Die Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ : Verhaltensregeln für buddhistische Mönche der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins, Bd III (Grammatik, Glossar und Anhänge)

Die Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ Verhaltensregeln für buddhistische Mönche der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins herausgegeben, mit der chinesischen Parallelversion verglichen, übersetzt und kommentiert von Seishi KARASHIMA unter Mitwirkung von Oskar von Hinüber Band III Grammatik, Glossar und Nachträge Bibliotheca Philologica et Philosophica Buddhica XIII, 3 The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology Soka University Tokyo 2012  Die Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ Verhaltensregeln für buddhistische Mönche der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins Band III Grammatik, Glossar und Nachträge  Bibliotheca Philologica et Philosophica Buddhica Volume XIII, 3 Die Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ Verhaltensregeln für buddhistische Mönche der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins Seishi KARASHIMA unter Mitwirkung von Oskar von Hinüber Band III Grammatik, Glossar und Nachträge The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology Soka University Tokyo 2012  Die Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ Verhaltensregeln für buddhistische Mönche der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins herausgegeben, mit der chinesischen Parallelversion verglichen, übersetzt und kommentiert von Seishi KARASHIMA unter Mitwirkung von Oskar von Hinüber Band III Grammatik, Glossar und Nachträge The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology Soka University Tokyo 2012 Published by The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology (= IRIAB), Soka University: 1-236 Tangi, Hachioji, Tokyo 192-8577, Japan 〒192-8577 東京都八王子市丹木町1-236 創価大学・国際仏教学高等研究所 Phone: (+ 81-42) 691-2695 Fax: (+ 81-42) 691-4814 E-mail: iriab@soka.ac.jp First published 2012 Printed in Japan by Meiwa Printing Company, Tokyo © Seishi Karashima 2012 All rights reserved. Apart from any fair dealing for the purpose of private study, research, criticism or review, no part of this book may be reproduced, translated or utilised in any form, either by print, photoprint, microform, multimedia or any other means, now known or hereafter invented, without written permission of the copyright holder and publisher. Enquiries should be made to the publisher. ISBN 978-4-904234-07-5  INHALTSVERZEICHNIS Band III Symbole ............................................................................................................................ VII Grammatik ...................................................................................................................... 1 1. Lautlehre ....................................................................................................................... 1 2. Sandhi ........................................................................................................................... 1 3. Hiatus ............................................................................................................................ 2 4. Genus ............................................................................................................................ 14 5. Kasus ............................................................................................................................. 14 6. A-Stämme ...................................................................................................................... 17 7. Ā-Stämme ...................................................................................................................... 22 8. I-Stämme ....................................................................................................................... 26 9. Ī-Stämme ....................................................................................................................... 28 10. IN-Stämme ................................................................................................................... 29 11. U-Stämme .................................................................................................................... 30 12. Ū-Stämme .................................................................................................................... 31 13. S-Stämme ..................................................................................................................... 31 14. N-Stämme .................................................................................................................... 31 15. NT-Stämme .................................................................................................................. 32 16. Zahlwörter ................................................................................................................... 35 17. Personalpronomen ........................................................................................................ 35 18. Geschlechtliches Pronomen ........................................................................................... 36 19. Suffixe ......................................................................................................................... 39 20. Inkongruenz im Bereich von Person und Numerus .......................................................... 39 21. Personalendung ............................................................................................................ 40 22. Optativ ......................................................................................................................... 40 23. Imperativ ..................................................................................................................... 42 24. Futur ............................................................................................................................ 44 25. Aorist ........................................................................................................................... 44 26. Perfekt ......................................................................................................................... 44 27. Partizip des Präsens ...................................................................................................... 45 28. Gerundivum ................................................................................................................. 45 29. Absolutiv ..................................................................................................................... 46 30. Infinitiv ........................................................................................................................ 50 31. Passiv .......................................................................................................................... 51 32. Kausativ ....................................................................................................................... 52 33. sthā, sthap, sthāp, thap, thāp, √ās als Hilfsverben .......................................................... 53 34. Partizip Präteritum + √as, √bhū .................................................................................... 54 35. Fehlerhafte Silbenumstellung ........................................................................................ 55 36. Haplographie ................................................................................................................ 56 37. Dittographie ................................................................................................................. 56 38. Irrtümlich gesetzter Daṇḍa ............................................................................................ 56 39. Irrtümlich gesetzter Anusvāra ........................................................................................ 56 40. Iteratio (Wiederholung von Wörtern) ............................................................................. 56 41. Syntaktische Cruces ...................................................................................................... 57 Glossar .............................................................................................................................. 59 Nachträge Anhang I : Über sprachliche und strukturelle Probleme der Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ ........... 555 Anhang II : Die chinesische Übersetzung des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas ............................. 567 Nachwort .......................................................................................................................... 575  Symbole ~ ein Nominalstamm, z.B. dharmma~ - ein Präsensstamm, z.B. gaccha- ° außer den Buchstaben nach oder vor dem Zeichen ist das Wort das gleiche wie das vorhergehende * eine unbelegte Form, z.B. *ati-nikuñja~ # eine in keinem Lexikon nachgewiesene Form oder Bedeutung, z.B. akalpiya-karakī~#; “um Erlaubnis bitten”# / In Verbindungen wie a / ā zeigt / an, daß a mit ā und ā mit a verwechselt wird ☞ Vgl. Anmerkung in Band I und II, z.B. ☞ § 18.7, Anm. 7 ⇒ Vgl. ein in Zusammenhang stehendes Wort in Band III, z.B. śuṣka~ “getrocknet” ⇒ su- śuṣka~ α < β Form α kommt von β α ∈ β α ist ein Schreibfehler, eine korrupte Form oder eine Hyperform von β α ≒ β β ist fast das gleiche wie α α × β eine Kreuzung aus α und β VII  Grammatik In die folgende Liste grammatischer Formen sind nur die Abweichungen von der Norm des klassischen Sanskrit aufgenommen, wobei nicht alle Stellen vollständig aufgenommen sind. Diese Übersicht über die Grammatik schließt sich im wesentlichen an die Paragrapheneinteilung von BHSG an. 1. Lautlehre § 1.1. Palatalisierung des Vokals; vgl. Norman 1975/76 = CP I 220~237 § 14.9.13A7. rejjūye; § 21.3.20B1. rejjukāya; § 22.2.20B7. rejjukāye (= § 45.3.39A2) < Skt. rajjū~ § 42.11.36B5. sejjetavyaṃ < Skt. sajjayati § 1.2. -ṃ > -n; vgl. BHSG § 2.65 § 42.4.36A6. evan nāma (< evaṃ nāma) § 42.5.36B1. akuśalan dharmmam (< akuśalaṃ dharmmam) § 47.1.40B3. teṣān dāni et passim 2. Sandhi § 2.1. -a ’- < -a ā- § 44.6.39A4. ekena (’)krāntaṃ § 55.6.46B7. pratyutthāya (’)puṇoti § 2.2. -a ’- < -a o- § 13.2.12A7. varṣeṇa (’)varṣiyantāṃ (= § 17.3.14B6) (⇒ o-varṣaya-) § 2.3. -aṃ ’- < -aṃ a-; vgl. BHSG § 4.7; Pischel § 175 § 26.1.23A5. ayaṃ (’)peyyā § 2.4. -i ’- < -i a-; vgl. BHSG § 4.11; Jacobi 1970: 92f. § 18.53.17B3. yadi (’)si (Hs. śe) § 2.5. -e ’- oder -’ e- < -e e-? § 18.12.16A2. māt<r>āye (’)va (od. māt<r>āy(’) eva?) § 32.2.27A5. ar(’) evacciro (od. are (’)vacciro) § 50.10.43B7. ubhaye (’)va (od. ubhay(’) eva) § 2.6. -e ’- < -e o-? § 47.8.41A1. dhūlīye pūritaṃ (oder (’)pūritaṃ? ☞ § 12.2, Anm. 3) § 2.7. -o ’- < -o u-; vgl. BHSG § 4.16 § 5.5.6B1. upāsako (’)pāsikā § 2.8. -’ i- < -a i-; vgl. BHSG § 4.23; RgsGr § 4.28; Jacobi 1970: 95 § 18.45.17A6. ken(’) imaṃ<hi> § 2.9. -’ e- < -a e-; vgl. Geiger § 70.1b (mūlen’ ekaṃ); Pischel § 173 (ih’ eva); Weller 1915: 41 = 1987 I 496; Renou, Gr § 40, S. 44; Matsumura 1988: 71; CPD, s.v. eva (bodhisattass’ eva, ekappahāren’ eva) § 1.8.1B6~7. pratikṛty(’) eva (= § 4.8.4B7, § 4.11.5A2, § 14.6.13A5) § 2.6.2B6. prakṛty(’) eva (= § 18.38.17A2 usw.) § 4.12.5A4. nimantraṇāy(’) etavyaṃ § 6.13.8A3. c(’) enaṃ (vs) § 31.16.26A2. ev(’) ettha § 2.10. -’ o- < -a o- § 4.6.4B3. yatr(’) ollagnāye (= § 5.6.6B2, § 39.28.32A5); § 6.6.7B3. yatr(’) (Hs. tatr(’)) ollagikāye § 7.3.8B1. naỿv(’) ovadatha 1 § 2.11. -’ a- < -aṃ a-; vgl. BHSG § 4.29; Geiger § 71.2a; Oberlies 2001: 117; vgl. auch Sn 538. oghatam’ agā (< ogha-tamaṃ agā); § 39.1.30B7. bhukt(’) api (oder bhukta<ṃ> pi) < bhuktaṃ api § 44.5.39A2. dviguṇ(’) ante < dviguṇaṃ ante § 2.12. -ā- < -aṃ a-; vgl. BHSG § 4.36; Geiger § 71.2a; Sn(tr.N) 235 (ad Sn 353); Oberlies 2001: 119 § 44.4.39A2. duguṇântaraṃ (< duguṇaṃ antaraṃ) kariya § 2.13. -ā- < -āṃ a- § 37.5.30A4. sarvvāśrāmiṇânopavāde (< °āśrāmiṇāṃ ano°? ☞ § 37.5[Text], Anm. 3) § 2.14. -ā- < -āṃ ā- § 54.2.46A1. aṣṭahastâyāmena (aṣṭahastāṃ āyāmena) § 2.15. -’ a- < -i a-; vgl. BHSG § 4.26 § 47.1.40B3. tān(’) api § 2.16. -’ ā- < -i ā-; vgl. BHSG § 4.26 § 4.12.5A5. dān(’) āha (= § 8.7.9A4, § 18.20.16A7, § 20.1.19A5, § 32.2.27A5, § 41.14.34B4, § 49.1.41B7) § 2.17. -’ u- < -i u-; vgl. Jacobi 1970: 92, 96 § 39.16.31B3. p(’) ullugikāye (für ullaggikāye) § 2.18. -’ e- < -i e-; vgl. Geiger § 71.2b § 4.13.5A6. h(’) eva § 6.1.7A5. h(’) etaṃ; § 5.1.6A5. h(’) eti (für etaṃ) § 2.19. -’ a- < -e a-; vgl. Geiger § 71.1b § 19.13.18A4. ekatam(’) aṃte (= § 24.8.22A5, § 36.4.29B3) § 2.20. -o ’- < -o e- § 39.24.32A2. anukālyo (’)va § 2.21. -o ’- oder -’ o- < -o o- § 18.29.16B5. ūrūpo (’)ha{ṃ}ya<ṃ>tena oder ūrūp(’) oha{ṃ}ya<ṃ>tena § 34.4.28B4. upānahāyo (’)muṃciya oder upānahāy(’) omuṃciya § 39.21.32A1. thālīyo (’)tāriya oder thālīy(’) otāriya § 2.22. -o- < -a u- < -aṃ u- § 31.7.25B5. sāye vāsôpagatā bhavanti 3. Hiatus § 3.1. -a a-; vgl. BHSG § 4.55; RgsGr § 4.64f. § 1.11.2A3. vasiṣyatha atha § 2.10.3A3. tāva atisītam § 4.5.4B2. gatāgatasya adhivāsayitavyaṃ; § 6.5.7B2. gatāgatasya adhivāsituṃ § 4.7.4B5. tāva anugraho (= § 5.7.6B4) § 4.8.4B6. śītalakasaṃgena anukālyaṃ § 4.8.4B7. yena anukālyaṃ § 4.18.5B7. ca anukampikā (vs) § 5.6.6B2. dvitīyasthavireṇa aparejjukāye § 5.8.6B6. uṣṇasantāpena anukallatarakaṃ § 7.1.8A5. na anuśāsanti § 14.6.13A5. eva agniharaṇī § 41.19.35A4. ācāreṇa anāryā (vs) § 42.15.36B7. hastena agrato (= § 42.18.37A3) § 43.3.38A3. saṃghasya anugraho § 43.12.38B1. yatra abhiyukto § 44.1.38B7. gṛhṇiya acchiyaṃ § 44.4.39A2. kāriya antaramukha<ṃ> § 47.1.40B3. ca antevāsikā § 47.9.41A2. paśyillakena atikrāmitavyaṃ § 48.7.41B2. <gha>sa<ṃ>tena atikramituṃ § 49.1.42A1. piṇḍāya aṇṭhituṃ 2  § 49.1.42A2. yeva anuparivarttiya § 49.1.42A2. tasyaỿva anupadam § 49.7.42B5. glānasya anukālyaṃ § 49.9.42B7. yeva agrāsanaṃ et passim § 3.2. -a ā-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.67f. § 1.2.1B3. saṃghasthavirasya āgatiḥ (≒ § 4.2.4A7) § 1.8.1B6. olaggikāya āsitavyaṃ § 2.1.2B2. cchoriya āgatā (= § 1.1.1B2, § 3.1.3A7, § 4.1.4A6, § 5.1.6A5, § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5) § 2.1.2B2. pratipāliya āsitvā § 3.1.3A6. na āgacchanti (= § 3.1.3A7) § 3.5.3B2. sūtreṇa āvraṇitvā § 4.7.4B4. tāva āhaṃsu (= § 4.7.4B5) § 4.8.5A1. eva āgantavyaṃ § 4.10.5A2. hastena āsanaṃ § 4.13.5A6. nikṣipiya āsitavyaṃ § 5.11.7A2. oka<ḍ>ḍhiya āsanti § 20.11.19B7. vinayātikrama āsādayati § 20.16.20A3. kurccakena āmarjayitavyā § 41.18.35A1. ca ācāragocareṇa § 41.31.35B7. cinta<ya>ntena āsituṃ § 42.21.37A5. eva āhaṃsuḥ § 42.24.37B1. jentākasya ārocitaṃ § 44.1.38B7. ekena ākrāntaṃ § 44.1.38B7. dvitīyena ākrāntaṃ (= § 44.6.39A4) § 46.6.40B2. ca āvellayitavyaṃ § 48.4.41A6. tāva āsanaṃ § 48.6.41B2. prasphoṭiya āmarjiya § 49.4.42A6. ca ātmano (= § 49.4.42A6~7) § 49.6.42B2. tasya ātmano § 49.6.42B3~4. paścācchramaṇasya ātmano § 49.7.42B5. āgacchiya āhāraṃ § 49.7.42B5. mama ānantikā § 49.7.42B5. bhikṣusya ātmano et passim § 3.3. -a i-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.71 § 49.1.42A3. praviṣṭasya ipsitānnāni § 3.4. -a u-; vgl. BHSG § 4.55; RgsGr § 4.74 § 1.10.2A1. oguṇṭhikāyakṛtena upānahārūḍhena § 1.10.2A2. apaniya upānahāṃ § 2.3.2B3. śabdāpayatha Upanandanaṃ (= § 5.3.6A6, § 49.2.42A4) § 2.8.3A1. nirmmādiyāṇa upānahāṃ (= § 3.9.4A1) § 2.9.3A2. vasiṣyatha uta § 3.9.3B7. nirmmādiya upānahāṃ § 4.7.4B4. nāma upāsako (= § 5.7.6B3) § 4.7.4B4. evaṃnāma upāsako § 4.9.5A1. yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 4.10.5A2. gatāgatasya upaviśantaṃ (lies: °viśituṃ); § 6.9.7B7. gatāgatasya upaviśituṃ § 5.7.6B4. kisya upāsako § 5.11.7A2. paśyiya utthiya (= § 6.11.8A2) § 7.4.8B1. eva ubhayato § 7.7.8B5. na uddiśati § 18.52.17B2. navakena ujjhitavyaṃ 3  § 20.19.20A5. vṛddhatareṇa uddhṛtavyo § 25.10.22B6. gomayena upalimpiya § 25.15.23A2. samavasthāya upaviṣṭakena utsaṅgasya upari § 41.24.35B1. āvarjiya upānahāpocchanakaṃ § 41.27.35B4. hastena udakaṃ § 41.29.35B5. ekasya upānahāye § 42.20.37A4. rāśīya upanetuṃ § 42.21.37A5. praviśantena udakasya § 43.15.38B3. yyeva upamakṣitaṃ § 45.2.39B4. eva utthiya § 46.6.40B1. saṃghasya uṭṭhānakāni § 46.6.40B2. tāva upahastīkarttavyaṃ § 48.6.41B1. prajñapiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 48.6.41B2. āmarjiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 49.1.41B6. Nandanasya Upanandano § 49.5.42B1. vāmenântena uccantitavyaṃ ... dakṣiṇenântena uccattitavyaṃ § 49.8.42B7. amukena upādhyāyo et passim § 3.5. -a e-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.78f. § 1.3.1B3. Nandana evaṃ (= § 4.3.4B1); § 2.3.2B3. Upanandana evaṃ § 1.10.2A2. omuñciya ekāṃsakṛtena (= § 3.9.3B7, § 3.9.4A1) § 2.8.3A1. omuñciyāṇa ekāṃsakṛteṇa § 3.5.3B3. tena ekam § 4.4.4B1. saṃghasthavireṇa evaṃ § 4.12.5A4~5. ettaka ettakaṃ § 4.12.5A5. āryasya etaṃ § 10.4.10A4. utthantakena eva{ṃ} § 18.29.16B5. saṃghārāmasya ekahiṃ § 19.37.19A2. ussariya ekānte § 20.11.19B7. khādiya evaṃ § 20.15.20A2. ekāṃśīkṛtena ekānte § 26.5.23B1. nikhosiya ekāṃśakṛtena § 41.18.35A1. dārakasya evaṃ § 41.18.35A1. evaṃ ca evaṃ ca § 42.24.37B1. tāva ekato § 44.6.39A4. muṃciya ekaṃ § 49.1.42A1. naỿva eṣo § 49.1.42A4. ca evaṃ (= § 49.2.42A5) usw. § 3.6. -a o-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.83 § 1.10.2A2. nirmmādiya oguṇṭhikāṃ § 3.2.3A7. ca odhyāyanti (= § 3.3.3B1, § 6.3.7A7, § 47.1.40B3) § 3.9.3B7. upānahārūḍhena oguṇṭhitena § 4.12.5A5. māṃsasya olaṃkānāṃ § 4.13.5A6. eva otrapeṃsu § 5.11.7A2. dvitīyasthavireṇa odanasampatti § 6.11.8A2. tena odanasampattī § 7.1.8A5. na ovadanti; § 7.2.8A7. na ovadatha § 7.7.8B4. tasya ovādo ... asya ovādo § 13.11.12B4. vātātapena opūriyanti ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyanti § 18.13.16A2. yasya oheyyako § 20.15.20A2. vandantena oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa § 41.30.35B6. oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa ohitahastena § 43.4.38A4. kariya omuddhikā 4  § 53.14.45B4. tāva ovārayitavyo usw. § 3.7. -ā a-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.85f. § 2.8.2B7. vā anirmmāditehi (= § 2.8.3A1) § 2.10.3A3. vā atiuṣṇam § 4.11.5A3. bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa § 4.11.5A3. vā ambhehi § 20.6.19B2. vā akṣadarśā § 20.14.20A1. vā agniśālāyām ... vā agrato § 41.16.34B6. mā atra § 42.12.36B6. ākoṭetvā agnir § 42.16.37A2. vā asukasya § 43.11.38A7. vā acaukṣā § 43.15.38B3. vā adhotakam vā anupaliptakam § 44.4.39A2. sāharitvā abhyantara- § 44.9.39A7. vā acaukṣo § 44.11.39B1. vā apratisaṃskṛtaṃ § 47.4.40B6. bhikṣuṇā antaragharaṃ § 47.6.40B7. prāvaritvā antaragharaṃ § 48.6.41B1. vā avisrambhakulaṃ § 48.7.41B3. vā amilā vā astarikā § 48.7.41B3. datvā apāśrayitavyaṃ § 48.8.41B5. vā anokṣīṇakā et passim § 3.8. -ā ā-; vgl. BHSG § 4.55; RgsGr § 4.91f. § 2.6.2B6. dātavyā āsanaprajñaptiḥ (= § 3.7.3B5) § 4.13.5A6. vā āgamaṃtena (= § 6.11.8A2); § 6.11.8A2. vā āgametavyaṃ § 4.13.5A7. dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā (= § 4.15.5A7, 5B1, 5B2, § 4.16.5B3, § 4.17.5B5, § 4.18.5B6, § 4.18.6A1, § 4.19.6A1~2, § 6.11.8A2 et passim) § 4.14.5A7. vā āgantukasya § 20.13.20A1. vā āviddhapuṭikāyām § 22.1.20B6. mayā ākrānto § 38.2.30A5. vā ācāryo vā āmantrayitavyo § 41.22.35A6. prāvaritvā āsanaṃ § 42.16.37A1. vā ācāryo (= § 49.5.42B2) § 42.21.37A6. vā āhaṃsu § 42.31.37B7. mā ādīnavam § 43.13.38B2. vā ādhīnaṃ § 44.4.39A3. vā ācāryasya (= § 44.7.39A5, § 44.7.39A6) et passim § 3.9. -ā i-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.93f. § 4.17.5B4. yā iha (vs) § 20.7.19B4. vā ime § 49.1.42A1. mā imasya § 3.10. -ā u-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.97f. § 1.5.1B5. vā upasthānaśālāyām (= § 3.6.3B4) § 1.10.2A2. vā upānahārūḍhena (= § 2.8.2B7, 3A1) § 1.12.2A5. vā uṣṇam (lies: atiuṣṇam) § 4.6.4B4. vā upadravo § 4.13.5A6. vā ukkaḍhḍhiya § 7.5.8B3. gāthā udānaṃ § 18.4.15B2. khāniyā udakāntikā § 18.18.16A6. yathā uccārapraśrāvakheṭasiṃghāṇakaṃ § 18.33.16B6. sahasā utpīḍito 5  § 19.28.18B4. kṛtvā ujjhitavyaṃ § 25.9.22B5. vā ukkaciya § 31.9.25B6. vā udupāno § 35.3.29A2. brāhmaṇaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5) § 41.30.35B6. {pādadhovanikāyā} upaviśituṃ § 42.18.37A2. vā usphoṣetavyo § 42.19.37A3~4. agni prajuhitvā udakaṃ praveśayitvā udakabhramaṃ (Hs. udakatamaṃ) bandhitvā § 42.20.37A5. bhadantā upaneṃtu (Hs. upanetuṃ) § 42.22.37A7. vā udakaṃ § 43.3.38A3. vā uddiśitavyā § 43.15.38B3. vitanikā ujjhitvā § 44.8.39A6. vā ukkanikā § 44.10.39B1. vā uccārakaṭāhakam ... vā ujjhituṃ ... vā uccinituṃ § 45.6.40A1. yathā uparimeṇa § 45.6.40A2. vā uccellayitavyaṃ (lies. uvve°) (= § 46.5.40B1) § 48.8.41B4. vā ukkhinakā § 49.5.42B2. vā uccatta § 49.5.42B2. vā uccattayitavyo § 53.7.45A6. iminā upaviśitavyaṃ § 57.6.47B4. bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā upānahāyo et passim § 3.11. -ā ū- § 18.7.15B5. vā ūṣo § 18.29.16B5. vā ūrūpo (= § 18.33.16B6, § 19.13.18A3) § 3.12. -ā e-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.100 § 8.13.9B3. sā evam § 14.9.13A7. nidhāvitavyā ekena § 18.2.15B1. vā evam (=§ 20.6.19B2) § 18.20.16A6. eṣā eva (= § 19.6.17B7, § 42.2.36A2) § 18.30.16B5. vā eṣo § 20.4.19B1. khādantā ekānte § 29.2.24A7. ṣaḍvarggikā evaṃ § 29.4.24B2. vā ekānte § 42.12.36B6. mā evam § 42.13.36B7. tathā eva § 42.14.36B7. sāharitvā ekasthāne § 46.5.40A7. nikṣipitvā ekanivasanakena § 46.5.40B1. sāharitvā ekānte § 3.13. -ā o-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.101 § 3.1.3A7. āryamiśrā osara<ṃ>tikāye (= § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7) § 3.6.3B4. vā occhedake § 3.9.4A1. vā oguṇṭhikākṛtena § 14.9.13A7. vā otaritavyaṃ § 17.11.15A5. vā oḍḍiṇṇakā § 17.12.15A6. vā opūriyanti ... vā ohapiyanti § 18.27.16B4. vā ohayitahastena § 18.45.17A6. mā odhyāyeṃsu § 18.47.17A7. vā ocorako (= § 19.39.19A2) § 20.15.20A2. vā ohitahastena (= § 19.10.18A2) § 20.18.20A4. dantā oghasayitavyāḥ (Hs. odya°) § 23.2.21A5. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā ollāye § 26.6.23B1. pārṣṇivadhrā (Hs. pāṣṇivavrā) omuñcitavyā § 27.6.23B7. vā oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā o{vā}hitahastena 6  § 44.11.39B1. vā omayilamayilam § 45.6.40A2. vā osārayituṃ § 47.2.40B5. antevāsikā odhyāyanti (= § 48.1.41A4, § 48.2.41A5) § 47.7.41A1. vā (Hs. cā) oharapārayuktaṃ § 48.7.41B2. vā opāśrayam vā omayilomayilaṃ § 48.8.41B4. vā oṣṭhāni § 49.5.42A7. yathā oḍḍitāye usw. § 3.14. -i a-; vgl. BHSG § 4.55; RgsGr § 4.103 § 1.12.2A5. dāni atiśītam (Hs. atisitam) § 2.2.2B2. dāni ativikāle § 4.7.4B4. nâsti asmākaṃ § 4.11.5A3. dāni adhyupekṣitavyaṃ § 4.15.5B2. santi abhiprasannā (vs) § 4.16.5B3. parinirvvānti anāśravā (vs) § 5.8.6B6. bhavati anukallatarakaṃ § 8.11.9A7. karomi amukena (= § 8.13.9B3) § 18.47.17A7. dāni apratisaṃviditena § 19.8.18A1. kṣamati aśabdakarṇṇikāye § 20.9.19B5. dāni aphāsuṃ (Hs. °āṃsu) § 20.10.19B6. catvāri aṅgulāni § 20.11.19B7. catvāri aṅgulāni avaśiṣṭāni § 28.10.24A5. kṣamati atiprākaṭe § 42.12.36B5. dāni agni § 42.16.37A1. dāni anyasya § 42.16.37A2. api anāpṛcchitvā § 42.17.37A2. navakehi agrato § 42.17.37A2. dāni agnir § 42.17.37A2. vṛddhehi agrato § 42.18.37A3. dāni apūrvvacarimaṃ § 42.19.37A3. tehi agni § 42.25.37B3. bhavanti antevāsikā § 44.1.38B7. karddamehi anupraviṣṭaṃ § 44.1.38B7. dāni aparejjukāto § 44.6.39A5. “ḍu” tti acchituṃ § 47.1.40B2. “ḍu” tti acchanti § 48.6.41B1. dāni aśrāddhakulaṃ (= § 48.7.41B3) § 49.1.41B7. kiṃci akalpiyaṃ § 49.1.41B7. kahiṃci adhivāsayati § 49.2.42A5. kiñci akalpiyaṃ § 49.2.42A5. kasyaci acikṣiṣyasi (lies: āci°) et passim § 3.15. -i ā-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.106 § 1.8.1B6. dāni ārocitaṃ § 1.11.2A4. dāni āhaṃsu § 2.1.2B1. deyadharmmāṇi ādāya § 3.1.3A7. pi āryamiśrā (= § 6.1.7A5) § 4.7.4B4. gaṇḍi āhaṇiya § 4.12.5A5. hi āryasya § 4.18.5B7. imasmi āgāre (lies: ’gāre [m.c.]) (vs) § 5.11.7A2. odanasampatti āgamayantena § 20.6.19B2. dāni āyuṣmanto (= § 29.1.24A6) § 28.1.24A1. tālapādukāhi ābaddhāhi § 31.1.25B1. ṣaḍvarggikehi āgantukā 7  § 39.2.31A1. gaṇḍi āhaniyāṇaṃ § 39.12.31A7. dānapati āgato § 41.16.34B6. dāni āha (= § 49.1.41B6) § 41.18.35A1. dāni āhaṃsu § 42.12.36B6. gaṇḍi ākoṭetvā § 42.15.37A1. dāni āsanāni § 42.16.37A1. snāyāmi ācārya § 42.23.37B1. kṣamati ātmano § 43.1.38A2. nakulamūṣikehi ālupyamānā § 44.4.39A3. cīvarehi ātmano § 44.8.39A7. cīvarakehi ātmano § 45.1.39B3. dāni āyuṣmanto (= § 31.1.25A7, § 47.1.40B2, § 48.1.41A3) § 49.1.41B6. ehi āyuṣmaṃ § 49.1.41B6. kasyaci ācikṣesi § 49.5.42B1. hasti āgaccheya et passim § 3.16. -i i-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.108 § 4.7.4B4. koci imaṃhi itthannāmo (= § 5.7.6B3) § 6.7.7B4. koci imaṃhi § 18.4.15B3. upari iṣṭāhi § 31.10.25B7. samāmapayi (?) ime § 49.1.42A2. kulehi ipsitānnāni (Hs. °āti) § 3.17. -i u-; vgl. BHSG § 4.55; RgsGr § 4.110 § 3.9.3B7. hastehi upānahārūḍhena (= § 3.9.4A1) § 4.7.4B4. bhaktāni uddiśitavyāni; § 6.7.7B5. bhaktakāni uddiśitavyāni § 5.7.6B4. koci upāsako § 7.1.8A5. dāni upasaṃpādiya § 7.3.8B1. dāni upādhyāyena; § 42.16.37A1. dāni upādhyāyo § 7.7.8B4. śraddhevihāri upasaṃpādiya § 8.6.9A2. cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni § 14.4.13A3. dāni udbahanti § 14.13.13B2. nâpi uddiṣṭako § 17.11.15A5. naṃgalāni utthāpayitavyāni § 18.35.16B7. dāni uśvāsaṃ § 19.17.18A6. dāni ujjhitavyo § 23.6.4.21B4. dāni upaṃsulako § 25.9.22B5. dāni ujjuko § 29.5.24B3. bhavati ucchedake § 31.4.25B3. dāni ujjhitvā § 42.16.37A1. snāyāmi upādhyāya § 42.21.37A6. bhavati udakaṃ § 42.22.37A7. dāni udakasya § 42.30.37B6. kṣamati uccaśabdamahāśabdehi § 44.4.39A3. cīvarehi upādhyāya- (= § 44.5.39A3) § 44.7.39A5. cīvarāṇi upari (= § 44.7.39A6) § 44.7.39A6. kṣamati upādhyāyasya § 44.7.39A6. cīvarakāni upari § 44.8.39A7. idāni upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ § 44.8.39A7. cīvarehi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ § 47.5.40B7. dāni udakaṃ § 49.8.42B7. nimantreti upalakṣitavyaṃ § 57.1.47B1. āsanehi upaviśiyāṇaṃ et passim § 3.18. -i e-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.112 8  § 1.4.1B4. hi evaṃ (= § 18.21.16A7, § 19.7.18A1, § 43.2.38A2, § 44.3.39A1, § 45.3.39B5, § 47.3.40B5, § 49.3.42A6 et passim; vgl. § 48.3.41A6. hi-y-evaṃ) § 6.4.7B1. sarvvehi evaṃ § 6.4.7B1. dāni evaṃ (= § 18.21.16A7, § 18.41.17A3, § 24.6.22A3, § 44.3.39A1, § 45.3.39B5, § 48.6.41B1, § 49.3.42A6 et passim) § 4.7.4B4. koci evaṃnāma § 6.7.7B4. ima<ṃ>hi evannāmako ... imaṃhi evaṃnāmako § 8.6.9A3. cīvarāṇi ekānte § 25.11.22B7. dāni ekaṃ § 29.5.24B3. dāni ekānte § 44.1.38B7. dāni ekena § 3.19. -i o- § 1.1.1B1. dāni ojjhāyanti (= § 2.1.2B2, § 3.1.3A7, § 4.1.4A6) § 1.8.1B7. puṣpehi okiritavyāyo (= § 2.6.2B6; ≒ § 3.7.3B5) § 2.3.2B3. pi ojjhāyati § 2.8.2B7. kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena (= § 2.8.3A1) § 4.2.4A7. dāni odhyāya<ṃ>ti § 5.1.6A5. dāni odhyāyanti (= § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5, § 19.2.17B4, § 20.6.19B2 usw.) § 5.3.6A7. pi odhyāyati § 5.11.7A2. hastāni oka<ḍ>ḍhiya § 8.2.8B6. ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ (= § 10.2.10A4) § 11.2.10B4. pakṣihi ohayiyantaṃ § 17.8.15A2. bhitti ollāye § 20.7.19B3. dāni odhyāyati § 27.8.23B7. câpi opānahārūḍho (wohl für upānahā°) § 29.5.24B3. câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo § 31.1.25A7. dāni okkhandiyāṇaṃ § 42.21.37A7. dāni ogho § 43.7.38A6. kīlakehi ollapitvā (= § 43.9.38A7) § 49.1.42A1. pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi (= § 49.1.42A2, § 49.1.42A3) § 53.11.45B2. dīpavartti okaḍḍhiya et passim § 3.20. -ī a-; vgl. BHSG § 4.55; RgsGr § 4.115 § 4.17.5B4. nadī anodikā (vs) § 22.7.21A3. cakkalī adhyupekṣituṃ § 43.11.38A7. kalpikakuṭī adhyupekṣitavyā § 3.21. -ī ā-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.117 § 1.11.2A2. sāmagrī ārocitā (= § 2.9.3A1) § 4.7.4B6. gaṇḍī āhaṇiya; § 42.26.37B3. gaṇḍī āhanitavyā § 25.1.22B1. gaṇḍī ākoṭitā (= § 42.13.36B6); § 42.12.36B5. gaṇḍī ākoṭetavyā (= § 42.12.36B6) § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha (= § 39.13.31B1) § 3.22. -ī u-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.119 § 5.5.6B1. bhikṣuṇī upāsako (= § 6.5.7B2) § 22.4.21A2. cakkalī utkṣipitavyā; § 22.5.21A2. cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ (= § 22.6.21A3) § 3.23. -ī o- § 22.4.21A2. cakkalī osārayitavyā § 22.5.21A2. cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ § 3.24. -u a-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.122 § 4.11.5A3. dīrghāyu avaśyan § 4.13.5A6. khalu anujānetavyaṃ § 18.16.16A4. khalu avalekhanaṃ § 19.8.18A1. khalu acchaṭikāṃ § 28.8.24A5. khalu abhidakṣiṇaṃ 9 § 3.25. -u ā-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.124 § 1.7.1B6. abhikramantu (Hs. atikramantu) āyuṣmanto (= § 3.6.3B4) § 1.12.2A7. abhipramodantu āyuṣmanto (= § 2.11.3A5, § 3.12.4A4) § 2.1.2B1. bhikṣu āgatā § 5.7.6B5. praviśantu āryamiśrāḥ (= § 42.21.37A6) § 6.1.7A5. bhikṣu āhaṃsu § 32.4.27A7. bhikṣu āgantuko § 34.5.28B5. khalu ārogyāpiya § 42.26.37B4. <s>nāyaṃtu āyuṣmanto § 42.31.37B7. {ā}gacchantu āyuṣmanto § 44.4.39A3. khalu ātmano (= § 44.8.39A7) § 49.9.43A1. khalu ādiśitavyaṃ § 3.26. -u u-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.127 § 18.8.15B6. khalu uddiśitavyaṃ § 18.45.17A6. bhikṣu uśvāsito § 18.50.17B1. khalu utthihitavyaṃ § 19.31.18B5. suṣṭhu uppīlito § 26.5.23B1. khalu upānahā § 49.5.42A7. bhikṣu upādhyāyasya § 51.4.44A2. khalu ud<d>eśe § 57.4.47B3. khalu upānahikāyo usw. § 3.27. -u e-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.128 § 1.10.2A2. khalu ekāṃśakṛtena § 18.17.16A5. khalu ekamante § 18.27.16B4. khalu ekāṃsīkṛtena § 18.45.17A6. khalu ekatamaṃ § 19.10.18A2. khalu ekāṃsakṛtena § 19.28.18B5. khalu ekāntena § 19.31.18B6. khalu ekamantena § 24.6.22A3. khalu ekasya § 29.4.24B2. khalu eko § 42.15.36B7. khalu ekena usw. § 3.28. -u o- § 4.13.5A6. khalu odanasampattir § 3.1.3A6. bhikṣu (Nom. pl.) osarantikāye § 3.29. -ū a- § 26.1.23A5. Sarayū Ajiravatī § 3.30. -ū ā- § 1.1.1B1, § 20.5.19B1. bhikṣū āhaṃsu (= § 1.2.1B2, 3, § 3.1.3A6, 7, § 5.1.6A5, § 5.3. 6A7, § 6.3.7A7 et passim) § 4.1.4A5. bhikṣū āgatāḥ (= § 5.3.6A7) § 20.11.19B6. bhikṣū āraṇyake § 33.5.28A1~2. bhikṣū ālapitavyā? § 3.31. -ū u- § 5.11.7A2. bhikṣū ugrāyanti § 18.29.16B4. bhikṣū utpīḍito § 26.1.23A5. bhikṣū utkṣiptā § 26.3.23A6. yavāgū ubhayato § 26.5.23A7. yavāgū upānahārūḍhena § 45.6.39B7. bhikṣū uddhārakaṃ § 3.32. -ū e- § 3.2.3B1. bhikṣū etām 10  § 20.5.19B1. bhikṣū ekānte § 3.33. -ū o- § 1.3.1B3. bhikṣū ojjhāyanti; § 4.3.4B1. bhikṣū odhyāyanti (= § 8.2.8B6) § 3.1.3A7. bhikṣū osarantikāye (= § 6.1.7A4, § 6.3.7A7) § 26.8.23B2. yavāgū odano § 3.34. -e a-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.132f. § 4.9.5A1. maṅgalakaraṇīye atidakṣiṇaṃ § 4.9.5A1. pretakaraṇīye anuvāmaṃ § 5.6.6B3. deśe asukāyāṃ § 8.2.8B6. ime asmākaṃ § 10.2.10A4. ime ambhehi § 31.27.26B1. vihārake anugraho § 44.6.39A4. bhūmīye anupraviṣṭo § 49.1.41B6. kiñcid eva akalpīyaṃ § 57.4.47B3. vṛddhānte añjaliṃ usw. § 3.35. -e ā-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.136f. § 2.2.2B2. ativikāle āgato § 4.6.4B3. ollagnāye āsitavyaṃ (= § 5.6.6B2); § 6.6.7B3. ollagikāye āsituṃ § 6.1.7A4. osarantikāye āgacchanti (= § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7); § 6.3.7A6. osarantikāye āgacchatha § 18.20.16A7. me āyuṣmaṃ (≒ § 19.6.17B7) § 20.5.19B1. ekānte āsanti § 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya § 25.1.22B1. vātamaṇḍalikāye āgacchiyāṇaṃ § 30.4.25A2. citte āttamano § 31.29.26B3. purebhakte āmatā (lies: āgatā) § 31.29.26B4. deśakāle āgatā ... vikāle āgatā; § 32.12.27B5. deśakāle āgato ... vikāle āgato § 34.5.28B5. tādṛśe āsane (= § 35.5.29A5) § 39.27.32A4. kāle āgacchanti ... vikāle āgatā § 52.3.44B2~3. darśanopavicāre āsitavyaṃ § 56.5.47A6. jarjare āgate (lies: āhate) § 57.7.47B5. kṛte āgamayitavyaṃ usw. § 3.36. -e i-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.138 § 8.2.8B6. ye ime § 26.1.23A5. nicuḍavuntikāye imaṃhi § 41.5.34A1. ime itikitikāya § 49.1.42A4. me ipsitānnāni (= § 49.2.42A5) § 3.37. -e u-; vgl. BHSG § 4.55; RgsGr § 4.140 § 6.9.7B7. yathāvṛddhikāye upaviśitavyaṃ § 7.7.8B4. prahāṇe upaviśati (= § 7.7.8B5) § 18.47.17A6. ekānte upaviśiya § 19.13.18A4. aṃte upaviśiya § 19.39.19A2. ekānte uccattiya (für uvvatti°) § 20.14.20A1. saṃghamadhye upādhyāyācāryāṇām § 34.5.28B4. darśanapathe upasaṃkramitvā § 34.5.28B5. āsane upaviśitavyaṃ (= § 35.5.29A5) § 35.5.29A5. tādṛśe upaviśitavyaṃ § 41.24.35B1. kalācīye udakaṃ § 42.20.37A5. mātrāye | upanetavyaṃ § 42.21.37A6. mātrāye upanetavyaṃ (= § 42.21.37A7) § 44.1.38B6. virātre uśvāsakārako 11  § 53.7.45A6. prahāṇe upaviṣṭo § 53.8.45A7. acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo § 55.5.46B6. acchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo § 57.4.47B3. yathāvṛddhikāye upaviśitavyaṃ § 57.7.47B5. vṛddhānte upānahāyo § 57.10.47B7. mūle upaviśati usw. § 3.38. -e e-; vgl. BHSG § 4.55; RgsGr § 4.141 § 4.7.4B6. bhante etaṃ; § 6.7.7B5. bhante evaṃ (lies: etaṃ) § 5.13.7A3. śikṣāpade evaṃ § 3.39. -e o- § 6.10.8A1. bhante oheyyaglānakānāṃ § 57.7.47B5. pārṣṇivaddhake osāriya § 3.40. -o a- < -aḥ a-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.143f. § 1.13.2A6. tato adhyeṣitavyaṃ § 2.1.2B1. bhikṣusaṃgho ahaṃsu (für āh°) § 2.9.3A2. deyadharmmo anumodāpayitavyo § 2.11.3A5. āyuṣmanto abhipramodayantu § 2.11.3A5. āyuṣmanto apramādena (= § 3.12.4A4) § 4.8.4B7. kālo atikramiṣyati; § 4.11.5A4. kālo atikramati (= § 5.10.6B7, § 6.10.7B7, 8A1); § 6.8.7B6. kālo atikrāmati § 4.11.5A3. manuṣyo anācīrṇṇadāno § 8.7.9A4. piṇḍacāro aṇṭhito § 14.5.13A4. vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ (= § 44.9.39A7) § 14.10.13B1. vihāro anuparinditavyo ... vihārako anuparindito § 19.16.18A6. tatraṃko alābu-{o}tumbako § 20.18.20A4. antamasato aṃgulidantakāṣṭhaṃ § 21.2.20A7. anucaṃkramanto anuvicaranto anyataraṃ § 23.7.21B4. vihārako adhyupekṣituṃ § 30.4.25A2. āttamano abhiraddho § 32.1.27A4. āgantuko allīya § 41.18.35A1. ko ahaṃ § 41.18.35A1. bhavanto ahaṃ § 43.1.38A1. anucaṃkramanto anuvicaranto § 44.1.38B7. cīvarakoṇako avaśiṣṭo § 47.7.41A1. ratho aśvavaṭavā § 48.7.41B3. tato apāśrayitavyaṃ usw. § 3.41. -o ā- < -aḥ ā-; vgl. RgsGr § 4.147 § 1.2.1B3. bhagavato ārocayeṃsu (= § 4.2.4A7, § 5.2.6A6, § 20.6.19B2 et passim) § 1.11.2A4. bāhyato āmuhūrttaṃ § 2.1.2B1. saṃghasthaviro āgato (= § 5.1.6A4, § 5.3.6A6, § 6.1.7A4) § 2.2.2B3. bhagavato ārocayanti § 2.9.3A2. bāhyato āgametha § 3.1.3A6. dvitīyasthaviro āgato (= § 6.1.7A4) § 4.1.4A5. Upanandano āgato § 5.13.7A3. tato āgantavyaṃ § 6.5.7B2. sārthavāho āgantuko § 6.7.7B4. tato āgacchiya § 8.7.9A5. puno āmiṣacakṣu § 21.5.20B3. valento āsati § 24.11.22A6. kheṭo āgacchati § 26.3.23A6. samayo ārocito § 27.2.23B5. purato āgacchiya 12  § 31.1.25A7. gaṇo āgato § 31.22.26A5. kativarṣo āyuṣman § 32.4.27A7. āgantuko āgato § 42.24.37B2. tato āgacchantu § 44.1.39A1. bhagavato ārocayeṃsuḥ § 48.4.41A7. praviṣṭo āsanena § 48.5.41A7. bhaginīyo āsanaṃ § 49.1.42A1. tato āha § 49.5.42B1. goṇo āgaccheya § 49.7.42B5~6. ātmano āhāraparyeṣṭiṃ § 49.8.42B7. tato ārocayitavyaṃ § 53.6.45A5. jarjaro āhato et passim § 3.42. -o i- ; vgl. RgsGr § 4.148 § 4.17.5B4. yo iha (vs) § 8.7.9A4. kuto idaṃ § 18.17.16A5. ko imāyo § 20.6.19B3. kuto imeṣāṃ (= § 20.7.19B3) § 31.16.26A2. nāgarājāno, ihaỿva § 52.6.44B4. kuto imaṃ § 3.43. -o u- ; vgl. RgsGr § 4.149f. § 3.1.3A6. saṃghasthaviro Upanandano (= § 4.3.4B1, § 5.1.6A4) § 4.1.4A5. dvitīyasthaviro Upanandano § 6.7.7B4. evannāmako upāsako § 8.8.9A5. piṇḍapāto ukkaḍhitavyo § 12.15.12A2~3. vihārako uddiśitavyo § 18.32.16B6. vandito uśvāsakṛto § 18.42.17A4. rikto ukkharo § 18.42.17A4. ṛkto udakadakānakā § 18.53.17B3. parakerako uccāro § 18.53.17B2. ātmano uccāro § 19.37.19A2. panthāto ussariya § 31.26.26B1. kalyato utthihantakenaỿva § 31.29.26B4. vikārako (lies: vihārako) uddiśitavyo (= § 32.12.27B5) § 44.1.38B6. vihārako uppeḍanako § 50.10.43B6. panthāto uccattiyāṇaṃ § 53.2.45A2. prahāṇāto utthitā § 58.4.48A4. bhūyo ukkāsikā § 62.2.49B6. bhikṣusaṃgho upaviṣṭo usw. § 3.44. -o e- ; vgl. RgsGr § 4.152 § 3.3.3B1. bhikṣavo evaṃ (= § 6.3.7A6) § 18.2.15B1. kuto eṣāṃ § 18.53.17B2. so eva § 19.9.18A2. tato ubhayohi § 20.5.19B1. tato ete bhikṣavo ekānte § 20.11.19B7. so eṣo § 42.24.37B1. jentāko ekato § 49.7.42B6. śirāviddho eva § 49.7.42B6. yato eva ... tato eva § 52.9.44B7. tato eva § 54.13.46B1. bahukaro eṣo § 3.45. -o o- § 2.2.2B2. saṃghasthaviro ojjhāyati 13  § 18.3.15B1. jano odhyāyati (= § 19.3.17B5) § 18.33.16B6. ūrūpo ohayantena § 19.13.18A4. ūrūpo omūtriyantena § 19.31.18B5. urūyo omūtrantena § 27.8.23B7. opānahārūḍho (wohl für upānahā°) oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo § 3.46. -au a- § 21.2.20A7. bhūmau astariya § 3.47. -au o- § 29.6.24B4. pādau osāriya § 3.48. -m- als Sandhikonsonant; vgl. BHSG § 4.59; RgsGr §§ 4.156~157; v. Hinüber 2001: § 272 § 41.11.34A7. na etarhi eva-m-anyadâpi § 3.49. -d- als Sandhikonsonant; vgl. BHSG § 4.64; Geiger § 73.4; Sn(tr.N) 181 (ad Sn, S. 16); EV I (2nd ed.) 216 (ad Th 406), ib. 317 (ad Th 1127) § 11.1.10B3. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ śraddhayā-d-āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ ... § 18.7.15B5. varccakumbhikā bāhire-d-eva (Hs. bāhirodivā) karttavyā § 3.50. -y- als Gleitlaut; vgl. RgsGr § 4.159; v. Hinüber 2001: § 270; Sn(tr.N) 234 (ad Sn 352); Oberlies 2001: § 25; Karashima 2002a: § 6.2 § 48.3.41A6. tena hi-y-evaṃ ... cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ 4. Genus § 4.1. Fehlerhafte Kongurenz im Bereich des Genus: BHSG §§ 6.11f.; RgsGr §§ 6.29f.; v. Hinüber 2001: § 292 § 14.6.13A5. vihārasya catuḥpārśve kakṣaṃ (Nom. masc.) jātakaṃ bhavati, so lavāpay- itavyo. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati niṣprāṇakaṃ, tato ’gninā dahāpayitavyo § 23.4.1.21A7. yo dāni jyeṣṭhako bhavati vihāro ... catvāri (Nom. pl. neut.) pratipādakā (Nom. pl. masc.) karttavyā § 31.21.26A4. cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ (Loc. sg. masc.) cīvarabisiyan (Loc. sg. fem.) thaviyāṇaṃ § 41.26.35B2. trīṇi (neut. pl.) vācāyo (fem. pl.) jalpayitavyāyo (fem. pl.) § 44.1.38B6. sa (masc.) cīvaraṃ (neut.) cīvara{ṃ}vaṃśāto kṛṣiyāṇaṃ patito (masc.) 5. Kasus § 5.1. Absoluter Nominativ; vgl. Uhle 1914: 6~7; Oertel 1926: §§ 25f.; Wijesekera 1993: § 26; BHSG § 7.13; Weller 1955; v. Hinüber 1968: §§ 16f.; Renou, Gr § 217; RgsGr §§ 7.10f.; Oguibénine 1996: 179-180 § 42.13.36B6. jentākasya gaṇḍī ākoṭitā {je} jānitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyā) : kiṃ eṣo jentāko sarvvasāṃghiko pāriveṇiko parṣāye. § 5.2. Absoluter Nominativ oder participium conjuctum § 38.6.30B2. kasya (“Warum”) tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto (Nom. sg. masc.; BHSG § 18.6) saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? § 41.19.35A4. raudrā lohitapāṇī caurā tuṣyanti tādṛśā santā (vs) § 5.3. Instr. sg. für Lok. sg.; vgl. BHSG §§ 7.30f. § 40.10.33A3. bhaktāgreṇa pānīyaṃ vārentena § 5.4. Absoluter Instrumental; vgl. Speyer 1896: § 213; Oertel 1926: § 39; Sen 1928: 25; Sen 1953: § 44; Renou, Gr § 225a § 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako śreṣṭhinā saparivāreṇa gatena gṛhasya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsati § 5.5. Absoluter Instrumental (oder Lokativ?) § 32.3.27A6. nâpi kṣamati pādehi vandiyamāṇehi na pratisaṃmodituṃ § 32.10.27B4. atha khalu tathā vanditavyaṃ, yathā na duḥkhāpiye (Passiv, Opt.) pādehi vandayantehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs) § 34.1.28B1. te dāni tehi niṣaṇṇehi na pārenti kāryāṇi karttuṃ (= § 35.1.28B7, § 36.1. 29A7, § 37.1.29B7) § 34.2.28B2. te dāni tumbhehi niṣaṇṇehi na pārenti kāryāṇi karttuṃ (= § 35.2.29A1) § 41.31.35B7. atha khalu pādehi dhovitehi utthiya gantavyaṃ 14  § 41.32.35B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pādehi dhovitehi dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramituṃ § 41.32.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi caṃkrama{n}ti bhūyo dhovitavyā § 5.6. Absoluter Genitiv; vgl. BHSG § 7.53; Speyer 1896: § 211; Sen 1928: 43f.; Wijesekera 1993: § 158 § 32.2.27A5. āyuṣman, evacciro tava āgatasya, na ca me pādavandako upasaṃkramasi § 32.2.27A6. evaṃ ca yaṃ tvaṃ mama pādāṃ vandantasya na pratisaṃmodesi § 52.3.44B2. nâpi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā bhuṃjantānāṃ tena dāni uṣṭhihitvā āsitavyaṃ § 5.7. Absoluter Genitiv oder participium conjuctum § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti § 38.6.30B1~2. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ sahitānāṃ saṃmodamānānāṃ avivadamānānāṃ ekoddeśakānāṃ kṣīrodakībhūtānāṃ śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ dīpayamānānāṃ sukhañ ca phāsuñ ca viharantānāṃ kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? mā jalpāhi” tti § 32.2.27A5. so dāni sthaviro pṛcchati “āyuṣmaṃ, kecciro te āgatasya?” § 32.3.27A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati āgantukena nevāsikasya vācovāciṃ karentasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 32.5.27B1. evaṃ praśvāsaṃ karentasya, dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantasya ... na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 32.6.27B1~2. na kṣamati mṛttikākarmma karentasya ‖ pe ‖ pātrapākaṃ dadantasya, cīvaraṃ dhovantasya, rajanikā pacantasya, cīvarāṇi sīvantasya, raṃjentasya, ccellaparikarmmam vā karentasya, pādāṃ dhovantasya, hastā nirmmādantasya, cetiyaṃ vandantasya, pātraṃ nirmmādentasya, dhūpam vā pibantasya, akṣīṇi vā añjantasya, pustakaṃ vācantasya, pustakaṃ likhantasya, varccakuṭīṃ gacchantasya ... <pādāṃ vandituṃ> § 61.4.49A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇam upaviṣṭasya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya antaraghare vā upaviṣṭasya puno puno vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, utthiya gantavyaṃ § 62.5.50A2. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇaśālāyām upaviṣṭasya vātakarmma āgacchati, ... § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya sārthena sārddhaṃ gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, ... § 5.8. Absoluter Lokativ; vgl. Delbrück 1888: 387f.; Speyer 1896: § 210; Oertel 1926: §§ 58f.; Sen 1928: 47; Minard 1956: §§ 309ff.; Sen 1953: § 100; Renou, Gr § 225b; Wijesekera 1993: §§ 182f.; von Hinüber 1968: §§ 295f. § 22.1.20B6. so dāni yathāsukhe (Hs. °sukhaṃ) kṛte vihārakaṃ apaduriya praviśati § 56.4.47A4. nâpi kṣamati yathāsukhe kṛte utthiya niṣīdanaṃ ... prasphoṭayituṃ § 56.6.47A6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte niṣīdanakaṃ ... prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.7.47B5. prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte āgamayitavyaṃ Vgl. § 19.19. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, ... (☞ yathā-sukhaṃ) § 39.16.31B4. gaṇḍī<yaṃ> āhatāyaṃ vandiya cetiyaṃ <bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ> § 39.28.32A6. gaṇḍīyaṃ āhatāyaṃ stūpaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ § 56.5.47A6. dvitīyasya (wohl für paścimasya) prahāṇasya jarjare āhate otaritavyaṃ § 5.9. Loc. pl. -ehi, -ehiṃ, -āhi, -īhi, -uhi, -ūhi; vgl. BHSG §§ 7.30f.; Pischel § 371; Ghatage 1937; Lüders 1954: §§ 220~225; v. Hinüber 1968: § 307; EV I (2nd ed.) 296 (ad Th 975); Caillat 1982: 76f.; ead. 1983: 237~238, Anm. 8; v. Hinüber 2001: § 321; Bollée 1988: 42; SWTF, S. 330b., s.v. indriya Loc. pl.; Oberlies 2001: 149 masc. -ehi § 4.15.5B1. etehi buddhehi maharddhikehi ye devatā santi abhiprasannā (vs) (= § 6.13. 8A4) § 5.9.6B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi dārakadārikā vā sovāpitā bhaveṃsu § 6.9.7B7. anekāye tahiṃ (Hs. tehiṃ) āsanehi garbharūpā sovāpitāni bhaveṃsu § 12.16.12A4. navakehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi abhyavakāśe vītināmayi- tavyaṃ; vgl. Gv 518.7f. teṣu ca caṅkrameṣu niṣadyāsv āsaneṣu ca § 39.28.32A5. ārāmehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi sthānacaṃkrama- 15  niṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ ... § 14.15.13B4. yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā upaskaro vā śraddhāprasannehi upāsakakulehi sthāpayitavyaṃ § 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6) § 39.16.31B4. svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ (= § 39.28.32A6) § 39.29.32B1. vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi (☞ § 39.29[Text], Anm. 6) no parihāṇi § 41.1.33B4. udake pi khalu mātrā uktā bhagavatā tathaỿva sarvvehi bāhirakehi jīvitapariṣkārehi § 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā tathaỿva sarvvehi jīvitapariṣkārehi § 41.3.33B6. evaṃ dhovitapādehi pratipadyitavyaṃ ( = § 41.3.33B7, § 41.33.36A1) § 41.17.34B7. yo (für ye?) etasya mātāpitā vā jñātikā vā tehi eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati § 43.1.38A1. vihārakehi bhaṇḍaṃ ujjhitāvakīrṇṇe tiṣṭhati § 44.1.38B7. sarvvaṃ karddamehi anupraviṣṭaṃ; vgl. § 44.6.39A4. sarvvaṃ bhūmīye anu- praviṣṭo bhavati § 47.1.40B4. katham ... cīvarehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 48.1.41A4, § 48.2.41A6; vgl. § 47.2.40B5. kathaṃ ... cīvarake pratipadyitavyaṃ) § 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... tehi prajñaptehi upaviśaṃti § 48.2.41A5. yūyaṃ ... <t>ehi prajñaptehi niṣīdatha § 53.10.45B1. tehi dīpavārikehi na kṣamati āghāto vā pra<dveṣo> vedayituṃ § 53.12.45B2. atha khalu bahi prāsādakoṇehi dīpakā nirvvāpayitavyā § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena ... ubhayehiṃ antehi lohakena bandhitavyā § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ § 57.1.47B1. te dāni ... prahāṇa okastāḥ samānā āsanehi upaviśiyāṇaṃ ... masc. -ehiṃ (Pkt.; vgl. Pischel § 371) § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena ... ubhayehiṃ antehi lohakena bandhitavyā neut. -ehi § 40.6.32B6. tehi bhājanehi prakṣipitavyā pāṭalāgulikā vā campakagulikā vā śarkarā vā § 40.15.33A6. omhāya vā thālikāya vā bhājanehi vā thapitavyaṃ § 49.1.42A2. § 49.1.42A2. mahātmehi kulehi ipsitānnāni bhukt<v>ā § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi niveśayamāno, phalabhāgiyān satvāṃ phalehi pratiṣṭhāpayamāno ... fem. -āhi § 3.5.3B2. avaśyaṃ vaṃśavidalikāhi (Hs. vaṃsa°) vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā § 12.16.12A4. navakehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi abhyavakāśe vītināmayi- tavyaṃ; vgl. Gv 518.7f. teṣu ca caṅkrameṣu niṣadyāsv āsaneṣu ca § 39.28.32A5. ārāmehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi sthānacaṃkrama- niṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ ... § 32.9.27B3. sāmīcī karentena na kṣamati jānukena (☞ § 32.9[Text], Anm. 1) vā jaṃghāhi vā vandituṃ § 40.15.33A6. bhājanāni patraśākhāhi (Hs. yatra-) sthapitavyāni § 41.1.33B3. ā<r>drapādakaṃ upānahāhi (Hs. upanāhāhi) prakṣipiya; vgl. § 41.2.33B5. upānahāsu prakṣipiya § 41.24.35B1. na kṣamati upānahāhi ārdrapādena praveśayituṃ § 47.1.40B3. saṃbādharathyāhi ... gacchanti § 48.2.41A5. sudhāpāṇḍulepanāhi bhittīhi ghasaṃtā praviśatha fem. -īhi § 48.2.41A5. sudhāpāṇḍulepanāhi bhittīhi ghasaṃtā praviśath masc. -uhi § 53.6.45A5. catuhi prāsādasya koṇe koṇe dīpako prajvālayitavyaḥ 16  masc. -ūhi § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ § 5.10. Lokativ in der Funktion eines Dativs: vgl. Sen 1930 (ABORI X): 226f. = 1930: 168f. = 1995: 174f.; Wijesekera 1993: § 170; Renou, Gr § 223(c); v. Hinüber 1968: § 307 § 51.5.44A2. nêdāni vaktavyaṃ “piṇḍapātaṃ mahāpuṇye dehi.” 6. A-Stämme § 6.1. Nom. sg. masc. -a; vgl. BHSG §§ 8.22f.; RgsGr §§ 8.10f. § 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya kheṭa bādhati § 41.11.34A7. katham ayaṃ brāhmaṇa sthavirasyâcāragocareṇa tuṣṭo? § 48.5.41B1. kocako vā kalantarako paṭa vā § 6.2. Nom. sg. masc. -ā; vgl. BHSG § 8.24; RgsGr § 8.13 § 19.16.18A5. mā aprakṛtikā (wohl für °iko) ghaṭasya {vā} bāhyena praśvāsaṃ cchoreyā ti § 32.10.27B4. yadi kasyaci vraṇā (wohl für °ṇo) bhavati gaṇḍo vā piṭako vā, na dāni sahasā uppīḍitavyaṃ § 43.14.38B2. māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko vā yācitavyā (aber wohl verschrieben für °vyo) § 60.5.48B7. koci se pradeśo khajjati, hastā ca se ’kalpiyā bhavanti ... usw. usw. § 6.3. Nom. sg. masc. -e; vgl. BHSG § 8.25; Sn(tr.N) 212 (ad Sn 233); Karashima 2002a: § 9.2 § 37.5.30A4. (tīrthikāḥ ...) sarvvāśrāmiṇânopavāde kadāci traividyaprāptāḥ bahuśrutā § 6.4. Nom. sg. masc. -aṃ; vgl. BHSG § 8.26 (Mvu); RgsGr § 8.14 § 14.6.13A5. vihārasya catuḥpārśve kakṣaṃ (Nom. masc.) jātakaṃ bhavati, so lavāpay- itavyo. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati niṣprāṇakaṃ, tato ’gninā dahāpayitavyo § 37.5.30A4. duṣkaraṃ gṛhiliṅgaparityāgo, duṣkaraṃ vastisaṃyamo, duṣkaram araṇya- vāso (☞ § 37.5[Text], Anm. 6) § 55.1.46B3. tena hi geṇḍukaṃ nāma karttavyo § 6.5. Voc. sg. masc. -ā; vgl. BHSG § 8.27; v. Hinüber 2001: § 311; Steiner 1997: 165f. § 41.18.35A2. so dāni dārakasyâha “haṃgho dārakā, imaṃ vayaṃ tava sarvvaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ demi.” § 6.6. Voc. sg. masc. -e; vgl. BHSG § 8.28; vgl. ferner Geiger § 80.2; Caillat 1980: 52 = 2011: 148; v. Hinüber 2001: § 311 § 33.8.28A3. vaktavyaṃ “ārye” vā “bhante” vā “āyuṣman” ti § 33.12.28A5. nâpi kṣamati “bhāve” tti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā “āyuṣmaṃ” tti vā § 6.7. Voc. sg. masc. -o; vgl. BHSG § 8.28; Pischel § 366b § 33.15.28A6. strī vā puruṣo vā mahanto bhavati ... “mahallako”, “mahallake” ti vā vaktavyā § 49.5.42B2. paścācchramaṇena vaktavyaṃ: “upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā vāmahastikam vā dakṣiṇahastikaṃ vā uvvatta” tti § 6.8. Nom., Acc. sg. neut. -a; vgl. BHSG §§ 8.32f.; RgsGr § 8.19 § 29.5.24B3. arddha śīrṣasya pithetavyaṃ § 42.9.36B4. kapāṭaṃ ... atha khalu tathā karttavyaṃ yathā yavaphalamātreṇa lagga (oder eine Verschreibung für laggati ?) § 43.10.38A7. kārya kṛtvā § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka karddamena vā vināśitaṃ bhavati § 54.13.46B1. ṣaḍāya<ta>na manasikarentena § 56.3.47A4. niṣīdana prasphoṭiyāṇaṃ § 6.9. Nom. sg. neut. -o; vgl. BHSG § 8.36; RgsGr §§ 8.20~21 § 1.8.1B7. pratikṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ siñcāpayitavyo sanmārjayitavyo § 3.10.4A2. deyadharmma pratiṣṭhāpayitavyo deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyo § 20.11.19B6. tato bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya ... dhoviyāṇaṃ thapayitavyo § 20.13.20A1. kheṭaṃ cchorayitavyo § 24.4.22A3. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ ... ātape vā dātavyo {yo} bhūyo praveśayitavyo § 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ sthavitaṃ. tan dāni ... bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno kapālānāṃ rāśiṃ kṛtvā 17  § 39.9.31A6. na dāni bhaktāgraṃ avaṣṭabhayitavyo āsayitavyaṃ § 42.18.37A2. parikramma karentehi na dāni svedena vā malena vā usphoṣetavyo upāntake § 44.1.38B7. (cīvaraṃ ...) evaṃ bhūmīye patito § 44.5.39A2. cīvaraṃ ... karttavyo antarapīḍito § 44.6.39A5. “mā cīvarakoṇako bhavatu. mā cīvarako” ti § 44.6.39A5. cīvarakaṃ ... <tha>payitavyo (oder <sthā>pa°) § 6.10. Nom. sg. neut. -e; vgl. BHSG § 8.37; v. Hinüber 2001: § 323 § 38.8.30B3. āyuṣman, sarvve (lies: sarvvaṃ?) tvaṃ etaṃ kāryaṃ samagreṇa saṃghena suvyupaśāntaṃ § 43.1.38A2. vihārakehi bhaṇḍaṃ ujjhitāvakīrṇṇe tiṣṭhati § 6.11. Nom. sg. neut. -aḥ § 42.31.37B6. jentākavārikena tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati praveśayitavyaḥ (wohl verschrieben für °tavyaṃ) § 6.12. Acc. sg. masc. -a; vgl. BHSG §§ 8.32f.; RgsGr §§ 8.23f. § 57.1.47B1. te ... upānahā nikkhāsiya eka<ṃ> pi ekena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrakasmi gṛhītvā ... § 62.8.50A4. atha khalu eka<ṃ> phiccakaṃ utkṣipiya vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 6.13. Acc. sg. masc. -o; vgl. BHSG § 8.36; RgsGr § 8.27 § 20.1.19A5. so dāni taṃ unneti va<r>ddheti ghaṭasiktako ekaputrako viya § 20.1.19A6. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ mama āmrapotako ghaṭasiktako ekaputrakaṃ viya saṃvarddhita{vya}ṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi § 6.14. Acc. sg. neut. -o; vgl. BHSG § 8.36 § 41.6.34A3. upānahāpoccha{n}no upanāmiya § 41.29.35B6. upānahāpocchano (Hs. °yocchanno) dhoviya pīḍiya tatraỿva sthapitavyaṃ § 6.15. Acc. sg. masc. -āṃ; vgl. BHSG § 8.38 § 55.4.46B5. nâpi kṣamati āghātacittena vā duṣṭacittena vā geṇḍukāṃ vārayituṃ § 55.6.46B7. <duve vā> trayo vā vārā geṇḍukāṃ purato ābhāsayitvā § 6.16. Nom., Acc. sg. neut. -ā; vgl. BHSG § 8.38 § 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyā (oder für °tavyaṃ) § 41.6.34A3. pīṭhakā (oder eine Verschreibung für pīṭhikā?) prajñāpiya § 51.6.44A3. “cakṣur anityā yāva mano anityan.” ti sthātavyaṃ § 6.17. Acc. sg. neut. -e (!?); vgl. BHSG § 8.37 ☞ § 40.12, Anm. 3 § 12.2.11A7. śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇe § 40.12.33A5. yadi koci atibahuṃ oṣṭhaṃ vā volayati keśā vā ālaya{ṃ}ti nilāṭe vā, apane- tavyaṃ § 6.18. Dat. sg. masc., neut. -āye; vgl. BHSG § 8.45; RgsGr § 8.35; v. Hinüber 2001: § 299 § 4.18.5B7. hitāye vastupālānāṃ cirarātrāya kalpate (vs) § 12.9.11B4~5. yo na cchandāye na doṣāye na mohāye na bhayāye, prajñaptaṃ ca jānāti § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye (☞ § 31.19[Text], Anm. 1, 2) bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako, so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā” § 31.27.26B2. piṇḍāye praviśiṣyāmaḥ; § 31.30.26B5. mā piṇḍāye praviśatha § 31.31.26B5. piṇḍāye (Hs. °āthe) cariya § 39.27.32A4. bhuñjanāye dātavyaṃ § 40.7.32B7. pibanāye pānīyaṃ § 40.8.33A1. tato pibanāye dātavyaṃ § 41.2.33B5. bhikṣū āgacchanti pādadhovanikāye pādāṃ dhovanāye § 46.1.40A3. te ... gocarāye prasthitā § 46.2.40A5. yūyaṃ ... gocarāye prasthitā § 46.4.40A6. gocarāye prasthito bhavati § 51.2.44A1. evaṃ piṇḍāye caritavyaṃ § 6.19. Abl. sg. masc., neut. -āto; vgl. BHSG § 8.50 § 4.6.4B4. rājakulāto § 4.13.5A7. āsanāto 18  § 8.6.9A2. gocarāto (= § 25.3.22B2) § 8.5.9A1. bhaktuddeśāto § 8.7.9A4. asukāto veśikākulāto (Hs. veśikak°) § 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto § 11.8.11A1. mañcāto § 14.18.13B5. prativeśikulāto § 19.37.19A2. panthāto (= § 50.10.43B6) § 34.7.28B6. āsanāto § 38.5.30A7. vṛddhāntāto (= § 54.7.46A4) § 40.8.33A1. pānīyāto § 40.16.33B1. pāridhovaniyāto § 41.9.34A5. dakānakāto § 41.22.35A5. grāmāto § 44.1.38B6. cīvara{ṃ}vaṃśāto § 44.6.39A3. cīvaravaṃśakāto § 44.6.39A5. koṇakāto § 45.1.39B3. gocarāto (= § 45.2.39B4, § 45.5.39B6, § 46.1.40A4, § 46.2.40A5 et passim) § 49.7.42B6. panthāto § 51.1.44A1. yāva uṭṭhāṇāto; § 51.3.44A2. yāva uṭṭhānāto § 53.2.45A2. prahāṇāto § 53.11.45B1. prahāṇaśālāto § 56.1.47A2. skandhāto § 6.20. Loc. sg. masc. -asmiṃ; vgl. BHSG §§ 8.63f. § 9.3.9B7. antevāsikasmiṃ § 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinasmiṃ § 39.2.30B7. deśakālasmin § 48.7.41B2. kuḍḍasmiṃ § 59.3.48A7. nakkasmin § 6.21. Loc. sg. neut. -asmiṃ; vgl. BHSG §§ 8.63f. § 4.18.5B6. ādīptasmiṃ āgāre § 22.2.20B7. dvārasmiṃ § 41.16.34B6. pānīyasmiṃ § 55.1.46B2. prahāṇasmiṃ § 6.22. Loc. sg. masc. -asmi; vgl. BHSG §§ 8.63f. § 21.5.20B3. bāhyena kaṭhinasmi pādāni thapiyāṇaṃ § 55.3.46B5. pārśvasmi § 57.1.47B1. pārṣṇikāvaddhrakasmi gṛhītvā § 6.23. Loc. sg. masc. -esmiṃ, -esmin, -esmi; vgl. BHSG §§ 8.70f.; Roth 1966: 44; BhiVin(Ma-L) § 147, Anm. 4; Bernhard 1964; id. 1973; Schwarzschild 1977: 81 = 1991: 179; v. Hinüber 2001: § 310 § 8.7.9A4. asukesmi kule § 18.45.17A6. panthesmiṃ (= § 19.37.19A1) § 18.45.17A6. ken’ imaṃ<hi> panthesmi (Hs. yatthe°) antrāṇi vikīrṇṇāni? § 6.24. Nom. pl. masc. -ā; vgl. BHSG § 8.78; RgsGr §§ 8.55~56 § 39.6.31A3. taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 41.19.35A4. tādṛśā santā (vs) § 41.25.35B2. pādā tti § 42.11.36B5. ghaṭā vā sajjetavyā et passim § 6.25. Nom. pl. masc. -a; vgl. BHSG § 8.79 (nur in Versen); RgsGr § 8.57 § 12.13.12A1. na kṣamati śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ vihāra (pl.; “Zellen”) uddiśituṃ. ... vihārakā uddiśitavyā § 35.6.29A6. brāhmaṇa nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo śreṣṭho varṇṇo § 40.11.33A4. na dāni atibahu oṣṭha prakṣipitavyā 19 § 6.26. Nom. pl. masc. -āni; vgl. BHSG § 8.86 § 22.2.20B7. vihārasya dvārasmiṃ upari trayo kīlakāni ā<ko>ṭayitavyā § 43.6.38A5. ... taṭṭukā vā caṣakā vā palīnakā vā nirmmāditā kārāpiya ... yathāsthāne praveśayitavyāni (wohl für sthāpayitavyāni) § 6.27. Voc. pl. masc. -o; vgl. Geiger § 79.3; BHSG.- § 39.9.31A5. āha “āryo (Voc. pl. masc.), āraṇyakānāṃ pi ārocetha” tti § 6.28. Voc. pl. masc. -ā; BHSG § 8.87 § 42.21.37A6. upādhyāyācāryā praviśatha usw. § 6.29. Voc. pl. masc. -a; BHSG § 8.87 § 1.1.1B1. dāyakadānapatī pṛcchanti: “ārya, kiṃ samagro bhikṣusaṃgho?” (≒ § 4.1.4A6, § 5.1.6A5, § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7) § 2.1.2B1. te dāni pṛcchanti “ārya, samagro bhikṣusaṃgho?” (≒ § 3.1.3A6) § 34.5.28B5. na dāni vaktavyaṃ “sukham bhavanto, sukhaṃ mārṣa.” (= § 35.5.29A4, § 36.5.29B4) § 49.1.41B7. ārya, bhaktakṛtyaṃ karetha § 6.30. Acc. pl. masc. -a; vgl. BHSG § 8.94(nur in Versen) § 40.11.33A4. oṣṭha pramārjitvā § 6.31. Acc. pl. masc. -āṃ; vgl. BHSG § 8.90 § 18.53.17B2. vaidyo jalpati “bhante mahāvikaṭāṃ pāyetha” tti § 21.5.20B2. pādāṃ dhova- (= § 21.5.20B2, § 23.4.3.21B1, § 41.1.33B3, § 41.2.33B5, § 41.6.34A3, § 41.7.34A4, § 41.25.35B2 usw.) § 21.5.20B3. bāhirakāṃ pādāṃ kṛtvā § 23.4.3.21B1. hastāṃ dhovituṃ § 23.6.4.21B3. hastām vā nirmmādayituṃ § 39.10.31A7. eṣo dāni koci grāmāntikāṃ bhaktena nimantreti, ... § 40.9.33A2. pānīyavārikāṃ (Hs. pānīyadhārikāṃ) yācati § 40.13.33A5. hastāṃ sunirmmāditā kariya § 41.2.33B4. śabdāpayatha NandanOpanandanāṃ ṣaḍvarggikāṃ ca § 41.19.35A3. labhanti vipulāṃ arthāṃ (vs) § 41.25.35B2. pādāṃ dhovituṃ § 42.4.36A6. śabdāpayatha ṣaḍvarggikāṃ § 43.1.38A1. pañcârthavaśāṃ § 47.5.40B7. tahiṃ pādāṃ prakṣālitvā et passim § 6.32. Acc. pl. masc. -aṃ; vgl. Lüders 1954: §§ 196~219; EV I (2nd ed.) 159 (ad Th 83); EV II (2nd ed.) 115 (ad Thī 183); Geiger § 78.3a § 12.12.11B7. jalpati “vihāraṃ (pl.; “Zellen”) yūyaṃ uddiśatha! ...” ... tato vihārakā uddiśitavyāḥ § 39.16.31B4. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ ... § 41.1.33B3. ā<r>drapādakaṃ upanāhāhi prakṣipiya § 62.2.49B5. vātakopanāni phalāni khādanti, kalāyā satilapallavaṃ khādanti § 6.33. Acc. pl. masc. -ā; vgl. BHSG § 8.92 § 26.9.23B2. na hastā nirmmādayati; § 32.6.27B2. hastā nirmmādantasya § 40.13.33A5. hastāṃ sunirmmāditā kariya § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati ... cikkaṇā (Hs. cikkannā) vā hastān nirmādituṃ § 62.2.49B5. vātakopanāni phalāni khādanti, kalāyā (Hs. kalāpā) satilapallavaṃ khādanti § 6.34. Acc. pl. masc. -ās, -āḥ; vgl. BHSG § 8.93 § 47.2.40B4. śabdāpayatha NandanOpanandanāḥ § 6.35. Acc. pl. masc. -āni; vgl. BHSG § 8.98; v. Hinüber 2001: § 315 § 21.5.20B3. bāhyena kaṭhinasmi pādāni thapiyāṇaṃ § 29.4.24B2. nâpi kṣamati ubhayāni sandhī maṭamaṭāye prasārituṃ § 39.7.31A4. tahiṃ taṇḍulāni prakṣipituṃ; § 39.7.31A4. prakṣipatha taṇḍulāni; § 48.8. 41B5. gṛhṇituṃ ... taṇḍulāni vā anokṣīṇakā; vgl. Jā III 425.19*. dhovasi taṇḍulāni 20  § 48.8.41B4. cikkaṇā vā oṣṭhāni (oder lies: oṣṭhā{ni}) nirmādayituṃ § 6.36. Nom. pl. neut. -ā, āḥ; vgl. BHSG § 8.100; RgsGr §§ 8.63~64; Schwarzschild 1979 = 1991: 186~190; v. Hinüber 2001: § 324; Oberlies 2001: 148; Caillat 2011: 288f. § 6.9.7B7. garbharūpā sovāpitāni bhaveṃsu; vgl. § 4.10.5A2. garbharūpāṇi sopāpitakāni § 14.8.13A7. na kṣamati lenāni bandhituṃ. atha khalu muktakā karttavyā § 20.10.19B6. śeṣāś catvāri aṅgulāni § 25.11.22B7. trayo pātrāṇi gṛhṇitavyāni. ekahastena dve gṛhṇitavyāḥ, apareṇa dāni ekaṃ § 42.11.36B5. bhaṇḍā sajjayitavyā § 42.11.36B5. ghaṭā vā sajjetavyā kuṇḍā <vā> § 6.37. Voc. pl. masc. -e; ☞ § 33.4 (Text), Anm. 3 § 33.4.28A1. bhagavān āha “"ārye (Hs. ālape)" ti (oder "āryê"ti?) vā "bhante" ti vā "āyuṣmante" ti <vā>.” § 33.9.28A4. eṣo bhikṣu mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā bhaginīm vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, ... atha khalu “sālohite” ti (oder “sālohitê”ti?) vā śabdāpayitavyāḥ § 6.38. Instr. pl. masc., neut. -ehi; vgl. BHSG § 8.108; RgsGr §§ 8.76, 77 § 1.8.1B7. puṣpehi (= § 2.6.2B6, § 3.7.3B5) § 2.8.2B7. hastehi (= § 3.9.3B7, § 5.9.6B7) § 4.8.4B7. -kṛtyehi § 4.18.5B6. āryehi § 6.9.7B7. praviṣṭehi (= § 48.1.41A4) § 11.2.10B4. prāṇakehi (= § 11.5.10B5) § 12.16.12A3. vṛddhehi (= § 42.17.37A2) § 12.16.12A4. navakehi (= § 42.17.37A2, § 42.29.37B5) § 19.9.18A2. ubhayehi (Hs. °yohi) Uddāna (II).20A5~6. varṣopagatehi ... varṣavustehi ... āgantukehi ... naivāsikehi § 22.3.21A1. kīlakehi § 39.2.30B7. āraṇyakehi (= § 39.2.31A1, § 39.9.31A6) § 39.5.31A3. grāmāntikehi (= § 39.6.31A3, § 39.8.31A4) § 40.11.33A4. agroṣṭhehi § 40.14.33A6. agroṣṭhakehi § 41.4.34A1. antarggatehi indriyehi § 41.14.34B3. kulaputrakehi § 41.17.34B7. praticorehi § 41.19.35A3. corehi (vs) § 41.31.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi (= § 41.32.35B7) § 42.3.36A4. ṣaḍvarggikehi § 42.7.36B2. upalehi § 42.18.37A3. antevāsikehi vā sārddhevihārikehi (Hs. sarvvevihārikehi) vā § 42.23.37B1. cīvarehi (= § 44.5.39A3, § 44.8.39A7, § 48.1.41A4 et passim) § 42.29.37B6. sagauravehi § 42.29.37B6. sapratīśehi (Hs. sapratiśehi) § 42.30.37B6. uccaśabdamahāśabdehi § 42.30.37B6. alpaśabdehi alpanirghoṣehi § 43.1.38A2. nakulamūṣikehi (Hs. nakūla-) § 43.1.38A2. kākaśakuntehi § 43.4.38A4. māsavārikehi vā pakṣavārikehi vā § 43.7.38A6. kīlakehi § 44.8.39A7. cīvarakehi § 47.5.40B7. tṛṇakehi § 48.1.41A3. pādehi (= § 48.2.41A5 et passim) § 48.2.41A5. kardamehi § 49.1.42A1. pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi (= § 49.1.42A2) § 49.7.42B5. sahitakehi et passim 21 § 6.39. Instr. pl. masc. -ihi? (Verschreibung) § 12.16.12A4. vṛddhehi (Hs. vṛddhihi) cchanne praviśitavyaṃ; vgl. § 31.6.25B5. karentehi (Hs. °ntihi) § 6.40. Gen. pl. masc., neut. -āṇaṃ (= mi.); vgl. BHSG § 8.121 § 31.15.26A1. cetiyāṇaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi § 43.16.38B4. takṣāṇaṃ bhāṇḍaṃ 7. Ā-Stämme § 7.1. Nom. sg. fem. -a; vgl. BHSG § 9.8 § 18.7.15B6. kalpiyakaraki sthāpayitavyā udakasya pūrṇṇa § 7.2. Nom. sg. fem. -aṃ (Verschreibung) § 40.12.33A5. tṛṇaṃ vā kulikaṃ (lies: tulikā? ☞ § 18.11, Anm.[3]) vā upari dātavyā; vgl. § 18.11.16A1. tṛṇam vā tūlikā vā upari sthāpetavyā § 7.3. Voc. sg. fem. ambe (vedisch); vgl. AiGr III 121~122 § 33.1.27B6. te ... gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, ...” ti § 33.9.28A3. nâyaṃ kṣamati śabdāpayituṃ “ambe” tti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā § 33.11.28A4. nâpi kṣamati “ambe” ti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā § 7.4. Acc. sg. fem. -aṃ, -am; vgl. BHSG §§ 9.16f. § 25.10.22B6. iṣṭakam vā upalam vā nirāmiṣaṃ nirmmādiya § 30.4.25A2. dakṣiṇāṃ bāhaṃ śirasy upanidhāya ... vāmaṃ bāhām anukāyaṃ prasārayitvā § 38.8.30B4. puno câsmaparṣaṃ (Hs. câsmi°) upasaṃkramesi § 42.19.37A4. śālaṃ bandhitvā § 42.20.37A4. cūrṇṇaṃ ... piṇḍikam vā vaṭṭiya (Hs. paṭṭiya) dātavyaṃ § 49.7.42B4. piṇḍacārikaṃ vā aṇṭhiyāṇa § 53.7.45A6. acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo § 7.5. Acc. sg. fem. -ā; vgl. BHSG §§ 9.20f.; RgsGr § 9.8 § 18.10.16A1. varccakumbhikā gantavyaṃ § 31.15.26A1. upānahā omuñcitvā; § 41.22.35A6. upānahā nirmmādayitavyā; § 44.10. 39B1. upānahā gṛhṇituṃ; § 57.1.47B1. upānahā nikkhāsiya § 43.14.38B2. dhovanikā vā <rajanikā vā> karttukāmo bhavati § 43.15.38B3. tena dhovanikā vā rajanikā vā kariya na kṣamati tathā yyeva ... dayituṃ § 43.15.38B3. cīvararaj<j>ūṃ ... vitanikā ujjhitvā § 57.6.47B4. vāmā bāhāṃ osāriya saṃprajānaṃ nirddhāvitavyaṃ usw. § 7.6. Obl. sg. fem. -āye; vgl. BHSG §§ 9.26f. § 4.18.5B7. praviśya vṛddhiyĕ varāyĕ bhūrīye (lies: °riye [m.c.]) (vs) § 8.7.9A4. asukāto veśikākulāto caṃḍavidhavāye sthūlakumārīye paṇḍakasya asukāye bhikṣuṇīye § 40.16.33B1. mātrāye upanāmetavyaṃ § 41.1.33B3. mātrāye yūyam āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha § 41.2.33B6. mātrāye āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha § 41.9.34A5. dakānakāto vāmāye kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjayitvā § 41.24.35A7. ekasyôpānahāye vaddhro pocchitavyo § 41.24.35A7. ekasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ § 41.24.35B1. dvitīyasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ § 41.29.35B5. ekasya upānahāye vadhro pocchitavyo § 42.7.36B2. ekāye vātapānīye vīthīye § 42.20.37A5. mātrāye upanetavyaṃ § 49.5.42A7~42B1. oḍḍitāye grīvāye § 53.4.45A4. gomayapiṇḍikā vā paṭipaṭikāye sthapetavyā § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto parapratibaddhāye jīvikāye ... § 7.7. Instr. sg. fem. -āye; vgl. BHSG § 9.37 § 13.3.12A7. ollāye gṛhītaka~ (= § 17.8.15A2) § 13.7.12B2. ullāye gṛhītaka~ (=§ 17.2.14B5, § 17.8.15A2) 22  § 13.7.12B2. mṛttikāye limpitavyo § 22.2.20B7. rejjukāye vā sūtrakāye (für sūtrikāye?) vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā § 25.1.22B1. vātamaṇḍalikāye āgacchiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ pātito § 26.1.23A5. nicuḍavuntikāye imaṃhi taṇḍulā mārggitavyā § 26.3.23A7. (yavāgū ...) pārṣikā bhavati, tāye parṣāye gantavyaṃ § 40.14.33A6. pibantena oṣṭhā patraśākhāye nirmmādayitvā agroṣṭhakehi pātavyaṃ § 44.4.39A2. tato paṭṭikāye vā loḍhakena vā rejjukāye vā bandhitavyāni § 52.6.44B4~5. asukāye ceṭikāye dinnaṃ. asukāye caṇḍavidhavāye dinnaṃ. asukena paṇḍakena dinnaṃ. asukāye sthūlakumārīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpabhikṣuṇīye dinnaṃ. asukāye (Hs. °kāyo) pāpaśrāmaṇerīye dinnaṃ § 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti § 53.8.45A7. acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo; § 54.12.46A7. acchaṭikāye utthāpiyāṇaṃ § 54.3.46A2. kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhananti pāde vā āhananti § 54.7.46A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye āhanituṃ (≒ § 54.8.46A5) § 60.3.48B5. na kṣamati ... śarkarāye vā <śalākāye vā> aṅgaṃ ... kaṇḍūyituṃ § 7.8. Dat. sg. fem. -āye; vgl. BHSG § 9.38; RgsGr § 9.13 § 26.3.23A6. kim ayaṃ yavāgū ubhayato sāṃghikā parṣāye § 7.9. Gen. sg. fem. -āye; vgl. BHSG § 9.40; RgsGr § 9.16 § 18.7.15B6. varccakumbhikāye purato § 24.3.22A2. vālikāye § 24.6.22A3. (Schleim) ekasya upānahāye tale cchorayitavyaṃ § 42.24.37B2. atha dāni parṣāye bhavati § 7.10. Loc. sg. fem. -āye; vgl. BHSG §§ 9.35, 41; RgsGr § 9.18; Oberlies 2001: § 31.3 § 6.5.7B2. katamāye rathyāye § 18.51.17B1. nāvāye gacchantasya § 34.3.28B3. kṣatriyaparṣāye kiñci kāryaṃ bhavati; § 37.3.30A2. kiṃci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryam bhavati; § 37.3.30A2. kiñci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryaṃ; § 34.3.28B3. kṣatriya- parṣāye imaṃ va kāryaṃ allīyāmi § 35.8.29A6. evaṃ brāhmaṇaparṣāye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 40.13.33A5. apareṇa pānīyaghaṭikāṃ paṭicchantena cīvarāṃtarikāya vā patrāntarikāye vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 41.2.33B5. bhikṣū āgacchanti pādadhovanikāye pādāṃ dhovanāye § 57.3.47B2. pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya ... § 57.2.47B1. evaṃ upānahāye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 57.13.48A1) § 58.4.48A3. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyikāye ... kāsituṃ § 7.11. Instr. sg. fem. -āyaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 9.51 (Mvu) § 60.1.48B5. te ... śarkarāyaṃ pi śalākāyaṃ pi aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyanti § 7.12. Instr. sg. fem. -āya; vgl. BHSG §§ 9.54, 59 § 13.2.12A6. ullāya gṛhītakāṃ § 14.9.13A7. rejjūye vā kaḍevarikā{|}ya vā otaritavyaṃ § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) upari iṣṭāhi mṛttikāya ca cchādayitavyā{ni} § 18.6.15B4. ākāśatalaṃ vā liṃpitavyaṃ mṛttikāya vā sudhāya vā § 21.3.20B1. sūtrikāya vā rejjukāya vā ghaṇa<ṃ> vuṇitavyaṃ § 40.10.33A3. prakṣālayitvā patraśākhāya (Hs. yatra-ś°) vā <nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ> § 42.14.36B7. loḍhikena vā paṭikāya vā § 42.20.37A4. caṣakena vā karaṇḍikāya vā § 53.11.45B1. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā mukhavātena vā ... dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ § 60.5.48B6. saṃkalikāya vā śarkkarakāya vā “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.5.48B7. tulikāya (Hs. kul°) vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati § 7.13. Abl. sg. fem. -āto; vgl. BHSG §§ 9.72f. § 40.16.33A7. pāridhovanikāto mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ § 41.24.35B1. kuṇḍikāto vā karakato vā kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya ... § 7.14. Gen. sg. fem. -āya; vgl. BHSG § 9.62; RgsGr § 9.17 23  § 55.2.46B3. geṇḍukaṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyo tṛṇānām vā palālānām vā ... vā sūtrasya vā uṇṇāya (od. *urṇāya; Hs. ulāya) vā § 7.15. Gen. sg. fem. -āyaṃ § 42.24.37B1. kim ayaṃ jentāko ekato sāṃghiko parṣāyaṃ pariveṇiko nimantritakānāṃ § 7.16. Gen. sg. fem. -ā; vgl. BHSG § 9.67; Geiger § 81.1; Sn(tr.N) 189 (ad Sn 110) § 41.8.34A4. ekasya upānaho vaddhro pocchito dvitīyasya upānahā vaddhro pocchito ekasya upānahā talaṃ pocchitaṃ dvitīyasya upānahā talaṃ pocchitaṃ; vgl. § 41.24.35A7~35B1. ekasyôpānahāye vaddhro ... ekasya upānahāye talaṃ ... dvitīyasya upānahāye talaṃ (= § 41.29.35B5) § 7.17. Gen. sg. fem. -asya; vgl. BHSG § 9.75 § 24.6.22A3. (Schleim) ekasya upānahāye tale cchorayitavyaṃ dvitīyena marddayitavyaṃ § 41.24.35A7~35B1. ekasyôpānahāye vaddhro ... ekasya upānahāye talaṃ ... dvitīyasya upānahāye talaṃ (= § 41.29.35B5) § 7.18. Loc. sg. fem. -āya; vgl. BHSG §§ 9.57, 63 § 4.15.5B1. ayaṃ kumāro śivapathikāya cchandito (vs) § 40.13.33A5. apareṇa pānīyaghaṭikāṃ paṭicchantena cīvarāṃtarikāya (Hs. cīvara°) vā pātrāntarikāye vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 7.19. Loc. sg. fem. -e; vgl. BHSG §§ 9.77f. § 12.4.11B1. varṣopanāyike śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 29.10.24B6. evaṃ niṣadye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 41.13.34B2. so śreṣṭhi aparehiṃ (für °ahiṃ?) jñātiśāle (Hs. jñātisāle; einfach ein Genusfehler?) nimantritako gato varṣārātrikaṃ Uddāna (V).39B2. evaṃ pādadhovanike (Verschreibung für dhovitapādehi?) pratipadyitavyaṃ § 7.20. Loc. sg. fem. -āyaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 9.80 § 18.13.16A2. antamasato kumbhikāyaṃ ekasya paryāptaṃ bhaveyā, tattakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyaṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropitako § 34.4.28B4. nâpi kṣamati ... kṣatriyaparṣāyam (Hs. °paryā°) upasaṃkramituṃ § 39.16.31B4. gaṇḍī<yaṃ> āhatāyaṃ vandiya cetiyaṃ <bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ> § 39.28.32A6. gaṇḍīyaṃ āhatāyaṃ stūpaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ § 39.26.32A4. sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo § 7.21. Nom. Acc. pl. fem. -ā; vgl. BHSG §§ 9.82f.; RgsGr §§ 9.27f. § 42.18.37A3. bāhā prasāretavyā § 43.4.38A4. omuddhikā sthapitavyā § 57.12.48A1. upānahā ... odriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā et passim § 7.22. Nom. pl. fem. -āya (?) § 41.22.35A6. mā prāṇakā jāyeṃsu nīlikāya vā bhaveṃsu § 7.23. Nom., Acc. pl. fem. -āyo; vgl. BHSG §§ 9.88f.; Geiger § 81.3; Oldenberg 1967: 1163; v. Hinüber 2001: § 336; Oberlies 2001: 150; vgl. auch Pkt. -āo, Pischel § 376; Caillat 2011: 293f. § 1.8.1B7. śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyāyo puṣpehi okiritavyāyo (= § 2.6.2B6) § 2.10.3A3. abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāyo § 5.13.7A3. tathā yeva dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyāyo (Hs. °tavyā | yā) § 6.14.8A4. tathā yeva dakṣiṇāyo vistareṇa karttavyāyo yathā saṃghasthavirasya bhaktāgre § 7.4.8B2. triṃśato pi grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyo gāthāyo (Acc.) ca ... abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyo gāthāyo (Acc.) ca ... °kāyo gāthāyo (Acc.) ca ≒ § 9.4.10A1~2. ... abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyo gāthāyo ... °kāye gāthāyo ... °kāye gāthāyo ca § 17.8.15A2. anyehi tāvad yā bhitti ollāye gṛhītakāyo tāyo śāṭayitavyāyo § 18.17.16A4. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchayatā tāyo varttikāyo vā tulikāyo (Hs. kuli°) (Acc.) vā varccakuṭīye prakṣipituṃ § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... tāyo (Nom.) devasikaṃ cchorayitavyāyo vā, dahiya bhūyo vā thapayitavyāyo § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “ko imāyo (Acc.) 24  dahiṣyatî”ti, tāyo (Acc.) cchoriya anyāyo sthāpayitavyāyo (Nom.) § 24.1.22A1. adrākṣīd ... pakkasiṃghāṇakena bhittīyo vināśitāyo (Acc.) § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo ... bhittiyo pakkakheṭena pakkasiṃghāṇakena varttīhi lambantīhi? § 34.4.28B4. upānahāy’ omuṃciya (od. °hāyo ’mu°) tato allīyitavyaṃ § 39.6.31A3. duve thālīyo ādrāhayitavyāyo (Hs. °tavyā | yā) § 39.19.31B6. duve sthālīyo adrāhayitavyāyo § 40.5.32B6. bandhitavyāyo § 41.6.34A3. upānahikāyo upanāmiya; § 41.9.34A5. upānahikāyo nikṣipiya; § 57.4. 47B3. upānahikāyo dvāramūle nikkhāsiya § 41.14.34B3. ulkāyo § 41.14.34B3. dīpikāyo § 41.24.35A7. upānahāyo (= § 41.29.35B5) § 41.26.35B2. vācāyo jalpayitavyāyo (Hs. °tavyo{|}yo) § 42.31.37B7. praveśayitavyāyo (vgl. § 42.27.37B4. praveśayitavy<āy>o) § 43.1.38A2. odanamānikāyo § 47.7.41A1. sudhāpāṇḍulepanāyo (Hs. °lapanāyo) <bhittīḥ> § 48.1.41A3. sudhāpāṇḍulepanāyo bhittīyo § 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā ... tehi prakṛty’ eva tāva dīpavarttikāyo varttitavyāyo § 53.14.45B4. prajñapetha śayyāyo § 53.19.45B7. dīpakoṭikāyo ekasthāne sthāpayitavyā § 53.19.45B7. dīpavarttīyo niṣpīḍiyāṇaṃ ekaṃhi koṇake sthāpetavyā{|}yo § 57.3.47B2. upānahāyo pocchiya § 57.5.47B3. anekāyo upānahikāyo mūṣikena vā khajjeṃsu § 57.6.47B4. (upānahikāyo ...) tathā yeva saṃpuṭikṛtikāyo āsanasya heṣṭhe sthapitavyāyo § 57.6.47B4. upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā § 57.7.47B5. upānahāyo pārṣṇivaddhake osāriya § 57.7.47B5. upānahāyo nikkhāsitvā § 57.8.47B6. upānahāyo ābandhiya § 57.10.47B7. upānahikāyo nikkhāsiyāṇaṃ § 57.11.47B7. upānahāyo “caḍacaḍa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.11.47B7. upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti § 7.24. Nom. pl. fem. -āyā?; vgl. BHSG § 9.91 § 1.6.1B5. abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā (verschrieben für °kāyo?) § 7.25. Acc. pl. fem. -āye; vgl. BHSG § 9.92 § 1.12.2A6. abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāye § 2.10.3A3. abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāyo § 9.4.10A1~2. abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāyo ... °kāye gāthāyo (Nom. Acc. pl. fem. -o?; vgl. BHSG § 9.97) § 42.27.37B4. śuktiyo praveśayitavyo (aber wohl für °tavy<āy>o) § 7.26. Nom. pl. fem. -āni; vgl. BHSG § 9.98 § 19.23.18B2. paudgalikapaudgalikāni praśvāsaghaṭikāni sthāpayitavyāni ghaṭikā vā karakā vā alābutumbukā vā § 43.4.38A4. (lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ...) sthāpayitavyāni § 7.27. Acc. pl. fem. -āni; vgl. BHSG § 9.98 § 42.31.37B7. jentākapīṭhikāni (verschrieben für °pīṭhakāni?) dhoviya praveśayitavyāni § 7.28. Acc. pl. fem. -āṃ; vgl. BHSG § 9.99 § 41.19.35A2. gāthāṃ bhāṣate § 7.29. Voc. pl. fem. -e § 39.2.31A1. upāsike § 7.30. Inst. pl. fem. -āhi; vgl. BHSG § 9.102 § 1.5.1B5. kettika pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi; § 3.6.3B4. kati pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi § 13.2.12A7. dvīpikāhi (= § 13.3.12A7) § 14.4.13A4. dīpikāhi § 18.4.15B3. iṣṭakāhi 25  § 18.4.15B3. iṣṭāhi § 18.15.16A3. vaṃśaśalākāhi (= § 18.16.16A3) § 28.1.24A1. tālapādukāhi ābaddhāhi usw. § 7.31. Loc. pl. fem. -āhi; vgl. BHSG §§ 7.30f. § 40.15.33A6. bhājanāni patraśākhāhi (Hs. yatra-) sthapitavyāni § 47.1.40B2. kaṇṭakaśākhāhi lagnaṃ bhavati 8. I-Stämme § 8.1. Nom. sg. masc. -i; vgl. BHSG § 10.15 § 41.16.34B6. so dāni senāpati tasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.18.35A1. so dāni corasenāpati pānīyaṃ pibiya ... § 42.19.37A3. agni prajuhitvā § 42.28.37B5. dānapati vā jalpati § 8.2. Nom. sg. masc. -ī; vgl. BHSG § 10.27; RgsGr § 10.4 § 6.7.7B4. koci imaṃhi evannāmako upāsako dānapatī vā vāṇijako (Hs. °akā) vā? § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 39.13.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha tumhe. āraṇyakâpi eṣyantî”ti § 8.3. Nom. sg. fem. -ī; vgl. BHSG § 10.28; RgsGr § 10.8 § 23.4.1.21A7. mā bhūmī khanīya{ṃ}ti § 24.11.22A6. atha dāni kṣudro kheṭo, upāṃsulā ca bhūmī bhavati, ... § 39.29.32B1. vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā § 47.9.41A2. sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittī bhavati varjayitavyā § 8.4. Acc. sg. fem. -i; vgl. BHSG § 10.50 § 53.11.45B2. dīpavartti okaḍḍhiya § 54.6.46A3. yaṣṭi dāni vārentena (Hs. cār°) § 8.5. Acc. sg. fem. -ī; vgl. BHSG § 10.55 § 6.11.8A2. tena odanasampattī vā āgametavyaṃ vyañjanasampattī vā āgamaṃtena bhuñjitavyaṃ; § 4.13.5A6. odanasampattir vvā āgamaṃtena ... vyañjanasampattir vvā āgamaṃtena (≒ § 5.11.7A2) § 54.12.46A7. na kṣamati yaṣṭī tasya dātuṃ. ... tena yeva yaṣṭī vāretavyaṃ § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ § 8.6. Acc. sg. fem. -īyaṃ § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ (Acc. von yaṣṭ) tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena aṣṭahastâyāmena karttavyā muṣṭimātrī sthūlatvena § 8.7. Instr. sg. fem. -īye; vgl. BHSG § 10.91 § 4.18.5B7. praviśya vṛddhiyĕ varāyĕ bhūrīye (lies: bhūriye [m.c.]) | śirīyĕ lakṣmī<yĕ>(?) parigraheṇa ca || (vs) § 12.9.11B4. bhikṣuḥ śayyāsanaprajñāpaka-saṃmutīye saṃmanyitavyo § 52.6.44B5. asukena paṇḍakena dinnaṃ. asukāye sthūlakumārīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpabhikṣuṇīye dinnaṃ. asukāye (Hs. °kāyo) pāpaśrāmaṇerīye dinnaṃ § 54.3.46A2. kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhananti pāde vā āhananti § 54.7.46A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye āhanituṃ (≒ § 54.8.46A5) § 8.8. Instr. sg. fem. -iye; vgl. BHSG § 10.96 § 1.13.2A6. sarvvarātriṃ dharmmavṛṣṭiye vītināmiyānaṃ ... § 4.18.5B7. praviśya vṛddhiyĕ varāyĕ bhūrīye (lies: bhūriye [m.c.]) (vs) § 34.6.28B6. tavâhaṃ hitopasaṃhāreṇa rakṣāvaraṇaguptiye sukhaṃ ... viharāmi § 8.9. Instr. sg. fem. -iyeḥ § 3.12.4A4. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇaṃ sarvvarātri dharmmavṛṣṭiyer vvītināmiyāna ... § 8.10. Instr. sg. fem. -īya; vgl. BHSG § 10.103; RgsGr § 10.18 § 42.20.37A4. cūrṇṇaṃ rāśīya upanetuṃ § 8.11. Abl. sg. fem. -iyo § 14.4.13A4. mañcā bhittiyo mocetvā pratipādakā dātavyā § 8.12. Gen. sg. masc. -isya; vgl. BHSG § 10.78 26  § 41.15.34B5. corasenāpatisya § 41.16.34B6. senāpatisya (= § 41.17.34B7) § 8.13. Gen. sg. fem. -īye; vgl. BHSG § 10.94 § 30.6.25A3. rātrīye purimaṃ yāmaṃ; § 30.7.25A4. rātrīye madhyame yāme; § 30.8. 25A4. rātrīye paścime yāme § 8.14. Loc. sg. neut. -ismiṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.84 § 25.17.23A4. yathā akṣismiṃ § 8.15. Loc. sg. masc. -ismi; vgl. BHSG § 10.85 (nur in Versen) § 56.4.47A4. ātmano pratisandhismi sukhākaṃ niṣīdanakaṃ pīṭhake prajñapayitavyaṃ § 8.16. Loc. sg. fem. -īye; vgl. BHSG § 10.95 § 21.6.20B3. bhittīye dve kīlakā nikhaniya § 24.6.22A3. bhūmīye cchorayituṃ; § 24.6.22A4. bhūmīye cchoriya § 25.6.22B4. bhūmīye ghasantena § 44.1.38B7. evaṃ bhūmīye patito § 44.6.39A4. bhūmīye anupraviṣṭo bhavati § 54.4.46A3. evaṃ yaṣṭīye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 8.17. Loc. sg. fem. -iye; vgl. BHSG § 10.100 § 24.9.22A5. upānahapuṭe kṛtvā bhūmi{ṃ}ye marditavyaṃ § 8.18. Loc. sg. fem. -īya; vgl. BHSG § 10.106; RgsGr § 10.32 § 21.3.20B1. evan taṃ tvaṃ bhūmīya astarīya cīvaraṃ sivayasi § 8.19. Loc. sg. fem. -īyaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.144 § 24.3.22A2. bhittīyaṃ kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakam vā cchorayituṃ § 25.1.22B1. bhūmīyaṃ (= § 44.6.39A4, § 55.2.46B4) § 54.17.46B2. evaṃ yaṣṭīyaṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ § 8.20. Loc. sg. fem. -iyaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.145, Günther 1942: 94, Geiger § 86 § 19.18.18A7. bhūmiyaṃ § 31.21.26A4. cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ cīvarabisiyan (☞ § 31.21[Text], Anm. 2, 3) thaviyāṇaṃ § 8.21. Loc. sg. fem. -o; vgl. v. Hinüber 2001: § 327; Oberlies 2001: 162, § 36.5 (Pā. ratto) § 41.26.35B3. trīṇi vācāyo jalpayitavyāyo “ko vṛddhatarako vṛddho (< Loc. sg. fem. vṛddhau)” tti § 8.22. Nom. pl. masc. -ī; vgl. BHSG § 10.179 § 41.19.35A4. raudrā lohitapāṇī caurā § 42.26.37B3. dāyakadānapatī § 8.23. Acc. pl. masc. -ī; vgl. BHSG § 10.180 § 29.4.24B2. nâpi kṣamati ubhayāni sandhī maṭamaṭāye prasārituṃ § 8.24. Nom. pl. masc. -i; vgl. BHSG § 10.189; RgsGr § 10.36 § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati (= § 1.11.2A4, § 1.13.2A6, § 2.1.2B1, § 3.1.3A6, § 3.10.4A1, § 4.1.4A6, § 4.11.5A3, § 5.1.6A5, § 6.1.7A4, § 6.3.7A6, § 6.10.8A1 usw.) § 42.20.37A5. dānapati āhaṃsuḥ § 8.25. Nom. pl. fem. -i; vgl. BHSG § 10.189 § 17.8.15A2. bhitti § 8.26. Acc. pl. masc. -iṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.166 § 4.2.4A7. nâpi dāyakadānapatiṃ dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayati samādāpayati § 8.27. Nom. pl. fem. -iyo von i-Stämmen; vgl. BHSG § 10.168 § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo ... § 42.27.37B4. śuktiyo praveśayitavy<āy>o § 42.31.37B7. śuktiyo dhoviya praveśayitavyāyo § 8.28. Acc. pl. fem. -iyo von i-Stämmen; vgl. BHSG § 10.168 § 47.1.40B3. bhittiyo (Hs. bhintiyo) ghasantā § 8.29. Nom. pl. fem. -īyo; vgl. BHSG § 10.172 § 53.19.45B7. dīpavarttīyo niṣpīḍiyāṇaṃ ekaṃhi koṇake sthāpetavyāyo § 8.30. Acc. pl. fem. -īyo; vgl. BHSG § 10.172 § 24.1.22A1. adrākṣīd ... bhittīyo vināśitāyo § 48.1.41A3. bhittīyo ghasaṃtā 27  9. Ī-Stämme § 9.1. Nom. sg. fem. -i; vgl. BHSG § 10.17 § 18.4.15B3. ullā va<r>ccagharaṃ dhovanti (< dhovantī; p.präs.; Hs. vovatti) gacchati § 18.7.15B6. kalpiyakaraki sthāpayitavyā udakasya pūrṇṇa § 22.7.21A3. nâpi kṣamati sā cakkalī adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggikā vā paluggikā vā prāṇakehi vā khajjanti (< °antī; p.präs.) § 9.2. Acc. sg. fem. -iṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.44 § 4.17.5B5. asatiṃ parivarjeyā mārggaṃ pratibhayaṃ yathā (vs) § 5.7.6B5. gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiyāṇaṃ; § 6.7.7B5. gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiya; § 39.1.30B6. gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ (= § 39.18.31B6); § 39.1.30B6. āhanatha gaṇḍiṃ; § 39.12.31B1. āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ usw. § 18.20.16A7. varccakuṭiṃ praviśati; § 18.21.16B1. varccakuṭiṃ gantavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyā); § 18.40.17A2. varccakuṭiṃ praviśituṃ § 19.8.18A1. praśvāsakuṭiṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 43.4.38A4. kalpiya-kuṭiṃ § 9.3. Acc. sg. fem. -i; vgl. BHSG § 10.51; RgsGr § 11.8 § 4.7.4B5. gaṇḍi āhaṇiya § 39.2.31A1. gaṇḍi āhaniyāṇaṃ § 42.12.36B6. gaṇḍi ākoṭetvā § 9.4. Acc. sg. fem. -ī; vgl. BHSG § 10.55 § 19.3.17B5. praśvāsakuṭī pi dāni bhikṣuṇā kārayantena ... § 22.2.21A1. cakkalī bandhitavyā; § 22.3.21A1. cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ; § 22.4.21A2. cakkalī osārayitavyā; § 22.5.21A2. cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ (= § 22.6.21A3); § 22.5.21A2. cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ § 9.5. Acc. sg. fem. -īyaṃ § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ (Acc. von yaṣṭ) tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena aṣṭahastâyāmena karttavyā muṣṭimātrī sthūlatvena § 9.6. Obl. sg. fem. -īye; vgl. BHSG § 10.90f. § 8.7.9A4. asukāto veśikākulāto caṃḍavidhavāye sthūlakumārīye paṇḍakasya asukāye bhikṣuṇīye § 14.13.13B2. sāmagrīye saṃviditvā § 42.7.36B2. ekāye vātapānīye vīthīye dvauvikā bhavati § 9.7. Instr. sg. fem. -īye; vgl. BHSG § 10.91 § 4.18.5B7. praviśya vṛddhiyĕ varāyĕ bhūrīye (lies: bhūriye [m.c.]) | śirīyĕ lakṣmī<yĕ>(?) parigraheṇa ca || (vs) § 41.9.34A5. dakānakāto vāmāye kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjayitvā § 41.24.35B1. kuṇḍikāto vā karakato vā kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya ... § 41.24.35B1. kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhovitavyā § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ dhūlīye pūritaṃ bhavati § 48.2.41A5. mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca ... dhūlīye kardamehi vināśitak<ā> § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka ... dhūlīye vā otaritaṃ bhavati § 9.8. Instr. sg. fem. -īya; vgl. BHSG § 10.103; RgsGr § 11.10 § 41.9.34A5. kalācīya udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhotā § 48.1.41A3. dhūlīya karddamena makṣitaparimakṣitā § 9.9. Instr. sg. fem. -īyaṃ § 41.22.35A6. dakāna<kāto ’da>kaṃ kalācīyaṃ āvarjetvā § 9.10. Abl. sg. fem. -īto; vgl. BHSG § 10.132 § 31.21.26A5. akalpiyakarakīto hastā nirmmādiyāṇa kalpiyakarakīto prakṣāliya ... § 9.11. Gen. sg. fem. -īye; vgl. BHSG § 10.94 § 18.9.15B7. varccakuṭīye purato kuṭī vā śālā vā karttavyā § 9.12. Loc. sg. fem. -īye; vgl. BHSG § 10.95 § 18.17.16A4. tāyo varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā varccakuṭīye prakṣipituṃ § 20.4.19A7. mahatīye bālakinīye (Hs. bālāk°) bhikṣuparṣāye 28  § 22.8.21A3. evaṃ cakkalīye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [III].25A6) § 53.6.45A5. sopānamaggulīye dīpako jālayitavyo § 53.18.45B7. varccakuṭīye prasrāvakuṭīye ca dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 9.13. Loc. sg. fem. -īyaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.144 § 12.11.11B6. trayodaśīyaṃ vā cāturddaśīyaṃ vā tena śayyāsanoddeśo karttavyo § 12.11.11B6. cāturddaśīyam vā pāñcadaśīyam vā śayyāsanoddeśo karttavyo § 18.25.16B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati varcakuṭīyaṃ upaviṣṭena dhyānāntaragatena ... āsituṃ § 18.28.16B4. prahāṇasya āmantriyāṇa cchatti varccakuṭīyaṃ gantavyaṃ § 39.14.31B2. sāṃghika{ṃ}kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ sthāpayitavyo § 39.26.32A4. sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo § 31.14.26A1. puṣkiriṇīyaṃ vā taḍāge vā oghe vā pādāṃ dhovitvā § 39.28.32A6. gaṇḍīyaṃ āhatāyaṃ stūpaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ § 53.6.45A6. varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo § 53.12.45B2. sopānamaggulīyaṃ prāsādakuṭīyaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.13.45B3. varccakuṭīyañ ca prasrāvakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo § 53.13.45B3. varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo. varccakuṭīyaṃ nirvvāpayitvā § 53.16.45B5. sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo § 57.9.47B6. saṃghamadhye bhaktāgre tarpaṇāgre vā samīcīyaṃ vā § 9.14. Nom. pl. fem. -ī; vgl. BHSG § 10.186 § 43.4.38A4. sthālī § 9.15. Nom. pl. fem. -iyo; vgl. BHSG § 10.168 § 17.10.15A4. oṇṇiyo § 17.10.15A4. bisiyo § 43.1.38A2. caṃgeriyo § 43.16.38B4. niśreṇiyo § 9.16. Nom. pl. fem. -io; Pischel § 99; Caillat 2011: 292f.; vgl. Nom. pl. fem. -īo (Pischel §§ 377, 380, 387; Bloch 1965: 142; BHSG §   10.171; v. Hinüber 2001: §   341; Oberlies 2001: 163; Caillat 2011: 292f.) § 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo vā bisio (Hs. biśio) vā caturasrakā vā omayilomayilā bhavanti ... § 9.17. Nom. pl. fem. -īyo; vgl. BHSG § 10.172; Caillat 2011: 292f. § 39.6.31A3. duve thālīyo (Hs. śālīyo) ādrāhayitavyāyo § 43.1.38A2. sthālīyo piṭharikā adhotakā ... § 43.1.38A2. droṇīyo § 43.8.38A6. khajjakacaṃgerīyo vanaphalacaṅgerīyo haritakīcaṅgerīyo § 43.16.38B4. vāsīyo § 9.18. Acc. pl. fem. -īyo; vgl. BHSG § 10.172 § 48.8.41B5. śimbaṭīyo § 9.19. Instr. pl. fem. -īhi; vgl. BHSG § 10.194 § 24.1.22A1. siṃghāṇakavarttīhi lambantīhi (Hs. °ntehi) § 24.2.22A1. varttīhi lambantīhi § 9.20. Voc. pl. fem. -īyo; vgl. BHSG.- § 48.5.41A7. bhaginīyo 10. IN-Stämme § 10.1. Nom. sg. masc. -i; vgl. BHSG § 10.19 § 9.4.9B7. antevāsi ubhayato vinayaṃ grāhayitavyo § 41.13.34B2. so śreṣṭhi ... gato § 10.2. Acc. sg. masc. -iṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.43 § 4.15.5B1. buddhaṃ Vipaśyiñ ca Śikhi<ṃ> ca Viśvabhuṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A4. buddhaṃ Vipaśyiñ ca Śikhiñ ca Viśvabhuva<ṃ> (vs) § 7.4.8B1. upādhyāyena tāva śrāddhevihāriṃ upasaṃpādentakenaỿva ... § 10.3. Acc. sg. masc. -i; vgl. BHSG § 10.49 § 7.7.8B4. upādhyāyo śraddhevihāri upasaṃpādiya na ovadati, na anuśāsati, na uddiśati § 9.6.10A2. eṣo ācāryo niśrayaṃ dadiya antevāsi (Acc. sg.) naỿva ovadati, nânuśāsati ... 29 § 10.4. Acc. sg. masc. -ī; vgl. BHSG § 10.54 § 49.6.42B2. eṣo ca dāni bhikṣu <ta>sya sārddhevihārī vā antevāsī vā paścācchramaṇaṃ praveśe{n}ti(?) § 10.5. Gen. sg. masc. -isya; vgl. BHSG § 10.80; RgsGr § 12.4 § 8.8.9A5. bhuktāvisya (Hs. °viśya); § 49.1.42A3. bhuktāvisya | (Hs. °visyā) § 10.5.10A6. śraddhevihārisya § 10.6. Loc. sg. masc. -esmiṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.83 § 7.3.8B1. tena hi evaṃ upādhyāyena śrāddhavihāresmiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni upādhyāyena śraddhevihāresmiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ? § 10.7. Loc. sg. masc. -ismiṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.84 § 7.8.8B5. evam upādhyāyena śraddhevihārismiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10B1) § 9.7.10A2. evam ācāryeṇa antevāsismiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10B1 § 10.8. Acc. pl. masc. -iṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.166 § 20.4.19B1. mā sabrahmacāriṃ gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ § 10.9. Acc. pl. masc. -i; vgl. BHSG § 10.189 § 9.1.9B4. te dāni ... niśrayaṃ dapiya naỿva antevāsi ovadanti, na anuśāsanti § 10.10. Inst. pl. masc. -īhi; vgl. BHSG § 10.194 § 11.5.10B5. pakṣīhi (= § 11.5.10B6, § 21.8.20B5) § 10.11. Inst. pl. masc. -ihi; vgl. BHSG § 10.197 § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... prāṇakehi khajjantaṃ pakṣihi ohayiyantaṃ § 10.12. Gen. pl. masc. -iṇāṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.203 § 37.5.30A4. (tīrthikāḥ ...) sarvvāśrāmiṇânopavāde (< °āśrāmiṇāṃ ano°? ☞ § 37.5[Text], Anm. 3) 11. U-Stämme § 11.1. Nom. sg. masc. -u; vgl. BHSG § 12.13; RgsGr § 14.3 § 19.30.18B5. bhikṣu (= § 19.32.18B6, § 20.19.20A4, § 24.7.22A4, § 41.22.35A5, § 43.14.38B2, § 45.7.40A2, § 46.6.40B1, § 50.4.43A6, § 53.9.45A7, § 57.5.47B3 usw.) § 11.2. Nom. sg. masc. -ū; vgl. BHSG § 12.14; RgsGr § 14.4 § 18.29.16B4. bhikṣū (= § 33.12.28A5, § 44.6.39A4, § 57.5.47B3, § 57.8.47B6); vgl. § 18.39.17A2. bhikṣūḥ (lies: bhikṣuḥ) § 11.3. Acc. sg. masc. -u; vgl. BHSG § 12.22 § 51.12.44A5. bhikṣu paśyiyāṇaṃ § 11.4. Acc. sg. masc. -uvaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 12.26 § 6.13.8A4. buddhaṃ Vipaśyiñ ca Śikhiñ ca Viśvabhuva<ṃ> (vs) § 11.5. Voc. sg. masc. -uḥ ?; BHSG.- § 21.2.20B1. bhikṣuḥ (= § 28.2.24A2, § 44.2.39A1) wohl für bhikṣu § 11.6. Gen. sg. masc. -usya; vgl. BHSG § 12.35 § 4.8.4B7. bhikṣusya (= § 18.53.17B3, § 24.11.22A6, § 27.2.23B5, § 27.3.23B6, § 40.9. 33A2, § 47.8.41A1, § 48.5.41A7, § 48.6.41B1, § 49.7.42B5, § 58.3.48A3 et passim) § 11.7. Nom. pl. masc. -uḥ; vgl. BHSG § 12.57 § 18.20.16A7. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣuḥ bhagavato ārocayeṃsuḥ § 19.2.17B4. te dāni bhikṣuḥ prakīrṇṇakaṃ praśvāsaṃ karonti § 54.1.46A1. te dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇe pracalāyaṃti § 54.8.46A4. ete dāni bhikṣuḥ pracalāyanti, nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ § 11.8. Nom. pl. masc. -ū; vgl. BHSG § 12.60 § 1.1.1B1. bhikṣū (= § 1.11.2A3, § 1.12.2A5, § 3.1.3A6, § 4.1.4A5, § 33.4.28A1, § 40.1. 32B2, § 40.1.32B3, § 40.16.33B1, § 41.1.33B4, § 41.2.33B5, § 41.11.34A7, § 42.2. 36A2, § 42.4.36A6, § 42.31.37B6, § 44.1.38B6 et passim) § 11.9. Nom. pl. masc. -u; vgl. BHSG § 12.61; RgsGr § 14.10 § 2.1.2B1. bhikṣu (= § 3.1.3A6, § 6.1.7A5, § 18.45.17A5, § 31.3.25B2, § 31.37.27A3, § 41.1.33B3, § 41.1.33B4, § 41.2.33B6, § 42.2.36A3, § 42.3.36A4, § 42.25.37B2 usw.) § 11.10. Nom. pl. neut. -u; vgl. BHSG § 12.61; RgsGr § 14.11 § 40.9.33A2. bhikṣusya cakṣu duḥkhanti 30 § 11.11. Voc. pl. masc. -u § 1.1.1B1. dīrghāyu (= § 2.1.2B1, § 3.1.3A7, § 4.1.4A6, § 5.1.6A5, § 14.10.13B1 usw.) § 23.2.21A5. kiṃ ime bhikṣu vihārakā oddriṇṇakā ... apratisaṃskṛtā? § 11.12. Voc. pl. masc. bhikṣave; Hypersanskritismus für Pā. bhikkhave, ein Magadhismus; vgl. Karashima 2001: 207f.; id. 2002b: 147 § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo ...? § 11.13. Voc. pl. masc. -ava? § 33.2.27B7. satyaṃ bhikṣava (für °avo?) ṣaḍvarggikāḥ, evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ ... § 11.14. Acc. pl. masc. -uṃ; vgl. BHSG § 12.55 § 39.16.31B4. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ ... § 56.1.47A3. yogācārāṃ bhikṣuṃ śabdena vyābahanti (= § 58.1.48A2) § 11.15. Acc. pl. masc. -u; vgl. BHSG § 12.61 § 62.4.50A1. śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni § 11.16. Acc. pl. masc. -ūyo § 18.29.16B5. ūrūyo (Hs. °ūpo) ’hayaṃtena; § 18.33.16B6. ūrūyo (Hs. °ūpo) ohayantena § 19.13.18A4. ūrūyo (Hs. °ūpo) omūtriyantena § 11.17. Instr. pl. masc. -ūhi; vgl. BHSG § 12.65; Oberlies 2001: 153 § 14.18.13B5. bhikṣūhi (= § 18.34.16B7, § 33.4.28A1, § 40.1.32B3, § 42.29.37B5, § 44.4. 39A2 usw.) § 11.18. Instr. pl. masc. -uhi; vgl. BHSG § 12.67 § 13.17.13A1. saktuhi § 11.19. Loc. pl. masc. -uhi § 53.6.45A5. catuhi (vgl. BHSG § 19.18; BLSF II 373.6) prāsādasya koṇe koṇe dīpako prajvālayitavyaḥ § 11.20. Loc. pl. masc. -ūhi § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ 12. Ū-Stämme § 12.1. Acc. sg. fem. -ūṃ § 43.15.38B3. cīvararaj<j>ūṃ § 12.2. Inst. sg. fem. -ūye; vgl. BHSG § 12.41 § 14.9.13A7. rejjūye § 12.3. Gen. sg. fem. -ūye; vgl. BHSG § 12.41 § 25.1.22B1. yavāgūye gaṇḍī ākoṭitā § 26.3.23A6. eṣo dāni yavāgūye samayo ārocito bhavati, ... § 26.9.23B3. imaṃ mama yavāgūye pratyaṃśaṃ gṛhṇa.” § 12.4. Loc. sg. fem. -ūye; vgl. BHSG § 12.41 § 26.2.23A6. evaṃ yavāgūye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 26.11.23B3, Uddāna [III].25A6) § 12.5. Inst. sg. fem. -ue; vgl. BHSG § 12.42. -uye; Pischel § 385. -ūe § 21.6.20B3. rajjue bandhiya 13. S-Stämme § 13.1. Acc. sg. masc. -aṃ; vgl. BHSG § 16.14 § 4.15.5B1. mahāyaśaṃ Śākyamuniñ ca Gautamaṃ (vs) 14. N-Stämme § 14.1. Acc. sg. neut. -am; vgl. BHSG § 17.10 § 42.5.36B1. idam evaṃrūpaṃ pāpakarmmam akuśalan dharmmam adhyācariṣyatha § 14.2. Loc. sg. neut. -e; vgl. BHSG § 17.15; Geiger § 92.2 (raññe); Pischel § 404 (kamme usw.) § 62.3.49B7. evaṃ vātakarmme pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 62.13.50B1) § 14.3. Nom. pl. masc. -āno; vgl. BHSG § 17.39 § 4.16.5B3. nirayaṃ pāpakarmmāṇo kṛtapuṇyā ca svarggatiṃ (vs) § 14.4. Loc. pl. neut. -ehi 31  § 49.1.42A2. mahātmehi kulehi 15. NT-Stämme § 15.1. Nom. sg. masc. -nto; vgl. BHSG § 18.6 § 62.4.50A1. bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto § 62.1.49B3. anuprāpayanto § 43.1.38A1. bhagavāṃ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikāṃm anucaṃkramanto anuvicaranto § 11.3.10B4. jānanto (= § 12.3.11A7, § 13.3.12A7, § 20.5.19B1, § 43.1.38A2 usw.) § 57.5.47B3. bhikṣū vā jānanto vā ajānanto § 4.8.4B7. mahanto ca kālo bhavati; § 4.12.5A4. mahanto piṇḍo parigṛhīto bhavati; § 33.15.28A6. strī vā puruṣo vā mahanto bhavati ... § 18.32.16B6. cetiyaṃ vandaṃto (Hs. °dito) § 21.5.20B3. sūtraṃ valento § 30.9.25A5. pallaṭṭanto śayati § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... saṃvibhajanto § 41.19.35A3. corehi gṛhīto saṃto mukto ācārakāraṇāt (vs) § 38.6.30B2. kasya tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? § 15.2. Nom., Acc. sg. neut. -ntaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 18.12 § 41.14.34B4. tehi ... gṛhasya madhyamāgāre mahāntaṃ kūṭaṃ kṛtaṃ § 15.3. Voc. sg. masc. -nto; zur Verwechslung von Singular- und Plural-Endungen, vgl. BHSG § 5.1 § 32.11.27B4. “svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. mâsi śrānto? ... viśramāhi!”; vgl. § 31.28.26B3. “entu āyuṣmanto (Voc. pl.), svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. mā śrāntā? mā klāntā? ...” § 15.4. Voc. sg. masc. -ān, -āṃ; vgl. BHSG § 18.81 § 13.3.12B1. ye bhagavān varṣāṃ vasiṣyanti te pratisaṃskariṣyanti § 33.5.28A1. sthaviro dāni bhagavantaṃ pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavāṃ, ...? § 41.11.34A7. yasya bhagavān katham ... tuṣṭo? § 15.5. Voc. sg. masc. -a; vgl. BHSG § 18.82 § 31.34.27A1. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣma, ...” (oder lies: āyuṣma<ṃ>?) § 15.6. Instr. sg. masc. -ntena; vgl. BHSG § 18.13 § 2.8.3A1. praticchantena (= § 3.9.4A1) § 18.18.16A5. karaṃtena (= § 18.23.16B2, § 18.31.16B5, § 19.8.18A1) § 18.12.16A1. karentena (= § 19.11.18A3, § 28.8.24A5, § 32.9.27B3) § 19.3.17B5. kārayantena § 18.25.16B3. manasikarentena (§ 51.6.44A2, § 54.13.46B1, § 55.7.47A1) § 30.7.25A4. manasikārentena § 40.13.33A5. paṭicchantena § 47.4.40B6. kaḍḍhantena § 25.13.23A1. okaḍḍhantena § 41.25.35B2. karentena (= § 42.7.36B2) § 40.11.33A4. prakṣālayantena § 25.15.23A2. prakṣipiyantena § 18.27.16B3. khādantena (= § 20.9.19B5, § 20.12.19B7, § 20.13.20A1, § 20.14.20A1) § 50.7.43B3. gacchantena § 4.13.5A6. āgamaṃtena (= § 6.11.8A2) § 5.11.7A2. āgamayantena § 1.10.2A2. gṛhṇantena (= § 25.11.22B6) § 25.6.22B4. ghasantena § 41.31.35B7. cinta<ya>ntena § 23.4.2.21B1. prajñapayantena § 30.5.25A3. prajñapeṃtena § 9.4.9B7. dentena § 53.5.45A4. ādīpentena 32  § 23.4.4.21B1. dhunantena § 41.23.35A7. dhovantena (= § 57.11.47B7) § 49.5.42B1. nidhyāyantena (= § 51.6.44A2) § 61.3.49A3. unnadantena § 25.14.23A1. nirmmādayantena § 40.14.33A6. pibantena § 61.3.49A3. bhañjantena (= § 61.8.49B1); § 61.6.49A6. bha<ṃ>jantena (= § 61.7. 49A7) § 50.7.43B3. bhuñjantena § 42.15.36B7. bhrāmayantena § 44.1.38B7. mārggantena § 19.13.18A4. omūtriyantena § 42.15.37A1. laṃghayantena § 25.15.23A2. ullapantena § 20.15.20A2. vandantena (= § 32.10.27B3) § 41.31.35B7. parivarjantena (= § 47.8.41A1) § 28.8.24A4. anuparivarttantena (Hs. anuvari°) § 1.10.2A1. vārayantena (Hs. cār°) § 2.8.2B7. vārantena (Hs. cār°) § 40.10.33A3. vārentena (= § 40.12.33A4, § 40.13.33A5 [Hs. cār°], § 54.6.46A3 usw.) § 42.21.37A5. praviśantena (= § 45.4.39B5, § 47.3.40B5) § 19.25.18B3. praveśentena § 46.4.40A6. prāvarantena § 25.8.22B4. pratisāmayantena § 19.28.18B5. siñcantena § 8.4.8B7. utthaṃtena § 42.14.36B7. snāyantena § 61.4.49A3. phoṭantena § 49.5.42A7. hanantena § 15.7. Gen. sg. masc. -ntasya; vgl. BHSG § 18.14 § 32.6.27B2. añjantasya § 24.9.22A5. āsantasya § 32.2.27A6. karentasya (= § 32.3.27A6, § 32.5.27B1, § 32.6.27B1~2, § 47.8.41A1, § 48.9.41B5) § 15.10.14A4. pratisaṃskārayantasya § 32.5.27B1. khādantasya § 8.10.9A6. gacchantasya (= § 18.51.17B1, § 19.41.19A3, § 31.4.25B4, § 32.6.27B2, § 32.7.27B3); § 8.12.9B1. āgacchantasya § 32.6.27B1. dadantasya § 32.7.27B3. dentasya (= § 41.16.34B6) § 32.6.27B1. dhovantasya § 32.6.27B2. nirmmādantasya § 32.6.27B2. nirmmādentasya § 32.6.27B1. pacantasya § 32.6.27B2. pibantasya § 8.8.9A5. bhuñjantasya § 32.6.27B2. likhantasya § 32.6.27B2. vācantasya § 8.12.9B1. vandantasya (= § 32.2.27A6, § 32.6.27B2) § 8.6.9A2. praviśantasya (= § 24.11.22A6) § 55.4.46B6. vārayantasya (Hs. cār°) § 32.7.27B3. prāvarantasya § 32.6.27B1. sīvantasya § 15.8. Nom. pl. masc. -ntā; vgl. BHSG § 18.18 33  § 41.19.35A4. santā (vs) § 47.2.40B4. kaḍḍhantā § 47.1.40B3. ghasantā § 47.2.40B5. dhovaṃtā sīvantā rañjentā § 47.1.40B3. dhoventā siventā raṃjentā (= § 48.1.41A4) § 31.1.25A7. bhaṃjantā (bhaṃjantaṃ |) § 36.6.29B5. muṣaṃtā § 41.1.33B3. marddantā ( = § 41.2.33B5) § 41.1.33B3. marddentā § 47.2.40B4. praviśantā § 55.1.46B2. vārayantā (Hs. cār°) (= § 55.3.46B4) § 54.3.46A2. vārentā § 12.3.11B1. ovarṣiyantā{ṃ} (= § 13.3.12A7); § 15.3.14A1. ovarṣayantā (= § 16.3.14A7) § 54.3.46A2. viheṭhiyantā (Hs. vihaṭh°) § 15.9. Nom. pl. masc. -ntāṃ; vgl. BHSG § 18.20 § 12.2.11A7. ovarṣiyantāṃ (= § 13.2.12A7, § 15.2) § 15.10. Nom. -Acc. pl. neut. -ntāni; vgl. BHSG § 18.22 § 14.12.13B1. mahāntāni (= § 49.1.41B7) § 15.11. Voc. pl. masc. -ntā § 42.20.37A5. bhadantā (= § 42.28.37B5) § 15.12. Nom. pl. masc. -to?; vgl. BHSG § 18.70 § 26.1.23A4. āyuṣma<ṃ>to ṣaḍvarggikāḥ § 15.13. Voc. pl. masc. -to? § 5.7.6B5. āyuṣma<ṃ>to vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho § 15.14. Voc. pl. masc. -aṃ,-an § 31.1.25B1. āyuṣmaṃ (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.; = § 39.1.30B6, § 39.9.31A6) § 4.7.4B5. āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) (= § 31.1.25B1, § 39.2.31A1, § 39.1.30B7, § 39.7.31A4, § 42.3.36A5, § 42.3.36A6, § 42.4.36A7, § 42.26.37B4, § 49.1.42A4, § 49.2.42A5) § 15.15. Voc. pl. masc. -ān; vgl. BHSG § 18.88 über Nom. pl. masc. -vān; RgsGr § 22.31 über Acc. pl. masc. -vān § 1.2.1B2. navakā bhikṣū pṛcchanti: “āyuṣmānn, āgato saṃghasthaviro?” bhikṣū āhaṃsu: “āgato ca gato ca” § 15.16. Voc. pl. masc. -nte; § 33.4.28A1. “kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirā bhikṣū ālapitavyā?” bhagavān āha “"ārye (Hs. ālape)" ti vā "bhante" ti vā "āyuṣmante" ti <vā>.” § 34.3.28B3. te jalpanti “bhante, mā allīyatha” tti, ... (≒ § 35.3.29A3, § 36.3.29B3) § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 39.13.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha tumhe. āraṇyakâpi eṣyantî”ti § 15.17. Instr. pl. masc. -ntehi (= Pā) § 31.1.25B1. āyuṣmantehi (= § 42.3.36A4) § 42.29.37B5. uccahantehi § 31.6.25B5. karentehi (= § 42.18.37A2); § 31.6.25B5. karentehi (Hs. °ntihi); § 31.15.26A1. pradakṣiṇīkarentehi (= § 31.20.26A4) § 39.9.31A7. cintayantehi § 31.5.25B4. pratibāhantehi § 42.17.37A2. pratibāhentehi § 31.19.26A3. bha<ṃ>jantehi; § 31.33.26B7. bhañjanteh § 4.10.5A1. laṃghaṃtehi § 5.9.6B6. laṃgha{ṃ}yantehi; § 6.9.7B6. laṃghayantehi § 32.10.27B4. vandayantehi (= § 32.11.27B4) § 39.14.31B2. varjantehi § 4.10.5A1. parivarjantehi (= § 5.9.6B6) § 5.9.6B7. varjayantehi (= § 6.9.7B7) 34  § 4.10.5A1. praviśantehi (= § 4.9.5A1, § 31.14.26A1, § 47.1.40B4, § 47.2.40B5) § 42.19.37A4. prasvedaṃtehi § 6.9.7B6. pariharantehi § 15.18. Loc. pl. masc. -ntehi § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi (Hs. cār°) cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ 16. Zahlwörter Siehe Glossar unter den einzelnen Zahlen § 16.1. Nom. sg. masc. eka § 40.10.33A3. yathā eka hasto nirāmiṣo bhavati § 16.2. Instr. sg. masc. ekinā; vgl. BHSG § 21.14 § 40.13.33A5. ekinā hastena pānīyaṃ parigṛhṇitavyaṃ § 16.3. Instr. sg. fem. ekāye § 42.7.36B2. ekāye vātapānīye vīthīye dvauvikā (?) bhavati dvitīyā karttavyā § 16.4. Gen. sg. fem. ekasya; vgl. BHSG § 9.75 § 24.6.22A3. (den Schleim) ekasya upānahāye tale cchorayitavyaṃ dvitīyena marddayi- tavyaṃ § 41.8.34A4. ekasya upānaho vaddhro pocchito § 41.8.34A4. ekasya upānahā talaṃ pocchitaṃ § 41.24.35A7. ekasyôpānahāye vaddhro pocchitavyo § 41.24.35A7. ekasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ (= § 41.29.35B5) § 41.29.35B5. ekasya upānahāye vadhro pocchitavyo § 16.5. Loc. sg. ekasmi; vgl. BHSG § 21.20 § 19.16.18A5. ekasmi koṇe sarvvasaṃghasya praśvāsaghaṭo sthāpayitavyo § 16.6. Loc. sg. ekaṃhi; vgl. BHSG § 21.21 § 53.19.45B7. dīpavarttīyo niṣpīḍiyāṇaṃ ekaṃhi koṇake sthāpetavyāyo § 16.7. Loc. sg. ekahiṃ; vgl. BHSG § 21.22 § 18.29.16B5. atha khalu saṃghārāmasya ekahiṃ ante upaviśitavyaṃ § 16.8. Loc. sg. ekahi; vgl. BHSG § 21.22 § 44.4.39A1. bhikṣūḥ ekahi vihārake prati<saṃ>-kramanti § 16.9. Nom., Acc. duve; vgl. BHSG § 19.3; Schneider 1960: 251f. = 2002: 49f. § 7.4.8B2. catvāri vā trīṇi duve ekaṃ sūtraṃ vistareṇa grāhayitavyo § 25.9.22B5. atha dāni ujjuko kīlako bhavati, duve trayo vā āveḍhakā dātavyāḥ § 25.11.22B6. gṛhṇantena nâpi kṣamati ekahastena duve trayo vā pātrāṇi gṛhṇituṃ § 31.7.25B5. sāye vāsôpagatā bhavanti, taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā usw. § 16.10. Gen. pl. dviṇṇāṃ; vgl. BHSG § 19.5 § 12.15.12A2. dviṇṇāṃ trayāṇāṃ janānāṃ eko vihārako uddiśitavyo § 16.11. Loc. pl. dvihi; vgl. BHSG § 19.4 § 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6) § 16.12. Nom. pl. ubhe; vgl. BHSG § 19.7; Geiger § 114.2 § 36.6.29B5. sāgārā cânagārā ca ubhe anyonyaniśritā (vs) § 16.13. Instr. pl. ubhayehi § 19.9.18A2. iminā avakāśo dātavyo. tato ubhayehi (Hs. °ohi) praśvāso karttavyo § 16.14. Loc. pl. catuhi; vgl. BHSG § 19.18 (Mvu); BLSF II 373.6; = Pā § 53.6.45A5. catuhi prāsādasya koṇe koṇe dīpako prajvālayitavyaḥ § 16.15. Instr. pl. pañcahi; vgl. BHSG § 19.22 § 12.9.11B4. pañcehi aṅgehi samanvāgato bhikṣuḥ ... katamehi pañcahi? ... imehi pañcahi § 16.16. Instr. pl. pañcehi § 12.9.11B4. pañcehi aṅgehi samanvāgato bhikṣuḥ ... katamehi pañcahi? ... imehi pañcahi 17. Personalpronomen Siehe Glossar unter den einzelnen Personalpronomina ahaṃ, me, no, mo; tvaṃ, tave, tumaṃ, te, vo 35 § 17.1. Nom. sg. tumaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 20.9 (Mvu); Pischel § 421 § 55.7.47A1. āsa tumaṃ, ahaṃ vārayiṣyaṃ § 17.2. Gen. sg. tvaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 20.35 (LV, Mvu) § 38.8.30B3. āyuṣman, sarvve tvaṃ etaṃ kāryaṃ samagreṇa saṃghena suvyupaśāntaṃ § 17.3. Nom. pl. tumhe; vgl. BHSG §§ 20.43 (Mvu) § 39.13.31B1. tumhe (= § 39.25.32A2) § 17.4. Nom. pl. tave? ☞ § 31.16, Anm. 2 § 31.16.26A2. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullapitavyaṃ āgantukehi “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ ettha vasatha, ghuṇaviddhā tave, NandOpanandanā yūyaṃ nāgarājāno, ...” § 17.5. Instr. pl. § 4.11.5A3. ambhehi (= § 6.10.8A1, § 8.2.8B6, § 10.2.10A4) § 39.1.30B7. amhehi § 17.6. Instr. pl.; vgl. BHSG §§ 20.53f. tumhehi (Mvu) § 34.2.28B2. tumbhehi § 39.2.31A1. tumhehiṃ § 17.7. Gen. pl. § 14.10.13B1. tumhākaṃ (< tumh- × yuṣmākam) § 14.18.13B6. tumhāṇaṃ (= § 41.14.34B4) (= Pkt; vgl. Pischel § 420) § 31.16.26A2. tumbhāṇaṃ § 17.8. Gen. pl. mo; vgl. BHSG § 20.58 § 55.4.46B6. vinīvaraṇaṃ mo karenti 18. Geschlechtliches Pronomen § 18.1. Nom. sg. masc. etaṃ? § 43.3.38A3. etaṃ (ein Genusfehler?) dāni saṃghasya anugraho bhavati § 18.2. Nom. sg. neut. sa § 44.1.38B6. sa (ein Genusfehler?) cīvaraṃ cīvara{ṃ}vaṃśāto kṛṣiyāṇaṃ patito § 18.3. Nom. sg. neut. taṃ, yaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 21.11, Pā § 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ sthavitaṃ. tan dāni ... bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno § 31.16.26A2. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullapitavyaṃ āgantukehi “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ (“nach wie vor”?) ettha vasatha, ghuṇaviddhā tave, ...” § 4.18.5B6. taṃ khu tasya svakaṃ bhavati na khalu yo (lies: yaṃ?) tatra dahyati (vs) § 40.14.33A6. taṃ yyeva karttavyaṃ § 41.20.35A4. taṃ pi dhik yo ’sya muñcati (vs) § 44.1.38B7. taṃ dāni ekena ākrāntaṃ dvitīyena ākrāntaṃ tṛtīyenâkrāntaṃ § 44.1.38B7. taṃ ... sarvaṃ phāṭitaṃ § 50.9.43B5. yadi tāva ākāṃkṣati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ yaṃ rucyati, taṃ khāditavyaṃ § 50.9.43B5. cchandayitavyo vaktavyo “ūnakaṃ pūrehi. yaṃ te rucyati taṃ khādehi.” § 50.9.43B5. yadi tāva ākāṃkṣati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ yaṃ rucyati, taṃ khāditavyaṃ § 18.4. Nom. sg. neut. imaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 21.55 § 17.7.15A2. mitakaṃ dātavyaṃ “iman tava khaṇḍaṃ, imaṃ tava khaṇḍan.” ti § 41.10.34A6. yathâpi imaṃ bhavatā Śāriputreṇa dakānakaṃ upacīrṇṇaṃ § 18.5. Acc. sg. neut. imaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 21.55 § 41.17.34B7. imaṃ hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ harāma § 41.18.35A2. imaṃ vayaṃ tava sarvvaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ demi § 18.6. Nom. sg. fem. für das neut. sg.; vgl. BHSG § 21.82; v. Hinüber 2001: § 382 § 43.1.38A2. kim iyaṃ bhikṣavo bhāṇḍaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ tiṣṭhati? § 18.7. Instr. sg. masc. imena; vgl. BHSG § 21.56 § 55.5.46B6. tena (Hs. imena; ☞ § 55.5[Text], Anm. 3) vārayitavyo, imena upaviśitavyaṃ § 18.8. Instr. sg. masc. iminā; vgl. BHSG § 21.57 (Mvu), Pā; vgl. Pkt. imiṇā § 18.22.16B1. iminā āgamayitavyaṃ tāva yāva utthita iti § 18.23.16B2. iminā ca parāṅmukhena bhavitavyaṃ. tasya câvakāśo dātavyaḥ § 19.9.18A2. iminā avakāśo dātavyo. tato ubhayehi praśvāso karttavyo § 53.7.45A7. tena sa vārayitavyo, iminā upaviśitavyaṃ 36  § 54.9.46A6. tena vāretavyaṃ, iminā upaviśitavyaṃ § 18.9. Dat. sg. masc. tāye; vgl. Aśoka-Inschriften: tāye ṭṭhāye (Kālsī), taye aṭhaye (Shāhbāzgaṛhī), taye athraye (Mānsehrā) (Bloch 1950: 107); vgl. auch Mv I 60.11. paścā tāye bodhaye § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye (Hs. tāpe) ārthāye bhavanti § 42.11.36B4. ya (pl. masc.?) tāye {t}ārthāyaỿva bhava<n>ti § 18.10. Abl. sg. kasya (“warum”) ☞ § 38.6, Anm. 4 § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ sahitānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? § 18.11. Gen. sg. masc. imasya; vgl. BHSG § 21.62 § 41.17.34B7. imasya dārakasya (= § 41.18.35A1) § 49.1.42A1. paśyati “mā imasya dātavyaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti § 18.12. Gen. sg. kisya (“wessen”); vgl. BHSG § 21.16 (Mvu) § 5.7.6B4. bhante kisya upāsako? kahiṃ upāsako? § 18.13. Gen. sg. kissa (“wessen; warum”); = Pā § 6.7.7B4. nâsti koci imaṃhi evaṃnāmako. kissa (od. kaḥ sa; Hs. kiḥ sa) upāsako? kasya bhaktaṃ? § 14.4.13A3. “kiṃ vayaṃ parityaktāḥ?” “kissa (“warum”) vayaṃ vasāmaḥ?” § 18.14. Gen. sg. masc. se; vgl. BHSG § 21.18; Scheller 1967; Emeneau 1988: 114; v. Hinüber 2001: § 385; Norman CP III 119 § 5.5.6B2. kiṃkarmmikā se mātāpitarau?; vgl. § 4.5.4B3. kiṃkarmmikā te mātāpitarau? § 6.13.8A3. kāko ca se akṣimalaṃ harantaṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A4. yathā icchati se mātā yathā icchati se pitā (vs) § 18.44.17A5. yo se (Hs. sau) dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, ... § 19.36.19A1. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena pṛṣṭhato sthātavyaṃ parāṅmukhena § 41.5.34A2. yatra yeva ayaṃ śramaṇako iryāpathaṃ vikopayiṣyati, tatraỿva se (Hs. śe) khaṭakaṃ dāsyāmi § 60.5.48B7. koci se (Hs. śe) pradeśo khajjati, hastā ca se ’kalpiyā bhavanti, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ § 18.15. Gen. sg. fem. aparasya ?; vgl. BHSG § 21.17, § 9.75 § 41.24.35A7. ekasyôpānahāye vaddhro pocchitavyo, aparasya vaddhro pocchitavyo Vgl. § 41.24.35A7. ekasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ (= § 41.29.35B5) § 18.16. Loc. sg. neut. imasmi; vgl. BHSG § 21.65. imasmiṃ § 4.18.5B7. imasmi āgāre (lies: ’gāre [m.c.]) nivasantu devatāḥ (vs) § 18.17. Loc. sg. masc. taṃhi; vgl. BHSG § 21.21 § 18.35.17A1. antamasato taṃhi pṛthivīpradeśe gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 18.18. Loc. sg. masc., neut. imaṃhi; vgl. BHSG § 21.66; vgl. Pā. imamhi § 4.7.4B4. koci imaṃhi itthannāmo nāma upāsako? (= § 5.7.6B3; ≒ § 6.7.7B4) § 6.7.7B4. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “nâsti koci imaṃhi evaṃnāmako ...” § 18.45.17A6. mā odhyāyeṃsu “ken’ imaṃ<hi> panthesmi antrāṇi vikīrṇṇāni?” § 19.37.19A1. kena imaṃhi (Hs. ime) panthe praśvāso kṛto rudhiraṃ viya cchanditaṃ? § 26.1.23A5. nicuḍavuntikāye imaṃhi taṇḍulā mārggitavyā § 18.19. Loc. sg. masc., neut. tahi, tahiṃ usw.; vgl. BHSG § 21.22 ⇒ kahiṃ, tahi, tahiṃ, yahiṃ § 18.20. Loc. sg. fem. tāye § 26.3.23A7. (yavāgū ...) pārṣikā bhavati, tāye parṣāye gantavyaṃ § 18.21. Loc. sg. fem. tasmiṃ; vgl. BHSG § 10.145; Geiger § 86; Günther 1942: 94 § 31.21.26A4. tahiṃ cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ (ein Genusfehler?) cīvarabisiyan thaviyāṇaṃ, ... § 18.22. Loc. sg. fem. katamāyāṃ § 4.5.4B3. katamaṃ deśaṃ gṛhaṃ? katamāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ? § 5.5.6B2. katamasmin deśe gṛhaṃ? katamāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ? § 18.23. Loc. sg. masc. katame § 6.5.7B2. katame deśe gṛhaṃ? kutomukhaṃ? katamāye rathyāye? § 18.24. Loc. sg. aparehiṃ (Entweder eine Kreuzung aus der Nominalendung -e und der Pronominal- endung -ahiṃ oder einfach eine Verschreibung von -ahiṃ) § 41.13.34B2. so śreṣṭhi aparehiṃ (für aparahiṃ?; Loc. sg. masc. neut.) jñātisāle (für 37  °śāle; Loc. sg. fem.; ein Genusfehler?) nimantritako gato varṣârātrikaṃ § 44.1.38B6. aparehiṃ (für aparahiṃ?; Loc. sg. masc.) vihārake saṃbahulā bhikṣū pratisaṃkrama<ṃ>ti § 18.25. Nom. pl. masc. ya; vgl. BHSG § 21.27 (in Versen); RgsGr §§ 28.17~18(in Versen) § 42.11.36B4. ya (pl. masc.?) tāye {t}ārthāyaỿva bhava<n>ti jentākavārikā vā ārāmikā vā, tehi jentāke santānikā śāṭayitavyā ...; vgl. § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye (Hs. tāpe) ārthāye (Hs. ārthāpe) bhavanti § 18.26. Nom. pl. masc. yā ? § 38.5.30A7. yā (lies: ye oder {yā}?) vṛddhatarakā yāvad vṛddhāntaṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti § 18.27. Acc. pl. masc. te; vgl. BHSG §§ 21.30~31 § 34.6.28B5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “ye kṣatriyā kuśalā bhavanti, prāg eva te nairayikā bhavantî”ti § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ...” § 36.6.29B6. te hi yūyaṃ niśrāya tathāgate brahmacaryaṃ caratha mahato oghasya niḥsaraṇārthaṃ § 18.28. Nom. pl. fem. ye ? § 4.15.5B2. ye (ein Genusfehler?) devatā santi abhiprasannā (vs); vgl. Mvu I 294.23. yā devatā santi abhiprasannā § 18.29. Nom. pl. fem. tāyo, anyāyo; vgl. BHSG § 9.89 § 17.8.15A2. anyehi tāvad yā bhitti ollāye gṛhītakāyo tāyo śāṭayitavyāyo § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... tāyo devasikaṃ cchorayitavyāyo vā, dahiya bhūyo vā thapayitavyāyo ... tāyo (Hs. tayo) cchoriya anyāyo sthāpayitavyāyo § 18.30. Nom. pl. fem. imāyo § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo ... bhittiyo pakkakheṭena pakkasiṃghāṇakena varttīhi lambantīhi? § 18.31. Acc. pl. fem. tāyo; vgl. BHSG § 9.90 § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... tāyo (Hs. tayo) cchoriya anyāyo sthāpayi- tavyāyo § 18.17.16A4. tāyo varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā varccakuṭīye prakṣipituṃ § 18.32. Acc. pl. fem. imāyo § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “ko imāyo dahiṣyatî”ti, tāyo cchoriya anyāyo sthāpayitavyāyo § 18.33. Instr. pl. masc., neut. tehi, katamehi usw.; vgl. BHSG § 21.37 § 14.15.13B3. na kṣamati tehi aśabdakarṇṇikāye āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantuṃ § 31.1.25A7. tehi dāṇi āyuṣmantehi § 41.14.34B3. tehi dāni kulaputrakehi otāro labdho § 31.1.25A7. tehi (= § 39.1.30B6, § 39.9.31A5, § 39.9.31A6, § 40.5.32B5, § 41.25.35B2, § 42.24.37B2 usw. usw.) § 12.9.11B4. katamehi pañcahi? § 17.6.15A1. anyehi (= § 17.8.15A2, § 17.10.15A4) § 39.3.31A2. nâpi kṣamati aparehi ... utkṣipituṃ § 18.34. Instr. pl. masc., neut. imehi; vgl. BHSG § 21.74 (Mvu) § 12.9.11B4. katamehi pañcahi? ... imehi pañcahi § 52.3.44B2. imehi śaknoma piṇḍacārikehi mukhe kavalaṃ prakṣipituṃ § 18.35. Gen. pl. masc. imeṣāṃ; vgl. BHSG § 21.77 (Mvu); Roth 1985: 132; Pā. imesaṃ; BLSF II.1, S. 537, Z. 6. imāṣāṃ (lies: imeṣāṃ) § 3.3.3B1. imeṣāṃ mottikā; § 6.2.7A6. imeṣāṃ muktikā (= § 8.2.8B6, § 10.2.10A3) § 19.2.17B5. kuto vā imeṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ?; § 20.6.19B3. kuto imeṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ? (=
 § 20.7.19B4, § 34.1.28B1, § 34.2.28B2, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 36.2.29B2 usw.) § 18.36. Loc. pl. masc., neut. tehi § 40.6.32B6. tehi bhājanehi prakṣipitavyā pāṭalāgulikā vā campakagulikā vā śarkarā vā § 41.17.34B7. yo (für ye?) etasya mātāpitā vā jñātikā vā tehi eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati § 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... tehi prajñaptehi upaviśaṃti 38  § 48.2.41A5. yūyaṃ ... <t>ehi prajñaptehi niṣīdatha § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ 19. Suffixe § 19.1. Mit dem Suffix aka erweiterte a-Stämme; vgl. § 44.1, Anm. 3; BHSG §§ 22.2f.; RgsGr §§ 30.2f. § 32.2.27A5. āyuṣman, evacciro tava āgatasya, na ca me pādavandako upasaṃkramasi § 44.1.38B6. aparo ca bhikṣuḥ virātre uśvāsakārako vā praśvāsakārako vā nirddhāvito bhavati; vgl. § 44.6.39A3. atha dāni bhikṣu virātrakāle uśvāsakāro vā praśvāsakāro vā nirddhāvati, ... § 19.2. Mit dem Suffix ka erweiterte Partizipien des Präsens; vgl. BHSG § 22.29 § 24.11.22A6. cchorantako § 4.13.5A6. bhuṃjantakena § 7.4.8B1. upasaṃpādentakena (Hs. °pādetuken°) § 10.4.10A4. utthantakena (Hs. °attakena) § 31.26.26B1. utthihantakena § 19.3. Mit dem Suffix ka erweiterte Partizipien des Präteritums; vgl. BHSG § 22.29; RgsGr § 30.11 kalahitaka~, prakīrṇṇaka~, kṛtaka~, khāditaka~, khāyitaka~, gṛhītaka~, ghaṭṭitaka~, cchinnaka~, cchoritaka~, jātaka~, parijñātaka~, prajñaptaka~, uddiṇṇaka~, oddiṇṇaka~, oddirṇṇaka~, oddriṇṇaka~, odriṇṇaka~, ondriṇṇaka~, vināśitaka~, a-nirmmāditaka~, patitaka~, *saṃpatitaka~, ghṛta-pītaka~, virecana-pītaka~, bhagnaka~, vibhagnaka~, nimantritaka~, mitaka~, muktaka~, mṛtaka~, mardditaka~, niyataka~, ropitaka~, ullaggaka~, pratisaṃlīnaka~, paluggaka~, praviṣṭaka~, śiṣṭaka~, ghaṭa-siktaka~, sopāpitaka~, thapitaka~, utthitaka~, du-tthāpitaka~, su-sthitaka~, śirā-viddhaka~, aśodhi<ta>ka~, niṣaṇṇaka~ 20. Inkongruenz im Bereich von Person und Numerus § 20.1. Vgl. BHSG §§ 25.4f.; Renou, Gr § 369h § 14.3.13A3. yo pratibalo vastuṃ, yadi utsahanti teṣāṃ āhāreṇa upastambhaṃ karttavyaṃ § 26.2, 23A6. te ... āha (vgl. BHSG § 25.25) § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako, so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā” § 39.22.32A1. atha dāni āhaṃsuḥ (3. pl. aor. für 3. sg; in der Funktion des Optativs; ☞ § 39.22[Text], Anm. 2) “nâsti mama ta{ṃ}hiṃ śraddhā, nâsti prasādo”, ... § 41.18.35A2. vayaṃ ... demi § 41.24.35B1. na kṣamati upānahāhi ārdrapādena (sg.) praveśayituṃ. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ adhvātā bhavanti (pl.), tato praveśayitavyo (sg.) § 41.25.35B2. yadi tāva koci bhikṣuḥ (sg.) pūrvvapraviṣṭo bhavati, āgamitavyaṃ yāva tehi (pl.) dhovitā pādā tti § 41.26.35B3. tena pādā dhovitā (pl.) bhavati (sg.; lies: bhava<ṃ>ti) upaviśitavyaṃ § 41.27.35B3. yadi tāva dakṣiṇānte pādadhovanikā (sg.) bhavaṃti (pl.; lies: bhava{ṃ}ti) § 41.32.35B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ svādhyāyaṃ karoti (sg.), pādehi dhovitehi caṃkrama{n}ti (pl.) § 42.4.36A7. yūyaṃ dāni āhaṃsu (3. pl. für 2. pl.; vgl. BHSG § 25.31) § 42.18.37A3. antevāsikehi vā sārddhevihārikehi (pl.) vā parikarmma karentena (sg.) na dāni apūrvvacarimaṃ ubhaya bāhā prasāretavyā § 42.19.37A3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati (sg.), na dāni kṣamati tehi (pl.) agni prajuhitvā ... prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi (pl.) § 42.21.37A6. atha dāni antevāsiko (sg.) sārddhevihāriko (sg.) vā āhaṃsu (pl.) “upādhyāyācāryā praviśatha. vayam (pl.) udakam upasthāpayiṣyāmi (sg.)” tti § 42.24.37B2. yasyâ(sg.)sti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tato āgacchantu (pl.) § 42.24.37B2. yasyâ(sg.)sti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tehi (pl.) gantavyaṃ § 42.25.37B2~3. atha dāni bhikṣu jarādurbbalā vā vyādhidurbbalā vā bhavanti (pl.), tasya (sg.) sārddhevihārikā bhavanti antevāsikā vā, tehi vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācāryā (pl.), 39  āgacchāhi (sg.) snāhi (sg.). ...”; vgl. § 49.5.42B1~2. atha dāni duścakṣuko bhavati (sg.) jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā paścācchramaṇena vaktavyaṃ: “upādhyāyo (sg.) vā ācāryo (sg.) vā ...” § 42.31.37B7. koci (sg.) paścāt praviśati (sg.) ‘ ... vayam (pl.) etaṃ praveśayiśyāma (pl.) ... tehi (pl.) praveśayitavyaṃ, mā ādīnavam utpādaye (sg.) § 43.5.38A4. yaṃ tatra bhavati (sg.; lies: bhava<ṃ>ti) dugdhaghaṭā (pl.) vā dadhighaṭā (pl.) vā vyañjanagolakā (pl.) vā, ... § 43.5.38A5. te (pl.) ... yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhavati (sg.; lies: °a<ṃ>ti), tato ... sthāpayitavyāḥ (pl.) § 44.1.38B6. saṃbahulā bhikṣū (pl.) pratisaṃkramati (sg.) (lies: °a<ṃ>ti) (vgl. BHSG § 25.25) § 45.6.39B7~40A1. te bhikṣū (pl.) uddhārakaṃ karttukāmā (pl.) bhavanti (pl.), upalepanaṃ vā saṃmārjanaṃ vā <karttukāmā> bhavati (sg.), snānaśāṭakaṃ vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakam vā nivāsiya snātukāmo (sg.) bhavati (sg.) ... § 50.2.43A3. so dāni tasya jalpati “āyuṣman, sādhu taṃ pātrakaṃ pi labhema (“wenn ich die Almosenschale zurückbekommen würde”; ☞ § 50.2, Anm. 1) § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohana{n}ti § 54.3.46A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ yaṣṭī vārentā yo yeva bhikṣu pracalāyati taṃ yeva kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhana<ṃ>ti, pāde vā āhana<ṃ>ti § 54.3.46A2. te dāni bhikṣu viheṭhiyantā ārāvaṃ muñca<ṃ>ti “āyuṣmaṃ, hato ’smi. hato ’smî”ti § 55.1.46B2. te dāni bhikṣu{ṃ} prahāṇasmiṃ yaṣṭiṃ vārayantā śītena kilamma<ṃ>ti usw.usw. 21. Personalendung § 21.1. 1. pers. pl. -āma; vgl. BHSG §§ 26.5~6; v. Hinüber 2001: § 422 § 12.12.11B7. kariṣyāma (= § 34.1.28A7, § 35.1.28B7, § 35.2.29A1, § 36.1.29A7, § 50.10.43B7); vgl. § 35.1.28B7. kariṣyāmo § 12.13.12A1. pratisaṃskariṣyāma § 1.1.1B2. gacchāma. samagrasya saṃghasya pādāni vandiṣyāma. deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayiṣyāma § 42.25.37B3. dāsyāma (Hs. vāsyāma) § 42.3.36A5. marāma § 35.3.29A3. allīyāma § 36.3.29B3. allīyāma mā āllīyāmo? usw. 22. Optativ § 22.1. Opt. 3. sg. -e; vgl. BHSG § 29.12 § 11.13.11A3. sāṃghikaṃ śayanāsanaṃ ... uparito bhuṃjitavyaṃ, yathā nāśaṃ na gacche § 18.18.16A6. yathā uccārapraśrāvakheṭasiṃghāṇakaṃ sarvvaṃ tahiṃ nigacche § 31.4.25B4. mā dāni adarśanena parijāne (< √jñā) “hṛtaṃ, hṛtaṃ me pātracīvaram” § 18.11.16A1. yathā jñāye (Passiv) “saprāṇakê”ty abhijñānaṃ § 40.12.33A5. yathā jñāye (Passiv) “akalpiyan” ti § 4.18.5B7. yā tatra devatā asyā tāsāṃ dakṣiṇām ādiśe (vs) § 32.10.27B4. yathā na duḥkhāpiye (Passiv) pādehi vandayantehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs) § 19.37.19A1. mā jano odhyāye “kena imaṃhi panthe praśvāso kṛto ...?” § 42.31.37B7. mā ādīnavam utpādaye § 39.20.31B7. anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparodho vā bhave § 41.16.34B6. mā atra pānīyasmiṃ tṛṇo vā bhave prāṇako vā ... § 41.18.35A2. yadi yuṣmākaṃ anukūlaṃ bhave § 4.15.5B1. aṃguṣṭhasnehena yāpaye saptarātraṃ (vs) § 22.2. Opt. 3. sg. -i; vgl. BHSG § 29.14 40  § 4.19.6A2. mā pramajji jinaśāsane (vs) § 22.3. Opt. 3. pl. -eṃsu, -eṃsuḥ; vgl. BHSG § 29.18 (Die in BHSG angeführten Formen auf -etsu gibt es nicht; vgl. Brough 1996: 137) § 43.9.38A7. yathā na <khā>dyeṃsu § 31.5.25B5. yathā paśyitvā prasādena avivarjitā gaccheṃsu § 31.34.27A1. yadi keci āgantukā āgaccheṃsu § 25.15.23A3. yathā na ghaṭṭeṃsu § 41.22.35A6. mā prāṇakā jāyeṃsu § 4.13.5A6. mā h’ eva otrapeṃsu § 18.45.17A6. mā odhyāyeṃsu § 19.21.18B1. mā anye bhikṣū na paśyeṃsu § 31.10.25B7. mā paśyeṃsu (“denken”) (= § 51.6.44A2) § 19.25.18B3. mā phuṭṭeṃsu § 19.21.18B1. mā naṃ ḍhossā vā viḍā vā vātaputrā vā bhuṃjeṃsu § 4.10.5A2. anekāyo tatra garbharūpāṇi sopāpitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ, kāṃsabhājanāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ; § 5.9.6B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi dārakadārikā vā sovāpitā bhaveṃsu; § 6.9.7B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi garbharūpā sovāpitāni bhaveṃsu, bhājanakāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ § 39.20.31B7. corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ § 40.6.32B7. yathā sugandhā bhaveṃsu § 41.22.35A6. mā prāṇakā jāyeṃsu nīlikāya vā bhaveṃsu § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi ... viheṭhanābhiprāyā nimantrayeṃsu (≒ § 6.6.7B4) § 53.17.45B6. “mā navakā bhikṣu sahasā viprakaṭa utthiheṃsu (Hs. °haṃsna)” tti § 14.3.13A3. yathā na vihanyeṃsu § 57.5.47B3. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “anekāyo upānahikāyo mūṣikena vā khajjeṃsu ...” § 22.4. Opt. 2. sg. -esi; vgl. BHSG §§ 29.20~21 § 1.9.2A1. so adhyeṣitavyo “tvaṃ śalākāṃ vāresi (Hs. cāreṣi)” “tvaṃ śalākāṃ praticchesi” “tvaṃ prātimokṣasūtram uddiśesi (Hs. °eṣi)” “tvaṃ bhāṣesi” “tvaṃ parikathāṃ karesi” “tvaṃ dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśesi” (≒ § 3.8.3B7); vgl. § 2.7.2B7. so adhyeṣitavyo “tvaṃ śalākāṃ vārayiṣyasi” “tvaṃ praticcheṣyasi” yāva “tvaṃ parikathāṃ kārayesî(Hs. °yasî)”ti § 1.13.2A6. tato adhyeṣitavyaṃ “tvaṃ bhāṣayesî”ti; vgl. § 2.11.3A5. tvayā bhāṣitavyaṃ tvayā bhāṣitavyaṃ § 31.34.27A1. yadi keci āgantukā āgaccheṃsu, tato dvāraṃ dadesi § 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi § 41.13.34B3. putra dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsesi § 42.16.37A2. asukasya vā asukasya vā parikarmma kuryesi § 49.1.41B6. mā kasyaci ācikṣesi § 59.5.48B2. ānantarikasya vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, mama piṇḍapātam ukkaḍḍhesi”; vgl. § 58.4.48A4. “āyuṣman, mama tāva piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhê”ti § 60.5.48B7. ānantarikasya pātraṃ dātavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mama piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍhesi” § 22.5. Opt. 3. sg. -eya; vgl. BHSG § 29.28 § 53.4.45A4. gaccheya (= § 57.5.47B3) § 49.5.42B1. āgaccheya § 42.12.36B6. dahyeya § 18.4.15B3. nipateya § 25.4.22B3. bhaṃjeya; § 25.5.22B3. bhañjeya (Hs. °aya) § 6.6.7B3. bhaveya (= § 18.30.16B5, § 18.40.17A3, § 19.14.18A4, § 19.32.18B6, § 22.4.21A1, § 24.4.22A2, § 39.8.31A5, § 40.5.32B6 usw.) § 41.20.35A4. muṃceya § 22.6. Opt. 3. sg. -eyā; vgl. BHSG § 29.28 § 14.4.13A4. khajjeyā § 13.15.12B6. khādyeyā § 19.26.18B4. gaccheyā 41  § 19.16.18A5. cchoreyā § 18.42.17A4. deyā § 18.51.17B1. nipateyā § 18.13.16A2. bhaveyā § 4.18.5B7. bhojeyā (vs) § 8.11.9A7. utpadyeyā § 18.48.17A7. v<y>ābaheyā § 4.17.5B5. parivarjeyā (vs) § 4.17.5B5. vareyā (Hs. car°) (vs) § 18.47.17A7. hanyeyā (= § 19.39.19A2) § 22.7. Opt. 3. pl. -eya; vgl. BHSG § 29.29 (nur im Vers!) § 43.7.38A6. khajjeya § 22.8. Opt. 3. sg. -eyyā; vgl. BHSG § 29.30 § 62.2.49B6. ko (Hs. kho) vātaṃ na iccheyyā? § 53.5.45A5. mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā § 18.46.17A6. mā sarvvasārthaṃ gandhena vyābaheyyā § 19.17.18A6. sarvvasaṃghasya mā gandhena vyābaheyyā § 59.4.48B1. yathā anantarikasya na vyābaheyyā § 59.5.48B2. yathā ānantarikasya na vyābaheyyā § 62.11.50A7. mā gandhena vyābaheyyā § 62.12.50B1. yathā sārthaṃ gandhena na vyābaheyyā § 13.17.12B7. vihāro ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ apāvuritavyo yathā vātaṃ labheyyā § 22.9. Opt. 3. sg. -eyaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 29.31; Karashima 2003: 161, Anm. 37 und 46 über nirīkṣayeyam in SP(O) und SP(F); BLSF II.1, S. 514, Or.15010/165 recto f. [kkrī]ḍyeyaṃ § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi jātakaṃ bhaveyaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya, ... § 18.43.17A5. na dāni tahiṃ atiniḥśabdapradeśe upaveṣṭavyaṃ, mā uśśaṃkito bhaveyaṃ § 22.10. Opt. 3. sg. asyā von √as; vgl. BHSG § 29.41 § 4.17.5B5. tām eva bhāryāṃ vareyā yâsyā (Hs. yo asyā) śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) § 22.11. Opt. 3. pl. asyā von √as; vgl. BHSG § 29.40 § 4.18.5B7. yā tatra devatā asyā tāsāṃ dakṣiṇām ādiśe (vs) 23. Imperativ § 23.1. Impv. 2. sg. -ehi; vgl. BHSG § 30.3 § 8.7.9A5. kārehi § 32.11.27B5. prakṣālehi § 50.9.43B5. khādehi § 48.7.41B2. prajñapehi § 32.11.27B5. nirmmādehi § 50.1.43A2. ānehi § 7.7.8B5. saṃpādehi § 50.9.43B5. pūrehi § 39.10.31A7. nimantrehi (= § 39.22.32A1) § 54.9.46A6. vārehi (Hs. cār°) (= § 55.5.46B6) § 55.5.46B6. utthehi § 23.2. Impv. 2. sg. -ihi; vgl. BHSG § 30.4 § 41.29.35B6. so vaktavyo “udakaṃ āsiñcihi” tti § 23.3. Impv. 2. sg. -āhi; vgl. BHSG § 30.6; v. Hinüber 2001: § 427 § 31.34.27A1. dvārakoṣṭhakasya upari āsāhi § 32.12.27B6. vaktavyaṃ “gacchāhi” tti § 28.6.24A4. mā caṃkramāhi § 38.6.30B1. mā jalpāhi (= § 38.6.30B2) § 4.6.4B3. jānāhi (vgl. BHSG § 28.63) (= § 5.6.6B3) § 49.9.43A1. dakṣiṇām ādiśāhi § 40.9.33A2. vaidyo āha “bhante, gotrasthena pānīyena akṣiṇī dhovāhi” tti 42  § 18.53.17B3. pibāhi; § 41.15.34B6. senāpati pibāhi § 49.1.41B6. pi<t>yako bhavāhi, mātulako bhavāhi (“Möget ihr auch mein Onkel väterlicherseits oder mein Onkel mütterlicherseits sein, ...”) § 52.7.44B6. āha “upādhyāyācārya, bhuñjāhi” § 52.6.44B4. āha “upādhyāyācārya, paribhuṃjāhi” tti § 52.7.44B6. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, paribhu<ṃ>jāhi tvaṃ § 38.3.30A6. vaktavyaṃ “mā allīyāhi” tti § 32.11.27B5. viśramāhi § 42.25.37B3. upādhyāyācāryā, āgacchāhi snāhi § 23.4. Impv. 2. sg. -ohi; vgl. BHSG § 30.9 § 8.11.9B1. atha dāni bhadrako bhavati guṇavāṃ śikṣākāmo, vaktavyaṃ “karohi” § 52.6.44B6. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, karohi dhūmaṃ. mā ca punaḥ āmiṣacakṣuḥ <deśesi>.” § 23.5. Impv. 2. sg. -ā; vgl. BHSG § 30.11 § 31.19.26A3. dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā § 23.6. Impv. 2. pl. -tha; vgl. BHSG §§ 26.12f.; Nobel 1953: 11~12; Salomon 1981: 96; v. Hinüber 2001: § 430 § 39.14.31B2. ukaḍḍhatha § 49.1.41B7. karetha § 30.4.25A1. kalpetha § 31.28.26B3. prakṣāletha (Hs. prakkāl°) § 39.7.31A4. prakṣipatha § 49.1.41B7. khādatha § 31.7.25B5. gacchatha (= § 42.25.37B3) § 39.9.31A6. āgacchatha § 31.27.26B2. āgametha § 41.14.34B4. gṛhṇatha (= § 50.5.43A7) § 39.26.32A4. parigṛhṇatha § 48.5.41A7. prajñapetha (= § 53.14.45B4) § 19.42.19A3. detha (= § 39.2.31A1, § 42.2.36A3, § 50.5.43A7 usw.) § 12.12.11B7. uddiśatha § 31.7.25B5. upadahatha (< √dhā) § 41.1.33B3. dhovatha § 31.28.26B3. nirmmādetha § 42.4.36A7. upanetha § 48.2.41A6. paśyatha § 18.53.17B2. pāyetha § 31.28.26B3. pibatha § 49.1.41B7. bhakṣatha § 39.9.31A5. ārocetha § 34.3.28B3. allīyatha (Hs. allīpa°) (= § 34.3.28B4, § 35.3.29A3); § 36.3.29B3. āllīyatha (Hs. āllīpa°) § 31.27.26B2. praviśatha (= § 31.30.26B5, § 31.32.26B6, § 42.21.37A6) § 6.3.7A6. śabdāpayatha (= § 40.2.32B3, § 41.2.33B4 et passim) § 31.28.26B3. viśramatha § 42.3.36A5. osaratha § 39.1.30B6. āhanatha § 39.12.31B1. āhanetha (= § 39.13.31B1) § 39.9.31A6. vihariṣyatha § 23.7. Impv. 3. pl. -ntā ; < Skt. -ntām § 4.15.5B1. kākā ca <se> akṣimalaṃ harantā (vs) § 23.8. Impv. 3. pl. -ntaṃ; < Skt. -ntām § 6.13.8A3. śunakhā śṛgā<lā> c’ enaṃ laṃghayantaṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A3. kāko ca se akṣimalaṃ harantaṃ (vs) 43  24. Futur § 24.1. Futur, das eine vergangene Handlung bezeichnet; vgl. § 42.5, Anm. 2 § 42.5.36B1. tatra nāma yūyaṃ idam evaṃrūpaṃ pāpakarmmam akuśalan dharmmam adhyācariṣyatha § 24.2. Fut. 2. sg. -eṣyasi; vgl. BHSG § 31.9 § 2.7.2B7. tvaṃ praticcheṣyasi § 24.3. Fut. 1. sg. -aṃ; vgl. BHSG §§ 31.30f.; v. Hinüber 2001: §§ 420, 464; Oberlies 2001: 244 § 27.2.23B5. aparo yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo “cittaṃ samādhayiṣyan” ti § 31.22.26A5. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman vandiṣyan” ti § 32.12.27B6. atha dāni gantukāmo bhavati, āha “anyatra gamiṣyan” ti, ... § 49.1.41B7. āha: “ācikṣiṣyaṃ.” so dāni āha: “āgacchâhaṃ tava śekhayiṣyaṃ (Hs. śeṣayiṣyaṃ).” § 49.7.42B4. āgamiṣyaṃ ahaṃ yena vā tena <vā?> sārddhaṃ § 50.9.43B5. āyuṣman, bhuṃja tvaṃ. nâhaṃ bhuṃjiṣyaṃ § 52.7.44B6. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, paribhuṃjāhi tvaṃ. nâhaṃ paribhuñjiṣyan” ti § 53.8.45A7. “āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣyan (Hs. cār°)” ti (= § 53.9.45B1, § 55.8.47A1; ≒ § 55.7.47A1) § 53.14.45B4. <vaktavyaṃ> “āyuṣmanto, prajñapetha śayyāyo. dīpaṃ gopayiṣyan” ti § 24.4. Fut. 1. sg. -a; vgl. BHSG § 31.33 § 54.12.46A7. vaktavyaṃ “āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣya<ṃ> (Hs. cār°).” tena yeva yaṣṭī vāretavyaṃ § 24.5. Fut. 3. sg. -hiti; vgl. Pischel § 533, Geiger § 153, v. Hinüber 2001: § 467f. § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti. yadi tāva tantuka nikṣipiyāṇaṃ uttheti, jānitavyaṃ “dāhiti eṣā” tti. atha dāni bhūyo prasārayati, jānitavyaṃ “na dāhiti eṣā” tti; vgl. § 51.7. 44A3. “dāsyati eṣā.” ... “na eṣā dāsyati” (≒ § 51.8.44A4) § 24.6. Fut. 3. sg. -heti: kāheti; Futur von √kṛ; mi. Futur kāh + mi. Kausativendung -eti; mit nicht- kausativer Bedeutung § 23.6.4.21B4. pādām vā dhovati, mukham vā dhovati, hastam vā nirmmādayati, “rajonigrahaṃ kāheti” tti, anāpattiḥ 25. Aorist § 25.1. Aor. 3. pl. -iṃsu; vgl. BHSG § 32.38 § 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... na kṣamati ātape śoṣayituṃ, mā phuṭṭiṃsu tti § 25.2. Aor. 3. sg. -si; vgl. BHSG §§ 32.69f. § 3.5.3B2. (’)bhūṣi § 25.3. Aor. 3. sg. -e; vgl. BHSG §§ 32.87f. § 25.1.22B1. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ so bhikṣuḥ bhagavato ārocaye § 27.1.23B4. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ so yogācāro bhagavato ārocaye (= § 28.1.24A2) § 25.4. Aor. 3. pl. -eṃsu, -eṃsuḥ; vgl. BHSG §§ 32.95f. § 1.2.1B3. ārocayeṃsu (= § 4.2.4A7, § 5.2.6A6, § 6.2.7A6, § 7.1.8A7, § 20.6.19B3, § 20.9.19B5, § 22.1.20B7, § 40.1.32B3, § 45.1.39B4, § 46.1.40A4, § 47.1.40B4, § 49.1.42A4 usw.) § 41.1.33B4. ārocayeṃsuḥ (= § 42.3.36A6, § 44.1.39A1, § 58.1.48A2) § 25.5. Aorist im Sinne eines Optativs; vgl. BHSG §§ 32.119f.; Günther 1942: 198 § 39.22.32A1. atha dāni āhaṃsuḥ (3. pl. aor. für 3. sg.) “nâsti mama ta{ṃ}hiṃ śraddhā, nâsti prasādo”, ... § 39.26.32A3. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “ahaṃ pi ahaṃ pi” tti, ... 26. Perfekt § 26.1. āhaṃsu, āhaṃsuḥ; vgl. BHSG §§ 33.8f.; Pischel: § 518; Geiger § 171; Bechert 1953: 66; Bloch 1965: 231 āhaṃsu : § 1.1.1B1, § 1.11.2A4, § 3.1.3A6, § 41.2.33B6, § 42.4.36A7, § 45.2.39B5, § 46.2.40A5, § 47.2.40B5, § 48.2.41A6 et passim āhaṃsuḥ : § 39.2.31A1, § 40.2.32B4 44  27. Partizip des Präsens § 27.1. Partizip des Mediums auf -māṇa § 32.3.27A6. nâpi kṣamati pādehi vandiyamāṇehi na pratisaṃmodituṃ § 41.13.34B3. rakṣamāṇo § 62.1.49B2. avasthāpayamāṇo (Kaus. mit medialer Endung) 28. Gerundivum § 28.1. Aus Präsensstämmen gebildete Gerundivums; vgl. BHSG § 34.20 § 2.8.3A1. praticchitavyā (= § 26.5.23B1) § 1.8.1B7. okiritavyāyo (= § 2.6.2B6); § 3.7.3B6. okiritavyā § 47.9.41A2. atikrāmitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B6. pratyudgacchitavyaṃ § 1.10.2A2. gṛhṇitavya~ (= § 4.11.5A4, § 19.42.19A3, § 25.11.22B7, § 26.7.23B1, § 50.6.43B2 usw.) § 20.11.19B6. cchinditavyaṃ § 1.5.1B4. jānitavya~ (= § 1.9.1B7, § 1.11.2A4, § 2.7.2B6, § 42.13.36B6, § 42.21.37A5, § 42.24.37B1, § 42.28.37B5, § 48.4.41A7 et passim) § 39.7.31A4. nidhyāyitavyaṃ § 1.4.1B4. pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 7.1.8A6 et passim) § 2.9.3A1. pṛcchitavyāḥ § 4.13.5A6. bhuñjitavya~ (= § 11.13.11A3, § 39.8.31A5, § 39.13.31B2 usw.) § 11.12.11A3. paribhuñjitavya~ (= § 26.10. 23B3, § 44.6.39A5, § 50.7.43B4 usw.) § 22.3.21A1. muñcitavyaṃ § 26.6.23B1. omuñcitavyā § 1.11.2A3. anumodāpayitavyaṃ; § 2.9.3A2. anumodāpayitavyo § 2.5.2B5. ārocayitavyaṃ § 34.3.28B4. allīyitavyaṃ (Hs. allīpi°) (= § 35.3.29A3, § 36.3.29B3) § 45.3.39B5. nivāsayitavyaṃ § 41.24.35B1. praveśayitavya~ (= § 42.27.37B4, § 42.31.37B6) § 3.7.3B5. siñcitavyaṃ § 1.8.1B7. siñcāpayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyo) sanmārjayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyo) § 2.6.2B6. siñcāpayitavyaṃ sanmārjayitavyaṃ § 44.11.39B1. sīvitavyaṃ § 3.5.3B3. saṃsārayitavyaṃ § 18.50.17B1. utthihitavyaṃ § 19.22.18B2. thapayitavyo (= § 20.11.19B6) § 39.8.31A5. sthapayitavya~ (= § 43.9.38A7, § 46.5.40B1) § 43.4.38A4. sthāpayitavya~ (= § 43.5.38A5, § 43.10.38A7, § 43.15.38B4, § 43.16.38B5, § 44.7.39A6 usw.) § 1.11.2A3. pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ (= § 2.9.3A2) § 42.29.37B6. snāyitavyaṃ (= § 42.30.37B6) § 47.8.41A1. prasphoṭayitavyaṃ et passim § 28.2. Gerundivum auf -etavya; vgl. BHSG § 34.21 § 4.13.5A7. āgametavyaṃ (= § 6.11.8A2) § 8.5.9A2. grahetavyaṃ (= § 42.21.37A5) § 54.9.46A5. saṃghaṭṭetavyo § 54.13.46B1. cintetavyaṃ § 18.6.15B4. cchādetavyaṃ § 4.13.5A6. anujānetavyaṃ § 30.5.25A3. prajñapetavyā § 29.5.24B3. pithetavyaṃ § 8.9.9A6. dhovetavyāni § 13.17.12B7. dhūpetavyo 45  § 14.14.13B3. samudānetavyaṃ § 31.4.25B3. anupāletavyo § 12.8.11B4. pūretavya~ (= § 13.7.12B2, § 13.8.12B2, § 50.6.43B1) § 8.12.9B1. mrakṣetavyā § 13.10.12B3. rañjetavyaṃ § 53.14.45B4. nirvvāpetavyo (Hs. °vyā) § 8.7.9A4. vāretavyo; § 54.10.46A6. vāretavya~ (Hs. cār°) (= § 54.12.46A7, § 54.13. 46A7, 46B1, § 54.15.46B1) § 42.11.36B5. sajjetavyā § 8.8.9A6. pratiśāmetavyaṃ § 43.12.38B1. pratisāmetavyaṃ (= § 8.8.9A6) § 42.11.36B5. sejjetavyaṃ § 8.8.9A6. śodhetavyaṃ § 13.11.12B4. thapetavya~ (= § 25.9.22B5, § 25.10.22B6) § 54.11.46A6. utthapetavya~ § 8.6.9A3. sthapetavya~ (§ 25.10.22B6, § 43.7.38A6, § 43.8.38A6, § 43.10.38A7, § 43.16.38B4, § 43.16.38B5, § 44.4.39A2, § 53.4.45A4, § 53.5.45A5 usw.) § 14.17.13B5. sthāpetavya~ (= § 18.7.15B5, § 40.5.32B6, § 42.31.37B7, § 43.16.38B4, § 43.16.38B5, § 53.19.45B7 usw.) § 53.8.45A7. upasthapetavyo § 8.6.9A3. snāpetavyo § 18.4.15B2. ohayiyāpetavyā 29. Absolutiv § 29.1. Absolutiv auf -tvā; vgl. BHSG § 35.8 § 25.15.23A2. pratyavekṣitvā § 26.6.23B1. adhyeṣitvā (= § 50.2.43A5, § 50.3.43A5) § 34.5.28B4. upasaṃkramitvā (= § 35.5.29A4) § 47.5.40B7. prakṣālitvā (= § 50.6.43B2) § 62.9.50A5. utkṣipitvā (= § 62.10.50A6) § 45.2.39B4. nikṣipitvā (= § 45.2.39B5, § 46.1.40A4, § 46.2.40A5, § 46.5.40A7) § 57.7.47B5. nikkhāsitvā § 28.1.24A1. āgatvā § 42.15.36B7. praticchāditvā § 56.1.47A2. prajñapayitvā (= § 57.7.47B5) § 8.5.8B7~9A1. uddiśitvā § 13.17.12B7. pithitvā (= § 61.4.49A4) § 42.19.37A4. pihitvā § 41.6.34A3. upanāmayitvā § 50.3.43A5. ānayitvā § 41.9.34A5. niṣpīḍitvā § 42.16.37A2. an-āpṛcchitvā § 42.16.37A1. āpṛcchitvā § 8.5.9A1. pratipṛcchitvā § 47.5.40B7. ābandhitvā § 39.1.30B5. abhisambhāvayitvā (= § 62.1.49B1) § 55.6.46B7. ābhāsayitvā (Hs. abhāmay°) § 31.9.25B7. āmantrayitvā (Hs. āmandha°); § 62.9.50A5. āmantrayitvā § 40.10.33A4. nirmmādayitvā = § 40.14.33A6 § 31.15.26A1. omuñcitvā § 2.9.3A2. udyojayitavyā § 43.7.38A6. ollapitvā (= § 43.9.38A7) § 41.4.33B7. nivāsayitvā (= § 45.6.40A1) § 53.13.45B3. nirvvāpayitvā 46  § 42.16.37A1. praviśitvā (= § 57.4.47B3) § 42.19.37A3. praveśayitvā (Hs. praviśiyitvā) § 41.22.35A6. prāvaritvā (= § 45.4.39B6 [Hs. pravāritvā], § 47.5.40B7, § 47.6.40B7 et passim) § 61.4.49A3. vivaritvā (= § 62.6.50A2, § 62.12.50A7) § 3.5.3B2. āvuṇitvā (Hs. āvraṇitvā) § 41.9.34A5. āvarjayitvā (= § 62.1.49B3) § 62.12.50A7. udvarttitvā § 61.3.49A3. osaritvā (= § 62.5.50A2) § 22.6.21A3. osarayitvā § 30.4.25A2. prasārayitvā § 55.5.46B6. āsthapayitvā § 24.9.22A6. utthitvā (= § 45.4.39B5, § 56.4.47A5) § 29.4.24B2. utthipitvā (vermutlich für *utthihitvā) § 57.8.47B6. utthapitvā § 41.22.35A6. uṣṭhapayitvā § 57.6.47B4. upasthapitvā § 30.4.25A2. pratiṣṭhāpayitvā § 41.22.35A5. prasphoṭitvā (= § 41.24.35A7, § 47.5.40B7) § 46.5.40B1. prasphoṭayitvā (= § 56.1.47A2) § 43.15.38B3. ujjhitvā § 62.1.49B3. abhyuddharitvā § 4.20.6A3. abhisāharitvā (vs) § 11.5.10B6. sāharitvā (= § 41.22.35A6, § 42.14.36B7, § 43.9.38A7, § 43.15.38B4, § 44.5.39A2, § 46.5.40B1, § 56.1.47A3, § 56.6.47A7) § 2.9.3A2. sampraharṣayitvā § 29.2. Absolutiv, das vom Präsensstamm gebildet ist; vgl. BHSG § 35.12 § 50.7.43B3. gacchitvā § 4.7.4B4. gacchiya (= § 34.2.28B2, § 41.2.33B5, § 42.2.36A2, § 59.7.48B4, § 60.7. 49A1§ 62.2.49B5) § 20.1.19A5. āgacchiya (= § 4.7.4B5, § 27.1.23B4, § 34.1.28B1, § 27.2.23B5 usw.) § 31.4.25B3. gṛhṇitvā (= § 31.15.26A1) § 31.5.25B4. paśyitvā § 31.7.25B6. obandhiya § 31.11.25B7. saṃvibhajitvā § 4.13.5A6. bhuñjitvā § 62.11.50A7. muñcitvā § 31.15.26A1. omuñcitvā § 34.4.28B4. omuṃciya § 21.9.20B5. upalimpiya (= § 25.10.22B6) § 19.13.18A4. upaviśiya § 4.13.5A6. utthihiya § 29.3. Absolutiv auf -īya; vgl. BHSG § 35.18 § 25.3.22B2. karīya (= § 29.7.24B4~5) § 41.6.34A3. pūrīya § 42.2.36A2. prajvālīya § 42.20.37A4. minīya § 21.3.20B1. astarīya (= § 21.6.20B4) § 29.4. Absolutiv auf -etvā; vgl. BHSG § 35.25 § 31.9.25B7. prakṣāletvā § 3.5.3B3. nikhanetvā § 13.15.12B6. mocetvā (= § 14.4.13A4) § 41.22.35A6. āvarjetvā (Hs. av°) § 31.9.25B7. prāvaretvā 47 § 29.5. Absolutiv auf -tvāna, -itvāna; vgl. BHSG §§ 35.29f. § 4.17.5B5. ubhau puṇyāni kṛtvāna samaśīlavratā ubhau (vs) § 29.6. Absolutiv auf -etvāna; vgl. BHSG § 35.34 § 43.15.38B3. raṃjetvāna § 29.7. Absolutiv auf -iya; vgl. BHSG § 35.42f. § 14.9.13A7. kariya (= § 18.25.16B3, § 19.35.18B7, § 29.7.24B4, § 35.7.29A6, § 37.6. 30A4, § 40.1.32B2, § 40.2.32B4, § 40.4.32B5, § 40.5.32B6, § 40.13.33A5, § 41.1. 33B3, § 41.2.33B5, § 41.6.34A3, § 41.8.34A4, § 41.15.34B5, § 41.29.35B5, § 42.31. 38A1, § 43.4.38A4, § 43.7.38A6, § 43.8.38A6, § 43.15.38B3, § 44.4.39A2 usw.) § 44.4.39A2. kāriya § 43.5.38A5. kārāpayiya; § 43.6.38A5. kārāpiya § 53.11.45B2. okaḍḍhiya § 20.11.19B6. khādiya (= § 20.16.20A3) § 4.7.4B4. gacchiya (= § 34.2.28B2, § 41.2.33B5, § 42.2.36A2, § 59.7.48B4, § 60.7. 49A1, § 62.2.49B5) § 6.7.7B5. gṛhṇiya (= § 8.6.9A2, § 10.1.10A3, § 26.4.23A7, § 40.16.33B1, § 41.8.34A4 usw.) § 40.4.32B5. ghaṭṭiya § 4.20.6A3. cariya (lies: cāriya [m.c.]) (vs) § 31.31.26B5. cariya (Hs. variya) § 2.1.2B2. cchoriya (= § 1.1.1B2 [Hs. cchoraya]; § 3.1.3A7, § 4.1.4A6, § 18.17.16A5, § 24.4.22A2, § 41.2.33B5, § 41.1.33B3 [Hs. sthāriya], § 41.9.34A5, § 42.2.36A3) § 8.6.9A3. dapiya (= § 9.1.9B4) § 9.6.10A2. dadiya (= § 11.11.11A2, § 11.12.11A3); vgl. § 9.3.9B7. dadiyaṃ § 18.17.16A5. dahiya § 8.5.9A1. dhoviya (= § 12.7.11B4, § 19.5.17B6, § 26.4.23A7, § 41.2.33B5, § 41.9.34A5, § 41.9.34A5, § 41.29.35B6, § 42.31.37B7, § 44.6.39A5, § 57.11.47B7 usw.) § 4.13.5A6. paśyiya (= § 4.13.5A7, § 5.11.7A2, § 41.10.34A6) § 41.18.35A1. pibiya § 41.24.35B1. pīḍiya (= § 41.29.35B6) § 41.15.34B5. pūriya § 5.5.6B2. pṛcchiya § 57.3.47B2. pocchiya § 21.6.20B4. bandhiya (= § 31.33.26B7, § 31.34.27A1) § 20.2.19A7. bhaṃjiya § 49.7.42B4. bhuñjiya § 41.14.34B4. mārggiya § 44.6.39A4. muṃciya § 31.25.26A7. mrakṣiya § 42.20.37A5. vaṭṭiya (Hs. paṭṭiya); § 59.3.48A7. vaṭṭiya § 39.16.31B4. vandiya (= § 39.18.31B6, § 39.21.32A1, § 44.5.39A3) § 41.18.35A1. śabdāpiya; § 43.4.38A4. śabdāviya § 13.7.12B2. śāṭiya § 42.31.37B7. siñciya § 35.4.29A4. sthapiya § 50.1.43A2. thapiya § 29.8. Absolutiv auf -iyaṃ; vgl. Karashima 2002a: § 21.2. abhiruhyaṃ § 9.3.9B7. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ niśrayaṃ dadiyaṃ antevāsikāṃ naỿva ovadatha nânuśāsatha § 11.11.11A2. na kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ sāṃghikaṃ prāvariyaṃ dīrghaca<ṃ>kramaṃ caṃkramituṃ § 29.9. Absolutiv auf -iyāna; vgl. BHSG §§ 35.45f., Geiger § 214, Oberlies 2001: 265, 267; S. 558f. in diesem Band § 2.11.3A5. vītināmiyāna (Hs. vītināmiya | na); § 3.12.4A4. vītināmiyāna § 29.10. Absolutiv auf -iyāṇa; vgl. AMg. -iyāṇa (Pischel § 592); S. 558f. in diesem Band 48  § 49.7.42B4. aṇṭhiyāṇa § 6.9.7B7. pratyavekṣiyāṇa § 14.1.13A1. kariyāṇa (= § 17.12.15A7, § 18.45.17A6, § 19.15.18A4, § 19.16.18A6, § 19.36.19A1); § 19.33.18B6. kariyāṇa{{ṃ}} § 37.2.30A1. gacchiyāṇa § 4.2.4A6. āgacchiyāṇa (= § 8.6.9A3, § 14.1.13A2, § 35.2.29A2) § 18.35.16B7. cchoḍiyāṇa § 24.7.22A4. cchoriyāṇa § 9.2.9B6. dadiyāṇa § 8.4.8B7. apaduriyāṇa § 1.2.1B2. uddeśiyāṇa § 22.3.21A1. nidhāpiyāṇa § 20.16.20A3. pāṭiyāna § 14.10.13B1. anuparindiyāṇa § 22.2.21A1. ā{ṃ}pīḍiyāṇa § 22.3.21A1. bandhiyāṇa § 4.2.4A6. bhuṃjiyāṇa (= § 4.13.5A6) § 2.8.3A1. nirmmādiyāṇa (= § 3.9.4A1, § 31.21.26A5) § 18.28.16B4. āmantriyāṇa § 2.8.3A1. omuñciyāṇa § 4.10.5A2. parā{ṃ}mṛśiyāṇa § 40.1.32B2. utthiyāṇa § 41.19.35A3. śikṣiyāṇa{ṃ}(m.c.) (vs) § 31.21.26A4. thaviyāṇa § 11.5.10B6. prasphoṭiyāna § 29.11. Absolutiv auf -iyāṇaṃ, -iyānaṃ; vgl. AMg. -iyāṇaṃ (Pischel § 592); Pā. -iyānaṃ (Geiger § 214, Oberlies 2001: 265, 267f.); Roth 1980: 87f. = 1986: 298f.; S. 558f. in diesem Band § 5.9.6B7. pratyavekṣiyāṇaṃ § 10.4.10A5. apaduriyāṇaṃ (= § 31.20.26A4) § 39.14.31B2. ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ (= § 39.26.32A4) § 38.5.30A7. ukkasiyāṇaṃ (= § 39.20.31B7) § 21.9.20B5. kariyāṇaṃ (= § 31.22.26A6, § 43.15.38B3, § 45.5.39B7); vgl. § 19.33.18B6. kariyāṇa{{ṃ}} § 57.5.47B3. saṃpuṭi-kariyāṇaṃ § 44.1.38B6. kṛṣiyāṇaṃ (Hs. hūṣi°) § 22.5.21A2. utkṣipiyāṇaṃ (= § 22.6.21A3, § 62.6.50A2) § 45.1.39B3. nikṣipiyāṇaṃ (= § 46.6.40B1, § 51.9.44A4) § 31.1.25A7. okkhandiyāṇaṃ (= § 31.1.25B1, § 31.2.25B2, § 41.14.34B3) § 57.10.47B7. nikkhāsiyāṇaṃ § 19.6.17B7. gacchiyāṇaṃ (= § 22.4.21A1, § 22.6.21A2, § 37.1.29B7) § 5.7.6B4. āgacchiyāṇaṃ (= § 25.1.22B1, § 34.2.28B2, § 35.1.28B7, § 36.1.29A7, § 50.1.43A3) § 50.1.43A2. āgamiyāṇaṃ § 19.6.17B7. o<gu>hiyāṇaṃ § 49.5.42B2. gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ (= § 52.6.44B4, § 57.5.47B4) § 41.13.34B3. ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ § 52.3.44B2. cariyāṇaṃ § 51.14.44A7. cchindiyāṇaṃ § 18.31.16B5. cchoriyāṇaṃ § 41.14.34B3. prajvāliyāṇaṃ § 39.8.31A5. otāriyāṇaṃ (= § 56.1.47A2) § 18.53.17B3. dadiyāṇaṃ (= § 19.42.19A4) § 1.12.2A6. uddiśiyānaṃ § 22.5.21A2. pidhiyāṇaṃ 49  § 51.8.44A4. pithiyāṇaṃ (Hs. piṣiy°) § 62.7.50A4. nirddhāviyāṇaṃ § 20.11.19B6. dhoviyāṇaṃ (= § 21.5.20B2, § 31.21.26A5, § 41.1.33B3) § 1.13.2A6. vītināmiyānaṃ § 2.8.2B7. nirmmādiyānaṃ (= § 41.29.35B6, § 50.10.43B6) § 51.10.44A5. paśyiyāṇaṃ (= § 51.11.44A5, § 51.12.44A5) § 53.19.45B7. niṣpīḍiyāṇaṃ (Hs. niṣpeḍi°) § 50.10.43B6. pūriyāṇaṃ § 50.8.43B4. paripūriyāṇaṃ § 4.5.4B3. pṛcchiyāṇaṃ (= § 6.5.7B2) § 31.1.25A7. bandhiyāṇaṃ (= § 31.1.25B1) § 1.13.2A6. bhāṣiyāṇaṃ (Hs. bhāṣamāṇaṃ); § 3.12.4A4. bhāṣiyāṇaṃ § 5.11.7A1. bhuñjiyāṇaṃ (= § 39.28.32A6) § 39.16.31B4. pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ (= § 39.28.32A6) § 62.2.49B5. mardiyāṇaṃ (= § 62.4.49B7) § 31.22.26A5. allīyāṇaṃ; § 32.7.27B2. al<l>īyāṇaṃ § 59.1.48A6. vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ § 21.6.20B3. samvaṭ<ṭ>iyāṇaṃ (Hs. savvaṭ°) § 31.22.26A5. vandiyāṇaṃ (= § 39.5.31A3, § 39.13.31B1, § 39.25.32A3, § 39.28.32A6) § 21.5.20B2. upaviśiyāṇaṃ (= § 50.9.43B5, § 50.9.43B5, § 57.1.47B1) § 22.4.21A2. praviśiyāṇaṃ (= § 5.7.6B3, § 39.16.31B4, § 39.28.32A6) § 19.22.18B1. praveśiyāṇaṃ (Hs. praviś°); § 23.4.1.21A7. praveśiyāṇaṃ § 51.7.44A3. parivarttiyāṇaṃ § 23.8.21B6. śāṭiyāṇaṃ § 41.19.35A3. śikṣiyāṇa{ṃ}(m.c.) (vs) § 11.8.11A1. siviyāṇaṃ (Hs. śiv°) § 22.2.21A1. osāriyāṇaṃ (= § 22.3.21A1, § 22.5.21A2) § 56.3.47A4. prasphoṭiyāṇaṃ § 21.5.20B2. astariyāṇaṃ § 21.5.20B3. thapiyāṇaṃ (= § 41.13.34B3) § 31.21.26A4. thaviyāṇaṃ § 19.15.18A4. uttatthiyāṇaṃ § 18.6.15B4. utthapiyāṇaṃ § 54.9.46A6. utthāpiyāṇaṃ (= § 54.12.46A7) § 19.12.18A3. utthiyāṇaṃ (= § 51.10.44A5) § 5.7.6B5. āhaṇiyāṇaṃ § 39.1.30B6. āhaniyāṇaṃ (= § 39.2.31A1, § 39.3.31A1, § 39.5.31A3, § 39.8.31A4, § 39.13.31B1, § 39.18.31B6, § 39.25.32A3) § 53.19.45B7. sāhariyāṇaṃ § 29.12. Absolutiv auf -i? (Schreibfehler?); vgl. BHSG §§ 35.49f.; RgsGr § 42.19; EV I (2nd ed.) 321 (ad Th 1144), Toda 1983: liv; Karashima 2003: 163, Anm. 12 über vipaśya / vipaśyi; BMSC II 143, Anm. 364. dhari § 4.2.4A7. nâpi dāyakadānapatiṃ dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayati ... saṃpraharṣayati, utthihi gato; vgl. § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā ... na parikathāṃ karoti, utthiya gato 30. Infinitiv § 30.1. Infinitiv auf -ituṃ, vom Präsensstamm gebildet; vgl. BHSG § 36.2; RgsGr § 43.1 § 2.8.3A1. praticchituṃ (= § 26.5.23A7) § 18.29.16B5. gacchituṃ (= § 18.49.17A7) § 1.10.2A2. gṛhṇituṃ (= § 25.11.22B6) § 43.15.38B3. dayituṃ (√dā) § 34.5.28B5. āpadyituṃ § 18.40.17A3. pṛcchituṃ § 49.6.42B2. saṃvibhajayituṃ 50  § 39.18.31B6. bhuñjituṃ § 11.7.10B7. paribhuñjituṃ (= § 11.12.11A3, § 18.19.16A6) § 40.16.33A7. nirmmādayituṃ; § 48.8.41B4. nirmādayituṃ § 34.3.28B3. al<l>īyituṃ (Hs. alīpi°); § 35.3.29A3. allīyituṃ (Hs. allīpi°) (= § 37.3. 30A3); § 36.3.29B3. āllīyituṃ (Hs. āllīpi°) § 2.8.2B7. vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°) § 49.7.42B3. vindhāpayitukāmo § 41.24.35B1. praveśayituṃ § 27.3.23B6. tiṣṭhituṃ (= § 27.4.23B6, § 27.5.23B6) § 44.7.39A6. sthāpayituṃ § 44.7.39A6. sthapayitu<ṃ> § 42.25.37B3. snāpitukāmo (verschrieben für snāyitu° ?) § 42.25.37B3. snāyitukāmo § 42.29.37B5. snāyituṃ (= § 42.30.37B6) § 30.2. Infinitiv auf -etuṃ; vgl. BHSG § 36.8; RgsGr § 43.3 § 25.17.23A3. grahetuṃ § 30.5.25A3. prajñapetuṃ § 42.21.37A6. upasthāpetuṃ (zweimal) 31. Passiv § 31.1. Passiv auf -īyati; vgl. BHSG §§ 37.2f. § 4.12.5A4. dīyati (= § 4.12.5A5, § 26.7.23B1, § 26.8.23B2, § 34.5.28B5 usw. ⇒ dīya-) § 12.14.12A2. uddiśīyati § 49.1.42A3. nirddhāpīyati § 11.5.10B6. vināśīyati § 41.12.34B2. unnīyati § 48.4.41A7. nimantrīyati; § 49.1.41B7. nimantrīyanti § 42.24.37B2. ārocīyati § 41.12.34B2. varddhīyati § 11.5.10B6. ovarṣīyati § 53.17.45B6. dīpo praveśīyati § 39.1.30B6. sādhīyati § 42.30.37B6. sthāpīyati § 31.2. -īya Passiv aus Präsensstamm auf -a; vgl. BHSG § 37.7 § 23.4.1.21A7. catvāri pratipādakā karttavyā, mā bhūmī (Nom. sg.) khanīya{ṃ}ti § 31.3. -iya Passiv aus Präsensstämmen auf -aya; vgl. BHSG § 37.8 § 11.2.10B3~4. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... śayyāsanaṃ ... vātātapena vināśiyantaṃ varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantaṃ prāṇakehi khajjantaṃ pakṣihi ohayiyantaṃ omayilamayilaṃ pāṭita- vipāṭitaṃ ātape dinnaṃ § 11.5.10B5. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... vātātapena vā vināśiyantaṃ pakṣīhi vā oh<ay>iyantaṃ § 21.8.20B4. kaṭhinaṃ ... vātātapena vināśiyantaṃ § 50.4.43A6. icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyantaṃ § 54.3.46A2. te dāni bhikṣu viheṭhiyantā (Hs. vihaṭh°) ārāvaṃ muñca<ṃ>ti § 31.4. -iya Passiv aus Präsensstamm auf -a; vgl. BHSG § 37.9 § 26.2.23A6. te dāni śabdāpitāḥ, etad eva pṛcchiyanti § 31.5. Passiva mit aktiven Endungen; vgl. BHSG §§ 37.10ff.; RgsGr §§ 38.5f.; v. Hinüber 2001: §§ 458f. § 31.24.26A7. āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati ... dhūmo kriyati (= § 39.17.31B5) § 39.29.32A7. āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati ...” § 47.1.40B3. tān’ api dāni cīvarakāni omaïlamaïlāṇi pāṭitavipāṭitāni kriyanti § 31.24.26A7. saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati (= § 39.17.31B5) § 39.29.32B1. āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ kelāpīyati § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... prāṇakehi khajjanti 51  § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) prāṇakehi khādyati § 4.2.4A7. naỿva saṃghasthavirasya āgatir ggatiḥ prajñāyati § 4.7.4B5. pacyati (= § 5.6.6B3, § 5.7.6B4, § 6.7.7B5, § 31.26.26B1) § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena opūriyanti § 35.5.29A5. <yā>dṛśaṃ āsanaṃ labhyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyanti § 4.6.4B4. kiṃ sajjiyati; § 39.18.31B6. bhaktaṃ sajjīyati § 31.24.26A7. kulāni prasādīyanti (Hs. praśād°) (= § 39.17.31B5) § 31.6. Passiv des Optativs 1. pl. -ema; vgl. BHSG § 37.14 § 41.17.34B7. praticorehi pi muṣyema ... rājakule pi vadhyema § 31.7. Aktive Verbalformen in der Funktion des Mediums; vgl. BHSG § 37.16 § 4.16.5B3. adya te suvihitehi dakṣiṇā agrabhājanagatā virocati (vs) § 25.4.22B3. (pātraṃ ...) nâpi kṣamati bilvasya ... heṣṭhe nirmmādayituṃ, mā pakvena vā bilvena pakvena vā kapitthena pakvena vā nālikereṇa bhaṃjeya tti § 25.5.22B3. nâpi kṣamati dariniśritena vā pātraṃ nirmmādayituṃ, mā patitaṃ bhañjeya (Hs. °aya) tti § 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6. loke utpadyanti) § 41.20.35A4. nâsya muṃceya brāhmaṇo (vs) § 41.20.35A4. taṃ pi dhik yo ’sya muñcati (vs) § 31.8. Aktive Formen in der Funktion des Passivs; vgl. BHSG § 37.18 § 32.10.27B4. atha khalu tathā vanditavyaṃ, yathā na duḥkhāpiye pādehi vandayantehi § 32.11.27B4. na dāni meṇḍhena viya āsitavyaṃ pādehi vandayaṃtehi; vgl. § 32.3. 27A6. nâpi kṣamati pādehi vandiyamāṇehi na pratisaṃmodituṃ § 33.13.28A5. bhikṣū vā tehi śabdāpayati (lies: °piyati?), ... § 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... tehi prajñaptehi upaviśaṃti, cīvarāṇi vināśayanti (lies: vināśiyanti?) § 48.2.41A5. cīvarāṇi vināśayanti (lies: vināśiyanti?) § 50.4.43A6. icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyantaṃ; vgl. § 50.1.43A1. icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyamānaṃ (= § 50.2.43A4) § 31.9. Passiv mit aktiver Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG §§ 37.22f.; Pischel § 550; Oberlies 2001: 199, Anm. 4; id. 2003: 243f. § 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena ... utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ § 40.1.32B2. tato yyeva hastāṃ nirmmādiyanti § 31.10. Passiv mit medialer Bedeutung; vgl. von Hinüber 2001: § 415, Oberlies 2001: § 44, id. 2003: 243 (āsyati) § 49.1.42A3. suṣṭhu khalu nirddhāpīyati (“läuft heraus”) 32. Kausativ § 32.1. Kausativ mit nicht-kausativer Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG §§ 38.18f. § 3.8.3B7. tvaṃ parikathāṃ kārayesi (Opt. 2. sg. -esi; vgl. BHSG §§ 29.20~21); § 2.7. 2B7. tvaṃ parikathāṃ kārayesi (Hs. °yasi) § 2.12.3A6. na pratipadyeti abhisamācārikāṃ dharmmān atikramati (≒ § 22.8) § 7.2.8A7. yūyaṃ upasaṃpādetha, upasaṃpādiya na ovadatha na anuśāsayatha § 39.9.31A6. na dāni bhaktāgraṃ avaṣṭabhayitavyo āsayitavyaṃ (“sitzen”) § 41.23.35A7. vāmo pādo dhovayitavyo dakṣiṇo pādo dhovayitavyo § 42.18.37A3. hastena agrato praticchādayitavyaṃ apareṇa parikarmma kārayitavyaṃ § 44.4.39A2. cīvarakāni sāharitāni kāriya antaramukhaṃ duguṇântaraṃ kariya cīvara- vaṃśe sthapetavyāni § 47.1.40B3. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarakāṇi dhoventā siventā raṃjentā talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ; vgl. § 47.2.40B5, § 48.2.41A6. cīvarakāni dhovantā ... § 53.17.45B6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmanto, dīpo praveśīyatî”ti. “dīpo praveśayati (‘Eine Lampe kommt herein!’; vgl. BHSG § 38.23, s.v. viś) ” tti § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānakaṃ kāsayitavyaṃ (“husten”) 52  § 59.4.48B1. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvayitavyaṃ ... § 32.2. Kausativ auf -āpayati; vgl. BHSG §§ 38.41f.; v. Hinüber 2001: § 489 § 18.3.15B2. kārāpayamāṇena ... kārāpayituṃ ... kārāpayitavyā § 21.3.20B1. kārāpayamāṇena (= § 54.2.46A1) § 8.12.9B2. pratikramāpayitavyaṃ § 18.53.17B3. pratigrahāpayitavyo § 14.6.13A5. dahāpayitavyo § 49.7.42B3. vindhāpayitukāmo § 1.3.1B3. śabdāpayatha (= § 2.3.2B3 usw. ⇒ śabdāpaya-) § 1.3.1B3. bhagavān āha: “śabdāpayatha Nandanaṃ” (= § 4.3.4A7, § 49.2.42A4) § 4.10.5A2. sopāpitakāni (Hs. sopāyita°) § 5.9.6B7. sovāpitā § 32.3. Kausativ auf -apayati; vgl. BHSG § 38.52 § 10.5.10A6. prajñapiya usw. § 8.6.9A3. dapiya (= § 9.1.9B4) § 40.5.32B6. thapetavyā § 57.8.47B6. utthapitvā (“aufgestanden habend”) § 32.4. Kausativ auf -āpayati mit nicht-kausativer Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG §§ 38.58f.; von Hinüber 2001 § 415 (mit Lit.) § 52.3.44B3. piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhiyāṇaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā allīpayitavyaṃ § 31.22.26A6. atha dāni nevāsiko vṛddhatarako bhavati, ārogyāpiya ... § 43.5.38A5. te sudhotāṃ suprakṣālitāṃ kārāpayiya ātape sthāpayitavyāḥ § 43.6.38A5. ... taṭṭukā vā caṣakā vā palīnakā vā nirmmāditā kārāpiya ... § 4.11.5A3. oheyyakānāṃ glānakānāṃ pratikṛty’ eva dāpitavyaṃ § 5.10.6B7. oheyyaglānakānāṃ piṇḍapāto dāpayitavyo (= § 6.10.7B7) § 1.11.2A3. deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyaṃ (≒ § 2.9.3A2) § 17.11.15A5. mañcā vā vātavyā pīṭhā vātavyā, bisī sīvayitavyā, caturasrā vāpayitavyā § 53.14.45B4. tato vaktavyaṃ “mā <cirāyi>(?) āyuṣman, eṣo nirvvāpayiṣyati (‘Diese [Lampe] wird erlöschen!’; ☞ § 53.14, Anm. 5)” § 43.3.38A3. tena ... bhikṣusaṃgho pariveṣāpayitavyo (Hs. pariveśāp°) § 32.5. Kausativ auf -āpayati mit intrasitiver Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG § 38.58; Sakamoto-Goto 1993 § 40.16.33B1. na dāni kṣamati pāridhovaniyāto snāpituṃ (aber verschrieben für snāyituṃ?) vā cīvaram vā dhovituṃ rañjanaṃ vā kaḍhituṃ § 42.25.37B3. nâhaṃ snāpayiṣyāmi § 32.6. Kausativ auf -apayati mit intrasitiver Bedeutung § 57.6, 47B4. bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā (“aufstehen”) § 32.7. Kausativ auf -āvayati / -āveti; vgl. BHSG §§ 38.68f. § 43.4.38A4. śabdāviya § 32.8. Kausativ mit medialer Endung -māno § 62.1.49B2~3. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi niveśayamāno, phalabhāgiyān satvāṃ phalehi pratiṣṭhāpayamāno, vāsanābhāgīyān satvān vāsanāyām avasthāpayamāṇo ... kṣeme same śive sthale abhaye nirvvāṇe pratiṣṭhāpayamāno ... 33. sthā, sthap, sthāp, thap, thāp, √ās als Hilfsverben § 33.1. √sthā als Hilfsverb ☞ § 25.8, Anm. 5 § 13.17.12B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati vihāro pi{t}thitvā sthapituṃ § 14.4.13A4. mañcā pīṭhā ullapitvā sthāpayitavyā § 22.6.21A3. (cakkalī ...) na dāni kṣamati divasata osarayitvā thapayituṃ § 25.8.22B5. atha khalu pātraprasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiya sthapetavyaṃ § 25.9.22B5. pātraprasevikā nāgadantake vā kīlake vā ukkaciya thapetavyā § 39.1.30B6. tehi ... gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ sthitāḥ § 40.2.32B4. kin dāni ayaṃ pānīyamaṇḍapo tāpitamudrito kariya thapito § 40.5.32B6. subhāvitā kariya thapetavyā 53  § 41.22.35A6. colakaṃ niṣpīḍitvā (Hs. °piḍitvā) thapetavyo § 42.23.37B1. na kṣamati ātmano cīvarāṇi gṛhṇitvā parasya cīvarehi samākulīkṛtvā sthapetuṃ § 43.7.38A6. tato kīlakehi ollapitvā sthapitavyā § 43.16.38B5. bhaṇḍakaṃ ... na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ § 33.2. √as als Hilfsverb ☞ § 25.8, Anm. 5 § 52.3.44B2. nâpi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā bhuṃjantānāṃ tena dāni uṣṭhihitvā āsitavyaṃ 34. Partizip Präteritum + √as, √bhū § 34.1. Partizip Präteritum + √as; BHSG §§ 41.1f. § 41.16.34B6. kasya kṛtena tvaṃ atra dīpamūlaṃ allīno ’si? § 34.2. Partizip Präteritum + √bhū; BHSG §§ 41.4f. § 4.10.5A2. anekāyo tatra garbharūpāṇi sopāpitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ, kāṃsabhājanāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ; § 5.9.6B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi dārakadārikā vā sovāpitā bhaveṃsu; § 6.9.7B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi garbharūpā sovāpitāni bhaveṃsu, bhājanakāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ § 5.9.6B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi dārakadārikā vā sovāpitā bhaveṃsu § 8.4.8B7. yaṃ kālaṃ abhyanujñā dinnā bhavati, tato dvāraṃ sukhākaṃ apaduriyāṇa ... (≒ § 10.4.10A5) § 8.7.9A4. yadi piṇḍacāro aṇṭhito bhavati, upanāmayitavyo § 14.10.13B1. vihāro anuparinditavyo ... “eṣo tumhākaṃ vihārako anuparindito bhavatu.” (≒ § 14.18.13B6) § 15.5.14A2. mañcaṃ pīṭhaṃ pi caturasrakaṃ kurccaṃ bi<ṃ>bohanaṃ uddiṣṭaṃ bhavati § 18.40.17A3. anekāye bhikṣuṇikā upaviṣṭā bhaveya § 19.19.18A7. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, ... (= § 22.4.21A1, § 53.11.45B1, § 53.17.45B6, § 56.1.47A3, § 57.6.47B4); ≒ § 54.15.46B1~2. evaṃ tāva vāretavyaṃ yāva prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (= § 55.9.47A1) § 21.6.20B3. yaṃ kālaṃ cīvaraṃ sīvitaṃ bhavati, kaṭhinaṃ samvaṭ<ṭ>iyāṇaṃ ... § 22.6.21A2. prahāṇato yaṃ kālaṃ utthito bhavati, vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, ... § 26.10.23B3. yaṃ kālaṃ praticchitā bhavati, tato paribhuñjitavyā § 31.28.26B2. atha dāni āgantukā bhikṣū vihāra āgatā bhavanti, ... § 31.29.26B3~4. yadi tāva purebhakte āgatā bhavanti, ... deśakāle āgatā bhavanti, ... vikāle āgatā bhavanti, ... ≒ § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāva purebhakte āgato bhavati, ... deśakāle āgato bhavati, ... vikāle āgato bhavati, ... § 31.35.27A1. yaṃ kālaṃ te nevāsikā (wohl für āgantukā) niddhāvitā bhavanti, ... § 31.36.27A2. yadi tāva stūpikena vā kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, ... sāṃghikena kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, ... § 31.37.27A2~3. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāptaṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, yadi koci sārtho prayāto bhavati, ... § 31.37.27A3. upāsaka! dānapati! ... ime bhikṣu tava parininditā bhavantu § 31.31.26B5. yaṃ kālaṃ āgantukā piṇḍāye cariya vihāraṃ āgatā bhavanti, ... § 32.4.27A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu āgantuko āgato bhavati, ... § 32.5.27A7. uśvāsam vā upaviṣṭo bhavati, na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ pādāṃ vandituṃ § 39.6.31A3. yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgatā bhavanti ... § 39.12.31A7. dānapati āgato bhavati, āraṇyakā ca nâgacchanti § 39.13.31B1~2. yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgatā bhavanti, tato bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 39.25.32A3. yadi tāva grāmāntikā āgatā bhavanti, bhuñjitavyaṃ § 39.14.31B2. atha dāni āraṇyakā nâgatā bhavanti, anantarikānāṃ āsanāni varjantehi āsitavyaṃ § 39.19.31B7. yā grāmāntikānāṃ sthālī, yadi tāva grāmāntikā āgatā bhavanti, tahiṃ pi taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.20.31B7. anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparodho vā bhave corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ § 39.24.32A2. yadi tāva grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, dānapatir āgato bhavati § 41.5.34A2. ime ... śramaṇakāḥ ... nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti, vikopenti 54 § 41.24.35B1. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ adhvātā bhavanti tato praveśayitavyo § 41.26.35B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tena pādā dhovitā bhava<ṃ>ti upaviśitavyaṃ § 42.16.37A1. yadi dāni upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā praviṣṭako bhavati § 42.16.37A2. so prakṛty’ eva bhaṇito bhavati “asukasya vā asukasya vā parikarmma kuryesi” tti, ... § 42.31.37B6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣū snātā bhavanti ... § 43.4.38A3. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃghena bhuktaṃ bhavati ... § 46.4.40A6. kalyato yeva gocarāye prasthito bhavati § 47.5.40B7. yadā grāmamūlagato bhavati, ... § 49.7.42B4. yaṃ kālaṃ śirā viddhā bhavati, ubhayehi bhuñjiya nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 50.9.43B5. yaṃ kālaṃ āgato bhavati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ sahitakehi bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 52.1.44A7~44B1. yaṃ kālam āgatā bhavanti, tato teṣāṃ saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ § 52.1.44B1. yaṃ kālaṃ āgatā bhaviṣyanti, tato saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ § 52.5.44B4. ayaṃ ca piṇḍāya caritvā āgato bhavati, sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 52.7.44B7. yaṃ kālaṃ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā anujñā dinnā bhavati, tato paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā § 53.6.45A5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, ... § 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, tato ... § 53.7.45A6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho prahāṇe upaviṣṭo bhavati, tato dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti § 53.13.45B3. yadā bhikṣū pratikrāntā bhavaṃti, tato varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.15.45B5. (die Lampe) nirvvāpito bhavati, agni gopayitavyo tuṣehi vā karṣehi vā buṣena vā buṣikāya vā § 53.18.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ vibhātaṃ bhavati, ākāśaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato ... § 57.11.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ adhvānam āgato bhavati, upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, nadīkūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā pādāṃ dhoviya prasphoṭeti, anāpattiḥ § 58.5.48A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgato bhavati, grīvā marditavyā § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāṃ gacchiya caturddiśaṃ niṣīdanti § 62.2.49B6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho upaviṣṭo bhavati, eko tāva pūtivātakarmmaṃ karoti. aparo “gaccha” tti. aparo “ḍharaḍha<ra>” tti usw. 35. Fehlerhafte Silbenumstellung § 2.11.3A5 bhāṣiyāṇa / Hs. bhāṣaṇāya § 13.7.12B2. vilikhkhikā für cikkhalikā § 11.9.11A2. vodhitavyaṃ für dhovi° (= § 12.18.12A5, § 17.10.15A5); § 19.24.18B2. vodhiya für dhoviya; § 39.8.31A5. vodhiyāṇaṃ für dhoviyāṇaṃ § 13.12.12B5. rañjiyatavyaṃ für rañjayitavyaṃ § 15.7.14A3. pātrapraveśikā für °sevikā; § 25.8.22B5. pātra-praveśikāyāṃ für °sevikāyāṃ § 17.10.15A5. visayitavyaṃ für sivayi° § 18.20.16A7. uddīpito für uppīḍito § 18.22.16B1. tāta vahi für tāva tahi § 18.49.17A7. vināsanaṃ für nivāsanaṃ § 25.15.23A2. pravesikā für prasevikā § 31.18.26A2. tithikā für thitikā § 31.27.26B1. vihārakaṃ für bāhirakaṃ (Metathese der Vokale) § 33.11.28A4. dānapatīnāṃ für *°patānīṃ? (Metathese der Vokale) § 33.12.28A5. dānapatti ti für dānapati tti § 40.7.32B7. paridhovanīyena / Hs. parivodhanīyena § 41.5.34A2. ṭhapayanti / Hs. paṭhayanti 55 § 41.25.35B2. cchoriya / Hs. cchorayi § 42.3.36A5. vilakṣenti / Hs. vilekṣanti § 43.16.38B5. sudhovitvā / Hs. bodhisatvā § 50.7.43B3. upakkhaṭo für upakaṭṭho § 57.1.47A7. ostakāḥ für okastāḥ § 61.3.49A3. jaṃbhayituṃ (Hs. bhañjayitavyaṃ; ☞ § 61.3[Text], Anm. 1) 36. Haplographie § 26.7.23B1. pāṭikāye für <paṭi>pāṭikāye § 28.5.24A4. padāni <ni>hīnakena § 41.21.35A4. asyâ<syā>d § 41.22.35A6. udaka-dānaṃ für udaka-dakānakaṃ § 43.16.38B5. bhaviṣya<tî>ti § 45.2.39B4. grāmapraveśanikāni <ni>vasanāni 37. Dittographie § 19.16.18A6. tatra tatraṃko (lies: kuṃtako) § 19.16.18A6. alābu-{o}tumbako (die Zeichen o und tu sind einander ähnlich) § 41.2.33B6. NandanO{nandano}panandanā 38. Irrtümlich gesetzter Daṇḍa § 2.6.2B6. dhovayitavyā{|}yo § 39.13.31B1. veti{|}yo für cetiyo § 39.16.31B3. ceti{|}yo § 39.25.32A3. āha{|}niyāṇaṃ § 53.19.45B7. sthāpetavyā{|}yo § 54.12.46A7. te{|}na 39. Irrtümlich gesetzter Anusvāra § 8.7.9A4. vaḍaṃvidhavāye für caṃḍav° § 15.7.14A3. cīvaraṃcaśo für cīvaravaṃśo § 18.29.16B5. (’)haṃyatena für (’)hayaṃtena § 20.9.19B5. aphāṃsu für aphāsuṃ § 21.5.20B3. pādā<ṃ> ○ na{ṃ} dhovayitukāmo § 24.1.21B7. pañcārthavaṃśā für °vaśāṃ § 29.1.24A6. upaviṃśati für °viśaṃti (= § 48.1.41A3) § 42.2.36A3. āgametuṃ für āgameṃtu § 42.14.36B7. cīvaraṃcaśe für cīvaravaṃśe § 42.20.37A5. upanetuṃ für upaneṃtu § 42.24.37B2. sarvva{ṃ}saṃghena § 43.14.38B2. yāṃca{ratī}ti für yācaṃti § 43.16.38B5. eva{ṃ} § 43.16.38B5. yasyaỿva{ṃ} § 44.1.38B6. cīvara{ṃ}vaṃśāto § 48.7.41B2. sudhāpāṇḍu{ṃ}lepanā § 53.1.45A2. upaviṃśati für °viśaṃti § 61.8.49B1. ekamataṃ für ekamaṃte 40. Iteratio (Wiederholung von Wörtern) § 1.10.2A1. nâpi kṣamati śalākāṃ vārayantena (Hs. cār°) anirmmādiya hastāṃ śalākāṃ vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°) (≒ § 3.9.3B7) § 2.8.2B7. tato śalākāṃ vāra<ya>ntena (Hs. cār°) ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°) § 2.8.3A1. śalākāṃ pi praticchantena na kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā hastehi vā anirmmāditehi śalākāṃ praticchituṃ (≒ § 3.9.4A1) 56  § 18.3.15B2. varccakuṭīṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena nâpi kṣamati vihārasya purastimena vā uttareṇa vā kārāpayituṃ § 19.3.17B5. praśvāsakuṭī pi dāni bhikṣuṇā kārayantena na kṣamati vihārasya uttareṇa pūrvveṇa kārāpayituṃ § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena dvādaśahastāṃ āyāmato karttavyaṃ aṣṭahastāṃ vistāreṇa § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī tāvad bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā naḍānām vā naṅgalānām vā kaṇḍānām vā rejjukāye vā sūtrakāye (für sūtrikāye?) vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā § 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apaduritavyaṃ cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ § 24.7.22A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ divāvihāraṃ gato caṃkramati, śleṣmiko bhikṣu bhavati, ito ca <ito ca> cchorayanto caṃkramati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 25.7.22B4. adhvāvayantena nâpi kṣamati sthitakena adhvāpayituṃ § 25.11.22B6. gṛhṇantena nâpi kṣamati ekahastena duve trayo vā pātrāṇi gṛhṇituṃ § 25.14.23A1~2. nirmmādayantena prathamaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. śoṣayantena prathamaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryyasya vā śoṣayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. pratisāmayantena prathamaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pratisāmayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano § 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena kalācīyaṃ vāmāyaṃ aṃsivaddhakaṃ prakṣipitvā samavasthāya upaviṣṭakena utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ § 28.8.24A4~5. anuparivarttantena (Hs. anuvari°) tadā na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā <anu>parivarttituṃ § 30.5.25A3. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva śeyyāṃ prajñapeṃtena abhidakṣiṇaṃ prajñapayitavyā § 53.5.45A4~5. dīpavārikena dīpam ādīpentena pratham{ān}am eva bhagavato śarīra- kuṭikāyāṃ dīpo ādīpitavyo § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena aṣṭahastâyāmena karttavyā muṣṭimātrī sthūlatvena ... § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā (Hs. °vyaṃ) vaṃśasya vā nalasya vā naṃgalasya vā rohiṣasya vā daśa-aṣṭahastāṃ dīrghatvena § 54.6.46A3~4. yaṣṭi dāni vārentena (Hs. cār°) na dāni oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā vāretavyā (Hs. cār°) ohitahastena vā upānahārūḍhena vā yaṣṭi vāretavyā (Hs. cār°) § 55.3.46B4. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ geṇḍukaṃ vārayaṃtā (Hs. cār°) iṣṭa- khaṇḍaṃ leṅkaṭakakhaṇḍena veṣṭayitvā vārenti (Hs. cār°) § 55.2.46B3. geṇḍukaṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyo tṛṇānām vā palālānām vā leṅka<ṭa>kakhaṇḍakānām vā sūtrasya vā uṇṇāya vā 41. Syntaktische Cruces Die syntaktischen Probleme sind an der jeweiligen Stelle erläutert § 28.7.24A4. atha dāni glāno, ghṛtaṃ vā pītaṃ, virecanaṃ vā pītaṃ, kiñ câpi caṃkramati, <anāpattiḥ> § 31.24.26A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati tehi āgantukehi nevāsikāṃ kutsiya haṃbhiya “āyuṣmann, adyâpi yūyaṃ iha vasatha. ... khādiṣyanti.” § 42.31.37B6~7. jentākavārikena tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati praveśayitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyaḥ), cūrṇṇaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati praveśayitavyaṃ, jentākapīṭhikāni dhoviya praveśayitavyāni, śuktiyo dhoviya praveśayitavyāyo § 43.11.38A7~38B1. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ –––– yadi tāva tṛṇacchannā bhavati –––– tṛṇapulako dātavyo § 43.15.38B3. cīvararaj<j>ūṃ na dāni cīvaraṃ raṃjetvāna tathā yeva vitanikā ujjhitvā gantavyaṃ usw. 57 58  Glossar Vorbemerkung: Das Glossar enthält den gesamten Wortschatz der Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ. Auch Verschreibungen sind in das Glossar aufgenommen und mit Querverweisen auf die richtige Form versehen. Verwechselungen von Schriftzeichen sind ebenfalls im Glossar gesammelt, z.B. unter a / ā. Die Stichwörter sind so angeführt, wie sie in der Handschrift erscheinen. Dabei ist zu beachten, daß die Handschrift anlautendes ch- verdoppelt, z.B. cchagala~. A a / ā ⇒ kaṭahaka~ für kaṭāhaka~ § 2.1.2B1. ahaṃsu für āh° § 2.11.3A5. dhārmmyakathayā für dhārmyā kathayā § 3.2.3B1. etām für etam § 7.5.8B3. adbhutādharmmā (vaipulyâdbhutadharmmā) für adbhutadh° § 8.7.9A4. veśikakulāto für veśikāk° § 8.13.9B3. avaḍḍhako für āvaṭṭako § 9.7.10A3. ātikramati für ati° § 14.14.13B3. ayacchitavyā ayaṃcchantiyo für āyacch° āyacch° § 14.14.13B3. dhovitva für °tvā § 14.18.13B6. araṇyakāni für āraṇyakāni § 17.9.15A3. āpakapāṃsuko für apakkapāṃsu°? § 18.3.15B2. uttāreṇa für uttareṇa § 18.9.15B7. dīrghanāgadanta für °dantā § 18.17.16A5. tayo für tāyo § 18.45.17A6. jjhaṭam für jjhā° § 20.4.19A7. bālākinīye für bālakinīye § 21.2.20A7. astariya für āst° § 25.9.22B5. aveḍhakā für āve° § 26.8.23B1. āyaṃ für ayaṃ § 27.1.23B4. yogavaro für yogācāro § 27.4.23B6. -samantakena (veśikāsamantakena) für -sāmanta° § 29.4.24B2. amuhūrtte für āmuh° § 29.6.24B3. amūhūrttakaṃ für āmuh° § 30.4.25A1. mṛgarāja für °rājā § 31.31.26B6. sāraṇīyaṃ für sārāṇ° § 31.35.27A1. kṣāmati für kṣam° § 31.37.27A3. gacchamanonāṃ für °mānānāṃ § 33.2.27B7. āmba für amba § 33.8.28A3. aṇapesī für āṇa° § 36.6.29B5. sāgarā für sāgārā (vs) § 36.6.29B5. amiṣacakraṃ für āmiṣa° (vs) § 36.6.29B6. carathā für °tha § 37.5.30A4. hīnāvīryā für hīnav° § 37.5.30A4. gṛhiliṅgāparityāgo für °liṅga-pari° § 39.9.31A5. āraṇyākānāṃ für āraṇyakānāṃ 59  § 39.13.31B1. araṇyakā für āra° § 39.18.31B6. āraṇyāke für °ṇyake § 40.13.33A5. pātrāntarikāye für patrāntarikāye § 41.4.34A1. manasena für mānasena § 41.4.34A1. dharmmatāvasthaprāptena für °sthāprāptena § 41.12.34B2. manaapavādī für manaāpa° § 42.9.36B3. samantena für sāmantena § 42.9.36B4. sūcikabandhimaṃ für sūcikābandhimaṃ § 42.18.37A3. sarvvevihārika~ für sārddhevihārika~ (= § 42.25.37B3, § 47.1.40B3, § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A3) § 43.13.38B1. raṅgakaṭahakā für °kaṭāhakā § 43.13.38B2. ādhīnaṃ wohl für adhīnaṃ § 45.1.39B3. nivasana~ für nivāsana~ (= § 45.2.39B4, § 45.4.39B6) § 45.4.39B6. pravāritvā wohl für prāvaritvā § 48.8.41B4. pātraṃ wohl für patraṃ § 48.8.41B5. hārītakī für harītakī § 48.8.41B5. āklinnakaṃ für aklinnakaṃ § 49.2.42A5. acikṣiṣyasi für ācikṣiṣyasi § 50.2.43A3. ayuṣman für āyuṣ° § 50.2.43A4. māyā für mayā § 53.10.45B1. aghāto für āgh° § 54.3.46A2. ahanati für āhananti § 55.4.46B5. caritavyo für vār° § 55.6.46B7. abhāmayitvā für ābhāsay° § 60.7.49A1. aṅguṣṭhodāreṇa für °odareṇa § 61.7.49A7. vijṛmbhāyitavyaṃ für vijṛmbhay° a + | (Daṇḍa) / ā § 2.11.3A5. vītināmiya | na für vītināmiyāna § 19.15.18A4. āhatya | für āhatyā § 31.1.25A7. bhaṃjantaṃ | für bhaṃjantā § 33.17.28A7. pravyāharttavyā für °ttavyaṃ | § 49.1.42A3~4. bhuktāvisyā für bhuktāvisya | a/i: § 1.1.1B2. cchoraya für cchoriya § 1.1.1B2. pādāna für pādāni § 8.4.8B7. praveśaya für °veśiya § 8.11.9A7. śaithaliko für śaithiliko § 10.4.10A5. praveśayāṇa für °veśiyāṇa § 18.4.15B4. nimuṣṭakam für °ṣṭikam § 24.7.22A4. cchoriyanto für cchoray° § 30.9.25A5. śayiti für śayati § 32.2.27A6. vandhintasya für vandant° § 38.8.30B4. asmiparṣaṃ für asmap° § 41.15.34B4. dāna für dāni § 42.19.37A3. praviśiyitvā wohl für praveśayitvā § 42.31.37B7. jentākapīṭhikāni wohl für °pīṭhakāni § 43.4.38A4. liptopaliptiṃ wohl für liptopaliptaṃ § 45.7.40A2. nivāsinaṃ wohl für nivāsanaṃ § 53.11.45B1. nirvvāpayantaṃ für °payituṃ § 55.2.46B4. āpiṭito für āpaṭito § 56.3.47A4. prasphoṭayāṇaṃ für °ṭiyāṇaṃ § 59.2.48A7. kṣapitavyaṃ für kṣipit° a- / u- : § 13.8.12B2. upakvapāṃsukena für apakva° a/u: § 16.7.14B2. pralaggakā für °luggakā § 16.7.14B2. sadhotā für sudh° 60  § 19.10.18A2. upaveṣṭaṃ für °ṣṭuṃ § 28.8.24A5. parivarttitaṃ für <anu>parivarttituṃ § 31.6.25B5. ujjakena für ujjuk° § 38.3.30A6. kaśalo (anarthakaśalo) für °kuśalo § 39.16.31B3. ullugikāye für *ullaggikāye § 42.25.37B3. sugotrīmātā für sagotrīmātā § 43.11.38A7. pralaggikā für praluggikā § 46.5.40A7. mārggitaṃ für °ituṃ a/e: § 22.1.20B6. nivareṇena für °raṇena § 25.1.22B1. muṇḍevātapāṇe für muṇḍav° § 25.5.22B3. bhañjaya für °ñjeya § 31.8.25B6. niḥsāreyetavyaṃ für °sārayitavyaṃ § 41.13.34B2. aparehiṃ für aparahiṃ(?) § 47.7.41A1. sudhāpāṇḍulapanāyo für °lepanāyo § 53.17.45B6. utthihaṃsna für °heṃsu § 54.3.46A2. vihaṭhiyantā für viheṭhi° a + | (Daṇḍa) / e § 40.16.33B1. lebhyā für | labhyā § 44.8.39A7. nêdāni wohl für | na dāni (= § 51.5.44A2) a/o: § 14.13.13B2. yosya für yasya aṃ / ā ⇒ saṃ / sā § 2.9.3A2. pratiṣṭhāpayitavyā für °itavyaṃ § 4.16.5B2. bhadrakā (für °kaṃ) ... prasthitā (für °itaṃ) § 11.4.10B5. apratyāstaraṇakā für °ṇakaṃ § 14.9.13A7. nidhāvitavyā für °tavyaṃ § 42.7.36B2. vātapānīyaṃ für vātapānīyā § 42.8.36B3. dvārā für dvāraṃ (?) § 48.5.41B1. niṣīditavyā für niṣīditavyaṃ § 49.7.42B5. nirddhāvitavyā für °itavyaṃ aṃ / i : § 2.5.2B5. purebhakti für purebhaktaṃ § 5.1.6A5. eti für etaṃ § 18.32.16B6. vandito für vandaṃto § 31.6.25B5. abhidakṣiṇi für °iṇaṃ § 31.6.25B5. apavāmi für °āmaṃ § 52.4.44B3. khajjakhaṇḍakāni für °ṇḍakānaṃ aṃ / u : vgl. v. Hinüber 1982: 244~245 = 2009: 304~305; id. 2001: §§ 115, 297 § 38.4.30A7. saṃgraho für sugra° § 38.8.30B3. saṃvyupaśāntaṃ wohl für suvyu° ☞ § 38.8(Text), Anm. 5 aṃ / e : § 12.2.11A7. ujjhitaprakīrṇṇe für °kīrṇṇaṃ § 12.6.11B3. saye für samaṃ § 21.7.20B4. raṅge für raṅgaṃ § 38.2.30A5. madhyaṃ für madhye § 56.6.47A7. skandhaṃ für °ndhe § 57.1.47B1. pārṣṇikāvaddhrakaṃ für °ke aṃ / o : § 18.48.17A7. sarvvasārtho für °sārthaṃ § 19.38.19A2. sārtho für <sarvva>sārthaṃ § 21.8.20B4. pratisaṃskarttavyo für °vyaṃ § 53.17.45B6. āyuṣmantaṃ für °manto aṃśaśas “stückweise” § 14.13.13B2. sāmagrīye saṃviditvā tahiṃ ekameko vâ<ṃ>śaśo (Hs. vâśamo) dātavyo dve vā dve vā trayo vā trayo vā aṃsa~ ⇒ ekāṃsa-kṛta~, ekāṃsī-kṛta~ aṃsa-vaddhaka~ ⇒ aṃsi-vaddhaka~ aṃsi-vaddhaka~# “Schultergurt”; < Skt. aṃsa + vadhraka; vgl. Pā. aṃsa-vaddhaka ☞ § 25.15, 61  Anm. 1 ⇒ pārṣṇi-vaddhaka~ § 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena kalācīyaṃ vāmāyaṃ aṃsivaddhakaṃ (für aṃsa°?) prakṣipitvā samavasthāya upaviṣṭakena utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ akaṃthāyena# Bedeutung? § 19.28.18B4. atha dāni uppīlito bhavati, akaṃthāyena (Hs. °yene) viya mūtreṇa siñcantena na gantavyaṃ akalpikarakī für akalpiya-karakī : § 31.21.26A4 a-kalpiya~# “nicht geeignet, unrecht”; vgl. Pā. akappiya, BHS. akalpya, akalpika § 40.12.33A5. yathā jñāye “akalpiyan” ti § 49.1.41B6. ahaṃ ca tatra kiñcid eva akalpiyaṃ (Hs. akalpī°) adhyācariṣyāmi § 49.1.41B7. yadi tvaṃ tatra kiṃci akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyasi, ... § 49.2.42A5. ahaṃ ca tatra kiñci akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyāmi § 60.5.48B7. koci se pradeśo khajjati, hastā ca se ’kalpiyā bhavanti, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ akalpiya-karakī~# “Krug für das Wasser, das für den Gebrauch durch Mönche nicht geeignet ist, d.h. Krug für ungefiltertes Wasser” ☞ § 18.7, Anm. 7 ⇒ akalpiya-karkkarī~, kalpiya-karakī § 31.21.26A4. pādadhovanikā kahiṃ? kalpiyakarakī kahiṃ? akalpi<ya>karakī kahi? § 31.21.26A5. akalpiyakarakīto hastā nirmmādiyāṇa kalpiyakarakīto prakṣāliya tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ § 40.8.33A1. tato pānīyāto kalpiyakarakī vā akalpiyakarakī vā ... pūrayituṃ akalpiya-karkkarī~# “Krug für das Wasser, das für den Gebrauch durch Mönche nicht geeignet ist, d.h. Krug für ungefiltertes Wasser”; vgl. Skt. karkarī (“Wasserkrug”) ☞ § 40.7, Anm. 3 ⇒ akalpiya-karakī~, kalpiya-karakī § 40.7.32B7. akalpiya-karkkarī (Hs. ākalpiya-k°) pūrayitavyā akalpīyaṃ für akalpiyaṃ : § 49.1.41B6 a-kālī-bhūta~# “außer der (Essens)Zeit geworden”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. a-kāla § 50.1.43A3. so dāni bhikṣuḥ vihāram āgatvā āgameti “idānīṃ pi eṣyati muhūrttaṃ pi eṣyati” yāva akālībhūtaṃ a-kuśala~ § 42.5.36B1. idam evaṃrūpaṃ pāpakarmmam akuśalan dharmmam adhyācariṣyatha a-kṛta~ ⇒ kṛta~ a-kṛta-karmman~ “unverputzt” ⇒ kṛta-karmman~ a-klinnaka~ ⇒ klinnaka~ § 48.8.41B5. labhyā dāni ... gṛhṇituṃ ... mālyam vā aklinnakaṃ (Hs. ākli°) śimbaṭīyo vā akṣa-darśa~# “Richter”; vgl. Skt. akṣa-darśaka (“Richter [der die Processe prüft]” [PW, s.v.]), akṣa- dṛś (dass.); Pā. akkha-dassa (dass.) ☞ § 20.6, Anm. 3 § 20.6.19B2. yathā kumārakā vā dharmmiṣṭhā vā akṣadarśā vā gaṇa<kā> vā mahāmātrā vā evam ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti akṣi~ “Auge” § 25.17.23A4. (hinsichtlich einer Almosenschale) yathā akṣismiṃ (☞ § 25.17, Anm. 5) § 32.6.27B2. dhūpam vā pibantasya, akṣiṇī (od. °īṇi; Hs. °iṇi) vā añjantasya (☞ § 32.6, Anm. 7), ... § 40.9.33A2. vaidyo āha “bhante, gotrasthena pānīyena akṣiṇī (od. °īṇi; Hs. °iṇi) dhovāhi” tti akṣiṇi für akṣiṇī (du.) oder akṣīṇi (pl.) : § 40.9.33A2, § 32.6.27B2 akṣi-mala~# “Verunreinigung der Augen” § 4.15.5B1. kākā ca <se> akṣimalaṃ harantā (vs) § 6.13.8A3. kāko ca se akṣimalaṃ harantaṃ (vs) agāra~ ⇒ an-agāra~, an-agārikā~, madhyamāgāra~, madhyāgāra~, sāgāra~, āgāra~, gṛha~, ghara~ agecchiya für āgacchiya: § 20.2.19A7 agni~ § 14.6.13A5. kakṣaṃ ... yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati niṣprāṇakaṃ, tato ’gninā dahāpayi- tavyo 62  § 42.2.36A3. sarvvaṃ kāṣṭhaṃ agnau prakṣipiya ... § 42.12.36B5. agnir dātavyo (= § 42.12.36B6) § 42.12.36B5. agni datvā ... § 42.12.36B6. agniṃ datvā ... § 42.17.37A2. yadi tāva agni bahalako bhavati, navakehi agrato sthātavyaṃ agni prati- bāhentehi. atha dāni agnir mmando bhavati, vṛddhehi agrato sthātavyaṃ § 42.19.37A3. na dāni kṣamati tehi agni prajuhitvā ... prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi § 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā § 53.15.45B5. (die Lampe) nirvvāpito bhavati, agni gopayitavyo tuṣehi vā karṣehi vā buṣena vā buṣikāya vā agni-dāha~ “Feuersbrunst”# § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi ... mṛtakam vā bhaveya, sandhi vā cchinno, agnidāho vā rājakulāto vā upadravo agni-śālā~ “geheizter Raum”# (vgl. PW, s.v. “Wohnung des Feuers”; Pā. aggi-sālā “a fire room, a heated hall; a house for keeping the sacrificial fire” [CPD, s.v.]) § 1.5.1B5. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kahim bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā? § 12.10.11B5. vihārā pariveṇā agniśālā bhaktaśālā upasthānaśālā ... grāhayitavyā § 14.12.13B2. etāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā § 19.27.18B4. agniśālāyāṃ vā upasthānaśālāyām vā upaviṣṭasya samudācāro bhavati, cchatti niṣkramitavyaṃ § 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā bhaktaśālāyām vā ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 21.4.20B2. upasthānaśālāyāṃ vā agniśālāyāṃ vā prāsāde vā prahāṇake <vā> kaṭhinaṃ prajñāpayitvā cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ agni-haraṇī~# “das Beseitigen von brennbaren Gegenständen, z.B. Gebüsch, abgestorbenen Ästen, Blättern” ☞ § 14.6, Anm. 1 § 14.6.13A5. samantena vihārasya tāva pratikṛty’ eva agniharaṇī karttavyā bhṛtakehi ca karmmakarehi ca agra~ (1) ⇒ agrato, jihvāgra~, tālukāgra~, rasāgra~, lābhāgra-yaśogra-prāpta~, anta~ § 34.6.28B5. vaktavyaṃ “kṣatriyā nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo. ...” § 35.6.29A6. brāhmaṇa nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo śreṣṭho varṇṇo § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā ... ubhayato agre pottakhaṇḍehi veḍhayitavyā agra~ (2) “Halle”; vgl. Norman CP III 123; DP, s.v. agga2 (“house, hall”) ⇒ tarpaṇāgra~, bhaktāgra~ agrakulika~ (BHS, SWTF) “(ein Mann) aus vornehmer Familie” § 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo mahādhano mahābhogo ... § 41.21.35A5. anyo ’sau tena kālena tena samaye[na] .. .. bhavati agrakulikasya putro agrato# “vor; vorn”; < Skt. agratas; vgl. Pā. aggato ⇒ mūle § 19.36.19A1. kuḍḍa agrato kariyāṇa praśvāso karttavyo § 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati ... upādhyāyācāryāṇām vā agrato vṛddhatarakānām vā bhikṣūṇāṃ agrato dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati mātṛgrāmasya agrato dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 28.8.24A5. atha khalu abhidakṣiṇaṃ agrato karentena anuparivarttitavyaṃ § 31.5.25B4. yadi dāni ośyā bhavati, taruṇabhikṣūhi agrato gantavyaṃ ośyā pratibāhantehi § 31.7.25B5. taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā “agrato gacchatha. ...” § 42.15.36B7. ekena hastena agrato praticchāditvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 42.17.37A2. yadi tāva agni bahalako bhavati, navakehi agrato sthātavyaṃ agni prati- bāhentehi. atha dāni agnir mmando bhavati, vṛddhehi agrato sthātavyaṃ § 42.18.37A3. hastena agrato praticchādayitavyaṃ § 44.5.39A3. cīvaraṃ sāharitvā abhyantaraparikarmma dviguṇ’ ante agrato karttavyo antarapīḍito § 57.10.47B6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato sa-upānahena niṣīdituṃ 63  § 58.6.48A5. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ § 59.7.48B3. nâpi kṣamati sāmāyikāyām vā upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena kṣīvituṃ § 60.6.49A1. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakāṇāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 61.8.49B1. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā agrato maṭamaṭāye aṃgāni bhaṃjantena vijṛmbhituṃ § 62.11.50A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā vṛddhatarakasya vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya sārthena sārddhaṃ gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, na dāni sārthasya (Hs. sārthena) agrato sthitvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ agra-piṇḍapāta~# “die beste Almosenspeise” § 49.9.42B7. yathā yeva agrāsanaṃ agrodakaṃ agrapiṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjasi ... agra-bhājana-gata~# “in einen vorzüglichen Behälter gelegt” § 4.16.5B2. adya te suvihitehi dakṣiṇā agrabhājanagatā virocati (vs) agrāsana~ (agra-ā°) “die beste Sitzgelegenheit” § 49.9.42B7. yathā yeva agrāsanaṃ agrodakaṃ agrapiṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjasi ... agrodaka~ (agra-u°) “das beste Wasser” § 49.9.42B7. yathā yeva agrāsanaṃ agrodakaṃ agrapiṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjasi ... agroṣṭha~# (agra-o°) “die gespitzten Lippen?” ⇒ agroṣṭhaka~ § 40.11.33A4. oṣṭha pramārjitvā agroṣṭhehi pātavyaṃ agroṣṭhaka~# (agra-o°) “die gespitzten Lippen?” ⇒ agroṣṭha~ § 40.14.33A6. pibantena oṣṭhā patraśākhāye nirmmādayitvā agroṣṭhakehi pātavyaṃ a-glāna~ ⇒ glāna~ § 23.6.3.21B3. glāno vā aglāno vā {anāpattiḥ}, kiṃ câpi caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ aghāto für āgh° : § 53.10.45B1 a-ghātya~ § 41.19.35A3. ghātyā bhavanty aghātyā (vs) aṅga~ “Glied, Glied (des Körpers); Eigenschaft” ⇒ aṅgāni √bhañj § 12.9.11B4. pañcehi aṅgehi samanvāgato bhikṣuḥ ... § 60.1.48B5. te ... śarkarāyaṃ pi śalākāyaṃ pi aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyanti § 60.3.48B5. na kṣamati ... śarkarāye vā <śalākāye vā> aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.6.49A1. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakāṇāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti, aṅgāni bhañjayanti maṭamaṭāya phoḍenti amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ § 61.4.49A3. na dāni aṃgāni “ṭaṭṭa ṭaṭṭa” tti phoṭantena mukhaṃ vivaritvā jambhayi- tavyaṃ § 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayi- tavyā ... aṅga-jāta~ “das Membrum virile”; vgl. CPD, s.v.; SWTF, s.v. ☞ § 18.50, Anm. 1 § 18.50.17A7. vāmena hastena aṅgajātaṃ gṛhṇiya draviḍena yathā udakasamīpaṃ gantuṃ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-Kośala-Kuru-Pañcāla-Ceti-Vatsa-Matsya-Śūrasena-Śibi-Daśārṇa- Aśvaki-Avanti~#; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 1, Anm. 17 ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... āvarjayitvā Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-(Hs. Kāsi)Kośala- Kuru-Pañcāla-Ceti-Vatsa-Mats<y>a-Śūrasena-Śibi-Daśārṇṇa-Aśvaki-Avanti ... aṅgāni √bhañj # “die Glieder recken” ☞ § 61.1, Anm. 1 § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti, aṅgāni bhañjayanti maṭamaṭāya phoḍenti amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ § 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa osaritvā indriyāṇi maṭamaṭa aṅgā<ni> bhañjantena yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ 64  § 61.5.49A5. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇam upaviṣṭakena maṭamaṭāya aṅgāni bhañjituṃ § 61.6.49A6. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>aṃ vā dharmmaśravaṇe vā aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhayituṃ § 61.7.49A7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gocaraṃ vā praviśantena antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena maṭamaṭāye aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhituṃ § 61.8.49B1. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā agrato maṭamaṭāye aṃgāni bhaṃjantena vijṛmbhituṃ aṅgāra~ § 20.18.20A4. atha dāni dantakāṣṭhaṃ na bhavati, aṅgāreṇa vā apakkalaḍḍunā vā dantā oghasayitavyāḥ § 42.31.37B7. jentākaṃ siñciya sammārjiya câṃgārā (?; Hs. [n]âṃ°) nicāpiya (lies: ni<r>vāpiya?) jentākaṃ bāhiraghaṭitaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ aṅgula~ § 20.5.19B2. tena hi anujānāmi dantakāṣṭhaṃ prāmāṇikaṃ mahāntaṃ ṣoḍaśāṅgulaṃ § 20.8.19B4~5. jyeṣṭhaṃ nāma ṣoḍaśāṅgulāni madhyamaṃ dvādaśāṅgulāni kanīyasam aṣṭāṅgulāni § 20.10.19B6. tena hi śeṣāś catvāri aṅgulāni dantakāṣṭhasya varjyaṃ karttavyaṃ § 20.11.19B7. evaṃ tāva khādayitavyaṃ yāva dantakāṣṭhasya catvāri aṅgulāni avaśiṣṭāni aṅgulaṃ für lāṅgulaṃ : § 30.4.25A2 aṅguli~ § 18.51.17B1. evaṃ na bhavati, antamasato svakā aṅguli upathapitavyā aṃguli-danta-kāṣṭha~# “die Finger als Zahnreinigungsholz” § 20.18.20A4. antamasato aṃgulidantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditavyaṃ aṅgulya-śirā~# “Ader im Finger”; ∈ Skt. aṅgulya + sirā ⇒ bāhu-śirā~, śirā~ § 49.7.42B3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāṃ vindhāpayitukāmo bhavati bāhuśirāṃ vâṅgulya- śirāṃ vā nilāṭiṃ vā ... aṅguṣṭha-sneha~# “Daumenlutschen”; vgl. Pā. aṅguṭṭha-sneha ☞ § 4.15, Anm. 3 § 4.15.5B1. aṃguṣṭhasnehena yāpaye saptarātraṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A3. aṅguṣṭhasnehena (Hs. °ana) yāpayati saptarātraṃ (vs) aṅguṣṭhodara~# (°ṣṭha-ud°) “die Daumeninnenseite” § 60.4.48B6. atha ca dāni bhikṣu prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā sukhākaṃ uvvaṭṭayitavyaṃ § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni bhikṣusya koci pradeśo khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa (Hs. °odāreṇa) vā hastatalena vā parimardditavyaṃ a-capala~ § 38.4.30A7. atha dāni so bhavati bhadrako guṇavān anuddhato śikṣākāmo anukūlo anunnaḍo acapalo, pṛcchitavyo “kiṃ kāryaṃ?” § 38.7.30B2. so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato anunnaḍo acapalo amukharo apragalbho aprakīrṇṇavāco, ... acikṣiṣyasi für ācikṣiṣyasi : § 49.2.42A5 aciram § 41.12.34B1. tasya dāni eko putro acira<ṃ> jāto a-cokṣa~ ⇒ a-caukṣa~, caukṣa~ § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... vihārakān ondriṇṇakāṃ praluggakāṃ acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ § 12.5.11B2. ye vihārakā uddiṇṇakā paluggakā ... acokṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā bhavanti § 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ ullāya gṛhītakāṃ acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ § 23.7.21B4. nâpi kṣamati vihārako adhyupekṣituṃ oddriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ollāye gṛhītako vā acokṣo vā a-caukṣa~ ⇒ caukṣa~, a-cokṣa~ § 11.6.10B6. na dāni vihāro adhyupekṣitavyo, oddirṇṇako praluggako acaukṣo vā ... § 12.3.11A7. kasyême bhikṣavo vihārakā odriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā ... § 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ullaggakā ollāye gṛhītakāḥ acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā ... § 14.5.13A4. so vihāro ... ondriṇṇako vā paluggako vā acaukṣo vā apratisaṃskṛto vā 65  § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddiṇṇakāṃ praluggakāṃ acaukṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ (≒ § 16.2.14A5, § 23.1.21A4) § 15.3.14A1. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtāḥ (≒ § 16.3.14A6, § 16.5.14A7, § 17.5.14B7) § 18.18.16A6. atha dāni anyena (Hs. anyo) ’caukṣīkṛtaṃ bhavati ohaṇṇam vā § 23.2.21A5. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā ollāye gṛhītakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā § 43.11.38A7. kalpikakuṭī ... oddriṇṇakā vā praluggikā vā acaukṣā vā § 44.9.39A7. na dāni kṣamati vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ uppaṃsulo vā acaukṣo vā accāviya für *alloḍiya? (“gemischt hat”) : § 18.53.17B3 accha~# Bedeutung? § 40.5.32B6. acchehi vā celapaṭṭehi vā bandhitavyāyo accha-# bzw. accho-# “ziehen”; < *ākṣoṭayati “zieht” × āskauti “zieht”? ☞ § 44.1, Anm. 7 § 14.9.13A7. otariya rajjū vā kaḍevariyā vā abhyantare kṣipitavyā, bāhyena vā acchitavyā § 44.1.38B7. taṃ dāni tahiṃ cīvarakarṇṇake gṛhṇiya acchiyaṃ “caṭa” tti sarvaṃ phāṭitaṃ § 44.2.39A1. tvaṃ ... cīvarakaṃ cīvarakoṇake gṛhṇiya acchosi va (Hs. ca) “caṭa” tti sarvvaṃ phāṭitaṃ § 44.6.39A5. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ cīvarakoṇake gṛhṇiya “ḍu” tti acchituṃ § 47.1.40B2. dranti (lies: “ḍu” tti?) acchanti § 47.8.41A2. cīvaraṃ ... na dāni “mā cīvaraṃ mā kaṇṭakaśākhā” tti udranti (lies: “ḍu ḍu” tti?) acchitavyaṃ acchaṭikā~# “das Schnippen mit den Fingern”; vgl. BHS. acchaṭā; Pā. accharā, accharikā ☞ § 18.22, Anm. 3 ⇒ praty-acchaṭikā~ § 18.22.16B1. atha khalu acchaṭikāṃ kara<ṃ>tena praviśitavyaṃ § 19.8.18A1. atha khalu acchaṭikāṃ karantena praśvāsakuṭiṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 18.23.16B2. atha dāni uppīḍito bhavati, acchaṭikāṃ karantena allīyitavyaṃ § 19.9.18A2. atha dāni so bhikṣuḥ uppīḍiyate yeva acchaṭikāṃ karantena allīyitavyaṃ § 41.25.35B2. acchaṭikāṃ karentena pādadhovanikāyāṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti § 53.8.45A7. atha khalu so pi acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo, vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti § 54.9.46A5. yadi na budhyati, acchaṭikā karttavyā § 54.12.46A7. atha khalu acchaṭikāye utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya, tava yaṣṭī prāpuṇati.” § 55.5.46B6. atha khalu bhūyo geṇḍukam āsthapayitvā acchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo § 55.6.46B7. <duve vā> trayo vā vārā geṇḍukaṃ purato ābhāsayitvâcchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo accho- ⇒ accha- aja~ ⇒ prabhūta-hasty-aśva-a°-gav’-eḍaka~ a-jānat~ “nicht wissend” ⇒ jānā- Ajiravatī~ (BHS); vgl. Pā. Aciravatī § 26.1.23A5. he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu Gaṅgā ayaṃ Sarayū Ajiravatī Mahī Mahāmahī tti añja- (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “mit Salbe bestreichen”; Skt. √añj; vgl. BHSG § 28.4, S. 204a § 32.6.27B2. dhūpam vā pibantasya, akṣiṇī vā añjantasya (☞ § 32.6, Anm. 7), ... añjali~ ⇒ prāñjalī-kṛta~ § 57.4.47B3. praviśitvā vṛddhānte añjaliṃ kṛtvā yathāvṛddhikāye upaviśitavyaṃ aṭṭilā~# eine Art Zimmermannsgerät? § 43.16.38B4. takṣāṇaṃ bhāṇḍaṃ bhavati kuṭhāro vā vāsīyo vā viharaṇako vā nikhādanako vā aṭṭilā vā aṇapesī für āṇa° : § 33.8.28A3 aṇṭha- ⇒ haṇṭha- § 8.7.9A4. yadi piṇḍacāro aṇṭhito bhavati, upanāmayitavyo § 49.1.42A1. naỿva eṣo pratibalo piṇḍāya aṇṭhituṃ 66  § 49.6.42B3. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā pratibalo bhavati piṇḍapātam vā aṇṭhituṃ vihārakaṃ vâgantuṃ § 49.7.42B4. tenâpi dāni piṇḍacārikaṃ vā aṇṭhiyāṇa ... § 52.3.44B3. piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhiyāṇaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā allīpayitavyaṃ § 52.9.44B7. atha dāni piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhitvā tato eva nadīkūle ... āhāraṃ kṛtvā pātraṃ nirmmādayitvā āgacchati, anāpattiḥ § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto parapratibaddhāye jīvikāye ... atas § 4.15.5B2. ato śreyataro bhotu kumāro kulavarddhano (vs) (≒ § 6.13.8A4) atiuccahṇe# “zu spät in der Mittagszeit” (< ati [“zu”] + ucca [“hoch”] + ahar [“Tag”]?) ☞ § 39.1, Anm. 7 § 39.1.30B7. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ atiuccahṇe (Hs. atiuvahne) āgacchatha atiuvahne für atiuccahṇe : § 39.1.30B7 ati-uṣṇam# “sehr heiß” (vgl. Skt. aty-uṣṇam; Pā. atiunha) ⇒ aty-āti-uṣṇam, aty-ūṣṇam § 1.12.2A5. atha dāni atiśītam (Hs. atisitam) vā <ati>uṣṇam vā bhavati, ... § 2.10.3A3. yadi tāva atiśītam vā atiuṣṇam vā bhavati § 26.9.23B2. atha dāni ... atiśītam vā atiuṣṇam vā, ... ati-krama- (Skt) ⇒ ati-krāma- § 1.14.2A7. na pratipadyati abhisamācārikān/ābhis° dharmmān atikramati (= § 4.21.6A4, § 5.14.7A4, § 7.8.8B5, § 10.6.10A7, § 19.43, § 20.20 et passim.) § 57.13.48A1. na pratipadyati, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikramati (= § 58.7.48A6, § 62.13.50B1) § 4.8.4B6~7. mā kālo ’tikramiṣyati (Hs. (’)tikrayi°) ... mā kālo atikramiṣyatîti § 4.11.5A4. “laghu kālo atikramati. detha yūyan” ti (≒ § 5.10.7A1) § 4.11.5A4. grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, cire hi kālo atikramati § 5.8.6B6. lahuṃ (Hs. bahuṃ) kālo atikramati § 5.10.6B7. hemantakālo bhavati, laghu kālo atikramati (= § 6.10.7B7, § 50.5. 43A7) § 5.10.7A1. grīṣmakālo varṣārātro vā bhavati, cireṇa kālo atikramati (≒ § 50.5.43B1) § 32.5.27B1. tvaritaṃ vā atikramati, na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 48.7.41B2. nâpi kṣamati antaraghare praviṣṭena sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittī ghasatena atikramituṃ § 50.10.43B6. atha dāni nīhārakapiṇḍapāto na pratyudgacchati, kālo ca atikramati piṇḍapātanīhārakena tvaritatvaritam āgantavyaṃ usw. atikramantu für abhikramantu : § 1.7.1B6 atikrāntena für abhikrāntena : § 41.4.34A1 ati-krāma- (Skt) ⇒ ati-krama- § 6.8.7B6. yadi tāva hemantakālo bhavati, ... laghuṃ kālo atikrāmati § 50.5.43B1. bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno pari<ṃ>dito. lahuṃ ca kālo atikrāmati § 8.14.9B4. na pratipadyate, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati § 27.9.23B7. evaṃ sthātavyaṃ. na tiṣṭhati, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati § 31.38.27A3. na pratipadyanti, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmaṃti § 32.13.27B6. na pratipadyati ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati (= § 33.17.28A7, § 34.8.28B6, § 35.8.29A6, § 37.7.30A5, § 38.10.30B4, § 40.17.33B2, § 41.33.36A1, § 42.32.38A1, § 43.17.38B6, § 44.12.39B2, § 45.8.40A3, § 46.7.40B2, § 47.10.41A2, § 48.10.41B6, § 49.10.43A1, § 50.11.43B7, § 54.17.46B2, § 59.9.48B4 usw.) § 47.9.41A2. sambādharathyā bhavati susaṃvṛtena paśyillakena atikrāmitavyaṃ usw. ati-gupta~ “allzu versteckt, verborgen” ⇒ ati-nikuñja~, atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~, ati-bhuṇḍa~, cchanna-pradeśa~, cchanna-prākaṭa~, pracchanna-prākaṭa~ § 27.5.23B6. nâyaṃ kṣamati atigupte vā atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe tiṣṭhituṃ ati-ghana~ (SWTF) “überaus fest”# ⇒ ghaṇa~, ghana~ § 26.8.23B2. atha dāni atighanā bhavati, na vaktavyaṃ “nâyaṃ yavāgū, odano ayaṃ, daṇḍāśanibhejjā ayaṃ.” 67 ati-dakṣiṇam “ganz rechts” ⇒ abhi-dakṣiṇam, apa-vāmaṃ § 4.9.5A1. kathaṃ āsanā prajñaptāḥ, atidakṣiṇaṃ (oder für abhida° [“rechts”]?) anuvāmaṃ § 4.9.5A1. kadāci maṅgalakaraṇīye atidakṣiṇaṃ (oder für abhida° [“rechts”]?) prajñaptaṃ bhavati, tathā yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ ati-dūre (SWTF, Pā) “zu dicht” § 8.6.9A2. nâpi dāni khurākhuraṃ. atha khalu nâtyāsanne nâtidūre *ati-nikuñja~ (Hs. abhini°) “allzu abgelegen”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 189.6B7.5. ekānte nikuñje pradeśe snāyanti ☞ § 19.21, Anm. 1 ⇒ ati-gupta~, ati-bhuṇḍa~, atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~, cchanna-pradeśa~, cchanna-prākaṭa~, pracchanna-prākaṭa~ § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje (Hs. abhini°) pradeśe sthāpayituṃ *atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~ “völlig stiller Teil (des Hauses)”?; vgl. Schmidt, Nachtr. s.v. atiniḥśabda (“very silent”) ☞ § 18.43, Anm. 2 ⇒ ati-gupta~, ati-nikuñja~, ati-bhuṇḍa~, cchanna- pradeśa~, cchanna-prākaṭa~, pracchanna-prākaṭa~ § 18.43.17A5. na dāni tahiṃ atini<ḥ>śabdapradeśe (Hs. °praveśe) upaveṣṭavyaṃ ... cchanna<prākaṭe>pradeśe (Hs. °praveśe) upaveṣṭavyaṃ ati-prākaṭa~# (Hs. abhini°) “allzu sichtbar, allzu öffentlich” ☞ § 19.21, Anm. 2 § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ § 27.5.23B6. nâyaṃ kṣamati atigupte vā atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe tiṣṭhituṃ § 28.10.24A5. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe caṃkramituṃ ati-bahu, ati-bahuṃ adv. “sehr viel” § 40.11.33A4. na dāni atibahu oṣṭha prakṣipitavyā § 40.12.33A4. yadi koci atibahuṃ oṣṭhaṃ vā volayati keśā vā ālaya{ṃ}ti nilāṭe vā, apane- tavyaṃ ati-bhuṇḍa~# “allzu abgelegen”?; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 99, Anm. 3 ☞ § 29.9, Anm. 3 ⇒ ati- gupta~, ati-nikuñja~, atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~, cchanna-pradeśa~, cchanna-prākaṭa~, pracchanna-prākaṭa~ § 29.9.24B5. nâpi kṣamati ... atibhuṃḍe vā pradeśe niṣīdituṃ. atha khalu cchannaprākaṭe pradeśe niṣīditavyaṃ ati-rikta~ “völlig leer”#; vgl. BHSD, s.v. atiriktaka (“completely empty”) § 40.16.33B1. atha dāni ... bhājanaṃ ca atiriktaṃ ti, labhyā dāni ... yācituṃ ati-r-iva (BHS[Mvu], Pā) ⇒ atīva § 12.1.11A6. te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā atirivôdārāṇi prītiprāmodyāni pratilabhiṣyanti atirekaṃ# “vorangehend”; vgl. Skt, BHS, Pā. atireka (“Überschuß, Übermaß”) § 28.5.24A3. <na kṣamati> upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya atirekaṃ caṃkramituṃ. nâpi kṣamati samaṃ caṃkramayituṃ *ati-vikālaka~ “sehr spät ankommend”? ⇒ ati-vikāle, vi-kāla~, vekālika~ § 31.25.26A7. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ ati-vikāle (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “sehr spät” ⇒ vi-kāla~, ati-vikālaka~ § 2.2.2B2. so dāni ativikāle āgato ati-śithila~# “zu weich”; vgl. Pā. ati-sithila ⇒ sūtra~ § 55.2.46B3. (geṇḍuka~ ...) nâpi kṣamati khakkhaṭaṃ karttuṃ. nâpi kṣamati atiśithilaṃ ati-śītam “sehr kalt”# ⇒ aty-āti-śītam § 1.12.2A5. atha dāni atiśītam (Hs. atisitam) vā <ati>uṣṇam vā bhavati, ... § 2.10.3A3. yadi tāva atiśītam (Hs. atisītam) vā atiuṣṇam vā bhavati § 3.11.4A3. yadi tāva nâtiśītaṃ bhavati nâtyūṣṇam vā ... § 26.9.23B2. atha dāni ... atiśītam vā atiuṣṇam vā, ... atisitam für atiśītam: § 1.12.2A5; atisītam für atiśītam: § 2.10.3A3 atīta~ § 41.12.34B1. bhūtapūrvvam bhikṣavo atītam adhvānaṃ eta<r>hiṃ ca nagaraṃ Vārāṇasī Kāśijanapado atīva ⇒ ati-r-iva § 11.1.10B3. te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā atīva udārāṇi prītiprāmodyāni pratilabhiṣyanti attā~ “ältere Schwester” 68  § 33.1.27B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti (≒ § 33.2.27B7) § 33.9.28A3. eṣo bhikṣu mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā bhaginīm vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâyaṃ kṣamati śabdāpayituṃ “ambe” tti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā § 33.11.28A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ upāsakāṃ vā dānapatānīṃ vā vihārasvāminīṃ vā śabdāpitu- kāmo bhavati, nâpi kṣamati “ambe” ti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā atyanukālye# “viel früher (als gewöhnlich)” ☞ § 39.1, Anm. 6 § 39.1.30B7. evaṃ yūyaṃ atyanukālye gaṇḍīṃ āhaniya bhuñjatha atyanta für abhyantara : § 14.18.13B5, § 41.22.35A5 atyantare für abhyantare : § 42.7.36B2 atyāgame für abhyāgame: § 19.17.18A6 aty-āti-uṣṇam# (ati + ati + uṣṇa) “zu heiß” ⇒ ati-uṣṇam, ati-śītam, aty-āti-śītam, aty-ūṣṇam § 1.12.2A4. yadi tāva nâtyā<ti>śītam bhavati nâtyātiuṣṇaṃ, na dūradūre vihārakā bhavanti, ... § 2.10.3A4. atha dāni nâtyātiśītaṃ na câtyātiuṣṇaṃ, na dūradūre pariveṇā bhavanti aty-āti-dūram# “sehr entfernt”; < ati + ati + dūra~ ⇒ aty-āti-uṣṇam, aty-āti-śītam, aty-āsannam § 49.5.42A7. nâtyātidūraṃ nâtyāsannaṃ gantavyaṃ aty-āti-śītam# (ati + ati + śīta) “zu kalt” ⇒ ati-śītam, aty-āti-uṣṇam, aty-ūṣṇam § 1.12.2A4. yadi tāva nâtyā<ti>śītam bhavati nâtyātiuṣṇaṃ na dūradūre vihārakā bhavanti, ... § 2.10.3A4. atha dāni nâtyātiśītaṃ na câtyātiuṣṇaṃ, na dūradūre pariveṇā bhavanti atyāyakaṃ für atyāyikaṃ : § 16.7.14B2 ⇒ mātu tyāyikaṃ atyāyikaṃ ⇒ mātu tyāyikaṃ ☞ § 16.5, Anm. 1 atyāśītam für atyā<ti>śītam: § 1.12.2A4 aty-āsannam “sehr nah” ⇒ aty-āti-dūram § 8.6.9A2. nâpi dāni khurākhuraṃ. atha khalu nâtyāsanne nâtidūre § 49.5.42A7. nâtyātidūraṃ nâtyāsannaṃ gantavyaṃ aty-ūṣṇam# “sehr heiß” (vgl. Skt. aty-uṣṇam; Pā. atiunha) ⇒ ati-uṣṇam, aty-āti-uṣṇam § 3.11.4A3. yadi tāva nâtiśītaṃ bhavati nâtyūṣṇam vā corabhayam vā na bhavati atra § 41.16.34B6. kasya kṛtena tvaṃ atra dīpamūlaṃ allīno ’si? § 41.16.34B6. mā atra pānīyasmiṃ tṛṇo vā bhave prāṇako vā tena senāpatisya aphāsu bhaveya atha ⇒ atha khalu, atha dāni, atha dāniṃ, atha vā § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati paripṛcchitavyā “kim vasiṣyatha atha gamiṣyatha?” (≒ § 3.10.4A1) § 29.3.24B1. dvātriṃśac catuṣaṣṭi nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti. athôttareṇa yathânu- bhāvaṃ § 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā atha khalu “vielmehr”; vgl. Roth 1966: 48~50 § 1.8.1B6. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ § 3.7.3B5. atha khalu yadi tāva saṃghasthaviro na pratibalo bhavati ... (= § 6.6.7B3, § 6.11.8A2) § 11.5.10B5. atha khalu yadi tāva ... (= § 11.6.10B6, § 14.5.13A4, § 15.6.14A2) § 19.20.18B1. atha khalu tahiṃ cchorayitavyaṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣante na anyena gacchati § 19.21.18B1. atha khalu pracchannaprākaṭe sthāpayitavyaṃ § 20.13.20A1, § 39.6.31A3, § 39.7.31A4, § 39.9.31A6, § 40.4.32B5, § 40.8.33A1, § 40.9.33A2, § 40.11.33A4, § 41.24.35B1, § 41.25.35B2, § 41.30.35B6, § 41.31.35B7, § 42.9.36B4, § 42.12.36B6, § 42.15.36B7, § 42.16.37A1, § 42.18.37A3, § 42.20.37A4, § 42.23.37B1, § 42.29.37B6, § 42.30.37B6, § 43.10.38A7, § 43.11.38A7, § 43.15.38B3, § 43.15.38B3, § 43.16.38B5, § 44.4.39A2, § 44.5.39A3, § 44.6.39A5, § 44.7.39A6, § 44.8.39A7, § 44.9.39A7, § 44.11.39B1, § 45.4.39B6, § 45.5.39B7, § 45.6.40A1, § 45.6.40A2, § 45.7.40A2, § 46.4.40A6 et passim 69  § 41.25.35B1. atha {khalu} dāni sarvvasaṃghasya pādadhovanikā bhavati, ... § 53.8.45A7. atha khalu so pi acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo ... § 53.10.45B1. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ no karenti” tti § 54.6.46A4. yaṣṭi ... na dāni oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā vāretavyā ... atha khalu ekāṃsīkṛtena vārayitavyā (≒ § 54.10.46A6) § 54.7.46A4. nâpi kṣamati viheṭhanābhiprāyeṇa yaṣṭī vārayituṃ. atha khalu maitracittena yaṣṭī vārayitavyā vṛddhāntāto navakāntaṃ § 54.12.46A7. atha dāni ... na kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ. atha khalu acchaṭikāye utthāpiyāṇaṃ ... § 55.6.46B7. atha dāni ... na kṣamati so pi adhyupekṣituṃ. atha khalu ... acchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo § 54.13.46B1. tena pi dāni tahiṃ na āghāto bandhitavyo. atha khalu cintetavyaṃ “bahukaro eṣo asmākaṃ vinīvaraṇaṃ karoti.” § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinivaraṇaṃ me karentî”ti § 55.4.46B5. nâpi kṣamati āghātacittena vā duṣṭacittena vā geṇḍukaṃ vārayituṃ. atha khalu maitracittena hitacittena geṇḍuko vāritavyo § 55.10.47A1. na kṣamati so geṇḍuko adhyupekṣituṃ pāṭitavipāṭito. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ sīvayitavyo kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyo § 57.12.48A1. nâpi kṣamati upānahā adhyupekṣituṃ odriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ ghaṭayitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ pratyargalakā dātavyāḥ § 59.8.48B4. yadi tāva koci kṣīvati, na dāni vaktavyaṃ “jīva” ti. atha khalu yadi vṛddha- tarako bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “vandāmi” tti § 62.6.50A3. taṃ pi dāni na kṣamati yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipituṃ. atha khalu yena navakatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipitavyaṃ et passim atha dāni “wenn ... nun; gesetzt nun den Fall” (vgl. Roth 1966: 48~50); diese Wendung ist wahrscheinlich für die Schule der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins charakteristisch ⇒ atha dāniṃ § 1.12.2A5, § 1.13.2A6, § 2.11.3A4, § 4.7.4B6, § 4.12.5A5, § 19.18.18A6, § 19.23.18B2, § 20.11.19B6, § 20.12.19B7, § 20.16.20A3, § 20.18.20A3~4, § 20.19.20A4, § 39.7.31A4, § 39.8.31A4, § 39.9.31A6, § 39.10.31A7, § 40.8.33A2, § 40.10.33A3, § 40.15.33A7, § 40.16.33B1, § 40.16.33B1, § 41.26.35B2, § 41.26.35B3, § 41.27.35B4, § 41.28.35B4, § 41.32.35B7, § 41.32.36A1, § 42.13.36B6, § 42.13.36B7, § 42.16.37A1, § 42.16.37A2, § 42.17.37A2, § 42.19.37A3, § 42.20.37A5, § 42.21.37A5, § 42.21.37A6, § 42.21.37A7, § 42.22.37A7, § 42.24.37B2, § 42.25.37B2, § 42.25.37B3, § 42.26.37B3, § 42.28.37B5, § 42.30.37B6, § 42.31.37B7, § 43.11.38B1, § 43.14.38B2, § 44.6.39A3, § 44.7.39A5, § 44.7.39A6, § 47.5.40B7, § 47.6.40B7, § 47.8.41A1, § 47.9.41A2, § 48.6.41B1, § 48.7.41B2, § 48.7.41B3, § 48.9.41B5, § 49.5.42B1 § 40.8.33A2. atha dāni śrāddho bhikṣur bhavati, tato eva śrīkuṇḍikāṃ pūreti, anāpattiḥ § 41.25.35B1. atha {khalu} dāni sarvvasaṃghasya pādadhovanikā bhavati, ... § 52.7.44B6. atha dāni āha “upādhyāyācārya, bhuñjāhi”, yadi tāva <kāṃkṣati>, paribhuñjitavyaṃ. atha dāni na kāṃkṣati, vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, paribhuṃjāhi tvaṃ.” § 52.9.44B7. atha dāni piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhitvā tato eva nadīkūle ..., anāpattiḥ § 53.8.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracalāyati, na kṣamati so ’dhyupekṣituṃ (≒ § 55.6.46B7) § 53.12.45B2. atha dāni navakā bhikṣū prahāṇaśālāyāṃ pratikramanti, na kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ § 54.14.46B1. atha dāni śraddhako bhikṣur bhavati, ... § 57.7.47B5. atha dāni akṛto bhūmi-astāro bhavati, sa-upānahena prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 60.4.48B5~6. atha ca dāni bhikṣu prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako khajjati, ... § 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... 70  kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ et passim atha dāniṃ # “wenn ... nun; gesetzt nun den Fall” ⇒ atha dāni § 43.14.38B2. atha dāniṃ vṛddhatarakasya cirakālo bhavati, ... atha vā § 42.9.36B3. atha vā vāmato bhraṣṭikā bhavati, dakṣiṇato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ athātā yāṃ für adhvātā pā<dā>ṃ : § 41.29.35B6 athānamārggagatasya für adhvāna° : § 24.11.22A6 adana~ ⇒ pathy-adana~ a-darśanaṃ, a-darśanena adv. “außer Sichtweite”# ⇒ adarśanena priyaṃ √kṛ § 31.4.25B3. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... nâpi dāni pātracīvaraṃ gṛhṇitvā adarśanena gantavyaṃ § 31.4.25B4. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ, mā dāni adarśanena parijāne “hṛtaṃ, hṛtaṃ me pātracīvaram” iti gacchantasya karttavyaṃ § 50.4.43A7. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mā khalu adarśanaṃ gamiṣyasi.” a-darśanapathe “außerhalb des Gesichtskreises”# ⇒ darśana-patha~ § 51.4.44A2. nâpi <kṣamati> adarśanapathe sthātuṃ. atha khalu ud<d>eśe sthātavyaṃ darśanaśravaṇapathe a-darśanena ⇒ a-darśanaṃ adarśanena priyaṃ √kṛ # “vorziehen, zu verschwinden”? ☞ § 49.7, Anm. 5 § 49.7.42B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati “dinnā mama āṇattikā” ti adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ § 50.2.43A5. evaṃ ca tvaṃ mama piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karesi § 50.3.43A5. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati nīhārikapiṇḍapātena piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ § 50.8.43B4. nâpi kṣamati nīhārapiṇḍapātenâpi “adhyeṣṭo mayā piṇḍapātanīhārako” ti adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ adas~ § 41.21.35A4. anyo ’sau tena kālena tena samaye[na] .. .. bhavati agrakulikasya putro adāniyā# ⇒ dāniyā adbhuta-dharmma~ (BHS) § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ ... vaipulyâdbhutadharmmā (Hs. °âdbhutādh°) adya § 1.5.1B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko pāñcadaśiko sandhipoṣadho bhaviṣyati? § 1.7.1B6. āyuṣman adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhipoṣadho vā (≒ § 2.5.2B5) § 2.5.2B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho caturddaśiko vā ... § 31.16.26A2. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullapitavyaṃ āgantukehi “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ ettha vasatha, ghuṇaviddhā tave, ...” § 31.24.26A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati tehi āgantukehi nevāsikāṃ kutsiya haṃbhiya “āyuṣmann, adyâpi yūyaṃ iha vasatha. ...” § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati”, vaktavyaṃ “prāgo tāva adyâpi. āraṇyakâpi tāva nâgacchanti” § 39.24.32A2. dānapatir āgato bhavati, āha “bhante, āhaṇatha gaṇḍiṃ. anukālyo ’va tāva adyâpi bhavati”, vaktavyaṃ “prāgo tāva adyâpi. grāmāntikā ca bhikṣavo nâgacchanti” § 39.16.31B4. yadi tāva anukalyo adyâpi tāva bhavati, ... usw. a-drāhaya- ⇒ ā-drāhaya- adhastā# “unten”; < Skt. adhastāt § 18.4.15B3. yāni sārāṇi ca dṛḍhāni ca sthūlāni ca kāṣṭhāni tāny adhastā dātavyāni adhikaraṇa~ “Rechtsfall” § 38.6.30B2. kasya tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto 71  saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? adhikaraṇika~ “Querulant” oder “Prozesshansel”; vgl. CPD, s.v. ☞ § 38.3, Anm. 6 § 38.3.30A6. yadi tāva so bhavati ... anarthakuśalo vā abhinīhārakuśalo vā kalahakārako vā bhaṇḍanakārako vā bhāṣyakārako vā adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā allīyāhi” tti § 38.6.30B1. yadi ... so ca bhikṣu bhavati kalahakārako bhaṇḍanakārako bhāṣyakāro adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā jalpāhi” tti adhi-√kṛ § 23.5.21B2. atha dāni madhya<mako vihāra>ko bhavati, madhyamake pi eṣo eva paryāyo ananyo adhikṛto adhi-√gam “finden” § 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “ ... na ca vo Māraḥ pāpīyāṃ avatāram adhigamiṣyati saddharmmasya antarddhānāya sa<ṃ>mohāya.” adhi-vāsaya- (BHS) “(Einladung) annehmen” § 4.5.4B2. eṣo dāni koci saṃghaṃ bhaktena śuvetanāya nimantreti, na dāni saṃgha- sthavireṇa gatāgatasya adhivāsayitavyaṃ § 4.5.4B3. sākāraṃ soddeśaṃ pṛcchiyāṇaṃ tato ’dhivāsayitavyaṃ (= § 6.5.7B2; ≒ § 5.5.6B2) § 4.6.4B3. nâpi dāni “adhivāsita<ṃ> mayê”ti yatr’ ollagnāye āsitavyaṃ (≒ § 5.6.6B2, § 6.6.7B3) § 6.5.7B2. nâpi kṣamati gatāgatasya adhivāsituṃ § 49.1.41B7. so dāni na kahiṃci adhivāsayati adhiṣṭhāna~ “Sitz” ☞ § 50.8, Anm. 2 § 50.8.43B4. vihārasya prahāṇake dve āsanāni prajñapiya adhiṣṭhānāṃ pratigrāhāpiya āsitavyaṃ adhīna~ § 43.13.38B2. māsavārikasya vā pakṣa<vārika>sya vā adhīnaṃ (Hs. ādh°) bhavati § 48.6.41B1. stūpikaṃ vā sāṃghikaṃ vā kāryaṃ adhīnaṃ bhavati a-dhotaka~# “ungewaschen, unsauber”; vgl. Pā. a-dhota ⇒ dhota~ § 18.8.15B6. tāni kuṇḍakāni vā kaṭāhakāni vā nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ saprāṇakāni vā adhotakāni vā § 21.5.20B3. na kṣamati adhotakehi pādakehi kaṭhinaṃ okramituṃ § 43.1.38A2. sthālīyo piṭharikā adhotakā anupaliptā nakulamūṣikehi ālupyamānā ... § 43.15.38B3. adhotakam vā anupaliptakam vā dayituṃ § 50.6.43B2. nâpi dāni adhotakehi hastehi aprayatehi gṛhṇitavyaṃ adhy-ā-cara- (BHS, SWTF I 485a) “(etwas Schlechtes) ausführen, tun” § 42.5.36B1. tatra nāma yūyaṃ idam evaṃrūpaṃ pāpakarmmam akuśalan dharmmam adhyācariṣyatha § 49.1.41B6. ahaṃ ca tatra kiñcid eva akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyāmi (≒ § 49.2.42A5) § 49.1.41B7. yadi tvaṃ tatra kiṃci akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyasi, ... adhy-ā-√vas “bewohnen” § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi no parihāṇi.” adhy-iṣṭa~# “gebeten”; Hypersanskritismus für Pā. ajjhiṭṭha?; vgl. Skt. adhyīṣṭa; sonst adhyeṣṭa~ in diesem Text ⇒ adhy-eṣa- § 50.4.43A7. tena adhyiṣṭena samānena duve pātrāṇy ādāya praviśitavyaṃ adhy-upekṣa- (BHS) (°upa-√īkṣ) “hinwegsehen” § 4.11.5A3. atha dāni so manuṣyo anācīrṇṇadāno vā bhavati, tintiṇo vā bhavati, na dāni adhyupekṣitavyaṃ, vaktavyaṃ ... § 11.5.10B5. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ utpādakam vā ... § 11.6.10B6. na dāni vihāro adhyupekṣitavyo oddirṇṇako praluggako acaukṣo vā ... § 11.9.11A1. tato na kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ vā pāṭitavipāṭitam vā adhyupekṣituṃ (≒ § 13.12.12B4) § 12.18.12A5. nâpi kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, mañcā vā pīṭhā vā oddriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā adhyupekṣituṃ 72  § 14.5.13A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati so vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ ondriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ... § 17.10.15A4. nâpi dāni adhyupekṣitavyaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ... omayilamayilā vā pāṭitavipāṭitā vā acaukṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā § 18.13.16A2. riktakāṃ varccakumbhikāṃ paśyati, na tadā adhyupekṣitavyaṃ § 21.8.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggakaṃ vā paluggakaṃ ... § 22.7.21A3. nâpi kṣamati sā cakkalī adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggikā vā paluggikā vā ... § 23.7.21B4. nâpi kṣamati vihārako adhyupekṣituṃ oddriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ... § 25.16.23A3. nâpi kṣamati pātraṃ adhyupekṣituṃ phalakena vā khajjantaṃ khaṇḍaṃ vā cchidram vā § 43.11.38A7. nâpi dāni kalpikakuṭī adhyupekṣitavyā oddriṇṇakā vā ... apratisaṃskṛtā vā § 44.9.39A7. na dāni kṣamati vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ uppaṃsulo vā acaukṣo vā § 44.11.39B1. na kṣamati cīvaraṃ adhyupekṣituṃ cikkaṇaṃ vā apratisaṃskṛtaṃ vā omayilamayilam vā pāṭitavipāṭitam vā § 53.8.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracalāyati, na kṣamati so ’dhyupekṣituṃ (≒ § 55.6.46B7) § 54.8.46A4. ete dāni bhikṣuḥ pracalāyanti, nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ § 54.12.46A7. atha dāni bhikṣu<sya> upādhyāyācāryā pracalāyanti, na kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ § 55.10.47A1. na kṣamati so geṇḍuko adhyupekṣituṃ pāṭitavipāṭito § 56.7.47A7. nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 57.12.48A1. nâpi kṣamati upānahā adhyupekṣituṃ odriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā usw. adhy-eṣa- (BHS, SWTF) “ersuchen, bitten” ⇒ adhy-iṣṭa~ § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo “tvaṃ śalākāṃ vāresi” “tvaṃ śalākāṃ praticchesi” (≒ § 3.8.3B7) § 1.9.2A1. tena yathâdhyeṣṭena śalākā vārayitavyā, dvitīyena pratīcchitavyā § 1.13.2A6. atha dāni sarvvarātrikā bhavati, tato adhyeṣitavyaṃ “tvaṃ bhāṣayesî”ti. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇaṃ sarvvarātriṃ dharmmavṛṣṭiye vītināmiyānaṃ ... (≒ § 2.11. 3A5) § 2.7.2B7. yo pratibalo bhaviṣyati, so adhyeṣitavyo “tvaṃ śalākāṃ vārayiṣyasi” ... § 2.11.3A4. saṃghasthaviro na pratibalo bhavati dvitīyasthavireṇa adhyeṣitavyaṃ § 3.12.4A4. atha dāni sarvvarātrikā bhavati, bhāṣaṇakā adhyeṣitavyāḥ: “tvayā bhāṣitavyaṃ tvayā bhāṣitavyan” ti. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇaṃ ... § 26.6.23B1. atha dāni daṇḍakarmma pratidinnaṃ bhavati, pārṣṇivadhrā omuñcitavyā, dvitīyakālikasya lābhagrāha<ka>ṃ adhyeṣitvā gantavyaṃ § 42.27.37B4. yentākavārikā adhyeṣitavyāḥ § 50.1.43A1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā bhikṣu adhyeṣṭo (Hs. °eṣṭā) “āyuṣman, icchāmi piṇḍa- pātaṃ nikkāliyamānaṃ.” § 50.2.43A4. so dāni āha “āyuṣman, na tvaṃ mayā adhyeṣṭo "icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyamānaṃ"?” § 50.2.43A5. evaṃ ca tvaṃ mama piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karesi § 50.3.43A5. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati nīhārikapiṇḍapātena piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ § 50.4.43A6. nimantraṇam bhavati, bhikṣu jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, na pratibalo gantuṃ, piṇḍapātanīhārako adhyeṣitavyo § 50.8.43B4. nâpi kṣamati nīhārapiṇḍapātenâpi “adhyeṣṭo mayā piṇḍapātanīhārako” ti adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ adhvan~ “Weg, Reise” ⇒ pantha~, mārgga~ § 18.45.17A6. ete bhikṣu sārthena sārddham adhvānaṃ gacchaṃti, ... § 19.37.19A1. eṣo bhikṣuḥ sārthena samānam adhvānaṃ gacchati, praśvāsakṛto bhavati § 41.12.34B1. bhūtapūrvvam bhikṣavo atītam adhvānaṃ eta<r>hiṃ ca nagaraṃ Vārāṇasī Kāśijanapado § 57.11.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ adhvānam āgato bhavati, upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā 73  bhavanti, ... adhvāta~# “trocken” ☞ § 41.24, Anm. 5 ⇒ adhvāpaya-, adhvāvaya- § 41.24.35B1. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ adhvātā bhavanti tato praveśayitavyo § 41.29.35B6. adhvātā pā<dā>ṃ (Hs. athātā yāṃ) upānahāyāṃ prakṣipitavyaṃ adhvāna-mārgga-gata~# “unterwegs”; vgl. BHS. adhvāna-mārga, Pā. addhāna-magga; SWTF, s.v. adhvāna-mārga-pratipanna § 24.11.22A6. etasya dāni bhikṣusya gocaraṃ praviśantasya adhvānamārggagatasya vā kheṭo āgacchati, cchoriya pādena marditavyo adhvāpaya-#, adhvāvaya-# “trocknen”? ☞ § 17.9, Anm. 6, § 25.7, Anm. 2 ⇒ adhvāta~ § 17.9.15A4. anyair udakaṃ pariharttavyaḥ, anyehi adhvāpayitavyaṃ, anyehi gomaya- kārṣī dātavyā § 25.7.22B4. adhvāvayantena nâpi kṣamati sthitakena adhvāpayituṃ. atha khalu upaviṣṭena adhvāpayitavyaṃ adhvāvaya- ⇒ adhvāpaya- an-agāra~ (Skt, SWTF, Pā), an-āgāra~ (BHS[Mvu]; SWTF, Pā) “hauslos, unbehaust; Hausloser (sc. Bettelmönch)” ⇒ an-agārikā~, āgāra~, sāgāra~ § 36.6.29B5. sāgārā (Hs. sāgarā) cânagārā (Hs. ca an°) ca ubhe anyonyaniśritā (vs) § 36.6.29B5. sāgārās tu (Hs. sāgārāṣṭraṃ) ’nagārāṇāṃ saṃprayacchanti dakṣiṇāṃ (vs) § 36.6.29B5. anāgārā pragṛhṇanti pratissayavinodanā<ṃ> (Hs. pratisaṃya{mya}v°) (vs) an-agārikā~ (BHS, SWTF) “Hauslosigkeit” ⇒ an-agāra~, an-āgāra~, āgāra~, sāgāra~ § 11.1.10B3. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ śraddhayā-d-āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ ... § 12.1.11A6. śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ tathāgatam evôddiśya āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ anantakaṃ für anantarikaṃ : § 62.6.50A2 anantarika~ ⇒ ānantarika~ anabhisaṃskṛtāṃ für apratisaṃskṛtāṃ : § 17.2.14B5 an-anya~ ⇒ anya~ § 23.5.21B2. atha dāni madhya<mako vihāra>ko bhavati, madhyamake pi eṣo eva paryāyo ananyo adhikṛto anartha-kuśala~ “zu nichts Gutem taugend”; vgl. Pā. an-attha-kusala ☞ § 38.3, Anm. 4 § 38.3.30A6. yadi tāva so bhavati ... anarthakuśalo vā abhinīhārakuśalo vā kalahakārako vā bhaṇḍanakārako vā bhāṣyakārako vā adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā allīyāhi” tti analpakena# “reichlich”; vgl. SWTF. an-alpaka, Pā. anappaka § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... amṛtam analpakena devamanuṣyāṃ saṃvibhajanto, prāṇikoṭī- niyutaśatasahasrāṇi amṛtam anuprāpayanto, ... anavarāgra-jāti-jarā-maraṇa-saṃsāra-kāntāra-naraka-vidurgga~# “der Urwald des anfang- und endlosen Kreislaufes von Geburt, Alter und Tod und die Höllenqualen” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... anavarāgrajātijarāmaraṇasaṃsārakāntāranarakavidurggān mahāprapātato abhyuddharitvā ... an-ākalpa-sampanna~# “eine äußere Erscheinung habend, die zu wünschen übrigläßt”; vgl. CPD, s.v. an-ākappa-sampanna (“not decently attired”) ☞ § 7.1, Anm. 4 § 7.1.8A6. anākalpasampannāḥ anīryāpathasampannāḥ (= § 9.1.9B5) an-āgāra~ ⇒ an-agāra~ an-ācāra~ § 7.6.8B4. ācāraṃ śekhayitavyo anācārato vārayitavyo (= § 9.5.10A2) § 41.19.35A3. ācāraṃ śikṣitaṃ śreyo anācāraṃ na śikṣitaṃ (vs) an-ācīrṇṇa-dāna~# “nicht gewohnt sein, zu geben” § 4.11.5A3. atha dāni so manuṣyo anācīrṇṇadāno vā bhavati, ... an-āttamanas~ (SWTF) “unzufrieden” ⇒ ātta-manas~ § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... sacet paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati anāttamano. <na> ca paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati citte āttamano abhiraddho an-āpatti~ “kein Vergehen” § 11.11.11A3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāviddhako vā bhavati virecanapītako vā glānako vā bhavati, vastraṃ puggalikaṃ antarīkaraṇaṃ dadiya caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ § 18.7.15B6. atha dāni prapātaniśrita bhavati varcakuṭī, kiñ câpi tahi yyeva udakaṃ patati, 74  anāpattiḥ § 18.17.16A5. kiṃcâpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati saṃkaraṃ vā, anāpattiḥ § 20.12.20A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati ... , kiñ câpi saṃghavigrahe dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, anāpattiḥ § 21.5.20B3. atha dāni niṣaṇṇo bāhirakāṃ pādāṃ kṛtvā sūtraṃ valento āsati, anāpattiḥ § 23.4.2.21B1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śeyyāṃ prajñapayitukāmo bhavati, kiñ câpi dīpakaṃ praveśeti, anāpattiḥ § 23.6.4.21B4. pādām vā dhovati ... “rajonigrahaṃ kāheti” tti, anāpattiḥ § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ... pratisaṃlīnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ § 31.3.25B3. ekasyâpi apāvuraṇi bhavati, sarvveṣām anāpattiḥ § 40.8.33A2. atha dāni śrāddho bhikṣur bhavati, tato eva śrīkuṇḍikāṃ pūreti, anāpattiḥ § 40.16.33B1. kiñ câpi deti, anāpattiḥ § 40.16.33B2. kiñ câpi tato yeva pibati ... anāpattiḥ § 42.16.37A2. kiñ câpi anāpṛcchitvā kareti, anāpattiḥ § 42.21.37A7. kiñ câpi yāvadarthaṃ upanenti, anāpattiḥ § 42.22.37A7. nābhimātraṃ vā udakaṃ, anāpattiḥ § 42.30.37B6. kiñ câpi praghuṣṭena svareṇa praśnā visarjenti, anāpattiḥ § 57.10.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi sa-upānaho upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā mūle upaviśati, anāpattiḥ § 57.11.48A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ adhvānam āgato bhavati, upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, nadīkūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā pādāṃ dhoviya prasphoṭeti, anāpattiḥ § 60.5.48B7. kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu<ṃ> mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ § 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ usw. an-ā-pṛcchitvā ⇒ ā-√pṛcch an-ābhogena# “unwillkürlich” ☞ § 59.4, Anm. 1 § 59.4.48A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya anābhogena kṣīvikā āgacchati vinodayitavyaṃ ... an-ārya~ § 41.19.35A4. ācāreṇa anāryā āryā jātāvakrāntāḥ (vs) an-āsrava~ (BHS, SWTF) “frei von verderblichen Einflüssen” § 4.16.5B3. apare mārggam bhāvayitvā parinirvvānti anāsravā (Hs. °āśravā) (vs) anāśravā für anāsravā : § 4.16.5B3 a-nitya~ “vergänglich” § 51.6.44A3. “cakṣur anityā yāva mano anityan.” ti sthātavyaṃ a-niyata~ (BHS, SWTF) “unbestimmter Fall” (die dritte Gruppe der Prātimokṣa-Regeln) § 7.4.8B2. triṃśato pi na pāreti, dve aniyatāṃ grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca. dve aniyatā na pāreti, ... (≒ § 9.4.10A1) a-nirmmādita~, a-nirmmāditaka~ ⇒ nirmmādaya- an-īryāpatha-sampanna~# “eine Haltung habend, die zu wünschen übrigläßt”; vgl. SWTF, s.v. īryāpatha-sampanna § 7.1.8A6. anākalpasampannāḥ anīryāpathasampannāḥ (= § 9.1.9B5) anukampā~ § 11.1.10B2. glānakānāñ ca bhikṣūṇāṃ anukampārthaṃ (= § 12.1.11A6) anukampikā~ § 4.18.5B7. mahābhiṣaṅkana ca anukampikā (lies: ānu° [m.c.] ?)(vs) anu-kampita~ ⇒ devānukampita~ anukarṇṇaṃ für anukallaṃ : § 6.8.7B6 anukarṇṇatarakaṃ für anukallatarakaṃ : § 5.8.6B6 anukalya~ ⇒ anukālya~ anukallaṃ# “frühzeitig” ☞ § 4.8, Anm. 1 ⇒ aty-anukālye, anukalya~, anukalla-tarakaṃ, 75  anukālaṃ, anukālya~, anukālyaṃ, kalyatas, kallato, *kallikaṃ, kālyam § 6.8.7B6. yadi tāva hemantakālo bhavati, anukallaṃ (Hs. °karṇṇaṃ) praviśitavyaṃ § 6.8.7B6. varṣārātro bhavati, devāntareṇa anukallaṃ (Hs. °karṇṇaṃ) praviśitavyaṃ anukalla-tarakaṃ# “sehr frühzeitig” ☞ § 4.8, Anm. 1 ⇒ aty-anukālye, anukalya~, anukallaṃ, anukālaṃ, anukālya~, anukālyaṃ, kalyatas, kallato, *kallikaṃ, kālyam § 5.8.6B6. yadi tāva hemantakālo bhavati, anukallatarakaṃ praviśitavyaṃ ... atha dāni grīṣmakālo bhavati uṣṇasantāpena anukallatarakaṃ (Hs. °karṇṇata°) praviśitavyaṃ anukāyaṃ# “am Körper entlang” ☞ § 30.4, Anm. 2 § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati ... lāṅgulaṃ anukāyaṃ āyacchi{hi}tvā ... vāmaṃ bāhām anukāyaṃ prasārayitvā § 30.7.25A4. dakṣiṇāṃ bāhāṃ śirasy upanidhāya, vāmāṃ bāhāṃ anukāyaṃ prasāritvā ... anukālaṃ “frühzeitig”# ☞ § 4.8, Anm. 1 ⇒ aty-anukālye, anukalya~, anukallaṃ, anukalla- tarakaṃ, anukālya~, anukālyaṃ, kalyatas, kallato, kālyam § 4.8.4B6. yadi tāva hemanto bhavati, anukālaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 6.8.7B6. atha dāni grīṣmakālo bhavati, anukālaṃ uṣṇa{ṃ}śaṃkena praviśitavyaṃ anukālya~#, anukalya~# “frühzeitig; früh”; anukālyaṃ# “beizeiten; frühzeitig; früh”; vgl. Pkt. aṇualla “früher Morgen” ☞ § 4.8, Anm. 1 ⇒ aty-anukālye, anukallaṃ, anukalla-tarakaṃ, anukālaṃ, kalyatas, kallato, kālyam § 4.8.4B6. atha dāni grīṣmakālo bhavati, śītalakasaṃgena anukālyaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 4.8.4B7. atha dāni varṣārātro kālo bhavati, devāntarā yeva anukālyaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 39.16.31B4. yadi tāva anukalyo adyâpi tāva bhavati, tatraỿva sthānacaṃkrama- niṣadyāyogam anuyuktehi viharitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā § 39.28.32A5. yadi tāva anukālyo bhavati, ... sthānacaṃkramaniṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā § 39.24.32A2. dānapatir āgato bhavati, āha “bhante, āhaṇatha gaṇḍiṃ. anukālyo (“die rechte Zeit”?; ☞ § 39.24, Anm. 1) ’va tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 49.7.42B5. glānasya anukālyaṃ āhāraṃ datvā sahitakehi nirddhāvitavyaṃ anu-kūla~ (1) “gehorsam” § 38.4.30A7. atha dāni so bhavati bhadrako guṇavān anuddhato śikṣākāmo anukūlo anunnaḍo acapalo, pṛcchitavyo “kiṃ kāryaṃ?” § 41.18.35A1. yadi yuṣmākaṃ anukūlaṃ bhave (2) “angenehm” § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” anuga~ ⇒ vratānuga~ anu-√gam § 8.6.9A2. ātmano cīvarakaṃ gṛhṇiya pṛṣṭhato ’nugantavyaṃ § 8.12.9B1. cetiyaṃ vandantasya pṛṣṭhato ’nugantavyaṃ anugraha~ “Vorrat (an Lebensmitteln)” (?) ☞ § 4.7, Anm. 2 § 4.7.4B5. yadi tāva anugraho bhavati, anugraho sādhayitavyo. anugraho na bhavati, bhaktāni bhavanti, bhaktāni uddiśitavyāni (≒ § 5.7.6B4, § 6.7.7B5) § 31.27.26B1. atha dāni tahiṃ vihārake anugraho bhavati, ... § 31.30.26B4. atha aparejjukāto yadi tāva bāhirakaṃ bhaktaṃ bhavati, anugraho vā bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, mā piṇḍāye praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha.” § 39.1.30B6. āraṇyakānāñ ca grāmāntikānāñ ca anugraho sādhīyati § 43.3.38A3. etaṃ dāni saṃghasya anugraho bhavati § 43.3.38A3. tena saṃghasya anugraho sādhayitavyo anu-caṃkrama- (BHS, SWTF) “entlangwandern”; vgl. Pā. anucaṅkamati § 11.1.10B2. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānās tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanti anuvicaranti (= § 12.1.11A5, § 21.1.20A7; ≒ § 11.1.10B3, § 12.1.11A6) § 11.2.10B3. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanto anuvicaranto ... (= § 12.2.11A6, § 13.2.12A6, § 15.2.13B7, § 16.2.14A5, § 17.2.14B5, 76  § 21.2.20A7, § 24.1.21B7; ≒ § 23.1.21A4, § 43.1.38A1) anu-jānā- “(der Buddha) billigt, heißt gut” (vgl. SWTF, Poṣ[Hu] 261, Anm. 2, DP) ⇒ anu-jāne- § 20.5.19B2. tena hi anujānāmi dantakāṣṭhaṃ prāmāṇikaṃ mahāntaṃ ṣoḍaśāṅgulaṃ § 42.1.36A2. anujānātu bhagavān śrāvakānāṃ jentākaṃ § 42.1.36A2. tena hi anujānāmi anu-jāne- “warten”#; vgl. Pā. anu-jāneti ⇒ anu-jānā- § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ, yadā navakāḥ santarpitā bhavanti, upagrāyanti pānīyaṃ vā pibanti, hastām vā ukkaḍḍhiya āsanti anujñā~ “Erlaubnis” § 52.7.44B7. yaṃ kālaṃ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā anujñā dinnā bhavati, tato paribhuñjitavyaṃ anu-√jñā ⇒ anu-jānā-, anu-jāne- an-uddhata~ “nicht überheblich” § 38.4.30A6. atha dāni so bhavati bhadrako guṇavān anuddhato śikṣākāmo anukūlo anunnaḍo acapalo, pṛcchitavyo “kiṃ kāryaṃ?” § 38.7.30B2. so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato anunnaḍo ... an-unnaḍa~ (BHS) “nicht leichtfertig”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. unnaḍa; GDhp, S. 279~280; Bollée 1983: 110; Pā. an-unnala, an-unnaḷa (“not boisterous, controlled” [DP I 435, s.v. unnala]) § 38.4.30A7. atha dāni so bhavati bhadrako guṇavān anuddhato śikṣākāmo anukūlo anunnaḍo acapalo, pṛcchitavyo “kiṃ kāryaṃ?” § 38.7.30B2. so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato anunnaḍo acapalo amukharo apragalbho aprakīrṇṇavāco, ... anu-padam § 49.1.42A2. so ... tasyaỿva anupadam eva nirddhāvito anuparidhārya für °parivārya : § 29.3.24B1 anu-parinda- (BHS) “anvertrauen”; vgl. BHSG, S. 220. parinda-ti, parīnda-ti; BHSD, s.v. anu- parindāmi ☞ § 4.11, Anm. 3 ⇒ paritta~, parītta~, parinda- § 14.10.13B1. ye tatra bhavanti gopālakā vā paśupālakā vā teṣāṃ so vihāro anuparindi- tavyo ... “eṣo tumhākaṃ vihārako anuparindito bhavatu!” evaṃ anuparindiyāṇa gantavyaṃ § 14.18.13B6. ye tatra prativeśikā bhavanti, teṣām anuparinditavyaṃ “dīrghāyu, eṣo vihārako tumhāṇaṃ anuparindito bhavatu. ...” evaṃ parindiya gantavyaṃ anu-pari-vartta- “sich umdrehen” § 28.8.24A4~5. anuparivarttantena (Hs. anuvari°) tadā na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā <anu>parivarttituṃ. atha khalu abhidakṣiṇaṃ agrato karentena anuparivarttitavyaṃ § 49.1.42A2. so dāni tato yeva anuparivarttiya mahātmehi kulehi ipsitânnāni bhukt<v>ā ... anu-pari-vāraya- (BHS) “einschließen” § 29.3.24B1. ekaṃ nāgaṃ dve nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti, dve nāgā catvāri nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti, catvāri aṣṭa, aṣṭa ṣoḍaśa, ṣoḍaśa <dvātriṃśad>, dvātriṃśac catuṣaṣṭi nāgā anupa<ri>vārya niṣīdanti an-upalipta~ (BHS, SWTF) ⇒ an-upaliptaka~, upa-limpa-, su-lipta~ (1) “nicht befleckt, unberührt” § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... lābhāgrayaśograprāpto, lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātaśayyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārāṇāṃ tatra ca anupaliptaḥ padmam iva jalena (2) “nicht (mit Tünche?) bestrichen”#(?) ☞ § 43.1, Anm. 2 § 43.1.38A2. sthālīyo piṭharikā adhotakā anupaliptā nakulamūṣikehi ālupyamānā ... an-upaliptaka~# “nicht (mit Tünche?) bestrichen” (?) ☞ § 43.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ an-upalipta~, upa- limpa-, su-lipta~ § 43.15.38B3. upamakṣitaṃ vā raṃgarañjitaṃ vā adhotakam vā anupaliptakam vā dayituṃ an-upahasta~# “nicht griffbereit” ⇒ upahasta~ § 45.4.39B5. grāmapraveśanikaṃ nivāsanaṃ anupahastaṃ kṛtvā ... 77  § 45.5.39B6. vihāracaraṇa<ka>ṃ nivāsanaṃ anupahastaṃ kariyāṇaṃ ... anu-pāle- (Pā) “sich kümmern”; < Skt. anu-pālayati ⇒ pālaya-, prati-pālaya-, prati-pāle- § 31.4.25B3. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... atha khalu anupāletavyo anupūrvveṇa “allmählich” § 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā. gomayapiṇḍikā vā paṭipaṭikāye sthapetavyā yathânupūrvveṇa gaccheya anu-pra-viṣṭa~ § 44.1.38B7. sarvvaṃ karddamehi anupraviṣṭaṃ § 44.6.39A4. tatraỿva sarvvaṃ bhūmīye anupraviṣṭo bhavati anu-pra-√śaṃs# “(ebenso) preisen” ⇒ pra-√śaṃs § 37.5.30A4. yasya praśaṃsā tam anupraśaṃśe teṣāṃ guṇaṃ eva vade na doṣan (vs) anu-prāpaya-# “erreichen lassen, führen”; Kaus. von Skt. anu-pra-√āp § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... amṛtam analpakena devamanuṣyāṃ saṃvibhajanto, prāṇikoṭī- niyutaśatasahasrāṇi amṛtam anuprāpayanto, ... anu-baddha~ § 41.5.34A2. so dāni praduṣṭacitto sthavirasya pṛṣṭhimena pṛṣṭhimaṃ anubaddho anubhāga~ “zusätzliche Portion (der Speise)”#; vgl. Pā. anubhāga (“a supplementary share, what is left over” [CPD, s.v.]; “an additional share” [DP, s.v.]) ☞ § 50.6, Anm. 1 § 50.6.43B2. yadi tāvad yāvadarthaṃ bhaktaṃ dīyati, prakṛty’ eva ātmano bhaktato tasya pātraṃ pūretavyaṃ. anubhāgo ātmano gṛhṇitavyo anubhāva~ § 29.3.24B1. dvātriṃśac catuṣaṣṭi nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti. athôttareṇa yathânubhāvaṃ anu-modāpaya-# “freudig annehmen” (Kausativ auf -āpayati mit nicht-kausativer Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG §§ 38.58f.); vgl. SWTF, s.v. anu-mud-; CPD, s.v. anu-modati § 1.11.2A3. deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyaṃ § 2.9.3A2. deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ deyadharmmo anumodāpayitavyo § 3.10.4A2. deyadharmma pratiṣṭhāpayitavyo deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyo anu-yukta~ ⇒ sthāna-caṃkramānuyukta~ § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ na karmmārāmā na karmmaratāḥ na karmmārāmatānuyogam anuyuktā viharanti (≒ § 12.1.11A5, § 21.1.20A7) § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ ... na bhāṣyārāmāḥ na bhāṣyaratāḥ, na bhāṣyārāmatānuyogam anuyuktā viharanti, na nidrārāmāḥ na nidrāratāḥ, na nidrārāmatānuyogam anuyuktā viharanti (= § 12.1.11A5) § 39.16.31B4. tatraỿva sthānacaṃkramaniṣadyāyogam anuyuktehi (Hs. °yuktena) viharitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā § 39.28.32A6. ārāmehi vṛkṣamūlehi ... sthānacaṃkramaniṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā § 49.1.42A2. ye dāni bhikṣū ... sthānacaṃkrama{sthāna}niṣadyâyogam anuyuktā viharanti anuyoga~ ⇒ karmmārāmatānuyoga~, nidrārāmatānuyoga~, bhāṣyārāmatānuyoga~, sthāna- caṃkrama-niṣadyānuyoga~ anurāgatam (BHS) “herzlich willkommen!” ☞ § 31.28, Anm. 3 ⇒ svāgatam § 31.28.26B3. atha khalu āgantukānāṃ ehisvāgataṃ kartta<vya>ṃ “entu āyuṣmanto, svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. ...” § 32.11.27B4. pratisaṃmodayitavyaṃ “svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. ...” anuvarivarttantena für anupariv° : § 28.8.24A4 anu-vātam (SWTF) “mit dem Wind”; vgl. Skt. anu-vāte ⇒ apa-vātam § 18.46.17A6. nâpi dāni anuvātaṃ karttavyaṃ, mā sarvvasārthaṃ gandhena vyābaheyyā (≒ § 18.48.17A7, § 19.38.19A2) § 19.40.19A2. nâpi dāni anuv<ātaṃ k>artt{it}avyaṃ. apavātaṃ karttavyaṃ § 57.11.48A1. ta<ṃ> pi dāni na kṣamati vṛddhatarakasya vā anuvātaṃ prasphoṭayituṃ § 62.11.50A7. vātakarmma ... nâpi dāni kṣamati anuvātaṃ karttuṃ, mā gandhena vyābaheyyā anu-vāmam# “zur Linken, links” ☞ § 30.5, Anm. 1 ⇒ apa-vāmaṃ, vāma~ 78  § 4.9.5A1. kathaṃ āsanā prajñaptāḥ, atidakṣiṇaṃ anuvāmaṃ (Hs. °vāmāṃ) § 4.9.5A1. atha dāni pretakaraṇīye anuvāmaṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati, tathā yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ anu-vi-cara- (BHS, SWTF) “umhergehen” § 11.1.10B2. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānās tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanti anuvicaranti (= § 12.1.11A5, § 21.1.20A7; ≒ § 11.1.10B3, § 12.1.11A6) § 11.2.10B3. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanto anu- vicaranto ... (= § 12.2.11A6, § 13.2.12A6, § 15.2.13B7, § 16.2.14A5, § 17.2.14B5, § 21.2.20A7, § 24.1.22A1; ≒ § 43.1.38A1) anu-√śās ⇒ anu-śāsaya- § 7.1.8A5. te dāni upasaṃpādiya na ovadanti, na anuśāsanti § 7.3.8B1. evaṃ dāṇi yūyaṃ upasaṃpādiya naỿv’ ovadatha nânuśāsatha § 7.5.8B3. śekhayitavyo anuśāsayitavyo kālyaṃ madhyantikaṃ sāyaṃ abhidharmmeṇa vā abhivinayena vā § 7.7.8B5. upādhyāyo śraddhevihāri upasaṃpādiya na ovadati, na anuśāsati, na uddiśati § 8.2.8B6. kathaṃ ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ (≒ § 10.2.10A4) § 9.1.9B4. te dāni ... niśrayaṃ dapiya naỿva antevāsi ovadanti na anuśāsanti § 9.2.9B6. evan nāma yūyaṃ ... antevāsikāṃ na ovadatha nânuśāsatha (≒ § 9.3.9B7) anu-śāsaya- (BHS) “belehren” (nicht-kausativ); vgl. BHSG § 38.21, S. 233, s.v. śās; Pā. anusāseti ⇒ anu-√śās § 7.2.8A7. yūyaṃ upasaṃpādetha, upasaṃpādiya na ovadatha na anuśāsayatha aneka-paryāyeṇa (SWTF) “auf mannigfaltige Weise”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. paryāya § 4.11.5A3. bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno paritto § 5.10.7A1. bhagavatânekaparyāyeṇa glāno parītto § 6.10.8A1. bhagavatā ca anekaparyāyeṇa glāno parindito § 42.5.36A7. nâhaṃ ... anekaparyāyeṇa metraṃ kāyakarmma vadāmi ... § 50.5.43A7. vaktavyaṃ “dīrghāyu, bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno pari<ṃ>dito. ...” anekāya#, anekāye#, anekāyo# “gelegentlich, manchmal” ☞ § 4.6, Anm. 2 § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi jātakaṃ bhaveyaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya, sandhi vā cchinno, agnidāho vā rājakulāto vā upadravo, ḍhossā vā viṭā vā vātaputro vā viheṭhanābhiprāyā nimantrayeṃsu § 4.10.5A2. anekāyo (Hs. anaikāyo) tatra garbharūpāṇi sopāpitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ, kāṃsa- bhājanāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ § 5.9.6B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi (Loc. pl.) dārakadārikā vā sovāpitā bhaveṃsu § 6.6.7B3. anekāye tahiṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya rājabhayaṃ vā corabhayam vā ... § 6.9.7B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi garbharūpā sovāpitāni bhaveṃsu, bhājanakāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ § 15.7.14A3. cīvaravaṃśo tāva pratyavekṣitavyo. anekāye prāṇakehi khāditako bhavati § 18.40.17A2. anekāye bhikṣuṇikā upaviṣṭā bhaveya § 22.4.21A1. cakkalī utkṣipitavyā. nâpi dāni sahasā. anekāyo mā (☞ § 22.4, Anm. 2) tarhi dīrghako praviṣṭo bhaveya tti § 39.8.31A5. anekāye āraṇyakānāṃ co<ra>bhayaṃ vā bhaveya udakabhayaṃ vā siṃha- bhayaṃ vā vyāghrabhayaṃ vā § 39.20.31B7. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, ... jānitavyaṃ, anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparo<dho> vā bhave corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ, yathā nâgacchantîti § 49.5.42B1. anekāye bhrānto vā hasti āgaccheya bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā ratho § 57.5.47B3. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “anekāyo upānahikāyo mūṣikena vā khajjeṃsu. bhikṣū vā jānanto vā ajānanto vā gṛhītvā gaccheya” tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? anaikāyo für anekāyo? : § 4.10.5A2 an-okṣīṇaka~# “ungeschält(er Reis)”? ; < an + *ut-kṣīṇa, *apa-kṣīṇa oder *ava-kṣīṇa ☞ § 48.8, Anm. 1 ⇒ *ukkhīṇaka~ § 48.8.41B5. labhyā dāni ... gṛhṇituṃ ... harītakī vā taṇḍulāni vā anokṣīṇakā vā mālyam vā aklinnakaṃ ... 79 an-otrāpin~ (BHS, SWTF) “unverschämt, rücksichtslos”; vgl. Pā. an-ottappin § 37.5.30A3. aśrāddhā tīrthikāḥ, ahrīkā tīrthikāḥ, anotrāpino tīrthikāḥ, mithyādṛṣṭikā ... an-odikā~ (Pā) “ohne Wasser”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. an-odaka ☞ § 4.17, Anm. 1 § 4.17.5B4. nagnā nadī anodikā nagnaṃ rāṣṭraṃ arājakaṃ (vs) anopavāda~# “Nicht-Tadeln, Nicht-Aussetzen”; < an-upavāda ☞ § 37.5, Anm. 2 § 37.5.30A4. (tīrthikāḥ ...) sarvvāśrāmiṇânopavāde (< °āśrāmiṇāṃ anopavāde [Nom. sg. masc.; vgl. BHSG § 8.25]; ☞ § 37.5[Text], Anm. 3) kadāci traividyaprāptāḥ bahuśrutā anta~ ⇒ antaka~, ekamantaṃ, ekamante, ekānte, ekatam’ ante, karmmānta~, grāmānta~, dakṣiṇānta~, navakānta~, maraṇānta~, vāmānta~, udakāntika~, agra (1) § 18.29.16B5. atha khalu saṃghārāmasya ekahiṃ ante upaviśitavyaṃ § 19.13.18A4. atha khalu ekatam’ aṃte upaviśiya praśvāso karttavyo § 24.8.22A5. yaṃ kālaṃ gacchati, tato ekatam’ aṃte cchorayitavyo § 23.4.4.21B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati ekenântena. atha khalu samantena caṃkramitavyaṃ § 40.11.33A4. tenaỿva antena prakṣālayantena ujjhitavyaṃ (“[damit das Trinkgefäß] spülen [und] eben am Rand [des Trinkgefäßes, wo die Lippen es berührt haben, das Wasser] weggießen”) § 44.5.39A2. cīvaraṃ sāharitvā abhyantaraparikarmma dviguṇ’ ante agrato karttavyo antarapīḍito § 49.5.42B1. yadi tāva dakṣiṇenântenâgacchati, vāmenântena uvvattitavyaṃ. vāmenântenâgacchati, dakṣiṇenântena uvvattitavyaṃ § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena ... ubhayehiṃ antehi (Loc. pl.) lohakena bandhitavyā § 56.5.47A6. yathāsāhaṭasya niṣīdanasya dvitīyo anto (☞ § 56.5, Anm. 4) uvveliya pra- jñapayitavyaṃ, tato niṣīditavyaṃ antaka~ ⇒ anta~ § 40.13.33A6. yāva tenaỿva anta{ra}kena ujjhitavyaṃ antamasato (BHS[Mvu]) “mindestens” § 1.6.1B5. saṃghasthavireṇa pañcasūtrāṇi vistareṇa svādhyāyitavyāni yāva ’ntamasato catvāri pārājikā gāthāś ca śiṣṭakam abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā § 7.4.8B2. dve aniyatā na pāreti, antamasato catvāri pārājikāṃ grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaṃśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca (≒ § 9.4.10A1) § 7.7.8B5. antamasato vaktavyo “apramādena saṃpādehî”ti § 8.12.9B2. yadi mahājaniko bhavati, antamasato hastena samavadhānaṃ dātavyaṃ § 18.13.16A2. antamasato kumbhikāyaṃ ekasya paryāptaṃ bhaveyā, tattakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 18.31.16B6. tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā ... antamasato gomayakārṣī dātavyā{ḥ} § 18.35.17A1. antamasato taṃhi pṛthivīpradeśe gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 18.36.17A1. durlabho gandho, antamasato tailakārṣī dātavyā (= § 19.34.18B7) § 18.51.17B1. evaṃ na bhavati, antamasato svakā aṅguli upathapitavyā § 19.15.18A5. atha dāni nâsti vibhavo, antamasato gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 19.29.18B5. tailakārṣī dātavyā. antamasato gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 19.33.18B7. antamasato tahiṃ pṛthivīpradeśe tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 20.18.20A4. antamasato aṃgulidantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditavyaṃ § 21.9.20B5. antamasato jānukānāṃ pi upari cīvarakaṃ thaviya sīvayitavyaṃ § 25.10.22B6. antamasato pṛthivīpradeśaṃ pi gomayena upalimpiya thapetavyaṃ § 31.31.26B6. antamasato yadi tahiṃ kiñci piṇḍacārikaṃ praṇītatarakaṃ bhavati, āgantukānāṃ sārāṇīyaṃ karttavyaṃ § 41.32.36A1. antamasato leṅkaṭakhaṇḍena vāmahastena vā āmarjiya praviśitavyaṃ § 48.6.41B1. antamasato hastenâpi prasphoṭiya āmarjiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. antamasato saṃkacchikâpi skandhe datvā apāśrayitavyaṃ antara~ ⇒ antaram, antarā, devāntarā, devāntareṇa, dhyānāntara-gata~, middhāntara-gata~ § 18.23.16B2. tena ca parāṅmukhena upaviśitavyaṃ antaraṃ dātavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyaḥ) § 41.26.35B3. yadi tāva koci vṛddhatarako bhavati, antaraṃ dātavyaṃ § 42.15.36B7. yo praviśati tenântaraṃ dātavyaṃ antarakena für antakena: § 40.13.33A6 80 antara-gharaṃ (Pā) (1) “in einem Haus”; (2) “zwischen den Häusern, d.h. im Dorf” (vgl. DP, s.v.; Bapat 1938); vgl. Skt. antargṛham ⇒ antara-ghare (1) “in einem Haus” § 48.1.41A3. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā antaragharaṃ praviṣṭā samānā ... § 48.1.41A4. ime pi na jānanti kathaṃ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭehi cīvarehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (≒ § 48.2.41A6) § 48.2.41A5. yūyaṃ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭā samānā ... § 48.3.41A6. evaṃ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭehi cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ § 48.4.41A6. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭo āsanena nimantrīyati, ... § 48.7.41B2. nâpi kṣamati antaraghare praviṣṭena ... atikramituṃ § 48.8.41B3. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena cīvarakena pratīcchituṃ sarppi- khajjakaṃ vā tailakhajjakaṃ vā § 61.7.49A7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gocaraṃ vā praviśantena antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena maṭamaṭāye aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhituṃ § 62.10.50A6. nâpi kṣamati antaragharaṃ niṣaṇṇena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ (2) “zwischen den Häusern, d.h. im Dorf ” § 47.2.40B4. yūyaṃ antara{ṃ}gharaṃ praviśantā cīvarakāni kaḍḍhantā gacchatha; vgl. § 47.1.40B2. gocaraṃ praviśantā cīvaraṃ kaḍḍhaṃtā praviśanti § 47.2.40B5. kathaṃ antaragharaṃ praviśantehi cīvarake pratipadyitavyaṃ § 47.3.40B5. evaṃ antaragharaṃ praviśantena cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 47.3.40B6, § 47.10.41A2) § 47.4.40B6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā antaragharaṃ praviśantena cīvaraṃ kaḍḍhantena praviśituṃ § 47.6.40B7. parimaṇḍalaṃ cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā antaragharaṃ praviśitavyaṃ antara-ghare (Pā) ⇒ antara-gharaṃ (1) “in einem Haus” § 48.10.41B5. evaṃ antaraghare praviṣṭena cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VI]. 45A1) § 49.8.42B7. amukena (lies: amukasya?) vā antaraghare bhuṃja § 51.1.44A1. te dāni bhikṣū piṇḍāya caramāṇo antaraghare yāva uṭṭhāṇāto nirghoṭenti § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya antaraghare vā upaviṣṭasya puno puno vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, utthiya gantavyaṃ (2) “zwischen den Häusern, d.h. im Dorf ” # § 47.1.40B4. ime pi na jānanti katham antaraghare praviśantehi cīvarehi pratipadyi- tavyaṃ § 50.4.43A6. etaṃ dāni sarvvasaṃghasya antaraghare nimantraṇam bhavati, ... antara-pīḍita~# “gepresst in der Mitte” (?) § 44.5.39A3. cīvaraṃ sāharitvā abhyantaraparikarmma dviguṇ’ ante agrato karttavyo antarapīḍito antaram ⇒ antara~, antarā § 44.4.39A2. cīvarakāni sāharitāni kāriya antaramukhaṃ duguṇântaraṃ (< duguṇaṃ antaraṃ) kariya cīvaravaṃśe sthapetavyāni § 49.7.42B6. rathyântaraṃ vā paśyati tato yyeva nivarttayitavyaṃ antara-mukham # “nach innen” (?) ⇒ kuto-mukham § 44.4.39A2. cīvarakāni sāharitāni kāriya antaramukha<ṃ> duguṇântaraṃ kariya cīvara- vaṃśe sthapetavyāni antarā ⇒ antara~, antaram § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) atha dāni prapātaniśritā vā, ... antarā kāṣṭhaṃ dātavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateya § 18.51.17B1. kāṣṭhakaṃ antarā karttavyaṃ (Hs. vyā), yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateyā antarā-√kṛ# “hineinlegen” ⇒ antarī-karaṇa~ § 11.7.10B7. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ evam eva paribhuṃjituṃ apratyāstaraṇaṃ vā tṛṇaṃ vā antarākṛtvā leṅkaṭakaṃ vā 81 antarikā~ ⇒ cīvarāntarikā~, patrāntarikā~ antariko für anantariko : § 58.4.48A4 antarī-karaṇa~# “das Hineinlegen” ☞ § 11.11, Anm. 5 ⇒ antarā-√kṛ § 11.11.11A2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāviddhako vā bhavati virecanapītako vā glānako vā bhavati, vastraṃ puggalikaṃ antarīkaraṇaṃ dadiya caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ § 11.14.11A4. atha dāni hemantakālo bhavati, sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ prāvariya śayati, antarīkaraṇa<ṃ> dātavyaṃ. na deti, vinayātikramam āsādayati antaroddāna~ (°ra-ud°) (BHS, SWTF) “Zwischen-Zusammenfassung” ⇒ uddāna~ Antaroddāna 50B2. antaroddānaṃ antar-gata~ § 41.4.34A1. antarggatehi indriyehi abahirggatena mānasena antar-dhāna~ “das Verschwinden” § 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “ ... na ca vo Māraḥ pāpīyāṃ avatāram adhigamiṣyati saddharmmasya antarddhānāya sa<ṃ>mohāya.” antāntika~# “allerletzter”; < Skt. anta + antika; vgl. Pā. antanta § 50.7.43B3. atha paśyati “upakaṭṭho kālo antāntiko. na śakyaṃ sakāle saṃbhāvayituṃ. mā dāni ubhaye cchinnabhaktā bhaviṣyāma”, tena paribhuñjitavyaṃ antika~ ⇒ antāntika~, udakāntika~ antena für hastena : § 41.27.35B3 antevāsika~ (BHS, Pā) “Schüler” ⇒ antevāsin~ § 9.2.9B6. niśrayaṃ dadiyāṇa antevāsikāṃ na ovadatha nânuśāsatha (≒ § 9.3.9B7) § 9.3.9B7. tena hi evaṃ ācāryeṇa antevāsikasmiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ § 10.1.10A3. te antevāsikā ācārikasya niśrayaṃ gṛhṇiya naỿva allīyanti na pratyallīyanti § 42.18.37A3. antevāsikehi vā sārddhevihārikehi vā parikarmma karentena ... § 42.21.37A6. antevāsiko sārddhevihāriko vā āhaṃsu § 42.25.37B3. tasya sārddhevihārikā bhavanti antevāsikā vā § 47.1.40B3. teṣān dāni sārddhevihārikā ca antevāsikā ca odhyāyanti § 47.2.40B5. yuṣmākaṃ sārddhevihārikā antevāsikā odhyāyanti (= § 48.2.41A5) § 48.1.41A4. teṣāṃ sārddhevihārikā vihārikā antevāsikā odhyāyanti antevāsin~ ⇒ antevāsika~ § 9.1.9B4. te dāni ... niśrayaṃ dapiya naỿva antevāsi (Acc. pl.) ovadanti, na anuśāsanti § 9.4.9B7. ācāryeṇa tāva niśrayaṃ dentena antevāsi (Nom. sg.) ubhayato vinayaṃ grāhay- itavyo § 9.6.10A2. eṣo ācāryo niśrayaṃ dadiya antevāsi (Acc. sg.) naỿva ovadati, nânuśāsati ... § 9.7.10A2. evam ācāryeṇa antevāsismiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10B1) § 10.3.10A4. evaṃ antevāsinā ācārye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 10.6.10A6, Uddāna [I].10B1) § 10.4.10A4. antevāsinā tāva kalyato yeva utthantakena eva ācāryasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ § 49.6.42B2. eṣo ca dāni bhikṣu <ta>sya (?) sārddhevihārī vā antevāsī (Acc. sg.?) vā paścācchramaṇaṃ praveśe{n}ti antra~ “Eingeweide”, hier “Kot”? ☞ § 18.45, Anm. 2 § 18.45.17A6. mā odhyāyeṃsu “ken’ imaṃ<hi> panthesmi antrāṇi vikīrṇṇāni?” andhakāre “im Dunkeln” § 32.7.27B3. <na kṣamati> andhakāre vā, uddeśaṃ dentasya <vā>, uddiśantasya vā, ... § 53.1.45A2. te dāni bhikṣū andhakāre prahāṇe upaviśaṃti ukkhalantā prakkhalantā andhakāraka~ (Pā) “dunkel”; Skt. andhakāra + Suffix ka § 15.6.14A2. yadi tāva andhakārako vihārako bhavati, pradīpo jvālayitavyo anna~ ⇒ ipsitânna~ anya~ ⇒ an-anya~ § 41.21.35A4. anyo ’sau ... bhavati agrakulikasya putro § 41.21.35A5. anyo so corasenāpati eṣo brāhmaṇo § 40.7.32B7. anyaṃ pibanāye pānīyaṃ bhavati anyaṃ pādadhovanīyaṃ § 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... saṃkāro vā anyam vā aprayat{t}aṃ grahetuṃ § 41.18.35A2. anyaṃ vayaṃ corayiṣyāmaḥ 82  § 46.6.40B1. bhikṣu ... anyaṃ leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ prāvaritukāmo bhavati § 18.18.16A6. atha dāni anyena (Hs. anyo) ’caukṣīkṛtaṃ bhavati ohaṇṇam vā § 40.4.32B5. anyena gantuṃ § 19.20.18B1. atha khalu tahiṃ cchorayitavyaṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣante na anyena gacchati § 24.4.22A3. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ cchoriya anyasya pūrayitavyaṃ § 42.16.37A1. anyasyâpi karttukāmo bhavati § 49.7.42B5. anyasya haste pātraṃ datvā, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ, mā anye bhikṣū na paśyeṃsu § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... tāyo cchoriya anyāyo (Nom. pl. fem.) sthāpayi- tavyāyo § 17.6.15A1~2. anyehi (“einige”) tāva mṛttikā mardditavyā, anyehi (“andere”) khāṇukā ... paripūriya dātavyā, anyehi pariharitavyaṃ, anyehi lippitavyaṃ, anyehi majjitavyaṃ, anyehi udakaṃ pariharitavyaṃ § 17.8.15A2~3. anyehi (“einige”) ... śāṭayitavyāyo, anyehi (“andere”) mṛttikā marddetavyā, anyehi udakaḥ pariharitavyaḥ, anyehi mṛttikā pariharttavyā, anyehi lepo dātavyaḥ, anyaiḥ samārjitavyaṃ § 17.10.15A4. kālena kālaṃ anyehi (“einige”) ... anyehi (“andere”) ... anyehi ... anyehi ... anya-tara~ (BHS) “ein, ein bestimmter”; vgl. Pā. aññatara § 21.2.20A7. adrākṣīd ... anyataraṃ bhikṣuṃ bhūmau astariya cīvaraṃ sīvantaṃ anyatra § 32.12.27B6. atha dāni gantukāmo bhavati, āha “anyatra gamiṣyan” ti, vaktavyaṃ “gacchāhi” tti anyathātva~ “Veränderung” § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... sacet paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati anāttamano. <na> ca paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati citte āttamano abhiraddho anyadâpi “auch zu anderer Zeit” § 41.11.34A7. bhagavān āha “na etarhi eva-m-anyadâpi eṣo etasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo.” “’nyadâpi bhagavan?” “anyadâpi bhikṣavo.” anya-vijñāna-samaṃmī# “sich auf anderes konzentrierend” (?) ☞ § 32.1, Anm. 2 § 32.1.27A4. so dāni anyavijñānasamaṃmī na samanvāharati, na taṃ pratisaṃmodati anyātaka~ (BHS[Mvu]) “eines anderen”; Hypersanskritismus für Pā. aññāta-ka (< Skt. a-jñāta “unbekannt”) ☞ § 19.42, Anm. 4 ⇒ ātmanaka~ § 19.42.19A4. (praśvāso ...) atha dāni anyātako (Hs. °takaṃ) bhavati, purimapaścimakañ ca varjyaṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ anyāyataḥ (“auf unrechtmäßige Weise”) für anyonyataḥ? : § 13.14.12B6 ☞ § 13.14, Anm. 3 anyena (BHS[Mvu]) “anderswohin”; vgl. von Hinüber 1968: § 125 § 18.7.15B5. varccakumbhikā bāhire-d-eva karttavyā, yathā taṃ udakaṃ anyena gacchati § 31.13.25B7. na dāni labhyā anyena gantuṃ. racchā cchiddrakā bhavati, anāpattiḥ anyonya~ § 18.5.15B4. kaṇṭhavāriṇī ... tathā karttavyā yathā upaviṣṭā anyonyaṃ na paśyanti § 31.9.25B7. pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 42.29.37B6. anyonyasya sagauravehi snāyitavyaṃ anyonyatas “abwechselnd”? ☞ § 13.14, Anm. 3 § 13.14.12B6. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā anyonyataḥ (Hs. anyāyataḥ) karttavyaṃ anvarddha-māsaṃ (BHS) “jeden halben Monat” § 13.15.12B6. anvarddhamāsaṃ gomayaśāṭo dātavyo apa-karṣa- ⇒ √kṛṣ § 8.8.9A5. bhuktāvisya pātraṃ apakarṣitavyaṃ apakkāraṃ ca apakka~#, apakva~ “luftgetrockneter Ziegel, ungebrannter Ziegel, Lehmziegel”#?; < Skt. a-pakva ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 4 ⇒ apakka-pāṃsuka~, apakva-pāṃsuka~ § 11.6.10B7. apakkacchadano bhavati, apakkā dātavyā (= § 23.7.21B5; ≒ § 12.5.11B2) § 13.6.12B2. apakvacchadano bhavati, apakvā dātavyā apakka-cchadana~#, apakva-cchadana~# “Decke bzw. Dach aus Lehmziegeln” ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 3 83  ⇒ kabhalla-cchadana~, tṛṇa-cch°, phalaka-cch°, mṛttikā-cch°, sudhā-cch° § 11.6.10B7. apakkacchadano bhavati, apakkā dātavyā (= § 23.7.21B5) § 12.5.11B2. apakkacchadano (Hs. apakkā°) bhavati, apakkā dātavyā § 13.6.12B2. apakvacchadano bhavati, apakvā dātavyā apakka-pāṃsuka~#, apakva-pāṃsuka~# “Pulver aus ungebrannten (Ziegeln)” (?) ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 4 ⇒ apakka~ § 13.8.12B2. yadi tāva uppeḍanako vihārako bhavati, śakkāroṭena vā pūretavyo apakva- pāṃsukena (Hs. upakva°) vā § 17.9.15A3. vihārakā uppeḍanakā bhavanti, śarkaroṭakā vā apakkapāṃsuko (Hs. āpakap °) vā pariharitavyo ākoṭayitavyo *apakka-laḍḍu~ “kugelförmiger Lehmziegel” (?) ☞ § 20.18, Anm. 2 § 20.18.20A4. atha dāni dantakāṣṭhaṃ na bhavati, aṅgāreṇa vā apakkalaḍḍunā (Hs. °laddunā) vā dantā oghasayitavyāḥ *apakkāra~# “Speisereste”; vgl. Pā. avakkāra (“leavings from a meal” [CPD]), Skt. apaskara (“Exkrement”), avaskara (“Exkrement”) ☞ § 8.8, Anm. 5 § 8.8.9A5. bhuktāvisya pātraṃ apakarṣitavyaṃ apakkā<raṃ> ca apakva~ “luftgetrockneter Ziegel, ungebrannter Ziegel, Lehmziegel”#? ⇒ apakka~, apakka- pāṃsuka~, apakva-pāṃsuka~ apakva-cchadana~ “Decke bzw. Dach aus Lehmziegeln” ⇒ apakka-cchadana~ apakva-pāṃsuka~ ⇒ apakka-pāṃsuka~ apa-cāyita~ “verehrt” § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisambhāvayitvā ... satkṛto gurukṛto mānitaḥ pūjitaḥ apacāyito ... apaduccaritavyaṃ für *apaduv{v}ari° oder apadu{cca}ri° : § 22.5.21A2 apa-dura-# “(die Tür) öffnen”; ∈ *ava’ura- < *apavurati (aus Skt. apa-√vṛ “öffnen”)? ☞ § 8.4, Anm. 3 ⇒ apa-duraka~, apā-vura-, *apa-duvara-, apāvuraṇa~, apāvuraṇi~ § 8.4.8B7. dvāraṃ sukhākaṃ apaduriyāṇa tato prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśitavyo § 10.4.10A5. dvāraṃ sukhākaṃ apaduriyāṇaṃ prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśayitavyo § 22.1.20B6. so dāni yathāsukhe kṛte vihārakaṃ apaduriya praviśati § 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apadu{cca}ritavyaṃ (oder lies: *apaduv{v}ari°?) cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ ... § 22.6.21A3. vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, ... dvāraṃ apaduriya tato praviśitavyaṃ § 31.20.26A4. vihāro ... ghaṭṭitako bhavati, apāvuraṇena apaduriyāṇaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 42.2.36A3. jentākaṃ apaduriya nirddhāvitāḥ apa-duraka~# “offen” ⇒ apa-dura- § 31.20.26A3. atha dāni apadurako vihāro bhavati, praviśitavyaṃ *apa-duvara-#? “öffnen”; Denominativ von apa + *duvāra (< dvāra)? ⇒ apa-dura-, apā-vura-, apāvuraṇa~, apāvuraṇi~ § 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apaduccaritavyaṃ (lies: *apaduv{v}ari° oder apadu{cca}ri°) cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ ... apa-niya (Abs.; vgl. Skt = Pā. apa-nīya) ⇒ apa-√nī apa-√nī § 1.10.2A2. atha khalu hastāṃ nirmmādiya oguṇṭhikāṃ apaniya (Abs.; vgl. Skt = Pā. apa-nīya) upānahāṃ omuñciya ekāṃsakṛtena śalākā vārayitavyā § 1.10.2A2. atha khalu ekāṃsakṛtena hastān nirmmādiya oguṇṭhikāṃ apaniya upānahāṃ omuñciya śalākā{ṃ} gṛhṇitavyā § 15.7.14A3. taṃ apaniya anyo kīlako ākoṭayitavyo pātraprasevikā sthāpayitavyā § 40.12.33A5. yadi koci atibahuṃ oṣṭhaṃ vā volayati keśā vā ālaya{ṃ}ti nilāṭe vā, apane- tavyaṃ apara~ (1) “ein anderer” § 10.5.10A6. evaṃ aparaṃ divasaṃ prasrāvakumbhikā niṣkāśayitavyā § 18.20.16A7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena uppīḍito nivasanaṃ oguhiya varccakuṭiṃ praviśati, tahiṃ ca aparo bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo 84  § 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako praśvāsena uppīḍito ... § 21.5.20B2. atha dāni aparo pi koci sīvayitukāmo bhavati, ... (≒ § 21.6.20B4) § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo ... aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgacchiya tasya purato sthito (≒ § 28.1.24A1) § 62.2.49B6. eko tāva pūtivātakarmmaṃ karoti. aparo “gaccha” tti. aparo “ḍharaḍha<ra>” tti. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. ...” § 20.11.19B6. aparaṃ divasaṃ evam eva khāditavyaṃ § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā āgacchiya uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāyitaṃ § 32.4.27A7. so ca apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sārddham vācovāciṃ karoti, nâpi kṣamati tasya taṃ velaṃ pādāṃ vandituṃ § 40.13.33A5. apareṇa pānīyaghaṭikāṃ paṭicchantena cīvarāṃtarikāya vā patrāntarikāye vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 40.15.33A7. ekena madhyama<ṃ> vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ, apareṇa praṇetavyaṃ § 42.18.37A3. hastena agrato praticchādayitavyaṃ apareṇa parikarmma kārayitavyaṃ § 50.1.43A3. vihārakasya dvāramūle piṇḍapātakaṃ thapiya gato. taṃ dāni {āha} apareṇa āgacchiyāṇaṃ utkṣiptaṃ § 41.24.35A7. ekasyôpānahāye vaddhro pocchitavyo, aparasya vaddhro pocchitavyo § 18.7.15B5. aparasmin pārśve varccakuṭīkā karttavyā § 4.16.5B3. apare mārggam bhāvayitvā parinirvvānti anāśravā (vs) § 39.3.31A2. nâpi kṣamati aparehi ... utkṣipituṃ usw. (2) “irgendeiner, ein gewisser” (BHS[Mvu]) § 18.20.16A7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena uppīḍito nivasanaṃ oguhiya varccakuṭiṃ praviśati, tahiṃ ca aparo bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo § 20.9.19B5. aparo dāni bhikṣu dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo ... aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgacchiya tasya purato sthito (≒ § 27.2.23B5, § 28.1.24A1) § 32.1.27A4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgantuko āgato. tasya dāni aparo bhikṣuḥ vṛddhatarako parijñātako bhavati, so ca apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sārddhaṃ vācovācikāṃ karoti § 44.1.38B6. aparo ca bhikṣuḥ virātre ... nirddhāvito bhavati § 14.1.13A1. aparaṃ dāni āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ himadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na vasati § 52.5.44B4. sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ, lūhaṃ ca praṇītaṃ ca ekañ ca aparaṃ ca § 18.15.16A3. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā vaṃśaśalākāhi vraṇamukhaṃ pocchitaṃ § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyaṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropitako § 20.2.19A6. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyāṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropito § 25.1.22B1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā muṇḍavātapāṇe pātraṃ sthavitaṃ § 41.5.34A1. sthaviro dāni apareṇa brāhmaṇena dṛṣṭo § 50.1.43A1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā bhikṣu adhyeṣṭo “āyuṣman, icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyamānaṃ.” § 41.13.34B2. so śreṣṭhi aparehiṃ (für aparahiṃ?; Loc. sg. masc. neut.) jñātisāle (für °śāle) nimantritako gato varṣârātrikaṃ § 44.1.38B6. aparehiṃ (für aparahiṃ?; Loc. sg. masc.) vihārake saṃbahulā bhikṣū pratisaṃkrama<ṃ>ti usw. apara-kālena# “später”; vgl. Skt = Pa. apara-kāla § 32.2.27A5. te dāni aparakālena ubhaye samāgatā aparejjukāto (BHS[Mvu]) “am nächsten Tag”; < Skt. aparedyus; vgl. Pā. aparajju ⇒ aparejjukāye § 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati aparejjukāto kalyato utthihantakenaỿva bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ § 31.30.26B4. atha aparejjukāto yadi tāva bāhirakaṃ bhaktaṃ bhavati, anugraho vā bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, mā piṇḍāye praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha.” § 39.2.30B7. aparejjukāto kalyato yeva utthihiya ... § 39.15.31B3. atha dāni vikāle āgacchanti, na vâgacchanti, aparejjukāto śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ dātavyaṃ 85  § 39.27.32A4. atha dāni vikāle āgatā bhavanti, na vā āgacchanti, aparejjukāto śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ vā ārāmikānām vā dātavyo § 44.1.38B7. so dāni aparejjukāto kalyata eva nivāsiya ... § 44.6.39A4. aparejjukāto bhikṣū kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya aparejjukāye# “am nächsten Tag” ☞ § 5.6, Anm. 2 ⇒ aparejjukāto § 5.6.6B2. dvitīyasthavireṇa aparejjukāye ’va (Hs. ca) māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo apalekh~# “Spatel zum Abkratzen (des Schmutzes)” ☞ § 18.16, Anm. 4 ⇒ avalekhana~ § 18.17.16A5. atha dāni prapātaniśritā bhavanti, kiṃcâpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati saṃkaraṃ vā anāpattiḥ apa-vātam# “in Lee; unter dem Wind” oder “zur vom Wind abgewandten Seite”? ☞ § 18.46, Anm. 2 ⇒ anuvātam § 18.46.17A6. nâpi dāni anuvātaṃ karttavyaṃ, mā sarvvasārthaṃ gandhena vyābaheyyā. apavātaṃ karttavyaṃ (≒ § 18.48.17A7, § 19.38.19A2) § 19.40.19A2. nâpi dāni anuv<ātaṃ k>artt{it}avyaṃ. apavātaṃ karttavyaṃ § 62.11.50A7. vātakarmma ... nâpi dāni kṣamati anuvātaṃ karttuṃ ... apavātaṃ karttavyaṃ, vātapathaṃ muñcitvā apa-vāmaṃ# “links”; < apa + Skt. vāma ☞ § 31.6, Anm. 2 ⇒ anu-vāmam, vāma~, ati-dakṣiṇam, abhi-dakṣiṇam § 31.6.25B5. na dāni kṣamati nagaracetiyāni abhidakṣiṇaṃ (Hs. °iṇi) karentehi vā gantuṃ apavāmaṃ (Hs. °āmi) vā karentehi {vā} apā-vura-# “öffnen”; < Skt. apa-ā-√vṛ; vgl. BHD, s.v. apāvurīyati; Pā. apāpurati ⇒ apa-dura-, *apa-duvara-, apāvuraṇa~, apāvuraṇi~ § 13.17.12B7. vihāro ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ apāvuritavyo, yathā vātaṃ labheyyā apāvuraṇa~# “(Tür-)Öffner”; vgl. Pā. apāpuraṇa, avāpuraṇa; BHS. apāvaraṇī; v. Hinüber 1992: 14~19 ☞ § 31.3, Anm. 2 ⇒ apāvuraṇi~, apā-vura-, apa-dura-, *apa-duvara- § 31.3.25B2. ete dāni bhikṣu āgantukā {ā}gacchanti, sarvvehi pāḍiyakkapāḍiyak{a}kāni apāvuraṇāni upasthāpayitavyāni § 31.20.26A3. vihāro ... ghaṭṭitako bhavati, apāvuraṇena apaduriyāṇaṃ praviśitavyaṃ apāvuraṇi~# “(Tür-)Öffner”; vgl. Pā. apāpuraṇa, avāpuraṇa; BHS. apāvaraṇī; v. Hinüber 1992: 14~19 ☞ § 31.3, Anm. 2 ⇒ apāvuraṇa~, apā-vura-, apa-dura-, *apa-duvara- § 31.3.25B3. ekasyâpi apāvuraṇi na bhavati, sarvve vinayātikramaṃ āsādayaṃti. ekasyâpi apāvuraṇi bhavati, sarvveṣām anāpattiḥ apāśraya~ ⇒ sāpāśraya~ apā-śraya- “sich anlehnen” § 48.7.41B2. na kṣamati sāpāśrayaṃ vā upāśrayam vā omayilomayilaṃ vā paṇḍara{ṃ}- vipāṇḍaraṃ apāśrayituṃ § 48.7.41B2. bhaginī prajñapehi kuḍḍasmiṃ yahiṃ apāśrayitavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā ... śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati, tato apāśrayitavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. antamasato saṃkacchikâpi skandhe datvā apāśrayitavyaṃ api ⇒ pi, pi ... pi, anyadâpi, kiñ câpi, na câpi, nâpi, nâpi dāni, yathâpi § 30.1.24B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ omuddhakâpi śeyyāṃ kalpenti, uttānakâpi śeyyā kalpenti, vāmenâpi pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpenti (api ... api ... api : “entweder ... oder ... oder ...” ☞ § 30.1, Anm. 3) (≒ § 30.2.24B7) § 39.3.31A2. nâpi kṣamati ... utkṣipituṃ § 39.7.31A4. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ taṇḍulāni prakṣipituṃ § 39.10.31A7. nâsti mama tahiṃ śraddhā nâpi prasādo § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati”, vaktavyaṃ “prāgo tāva adyâpi. āraṇyakâpi tāva nâgacchanti” § 41.16.34B6. tenâpi dāni corasenāpatinā ... upalakṣitaṃ § 41.21.35A5. tadâpi etasya eṣo ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.23.35A6. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva pādāṃ dhovantena ... āsiṃcitavyaṃ § 41.30.35B6. nâpi kṣamati ... upaviśituṃ 86  § 41.31.35B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... āsituṃ § 42.16.37A1. anyasyâpi karttukāmo bhavati § 47.1.40B3. tān’ api dāni ... § 48.6.41B2. antamasato hastenâpi prasphoṭiya āmarjiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. antamasato saṃkacchikâpi skandhe datvā apāśrayitavyaṃ § 49.5.42A7. tenâpi dāni pureśramaṇena nâpi kṣamati ... gantuṃ § 49.7.42B4. tenâpi dāni ... āhāraṃ kṛtvā nâpi dāni kṣamati ... karttuṃ § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ...” et passim a-pūrvva-carimam# “gleichzeitig (lit. ohne früher und später)”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 106, 2B7.4. apūrvācarimaṃ; AS.34.19 = AAA.226.22. apūrvācaramam (AS.199.25 = AAA.792.17); Mvy(S).2703. apūrvam acaramam (= Mvy[I/F]. 2712), Mvy(S).6659. apūrvācaramaḥ (= Mvy[I/F]. 6633) § 42.18.37A3. parikarmma karentena na dāni apūrvvacarimaṃ (lies: apūrvvâcarimaṃ?) ubhaya bāhā prasāretavyā a-peyya~ (Pā) “nicht zu trinken”; vgl. Skt. peya; ☞ § 26.1, Anm. 3 ⇒ peyā~ § 26.1.23A5. atha dāni khakkhaṭa bhavati, jalpa<ṃ>ti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, lecchaṃ (wohl für lehyaṃ) ayaṃ, ’peyyā ayaṃ, kaṭṭārikācchejjā ayaṃ.” appihāṇa~# “Bedeckung, Hülle, Decke”; vgl. Skt. = Pā. apidhāna~ (“dass.”), Pkt. pidhāṇa, pihāṇa (“dass.”) § 40.5.32B6. appihāṇā karttavyā śilāmayā vā mṛttikāmayā vā kāṣṭhamayā vā a-prakīrṇṇavāca~# “keine wirren Worte sagend” ☞ § 38.4, Anm. 4 § 38.7.30B2. so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato anunnaḍo acapalo amukharo apragalbho aprakīrṇṇavāco, ... a-prakṛtika~ “unvorsichtig”# ☞ § 19.16, Anm. 1 ⇒ a-prakṛti-jña~ § 19.16.18A5. mā aprakṛtikā (wohl für °iko) ghaṭasya {vā} bāhyena praśvāsaṃ cchoreyā ti a-prakṛti-jña~# “jemand, der keine Sitten kennt”; ☞ § 24.12, Anm. 3; § 19.16, Anm. 1 ⇒ a- prakṛtika~ § 24.12.22A7. <paśyati?> kheṭaṃ cchoritakaṃ kenaci aprakṛtijñena, pādena marditavyo a-pragalbha~ “bescheiden; nicht arrogant” § 38.7.30B2. so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato anunnaḍo acapalo amukharo apragalbho aprakīrṇṇavāco, ... a-pratigrāhya~ “von dem man nichts annehmen darf” § 52.6.44B5. suvihita, apratigrāhyo eṣo jano. mā bhūyo eteṣāṃ tena pratigṛhṇīhasi a-pratisaṃviditena# “ohne Ankündigung; ohne daß man sich abgemeldet hat”; vgl. BHS, SWTF. apratisaṃvidita; Pā. appaṭisaṃvidita ⇒ a-pratisaṃviditvā, pratisaṃviditena, saṃviditena, aśabdakarṇṇikāye § 18.47.17A7. nâpi dāni apratisaṃviditena uvvattitavyaṃ, mā “coro vā ocorako vā” tti hanyeyā (≒ § 19.39.19A2) a-pratisaṃviditvā# “ohne Ankündigung; ohne daß man sich abgemeldet hat” ⇒ a-pratisaṃviditena, aśabdakarṇṇikāye § 53.14.45B4. (eine Lampe) na dāni sahasākārasya apratisaṃviditvā nirvvāpetavyo a-pratisaṃskṛta~# “unrepariert; nicht instand gehalten” ⇒ prati-saṃ-s-√kṛ § 11.6.10B6. na dāni vihāro adhyupekṣitavyo oddirṇṇako praluggako acaukṣo vā apratisaṃskṛto vā § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... vihārakān ondriṇṇakāṃ praluggakāṃ acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ (≒ § 13.2.12A6, § 23.1.21A4) § 12.3.11A7. kasyême bhikṣavo vihārakā odriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā ... § 12.5.11B2. ye vihārakā uddiṇṇakā paluggakā ... acokṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā bhavanti § 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ullaggakā ollāye gṛhītakāḥ acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā ... § 14.5.13A4. so vihāro ... ondriṇṇako vā paluggako vā acaukṣo vā apratisaṃskṛto vā § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddiṇṇakāṃ praluggakāṃ acaukṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ (≒ § 16.2.14A6) 87  § 15.3.14A1. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtāḥ (≒ § 16.3.14A6, § 16.5.14A7, § 17.5.14B7) § 17.2.14B5. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ (Hs. anabhisaṃskṛtāṃ) § 17.8.15A2. ete vihārakā ullāye gṛhītakā bhavanti apratisaṃskṛtā vā uppaṃsulā vā ... § 23.2.21A5. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā ollāye gṛhītakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā § 43.11.38A7. kalpikakuṭī ... praluggikā vā acaukṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā § 44.11.39B1. cīvaraṃ ... cikkaṇaṃ vā apratisaṃskṛtaṃ vā omayilamayilam vā ... a-pratyagra~ “nicht frisch” § 50.6.43B2. na dāni apratyagraṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ. ekānte yūṣaṃ sākavyañjanaṃ vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ a-pratyāstaraṇa~#, a-pratyāstaraṇaka~# “ohne Bezug; ohne Zwischendecke”; vgl. BHSD, SWTF, s.v. pratyāstaraṇa; Pa. paccattharaṇa; Sp 464.24f. yaṃ suddhaṃ āsanam eva hoti apaccattharaṇakaṃ ☞ § 11.4, Anm. 1, § 11.7, Anm. 1 § 11.4.10B5. yūyaṃ apratyāstaraṇakaṃ (Hs. °ṇakā) śayyāsanaṃ paribhuṃjatha. ... § 11.7.10B7. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ evam eva paribhuṃjituṃ apratyā- staraṇaṃ vā tṛṇaṃ vā antarākṛtvā leṅkaṭakaṃ vā a-pramāṇa~ § 20.8.19B4. evaṃ ca dāni yūyaṃ apramāṇāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādatha a-pramāda~ § 2.11.3A5. apramādena saṃpādayitavyaṃ (= § 3.12.4A4) § 7.7.8B5. antamasato vaktavyo “apramādena saṃpādehî”ti a-prayata~ “unrein” § 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa aprayataṃ gṛhṇituṃ, uccāro vā prasrāvo vā kheṭaṃ vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā vighaso vā saṃkāro vā anyam vā aprayat{t}aṃ grahetuṃ § 50.6.43B2. nâpi dāni adhotakehi hastehi aprayatehi gṛhṇitavyaṃ. atha khalu prakṣālitvā nirmmādayitvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ a-prasanna~ “unrein” ⇒ pra-sanna~ § 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇâprasannaṃ gṛhṇituṃ kheṭakaṭāham vā uccāra- kaṭāhakam vā prasrāvakumbhakaṃ vā aphāṃsu für aphāsuṃ: § 20.9.19B5 a-phāsu, a-phāsuṃ (Pā) “unwohl; widerwärtig”; vgl. BHSD, SWTF. aphāṣa ⇒ phāsu, phāsuṃ, phāsukaṃ § 20.9.19B5. tasya dāni aphāsuṃ (Hs. aphāṃsu) § 41.16.34B6. mā atra pānīyasmiṃ tṛṇo vā bhave prāṇako vā tena senāpatisya aphāsu bhaveya a-bahir-ggata~# “nicht nach außen gerichtet” § 41.4.34A1. antarggatehi indriyehi abahirggatena mānasena (Hs. man°) a-bhaya~ § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... satvān ... kṣeme same śive sthale abhaye nirvvāṇe pratiṣṭhā- payamāno ... abhāmayitvā für ābhāsay° : § 55.6.46B7 abhi-√kram § 1.7.1B6. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... abhikramantu (Hs. atikramantu) āyuṣmanto § 3.6.3B4. yahiṃ bhavati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ “abhikramantu āyuṣmanto” ti abhi-krānta~ (BHS) “das Herbeikommen”; vgl. Pā. abhikkanta; vgl. auch SWTF, s.v. abhikrama- pratikrama § 41.4.34A1. prāsādikena abhikrāntena (Hs. atikr°) pratikrāntena ālokitavilokitena sammiñjitaprasāritena saṃghāṭīpātracīvaradhāraṇena abhigṛha~ ⇒ cetiyābhigṛha~, saṃghābhigṛha~, stūpābhigṛha~, stūpa-vigraha~, saṃgha-vigraha~ ☞ § 18.52, Anm. 1 abhijñāna~ “Zeichen” § 18.11.16A1. tṛṇam vā tūlikā vā upari sthāpetavyā, yathā jñāye “saprāṇakê”ty abhijñānaṃ 88  § 40.12.33A5. taṃ bhājanaṃ ekānte sthapitvā, tṛṇaṃ vā kulikaṃ vā upari dātavyā abhijñānaṃ, yathā jñāye “akalpiyan” ti abhi-dakṣiṇam “rechts” ☞ § 30.5, Anm. 1 ⇒ ati-dakṣiṇam, apa-vāmaṃ § 28.8.24A5. atha khalu abhidakṣiṇaṃ agrato karentena anuparivarttitavyaṃ § 30.5.25A3. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva śeyyāṃ prajñapeṃtena abhidakṣiṇaṃ (Hs. °ṇāṃ) prajñapayitavyā § 31.6.25B5. na dāni kṣamati nagaracetiyāni abhidakṣiṇaṃ (Hs. °iṇi) karentehi vā gantuṃ apavāmaṃ (Hs. °āmi) vā karentehi {vā} abhidakṣiṇāṃ wohl für °iṇaṃ : § 30.5.25A3 abhi-dharmma~ (BHS) “die Lehre betreffend”#; vgl. Pā. abhidhamma ☞ § 7.5, Anm. 2, 3 § 7.5.8B3. śekhayitavyo anuśāsayitavyo kālyaṃ madhyantikaṃ sāyaṃ abhidharmmeṇa vā abhivinayena vā. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ geyaṃ vyākaraṇaṃ gāthā udānaṃ itivṛttakaṃ jātakaṃ vaipulyâdbhutadharmmā abhi-nikuñja~ ⇒ *ati-nikuñja~ abhinikuṭitakena# adv. “mit gebeugtem Kopf”?; < abhi + ni + √kuṭ (“sich krümmen”)? ☞ § 57.5, Anm. 2 ⇒ nikuṭitakena § 57.7.47B5. vṛddhānte ... praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ. abhinikuṭitakena prāñjalīkṛtena gantavyaṃ yāvat pratisandhi abhinīhāra-kuśala~ “verschlagen”? ☞ § 38.3, Anm. 5 § 38.3.30A6. yadi tāva so bhavati ... anarthakuśalo vā abhinīhārakuśalo vā kalahakārako vā bhaṇḍanakārako vā bhāṣyakārako vā adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā allīyāhi” tti abhi-pra-moda- “freudig zustimmen” (vgl. SJW, S. 1050; vgl. auch CPD, s.v. abhi-ppamodati) § 1.13.2A7. yathāsukhaṃ karttavyaṃ, abhipramodantu āyuṣmanto § 2.11.3A5. tato yathāsukhaṃ karttavyaṃ. abhipramodayaṃtu āyuṣmanto abhipra- modayantu āyuṣmanto apramādena saṃpādayitavyaṃ (≒ § 3.12.4A4) abhi-pra-sanna~ (BHS, SWTF) “zugeneigt, ergeben” § 4.15.5B2. etehi buddhehi maharddhikehi ye devatā santi abhiprasannā (vs) § 6.13.8A4. etehi buddhehi maharddhikehi ye devatā santi abhiprasannāḥ (vs) abhiprāya~ ⇒ upārambhaṇābhiprāya~, auddhatyābhi°, viheṭhanābhi°,vibhūṣaṇābhi° abhimukham ⇒ sūryābhimukham abhi-yukta~ “verantwortlich” § 43.12.38B1. yo yatra abhiyukto bhavati, tena taṃ pratisāmetavyaṃ abhi-raddha~ (Pā) “befriedigt”; < Skt. abhi-rāddha § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... sacet paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati anāttamano. <na> ca paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati citte āttamano abhiraddho abhirama~ ⇒ dur-abhirama~ abhi-vinaya~ (Pā) “die Ordensregeln betreffend”# ☞ § 7.5, Anm. 2, 3 § 7.5.8B3. śekhayitavyo anuśāsayitavyo kālyaṃ madhyantikaṃ sāyaṃ abhidharmmeṇa vā abhivinayena vā. ... abhivinayo nāma prātimokṣo saṃkṣiptavistaraprabhedena abhi-vi-lokaya- (BHS[Mvu]) “betrachten” § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... so pi *pratibodhiyānaṃ (?; Hs. pratibodhanāṃ) tena purimaṃ kāyaṃ abhyunnāmeti, pṛṣṭhimaṃ kāyaṃ abhivilokayati abhisamācārika~ (Pā) “das richtige Verhalten betreffend; die Grundbegriffe guten Benehmens betreffend”; aus Skt. abhi + samācāra; vgl. S. 555f., 557 in diesem Band ⇒ ābhisamācārika~ § 5.14.7A4. na pratipadyati, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikramati (= § 1.14.2A7, § 7.8. 8B5, § 9.7.10A3, § 19.43, § 20.20 et passim) § 8.14.9B4. na pratipadyate, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati § 27.9.23B7. evaṃ sthātavyaṃ. na tiṣṭhati, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati abhi-sam-bhāvaya- (BHS[Mvu]) “erreichen” § 39.1.30B5. bhagavān ... yadarthaṃ samudāgato tam artham abhisambhāvayitvā (≒ § 62.1.49B1) abhi-saṃ-bhuṇa- (BHS) “notwendig sein” § 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo, navakānte paṭipaṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, eko vā dvayo vā trayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti 89  § 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā, eko vā dvayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti, navakānto (Hs. °kāntena) vā paṭipāṭikāye vā yasya vā prāpuṇati abhi-sā-hara-# “sammeln”; < Skt. abhi-saṃ-harati ☞ § 4.20, Anm. 2 ⇒ sā-hara- § 4.20.6A3. pātreṇa bhaikṣaṃ abhisāharitvā (vs) abhīkṣṇaṃ § 43.11.38B1. abhīkṣṇaṃ sammārjayitavyaṃ abhīkṣṇa-śrutika~#, abhīkṣṇaṃ-śrutika~# “ständig zu hörender” ☞ § 1.6, Anm. 1 § 1.6.1B5. catvāri pārājikā gāthāś ca śiṣṭakam abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā (Nom. pl. fem.; verschrieben für °kāyo?) § 1.12.2A6. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikāṃ dharmmāṃ uddiśiyānaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa- śrutikāye (Acc. pl. fem. in -āye; vgl. BHSG § 9.92) gāthāye ca § 2.10.3A3. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikā uddiśitavyaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāyo ca § 7.4.8B2. triṃśato pi grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa<śruti>kāyo gāthāyo ca. triṃśato pi na pāreti, dve aniyatāṃ grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca. ... antamasato catvāri pārājikāṃ grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaṃśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca (≒ § 9.4.10A1~2. ... abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyo gāthāyo ... °kāye gāthāyo ... °kāye gāthāyo ca) abhy-anu-jñā~ “Erlaubnis” § 8.4.8B7. yaṃ kālaṃ abhyanujñā dinnā bhavati, tato dvāraṃ sukhākaṃ apaduriyāṇa ... (≒ § 10.4.10A5) abhyantara~ ⇒ abhyantare, abhyantareṇa abhyantara-ghaṭṭima~# “verriegelt von innen” ☞ § 14.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ bāhira-ghaṭṭima~ § 14.9.13A7. ekena abhyantaraghaṭṭimaṃ vihārakāṃ (lies: °rakaṃ?) kariya, ... § 14.18.13B5. ekena vihārako abhyantaghaṭṭimo (Hs. aty°) karttavyo abhyantara-parikarmma#, °rmmaṃ# “(das Gewand mit der Außenseite) nach innen (zusammen- legen)” § 41.22.35A5. grāmapraveśikaṃ cīvaraṃ prasphoṭitvā abhyantaraparikarmmaṃ (Hs. atyantapari°) sāharitvā sthapetavyaṃ § 44.5.39A2. cīvaraṃ sāharitvā abhyantaraparikarmma dviguṇ’ ante agrato karttavyo antarapīḍito abhyantare § 14.9.13A7. otariya rajjū{ye} vā kaḍevariyā vā abhyantare kṣipitavyā § 42.7.36B2. vātapānīyā vīthī karttavyā abhyantare (Hs. aty°) viśālā bāhirato saṃkṣiptā abhyantareṇa# “in der Mitte” § 41.6.34A3. saṃghāṭīṃ prasphoṭiya sāhariya abhyantareṇa dviguṇikāṃ kariya ... abhyavakāśe (BHS, SWTF) “im Freien” § 12.16.12A4. navakehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi abhyavakāśe vītināmayi- tavyaṃ § 42.22.37A7. na kṣamati abhyavakāśe nagnasya nagnena parikarmma karttuṃ abhy-ava-hṛta~ “herunterschlucken” § 20.9.19B5. tena dāni bhagavān dṛṣṭo bhagavato gauraveṇa sarvvam abhyavahṛtaṃ abhyāgama~ “benachbart; belebt”#; vgl. Skt. abhyāgama (“Annäherung; Besuch; Nähe”, pw, s.v.) ☞ § 19.17, Anm. 2 § 19.17.18A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati abhyāgame (Hs. atyā°) pradeśe ujjhituṃ § 19.36.18B7. praśvāsakṛto bhavati, nâpi kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe praśvāsaṃ karttuṃ abhy-ud-dhara- “herausziehen, retten” § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... anavarāgrajātijarāmaraṇasaṃsārakāntāranarakavidurggān mahā- prapātato abhyuddharitvā kṣeme same śive sthale abhaye nirvvāṇe pratiṣṭhāpayamāno .. abhy-un-nāme- (Pā) “emporrecken”; < *abhy-un-nāmayati; vgl. BHS. abhyunnāmya ⇒ √nam, upa- nāme-, o-nāme- § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... so pi *pratibodhiyānaṃ (?; Hs. pratibodhanāṃ) tena purimaṃ kāyaṃ abhyunnāmeti, pṛṣṭhimaṃ kāyaṃ abhivilokayati amakucak~#? ⇒ makucaka~ amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ # “knack! knack!” Onomatopoetica ☞ § 61.1, Anm. 3 ⇒ maṭamaṭa, 90  maṭamaṭāya, maṭamaṭāye, ṭaṭṭa ṭaṭṭa § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti, aṅgāni bhañjayanti maṭamaṭāya phoḍenti amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ. yathā sīhā vā vyāghrā vā evaṃ jaṃbhayanti a-manāpa~ “unangenehm” § 18.53.17B3. mā khalu te amanāpaṃ (Hs. °āyaṃ) bhaviṣyati amanāyaṃ für °āpaṃ : § 18.53.17B3 amila~ (BHS, Pkt), amilā~#, āmilā~# “Wolldecke”?; vgl. SWTF, s.v. āmila (“eine Art Wollstoff”); BHSD, s.vv. amila, āmila; PSM, s.v. amila ☞ § 14.7, Anm. 1 § 14.7.13A6. yaṃ sārāsāraṃ śayyāsanaṃ amilā vā astaraṇikā vā kocakā vā guḍuguḍukā vā makucakā vā ... § 48.5.41A7. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā ... § 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā amilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati, tato apāśrayitavyaṃ amiṣacakraṃ für āmiṣa° : § 36.6.29B5 (vs) amuka~ ⇒ asuka~ § 4.8.4B7. amukaṃ kulaṃ upasaṃkramiṣyatha § 8.11.9A7. vaktavyaṃ “karomi amukena saha svādhyāyan” ti (≒ § 8.13.9B3) § 8.13.9B2. yadi vihāro prāpuṇati, āpṛcchitavyaṃ “amukaṃ vihāraṃ gṛhṇāmi.” § 12.12.11B7. amuke vihārake ettakā mañcā ettakā pīṭhāḥ ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ... Vgl. § 12.10.11B5. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ... § 31.32.26B6. amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. pātranikubjanaṃ sa<ṃ>mutīkṛtaṃ. amutra śunakhā caṇḍāḥ. amukaṃ aśrāddhakulaṃ § 32.2.27A5. amukaṃ divasaṃ tvaṃ amukena bhikṣuṇā sārddhaṃ vācaṃvāciṃ karosi § 49.8.42B7. atha dāni koci vandati, vaktavyaṃ “amuko vandati” § 49.8.42B7. ārocayitavyaṃ “amukena upādhyāyo nimantrito. amukena (lies: amukasya?) vā antaraghare bhuṃja” ti amukahiṃ# “an jenem Ort”; vgl. BHSG § 21.22 ⇒ ekahi, ekahiṃ, kahiṃ, tahi, tahiṃ, yahiṃ § 1.7.1B6. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... amukahiṃ bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā ... a-mukhara~ (BHS, Pā) “nicht geschwätzig” ☞ § 38.4, Anm. 4 § 38.7.30B2. so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato anunnaḍo acapalo amukharo apragalbho aprakīrṇṇavāco, ... amutra “dort” § 31.32.26B6. amutra śunakhā caṇḍāḥ. amukaṃ aśrāddhakulaṃ amuhūrtte für āmuh° : § 29.4.24B2 amūhūrttakaṃ für āmuh° : § 29.6.24B3 a-mṛta~ § 62.1.49B2~3. bhagavān ... amṛtam analpakena devamanuṣyāṃ saṃvibhajanto, prāṇikoṭīniyutaśatasahasrāṇi amṛtam anuprāpayanto, ... amaitra-citta~# “nicht freundschaftlich gesinnt” § 41.17.34B7. tehi eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati ambā~ “Mutter” § 33.1.27B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe (Voc. sg.; vedisch; vgl. AiGr III 121~122), atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti § 33.2.27B7. yūyaṃ gṛhī-ālāpena ālāpayatha “amba (Voc. sg.; Skt.; Hs. ā°), atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, {a}haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti § 33.9.28A3. eṣo bhikṣu mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā bhaginīm vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâyaṃ kṣamati śabdāpayituṃ “ambe (Voc. sg.)” tti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā § 33.11.28A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ upāsakāṃ vā dānapatānīṃ vā vihārasvāminīṃ vā śabdāpitu- kāmo bhavati, nâpi kṣamati “ambe (Voc. sg.)” ti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā ambhehi ⇒ ahaṃ amhehi ⇒ ahaṃ ayacchitavyā ayaṃcchantiyo für āyacch° āyacch°: § 14.14.13B3 91 ayam ⇒ idam~ ayaṃ sānaṃ für tvaṃ? : § 1.9.2A1 ayuṣman für āyuṣ° : § 50.2.43A3 araṇya~ ⇒ āraṇya~ § 7.7.8B4. evaṃ svādhyāyati, araṇye vasati, prahāṇe upaviśati, so evâsya ovādo § 7.7.8B5. upādhyāyo ... na svādhyāyati, na araṇye vasati, na prahāṇe upaviśati § 9.1.9B5. na jānanti: ... kathaṃ araṇye pratipadyitavyaṃ Uddāna (V).39B2. evam araṇye pratipadyitavyaṃ araṇyaka~ für āraṇyaka~ : § 14.18.13B6, § 39.13.31B1 araṇya-vāsa~ “das Leben in der Wildnis” § 37.5.30A4. duṣkaraṃ gṛhiliṅgaparityāgo duṣkaraṃ vastisaṃyamo duṣkaram araṇyavāso a-rājaka~ § 4.17.5B4. nagnā nadī anodikā nagnaṃ rāṣṭraṃ arājakaṃ (vs) are Interj. § 32.2.27A5. so dāni sthaviro pṛcchati “āyuṣmaṃ, kecciro te āgatasya?” āh“âr’ evacciro evacciro ca” artha~ ⇒ anartha-kuśala~, durggandha-prahāṇārthaṃ, yad-artha~, yāvadartham, ārthāya, ārthāye § 11.1.10B2. glānakānāñ ca bhikṣūṇāṃ anukampārthaṃ (= § 12.1.11A6) § 12.14.12A2. {grīṣme śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ...} (≒ § 12.17.12A4) § 12.14.12A2. vaktavyo “na eṣo tava kiñcit bhogārthaṃ vadiṣanti (für uddiśīyati?). ...” § 12.14.12A2. pratisaṃskāraṇārthaṃ eṣo ca{ṃ} uddiśīyati § 36.6.29B6. te hi yūyaṃ niśrāya tathāgate brahmacaryaṃ caratha mahato oghasya niḥsaraṇārthaṃ § 39.1.30B5. bhagavān ... yadarthaṃ samudāgato tam artham abhisambhāvayitvā ... § 62.1.49B1. bhagavān ... yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisambhāvayitvā ... § 41.19.35A3. labhanti vipulāṃ arthāṃ yathā pānīyadāyakaḥ (vs) § 46.6.40B1. cīvarakāṇāṃ dayārthaṃ anyaṃ leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ prāvaritukāmo bhavati ... artha-kāma~ § 41.17.34B7. asmākaṃ tāva eṣo ... pratyamitrāṇāṃ arthakāmo hitakāmo artham ⇒ artha~ artha-vaśa~ (BHS) “Ziel; Absicht” § 11.1.10B1. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānās tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanti anuvicaranti (= § 12.1.11A4, § 21.1.20A7) § 11.1.10B3. imā<ṃ pa>ñcârthavaśān saṃpaśyamānās tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyak- saṃbuddhāḥ ... (≒ § 12.1.11A6) § 15.1.13B7. pañcārthavaśāṃ (= § 16.1, § 23.1.21A4, § 24.1.21B7, § 43.1.38A1) artha-hetoḥ (SWTF) “weil es erforderlich ist” ☞ § 33.16, Anm. 2 § 33.16.28A7. arthahetor nnāmaṃ gṛhṇāmi. asuko me upādhyāyo. asuko me ācāryo arthika~ § 4.12.5A5. atha dāni so thokinā arthiko bhavati, ... § 39.9.31A6. yadi arthikā bhaviṣyanti pratipālayiṣyanti § 52.8.44B7. yadi koci nimantreti, yadi arthiko bhavati, praticchitavyaṃ arthotpatti~# (artha-ut°) “Ursprung (einer Belehrung/Vorschrift) aufgrund eines besonderen Anlasses; ein (besonderer) Anlaß”; vgl. Pā. aṭṭh’uppatti ☞ § 18.15, Anm. 1 § 18.15.16A2. eṣaỿvârthotpattiḥ. bhagavān Śrāvastyāṃ viharati ... (= § 20.6.19B2) § 18.20.16A6. eṣā evârthotpattiḥ. bhagavān Śrāvastyāṃ viharati ... (= § 19.6.17B7, § 20.4. 19A7, § 42.2.36A2, § 54.3.46A2, § 55.3.46B4) arddha~ § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, śīrṣam vā duḥkhati, arddha śīrṣasya pithetavyaṃ eko ca karṇṇo arddha-paryaṅka~ (BHS) “Sitzhaltung mit einem gebeugten (und einem angezogenen) Bein” ☞ § 29.6, Anm. 3 ⇒ paryaṅka~, svastika-paryaṅka~ § 29.6.24B3. atha dāni bhikṣu na pāreti svastikaparyaṅkena niṣīdituṃ, arddhaparyaṅkena 92  niṣīditavyaṃ § 29.6.24B4. atha dāni arddhaparyaṅkenâpi na pāreti niṣīdituṃ, ubhau pādau osāriya susaṃvṛtena niṣīditavyaṃ arddha-hasta~ “eine halbe Elle” § 42.8.36B3. bhūmito arddhahasta upasthalatarikā karttavyā arddha-hāra~ “Halsschmuck aus 64 Perlenschnüren” ☞ § 51.13, Anm. 1 § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti śāṭakā vā paṭakā vā hārā vā arddhahārā vā hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇam vā, ... arhat~ § 11.1.10B1. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānās tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanti anuvicaranti (= § 12.1.11A4, § 21.1.20A7; ≒ § 11.1.10B3, § 12.1.11A6) § 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi (Loc. pl.) tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6) alābuka~ “Flaschenkürbis” ☞ § 19.16, Anm. 2 § 24.9.22A5. atha dāni bhūmyastāro bhavati, bhājane karttavyaṃ kuntake vā alābuke vā vaṃśatthālikāyāṃ vā alābu-tumbuka~ “Gefäß aus Flaschenkürbis/Flaschengurke” ☞ § 19.16, Anm. 2 § 19.16.18A6. tatra kuṃtako alābu-{o}tumbako vā thapayitavyo § 19.22.18B2. cchidramallakasyôpari kuntako vā alābutumbuko vā thapayitavyo § 19.23.18B2. paudgalikapaudgalikāni praśvāsaghaṭikāni sthāpayitavyāni ghaṭikā vā karakā vā alābutumbukā vā alīpituṃ für allīyi° : § 34.3.28B3 alīyāṇaṃ für allī° : § 32.7.27B2 alpa~ § 12.16.12A3. atha dāni evaṃ pi stokaṃ bhavati, alpo ’vakāśo bhavati, ... § 42.28.37B4. yadi tāva alpaṃ tailaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ bhavati, ... alpa-nirghoṣa~# “wenig Lärm machend, ruhig”; vgl. Pā. appa-nigghosa § 42.30.37B6. alpaśabdehi alpanirghoṣehi jentāke snāyitavyaṃ alpa-śabda~ (SJW 137a; SWTF I 156, 552; Mbh. 6.92.58) “leise”; vgl. Pā. appa-sadda § 42.30.37B6. alpaśabdehi alpanirghoṣehi jentāke snāyitavyaṃ alpāvakāśa~# (alpa-ava°) “wenig Platz habend” § 12.16.12A4. atha dāni evaṃ pi alpāvakāśo bhavati, vṛddhehi cchanne praviśitavyaṃ allipitavyā für alliyi° : § 34.3.28B3 allimpaṃti für alliyyaṃti : § 8.1.8B6 alliya-# “nahekommen, sich nähern, zukommen”; Pkt. alliyai, s. dazu Oberlies 1993: 24 ⇒ alliyya-, allīya-, ā-llīya-, praty-allīya-, praty-ā-līya-, allīpaya-, √lī, upa-saṃ-√kram § 34.3.28B3. atha khalu ye tahiṃ vṛddhatarakā kṣatriyā bhavanti, te tāva alliyitavyā (Hs. allipi°) alliyya-# “nahekommen, sich nähern, zukommen”; < BHS. allīyati < Skt. ā-√lī; vgl. Oberlies 1993: 24 über Pkt. alliyai ☞ § 8.2, Anm. 2 ⇒ alliya-, allīya-, ā-llīya-, praty-allīya-, praty-ā-līya-, allīpaya-, √lī, upa-saṃ-√kram § 8.1.8B6. te dāni upasaṃpāditāḥ, upādhyāyasya na alliyyaṃti (Hs. allimpaṃti) allīna~ (BHS[Mvu]) “hingegangen, herangekommen, genaht” ⇒ alliya-, alliyya-, allīya-, ā-llīya- § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... yatra dīpā dīpyanti tatra allīno § 41.15.34B5. so dāni supratyavekṣitaṃ kariya corasenāpatisya all[ī]no § 41.16.34B6. kasya kṛtena tvaṃ atra dīpamūlaṃ allīno ’si? allīpa- für allīya- ⇒ āllīpa- für āllīya- § 18.23.16B2. allīpitavyaṃ für allīyi° (= § 19.9.18A2, § 38.4.30A7) § 34.3.28B3~4. allipitavyā (für alliyi°) ... allīyāmi ... allīpatha (für allīya°) ... alīpituṃ (für allīyi°) ... allīpatha (für allīya°) ... allīpitavyaṃ (für allīyi°) (≒ § 35.3.29A3) § 34.4.28B4. allīpitavyaṃ (für allīyi°) (= § 36.3.29B3) § 36.3.29B2. allīpituṃ für allīyi° § 37.3.30A3. āllīpāma (für āllīyā°) ... āllīpāmo (für āllīyā°) ... āllīpatha (für āllīya°) ... 93  allīpituṃ (für allīyi°) ... allīpatha (für allīya°) allīpaya- (BHS[Mvu]) (1) “bringen zu; überreichen”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. allīyati (2) allīpayati (“brings, causes to come”); CDIAL 1387. ālīyate, Pā. allīyāpeti (“brings near”, DP, s.v.), Pkt. alliyāvei (“bringen zu”), allivaï (“überreichen”) ⇒ allīya-, alliya-, alliyya-, ā-llīya- § 12.12.11B7. taṃ likhitaṃ saṃghasthavirasya allīpitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman ...” § 25.13.22B7~23A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ upādhyāyasya vâcāryasya vā pātram allīpayati, nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ vāmena hastena allīpayituṃ. atha khalu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā dakṣiṇena hastena pātraṃ allīpayitavyaṃ (2) “nahekommen, sich nähern, zukommen” (Kausativ auf -āpayati mit nicht-kausativer Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG §§ 38.58f.) § 52.3.44B3. piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhiyāṇaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā allīpayitavyaṃ allīya Abs. von ā-√lī- ⇒ allīya- allīya- (BHS[Mvu]), ā-llīya-# “nahekommen, sich nähern, zukommen”; < ā-√lī- ☞ § 8.2, Anm. 2 ⇒ alliya-, alliyya-, allīna~, praty-allīya-, praty-ā-līya-, allīpaya-, √lī, upa-saṃ-√kram, prati- sara- § 8.2.8B6. kathaṃ ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ, ye ime asmākaṃ naỿv’ allīyaṃti (Hs. na avallīyaṃti) na pratyālīyanti? § 10.1.10A3. te antevāsikā ācārikasya niśrayaṃ gṛhṇiya naỿva allīyanti na pratyallīyanti § 10.2.10A4. ye dāni asmākaṃ <na> allīyanti na pratyal<l>īyanti, kathaṃ ime ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ? § 18.23.16B2. atha dāni uppīḍito bhavati, acchaṭikāṃ karantena allīyitavyaṃ (Hs. allīpi°) § 19.9.18A2. atha dāni so bhikṣuḥ uppīḍiyate yeva acchaṭikāṃ karantena allīyitavyaṃ (Hs. allīpi°) § 31.22.26A5. yatra nevāsikā bhavanti tatra gantavyaṃ. allīyāṇaṃ (Abs.) nâpi kṣamati vaktuṃ “vandāmî”tti. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman vandiṣyan” ti § 32.1.27A4. so dāni āgantuko allīya (Abs.) tasya nevāsikasya pādāṃ vanda{n}ti § 32.7.27B2. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ samavasthāye niṣaṇṇo bhavati, taṃ velaṃ al<l>īyāṇaṃ śīrṣeṇa pādā{ṃ} vanditavyā, karkaṭagrāhikāye vanditavyā § 34.3.28B3. vaktavyaṃ “dīrghāyu kṣatriyaparṣāye imaṃ va kāryaṃ allīyāmi” tti § 35.3.29A3. “dīrghāyu, asti me kiñcid brāhmaṇaparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ allīyāma” tti § 36.3.29B3. dīrghāyu, asti <me> kiñci gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ, allīyāma mā āllīyāmo? § 38.2.30A6. upādhyāyācāryā! saṃghasya madhye me kiñcit kāryaṃ. āllīyāmi mā allīyāmi? § 34.3.28B3~4. yadi tāva te jalpanti “bhante, mā allīyatha (Hs. allīpa°)” tti, na kṣamati al<l>īyituṃ (Hs. alīpi°). atha dāni jalpanti “allīyatha (Hs. allīpa°)” tti, allīyitavyaṃ (Hs. allīpi°) (≒ § 35.3.29A3) § 36.3.29B3. yadi tāva jalpanti “bhante mā āllīyatha (Hs. āllīpa°)” tti, na kṣamati āllīyituṃ (Hs. āllīpi°). atha dāni jalpati “āllīyatha (Hs. āllīpa°)” tti, allīyitavyaṃ (Hs. allīpi°) § 37.3.30A2~3. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, asti me kiñci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryaṃ, āllīyāma (Hs. āllīpā°) mā āllīyāmo (Hs. āllīpā°) vā (Hs. tha)?” tti. yadi tāva jalpanti “mā āllīyatha (Hs. āllīpa°)” tti, na kṣamati allīyituṃ (Hs. allīpi°), atha dāni jalpanti “allīyatha (Hs. allīpa°)” tti, upasaṃkramitavyaṃ § 34.4.28B4. ekānte cchattraṃ nikṣipiya upānahāy’ omuṃciya tato allīyitavyaṃ (Hs. °īpi°) § 35.4.29A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cchatreṇa vā dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi brāhmaṇaparṣā āllīyituṃ (Hs. āllīpi°) § 36.3.29B2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kiñcit kāryam bhavati, na kṣamati gatāgatasya allīyituṃ (Hs. allīpi°) § 38.3.30A6. yadi tāva so bhavati ... anarthakuśalo vā abhinīhārakuśalo vā kalahakārako vā bhaṇḍanakārako vā bhāṣyakārako vā adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā allīyāhi” tti § 38.4.30A7. yadi tāva tasya dugraho bhavati vaktavyaṃ, “mā allīya.” atha dāni tasya sugraho bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “āllīya” tti, allīyitavyaṃ (Hs. allīpi°) § 38.5.30A7. allīya (Abs.) vṛddhāntāto prabhṛti sarvveṣāṃ praṇāmo karttavyo allīyāṇaṃ Abs. von ā-√lī- ⇒ allīya- 94 *alloḍiya “gemischt habend”?; < *āloḍiya < āloḍya? ☞ § 18.53, Anm. 7 § 18.53.17B3. (parakerako uccāro) ... udakena accāviya (für *alloḍiya?) ghanena narttakena parisrāviya, ... avakāśa~ “Platz, freier Raum” § 12.16.12A3. atha dāni evaṃ pi stokaṃ bhavati, alpo ’vakāśo bhavati, ... § 18.23.16B2. iminā ca parāṅmukhena bhavitavyaṃ. tasya câvakāśo dātavyaḥ § 19.9.18A2. iminā avakāśo dātavyo. tato ubhayehi praśvāso karttavyo ava-kīrṇṇa~ ⇒ ujjhitāvakīrṇṇa~ ava-krānta~ “geboren”?; vgl. SWTF, s.v. avakrānti “Eintritt in diese Welt, Wiedergeburt” ☞ § 41.19, Anm. 2 § 41.19.35A4. ācāreṇa anāryā āryā jātâvakrāntāḥ (lies: jātī ava° [m.c.] ?) (vs) avaḍḍhako für āvaṭṭako : § 8.13.9B3 ava-tara-, ava-tāraya- ⇒ o-tara- (1), o-tara- (2), o-tāraya-, o-tāre- avatāra~ (BHS, SWTF) “Gelegenheit (zum Angriff)” ⇒ otāra~ § 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “ ... na ca vo Māraḥ pāpīyāṃ avatāram adhigamiṣyati saddharmmasya antarddhānāya sa<ṃ>mohāya.” a-vadhya~ ⇒ vadhya~ § 41.19.35A3. vadhyā bhavanty avadhyā (vs) Avanti~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-...-Vatsa-Matsya-Śūrasena-Śibi-Daśārṇa-Aśvaki-Avanti~ a-varṣaka~# “einer, der noch kein Jahr (als Mönch verbracht) hat”; vgl. SWTF, s.v. a-varṣika ☞ § 12.12, Anm. 4 § 12.12.12A1. tato vihārakā uddiśitavyāḥ, vṛddhāntato prabhṛti yāva avarṣaka-paryantaṃ (Hs. avaryaka°) avalekhana~ “Spatel zum Abkratzen (des Schmutzes)”#; vgl. CPD, s.v. avalekhana-kaṭṭha (“a wooden chip for cleaning”) ☞ § 18.16, Anm. 4 ⇒ apalekh~ § 18.16.16A4. atha khalu avalekhanaṃ nāma karttavyaṃ ava-śiṣṭa~ § 20.11.19B7. evaṃ tāva khādayitavyaṃ yāva dantakāṣṭhasya catvāri aṅgulāni avaśiṣṭāni § 44.1.38B7. sa cīvaraṃ ... sarvvaṃ karddamehi anupraviṣṭaṃ cīvarakoṇako avaśiṣṭo avaśeṣa~ ⇒ pānīyāvaśeṣa~, stokāvaśeṣa~ § 20.9.19B5. tena dāni khādantena dantakāṣṭhaṃ tho<kā>vaśeṣaṃ kṛtaṃ a-vaśyam “unbedingt, auf jeden Fall” § 3.5.3B2. avaśyaṃ vaṃśavidalikāhi vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā ... dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ § 4.11.5A3. dīrghāyu avaśyan teṣāṃ dātavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ava-ṣṭabhaya- “haftenbleiben” § 39.9.31A6. yadi na sajjaṃ bhavati, na dāni bhaktāgraṃ avaṣṭabhayitavyo (Nom. sg. neut.) āsayitavyaṃ ava-sara-, ava-sāraya- ⇒ o-sara-, o-sāraya- avasthā~ ⇒ dharmmatāvasthāprāpta~ ava-sthāpaya- “verweilen lassen” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... phalabhāgiyān satvāṃ phalehi pratiṣṭhāpayamāno, vāsanā- bhāgīyān satvān vāsanāyām avasthāpayamāṇo (Kaus. mit medialer Endung) avikālako für a<ti>vi°? : § 31.25.26A7 a-vidūreṇa# “nicht sehr weit entfernt”; vgl. Skt = Pā. a-vidūre § 31.4.25B3. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ ... a-vivadamāna~ (SWTF, Pā) “nicht (mit Worten) streitend” ⇒ vi-√vad § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ sahitānāṃ saṃmodamānānāṃ avivadamānānāṃ ekoddeśakānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? a-vivarjita~ “nicht ohne” § 31.5.25B5. atha dāni corā saprasādā bhavanti, vṛddhehi agrato gantavyaṃ, yathā paśyitvā prasādena avivarjitā gaccheṃsu a-viśrambha-kula~# “nicht vertraute Familie” ⇒ viśrambha-kula~, a-śrāddha-kula~ § 48.6.41B1. atha dāni aśrāddhakulaṃ bhavati bhikṣusya vā aviśrambhakulaṃ (Hs. avisram°) bhavati, ... 95 avisrambhakulaṃ für aviśrambhakulaṃ : § 48.6.41B1 a-vītaka~# “(das Niṣīdana) nicht bedeckt, nicht beschützt”?; < a +vīta (p.pt. von √vyā) + Suffix ka ☞ § 56.5, Anm. 2 § 56.5.47A5. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ paśyati “dvitīye prahāṇe avītakaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti ... aveḍhakā für āve° : § 25.9.22B5 aśani~ ⇒ daṇḍāśani-bhejja~ aśabdakarṇṇikāye# “ohne Ankündigung” ☞ § 14.3, Anm. 2 ⇒ a-pratisaṃviditena, a- pratisaṃviditvā, pratisaṃviditena, saṃviditena § 14.3.13A2. na kṣamati āraṇyakehi aśabdakarṇṇikāye grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ okkasituṃ § 14.15.13B3. na kṣamati tehi aśabdakarṇṇikāye āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantuṃ § 18.22.16B1. na kṣamati nivāsanaṃ oguhiya aśabdakarṇṇikāye varcakuṭī praviśituṃ § 19.8.18A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati aśabdakarṇṇikāye praśvāsakuṭīṃ praviśituṃ § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti ... suvarṇṇam vā, na dāni tahiṃ aśabdakarṇṇikāye nirggantavyaṃ a-śikṣā-kāma~# “keine Neigung zur Śikṣā (den Ordensregeln) verspürend” ☞ § 8.11, Anm. 2 ⇒ śikṣā-kāma~ § 8.11.9A7. śaithaliko vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako vā aśikṣākāmo (Hs. asikṣā°) ... § 8.13.9B3. yadi so bhavati śaithiliko vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako vâśikṣākāmo ... § 18.52.17B2. atha dāni so bhavati śaithiliko vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako vā aśikṣākāmo, ... aśubha-samāpatti~# “Meditation über das Unreine”; vgl. CPD, s.v. asubha-samāpatti; BHSD, s.v. aśubha-bhāvanā § 19.11.18A3. nâpi dāni tahiṃ dhyānāntaragateṇa vā svādhyāyam vā karentena aśubhasamāpattim vā samāpannena āsitavyaṃ a-śodhitaka~ ⇒ śodhitaka~ a-śrāddha~ (SWTF) “ungläubig” ⇒ śrāddha~ § 37.5.30A3. aśrāddhā tīrthikāḥ, ahrīkā tīrthikāḥ, anotrāpino tīrthikāḥ, mithyādṛṣṭikā ... a-śrāddha-kula~# “ungläubige Familie” ⇒ a-viśrambha-kula~, śrāddha~ § 31.32.26B6. amutra śunakhā caṇḍāḥ. amukaṃ aśrāddhakulaṃ § 48.6.41B1. atha dāni aśrāddhakulaṃ bhavati bhikṣusya vā aviśrambhakulaṃ bhavati, ... § 48.7.41B3. atha dāni aśrāddhakulaṃ bhavati na vā bhikṣusya viśrambhakulaṃ bhavati, ... aśva~ ⇒ prabhūta-hasty-a°-aja-gav’-eḍaka~ § 47.7.41A1. parivarjitavyā bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā hasti § 49.5.42B1. anekāye bhrānto vā hasti āgaccheya bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā ratho Aśvaki~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-...-Vatsa-Matsya-Śūrasena-Śibi-Daśārṇa-Aśvaki-Avanti~ aśvavaṭavā für °vaḍavā : § 47.7.41A1 aśva-vaḍavā~ “Hengst und Stute” § 47.7.41A1. parivarjitavyā bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā hasti bhrānto vā ratho aśvavaḍavā (Hs. °vaṭavā) (pl. masc., gebraucht anstelle von dual °vaḍavau, oder eine Umschreibung von °vaḍavaṃ; vgl. § 47.7[Text], Anm. 1) vā oharapārayuktaṃ aṣṭa~ § 20.8.19B5. jyeṣṭhaṃ nāma ṣoḍaśāṅgulāni madhyamaṃ dvādaśāṅgulāni kanīyasam aṣṭāṅgulāni § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena dvādaśahastāṃ āyāmato karttavyaṃ aṣṭahastāṃ vistāreṇa aṣṭa-bhāgam “in den acht Himmelsrichtungen”# ⇒ catur-bhāgam § 40.15.33A6. yadi aṣṭabhāga<ṃ> caturbhāgaṃ ca niṣaṇṇakā bhavanti, ekena madhyamaṃ vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ aṣṭa-varṣa~ § 41.12.34B2. yaṃ kālaṃ saptavarṣo ’ṣṭavarṣo vā ... aṣṭa-śata~ “hundertacht” § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” 96 √as ⇒ sat~, samāna~ § 4.17.5B5. tām eva bhāryāṃ vareyā yâsyā (< yā asyā [Opt. 3. sg.]; Hs. yo asyā) śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) § 4.18.5B7. yā tatra devatā asyā (Opt. 3. pl.; vgl. BHSG § 29.40) tāsāṃ dakṣiṇām ādiśe (vs) § 18.53.17B3. pibāhi, yadi ’si jīvitukāmo § 19.42.19A4. piba yadi jīvitukāmo ’si § 31.23.26A6. āyuṣman, asti etāvativarṣasya vihārako prāpuṇati? (In einem Hauptsatz stehen zwei Verba; ☞ § 31.23, Anm. 2) § 32.11.27B4. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. mâsi śrānto? mâsi klānto? § 39.10.31A7. nâsti mama tahiṃ śraddhā nâpi prasādo § 41.15.34B5. haṃgho dāraka, pipāsito ’smi § 41.16.34B6. kasya kṛtena tvaṃ atra dīpamūlaṃ allīno ’si? § 41.21.35A4. syād vo bhikṣavo evam asyâ<syā>d (Opt. 3. sg.) § 42.13.36B6. ye tasmiṃ pariveṇikā saṃti tehi gantavyaṃ § 42.24.37B2. yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tato āgacchantu § 42.24.37B2. tato yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tehi gantavyaṃ § 49.1.42A4. evaṃ ca evaṃ câsmi vipralabdho § 54.3.46A2. te dāni bhikṣu viheṭhiyantā ārāvaṃ muñca<ṃ>ti “āyuṣmaṃ, hato ’smi. hato ’smî”ti (≒ § 55.3.46B5) et passim a-satī~ § 4.17.5B5. asatiṃ parivarjeyā mārggaṃ pratibhayaṃ yathā (vs) asani (daṇḍāsani-bhejjā) für aśani (daṇḍāśani-bhejjā) : § 26.8.23B2 asikṣākāmo für aśikṣākāmo : § 8.11.9A7 asuka~ (SWTF; Pā) “ein gewisser, der und der”; vgl. v. Hinüber 2001: § 388 ⇒ amuka~ § 5.6.6B3. asuke deśe asukāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ itthaṃnāmo nāma upāsako § 8.7.9A4. “asukāto veśikākulāto caṃḍavidhavāye sthūlakumārīye paṇḍakasya asukāye bhikṣuṇīye.” § 8.7.9A4. atha dān’ āha “asukesmi kule buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ, tato labdhaṃ.” § 12.10.11B5. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ... Vgl. § 12.12.11B7. amuke vihārake ettakā mañcā ettakā pīṭhāḥ ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ... § 33.16.28A6~7. na dāni vaktavyaṃ “asuko ācāryo. asuko upādhyāyo.” atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “arthahetor nnāmaṃ gṛhṇāmi. asuko me upādhyāyo. asuko me ācāryo.” § 38.4.30A7. pṛcchitavyo “kiṃ kāryaṃ?” āha “asukam vā asukam vā” § 38.5.30A7. saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti § 42.16.37A2. asukasya vā asukasya vā parikarmma kuryesi § 52.6.44B4~5. yadi tāva āha “upādhyāyācārya, asukāye ceṭikāye dinnaṃ. asukāye caṇḍa- vidhavāye dinnaṃ. asukena paṇḍakena dinnaṃ. asukāye sthūlakumārīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpabhikṣuṇīye dinnaṃ. asukāye (Hs. °kāyo) pāpaśrāmaṇerīye dinnaṃ”, ... § 52.6.44B5. atha dāni āha “upādhyāyācārya, asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno”, ... a-stara-# “ausbreiten; bedecken, bestreuen”; < Skt. ā-√stṛ; vgl. Pā. attharati, Pkt. attharaï ⇒ astaraṇa~, astaraṇika~, astarikā~, āstaraṇa~, praty-ā-stara-, bhūmi-astāra~, bhūmy-astāra~, bhūmy-āstara~ § 21.2.20A7. adrākṣīd ... anyataraṃ bhikṣuṃ bhūmau astariya cīvaraṃ sīvantaṃ § 21.3.20B1. evan taṃ tvaṃ bhūmīya astarīya cīvaraṃ sivayasi § 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinaṃ astariyāṇaṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ... § 21.6.20B4. tenâpi kaṭhinaṃ astarīya cīvarakaṃ yeva tathā sīvayitavyaṃ § 42.7.36B2. bhūmi astaritavyā upalehi vā pakviṭṭikāya vā astaraṇa~# “Matte”; < Skt. āstaraṇa; vgl. Pā. attharaṇa ☞ § 14.7, Anm. 2 ⇒ āstaraṇa~, astaraṇika~, astarikā~, bhūmi-astāra~, bhūmy-astāra~, bhūmy-āstara~, saṃstaraṇa~ § 14.15.13B4. yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā upaskaro vā śraddhāprasannehi upāsakakulehi sthāpayitavyaṃ 97 astaraṇika~# “Matte”; < Skt. āstaraṇika; vgl. Pā. attharaṇa ☞ § 14.7, Anm. 2 ⇒ astaraṇa~, āstaraṇa~, astarikā~, saṃstaraṇa~ § 14.7.13A6. yaṃ sārāsāraṃ śayyāsanaṃ amilā vā astaraṇikā{ṃ} vā kocakā vā guḍuguḍukā vā makucakā vā ... astarikā~# “Matte”: vgl. Pā. attharikā ☞ § 48.5, Anm. 2 ⇒ astaraṇa~, astaraṇika~, āstaraṇa~, bhūmi-astāra~, bhūmy-astāra~, bhūmy-āstara~, saṃstaraṇa~ § 48.5.41A7. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā ... § 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā amilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati asthi-khaṇḍa~# “Knochensplitter” § 18.16.16A4. tena hi na kṣamati ... kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā asthikhaṇḍena vā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchituṃ *asma-parṣā~ “unsere Versammlung”; < *asmat-parṣā~ § 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ (Hs. câsmip°) upasaṃ- kramesi. saṃgho te uttari upaparīkṣiṣyati √ah § 1.1.1B1. āhaṃsu “no dīrghāyu” § 1.1.1B1. bhikṣū āhaṃsu “saṃghasthaviro nâgacchati” § 1.11.2A4. atha dāni āhaṃsu “vasiṣyāma” tti, vaktavyaṃ “gacchatha tāva ...” § 20.1.19A5. so dān’ āha § 1.3.1B4. āha “āma bhagavan” (= § 20.2.19A7) § 4.12.5A5. āha “na hi. āryasya etaṃ evaṃ dīyati.” § 4.18.5B6. yo nīharati dānena dinnaṃ taṃ āhu (3. pl.) tihutaṃ (lies: *nīhṛt°) (vs) § 20.5.19B1. bhikṣū āhaṃsu § 20.7.19B4. āhaṃsu (= § 39.1.30B6, § 39.1.30B7, § 39.2.31A1, § 48.2.41A6 usw.) § 26.2.23A6. te dāni śabdāpitāḥ, etad eva pṛcchiyanti, āha (3. sg. perf. für 3. pl.) “āma bhagavan!” § 39.2.31A1. te dāni teṣāṃ āraṇyakānāṃ āhaṃsu § 1.3.1B3. bhagavān āha (= § 39.3.31A1, § 40.2.32B3, § 40.2.32B3, § 40.3.32B4, § 41.2.33B4, § 41.2.33B6, § 41.11.34A7, § 41.21.35A4, § 42.1.36A2, § 42.4.36A6, § 42.4.36A7, § 44.2.39A1, § 45.2.39B4, § 45.3.39B5, § 46.2.40A4, § 46.2.40A5, § 46.3.40A6, § 47.2.40B4, § 47.3.40B5, § 48.2.41A4, § 48.3.41A6 et passim) § 3.3.3B1. āhaṃsuḥ (= § 13.3.12B1, § 40.2.32B4, § 42.2.36A3, § 42.3.36A4~5 usw.) § 39.22.32A1. atha dāni āhaṃsuḥ (3. pl. aor. für 3. sg; in der Funktion des Optativs; ☞ § 39.22[Text], Anm. 2) “nâsti mama ta{ṃ}hiṃ śraddhā, nâsti prasādo”, ... § 39.26.32A3. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “ahaṃ pi ahaṃ pi” tti, ... § 41.1.33B3. te dāni āhaṃsuḥ § 41.2.33B6. āhaṃsu “āma bhagavan” (= § 42.4.36A7, § 45.2.39B5, § 46.2.40A5, § 47.2.40B5 et passim) § 41.11.34A7. bhikṣū dāni bhagavantam āhaṃsu § 41.15.34B5. so ... tasya dārakasyâha § 41.18.35A2. so dāni dārakasyâha § 42.4.36A7. yūyaṃ dāni āhaṃsu (3. pl. für 2. pl.; vgl. BHSG § 25.31) § 42.20.37A5. dānapati āhaṃsuḥ § 42.21.37A5. atha dāni prakṛty’ eva āhaṃsuḥ § 42.21.37A6. antevāsiko sārddhevihāriko vā āhaṃsu § 42.21.37A6. upāsakā vā karmmakarā ārāmikā vā āhaṃsu § 49.9.42B7. pureśramaṇo na pratibalo bhavati dakṣiṇām ādiśituṃ, āhaṃsu (gebraucht als 3. sg.; vgl. BHSG §§ 33.1, 6) “ādiśa dakṣiṇāṃ” et passim aha~ ⇒ pañcāha~ ahaṃ (BHS, Pā); aham (Skt) ⇒ asma-parṣā~, no (2), me, mo § 41.18.35A1. ko (für ho?) bhaṇe ko ahaṃ yuṣmākaṃ? § 49.1.41B7. ācakṣiṣyāmi ahaṃ 98  § 49.7.42B4. āgamiṣyaṃ ahaṃ yena vā tena <vā?> sārddhaṃ § 3.6.3B4. nâyaṃ <kṣamati> “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ ollaggikāye āsituṃ § 4.6.4B3. nâpi dāni “adhivāsita<ṃ> mayê”ti yatr’ ollagnāye āsitavyaṃ (≒ § 5.6.6B2, § 6.6.7B3) § 22.1.20B6. śītalakaṃ ca tena ākrāntaṃ tasya bhavati “dīrghako mayā ākrānto.” § 32.2.27A5. so dān’ āha “vanditā mayā tava pādā. tvaṃ ca mama na pratisaṃmodesi.” § 32.2.27A6. tadā tava mayā pādā vanditā § 50.2.43A4. so dāni āha “āyuṣman, na tvaṃ mayā adhyeṣṭo "icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyamānaṃ"?” § 50.8.43B4. nâpi kṣamati nīhārapiṇḍapātenâpi “adhyeṣṭo mayā piṇḍapātanīhārako” ti adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ § 32.2.27A6. evaṃ ca yaṃ tvaṃ mama pādāṃ vandantasya na pratisaṃmodesi § 39.22.32A1. atha dāni āhaṃsuḥ “nâsti mama ta{ṃ}hiṃ śraddhā, nâsti prasādo”, vaktavyaṃ “vayaṃ pi na praticchāmo” nti § 49.7.42B5. dinnā mama āṇattikā § 50.2.43A4. evaṃ ca tvaṃ mama piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karesi § 58.4.48A4. a<na>ntariko vaktavyo “āyuṣman, mama tāva piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhê”ti § 59.5.48B2. ānantarikasya vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, mama piṇḍapātam ukkaḍḍhesi” § 60.5.48B7. ānantarikasya pātraṃ dātavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mama piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍhesi” § 1.1.1B2. vayaṃ (= § 2.1.2B2, § 3.1.3A7, § 4.1.4A6, § 39.10.31A7, § 41.17.34B7, § 41.18.35A1, § 41.18.35A2, § 42.21.37A7, § 42.25.37B3, § 42.31.37B7, § 47.1.40B3, § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A4, § 48.2.41A6 et passim) § 41.18.35A2. vayaṃ ... demi (!) § 42.21.37A6. vayam ... upasthāpayiṣyāmi (!) § 5.10.7A1. kim asmābhiḥ vihārako śūnyako karttavyo? § 4.11.5A3. kim vā ambhehi (Instr. pl.) vihāra śūnyaṃ śakyaṃ karttuṃ § 6.10.8A1. “ ... kiṃ ambhehi śakyam vihārako śūnyako kartun” ti § 8.2.8B6. kathaṃ ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ ... na pratyālīyanti? § 10.2.10A4. kathaṃ ime ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ? § 39.1.30B7. āhatā pi ’yaṃ gaṇḍī, bhukta<ṃ> pi amhehi (Instr. pl.) § 2.2.2B2. asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmman dadāti/deti (≒ § 2.3.2B3, § 3.2.3A7, § 3.3. 3B1, § 5.3.6B1, § 6.2.7A6, § 6.3.7B1, § 8.2.8B6, § 10.2.10A3) § 54.13.46B1. atha khalu cintetavyaṃ “bahukaro eṣo asmākaṃ vinīvaraṇaṃ karoti.” et passim ahaṃsu für āh° : § 2.1.2B1 ahaṃgho für haṃgho? : § 33.2.27B7 ahan ⇒ *atiparahṇe ahanati für āhananti : § 54.3.46A2 aham ⇒ ahaṃ ahar~ ⇒ *atiparahṇe, pañcāha~ § 1.5.1B4. yad aho saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, tad aho saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ § 2.5.2B4. yad aho dāni saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati ... aho “Oh” § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” § 62.2.49B6. ānantarikānāṃ baddhamuṣṭikāṃ jighrāpenti, āha “jighrâyuṣman, aho mṛṣṭo gandho. aho śobhano gandho.” a-hrīka~ (BHS, SWTF) “schamlos” § 37.5.30A3. aśrāddhā tīrthikāḥ, ahrīkā tīrthikāḥ, anotrāpino tīrthikāḥ, mithyādṛṣṭikā ... 99  Ā ā / a + | (Daṇḍa) ⇒ a + | (Daṇḍa) / ā ā / aṃ ⇒ aṃ / ā ā/i: § 60.1.48B5. śalikāyaṃ für śalākāyaṃ ā/ī: § 40.16.33B1. pāpicakadharmmīya für pāyattikadharmmāya? § 54.7.46A4. yaṣṭā für yaṣṭī ā/e: § 18.12.16A1. jjhallajjhaleye für °jjhalāye § 19.25.18B3. cchannā für cchanne § 25.15.23A3. pātramelake für °mālake § 31.33.26B7. nivāsikāhi für °kehi ā / o ⇒ o / | (Daṇḍa) + ā § 1.6.1B5. abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā für °kāyo? § 4.17.5B4. peśalā für °peśalo § 4.18.5B7. bhūrimecasā für °medhaso § 4.20.6A2. pañcadho für °dhā § 12.5.11B3. dātavyā für °tavyo § 13.15.12B6. śāṭitavyo für °tavyā § 14.4.13A3. kocavako für °vakā § 14.12.13B2. pratisaṃskāroyetavyā für °kārāpetavyā § 15.7.14A3. bhagnakā für °ako § 17.9.15A3. śarkarāṭakā für °karoṭakā § 19.16.18A5. aprakṛtikā für °iko § 23.3.21A6. ullāpo für ulloyo (zweimal) § 26.5.23B1. nikhosiya für ni<k>khāsiya § 31.37.27A3. sārthā für °rtho § 31.37.27A3. gacchamanonāṃ für °mānānāṃ § 32.10.27B4. vraṇā für °ṇo § 33.2.27B7. gṛhī-ālopena für °-ālāpena § 38.5.30A7. karttavyā für °vyo § 39.21.32A1. thātoyaliptāṃ für dhotôpaliptāṃ ☞ § 39.21(Text), Anm. 1 § 41.15.34B5. sudhātāṃ für sudhotāṃ § 42.21.37A5. yā für yo § 43.14.38B2. yācitavyā für °tavyo § 50.1.43A1. adhyeṣṭā für °eṣṭo § 55.10.47A1. pāṭitavipāṭitā für °ito § 57.3.47B2. nikkhosiya für nikkhāsiya usw. ā / o + | (Daṇḍa) : § 41.26.35B2. jalpayitavyo{|}yo für jalpayitavyāyo ākalpa~ ⇒ an-ākalpa-sampanna~ ākalpiya-karkkarī~ für *akalpiya-karkkarī~: § 40.7.32B7 ā-√kāṅkṣ § 50.9.43B5. yadi tāva ākāṃkṣati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ yaṃ rucyati, taṃ khāditavyaṃ § 62.1.49B4. cetovaśiparamapāramiprāptā punar bbuddhā bhagavanto yehi yehi vihārehi ākāṃkṣanti, tehi tehi vihārehi viharanti ākāra~ ⇒ sākāram ākāśa~ “Licht, Helle” § 53.18.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ vibhātaṃ bhavati, ākāśaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (“[wenn] es hell geworden ist”), tato varccakuṭīye prasrāvakuṭīye ca dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo ākāśa-tala~ “Flachdach”; vgl. Pā. ākāsa-tala ☞ § 18.6, Anm. 1 § 18.6.15B4. ākāśatalaṃ vā liṃpitavyaṃ mṛttikāya vā sudhāya vā ā-koṭaya- (BHS), ā-koṭe- (Pā) “schlagen; stampfen, einstampfen” ☞ § 15.9, Anm. 2 § 8.4.8B7. sārdhevihāriṇā ... upādhyāyasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ § 10.4.10A5. antevāsinā tāva kalyato yeva ... ācāryasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ 100  § 15.7.14A3. taṃ apaniya anyo kīlako ākoṭayitavyo pātraprasevikā sthāpayitavyā § 15.9.14A4. mūṣa-ukkirā vā bhava<ṃ>ti, ākoṭayitavyā § 17.8.15A2. sarvvasaṃghasya gaṇḍim ākoṭayitvā ... § 17.9.15A3. vihārakā uppeḍanakā bhavanti, śarkaroṭakā vā apakkapāṃsuko vā parihari- tavyo ākoṭayitavyo § 22.2.20B7. vihārasya dvārasmiṃ upari trayo kīlakāni ā<ko>ṭayitavyā § 23.8.21B6. saṃtānikā śāṭayitavyā, mūṣika-ukkiro vâkoṭayitavyo § 25.1.22B1. yavāgūye gaṇḍī ākoṭitā § 42.12.36B5. gaṇḍī ākoṭetavyā § 42.12.36B5. gaṇḍī ākoṭetavyo (lies: ākoṭenti?) § 42.12.36B6. na dāni ... gaṇḍī ākoṭetavyā § 42.12.36B6. gaṇḍi ākoṭetvā agnir dātavyo § 42.13.36B6. jentākasya gaṇḍī ākoṭitā {je} jānitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyā) ā-krānta~ “getreten” ⇒ √kram § 22.1.20B6. śītalakaṃ ca tena ākrāntaṃ tasya bhavati “dīrghako mayā ākrānto.” § 44.1.38B7. taṃ dāni ekena ākrāntaṃ dvitīyena ākrāntaṃ tṛtīyenâkrāntaṃ § 44.6.39A4. ekena ’krāntaṃ dvitīyena ākrāntaṃ ... āklinnakaṃ für aklinnakaṃ : § 48.8.41B5 ā-gaccha- ⇒ ā-√gam ā-gata~ “gekommen” ⇒ o-kasta~ § 1.1.1B2. vayan tāva karmmāntān cchoriya ā<gatā> § 2.1.2B2. vayaṃ yeva tāva karmmāntā cchoriya āgatā (≒ § 5.3.6A7) § 3.1.3A7. vayaṃ yeva karmmāntāṃ cchoriya āgatā (= § 4.1.4A6) § 1.2.1B2. navakā bhikṣū pṛcchanti: “āyuṣmānn, āgato saṃghasthaviro?” bhikṣū āhaṃsu: “āgato ca gato ca” (≒ § 4.2.4A7) § 2.1.2B1. saṃghasthaviro āgato bhikṣu āgatā dvitīyasthaviro nâgacchati § 2.2.2B2. so dāni ativikāle āgato § 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto ... āgatasya samānasya hastanirmādanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 31.28.26B2. atha dāni āgantukā bhikṣū vihāra āgatā bhavanti, ... § 31.29.26B3~4. yadi tāva purebhakte āgatā (Hs. āmatā) bhavanti, ... deśakāle āgatā bhavanti, ... vikāle āgatā bhavanti, ... § 31.31.26B5. yaṃ kālaṃ āgantukā piṇḍāye cariya vihāraṃ āgatā bhavanti, ... § 31.36.27A2. yadi tāva stūpikena vā kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, ... sāṃghikena kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, ... (≒ § 32.12.27B5) § 32.2.27A5. so dāni sthaviro pṛcchati “āyuṣmaṃ, kecciro te āgatasya?” § 32.2.27A5. āyuṣman, evacciro tava āgatasya, na ca me pādavandako upasaṃkramasi § 39.1.30B6. te dāni āraṇyakā deśakāle grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ āgatā § 39.12.31A7. dānapati āgato bhavati, āraṇyakā ca nâgacchanti § 39.6.31A3. yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgatā bhavanti § 40.1.32B3. āgantukā bhikṣū āgatāḥ § 40.2.32B4. āgantukānāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ gaṇo āgato § 41.6.34A2. sthaviro ... vihāraṃ āgato § 42.2.36A2. āgatā bhikṣū dvāraṃ yācanti § 56.1.47A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa āgatā samānā skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti § 57.11.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ adhvānam āgato bhavati, upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, ... § 58.5.48A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgato bhavati, grīvā marditavyā et passim āgati~ § 1.2.1B3. te pi navakā bhikṣū āhaṃsu “naỿva saṃghasthavirasya āgatiḥ prajñāyate na gatiḥ” § 1.3.1B3. naỿva saṃghasthavirasyâgatir nna gatiḥ prajñāyate (≒ § 4.3.4B1) § 4.2.4A7. naỿva saṃghasthavirasya āgatir ggatiḥ prajñāyati 101 āgantuka~ (SWTF, Pā) “Anreisender” (☞ § 4.5, Anm. 7); “Besucher, Gast(mönch)”; vgl. Deeg 2005a: 108f. § 4.5.4B2. āgantuko gamiko gṛhastho pravrajito strī puruṣo dārako dārikā § 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ ... etaṃ bhaktaṃ ... āgantukasya gamikasya gṛhasthasya pravrajitasyêti (= § 5.12.7A3, § 6.12.8A3) § 5.5.6B1. bhikṣu bhikṣuṇī upāsako ’pāsikā āgantuko gamiko § 6.5.7B2. gṛhastho pravrajito vāṇijako sārthavāho āgantuko gamiko? § 15.3.14A1. vayaṃ bhagavan āgantukā. ye nevāsikā te <prati>saṃskariṣyanti § 15.4.14A1. evaṃ āgantukehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 15.11, Uddāna [II].20A6) § 16.3.14A7. vayaṃ bhagavan nevāsikā. ye āgantukā te pratisaṃskariṣyanti § 16.5.14A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati naivāsikehi ye vihārakā oddriṇṇakā ... te āgantukānāṃ sthāpayituṃ § 16.5.14B1. ye vihārakā navakā ca supratisaṃskṛtā ca, te āgantukānāṃ sthāpayitavyā § 16.6.14B1. “yadi āgantukānāṃ mātu atyāyikaṃ bhaviṣyati, tato dhoviṣyanti ...” (≒ § 16.7.14B2) § 31.1.25A7. āgantukānāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ gaṇo āgato (= § 40.2.32B3) § 31.1.25B1. tehi dāṇi āyuṣmantehi ṣaḍvarggikehi āgantukā dṛṣṭāḥ § 31.2.25B2. nâpi kṣamati āgantukehi vihāraṃ okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviśituṃ § 31.3.25B2. evaṃ āgantukehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 31.38.27A3, Uddāna [IV].30B4) § 31.3.25B2. ete dāni bhikṣu āgantukā {ā}gacchanti, sarvvehi pāḍiyakkapāḍiyak{a}kāni apāvuraṇāni upasthāpayitavyāni § 31.16.26A1. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullap<itavyaṃ āg>ant<uk>ehi “hū ha he adyâpi ...” § 31.22.26A5. yadi tāva āgantuko vṛddhatarako bhavati, nevāsikena utthiya pādā vandi- tavyā, āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 31.24.26A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati tehi āgantukehi nevāsikāṃ kutsiya haṃbhiya “āyuṣmann, adyâpi yūyaṃ iha vasatha. ...” § 31.27.26B2. āgantukānāṃ {piṇḍakānāṃ} piṇḍabhaktāni uddiśitavyāni § 31.28.26B2. atha dāni āgantukā bhikṣū vihāra āgatā bhavanti, nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he nāvā <mucyati> ...” § 31.28.26B3. atha khalu āgantukānāṃ ehisvāgataṃ kartta<vya>ṃ “entu āyuṣmanto, svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. ...” § 31.30.26B5. atha dāni bhaktakāni bhavanti, āgantukā<nā>ṃ piṇḍabhaktakāni uddiśi- tavyāni § 31.31.26B5. atha dāni piṇḍacāriko bhavati, yaṃ kālaṃ āgantukā piṇḍāye cariya vihāraṃ āgatā bhavanti, ... § 31.31.26B6. tato yadi nevāsikānāṃ vyañjanāni bhavanti, khajjakāni bhavanti, tato yadi snehakā vā bhavanti, tehi āgantukānāṃ samvibhāgo karttavyo § 31.31.26B6. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato yadi tahiṃ kiñci piṇḍacārikaṃ praṇītatarakaṃ bhavati, āgantukānāṃ sārāṇīyaṃ karttavyaṃ § 32.1.27A4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgantuko āgato. ... so dāni āgantuko allīya tasya nevāsikasya pādāṃ vanda{n}ti § 32.3.27A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati āgantukena nevāsikasya vācovāciṃ karentasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 32.4.27A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu āgantuko āgato bhavati, ... § 40.1.32B3. āgantukā bhikṣū āgatāḥ Antaroddāna 50B2. saṃghasthaviro ca śayyāsana kaṭhina āgantukā ca usw. ā-√gam ⇒ ā-gata~, ā-gama-, ā-gamaya-, ā-game- § 1.1.1B1. “ko dāni nâgacchati?” (= § 5.1.6A5, § 6.1.7A5) § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā § 3.1.3A6. bhikṣu osarantikāye na āgacchanti § 4.2.4A6. so dāṇi paścād āgacchiyāṇa bhuṃjiyāṇa ... § 4.7.4B5. āgacchiya yadi tāva anugraho bhavati, ... (= § 6.7.7B4) § 5.7.6B4. āgacchiyāṇaṃ 102 § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa pīṭhikā prajñapayitavyā ... § 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto āgacchantasya pīṭhikā ānayitavyā, niṣīdanaṃ ānayitavyaṃ ... § 14.1.13A2. so dāni vihārako vanadavena āgacchiyāṇa dagdho § 19.7.18A1. tāva na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā āgamayituṃ, yāva praśvāsena prapīḍito bhavati § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā āgacchiya uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāyitaṃ § 20.2.19A7. āmrapotako ropito ... tvayā so āgacchiya (Hs. agecch°) uppāḍiya bhaṃjiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditaṃ § 24.11.22A6. etasya dāni bhikṣusya gocaraṃ praviśantasya adhvānamārggagatasya vā kheṭo āgacchati, cchoriya pādena marditavyo § 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ sthavitaṃ. tan dāni vātamaṇḍalikāye āgacchiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno kapālānāṃ rāśiṃ kṛtvā § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgacchiya tasya purato sthito § 27.2.23B5. tvaṃ dāni tasya purato āgacchiya sthito § 28.1.24A1. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgatvā tasya purato ... dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramati § 31.20.26A4. saṃghārāmaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi āgantavyaṃ § 31.34.27A1. “ ... yadi keci āgantukā āgaccheṃsu (Opt.), tato dvāraṃ dadesi.” ... yadi tāva keci āgantukā āgacchanti (Hs. °cchenti), teṣāṃ dvāraṃ dātavyaṃ § 34.1.28B1. ime pi śramaṇakā āgacchiya madhye niṣaṇṇāḥ (≒ § 36.2.29B2, § 37.1.29B7) § 34.2.28B2. ime pi śramaṇakâgacchiyāṇaṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā § 35.1.28B7. ime pi śramaṇakā āgacchiyāṇaṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā § 35.2.29A2. ime pi śramaṇakā āgacchiyāṇa madhye niṣaṇṇakā § 36.1.29A7. ime pi śramaṇakā madhye āgacchiyāṇaṃ niṣaṇṇāḥ § 35.1.28B7. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā āgacchiyāṇaṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā § 39.1.30B7. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ atiuccahṇe āgacchatha § 39.8.31A4. atha dāni kālaparyantaṃ nâgacchanti, grāmāntikehi gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjitavyaṃ § 39.9.31A6. kallato yyeva āgacchatha § 39.16.31B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ... āgacchiya pādāṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo § 41.1.33B3. bhikṣu āgacchanti pādadhovanāya § 41.2.33B5. bhikṣū āgacchanti pādadhovanikāye pādāṃ dhovanāye § 42.3.36A4. te dāni dvāraṃ āgacchanti § 42.24.37B2. yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tato āgacchantu § 42.25.37B3. upādhyāyâcāryā, āgacchāhi snāhi § 42.31.37B7. āgacchantu (wohl für gacchantu) āyuṣmanto § 49.1.41B7. āgacchâhaṃ tava śekhayiṣyaṃ § 49.5.42B1. anekāye bhrānto vā hasti āgaccheya bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā ratho § 49.5.42B1. anekāye ... caṇḍo vā śvāno caṇḍo vā goṇo āgaccheya § 49.5.42B1. yadi tāva dakṣiṇenântenâgacchati ... vāmenântenâgacchati § 49.6.42B3. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā pratibalo bhavati piṇḍapātam vā aṇṭhituṃ vihārakaṃ vâgantuṃ § 49.7.42B4. āgamiṣyaṃ ahaṃ yena vā tena <vā?> sārddhaṃ § 49.7.42B5. tenâpi dāni piṇḍacārikaṃ vā aṇṭhiyāṇa vihāraṃ vâgacchiya ... § 50.1.43A3. apareṇa āgacchiyāṇaṃ utkṣiptaṃ § 50.1.43A3. so dāni bhikṣuḥ vihāram āgatvā āgameti § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgacchati, hastena grīvā parimarditavyā § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo kāso āgacchati, bāhirato nirddhāpiya kāsitavyaṃ § 58.4.48A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāsikā āgacchati, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ § 58.4.48A4. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo ukkāsikā āgacchati, ... gantavyaṃ § 58.6.48A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya ukkāsikā āgacchati, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ. ekatam’ aṃte āgacchiya kāsitavyaṃ § 59.4.48A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya anābhogena kṣīvikā āgacchati, vinodayitavyaṃ ... § 59.5.48B1. atha dāni bhikṣusya kṣīvikā āgacchati, vinodayitavyā (≒ § 59.6.48B2, § 59.7.48B3) 103  § 59.4.48B1. atha dāni puno puno kṣīvikā āgacchati, prahāṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 61.4.49A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇam upaviṣṭasya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... § 61.4.49A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, ... (= § 61.6.49A6) § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... (= § 61.8.49B1) § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya bhūyo bhūyo vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya antaraghare vā upaviṣṭasya puno puno vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, utthiya gantavyaṃ § 62.5.50A2. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇaśālāyām upaviṣṭasya vātakarmma āgacchati, na dāni osaritvā indriyāṇi karttavyaṃ § 62.7.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno vātakarmma āgacchati, ... (= § 62.9.50A5, § 62.10.50A6; ≒ § 62.8.50A4, § 62.11.50A7) § 62.10.50A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno vātakarmma āgacchati, ekamantaṃ {ā}gacchiya karttavyaṃ usw. ā-gama- (BHS; BHSG, S. 210, s.v. gam [2] gama-ti) “warten”# ⇒ ā-gamaya-, ā-game- § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu odanasampattir vvā āgamaṃtena bhuṃjitavyaṃ, vyañjana- sampattir vvā āgamaṃtena bhuñjitavyaṃ § 6.11.8A2. tena odanasampattī vā āgametavyaṃ vyañjanasampattī vā āgamaṃtena bhuñjitavyaṃ § 41.25.35B2. āgamitavyaṃ yāva tehi dhovitā pādā tti § 50.1.43A2. yāva paśyati so vihārakaṃ ghaṭṭitakaṃ. so dāni muhūrttakaṃ āgamiyāṇaṃ yadā nâgacchati, vihārakasya dvāramūle piṇḍapātakaṃ thapiya gato ā-gamaya- (Skt), ā-game- (Pā) “warten” ⇒ ā-gama- § 1.11.2A4. vaktavyaṃ “gacchatha tāva bāhyato āmuhūrttaṃ āgametha ...” § 2.9.3A2. muhūrttan tāva bāhyato āgametha § 3.10.4A2. bāhyato tāva yūyaṃ muhūrttam āgametha § 4.13.5A7. atha khalu saṃghasthavireṇa āgametavyaṃ § 5.11.7A2. odanasampatti āgamayantena bhuñjitavyaṃ, vyañjanasampattim vā āgamaya- ntena bhuñjitavyaṃ § 6.11.8A2. tena odanasampattī vā āgametavyaṃ vyañjanasampattī vā āgamaṃtena bhuñjitavyaṃ § 18.22.16B1. iminā āgamayitavyaṃ tāva yāva utthita iti § 19.8.18A2. iminā tāva āgamayitavyaṃ yāva praśvāso kṛto § 31.27.26B2. nevāsikehi vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, āgametha sahitakā piṇḍāye praviś- iṣyāmaḥ”, tato sahitakehi praviśitavyaṃ § 42.2.36A3. āgameṃtu (Hs. āgametuṃ) āyuṣmanto, na tāva jentāko tatto bhavati § 50.1.43A3. so dāni bhikṣuḥ vihāram āgatvā āgameti “idānīṃ pi eṣyati muhūrttaṃ pi eṣyati” yāva akālībhūtaṃ § 57.7.47B5. prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte āgamayitavyaṃ āgametuṃ für āgameṃtu : § 42.2.36A3 āgāra~ “Haus”; vgl. CDIAL 52. agāra ⇒ an-agāra~, an-agārikā~, an-āgāra~, madhyamāgāra~, madhyāgāra~, sāgāra~, śūnyāgāra-gāta~, gṛha~, ghara~ § 4.18.5B6. ādīptasmiṃ āgāre yo (lies: yaṃ?) niharati bhaṇḍakaṃ (vs) § 4.18.5B7. imasmi āgāre (lies: ’gāre [m.c.]) nivasantu devatāḥ (vs) § 11.1.10B3. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ śraddhayā-d-āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ ... § 12.1.11A6. śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ tathāgatam evôddiśya āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ āgāra-śālā~ ⇒ vadha-bandhanāgāra-śālā~ ā-√ghaṭṭ “(die Tür) schließen” oder “(die Tür) verriegeln”# ⇒ √ghaṭṭ § 42.3.36A4. tehi āyuṣmantehi ṣaḍvarggikehi dvāraṃ āghaṭṭiya bāhiravitaṇḍitaṃ kṛtaṃ āghāta (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “Ärger” § 53.10.45B1. tehi dīpavārikehi na kṣamati āghāto (Hs. agh°) vā pra<dveṣo> vedayituṃ § 54.13.46B1. yadi koci pracālayati tasya dātavyā. te<na> pi dāni tahiṃ na āghāto bandhitavyo āghāta-citta~# “Ärger” 104  § 55.4.46B5. nâpi kṣamati āghātacittena vā duṣṭacittena vā geṇḍukaṃ vārayituṃ ā-√cakṣ “mitteilen” ⇒ ā-cikṣa- § 49.1.41B7. yadi tvaṃ tatra kiṃci akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyasi, ācakṣiṣyāmi ahaṃ ācāra~ ⇒ an-ācāra~, yogācāra~ § 7.6.8B4. ācāraṃ śekhayitavyo anācārato vārayitavyo (= § 9.5.10A2) § 9.1.9B5. na jānanti: ... kathaṃ ācārye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 41.19.35A3. ācāraṃ śikṣitaṃ śreyo anācāraṃ na śikṣitaṃ (vs) § 41.19.35A3. ācāraṃ śikṣiyāṇa{ṃ} vinayaṃ ca (vs) (2 mal) § 41.19.35A4. ācāreṇa anāryā āryā jātâvakrāntāḥ (lies: jātī ava° [m.c.] ?) (vs) § 41.19.35A3. corehi gṛhīto saṃto mukto ācāra-kāraṇāt (vs) ācāra-guṇa~ “(tadelloses) Benehmen und Tugend” § 41.19.35A3. tasmān nareṇa satataṃ ācāraguṇena bhavitavyaṃ (vs) ācāra-guṇa-yukta~# “mit (tadellosem) Benehmen und Tugend ausgestattet” § 41.19.35A3. sthāneṣu ca aiśvaryaṃ labhanti ācāraguṇayuktāḥ (vs) ācāra-guṇa-sampanna~ (Pā) “vollkommen im Besitz (tadellosen) Benehmens und von Tugend” § 41.19.35A2. ācāraguṇasampannāḥ ye bhavanti tu mānavāḥ (vs) ācāra-gocara~ (BHS, Pā) “(tadelloses) Benehmen und (richtige) Umgangsformen”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. gocara ☞ § 41.10, Anm. 1 § 41.10.34A6. so dāni brāhmaṇo tasya ācāragocaraṃ paśyiya tuṣṭo § 41.11.34A7. yasya bhagavān katham ayaṃ brāhmaṇa sthavirasyâcāragocareṇa tuṣṭo? § 41.11.34A7. na etarhi eva-m-anyadâpi eṣo etasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.16.34B6. so dāni senāpati tasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.18.35A1. ahaṃ imasya dārakasya evaṃ ca evaṃ ca ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.21.35A5. tadâpi etasya eṣo ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.21.35A5. etarhi pi eṣo sthavirasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo ācārika~# “Lehrer” ⇒ ācārya § 10.1.10A3. te antevāsikā ācārikasya niśrayaṃ gṛhṇiya naỿva allīyanti na pratyallīyanti ācārya~ ⇒ ācārika~, upādhyāyācāryāḥ § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: ... katham ācārye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 9.3.9B7. tena hi evaṃ ācāryeṇa antevāsikasmiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ § 9.4.9B7. ācāryeṇa tāva niśrayaṃ dentena antevāsi ubhayato vinayaṃ grāhayitavyo § 10.3.10A4. evaṃ antevāsinā ācārye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 10.6.10A6, Uddāna [I].10B1) § 25.13.22B7~23A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ upādhyāyasya vâcāryasya vā pātram allīpayati, nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ vāmena hastena allīpayituṃ. atha khalu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā dakṣiṇena hastena pātraṃ allīpayitavyaṃ § 28.5.24A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā sārddhaṃ caṃkramati, ... § 28.5.24A3. <na kṣamati> upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya atirekaṃ caṃkramituṃ § 33.7.28A3. vaktavyaṃ “vandāmi upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā ...” tti § 33.16.28A6~7. atha dāni koci pṛcchati “ko te upādhyāyo?” “ko te ācāryo?” vā, na dāni vaktavyaṃ “asuko ācāryo. asuko upādhyāyo.” atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “arthahetor nnāmaṃ gṛhṇāmi. asuko me upādhyāyo. asuko me ācāryo.” § 38.2.30A5. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva tāva upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā āmantrayitavyo § 38.3.30A6. upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā jānitavyaṃ § 42.16.37A1. upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā praviṣṭako bhavati § 42.16.37A1. snāyāmi ācārya, snāyāmi upādhyāya § 44.5.39A2. upādhyāyasya <vā> ācāryasya vā cīvaraṃ ... § 44.5.39A3. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya <vā> cīvarehi ... § 44.7.39A5. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarāṇi ... § 44.7.39A6. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarakāni ... § 44.7.39A6. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā <cīvarāṇi> ... § 49.5.42A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā paścācchramaṇo gacchati § 49.5.42B2. paścācchramaṇena vaktavyaṃ: “upādhyāyo vā ācāryo (Voc. ?) vā vāma- hastikam vā dakṣiṇahastikaṃ vā uvvatta” tti § 52.3.44B3. piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhiyāṇaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā allīpayitavyaṃ 105  § 52.4.44B3. yadi tāva labdhaṃ bhavati, upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā saṃgraho karttavyo § 57.10.47B6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato sa-upānahena niṣīdituṃ § 62.9.50A5. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā āmantrayitvā gantuṃ § 62.11.50A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā vṛddhatarakasya vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ usw. ā-cikṣa- (BHS[Mvu]) “zeigen; sagen; mitteilen”; vgl. Pā. ācikkhati; die Form ā-cikṣa- ist wahrschein- lich für die Schule der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins charakteristisch ☞ § 18.13, Anm. 3 ⇒ ā-√cakṣ § 18.13.16A2. riktakāṃ varccakumbhikāṃ paśyati, ... yasya oheyyako bhavati, tasya ācikṣitavyaṃ (Hs. āvi°) § 31.8.25B6. ācikṣitavyaṃ (Hs. āvi°) “labdho pratiśrayo” § 31.21.26A4. yadi tāva ācikṣanti (Hs. āvi°) pādadhovanikāyāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ... tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ § 49.1.41B6. mā kasyaci ācikṣesi § 49.1.41B7. so dān’ āha “ācikṣiṣyasi?” āha “ācikṣiṣyaṃ” § 49.2.42A5. mā khalu kasyaci ācikṣiṣyasi (Hs. aci°) ā-cīrṇṇa~ ⇒ an-ācīrṇṇa-dāna~ āccellayitavyaṃ für āvellayitavyaṃ : § 46.4.40A7, § 46.5.40A7, § 46.5.40B1 ā-juha-# “(ins Feuer) legen”; < Skt. ā-juhoti, ā-√hu; vgl. BHS = Pā. juhati; BHSG § 28.18 ⇒ pra- juha- § 42.12.36B5. kāṣṭhaṃ bhraṣṭikāyāṃ ājuhitavyaṃ āṭakkara-siṃhanādika~# “das Gebrüll eines gefräßigen Löwen erhebend; d.h. ein Gieriger, der sehr laut seine Interessen vertritt” ☞ § 12.14, Anm. 3 § 12.14.12A1. atha dāni tahi koci bhavati āṭakkarasiṃhanādiko “paryāpto. ...” āṭayitavyā für ākoṭayitavyā : § 22.2.20B7 āḍhya~ § 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo mahādhano mahābhogo ... āṇattikā~ (BHS[Mvu]) “Befehl”; < Skt. ājñapti + kā ⇒ ā-ṇape- § 49.7.42B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati “dinnā mama āṇattikā (Hs. ānantikā)” ti adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ ā-ṇape- (BHS[Mvu]) “befehlen”; Skt. ā-jñāpayati; vgl. Pā. āṇāpeti, Pkt. āṇvei ⇒ āṇattikā~ § 33.7.28A3. vandāmi upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā. kiṃ āṇapesi (Hs. āṇapehi)? § 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati ... vaktavyaṃ ... “kiṃ āṇapesî(Hs. a°)?”tti, “kiṃ karemi?” § 33.10.28A4. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “sālohite, kiṃ āṇapesi? kiṃ karemi?” § 33.13.28A6. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “sālohita, kiṃ āṇapesi? kiṃ karomi?” tti ātapa~ ⇒ vātātapa~ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ ātape dinnaṃ (≒ § 11.3.10B4) § 11.9.11A2. kālena kālaṃ sivitavyaṃ, kālena kālaṃ ātape dātavyaṃ § 18.8.15B7. tena tāni kuṇḍakāni ... kālena kālaṃ ātape śoṣayitavyāni § 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... kāṣṭhamayāni bhavanti, na kṣamati ātape{na} śoṣayituṃ § 19.24.18B3. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya praśvāsabhaṇḍakaṃ dhoviya pratigupte pradeśe ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.25.18B3. mallakaṃ bhavati, ekānte ujjhitvā dhovitvā ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ § 24.4.22A3. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ ... ātape vā dātavyo {yo} bhūyo praveśayitavyo § 41.9.34A5. upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhoviya niṣpīḍitvā ātape śoṣayetaṃ (lies: °yitaṃ ?) § 41.9.34A5. dakānakaṃ dhoviya pānīyāvaśeṣaṃ cchoriya ātape śoṣitaṃ § 41.24.35B1. upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhovitavyaṃ pīḍiya ātape śoṣayitavyaṃ § 43.5.38A5. te ... ātape sthāpayitavyāḥ § 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā ... prasphoṭiya sudhotāṃ suprakṣālitāṃ kariya, ātape śoṣayitavyā § 62.2.49B5. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena 106  saktukāṃ kulmāṣāṃ ca (lies: vā?) mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayanti § 62.4.49B7. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktukān vā mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayitvā śvetamayena yeva khādituṃ ātta-manas~ (BHS. SWTF) “unzufrieden” ⇒ an-āttamanas~ § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... sacet paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati anāttamano. <na> ca paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati citte āttamano abhiraddho ātman~ ⇒ mahātman~ § 3.8.3B6. yadi tāvat pratibalo bhavati, ātmanā sarvvaṃ karttavyaṃ § 8.6.9A2. ātmano cīvarakaṃ gṛhṇiya pṛṣṭhato ’nugantavyaṃ § 18.53.17B2. yadi tāva ātmano uccāro bhavati, so eva tasya pratigraho § 25.14.23A1~2. nirmmādayantena prathamaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. śoṣayantena prathamaṃ ... śoṣayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. pratisāmayantena prathamaṃ ... pratisāmayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano § 42.23.37B1. na kṣamati ātmano cīvarāṇi gṛhṇitvā parasya cīvarehi samākulīkṛtvā sthapetuṃ § 44.5.39A3. na ... cīvarehi ātmano cīvaraṃ veḍhayitavyaṃ § 44.5.39A3. ātmano cīvarehi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarā veḍhayitavyāḥ § 44.7.39A6. ātmano cīvarakāni heṣṭe sthapayitu<ṃ> § 44.7.39A6. ātmano cīvarāṇi upari sthāpayitavyāni § 44.8.39A7. nêdāni upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarakehi ātmano cīvarā veḍhayitavyā § 44.8.39A7. ātmano cīvarehi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarā veḍhitavyā § 49.4.42A6~7. yo na pratibalo tasya ca ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajituṃ ... yo pratibalo tasya ca ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajituṃ § 49.6.42B2. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati tasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajayituṃ, praveśayitavyo § 49.7.42B4. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati paścācchramaṇasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ (Hs. c<a v>ittaṃ) saṃvibhajitu<ṃ> ... § 49.7.42B5. bhikṣusya ātmano āhāraparyeṣṭiṃ paryeṣamāṇasya vikālo bhavati § 50.6.43B1. yadi tāvad yāvadarthaṃ bhaktaṃ dīyati, prakṛty’ eva ātmano bhaktato tasya pātraṃ pūretavyaṃ. anubhāgo ātmano gṛhṇitavyo § 56.4.47A4. ātmano pratisandhismi sukhākaṃ niṣīdanakaṃ pīṭhake prajñapayitavyaṃ ātmanaka~# “zum Selbst gehörend, eigen”; vgl. BHS. ātmanīya, Pā. attaniya ⇒ anyātaka~ § 19.42.19A3. yadi tāva ātmanako praśvāso bhavati, purimapaścimakaṃ ca varjayitvā madhyamaṃ gṛhṇitavyo. evam tasya pratigrahaḥ ātyāyikaṃ ⇒ mātu tyāyikaṃ ☞ § 16.5, Anm. 1 ā-√dah ⇒ a-drāhaya-, ā-drāhaya- ādāniyā# ⇒ dāniyā ā-dāya “ergriffen habend; mit” § 2.1.2B1. dāyakadānapati dāni deyadharmmāṇi ādāya pratipālenti § 18.42.17A4. yadi tāvad āha “ṛkto”, udakadakānakaṃ ādāya praveṣṭavyaṃ § 25.3.22B2. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya pātracīvaram ādāya gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 41.4.33B7. sthaviro dāni kālasyaỿva nivāsayitvā pātracīvaram ādāya § 50.4.43A7. tena adhyiṣṭena samānena duve pātrāṇy ādāya praviśitavyaṃ ā-√diś “(das religiöse Verdienst, dakṣiṇāṃ) zuweisen”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. ādiśati, 2; SWTF, s.v. ādiś, 1; CPD, s.v. ādisati, 2; Poṣ(Hu) 295, Anm. 2 § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa no ca dakṣiṇām ādiśati, na parikathāṃ karoti § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ... ko prātimokṣasūtraṃ uddiśiṣyati, ko dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśiṣyati, ko parikathāṃ kariṣyati (≒ § 2.7.2B7, § 3.8.3B6) § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśesi” § 3.8.3B7. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati so adhyeṣitavyo: ... “tvaṃ dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśesi (Hs. °eṣi)” § 4.2.4A6. so dāṇi paścād āgacchiyāṇa bhuṃjiyāṇa saṃkṣiptena dakṣiṇām ādiśiya na 107  parikathāṃ karoti § 4.13.5A7. parikathā karttavyā, dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā (Hs. ādis°) § 4.15.5A7. yadi tāva jātakaṃ bhavati, nâyaṃ dakṣiṇā ādi<śi>tavyā § 4.15.5B1. nâyaṃ evaṃ dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā. atha khalu dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā (= § 4.16.5B3, § 4.17.5B4, § 4.18.5B6, § 6.13.8A3; ≒ § 4.19.6A2, § 4.20.6A3) § 4.18.5B7. yā tatra devatā asyā tāsāṃ dakṣiṇām ādiśe (vs) § 4.20.6A4. evaṃ dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśiya gantavyaṃ § 5.13.7A3. tathā yeva dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyāyo (Hs. °tavyā|yā) § 49.9.42B7. pureśramaṇo na pratibalo bhavati dakṣiṇām ādiśituṃ, āhaṃsu “ādiśa dakṣiṇāṃ” § 49.9.43A1. tathā yeva dakṣiṇām ādiśāhi § 49.9.43A1. atha khalu ādiśitavyaṃ paścācchramaṇena et passim ādisitavyā für ādiśitavyā : § 4.13.5A7 ādīnava~ (BHS, SWTF) “Schaden” § 42.31.37B7. mā ādīnavam utpādaye § 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā ā-√dīp, ā-dīpaya- (Skt), ā-dīpe- (Pā) “in Flammen setzen; anzünden” ⇒ dīpya- § 4.18.5B6. ādīptasmiṃ āgāre yo (lies: yaṃ?) niharati bhaṇḍakaṃ (vs) § 4.18.5B6. evam ādīpite loke mṛtyunā ca jarayā ca (vs) § 10.5.10A6. dīpaṃ ādīpiya śayyāṃ prajñapiya sukhaṃ pratikrāmayitavyo § 31.25.26A7. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ § 53.5.45A4~5. dīpavārikena dīpam ādīpentena pratham{ān}am eva bhagavato śarīra- kuṭikāyāṃ dīpo ādīpitavyo ādrapādakaṃ für ārdrapādakaṃ : § 41.1.33B3 ā-drāhaya-#, a-drāhaya-# “aufs Feuer stellen”; wohl ein Hypersanskritismus für Pkt. ā-ḍaha-, *ā- ḍāha- ( < Skt. ā-√dah “verbrennen”) ☞ § 39.6, Anm. 1 § 39.6.31A3. grāmāntikehi duve thālīyo (Hs. śālīyo) ādrāhayitavyāyo (Hs. °tavyā | yā) § 39.19.31B6. duve sthālīyo adrāhayitavyāyo. ekā āraṇyakānāṃ ekā grāmāntikānāṃ ā-√dhā § 30.4.25A1~2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati, pādena pādaṃ ādhāya, dantena dantaṃ ādhāya ... § 30.7.25A4. pādena pādam ādhāya, jihvāgraṃ tālukāgre pratiṣṭhāpayitvā, ... ādhīnaṃ wohl für adhīnaṃ : § 43.13.38B2 ādhyātmaṃ (SWTF) “in bezug auf das eigene Selbst”; vgl. Skt. adhyātma, Pā. ajjhattaṃ § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “ ... duṣkaraṃ pravivekena dura- bhiramaṃ ekaṃ paraṃ rātri vinayamāno mānasaṃ ādhyātmaṃ vê”ti ānantarika~ (Pā), anantarika~#, ānantariya~ (Pā), ānantarya~ (Skt), ānantaryaka~# “Nachbar”# ☞ § 5.9, Anm. 3 § 5.9.6B7. hastehi pratyavekṣiyāṇaṃ anantarikāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 6.9.7B7. hastena pratyavekṣiyāṇa ānantariyāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi ... upaviśitavyaṃ § 26.9.23B2. ānantaryasya {yā} pātraṃ dātavyaṃ, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, imaṃ mama yavāgūye pratyaṃśaṃ gṛhṇa.” § 29.1.24A6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ uṣṭ<r>aparyaṃkena prahāṇaṃ upaviśaṃti, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahanti § 29.2.24A7. satyaṃ bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikā, evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahatha? § 29.6.24B4. tathā karttavyaṃ, yathânantaryaṃ jānukehi na vyābahati § 39.14.31B2. atha dāni āraṇyakā nâgatā bhavanti, anantarikānāṃ āsanāni varjantehi āsitavyaṃ § 56.4.47A4. ātmano pratisandhismi sukhākaṃ niṣīdanakaṃ pīṭhake prajñapayitavyaṃ. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā ānantarikaṃ na vyābahati 108  § 58.4.48A4. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo ukkāsikā āgacchati, a<na>ntariko vaktavyo “āyuṣman, mama tāva piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhê”ti. tato gantavyaṃ § 59.4.48B1. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvayitavyaṃ, yathā anantarikasya na vyābaheyyā kheṭena vā siṃghāṇakena vā § 59.5.48B2. saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvitavyaṃ, yathā ānantarikasya na vyābaheyyā kheṭen<a v>ā siṃhāṇakena vā § 59.5.48B2. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno kṣīvikā āgacchati ānantarikasya vaktavyaṃ ... § 60.5.48B7. taṃ pi tathā dāni kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ, yathā ānantaryakaṃ śabdena na vyābahati § 61.4.49A4. tathā karttavyaṃ, yathânantarikaṃ śabdena na vyābahati § 60.5.48B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ khajjanako bhavati, puno puno kaṇḍūyati, ānantarikasya pātraṃ dātavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mama piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍhesi.” tato gantavyaṃ § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, yadi tāva bhaktāgre vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, anantarikasya pātraṃ datvā gantavyaṃ § 62.2.49B6. ānantarikānāṃ baddhamuṣṭikāṃ jighrāpenti, āha “jighrâyuṣman, aho mṛṣṭo gandho. aho śobhano gandho.” § 62.6.50A2. tathā karttavyaṃ, yathā ananta<ri>kaṃ śabdena na vyābahati § 62.8.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vātakarmma puno <puno> āgacchati, anantarikasya pātraṃ datvā gantavyaṃ ānantariya~ ⇒ ānantarika~ ānantarya~ ⇒ ānantarika~ ānantaryaka~ ⇒ ānantarika~ ānantikā für āṇattikā : § 49.7.42B5 ā-naya- ⇒ ā-√nī āniñjya~ (BHS, SWTF) “unbeweglich”; vgl. BHS. ānijya, BHS = Pā. aniñja, BHS. aniñjya, BhiVin(Ma-L) § 1, Anm. 21 § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... svayaṃbhū divyehi vihārehi <viharanto> brāhmehi vihārehi āryehi vihārehi āniṃjyehi vihārehi sātatyehi vihārehi ... ā-√nī § 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto āgacchantasya pīṭhikā ānayitavyā, niṣīdanaṃ ānayitavyaṃ, pustako ānayitavyo, kuṇḍikā ānayitavyā ... § 17.10.15A5. anyehi udakaṃ pariharttavyaṃ, anyehi kṣāraṃ ānayitavyaṃ § 40.16.33B1. āha “āyuṣman, dehi bhūyo. ānīya dāsyāmi” tti § 40.16.33B1. taṃ pi dāni gṛhṇiya ānīya kālena kālaṃ dātavyaṃ § 50.1.43A2. so dāni āha “ānehi pātraṃ.” § 50.3.43A5. nâpi kṣamati piṇḍapātanīhārakena piṇḍapātam ānayitvā śūnyake vihārake osariya gantuṃ *ānukampikā~ ⇒ anukampikā~ √āp ⇒ anu-prāpaya-, ā-puṇo-, ipsitānna~, pari-prāpaya-, pari-prāpta~, prāpuṇa-, prāpuṇe-, prāpta~ āpakapāṃsuko für apakkapāṃsu°? : § 17.9.15A3 *ā-paṭita~ “gefallen”; < Skt. ā-patita ☞ § 55.2, Anm. 3 ⇒ up-paṭa- § 55.2.46B4. (geṇḍuka~ ...) tādṛśo karttavyo yo bhūmīyaṃ *āpaṭito (Hs. āpiṭito) yuga- mātraṃ uppaṭati āpatti~ ⇒ srotāpatti-phala~ āpatti-kauśalya~ (SWTF) “die Fähigkeit, mit Vergehen umzugehen” ☞ § 7.6, Anm. 1 § 7.6.8B3. āpattikauśalyaṃ śikṣitavyo sūtrakauśalyaṃ skandhakauśalyaṃ ... ā-√pad § 34.5.28B5. nâpi kṣamati āsane kṣiyādharmmam āpadyituṃ § 35.5.29A5. nâyaṃ kṣamati āsane kṣīyādharmmam āpadyituṃ āpiṭito für āpaṭito : § 55.2.46B4 ā-pīḍaya- “einschlagen” ⇒ √pīḍ § 22.2.21A1. cakkalī ... osāriyāṇaṃ heṣṭhe dve kīlakān ā{ṃ}pīḍiyāṇa tahiṃ bandhitavyaṃ ā-puṇo-# “bekommen, nehmen”; < Skt. ā-pnoti; vgl. BHSG, S. 205a, s.v. āp (1) -āpuna-ti 109  § 55.6.46B7. tenâpi dāni dharmmagauraveṇa pratyutthāya ’puṇoti, niṣīditavyaṃ ā-√pṛcch § 8.11.9A7. divāvihāraṃ gantukāmo bhavati, āpṛcchitvā gantavyaṃ (Hs. āpṛcchi āgan°) § 8.11.9A7. yadi dāni tahiṃ kenaci saha svādhyāyatukāmo bhavati, āpṛcchitavyaṃ (= § 8.13.9B3) § 8.13.9B2. yadi vihāro prāpuṇati, āpṛcchitavyaṃ “amukaṃ vihāraṃ gṛhṇāmi.” § 8.13.9B3. atha dāni utthāpīyati, yattikāṃ vārāṃ āpṛcchitavyaṃ § 42.16.37A1. āpṛcchitvā karttavyaṃ § 42.16.37A2. kiñ câpi anāpṛcchitvā kareti, anāpattiḥ ā-pṛcchanikā~# “Bitte um Erlaubnis”; vgl. CPD, s.v. āpucchana (“[the act of] asking permission, leave-taking”); Skt. āpṛcchā, āpracchana ☞ § 8.13, Anm. 5 § 8.13.9B3. yāvan na utthāpīyati, sā evam e<va> āpṛcchanikā. atha dāni utthāpīyati, yattikāṃ vārāṃ āpṛcchitavyaṃ ā-√bandh ⇒ o-bandha- § 28.1.24A1. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgatvā tasya purato tālapādukāhi ābaddhāhi dīrgha- caṃkramaṃ caṃkramati ṭapya ṭaṭapya ṭapya ṭaṭapya tti § 35.4.29A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cchatreṇa vā dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi brāhmaṇaparṣā āllīyituṃ § 36.4.29B3. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramituṃ § 47.5.40B7. cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā gaṇṭhipāśaṃ ābandhitvā praviśitavyaṃ § 57.8.47B6. bhikṣuṇā yāva vṛddhatarakā nirddhāvitā paścād utthapitvā upānahāyo ābandhiya gantavyaṃ § 57.8.47B6. atha dāni vṛddhatarakā āsanti, bhikṣū ca {ā}gantukāmo bhavati, upānahāyo ābandhiya navakānte saṃprajānaṃ gantavyaṃ ābharaṇa~ “Schmuck” § 51.12.44A6. eṣā strī ... bhikṣu paśyiyāṇaṃ ... ābharaṇāni vā uccāreti (Hs. ucchār°), jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyatî”ti ābharaṇaka~ “Tragebeutel” (?) ⇒ vastrābharaṇaka~ ā-bhāsaya- “erscheinen lassen”#; vgl. Skt. bhāsayati “erscheinen machen, zeigen” (PW V, S. 273) § 55.6.46B7. <duve vā> trayo vā vārā geṇḍukaṃ purato ābhāsayitvâcchaṭikāye (Hs. abhāmay°) utthāpayitavyo ābhisamācārika~ (Pā) “das richtige Verhalten betreffend; die Grundbegriffe guten Benehmens betreffend”; aus Skt. abhi + samācāra; vgl. 555f., 557 in diesem Band ⇒ abhisamācārika~ § 31.38.27A3. na pratipadyanti, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmaṃti § 32.13.27B6. na pratipadyati, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati (= § 33.17.28A7, § 34.8.28B6, § 35.8.29A6, § 37.7.30A5, § 40.17.33B2, § 41.33.36A1, § 42.32.38A1, § 43.17.38B6, § 44.12.39B2, § 45.8.40A3, § 46.7.40B2, § 47.10.41A2, § 48.10.41B5, § 49.10.43A1, § 50.11.43B7, § 54.17.46B2 usw.) § 57.13.48A1. na pratipadyati, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikramati (= § 58.7.48A6, § 62.13.50B1) Kolophon 50B2. Ābhisamācārikāḥ samāptāḥ āryaMahāsāṃghikānāṃ Lokottaravādināṃ madhyuddeśapāṭhakānāṃ pāṭhena ā-bhoga~ ⇒ an-ābhogena āma (BHS, Pā, Pkt, Skt1) “Ja” § 1.3.1B4. āha “āma bhagavan” (= § 4.3.4B1, § 20.2.19A7, § 49.2.42A5 et passim) § 20.7.19B4. āhaṃsu “āma bhagavan” (= § 41.2.33B6, § 42.4.36A7, § 45.2.39B5, § 46.2.40A5, § 47.2.40B5, § 48.2.41A6 et passim) makucak~#? ⇒ makucaka~ āmatā für āgatā : § 31.29.26B3 āmantiya für āmantriya : § 62.7.50A4 ā-mantraya- 1  Vgl. IIJ 5(1961~62).143, 7(1963~64).323; IF 71.3(1966).307 = Caillat 2011: 336; Esposito 2004: 80. 110  (1) “anreden, sagen, ankündigen” § 4.8.4B7. na dāni tena “āmantritaṃ mayā” ti Bhadrapālakṛtyehi haṇṭhitavyaṃ § 29.3.24A7. bhagavān tān bhikṣūn āmantrayati “evaṃ bhikṣavo niṣīdatha ...” § 30.3.25A1. bhagavān dāni bhikṣūn āmantrayati “omuddhakā bhikṣavo pretā śeyyāṃ kalpayanti. ...” § 31.9.25B7. pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā (Hs. āmandha°) praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.12.25B7. nisṛṣṭagṛhaṃ bhavati, anāmantriya praviśati, anāpattiḥ § 41.3.33B7. bhagavān dāni bhikṣūn āmantrayati (2) “um Erlaubnis bitten”# ☞ § 18.28, Anm. 3 ⇒ dharmmaśravaṇasya ā-mantraya-, prahāṇasya ā-mantraya- § 31.7.25B6. tehi dāni prāvariya gaṇṭhipāśakaṃ obandhiya āmantriya praveṣṭavyaṃ § 38.2.30A5. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva tāva upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā āmantrayitavyo § 18.28.16B4. prahāṇasya āmantriyāṇa cchatti varccakuṭīyaṃ gantavyaṃ § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo kāso āgacchati, bāhirato nirddhāpiya kāsitavyaṃ. prahāṇasya vā āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 59.4.48B1. atha dāni puno puno kṣīvikā āgacchati, prahāṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 60.4.48B6. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo khajjati, khajjanako bhavati, prahāṇasyâmantriya gantavyaṃ § 61.4.49A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, nirddhāviya vijṛmbhi- tavyaṃ. prahāṇasya vā āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 58.5.48A5. atha dāni puno puno kāsā vīyati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 59.6.48B3. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno kṣivikā āgacchati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, ... dharmmaśravaṇe{na} vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 62.9.50A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno vātakarmma āgacchati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā āmantrayitvā gantuṃ āmandhayitvā für āmantrayi° : § 31.9.25B6 ā-marjaya- “abreiben; abwischen” ⇒ √mṛj § 20.16.20A3. atha dāni bhikṣu jihvāṃ nilehitukāmo bhavati, kurccakena āmarjayitavyā § 41.32.36A1. antamasato leṅkaṭakhaṇḍena vāmahastena vā āmarjiya praviśitavyaṃ § 48.6.41B2. antamasato hastenâpi prasphoṭiya āmarjiya upaviśitavyaṃ āmalaka~ § 48.8.41B4. labhyā ... khakkhaṭāni phalāni gṛhṇituṃ badarāṇi vā kolakāni vā āmalakāni vā harītakī vā ... āmilā~# “Wolldecke” (?) ⇒ amila~, āmilā~ ā-milāya-# “(die Gelenke) erschlaffen”; vgl. Skt. mlāyati; BHS. āmilāta, āmlāyati § 29.4.24B2. atha dāni bhikṣu paryaṅkena niṣaṇṇo bhavati, śrānto bhavati, parvvāṇi (Hs. garbhāni) āmilāyanti, nâpi kṣamati ubhayāni sandhī maṭamaṭāye prasārituṃ āmiṣa-cakra~# “das Rad der Speise” § 36.6.29B5. āmiṣacakraṃ (Hs. amiṣa°) niśrāya dharmmacakraṃ pravarttati (vs) āmiṣa-cakṣu~# “ein Auge auf Nahrung werfend”; vgl. Pā. amisa-cakkhu ☞ § 8.7, Anm. 8 § 8.7.9A5. vaktavyaṃ “kārehi dhūmaṃ. mā ca puno āmiṣacakṣu deśesi.” § 52.6.44B6. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, karohi dhūmaṃ. mā ca punaḥ āmiṣacakṣuḥ <deśesi>.” *ā-muhūrttakaṃ, ā-muhūrttaṃ#, *ā-muhūrtte adv. “für eine kurze Weile”; Skt. muhūrtam ☞ § 1.11, Anm. 1 ⇒ muhūrttaṃ, muhūrttakaṃ § 1.11.2A4. vaktavyaṃ “gacchatha tāva bāhyato āmuhūrttaṃ āgametha ...” § 29.4.24B2. eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ āmuhūrtte (Hs. amuh°) viśrāmiya sammiñjiya, dvitīyo pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo § 29.6.24B3. āmuhūrttakaṃ (Hs. amūh°) viśramiya bhūyo svastikaparyaṅkena niṣīdi- tavyaṃ āmba für amba : § 33.2.27B7 āmra-potaka~# “junges Mangobäumchen” 111  § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyaṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropitako § 20.1.19A5. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ mama āmrapotakaṃ (Hs. °ko) ghaṭasiktakaṃ (Hs. °ko) ekaputrakaṃ viya saṃvarddhita{vya}ṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi § 20.2.19A6. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyāṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropito āyaṃ für ayaṃ : § 26.8.23B1 ā-yaccha- “spannen, ausstrecken” § 14.14.13B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ullaggakā bhava<ṃ>ti, āyacchitavyā (Hs. aya°), āyacchantiyo (Hs. ayaṃcch°) karttavyāḥ § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati ... lāṅgulaṃ anukāyaṃ āyacchi{hi}tvā (☞ § 30.4, Anm. 2) ... āyacchihitvā für āyacchitvā? : § 30.4.25A2 āyatana~ ⇒ śreṣṭhāyatana~, ṣaḍ-āyatana~ āyatana-kauśalya~# “die Fähigkeit, mit den (Sinnes-)Bereichen umzugehen” ☞ § 7.6, Anm. 1 § 7.6.8B4. āpattikauśalyaṃ śikṣitavyo sūtrakauśalyaṃ skandhakauśalyaṃ āyatana- kauśalyaṃ pratītyasamutpādakauśalyaṃ ... § 9.5.10A2. śekhayitavyo dhātukauśalyaṃ skandhak° āyatanak° pratītyasamutpādak° ā-√yam ⇒ ā-yaccha- āyāma~ “Länge” ⇒ dīrghatva~ § 18.4.15B4. tac ca mukhāni karttavyāni hastām vā āyāmena nimuṣṭikam vā hastam vistāreṇa § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena dvādaśahastāṃ āyāmato karttavyaṃ aṣṭahastāṃ vistāreṇa § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena aṣṭahastâyāmena karttavyā muṣṭi- mātrī sthūlatvena āyuṣ~ ⇒ dīrghāyu~ āyuṣmat~ § 1.1.1B1. āyuṣmāṃ Nandano saṃghasthaviro (= § 2.1.2A7; ≒ § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4) § 1.2.1B2. navakā bhikṣū pṛcchanti: “āyuṣmānn (Voc. pl.), āgato saṃghasthaviro?” § 1.7.1B6. āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhipoṣadho vā ... abhikramantu āyuṣmanto § 1.13.2A7. yathāsukhaṃ karttavyaṃ, abhipramodantu āyuṣmanto (= § 3.12.4A4) § 2.5.2B5. āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... § 2.11.3A5. abhipramodayaṃtu āyuṣmanto abhipramodayantu āyuṣmanto § 4.7.4B5. āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho § 5.7.6B5. āyuṣma<ṃ>to (vgl. aber BHSG § 18.70) vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho § 7.1.8A5. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā ṣaḍvarggikāś ca ... § 12.12.11B7. taṃ likhitaṃ saṃghasthavirasya allīpitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman ...” § 18.20.16A7. so dān’ āha “mā me āyuṣmaṃ, ohayesi.” § 19.6.17B7. so jalpati “mā khalu me āyuṣman, omutrayasi” tti § 18.53.17B3. āyuṣman imasya bhaiṣajyasya gandho yādṛśo uccārasya § 20.1.19A5. so dān’ āha “āyuṣman, evaṃ ca dāni ...” § 20.6.19B2. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā ... § 26.1.23A4. te{na} dāni āyuṣma<ṃ>to ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ... § 26.9.23B3. ānantaryasya pātraṃ dātavyaṃ, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, imaṃ mama yavāgūye pratyaṃśaṃ gṛhṇa.” § 31.1.25B1. tehi dāṇi āyuṣmantehi ṣaḍvarggikehi āgantukā dṛṣṭāḥ § 31.1.25B1. āyuṣmaṃ (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) kuto vā praviṣṭāḥ? § 31.21.26A4. nevāsikā pṛcchitavyāḥ “āyuṣmaṃ (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.), pādadhovanikā kahiṃ? ...” § 31.22.26A5. yatra nevāsikā bhavanti tatra gantavyaṃ. allīyāṇaṃ ... vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) vandiṣyan” ti § 31.22.26A5. nevāsikehi varṣāgraṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ “kativarṣo āyuṣman?” § 31.24.26A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati tehi āgantukehi nevāsikāṃ kutsiya haṃbhiya “āyuṣmann (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) adyâpi yūyaṃ iha vasatha. ...” 112 § 31.24.26A7. (nevāsikā ...) saṃpraharṣayitavyā vaktavyā “āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.), śobhanaṃ kriyati saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyanti” § 31.27.26B1. āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.), mā piṇḍāya praviśatha (≒ § 31.30.26B5) § 31.28.26B3. atha khalu āgantukānāṃ ehisvāgataṃ kartta<vya>ṃ “entu āyuṣmanto, svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. mā śrāntā? mā klāntā? ...” § 32.11.27B4. “svāgatam āyuṣmanto (Voc. pl. als Voc. sg.), anurāgatam āyuṣmanto (dass.). mâsi śrānto? ... viśramāhi!” § 31.32.26B6. āyuṣmanto, amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. ... § 31.34.27A1. eko vā rakṣapālo dātavyo, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣma<ṃ>, dvāraṃ bandhiya ...” § 31.35.27A2. nâpi kṣamati tehi nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “āyuṣmaṃ (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.), eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho prayāto. gacchantu āyuṣmanto. gataṃ mārggasya śreyo.” § 32.2.27A5. so dāni sthaviro pṛcchati “āyuṣmaṃ, kecciro te āgatasya?” § 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati ... vaktavyaṃ “ārye” vā “bhante” vā “āyuṣman” ti § 33.12.28A5. bhikṣū vā upāsakam vā dānapatim vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâpi kṣamati “bhāve” tti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā “āyuṣmaṃ” tti vā § 37.3.30A2. āyuṣmaṃ, asti me kiñci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryaṃ, āllīyāma mā āllīyāmo vā? § 39.1.30B6. āyuṣmaṃ (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) deśakālo, āhanatha gaṇḍiṃ § 39.1.30B7. āyuṣman, evaṃ yūyaṃ ... bhuñjatha § 39.2.31A1. āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.), kin dāni yuṣmābhiḥ ... utkṣiptāni? § 39.7.31A4. āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.), ... prakṣipatha taṇḍulāni § 39.9.31A6. āyuṣmaṃ (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.), ... mā piṇḍakena vihariṣyatha § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.), śobhanaṃ kriyati. ... kulāni prasādīyantî”ti. evaṃ saṃrādhayitavyāḥ § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.), śobhanaṃ kriyati, āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ kelāpīyati. ...” § 40.1.32B2. āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā ... pratijāgaranti § 40.16.33B1. āha “āyuṣman, dehi ...” tti § 41.1.33B2. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā (= § 47.1.40B2, § 48.1.41A3) § 41.1.33B3. yūyam āyuṣmanto § 41.2.33B6. mātrāye āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha § 31.1.25A7. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ (= § 42.2.36A2) § 42.2.36A3. āyuṣmanto, detha dvāraṃ § 42.2.36A3. āgameṃtu āyuṣmanto, na tāva jentāko tatto bhavati § 42.2.36A3. praviśantu āyuṣmanto, jentāko tapto § 42.3.36A4. tehi āyuṣmantehi ṣaḍvarggikehi dvāraṃ āghaṭṭiya § 42.3.36A5. āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) ṣaḍvarggikāḥ § 42.3.36A5. svedantu āyuṣmanto, utpātagaṇḍapiṭakānāṃ vātapittaśleṣmikānāṃ phāsu bhaviṣyati § 42.3.36A6. stokastokaṃ āyuṣman{a} (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) mātrāye upanetha § 42.4.36A7. stokaṃ stokaṃ āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) mātrāye upanetha § 42.26.37B4. āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) ... <s>nāyaṃtu āyuṣmanto § 42.31.37B7. {ā}gacchantu āyuṣmanto, vayam etaṃ praveśayiṣyāma § 45.1.39B3. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikā (= § 46.1.40A3) § 49.1.41B6. āyuṣmato Nandanasya Upanandano nāma bhrātā § 49.1.41B6. ehi āyuṣmaṃ, grāmaṃ praviśyāmaḥ (≒ § 49.2.42A4. āyuṣman) § 49.1.42A1. (Upanandana ruft einen Schüler) āyuṣman, gaccha tvaṃ § 49.1.42A3. te dāni taṃ uccagghanti “āyuṣman, snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo ...” § 49.1.42A4. āyuṣman (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.), kuto me ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāni (= § 49.2.42A5) § 50.2.43A3~4. so dāni tasya jalpati “āyuṣman (Hs. ay°), sādhu taṃ pātrakaṃ pi labhema.” so dāni āha “āyuṣman, kasya pātraṃ? kuto pātraṃ?” so dāni āha “āyuṣman, na tvaṃ ...?” so dāni āha “āyuṣman, ...” so dāni āha “āyuṣman, ...” so dāni āha “āyuṣman, ...” § 53.17.45B6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmanto (Hs. °mantaṃ), dīpo praveśīyatî”ti 113  § 58.4.48A4. a<na>ntariko vaktavyo “āyuṣman, mama tāva piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhê”ti § 59.5.48B2. ānantarikasya vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, mama piṇḍapātam ukkaḍḍhesi” (≒ § 60.5.48B7) § 62.2.49B6. ānantarikānāṃ baddhamuṣṭikāṃ jighrāpenti, āha “jighrâyuṣman, aho mṛṣṭo gandho. aho śobhano gandho.” usw. āyoga~ ⇒ sthāna-caṃkrama-niṣadyāyoga~ āraṃjara~# “großer Wassertopf”; vgl. Skt. aliñjara, āliñjara, alañjara, Pā. arañjara ☞ § 40.5, Anm. 3 § 40.5.32B6. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya, golakā vā ... thaganakā vā āraṃjarā vā ghaṭṭā vā karakīyo vā <pūrayitavyā?> āraṇya~ ⇒ araṇya~, grāmāraṇya-sama~ § 4.18.6A1. grāme vā yadi vâraṇye nimne vā yadi vā sthale (vs) § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: ... kathaṃ āraṇye pratipattavyaṃ § 39.29.32A7. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... śṛgālâpi āraṇye vasanti. divasaṃ yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha” āraṇyaka~ (1) “in der Wildnis befindlich” § 12.11.11B6. yadi tāva āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, dūre dūre pariveṇā bhava<ṃ>ti § 14.1.13A1. aparaṃ dāni āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ himadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na vasati § 14.15.13B4. na kṣamati tehi aśabdakarṇṇikāye āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantuṃ § 14.18.13B6. gacchāma vayaṃ āraṇyakāni (Hs. ara°) śeyyāsanāni § 18.36.17A1. āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, durlabho gandho (= § 19.34.18B7) § 20.11.19B6. atha dāni bhikṣū āraṇyake śeyyāsane prativasanti ... § 31.14.26A1. atha dāni āraṇyaka<ṃ> śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, tahiṅ gantavyaṃ § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, na kṣamati tehi nivāsikehi dvāraṃ ca bandhiya vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhāṃ bhañjantehi āsituṃ § 39.1.30B6. āraṇyakaṃ tāva śeyyāsanaṃ § 39.4.31A2. tena hi evaṃ āraṇyake vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 39.5.31A2. āraṇyakañ ca śeyyāsanaṃ ca ekabhaktatarppaṇaṃ bhavati § 39.18.31B6. atha dāni āraṇyake śeyyāsane grāmāntikānāṃ ca āraṇyakānāñ ca bhaktaṃ sajjīyati, nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva ... bhuñjituṃ § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni prāntāni viviktāni vigatajanapadāni manuṣyarahaśayyakāni pratisaṃlayanasāropyāni ...” (☞ § 39.29, Anm. 4) § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati, āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ kelāpīyati. ...” § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi no parihāṇi.” usw. (2) “(ein) in der Wildnis lebend(er Mönch)” § 14.1.13A1. te dāni āraṇyakā vihāraṃ bāhira{ṃ}ghaṭṭimaṃ kariyāṇa ... § 14.3.13A2. na kṣamati āraṇyakehi ... grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ okkasituṃ § 17.5.15A1. ahan dharmmakathiko, ahaṃ vinayadharo, aham āraṇyako, piṇḍacāriko, pāṃsukūliko § 39.1.30B6. āraṇyakānāñ ca grāmāntikānāñ ca anugraho sādhīyati § 39.1.30B6. te dāni āraṇyakā deśakāle grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ āgatā āhaṃsu § 39.2.30B7. te<hi> dāni āraṇyakehi ... bhaktakāni sarvvāṇi ukṣiptāni § 39.2.31A1. te dāni teṣāṃ āraṇyakānāṃ āhaṃsu § 39.6.31A3. duve thālīyo ... ekā grāmāntikānāṃ. ekā āraṇyakānāṃ § 39.6.31A3. yā āraṇyakānāṃ thālī ... tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.6.31A3. yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgatā bhavanti § 39.7.31A4. yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgacchanti § 39.7.31A4. ete āraṇyakā āgacchanti 114  § 39.8.31A5. āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī otāriyāṇaṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ sthāne sthapayitavyā § 39.8.31A5. anekāye āraṇyakānāṃ co<ra>bhayaṃ vā bhaveya § 39.9.31A5. āraṇyakānāṃ (Hs. āraṇyāk°) pi ārocetha § 39.9.31A5. tehi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakānāṃ pi ārocitavyaṃ § 39.9.31A6. tehi pi dāni āraṇyakehi na vighnayitavyaṃ § 39.10.31A7. āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantrehi § 39.11.31A7. atha dāni āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñapti karttavyā § 39.13.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha tumhe. āraṇyakâpi (Hs. ara°) eṣyantî”ti § 39.14.31B2. pariveśakena pṛcchitavyaṃ “ko āraṇyakānāṃ lābhagrāh<ak>o?” § 39.14.31B2. vaktavyaṃ “āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ukaḍḍhatha.” tehi āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapāto ukkaḍḍhayitavyo. ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikakalpiyakuṭīyaṃ sthāpayitavyo § 39.16.31B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi yatra p’ ullaggikāye āsituṃ § 39.17.31B5. nâpi dāni āraṇyakehi grāmāntikā kutsetavyā “bahukṛtyā bahukaraṇīyā jihvāgre<na> yūyaṃ rasāgrāṇi paryeṣatha” § 39.18.31B6. atha dāni āraṇyake śeyyāsane grāmāntikānāṃ ca āraṇyakānāñ ca bhaktaṃ sajjīyati, nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva ... bhuñjituṃ § 39.19.31B6. duve sthālīyo adrāhayitavyāyo. ekā āraṇyakānāṃ ekā grāmāntikānāṃ. yā āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.22.32A1. eṣo dāni koci āraṇyakānāṃ bhaktenôpanimantrayati, ... § 39.29.32A6. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... divasaṃ yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha” § 39.30.32B1. evaṃ āraṇyakehi pratipadyitavyaṃ Antaroddāna 50B2. āraṇyakā nevāsikā (lies: nivāsanaṃ?) ca pradīpo ca sapta varggāḥ prakāśitāḥ usw. āraṇyākānāṃ für āraṇyakānāṃ : § 39.9.31A5; āraṇyāke für °ṇyake : § 39.18.31B6 ā-rabhya (1) “beginnend mit” § 4.20.6A2. putram vā paśum vā ārabhya (vs) (2) (BHS) “auf Grundlage von” § 4.12.5A4. tato saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ ārabhya deti, tathā yeva nimantraṇāy’ etavyaṃ ārambaṇa~ ⇒ kim-ārambaṇa~ ā-rāgaya- (BHS) “erreichen”; vgl. SWTF I 281, 594. ā-rāgaya; Pā. ā-rādheti § 36.6.29B5. ārāgayanti saddharmmaṃ samyaksambuddha{ṃ}deśitaṃ (vs) ārātrikā~ ⇒ varṣā° ārāma~ (1) “Freude, Vergnügen” ⇒ karmmārāma~, nidrārāma~, bhāṣyārāma~ (2) (SWTF) “Garten, Hain (eines Klosters)” § 39.28.32A5. yadi tāva anukālyo bhavati, ārāmehi (Loc. pl.) vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi sthānacaṃkramaniṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ ... ārāma-caraṇaka~# “(ein) im Klostergarten zu tragendes (Gewand)” ⇒ vihāra-caraṇaka~, grāma- praveśanika~ usw. § 41.22.35A6. ārāmacaraṇakaṃ prāvaritvā āsanaṃ prajñapetavyaṃ § 46.5.40B1. evaṃ ārāmacaraṇakaṃ vā āvellayitavyaṃ vihāracaraṇakaṃ vā uvvellayi- tavyaṃ ārāma-cārikā~# “Spaziergang im Klostergarten” (vgl. BHSD, s.v. cārikā; Poṣ[Hu] 357, Anm. 5) ⇒ vihāra-cārikā~ § 50.1.43A2. ayaṃ pi deśakālaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ gṛhītvā ārāmacārikāṃ caṃcūryati ārāma-dvāra-koṣṭhaka~# “Torhaus des Klosters”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 5 § 49.1.42A2. ye dāni bhikṣū Jetavanasyârāmadvārakoṣṭhakasamīpe sthānacaṃkrama- {sthāna}niṣadyāyogam anuyuktā viharanti ārāmika~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “Klosterpersonal” 115  § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako, so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā” § 39.27.32A5. atha dāni vikāle āgatā bhavanti, na vā āgacchanti, aparejjukāto śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ vā ārāmikānām vā dātavyo § 42.11.36B4. ya ... bhava<n>ti jentākavārikā vā ārāmikā vā, tehi jentāke santānikā śāṭayitavyā ... § 42.21.37A6. upāsakā vā karmmakarā ārāmikā vā āhaṃsu ārāva~ “Schrei, Geschrei” § 54.3.46A2. te dāni bhikṣu viheṭhiyantā ārāvaṃ muñca<ṃ>ti “āyuṣmaṃ, hato ’smi. hato ’smî”ti § 55.3.46B5. te dāni bhikṣū viheṭhayamānā ārāvaṃ muñcanti “āyuṣman, hato ’smi. hato ’smi.” ā-roga (SWTF, Pā) “Gesundheit!”# ☞ § 59.8, Anm. 2 ⇒ ārogyam, ārogyāpaya- § 59.8.48B4. atha dāni navako kṣīvati, “ārogê”ti (Hs. ārocêti) vaktavyaṃ ārogyam# “Möge es euch gut gehen!”; wörtl. “Gesundheit!”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. ārogyayati “salutes” ☞ § 5.7, Anm. 1 ⇒ ārogyāpaya-, ā-roga § 5.7.6B3. ārogyaṃ dīrghāyu koci imaṃhi itthaṃnāmo nāma upāsako? ārogyāpaya- (BHS) “grüßen, begrüßen”# (Kausativ auf -āpayati mit nicht-kausativer Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG §§ 38.58f.) ☞ § 31.22, Anm. 3 ⇒ ārogyam, ā-roga § 31.22.26A6. atha dāni nevāsiko vṛddhatarako bhavati, ārogyāpiya evaṃ kariyāṇaṃ āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 34.5.28B5. atha khalu ārogyāpiya, yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ dīyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 35.5.29A5. ārogyāpayitvā <yā>dṛśaṃ āsanaṃ labhyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 36.5.29B4. ārogyāpiya yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ labhyate, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ ā-roca- (BHS), ā-rocaya- (Skt, SWTF), ā-roce- (BHS) “mitteilen, berichten”; vgl BHSG, S. 227b, s.v. ruc- (3) § 1.2.1B3. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣū bhagavato ārocayeṃsu (= § 4.2.4A7, § 5.2.6A6, § 6.2.7A6, § 7.1.8A7, § 20.6.19B3, § 20.9.19B5, § 22.1.20B7, § 49.1.42A4 et passim) § 41.1.33B4. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣū bhagavato ārocayeṃsuḥ (= § 42.3.36A6, § 44.1. 39A1, § 58.1.48A2) § 2.2.2B3. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣū bhagavato ārocayanti § 3.2.3B1. bhikṣū etam prakaraṇaṃ ārocayanti § 25.1.22B1. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ so bhikṣuḥ bhagavato ārocaye (Aor. 3. sg.; vgl. BHSG §§ 32.87f.) § 27.1.23B4. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ so yogācāro bhagavato ārocaye (= § 28.1.24A2) § 1.7.1B6. yadi dāni na gato saṃgho bhavati saṃghasthavireṇa yahiṃ bhaviṣyati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ § 1.8.1B6. nâpi dāni “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ olaggikāya āsitavyaṃ § 1.11.2A3. yaṃ kālaṃ śalākā vāritā bhavanti, bhikṣū gaṇitā bhavanti, sāmagrī ārocitā bhavati, ... (≒ § 2.9.3A1, § 3.10.4A1) § 2.5.2B5. yahim bhavati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ: “āyuṣman adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā” § 3.6.3B4. yahiṃ bhavati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ “abhikramantu āyuṣmanto” ti § 3.6.3B4. nâyaṃ <kṣamati> “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ ollaggikāye āsituṃ § 5.7.6B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiyāṇaṃ ārocitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ ... § 26.3.23A6. eṣo dāni yavāgūye samayo ārocito bhavati, tato jānitavyaṃ ... § 31.32.26B6. nevāsikehi sarvvam ārocayitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmanto, amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. ...” yā kriyā ārocayitavyā § 38.8.30B3. tena kāryaṃ saṃghamadhye ārocayitavyaṃ § 39.9.31A5. āraṇyakānāṃ pi ārocetha § 39.9.31A6. tehi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakānāṃ pi ārocitavyaṃ § 42.24.37B1. etaṃ dāni jentākasya ārocitaṃ bhavati § 42.24.37B2. atha dāni ārocīyati § 42.26.37B4. ārocayitavyaṃ 116  § 49.8.42B7. yato nirggato bhavati, tato ārocayitavyaṃ § 59.8.48B4. atha dāni navako kṣīvati, “ārogê”ti (Hs. ārocêti) vaktavyaṃ usw. ārthāya#, ārthāye# “zum Zweck von, für” § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye (Dat. sg. masc.; ☞ § 31.19[Text], Anm. 1, 2) bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako, so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā” § 42.11.36B4. ya (pl. masc.) tāye {t}ārthāyaỿva bhava<n>ti jentākavārikā vā ārāmikā vā ārdra-pāda~ “nasser Fuß” ⇒ ārdra-pādaka~ § 41.2.33B5. ārdrapādāṃ upānahāsu prakṣipiya § 41.24.35B1. na kṣamati upānahāhi ārdrapādena (für ārdrapādehi [Instr. pl.] oder ārdrapādān) praveśayituṃ ārdra-pādaka~# “nasser Fuß” ⇒ ārdra-pāda~ § 41.1.33B3. ā<r>drapādakaṃ (Acc. pl. masc.) upānahāhi (Hs. upanāhāhi) prakṣipiya ārya~ ⇒ an-ārya~ § 1.1.1B1. dāyakadānapatī pṛcchanti: “ārya (Voc. pl.) kiṃ samagro bhikṣusaṃgho?” (≒ § 4.1.4A6, § 5.1.6A5, § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7) § 2.1.2B1. te dāni pṛcchanti “ārya (Voc. pl.) samagro bhikṣusaṃgho?” (≒ § 3.1.3A6) § 4.12.5A5. āha “na hi. āryasya etaṃ evaṃ dīyati.” § 4.18.5B6. praśastam āryehi navaṃ niveśanaṃ (vs) § 18.40.17A3. yadi tāvad āha “ārya, riktā varccakuṭī” ti, ... praviśitavyaṃ § 33.4.28A1. “kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirā bhikṣū ālapitavyā?” bhagavān āha “"ārye (Voc. pl.; Hs. ālape; ☞ § 33.4[Text], Anm. 3)" ti vā "bhante" ti vā "āyuṣmante" ti <vā>.” § 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati, ... vaktavyaṃ “ārye (Voc. sg.; ☞ § 33.8[Text], Anm. 3)” vā “bhante” vā “āyuṣman” ti § 39.9.31A5. āryo (Voc. pl.), āraṇyakānāṃ pi ārocetha § 41.19.35A4. ācāreṇa anāryā āryā jātâvakrāntāḥ (lies: jātī ava° [m.c.] ?) (vs) § 49.1.41B7. ārya (Voc. pl.), bhaktakṛtyaṃ karetha § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... svayaṃbhū divyehi vihārehi <viharanto> brāhmehi vihārehi āryehi vihārehi āniṃjyehi vihārehi sātatyehi vihārehi ... ārya-parṣā~# “Versammlung der Edlen (d.h. der Mönche)” ⇒ kṣatriya-parṣā~, gṛhapati-parṣā~, tīrthika-parṣā~, brāhmaṇa-parṣā~, bhikṣu-parṣā~ § 38.2.30A5. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya āryaparṣāye kāryam bhavati, ... § 38.10.30B4. evaṃ āryaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5) ārya-Mahāsāṃghika~ Lokottaravādin~ (pl.) “die edlen Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins” ☞ Zwischen-Zusammenfassung, Anm. 1 Kolophon 50B2. Ābhisamācārikāḥ samāptāḥ āryaMahāsāṃghikānāṃ Lokottaravādināṃ madhyuddeśapāṭhakānāṃ pāṭhena ārya-miśra~ “Ehrenwerte Herren!” (Eine Anrede an Mönche seitens Laien. Diese und die entsprechende feminine Form āryamiśrikā [“Ehrenwerte Damen!”], die als eine Anrede an Nonnen im BhiVin[Ma-L] häufig vorkommt, sind wahrscheinlich für die Schule der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins charakteristisch; vgl. dazu Roth 1993: 232; Karashima 2000: 237, Anm. 41) § 3.1.3A7. ime pi āryamiśrā osara<ṃ>tikāye nâgacchanti § 5.1.6A5. gacchāma ... āryamiśrāṇāñ ca pādāṃ vandiṣyāmaḥ (≒ § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7) § 5.7.6B5. bhante etaṃ sidhyati, etaṃ pacyati, praviśantu āryamiśrāḥ § 6.1.7A5. ime pi āryamiśrā osara<ṃ>tikāye āgacchanti (≒ § 6.3.7A7) § 42.21.37A6. praviśantu āryamiśrāḥ ārya-satya~ (BHS, SWTF) § 41.10.34A6. sthavireṇa dāni tasya brāhmaṇasya prasannacittasya catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni § 41.10.34A6~7. catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni, duḥkham āryasatyaṃ, duḥkha- samudayam āryasatyaṃ, duḥkhanirodham āryasatyaṃ, duḥkhaṃnirodhagāminī- 117  pratipadam āryasatyaṃ ārśa-vyādhika~# “an Hämorrhoiden leidend”; < Skt. arśas (“Hämorrhoiden”) + vyādhi ☞ § 18.14, Anm. 1 § 18.14.16A2. atha dāni glāno bhavati ārśavyādhikaṃ (Hs. ārṣa°) vā praskandikaṃ vā, ... § 62.6.50A2. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati saṃprajāna ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipiyāṇaṃ hastena vivaritvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati, hastena vivaritvā mārggato udvarttitvā saṃprajānaṃ karttavyaṃ ārṣavyādhikaṃ für ārśa° : § 18.14.16A2 ālapa~ (gṛhi-ālapa~) für °-ālāpa~? : § 33.6.28A2, § 33.7.28A2 ā-lapa- (Skt), ā-lape- (BHS) “anreden”; vgl. BHS. ālapeti (BHSG, S. 228a, s.v. lapa-ti) ⇒ ā- lāpaya-, ā-lāpe- § 33.3.27B7~28A1. evaṃ yūyaṃ gṛhi-ālāpena ālapetha. tena hi na kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena ālapituṃ § 33.4.28A1. “kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirā bhikṣū ālapitavyā?” bhagavān āha “"ārye (Hs. ālape)" ti vā "bhante" ti vā "āyuṣmante" ti <vā>.” § 33.5.28A2. kathaṃ bhagavāṃ, sthavirehi bhikṣūhi navakā bhikṣū ālapitavyā? § 33.6.28A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena (Hs °lapena) ālapituṃ “haṃgho he he” tti § 33.14.28A6. te ete gṛhi-ālāpena ālapanti vā pravyāharanti vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsāda- yaṃti § 33.15.28A6. strī vā puruṣo vā mahanto bhavati, na dāni mātāpitṛkaṃṭhena ālapitavyā. “mahallako”, “mahallake” ti vā vaktavyā § 33.17.28A7. <evaṃ> ālapitavyaṃ; Uddāna (IV).30B5. evaṃ ālapitavyaṃ ā-√lamb § 31.4.25B3. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... anupāletavyo, pātracīvaraṃ ālambitavyaṃ ālambana~ ⇒ kim-ālambana~ ā-laya-# “haften?; berühren?”; vgl. BHSG, S. 229, s.v. lī ⇒ vo-laya- § 40.12.33A4. yadi koci atibahuṃ oṣṭhaṃ vā volayati keśā vā ālaya{ṃ}ti nilāṭe vā, apane- tavyaṃ ālāpa~ ⇒ gṛh-ālāpa~ ā-lāpaya-#, ā-lāpe-# “anreden”; vgl. BHS. ālapeti (BHSG, S. 228a, s.v. lapa-ti) ⇒ ā-lapa-, ā-lape- § 33.1.27B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti § 33.2.27B7. yūyaṃ gṛhī-ālāpena ālāpayatha “amba, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, {a}haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti ā-liha-# “berühren, streifen” § 40.11.33A4. na dāni ... keśā vā ālihitum vā niḍālam vā ā-lupya- “angenagt werden” § 43.1.38A2. sthālīyo piṭharikā ... nakulamūṣikehi ālupyamānā ... ālokita-vilokita~ (BHS) “das Hinblicken und Umherblicken”; vgl. SWTF I 295. ālokita-vyavalokita § 41.4.34A1. prāsādikena abhikrāntena pratikrāntena ālokitavilokitena sammiñjita- prasāritena saṃghāṭīpātracīvaradhāraṇena āllīpa- für āllīya- ⇒ allīpa- für allīya- § 35.4.29A4. āllīpituṃ für āllīyi° § 36.3.29B3. āllīpatha (für āllīya°) ... āllīpituṃ (für āllīyi°) ... āllīpatha (für āllīya°) ... allīpitavyaṃ (für allīyi°) § 37.3.30A2~3. āllīpāma (für āllīyā°) ... āllīpāmo (für āllīyā°) ... āllīpatha (für āllīya°) ... allīpituṃ (für allīyi°) ... allīpatha (für allīya°) ā-llīya- ⇒ allīya- āvaṭṭaka~# “(in das weltliche Leben) zurückkehren wollend” ☞ § 8.11, Anm. 2 § 8.11.9A7. śaithiliko vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako (Hs. āvaḍḍhako) vā aśikṣākāmo, ... § 8.13.9B3. śaithiliko vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako (Hs. avaḍḍhako) vâśikṣākāmo, ... § 18.52.17B2. śaithiliko vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako (Hs. āvaḍḍhako) vā aśikṣākāmo, ... āvaḍḍhako für āvaṭṭako : § 8.11.9A7, § 18.52.17B2 118 āvaraṇa~ ⇒ rakṣāvaraṇa-gupti~ ā-varjaya- (Skt), a-varje-# (1) “(das Wasser) ausgießen” § 41.9.34A5. upānahikāyo nikṣipiya dakānakāto vāmāye kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjayitvā ... § 41.9.34A5. kalācīya udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhotā § 41.22.35A6. dakāna<kāto ’da>kaṃ kalācīyaṃ āvarjetvā (Hs. av°) colakaṃ dhovitvā ... § 41.24.35B1. kuṇḍikāto vā karakato vā kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya ... § 41.24.35B1. kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhovitavyā (2) “für sich gewinnen” § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... āvarjayitvā Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-Kośala-Kuru- Pañcāla-Ceti-Vatsa-Matsya-Śūrasena-Śibi-Daśārṇa-Aśvaki-Avanti ... āvi (Pā) “offen, in der Gegenwart anderer”; < Skt. āvis § 42.5.36A7. metraṃ kāyakarmma ... sabrahmacāriṣu dhruvaṃ pratyupasthāpayitavyaṃ āvi caỿva raho ca āvikṣa- für ācikṣa- § 18.13.16A2. āvikṣitavyaṃ für ācikṣ° (= § 31.8.25B6) § 31.21.26A4. āvikṣanti für ācikṣ° āviddha-puṭikā~# “Behälter aus Blättern, der (von einem kleinen Stock) durchbohrt (und damit zusammengehalten) ist” (?) ☞ § 20.13, Anm. 4 § 20.13.20A1. atha khalu kaṭāhake vā mallake vā koṭiyāṃ vā āviddhapuṭikāyām vā kheṭaṃ cchorayitavyaṃ § 24.5.22A3. mallakaṃ vā koṭikam vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thapetavyā, tahiṃ kheṭo karttavyo § 24.8.22A4. caṃkramaśīrṣe vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thālikā vā kuṭaṃ mallakaṃ vā thape- tavyaṃ. tahiṃ kheṭo cchorayitavyo āvila~ “trübe, unrein” § 40.16.33B1. udakañ ca āvilaṃ bhavati ā-vīya- “ergriffen werden, gepackt werden”?; < ā-√vī (āvayati); Verschreibung? ☞ § 58.5, Anm. 3 § 58.5.48A5. atha dāni puno puno kās’ āvīyati (oder kāsā vīyati?), dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ ā-vuṇ- “auffädeln”; vgl. Pā. āvuṇti; CDIAL 1439 *āvunāti (“strings together”) ☞ § 3.5, Anm. 2, § 12.6, Anm. 1 ⇒ vuṇ-, 2√vā, uv-vin- § 3.5.3B2. avaśyaṃ vaṃśavidalikāhi vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā sūtreṇa āvuṇitvā (Hs. āvraṇitvā) dvārakoṣṭhake vā ... bandhitavyaṃ ... dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ āveḍhaka~# “Schlinge”; vermutlich < *ā-veṭhaka~ < *ā-veṭṭhaka~ < Skt. ā-veṣṭaka~ (“Schlinge”) ☞ § 25.9, Anm. 4 ⇒ veḍhaya-, ā-veḍhaya- § 25.9.22B5. atha dāni ujjuko kīlako bhavati, duve trayo vā āveḍhakā (Hs. ave°) dātavyāḥ ā-veḍhaya-# “umwickeln, anziehen”; < ā-veṣṭayati ☞ § 45.4, Anm. 1 ⇒ veḍhaya-, ā-vellaya-, āveḍhaka~, uv-vel(l)aya-, ov-vellaya-, veṣṭaya- § 45.6.40A1. snānaśāṭikā vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakaṃ āveḍhayitavyaṃ ā-vellaya-# “umwickeln, anziehen”; < ā-veṣṭayati ☞ § 45.4, Anm. 1 ⇒ uv-vel(l)aya-, ov-vellaya-, veḍhaya-, ā-veḍhaya-, āveḍhaka~, veṣṭaya- § 45.4.39B6. tato grāmapraveśana<ka>ṃ ca nivāsanaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 45.5.39B7. tato vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 45.7.40A3. rātriprāvaraṇaṃ nivāsanaṃ ca āvellayitavyaṃ § 46.4.40A7. prāvarantena grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ āvellayitavyaṃ (Hs. āccella°) § 46.5.40A7. prāvaramāṇena vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvarakaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ (Hs. āccella°) § 46.5.40B1. evaṃ ārāmacaraṇakaṃ vā āvellayitavyaṃ (Hs. āccella°) vihāracaraṇakaṃ vā uvvellayitavyaṃ § 46.6.40B2. ekaṃ ca āvellayitavyaṃ dvitīyaṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ āvraṇitvā für āvuṇitvā : § 3.5.3B2 āśa für āsa : § 55.7.47A1 āśraya~ § 8.11.9A7. yadi so bhavati śaithaliko vā ... vaktavyaṃ “mâśrayo utpadyeyā” āśrāmin~# “Einsiedler”? ☞ § 37.5, Anm. 2 119  § 37.5.30A4. (tīrthikāḥ ...) sarvvāśrāmiṇânopavāde (< °āśrāmiṇāṃ ano°?; ☞ § 37.5[Text], Anm. 3) kadāci traividyaprāptāḥ bahuśrutā āṣāḍha-māsa~# “Monat Āṣāḍha (Juni-Juli)” § 12.10.11B5. te<na> dāni samantena āṣāḍhamāsaṃ śayyāsanaṃ grāhetavyaṃ √ās ⇒ āsaya- § 1.8.1B6. nâpi dāni “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ olaggikāya āsitavyaṃ § 2.1.2B2. te dāni muhūrttamātraṃ pratipāliya āsitvā ... gatāḥ § 3.6.3B5. nâyaṃ <kṣamati> “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ ollaggikāye āsituṃ § 4.6.4B3. nâpi dāni “adhivāsita<ṃ> mayê”ti yatr’ ollagnāye āsitavyaṃ (≒ § 5.6.6B2) § 4.13.5A6. na bhuñjitvā hastaṃ nikṣipiya āsitavyaṃ § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ yadā navakāḥ ... pānīyaṃ vā pibanti, hastām vā ukkaḍḍhiya āsanti § 5.11.7A2. pānīyam vā pibanti hastāni oka<ḍ>ḍhiya āsanti § 6.6.7B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati “adhivāsitaṃ mayê”ti yatr’ ollagikāye āsituṃ § 8.10.9A7. uddeśaṃ gṛhṇiya ekamante svādhyāyatena āsitavyaṃ § 18.25.16B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati varcakuṭīyaṃ upaviṣṭena dhyānāntaragatena vā middhāntaragatena vā uddeśaṃ vā svādhyāyam vā manasikarentena āsituṃ § 19.11.18A3. nâpi dāni tahiṃ dhyānāntaragateṇa vā svādhyāyam vā karentena aśubha- samāpattim vā samāpannena āsitavyaṃ § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādantā ekānte niṣaṇṇā āsanti pravāta- gandhikena mukhena § 20.5.19B1. kiṃ ete bhikṣavo bhikṣū ekānte āsanti kalahitakā viya manye? § 20.5.19B1. tato ete bhikṣavo ekānte āsanti pravātagandhikena mukhena § 21.5.20B3. atha dāni niṣaṇṇo bāhirakāṃ pādāṃ kṛtvā sūtraṃ valento āsati, anāpattiḥ § 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya kheṭa bādhati, upānahapuṭe kṛtvā bhūmiye marditavyaṃ § 31.1.25A7. te ... vihārasya paścādvastuke kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjantā āsanti § 31.1.25B1. yūyaṃ ... vihārasya paścādvastukasya kākavāhaṃ bhañjantā āsatha § 31.2.25B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjamānehi āsituṃ § 31.19.26A3. nâpi dāni nevāsikehi dvāraṃ bandhitvā kākavāhāṃ bhaṃjantehi āsitavyaṃ § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako, so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā (Impv. 2. sg.; vgl. BHSG § 30.11)” § 31.33.26B7. na kṣamati ... vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhāṃ bhañjantehi āsituṃ § 31.34.27A1. “āyuṣmaṃ, dvāraṃ bandhiya dvārakoṣṭhakasya upari āsāhi ...” tena upari dvārakoṣṭhasya āsitavyaṃ § 32.11.27B4. na dāni meṇḍhena viya āsitavyaṃ pādehi vandayaṃtehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs) § 36.6.29B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati kutsitum vā pansitum vā “gṛhapatikā nāma yūyaṃ tulākūṭamānakūṭehi divasaṃ lokaṃ muṣaṃtā āsatha.” § 39.9.31A7. cetiyaṃ vanditvā ekānte svādhyāyo karttavyo, dharmmam vā cintayantehi āsitavyaṃ § 39.14.31B2. anantarikānāṃ āsanāni varjantehi āsitavyaṃ § 39.16.31B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi yatra p’ ullaggikāye (Hs. ullugikāye) āsituṃ § 39.28.32A5. nâpi dāni kṣamati grāmāntikehi yatr’ ollagnāye āsituṃ § 39.20.31B7. ekena bhikṣuṇā vihāraṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ “kiṃ grāmāntikā āgacchanti na hi?” tti § 39.29.32A7. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... śṛgālâpi āraṇye vasanti. divasaṃ yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha” § 41.13.34B3. putra dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsesi (Opt. 2. sg.) § 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako ... gṛhasya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsati § 41.31.35B7. na ... kṣamati ... nirodhasamāpattiṃ cinta<ya>ntena āsituṃ § 42.2.36A2. te ... jentākaṃ prajvālīya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiya svedantā āsanti § 42.19.37A4. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi § 49.7.42B4. āsa tvaṃ, sahitakā{ṃ} bhuñjiya nirddhāviṣyāmaḥ 120  § 50.7.43B3. yadi upakaṭṭho kālo bhavati, na dāni tena bhuñjantena āsitavyaṃ § 50.8.43B4. vihārasya prahāṇake dve āsanāni prajñapiya adhiṣṭhānāṃ pratigrāhāpiya āsitavyaṃ § 51.6.44A2. na dāni ito vā ito vā nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ § 51.10.44A4. eṣā strī upaviṣṭikā āsati. bhikṣūn paśyiyāṇaṃ uttheti, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” tti § 52.3.44B2~3. nâpi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā bhuṃjantānāṃ tena dāni uṣṭhihitvā āsitavyaṃ ... atha khalu darśanopavicāre āsitavyaṃ § 53.8.45A7. “āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣyan.” ti. tena vārayitavyo (≒ § 53.9.45A7, § 54.12. 46A7) § 54.14.46B1. āha “sagotrīmātā, āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣyāmi”, dātavyā (≒ § 55.8.47A1) § 55.7.46B7~47A1. na dāni tena otāraprekṣiṇā āsitavyaṃ (für vāretavyaṃ?). atha khalu ṣaḍāyatana manasikarentena āsitavyaṃ (für vāretavyaṃ?) § 55.7.47A1. atha dāni āha “āsa (Hs. āśa) tumaṃ, ahaṃ vārayiṣyan (Hs. cār°)” ti, ... § 56.5.47A5. rātriñ ca śayyāsanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ āsati, nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ kṛtvā gantuṃ § 57.8.47B6. atha dāni vṛddhatarakā āsanti, bhikṣū ca {ā}gantukāmo bhavati, ... āsana~ ⇒ agrāsana~ § 4.9.5A1. praviśa<ṃ>tehi jānitavyaṃ: kathaṃ āsanā prajñaptāḥ § 4.10.5A2. atha khalu hastena āsanaṃ pratyavekṣitavyaṃ § 4.13.5A7. na dāni saṃghasthavireṇa bhuṃjantakenaỿva utthāya āsanāto gantavyaṃ § 5.9.6B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi (Loc. pl.) dārakadārikā vā sovāpitā bhaveṃsu § 6.9.7B7. anekāye tahiṃ (Hs. tehiṃ) āsanehi garbharūpā sovāpitāni bhaveṃsu § 5.9.6B7. anantarikāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 6.9.7B7. ānantariyāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi ... upaviśitavyaṃ § 31.22.26A6. yadi tāva āgantuko vṛddhatarako bhavati, nevāsikena utthiya pādā vandi- tavyā, āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 31.22.26A6. atha dāni nevāsiko vṛddhatarako bhavati, ārogyāpiya evaṃ kariyāṇaṃ āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 34.5.28B5. atha khalu ārogyāpiya, yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ dīyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 35.5.29A5. ārogyāpayitvā <yā>dṛśaṃ āsanaṃ labhyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 36.5.29B4. ārogyāpiya yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ labhyate, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 34.5.28B5. nâpi kṣamati āsane kṣiyādharmmam āpadyituṃ (≒ § 35.5.29A5, § 37.4. 30A3) § 34.7.28B6. kāryaṅ kṛtvā utthāyâsanāto gantavyaṃ § 39.14.31B2. atha dāni āraṇyakā nâgatā bhavanti, anantarikānāṃ āsanāni varjantehi āsitavyaṃ § 39.26.32A3. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, <anantarikāṇāṃ> āsanāni varjayantehi (Hs. vaṃjāy°) upaviśitavyaṃ § 39.16.31B4. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi (Loc. pl.) upaviśitavyaṃ § 39.28.32A6. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, vihāraṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ āraṇyakāṃ bhikṣūṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi (Loc. pl.) upaviśitavyaṃ § 41.22.35A6. ārāmacaraṇakaṃ prāvaritvā āsanaṃ prajñapetavyaṃ § 42.15.37A1. na dāni āsanāni vā bhājanāni vā ... laṃghayantena gantavyaṃ § 48.4.41A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭo āsanena nimantrīyati, āsanaṃ jānitavyaṃ § 48.4.41A7. yadi tāva āsanaṃ bhavati dhūlīye vā mrakṣitaṃ karddamena vā vināśitakaṃ omaïlamaïlaṃ vā prajñaptakaṃ bhavati, ... § 48.5.41A7. bhaginīyo āsanaṃ prajñapetha, mā cīvarakāni vinaśiṣyanti § 50.8.43B4. vihārasya prahāṇake dve āsanāni prajñapiya adhiṣṭhānāṃ pratigrāhāpiya āsitavyaṃ § 57.1.47B1. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa okastāḥ samānā āsanehi upaviś- iyānaṃ upānahā nikkhāsiya ... prasphoṭanti 121  § 57.6.47B4. (upānahikāyo ...) pratisandhismi tathā yeva saṃpuṭikṛtikāyo āsanasya heṣṭhe sthapitavyāyo āsana-prajñapti~# “das Herrichten von Sitzgelegenheiten”; vgl. Pāṇḍ-v 292v5, 8, Poṣ-v 60v10, Pravā-v 69r7 usw.; CPD, s.v. āsanapaññatti (“allocation, assignment, appointment of seats”) § 1.8.1B7. poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ ... āsanaprajñapti karttavyā (= § 2.6.2B6) § 3.7.3B5. poṣadhasthānaṃ siñcitavyaṃ ... gomayakārṣī dātavyā āsanaprajñaptiḥ karttavyā § 31.21.26A4. yatra bhikṣūṇāṃ āsanaprajñaptir bhavati, tahiṃ cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ cīvara- bisiyan thaviyāṇaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ vā upānahau vā thaviyāṇa, ... § 39.11.31A7. atha dāni āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñapti karttavyā § 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñaptiḥ karttavyā, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, puṣpaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, ... āsandaka~# eine Art Sessel; vgl. CDIAL 1485(2). *āsandaka > Pkt. āsaṃdaya; Skt. āsandī, Pā. āsand, Skt. āsandikā, Pā. āsandika ☞ § 23.4.1, Anm. 4 § 23.4.1.21A7. āsandakaṃ tṛpādakaṃ vā praveśeti, tasyâpi leṅkaṭakehi pādakā bandhi- tavyā āsanna~ (SWTF, Pā) “Nähe” ⇒ aty-āsannaṃ, dūra~ § 12.11.11B6. atha dāni grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, āsanne āsanne pariveṇā bhavanti, ... āsaṃnodaka~# (āsaṃna-ud°) “befindlich in der Nähe von Wasser (d.h. einer Quelle)” § 40.16.33B2. atha dāni āsaṃnodako saṃghārāmo bhavati, kiñ câpi tato yeva pibati tato yeva pāridhovanīyaṃ karoti, tato yeva hastāṃ dhovati raṅgam vā karoti, anāpattiḥ āsaya- (BHS) “sitzen” ⇒ √ās § 39.9.31A6. yadi na sajjaṃ bhavati, na dāni bhaktāgraṃ avaṣṭabhayitavyo āsayitavyaṃ ā-sādaya- “(einer Übertretung der Regeln) begehen”# ⇒ vinayātikramam (vinaya-ati°) ā-sādaya- ā-siñca- ⇒ siñca- § 8.5.9A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ dhoviya upanāmayitavyaṃ. mukhodakam āsiñcitavyaṃ § 41.7.34A3. dakṣiṇena hastena udakaṃ āsiñcati § 41.23.35A7. dakṣiṇahastena udakaṃ āsiṃcitavyaṃ § 41.27.35B3. dakṣiṇena hastena udakaṃ āsiñcitavyaṃ § 41.27.35B4. vāmena hastena udakaṃ āsiñcitavyaṃ § 41.27.35B4. nâpi dāni kṣamati tenaỿva hastena udakaṃ āsiñcituṃ § 41.28.35B4. ekena āsiñcitavyaṃ ekena dhovitavyaṃ § 41.29.35B6. yadi tahiṃ koci bhikṣu bhavati navatarako, so vaktavyo “udakaṃ āsiñcihi” tti āsura~ “Dämon” (= asura) § 30.3.25A1. uttānakā bhikṣavo āsurā śeyyāṃ kalpayanti ā-stara- ⇒ a-stara- āstaraṇa~ “Matte” ⇒ astaraṇa~, astaraṇika~, astarikā~, bhūmi-astāra~, bhūmy-astāra~, bhūmy- āstara~, saṃstaraṇa~ § 12.10.11B6. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ettakaṃ prāvaraṇaṃ tato likhitavyaṃ ... (≒ § 12.12.11B7) § 15.9.14A4. āstaraṇaṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ ā-sthapaya-# “hinlegen”; < Skt. ā-sthāpayati § 55.5.46B6. atha khalu bhūyo geṇḍukam āsthapayitvā acchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo āha, āhaṃsuḥ, āhu usw. ⇒ √ah āhaṃ für ahaṃ : § 53.8.45A7 ā-haṇa-# “schlagen”; < ā-√han ⇒ ā-√han, ā-hane- § 4.7.4B5. raṇaraṇā gaṇḍi āhaṇiya vaktavyaṃ: “āyuṣman vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho ...” § 4.7.4B6. tato raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍī āhaṇiya <praviśitavyaṃ> § 5.7.6B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiyāṇaṃ ārocitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ § 5.7.6B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiyāṇaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 6.7.7B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiya ... pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ 122  § 17.5.14B7. tato raṇaraṇāye gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiya sarvvasaṃghena sannipatitavyaṃ § 39.24.32A2. dānapatir āgato bhavati, āha “bhante, āhaṇatha gaṇḍiṃ. anukālyo ’va tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 39.25.32A2. atha dāni āha “āhaṇatha tumhe. grāmāntikâpi eṣyantî”ti § 55.3.46B5. yo yeva pracālayati taṃ yeva kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena urasi vā tāṇḍeti pārśvasmi vā āhananti ā-hata~ ⇒ ā-√han ā-hatya~# “abnehmbar, abhebbar”; < Skt. *ā-hṛtya > Pā. āhacca ☞ § 18.35, Anm. 3 § 18.35.16B7. yadi tāva āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, uttatthapitavyā § 19.15.18A4. so pṛthivīpradeśo, yadi tāvad āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā uttatthiyāṇaṃ cchorayitavyo (≒ § 19.33.18B6) ā-√han ⇒ ā-haṇa-, ā-hane- § 39.1.30B6. tehi dāni grāmāntikehi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ sthitāḥ § 39.1.30B6. āyuṣmaṃ deśakālo, āhanatha gaṇḍiṃ § 39.1.30B7. āhatā pi ’yaṃ gaṇḍī § 39.1.30B7. evaṃ yūyaṃ atyanukālye gaṇḍīṃ āhaniya bhuñjatha § 39.2.31A1. tathā tumhehiṃ pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍi āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjatha § 39.3.31A1. pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjituṃ § 39.5.31A3. pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ ... bhuñjituṃ § 39.8.31A4. grāmāntikehi gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjitavyaṃ § 39.13.31B1. gaṇḍī tāva vistareṇa āhaniyāṇaṃ, cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo (= § 39.25. 32A3) § 39.16.31B4. gaṇḍī<yaṃ> āhatāyaṃ vandiya cetiyaṃ <bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ> § 39.18.31B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjituṃ § 39.21.32A1. atha dāni nâgacchanti, deśakāle gaṇḍiṃ āhaniya cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjitavyaṃ § 42.26.37B3. gaṇḍī āhanitavyā § 53.6.45A5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, ... § 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, ... § 54.3.46A2. te ... yaṣṭī vārentā yo yeva bhikṣu pracalāyati taṃ yeva kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhana<ṃ>ti, pāde vā āhana<ṃ>ti (Hs. ahanati) § 54.7.46A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yaṣṭiṃ vārentena kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye āhanituṃ § 55.5.46B6. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ pracālayati, na kṣamati kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena āhanituṃ § 54.8.46A5. nâpi kṣamati kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye āhanituṃ rajag[g]asma viya § 56.5.47A6. dvitīyasya (wohl für paścimasya) prahāṇasya jarjare āhate (Hs. āgate) otaritavyaṃ § 57.3.47B2. atha khalu bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāṃ gacchiya caturddiśaṃ niṣīdanti ā-hane-# “schlagen”; < Skt. ā-hanayati ⇒ ā-haṇa-, ā-√han § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 39.13.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha tumhe. āraṇyakâpi eṣyantî”ti ā-hara- “holen” § 42.12.36B5. udakaṃ āharttavyaṃ āhāra~ “Speise, Nahrung; Nahrungsaufnahme” § 14.3.13A3. yadi utsahanti, teṣāṃ āhāreṇa upastambhaṃ karttavyaṃ § 25.3.22B2. gocarāto nirddhāviya āhāraṃ karīya pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ § 49.7.42B5. piṇḍacārikaṃ vā aṇṭhiyāṇa vihāraṃ vâgacchiya āhāraṃ kṛtvā ... § 49.7.42B5. glānasya anukālyaṃ āhāraṃ datvā sahitakehi nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 52.9.44B7. nadīkūle vā udupānakūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā āhāraṃ kṛtvā pātraṃ nirmmādayitvā āgacchati, anāpattiḥ āhāraka~ (BHS) “Speise”# 123  § 52.6.44B6. asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno āhāra-paryeṣṭi~# “Suchen nach Speise”; vgl. Pā. āhāra-pariyeṭṭhi; BHS. paryeṣṭi § 49.7.42B6. bhikṣusya ātmano āhāraparyeṣṭiṃ (Hs. °paryeptiṃ) paryeṣamāṇasya vikālo bhavati I i/a ⇒ a/i i / aṃ ⇒ aṃ / i i/ī: § 1.12.2A5. atisitam für atiśītam § 4.20.5B7. prīyan für priyaṃ § 14.8.13A7. uppiḍanako für uppīḍ° § 18.41.17A4. nigamaṃca für nīlamaṃcaṃ § 19.3.17B5. vīhārasya für vi° § 19.28.18B4. uppilito für uppīlito § 20.8.19B4. triṇi für trīṇi § 28.5.24A4. nihinakena für nihīn° § 32.6.27B2. akṣiṇi für akṣiṇī (du.) oder akṣīṇi (pl.) (= § 40.9.33A2) § 37.5.30A4. kusidā für kusīdā § 41.22.35A6. niṣpiḍitvā für niṣpīḍitvā (zweimal) § 42.29.37B6. sapratiśehi für sapratīśehi § 43.1.38A2. pīṭharikā für piṭharikā § 43.8.38A6. harītakī- für haritakī- § 48.8.41B4. ukkhinakā für ukkhīṇaka? § 49.1.41B6. akalpīyaṃ für akalpiyaṃ § 50.7.43B3. niharttavyā für nīh° i/e: § 12.16.12A4. vṛddhihi für vṛddhehi § 18.53.17B3. śe für ’si § 31.6.25B5. karentihi für °tehi § 41.9.34A5. śoṣayetaṃ für śoṣayitaṃ § 42.19.37A3. praviśiyitvā wohl für praveśayitvā i / ai : § 31.8.25B6. bhaikṣitavyaṃ für bhikṣitavyaṃ √i ⇒ e- § 4.12.5A4. kiṃ ārabhya deti, tathā yeva nimantraṇāy’ etavyaṃ § 50.1.43A3. idānīṃ pi eṣyati muhūrttaṃ pi eṣyati iccha- § 4.15.5B2. yathā naṃ icchati (lies: °atī od. °ate [m.c.]) mātā yathā naṃ icchati (dass.) pitā (vs) § 6.13.8A4. yathā icchati se mātā yathā icchati se pitā (vs) § 40.9.33A2. “icchāmi pānīyaṃ dīyamānan” ti § 41.15.34B5. icchāmi pānīyaṃ pātuṃ § 50.1.43A1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā bhikṣu adhyeṣṭo “āyuṣman, icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyamānaṃ.” (≒ § 50.2.43A4) § 50.4.43A6. piṇḍapātanīhārako adhyeṣitavyo, vaktavyam “āyuṣman, icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyantaṃ.” ti § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko (Hs. kho) vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” usw. iṭṭikā~ ⇒ pakviṭṭikā~ itas ⇒ ito iti (1) ⇒ itti, ti, tti § 18.22.16B1. iminā āgamayitavyaṃ tāva yāva utthita iti 124  § 31.4.25B4. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ, mā dāni adarśanena parijāne “hṛtaṃ, hṛtaṃ me pātracīvaram” iti gacchantasya karttavyaṃ usw. iti (2) iti als Adverbialbilder ☞ § 18.25, Anm. 4; § 23.4.2, Anm. 2 ⇒ cchatti, cchitti itikitikā~# “Hetäre”; < iti + kṛti? ⇒ itikitikāya-putra~ itikitikāya-putra~# “Hurensohn” (Schimpfwort) < “Sohn einer Hetäre” ☞ § 41.5, Anm. 2 § 41.5.34A1. ime itikitikāyaputrāḥ śramaṇakāḥ grāmānte iryāpathaṃ ṭhapayanti, nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti vikopenti iti-nāman~ ⇒ evaṃ-nāma~, evaṃ-nāmaka~ § 5.7.6B4. <nâsti> ’tināmâsmākaṃ koci upāsako iti-pravṛttaka~# “so angefangen”? ☞ § 36.6, Anm. 9 § 36.6.29B6. sarvve itipravṛttakā karttavyā itivṛttaka~ (BHS, SWTF) “Itivṛttaka”; vgl. Pā. itivuttaka § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto ... udānaṃ itivṛttakaṃ jātakaṃ ... ito (Pā) < Skt. itas § 24.7.22A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ divāvihāraṃ gato caṃkramati, śleṣmiko bhikṣu bhavati, ito ca <ito ca> (“hierhin und dorthin”; ☞ § 24.7[Text], Anm. 1) cchorayanto caṃkramati ... § 41.10.34A6. labhyā khalu ito pānīyaṃ pātuṃ § 51.6.44A2. na dāni ito vā ito vā (“hierhin und dorthin”; ☞ § 51.6, Anm. 1) nidhyāya- ntena āsitavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “corā vā ocorakā bhavanti.” itti# < iti ⇒ iti, ti, tti § 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati ... vaktavyaṃ ... “kiṃ āṇapesî?”tti, “kiṃ karemi?” itthaṃ (BHS[Mvu]) “hier”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. etthaṃ ☞ § 31.18, Anm. 1 ⇒ ettha, iha § 31.18.26A2. nâpi dāni vaktavyaṃ “ko itthaṃ? kativarṣo? utthiha!” itthan-nāma~ (SWTF, Pā) “soundso heißend” ⇒ evaṃ-nāma~, evaṃ-nāmaka~ § 4.7.4B4. koci imaṃhi itthannāmo nāma upāsako? (= § 5.7.6B3) § 5.6.6B3. asuke deśe asukāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ itthaṃnāmo nāma upāsako itvara-kālikam# “kurzzeitig” ⇒ cira-kālikam § 43.14.38B2. atha dāniṃ vṛddhatarakasya cirakālo bhavati, navatarakasya itvarakālikaṃ bhavati, navatarakasya dātavyaṃ. atha dāni ubhayeṣāṃ itvarakālikaṃ, vṛddhatarakasya dātavyaṃ itvāra-vāsin~# “einer, der sich nur für kurze Zeit aufhält” ☞ § 17.3, Anm. 2 § 17.3.14B7. ye ... āgantukā ca nevāsikā ca te pratisaṃskariṣyanti. vayaṃ itvāravāsino idam~ ⇒ se § 3.6.3B4. nâyaṃ kṣamati “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ ollaggikāye āsituṃ § 4.16.5B2. nâyaṃ kṣamati evaṃ dakṣiṇā ādiśituṃ § 4.5.4B2. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ko ’yaṃ nimantreti (≒ § 6.5.7B1) § 4.20.6A3. so ’yaṃ śreṣṭhāyatane pratiṣṭhito pātrasaṃhṛto lābho (vs) § 16.5.14A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... sthāpayituṃ § 19.19.18A7. kenâyaṃ nikkālayitavyo? § 26.1.23A5. te dāni āyuṣmaṃto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ... jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu ...” ... jalpa<ṃ>ti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, ...” § 26.3.23A6. kim ayaṃ yavāgū ubhayato sāṃghikā parṣāye pariveṇikā nimantritikā{yāṃ} § 33.6.28A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati gṛhi-ālapena ālapituṃ “haṃgho he he” tti § 41.11.34A7. katham ayaṃ brāhmaṇa ... tuṣṭo? § 42.24.37B1. ayaṃ jentāko § 47.4.40B6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā ... praviśituṃ § 49.4.42A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā paścācchramaṇo praveśituṃ § 49.7.42B6. yadi tāva so śirāviddho eva nirddhāvati, ayaṃ praviṣṭo bhavati § 50.1.43A2. ayaṃ pi deśakālaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ gṛhītvā ārāmacārikāṃ caṃcūryati § 52.5.44B4. atha dāni upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā piṇḍapātako bhavati, ayaṃ ca piṇḍāya caritvā āgato bhavati, sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 3.1.3A7. āhaṃsu “no hîdaṃ dīrghāyu” (= § 6.3.7A7) § 15.3.14A1. kim idaṃ (lies: ime) bhikṣavo vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā ...? (≒ 125  § 16.3.14A6. kiṃ ime ...) § 36.6.29B5. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhaga<va>tā “bahukarā bhikṣavo brāhmaṇagṛhapatayo ...” § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha ...” § 41.4.33B7. ekam idaṃ bhikṣavo samayaṃ Śāriputro sthaviro Vaiśālyām viharati Mahāvane Kūṭāgāraśālāyāṃ § 42.5.36B1. idam evaṃrūpaṃ pāpakarmmam akuśalan dharmmam adhyācariṣyatha § 43.1.38A2. kim iyaṃ (Nom. sg. fem. für das neut. sg.; vgl. BHSG § 21.82; v. Hinüber 2001: § 382) bhikṣavo bhāṇḍaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ tiṣṭhati § 17.7.15A2. mitakaṃ dātavyaṃ “iman tava khaṇḍaṃ, imaṃ tava khaṇḍan.” ti § 41.10.34A6. yathâpi imaṃ bhavatā Śāriputreṇa dakānakaṃ upacīrṇṇaṃ § 26.9.23B3. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, imaṃ mama yavāgūye pratyaṃśaṃ gṛhṇa.” § 41.17.34B7. imaṃ hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ harāma § 41.18.35A2. imaṃ vayaṃ tava sarvvaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ demi § 55.5.46B6. tena (Hs. imena; ☞ § 55.5[Text], Anm. 3) vārayitavyo, imena (vgl. BHSG § 21.56) upaviśitavyaṃ § 18.22.16B1. iminā (BHS, Pā; BHSG § 21.57 [Mvu]; Pkt. imiṇā) āgamayitavyaṃ tāva yāva utthita iti § 18.23.16B2. iminā ca parāṅmukhena bhavitavyaṃ. tasya câvakāśo dātavyaḥ § 19.9.18A2. iminā avakāśo dātavyo. tato ubhayehi praśvāso karttavyo § 53.7.45A7. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, ... vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti. tena sa vārayitavyo, iminā upaviśitavyaṃ § 54.9.46A6. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava yaṣṭi prāpuṇati. vārehi.” tena vāretavyaṃ, iminā upaviśitavyaṃ § 41.20.35A4. nâsya muṃceya brāhmaṇo (vs) § 41.20.35A4. taṃ pi dhik yo ’sya muñcati (vs) § 41.17.34B7. imasya dārakasya (= § 41.18.35A1) § 49.1.42A1. paśyati “mā imasya dātavyaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti § 4.17.5B4. istrī pi vidhavā nagnā sace ’syā daśa bhrātaro (vs) § 4.18.5B7. imasmi āgāre (lies: ’gāre [m.c.]) nivasantu devatāḥ (vs) § 4.7.4B4. koci imaṃhi itthannāmo nāma upāsako? (= § 5.7.6B3; ≒ § 6.7.7B4) § 6.7.7B4. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “nâsti koci imaṃhi evaṃnāmako ...” § 18.45.17A6. mā odhyāyeṃsu “ken’ imaṃ<hi> panthesmi antrāṇi vikīrṇṇāni?” § 19.37.19A1. kena imaṃhi (Hs. ime) panthe praśvāso kṛto rudhiraṃ viya cchanditaṃ? § 26.1.23A5. nicuḍavuntikāye imaṃhi taṇḍulā mārggitavyā § 8.2.8B6. kathaṃ ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ, ye ime asmākaṃ naỿv’ allīyaṃti na pratyālīyanti? § 23.2.21A5. kiṃ ime (Hs. keme) bhikṣu vihārakā oddriṇṇakā ... apratisaṃskṛtā? § 31.10.25B7. mā paśyeṃsu “samāmapayi (?) ime pravrajitā karonti.” § 41.5.34A1. ime itikitikāyaputrāḥ śramaṇakāḥ grāmānte iryāpathaṃ ṭhapayanti ... § 47.1.40B4. ime pi na jānanti ... (= § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A4) § 48.2.41A6. ime na jānanti § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo (Nom. pl. fem.) ... bhittiyo pakkakheṭena pakkasiṃghāṇakena varttīhi lambantīhi? § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “ko imāyo (Acc. pl. fem.) dahiṣyatî”ti, tāyo cchoriya anyāyo sthāpayitavyāyo § 12.9.11B4. katamehi pañcahi? ... imehi pañcahi § 52.3.44B2. imehi śaknoma piṇḍacārikehi mukhe kavalaṃ prakṣipituṃ § 3.3.3B1. imeṣāṃ mottikā; § 6.2.7A6. imeṣāṃ muktikā (= § 8.2.8B6, § 10.2.10A3) § 19.2.17B5. kuto vā imeṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ?; § 20.6.19B3. kuto imeṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ? (=
 § 20.7.19B4, § 34.1.28B1, § 34.2.28B2, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 36.2.29B2 usw.) usw. usw. idāni (BHS) ⇒ idānīṃ, idāniṃ § 44.8.39A7. nêdāni (wohl für | [Daṇḍa] na dāni) (= § 51.5.44A2) 126 idāniṃ# ⇒ idāni, idānīṃ § 3.10.4A2. athêdāniṃ jalpanti “vasiṣyāma” tti idānīṃ ⇒ idāni, idāniṃ § 50.1.43A3. idānīṃ pi eṣyati muhūrttaṃ pi eṣyati Indra-gava~# “Indras Rind” ☞ § 7.1, Anm. 3 § 7.1.8A6. te dāni Indragavā viya varddhayanti, Śivacchagalā viya vardha<ṃ>ti § 9.1.9B4. te dāni Indragavā viya varddhanti Śivacchagalā viya varddhanti indriya~ ⇒ osara- indriyāṇi § 41.4.34A1. antarggatehi indriyehi abahirggatena mānasena ipsitānna~# (ipsita-anna) “erwünschte Speise”; < Skt. īpsitā° § 49.1.42A2. so ... mahātmehi kulehi ipsitānnāni (Hs. °āti) bhukt<v>ā § 49.1.42A3. nagarakulopakena pityakena sārddhaṃ praviṣṭasya ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāvisya § 49.1.42A4. āyuṣman, kuto me ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāni (= § 49.2.42A5) -ima Suffix ⇒ khānima~, ghaṭikā-bandhima, sūcikā-bandhima ☞ § 18.7, Anm. 4 imaṃ ⇒ idam~ iminā (BHS[Mvu], Pā; vgl. BHSG § 21.57; Pkt. imiṇā) ⇒ idam~ ime für imaṃ<hi> : § 19.37.19A1 -iyya < -eyya < -eya ⇒ *utthiyyaṃ iryāpatha~ (BHS) “Körperhaltung”; vgl. Pā. iriyāpatha ⇒ īryāpatha~ § 41.5.34A2. ime ... śramaṇakāḥ grāmānte iryāpathaṃ ṭhapayanti (Hs. paṭha°), nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti vikopenti § 41.5.34A2. ayaṃ śramaṇako iryāpathaṃ vikopayiṣyati -illa~ ⇒ koḍilla~ -illaka~ ⇒ paśyillaka~ iva “wie, gleichsam”; vgl. S. 559 in diesem Band ⇒ viya § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... lābhāgrayaśograprāpto, lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātaśayyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārāṇāṃ tatra ca anupaliptaḥ padmam iva jalena ivā (bāhirodivā) für eva (bāhire-d-eva)? : § 18.7.15B5 √iṣ ⇒ iccha-, paṭiccha-, praticcha-, pratīccha-, adhy-eṣa-, pary-eṣa-, preṣaya- iṣṭakā~ “Ziegelstein” ⇒ iṣṭā~, iṣṭa-khaṇḍa~ § 12.5.11B2. iṣṭakācchadano bhavati, iṣṭakā dātavyā (= § 23.7.21B5) § 13.6.12B2. yadi tāva vihārako ... iṣṭakācchadano bhavati, iṣṭakā dātavyā § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) iṣṭakāhi vā upalair vvā cchādayitavyā § 19.3.17B6. (praśvāsakuṭī ...) udakabhramaṇasya vā upari karttavyā upalasya vā iṣṭakāya vā upari § 25.10.22B6. (pātraṃ) ... kāṣṭham vā iṣṭakam (Acc. sg. fem.) vā upalam vā nirāmiṣaṃ nirmmādiya tasya upari sthapetavyaṃ iṣṭakā-cchadana~# “Decke bzw. Dach aus Ziegelsteinen” § 12.5.11B2. iṣṭakācchadano bhavati, iṣṭakā dātavyā (= § 23.7.21B5) § 13.6.12B2. yadi tāva vihārako ... iṣṭakācchadano bhavati, iṣṭakā dātavyā iṣṭa-khaṇḍa~# “ein Stück Ziegelstein”; < *iṣṭā-khaṇḍa~ (vgl. Skt. iṣṭakā, BHS. iṣṭā, Pā. iṭṭhā); vgl. AiGr II, 1, § 21a, β § 55.3.46B4. te ... geṇḍukaṃ vārayaṃtā (Hs. cār°) iṣṭakhaṇḍaṃ leṅkaṭakakhaṇḍena veṣṭayitvā vārenti (Hs. cār°) iṣṭā (BHS) “Ziegelstein”; vgl. Pkt. iṭṭā; CDIAL 1600 ⇒ iṣṭakā~, iṣṭa-khaṇḍa~ § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) upari iṣṭāhi mṛttikāya ca cchādayitavyā{ni} istr~ (BHS) ⇒ strī~ § 4.17.5B4. istrī pi vidhavā nagnā sace ’syā daśa bhrātaro (vs) § 4.17.5B4. istri pi peśalā bhavatu śrāddhā bhavatu vratānugā (vs) iha ⇒ itthaṃ, ettha § 4.17.5B4. śīlavatī yogasampannā samyagdṛṣṭi ca yā iha (vs) § 4.17.5B5. śīlavāṃ tyāgasampanno samyagdṛṣṭi ca yo iha (vs) § 31.16.26A2. ihaỿva yūyaṃ jātā ihaỿva mariṣyatha 127  § 31.24.26A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati tehi āgantukehi nevāsikāṃ kutsiya haṃbhiya “āyuṣmann, adyâpi yūyaṃ iha vasatha. ...” § 31.27.26B2. āyuṣman, mā piṇḍāya praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha (≒ § 31.30.26B5) iha-loka~ “diese Welt” § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti Ī ī/ā ⇒ ā/ī ī/e: § 18.28.16B4. prahāṇī für °hāṇe § 19.9.18A2. uppīḍiyatī für °yate § 24.1.22A1. lambantehi für °ntīhi § 53.19.45B7. niṣpeḍiyāṇaṃ für niṣpīḍi° (vgl. BHSG § 3.59) √īkṣ ⇒ adhy-upekṣa-, ud-√īkṣ, upa-parīkṣa-, praty-avekṣa-, su-pratyavekṣita~ īpsita~ ⇒ ipsitānna~ īryāpatha~ (BHS, SWTF) “Körperhaltung” ⇒ iryāpatha~, an-īryāpatha-sampanna~ § 41.6.34A2. sthaviro dāni grāmāraṇyasamena īryāpathena samanvāgato U u- / a- ⇒ a- / u- u/a ⇒ a/u u / aṃ ⇒ aṃ / u u/ū: § 12.10.11B6. bhurjake für bhūr°? § 17.5.15A1. pāṃsukuliko für °kūliko § 19.31.18B5. urūyo für ūr° § 29.6.24B3. amūhūrttakaṃ für āmuh° § 43.1.38A2. nakūla- für nakula- § 52.9.44B7. -kule (nadī-kule, udupāna-kule, puṣkiriṇī-kule) für -kūle u/o: § 24.9.22A5. opānahapuṭe für upā° § 27.8.23B7. opānahārūḍho für upā° § 49.5.42A7. oḍḍitāye < Pā. uḍḍita~ u / ḍa : § 23.4.4.21B2. ḍaddhāpayantena für *uddhā°? u / ḍu? : § 47.8.41A2. udranti für “ḍu ḍu” tti? u / ta : § 19.3.17B6. tapari für upari u / du : § 13.11.12B4. utthitakā für dutthitakā (= § 13.13.12B5); § 16.9.14B3. utthāpitakā für dutth° u / ra : § 3.5.3B2. āvraṇitvā für āvuṇitvā § 8.12.9B1. prastako für pustako § 13.11.12B4. vraṇitavyā für vuṇi° (= § 15.8.14A4) u-k, u-g, u-p, u-ś, u-ṣ, u-s < uk-k, ug-g, up-p, uś-ś, uṣ-ṣ, us-s < ut-k, ud-g, ut-p, ut-ś, ut-ṣ, ut-s ⇒ u- kaḍḍha-, ukūla-nikūla~, u-kṣipta~, ukṣipta-rathyā, u-grāya-, upaṃsulaka~, upādakā, upeḍanaka~, upaṃsulaka~, upāṃsulaka~, uśvāsa~, uśvāsa-kāra~, uśvāsa-kāraka~, uśvāsa- kṛta~, u-śvāsita~, u-ṣṭhapaya-, u-ṣṭhiha-, u-sphoṣe-, usvedaka~; zur Vereinfachung der Doppelkonsonanten wie Skt. utpanno > BHS. upanno, die meistens aus metrischen Gründen vorkommt, s. BHSG §§ 2.84, 88; Brough 1962: 106 Anm. 3 u-kaḍḍha- ⇒ uk-kaḍḍha- (1) ukūla-nikūla~# “uneben”; < BHS. utkūla-nikūla (s. BHSD, s.v. utkūla), Pā. ukkūlavi(k)kūla ☞ § 23.8, Anm. 3 § 23.8.21B6. mūṣika-ukkiro vâkoṭayitavyo. ukūlanikūlo bhavati, samo karttavyo uk-kacaya-# “befestigen”; vgl. Skt = Pā. kacati (Lex. “umbinden, befestigen” [pw, s.v.]; “to bind” [CPD, s.v.]) ☞ § 21.6, Anm. 3 128  § 21.6.20B4. kaṭhinaṃ .... bhittīye dve kīlakā nikhaniya rajjue bandhiya tahiṃ ukkacayi- tavyaṃ (Hs. ukkava°) § 25.9.22B5. pātraprasevikā nāgadantake vā kīlake vā ukkaciya thapetavyā uk-kaḍḍha- (1) (Pā), u-kaḍḍha-#, uk-kaḍha-#, uk-kaḍḍhaya-# “aufheben, beiseite legen, bereithalten, wegräumen, wegbringen”; < ut + kaḍḍha- (s.v.) ☞ § 8.5, Anm. 8; § 4.13, Anm. 5 ⇒ o- kaḍḍha-, kaḍḍha- § 8.5.9A1. peyā ukkaḍhitavyā. peyā peyi{ṃ}tā (für *pāyitā?) peyāpātraṃ śodhitavyaṃ § 8.8.9A5. piṇḍapāto ukkaḍhitavyo piṇḍapāta upanāmayitavyo § 39.14.31B2. vaktavyaṃ “āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ukaḍḍhatha.” tehi āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapāto ukkaḍḍhayitavyo. ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikakalpiyakuṭīyaṃ sthāpayitavyo § 39.26.32A4. atha dāni teṣāṃ na koci lābhagrāhako bhavati, pariveṣakena sarvveṣāṃ ekasthāne piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohanati, yadi tāva kaṇḍikāpūrakam ukkaḍḍhiya ovvarakaṃ praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā.” ti § 53.11.45B1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāto dīpako ukkaḍhitavyo § 58.4.48A4. a<na>ntariko vaktavyo “āyuṣman, mama tāva piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhê”ti § 59.5.48B2. ānantarikasya vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, mama piṇḍapātam ukkaḍḍhesi” § 60.5.48B7. ānantarikasya pātraṃ dātavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mama piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍhesi” uk-kaḍḍha- (2) (Pā) “zurückziehen”; < ut + kaḍḍha- (s.v.) ☞ § 4.13, Anm. 5; § 25.13, Anm. 3; § 47.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ o-kaḍḍha-, kaḍḍha-, √kṛṣ § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ yadā navakāḥ santarpitā bhavanti, upagrāyanti pānīyaṃ vā pibanti, hastām vā ukkaḍḍhiya (Hs. ukkaḍhḍhiya) āsanti uk-kaḍḍhaya- ⇒ uk-kaḍḍha- (1) uk-kaḍha- ⇒ uk-kaḍḍha- (1) ukkanikā für ukkalikā : § 44.8.39A6 ukkalikā~# “plötzlicher Windstoß, Bö”; vgl. Pkt. ukkaliyā “dass.” ☞ § 44.8, Anm. 2 § 44.8.39A6. rajo vātarajo vā ukkalikā (Hs. ukkanikā) cīvaraṃ vināśeti ukkavayitavyaṃ für ukkaca° : § 21.6.20B4 uk-kasa- “gehen, hinaufgehen, zugehen”; < Skt. ud + √kas (“gehen, sich bewegen”) > Pkt. ukkasaï (“gehen”) ☞ § 32.5, Anm. 3; § 38.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ o-kasa-, o-kkasa-, o-kasta~, niṣ-kāśaya- § 32.5.27B1. dvibhūmikam vā ukkasati, tvaritaṃ vā atikramati, na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 38.2.30A5. nâyaṃ kṣamati gatāgatasya vṛddhāntam ukkasituṃ § 38.5.30A7. ye (?; Hs. yā) vṛddhatarakā yāvad vṛddhāntaṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ, saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti § 39.7.31A4. ekena bhikṣuṇā vihārakaṃ ukkasiya nidhyāyitavyaṃ § 39.20.31B7. ekena bhikṣuṇā vihāraṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ “kiṃ grāmāntikā āgacchanti na hi?” tti § 39.28.32A5. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ukkasitavyaṃ; vgl. § 39.16.31B3. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantavyaṃ § 43.7.38A6. ukkasiya sthapetavyā (☞ § 43.7, Anm. 9) ukkahitāni für ukṣiptāni? : § 39.2.31A1 ukkāra ⇒ mūṣa-ukkāra~, mūṣikokkāra~, ukkhara~ uk-kāsikā~# “Husten”; vgl. Skt. utkāsana, Pā. ukkāsana ⇒ kāsa~, kāsā~, kāsikā~ § 58.4.48A4. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo ukkāsikā āgacchati, ... gantavyaṃ § 58.6.48A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya ukkāsikā āgacchati, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ ukkira ⇒ mūṣa-ukkira~, mūṣika-ukkira~ ukkhara~# “Abort”; vgl. Pā. ukkara, ukkāra ☞ § 18.42, Anm. 2 ⇒ ukkāra § 18.42.17A4. utsṛṣṭagṛhaṃ gantavyaṃ. pṛcchitavyaṃ “rikto ukkharo” ti uk-khala-# “stolpern”; < Skt. ut-√skhal; vgl. BHS. utskhalati, utkhalati ⇒ pra-kkhala- § 53.1.45A2. te dāni bhikṣū andhakāre prahāṇe upaviśaṃti ukkhalantā prakkhalantā ukkhinakā für ukkhīṇakā? : § 48.8.41B4 *ukkhīṇaka~ “geschält(es Reiskorn)”?; < *ut-kṣīṇa, *apa-kṣīṇa oder *ava-kṣīṇa ☞ § 48.8, Anm. 129  1 ⇒ an-okṣīṇaka~ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... ukkhīṇaka (Hs. ukkhinakā) vā taṇḍulā praticchituṃ ukta~ ⇒ √vac § 27.7.23B7. nâpi kṣamati “saṃghamadhye mā tiṣṭha” ti ukto tiṣṭhituṃ. upādhyāyācāryehi vā uktena samānena “mā tiṣṭhê”ti tiṣṭhati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 28.6.24A4. “mā caṃkramāhî”ti uktena na caṃkramitavyaṃ § 29.8.24B5. nâpi kṣamati “saṃghamadhye mā niṣīda” tti uktena samānena niṣīdituṃ. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyācāryehi “mā niṣīda” tti uktena niṣīdituṃ § 36.6.29B5. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhaga<va>tā “bahukarā bhikṣavo brāhmaṇagṛhapatayo ...” § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi no parihāṇi.” § 41.1.33B4. udake pi khalu mātrā uktā bhagavatā tathaỿva sarvvehi bāhirakehi jīvitapariṣkārehi § 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā tathaỿva sarvvehi jīvitapariṣkārehi § 42.3.36A6. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā (= § 42.4.36A7) u-kṣipta~# “weggebracht” ⇒ ut-kṣipta~ ukṣipta-rathyā~# “Nebenstraße”? ⇒ utkṣipta-rathyā~ uggaṃkito für uśśaṃkito : § 18.43.17A5 u-grāya-# “rülpsen”; vgl. ud-2√g (“ausspeien”), upa-2√g (“einschlucken” [PW]) ☞ § 4.13, Anm. 4 ⇒ upa-grāya § 5.11.7A2. yaṃ kālaṃ navakā bhikṣū ugrāyanti vā pānīyam vā pibanti uc-caggha- (BHS) “auslachen, verspotten”; < Skt. ud + √jakṣ ☞ § 42.29, Anm. 2 ⇒ uc-caha- § 49.1.42A3. te dāni taṃ uccagghanti “āyuṣman, snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo ...” uccaṭṭayitavyaṃ für uvvaṭṭ° : § 60.4.48B6 uccatta-, uccanta für uvvatta- ⇒ uv-vatta- uccaśabda-mahāśabda~ (SWTF) “laut und lärmend” § 31.15.26A1. nâpi dāni uccaśabdamahāśabdehi praveṣṭavyaṃ § 42.30.37B6. nâpi kṣamati uccaśabdamahāśabdehi snāyituṃ *uc-caha-# “auslachen, verspotten” (eine verderbte Form von uc-caggha- [< ud + √jakṣ]) ☞ § 42.29, Anm. 2 ⇒ uc-caggha- § 42.29.37B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati navakehi bhikṣūhi uccahantehi snāyituṃ uccāra~ “Kot” ⇒ ucchvāsa~, uśvāsa~, praśvāsa~, praśvāsaka~, prasrāva~ § 18.53.17B2. yadi tāva ātmano uccāro bhavati, so eva tasya pratigraho § 18.53.17B3. atha dāni parakerako uccāro bhavati, pratigrahāpayitavyo § 18.53.17B3. āyuṣman imasya bhaiṣajyasya gandho yādṛśo uccārasya § 19.16.18A6. na dāni tahi kṣamati uccāro vā kheṭasiṃghāṇako vā prakṣipituṃ § 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa aprayataṃ gṛhṇituṃ, uccāro vā prasrāvo vā kheṭaṃ vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā ... grahetuṃ uccāra-kaṭāhaka~# “Schüssel für Kot; Kotgefäß” § 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇâprasannaṃ gṛhṇituṃ kheṭakaṭāham vā uccāra- kaṭāhakam vā prasrāvakumbhakaṃ vā *uccāra-prasrāva-kheṭa-siṃghāṇaka~# “Exkremente, Urin, Schleim und Rotz” ⇒ kheṭa- siṃghāṇaka~ § 18.18.16A6. yathā uccāraprasrāvakheṭasiṃghāṇakaṃ (Hs. °praśrāva°) sarvvaṃ tahiṃ nigacche uc-cāre- (Pā) “hochheben”; < Skt. uc-cārayati § 51.12.44A6. eṣā strī ... bhikṣu paśyiyāṇaṃ ... ābharaṇāni vā uccāreti (Hs. ucchār°), jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyatî”ti uc-√ci “einsammeln” ⇒ √ci § 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇa ... gomayāni vā uccinituṃ uccikā~# Bedeutung? ☞ § 18.18, Anm. 3 § 18.18.16A6. kheṭaṃ vā siṃhāṇakam vā varcco vā tahi nikṣiptaṃ bhavati, uccikāye tahiṃ sarvvaṃ prakṣipitavyaṃ 130 uccel(l)aya- für uvvel(l)aya- : § 45.4.39B6, § 45.5.39B7, § 45.6.40A1, § 45.7.40A3, § 46.4.40A7, § 46.5.40B1, § 46.6.40B2 uc-chada~ (SWTF) “Decke”; < Skt. avacchada od. < Skt. upacchada ☞ § 24.9, Anm. 5 § 24.9.22A5. atha dāni ucchado bhavati, kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā utthitvā ekānte kṛtvā punaḥ upaveṣṭavyaṃ uc-chaha- (BHS) “Mut fassen”; < Skt. ut-sahati; vgl. Pā. ussahati ☞ § 14.3, Anm. 4 ⇒ uc-chāhe-, ut-saha- § 14.3.13A3. atha khalu ucchāhetavyā. tahi eko vā dvau vā trayo vā yāvatakā ucchahanti ucchāreti für uccār°? : § 51.12.44A6 uc-chāhe-# “ermutigen”; < Skt. ut-sāhayati; vgl. Pā. ussāheti ⇒ uc-chaha-, ut-saha- § 14.3.13A2. atha khalu ucchāhetavyā. tahi eko vā dvau vā trayo vā yāvatakā ucchahanti ucchitakāṃ für utthitakāṃ : § 12.2.11A7 ucchirā (mūṣika-ucchirā) für (mūṣika-)utkirā : § 12.8.11B4 ucchedaka~# “(von einer Abtrennung) umschlossener Ort” (?); vgl. Skt. avaccheda~ ☞ § 2.5, Anm. 1 ⇒ ucchedanaka~, occhedaka~ § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ekānte bhavati ucchedake vā vṛkṣamūlake vā vihāre vā pratisaṃlīnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ ucchedanaka~# “(von einer Abtrennung) umschlossener Ort” (?) ☞ § 2.5, Anm. 1 ⇒ ucchedaka~, occhedaka~ § 2.5.2B5. kahiṃ bhaviṣyati upasthānaśālāyām vā prahāṇaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā ucchedanake vā niṣadyāya vā? ucchvāsa~ “Notdurft”#; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 142, Anm. 2 ⇒ uśvāsa~, uccāra~, praśvāsa~, praśvāsaka~ § 18.2.15B1. te dāni bhikṣū prakīrṇṇakasya ucchvāsaṃ karonti ujjakena für ujjuk° : § 31.6.25B5 ujjuka~ (BHS) “gerade”; vgl. BHS, Pā, Pkt. ujju < Skt. ṛju § 25.9.22B5. atha dāni ujjuko kīlako bhavati, duve trayo vā āveḍhakā dātavyāḥ § 31.6.25B5. atha khalu ujjukena (Hs. ujja°) mā<r>gakena gantavyaṃ ujjha- (Skt; < ud-√hā) ⇒ ujjhita-prakīrṇṇa~, ujjhitāvakīrṇṇa~ § 18.51.17B1. varccakuṭī na bhavati, kaṭāhena vā mallikena vā ujjhitavyaṃ § 18.52.17B2. stūpābhigṛhe vā saṃghābhigṛhe vā paśyati, ujjhitavyaṃ § 18.52.17B2. dve caṃkramante, vṛddhatarako navatarako ca, navakena ujjhitavyaṃ § 18.52.17B2. atha dāni so bhavati śaithiliko vā ... aśikṣākāmo, tadā svayaṃ ujjhitavyaṃ § 19.17.18A6. so dāni ujjhitavyo navakāntena vā yasya vā oheyyako bhavati § 19.17.18A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe ujjhituṃ § 19.25.18B3. tumbakaṃ bhavati, kalyato yeva ujjhitvā cchanne sthavitavyaṃ ... mallakaṃ bhavati, ekānte ujjhitvā dhovitvā ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.28.18B5. atha khalu ekāntena kṛtvā ujjhitavyaṃ § 19.41.19A3. atha dāni varccakuṭī na bhavati, bhājane kṛtvā ujjhitavyaṃ § 31.4.25B3. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, na dāni ujjhitvā gantavyaṃ § 40.11.33A4. tenaỿva antena prakṣālayantena ujjhitavyaṃ § 40.13.33A6. yāva tenaỿva anta{ra}kena ujjhitavyaṃ § 40.16.33A7. na dāni kṣamati jhallajhallāye ujjhituṃ § 43.15.38B3. cīvararaj<j>ūṃ na dāni ... vitanikā ujjhitvā gantavyaṃ § 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇa ... saṃkāraṃ vā ujjhituṃ ujjhita-prakīrṇṇa~# “liegengeblieben und verstreut” ⇒ ujjhitāvakīrṇṇa~, prakīrṇṇakaṃ, prakīrṇṇakasya § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ utpādakaṃ utthitakaṃ § 11.3.10B4. kasyêmaṃ bhikṣavo śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ ... ātape dinnaṃ? § 11.5.10B6. yadi tāva ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ bhavati, sāharitvā ekānte sthāpayitavyaṃ § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ (Hs. °ṇṇe) omayilemayilaṃ ... § 12.3.11B1. śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... śeyyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 15.3.14A1. śeyyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ 131  § 43.1.38A2. kim iyaṃ bhikṣavo bhāṇḍaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ tiṣṭhati? § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti śāṭakā vā paṭakā vā hārā vā arddhahārā vā hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇam vā, ... ujjhitāvakīrṇṇa~# (°ita-avak°) “liegengeblieben und verstreut” ⇒ ujjhita-prakīrṇṇa~ § 43.1.38A1. vihārakehi bhaṇḍaṃ ujjhitāvakīrṇṇe (Nom. sg. neut.) tiṣṭhati uṭṭhāṇa~ (Pkt), uṭṭhāna~ (Pā) “das Aufstehen”; vgl. Skt. utthāna § 51.1.44A1. te dāni bhikṣū piṇḍāya caramāṇo antaraghare yāva uṭṭhāṇāto nirghoṭenti § 51.1.44A1. paśyatha bhaṇe, śramaṇakāḥ yāva uṭṭhāṇāto nirghoṭenti § 51.3.44A2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati piṇḍacārikena yāva uṭṭhānāto nirghoṭayituṃ uṭṭhānaka~ “Arbeit, Aktivität”# (?) ☞ § 46.6, Anm. 1 § 46.6.40B1. etan (lies: etāni) dāni saṃghasya uṭṭhānakāni bhavanti cchādanikā vā lepanikā vā sammārjanako vā -uḍḍitaka~ ⇒ śikkuḍḍitaka~ uṇṇā~ (Pā) “Wolle, Schafwolle”; < Skt. ūrṇā § 55.2.46B3. geṇḍukaṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyo tṛṇānām vā palālānām vā leṅka<ṭa>kakhaṇḍakānām vā sūtrasya vā uṇṇāya (od. *urṇāya; Hs. ulāya) vā uṇṇī~ (Pā) “Wolldecke”; < Skt. aurṇī (“wollen”) ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 3 ⇒ urṇṇī~, oṇṇī~ § 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo (Hs. unni°) vā bisio vā caturasrakā vā omayilomayilā bhavanti pāṭitavipāṭitā, ... uta § 2.9.3A2. kim vasiṣyatha uta gamiṣyatha? utkira~ ⇒ mūṣika-utkira~ utkūla-nikūla~ ⇒ ukūla-nikūla~ ut-√kṣip “hochziehen; aufheben, heben” ⇒ ut-kṣipta~, u-kṣipta~ § 22.4.21A1. tato vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ cakkalī utkṣipitavyā § 22.4.21A2. atha khalu khaṭakhaṭāpayitavyā kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā tato paścāc cakkalī utkṣipitavyā § 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apadu{cca}ritavyaṃ cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ § 22.6.21A3. vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, yadi <tā>va prabhātaṃ bhavati, cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ upari bandhitavyā § 39.3.31A2. nâpi kṣamati ... sarvvāṇi bhaktāni utkṣipituṃ § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati ... uparimeṇa nivāsanasya snānaśāṭikāṃ utkṣipituṃ (☞ § 45.6, Anm. 3) § 62.6.50A2. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati saṃprajāna ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipiyāṇaṃ hastena vivaritvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.6.50A2. taṃ pi dāni na kṣamati yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipituṃ § 62.6.50A3. atha khalu yena navakatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipitavyaṃ § 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ § 62.6.50A3. nâyaṃ kṣamati saṃghanavakena yena saṃghasthaviro tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipituṃ § 62.8.50A4. atha khalu ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipiya vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.9.50A5. atha khalu ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipitvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.10.50A6. atha khalu ekaṃ phiccakaṃ ukṣipitvā saṃprajānan vātakarmma karttavyaṃ ut-kṣipta~, u-kṣipta~# ⇒ ut-√kṣip (1) “weggebracht” § 39.2.30B7. te<hi> dāni āraṇyakehi ... bhaktakāni sarvvāṇi ukṣiptāni § 39.2.31A1. ukkahitāni (lies: ukṣiptāni ?) bhaktāni § 39.2.31A1. kin dāni yuṣmābhiḥ sarvvāṇi bhaktakāni utkṣiptāni? § 50.1.43A3. vihārakasya dvāramūle piṇḍapātakaṃ thapiya gato. taṃ dāni apareṇa āgacchiyāṇaṃ utkṣiptaṃ (2) “erstaunt”? ☞ § 26.1, Anm. 4, 5 132  § 26.1.23A5. te dāni bhikṣū utkṣiptā bhavanti jihmā veḍḍā niṣpratibhānāḥ utkṣipta-rathyā~#, ukṣipta-rathyā~# “Nebenstraße”?; vgl. SWTF, s.v. ut-kṣipta (“entfernt”) ☞ § 18.44, Anm. 2 ⇒ tuṇḍa-rathyā~, saṃbādha-rathyā~ § 18.44.17A5. utkṣiptarathyāyāṃ kuḍyaṃ pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā uśvāso karttavyo § 19.36.19A1. atha khalu yā ukṣiptarathyā bhavati tuṇḍarathyā <vā?> tahiṅ gantavyaṃ ut-khoṭaya~# “wieder eröffnen; (einen schon entschiedenen Fall wieder zu einer neuen Verhandlung) aufnehmen lassen”; vgl. BHS. utkoṭayati, Pā. ukkoṭeti, SWTF, s.v. ut-kuṭ ☞ § 38.8, Anm. 1 ⇒ ni-kkhoḍiya- § 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi. saṃgho te uttari upaparīkṣiṣyati uttacchiya für °tthiya : § 19.33.18B6 ut-tatthapaya-# “(den Fußboden) aufgraben”; vgl. Skt. ut-tiṣṭhati, ut-thāpayati; Pā. uṭṭhapayati, °peti ☞ § 18.35, Anm. 4 ⇒ ut-tatthaya-, ut-thapaya-, ut-thāpaya-, ut-thāpīya- § 18.35.16B7. yadi tāva āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, uttatthapitavyā ut-tatthaya-# “(den Fußboden) aufgraben”; vgl. Skt. ut-tiṣṭhati, ut-thāpayati ☞ § 18.35, Anm. 4 ⇒ ut-tatthapaya-, ut-thapaya-, ut-thāpaya-, ut-thāpīya-, ut-√thā § 19.15.18A4. so pṛthivīpradeśo, yadi tāvad āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā uttatthiyāṇaṃ cchorayitavyo § 19.33.18B6. tenâpi praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa, yadi tāva āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā uttatthiya (Hs. °cchiya) cchorayitavyaṃ uttara~ “Norden” § 4.19.6A1. sarvvā diśā subhayā samākulā sa uttarā sa purastimā (vs) § 18.3.15B2. varccakuṭīṃ ... nâpi kṣamati vihārasya purastimena vā uttareṇa (Hs. uttā°) vā kārāpayituṃ § 19.3.17B5. praśvāsakuṭī ... na kṣamati vihārasya uttareṇa pūrvveṇa kārāpayituṃ uttari (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “zusätzlich” ⇒ uttareṇa § 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi. saṃgho te uttari upaparīkṣiṣyati uttareṇa “weiterhin” ⇒ uttari § 29.3.24B1. dvātriṃśac catuṣaṣṭi nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti. athôttareṇa yathânubhāvaṃ uttānaka~ (BHS, Pā) “auf dem Rücken”; vgl. Skt. uttāna § 30.1.24B6. omuddhakâpi śeyyāṃ kalpenti, uttānakâpi śeyyā kalpenti § 30.3.24B7. tena hi na kṣamati uttānakena śeyyāṃ kalpituṃ § 30.3.25A1. uttānakā bhikṣavo āsurā śeyyāṃ kalpayanti uttāreṇa für uttareṇa : § 18.3.15B2 ut-thantaka~# “aufstehend” (Partizip des Präsens mit dem Suffix ka; vgl. BHSG § 22.29) ⇒ ut- thihantaka~, ut-thitaka~ § 10.4.10A4. antevāsinā tāva kalyato yeva utthantakena (Hs. °attakena) eva{ṃ} ācāryasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ ut-thapaya- (BHS), ut-thape- (BHS; vgl. BHSG, S. 237a, s.v. sthāpaya-ti); vgl. Pā. uṭṭhapayati, °peti ⇒ ut-thāpaya-, ut-tatthaya-, ut-tatthapaya-, u-ṣṭhapaya-, thapaya-, thape-, sthapaya-, √sthā usw. (1) “errichten; aufstehen lassen” § 18.6.15B4. kuḍḍa utthapiyāṇaṃ valabhī kārayitavyā § 54.11.46A6. atha dāni bahu pracālayanti, na dāni te sarvve balīvandā viya utthapetavyā (2) “aufstehen”# (nicht-kausativ; vgl. BHSG §§ 38.58ff.) § 57.8.47B6. bhikṣuṇā yāva vṛddhatarakā nirddhāvitā paścād utthapitvā upānahāyo ābandhiya gantavyaṃ ut-√thā (Skt; i.e. ud + √sthā) ⇒ ut-thantaka~, uṭṭhāṇa~, ut-thitaka~, ut-thiha-, ut-thihantaka~, ut- thāpaya-, ut-thāpīya-, ut-thāyyaṃ, ut-thiyyaṃ, ut-the-, ut-tatthaya-, ut-tatthapaya-, u- ṣṭhapaya-, u-ṣṭhiha-, praty-ut-thā-, √sthā § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā ... na parikathāṃ karoti, utthiya gato § 4.13.5A7. na dāni saṃghasthavireṇa bhuṃjantakenaỿva utthāya āsanāto gantavyaṃ 133  § 5.11.7A2. na kṣamati ... dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ (= § 6.11.8A2) § 8.4.8B7. sārdhevihāriṇā tāva kalyata eva utthaṃtena upādhyāyasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ § 18.22.16B1. iminā āgamayitavyaṃ tāva yāva utthita iti § 18.25.16B3. atha khalu samudācāraṃ kariya utthiya cchatti gantavyaṃ § 19.11.18A3. atha khalu prasrāvaṃ kṛtvā cchatti utthitavyaṃ § 19.12.18A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇa upaviṣṭako praśvāsakṛto bhavati, utthiyāṇaṃ praśvāsakuṭīṃ gantavyaṃ § 22.6.21A2. prahāṇato yaṃ kālaṃ utthito bhavati, vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, ... § 24.9.22A6. kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā utthitvā ekānte kṛtvā punaḥ upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.22.26A6. nevāsikena utthiya pādā vanditavyā, āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 31.26.26B1. kalyato yeva utthiya nivāsiya prāvariya hastān nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 34.7.28B6. kāryaṅ kṛtvā utthāyâsanāto gantavyaṃ § 40.1.32B2. te dāni kalyato yeva ... utthiyāṇa § 40.5.32B5. tehi kalyata eva utthiya hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... § 41.31.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi utthiya gantavyaṃ § 45.2.39B4. yūyaṃ kalyata eva utthiya ... § 45.4.39B5. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyata evôtthitvā § 51.10.44A5. eṣā strī upaviṣṭikā āsati. bhikṣūn paśyiyāṇaṃ ... utthiyāṇaṃ bhūyo upaviśati, jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati.” § 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti § 56.4.47A4. nâpi kṣamati yathāsukhe kṛte utthiya niṣīdanaṃ ... prasphoṭayituṃ § 56.4.47A5. atha khalu sukhākaṃ utthitvā dviguṇīkṛtvā skandhe kṛtvā ca gantavyaṃ § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya antaraghare vā upaviṣṭasya puno puno vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, utthiya gantavyaṃ utthāna-saṃjñā~ (SWTF) “die Absicht aufzustehen” § 30.7.25A4. siṃhaśeyyā kalpayitavyā ... utthānasaṃjñāṃ (Hs. °jñī) manasikārentena ut-thāpaya- (BHS [BHSG, S. 237a, s.v. sthāpaya-ti]) “instand halten; aufstellen; aufwecken”; vgl. Pā. uṭṭhapeti ⇒ ut-thāpīya-, ut-thapaya-, ut-tatthaya-, ut-tatthapaya-, ut-√thā, u-ṣṭhapaya-, √sthā usw. § 12.14.12A2. {grīṣme śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ, utthiyyaṃ utthāpayi<ta>vyaṃ (Hs. °payiṣyaṃ)} § 12.17.12A4~5. hemante śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ, utthiyyaṃ (Hs. °iṣyaṃ) utthāpayi<ta>vyaṃ (Hs. °payiṣyaṃ). varṣāsu śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ, utthāyyaṃ utthāpayitavyaṃ § 17.11.15A6. bisī sīvayitavyā, caturasrā vāpayitavyā, naṃgalāni utthāpayitavyāni § 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti § 54.9.46A6. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava yaṣṭi prāpuṇati. vārehi.” tena vāretavyaṃ, iminā upaviśitavyaṃ § 54.12.46A7. atha khalu acchaṭikāye utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya, tava yaṣṭī prāpuṇati.” § 55.5.46B6. atha khalu bhūyo geṇḍukam āsthapayitvā acchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo § 55.6.46B7. <duve vā> trayo vā vārā geṇḍukaṃ purato ābhāsayitvâcchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo utthāpitakā für dutth° : § 16.9.14B3 ut-thāpīya-# “zugeteilt werden; bereitgestellt werden” ☞ § 8.13, Anm. 5 ⇒ ut-thāpaya- usw. § 8.13.9B3. yāvan na utthāpīyati, sā evam e<va> āpṛcchanikā. atha dāni utthāpīyati, yattikāṃ vārāṃ āpṛcchitavyaṃ ut-thāyyaṃ# “energisch” (?); vgl. CPD, s.v. uṭṭhāya “energetically, actively, with zest” ☞ § 12.17, Anm. 1 ⇒ ut-thiyyaṃ, ut-√thā § 12.17.12A4. varṣāsu śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ, guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ utthāyyaṃ (Hs. °āsyaṃ) utthāpayitavyaṃ 134 ut-thitaka~ “aufgerichtet”; < utthita + Suffix ka ⇒ ut-thantaka~, du-tthitaka~, du-tthita~ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ utpādakaṃ utthitakaṃ § 11.5.10B5. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ utpādakam vā utthitakam vā § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ondriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ utthitakāṃ (Hs. ucchi°) ... (≒ § 13.2. 12A7, § 16.2.14A6) § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā paluggakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} vātātapena opūriyantā{ṃ} § 13.3.12A7. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} paluggakā{ṃ} utpādakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} ... § 13.11.12B4. utthitakā (lies: dutthitakā?) bhavanti, sutthitā thapetavyā § 13.13.12B5. pādakā utthitakā (lies: dutthitakā?) bhavanti, suthapitā karttavyāḥ § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... mañcā ca pīṭhā ca uddriṇṇakā praluggakā uppādakā utthitakā ... (≒ § 17.2.14B6) § 15.3.14A1. mañcā ca pīṭhā ca oddriṇṇakā paluggakā uppādakā utthitakā (≒ § 16.3, § 17.3.14B6) utthitakā für dutthitakā? : § 13.11.12B4, § 13.13.12B5 utthipitvā für *utthihitvā? : § 29.4.24B2 *ut-thiyyaṃ “energisch” (?); < *ut-theyaṃ?; vgl. CPD, s.v. uṭṭhāya “energetically, actively, with zest” ☞ § 12.17, Anm. 1 ⇒ ut-thāyyaṃ, ut-√thā § 12.14.12A2. {grīṣme śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ utthiyyaṃ (Hs. °iṣyaṃ) utthāpayi<ta>vyaṃ (Hs. °payiṣyaṃ)} § 12.17.12A4. guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ utthiyyaṃ (Hs. °iṣyaṃ) utthāpayi<ta>vyaṃ ... guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ utthāyyaṃ (Hs. °āsyaṃ) utthāpayitavyaṃ ut-thiha- (BHS) “aufstehen” ⇒ ut-thihantaka~, ut-the-, ut-thāpaya-, ut-tatthaya-, ut-tatthapaya-, ut- √thā, u-ṣṭhiha-, u-ṣṭhapaya-, √sthā § 4.2.4A7. nâpi dāyakadānapatiṃ dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayati ... saṃpraharṣayati, utthihi (Absolutiv; vgl. BHSG §§ 35.49f.) gato § 4.13.5A6. nâpi kṣamati ... dvāraṃ paśyiya layyalayāye bhuṃjiyāṇa utthihiya gantuṃ § 18.50.17B1. atha khalu utthihitavyaṃ ca nivāsanaṃ osaritavyaṃ § 29.4.24B2. utthipitvā (vermutlich für *utthihitvā) vā ekānte caṃkramitavyaṃ § 31.18.26A2. nâpi dāni vaktavyaṃ “ko itthaṃ? kativarṣo? utthiha!” § 39.2.30B7. aparejjukāto kalyato yeva utthihiya § 53.17.45B6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ sahasā dīpakaṃ praveśayituṃ “mā navakā bhikṣu sahasā viprakaṭa utthiheṃsu (Hs. °haṃsna)” tti ut-thihantaka~# “aufstehend” (Partizip des Präsens mit dem Suffix ka; vgl. BHSG § 22.29) ⇒ ut- thantaka~ § 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati aparejjukāto kalyato utthihantakenaỿva bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ ut-the- (BHS [BHSG, S. 236b [2]) “aufstehen”; vgl. Pā. uṭṭheti ⇒ ut-√thā, ut-thiha- § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti. yadi tāva tantuka nikṣipiyāṇaṃ uttheti, jānitavyaṃ “dāhiti eṣā” tti § 51.10.44A5. eṣā strī upaviṣṭikā āsati. bhikṣūn paśyiyāṇaṃ uttheti, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” tti § 55.5.46B6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava geṇḍuko prāpuṇati. utthehi (BHSG, S. 236b [nur Mvu]) vārehi (Hs. cār°)” tti utpatti~ ⇒ arthotpatti~ ut-padya- “entstehen” ⇒ ut-pādaya- § 8.11.9A7. yadi so bhavati śaithaliko vā ... vaktavyaṃ “mâśrayo utpadyeyā” § 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi (Loc. pl.) tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6) utpāta-gaṇḍa-piṭaka~# “an Geschwülsten (?), Beulen oder Pusteln leidend” ☞ § 42.3, Anm. 6 § 42.3.36A5. utpātagaṇḍapiṭakānāṃ vātapittaśleṣmikānāṃ phāsu bhaviṣyati ut-pādaka~ “auf dem Kopf stehend”# ☞ § 11.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ up-pādaka~ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ utpādakaṃ utthitakaṃ § 11.5.10B5. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ utpādakam vā 135  utthitakam vā ... § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) utpādakaṃ bhavati, sam<aṃ th>āpetavyaṃ § 13.3.12A7. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} paluggakā{ṃ} utpādakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} ... ut-pādaya- “entstehen lassen, hervorbringen” ⇒ ut-padya- § 42.31.37B7. mā ādīnavam utpādaye § 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā (Hs. °eṣyā) § 53.10.45B1. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ no karenti” tti § 54.16.46B2. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinivaraṇaṃ me karentî”ti ut-pīḍita~ “bedrängt”# ⇒ up-pīḍita~, up-pīḍaya-, up-pīlita~ § 18.21.16B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā kṣamayituṃ, yāva uśvāsena utpīḍito tti § 18.29.16B4. atha dāni bhikṣū utpīḍito bhavati, nâpi kṣamati ... gacchituṃ § 18.33.16B6. atha dāni sahasā utpīḍito bhavati, ... utsaṅga~ “Schoß” § 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena kalācīyaṃ vāmāyaṃ aṃsivaddhakaṃ prakṣipitvā samavasthāya upaviṣṭakena utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ ut-saha- “können, vermögen” ⇒ uc-chaha-, uc-chāhe- § 14.3.13A3. yo pratibalo vastuṃ, yadi utsahanti, teṣāṃ āhāreṇa upastambhaṃ karttavyaṃ utsṛṣṭa-gṛha~# “Haus für ausgesetzte Leute”? oder “verlassenes Haus”? ☞ § 18.42, Anm. 1 ⇒ nisṛṣṭa-gṛha~, śūnya-ghara~, śūnyāgāra-gāta~ § 18.42.17A4. nīlamañco na bhavati, utsṛṣṭagṛhaṃ gantavyaṃ uthattitavyaṃ für uvvatti° : § 18.47.17A7 ud / udd : Uddāna (III).25A6. udānaṃ für uddānaṃ § 51.4.44A2. udeśe für uddeśe udaka~ ⇒ agrodaka~, āsaṃnodaka~, uṣṇodaka~, uṣṇodaka-karaka~, odaka, kṣīrodakī-bhūta~, gandhodaka, pātrodaka~, pādodaka, mukhodaka, varṣā-udaka~, hastodaka~ § 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ ... acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ udakasya pūrāṃ § 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ... acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā udakasya pūrā{ṃ} § 17.6.15A2. anyehi lippitavyaṃ, anyehi majjitavyaṃ, anyehi udakaṃ pariharitavyaṃ § 17.8.15A3. anyehi mṛttikā marddetavyā, anyehi udakaḥ pariharitavyaḥ § 17.9.15A4. anyair udakaṃ pariharttavyaḥ, anyehi adhvāpayitavyaṃ § 17.10.15A5. anyehi udakaṃ pariharttavyaṃ, anyehi kṣāraṃ ānayitavyaṃ § 18.7.15B6. varccakumbhikāye purato kalpiyakaraki sthāpayitavyā udakasya pūrṇṇa § 18.35.16B7. kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, udakena dhovitavyā § 18.40.17A3. karakena vā dakānakena vā udakaṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 18.50.17B1. na kṣamati ... aṅgajātaṃ gṛhṇiya draviḍena yathā udakasamīpa<ṃ> gantuṃ § 18.53.17B3. (parakerako uccāro) ... udakena accāviya (für *alloḍiya < āloḍiya?) ghanena narttakena parisrāviya, ... § 40.9.33A2. tasya udakena kāryam bhavati § 40.9.33A2. na kṣamati gotrasthaṃ udakaṃ dātuṃ § 40.9.33A3. atha khalu pāridhovanīyaṃ udakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 40.16.33B1. udakañ ca āvilaṃ bhavati § 41.1.33B3. sarvvaṃ udakaṃ cchoriya § 41.1.33B3. udake pi khalu mātrā § 41.2.33B5. udakaṃ cchoriya § 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā § 41.7.34A3. dakṣiṇena hastena udakaṃ āsiñcati § 41.9.34A5. upānahikāyo nikṣipiya dakānakāto vāmāye kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjayitvā ... § 41.9.34A5. kalācīya udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhotā § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... bhājanaṃ sudhotaṃ kṛtvā udakasya pūriya ... § 41.22.35A6. dakāna<kāto ’da>kaṃ kalācīyaṃ āvarjetvā (Hs. av°) ... § 41.23.35A7. dakṣiṇahastena udakaṃ āsiṃcitavyaṃ § 41.24.35B1. kuṇḍikāto vā karakato vā kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya ... § 41.24.35B1. kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhovitavyā 136  § 41.25.35B2. udakaṃ cchoriya § 41.27.35B3. dakṣiṇena hastena udakaṃ āsiñcitavyaṃ § 41.27.35B4. vāmena hastena udakaṃ āsiñcitavyaṃ § 41.27.35B4. nâpi dāni kṣamati tenaỿva hastena udakaṃ āsiñcituṃ § 41.29.35B6. yadi tahiṃ koci bhikṣu bhavati navatarako, so vaktavyo “udakaṃ āsiñcihi” tti § 42.2.36A3. sarvvaṃ udakaṃ cchoriya § 42.3.36A4. udakaṃ na labhanti § 42.3.36A6. te dāni uṣṇena ca santāpitāḥ bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārgganti, na labhanti § 42.3.36A6. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā (= § 42.4.36A7) § 42.4.36A7. bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārggayanti na labhanti § 42.12.36B5. udakaṃ āharttavyaṃ § 42.19.37A3. udakaṃ praveśayitvā § 42.21.37A5. udakasya pratyayo (lies: pratya<ṃ>śo?) jānitavyo “kathaṃ dīyati” § 42.21.37A6. yo pratibalo bhavati udakaṃ upasthāpetuṃ, ... § 42.21.37A6. vayam udakam upasthāpayiṣyāmi § 42.21.37A7. vayaṃ udakaṃ dāsyāmaḥ § 42.22.37A7. udakasya (lies: uda<kena> kakṣa?) praticchannaṃ bhavati § 42.22.37A7. nābhimātraṃ vā udakaṃ § 42.22.37A7. jānumātraṃ udakaṃ bhavati § 42.26.37B4. tailaṃ bhaviṣyati, cūrṇṇaṃ bhaviṣyati, udakaṃ bhaviṣyati. <s>nāyaṃtu āyuṣmanto § 42.27.37B4. tehi jentāko prajvalitavyo ... udakaṃ tāpayitavyaṃ § 42.28.37B5. yadi tāva alpaṃ tailaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ bhavati, mitakaṃ dātavyaṃ, tailaṃ saṃcayitavyaṃ, udakaṃ bhāvayitavyaṃ § 47.5.40B7. atha dāni udakaṃ na bhavati, ... usw. udaka-kṛtya~# “Waschung”; vgl. Pā. udaka-kicca, Skt. udaka-kārya ☞ § 18.12, Anm. 2 § 18.12.16A1. udakakṛtyaṃ karentena na dāni jjhallajjhalāye udakaṃ <siṃ>cetavyaṃ § 18.19.16A6. nâpi ... kṣamati akṛtvā udakakṛtyaṃ sāṃghikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ paribhuñjituṃ § 18.40.17A3. uśvāsaṃ kariya udakakṛtyaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ § 25.17.23A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... udakakṛtyaṃ vā karttuṃ (☞ § 25.17, Anm. 4) udakatama~ für udakabhrama~ : § 42.19.37A4 udaka-dakānaka~# “Wassereimer” ⇒ dakānaka~ § 18.42.17A4. yadi tāvad āha “ṛkto”, udakadakānakaṃ (Hs. °nakā) ādāya praveṣṭavyaṃ § 41.22.35A6. pādopadhānakaṃ udakad<ak>āna<ka>ṃ pi ca uṣṭhapayitvā udakadānaṃ für udakadakānakaṃ : § 41.22.35A6 udaka-doṣa~# “Überschwemmung” ⇒ hima-doṣa~ § 14.15.13B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ udakadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na saṃvasati, ... udaka-bhaya~ (Pā) “Gefahr durch Wasser” § 39.8.31A5. anekāye āraṇyakānāṃ co<ra>bhayaṃ vā bhaveya udakabhayaṃ vā siṃhabhayaṃ vā vyāghrabhayaṃ vā udaka-bhrama~ (BHS) “Abwasserkanal” ☞ § 13.2, Anm. 2 ⇒ pranāḍikā-bhrama~, praṇāli- bhrama~ § 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ ... udakasya pūrāṃ, udakabhramām aśodhi<ta>kāṃ § 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ... udakasya pūrā{ṃ} udakabhramā aśodhitakā § 13.9.12B3. udakabhramā vā praṇālibhramā vā paripūritā bhavanti, śodhayitavyāḥ § 13.14.12B6. udakabhramāḥ pranāḍikābhramā vā kālena kālaṃ śodhitavyāḥ § 19.3.17B6. udakabhramaṇasya vā upari karttavyā upalasya vā iṣṭakāya vā upari § 19.4.17B6. udakabhramaṇasya upari thapetavyā sudhāya samaṃtena lipitavyā § 42.19.37A4. udakaṃ praveśayitvā udakabhramaṃ (Hs. udakatamaṃ) bandhitvā dvāraṃ pihitvā ... udakāntika~# (udaka-ant°) “mit Wasserspülung versehen”; vgl. DP, s.v. odakantika1 (“ending with water; concluding with an ablution”) ☞ § 18.4, Anm. 5 137  § 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) yadi vā khāniyā udakāntikā bhavati, prathamaṃ kalpiya- kāreṇa ohayiyāpetavyā udara~ ⇒ aṅguṣṭhodara~ udāna~ (BHS) § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ ... gāthā udānaṃ itivṛttakaṃ ... udānaṃ für uddānaṃ : Uddāna (III).25A6 udāra~ § 11.1.10B3. te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā atīva udārāṇi prītiprāmodyāni pratilabhiṣyanti (≒ § 12.1.11A6) ud-√īkṣ § 4.20.6A3. kruddhaprasannānāṃ mukhaṃ udīkṣiyaṃ (vs) udu-pāna~ (BHS) “Brunnen(haus)” § 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 12.10.11B5. varccakuṭī udupāno jantāko caṃkramā vṛkṣamūlā vihārakā grāhayitavyā udupāna-kūla~# “Rand eines Brunnens” § 52.9.44B7. nadīkūle vā udupānakūle (Hs. °kule) vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā āhāraṃ kṛtvā pātraṃ nirmmādayitvā āgacchati, anāpattiḥ udeśe für uddeśe : § 51.4.44A2 udgamana~ ⇒ sūryodgamana~ uddāna~ (BHS, SWTF) “Zusammenfassung” ⇒ antaroddāna~ Uddāna (I).10A7. uddānaṃ (= Uddāna [II].20A5, Uddāna [IV].30B4, Uddāna [V].39B2, Uddāna [VI].45A1, Uddāna [VII].50B1) Uddāna (III).25A6. ud<d>ānaṃ uddiṇṇaka~#, uddriṇṇaka~# “zerspalten”; < ud-dīrṇa~ (p. pt. von ud-√d) + Suffix ka ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 2 ⇒ oddiṇṇaka~, oddirṇṇaka~, oddriṇṇaka~, odriṇṇaka~, ondriṇṇaka~ § 12.5.11B2. ye vihārakā uddiṇṇakā paluggakā bhavanti, acokṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā bhavanti § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... mañcā ca pīṭhā ca uddriṇṇakā praluggakā uppādakā utthitakā ... ud-√diś (1) “rezitieren” (vgl. SWTF, s.v. 2) ⇒ ud-deśaya- § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ... ko prātimokṣasūtraṃ uddiśiṣyati, ko dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśiṣyati, ko parikathāṃ kariṣyati (≒ § 2.7.2B6, § 3.8.3B6) § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ prātimokṣasūtram uddiśesi (Hs. °eṣi)” § 1.12.2A5. vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ uddiśitavyaṃ (= § 3.11.4A3) § 1.12.2A6. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikāṃ dharmmāṃ uddiśiyānaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa- śrutikāye gāthāye ca § 2.10.3A3. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikā uddiśitavyaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāyo ca § 3.8.3B7. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati so adhyeṣitavyo: ... “tvaṃ prātimokṣaṃ uddiśesi” § 7.6.8B3. atha dāni na pratibalo bhavati uddiśituṃ, āpattikauśalyaṃ śikṣitavyo ... § 7.7.8B5. upādhyāyo śraddhevihāri upasaṃpādiya na ovadati, na anuśāsati, na uddiśati § 8.5.8B7~9A1. uddiśitvā pratipṛcchitvā kheṭakaṭāhako nikkālayitavyo ... § 8.12.9B2. sukhaṃ pratikramāpayitavyaṃ, uddiśitvā vā paripṛcchitvā vā § 32.7.27B3. <na kṣamati> andhakāre vā, uddeśaṃ dentasya <vā>, uddiśantasya vā, ... (2) “anerkennen als (jmd als spirituellen Lehrer); ernennen, einsetzen” (vgl. SWTF, s.v. 1) § 12.1.11A6. ye ca te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ tathāgatam evôddiśya āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ § 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo § 43.3.38A3. etaṃ dāni saṃghasya anugraho bhavati, nityapacanā vā uddiśitavyā, māsavāriko vā daśāhavāriko vā tatra uddiśitavyo paṃcāhavāriko vā § 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā, eko vā dvayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti, navakānto (Hs. °kāntena) vā paṭipāṭikāye vā yasya vā prāpuṇati 138  (3) “zuteilen, zuweisen” ⇒ ud-diṣṭaka~ § 4.7.4B5. bhaktāni bhavanti, bhaktāni uddiśitavyāni (= § 5.7.6B4) § 6.7.7B5. anugraho na bhavati, bhaktakāni bhavanti, bhaktakāni uddiśitavyāni § 12.12.11B7~12A1. atha dāni saṃghasthaviro jalpati “vihāraṃ yūyaṃ uddiśatha, varṣā- vāsikaṃ samaṃ kariṣyāma” tti ... tato vihārakā uddiśitavyāḥ § 12.13.12A1. na kṣamati śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ vihāra uddiśituṃ. atha dāni teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā jalpanti “uddiśatha yūyaṃ eteṣāṃ. ...” tti, tato śrāmaṇerakāṇāṃ pi vihārakā uddiśitavyā § 12.14.12A2. {grīṣme śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ...} § 12.14.12A2. na eṣo tava kiñcit bhogārthaṃ vadiṣanti (für uddiśīyati?). pratisaṃskāraṇā- rthaṃ eṣo ca{ṃ} uddiśīyati (Passiv; vgl. BHSG §§ 37.2f.) § 12.15.12A2~3. atha dāni stokā vihārakā bhavanti, dviṇṇāṃ trayāṇāṃ janānāṃ eko vihārako uddiśitavyo ... eko vihārako uddiśitavyo § 12.17.12A4. hemante śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ... varṣāsu śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ... § 15.5.14A2. mañcaṃ pīṭhaṃ pi caturasrakaṃ kurccaṃ bi<ṃ>bohanaṃ uddiṣṭaṃ bhavati § 18.8.15B6. tāni kuṇḍakāni vā kaṭāhakāni vā ... atha khalu uddiśitavyaṃ § 31.27.26B2. atha dāni <na> bhavati, āgantukānāṃ {piṇḍakānāṃ} piṇḍabhaktāni uddiśitavyāni § 31.30.26B5. atha dāni bhaktakāni bhavanti, āgantukānāṃ piṇḍabhaktakāni uddiśitavyāni § 31.27.26B2. atha dāni bhaktakāni <bhavanti, bhaktakāni> uddiśitavyāni § 31.29.26B4. vihārako uddiśitavyo, mañcapīṭhaṃ bisī catu<ra>śrakaṃ kuccakaṃ bimbohanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāvad vastukāmo bhavati, ... vihārako uddiśitavyo uddiṣṭaka~# “zugewiesen”; Skt. uddiṣṭa + Suffix ka ⇒ ud-√diś (3) § 14.12.13B2. tāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā. ... uddiṣṭakā (Hs. °ako) dani (Hs. nāśo) yasya (Hs. yosya) bhavati, tena pratisaṃskarttavyā § 14.13.13B2. atha dāni naỿva sasvāmiko bhavati, nâpi uddiṣṭako, sarvvasaṃghena prati- saṃskarttavyo § 15.5.14A2. etā dāni bhikṣū āgantukā bhavanti, vihārako uddiṣṭako bhavati § 19.5.17B6. (das Pissoir) tailena mrakṣayitavyā navakāntena vā uddiṣṭakena vā paṭipāṭi- kāye{na} vā yasya vā prāpuṇeti uddīpito für uppīḍito : § 18.20.16A7 uddeśa~ (1) “Rezitation; Unterweisung” ⇒ ekoddeśaka~, madhyuddeśa-pāṭhaka~, sūtroddeśaka~ § 8.10.9A6. uddeśaṃ gṛhṇiya ekamante svādhyāyatena āsitavyaṃ § 18.25.16B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati varcakuṭīyaṃ upaviṣṭena dhyānāntaragatena vā middhāntaragatena vā uddeśaṃ vā svādhyāyam vā manasikarentena āsituṃ § 32.7.27B3. <na kṣamati> andhakāre vā, uddeśaṃ dentasya (☞ § 32.7, Anm. 3) <vā>, uddiśantasya vā, ... (2) “Erwähnung; Name” ⇒ soddeśam (3) “Verteilung” ⇒ bhaktuddeśa~, śayyāsanoddeśa~ (4) “Andeuten”# ☞ § 51.4, Anm. 1 § 51.4.44A2. nâpi <kṣamati> adarśanapathe sthātuṃ. atha khalu ud<d>eśe sthātavyaṃ darśanaśravaṇapathe § 51.5.44A2. nêdāni vaktavyaṃ “piṇḍapātaṃ mahāpuṇye dehi.” atha khalu tūṣṇīkena uddeśe sthātavyaṃ uddeśaka~ ⇒ ekoddeśaka~, sūtroddeśaka~ uddeśa-prayukta~# “sich in der Rezitation übend” § 30.6.25A3. rātrīye purimaṃ yāmaṃ uddeśaprayuktena svādhyāyaprayuktena sthānena caṃkrameṇa vītināmayitavyaṃ § 30.8.25A5. rātrīye paścime yāme paryaṅkena vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktena sthānacaṃkramānuyuktena vā § 39.16.31B4. tatraỿva sthānacaṃkramaniṣadyāyogam anuyuktehi viharitavyaṃ uddeśa- 139  prayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā § 39.28.32A6. ārāmehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi ... sthānacaṃkrama-niṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā § 41.31.35B7. uddeśaprayuktena vā manasikāraprayuktena vā middhāntaragatena vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ cinta<ya>ntena āsituṃ ud-deśaya~ “rezitieren”# Vgl. SWTF, s.v. ud-diś, 2a; CPD, s.v. uddisati, 4c; DP, s.v. uddisati, 2 ⇒ ud-√diś (1) § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa no ca dakṣiṇām ādiśati ... ud-dhata~ ⇒ an-uddhata~ uddhā~ ⇒ ḍaddhā~ *ud-dhāpaya- “aufwirbeln”; ∈ *ud-dhāvaya-, Kausativ von Skt. ud-√dhū (“aufrütteln, aufschütteln”) ☞ § 23.4.4, Anm. 1 ⇒ dhuna-, nir-ddhāpa- § 23.4.4.21B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati ekenântena. atha khalu samantena caṃkramitavyaṃ, na paṃtholi<ṃ> uddhāpayantena (Hs. ḍaddhā°) ud-dhāraka~ (BHS) “das Wegnehmen, Wegräumen, Entfernen (von Möbeln)”# ☞ § 45.6, Anm. 1 § 45.6.39B7. te bhikṣū uddhārakaṃ karttukāmā bhavanti ... ud-√dhṛ § 20.19.20A5. atha dāni dve janā bhavanti yo navako bhavati tena uddhṛtavyo. atha dāni navako śaithiliko bāhuliko bhavati, vṛddhatareṇa uddhṛtavyo ud-baha-# oder ud-vaha-# “widersetzen”; < ud + Skt. √bādh (“bedrängen, plagen”; Pā. bāheti, Pkt. bāhai, vāhai) × Skt. √vadh bzw. √badh (“schlagen, töten”; Pkt. vahai bzw. BHS. vahati) ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 1 ⇒ prati-bāha-, prati-bāhe-, √bādh, vy-ā-bha-, vy-ā-vha- § 14.4.13A3. atha dāni udbahanti, āha “kiṃ vayaṃ parityaktāḥ?” “kissa vayaṃ vasāmaḥ?” ud-yojaya- (BHS, SWTF) “entlassen; (zum Gehen) ermuntern”; vgl. Pā. § 1.11.2A4. dāyakadānapati ... dhārmmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyāḥ, samādāpayitavyāḥ, samuttejayitavyāḥ, saṃpraharṣayitavyāḥ, udyojayitavyāḥ § 1.13.2A7. dāyakadānapati dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyā samādāpayitavyā samuttejayitavyā saṃpraharṣayitavyā udyojayitavyā (≒ § 3.12.4A4) § 2.9.3A2. dhārmyā kathayā saṃdarśiya samādāpiya samuttejiya sampraharṣayitvā udyojayitavyā (= § 3.10.4A2; ≒ § 2.11.3A5) udranti ⇒ dranti für “ḍu ḍu” tti? : § 47.8.41A2 ud-vartta- “ausgehen, weggehen; abwenden” ⇒ uv-vatta-, uv-vattaya- § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati, hastena vivaritvā mārggato udvarttitvā saṃprajānaṃ karttavyaṃ ud-varttaya- “salben, bestreichen”; vgl. BHSD, udvartayati (Mvu); Pā. ubbaṭṭeti § 18.31.16B6. so pṛthivīpradeśo gomayena udvarttitavyo (Hs. °vyaṃ) § 18.35.16B7. (uśvāsaṃ ...) cchoḍiyāṇa so pṛthivīpradeśo gomayena udvarttayitavyo ud-vaha- ⇒ ud-baha- udviddha-vīthī~# “erhöhter Weg” (?) § 42.7.36B2. jentākaṃ karentena ... udviddhavīthī karttavyā udvedha~ (BHS) § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... udvedho nirmuṣṭikā trayo hastā karttavyā vistāreṇa nimuṣṭikā vā unnaḍa~ ⇒ an-unnaḍa~ un-nada- “brüllen” § 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ unniyo für uṇṇiyo: § 14.14.13B3 un-√nī “heranziehen, großziehen” (vgl. BHSD, s.v. unnayati) § 20.1.19A5. so dāni taṃ unneti va<r>ddheti ghaṭasiktakaṃ ekaputrakaṃ viya § 20.2.19A6. so dāni tena unnīto varddhito ghaṭasiktako ekaputrako viya § 41.12.34B2. so dāni mātāpitṛbhir unnīyati varddhīyati up / upp : § 17.12.15A6. upādakā für uppā° 140  § 50.7.43B2. uppakkaṭo wohl für upakaṭṭho § 50.7.43B3. upakkhaṭo für upakaṭṭho upaṃsulaka~ ⇒ uppaṃsulaka~ upaka~ ⇒ nagara-kulopaka~ upa-kaṭṭha~ (Pā) “(die Zeit) naht heran”; < Skt. upa-kṛṣṭa; vgl. DP, s.v. upakaṭṭha (“drawing near [esp. of time]”). § 50.7.43B2. yadi upakaṭṭho (Hs. uppakkaṭo) kālo bhavati, na dāni tena bhuñjantena āsitavyaṃ § 50.7.43B3. atha paśyati “upakaṭṭho (Hs. upakkhaṭo) kālo antāntiko, na śakyaṃ sakāle saṃbhāvayituṃ. mā dāni ubhaye cchinnabhaktā bhaviṣyāma”, tena paribhuñjitavyaṃ upakaraṇa~ ⇒ vittopakaraṇa~ upakkhaṭo für upakaṭṭho : § 50.7.43B3 upakvapāṃsukena für apakva° : § 13.8.12B2 upaga~ ⇒ puṇya-pāpa-phalopaga~ upagacchanikā-kāla~# “die Zeit des Eintretens (in die Regenzeit)”; vgl. Pā. vassaṃ upagacchati (“tritt in die Regenzeit ein”) ☞ § 12.1, Anm. 1 § 12.1.11A4. te dāni bhikṣū upagacchanikākāle vihārān na pratisaṃskarenti upa-gata~ ⇒ upa-√gam, puṣpopagata~, varṣopagata~ upa-√gam ⇒ puṣpopagata~, varṣopagata~ § 12.3.11B1. ye varṣāṃ upagacchiṣyanti, te pratisaṃskariṣyanti § 31.7.25B5. sāye vāsôpagatā (< vāsa upa° < vāsaṃ upa°) bhavanti, taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā upa-grāya-# “rülpsen”; vgl. ud-2√g (“ausspeien”), upa-2√g (“einschlucken” [PW]) ☞ § 4.13, Anm. 4 ⇒ u-grāya- § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ yadā navakāḥ santarpitā bhavanti, upagrāyanti pānīyaṃ vā pibanti ... upacāra~ ⇒ darśanopacāra~ upa-cīrṇṇa~ § 41.10.34A6. yathâpi imaṃ bhavatā Śāriputreṇa dakānakaṃ upacīrṇṇaṃ upa-thapaya- ⇒ upa-sthapaya-, upa-sthāpaya-, upa-sthāpe-, √sthā § 18.51.17B1. evaṃ na bhavati, antamasato svakā aṅguli upathapitavyā (Hs. upathayi°) upathayitavyā für upathapi° : § 18.51.17B1 upa-daha- (Pā) “besorgen”; < Skt. upadadhāti; BHSG, S. 217a, (3) *daha-ti § 31.7.25B5. saṃghasya phāsuvihāraṃ upadahatha pādatailena guḍapānīyena pratiśrayeṇa purebhaktikena upadrava~ ☞ § 4.6, Anm. 3 § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi ... mṛtakam vā bhaveya, sandhi vā cchinno, agnidāho vā rājakulāto vā upadravo upadhāna~ ⇒ bhaktopadhāna~ upadhānaka~ ⇒ pādopadhānaka~ Upanandana~ ⇒ NandanOpanandanā~ § 1.1.1B1. āyuṣmāṃ Nandano saṃghasthaviro. Upanandano dvitīyasthaviro (= § 2.1.2B1, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4) § 49.1.41B6. āyuṣmanto Nandanasya Upanandano nāma bhrātā et passim upa-nāmaya- (BHS) “übergeben, überreichen; legen, stellen” ⇒ upa-nāme- § 8.5.9A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ dhoviya upanāmayitavyaṃ. mukhodakam āsiñcitavyaṃ § 8.6.9A2. gocaraṃ praviśantasya grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni, pādodakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ § 8.7.9A4. yadi piṇḍacāro aṇṭhito bhavati, upanāmayitavyo § 8.8.9A5. piṇḍapāto ukkaḍhitavyo piṇḍapāta upanāmayitavyo § 8.12.9B2. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, prasrāvakumbham upanāmayitavyaṃ § 10.5.10A5. pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādā dhovayitavyā 141  § 41.6.34A3. pādataṭṭhakaṃ (Hs. °taddhakaṃ) upanāmayitvā upānahikāyo upanāmiya upānahāpocchan{n}o upanāmiya pādāṃ dhovati § 50.7.43B3. gacchitvā tasya upanāmetavyaṃ upa-nāme- (BHS, Pā) “übergeben, überreichen” ⇒ upa-nāmaya- § 40.16.33B1. mātrāye upanāmetavyaṃ upanāyika~ ⇒ varṣopanāyika~ upanāhāhi für upānahāhi : § 41.1.33B3 upa-ni-√dhā § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati ... dakṣiṇāṃ bāhaṃ śirasy upanidhāya, ... § 30.7.25A4. dakṣiṇāṃ bāhāṃ śirasy upanidhāya, vāmāṃ bāhāṃ anukāyaṃ prasāritvā ... upa-ni-mantraya- “einladen” ⇒ ni-mantraya-, ni-mantre- § 39.22.32A1. eṣo dāni koci āraṇyakānāṃ bhaktenôpanimantrayati, vaktavyaṃ “grāmāntikānām api nimantrehî”ti upa-ne- (Pā) “gebrauchen, benützen”# ☞ § 42.3, Anm. 8 § 42.3.36A6. stokastokaṃ āyuṣman mātrāye upanetha. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā § 42.4.36A7. stokaṃ stokaṃ āyuṣman mātrāye upanetha. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā § 42.20.37A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cūrṇṇaṃ rāśīya upanetuṃ § 42.20.37A5. yāvadarthaṃ bhadantā upaneṃtu (Hs. upanetuṃ) § 42.20.37A5. evaṃ pi kṛtvā mātrāye upanetavyaṃ (= § 42.21.37A6) § 42.21.37A7. mātrāye upanetavyaṃ § 42.21.37A7. kiñ câpi yāvadarthaṃ upanenti, anāpattiḥ upa-parīkṣa- (BHS, SWTF) (°pari-√īkṣ) “prüfen, untersuchen”; vgl. Pā. upa-parikkhati ☞ § 38.8, Anm. 2 § 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi. saṃgho te uttari upaparīkṣiṣyati upa-makṣita~# “beschmiert”; < Skt. upa + mrakṣita ⇒ makṣita-parimakṣita~, √mrakṣ § 43.15.38B3. upamakṣitaṃ vā raṃga-rañjitaṃ (Hs. °-rakṣitaṃ) vā ... upa-yojaya- § 42.2.36A3. sarvvaṃ tailaṃ upayojiya, sarvvaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ upayojiya, sarvvaṃ udakaṃ cchoriya ... jentākaṃ apaduriya nirddhāvitāḥ upari § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) upari iṣṭāhi mṛttikāya ca cchādayitavyā{ni}i § 19.3.17B6. udakabhramaṇasya vā upari karttavyā upalasya vā iṣṭakāya vā upari § 19.4.17B6. udakabhramaṇasya upari thapetavyā sudhāya samaṃtena lipitavyā § 19.16.18A5. praśvāsaghaṭo sthāpayitavyo tasyôpari cchidramallakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 19.22.18B2. ghaṭasyôpari cchidramallakaṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.22.18B2. cchidramallakasyôpari kuntako vā alābutumbuko vā thapayitavyo § 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo, yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso gaccheyā § 21.9.20B5. atha dāni kaṭhinaṃ na bhavati, mañcasya vā upari cīvaraṃ pīṭhasya vā upari cīvarakaṃ kariyāṇaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 21.9.20B6. antamasato jānukānāṃ pi upari cīvarakaṃ thaviya sīvayitavyaṃ § 22.2.20B7. vihārasya dvārasmiṃ upari trayo kīlakāni ā<ko>ṭayitavyā § 22.6.21A3. yadi <tā>va prabhātaṃ bhavati, cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ upari bandhitavyā § 23.4.1.21A7. maṃcā vā pīṭhā vā ... praveśiyāṇaṃ tato tahiṃ pratipādakānāṃ upari thapetavyo § 25.10.22B6. (pātraṃ) ... kāṣṭham vā iṣṭakam vā upalam vā nirāmiṣaṃ nirmmādiya tasya upari sthapetavyaṃ § 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ ... upaviṣṭakena utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ, mañcasya vā pīṭhasya vā upari prakṣipitavyaṃ § 25.15.23A2. <sthapetavyaṃ>(?) mañcasya vā pīṭhasya vā upari jālavātāyane vā ... § 31.34.27A1. “āyuṣmaṃ, dvāraṃ bandhiya dvārakoṣṭhakasya upari āsāhi ...” tena upari dvārakoṣṭhasya āsitavyaṃ 142  § 40.12.33A5. taṃ bhājanaṃ ekānte sthapitvā, tṛṇaṃ vā kulikaṃ (lies: tulikā?) vā upari dātavyā abhijñānaṃ, yathā jñāye “akalpiyan” ti § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... heṣṭhato viśālā hi upari saṃkṣiptā § 44.7.39A5. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarāṇi upari sthāpayitavyāni § 44.7.39A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarakāni upari sthāpayituṃ § 44.7.39A6. ātmano cīvarāṇi upari sthāpayitavyāni usw. uparitas § 11.13.11A3. sāṃghikaṃ śayanāsanaṃ mahantaṃ bhavati, uparito bhuṃjitavyaṃ ... uparimeṇa (BHS) “oben, herauf” ⇒ heṣṭhena § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati ... uparimeṇa nivāsanasya snānaśāṭikāṃ utkṣipituṃ uparodha~ ⇒ grāmoparodha~ upala~ “Stein” § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) iṣṭakāhi vā upalair vvā cchādayitavyā § 19.3.17B6. (praśvāsakuṭī ...) udakabhramaṇasya vā upari karttavyā upalasya vā iṣṭakāya vā upari § 25.10.22B6. (pātraṃ) ... kāṣṭham vā iṣṭakam vā upalam vā nirāmiṣaṃ nirmmādiya tasya upari sthapetavyaṃ § 42.7.36B2. bhūmi astaritavyā upalehi vā pakviṭṭikāya vā upa-√lakṣ § 40.12.33A4. pānīyaṃ vārentena upalakṣayitavyaṃ § 41.16.34B6. tena ... tasya dārakasya pānīyaṃ dentasya sarvvam upalakṣitaṃ § 49.8.42B7. atha dāni nimantreti upalakṣitavyaṃ (“sich merken”) paścācchramaṇena upa-lipta~ ⇒ upa-limpa-, liptopalipta~ § 39.21.32A1. atha dāni nâgacchanti, ... grāmāntikā<nāṃ> thālīy’ otāriya dhotôpaliptāṃ (< dhotāṃ upaliptāṃ; Hs. thātôyaliptāṃ; ☞ § 39.21[Text], Anm. 1) kariya thapitavyāḥ upa-limpa- ⇒ upa-lipta~, liptopalipta~ § 21.9.20B5. prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā pradeśakaṃ gomayena upalimpiya cīvarakaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 25.10.22B6. antamasato pṛthivīpradeśaṃ pi gomayena upalimpiya thapetavyaṃ upalepana~ ⇒ lepanikā § 45.6.39B7. upalepanaṃ vā saṃmārjanaṃ vā <karttukāmā> bhava<n>ti upavāda~ ⇒ anopavāda~ upaviṃśati für upaviśaṃti : § 29.1.24A6, § 48.1.41A3 (zweimal) upavicāra~ ⇒ darśanopavicāra~ upa-√viś “sich setzen, sich hinsetzen” ⇒ upa-viṣṭa~, upaviṣṭaka~, upaviṣṭikā~ § 4.9.5A1. kadāci maṅgalakaraṇīye atidakṣiṇaṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati, tathā yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ. atha dāni pretakaraṇīye anuvāmaṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati, tathā yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 4.10.5A2. nâpi dāni kṣamati gatāgatasya upaviśituṃ (Hs. °viśantaṃ) § 5.9.6B7. tato na kṣamati gatāgatasya upaviśituṃ § 6.9.7B7. tato nâpi kṣamati praviṣṭehi gatāgatasya upaviśituṃ § 5.9.6B7. anantarikāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 6.9.7B7. ānantariyāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi yathāvṛddhikāye upaviśitavyaṃ § 7.7.8B4. evaṃ svādhyāyati, araṇye vasati, prahāṇe upaviśati, so evâsya ovādo § 7.7.8B5. upādhyāyo ... na svādhyāyati, na araṇye vasati, na prahāṇe upaviśati § 11.10.11A2. na kṣamati sāṃghikena śayyāsanena prāvṛtena bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>am vā upaviśituṃ § 18.23.16B2. tena ca parāṅmukhena u<pa>viśitavyaṃ antaraṃ dātavya § 18.24.16B2. nâpi dāni dūrato yeva nivāsa<na>ṃ oguhiya upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 18.24.16B2. samanantaraṃ upaviśitavyaṃ ca nivasanaṃ oguhitavyaṃ ca § 18.29.16B5. atha khalu saṃghārāmasya ekahiṃ ante upaviśitavyaṃ § 18.33.16B7. ekamante nivāsa<na>ṃ o<gu>hiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 18.45.17A6. ekatamaṃ jjhāṭam vā vṛkṣaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariyāṇa upaviśitavyaṃ 143  § 18.47.17A6. sārthe niviṣṭasmiṃ samudācāro bhavati, ekānte upaviśiya karttavyaṃ § 19.10.18A2. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena upaveṣṭuṃ (Hs. °ṣṭaṃ) § 19.10.18A3. atha khalu ekāṃsakṛtena ekānte dantakāṣṭhaṃ sthāpayitvā upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 19.13.18A4. atha khalu ekatam’ aṃte upaviśiya praśvāso karttavyo § 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiyāṇaṃ taṃ cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 26.4.23A7. mukhaṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 29.1.24A6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ uṣṭ<r>aparyaṃkena prahāṇaṃ upaviśaṃti § 29.5.24B2. na kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa prahāṇe upaveṣṭuṃ § 34.5.28B5. atha khalu ārogyāpiya, yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ dīyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ (≒ § 35.5.29A5, § 36.5.29B4) § 39.16.31B4. svakasvakehi āsanehi (Loc. pl.) upaviśitavyaṃ (= § 39.28.32A6) § 41.26.35B3. pādadhovanikā bhavati ... yaṃ kālaṃ tena pādā dhovitā bhava<ṃ>ti upaviśitavyaṃ § 41.26.35B3. evaṃ pi upaviśitavyaṃ § 41.30.35B6. nâpi kṣamati pādadhovanikāyāṃ ... upaviśituṃ § 41.30.35B6. ekāṃsīkṛtena upaviśitavyaṃ § 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... tehi prajñaptehi upaviśaṃti (Hs. °viṃśati) § 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... sudhāpāṇḍulepanāyo bhittīyo ghasaṃtā upaviśaṃti (Hs. °viṃśati) § 48.4.41A7. yadi tāva āsanaṃ bhavati dhūlīye vā mrakṣitaṃ ... , na kṣamati tahiṃ upaviśituṃ § 48.6.41B1. (e)ka saṃkacchikāṃ (Hs. saṃkalikāṃ) prajñapiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 48.6.41B2. antamasato hastenâpi prasphoṭiya āmarjiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 50.9.43B5. yaṃ kālaṃ āgato bhavati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ sahitakehi bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 50.9.43B5. yadi tāva ākāṃkṣati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ yaṃ rucyati, taṃ khāditavyaṃ § 51.10.44A5. eṣā strī upaviṣṭikā āsati. bhikṣūn paśyiyāṇaṃ ... utthiyāṇaṃ bhūyo upaviśati, jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati.” § 53.1.45A2. te dāni bhikṣū andhakāre prahāṇe upaviśaṃti (Hs. °viṃśati) ukkhalantā prakkhalantā § 57.1.47B1. te dāni ... prahāṇa okastāḥ samānā āsanehi upaviśiyāṇaṃ ... § 57.4.47B3. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, na kṣamati sopānahena pādena prahāṇaṃ upaviśituṃ § 57.4.47B3. praviśitvā vṛddhānte añjaliṃ kṛtvā yathāvṛddhikāye upaviśitavyaṃ § 57.10.47B7. atha khalu upānahikāyo nikkhāsiyāṇaṃ praṇāmaṃ kṛtvā upaviśitavyaṃ § 57.10.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi sa-upānaho upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā mūle upaviśati, anāpattiḥ usw. upa-viṣṭa~ “gesessen” ⇒ sukhopaviṣṭa~, upaviṣṭaka~, upaviṣṭikā~, upa-√viś § 18.5.15B4. kaṇṭhavāriṇī ... tathā karttavyā yathā upaviṣṭā anyonyaṃ na paśyanti § 18.25.16B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati varcakuṭīyaṃ upaviṣṭena dhyānāntaragatena ... āsituṃ § 18.28.16B4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ purime vā paścime vā prahāṇe upaviṣṭo ... § 18.40.17A3. anekāye bhikṣuṇikā upaviṣṭā bhaveya § 19.27.18B4. agniśālāyāṃ vā upasthānaśālāyām vā upaviṣṭasya samudācāro bhavati, cchatti niṣkramitavyaṃ § 22.1.20B6. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇakaṃ upaviṣṭo § 25.7.22B4. adhvāvayantena nâpi kṣamati sthitakena adhvāpayituṃ. atha khalu upaviṣṭena adhvāpayitavyaṃ § 32.5.27A7. uśvāsam vā upaviṣṭo bhavati, na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ pādāṃ vandituṃ § 40.15.33A7. atha dāni paṭipāṭikāye dūredūraṃ prahāṇasya upaviṣṭā bhavanti, ekena vāretavyaṃ § 41.15.34B4. so gṛhasya madhyāgāre upaviṣṭaḥ § 42.22.37A7. upaviṣṭena karttavyaṃ § 53.7.45A6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho prahāṇe upaviṣṭo bhavati, tato dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti 144  § 57.3.47B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇa upaviṣṭena upānahā nikkhāsiya ... § 58.1.48A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭāḥ ... (= § 59.1.48A6, § 61.1.49A2) § 58.3.48A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇam upaviṣṭena ... “khulu khulu” tti kāsituṃ § 58.5.48A4. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇikena upaviṣṭe<na> auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha” tti kāsituṃ § 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭena ... (= § 61.3.49A3) § 59.5.48B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā upaviṣṭena auddhatyā<bhi>prāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhe<na> kṣīvituṃ § 60.1.48B4. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇam upaviṣṭāḥ samānā ... § 61.4.49A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇam upaviṣṭasya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya antaraghare vā upaviṣṭasya puno puno vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, utthiya gantavyaṃ § 62.5.50A2. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇaśālāyām upaviṣṭasya vātakarmma āgacchati, ... usw. upaviṣṭaka~, upaviṣṭikā~ “gesessen”#; < Skt. upa-viṣṭa + Suffix ka ⇒ upa-viṣṭa~, upa-√viś, praviṣṭaka~ § 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako praśvāsena uppīḍito ... § 19.12.18A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇa upaviṣṭako praśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 25.6.22B4. atha khalu upaviṣṭakena nirmmādayitavyaṃ § 25.8.22B5. nâpi kṣamati sthitakena prakṣipituṃ. atha khalu upaviṣṭakena prakṣipi- tavyaṃ § 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena kalācīyaṃ vāmāyaṃ aṃsivaddhakaṃ prakṣipitvā samavasthāya upaviṣṭakena utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ § 26.7.23B1. atha dāni upaviṣṭakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye dīyati, yathāvṛddhikāye gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 51.10.44A4. eṣā strī upaviṣṭikā āsati. bhikṣūn paśyiyāṇaṃ uttheti, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” tti § 60.4.48B6. atha ca dāni bhikṣu prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako khajjati, ... § 60.5.48B7. atha dāni bhikṣu bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, ... § 61.5.49A5. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇam upaviṣṭakena maṭamaṭāya aṅgāni bhañjituṃ § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, yadi tāva bhaktāgre vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, anantarikasya pātraṃ datvā gantavyaṃ § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, ... dharmmaśravaṇe{na} vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ upa-śuṣka~# “ausgetrocknet, trocken” ⇒ śuṣka~ § 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvitaṃ § 49.1.42A3. ayaṃ upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati upasaṃhāra~ ⇒ hitopasaṃhāra~ upa-saṃ-√kram ☞ § 34.4(Text), Anm. 2 (über die Konstruktion des Verbums mit Akkusativ und Lokativ) ⇒ alliya-, alliyya-, allīya-, ā-llīya- § 4.8.4B7. amukaṃ kulaṃ upasaṃkramiṣyatha § 32.2.27A5. āyuṣman, evacciro tava āgatasya, na ca me pādavandako upasaṃkramasi § 33.4.28A1. āyuṣmān dāni Upālī kālajño velajño samayajño bhagavantam upasaṃkram- iya pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, ...?” § 34.3.28B3. kṣatriyaparṣāye kiñci kāryaṃ bhavati, na kṣamati gatāgatasya upasaṃkram- ituṃ § 35.3.29A3. nâyaṃ kṣamati gatāgatasya brāhmaṇaparṣām upasaṃkramituṃ § 37.3.30A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gatāgatasya tīrthikaparṣā upasaṃkramituṃ § 34.4.28B4. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryantene upānahāhi vā obaddhāhi kṣatriya- parṣāyam upasaṃkramituṃ (☞ § 34.4[Text], Anm. 2) § 36.4.29B3. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramituṃ § 35.4.29A4. cchatropānahāṃ ekamante sthapiya brāhmaṇaparṣāyām upasaṃkramitavyaṃ 145  (☞ § 34.4[Text], Anm. 2) § 34.5.28B4. darśanapathe upasaṃkramitvā na dāni vaktavyaṃ “sukham bhavanto, sukhaṃ mārṣa.” (= § 35.5.29A4, § 36.5.29B4) § 36.4.29B4. ekatam’ ante cchatropānahāṃ nikṣipiya gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā § 39.2.30B7. te dāni grāmāntikā deśakālasmin kulāni upasaṃkramanti § 34.8.28B6. evaṃ kṣatriyaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5) § 35.3.29A2. evaṃ brāhmaṇaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5) § 36.3.29B2. evaṃ gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5) § 37.3.30A2. evaṃ tīrthikaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= § 37.7.30A5, Uddāna [IV].30B5) § 38.10.30B4. evaṃ āryaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5) § 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi (Opt. 2. sg.) § 49.1.41B7. te dāni mahāntāni kulāny upasaṃkramanti usw. upa-saṃ-pāde- (BHS, Pā) “ordinieren”; vgl. BHS, SWTF. upasaṃpādayati § 7.1.8A5. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā ṣaḍvarggikāś ca upasaṃpādenti. te dāni upasaṃpādiya na ovadanti, na anuśāsanti § 7.2.8A7. yūyaṃ upasaṃpādetha, upasaṃpādiya na ovadatha na anuśāsayatha § 7.3.8B1. bhagavān āha “evaṃ dāṇi yūyaṃ upasaṃpādiya naỿv’ ovadatha nânuśāsatha ...” § 7.7.8B4. upādhyāyo śraddhevihāri upasaṃpādiya na ovadati, na anuśāsati, na uddiśati § 8.1.8B6. te dāni upasaṃpāditāḥ upādhyāyasya na alliyyaṃti usw. upasaṃpādetukena für °pādentakena : § 7.4.8B1 *upa-saṃpādentaka~# “ordinierend”; vgl. BHSG § 22.29 § 7.4.8B1. upādhyāyena tāva śrāddhevihāriṃ upasaṃpādentakenaỿva (Hs. °pādetuken°) ubhayato vinayo grāhayitavyo upaskara~ § 14.15.13B4. yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā upaskaro vā śraddhāprasannehi upāsakakulehi sthāpayitavyaṃ upastambha~ § 14.3.13A3. yo pratibalo vastuṃ, yadi utsahanti, teṣāṃ āhāreṇa upastambhaṃ karttavyaṃ, yathā na vihanyeṃsu upa-sthapaya- (BHS) ⇒ upa-sthāpaya-, upa-sthāpe-, upa-thapaya-, √sthā (1) “aufwecken”# § 53.8.45A7. atha khalu so pi acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo, vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti (2) “aufstehen”# (nicht-kausativ) § 57.6.47B4. bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā ... upasthala-tarikā~# “(Rauch)abzug”; < upa (“zu, nach”) + sthala (“Erdboden”) + tarikā (“Boot”)? ☞ § 42.8, Anm. 7 § 42.8.36B3. bhūmito arddhahasta upasthalatarikā karttavyā upasthāna-śālā~ (BHS) “Mehrzweckgebäude” ☞ § 1.5, Anm. 4 § 1.5.1B5. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kahim bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā? (≒ § 3.6.3B4) § 1.7.1B6. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... amukahiṃ bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā § 2.5.2B5. kahiṃ bhaviṣyati upasthānaśālāyām vā prahāṇaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā ucchedanake vā niṣadyāya vā? § 12.10.11B5. vihārā pariveṇā agniśālā bhaktaśālā upasthānaśālā ... grāhayitavyā § 14.12.13B2. etāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā § 19.27.18B4. agniśālāyāṃ vā upasthānaśālāyām vā upaviṣṭasya samudācāro bhavati, cchatti niṣkramitavyaṃ § 20.14.20A1. nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā bhaktaśālāyām vā ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ 146  § 21.4.20B2. upasthānaśālāyāṃ vā agniśālāyāṃ vā prāsāde vā prahāṇake <vā> kaṭhinaṃ prajñāpayitvā cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 21.9.20B5. prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā pradeśakaṃ gomayena upalimpiya cīvarakaṃ sīvitavyaṃ upa-sthāpaya-, upa-sthāpe- (BHS) “sich versorgen” ⇒ upa-thapaya-, upa-sthapaya-, √sthā § 31.3.25B3. ete dāni bhikṣu āgantukā {ā}gacchanti, sarvvehi pāḍiyakkapāḍiyak{a}kāni apāvuraṇāni upasthāpayitavyāni § 42.21.37A6. yo pratibalo bhavati udakaṃ upasthāpetuṃ, ... § 42.21.37A6. vayam udakam upasthāpayiṣyāmi (1. sg. präs. für 1. pl.) upahasta~ “griffbereit”# ⇒ an-upahasta~ § 45.4.39B6. prakṛty’ eva tāva grāmapraveśanakaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 45.5.39B7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivasanaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 45.7.40A2. rātrīprāvaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ upahastī-karttavyaṃ § 46.4.40A6. grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 46.5.40A7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastī-karttavyaṃ § 46.6.40B2. prakṛty’ eva tāva upahastī-karttavyaṃ upāṃsula~ ⇒ uppaṃsula~ upāṃsulaka~ ⇒ uppaṃsulaka~ upādakā für uppā° : § 17.12.15A6 upādhyāya~ § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: katham upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 9.1.9B5) § 7.3.8B1. tena hi evaṃ upādhyāyena śrāddhavihāresmiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ § 7.4.8B1. upādhyāyena tāva śrāddhevihāriṃ upasaṃpādentakenaỿva ... § 7.7.8B4. upādhyāyo śraddhevihāri upasaṃpādiya na ovadati, na anuśāsati, na uddiśati ... § 7.8.8B5. evam upādhyāyena śraddhevihārismiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10A7) § 8.3.8B7. evaṃ sārddhevihāriṇā upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 8.14.9B4. evaṃ śraddhevihāriṇā upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10B1) § 25.13.22B7~23A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ upādhyāyasya vâcāryasya vā pātram allīpayati, nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ vāmena hastena allīpayituṃ. atha khalu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā dakṣiṇena hastena pātraṃ allīpayitavyaṃ § 28.5.24A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā sārddhaṃ caṃkramati, ... § 28.5.24A3. <na kṣamati> upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya atirekaṃ caṃkramituṃ § 33.7.28A2. vaktavyaṃ “vandāmi upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā ...” tti § 33.16.28A6~7. atha dāni koci pṛcchati “ko te upādhyāyo?” “ko te ācāryo?” vā, na dāni vaktavyaṃ “asuko ācāryo. asuko upādhyāyo.” atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “arthahetor nnāmaṃ gṛhṇāmi. asuko me upādhyāyo. asuko me ācāryo.” § 38.2.30A5. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva tāva upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā āmantrayitavyo § 38.3.30A6. upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā jānitavyaṃ § 42.16.37A1. upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā praviṣṭako bhavati § 42.16.37A1. snāyāmi ācārya, snāyāmi upādhyāya § 44.5.39A2. upādhyāyasya <vā> ācāryasya vā cīvaraṃ ... § 44.5.39A3. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya <vā> cīvarehi ... § 44.7.39A5. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarāṇi upari sthāpayitavyāni § 44.7.39A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarakāni upari sthāpayituṃ § 44.7.39A6. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā <cīvarāṇi> heṣṭe sthapayitavyāni § 49.5.42A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā paścācchramaṇo gacchati § 49.5.42B2. paścācchramaṇena vaktavyaṃ: “upādhyāyo (Voc. sg.) vā ācāryo vā vāma- hastikam vā dakṣiṇahastikaṃ vā uvvatta” tti § 49.8.42B7. amukena upādhyāyo (Voc. sg.?) nimantrito § 52.3.44B3. piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhiyāṇaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā allīpayitavyaṃ § 52.4.44B3. yadi tāva labdhaṃ bhavati, upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā saṃgraho karttavyo § 57.10.47B6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato sa-upānahena niṣīdituṃ § 62.9.50A5. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā āmantrayitvā gantuṃ § 62.11.50A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā vṛddhatarakasya vā agrato 147  auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ usw. upādhyāyācārya~ (°āya-āc°) (SWTF) “Erzieher und Lehrer”; “Erzieher bzw. Lehrer” § 12.13.12A1. atha dāni teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā jalpanti “uddiśatha yūyaṃ eteṣāṃ ...” § 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati ... upādhyāyācāryāṇām vā agrato vṛddhatarakānām vā bhikṣūṇāṃ agrato dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 24.10.22A6. upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā mūle kheṭaṃ vyābahati, ekānte karttavyaṃ § 27.6.23B6. na kṣamati ... saṃghaṃ vā upādhyāyācāryam vā vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ § 27.7.23B7. upādhyāyācāryehi vā uktena samānena “mā tiṣṭhê”ti tiṣṭhati, vinayāti- kramam āsādayati § 28.4.24A3. nâpi kṣamati ... upādhyāyācāryam vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ § 28.8.24A4. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā <anu>parivarttituṃ § 29.7.24B4. na kṣamati ... upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariya niṣīdituṃ § 29.8.24B5. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyācāryehi “mā niṣīda” tti uktena niṣīdituṃ § 30.11.25A6. na kṣamati ... upādhyāyācāryaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ § 38.2.30A5. vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācāryā! saṃghasya madhye me kiñcit kāryaṃ. āllīyāmi mā allīyāmi?” tti § 42.25.37B3. upādhyāyācāryā, āgacchāhi snāhi § 44.8.39A7. nêdāni upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarakehi ātmano cīvarā veḍhayitavyā § 44.8.39A7. ātmano cīvarehi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarā veḍhitavyā § 52.1.44A7. teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā snehaṃ sthapenti, khajjakhaṇḍakāni thapenti § 52.1.44B1. te dāni teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā odhyāyanti “vayaṃ yyeva tāva ...” § 52.3.44B2. nâpi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā bhuṃjantānāṃ tena dāni uṣṭhihitvā āsitavyaṃ § 52.6.44B4. āha “upādhyāyācārya (Voc. sg.; “Erzieher bzw. Lehrer!”), paribhuṃjāhi” tti § 52.6.44B4. yadi tāva āha “upādhyāyācārya (Voc. sg.), asukāye ceṭikāye dinnaṃ. ...” § 52.6.44B5. atha dāni āha “upādhyāyācārya (Voc. sg.), asukasya me vāṇijasya ...” § 52.7.44B6. atha dāni āha “upādhyāyācārya (Voc. sg.), bhuñjāhi”, yadi tāva <kāṃkṣati>, paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 53.8.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracalāyati, ... so pi acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo, vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya (Voc. sg.) tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti (≒ § 55.6.46B7) § 54.12.46A7. atha khalu acchaṭikāye utthāpiyāṇaṃ, vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya (Voc. sg.), tava yaṣṭī prāpuṇati.” § 59.7.48B3. nâpi kṣamati sāmāyikāyām vā upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena kṣīvituṃ § 61.8.49A7. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā agrato maṭamaṭāye aṃgāni bhaṃjantena vijṛmbhituṃ usw. upādhyāye für upānahāye : § 62.13.50B1 upānah~ ⇒ upānahā~, upānahikā~, cchatropānahā~, sopānaha~ § 31.21.26A4. yatra bhikṣūṇāṃ āsanaprajñaptir bhavati, tahiṃ cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ cīvara- bisiyan thaviyāṇaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ vā upānahau vā thaviyāṇa, ... § 41.8.34A4. ekasya upānaho vaddhro pocchito *upānaha-puṭa~# wörtl. “Falte der Sandale”? Es kann sich um zwei v-förmig zusammengelegte Sandalen handeln oder um eine Sandale, deren Sohle zusammengebogen ist § 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya kheṭa bādhati, upānahapuṭe (Hs. opā°) kṛtvā bhūmiye marditavyaṃ upānahā~ (BHS) “Sandale” ⇒ upānah~, upānahikā~, cchatropānahā~, sa-upānaha~, sopānaha~ § 1.10.2A2. upānahāṃ omuñciya (= § 2.8.2B7, § 3.9.3B7) § 24.6.22A3. (Schleim) ekasya upānahāye tale cchorayitavyaṃ dvitīyena marddayitavya § 26.5.23B1. upānahā ni<k>khāsiya ekāṃsakṛtena yavāgū praticchitavyā § 31.15.26A1. cetiyāṇaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi upānahā omuñcitvā kāṣṭhakena gṛhṇitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ 148  § 34.4.28B4. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryante<na> upānahā{ṃ}hi vā obaddhāhi kṣatriya- parṣāyam upasaṃkramituṃ § 35.4.29A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cchatreṇa vā dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi brāhmaṇaparṣā āllīyituṃ § 36.4.29B3. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi gṛhapati- parṣā upasaṃkramituṃ § 34.4.28B4. ekānte cchattraṃ nikṣipiya upānahāy’ omuṃciya tato allīyitavyaṃ § 41.1.33B3. ā<r>drapādakaṃ upānahāhi (Loc. pl. fem.; Hs. upanāhāhi) prakṣipiya § 41.2.33B5. ārdrapādāṃ upānahāsu prakṣipiya § 41.8.34A4. ekasya upānaho vaddhro pocchito dvitīyasya upānahā (Gen. sg. fem.) vaddhro pocchito ekasya upānahā (Gen. sg. fem.) talaṃ pocchitaṃ dvitīyasya upānahā (Gen. sg. fem.) talaṃ pocchitaṃ § 41.22.35A6. colakaṃ dhovitvā niṣpiḍitvā upānahā nirmmādayitavyā § 41.24.35A7. upānahāyo prasphoṭitvā saṃpuṭīkṛtvā § 41.24.35A7. ekasyôpānahāye vaddhro pocchitavyo § 41.24.35A7. ekasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ (= § 41.29.35B5) § 41.24.35B1. dvitīyasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ § 41.24.35B1. na kṣamati upānahāhi (Loc. pl. fem.) ārdrapādena praveśayituṃ § 41.29.35B5. upānahāyo saṃpuṭī-kariya § 41.29.35B5. ekasya upānahāye vadhro pocchitavyo § 41.29.35B6. adhvātā pā<dā>ṃ upānahāyāṃ prakṣipitavyaṃ § 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇa ... upānahā gṛhṇituṃ § 57.1.47B1. te ... prahāṇa okastāḥ samānā āsanehi upaviśiyāṇaṃ upānahā nikkhāsiya ... prasphoṭanti § 57.2.47B1. evaṃ upānahāye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 57.13.48A1); Uddāna (VII). 50B1. evam upānahāye (Hs. upādhyāye) pratipadyitavyaṃ § 57.3.47B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇa upaviṣṭena upānahā nikkhāsiya ... § 57.3.47B2. atha khalu bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ § 57.6.47B4. bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā nikuṭitakena vāmā bāhāṃ osāriya saṃprajānaṃ nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 57.7.47B5. prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśitavyaṃ. vṛddhānte upānahāyo pārṣṇivaddhake osāriya praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ § 57.7.47B5. niṣīdanaṃ prajñapayitvā upānahāyo nikkhāsitvā paryaṃkena niṣīditavyaṃ § 57.8.47B6. bhikṣuṇā yāva vṛddhatarakā nirddhāvitā paścād utthapitvā upānahāyo ābandhiya gantavyaṃ § 57.8.47B6. atha dāni vṛddhatarakā āsanti, bhikṣū ca {ā}gantukāmo bhavati, upānahāyo ābandhiya navakānte saṃprajānaṃ gantavyaṃ § 57.11.47B7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā pādāṃ dhovantena upānahāyo “caḍacaḍa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.11.47B7. upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, ... upānahā-pocchana~# “Wischtuch für Sandalen”; vgl. Pā. upāhana-puñchana-coḷaka~ ☞ § 41.6, Anm. 4 ⇒ upānahā-pocchanaka~, upānahā-pocchana-nattaka~ § 41.6.34A3. upānahāpocchano (Hs. °hāyocch°) upanāmiya pādāṃ dhovati § 41.29.35B6. upānahāpocchano (Hs. °hāyocch°) dhoviya pīḍiya tatraỿva sthapitavyaṃ upānahā-pocchanaka~# “Wischtuch für Sandalen” ☞ § 41.6, Anm. 4 ⇒ upānahā-pocchana~ § 41.9.34A5. dakṣiṇena hastena upānahāpocchanakaṃ (Hs. °āyocch°) dhoviya niṣpīḍitvā ātape śoṣayetaṃ (lies: °yitaṃ ?) § 41.24.35B1. upānahāpocchanakaṃ (Hs. °hāyocch°) dhovitavyaṃ upānahā-pocchana-nattaka~# “Wischtuch für Sandalen” (wörtl. “Lappen zum Abwischen der Sandalen”); vgl. Pā. upāhana-puñchana-coḷaka~ ☞ § 41.8, Anm. 2 ⇒ upānahā-pocchana~, upānahā-pocchanaka~, nattaka~ § 41.8.34A4. upānahāpocchananattakaṃ (Hs. °hāyocch°) gṛhṇiya upānahā saṃpuṭaṃ kariya ... 149 upānahā-yocchanakaṃ für upānahā-pocchanakaṃ : § 41.9.34A5, § 41.24.35B1 upānahā-yocchana-nattakaṃ für upānahā-pocchana-nattakaṃ : § 41.8.34A4 upānahā-yocchanno für upānahā-pocchano : § 41.6.34A3, § 41.29.35B6 upānahārūḍha~# (°nahā + ārūḍha) “Sandalen tragend”; Pā. upāhanārūḷha (z.B. Vin V 31.37) § 1.10.2A1. nâpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikā{ya}kṛtena upānahārūḍhena vā śalākāṃ vārayituṃ § 1.10.2A2. śalākāṃ pi dāni gṛhṇantena na câpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā śalākāṃ gṛhṇituṃ § 2.8.2B7~3A1. na kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ ... na kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā ... śalākāṃ praticchituṃ (= § 3.9. 3B7) § 26.5.23A7. nâpi kṣamati yavāgū upānahārūḍhena vā praticchituṃ § 27.6.23B6. na kṣamati ... upānahārūḍhena vā tiṣṭhituṃ khaṃbhakṛtena vā ... § 27.8.23B7. kiñ câpi upānahārūḍho (Hs. opā°) oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo vā ohitahasto vā tiṣṭhati, anāpattiḥ § 32.8.27B3. na kṣamati oguṇṭhitakāyena. na kṣamati ohitahastena. na kṣamati upānahārūḍhena § 54.6.46A4. yaṣṭi dāni vārentena na dāni oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā vāretavyā ohitahastena vā upānahārūḍhena vā yaṣṭi vāretavyā upānahikā~# “Sandale” ☞ § 41.6, Anm. 3; vgl. upānah~, upānahā~ § 41.6.34A3. upānahikāyo upanāmiya upānahāpocchan{n}o upanāmiya pādāṃ dhovati § 41.9.34A5. upānahikāyo nikṣipiya dakānakāto vāmāye kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjayitvā ... § 57.4.47B3. atha khalu upānahikāyo dvāramūle nikkhāsiya praviśitvā ... § 57.5.47B3. anekāyo upānahikāyo mūṣikena vā khajjeṃsu. bhikṣū vā jānanto vā ajānanto vā gṛhītvā gaccheya § 57.10.47B7. atha khalu upānahikāyo nikkhāsiyāṇaṃ praṇāmaṃ kṛtvā upaviśitavyaṃ upāntake# “um sich herum; in der Nähe”; vgl. Skt. upānta~, upāntika~ § 42.18.37A2. parikramma karentehi na dāni svedena vā malena vā usphoṣetavyo upāntake (Hs. uṣāntake) upārambhaṇābhiprāya~ (°bhaṇa-abhi°)# “die Absicht, einen Vorwurf zu machen” ⇒ viheṭhanābhiprāya~ § 53.10.45B1. nâpi kṣamati tena upārambhaṇābhiprāyeṇa dīpo vārayituṃ Upālin~ (BHS, SWTF) ☞ § 33.4, Anm. 2 § 33.4.28A1. āyuṣmān dāni Upālī kālajño velajño samayajño bhagavantam upasaṃkram- iya pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, ...?” upāśraya~ “Lehne, Stützkissen” (pw.) ⇒ sāpāśraya~, bhikṣuṇī-upāśraya~ § 48.7.41B2. na kṣamati sāpāśrayaṃ vā upāśrayam (?; Hs. opā°) vā omayilomayilaṃ vā paṇḍara{ṃ}vipāṇḍaraṃ apāśrayituṃ upāsaka~ § 4.7.4B4. koci imaṃhi itthannāmo nāma upāsako? (= § 5.7.6B3) § 6.7.7B4. koci ima<ṃ>hi evannāmako upāsako dānapatī vā vāṇijako vā? § 4.7.4B4. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “nâsti asmākaṃ koci evaṃnāma upāsako” § 5.5.6B1. bhikṣu bhikṣuṇī upāsako ’pāsikā āgantuko gamiko (≒ § 6.5.7B2) § 5.6.6B3. asuke deśe asukāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ itthaṃnāmo nāma upāsako § 5.7.6B4. bhante kisya upāsako? kahiṃ upāsako? <nâsti> ’tināmâsmākaṃ koci upāsako § 6.7.7B4. nâsti koci imaṃhi evaṃnāmako. kissa (od. kaḥ sa; Hs. kiḥ sa) upāsako? § 31.37.27A3. upāsaka! dānapati! ime bhikṣavo tvayā sārddhaṃ gamiṣyanti § 33.12.28A5. bhikṣū vā upāsakam vā dānapatim vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâpi kṣamati “bhāve” tti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā “āyuṣmaṃ” tti vā § 39.9.31A5. yadi koci upāsako saṃghaṃ bhaktena nimantrayati § 42.21.37A6. upāsakā vā karmmakarā ārāmikā vā āhaṃsu usw. upāsaka-kula~ (Pā) § 14.15.13B4. yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā upaskaro vā śraddhāprasannehi upāsakakulehi (Loc. pl.) sthāpayitavyaṃ 150 upāsakā~# “Laienanhängerin” ☞ § 33.11, Anm. 1 ⇒ upāsikā~ § 33.11.28A4~5. eṣo bhikṣuḥ upāsakāṃ vā dānapatānīṃ vā vihārasvāminīṃ vā śabdāpitu- kāmo bhavati, ... “upāsake” tti vā “dānapatti” ti vā “vihārasvāmini” ti vā śabdāpayitavyaṃ upāsikā~ (BHS, Pā) “Laienanhängerin” ⇒ upāsakā~ § 5.5.6B1. bhikṣu bhikṣuṇī upāsako ’pāsikā āgantuko gamiko § 6.5.7B2. bhikṣu bhikṣuṇī upāsaka upāsikā gṛhastho pravrajito § 39.2.31A1. upāsike (Voc. sg. als Voc. pl.) detha bhaktāni upe- (upa-√i) § 4.15.5B1. ayaṃ kumāro śaraṇaṃ upetu (vs) (= § 6.13.8A3) upeḍanaka~ ⇒ uppīḍanaka~, uppeḍanaka~ uppaṃsula~#, upāṃsula~# “staubig”; < Skt. ud (“nach oben”) + pāṃsu (“Staub”) + Suffix -la; vgl. Skt. pāṃsula (“staubig”) ☞ § 13.8, Anm. 4 ⇒ uppaṃsulaka~ § 13.8.12B3. atha dāni uppaṃsulo bhavati, gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 14.17.13B5. atha dāni uppansulako (Hs. uppatsu°) vihā<ro> bhavati, ... § 17.8.15A2. ete vihārakā ullāye gṛhītakā bhavanti apratisaṃskṛtā vā uppaṃsulā vā ... § 24.6.22A4. atha dāni uppaṃsulo vihāro bhavati, bhūmīye cchoriya pādena mardditavyo § 24.11.22A6. atha dāni kṣudro kheṭo, upāṃsulā (Hs. °sulo) ca bhūmī bhavati, ... § 44.9.39A7. na dāni kṣamati vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ uppaṃsulo vā acaukṣo vā uppaṃsulaka~#, upaṃsulaka~#, upāṃsulaka~# “staubig” ☞ § 13.8, Anm. 4 ⇒ uppaṃsula~ § 14.9.13A7. atha dāni uppaṃsulakā vihārakā bāhiraghaṭṭimā karttavyāḥ § 17.9.15A3. atha dāni upaṃsulakā vihārakā bhavanti, ... gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 23.6.4.21B4. atha dāni upaṃsulako bhavati, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ pādām vā dhovati, mukham vā dhovati, hastam vā nirmmādayati, “rajonigrahaṃ kāheti” tti, anāpattiḥ § 23.9.21B7. upāṃsulako vihārako bhavati, kālena kālaṃ siñcitavyo saṃmārjitavyo § 44.7.39A6. so uppaṃsulako vihārako bhavati uppakkaṭo wohl für upakaṭṭho : § 50.7.43B2 up-paṭa-# “aufspringen”; < Skt. ut-patati; vgl Pā. uppatati ☞ § 55.2, Anm. 3 ⇒ ā-paṭita~ § 55.2.46B4. (geṇḍuka~ ...) tādṛśo karttavyo yo bhūmīyaṃ āpaṭito yugamātraṃ uppaṭati uppaḍi für uppīḍito : § 18.22.16B1 uppatsulako für uppansu° (= uppaṃsu°) : § 14.17.13B5 up-pāḍaya-# “herrausreißen, entwurzeln”; < Skt. ut-pāṭayati, vgl. Pā. uppāṭeti, Pkt. uppāḍei § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā āgacchiya uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāyitaṃ § 20.1.19A6. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ mama āmrapotakaṃ ghaṭasiktakaṃ ekaputrakaṃ viya saṃvarddhita{vya}ṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi § 20.2.19A7. āmrapotako ropito ... tvayā so āgacchiya uppāḍiya bhaṃjiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditaṃ § 20.3.19A7. evaṃ nāma tvaṃ puṣpopagataṃ vṛkṣaṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi up-pādaka~ (Pā), u-pādaka~# “auf dem Kopf stehend”# ☞ § 11.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ ut-pādaka~ § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... uppādakā bhavanti samaṃ tthapayitavyā (≒ § 13.11. 12B4, § 13.13.12B5, § 16.9.14B3) § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... mañcā ca pīṭhā ca uddriṇṇakā praluggakā uppādakā utthitakā § 15.3.14A1. mañcā ca pīṭhā ca oddriṇṇakā paluggakā uppādakā utthitakā (≒ § 16.3, § 17.3.14B6) § 16.2.14A6. adrākṣīd ... mañcā pīṭhā oddriṇṇakā paluggakāṃ uppādakāṃ utthitakāṃ (≒ § 17.2.14B5) § 17.12.15A6. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... upādakā bhavanti, yo ye paśyati tena yeva samaṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ uppiḍanako für uppīḍ° : § 14.8.13A7 uppilito für uppīlito : § 19.28.18B4 uppīḍanaka~#, uppeḍanaka~#, upeḍanaka~# “schlammig, sumpfig” ☞ § 13.8, Anm. 1 § 13.8.12B2. yadi tāva uppeḍanako vihārako bhavati, śakkāroṭena vā pūretavyo apakva- pāṃsukena vā § 14.8.13A7. yadi tāva vihāro uppīḍanako (Hs. uppiḍ°) bhavati, na kṣamati lenāni 151  bandhituṃ § 14.17.13B5. yadi tāva uppīḍanako vihāro bhavati, tato lenāni muktāni sthāpetavyāni § 17.9.15A3. vihārakā uppeḍanakā bhavanti, ... § 23.6.4.21B3. yadi tāva up<p>eḍanako so vihārako bhavati, nâpi tahiṃ kṣamati pādāṃ dhovituṃ, hastām vā nirmmādayituṃ § 23.9.21B6. uppeḍanako bhavati, pāṃsukena vā śarkaroṭena vā pratyāstaritavyo § 44.1.38B6. so dāni vihārako uppeḍanako § 44.4.39A2. so uppeḍanako vihārako bhavati up-pīḍaya-# “bedrängen; drücken”; < Skt. ut-pīḍayati (“hinaufdrücken, hinaufdrängen”); vgl. Pā. uppīḷeti ⇒ up-pīḍita~, ut-pīḍita-, up-pīlita~ § 19.9.18A2. atha dāni so bhikṣuḥ uppīḍiyate (Hs. °yatī) yeva acchaṭikāṃ karantena allīyitavyaṃ § 32.10.27B4. yadi kasyaci vraṇo bhavati gaṇḍo vā piṭako vā, na dāni sahasā uppīḍitavyaṃ up-pīḍita~# “bedrängt”; < Skt. utpīḍita; vgl. Pā. uppīḷita ⇒ up-pīḍaya-, ut-pīḍita-, up-pīlita~ § 18.20.16A7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena uppīḍito (Hs. uddīpito) nivasanaṃ oguhiya varccakuṭiṃ praviśati § 18.22.16B1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena sahasā uppīḍito (Hs. °uppaḍi) bhavati, ... § 18.23.16B2. atha dāni uppīḍito bhavati, acchaṭikāṃ karantena allīyitavyaṃ § 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako praśvāsena uppīḍito ... § 19.13.18A3. atha dāni praśvāsena uppīḍito bhavati, na kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa ... up-pīlita~# “bedrängt”; < Skt. utpīḍita; vgl. Pā. uppīḷita, Pkt. uppīlia ⇒ ut-pīḍita-, up-pīḍita~, up- pīḍaya- § 19.28.18B4. atha dāni uppīlito bhavati, akaṃthāyena viya mūtreṇa siñcantena na gantavyaṃ § 19.31.18B5. § 19.31.18B5. atha dāni bhikṣu suṣṭhu uppīlito bhavati, nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā urūyo omūtra<ya>ntena gantuṃ ub-bhaṇḍita~ (Pā), u-bhaṇḍita~# “schwer beladen”; Denominativ von ud + bhāṇḍa ☞ § 31.11, Anm. 1 § 31.11.25B7. atha dāni ubhaṃḍito bhavati, saṃvibhajitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.15.26A1. atha dāni ubbhaṃḍito, saṃvibhajitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ ubha~ § 4.17.5B5. ubhau śraddhāya sampannā ubhau śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) § 4.17.5B5. ubhau puṇyāni kṛtvāna samaśīlavratā ubhau (vs) § 29.6.24B4. ubhau pādau osāriya susaṃvṛtena niṣīditavyaṃ § 19.9.18A2. iminā avakāśo dātavyo. tato ubhayehi (Hs. °ohi) praśvāso karttavyo § 36.6.29B5. sāgārā cânagārā ca ubhe (BHSG § 19.7; Geiger § 114.2) anyonyaniśritā (vs) u-bhaṃḍita~ ⇒ ub-bhaṇḍita~ ubhaya~ ⇒ ubhayato, ubhaya-bāhā~ § 29.4.24B2. parvvāṇi āmilāyanti, nâpi kṣamati ubhayāni sandhī maṭamaṭāye prasārituṃ § 32.2.27A5. te dāni aparakālena ubhaye samāgatā § 42.18.37A3. na dāni apūrvvacarimaṃ ubhayabāhā (od. ubhaya<ṃ> bāhā?) prasāretavyā § 43.14.38B2. ubhayeṣāṃ itvarakālikaṃ, vṛddhatarakasya dātavyaṃ. ubhayeṣāṃ cira- kālikaṃ bhavati, vṛddhatarakasya dātavyaṃ § 49.7.42B4. ubhayehi bhuñjiya nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 50.2.43A3. te dāni katpāhaṃ kālasya ubhaye samāgatā § 50.7.43B3. yadi upakaṭṭho kālo bhavati, na dāni tena bhuñjantena āsitavyaṃ. atha khalu ubhaye piṇḍapātā nīharttavyā § 50.7.43B3. atha paśyati “ ... mā dāni ubhaye cchinnabhaktā bhaviṣyāma”, ... § 50.10.43B7. mā dāni vayaṃ ubhaye ’va bhaktacchedaṃ kariṣyāma § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena ... ubhayehiṃ antehi lohakena bandhitavyā ubhayato adv. “auf beiden Seiten”; < Skt. ubhayatas § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā ... ubhayato agre pottakhaṇḍehi veḍhayitavyā 152 ubhayato vinaya~ # “die beiden Vinaya-Texte (für Mönche und Nonnen)” ☞ § 7.4, Anm. 1 ⇒ ekato vinaya~ § 7.4.8B1. upādhyāyena tāva śrāddhevihāriṃ upasaṃpādentakenaỿva ubhayato vinayo grāhayitavyo. ubhayato vinayaṃ na pārayati, ekato vinayo grāhayitavyo § 9.4.9B7. ācāryeṇa tāva niśrayaṃ dentena antevāsi ubhayato vinayaṃ grāhayitavyo, ubhayato pi vinayaṃ na pāreti, ekato vinay{at}o grāhayitavyo ubhayato sāṃghika~ # “die beiden Gemeinden (d.h. die Gemeinden von Mönchen und Nonnen) betreffend” ☞ § 4.5, Anm. 1; ekato sāṃghika~, sarvva-sāṃghika~ § 4.5.4B2. kasyâdya bhaktaṃ ubhayato sāṃghikaṃ sarvvasāṃghikaṃ pariveṇikaṃ pāṭiyakaṃ bhaktaṃ grāme vihāre § 26.3.23A6. kim ayaṃ yavāgū ubhayato sāṃghikā parṣāye pariveṇikā nimantritikā{yāṃ}. yadi tāva ubhayato sāṃghikā bhavati, sarvvehi gantavyaṃ ubhaya-bāhā~# “beide Arme” ⇒ bāhā~ § 42.18.37A3. na dāni apūrvvacarimaṃ ubhayabāhā (od. ubhaya<ṃ> bāhā?) prasāretavyā ubhayehiṃ (Loc. pl. masc.) ⇒ ubhaya~ ubhe ⇒ ubha~ ura~ (Pā, Pkt) “Brust” ⇒ uras~ § 54.3.46A2. te ... yaṣṭī vārentā yo yeva bhikṣu pracalāyati taṃ yeva kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhananti, pāde vā āhananti uras~ “Brust” ⇒ ura~ § 55.3.46B5. yo yeva pracālayati taṃ yeva kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena urasi vā tāṇḍeti pārśvasmi vā āhananti urūyo für ūr° : § 19.31.18B5 *urṇā~ ⇒ uṇṇā~ urṇṇā~ für ullā~ : § 13.7.12B2, § 18.4.15B3 urṇṇī~# “Wolldecke”; < Skt. aurṇī (“wollen”); vgl. Pā. uṇṇī ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 3 ⇒ uṇṇī~, oṇṇī~ § 14.4.13A3. yaṃ tahiṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati kocavakā vā urṇṇīyo (Hs. ullī°) vā caturasrakā vā kumbhīyo vā kaṭāhakāni vā sarvvaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ otāretavyaṃ ulāya für *urṇāya oder Pā. uṇṇāya (< Skt. ūrṇā “Wolle”) : § 55.2.46B3 ulka-bhrama~# “Feuerhaken”; < ulkā (“Feuerbrand; Brennofen”, vgl. SWTF, s.v.) + bhrama (“Drehung”)? Oder eine Verschreibung von udaka-bhrama~ (“Abwasserkanal”)? ☞ § 42.8, Anm. 8 § 42.8.36B3. ulkabhramo karttavyo ulkā~ ⇒ ulka-bhrama~, kaṇḍolkā~, tṛṇolkā~ § 41.14.34B3. te dāni ulkāyo ca dīpikāyo ca prajvāliyāṇaṃ mārgganti ullaggaka~#, ullaggikā~# “wackelig”; < Skt. *ullagna (“locker, losgemacht”; p.pt. von Skt. ud + √lag) + Suffix ka ☞ § 14.14, Anm. 1 § 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ullaggakā ollāye gṛhītakāḥ acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā ... § 14.14.13B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ullaggakā bhava<ṃ>ti, āyacchitavyā, āyacchantiyo karttavyāḥ § 21.8.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggakaṃ vā paluggakaṃ ... § 22.7.21A3. nâpi kṣamati sā cakkalī adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggikā vā paluggikā vā prāṇakehi vā khajjanti *ullaggikāye, olaggikāya#, ollaggikāye#, ollagnāye# adv. “wie angewurzelt (sitzen- bleiben)” (adverbial verwendete oblique Formen von *olaggikā~, *ollagikā~ < Skt. ava-√lag [“verweilen”]?) ⇒ ☞ § 1.8, Anm. 1 § 1.8.1B6. nâpi dāni “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ olaggikāya āsitavyaṃ § 3.6.3B5. nâyaṃ <kṣamati> “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ ollaggikāye āsituṃ § 4.6.4B3. nâpi dāni “adhivāsita<ṃ> mayê”ti yatr’ ollagnāye āsitavyaṃ (≒ § 5.6.6B2) § 6.6.7B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati “adhivāsitaṃ mayê”ti yatr’ (Hs. tatr(’)) ollagikāye āsituṃ § 39.16.31B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi yatra p’ ullaggikāye (Hs. ullugikāye) āsituṃ. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantavyaṃ § 39.28.32A5. nâpi dāni kṣamati grāmāntikehi yatr’ ollagnāye āsituṃ. atha khalu kālena 153  kālaṃ āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ukkasitavyaṃ ul-lapa- (BHS) (1) “verspotten, beschimpfen”; vgl. Osier 2005: 23; vgl. auch SWTF I 419b, ul-lap § 31.16.26A1. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullap<itavyaṃ āg>ant<uk>ehi “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ ettha vasatha, ghuṇaviddhā tave, NandOpanandanā yūyaṃ nāgarājāno, ...” § 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. ...” ul-lapa-# (2) “aufhängen, anhängen”; < ud + *lapayati (Kausativ von Skt. √lī)? ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 5 ⇒ ol-lapa- § 14.4.13A4. mañcā pīṭhā ullapitvā sthāpayitavyā § 19.25.18B3. sāyaṃ praveśentena kunta vā tumbakā vā śikke uvvinitvā mañcakasthāne ullapitavyaṃ § 25.15.23A2. ullapantena kīlakaṃ hastena pratyavekṣitvā <ullapitavyaṃ> ullayantena für ullapa° : § 25.15.23A2 ullā~# (1), ollā~# “Schimmel” oder “Nässe”? ☞ § 13.2, Anm. 1 § 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ ullāya gṛhītakāṃ acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ udakasya pūrāṃ ... § 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ullaggakā ollāye gṛhītakāḥ acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā ... § 13.7.12B2. ullāye (Hs. urṇṇāye) gṛhītako bhavati, piṇḍaṃ śāṭiya mṛttikāye limpitavyo § 17.2.14B5. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ ... ullāye (Hs. ullāpe) gṛhītakāṃ § 17.8.15A2. ete vihārakā ullāye gṛhītakā bhavanti apratisaṃskṛtā vā uppaṃsulā vā ... § 17.8.15A2. anyehi tāvad yā bhitti ollāye gṛhītakāyo tāyo śāṭayitavyāyo § 23.1.21A4. adrākṣīd ... vihārāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ ullāye (Hs. °āpe) gṛhītakāṃ § 23.2.21A5. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā ollāye gṛhītakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā § 23.7.21B4. nâpi kṣamati vihārako adhyupekṣituṃ oddriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ollāye gṛhītako vā acokṣo vā § 23.8.21B6. ullāye (Hs. °āpe) gṛhītako bhavati, śāṭiyāṇaṃ liptopalipto ghaṣṭamaṣṭo karttavyo ullā~# (2) “Wasser”? ☞ § 18.4, Anm. 8 § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) atha dāni prapātaniśritā vā, ullā varccagharaṃ dhovanti (p.präs) gacchati, antarā kāṣṭhaṃ dātavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateya ullāpe für ullāye : § 17.2.14B5, § 23.1.21A4, § 23.8.21B6 ullāpo für ulloyo : § 23.3.21A6 (zweimal) ullīyo für urṇṇīyo : § 14.4.13A3 ullugikāye für *ullaggikāye : § 39.16.31B3 ☞ § 39.16(Text), Anm. 1 ulloka~ (Pā), ulloya~ (Pkt) “Deckenbespannung”#; vgl. Pā. ulloka, ulloca; AMg. ulloga, ulloya, ullova; Skt. ulloca ☞ § 23.3, Anm. 4 § 23.3.21A5. jyeṣṭhako nāma vihārako, bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, ulloko bhavati prapāṇḍaro (Hs. °ṇḍarā), bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā § 23.3.21A6. madhyamako nāma vihārako, <bhūmi> bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā, na ca bhavati ulloyo (Hs. ullāpo) prapāṇḍaro § 23.3.21A6. bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, nâpi bhavati ulloyo (Hs. ullāpo) prapāṇḍaro, na haỿva bhitti kṛtaparikarmmā. evaṃ kanīyasako ulloya~ ⇒ ulloka~ uviśitavyaṃ für upaviś° : § 18.23.16B2 uv-vaṭṭaya-# “reiben”; vgl. Pā. ubbaṭṭeti, BHS. udvartayati, Pkt. uvvaṭṭe- ☞ § 60.4, Anm. 2 § 60.4.48B6. atha ca dāni bhikṣu prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā sukhākaṃ uvvaṭṭayitavyaṃ (Hs. uccaṭṭ°) *uv-vatta-# “ausgehen, weggehen; ausweichen, abweichen”; < Skt. ud-vartate “ausgehen”; vgl. Pā. ubbattati; vgl. auch § 62.12.50A7. mārggato udvarttitvā ⇒ *uv-vattaya-, ud-vartta- § 18.47.17A7. nâpi dāni apratisaṃviditena uvvattitavyaṃ (Hs. uthatti°) § 19.39.19A2. atha dāni sārthe sanniviṣṭe samudācāro bhavati, ekānte uvvattiya (Hs. ucca°) karttavyaṃ. na dāni apratisaṃviditena uvvattitavyaṃ (Hs. ucca°), mā coro vā ocorako vêti hanyeyā. atha khalu saṃviditena uvvattitavyaṃ (Hs. ucca°) § 49.5.42B1. yadi tāva dakṣiṇenântenâgacchati, vāmenântena uvvattitavyaṃ (Hs. uccanti°). vāmenântenâgacchati, dakṣiṇenântena uvvattitavyaṃ (Hs. ucca°) 154  § 49.5.42B2. paścācchramaṇena vaktavyaṃ: “upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā vāmahastikam vā dakṣiṇahastikaṃ vā uvvatta (Hs. ucca°)” tti § 50.10.43B6. tatra yeva panthāto uvvattiyāṇaṃ (Hs. ucca°) sahitakehi bhuñjitavyaṃ *uv-vattaya- “ausweichen (wörtl. “ausgehen”) lassen”; Kaus. von *uv-vattate ⇒ *uv-vatta-, ud- vartta- § 49.5.42B2. hastena gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ ekato vā ekato vā uvvattayitavyo (Hs. uccatti°) *uv-vin- “hinaufbinden, aufhängen”; < *ud-vinitvā, ud-√ve; § 19.25, Anm. 2 ⇒ ā-vuṇ-, 2√vā, vuṇ-, § 19.25.18B3. śikkena uvvinitvā (Hs. ucci°) sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.25.18B3. sāyaṃ praveśentena kunta vā tumbakā vā śikke uvvinitvā mañcakasthāne ullapitavyaṃ uv-velaya-#, uv-vellaya-# “auswickeln, ausziehen, lösen”; < ud-veṣṭayati ☞ § 45.4, Anm. 1 ⇒ ā- vellaya-, ov-vellaya-, veḍhaya-, ā-veḍhaya-, veṣṭaya- § 45.4.39B6. vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ uvvelayitavyaṃ (Hs. ucce{ca}layitavyaṃ) § 45.5.39B7. grāmapraveśanakaṃ ca nivāsanaṃ uvvelayitavyaṃ (Hs. uccelay°) § 45.6.40A1. nivāsanaṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ (Hs. uccellay°) § 45.7.40A3. tato nivāsanaṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ (Hs. uccellay°) rātriprāvaraṇaṃ nivāsanaṃ ca āvellayitavyaṃ § 46.4.40A7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ (Hs. uccellay°) § 46.5.40B1. grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ (Hs. uccellay°) § 46.5.40B1. evaṃ ... vihāracaraṇakaṃ vā uvvellayitavyaṃ (Hs. uccellay°) § 46.6.40B2. ekaṃ ca āvellayitavyaṃ dvitīyaṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ (Hs. uccellay°) § 56.5.47A6. yathāsāhaṭasya niṣīdanasya dvitīyo anto uvveliya prajñapayitavyaṃ, tato niṣīditavyaṃ uśvāsa~# “Notdurft; Kot”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 142, Anm. 2 ⇒ ucchvāsa~, uccāra~, praśvāsa~, praśvāsaka~ § 18.2.15B1. yathā uṣṭrā vā goṇā vā ... evam ime śramaṇā prakīrṇṇakasya uśvāsaṃ karenti § 18.20.16A7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena uppīḍito nivasanaṃ oguhiya varccakuṭiṃ praviśati § 18.21.16B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā kṣamayituṃ, yāva uśvāsena utpīḍito tti § 18.22.16B1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena sahasā uppīḍito bhavati, ... § 18.31.16B5. tena uśvāsaṃ karaṃtena mallakena vā koḍikena vā cchorayitavyaṃ § 18.35.16B7. tenâpi dāni uśvāsaṃ kariya mallakena vā koḍillena vā ... cchoḍiyāṇa ... § 18.37.17A1. bhikṣū ... yaṃ paśyanti tatra śunakhena vā śṛgālena vā uśvāsaṃ kṛtakaṃ § 18.40.17A3. uśvāsaṃ kariya udakakṛtyaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ § 18.44.17A5. utkṣiptarathyāyāṃ kuḍyaṃ pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā uśvāso karttavyo § 18.45.17A6. bhikṣu uśvāsito bhavati, nâpi kṣamati panthesmiṃ uśvāsaṃ karttuṃ § 32.5.27A7. uśvāsam vā upaviṣṭo bhavati, na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ pādāṃ vandituṃ uśvāsa-kāra~ “seine Notdurft zu verrichten beabsichtigend” ☞ § 44.1, Anm. 3; BHSG §§ 22.2f. ⇒ uśvāsa-kāraka~, praśvāsa-kāra~ § 44.6.39A3. atha dāni bhikṣu virātrakāle uśvāsakāro vā praśvāsakāro vā nirddhāvati, ... uśvāsa-kāraka~ “seine Notdurft zu verrichten beabsichtigend” ☞ § 44.1, Anm. 3; BHSG §§ 22.2f. ⇒ praśvāsa-kāraka~, pāda-vandaka~ § 44.1.38B6. aparo ca bhikṣuḥ virātre uśvāsakārako vā praśvāsakārako vā nirddhāvito bhavati uśvāsa-kṛta~# “(ein Bedürfnis) verspürend, seine Notdurft zu verrichten” ☞ § 18.32, Anm. 1 ⇒ praśvāsa-kṛta~, samudācāra-kṛta~, u-śvāsita~ § 18.32.16B6. eṣo bhikṣuḥ cetiyaṃ vandaṃto uśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... u-śvāsita~# “(ein Bedürfnis) verspürend, seine Notdurft zu verrichten”; vgl. Skt. uc-chvāśita ☞ § 18.45, Anm. 1 ⇒ uśvāsa-kṛta~ § 18.45.17A6. bhikṣu uśvāsito bhavati, nâpi kṣamati panthesmiṃ uśvāsaṃ karttuṃ *uś-śaṃkita~ “verdächtigt”; < ud + Skt. √śaṅk; vgl. Pā. ussaṅkita (“angezweifelt, verdächtigt”) ⇒ uśśaṃkiya-pariśaṅkiya~ § 18.43.17A5. na dāni tahiṃ atiniḥśabdapradeśe upaveṣṭavyaṃ, mā uśśaṃkito (Hs. 155  uggaṃkito) bhaveyaṃ uśśaṃkiya-pariśaṅkiya~# “anrüchig”; wörtl. “jemand, dem man mißtrauen und den man verdächtigen muß”; vgl. CPD, s.v. ussaṅkita-parisaṅkita (“mistrusted and suspected”) ⇒ *uś- śaṃkita~ § 8.7.9A4. uśśa<ṃ>kiyapariśaṅkiyāṇi kulāni vyapadiśati, vāretavyo vaktavyo “mā tahiṃ gaccha!” uṣāntake für upāntake : § 42.18.37A2 uṣṭaparyaṃkena für uṣṭra° : § 29.1.24A6 uṣṭikā~ für uṣṭrikā : § 40.4.32B5 uṣṭra~ “Kamel” § 18.2.15B1. yathā uṣṭrā vā goṇā vā garddabhā vā cchagalakā vā evam ime śramaṇā prakīrṇṇakasya uśvāsaṃ karenti (≒ § 19.2.17B4) § 18.29.16B4. nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā garddabhena vā ūrūyo ’hayaṃtena gacchituṃ § 18.33.16B6. na kṣamati <yathā> uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā ūrūyo ohayantena gantuṃ § 19.13.18A3. na kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā gardabhena vā ūrūyo omūtriyantena gantuṃ (≒ § 19.31.18B5) uṣṭra-paryaṅka~# “das Knien wie ein Kamel” ☞ § 29.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ paryaṅka~ § 29.1.24A6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ uṣṭ<r>aparyaṃkena prahāṇaṃ upaviśaṃti, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahanti § 29.2.24A7. satyaṃ bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikā, evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahatha? § 29.2.24A7. duṣkṛtaṃ ... evaṃ ca yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha § 29.3.24A7. tena hi <na> kṣamati uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdituṃ § 29.3.24B1. na kṣamati uṣṭraparyaṅkena niṣīdituṃ uṣṭrikā~ eine Art Gefäß ☞ § 40.5, Anm. 1 § 40.5.32B5. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya, golakā vā maṇikā vā uṣṭrikā (Hs. uṣṭikā; vgl. PW, s.v. uṣṭrikā) vā thaganakā vā ... karakīyo vā <pūrayitavyā?> u-ṣṭhapaya-# “aufstellen, hinstellen”; < Skt. ud + sthāpayati > Pā. uṭṭhapeti, Pkt. uṭṭhavei ⇒ ut- thapaya-, ut-thape-, ut-thāpaya-, ut-tatthapaya-, thapaya-, thape-, sthapaya-, √sthā usw. § 41.22.35A6. pādopadhānakaṃ udakad<ak>āna<ka>ṃ pi ca uṣṭhapayitvā u-ṣṭhiha- “sich hinstellen”; < Skt. ut-√sthā ⇒ ut-√thā, ut-thāpaya-, ut-thiha-, u-ṣṭhapaya-, √sthā; vgl. Pā. uṭṭhahati § 52.3.44B2. nâpi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā bhuṃjantānāṃ tena dāni uṣṭhihitvā āsitavyaṃ uṣṇa~ ⇒ ati-uṣṇam, aty-āti-uṣṇam, aty-ūṣṇam § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... uṣṇaṃ bhavati, snāpetavyo § 42.3.36A4. te ... uṣṇena ca dhūmena ca saṃtāpitāḥ udakaṃ na labhanti § 42.3.36A5. dhūmena ca uṣṇena ca marāma § 42.3.36A5. dhūmena ca uṣṇena ca suṣṭhu saṃtāpitāḥ § 42.3.36A5. te dāni uṣṇena ca santāpitāḥ bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārgganti, na labhanti § 42.4.36A7. ete dāni bhikṣū uṣṇena ca dhūmena ca santāpitā nirddhāvitā bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārggayanti, na labhanti uṣṇam für atiuṣṇam: § 1.12.2A5 *uṣṇa-śaṃka~ “Sorge um die Hitze”; vgl. Skt. śaṅkā ☞ § 6.8, Anm. 1 § 6.8.7B6. atha dāni grīṣmakālo bhavati, anukālaṃ uṣṇa{ṃ}śaṃkena praviśitavyaṃ uṣṇa-santāpa~# “starke Hitze” ☞ § 5.8, Anm. 3 § 5.8.6B6. atha dāni grīṣmakālo bhavati, uṣṇasantāpena anukallatarakaṃ praviśitavyaṃ uṣṇodaka~ (uṣṇa-ud°) ⇒ uṣṇodaka-karaka~ § 42.21.37A5. yadi tāva mitakaṃ dīyati uṣṇodakaṃ ghaṭena vā kuṇḍena vā, tena tathā yeva grahetavyaṃ uṣṇodaka-karaka~# “Krug für warmes Wasser” § 41.10.34A6. yo pi so brāhmaṇānāṃ uṣṇodakakarako, so pi na evaṃ śucī uṣpīḍito für uppīḍito : § 19.6.17B7 u-sphoṣe-# “spritzen, besprengen”; < Skt. ut-√*spruṣ (vgl. CDIAL, S. 504a, pruṣ1); vgl. Pā. phoseti 156  (“besprengt”), paripphoseti (dass.), Pkt. upphusiūṇaṃ (“nachdem man besprengt hat”; Abhidh- rāj, s.v.) § 42.18.37A2. parikramma karentehi na dāni svedena vā malena vā usphoṣetavyo upāntake usreṇaka~# “prahlerisch”?; Denominativ von Skt. ud (“hinauf, hinaus”) + śreṇ (“Schar, Menge”) oder von Skt. ut + √śri?; vgl. Pā. ussita (< Skt. ut + śrita) “aufgerichtet, arrogant” ☞ § 38.3, Anm. 2 § 38.3.30A6. yadi tāva so bhavati usreṇako vā pravarddhako vā anarthakuśalo vā ... usvedaka~# “feucht”; < Skt. *utsveda (“sweat”, CDIAL 1920)? ☞ § 13.15, Anm. 1 ⇒ opasvedika~ § 13.16.12B7. atha dāni usvedako bhavati, śuddhena gomayena mardditavyaṃ § 13.17.12B7. vihāro usvedako bhavati, na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati hastaśaucaṃ vā karttuṃ ... us-sara- (Pā) “sich entfernen”; < Skt. apa-√sṛ (“herabgleiten, sich entfernen”); vgl. Pā. ussarati “hastens away, gets out of the way; comes from” < Skt. ut-sarati [DP, s.v.]) ☞ § 19.37, Anm. 2 ⇒ o-sara-, o-saraya-, o-sāraya-, osarantikāye § 19.37.19A2. atha khalu ekānte praśvāso karttavyo. panthāto ussariya ekānte karttavyaṃ us-sāraya- “rezitieren”; < Skt. *ut-√svar; vgl. Pā. ussāreti ☞ § 2.10, Anm. 2 § 2.10.3A4. tato vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ ussārayitavyaṃ Ū ū/u ⇒ u/ū ū / ra : § 19.42.19A3. pratimūtraṃ für pūtim° ūnaka~ “unvollständig” § 50.9.43B5. cchandayitavyo vaktavyo “ūnakaṃ pūrehi (“Stille deinen Hunger!”; ☞ § 50.9, Anm. 1) yaṃ te rucyati taṃ khādehi.” ūru~ “Schenkel” § 18.29.16B5. nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā garddabhena vā ūrūyo (Acc. pl.; Hs. °ūpo) ’hayaṃtena gacchituṃ § 18.33.16B6. na kṣamati <yathā> uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā ūrūyo (Hs. °ūpo) ohayantena gantuṃ § 19.13.18A4. na kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā gardabhena vā ūrūyo omūtriyantena gantuṃ § 19.31.18B5. nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā ūrūyo (Hs. ur°) omūtra<ya>ntena gantuṃ ūrūpo für ūrūyo : § 18.29.16B5, § 18.33.16B6, § 19.13.18A4 ūṣa~ “Steppensalz; Erdsalz” ☞ § 17.10, Anm. 6 § 18.7.15B5. tahiṃ sthāpetavyaṃ karīṣo mṛttikā vā ūṣo vā Ṛ ṛ / ri : § 18.7.15B6. nisṛtā für niśritā ṛkta~ (BHS) “frei, leer”; Hypersanskritismus für Skt. rikta ⇒ rikta~, ritta~ § 18.42.17A4. yadi tāvad āha “ṛkto”, udakadakānakaṃ ādāya praveṣṭavyaṃ § 41.1.33B4. te dāni bhikṣu paśyanti tāṃ pādadhovanikāṃ ṛktāṃ E e/a ⇒ a/e e / aṃ ⇒ aṃ / e e / a + | (Daṇḍa) ⇒ a + | (Daṇḍa) / e e/ā ⇒ ā/e 157 e/i ⇒ i/e e/ī ⇒ ī/e e / ai : § 4.10.5A2. anaikāyo für anekāyo? § 18.16.16A4. kaṇḍavidalikaina für °kena e/o: § 3.6.3B4. poṣadhe für °dho § 4.17.5B5. śīlohi für °ehi § 6.10.8A1. paṭipāṭikāyo für °kāye § 12.11.11B6. duro für dūre § 17.5.15A1. eto für ete § 18.7.15B5. bāhirodivā für bāhire-d-eva ? § 18.16.16A3. pecchesi für pocch° § 18.18.16A6. varcce für varcco § 19.9.18A2. ubhayohi für °yehi § 19.14.18A4. veḍḍe für veḍḍo Uddāna (II).20A5. varṣopanāyiko für °ike § 24.3.22A2. kheṭe für kheṭo § 24.12.22A7. aprakṛtijñona für °jñena § 25.8.22B4. kapāṭo für °pāṭe usw. e / au : § 18.44.17A5. sau für se e + | (Daṇḍa) / o : § 42.13.36B6. yathāyo für parṣāye |(Daṇḍa) e- (ā-√ī) § 31.28.26B3. atha khalu āgantukānāṃ ehisvāgataṃ kartta<vya>ṃ “entu (Hs. ettu) āyuṣ- manto, svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. ...” § 39.13.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha tumhe. āraṇyakâpi eṣyantî”ti § 39.25.32A2. atha dāni āha “āhaṇatha tumhe. grāmāntikâpi eṣyantî”ti § 50.1.43A3. so dāni bhikṣuḥ vihāram āgatvā āgameti “idānīṃ pi eṣyati muhūrttaṃ pi eṣyati” yāva akālībhūtaṃ eka~ § 14.3.13A3. tahi eko vā dvau vā trayo vā yāvatakā ucchahanti § 29.5.24B3. arddha śīrṣasya pithetavyaṃ eko ca karṇṇo § 31.34.27A1. sarvve yeva gocaraṃ praviśanti ... eko vā rakṣapālo dātavyo § 40.4.32B5. eko vā dvayo vā trayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti § 41.12.34B1. tasya dāni eko putro acirajāto § 41.14.34B3. so eko dārako dṛṣṭo § 42.15.36B7. eko niṣkrāmati, eko praviśati § 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā, eko vā dvayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti, navakānto vā paṭipāṭikāye vā yasya vā prāpuṇati § 62.2.49B6. eko tāva pūtivātakarmmaṃ karoti. aparo “gaccha” tti. aparo “ḍharaḍha<ra>” tti § 40.10.33A3. yathā eka (Nom. sg. masc.) hasto nirāmiṣo bhavati § 44.6.39A4. cīvaravaṃśakāto cīvarāṇi muṃciya ekaṃ dvitīyaṃ vā tṛtīyam vā kṛṣiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ patitaṃ § 46.6.40B2. ekaṃ ca āvellayitavyaṃ dvitīyaṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ § 52.5.44B4. sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ, lūhaṃ ca praṇītaṃ ca ekañ ca aparaṃ ca § 39.6.31A3. duve thālīyo ... ekā grāmāntikānāṃ. ekā āraṇyakānāṃ § 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayi- tavyā ... eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo § 3.5.3B3. yo dāni bhavati māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko tena ekam ekaṃ saṃsārayitavyaṃ devasikaṃ § 39.29.32A7. duṣkaraṃ pravivekena durabhiramaṃ ekaṃ paraṃ rātri vinayamāno mānasaṃ ādhyātmaṃ vā § 41.4.33B7. ekam idaṃ bhikṣavo samayaṃ Śāriputro sthaviro Vaiśālyām viharati Mahā- vane Kūṭāgāraśālāyāṃ§ 57.1.47B1. te ... upānahā nikkhāsiya eka<ṃ> pi ekena hastena 158  pārṣṇikāvaddhrakasmi gṛhītvā dvitīyaṃ dvitīyena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrake gṛhītvā ... prasphoṭanti § 57.3.47B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... upānahā nikkhāsiya ekam pi ekena hastena pārṣṇivaddhrake gṛhṇiya dvitīyaṃ dvitīyena hastena pārṣṇivaddhrake gṛhṇiya “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 62.6.50A2. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati saṃprajāna ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipiyāṇaṃ hastena vivaritvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.8.50A4. atha khalu eka<ṃ> phiccakaṃ utkṣipiya vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.9.50A5. atha khalu ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipitvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 14.9.13A7. ekena abhyantaraghaṭṭimaṃ vihārakāṃ kariya § 14.18.13B5. sarvvehi bhikṣūhi nidhāvantehi ekena vihārako abhyantaghaṭṭimo karttavyo § 23.4.4.21B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati ekenântena. atha khalu samantena caṃkramitavyaṃ § 40.15.33A7. ekena madhyama<ṃ> vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ, apareṇa praṇetavyaṃ § 40.15.33A7. ekena vāretavyaṃ (Hs. cār°) § 41.28.35B4~5. ekena āsiñcitavyaṃ ekena dhovitavyaṃ § 42.15.36B7. ekena hastena agrato praticchāditvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 44.1.38B7. taṃ dāni ekena ākrāntaṃ dvitīyena ākrāntaṃ ... § 44.6.39A4. ekena ’krāntaṃ dvitīyena ākrāntaṃ ... § 40.13.33A5. ekinā (Instr. sg. masc.; vgl. BHSG § 21.14) hastena pānīyaṃ parigṛhṇi- tavyaṃ § 42.7.36B2. ekāye (Instr. sg. fem.) vātapānīye vīthīye dvauvikā (?) bhavati dvitīyā karttavyā § 18.13.16A2. antamasato kumbhikāyaṃ ekasya paryāptaṃ bhaveyā, tattakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 31.3.25B3. ekasyâpi apāvuraṇi na bhavati, sarvve vinayātikramaṃ āsādayaṃti. ekasyâpi apāvuraṇi bhavati, sarvveṣām anāpattiḥ § 49.1.42A1. ekasyaỿva mama phāsu bhavati § 24.6.22A3. (den Schleim) ekasya (Gen. sg. fem.; vgl. BHSG § 9.75) upānahāye tale cchorayitavyaṃ dvitīyena marddayitavyaṃ § 41.8.34A4. ekasya (Gen. sg. fem.) upānaho vaddhro pocchito § 41.8.34A4. ekasya upānahā talaṃ pocchitaṃ § 41.24.35A7. ekasyôpānahāye vaddhro pocchitavyo § 41.24.35A7. ekasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ (= § 41.29.35B5) § 41.29.35B5. ekasya upānahāye vadhro pocchitavyo § 19.16.18A5. ekasmi (vgl. BHSG § 21.20) koṇe sarvvasaṃghasya praśvāsaghaṭo sthāpayitavyo § 53.19.45B7. dīpavarttīyo niṣpīḍiyāṇaṃ ekaṃhi (Loc. sg.; vgl. BHSG § 21.21) koṇake sthāpetavyāyo § 18.29.16B5. atha khalu saṃghārāmasya ekahiṃ (Loc. sg. masc.; vgl. BHSG § 21.22) ante upaviśitavyaṃ § 44.4.39A1. bhikṣūḥ ekahi (Loc. sg. masc.; vgl. BHSG § 21.22) vihārake prati<saṃ>- kramanti usw. ekaṃhi# Loc. sg. von eka~; vgl. Pā. ekamhi; BHSG § 21.21 § 53.19.45B7. dīpavarttīyo niṣpīḍiyāṇaṃ ekaṃhi koṇake sthāpetavyāyo eka-tama~ ⇒ ekatam’ ante § 18.45.17A6. ekatamaṃ jjhāṭam vā vṛkṣaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariyāṇa upaviśitavyaṃ ekatam’ ante # “in einer Ecke”; diese Wendung ist wahrscheinlich für die Schule der Mahāsāṃghika- Lokottaravādins charakteristisch ☞ § 24.8, Anm. 4 ⇒ ekamantaṃ, ekamante, ekamantena, ekānte, ekāntake, ekāntena § 19.13.18A4. ekatam’ aṃte upaviśiya praśvāso karttavyo; vgl. § 18.29.16B5. ekahiṃ ante upaviśitavyaṃ § 24.8.22A5. yaṃ kālaṃ gacchati, tato ekatam’ aṃte cchorayitavyo § 36.4.29B3. ekatam’ ante cchatropānahāṃ nikṣipiya gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā § 58.6.48A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya ukkāsikā āgacchati ... ekatam’ aṃte āgacchiya 159  kāsitavyaṃ § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni <na> pāreti vinodayituṃ, punaḥ punaḥ khajjati, ekatam’ aṃte gacchiya kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ ekato (Pā) “einerseits”; < Skt. ekatas § 49.5.42B2. hastena gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ ekato vā ekato vā (“hierhin und dorthin”?) uvvattayi- tavyo ekato vinaya~ # “ein Vinaya-Text (d.h. der für Mönche)” ⇒ ubhayato vinaya~ § 7.4.8B1. ubhayato vinayaṃ na pārayati, ekato vinayo grāhayitavyo. ekato vinayaṃ na pārayati, pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa grāhayitavyo (≒ § 9.4.9B7) ekato sāṃghika~ # “die einseitige Gemeinde (d.h. die Gemeinde von Mönchen) betreffend”  (wesentlich ein Synonym für sarvva-sāṃghika~) ☞ § 42.24, Anm. 1 ⇒ ubhayato sāṃghika~, sarvva-sāṃghika~ § 42.24.37B1. jānitavyaṃ: kim ayaṃ jentāko ekato sāṃghiko parṣāyaṃ pariveṇiko nimantritakānāṃ § 42.24.37B1. yadi tāva ekato sāṃghiko bhavati, sarvvasaṃghena gantavyaṃ ekatyaṃ “mehrmals”#; vgl. BHS. ekatya; Pā. ekacca, ekatiya, Aś. ekatiya, Pkt. egaiya § 26.1.23A4. te dāni āyuṣmaṃto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ekatyaṃ yavāgūṃ nindanti, ekatyaṃ praśaṃsanti eka-nivasana~# “(nur) das Untergewand anhabend” ⇒ eka-nivasanaka~, eka-nivāsanaka~, nivasana~ § 32.5.27B1. snāyati vā ekanivasano vā bhavati, bhaktakṛtyaṃ karoti, purebhaktikam vā karoti, ... na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 46.1.40A3. ekanivasanā grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarakāni mārgganti § 46.2.40A5. ekanivasanā grāmapraveśanakāni cīvarāṇi mārggatha eka-nivasanaka~# “(nur) das Untergewand anhabend” ⇒ eka-nivasana~, eka-nivāsanaka~, nivasana~, nivāsana~ § 32.6.27B2. varccakuṭīṃ gacchantasya, nagnasya vā ekanivasanakasya (Hs. °kena) vā § 46.4.40A6. nâpi kṣamati ... ekanivasanakena grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi mārggituṃ § 46.5.40A7. nâpi kṣamati ... ekanivasanakena vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ mārggituṃ § 46.6.40B1. nâpi kṣamati ... ekanivasanakena leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ mārggituṃ eka-nivāsanaka~# “(nur) das Untergewand anhabend” ⇒ eka-nivasanaka~, eka-nivasana~, nivasana~, nivāsana~ § 46.1.40A4. ekanivāsanakā vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarakāni mārgganti § 46.2.40A5. ekanivasanakā vihāracīvarakāni mārggatha eka-puṭa~ (BHS) ⇒ -puṭa~ eka-putraka~ “der einzige Sohn” § 20.1.19A5. so dāni taṃ unneti va<r>ddheti ghaṭasiktakaṃ ekaputrakaṃ (Hs. °ko) viya § 20.1.19A6. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ mama āmrapotakaṃ ghaṭasiktakaṃ ekaputrakaṃ viya saṃvarddhita{vya}ṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi § 20.2.19A6. so dāni tena unnīto varddhito ghaṭasiktako ekaputrako viya eka-bhakta-tarppaṇa~# “gemeinsame Erfrischungen und Speisen; gemeinsame Mahlzeiten” § 39.1.30B6. āraṇyakaṃ tāva śeyyāsanaṃ grāmāntikañ ca ekabhaktatarppaṇañ {ca} § 39.5.31A2. etaṃ dāni grāmāntikaṃ ca śeyyāsanaṃ āraṇyakañ ca śeyyāsanaṃ ca ekabhaktatarppaṇaṃ bhavati ekamataṃ für ekamaṃtaṃ : § 61.8.49B1 ekamate für ekamaṃte : § 59.7.48B4 ekamantaṃ (Pā), ekamante (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “beiseite” ⇒ ekatam’ ante, ekamantena, ekānte, ekāntake, ekāntena § 8.10.9A7. uddeśaṃ gṛhṇiya ekamante svādhyāyatena āsitavyaṃ § 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya ... § 18.17.16A5. atha khalu ekamante kūṭakaṃ karttavyaṃ § 18.33.16B7. ekamante nivāsa<na>ṃ o<gu>hiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 35.4.29A4. cchatropānahāṃ ekamante sthapiya brāhmaṇaparṣāyām upasaṃkramitavyaṃ § 43.8.38A6. ekamante sthapetavyāḥ 160  § 59.7.48B4. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, ekama<ṃ>te gacchiya kṣīvitavyaṃ § 61.8.49B1. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ekama<ṃ>taṃ gatvā <vijṛmbhi- tavyaṃ> § 62.10.50A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno vātakarmma āgacchati, ekamantaṃ {ā}gacchiya karttavyaṃ § 62.11.50A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya vātakarmma āgacchati, ekamantaṃ gacchiya karttavyaṃ ekamantena# “beiseite” ⇒ ekatam’ ante, ekamantaṃ, ekamante, ekānte, ekāntake, ekāntena § 19.31.18B6. atha khalu ekamantena praśvāso karttavyo § 20.13.20A1. vāmena ca hastena kuccako gṛhṇitavyaḥ paścāt ekamantena cchorayitavyaḥ eka-m-eka~ (BHS, Pā) “je einer”; vgl. Skt. ekaika § 14.13.13B2. sāmagrīye saṃviditvā tahiṃ ekameko vâ<ṃ>śaśo dātavyo dve vā dve vā trayo vā trayo vā eka-vastuka~# “(nur) ein Gebäude habend” ☞ § 12.16, Anm. 2 § 12.16.12A3. atha dāni ekavastukaṃ bhavati, bhikṣū ca bahu bhavaṃti ... eka-sthāne “an einem Ort” § 39.26.32A4. atha dāni teṣāṃ na koci lābhagrāhako bhavati, pariveṣakena sarvveṣāṃ ekasthāne piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo § 42.14.36B7. snāyantena cīvarakaṃ sāharitvā ekasthāne sthavitavyaṃ loḍhikena vā paṭikāya vā § 53.19.45B7. dīpakoṭikāyo ekasthāne sthāpayitavyā § 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ eka-hastena# “mit einer Hand” § 25.11.22B6. gṛhṇantena nâpi kṣamati ekahastena duve trayo vā pātrāṇi gṛhṇituṃ § 25.11.22B7. paramaṃ trayo pātrāṇi gṛhṇitavyāni. ekahastena dve gṛhṇitavyāḥ, apareṇa dāni ekaṃ ekahi (BHS), ekahiṃ# Loc. sg. masc. von eka~; vgl. BHSG § 21.22 ⇒ eka, amukahiṃ, kahiṃ, tahi, tahiṃ, yahiṃ § 18.29.16B5. atha khalu saṃghārāmasya ekahiṃ ante upaviśitavyaṃ § 44.4.39A1. bhikṣūḥ ekahi vihārake prati<saṃ>kramanti ekāṃśa-kṛtena für ekāṃsa-k°: § 1.10.2A2, § 3.9.3B7, 4A1, § 26.5.23B1 ekāṃśī-kṛtena für ekāṃsī-k°: § 20.15.20A3 ekāṃsa~ (BHS, SWTF) (eka + a°) “zur einen Schulter gehörend, auf einer Schulter getragen”; vgl. Pā. ekaṃsa § 54.10.46A6. yaṣṭi ... atha khalu ekāṃsaṃ (Hs. ekāṃsīkṛtena) cīvaraṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ tena vāretavyaṃ ekāṃsa-kṛta~# (eka + a°) “eine Schulter entblößt habend” ⇒ ekāṃsī-kṛta~ ☞ § 1.10, Anm. 3 § 1.10.2A2. hastāṃ nirmmādiya oguṇṭhikāṃ apaniya upānahāṃ omuñciya ekāṃsakṛtena śalākā vārayitavyā (≒ § 2.8.3A1) § 1.10.2A2. atha khalu ekāṃsakṛtena (Hs. ekāṃś°) hastān nirmmādiya oguṇṭhikāṃ apaniya upānahāṃ omuñciya śalākā{ṃ} gṛhṇitavyā § 2.8.3A1. ekāṃsakṛteṇa śalākā praticchitavyā § 3.9.3B7~4A1. hastāṃ nirmmādiya upānahāṃ omuñciya ekāṃsakṛtena (Hs. ekāṃś°) śalākā vārayitavyā ... ekāṃsakṛtena (Hs. ekāṃś°) śalākā praticchitavyā § 19.10.18A2. atha khalu ekāṃsakṛtena ekānte dantakāṣṭhaṃ sthāpayitvā upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 26.5.23B1. upānahā ni<k>khāsiya ekāṃsakṛtena (Hs. ekāṃś°) yavāgū praticchitavyā ekāṃsī-kṛta~ (BHS[Mvu]) “eine Schulter entblößt habend” ⇒ ekāṃsa-kṛta~ ☞ § 1.10, Anm. 3 § 18.27.16B4. atha khalu ekāṃsīkṛtena praveṣṭavyaṃ § 20.15.20A3. ekāṃsīkṛtena (Hs. °ṃśīkṛ°) ekānte khāditavyaṃ § 41.30.35B6. atha khalu ekāṃsīkṛtena upaviśitavyaṃ § 54.6.46A4. yaṣṭi ... atha khalu ekāṃsīkṛtena vārayitavyā § 54.10.46A6. yaṣṭi ... atha khalu ekāṃsaṃ (Hs. ekāṃsīkṛtena) cīvaraṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ tena vāretavyaṃ 161 ekāntake “beiseite”# ☞ § 19.26, Anm. 4 ⇒ ekānte, ekatam’ ante, ekamantaṃ, ekamante, ekamantena, ekāntena § 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo, yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso gaccheyā. ekāntake karttavyaṃ ekānte (1) “zur Seite; beiseite” ⇒ ekatam’ ante, ekamantaṃ, ekamante, ekāntake, ekāntena, ekamantena § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi ekānte sthapetavyāni § 11.5.10B6. yadi tāva ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ bhavati, sāharitvā ekānte sthāpayitavyaṃ § 18.27.16B4. dantakāṣṭhaṃ ... ekānte nikṣipitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 18.47.17A6. sārthe niviṣṭasmiṃ samudācāro bhavati, ekānte upaviśiya karttavyaṃ § 19.10.18A2. atha khalu ekāṃsakṛtena ekānte dantakāṣṭhaṃ sthāpayitvā upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 19.25.18B3. mallakaṃ bhavati, ekānte ujjhitvā dhovitvā ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.37.19A1. atha khalu ekānte praśvāso karttavyo. panthāto ussariya ekānte karttavyaṃ § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādantā ekānte niṣaṇṇā āsanti pravāta- gandhikena mukhena § 20.5.19B1. kiṃ ete bhikṣavo bhikṣū ekānte āsanti kalahitakā viya manye? § 20.5.19B1. tato ete bhikṣavo ekānte āsanti pravātagandhikena mukhena § 20.15.20A3. ekāṃsīkṛtena ekānte khāditavyaṃ § 24.9.22A6. kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā utthitvā ekānte kṛtvā punaḥ upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 24.10.22A6. upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā mūle kheṭaṃ vyābahati, ekānte karttavyaṃ § 29.4.24B2. utthipitvā (vermutlich für *utthihitvā) vā ekānte caṃkramitavyaṃ § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ekānte bhavati ucchedake vā vṛkṣamūlake vā vihāre vā pratisaṃ- līnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ § 34.4.28B4. ekānte cchattraṃ nikṣipiya upānahāy’ omuṃciya tato allīyitavyaṃ § 39.9.31A6. cetiyaṃ vanditvā ekānte svādhyāyo karttavyo, dharmmam vā cintayantehi āsitavyaṃ § 40.12.33A5. taṃ bhājanaṃ ekānte sthapitvā, tṛṇaṃ vā kulikaṃ vā upari dātavyā abhijñānaṃ, yathā jñāye “akalpiyan” ti § 43.11.38B1. atha dāni tṛṇapraveśikā bhavanti, ekānte sthapetavyaṃ § 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā § 43.16.38B4. ekānte sthapetavyā § 46.5.40B1. prasphoṭayitvā sāharitvā ekānte sthapayitavyaṃ (2) “ausschließlich, nur” § 50.6.43B2. ekānte yūṣaṃ sākavyañjanaṃ vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ ekāntena “in einer Ecke”# ⇒ ekatam’ ante, ekamantaṃ, ekamante, ekānte, ekāntake, ekamantena § 19.28.18B5. atha khalu ekāntena kṛtvā ujjhitavyaṃ ekoddeśaka~ (eka-udd°)# “eine gemeinsame Rezitation (des Prātimokṣa) durchführend”; vgl. SWTF. ekoddeśa, Pā. ekuddesa ⇒ uddeśa, sūtroddeśaka~ § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ sahitānāṃ saṃmodamānānāṃ avivadamānānāṃ ekoddeśakānāṃ kṣīrodakībhūtānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? eca für eva : § 39.5.31A3 ecacciro für evacciro : § 32.2.27A5 eḍaka~ ⇒ prabhūta-hasty-aśva-aja-gav’-eḍaka~ etad~ (1) § 1.2.1B3. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣū bhagavato ārocayeṃsu/°eṃsuḥ (= § 4.2.4A7, § 5.2. 6A6, § 7.1.8A7, § 20.6.19B3, § 20.9.19B5, § 41.1.33B4, § 55.3.46B5 et passim) § 2.1.2B1. āhaṃsu “no h’ etaṃ dīrghāyu” § 4.12.5A5. āha “na hi. āryasya etaṃ evaṃ dīyati.” § 4.15.5B1. etehi buddhehi maharddhikehi (Loc. pl. masc.) ye devatā santi abhiprasannā (vs) (= § 6.13.8A4) 162  § 5.7.6B5. bhante etaṃ sidhyati, etaṃ pacyati (≒ § 6.7.7B5) § 14.12.13B1. etāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā ... § 17.5.15A1. ya ete droṇīśramaṇakā te pratisaṃskariṣyanti; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 210. 7A8.2. yā eṣā kumārībhūtā ... sā ... § 18.15.16A2. eṣaỿvârthotpattiḥ (= § 20.6.19B2) § 18.20.16A6. eṣā evârthotpattiḥ (= § 19.6.17B7, § 20.4.19A7, § 42.2.36A2, § 54.3.46A2, § 55.3.46B4) § 20.5.19B1. tato ete bhikṣavo ekānte āsanti ... § 31.35.27A2. eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho prayāto § 38.8.30B3. sarvve tvaṃ (Gen. sg.) etaṃ kāryaṃ samagreṇa saṃghena suvyupaśāntaṃ § 39.7.31A4. ete āraṇyakā āgacchanti § 18.2.15B1. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣūhi śrutaṃ (= § 19.2.17B5, § 19.6.7B7, § 20.1.19A6, § 30.1.24B6, § 36.1.29B1, § 40.1.32B3, § 46.1.40A4, § 47.1.40B4, § 48.1.41A4 usw.) § 41.11.34A7. na etarhi eva-m-anyadâpi eṣo etasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.14.34B4. etaṃ gṛhaṃ śūnyakaṃ § 41.17.34B7. asmākaṃ tāva eṣo ... hitakāmo § 41.17.34B7. yo (für ye?) etasya mātāpitā vā jñātikā vā tehi eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati § 41.18.35A1. yadi vayaṃ etasya dharmmiṣṭhasya etaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ harema, ... § 41.18.35A2. muñcema vayaṃ etaṃ etasya hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ § 41.20.35A4. bhagavān etasmin vastuni Dharmmapadaṃ bhāṣate § 41.21.35A5. naỿtad evaṃ draṣṭavyaṃ § 41.21.35A5. eṣo Śāriputro sthaviro § 41.21.35A5. anyo so corasenāpati eṣo brāhmaṇo § 41.21.35A5. tadâpi etasya eṣo ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.21.35A5. etarhi pi eṣo sthavirasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 42.24.37B1. etaṃ dāni jentākasya ārocitaṃ bhavati § 42.4.36A7. ete dāni bhikṣū § 42.13.36B6. eṣo jentāko sarvvasāṃghiko ... § 42.31.37B7. etaṃ praveśayiṣyāma § 45.1.39B4. etaṃ (Hs. ete) prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣūhi śrutaṃ § 51.7.44A3. jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” ... jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati” (= § 51.10.44A5, § 51.12.44A6) § 51.8.44A4. jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” ... jānitavyaṃ “eṣā na dāsyati” (= § 51.11.44A5) § 51.9.44A4. jānitavyaṃ “dāhiti eṣā” ... jānitavyaṃ “na dāhiti eṣā” § 54.13.46B1. atha khalu cintetavyaṃ “bahukaro eṣo asmākaṃ vinīvaraṇaṃ karoti.” § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” et passim (2) als Indefinitpronomen “wenn irgendein ...; wenn jemand ...” ☞ § 12.5, Anm. 1 ⇒ etad~ ... ka~ + ci § 3.6.3B3. eṣo dāni saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, ... yo tatra pratibalo bhavati tena jānitavyaṃ § 9.6.10A2. eṣo ācāryo niśrayaṃ dadiya antevāsi naỿva ovadati, nânuśāsati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 12.5.11B2. eṣā dāni saṃghasya varṣopanāyikā bhavati, prakṛtyaỿva tāva dāyakadānapati pratisaritavyā, tato vihārakā pratisaṃskarttavyāḥ § 14.3.13A2. etaṃ dāni āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ himadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na vasati, na kṣamati ... § 17.8.15A2. ete vihārakā ullāye gṛhītakā bhavanti apratisaṃskṛtā vā uppaṃsulā vā ... § 17.12.15A6. ete mañcā vā pīṭhā vā bhagnakā vā bhavanti, ... § 18.28.16B4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ ... samudācārakṛto bhavati, ... § 18.32.16B6. eṣo bhikṣuḥ cetiyaṃ vandaṃto uśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 18.37.17A1. ete dve bhikṣū cetiyaṃ vandanti, yaṃ paśyanti tatra .... § 18.38.17A2. ete dve bhikṣū gocaraṃ praviśanti, prakṛty’ eva tāva cchaḍḍayitavyaṃ 163 § 18.45.17A5. ete bhikṣu sārthena sārddham adhvānaṃ gacchaṃti, bhikṣu uśvāsito bhavati, nâpi kṣamati, ... § 18.53.17B2. eṣo hi bhikṣuḥ dīrghakena khāyitako bhavati, ... § 19.12.18A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇa upaviṣṭako praśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 19.30.18B5. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandanto praśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 19.35.18B7. eṣo bhikṣuḥ gocaraṃ praviśati, prakṛty’ eva tāva praśvāsaṃ kariya ... § 19.37.19A1. eṣo bhikṣuḥ sārthena samānam adhvānaṃ gacchati, praśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 20.11.19B7. so eṣo bhikṣuḥ (“Wenn irgendein Mönch ...” ☞ § 20.11, Anm. 3) nir- avaśeṣaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati vinayātikrama āsādayati § 20.18.20A4. sa eṣo bhikṣuḥ (“Wenn irgendein Mönch ...” ☞ § 20.11, Anm. 3) sarvveṇa sarvvaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 33.14.28A6. te ete (“Diejenigen, die ...” ☞ § 20.11, Anm. 3) gṛhi-ālāpena ālapanti vā pravyāharanti vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsādayaṃti § 20.19.20A4. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandati, paśyati dantapoṇaṃ, cchorayitavyo § 24.7.22A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ divāvihāraṃ gato caṃkramati, śleṣmiko bhikṣu bhavati, ito ca <ito ca> cchorayanto caṃkramati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 24.11.22A6. etasya (Hs. eṣo) dāni bhikṣusya gocaraṃ praviśantasya ... kheṭo āgacchati § 24.12.22A7. eṣo bhikṣuḥ stūpaṃ vandati stūpābhigṛhe vā <paśyati?> ... § 26.3.23A6. eṣo dāni yavāgūye samayo ārocito bhavati, tato jānitavyaṃ: kim ayaṃ yavāgū ... § 26.10.23B3. ete vilambakā yavāgūḥ nindanti vā praśaṃsanti vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsādayanti § 28.5.24A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā sārddhaṃ caṃkramati, ... § 31.3.25B2. ete dāni bhikṣu āgantukā {ā}gacchanti, sarvvehi ... § 32.4.27A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu āgantuko āgato bhavati, ... § 33.6.28A2. eṣo dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā śabdāpayati, ... § 33.9.28A3. eṣo bhikṣu mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā bhaginīm vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, ... § 38.2.30A5. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya āryaparṣāye <kiṃci?> kāryam bhavati, ...; vgl. § 35.3. 29A2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya kiṃci brāhmaṇaparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ bhavati; § 36.3.29B2. etaṃ ... kiñcit kāryam bhavati; § 37.3.30A2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya kiṃci ... kāryam bhavati § 39.5.31A2. etaṃ dāni grāmāntikaṃ ca śeyyāsanaṃ āraṇyakañ ca śeyyāsanaṃ ca ekabhaktatarppaṇaṃ bhavati § 40.9.33A2. eṣo dāni ... kareti § 41.22.35A5. eṣo dāni bhikṣu yadā grāmāto nirggato bhavati § 43.3.38A3. etaṃ (neut. sg für das masc. sg.) dāni saṃghasya anugraho bhavati § 43.7.38A5. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā durvvā vā kaṇḍahastā vā karkkaṭakā vā ... § 43.8.38A6. ete khajjakacaṃgerīyo vanaphalacaṅgerīyo haritakīcaṅgerīyo vā prasphoḍiya suprakṣālitāṃ kariya ekamante sthapetavyāḥ § 43.9.38A6. ete bhavanti vastrābharaṇakā vā pariśrāvaṇā vā caturasrakā vā ... § 43.10.38A7. etā bhaiṣajyapiṣaṇikā śilā na dāni ... pratiliptikā sthapetavyā § 43.13.38B1. ete bhavanti raṅgagolakā vā raṅgaghaṭakā vā raṅgakuṇḍakā vā raṅga- kaṭāhakā vā, ... § 43.14.38B2. eṣo bhikṣu dhovanikā vā <rajanikā vā> karttukāmo bhavati, ... § 43.16.38B4. etā bhavanti vāsīyo vā kuddālakā vā niśreṇiyo vā, na dāni tathā yeva mṛttikāpraliptikā sthapetavyā § 44.4.39A1. ete dāni saṃbahulā {saṃbahulā} bhikṣūḥ ekahi vihārake pratikramanti, ... § 45.7.40A2. eṣo bhikṣu vikāle pratikramati, ... § 46.4.40A6. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ kalyato yeva gocarāye prasthito bhavati ... § 46.6.40B1. etan (lies: etāni) dāni saṃghasya uṭṭhānakāni bhavanti ... § 48.4.41A6. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭo āsanena nimantrīyati, ... § 49.5.42A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā paścācchramaṇo gacchati, ... § 49.6.42B2. eṣo ca dāni bhikṣu <ta>sya (?) sārddhevihārī vā antevāsī vā paścāc- 164  chramaṇaṃ praveśe{n}ti, ... § 50.4.43A6. etaṃ dāni sarvvasaṃghasya antaraghare nimantraṇam bhavati, ... § 51.7.44A3. eṣā (Hs. eṣa) strī dhānyaṃ ohanati ... jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” ti ... jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati” § 51.8.44A3. eṣā strī dhānāṃ vā pīṣayati, tilam vā mudgam vā kalāyām vā daleti ... jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” ... jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati” § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti ... jānitavyaṃ “dāhiti eṣā” ... “na dāhiti eṣā” § 51.10.44A4. eṣā strī upaviṣṭikā āsati ... jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” ... “na eṣā dāsyati” § 51.11.44A5. eṣā strī bhikṣuṃ paśyiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” tti. ... “eṣā na dāsyati” § 51.12.44A5. eṣā strī kāṃsabhājanaṃ mārjati, ... jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” tti ... “na eṣā dāsyatî”ti § 52.3.44B2. eṣo dāni bhikṣu niśrayakaraṇīyo bhavati, ... § 53.4.45A3. eṣo dāni saṃghārāmo purimaṃ paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ pratijāgrīyati, ... § 54.8.46A4. ete dāni bhikṣuḥ pracalāyanti, nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ § 55.5.46B6. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ pracālayati, na kṣamati kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena āhanituṃ usw. etad~ ... ka~ + ci, etad~ ... kiñci, etad~ ... kiñcid “wenn irgendein ...; wenn jemand ...” ☞ § 4.5, Anm. 5 ⇒ etad~ (2) § 4.5.4B2. eṣo dāni koci saṃghaṃ bhaktena śuvetanāya nimantreti, ... (≒ § 6.5.7B1) § 5.5.6B1. eṣo dāni koci bhikṣusaṃghaṃ bhaktena nimantrayati, ... § 35.3.29A2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya kiṃci brāhmaṇaparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, ... vgl. § 38.2.30A5. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya āryaparṣāye <kiṃci?> kāryam bhavati, ... § 36.3.29B2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kiñcit kāryam bhavati, ... § 37.3.30A2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya kiṃci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryam bhavati, ... § 39.10.31A7. eṣo dāni koci grāmāntikāṃ bhaktena nimantreti, ... § 39.22.32A1. eṣo dāni koci āraṇyakānāṃ bhaktenôpanimantrayati, ... etad~ ... kiñci ⇒ etad~ ... ka~ + ci etarhi “jetzt” § 41.11.34A7. na etarhi eva-m-anyadâpi eṣo etasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.21.35A5. etarhi pi eṣo sthavirasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo etarhiṃ (BHS[Mvu]) “jetzt” § 41.12.34B1. bhūtapūrvvam bhikṣavo atītam adhvānaṃ eta<r>hiṃ ca nagaraṃ Vārāṇasī Kāśijanapado etahiṃ für eta<r>hiṃ : § 41.12.34B1 etāvati-varṣa~# “(ein Mönch) dieses (Ordinations-)Alters” (etāvati ist der Loc. sg. des Adjektivs etāvat) ☞ § 31.23, Anm. 1 ⇒ kati-varṣa~ § 31.23.26A6. pṛcchitavyaṃ “āyuṣman, asti etāvativarṣasya vihārako prāpuṇati?” eti für etaṃ : § 5.1.6A5 eto für ete : § 17.5.15A1 ettaka~ (BHS, Pā) “so viel, so und so viel” § 4.12.5A4~5. sarvveṣāṃ ettaka ettakaṃ bhaviṣyati? § 12.10.11B5~6. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ettakaṃ prāvaraṇaṃ tato likhitavyaṃ bhurjake phalake vā paṭṭikāyām vā § 12.12.11B7. āyuṣman amuke vihārake ettakā mañcā ettakā pīṭhāḥ ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ettakaṃ prāvaraṇaṃ. katamo tava vihārako rucyati? ettu für entu : § 31.28.26B3 ettha (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “hier” ⇒ iha, itthaṃ § 31.16.26A2. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullapitavyaṃ āgantukehi “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ ettha vasatha, ghuṇaviddhā tave, ...” edam~# < etat × idaṃ? ☞ § 4.1, Anm. 3 § 4.1.4A6. āhaṃsu “no h’ edaṃ dīrghāyu”; vgl. § 3.1.3A7. no hîdaṃ (= § 6.3.7A7); § 2.1.2B1. no h’ etaṃ (= § 6.1.7A5) enaṃ ⇒ naṃ 165  § 6.13.8A3. śunakhā śṛgā<lā> c’ enaṃ laṃghayantaṃ (vs) eva; vgl. S. 559 in diesem Band ⇒ naỿva, prakṛty’ eva, pratikṛty’ eva, prāg eva, yeva, yyeva, haỿva, va, vā (2) § 1.3.1B3. tad eva sarvvaṃ bhagavān vistareṇa pratyārocayati (= § 7.2.8A7, § 9.2.9B6, § 42.4.36A6, § 47.2.40B5, § 49.2.42A5 et passim) § 4.13.5A6. mā h’ eva otrapeṃsu § 5.6.6B2. dvitīyasthavireṇa aparejjukāye (’)va (Hs. ca) māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo § 18.12.16A2. udakakṛtyaṃ karentena ... māt<r>āye (’)va <siṃ>cetavyaṃ § 18.15.16A2. eṣaỿvârthotpattiḥ (= § 20.6.19B2) § 18.20.16A6. eṣā evârthotpattiḥ (= § 19.6.17B7, § 20.4.19A7, § 42.2.36A2, § 54.3.46A2, § 55.3.46B4) § 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya ... § 20.11.19B7. aparaṃ divasaṃ evam eva khāditavyaṃ § 41.4.33B7. sthaviro dāni kālasyaỿva nivāsayitvā § 41.10.34A7. tena dāni brāhmaṇena tatraỿva sthāne sthitena § 41.11.34A7. na etarhi eva-m-anyadâpi eṣo etasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.27.35B4. nâpi dāni kṣamati tenaỿva hastena udakaṃ āsiñcituṃ § 41.29.35B6. tatraỿva sthapitavyaṃ § 42.5.36B1. āvi caỿva raho ca § 42.12.36B6. mā evam eva kāṣṭhaṃ dahyeya § 42.13.36B7. atha dāni sarvvasāṃghiko bhavati, tathā eva <gantavya>ṃ (?) § 43.16.38B5. tac c’ eva{ṃ} cāturddiśaṃ sāṃghikaṃ ... § 43.16.38B5. yasyaỿva{ṃ} kāryam bhavati, tasyaỿva{n} dātavyaṃ § 44.1.38B7. so dāni aparejjukāto kalyata eva nivāsiya § 44.6.39A4. tatraỿva sarvvaṃ bhūmīye anupraviṣṭo bhavati § 45.1.39B3. te ... kalyata eva vihāracaraṇakāni nivāsanāni nikṣipiyāṇaṃ § 45.4.39B5. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyata evôtthitvā § 49.1.41B6. ahaṃ ca tatra kiñcid eva akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyāmi § 49.7.42B6. yadi tāva so śirāviddho eva nirddhāvati, ayaṃ praviṣṭo bhavati ... § 49.7.42B6. yato eva paśyati tato eva nivarttitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B7. mā dāni vayaṃ ubhaye ’va bhaktacchedaṃ kariṣyāma et passim evaṃ, evam ⇒ evaṃ nāma, evaṃ pi, evaṃ pi kṛtvā, evaṃ pi kariya § 4.12.5A5. āha “na hi. āryasya etaṃ evaṃ dīyati.” § 4.12.5A5. evaṃ ‖ pe ‖ sūpasya ghṛtasya māṃsasya olaṃkānāṃ ... § 7.3.8B1. bhagavān āha “evaṃ dāṇi yūyaṃ upasaṃpādiya naỿv’ ovadatha nânuśāsatha ...” § 8.13.9B3. yāvan na utthāpīyati, sā evam e<va> āpṛcchanikā § 11.4.10B5. bhagavān āha “evaṃ ca yūyaṃ ... śayyāsanaṃ paribhuṃjatha. ...” § 11.7.10B7. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ evam eva paribhuṃjituṃ ... § 14.11.13B1. evaṃ hy eva sarvvaṃ pratisaṃskāro karttavyaḥ § 18.51.17B1. evaṃ na bhavati (“Wenn es so nicht geht”), antamasato ...; § 48.6. 41B1. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato ...; § 21.9.20B5. atha dāni evaṃ na bhavati, ... § 19.7.18A1. evaṃ tāva na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā āgamayituṃ yāva praśvāsena prapīḍito bhavati § 19.25.18B3. ku<ṃ>tako bhavati, evaṃ yyeva karttavyaṃ § 20.1.19A5. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ ... khādasi § 20.6.19B2. yathā kumārakā vā dharmmiṣṭhā vā akṣadarśā vā gaṇa<kā> vā mahāmātrā vā evam ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti § 20.8.19B4. evaṃ ca dāni yūyaṃ apramāṇāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādatha § 20.10.19B6. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ sarvvaṃ niravaśeṣaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādatha. tena hi śeṣāś catvāri aṅgulāni § 20.11.19B7. aparaṃ divasaṃ evam eva khāditavyaṃ 166 § 20.11.19B7. evaṃ tāva khādayitavyaṃ yāva dantakāṣṭhasya catvāri aṅgulāni avaśiṣṭāni § 21.9.20B5. atha dāni evaṃ na bhavati, ... § 23.4.1.21A7. pīṭhaṃ praveśeti. pīṭhasyâpi evaṃ yyeva § 25.2.22B2. bhagavān āha “evaṃ ca tvaṃ muṇḍavātapāne pātraṃ thapesi. ...” § 25.9.22B6. atha dāni nāgadantako bhavati, kiñ câpi evam eva thapeti, anāpattiḥ § 27.2.23B5. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, eva<ṃ> ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhasi § 31.22.26A6. atha dāni nevāsiko vṛddhatarako bhavati, ārogyāpiya evaṃ kariyāṇaṃ āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 39.1.30B7. āyuṣman, evaṃ yūyaṃ ... bhuñjatha § 39.1.30B7. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ ... āgacchatha § 39.4.31A2. evaṃ āraṇyake vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 39.4.31A2. evaṃ grāmāntike vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 40.3.32B4. evaṃ pānīye pratipadyitavyaṃ. evaṃ pādadhovanīye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 40.17.33B2. evaṃ pānīye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 41.3.33B6. evaṃ pādā dhovitavyā ( = § 41.3.33B7, § 41.33.36A1) § 41.3.33B6. evaṃ dhovitapādehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 41.33.36A1) § 41.3.33B7. evaṃ ... yathā § 41.10.34A6. so pi na evaṃ śucī § 41.17.34B7. evaṃ dharmmiṣṭhasya § 41.18.35A1. ahaṃ imasya dārakasya evaṃ ca evaṃ ca ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.21.35A4. syād vo bhikṣavo evam asyâ<syā>d § 41.21.35A5. naỿtad evaṃ draṣṭavyaṃ § 41.26.35B3. atha dāni koci vṛddhatarako na bhavati, evaṃ pi upaviśitavyaṃ § 42.6.36B1. evaṃ snāne pratipadyitavyaṃ ( = § 42.32.38A1) § 42.6.36B1. evaṃ jentāke pratipadyitavyaṃ ( = § 42.32.38A1) § 42.12.36B6. mā evam eva kāṣṭhaṃ dahyeya § 42.13.36B7. atha dāni sarvvasāṃghiko bhavati, tathā evaṃ (lies: eva<gantavya>ṃ?) § 43.2.38A2. evaṃ bhaṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 43.2.38A3) § 43.12.38B1. evaṃ yat kiñcit saṃghasya bhāṇḍaṃ ... § 43.16.38B5. tac c’ evaṃ (lies: eva) cāturddiśaṃ sāṃghikaṃ ... § 43.16.38B5. yasyaỿvaṃ (lies: °aỿva) kāryam bhavati, tasyaỿvan (lies: °aỿva) dātavyaṃ § 43.17.38B5. evaṃ bhāṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 44.1.38B6. evaṃ bhūmīye patito § 44.2.39A1. evaṃ ca tvaṃ ... acchosi § 44.3.39A1. evaṃ cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 44.12.39B1) § 44.5.39A3. evaṃ sarvvehi vandiya thapetavyāni Uddāna (V).39B2. evam araṇye pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ grāmāntike pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ pānīye pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ paridhovaniye pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ pādā dhovitavyā; evaṃ pādadhovanike pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ snāne pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ jentāke pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ bhaṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ cīvare prati- padyitavyaṃ § 45.3.39B5. tena hi evaṃ nivāsitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni evaṃ nivāsayitavyaṃ? § 45.8.40A3. evaṃ nivāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 46.3.40A6. evaṃ prāvaritavyaṃ (= § 46.7.40B2) § 46.5.40B1. evaṃ ārāmacaraṇakaṃ vā āvellayitavyaṃ vihāracaraṇakaṃ vā uvvellayi- tavyaṃ § 47.3.40B5. tena hi evaṃ ... pratipadyitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni evaṃ ... pratipadyitavyaṃ § 47.10.41A2. evaṃ antaragharaṃ praviśantena cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ § 48.3.41A6. tena hi-y-evaṃ ... pratipadyitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni evaṃ ... pratipadyitavyaṃ § 48.10.41B5. evaṃ antaraghare praviṣṭena cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VI]. 45A1) § 49.1.42A4. evaṃ ca evaṃ câsmi vipralabdho (= § 49.2.42A5) § 50.2.43A4. āyuṣman, evaṃ ca tvaṃ śūnyake vihārake pātraṃ nikṣipiya gacchasi § 50.2.43A4. so dāni āha “āyuṣman, evaṃ (Hs. etaṃ) ca tvaṃ mama piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ 167  adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karesi.” § 54.15.46B1. evaṃ tāva vāretavyaṃ yāva prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (= § 55.9.47A1) § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti ... yathā sīhā vā vyāghrā vā evaṃ jaṃbhayanti § 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ et passim evaṃ für etaṃ : § 6.7.7B5 evaṃ nāma § 1.3.1B3. bhagavān āha: “satyaṃ Nandana, evaṃ nāma saṃghasya poṣadho?” ti § 5.3.6A6. satyaṃ ... evaṃ nāma ... (= § 6.3.7A6, § 9.2.9B6, § 20.2.19A6, § 35.2.29A1, § 41.2.33B5, § 45.2.39B4, § 46.2.40A5, § 47.2.40B4, § 48.2.41A5 et passim) § 20.3.19A7. evaṃ nāma tvaṃ puṣpopagataṃ vṛkṣaṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi § 20.7.19B3. evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādatha § 42.4.36A6. evan nāma saṃghasya jentāko evaṃ-nāma~ ⇒ iti-nāman~, itthan-nāma~, evaṃ-nāmaka~ § 4.7.4B4. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “nâsti asmākaṃ koci evaṃnāma upāsako” evaṃ-nāmaka~# “soundso heißend” ⇒ iti-nāman~, itthan-nāma~, evaṃ-nāma~ § 6.7.7B4. koci ima<ṃ>hi evannāmako upāsako dānapatī vā vāṇijako vā? § 6.7.7B4. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “nâsti koci imaṃhi evaṃnāmako ...” evaṃ pi # “dennoch; immer noch”; < Skt. evam api ⇒ evaṃ pi kariya, evaṃ pi kṛtvā, taṃ pi § 12.15.12A2. atha dāni evaṃ pi stokā bhavanti, ... (= § 12.16.12A3) § 12.16.12A4. atha dāni evaṃ pi alpāvakāśo bhavati, ... § 18.41.17A3. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, ... (= § 18.44.17A5, § 24.6.22A3, § 25.10. 22B6, § 31.31.26B6) § 18.43.17A4. evaṃ pi na bhavati, śūnyagharaṃ vā jambālam vā bhavati, ... evaṃ pi kariya # “dennoch; immer noch” ☞ § 42.20, Anm. 6 ⇒ evaṃ pi, evaṃ pi kṛtvā § 42.28.37B5. evaṃ pi kariya tailamātrā janitavyā § 49.7.42B6. bhikṣusya ātmano āhāraparyeṣṭiṃ paryeṣamāṇasya vikālo bhavati, evaṃ pi kariya gantavyaṃ evaṃ pi kṛtvā # “dennoch; immer noch” ☞ § 42.20, Anm. 6 ⇒ evaṃ pi, evaṃ pi kariya § 42.20.37A5. evaṃ pi kṛtvā mātrāye upanetavyaṃ (= § 42.21.37A6) evaṃ-rūpa~ § 42.5.36B1. tatra nāma yūyaṃ idam evaṃrūpaṃ pāpakarmmam akuśalan dharmmam adhyācariṣyatha evac-cira~# “(schon) so lange her”; < evam + cira ☞ § 32.2, Anm. 2 ⇒ kec-cira~ § 32.2.27A5. so dāni sthaviro pṛcchati “āyuṣmaṃ, kecciro te āgatasya?” āh“âr’ evacciro evacciro ca.” so āha “āyuṣman, evacciro tava āgatasya, na ca me pādavandako upasaṃkramasi.” evam ⇒ evaṃ ehi § 49.1.41B6. ehi āyuṣmaṃ, grāmaṃ praviśyāmaḥ (≒ § 49.2.42A4) ehi-svāgata~ (BHS) “Willkommen”; vgl. BHS. ehi-svāgata-vādin, Pā. ehi-s(v)āgata-vādi(n) ☞ § 31.28, Anm. 2 ⇒ svāgatam § 31.28.26B3. atha khalu āgantukānāṃ ehisvāgataṃ kartta<vya>ṃ “entu āyuṣmanto, svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. ...” AI ai / i ⇒ i / ai ai / e ⇒ e / ai aiśvarya~ 168  § 41.19.35A3. sthāneṣu ca aiśvaryaṃ labhanti ācāraguṇayuktāḥ (vs) O o/ā ⇒ ā/o o / | (Daṇḍa) + ā § 39.6.31A3. ādrāhayitavyā | yā für ādrāhayitavyāyo § 49.5.42A7. | ghāḍena für ghoḍena o/u ⇒ u/o o/e ⇒ e/o o / e + | (Daṇḍa) ⇒ e + | (Daṇḍa) / o o / tu : § 12.2.11A7. tudrinnakāṃ für ondriṇṇakāṃ § 18.16.16A4. olikā für tulikā o / te : § 16.9.14B4. tepūriyanti für opūr°; § 16.9.14B4. tevarṣiyanti für ovarṣ° o / ni : § 18.24.16B2. niguhitavyaṃ für oguhi° o + | (Daṇḍa) / ā ⇒ ā / o + | (Daṇḍa) o Interj. § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he nāvā <mucyati> ...” tti o-kaḍḍha-# “zurückziehen; entgegennehmen; herausziehen”; < ava + kaḍḍha- (s.v.) ☞ § 4.13, Anm. 5, § 25.13, Anm. 3, § 47.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ uk-kaḍḍha-, kaḍḍha-, √kṛṣ § 5.11.7A2. yaṃ kālaṃ navakā bhikṣū ugrāyanti vā pānīyam vā pibanti hastāni oka<ḍ>ḍhiya āsanti § 25.13.23A1. pātraṃ ... okaḍḍhantena sugṛhītaṃ karttavyaṃ § 53.11.45B2. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā ... dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ. atha khalu tulikāye nisnehiya dīpavartti okaḍḍhiya kulikātaile nirvvāpayitavyaṃ § 53.15.45B5. yadi dīpavartti dagdhikā bhavati, palikhāṭir vvā okaḍḍhitavyo o-kasa-# “hinuntergehen, hineingehen”; < Skt. ava-√kas ⇒ o-kasta~, o-kkasa-, uk-kasa-, niṣ- kāśaya- § 56.3.47A4. atha khalu vihārake vā bāhyato vā niṣīdana prasphoṭiyāṇaṃ dviguṇaṃ kṛtvā prahāṇaṃ okasitavyaṃ o-kasta~ (BHS) “hinuntergegangen; hineingegangen”; < Skt. ava-√kas ☞ § 14.1, Anm. 3 ⇒ o- kasa-, o-kkasa-, uk-kasa-, niṣ-kāśaya-, ā-gata~ § 14.1.13A1. te dāni āraṇyakā ... grāmantikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ okastāḥ § 56.3.47A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ okastena niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭayituṃ (≒ § 56.5.47A6) § 57.1.47A7. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa okastāḥ (Hs. ostakāḥ) samānā āsanehi upaviśiyāṇaṃ upānahā nikkhāsiya ... prasphoṭanti; vgl. § 56.1.47A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa āgatā samānā ... o-kira- (Pā) “bestreuen”; < Skt. ava-kirati; vgl. CPD, s.v. o-kirati § 1.8.1B7. vibhavo bhavati, śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyāyo puṣpehi okiritavyāyo (= § 2.6.2B6) § 3.7.3B6. vibhavo bhavati śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyā puṣpehi okiritavyā o-kkasa-# “hinuntergehen”; < Skt. ava-√kas ⇒ uk-kasa-, o-kasa-, o-kasta~, niṣ-kāśaya- § 14.3.13A2. na kṣamati āraṇyakehi aśabdakarṇṇikāye grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ okkasituṃ o-kkhanda-# “herabspringen”; < Skt. ava-√skand; vgl. DP I 557, s.vv. okkanditvā, okkhanditvā (“jumping up, leaping to”) ☞ § 31.1, Anm. 4 § 31.1.25A7. te dāni okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviṣṭāḥ § 31.1.25B1. “āyuṣmaṃ kuto vā praviṣṭāḥ?”, āhaṃsuḥ “okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviṣṭāḥ.” § 31.1.25B1. āyuṣman, evaṃ ca yūyaṃ okkhandiyāṇaṃ vihāraṃ praviśatha § 31.2.25B2. nâpi kṣamati āgantukehi vihāraṃ okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviśituṃ § 41.14.34B3. te dāni taṃ gṛhaṃ okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviṣṭā o-krama-# “treten”; < Skt. ava-√kram 169  § 21.5.20B3. na kṣamati adhotakehi pādakehi kaṭhinaṃ okramituṃ oguṇṭhikā~# “Verhüllung (des Kopfes), Kopfbedeckung”; vgl. BHSD, s.vv. avaguṇṭhikā, udguṇṭhikā-kṛta; CPD, s.v. oguṇṭhikā; SWTF, s.v. avaguṇṭhikā-kṛta § 1.10.2A2. atha khalu hastāṃ nirmmādiya oguṇṭhikāṃ apaniya upānahāṃ omuñciya ekāṃsakṛtena śalākā vārayitavyā § 1.10.2A2. atha khalu ekāṃsakṛtena hastān nirmmādiya oguṇṭhikāṃ apaniya upānahāṃ omuñciya śalākā{ṃ} gṛhṇitavyā oguṇṭhikā-kṛta~# “der sein Haupt verhüllt hat” (wörtl. “der eine Verhüllung [seines Kopfes] gemacht hat”; vgl. SWTF, s.v. avaguṇṭhikā-kṛta, BHSD, s.vv. avaguṇṭhikā, udguṇṭhikā-kṛta; CPD, s.vv. oguṇṭhita, oguṇṭhita-sīsa) ☞ § 1.10, Anm. 1 ⇒ o-guṇṭhita~, oguṇṭhita-kāya~, oguṇṭhita- śīrṣa~ § 1.10.2A1. nâpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikā{ya}kṛtena upānahārūḍhena vā śalākāṃ vārayituṃ § 1.10.2A2. śalākāṃ pi dāni gṛhṇantena na câpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā śalākāṃ gṛhṇituṃ § 2.8.2B7~3A1. na kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ ... na kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā ... śalākāṃ praticchituṃ § 3.9.4A1. śalākāṃ pi dāni praticchantena na kṣamati ... oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā śalākāṃ praticchituṃ § 26.5.23B1. nâpi kṣamati yavāgū ... oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā samaṃtaprāvṛtena vā praticchituṃ oguṇṭhikāyakṛtena für oguṇṭhikā-kṛtena: § 1.10.2A1 o-guṇṭhita~ (Pā) “verhüllt”; < Skt. avaguṇṭhita ⇒ oguṇṭhikā-kṛta~, oguṇṭhita-kāya~, oguṇṭhita- śīrṣa~ § 3.9.3B7. na kṣamati anirmmāditakehi hastehi upānahārūḍhena oguṇṭhitena vā śalākāṃ vārayituṃ oguṇṭhita-kāya~# “mit verhülltem Körper” ☞ § 32.8, Anm. 2 ⇒ oguṇṭhikā-kṛta~, o-guṇṭhita~, oguṇṭhita-śīrṣa~ § 32.8.27B3. na kṣamati oguṇṭhitakāyena. na kṣamati ohitahastena. na kṣamati upānahārūḍhena oguṇṭhita-śīrṣa~# “mit verhülltem Haupt” (vgl. CPD, s.vv. oguṇṭhita, oguṇṭhita-sīsa) ☞ § 18.27, Anm. 1 ⇒ oguṇṭhikā-kṛta~, o-guṇṭhita~, oguṇṭhita-kāya~ § 18.27.16B4. nâpi kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ohāyitahastena vā varccakuṭīṃ praveṣṭuṃ § 19.10.18A2. nâpi dāni kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ohitahaste<na> vā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena upaveṣṭuṃ § 20.15.20A2. nâpi kṣamati cetiyaṃ vandantena oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ohitahastena vā cetiyābhigṛhe vā prāsāde vā khādituṃ § 27.6.23B7. na kṣamati ... upānahārūḍhena vā tiṣṭhituṃ khaṃbhakṛtena vā oguṇṭhita- śīrṣeṇa vā o{vā}hitahastena vā § 27.8.23B7. kiñ câpi upānahārūḍho oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo vā ohitahasto vā tiṣṭhati, anāpattiḥ § 29.5.24B2. na kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa prahāṇe upaveṣṭuṃ § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ... pratisaṃlīnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ § 41.30.35B6. nâpi kṣamati pādadhovanikāyāṃ oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa ohitahastena vā {pādadhovanikāyā} upaviśituṃ § 54.6.46A3. yaṣṭi dāni vārentena na dāni oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā vāretavyā ohitahastena vā upānahārūḍhena vā yaṣṭi vāretavyā § 54.10.46A6. na dāni kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ‖ pe ‖ yāva atha khalu ekāṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ tena vāretavyaṃ (Hs. cār°) o-guha-# “raffen”? ☞ § 18.20, Anm. 2 ⇒ o-sara- § 18.20.16A7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena uppīḍito nivasanaṃ oguhiya varccakuṭiṃ praviśati § 18.22.16B1. na kṣamati nivāsanaṃ oguhiya aśabdakarṇṇikāye varcakuṭī praviśituṃ § 18.24.16B2. nâpi dāni dūrato yeva nivāsa<na>ṃ oguhiya upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 18.24.16B2. samanantaraṃ upaviśitavyaṃ ca nivasanaṃ oguhitavyaṃ (Hs. niguh°) ca 170  § 18.33.16B7. ekamante nivāsa<na>ṃ o<gu>hiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 18.49.17A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pratikṛty’ eva nivāsanaṃ oguhiya gacchituṃ § 18.49.17A7. atha khalu nivāsanaṃ oguhitavyaṃ ca upaviśitavyañ ca § 18.50.17A7. na kṣamati nivāsanaṃ oguhiya ... udakasamīpa<ṃ> gantuṃ § 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ ... praśvāsakuṭīṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ nivāsanaṃ o<gu>hi- yāṇaṃ “praśvāsaṃ kariṣyan” ti <praviśati?> ogha~ § 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.14.26A1. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśantehi puṣkiriṇīyaṃ vā taḍāge vā oghe vā pādāṃ dhovitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 36.6.29B6. te hi yūyaṃ niśrāya tathāgate brahmacaryaṃ caratha mahato oghasya niḥsaraṇārthaṃ § 42.21.37A7. atha dāni ogho vā puṣkiriṇī vā taḍāgo vā bhavati, ... § 47.5.40B7. yadi tahiṃ ogho vā taḍāgam vā bhavati puṣkiriṇī vā, ... *o-ghasaya- “sich (die Zähne) abreiben; reinigen”; < Skt. *ava-ghṛṣati; vgl. Skt. ava-gharṣati (“abreiben, zerreiben”), Pkt. o-ghasiya, o-gghasiya (“gereinigt, saubergemacht”) ☞ § 20.18, Anm. 3 ⇒ ghasa- § 20.18.20A4. atha dāni dantakāṣṭhaṃ na bhavati, aṅgāreṇa vā apakkalaḍḍunā vā dantā oghasayitavyāḥ (Hs. odya°) o-cara- (Pā; BhiVin[Ma-L]) “ausspähen” ☞ § 41.13, Anm. 1 § 41.13.34B2. tasya dāni śreṣṭhikasya kulaputrakā gṛhaṃ ocaranti ocoraka~# “Kundschafter” oder “Spion”; vgl. Pā. ocaraka, BHS. avacaraka ☞ § 18.47, Anm. 2 ⇒ cora~ § 18.47.17A7. nâpi dāni apratisaṃviditena uvvattitavyaṃ, mā “coro vā ocorako vā” tti hanyeyā (≒ § 19.39.19A2) § 51.6.44A2. na dāni ito vā ito vā nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “corā vā ocorakā bhavanti.” occarakaṃ für ovvara° : § 51.7.44A3, § 51.8.44A4, § 51.11.44A5, § 51.14.44A7 occellayitavyaṃ für ovvellayitavyaṃ : § 45.6.40A2 occhedaka~# “(von einer Abtrennung) umschlossener Ort” (?); vgl. Skt. avaccheda~ ☞ § 2.5, Anm. 1 ⇒ ucchedaka~, ucchedanaka~ § 3.6.3B4. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kahiṃ bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthāna- śālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā occhedake caṃkrame vā niṣadyāya? o-jjhāya-# “beklagen”; vgl. Pā. ujjhāyati, BHSD, s.vv. ava-dhyati, -dhyāyati, avadhyāna ☞ § 1.1, Anm. 3 ⇒ o-dhyāya- § 1.1.1B1. te dāni ojjhāyanti: “paśyatha bhaṇe ...” § 1.3.1B3. navakā bhikṣū ojjhāyanti § 2.1.2B2. te dāni ojjhāyanti “vayaṃ yeva tāva karmmāntā cchoriya ...” (= § 3.1.3A7, § 4.1.4A6) § 2.2.2B2. saṃghasthaviro ojjhāyati “asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmma ...” § 2.3.2B3. saṃghasthaviro pi ojjhāyati “asmākaṃ bhagavāṃ daṇḍakarmman ...” -oṭa~, -oṭaka~ ⇒ śakkāroṭa~, śarkaroṭa~, śarkaroṭaka~ oṭṭha~ (Pā, Pkt.) “Lippe”; < Skt. oṣṭḥa ⇒ oṣṭha~ § 40.10.33A3. pātraṃ vā oṭṭhā cikkaṇaṃ bhavati, nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ oḍḍiṇṇakā für oddiṇṇ° : § 17.11.15A5 oḍ-ḍita~ “gereckt(er Hals); aufgeflogen”; vgl. Pā. oḍḍita (“thrown out, laid, placed [of a net, trap, or snare]” [CPD, s.v.]), Pā. oḍḍeti (“to throw out [a net]; to display [the limbs]” [CPD, s.v.]), uḍḍeti (“to fly up” [CPD, s.v. 2uḍḍeti]) < Skt. ud-√ḍī (“auffliegen”) § 49.5.42A7. nâpi kṣamati ghoḍena yathā oḍḍitāye grīvāye gantuṃ oṇṇī~# “Wolldecke”; < Skt. aurṇī (“wollen”) ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 3 ⇒ uṇṇī~, urṇṇī~ § 17.10.15A4. śeyyāsanaṃ oṇṇiyo vā kocavakā vā prāvārā vā bisiyo vā caturasrako vā ... o-tara- (BHS, Pā) (1) “heruntersteigen; eintreten”; “sich begeben”#; < Skt. ava-tarati ⇒ o-tāraya-, o-tāre- 171  § 14.9.13A7. ekena abhyantaraghaṭṭimaṃ vihārakaṃ kariya, rejjūye vā kaḍevarikāya vā otaritavyaṃ § 14.9.13A7. otariya rajjū{ye} vā kaḍevariyā vā abhyantare kṣipitavyā § 14.18.13B5. prativeśikulāto niśreṇi yāciya tato otaritavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyo) § 22.3.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ otara{n}ti tato dvāraṃ muñcitavyaṃ. nidhāpiyāṇa cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ kīlakehi bandhiyāṇa tato otaritavyaṃ (Hs. osāri°) § 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apaduritavyaṃ cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ § 56.5.47A6. dvitīyasya (wohl für paścimasya) prahāṇasya jarjare āhate otaritavyaṃ § 57.3.47B2. atha khalu bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ (2) “beschädigen; bedecken”#; < Skt. ava-tarati (“überwältigen, überwinden”) ☞ § 12.6, Anm. 2; § 12.2, Anm. 3 § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena otariyanti (“werden beschädigt”) § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka ... dhūlīye vā otaritaṃ (“bedeckt”) bhavati otāra~ (Pā) “Gelegenheit (zum Angriff)” ⇒ avatāra~ § 41.13.34B2. tasya gṛha<ṃ> guptañ ca surakṣitañ ca na pārenti otāraṃ vindanāya § 41.14.34B3. tehi dāni kulaputrakehi otāro labdho otāra-prekṣin~ “absichtlich auf eine Gelegenheit wartend”; vgl. BHS, SWTF. avatāra-prekṣin; Pā. otārāpekkha § 54.13.46A7. na dāni tena otāraprekṣiṇā vāretavyā. atha khalu ṣaḍāya<ta>na manasi- karentena vāretavyā § 55.7.46B7. na dāni tena otāraprekṣiṇā āsitavyaṃ (für vāretavyaṃ?). atha khalu ṣaḍāyatana manasikarentena āsitavyaṃ (für vāretavyaṃ?) o-tāraya- (BHS), o-tāre- (BHS) “herunternehmen”; Kausativ von Skt. ava-√t ⇒ o-tara- § 14.4.13A4. yaṃ tahiṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati kocavakā vā urṇṇīyo vā caturasrakā vā kumbhīyo vā kaṭāhakāni vā sarvvaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ otāretavyaṃ § 25.17.23A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa keśāṃ otārayitum (☞ § 25.17, Anm. 3) § 39.8.31A5. āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī otāriyāṇaṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ sthāne sthapayitavyā § 39.21.32A1. atha dāni nâgacchanti, ... grāmāntikā<nāṃ> thālīy’ otāriya dhotôpaliptāṃ (Hs. thātôyaliptāṃ) kariya thapitavyāḥ § 56.1.47A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa āgatā samānā skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti o-trapa-# “verlegen werden, sich schämen”; < Skt. apa-trapate; vgl. Pā. ottapati, ottappati, BHSD, s.v. otrapa, otrapya (“shame”) § 4.13.5A6. mā h’ eva otrapeṃsu odaka~ (Pā) “Wasser”; vgl. CPD, s.v. 1odaka ⇒ udaka~ § 13.16.12B7. yadi tāva vihāro ośakaroti (lies: ośakaro <bhava>ti?), odako dātavyo odana~ § 4.1.4A5. odano śītalo bhavati. sūpo śītalo bhavati § 26.8.23B2. atha dāni atighanā bhavati, na vaktavyaṃ “nâyaṃ yavāgū, odano ayaṃ, ...” odana-mānikā~# eine Art Behälter für gekochten Reis (?) ☞ § 43.1, Anm. 4 ⇒ māṇikā~, maṇika~ § 43.1.38A2. odanamānikāyo hastā kākaśakuntehi nikkhoḍiyantā ... odana-sampatti~# “die Vollkommenheit des gekochten Reises” ☞ § 4.13, Anm. 3 § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu odanasampattir vvā āgamaṃtena bhuṃjitavyaṃ, vyañjana- sampattir vvā āgamaṃtena bhuñjitavyaṃ (≒ § 5.11.7A2) § 6.11.8A2. tena odanasampattī vā āgametavyaṃ vyañjanasampattī vā āgamaṃtena bhuñjitavyaṃ oddiṇṇaka~#, oddirṇṇaka~#, oddriṇṇaka~#, odriṇṇaka~#, ondriṇṇaka~# “zerspalten”; ∈ ud-dīrṇa~ (p. pt. von ud-√d) + Suffix ka ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 2 ⇒ uddiṇṇaka~, uddriṇṇaka~ § 11.6.10B6. na dāni vihāro adhyupekṣitavyo oddirṇṇako praluggako acaukṣo vā ... § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... vihārakān ondriṇṇakāṃ praluggakāṃ acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ondriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ utthitakāṃ ... 172  § 12.3.11A7. kasyême bhikṣavo vihārakā odriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā paluggakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} vātātapena opūriyantā{ṃ} § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ondriṇṇakā paluggakā bhavanti, muṃjā karttitavyā ... (≒ § 13.11.12B3, § 13.13.12B5) § 12.18.12A5. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā oddriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā adhyupekṣituṃ § 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ ullāya gṛhītakāṃ acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ (≒ § 16.2.14A5, § 17.2.14B5) § 13.2.12A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcāṃ pīṭhāṃ ondriṇṇakā{ṇā}ṃ paluggakāṃ utthitakāṃ ... § 13.3.12A7. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} paluggakā{ṃ} utpādakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} ... § 13.5.12B1. vihārakā ... yadi tāva ondriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā bhavanti, ... § 14.5.13A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati so vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ ondriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ... § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddiṇṇakāṃ praluggakāṃ acaukṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ § 15.3.14A1. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtāḥ (= § 16.3.14A6, § 16.5.14A7, § 17.5.14B7) § 15.3.14A1. mañcā ca pīṭhā ca oddriṇṇakā paluggakā uppādakā utthitakā (≒ § 16.3, § 17.3.14B6) § 15.8.14A3. mañcakaś ... oddriṇṇako vā paluggako vā bhavati, ... § 16.2.14A6. adrākṣīd ... mañcā pīṭhā oddriṇṇakā paluggakāṃ uppādakāṃ utthitakāṃ (≒ § 17.2.14B5) § 16.7.14B2. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā praluggakā vā oddriṇṇakā vā § 16.9.14B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... oddriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā bhavanti § 17.3.14B6. kiṃ ete bhikṣavo vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā ...? (≒ § 23.2.21A5) § 17.11.15A5. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā oddiṇṇakā (Hs. oḍḍiṇṇ°) vā paluggakā vā bhavanti, ... § 23.1.21A4. adrākṣīd ... vihārāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ ullāye gṛhītakāṃ ... § 23.7.21B4. nâpi kṣamati vihārako adhyupekṣituṃ oddriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ... § 23.7.21B5. atha dāni oddriṇṇako bhavati, tṛṇacchadano bhavati, tṛṇapulako dātavyo ... § 43.11.38A7. kalpikakuṭī ... oddriṇṇakā vā praluggikā vā ... § 57.12.48A1. nâpi kṣamati upānahā adhyupekṣituṃ odriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā odyasayitavyāḥ für oghasa°: § 20.18.20A4 odriṇṇaka~# “zerspalten” ⇒ oddiṇṇaka~ usw. o-dhyāya-# “beklagen”; vgl. BHSD, s.vv. avadhyāti, -dhyāyati, avadhyāna; SWTF, s.v. ava-dhyā; CPD, s.vv, avajjhāyati, apajjhāyati, ujjhāyati, upajjhāyati ⇒ o-jjhāya- § 3.2.3A7. saṃghasthaviro ca dvitīyasthaviro ca odhyāyanti “asmākaṃ bhagavāṃ ...” (= § 3.3.3B1, § 6.2.7A6, § 6.3.7B1) § 4.2.4A7. te dāni odhyāya<ṃ>ti “naỿva saṃghasthavirasya āgatir ggatiḥ prajñāyati.” § 4.3.4B1. navakā bhikṣū odhyāyanti § 5.1.6A5. te dāni odhyāyanti “paśyatha bhaṇe ...” (= § 34.1.28B1, § 34.2.28B2, § 35.2. 29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 37.1.29B7) § 5.3.6A7. saṃghasthaviro pi odhyāyati “asmākaṃ bhagavān ...” § 8.2.8B6. te dāni bhikṣū odhyāyanti “asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmman deti, ...” § 18.2.15B1. jano dāni odhyāyati “paśyatha bhaṇe śramaṇakā ...” (≒ § 20.6.19B2, § 20.7.19B3, § 51.1.44A1) § 19.2.17B4. jano dāni odhyāyanti “paśyatha bhaṇe śramaṇakā ...” § 18.45.17A6. mā odhyāyeṃsu “ken’ imaṃ<hi> panthesmi antrāṇi vikīrṇṇāni?” § 18.3.15B1. bhagavān āha “satyaṃ bhikṣavo jano odhyāyati?” (= § 19.3.17B5) § 19.37.19A1. mā jano odhyāye “kena imaṃhi panthe praśvāso kṛto ...?” § 35.1.28B7. te dāni odhyāyanti “vayaṃ yeva tāva niṣaṇṇā ...” § 35.3.29A2. samyag bhikṣavo jano odhyāyanti; vgl. § 51.1.44A1. samyag bhikṣavo jano odhyāyati § 40.1.32B3. te dāni odhyāyanti “kin dāni ayaṃ ...?” (= § 40.2.32B4, § 41.1.33B4) § 47.1.40B3. teṣān dāni sārddhevihārikā ca antevāsikā ca odhyāyanti “vayaṃ yeva ...” § 47.2.40B5. yuṣmākaṃ sārddhevihārikā antevāsikā odhyāyanti “vayaṃ yeva ...” § 48.1.41A4. teṣāṃ sārddhevihārikā antevāsikā odhyāyanti “vayaṃ yeva ...” § 48.2.41A5. yuṣmākaṃ sārddhevihārikā antevāsikā odhyāyanti “paśyatha bhaṇe ...” 173  § 52.1.44B1. te dāni teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā odhyāyanti “vayaṃ yyeva tāva ...” usw. o-nāme- (Pā) “senken (den Kopf)”; < Skt. ava-nāmayati § 8.6.9A3. cīvarāṇi ... ātmano skandhe dapiya śīrṣaṃ onāmiya purato gantavyaṃ ondriṇṇaka~, *ondrinnaka~? (Hs. tundrinnak°) “zerspalten” ⇒ oddiṇṇaka~ usw. opasvedika~# “feucht”; < *aupasvedika (eine Vṛddhi-Form von Skt. upasveda “Feuchtigkeit”) ☞ § 13.15, Anm. 1 ⇒ usvedaka~ § 13.15.12B6. vihāro opasvediko (Hs. oma°) bhavati, mañcā bhittito mocetvā pratipādikā dātavyāḥ yathā prāṇakehi na khādyeyā opānahapuṭe für upā° : § 24.9.22A5; opānahārūḍho für upā° : § 27.8.23B7 opāśrayam für upāśrayam? : § 48.7.41B2 o-pūraya-#, o-pūre-# “voll machen; blähen; vollkommen bedecken”; < Skt. *ava-pūrayati?; vgl. PW, Bd. IV, 474, s.vv. pūrayati, āpūrayati ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 7, § 12.2, Anm. 3 ⇒ pūraya-, pūre- § 11.6.10B7. varṣāya ovṛṣṭo bhavati, cikhallikā opūre<ta>vyā, vaṃghorikā dātavyā ... § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ... vātātapena opūriyaṃtāṃ (≒ § 17.2.14B6) § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ... vātātapena opūriyantā prāṇakehi khajjantā (≒ § 17.3.14B6) § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena opūriyanti, naivāte thapitavyāḥ § 16.9.14B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena opūriyanti (Hs. tepū°), nivāte sthāpayitavyā § 17.12.15A6. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena vā opūriyanti, ... nivāte sthāpayitavyā § 57.11.47B7. upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, ... o-pūrita~ ⇒ o-pūraya- o-baddha~ (Pā) “gebunden; angelegt”; < Skt. ava-baddha ⇒ o-bandha-, ā-baddha~ § 34.4.28B4. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryante<na> upānahā{ṃ}hi vā obaddhāhi kṣatriya- parṣāyam upasaṃkramituṃ o-bandha- (Pā) “binden”; < Skt. ava-√bandh; vgl. BHSG, S. 221b, bandha-ti ⇒ o-baddha~, ā- √bandh § 31.7.25B6. tehi dāni prāvariya gaṇṭhipāśakaṃ obandhiya āmantriya praveṣṭavyaṃ omaïlamaïla~# “völlig schmutzig”; vgl. Pkt. omaïlla “schmutzig”, Pkt. maïla “schmutzig” ☞ § 11.2, Anm. 4 ⇒ omayilamayila~, omayilemayila~, omayilomayila § 47.1.40B3. tān’ api dāni cīvarakāni omaïlamaïlāṇi pāṭitavipāṭitāni kriyanti § 48.4.41A7. āsanaṃ bhavati ... karddamena vā vināśitakaṃ omaïlamaïlaṃ vā prajñaptakaṃ bhavati omayilamayila~#, omayilemayila~#, omayilomayila~# “völlig schmutzig”; vgl. Pkt. omaïlla “schmutzig”, Pkt. maïla “schmutzig” ☞ § 11.2, Anm. 4 ⇒ omaïlamaïla~ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ ātape dinnaṃ (≒ § 11.3.10B4, § 17.2.14B5) § 11.9.11A1. na kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ vā pāṭitavipāṭitam vā adhyupekṣituṃ (≒ § 13.12.12B4) § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilemayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 12.3.11B1. śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 12.7.11B4. śayyāsanaṃ bhavati omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhoviya sīvitavyaṃ § 12.18.12A5. nâpi kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 13.10.12B3. śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ bhavati pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhovayitavyaṃ rañjetavyaṃ § 14.7.13A6. yaṃ tatra śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ ... § 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo vā bisio vā caturasrakā vā omayilomayilā bhavanti pāṭitavipāṭitā ... § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... śeyyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 15.3.14A1. śeyyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 16.2.14A6. adrākṣīd ... śeyyāsanaṃ omayilemayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 16.3.14A6. śayyāsanaṃ omayilemayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 16.6.14B1. nâpi kṣamati śeyyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ āgantukānāṃ sthāpayituṃ § 17.3.14B6. śeyyāsanaṃ omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ 174  § 17.10.15A4. śeyyāsanaṃ oṇṇiyo vā kocavakā vā prāvārā vā ... bimbohanakā vā cilimilikā vā omayilamayilā vā pāṭitavipāṭitā vā acaukṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā § 44.11.39B1. cīvaraṃ ... cikkaṇaṃ vā apratisaṃskṛtaṃ vā omayilamayilam vā pāṭita- vipāṭitam vā § 48.7.41B2. na kṣamati sāpāśrayaṃ vā upāśrayam vā omayilomayilaṃ vā paṇḍara- vipāṇḍaraṃ apāśrayituṃ § 56.7.47A7. nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ omasvediko für opa° : § 13.15.12B6 o-muñca- (BHS, Pā) “ausziehen”; < Skt. ava-√muc, ut-√muc § 1.10.2A2. upānahāṃ omuñciya ... (= § 2.8.2B7, § 3.9.3B7) § 2.8.3A1. upānahāṃ omuñciyāṇa ... § 3.9.4A1. hastāṃ nirmmādiyāṇa upānahāṃ <o>muñciya ... § 26.6.23B1. atha dāni daṇḍakarmma pratidinnaṃ bhavati, pārṣṇivadhrā omuñcitavyā, dvitīyakālikasya lābhagrāha<ka>ṃ adhyeṣitvā gantavyaṃ § 31.15.26A1. cetiyāṇaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi upānahā omuñcitvā kāṣṭhakena gṛhṇitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 34.4.28B4. ekānte cchattraṃ nikṣipiya upānahāy’ omuṃciya tato allīyitavyaṃ o-mutraya- ⇒ o-mtraya- omuddhaka~ (BHS[Mvu]) “auf dem Bauch”; wörtl. “mit dem Kopf, Gesicht nach unten” ☞ § 30.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ omuddhikā~, omuddhi-kṛta~ § 30.1.24B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ omuddhakâpi śeyyāṃ kalpenti § 30.2.24B7. satyaṃ ... yūyaṃ omuddhakâpi śeyyāṃ kalpetha, vāmenâpi pārśvena śayyāṃ kalpetha? § 30.3.24B7. na kṣamati omuddhakena śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ § 30.3.25A1. omuddhakā bhikṣavo pretā śeyyāṃ kalpayanti omuddhikā~# “umgestülpt, auf den Kopf gestellt” ⇒ omuddhaka~, omuddhi-kṛta~ § 41.1.33B3. pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kariya ... (= § 41.2.33B5) § 41.2.33B6. te dāni bhikṣu paśyanti pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kṛtāṃ? § 41.25.35B2. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā ... omuddhikāṃ pādadhovanikāṃ karttuṃ § 43.4.38A4. lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ... omuddhikā sthapitavyā sūryābhimukhaṃ omuddhi-kṛta~# “umgestülpt, auf den Kopf gestellt” ⇒ omuddhaka~, omuddhikā~ § 41.1.33B4. kiṃ dāni ayaṃ pādadhovanikā omuddhikṛtā? omūtrantena für omūtra<ya>ntena oder omūtr<iy>antena : § 19.31.18B5 o-mtraya-# “urinieren auf”; < Skt. ava-mūtrayati; vgl. Pā. omutteti, omuttayati ☞ § 19.6, Anm. 3 § 19.6.17B7. so jalpati “mā khalu me āyuṣman, omutrayasi” tti § 19.13.18A4. na kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā ... gardabhena vā ūrūyo omūtriyantena gantuṃ § 19.31.18B5. nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā ūrūyo omūtra<ya>ntena gantuṃ omhāya Bedeutung ist unklar; wohl eine Verschreibung § 40.15.33A6. omhāya vā thālikāya vā bhājanehi vā thapitavyaṃ o-ruha-# “herabbringen, herabnehmen”; < *o-rūh- < Pkt. o-roh- < Skt. ava-rohayati ☞ § 19.25, Anm. 6 § 19.25.18B3~4. oruhantena mallakaṃ ghaṭikā vā mañcakasya ca oruhantena (lies: adhastāt?) susthapitā karttavyā olaggikāya# adv. “wie angewurzelt (sitzenbleiben)” ⇒ ullaggikāye olaṅka~ (BHS[Mvu]) “Schöpflöffel”; vgl. Pā. uḷuṅka, Skt. udaṅka ☞ § 4.12, Anm. 4 § 4.12.5A5. sūpasya ghṛtasya māṃsasya olaṃkānāṃ dadhisya olambika~ “Senklot” (?); vgl. Pā. olambaka “dass.” ☞ § 43.16, Anm. 6 § 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā olikā für tulikā : § 18.16.16A4 ollaggikāye#, ollagnāye# adv. “wie angewurzelt (sitzenbleiben)” ⇒ ullaggikāye ol-lapa-# “aufhängen, anhängen”; < ul-lapa- < ud + *lapayati (Kausativ von Skt. √lī?) ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 5 ⇒ ul-lapa- (2) § 43.7.38A6. tato kīlakehi ollapitvā sthapitavyā 175  § 43.9.38A7. kīlakehi ollapitvā sthapayitavyā ollā~# “Schimmel” oder “Nässe” ⇒ ullā~ (1) o-vada- (BHS[Mvu, SP], Pā) “unterweisen, belehren” ⇒ o-vāda~ § 7.1.8A5. te dāni upasaṃpādiya na ovadanti, na anuśāsanti § 7.2.8A7. yūyaṃ upasaṃpādetha, upasaṃpādiya na ovadatha na anuśāsayatha § 7.3.8B1. evaṃ dāṇi yūyaṃ upasaṃpādiya naỿv’ ovadatha nânuśāsatha § 7.7.8B4. atha dāni ovadati, so eva tasya ovādo § 7.7.8B4. upādhyāyo śraddhevihāri upasaṃpādiya na ovadati, na anuśāsati, na uddiśati § 7.7.8B5. na ovadati vinayāti<kra>maṃ āsādayati § 8.2.8B6. kathaṃ ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ (≒ § 10.2.10A4) § 9.1.9B4. te dāni ... niśrayaṃ dapiya naỿva antevāsi ovadanti, na anuśāsanti § 9.2.9B6. niśrayaṃ dadiyāṇa antevāsikāṃ na ovadatha nânuśāsatha (≒ § 9.3.9B7) § 9.6.10A2. eṣo ācāryo ... antevāsi naỿva ovadati, nânuśāsati, vinayātikramam āsādayati o-varṣaya-#, o-varṣya-# “(vom Regen) naß werden”; < Skt. ava-√vṛṣ (“beregnen”); vgl. Pā. o- vassati (“is rained upon; is exposed to the rain” [DP]), o-vassate (“rains upon”) ⇒ o-vṛṣṭa~, nir-ovarṣa~ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... vātātapena vināśiyantaṃ varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantaṃ § 11.5.10B5. śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... varṣeṇa ovarṣa{par}yantam § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) varṣeṇa ovarṣīyati vātātapena vā vināśīyati § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ... varṣena ovarṣiyantāṃ (≒ § 15.2, § 16.2.14A6, § 17.2.14B6) § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantā{ṃ} kākaśakuntehi ohayiyantā{ṃ} § 13.2.12A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcāṃ pīṭhāṃ ... varṣeṇa ’varṣiyantāṃ prāṇakehi khajjantāṃ § 13.3.12A7. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantā{ṃ} prāṇakehi khajjantā? § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyanti, cchanne thapitavyā § 15.3.14A1. mañcā ca pīṭhā ca ... varṣeṇa ovarṣayantā prāṇakehi khājjantā § 16.3.14A7. mañcā pīṭhā ... varṣeṇa ovarṣayantā prāṇakehi khajjantā § 16.9.14B4. (mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... ) varṣeṇa ovarṣiyanti, nirovarṣe sthāpayitavyā (≒ § 17.12.15A7) § 17.3.14B6. mañcā pīṭhā ca ... varṣeṇa ’varṣiyaṃtā prāṇakehi khajjantā § 21.8.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... vātātapena vināśiyantaṃ varṣeṇa vā ovarṣayantaṃ pakṣīhi vā ohayiyantaṃ o-vāda~ (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “Unterweisung, Belehrung” ⇒ o-vada- § 7.7.8B4. atha dāni ovadati, so eva tasya ovādo. evaṃ svādhyāyati, araṇye vasati, prahāṇe upaviśati, so evâsya ovādo o-vāraya-# “verdecken”; vgl. DP, s.vv. *ovarati (“covers, checks, hinders”), ovārenta (“obstructing, covering, concealing”); CDIAL 457. *apavārayati (“wards off, protects”) ☞ § 53.14, Anm. 3 § 53.14.45B4. <vaktavyaṃ> “... dīpaṃ gopayiṣyan.” ti. tato hastena tāva ovārayitavyo ovāhitahastena für ohitah° : § 27.6.23B7 o-vṛṣṭa~# “vom Regen benetzt”; < Skt. ava-vṛṣṭa~ ⇒ o-varṣaya-, o-varṣya- § 11.6.10B7. varṣāya ovṛṣṭo bhavati, cikhallikā opūretavyā, vaṃghorikā dātavyā ovvaraka~# “Kammer, Zimmer für Frauen”; vgl. Pā. ovaraka, BHS. avavaraka, Skt. apavaraka ☞ § 51.7, Anm. 5 § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohanati, yadi tāva kaṇḍikāpūrakam ukkaḍḍhiya ovvarakaṃ (Hs. occa°) praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā.” ti § 51.8.44A4. yadi tāva śilāpūrakāṃ pithiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ (Hs. occa°) praviśati, jāni- tavyaṃ “eṣā dāsyati” § 51.11.44A5. eṣā strī bhikṣuṃ paśyiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ (Hs. occa°) praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” tti § 51.14.44A7. evaṃ yaṃ yaṃ kāryyaṃ cchindiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ (Hs. occa°) praviśati, dātukāmā bhavati, na tena gantavyaṃ ov-vellaya-# “wickeln, anziehen”; < ā-veṣṭayati oder upa-veṣṭayati? ☞ § 45.6, Anm. 4 ⇒ uv- vel(l)aya-, ā-vellaya- usw. § 45.6.40A2. nivāsanaṃ ovvellayitavyaṃ (Hs. occell°), snānaśāṭakaṃ vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍa- 176  kaṃ vā uvvellayitavyaṃ ośakara~#? “trocken”? ☞ § 13.16, Anm. 1 § 13.16.12B7. yadi tāva vihāro ośakaroti (lies: ośakaro <bhava>ti?), odako dātavyo ośyā~# “Tau”; < Skt. avaśyā (“Reif, Tau”) ☞ § 31.5, Anm. 1 § 31.5.25B4. yadi dāni ośyā bhavati, taruṇabhikṣūhi agrato gantavyaṃ ośyā pratibāhantehi oṣa~# oder oṣā~# “Erdsalz”; vgl. Skt. ūṣa, ūṣā, Pā. ūsa ☞ § 17.10, Anm. 6 ⇒ ūṣa~ § 17.10.15A5. kālena kālaṃ anyehi oṣā gālayitavyā oṣṭha~ ⇒ oṭṭha~, agroṣṭha~ § 40.11.33A4. na dāni atibahu oṣṭha (Nom. pl. masc.) prakṣipitavyā § 40.11.33A4. oṣṭha (Acc. pl. masc.) pramārjitvā agroṣṭhehi pātavyaṃ § 40.12.33A4. yadi koci atibahuṃ oṣṭhaṃ (Acc. pl. masc.) vā volayati keśā vā ālaya{ṃ}ti nilāṭe vā, apanetavyaṃ § 40.14.33A6. jentāke vārentena oṣṭhā (“Rand”; ☞ § 40.14, Anm. 1) pānīyadhārikāye (?; Hs. pānīyacārikāye) patraṃ (Hs. pātraṃ) bandhitavyaṃ § 40.14.33A6. pibantena oṣṭhā patraśākhāye nirmmādayitvā agroṣṭhakehi pātavyaṃ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... cikkaṇā vā oṣṭhāni (oder lies: oṣṭhā{ni}) nirmādayituṃ § 49.1.42A1. so dāni śuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati § 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvitaṃ § 49.1.42A3. ayaṃ upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati § 49.1.42A3. āyuṣman, snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo, pilipilāpanti oṣṭhā, suṣṭhu khalu nirddhāpīyati o-sara- (BHS) < Skt. apa-√sṛ (“herabgleiten, sich entfernen”) oder Skt. ava-√sṛ (“wegbewegen”); vgl. BHSD, s.v. avaśirati ☞ § 18.50, Anm. 2 ⇒ o-saraya-, o-sāraya-, us-sara- (1) “herunterlassen, herunterkrempeln, herunterziehen” § 18.50.17B1. atha khalu utthihitavyaṃ ca nivāsanaṃ osaritavyaṃ (2) “zurücklassen” § 50.3.43A5. nâpi kṣamati piṇḍapātanīhārakena piṇḍapātam ānayitvā śūnyake vihārake osariya gantuṃ (3) “(die Tür) öffnen” § 42.3.36A5. osaratha dvāraṃ (4) ⇒ osara- indriyāṇi o-sara- indriyāṇi # “in eigener Selbstkontrolle nachlassen” ☞ § 60.7, Anm. 1 § 60.7.49A1. nâpi kṣamati osariya indriyāṇi vuktanti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa osaritvā indriyāṇi maṭamaṭa aṅgā<ni> bhañjantena yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ § 62.5.50A2. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇaśālāyām upaviṣṭasya vātakarmma āgacchati, na dāni osaritvā indriyāṇi karttavyaṃ osarantikāye# “sich Zeit lassend”; < Skt. apa-√sṛ (“herabgleiten, sich entfernen”) oder Skt. ava- sārayati (“wegbewegen”)? ☞ § 3.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ o-sara-, us-sara- § 3.1.3A6. bhikṣu osarantikāye na āgacchanti § 3.1.3A7. ete hi bhikṣū osarantikāye na āgacchati § 3.1.3A7. ime pi āryamiśrā osara<ṃ>tikāye nâgacchanti § 6.1.7A4. bhikṣū osarantikāye āgacchanti § 6.1.7A5. bhikṣū āhaṃsu “osarantikāye āgacchanti” § 6.1.7A5. ime pi āryamiśrā osara<ṃ>tikāye āgacchanti (≒ § 6.3.7A7) § 6.3.7A6. yūyaṃ osarantikāye āgacchatha § 6.3.7A7. bhikṣū osarantikāye āgacchanti o-saraya-# “herunterziehen; herabziehen”; < Skt. apa-√sṛ (“herabgleiten, sich entfernen”), Skt. ava- sārayati ⇒ o-sara-, o-sāraya- § 22.6.21A3. (cakkalī ...) na dāni kṣamati divasata osarayitvā thapayituṃ o-sāraya- (BHS) (1) “herunterziehen; herabziehen; stecken”; < Skt. ava-sārayati; vgl. BHSD, s.v. avaśirati; DP 177  I, S. 594, s.v. osāreti1,~ayati1 (“makes enter; puts into or on to; lowers [into]”) ⇒ o-saraya-, o-sara-, us-sara- § 22.2.21A1. (cakkalī ...) osāriyāṇaṃ heṣṭhe dve kīlakān āpīḍiyāṇa tahiṃ bandhitavyaṃ § 22.3.21A1. nidhāpiyāṇa cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ kīlakehi bandhiyāṇa tato otaritavyaṃ § 22.4.21A2. (vihāraṃ ...) praviśiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osārayitavyā, dvāraṃ bandhitavyaṃ § 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apadu{cca}ritavyaṃ cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ § 45.6.40A2. nâpi kṣamati heṣṭhena snānaśāṭikām vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakam vā osārayituṃ calanakaṃ yathā § 57.5.47B4. upānahikāyo ... saṃpuṭikariyāṇaṃ vāmakena hastena gṛhṇiya nikuṭitakena <vāmā bāhāṃ> osārayitvā saṃprajānaṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ § 57.6.47B4. upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā nikuṭitakena vāmā bāhāṃ osāriya saṃprajānaṃ nirddhāvitavyaṃ (2) “ausstrecken”#; < Skt. apa-sārayati (“entfernen”) § 29.6.24B4. atha dāni arddhaparyaṅkenâpi na pāreti niṣīdituṃ, ubhau pādau osāriya susaṃvṛtena niṣīditavyaṃ (3) “abnehmen”#; < Skt. apa-sārayati (“fortschaffen, entfernen”) ☞ § 57.7, Anm. 2 § 57.7.47B5. prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśitavyaṃ. vṛddhānte upānahāyo pārṣṇivaddhake osāriya praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ ostakāḥ für okastāḥ (Metathese) : § 57.1.47A7 *o-haṇṇa~# “beschmutzt”?; < Skt. upa (oder ava-) + hanna (Lex. “defaktiert”); vgl. Pā. ūhanna (“[mit Exkrementen] beschmutzt”) ☞ § 18.18, Anm. 2 ⇒ o-haya- § 18.18.16A6. atha dāni anyena (Hs. °nyo) ’caukṣīkṛtaṃ bhavati ohaṇṇam (Hs. ohāṇam) vā o-hana- (Pā) “enthülsen” oder “dreschen”; < Skt. avahanati (“ausschlagen, dreschen”) § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohana{n}ti, yadi tāva kaṇḍikāpūrakam ukkaḍḍhiya ovvarakaṃ praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā.” ti o-hapa- für o-haya- : § 11.5.10B6. ohapiyante für ohayi°; § 12.3.11B1. ohapiyantāṃ für ohayi° (= § 17.3.14B6); § 12.6.11B3. ohapiyanti für ohayi°; § 17.12.15A6. ohapiyanti für ohayi°; § 18.4. 15B2. ohapiyāpetavyā für ohayi° o-haya-# “beschmutzen”; < Skt. *ava-√had (“beschmutzen”; vgl. hadati “Stuhlgang haben”); Pā. o- hadati, ū-hadati ☞ § 11.2, Anm. 3 ⇒ o-hayiyāpe-, o-haṇṇa~ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... prāṇakehi khajjantaṃ pakṣihi ohayiyantaṃ § 11.5.10B5. śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... pakṣīhi vā oh<ay>iyantaṃ § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) prāṇakehi khādyati, pakṣīhi ohayiyate (Hs. ohapiyante) § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ... kākaśakuntehi ohayiyantāṃ § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ... kākaśakuntehi ohayiyantā{ṃ} (Hs. ohapi°) (≒ § 17.3.14B6) § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... kākaśakuntehi vā ohayiyanti (Hs. ohapi°) § 16.9.14B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... kākaśakuntakehi ohayiyanti cchanne sthāpayitavyāḥ § 17.2.14B6. adrākṣīd ... mañcā ca pīṭhā ca ... kākaśakuntehi ohayiyantāṃ (Hs. oharṣi°) § 17.12.15A6. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... kākaśakuntehi vā ohayiyanti (Hs. ohapi°) ... cchanne sthāpayitavyā § 18.20.16A7. so dān’ āha “mā me āyuṣmaṃ ohayesi.” § 18.29.16B5. nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā garddabhena vā ūrūyo ’hayaṃtena (Hs. haṃyatena) gacchituṃ § 18.33.16B6. na kṣamati <yathā> uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā ūrūyo ohayantena gantuṃ § 21.8.20B5. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... pakṣīhi vā ohayiyantaṃ ohayitahastena für ohāyita° : § 18.27.16B4 o-hayitvā# “Abstand hinter (jemandem) haltend” (wörtl. “zurückgeblieben seiend”?); Absolutiv von Skt. ava-√hā (“verlassen, zurücklassen”); vgl. Pā. ohāyitvā ☞ § 28.8, Anm. 1 ⇒ nihīnakena § 28.8.24A4. tan na kṣamati purato samaṃ vā gantuṃ. ohayitvā gantavyaṃ o-hayiyāpe-# “(mit Kot) beschmutzt werden lassen”; Kausativ von o-hayiya- (“beschmutzt werden”) ☞ § 18.4, Anm. 7, § 11.2, Anm. 3 ⇒ o-haya- § 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) yadi vā khāniyā udakāntikā bhavati, prathamaṃ kalpiya- 178  kāreṇa ohayiyāpetavyā (Hs. ohapi°) oharapāra-yukta~ Bedeutung ist unklar (“bei der Paarung”?) ☞ § 47.7, Anm. 3 § 47.7.41A1. parivarjitavyā bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā hasti bhrānto vā ratho aśvavaḍavā vā oharapārayuktaṃ oharṣiyantāṃ für ohayiyantāṃ : § 17.2.14B6 o-hāṭaya-# “abdecken”; < Skt. apa-√ghaṭ?; Pkt. ohāḍiya “geschlossen”; Pkt. ohāḍaṇa “Deckel” ☞ § 18.4, Anm. 11 § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) tatra kāṣṭhehi vā phalakehi vā ohāṭayitavyā ohāṇam für ohaṇṇam? : § 18.18.16A6 *ohāyita-hasta~# “mit herunterhängenden Armen” (?); < Skt. ava-√dhā ☞ § 18.27, Anm. 1 ⇒ ohita-hasta~ § 18.27.16B4. nâpi kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ohāyitahastena (Hs. oha°) vā varccakuṭīṃ praveṣṭuṃ ohita-hasta~# “mit herunterhängenden Armen” (?); < Skt. ava-hita ☞ § 18.27, Anm. 1 ⇒ ohāyita- hasta~ § 19.10.18A2. nâpi dāni kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ohitahaste<na> vā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena upaveṣṭuṃ § 20.15.20A2. nâpi kṣamati cetiyaṃ vandantena oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ohitahastena vā cetiyābhigṛhe vā prāsāde vā khādituṃ § 27.6.23B7. na kṣamati ... upānahārūḍhena vā tiṣṭhituṃ khaṃbhakṛtena vā oguṇṭhita- śīrṣeṇa vā o{vā}hitahastena vā § 27.8.23B7. kiñ câpi upānahārūḍho oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo vā ohitahasto vā tiṣṭhati, anāpattiḥ § 32.8.27B3. na kṣamati oguṇṭhitakāyena. na kṣamati ohitahastena. na kṣamati upānahārūḍhena § 41.30.35B6. nâpi kṣamati pādadhovanikāyāṃ oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa ohitahastena vā {pādadhovanikāyā} upaviśituṃ § 54.6.46A3. yaṣṭi dāni vārentena na dāni oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā vāretavyā ohitahastena vā upānahārūḍhena vā yaṣṭi vāretavyā ohiya für oguhiya : § 18.33.16B7; ohiyāṇaṃ für o<gu>hiyāṇaṃ : § 19.6.17B7 ohiyantaṃ für oh<ay>iyantaṃ : § 11.5.10B5 oheyyaka~# (1) “jemand, der (als Wächter im Kloster) zurückgelassen worden ist”; < Skt. avahīyate; vgl. Pā. ohiyyaka, ohīyaka ☞ § 4.11, Anm. 1 § 4.11.5A2. oheyyakānāṃ (Hs. oheṣya°) glānakānāṃ pratikṛty’ eva dāpitavyaṃ (2) “jemand, dem die Verantwortung (für Wasserkrüge bzw. Wasser) übertragen worden ist”? ☞ § 18.13, Anm. 2 § 18.13.16A2. riktakāṃ varccakumbhikāṃ paśyati, ... yasya oheyyako bhavati, tasya ācikṣitavyaṃ § 19.17.18A6. so dāni ujjhitavyo navakāntena vā yasya vā oheyyako bhavati § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako, so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā” oheyya-glānaka~# “ein (im Kloster) zurückbleibender und ein kranker (Mönch)” ☞ § 5.10, Anm. 3 § 5.10.6B7. oheyyaglānakānāṃ piṇḍapāto dāpayitavyo (= § 6.10.7B7) § 5.10.7A1. oheyyaglānakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye piṇḍapāto gṛhṇitavyo (= § 6.10.8A1) § 6.10.8A1. bhante oheyyaglānakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye piṇḍapātaṃ gṛhṇatha oheṣyakānāṃ für oheyya° : § 4.11.5A2 AU au / e ⇒ e / au auddhatyābhiprāya~# (°tya-abhi°) “die Absicht, zu stören; die Absicht, zu stören, habend” ⇒ upārambhaṇābhiprāya~, viheṭhanābhiprāya~ § 58.1.48A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyā 179  muktehi pārśvehi “khala khala” tti kāsanti, yogācārāṃ bhikṣuṃ śabdena vyābahanti § 58.3.48A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇam upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “khulu khulu” tti kāsituṃ § 58.4.48A3. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyikāye vā auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ § 58.5.48A4. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇikena upaviṣṭe<na> auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha” tti kāsituṃ § 58.6.48A5. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ § 59.1.48A6. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyāḥ tulikāye nakkaṃ vijjhanti, sūtrakaṃ pi vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ nakke prakṣipanti § 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa tulikāya vā nakkaṃ vijjhituṃ sūtraṃ vaṭṭiya nakkasmin prakṣipituṃ § 59.5.48B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā upaviṣṭena auddhatyā<bhi>prāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhe<na> kṣīvituṃ § 59.7.48B3. nâpi kṣamati sāmāyikāyām vā upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena kṣīvituṃ § 60.3.48B5. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇa upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa ... kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.5.48B6. nâpi kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa saṃkalikāya vā śarkkarakāya vā “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.6.49A1. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakāṇāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti, aṅgāni bhañjayanti maṭamaṭāya phoḍenti amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ § 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa osaritvā indriyāṇi maṭamaṭa aṅgā<ni> bhañjantena yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ § 62.2.49B5. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena saktukāṃ kulmāṣāṃ ca (lies: vā?) mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayanti § 62.4.49B7. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktukān vā mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayitvā śvetamayena yeva khādituṃ § 62.5.50A1. na kṣamati prahāṇam upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} ḍharaḍharāye vātakarmma karttuṃ § 62.8.50A4. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa vātakarmma karttuṃ § 62.9.50A5. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇe vā sāmāyikāyām vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} pharapharasya vātakarmma karttuṃ § 62.10.50A6. nâpi kṣamati antaragharaṃ niṣaṇṇena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ § 62.11.50A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā vṛddhatarakasya vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ Ṃ ṃ/ḥ: § 62.5.50A2. karttuḥ für karttuṃ ṃ/r: § 39.26.32A3. vaṃjāyatehi für varjaya° § 44.1.38B7. saṃca wohl für sarvaṃ bzw. sarvvaṃ Ḥ ḥ/ṃ ⇒ ṃ/ḥ 180  K k / kh : § 62.2.49B6. kho für ko ☞ § 62.2(Text), Anm. 9 k/g: § 15.8.14A3. cchinnakaṇṭhi für cchinnagaṇṭhikā k/t: § 18.31.16B5. koḍitena für koḍikena ⇒ kulikā~ für tulikā~? k/n: § 45.1.39B3. nivāsakāni wohl für nivāsanāni k/v: § 17.10.15A4. prākārā für prāvārā § 19.17.18A6. kā für vā § 19.26.18B4. varttavyo für karttavyo (= § 8.8.9A5) ka~ ⇒ ka~ + ci, ka~ + cid, ko punar vvādo, etad~ ... ka~ + ci, kahi, kahiṃ, kiṃ, kiñci, kiñcid § 1.1.1B1. “ko dāni nâgacchati?” (= § 5.1.6A5, § 6.1.7A5) § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ko śalākāṃ vārayiṣyati, ko praticchiṣyati, ko prātimokṣasūtraṃ uddiśiṣyati, ko dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśiṣyati, ko parikathāṃ kariṣyati § 3.1.3A7. ko khu nâgacchati? (= § 4.1.4A6) § 4.5.4B2. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ko ’yaṃ nimantreti (≒ § 6.5.7B1) § 12.14.12A1. tahi koci bhavati āṭakkarasiṃhanādiko “paryāpto. ... ko vihārako?” ti § 31.18.26A2. nâpi dāni vaktavyaṃ “ko itthaṃ? kativarṣo? utthiha!” § 33.16.28A6. “ko te upādhyāyo?” “ko te ācāryo?” § 41.18.35A1. ko (für ho?) bhaṇe ko ahaṃ yuṣmākaṃ? § 41.26.35B3. trīṇi vācāyo jalpayitavyāyo “ko vṛddhatarako vṛddho?” tti § 41.32.36A1. atha dāni hemantakālo bhavati, bhikṣuḥ paśyati “ko bhūyo dhoviṣyatî?”ti § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko (Hs. kho) vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” § 18.45.17A6. mā odhyāyeṃsu “ken’ imaṃ<hi> panthesmi antrāṇi vikīrṇṇāni?” § 19.19.18A7. kenâyaṃ nikkālayitavyo? § 4.5.4B2. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: kasyâdya bhaktaṃ ... § 4.7.4B5. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “kasya bhaktaṃ? kasya sidhyati? kasya pacyatî?”ti § 11.3.10B4. kasyêmaṃ bhikṣavo śayyāsanaṃ ... ātape dinnaṃ? § 12.3.11A7. kasyême bhikṣavo vihārakā odriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā ...? § 31.18.26A2. kasya śuve bhaktaṃ tarpaṇaṃ purobhaktikaṃ vā? § 38.6.30B1. kasya (“Warum”; Ablativ; ☞ § 38.6, Anm. 4) tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ sahitānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? § 41.16.34B6. kasya kṛtena tvaṃ atra dīpamūlaṃ allīno ’si? usw. ka~ + ci (Pā) ⇒ etad~ ... ka~ + ci, ka~ + cid, kiñci, kiñcid § 3.5.3B2. yadi dāni koci pṛcchati “bhante katamâdya?”, ... § 5.7.6B4. <nâsti> ’tināmâsmākaṃ koci upāsako § 6.7.7B4. koci ima<ṃ>hi evannāmako upāsako dānapatī vā vāṇijako (Hs. °akā) vā? § 6.7.7B4. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “nâsti koci imaṃhi evaṃnāmako ...” § 12.14.12A1. tahi koci bhavati āṭakkarasiṃhanādiko “paryāpto. ... ko vihārako?” ti § 18.22.16B1. yadi tāva tahi koci pūrvvapraviṣṭo bhavati tena pratyacchaṭikā karttavyā (≒ § 19.8.18A2) § 19.32.18B6. atha dāni koci bhikṣu paśyati, nâyaṃ vaktavyo “ko eṣo? kim vā? ...” § 21.5.20B2. atha dāni aparo pi koci sīvayi<tu>kāmo bhavati, ... (≒ § 21.6.20B4) § 31.4.25B3. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, na dāni ujjhitvā gantavyaṃ § 31.37.27A3. yadi koci sārtho prayāto bhavati, ... § 39.26.32A4. atha dāni teṣāṃ na koci lābhagrāhako bhavati, ... § 41.26.35B3. atha dāni koci vṛddhatarako na bhavati, ... § 49.8.42B6. atha dāni koci vandati, vaktavyaṃ “amuko vandati” § 52.8.44B7. yadi koci nimantreti, yadi arthiko bhavati, praticchitavyaṃ § 53.7.45A6. dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti § 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo ... § 54.13.46B1. yadi koci pracālayati tasya dātavyā § 59.8.48B4. yadi tāva koci kṣīvati, na dāni vaktavyaṃ “jīva” ti 181  § 60.5.48B7. koci se pradeśo khajjati, hastā ca se ’kalpiyā bhavanti, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni bhikṣusya koci pradeśo khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā parimardditavyaṃ § 19.14.18A4. atha dāni kenaci bhikṣuṇā dṛṣṭo, ... § 24.12.22A7. <paśyati?> kheṭaṃ cchoritakaṃ kenaci aprakṛtijñena, pādena marditavyo § 32.10.27B4. yadi kasyaci vraṇo bhavati gaṇḍo vā piṭako vā, na dāni sahasā uppīḍi- tavyaṃ § 49.1.41B6. mā kasyaci ācikṣesi § 49.2.42A5. mā khalu kasyaci ācikṣiṣyasi § 31.34.27A1. “ ... yadi keci āgantukā āgaccheṃsu, tato dvāraṃ dadesi.” ... yadi tāva keci āgantukā āgacchanti, teṣāṃ dvāraṃ dātavyaṃ usw. ka~ + cid ⇒ ka~ + ci § 4.8.4B7. kasyacit bhikṣusya jalpitavyaṃ ... kakṣa~ § 14.6.13A5. vihārasya catuḥpārśve kakṣaṃ jātakaṃ bhavati, so lavāpayitavyo § 18.5.15B4. tatra kaṇṭhavāriṇī karttavyā kakṣamātrī vā galamātrī vā √kac ⇒ uk-kacaya- kacci (Pā) < Skt. kaccid § 21.1.20A7. kacci me śrāvakāḥ na karmmārāmāḥ na karmmaratāḥ na karmmārāmatā- nuyogam anuyuktā viharanti (≒ § 11.1.10B2, § 12.1.11A5) kaṭacchuk~ (BHS, Pā) “Löffel” § 43.6.38A5. yaṃ tatra bhavati śatapotanako vā tāmrapātrā vā lohapātrā vā kaṭacchukā vā taddukā vā ... kaṭahaka~ für kaṭāhaka~ : § 14.4.13A3. kaṭāhakāni (Hs. kaṭa°); § 20.13.20A1. kaṭāhake (Hs. kaṭa°); § 43.13.38B1. raṅgakaṭāhakā (Hs. °kaṭahakā) kaṭāha~ ⇒ kheṭa-kaṭāha~ § 18.51.17B1. varccakuṭī na bhavati, kaṭāhena vā mallikena vā ujjhitavyaṃ kaṭāhaka~ ⇒ kheṭa-kaṭāhaka~, uccāra-kaṭāhaka, raṅga-kaṭāhaka~ § 14.4.13A3. yaṃ tahiṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati kocavakā vā ... caturasrakā vā kumbhīyo vā kaṭāhakāni (Hs. kaṭah°) vā sarvvaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ otāretavyaṃ § 18.8.15B6. tāni kuṇḍakāni vā kaṭāhakāni vā nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ saprāṇakāni vā adhotakāni vā. § 20.13.20A1. atha khalu kaṭāhake (Hs. kaṭah°) vā mallake vā koṭiyāṃ vā āviddha- puṭikāyām vā kheṭaṃ cchorayitavyaṃ § 43.4.38A4. yaṃ tatra bhaṇḍaṃ bhavati lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā sthālī vā piṭharikā vā ... kaṭṭārikā-cchejja~# “mit einem Messer zu schneiden”; < Skt. kaṭṭārikā + chedya ⇒ daṇḍāśani- bhejja~ § 26.1.23A5. atha dāni khakkhaṭa bhavati, jalpa<ṃ>ti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, lecchaṃ (wohl für lehyaṃ) ayaṃ, ’peyyā ayaṃ, kaṭṭārikācchejjā ayaṃ.” kaṭhalla~ (BHS) “Scherbe”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. kaṭhala, CPD, s.v. kaṭhal ☞ § 18.16, Anm. 3 § 18.16.16A4. tena hi na kṣamati vaṃśaśalākāhi ... kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā asthi- khaṇḍena vā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchituṃ § 18.35.16B7. tenâpi dāni uśvāsaṃ kariya mallakena vā koḍillena vā kaṭhallena vā cchoḍiyāṇa ... § 19.15.18A4. so pṛthivīpradeśo, yadi tāvad āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā uttatthiyāṇaṃ cchorayitavyo (≒ § 19.33.18B6) § 22.4.21A2. atha khalu khaṭakhaṭāpayitavyā kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā tato paścāc cakkalī utkṣipitavyā kaṭhina~ (BHS, Pā) “Kaṭhina-Matte”# ☞ § 21.3, Anm. 1, 2 § 21.3.20B1~2. tena hi kaṭhinaṃ nāma karttavyaṃ. kaṭhinaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpaya- māṇena dvādaśahastāṃ āyāmato karttavyaṃ aṣṭahastāṃ vistāreṇa, vaṃśānāṃ vā nalānām vā na<ṃ>galānāṃ vā kāṇḍānām vā carukānām vā rohiṣāṇāṃ vā sūtrikāya vā 182  rejjukāya vā ghaṇa vuṇitavyaṃ § 21.4.20B2. upasthānaśālāyāṃ vā agniśālāyāṃ vā prāsāde vā prahāṇake <vā> kaṭhinaṃ prajñāpayitvā cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinaṃ astariyāṇaṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśi- yāṇaṃ taṃ cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 21.5.20B2. tenâpi pādāṃ dhovayitvā kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiya ... § 21.5.20B3. na kṣamati adhotakehi pādakehi kaṭhinaṃ okramituṃ. atha khalu bāhyena kaṭhinasmi pādāni thapiyāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ sīvayitavyaṃ § 21.6.20B3. yaṃ kālaṃ cīvaraṃ sīvitaṃ bhavati, kaṭhinaṃ samvaṭ<ṭ>iyāṇaṃ bhittīye dve kīlakā nikhaniya rajjue bandhiya tahiṃ ukkacayitavyaṃ § 21.7.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinasmi (Hs. °sya) raṅgaṃ vā śoṣayituṃ (Hs. śodha°) gomayaṃ vā cīvarakāni vā śoṣayituṃ (Hs. śodha°). atha khalu cīvarakaṃ sīvayitavyaṃ § 21.8.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggakaṃ vā paluggakaṃ ... § 21.9.20B5. atha dāni kaṭhinaṃ na bhavati, mañcasya vā upari cīvaraṃ pīṭhasya vā upari cīvarakaṃ kariyāṇaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 21.10.20B6. evaṃ kaṭhine pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [III].25A6) Antaroddāna 50B2. saṃghasthaviro ca śayyāsana kaṭhina āgantukā ca kaḍevarikā~#, kaḍevariyā~# “eine Leiter” ☞ § 14.9, Anm. 5 ⇒ niśreṇ~ § 14.9.13A7. ekena abhyantaraghaṭṭimaṃ vihārakaṃ kariya, rejjūye vā kaḍevarikā{|}ya vā otaritavyaṃ. otariya rajjū{ye} vā kaḍevariyā vā abhyantare kṣipitavyā kaḍḍha- (Pā) “ziehen”; vgl. Pkt. kaḍḍhai, BHS. kaṭṭati, Skt. karṣati; Denominativ vom Partizip Präteritum *kaḍḍha < *kaṭṭha < kṛṣṭa, vgl. dazu Tedesco 1965: 374-377; Norman, CP V. 84f.; CPD, s.v. kaḍḍhati; Poṣ(Hu) 145; Oguibénine 1998b: 82~83; v. Hinüber 2001: § 493; Oberlies 2001: 251 ☞ § 4.13, Anm. 5, § 25.13, Anm. 3, § 47.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ uk-kaḍḍha-, o-kaḍḍha-, √kṛṣ § 47.1.40B2. te ... cīvaraṃ ka<ḍ>ḍhaṃtā (Hs. kaṃḍhaṃtā) praviśanti § 47.1.40B3. jhāḍe vā vṛkṣaśākhāyām vā lagnaṃ dranti (lies: “ḍu” tti?) ka<ḍ>ḍhanti § 47.2.40B4. cīvarakāni kaḍḍhantā gacchatha § 47.4.40B6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā antaragharaṃ praviśantena cīvaraṃ kaḍḍhantena praviśituṃ kaḍha-# “kochen”; vgl. Pā. kaṭhati, Pkt. kaḍhaï < Skt. √kvath ☞ § 39.7, Anm. 1 § 39.7.31A4. atha dāni nâgacchanti, nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ taṇḍulāni prakṣipituṃ. atha khalu kaḍhantī thapitavyā § 40.16.33B1. na dāni kṣamati pāridhovaniyāto snāpituṃ (lies: snāyituṃ?) vā cīvaram vā dhovituṃ rañjanaṃ vā kaḍhituṃ kaḍha- für kaḍḍha- (vgl. Poṣ[Hu] 114) : § 47.1.40B2. ka<ḍ>ḍhaṃtā (Hs. kaṃḍhaṃtā); § 47.1. 40B3. ka<ḍ>ḍhanti kaṇṭaka-śākhā~# “dorniger Zweig”; vgl. Pā. kaṇṭaka-sākhā (“a thorny bough” [CPD]) § 47.1.40B2. kaṇṭakaśākhāhi lagnaṃ bhavati § 47.7.41A1. kaṇṭakaśākhā parivarjantena sudhāpāṇḍulepanāyo <bhittīḥ> parivarjantena praviśitavyaṃ § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ ... kaṇṭakaśākhāyāṃ vā lagnaṃ bhavati § 47.8.41A2. mā cīvaraṃ mā kaṇṭakaśākhā kaṇṭha~ “Hals” ⇒ mātā-pitṛ-kaṇṭha~ § 59.1.48A6. te dāni sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena hacchīyanti § 59.3.48A7. nâpi kṣamati sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena “hā” tti kṣipituṃ § 59.5.48B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... sarvveṇa kaṇṭhe<na> kṣīvituṃ (≒ § 59.7.48B3) § 59.6.48B2. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇe sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena kṣīvituṃ kaṇṭha-vāriṇī~# od. °-dhāriṇī~# “Trennwand”; vgl. CDIAL 2680. kaṇṭha- “*border, immediate proximity”, 2720. kanthā-1 “wall” ☞ § 18.5, Anm. 2 § 18.5.15B4. tatra kaṇṭhavāriṇī (Hs. °iṇi) karttavyā kakṣamātrī vā galamātrī vā vaṃśehi vā nalena vā naṃgalehi vā phalakair vvā. tathā karttavyā yathā upaviṣṭā anyonyaṃ na paśyanti -kaṇṭhi für -gaṇṭhikā : § 15.8.14A3. cchinnakaṇṭhi für cchinnagaṇṭhikā 183 kaṇḍa~ (Pā), kāṇḍa~ (Skt) “Rohr”; vgl. BHS. kaṇḍa (“Pfeil”) ⇒ kaṇḍa-vidalik~ § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ ... vaṃśānāṃ vā nalānām vā na<ṃ>galānāṃ vā kāṇḍānām vā carukānām vā rohiṣāṇāṃ vā sūtrikāya vā rejjukāya vā ghaṇa<ṃ> vuṇitavyaṃ § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī ... kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā naḍānām vā naṅgalānām vā kaṇḍānām vā rejjukāye vā sūtrakāye (für sūtrikāye?) vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā kaṇḍa-vidalik~# “gespaltenes Rohr” ⇒ kaṇḍa~ § 18.16.16A4. tena hi na kṣamati vaṃśaśalākāhi kaṇḍavidalikena (Hs. °kaina; ein Fehler für °vidalikāya?) vā ... vraṇamukhaṃ pocchituṃ kaṇḍa-hasta~# “Stößel” od. “Mörserkeule, Stampfer” (?) ☞ § 43.7, Anm. 4 § 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā durvvā vā kaṇḍahastā vā karkkaṭakā vā ... kaṇḍikā-pūraka~# “Mörser und Stößel” (?) ☞ § 51.7, Anm. 3 ⇒ śilā-pūrak~ § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohanati, yadi tāva kaṇḍikāpūrakam ukkaḍḍhiya ovvarakaṃ praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā.” ti kaṇḍū~ “Kratzen; Jucken” § 60.8.49A1. evaṃ kaṇḍūye pratipadyitavyaṃ; vgl. § 60.2.48B5. evaṃ kaṃḍūyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VII].50B1) kaṇḍūya- (Skt) “kratzen”; vgl. Pā. kaṇḍyati, kaṇḍvati § 60.1.48B5. te ... śarkarāyaṃ pi śalākāyaṃ pi aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyanti § 60.2.48B5. tena hi evaṃ kaṃḍūyitavyaṃ (Hs. saṃdūṣitavyaṃ). kin ti dāni evaṃ kaṃḍūyitavyaṃ (Hs. dūṣitavyaṃ)? Uddāna (VII).50B1. evaṃ kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ § 60.3.48B5. na kṣamati ... śarkarāye vā <śalākāye vā> aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.5.48B6. nâpi kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa saṃkalikāya vā śarkkarakāya vā “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.5.48B7. kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ § 60.5.48B7. taṃ pi tathā dāni kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ, yathā ānantaryakaṃ śabdena na vyābahati § 60.5.48B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ khajjanako bhavati, puno puno kaṇḍūyati, ... § 60.6.49A1. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakāṇāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.7.49A1. nâpi kṣamati osariya indriyāṇi vuktanti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni <na> pāreti vinodayituṃ, punaḥ punaḥ khajjati, ekatam’ aṃte gacchiya kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ kaṇḍolkā~# (kaṇḍa-u°) “Rohrfackel” od. “Stockfackel”? ☞ § 15.6, Anm. 1 § 15.6.14A2. pradīpo jvālayitavyo tṛṇolkā vā kaṇḍolkā vā prajvālayitavyā kaṃḍhaṃtā für ka<ḍ>ḍhaṃtā: § 47.1.40B2 katama~ “welcher?” ⇒ katima~ § 12.12.11B7. āyuṣman amuke vihārake ettakā mañcā ettakā pīṭhāḥ ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ettakaṃ prāvaraṇaṃ. katamo tava vihārako rucyati? § 3.5.3B2. bhante katamâdya? ... katamā puna hiyo ’bhūṣi? § 4.5.4B3. katamaṃ deśaṃ gṛhaṃ? katamāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ? § 5.5.6B2. katamasmin deśe gṛhaṃ? katamāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ? § 6.5.7B2. katame deśe gṛhaṃ? kutomukhaṃ? katamāye rathyāye? kutomukhaṃ gṛhasya dvāraṃ? § 11.1.10B2. katamāṃ pañca? (= § 12.1.11A5, § 21.1.20A7) § 12.9.11B4. katamehi pañcahi? kati § 3.6.3B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kati pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi?; vgl. § 1.5.1B5. kettika pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi? katima~ (BHS, Pā) “welcher?”; vgl. BHSG § 22.16, Caillat 2011: 92, CPD, s.v. ⇒ katama~ § 3.5.3B3. yathā jñāpeta katimâdya sarvvehi jānitavyaṃ 184 kati-varṣa~# “wie viele Jahre (seit der Ordination)” ☞ § 31.22, Anm. 2 ⇒ etāvati-varṣa~ § 31.18.26A2. nâpi dāni vaktavyaṃ “ko itthaṃ? kativarṣo? utthiha!” § 31.22.26A5. nevāsikehi varṣāgraṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ “kativarṣo āyuṣman?” *katpāhaṃ# “nach einigen Tagen”; < *katipāhaṃ < Pā. katipāhaṃ (vgl. CPD, s.v. katipâha “a few days”) < Skt. katipaya + ahan ☞ § 50.2(Text), Anm. 1 § 50.2.43A3. te dāni katpāhaṃ (?; Hs. katyāhaṃ) kālasya ubhaye samāgatā katyāhaṃ für *katpāhaṃ?: § 50.2.43A3 ☞ § 50.2(Text), Anm. 1 katham § 4.9.5A1. praviśa<ṃ>tehi jānitavyaṃ: kathaṃ āsanā prajñaptāḥ § 6.7.7B4. nâsti koci imaṃhi evaṃnāmako. ... kasya bhaktaṃ? kathaṃ bhaktaṃ? § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: katham upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 9.1.9B5) § 8.2.8B6. kathaṃ ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ ... na pratyālīyanti? § 10.2.10A4. kathaṃ ime ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ? § 18.30.16B5. nâpi kṣamati vaktuṃ “ko vā eṣo? kathaṃ vā eṣo?”, mā veḍḍo bhaveya tti (≒ § 18.34.16B7, § 19.14.18A4) § 19.32. nâyaṃ vaktavyo “ko eṣo? kim vā? katham vā etaṃ?” ti, mā veḍḍo bhaveya tti § 33.4.28A1. kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirā bhikṣū ālapitavyā? § 33.5.28A1. kathaṃ bhagavāṃ, sthavirehi bhikṣūhi navakā bhikṣū ālapitavyā? § 41.11.34A7. yasya bhagavān katham ayaṃ brāhmaṇa sthavirasyâcāragocareṇa tuṣṭo? § 41.17.34B7. tehi eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati § 42.21.37A5. udakasya pratyayo (lies: pratya<ṃ>śo?) jānitavyo “kathaṃ dīyati” § 47.1.40B4. ime pi na jānanti katham antaraghare praviśantehi cīvarehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (≒ § 47.2.40B5) § 48.1.41A4. ime pi na jānanti kathaṃ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭehi cīvarehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (≒ § 48.2.41A6) usw. kathā~ § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati ... dhārmmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyāḥ § 1.13.2A6. dāyakadānapati dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyā (= § 3.12.4A4) § 2.9.3A2. dhārmyā kathayā saṃdarśiya samādāpiya samuttejiya sampraharṣayitvā udyojayitavyā (= § 3.10.4A2) § 4.2.4A7. nâpi dāyakadānapatiṃ dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayati samādāpayati ... § 49.1.42A1. na me tvayā sārddhaṃ phāsu bhavati kathāya vā niṣadyāya vā kathika~ ⇒ dharmma-kathika~ kadā § 32.2.27A5. so dān’ āha “kadā vā? kim vā?” kadā-ci (Pā) “einmal; eines Tages”; < Skt. kadācit § 4.9.5A1. kadāci maṅgalakaraṇīye atidakṣiṇaṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati, tathā yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 37.5.30A4. (tīrthikāḥ ...) sarvvāśrāmiṇânopavāde kadāci traividyaprāptāḥ bahuśrutā § 41.13.34B2. kadāci dāni dāni so śreṣṭhi aparehiṃ jñātiśāle nimantritako gato varṣārātrikaṃ kanaka~ für karaka~ : § 18.40.17A3 Kanaka-muni~ (BHS, SWTF) Name eines Buddha der Vorzeit ⇒ Konāka-muni~ § 6.13.8A4. Krakucchanda ca Kanakamuniñ ca Kāśyapaṃ (vs) kanīyasa~ ⇒ kanīyasaka~ § 20.8.19B4. dantakāṣṭhāni nāma trīṇi jyeṣṭhaṃ madhyamaṃ kanīyasaṃ § 20.8.19B5. jyeṣṭhaṃ nāma ṣoḍaśāṅgulāni madhyamaṃ dvādaśāṅgulāni kanīyasam aṣṭāṅgulāni kanīyasaka~# “kleiner, geringer, minder” ⇒ kanīyasa~ § 23.3.21A5. vihārā nāma trīṇi. jyeṣṭhako madhyamako kanīyasako. ... kin ti dāni kanīyasako? bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, nâpi bhavati ulloyo prapāṇḍaro, na haỿva bhitti kṛtaparikarmmā. evaṃ kanīyasako § 23.6.1.21B2. atha dāni kanīyasako vihārako bhavati, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ vinā pratipādakehi 185  mañcakaṃ thapeti, anāpattiḥ kapāṭa~ “Türflügel” § 25.8.22B5. pratisāmayantena nâpi kṣamati jaṃghāpathe vā sthāpayituṃ kapāṭe (Hs. °āṭo) vā muṇḍavātāyane vā § 42.9.36B3. yena bhraṣṭikā sāmantena {karttavyaṃ} kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.9.36B3. yadi tāva bhraṣṭikā dakṣiṇato bhavati, vāmato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.9.36B4. dakṣiṇato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ kapāla~ “Schale; Scherbe” § 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya ... § 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ sthavitaṃ. tan dāni vātamaṇḍalikāye āgacchiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno kapālānāṃ rāśiṃ kṛtvā kapālika~ “Scherbe” § 25.1.22B1. so dāni hastāṃ nirmmādiya vihārakaṃ praviṣṭo, paśyati kapālikānāṃ rāśiṃ kapittha~ § 25.4.22B3. nâpi kṣamati bilvasya vā pakvasya kapitthasya pakvasya nālikerasya heṣṭhe nirmmādayituṃ, mā pakvena vā bilvena pakvena vā kapitthena ... bhaṃjeya tti kabhallakā~#, kabhallikā~# “Dachziegel”; vgl. Skt. kapālikā (“Scherbe”) ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 5 § 11.6.10B7. kabhallacchadano bhavati, kabhallikā dātavyā (= § 12.5.11B3) § 23.7.21B5. kabhallakācchadano bhavati, kabhallakā dātavyā kabhalla-cchadana~#, kabhallakā-cchadana~# “Decke bzw. Dach aus Dachziegeln; Ziegeldach”; vgl. Skt. kapāla (“Schale, Schüssel; Scherbe”) ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 3, 5 ⇒ apakka-cchadana~, apakva-cch°, tṛṇa-cch°, phalaka-cch°, mṛttikā-cch°, sudhā-cch° § 11.6.10B7. kabhallacchadano bhavati, kabhallikā dātavyā (= § 12.5.11B2, § 13.6.12B2) § 23.7.21B5. kabhallakācchadano bhavati, kabhallakā dātavyā kabhallikā~ ⇒ kabhallakā~ kabhallakā-cchadana~ ⇒ kabhalla-cchadana~ √kamp ⇒ devānukampita~ kambala~ § 11.8.11A1. yadi tāva kambalasya bhavati, ekapuṭaṃ vā dvipuṭam vā karttavyaṃ kammaṃ für karmmaṃ : § 12.10.11B5 kara~ ⇒ karmma-kara~, dyutikara-śālā~, bahu-kara~ kara- (BHS; BHSG, S. 207a), karo- (Skt) ⇒ √kṛ, kare-, karitavya~, karttavya~ § 1.2.1B2. na parikathāṃ karoti (= § 4.2.4A7) § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ... ko dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśiṣyati, ko parikathāṃ kariṣyati (≒ § 2.7.2B7, § 3.8.3B6) § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ bhāṣesi” “tvaṃ parikathāṃ karesi” § 3.10.4A2. bāhyato tāva yūyaṃ muhūrttam āgametha. saṃgho tāva poṣadhaṃ kariṣyati § 5.7.6B3. āha “bhante kiṃ kariṣyasi?” § 8.11.9B1. atha dāni bhadrako bhavati guṇavāṃ śikṣākāmo, vaktavyaṃ “karohi” § 14.1.13A1. te dāni āraṇyakā vihāraṃ bāhiraghaṭṭimaṃ kariyāṇa ... § 14.9.13A7. ekena abhyantaraghaṭṭimaṃ vihārakāṃ (lies: °rakaṃ) kariya ... § 17.12.15A7. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... cchinnagaṇṭhikā kariyāṇa pratipādakehi sthāpayitavyā § 18.18.16A5. varcca karaṃtena tathā karttavyaṃ, yathā ... § 18.22.16B1. atha khalu acchaṭikāṃ kara<ṃ>tena praviśitavyaṃ § 19.8.18A1. atha khalu acchaṭikāṃ karantena praśvāsakuṭiṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 18.23.16B2. atha dāni uppīḍito bhavati, acchaṭikāṃ karantena allīyitavyaṃ (≒ § 19.9.18A2) § 18.25.16B3. atha khalu samudācāraṃ kariya utthiya cchatti gantavyaṃ § 18.31.16B5. tena uśvāsaṃ karaṃtena mallakena vā koḍikena vā cchorayitavyaṃ § 18.35.16B7. tenâpi dāni uśvāsaṃ kariya mallakena vā koḍillena vā ... cchoḍiyāṇa ... § 18.45.17A6. ekatamaṃ jjhāṭam vā vṛkṣaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariyāṇa upaviśitavyaṃ § 19.6.17B7. praśvāsakuṭīṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ ... “praśvāsaṃ kariṣyan” ti <praviśati?> § 19.15.18A4. tenâpi dāni praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa so pṛthivīpradeśo ... cchorayitavyo 186 § 19.16.18A6. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa ghaṭake prakṣipitavyaṃ § 19.33.18B6. tenâpi praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa{{ṃ}}, ... cchorayitavyaṃ § 19.36.19A1. kuḍḍa agrato kariyāṇa praśvāso karttavyo § 21.9.20B5. atha dāni kaṭhinaṃ na bhavati, mañcasya vā upari cīvaraṃ pīṭhasya vā upari cīvarakaṃ kariyāṇaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya ... § 25.3.22B2. gocarāto nirddhāviya āhāraṃ karīya pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ § 29.7.24B4~5. na kṣamati stūpaṃ pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ, saṃgham vā pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ, upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariya niṣīdituṃ, vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ § 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.10.25B7. mā paśyeṃsu “samāmapayi (?) ime pravrajitā karonti.” § 31.19.26A3. atha dāni paścādvastuke mṛttikākarmmaṃ karonti § 31.22.26A6. atha dāni nevāsiko vṛddhatarako bhavati, ārogyāpiya evaṃ kariyāṇaṃ āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 32.2.27A6. amukaṃ divasaṃ tvaṃ amukena bhikṣuṇā sārddhaṃ vācaṃvāciṃ karosi § 33.13.28A6. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “sālohita, kiṃ āṇapesi? kiṃ karomi?” tti § 34.1.28A7. kṣatriyaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 34.2.28B2) § 35.1.28B7. brāhmaṇaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāmo” ti § 36.1.29A7. gṛhapatiparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 36.2.29B1) § 37.1.29B7. tīrthikaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 37.2.30A1. tīrthikaparṣā sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāmo” tti § 35.7.29A6. evaṃ kāryaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ (= § 36.7.29B6, § 37.6.30A4) § 38.9.30B4. yathāsukhaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ § 35.2.29A1. brāhmaṇaparṣā sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 35.2.29A2. vayaṃ yeva tāva niṣaṇṇā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāmo” ti § 36.2.29B1. vayaṃ yeva tāva sannipatitā “karmmāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 37.1.29B7. vayaṃ yeva{ṃ} tāva sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāmo” ti § 38.8.30B3. saṃghena tat kāryaṃ ... vyupaśamayitavyaṃ. vyupaśāntaṃ kariya so bhikṣu pṛcchitavyo “āyuṣman, kiṃ vyupaśāntaṃ etaṃ kāryaṃ?” § 39.21.32A1. grāmāntikā<nāṃ> thālīy’ otāriya dhotôpaliptāṃ (< dhotāṃ upa°; Hs. thātôya°) kariya thapitavyāḥ § 40.1.32B2. pānīyamaṇḍapaṃ ... tāpitamudritaṃ kariya ... § 40.2.32B4. ayaṃ pānīyamaṇḍapo tāpitamudrito kariya thapito § 40.4.32B5. pānīyamaṇḍapaṃ ... tāpitamudritaṃ (Hs. tāpiyam°) kariya .... § 40.5.32B6. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya, golakā vā maṇikā vā ... subhāvitā kariya thapetavyā § 40.16.33B1. bhikṣū cīvarakarmma karoṃti § 40.16.33B2. tato yeva pāridhovanīyaṃ karoti § 40.16.33B2. raṅgam vā karoti § 41.1.33B3. pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kariya (= § 41.2.33B5) § 41.6.34A3. saṃghāṭīṃ ... abhyantareṇa dviguṇikāṃ kariya ... § 41.8.34A4. upānahā saṃpuṭaṃ kariya ... § 41.15.34B5. so dāni supratyavekṣitaṃ kariya corasenāpatisya allīno § 41.32.35B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ svādhyāyaṃ karoti ... § 42.31.38A1. jentākaṃ bāhiraghaṭitaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ § 43.4.38A4. lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ... liptopaliptaṃ (oder °liptāṃ?; Hs. °liptiṃ) kariya ... § 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā ... prasphoṭiya sudhotāṃ suprakṣālitāṃ kariya ātape śoṣayitavyā § 43.8.38A6. ete khajjakacaṃgerīyo vanaphalacaṅgerīyo haritakīcaṅgerīyo vā prasphoḍiya suprakṣālitāṃ kariya ekamante sthapetavyāḥ § 43.14.38B2. eṣo bhikṣu dhovanikā vā <rajanikā vā> karttukāmo bhavati, ... § 43.15.38B3. tena dhovanikā vā rajanikā vā kariya na kṣamati tathā yyeva ... dayituṃ § 43.15.38B3. sudhotaṃ suprakṣālitaṃ suliptaṃ suśuṣkaṃ kariyāṇaṃ <yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyaṃ> 187  § 44.4.39A2. cīvarakāni sāharitāni kāriya antaramukha<ṃ> duguṇântaraṃ kariya cīvara- vaṃśe sthapetavyāni § 45.5.39B7. vihāracaraṇa<ka>ṃ nivāsanaṃ anupahastaṃ kariyāṇaṃ ... § 50.10.43B7. mā dāni vayaṃ ubhaye ’va bhaktacchedaṃ kariṣyāma § 52.6.44B6. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, karohi dhūmaṃ. mā ca punaḥ āmiṣacakṣuḥ <deśesi>.” § 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo, ... § 54.13.46B1. atha khalu cintetavyaṃ “bahukaro eṣo asmākaṃ vinīvaraṇaṃ karoti.” § 57.5.47B3. upānahikāyo ... saṃpuṭikariyāṇaṃ ... § 62.2.49B6. eko tāva pūtivātakarmmaṃ karoti. aparo “gaccha” tti. aparo “ḍharaḍha<ra>” tti usw. karaka~ “Krug” ⇒ uṣṇodaka-karaka~ § 18.40.17A3. karakena (Hs. kana°) vā dakānakena vā udakaṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 19.23.18B2. paudgalikapaudgalikāni praśvāsaghaṭikāni sthāpayitavyāni ghaṭikā vā karakā (Hs. kārakā) vā alābutumbukā vā § 40.7.32B7. bhikṣūṇāṃ hastodakasya pātrodakasya pāribhogikasya kumbhikā ca karakā ca pūrayitavyā § 41.24.35B1. kuṇḍikāto vā karakato vā kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya ... karakī~# “Wasserkrug”; vgl. Skt. karaka ⇒ akalpiya-karakī~, kalpiya-karakī~ § 40.5.32B6. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya, golakā vā ... thaganakā vā āraṃjarā vā ghaṭṭā vā karakīyo vā <pūrayitavyā?> karaṇa~ ⇒ antarī-karaṇa~, prasrāva-karaṇa~ karaṇīya~ ⇒ preta-karaṇīya~, bahu-karaṇīya~, maṅgala-karaṇīya~ karaṇḍikā~ “Korb; Gefäß” § 42.20.37A4. caṣakena vā karaṇḍikāya vā hastasaṃjñāya vā bhājanakena vā dātavyaṃ karitavya~ ⇒ karttavya~ § 19.18.18A7. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ karitavyaṃ kariya ⇒ kara-, karo- karīṣa~ “trockener Kuhdung” § 18.7.15B5. tahiṃ sthāpetavyaṃ karīṣo mṛttikā vā ūṣo vā kare- (NiDoc); vgl. Pkt. karei, karedi (s. Pischel § 472); NiDoc. kareti, kareṃti; Aś. kaleti, apakaleti (s. Bloch 1950: 72) ⇒ kara-, karo-, √kṛ, prati-saṃ-s-karaya-, prati-saṃ-s-kare-, pradakṣiṇī- kare-, manasi-kare-, manasi-kāre- § 17.7.15A2. atha dāni bahuṃ lippitavyaṃ bhavati, bhikṣū ca śāṭhyena karenti, ... § 18.2.15B1. yathā uṣṭrā vā goṇā vā ... evam ime śramaṇā prakīrṇṇakasya uśvāsaṃ karenti § 18.12.16A1. udakakṛtyaṃ karentena na dāni jjhallajjhalāye udakaṃ <siṃ>cetavyaṃ § 19.11.18A3. nâpi dāni tahiṃ dhyānāntaragateṇa vā svādhyāyam vā karentena aśubha- samāpattim vā samāpannena āsitavyaṃ § 28.8.24A5. atha khalu abhidakṣiṇaṃ agrato karentena anuparivarttitavyaṃ § 31.6.25B5. na dāni kṣamati nagaracetiyāni abhidakṣiṇaṃ (Hs. °iṇi) karentehi (Hs. °ntihi) vā gantuṃ apavāmaṃ (Hs. °āmi) vā karentehi {vā} § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni ... bhikṣū ca paliguddhakā bhavanti, cchādanikā vā lepanikā vā karenti, kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 32.2.27A6. so dāni āha “āyuṣman, vācovāciṃ karentasya pādāṃ vandasi?” § 32.3.27A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati āgantukena nevāsikasya vācovāciṃ karentasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 32.5.27B1. evaṃ praśvāsaṃ karentasya, dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantasya ... na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 32.6.27B1. na kṣamati mṛttikākarmma karentasya ‖ pe ‖ pātrapākaṃ dadantasya, ... § 32.6.27B2. cīvarāṇi sīvantasya raṃjentasya, cellaparikarmmam vā karentasya, ... § 32.9.27B3. sāmīcī karentena na kṣamati jānukena (☞ § 32.9[Text], Anm. 1) vā jaṃghāhi vā vandituṃ. atha khalu pādā vanditavyā § 33.7.28A3. “vandāmi upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā. kiṃ āṇapesi?” tti, “kiṃ karemi?” tti § 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati ... vaktavyaṃ ... “kiṃ āṇapesî?”tti, “kiṃ karemi?” 188  § 33.10.28A4. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “sālohite, kiṃ āṇapesi? kiṃ karemi?” § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. bahukarā yūyaṃ bhāraṃ vahatha. dharmmadeśanāṃ karetha. ...” ti § 40.9.33A2. eṣo dāni dhovanikāṃ vā rajanikām vā kareti, tasya udakena kāryam bhavati, ... § 41.25.35B2. acchaṭikāṃ karentena pādadhovanikāyāṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 42.7.36B2. jentākaṃ karentena vaṭṭito vā karttavyo caturasro vā § 42.16.37A2. kiñ câpi anāpṛcchitvā kareti, anāpattiḥ § 42.18.37A2. parikramma karentehi ... § 42.18.37A3. parikarmma karentena na ... bāhā prasāretavyā § 47.8.41A1. bhikṣusya yatnaṃ karentasya ... (= § 48.9.41B5) § 49.1.41B7. ārya, bhaktakṛtyaṃ karetha. purebhaktikaṃ karetha. ... yathāpratibhānakaṃ karetha § 50.2.43A5. tvaṃ mama piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karesi § 53.10.45B1. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ no karenti” tti § 54.16.46B2. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinivaraṇaṃ me (für mo?) karentî”ti § 55.4.46B6. atha khalu cittaṃ pragopayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ mo karenti” tti karo- ⇒ kara- karkkaṭaka~# “kleiner Wasserkrug” (?) ☞ § 43.7, Anm. 5 § 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā durvvā vā kaṇḍahastā vā karkkaṭakā vā ... karkaṭa-grāhikāye# “mit dem Krebsgriff (d.h. indem man die Füße umfaßt wie ein Krebs seine Beute greift)” ☞ § 32.7, Anm. 2 § 32.7.27B2. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ samavasthāye niṣaṇṇo bhavati, taṃ velaṃ allīyāṇaṃ śīrṣeṇa pādā{ṃ} vanditavyā, karkaṭagrāhikāye vanditavyā karkarī~ ⇒ akalpiya-karkarī~ karkaśa~ “grob, heftig” § 25.3.22B2. nâpi kṣamati karkaśena vā cūrṇṇena karkaśena vā gomayena nirmmādayituṃ § 38.6.30B2. kasya tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? karṇṇa~ § 29.5.24B3. arddha śīrṣasya pithetavyaṃ eko ca karṇṇo karṇṇaka~ ⇒ cīvara-karṇṇaka~ karṇṇato für kallato : § 39.9.31A6 karṇṇikaṃ für *kallikaṃ? § 19.19 kartta- “schneiden” ⇒ kartte- § 12.6.11B3. muṃjā karttitavyā, balbajā karttitavyā mañcā vuṇitavyā (≒ § 12.18.12A5, § 13.13.12B5, § 15.8.14A4, § 16.9.14B3) § 13.11.12B4. muñjā karttitavyā, mañcā vuṇitavyā pīṭhikā vuṇitavyā § 17.11.15A5. sarvvehi muñjā vā balbajā vā karttitavyā, mañcā vā vātavyā pīṭhā vātavyā karttavya~ ⇒ karitavya~ § 1.8.1B7. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ ... āsanaprajñapti karttavyā (= § 2.6.2B6; ≒ § 3.7.3B5) § 4.13.5A7. parikathā karttavyā, dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā § 5.10.7A1. kim asmābhiḥ vihārako śūnyako karttavyo? § 8.5.9A2. bhaktuddeśāto bhaktakaṃ grahetavyaṃ. bhaktavisarggo karttavyo § 14.8.13A7. na kṣamati lenāni bandhituṃ. atha khalu muktakā karttavyā (Nom. pl. neut.) § 14.9.13A7. atha dāni uppaṃsulakā vihārakā bāhiraghaṭṭimā karttavyāḥ § 14.17.13B5. atha dāni uppansulako vihāro bhavati, lenāni bāhiraghaṭṭimāni karttavyāni § 14.14.13B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ullaggakā bhavaṃti, āyacchitavyā, āyacchantiyo karttavyāḥ § 18.3.15B2. tena hi varccakuṭī nāma karttavyā § 19.25.18B3. ku<ṃ>tako bhavati, evaṃ yyeva karttavyaṃ § 19.25.18B4. oruhantena mallakaṃ ghaṭikā vā mañcakasya ca oruhantena (lies: 189  adhastāt?) susthapitā karttavyā § 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo (Hs. vartt°), yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso gaccheyā. ekāntake karttavyaṃ § 19.37.19A2. atha khalu ekānte praśvāso karttavyo. panthāto ussariya ekānte karttavyaṃ § 20.10.19B6. tena hi śeṣāś catvāri aṅgulāni dantakāṣṭhasya varjyaṃ karttavyaṃ § 30.5.25A3. (śeyyā ...) tathā karttavyā yathā saṃpa<ti>tako yeva dakṣiṇena pārśvena śayyāṃ kalpeti § 31.4.25B4. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ, mā dāni adarśanena parijāne “hṛtaṃ, hṛtaṃ me pātracīvaram” iti gacchantasya karttavyaṃ § 31.37.27A3. teṣāṃ gacchamānānāṃ pathyadanena vaikalpaṃ karttavyaṃ § 31.28.26B3. atha khalu āgantukānāṃ ehisvāgataṃ kartta<vya>ṃ “entu āyuṣmanto, ...” § 38.5.30A7. allīya vṛddhāntāto prabhṛti sarvveṣāṃ praṇāmo karttavyo (Hs. °vyā) § 39.9.31A7. cetiyaṃ vanditvā ekānte svādhyāyo karttavyo, dharmmam vā cintayantehi āsitavyaṃ § 40.5.32B6. appihāṇā karttavyā § 40.6.32B6. sarvvaṅ karttavyaṃ, yathā sugandhā bhaveṃsu § 40.14.33A6. taṃ yyeva karttavyaṃ § 42.7.36B2. jentākaṃ karentena vaṭṭito vā karttavyo caturasro vā. vidiśaṃ dvāraṃ karttavyaṃ. vātapānīyā vīthī karttavyā abhyantare viśālā bāhirato saṃkṣiptā. ekāye vātapānīye vīthīye dvauvikā(?) bhavati dvitīyā karttavyā ... sudhāmṛttikālepo vā karttavyo. udviddhavīthī karttavyā § 42.8.36B3. bhraṣṭikā karttavyā § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... udvedho nirmmuṣṭikā trayo hastā karttavyā vistāreṇa nimuṣṭikā vā § 42.8.36B3. bhūmito arddhahasta upasthalatarikā karttavyā § 42.8.36B3. ulkabhramo karttavyo § 42.9.36B3. yena bhraṣṭikā sāmantena (Hs. sam°) {karttavyaṃ} kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.9.36B3. yadi tāva bhraṣṭikā dakṣiṇato bhavati, vāmato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.9.36B4. dakṣiṇato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.9.36B4. kapāṭaṃ ... ghaṭikābandhimaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.9.36B4. nâpi dāni {kṣamati} tathā karttavyaṃ yathā sukhena tapyati § 42.9.36B4. atha khalu tathā karttavyaṃ yathā yavaphalamātreṇa lagga<ti> § 42.10.36B4. bāhirato cīvarakuṭī karttavyā. nāgadantakavīthī karttavyā § 42.16.37A1. tasya tāva parikarmma karttavyaṃ § 42.16.37A1. anyasyâpi karttukāmo bhavati, āpṛcchitvā karttavyaṃ § 42.18.37A3. na snāne navapratipannena vā parikarmma karttavyaṃ § 42.22.37B1. upaviṣṭena karttavyaṃ, yathā ... bhaveya § 42.29.37B5. kāyaparicaryā karttavyā § 44.5.39A3. cīvaraṃ ... dviguṇ’ ante agrato karttavyo (Nom. sg. neut.) antarapīḍito § 45.4.39B6. prakṛty’ eva tāva grāmapraveśanakaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 45.5.39B7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivasanaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 45.7.40A3. rātrīprāvaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ upahastī-karttavyaṃ § 46.4.40A6. grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 46.5.40A7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastī-karttavyaṃ § 46.6.40B2. prakṛty’ eva tāva upahastī-karttavyaṃ § 49.6.42B3. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā pratibalo bhavati piṇḍapātam vā aṇṭhituṃ vihārakaṃ vâgantuṃ § 62.5.50A2. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇaśālāyām upaviṣṭasya vātakarmma āgacchati, na dāni osaritvā indriyāṇi karttavyaṃ § 62.6.50A2. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati saṃprajāna ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipiyāṇaṃ hastena vivaritvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ et passim kartte-# “spinnen”; vgl. Skt. kṛṇatti, BHS. kartati, Amg. kattaï, Pā. kantati ⇒ kartta- § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti. yadi tāva tantuka nikṣipiyāṇaṃ uttheti, jānitavyaṃ 190  “dāhiti eṣā” tti. atha dāni bhūyo prasārayati, jānitavyaṃ “na dāhiti eṣā” tti karddama~ “Schlamm” § 41.1.33B3. naỿva karddamaṃ pariharanti na pāṃsu § 41.1.33B3. karddamaṃ marddantā pāṃsu marddentā dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramanti § 41.2.33B5. naỿva pāṃsu pariharatha na karddamaṃ § 41.2.33B5. karddamaṃ marddantā pāṃsu marddantā dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramatha § 44.1.38B7. sarvvaṃ karddamehi anupraviṣṭaṃ § 47.1.40B3. na kardamaṃ (sic) pariharanti § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ ... karddamena vā vināśita{vya}ṃ bhavati dhovitavyaṃ § 48.1.41A3. mañcā ... dhūlīya karddamena makṣitaparimakṣitā § 48.2.41A5. mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca ... dhūlīye kardamehi (sic) vināśitak<ā> § 48.4.41A7. āsanaṃ bhavati ... karddamena vā vināśitakaṃ § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka karddamena vā vināśitaṃ bhavati karpāsa~ “Baumwolle” § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti, ... karmma-kara~ “Arbeiter”⇒ prabhūta-dāsī-dāsa-k°-pauruṣeya~ § 14.6.13A5. samantena vihārasya ... agniharaṇī karttavyā bhṛtakehi ca karmmakarehi ca § 42.21.37A6. upāsakā vā karmmakarā ārāmikā vā āhaṃsu karmman~ ⇒ kāya-karmman~, kṛta-k°, cīvara-k°, pāpa-k°, pūti-vāta-k°, mano-k°, mṛttikā-k°, vācā- k°, yathā-karmma, vāta-karmman~ § 12.10.11B5. ka<r>mmaṃ (“Rechtshandlung”) kṛtvā yāva te<na> dāni samantena āṣāḍhamāsaṃ śayyāsanaṃ grāhetavyaṃ § 34.1.28B1. vayaṃ yeva sannipatitā “karmmāṇi kariṣyāma” (☞ § 34.1, Anm. 1) tti § 36.2.29B1. vayaṃ yeva tāva sannipatitā “karmmāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya (“Verhandlung”) utkhoṭayasi (☞ § 38.8, Anm. 1) puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi karmma-rata~# “sich an körperlicher Betätigung erfreuend”; vgl. Pā. kamma-rata ☞ § 11.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ bhāṣya-rata~, nidrā-rata~ § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ na karmmārāmā na karmmaratāḥ na karmmārāmatā- nuyogam anuyuktā viharanti (≒ § 12.1.11A5, § 21.1.20A7) karmmānta~ “Geschäft, Tätigkeit” § 1.1.1B2. te dāni ojjhāyanti: “paśyatha bhaṇe vayan tāva karmmāntān cchoriya ā<gatā> ...” (≒ § 5.1.6A5) § 2.1.2B2. vayaṃ yeva tāva karmmāntā cchoriya āgatā (≒ § 6.3.7A7) § 3.1.3A7. vayaṃ yeva karmmāntāṃ cchoriya āgatā (= § 4.1.4A6) § 5.3.6A7. vayaṃ yeva tāva karmmāntāṃ (Hs. °āntaṃ) cchoriya āgatā § 6.1.7A5. vayam eva tāva karmmāntāṃ cchoriya āgatā karmmārāma~ (SWTF) (karmma-ā°) “an körperlicher Betätigung Freude habend”; vgl. Pā. kammārāma ☞ § 11.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ nidrārāma~, bhāṣyārāma~ § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ na karmmārāmā na karmmaratāḥ na karmmārāmatānu- yogam anuyuktā viharanti (≒ § 12.1.11A5, § 21.1.20A7) karmmārāmatānuyoga~# (°rmma-ārā°-anu°) “Hingabe an Freude an körperlicher Betätigung”; vgl. SWTF, s.v. karmārāmatā ☞ § 11.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ nidrārāmatānuyoga~, bhāṣyārāmatānuyoga~ § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ na karmmārāmā na karmmaratāḥ na karmmārāmatānu- yogam anuyuktā viharanti (≒ § 12.1.11A5, § 21.1.20A7) -karmmika~ ⇒ kiṃ-karmmika~ karṣa~ (Skt, BHS) “Kleie, Reiskleie”; vgl. Pā. kaṇa ☞ § 53.4, Anm. 5 § 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā § 53.15.45B5. (die Lampe) nirvvāpito bhavati, agni gopayitavyo tuṣehi vā karṣehi vā buṣena vā buṣikāya vā karṣa-dhāna~# “Feld”; wörtl. “Ort für Ackerbau” ☞ § 25.5, Anm. 3 ⇒ vālikā-dhāna~ § 25.5.22B4. pātraṃ ... karṣadhāne vā vālikādhāne vā dūrvvāsādvale vā nirmmādayi- tavyaṃ √kal ⇒ nik-kālaya- 191 kalantaraka~# oder kalantaka~ (BHS) “eine Art Bezug der Sitzgelegenheit” (?); vgl. BHSD, s.v. kalandaka (v.ll. kalantaka, karanta, karañjaka, kalaṇḍaka) (“spread, cover for a seat”); DP, s.v. kaḷandaka (“mat, covering”) § 48.5.41B1. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā kalantarako (lies: kalanta{ra}ko?) paṭa vā, tato niṣīditavyaṃ kalaha-kāraka~ (SWTF, Pā) “Streit stiftend” ☞ § 38.3, Anm. 6 § 38.3.30A6. yadi tāva so bhavati ... anarthakuśalo vā abhinīhārakuśalo vā kalahakārako vā bhaṇḍanakārako vā bhāṣyakārako vā adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā allīyāhi” tti § 38.6.30B1. yadi ... so ca bhikṣu bhavati kalahakārako bhaṇḍanakārako bhāṣyakāro adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā jalpāhi” tti kalaha-jāta~ (SWTF, Pā) “durch Streit charakterisiert, streitsüchtig” ☞ § 38.6, Anm. 6 § 38.6.30B2. kasya tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? kalahitaka~# “gestritten habend”; p. pt. von Skt. kalahati + Suffix ka § 20.5.19B1. kiṃ ete bhikṣavo bhikṣū ekānte āsanti kalahitakā viya manye? kalācī~ (BHS) “Unterarm” § 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena kalācīyaṃ vāmāyaṃ aṃsivaddhakaṃ prakṣipitvā ... prakṣipitavyaṃ § 41.9.34A5. upānahikāyo nikṣipiya dakānakāto vāmāye kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjayitvā ... § 41.9.34A5. kalācīya udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhotā § 41.22.35A6. dakāna<kāto ’da>kaṃ kalācīyaṃ āvarjetvā colakaṃ dhovitvā ... § 41.24.35B1. kuṇḍikāto vā karakato vā kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya ... § 41.24.35B1. kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhovitavyā kalāpā für kalāyā oder kalāyaṃ : § 62.2.49B5 kalāya~ “Kichererbse” § 51.8.44A3. eṣā strī dhānāṃ vā pīṣayati, tilam vā mudgam vā kalāyām vā daleti § 62.2.49B5. tato śvetamayena yeva khādanti, bilvāni khādanti, vātakopanāni phalāni khādanti, kalāyā (Hs. kalāpā) satilapallavaṃ khādanti § 62.4.50A1. nâpi kṣamati bilvāni vā madanaphalāni vātakopakāni phalāni khādituṃ kalāyaṃ {vā} satilapallavaṃ vā kalāvīyaṃ für °ācīyaṃ : § 25.15.23A2 kalpa- ⇒ kalpe- § 4.18.5B7. hitāye vastupālānāṃ cirarātrāya kalpate (vs) kalpaṃ √kṛ “zuschneiden”#; vgl. Skt. kalpayati (“schneiden”) ☞ § 11.8, Anm. 1 § 11.8.11A1. nâpi kṣamati kalpaṃ karttuṃ, paṭikām vā loḍḍhakam vā pratyāstaraṇaṃ karttuṃ kalpatas für kalyatas: § 40.1.32B2, § 44.6.39A4, § 45.1.39B3, § 45.2.39B4, § 45.4.39B5, § 46.2. 40A5 kalpika~ (BHS, SWTF) “vorgeschrieben, vorschriftsmäßig”; vgl. Pā. kappiya § 18.9.16A1. tatra cīvaravaṃśā ... karttavyāḥ, yatra bhikṣū kalpikāni cīvarakāṇi vinikṣipiya varccakuṭī praviśanti § 18.26.16B3. nâpi kṣamati kalpikehi cīvarehi prāvṛtehi varccakuṭīṃ praviśituṃ kalpika-kuṭikā~# “die Klosterküche; das Klosterlagerhaus” ☞ § 3.5, Anm. 3 ⇒ kalpika-kuṭī~, kalpiya-kuṭikā~, kalpiya-kuṭī~ § 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā bhaktaśālāyām vā kalpiyaśālāyām vā kalpikakuṭikāyām vā ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ kalpika-kuṭī~# “die Klosterküche; das Klosterlagerhaus” ☞ § 3.5, Anm. 3 ⇒ kalpika-kuṭikā~, kalpiya-kuṭikā~, kalpiya-kuṭī~ § 43.11.38A7. nâpi dāni kalpikakuṭī adhyupekṣitavyā oddriṇṇakā vā ... apratisaṃskṛtā vā kalpiya-karakī~# “Krug für das Wasser, das für den Gebrauch durch Mönche geeignet ist, d.h. Krug für gefiltertes Wasser” ☞ § 18.7, Anm. 7 ⇒ akalpiya-karakī, ākalpiya-karkkarī~ § 18.7.15B6. varccakumbhikāye purato kalpiyakaraki sthāpayitavyā udakasya pūrṇṇa § 31.21.26A4. pādadhovanikā kahiṃ? kalpiyakarakī kahiṃ? akalpi<ya>karakī kahi? § 31.21.26A5. akalpiyakarakīto hastā nirmmādiyāṇa kalpiyakarakīto prakṣāliya tato 192  cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ § 40.8.33A1. tato pānīyāto kalpiyakarakī vā akalpiyakarakī vā ... pūrayituṃ kalpiya-kāra~# “ein Laie, der bestimmte Gegenstände für Mönche unmittelbar entgegennimmt, um sie für den Gebrauch durch Mönche geeignet zu machen; Mittelsmann”; vgl. Pā. kappiyakāra, kappiyakāraka; BHS. kalpikāra, kalpikāraka ☞ § 18.4, Anm. 6 § 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) yadi vā khāniyā udakāntikā bhavati, prathamaṃ kalpiya- kāreṇa ohayiyāpetavyā § 20.11.19B6. atha dāni bhikṣū āraṇyake śeyyāsane prativasanti, kalpiyakāro durllabho bhavati § 43.4.38A4. māsavārikehi vā pakṣavārikehi vā kalpiyakāraṃ śabdāviya ... kalpiya-kuṭikā~# “die Klosterküche; das Klosterlagerhaus” ☞ § 3.5, Anm. 3 ⇒ kalpika-kuṭikā~, kalpika-kuṭī~, kalpiya-kuṭī~, sāṃghika-kalpiyakuṭī~ § 3.5.3B2. vaṃśavidalikāhi vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā sūtreṇa āvuṇitvā dvārakoṣṭhake vā prāsāde vā kalpiyakuṭikāyāṃ vā bandhitavyaṃ ... dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ kalpiya-kuṭī~# “die Klosterküche; das Klosterlagerhaus” ☞ § 3.5, Anm. 3 ⇒ kalpika-kuṭikā~, kalpika-kuṭī~, kalpiya-kuṭikā~, sāṃghika-kalpiyakuṭī~ § 39.26.32A4. atha dāni teṣāṃ na koci lābhagrāhako bhavati, pariveṣakena sarvveṣāṃ ekasthāne piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo § 43.4.38A4. (lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ...) kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya sthāpayitavyāni yathā- sthānaṃ § 43.5.38A5. kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya sthāpayitavyāḥ § 43.6.38A5. kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya yathāsthāne praveśayitavyāni (wohl für sthāpayi- tavyāni) kalpiya-śālā~# “Vorratsraum”; wörtl. “Haus für gesetzlich erlaubte Dinge”; vgl. BHS. kalpika-śālā ☞ § 20.14, Anm. 3 § 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā bhaktaśālāyām vā kalpiyaśālāyām vā kalpikakuṭikāyām vā ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ kalpe- (BHS[Mvu, SP]; vgl. BHSG, S. 208a, s.v. kḷp) “verfertigen, erzeugen” ⇒ kalpa-, śeyyāṃ (śayyāṃ) kalpaya- (kalpe-) § 4.18.5B7. yasmiṃ pradeśe medhāvī vāsaṃ kalpeti paṇḍito (vs) kalyatas, °to (BHS[Mvu]) “frühmorgens” ⇒ aty-anukālye, anukalla-tarakaṃ, anukālaṃ, anukālya~, anukālyaṃ, kallato, *kallikaṃ, kālyam § 8.4.8B7. sārdhevihāriṇā tāva kalyata eva utthaṃtena upādhyāyasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ § 10.4.10A4. antevāsinā tāva kalyato (Hs. kalpato) yeva utthantakena eva ācāryasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ § 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya ... § 19.25.18B3. tumbakaṃ bhavati, kalyato yeva ujjhitvā cchanne sthavitavyaṃ § 25.3.22B2. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya pātracīvaram ādāya gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati aparejjukāto kalyato utthihantakenaỿva bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ § 31.26.26B1. kalyato yeva utthiya nivāsiya prāvariya hastān nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 39.2.30B7. aparejjukāto kalyato yeva utthihiya § 39.3.31A2. kalyato yeva sarvvāṇi bhaktāni utkṣipituṃ § 40.1.32B2. te dāni kalyato (Hs. kalpato) yeva ... utthiyāṇa § 40.5.32B5. tehi kalyata (Hs. kalpata) eva utthiya hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... § 44.1.38B7. so dāni aparejjukāto kalyata eva nivāsiya ... § 44.6.39A4. aparejjukāto bhikṣū kalyato (Hs. kalpato) yeva nivāsiya prāvariya § 45.1.39B3. te ... kalyata (Hs. kalpata) eva vihāracaraṇakāni nivāsanāni nikṣipiyāṇaṃ ... § 45.2.39B4. yūyaṃ kalyata (Hs. kalpata) eva utthiya ... § 45.4.39B5. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyata (Hs. kalpata) evôtthitvā § 46.2.40A5. yūyaṃ kalyato (Hs. kalpato) yeva gocarāye prasthitā 193  § 46.4.40A6. kalyato yeva gocarāye prasthito bhavati kallato# “frühmorgens” ⇒ kalyatas, kālyam, *kallikaṃ, aty-anukālye, anukallatarakaṃ, anukālaṃ, anukālyaṃ § 39.9.31A6. kallato (Hs. karṇṇato) yyeva āgacchatha *kallikaṃ? “frühmorgens” ⇒ kalyatas, kallato § 19.19.18A7. karṇṇikaṃ (lies: *kallikaṃ?) yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, taṃ kālaṃ praśvāsaghaṭikā nikkālayitavyā kavala~ “Bissen” § 52.3.44B2. imehi śaknoma piṇḍacārikehi mukhe kavalaṃ prakṣipituṃ √kas ⇒ uk-kasa-, o-kasa-, o-kasta~, o-kkasa-, niṣ-kāśaya-, niṣ-kāsaya- kasya interr. “warum”; Ablativ von ka~; vgl. Pā. kassa ☞ § 38.6, Anm. 4 ⇒ ka~ § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ sahitānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? kahi (BHS[LV], Pkt) interr. “wo”; vgl. Pischel § 428; BHSG § 21.22; Ratnach, s.v.; Oberlies 1993: 53 ⇒ kahiṃ, ekahi, tahi § 31.21.26A4. pādadhovanikā kahiṃ? kalpiyakarakī kahiṃ? akalpi<ya>karakī kahi? kahiṃ (BHS) interr. “wo”; vgl. BHSG § 21.22; RgsGr § 27.7 ⇒ kahi, amukahiṃ, ekahi, ekahiṃ, tahi, tahiṃ, yahiṃ § 1.5.1B5. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kettika pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi? kahim bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā? (≒ § 3.6. 3B4) § 2.5.2B5. kahiṃ bhaviṣyati upasthānaśālāyām vā prahāṇaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā ucchedanake vā niṣadyāya vā? § 4.8.4B7. kahiñci ca gantukāmo bhavati, ... § 5.7.6B4. bhante kisya upāsako? kahiṃ upāsako? § 31.21.26A4. pādadhovanikā kahiṃ? kalpiyakarakī kahiṃ? akalpi<ya>karakī kahi? § 41.14.34B4. dāraka kahiṃ tumhāṇaṃ hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇaṃ vā? § 49.1.41B7. so dāni na kahiṃci adhivāsayati kahiṃci, kahiñci ⇒ kahiṃ kā für vā : § 19.17.18A6 kāṃsa-bhājana~# “Messinggefäß” § 4.10.5A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... kāṃsabhājanaṃ laṃghaṃtehi ... gantuṃ. atha khalu ... kāṃsabhājanaṃ parivarjantehi ... praviśitavyaṃ § 4.10.5A2. anekāyo tatra ... kāṃsabhājanāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ § 51.12.44A5. eṣā strī kāṃsabhājanaṃ mārjati, ... kāka~ § 4.15.5B1. kākā ca <se> akṣimalaṃ harantā (vs) § 6.13.8A3. kāko ca se akṣimalaṃ harantaṃ (vs) kāka-vāhṃ bhañja-# “schwatzen” ☞ § 31.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ √bhañj § 31.1.25A7. te ... dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjantā (Hs. bhaṃjantaṃ |) āsanti § 31.1.25B1. yūyaṃ dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ vihārasya paścādvastukasya kākavāhaṃ bhañjantā āsatha § 31.2.25B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... vihārasya paścādvastukasya kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjamānehi āsituṃ § 31.19.26A3. nâpi dāni nevāsikehi dvāraṃ bandhitvā kākavāhāṃ bha<ṃ>jantehi āsitavyaṃ § 31.33.26B7. na kṣamati tehi nivāsikehi dvāraṃ ca bandhiya vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhāṃ bhañjantehi āsituṃ kāka-śakunta~#, kāka-śakuntaka~# “Krähen und (andere) Vögel” § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ... kākaśakuntehi ohayiyantāṃ § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantā{ṃ} kākaśakuntehi ohayiyantā{ṃ} § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena otariyanti, kākaśakuntehi vā ohayiyanti § 17.2.14B6. adrākṣīd ... mañcā ca pīṭhā ca ... kākaśakuntehi (Hs. °nnehi) ohayiyantāṃ ... 194  § 16.9.14B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... kākaśakuntakehi ohayiyanti cchanne sthāpayitavyāḥ § 17.3.14B6. mañcā pīṭhā ca ... kākaśakuntehi (Hs. °nnehi) ohayiyantā varṣeṇa varṣiyaṃtā § 17.12.15A6. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... kākaśakuntehi vā ohayiyanti ... cchanne sthāpayitavyā § 43.1.38A2. odanamānikāyo hastā kākaśakuntehi nikkhoḍiyantā ... kāka-śakuntaka~# “Krähen und (andere) Vögel” ⇒ kāka-śakunta~ √kāṅkṣ ⇒ ā-√kāṅkṣ, prati-√kāṅkṣ § 50.9.43B5. atha dāni na kāṃkṣ<at>i <vak>tavyaṃ “āyuṣman, bhuṃja tvaṃ. nâhaṃ bhuṃjiṣyaṃ.” § 52.7.44B6. atha dāni na kāṃkṣati, vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, paribhuṃjāhi tvaṃ. nâhaṃ paribhuñjiṣyan.” ti kāṇḍa~ “Rohr” ⇒ kaṇḍa~ kāna (māṣa-kāna-vallā) für °kāla° : § 23.3.21A5 kāntāra~ ⇒ anavarāgra-jāti-jarā-maraṇa-saṃsāra-kāntāra-naraka-vidurgga~ kāma~ ⇒ artha-kāma~, a-śikṣā-kāma~, śikṣā-kāma~, hita-kāma~ § 1.12.2A5. vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ śrotu-kāmā bhavanti (= § 1.12.2A6, § 2.10.3A3) § 2.10.3A4. vistareṇa śrotu-kāmā § 3.11.4A3. vistareṇa śrotu-kāmā bhavanti § 4.8.4B7. kahiñci ca gantu-kāmo bhavati, ... § 18.53.17B3. pibāhi, yadi ’si jīvitu-kāmo § 19.42.19A4. piba yadi jīvitu-kāmo ’si § 20.16.20A3. atha dāni bhikṣu jihvāṃ nilehitu-kāmo bhavati, kurccakena āmarjayitavyā § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāvad vastu-kāmo bhavati, ... vihārako uddiśitavyo § 32.12.27B6. atha dāni gantu-kāmo bhavati, ... vaktavyaṃ “gacchāhi” tti § 42.16.37A1. anyasyâpi karttu-kāmo bhavati § 42.25.37B3. yadi snāpitu-kāmo (verschrieben für snāyitu-k° ?) bhavati § 42.25.37B3. atha dāni na snāyitu-kāmo bhavati § 43.14.38B2. eṣo bhikṣu dhovanikā vā <rajanikā vā> karttu-kāmo bhavati, ... § 45.6.39B7. te bhikṣū uddhārakaṃ karttu-kāmā bhavanti ... § 45.6.40A1. snātu-kāmo bhavati § 46.6.40B1. bhikṣu ... anyaṃ leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ prāvaritu-kāmo bhavati § 49.7.42B3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāṃ vindhāpayitu-kāmo bhavati ... § 51.14.44A7. evaṃ yaṃ yaṃ kāryyaṃ cchindiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, dātu-kāmā bhavati, na tena gantavyaṃ § 57.8.47B6. atha dāni vṛddhatarakā āsanti, bhikṣū ca {ā}gantu-kāmo bhavati, ... usw. kāma-kāmin~ “sinnliche Freuden wünschend” § 4.17.5B5. vidhinā devalokaṃ tu modantu kāmakāmino (vs) kāma-bhogin~ (Pā) “Genießer sinnlicher Freuden” ⇒ kāmopabhogin~ § 20.16.20A3. nâpi kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya madhyena pāṭiyāna jihvāṃ nilehituṃ kāmabhoginā yathā § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati ... kāmabhoginā yathā uparimeṇa nivāsanasya snānaśāṭikāṃ utkṣipituṃ kāmin~ ⇒ kāma-kāmin~ kāmopabhogin~# (kāma-upa°) “Genießer sinnlicher Freuden”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 233. 8B7.6 ⇒ kāma-bhogin~ § 30.3.25A1. vāmena pārśvena kāmopabhoginaḥ śeyyāṃ kalpaya<n>ti kāya~ ⇒ oguṇṭhita-kāya~, pānīyavārika-kāya~ § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... so pi *pratibodhiyānaṃ (?; Hs. pratibodhanāṃ) tena purimaṃ kāyaṃ abhyunnāmeti, pṛṣṭhimaṃ kāyaṃ abhivilokayati kāya-karmman~ (SWTF, SJW) “Tat, Handlung mit dem Körper” § 42.5.36A7. metraṃ kāyakarmma ... sabrahmacāriṣu dhruvaṃ pratyupasthāpayitavyaṃ āvi caỿva raho ca kāya-paricaryā~ (SWTF, SJW) “Bedienung mit dem Körper” oder “Bedienung am Körper”?; vgl. BHSD, s.v. paricaryā ☞ § 42.29, Anm. 1 195  § 10.5.10A6. navak<ehi bhikṣūhi sthavirāṇāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ kāy>aparicaryā karttavyā § 42.29.37B5. navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirāṇāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ kāyaparicaryā karttavyā kāya-bandhana~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “Gürtel” § 45.4.39B6. kāyabandhanaṃ bandhayitvā -kāra~ ⇒ uśvāsa-kāra~, kalpiya-kāra~, praśvāsa-kāra~, bhāṣya-kāra~ -kāraka~ ⇒ uśvāsa-kāraka~, kalaha-kāraka~, praśvāsa-kāraka~, bhaṇḍana-kāraka~, bhāṣya- kāraka~ kārakā für karakā: § 19.23 kāraṇa~ “Ursache, Grund” ⇒ kārita-kāraṇa~ § 41.19.35A3. corehi gṛhīto saṃto mukto ācāra-kāraṇāt (vs) kāraya- (1) Kausativ § 19.3.17B5. praśvāsakuṭī pi dāni bhikṣuṇā kārayantena na kṣamati vihārasya uttareṇa pūrvveṇa kārāpayituṃ § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā (Hs. °vyaṃ) vaṃśasya vā nalasya vā naṃgalasya vā rohiṣasya vā daśa-aṣṭahastāṃ dīrghatvena ... kāraya- (2) (BHS), kāre- (Pā) (nicht-kausativ); vgl. BHSG, S. 207b, kṛ, (4) kāraya-ti ⇒ manasi- kāre- § 2.7.2B7. § 2.7.2B7. “tvaṃ praticcheṣyasi” yāva “tvaṃ parikathāṃ kārayesî(Hs. °yasî)”ti § 3.8.3B7. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati so adhyeṣitavyo: ... “tvaṃ parikathāṃ kārayesi” § 8.7.9A5. vaktavyaṃ “kārehi dhūmaṃ. mā ca puno āmiṣacakṣu deśesi.”; vgl. § 52.6. 44B6. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, karohi dhūmaṃ. mā ...” § 18.6.15B4. kuḍḍa utthapiyāṇaṃ valabhī kārayitavyā § 42.18.37A3. apareṇa parikarmma kārayitavyaṃ § 44.4.39A2. cīvarakāni sāharitāni kāriya antaramukha<ṃ> duguṇântaraṃ kariya cīvara- vaṃśe sthapetavyāni § 54.8.46A5. atha khalu pārśve sthitvā trikkhatto purato yaṣṭi kārayitavyā (“den Stock schwingen”?; ☞ § 54.8, Anm. 2) kārāpaya- (BHS) (1) Kausativ; vgl. BHSG § 38.57 § 18.3.15B2. varccakuṭīṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena (vgl. Mvu I 96.6) nâpi kṣamati vihārasya purastimena vā uttareṇa vā kārāpayituṃ. atha khalu dakṣiṇena vā paścimena vā kārāpayitavyā vātapathaṃ muktvā § 19.3.17B5. praśvāsakuṭī pi dāni bhikṣuṇā kārayantena na kṣamati vihārasya uttareṇa pūrvveṇa kārāpayituṃ. atha khalu dakṣiṇena vā paścimena vā kārāpayitavyā vātapatha<ṃ> muktvā § 20.11.19B6. jyeṣṭhakāni dantakāṣṭhāni kārāpayitavyāni § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena dvādaśahastāṃ āyāmato karttavyaṃ aṣṭahastāṃ vistāreṇa § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī tāvad bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā naḍānām vā naṅgalānām vā kaṇḍānām vā rejjukāye vā sūtrakāye (für sūtrikāye?) vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena aṣṭahastâyāmena karttavyā muṣṭimātrī sthūlatvena § 55.2.46B3. geṇḍukaṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyo tṛṇānām vā palālānām vā leṅka<ṭa>kakhaṇḍakānām vā sūtrasya vā uṇṇāya vā (2) nicht-kausativ; vgl. BHSG §§ 38.58f. § 43.5.38A5. te sudhotāṃ suprakṣālitāṃ kārāpayiya ātape sthāpayitavyāḥ § 43.6.38A5. ... taṭṭukā vā caṣakā vā palīnakā vā nirmmāditā kārāpiya ... kārita-kāraṇa~ (BHS[Mvu]) “abgerichtet” ☞ § 41.4, Anm. 5 § 41.4.34A1. smṛto saṃprajāno nāgo viya kāritakāraṇo Veśālīṃ nagarīṃ piṇḍāya carati kārmmaṃ für kāryyaṃ : § 51.14.44A7 kārya~ (kāryya~ ) “Angelegenheit, Tat; Gebrauch” ☞ § 34.3, Anm. 1 zu kāryaṃ (Akkusativ des Ziels) llīya- § 31.36.27A2. yadi tāva stūpikena vā kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, stūpikaṃ kāryaṃ pari- 196  prāpayitavyaṃ. sāṃghikena kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, sāṃghikaṃ kāryaṃ pariprāpayi- tavyaṃ § 31.37.27A2. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāpta<ṃ> kāryaṃ bhavati, ... § 34.1.28A7. kṣatriyaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 34.2.28B2) § 35.1.28B7. brāhmaṇaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāmo” ti (≒ § 35.2.29A1) § 36.1.29A7. gṛhapatiparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 36.2.29B1) § 37.1.29B7. tīrthikaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 37.2.30A1) § 34.1.28B1. te dāni tehi niṣaṇṇehi na pārenti kāryāṇi karttuṃ (= § 35.1.28B7, § 36.1. 29A7, § 37.1.29B7) § 34.2.28B2. te dāni tumbhehi niṣaṇṇehi na pārenti kāryāṇi karttuṃ (= § 35.2.29A2) § 34.2.28B2. vayaṃ yeva tāva niṣaṇṇā “kāryāṇi kārayiṣyāma” tti (= § 35.1.28B7) § 35.2.29A2. vayaṃ yeva tāva niṣaṇṇā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāmo” ti § 36.1.29A7. vayaṃ ye<va> tāva sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 37.1.29B7. vayaṃ yeva{ṃ} tāva sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāmo” ti § 34.3.28B3. <etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya> kṣatriyaparṣāye kiñci kāryaṃ bhavati, ... § 36.3.29B2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kiñcit kāryam bhavati, ... § 38.2.30A5. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya āryaparṣāye kāryam bhavati, ... § 34.3.28B3. vaktavyaṃ “dīrghāyu kṣatriyaparṣāye imaṃ va kāryaṃ allīyāmi (☞ § 34.3, Anm. 1)” tti § 35.3.29A3. “dīrghāyu, asti me kiñcid brāhmaṇaparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ allīyāma” tti § 36.3.29B3. dīrghāyu, asti <me> kiñci gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ, allīyāma mā āllīyāmo? § 37.3.30A2. āyuṣmaṃ, asti me kiñci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryaṃ, āllīyāma mā āllīyāmo vā? § 34.7.28B6. kāryaṅ kṛtvā utthāyâsanāto gantavyaṃ § 35.7.29A6. evaṃ kāryaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ (= § 36.7.29B6, § 37.6.30A4) § 35.3.29A3. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya kiṃci brāhmaṇaparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, ... § 36.3.29B2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kiñcit kāryam bhavati, ... § 37.3.30A2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya kiṃci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryam bhavati, ... § 38.5.30B1. saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti § 38.8.30B3. tena kāryaṃ saṃghamadhye ārocayitavyaṃ. saṃghena tat kāryaṃ dharmmeṇa vinayena śāstuḥ śāsanena vyupaśamayitavyaṃ. ... “āyuṣman, kiṃ vyupaśāntaṃ etaṃ kāryaṃ?” ... “āyuṣman, sarvve tvaṃ etaṃ kāryaṃ samagreṇa saṃghena suvyupaśāntaṃ ...” § 40.9.33A2. tasya udakena kāryam bhavati § 43.10.38A7. etā bhaiṣajyapiṣaṇikā śilā na dāni kārya kṛtvā yathā yeva pratiliptikā sthapetavyā § 43.16.38B5. bhaṇḍakaṃ ... na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ § 43.16.38B5. yasyaỿva{ṃ} kāryam bhavati, tasyaỿva{n} dātavyaṃ § 48.6.41B1. stūpikaṃ vā sāṃghikaṃ vā kāryaṃ adhīnaṃ bhavati § 51.14.44A7. evaṃ yaṃ yaṃ kāryyaṃ (Hs. kārmmaṃ) cchindiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, dātukāmā bhavati, na tena gantavyaṃ usw. kārṣa für kāryaṃ : § 31.36.27A2 -kārṣī~ ⇒ gandha-kārṣī~, gomaya-kārṣī~, taila-kārṣī~ kāla~ ⇒ a-kālī-bhūta~, apara-kālena, upagacchanikā-kāla~, kālasya, kāle, kālena kālaṃ, taṃ kālaṃ, yaṃ kālaṃ, cira-kāla~, varṣā-rātra-kāla~, virātra-kāle, sa-kāle, sa-kālena, hemanta- kāla~ § 2.9.3A2. yadā kāle (lies: yadā {kāle} oder yaṃ kālaṃ) dāyakadānapati nirddhāvitā bhavanti, ... § 4.8.4B6~7. mā kālo ’tikramiṣyatîti ... mā kālo atikramiṣyatîti § 4.8.4B7. atha dāni varṣārātro kālo bhavati, ... § 4.8.4B7. yadi tāva saṃjñam bhavati, mahanto ca kālo bhavati, ... § 4.11.5A3. hemanto ca kālo bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “na hi” tti § 4.11.5A4. “laghu kālo atikramati. detha yūyan” ti (≒ § 5.10.7A1) § 4.11.5A4. atha dāni grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, cire hi kālo atikramati 197  § 5.8.6B6. yadi tāva hemantakālo bhavati, ... lahuṃ (Hs. bahuṃ) kālo atikramati § 5.10.6B7. yadi tāva hemantakālo bhavati, laghu kālo atikramati, ... (= § 6.10.7B7, § 50.5.43A7) § 5.10.7A1. grīṣmakālo varṣārātro vā bhavati, cireṇa kālo atikramati § 6.8.7B6. yadi tāva hemantakālo bhavati, ... laghuṃ kālo atikrāmati § 6.10.8A1. atha dāni grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, na lahuṃ kālo atikramati § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 40.1.32B2. tena dāni kālena tena samayena āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā pānīyaṃ pratijāgaranti § 41.21.35A4. anyo ’sau tena kālena tena samaye[na] .. .. bhavati agrakulikasya putro § 49.1.42A1. so dāni ... tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati kālaṃ nidhyāyamāno § 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti ... tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvitaṃ kālaṃ nidhyāyantaṃ § 49.1.42A3. ayaṃ ... tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati kālaṃ nidhyāyamāno § 50.5.43B1. bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno pari<ṃ>dito. lahuṃ ca kālo atikrāmati § 50.5.43B1. atha dāni grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, cireṇa kālo atikramati § 50.7.43B2. yadi upakaṭṭho kālo bhavati, na dāni tena bhuñjantena āsitavyaṃ § 50.7.43B3. tena gacchantena kālo nidhyā{pa}yitavyo. yadi jāna{n}ti śakyaṃ sakālena saṃbhāvayituṃ, gantavyaṃ § 50.7.43B3. atha paśyati “upakaṭṭho kālo antāntiko. ...”, tena paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B6. piṇḍapātanīhārako ca cireṇa āgacchati, kālo ca stokāvaśeṣo bhavati, nīhārakapiṇḍapātena ... panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B6. atha dāni nīhārakapiṇḍapāto na pratyudgacchati, kālo ca atikramati piṇḍapātanīhārakena tvaritatvaritam āgantavyaṃ usw. kāla-jña~ § 33.4.28A1. āyuṣmān dāni Upālī kālajño velajño samayajño bhagavantam upasaṃkram- iya pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, ...?” kāla-paryantaṃ# “innerhalb der festgelegten Zeit; vgl. Pā. kāla-pariyanta~ (Vism 12.21, 12.22, 10.29) § 39.8.31A4. atha dāni kālaparyantaṃ nâgacchanti, grāmāntikehi gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjitavyaṃ kālasya# “früh (am Morgen)”; vgl. Pā. kālassa; v. Hinüber 1968: § 249 § 41.4.33B7. sthaviro dāni kālasyaỿva nivāsayitvā § 50.2.43A3. te dāni katpāhaṃ kālasya ubhaye samāgatā kālika~ ⇒ itvara-kālikam, cira-kālikam, dvitīya-kālikasya, dvitīya-kālikā~ kāle “zur rechten Zeit” ⇒ deśa-kāla~, vi-kāla~, sa-kāle, sa-kālena § 39.27.32A4. yadi tāva kāle āgacchanti, bhuñjanāye dātavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ (1) “zur rechten Zeit”# ☞ § 39.9, Anm. 4 § 39.9.31A6. kālena kālaṃ gantavyaṃ § 40.16.33B1. taṃ pi dāni gṛhṇiya ānīya kālena kālaṃ dātavyaṃ § 49.6.42B3. paścācchramaṇo kālena kālaṃ visarjayitavyo § 49.7.42B4. atha dāni na pratibalo bhavati, kālena kālaṃ visarjayitavyo (2) “von Zeit zu Zeit; immer” § 8.9.9A6. vihārako siñcitavyo sammārjitavyo. kālena kālaṃ gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 13.14.12B5~6. vihārakā kāl° kāl° siñcitavyāḥ saṃmārjitavyāḥ gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 11.9.11A2. kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ, kāl° kāl° sivitavyaṃ kāl° kāl° ātape dātavyaṃ § 12.18.12A5. kālena kālaṃ śayyāsanaṃ sīvitavyaṃ dhovitavyaṃ, kālena kālaṃ muñjā karttitavyā, balbajā karttitavyā, tato mañcā ca pīṭhā ca vuṇitavyā § 13.12.12B5. śayyāsanaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ sīvayitavyaṃ rañjayitavyaṃ § 13.17.12B7. vihāro ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ apāvuritavyo, yathā vātaṃ labheyyā § 21.8.20B5. kaṭhinaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ bandhitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyaṃ § 22.7.21A3. cakkalī ... kālena kālaṃ bandhitavyā, kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyā § 23.8.21B6. kālena kālaṃ śodhayitavyo, saṃtānikā śāṭayitavyā 198  § 23.9.21B7. upāṃsulako vihārako bhavati, kālena kālaṃ siñcitavyo saṃmārjitavyo § 25.16.23A3. pātraṃ ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ dahitavyaṃ pacitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ § 39.16.31B3. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantavyaṃ § 39.28.32A5. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ukkasitavyaṃ § 43.11.38B1. kālena kālaṃ ... tṛṇapulako dātavyo § 44.9.39A7. kālena kālaṃ siñcitvā sammārjitavyaṃ § 44.11.39B1. kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ raṃjitavyaṃ sīvitavyaṃ yathā cchavi § 55.10.47A1~2. (geṇḍuka~) ... kālena kālaṃ sīvayitavyo kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyo § 56.7.47A7. niṣīdanaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 57.12.48A1. upānahā ... kālena kālaṃ ghaṭayitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ pratyargalakā dātavyāḥ usw. kālyam “morgens” ⇒ aty-anukālye, anukalya~, anukallaṃ, anukalla-tarakaṃ, anukālaṃ, anukālya~, anukālyaṃ, kalyatas, kallato, *kallikaṃ § 7.5.8B3. śekhayitavyo anuśāsayitavyo kālyaṃ madhyantikaṃ sāyaṃ abhidharmmeṇa vā abhivinayena vā √kāś ⇒ pra-kāśita~ Kāśi~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-Kośala-Kuru-Pañcāla-Ceti-... Kāśi-janapada~ § 41.12.34B1. bhūtapūrvvam bhikṣavo atītam adhvānaṃ eta<r>hiṃ ca nagaraṃ Vārāṇasī Kāśijanapado kāśituṃ für kāsituṃ : § 58.5.48A4 kāśo für kāso : § 58.3.48A3 Kāśyapa~ (BHS, SWTF) Name eines Buddha der Vorzeit § 4.15.5B1. Krakucchanda Konākamuniñ ca Kāśyapaṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A4. Krakucchanda ca Kanakamuniñ ca Kāśyapaṃ (vs) kāṣṭha~ ⇒ danta-kāṣṭha~ § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) atha dāni prapātaniśritā vā, ... antarā kāṣṭhaṃ dātavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateya § 18.4.15B3. yāni sārāṇi ca dṛḍhāni ca sthūlā<ni> ca kāṣṭhāni tāny adhastā dātavyāni § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) tatra kāṣṭhehi vā phalakehi vā ohāṭayitavyā § 18.16.16A4. tena hi na kṣamati vaṃśaśalākāhi kaṇḍavidalikena vā nala<vidalikāya> kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā asthikhaṇḍena vā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchituṃ § 19.15.18A4. so pṛthivīpradeśo, yadi tāvad āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā uttatthiyāṇaṃ cchorayitavyo (≒ § 19.33.18B6) § 22.4.21A2. atha khalu khaṭakhaṭāpayitavyā kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā tato paścāc cakkalī utkṣipitavyā § 25.10.22B6. (pātraṃ) ... kāṣṭham vā iṣṭakam vā upalam vā nirāmiṣaṃ nirmmādiya tasya upari sthapetavyaṃ § 42.2.36A3. sarvvaṃ kāṣṭhaṃ agnau prakṣipiya § 42.11.36B5. kāṣṭhaṃ sejjetavyaṃ § 42.12.36B5. kāṣṭhaṃ bhraṣṭikāyāṃ ājuhitavyaṃ § 42.12.36B6. mā evam eva kāṣṭhaṃ dahyeya § 42.31.37B7. yaṃ kāṣṭhaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati yathāsthāne sthāpetavyaṃ kāṣṭhaka~ § 18.51.17B1. kāṣṭhakaṃ antarā karttavyaṃ (Hs. vyā), yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateyā § 31.15.26A1. cetiyāṇaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi upānahā omuñcitvā kāṣṭhakena gṛhṇitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ kāṣṭha-kuṇḍa~# “hölzerner Krug” § 18.7.15B5. tahiṃ sthāpetavyā<ni> kāṣṭhakuṇḍāni vā mṛttikākuṇḍāni vā kāṣṭha-ga<ṃ>ḍa~# “Holzstück”; eine Verschreibung für kāṣṭha-khaṃḍena? § 60.5.48B7. kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ kāṣṭha-maya~ 199  § 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... atha tāni kāṣṭhamayāni bhavanti, na kṣamati ātape{na} śoṣayituṃ § 40.5.32B6. appihāṇā karttavyā śilāmayā vā mṛttikāmayā vā kāṣṭhamayā vā kāsa~ “Husten” ⇒ kāsā~, kāsikā~, uk-kāsikā~ § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgacchati, hastena grīvā parimarditavyā § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo kāso (Hs. kāśo) āgacchati, bāhirato nirddhāpiya kāsitavyaṃ § 58.5.48A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgato bhavati, grīvā marditavyā § 58.7.48A6. evaṃ kāse pratipadyitavyaṃ kāsa- (Skt), kāsaya-# “husten”; vgl. Skt. kāsate, Pā. kāsati, Pkt. kāsaï § 58.2.48A2. evaṃ kāsitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VII].50B1) § 58.1.48A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā muktehi pārśvehi “khala khala” tti kāsanti § 58.3.48A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati ... muktehi pārśvehi “khulu khulu” tti kāsituṃ § 58.4.48A4. nâpi kṣamati ... muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānakaṃ kāsayitavyaṃ (“husten”) § 58.5.48A5. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo kāso āgacchati, bāhirato nirddhāpiya kāsitavyaṃ § 58.4.48A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāsikā āgacchati, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ § 58.5.48A4. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇikena upaviṣṭe<na> auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha” tti kāsituṃ (Hs. kāśi°) § 58.6.48A5. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ § 58.6.48A5~6. atha dāni bhikṣusya ukkāsikā āgacchati, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ. ekatam’ aṃte āgacchiya kāsitavyaṃ kāsā~ “Husten” ⇒ kāsa~, kāsikā~, uk-kāsikā~ § 58.5.48A5. atha dāni puno puno kāsā vīyati (oder kās’ āvīyati?; ☞ § 58.5, Anm. 3), dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ Kāsi für Kāśi : § 62.1.49B3 kāsikā~ “Husten” ⇒ kāsa~, kāsā~, uk-kāsikā~ § 58.4.48A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāsikā āgacchati, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ kāhe-# Futur von √kṛ; mi. Futur kāh(-iti oder -ati; vgl. Pischel § 533, Geiger § 153, v. Hinüber 2001: § 467f.) + mi. Kausativendung -eti; mit nicht-kausativer Bedeutung? § 23.6.4.21B4. pādām vā dhovati, mukham vā dhovati, hastam vā nirmmādayati, “rajonigrahaṃ kāheti” tti, anāpattiḥ kiṃ (BHS, Pā, Pkt), kim (Skt) ⇒ ka~, kiñ câpi, kin ti dāni, kiñci, kiñcid, kiṅ-gotraka~, kiṃ- karmmika~, kin-nāmaka~, kisya, kissa § 1.1.1B1. dāyakadānapatī pṛcchanti: “ārya, kiṃ samagro bhikṣusaṃgho?” (≒ § 4.1.4A6, § 5.1.6A5, § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7) § 1.5.1B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko pāñcadaśiko sandhipoṣadho bhaviṣyatîti. kiṃ pūrvvaṃbhaktaṃ, kiṃ paścādbhaktaṃ § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati paripṛcchitavyā “kim vasiṣyatha atha gamiṣyatha?” (≒ § 2.9.3A2) § 2.5.2B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā ... (= § 3.6.3B3) § 3.5.3B2. sarvvehi jānitavyaṃ “kiṃ khalv adya pakṣasya pratipadā dvitīyā yāvat pañcadaśī” § 3.10.4A1. kim vasiṣyatha atha gacchatha? § 4.11.5A3. kim vā ambhehi vihāra śūnyaṃ śakyaṃ karttuṃ § 5.10.7A1. kim asmābhiḥ vihārako śūnyako karttavyo? § 6.10.8A1. “ ... kiṃ ambhehi śakyam vihārako śūnyako kartun” ti § 4.12.5A4. tato saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ ārabhya deti, tathā yeva nimantraṇāy’ etavyaṃ § 5.7.6B3. āha “bhante kiṃ kariṣyasi?” ☞ § 5.7, Anm. 2 § 6.7.7B4. “kim vā etat?” ti, vaktavyaṃ “bhikṣusaṃgho tena bhaktena nimantrito.” § 13.3.12A7. bhagavān jānanto pṛcchati “kiṃ ime (Hs. imaṃ) bhikṣavo vihārakā ullaggakā 200  ... prāṇakehi khajjantā?” (≒ § 16.3.14A6, § 23.2.21A5) § 14.4.13A3. “kiṃ (“warum”) vayaṃ parityaktāḥ?” “kissa (“warum”) vayaṃ vasāmaḥ?” § 17.3.14B6. kiṃ ete bhikṣavo vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā ...? § 20.5.19B1. kiṃ ete bhikṣavo bhikṣū ekānte āsanti kalahitakā viya manye? § 20.11.19B6. kiṃ karttavyaṃ? § 21.2.20B1. bhagavāṃ jānanto pṛccha{n}ti “kim idaṃ bhikṣu{ḥ} (Voc.)?” § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo pakkakheṭena pakkasiṃghāṇakena varttīhi lambantīhi? § 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ. “āyuṣman, kiṃ sidhyati? kiṃ pacyati? kiṃ bhaktakānāṃ sthitikā?” § 32.2.27A5. so dān’ āha “kadā vā? kim vā?” § 33.1.27B7. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti (≒ § 33.2.27B7) (☞ § 33.1, Anm. 2 zu kiṃ bhaṇasi) § 33.7.28A2. tenâpi na kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena vyāharttuṃ “hā kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti § 33.7.28A3. “vandāmi upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā. kiṃ āṇapesi?” tti, “kiṃ karemi?” tti § 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati ... vaktavyaṃ ... “kiṃ āṇapesī?” tti “kiṃ karemi?” § 33.10.28A4. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “sālohite, kiṃ āṇapesi? kiṃ karemi?” § 33.10.28A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya <mātā vā> pitā vā bhaginī vā śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti pravyāharttuṃ § 33.13.28A5. bhikṣū vā tehi śabdāpayati (lies: °piyati?), nâyaṃ kṣamati, “hā kiṃ bhaṇasi” ti vyāharttuṃ § 39.2.31A1. kin dāni yuṣmābhiḥ sarvvāṇi bhaktakāni utkṣiptāni? § 39.20.31B7. ekena bhikṣuṇā vihāraṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ “kiṃ grāmāntikā āgacchanti na hi?” tti § 40.1.32B3. te dāni odhyāyanti “kin dāni ayaṃ ... thapito” (= § 40.2.32B4) § 41.1.33B4. te dāni odhyāyanti “kiṃ dāni ayaṃ pādadhovanikā omuddhikṛtā?” § 42.13.36B6. jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ eṣo jentāko sarvvasāṃghiko pāriveṇiko parṣāye § 42.24.37B1. jānitavyaṃ: kim ayaṃ jentāko ekato sāṃghiko parṣāyaṃ pariveṇiko nimantritakānāṃ § 43.1.38A2. kim iyaṃ bhikṣavo bhāṇḍaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ tiṣṭhati? § 57.5.47B3. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “anekāyo upānahikāyo mūṣikena vā khajjeṃsu. bhikṣū vā jānanto vā ajānanto vā gṛhītvā gaccheya” tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” et passim kiṃkara-pariśrāvaka~# “eifrig auf den Dienst achtend”;< kiṃkara + prati-√śru; vgl. Pā. kiṃkāra- paṭissāvin~ ☞ § 41.12, Anm. 5 § 41.12.34B2. so dāni mātāpitṇāṃ pūrvvotthāyī paścānnipātī priyavādī manaāpavādī kiṃkarapariśrāvako kiṃ-karmmika~# “welchen Beruf habend” § 4.5.4B3. pṛcchitavyaṃ “... kiṅgotrako ’si? kiṃkarmmikā te mātāpitarau? ...” (= § 6.5. 7B2) § 5.5.6B2. kinnāmako? kiṃjātiko? kiṃkarmmikā se mātāpitarau? kiṅ-gotraka~# “welches Gotra habend” § 4.5.4B3. pṛcchitavyaṃ “kinnāmako ’si? kiṅgotrako ’si? ...” (= § 6.5.7B2) kiñ câpi “auch wenn” § 18.7.15B6. atha dāni prapātaniśrita bhavati varcakuṭī, kiñ câpi tahi yyeva udakaṃ patati, anāpattiḥ § 18.17.16A5. atha dāni prapātaniśritā bhavanti, kiṃ câpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati saṃkaraṃ vā anāpattiḥ § 20.12.20A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati ... , kiñ câpi saṃghavigrahe dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, anāpattiḥ § 23.4.2.21B1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śeyyāṃ prajñapayitukāmo bhavati, kiñ câpi dīpakaṃ 201  praveśeti, anāpattiḥ § 23.4.4.21B1. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi ṣaṭpañca gatāgatāṃ deti, anāpattiḥ § 23.6.1.21B2. atha dāni kanīyasako vihārako bhavati, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ vinā pratipādakehi mañcakaṃ thapeti, anāpattiḥ § 24.11.22A7. cchorantako yyeva paryādānaṃ gacchati. kiṃ câpi na marddati, anāpattiḥ § 25.9.22B6. atha dāni nāgadantako bhavati, kiñ câpi evam eva thapeti, anāpattiḥ § 27.8.23B7. atha dāni glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi ... ohitahasto vā tiṣṭhati, anāpattiḥ § 28.7.24A4. atha dāni glāno, ... virecanaṃ vā pītaṃ, kiñ câpi caṃkramati, <anāpattiḥ> § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ... pratisaṃlīnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni ... bhikṣū ca paliguddhakā bhavanti, cchādanikā vā lepanikā vā karenti, kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 31.34.27A1. sarvve yeva gocaraṃ praviśanti, kiñ câpi ghaṭṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 40.16.33B1. kiñ câpi deti, anāpattiḥ § 40.16.33B2. kiñ câpi tato yeva pibati ... anāpattiḥ § 42.16.37A2. kiñ câpi anāpṛcchitvā kareti, anāpattiḥ § 42.21.37A7. kiñ câpi yāvadarthaṃ upanenti, anāpattiḥ § 42.30.37B6. kiñ câpi ... visarjenti, anāpattiḥ § 57.10.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi sa-upānaho upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā mūle upaviśati, anāpattiḥ § 60.5.48B7. koci se pradeśo khajjati, hastā ca se ’kalpiyā bhavanti, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu<ṃ> mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ § 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ usw. kiñci (Pā) ⇒ kiñcid, etad~ ... kiñci, ka~ + ci, ka~ + cid § 26.1.23A5. jalpa<ṃ>ti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, ...” § 31.31.26B6. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato yadi tahiṃ kiñci piṇḍacārikaṃ praṇītatarakaṃ bhavati, āgantukānāṃ sārāṇīyaṃ karttavyaṃ § 36.3.29B3. dīrghāyu, asti <me> kiñci gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ, allīyāma mā āllīyāmo? § 49.1.41B7. yadi tvaṃ tatra kiṃci akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyasi, ... § 49.2.42A5. ahaṃ ca tatra kiñci akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyāmi kiñcid ⇒ kiñci, etad~ ... kiñcid, ka~ + cid § 12.14.12A2. vaktavyo “na eṣo tava kiñcit{a} bhogārthaṃ vadiṣanti (für uddiśīyati?). ...” § 26.1.23A5. te dāni āyuṣmaṃto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ... jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid (Hs. kiñcad) yāgu ...” ... jalpa<ṃ>ti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, ...” § 35.3.29A3. “dīrghāyu, asti me kiñcid brāhmaṇaparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ allīyāma” tti § 38.2.30A6. saṃghasya madhye me kiñcit kāryaṃ. āllīyāmi mā allīyāmi? § 43.12.38B1. evaṃ yat kiñcit saṃghasya bhāṇḍaṃ ... pratisāmetavyaṃ § 49.1.41B6. ahaṃ ca tatra kiñcid eva akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyāmi kiṃ-jātika~# “von welcher Abstammung seiend”; vgl. SWTF, s.v. kiṃ-jātīya § 5.5.6B2. kinnāmako? kiṃjātiko? kiṃkarmmikā se mātāpitarau? kin ti dāni # “was heißt es denn ...?” § 1.4.1B4. kin ti dāni <evaṃ> saṃghasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 2.4.2B4. kin ti dāni <evaṃ> dvitīyasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ? § 3.4.3B1. kin ti dāni evaṃ ... pratipadyitavyaṃ? (= § 4.4.4B1, § 6.4.7B1, § 8.3.8B7, § 24.3.22A1, § 39.4.31A2, § 40.3.32B4, § 47.3.40B6, § 48.3.41A6 et passim) § 23.3.21A6. kin ti dāni madhyamako? madhyamako nāma vihārako, ... kin ti dāni kanīyasako? § 31.3.25B2. kin ti dāni evaṃ āgantukehi pratipadyitavyaṃ? § 41.3.33B6. kin ti dāni evaṃ pādā dhovitavyā § 41.3.33B7. kin ti dāni <evaṃ> dhovitapādehi pratipadyitavyaṃ § 42.6.36B1. kin ti dāni evaṃ snāne pratipadyitavyaṃ 202  § 43.2.38A3. kin ti dāni evaṃ bhaṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 44.3.39A1. kin ti dāni evaṃ cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ § 45.3.39B5. kin ti dāni evaṃ nivāsayitavyaṃ § 46.3.40A6. kin ti dāni evaṃ prāvaritavyaṃ § 49.3.42A6. kin ti dāni evaṃ pureśramaṇena pratipadyitavyaṃ ... § 53.3.45A3. kin ti dāni evaṃ pradīpe pratipadyitavyaṃ usw. kin-nāmaka~ (Skt, Pā) § 4.5.4B3. pṛcchitavyaṃ “kinnāmako ’si? kiṅgotrako ’si? ...” (= § 6.5.7B2) § 5.5.6B2. kinnāmako? kiṃjātiko? kiṃkarmmikā se mātāpitarau? kim-ārambaṇa~ (SWTF) “was als Anlaß habend” ⇒ kim-ālambana~ § 5.12.7A3. jānitavyaṃ kimārambaṇaṃ evaṃ (wohl für etaṃ od. eva) bhaktaṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakaṃ vevāhikaṃ gharapraveśakaṃ ... kim-ālambana~ (SWTF) “was als Anlaß habend” ⇒ kim-ārambaṇa~ § 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ kimālambanaṃ <etaṃ> bhaktaṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā vevāhikam vā gṛhapraveśakam vā ... (≒ § 6.12.8A2) kilamma- “leiden”; vgl. BHS. *kilamyati (BHSG, S. 209a, s.v. klam-), Pā. kilamati, Pkt. kilammai < Skt. klāmyati ☞ § 55.1, Anm. 1 § 55.1.46B2. te dāni bhikṣu{ṃ} prahāṇasmiṃ yaṣṭiṃ vārayantā śītena kilamma<ṃ>ti kisya (BHS[Mvu]; vgl. BHSG § 21.16) “wessen”; vgl. Pā. kissa ⇒ kissa § 5.7.6B4. bhante kisya upāsako? kahiṃ upāsako? kissa (Pā) “wessen; warum”; vgl. S. 560 in diesem Band ⇒ kisya § 6.7.7B4. nâsti koci imaṃhi evaṃnāmako. kissa (od. kaḥ sa; Hs. kiḥ sa) upāsako? kasya bhaktaṃ? § 14.4.13A3. “kiṃ vayaṃ parityaktāḥ?” “kissa (“warum”) vayaṃ vasāmaḥ?” kiḥ sa für kissa oder kaḥ sa : § 6.7.7B4 kīṇakehi für kīlakehi : § 43.9.38A7 kīrṇṇakaṃ für *kīllakaṃ oder kīlakaṃ : § 25.15.23A2 kīlaka~ “Holzpflock” § 3.5.3B3. kīlakā nikhanetvā dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ § 15.7.14A3. taṃ apaniya anyo kīlako ākoṭayitavyo pātraprasevikā sthāpayitavyā § 21.6.20B3. bhittīye dve kīlakā nikhaniya rajjue bandhiya tahiṃ ukkacayitavyaṃ § 22.2.20B7. vihārasya dvārasmiṃ upari trayo kīlakāni ā<ko>ṭayitavyā § 22.2.21A1. cakkalī ... osāriyāṇaṃ heṣṭhe dve kīlakān ā{ṃ}pīḍiyāṇa tahiṃ bandhitavyaṃ § 22.3.21A1. nidhāpiyāṇa cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ kīlakehi bandhiyāṇa tato otaritavyaṃ § 25.9.22B5. pātraprasevikā nāgadantake vā kīlake vā ukkaciya thapetavyā § 25.9.22B5. atha dāni ujjuko kīlako bhavati, duve trayo vā āveḍhakā dātavyāḥ § 25.15.23A2. ullapantena kīlakaṃ (Hs. kīrṇṇa°) hastena pratyavekṣitvā <ullapitavyaṃ> § 43.7.38A6. tato kīlakehi ollapitvā sthapitavyā yathā na khajjeya § 43.9.38A7. kīlakehi (Hs. kīṇakehi) ollapitvā sthapayitavyā kukkuṭa~ § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti kukkuṭa-pāśaka~# eine Art Band (?); wörtl. “Hahnenschlinge” § 40.5.32B6. (Ein Wassergefäß) na dāni kukkuṭapāśakena bandhitvā sthāpetavyaṃ kucca~# “Sitz aus Grasbüscheln” (?); < Skt. kūrca (“Büschel”) ☞ § 14.7, Anm. 3 ⇒ kuccaka~, kurcca~, kocaka~, kocavaka~ § 31.23.26A6. mañcapīṭhaṃ bisi caturasrako kuccaṃ bi<ṃ>bohanaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ kuccaka~# (1) “Sitz aus Grasbüscheln” (?); < Skt. kūrcaka (“Büschel”) ☞ § 14.7, Anm. 3 ⇒ kucca~, kocaka~, kocavaka~ § 31.29.26B4. mañcapīṭhaṃ bisī catu<ra>śrakaṃ kuccakaṃ bimbohanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ (2) “(durch Kauen) zersplitterter Teil (eines Zahnreinigungsholz)” (< Skt. kūrcaka~ [“Büschel; Besen, Bürste, Zahnbürste; Bündel; Bart”]) ☞ § 20.11, Anm. 1 ⇒ kurccaka~ 203  § 20.11.19B6. tato bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya kuccakaṃ śastrakena cchinditavyaṃ § 20.13.20A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena ... kuccako vā vicchaddiya diśodiśaṃ cchorayituṃ § 20.13.20A1. vāmena ca hastena kuccako gṛhṇitavyaḥ paścāt ekamantena cchorayitavyaḥ √kuṭ ⇒ ā-koṭaya-, ā-koṭe-, abhinikuṭitakena, nikuṭitakena kuṭa~ “Wasserkrug, Gefäß” ⇒ koṭ~ (2), koṭika~, *koḍika~, koḍilla~ § 24.8.22A5. caṃkramaśīrṣe vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thālikā vā kuṭaṃ mallakaṃ vā thape- tavyaṃ. tahiṃ kheṭo cchorayitavyo kuṭikā~ ⇒ kalpika-kuṭikā~, kalpiya-kuṭikā~, varcca-kuṭikā~, śarīra-kuṭikā~ kuṭī~ ⇒ cīvara-kuṭī~, kalpika-kuṭī~, kalpiya-kuṭī~, praśvāsa-kuṭī~, prasrāva-kuṭī~, prāsāda-kuṭī~, varc(c)a-kuṭī~, varcca-kuṭikā~, varcca-kuṭīkā~ § 18.9.15B7. varccakuṭīye purato kuṭī vā śālā vā karttavyā kuṭīkā~ ⇒ varcca-kuṭīkā~ kuṭhāra~ “Axt” § 43.16.38B4. takṣāṇaṃ bhāṇḍaṃ bhavati kuṭhāro vā vāsīyo vā viharaṇako vā nikhādanako vā aṭṭilā vā kuḍḍa~ (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “Wand”; < Skt. kuḍya ⇒ kuḍya § 18.6.15B4. kuḍḍa utthapiyāṇaṃ valabhī kārayitavyā § 19.36.19A1. kuḍḍa (Hs. kuṇḍa) agrato kariyāṇa praśvāso karttavyo § 48.7.41B2. bhaginī prajñapehi kuḍḍasmiṃ yahiṃ apāśrayitavyaṃ kuḍya~ “Wand” ⇒ kuḍḍa~ § 18.44.17A5. utkṣiptarathyāyāṃ kuḍyaṃ pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā uśvāso karttavyo kuṇḍa~ “Krug” ⇒ kāṣṭha-kuṇḍa~, mṛttikā-kuṇḍa~ § 42.11.36B5. ghaṭā vā sajjetavyā kuṇḍā <vā> § 42.21.37A5. yadi tāva mitakaṃ dīyati uṣṇodakaṃ ghaṭena vā kuṇḍena vā, tena tathā yeva grahetavyaṃ § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti śāṭakā vā paṭakā vā hārā vā arddhahārā vā hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇam vā kuṇḍa für kuḍḍa : § 19.36.19A1 kuṇḍaka~ “Krug” ⇒ raṅga-kuṇḍaka~, kuṇḍika~, kuntaka~ § 18.8.15B6. tāni kuṇḍakāni vā kaṭāhakāni vā nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ saprāṇakāni vā adhotakāni vā. ... tena tāni kuṇḍa{ni}kāni kālena kālaṃ pūrayitavyāni ... kuṇḍanikāni für kuṇḍakāni : § 18.8.15B6 kuṇḍika~ (BHS[LV]) “Wassertopf” ⇒ kuṇḍaka~, kuṇḍikā~ § 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya ... § 50.8.43B4. pānīyaṃ parisrāvayitavyaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ paripūriyāṇaṃ ... kuṇḍikā~ “Wassertopf” ⇒ śrī-kuṇḍikā~, śiri-kuṇḍikā~, kuṇḍika~ § 8.10.9A6. divāvihāraṃ gacchantasya ... pustako nayitavyo, kuṇḍikā nayitavyā ... § 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto āgacchantasya ... pustako ānayitavyo, kuṇḍikā ānayitavyā, ... § 31.21.26A4. yatra bhikṣūṇāṃ āsanaprajñaptir bhavati, tahiṃ cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ cīvara- bisiyan thaviyāṇaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ vā upānahau vā thaviyāṇa, ... § 41.24.35B1. kuṇḍikāto vā karakato vā kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya ... § 50.10.43B6. nīhārakapiṇḍapātena hastā nirmmādiyāṇaṃ pānīyasya kuṇḍikāṃ pūriyāṇaṃ panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ kutako für kuṃtako: § 19.25.18B3 kuto (Pā) < Skt. kutas § 8.7.9A4. nānāvarṇṇitaṃ bhavati, pṛcchitavyo “suvihita, kuto idaṃ labdhaṃ?” § 18.2.15B1. jano dāni odhyāyati “ ... naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ. kuto eṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ?” (☞ § 18.2, Anm. 4 zu kuto eṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ) § 19.2.17B4. naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ. kuto vā (= eva) imeṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ? § 20.6.19B3. naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ. kuto imeṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ? (=
 § 20.7.19B4, § 34.1.28B1, § 34.2.28B2, § 35.1.29A1, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 36.2.29B2, § 37.1.29B7, § 51.1.44A1 usw.) § 31.1.25B1. “āyuṣmaṃ kuto vā praviṣṭāḥ?”, āhaṃsuḥ “okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviṣṭāḥ.” 204  § 49.1.42A4. āyuṣman, kuto me ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāni (= § 49.2.42A5) § 50.2.43A3. āyuṣman, kasya pātraṃ? kuto pātraṃ? (“Was für eine Almosenschale?” ☞ § 50.2, Anm. 2) § 52.6.44B4. āha “upādhyāyācārya, paribhuṃjāhi” tti, “suvihita, kuto imaṃ?” ti pṛcchitavyo kuto-mukham# “in welche Richtung” ⇒ antara-mukham § 4.5.4B3. katamaṃ deśaṃ gṛhaṃ? katamāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ? kutomukhaṃ gṛhasya dvāraṃ? (≒ § 5.5.6B2) § 6.5.7B2. katame deśe gṛhaṃ? kutomukhaṃ? katamāye rathyāye? kutomukhaṃ gṛhasya dvāraṃ? kutsaya- (Skt), kutse-# “schmähen, tadeln” § 31.24.26A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati tehi āgantukehi nevāsikāṃ kutsiya haṃbhiya “āyuṣmann, adyâpi yūyaṃ iha vasatha. ...” (☞ § 31.24, Anm. 1) § 36.6.29B4. nâpi dāni kṣamati kutsitum vā pansitum vā “gṛhapatikā nāma ...” § 37.5.30A3. nâpi kṣamati kutsitum vā paṃsitum vā “aśrāddhā tīrthikāḥ ...” § 39.17.31B5. nâpi dāni āraṇyakehi grāmāntikā kutsetavyā “bahukṛtyā bahukaraṇīyā jihvāgre<na> yūyaṃ rasāgrāṇi paryeṣatha” § 39.29.32A6. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... divasaṃ yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha” kuddālaka~ “Spaten” § 43.16.38B4. etā bhavanti vāsīyo vā kuddālakā vā niśreṇiyo vā, na dāni tathā yeva mṛttikāpraliptikā sthapetavyā kunta für kuntakā? : § 19.25.18B3 kuntaka~# eine Art Flaschenkürbis oder Flaschengurke? ☞ § 19.16, Anm. 2 § 19.16.18A6. tatra kuṃtako (Hs. tatraṃko) alābu-{o}tumbako vā thapayitavyo § 19.22.18B2. cchidramallakasyôpari kuntako vā alābutumbuko vā thapayitavyo § 19.25.18B3. sāyaṃ praveśentena kunta<kā> vā tumbakā vā śikke uvvinitvā mañcaka- sthāne ullapitavyaṃ § 19.25.18B3. ku<ṃ>tako bhavati, evaṃ yyeva karttavyaṃ § 24.9.22A5. atha dāni bhūmyastāro bhavati, bhājane karttavyaṃ kuntake vā alābuke vā vaṃśatthālikāyāṃ vā √kup ⇒ vi-kopaya-, vi-kope- kumāra~ § 4.15.5B1. ayaṃ kumāro śivapathikāya cchandito (vs) § 6.13.8A3. <ayaṃ> kumāro śivapathikā (Hs. si{|}vapasikā) cchandito (Hs. cchoto) (vs) § 4.15.5B1. ayaṃ kumāro śaraṇaṃ upetu (vs) (= § 6.13.8A3) § 4.15.5B2. ato śreyataro bhotu kumāro kulavarddhano (vs) (≒ § 6.13.8A4) kumāraka~ “Prinz”#; vgl. Habata 2007: 55 über kumāraka-bhūta~ statt kumāra-bhūta~ mit weiteren Literaturhinweisen § 20.6.19B2. yathā kumārakā vā dharmmiṣṭhā vā akṣadarśā vā gaṇa<kā> vā mahāmātrā vā evam ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti (≒ § 20.7.19B4) kumārī~ ⇒ sthūla-kumārī~ kumbhaka~ ⇒ prasrāva-kumbhaka~, kumbhī~ kumbhikā~ “Krug; Topf ”⇒ prasrāva-kumbhikā~, varcca-kumbhikā~, kumbhī~ § 18.13.16A2. antamasato kumbhikāyaṃ ekasya paryāptaṃ bhaveyā, tattakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 40.7.32B7. bhikṣūṇāṃ hastodakasya pātrodakasya pāribhogikasya kumbhikā ca karakā ca pūrayitavyā kumbhī~ “Krug; Topf” ⇒ kumbhaka~, kumbhikā~ § 14.4.13A3. yaṃ tahiṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati kocavakā vā urṇṇīyo vā caturasrakā vā kumbhīyo vā kaṭāhakāni vā sarvvaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ otāretavyaṃ Kuru~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-Kośala-Kuru-Pañcāla-Ceti-Vatsa-Matsya-... kurcca~# “Sitz aus Grasbüscheln” (?); < Skt. kūrca (“Büschel”) ☞ § 14.7, Anm. 3 ⇒ kucca~, kuccaka~, kocaka~, kocavaka~ § 15.5.14A2. mañcaṃ pīṭhaṃ pi caturasrakaṃ kurccaṃ bi<ṃ>bohanaṃ uddiṣṭaṃ bhavati 205 kurccaka~# “(durch Kauen) zersplitterter Teil (eines Zahnreinigungsholz)”? (< Skt. kūrcaka) ⇒ kuccaka~ (2) § 20.16.20A3. atha dāni bhikṣu jihvāṃ nilehitukāmo bhavati, kurccakena āmarjayitavyā kuryesi Opt. 2. sg. von √kṛ; vgl. BHSG §§ 29.20~21 ⇒ √kṛ § 42.16.37A2. asukasya vā asukasya vā parikarmma kuryesi kula~ ⇒ a-viśrambha-kula~, a-śrāddha-kula~, upāsaka-kula~, kṣatriya-kula~, brāhmaṇa-kula~, rāja-kula~, viśrambha-kula~, veśikā-kula~ § 4.8.4B7. amukaṃ kulaṃ upasaṃkramiṣyatha § 4.20.6A3. kulāt kulaṃ cariya (lies: cāriya [m.c.]) piṇḍapātaṃ (vs) § 8.7.9A4. uśśa<ṃ>kiyapariśaṅkiyāṇi kulāni vyapadiśati, vāretavyo ... § 8.7.9A5. asukesmi kule buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ, tato labdhaṃ § 31.24.26A7. (nevāsikā ...) saṃpraharṣayitavyā vaktavyā “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyanti” § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. ... saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyantî”ti § 31.32.26B6. amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. pātranikubjanaṃ sa<ṃ>mutīkṛtaṃ. amutra śunakhā caṇḍāḥ. amukaṃ aśrāddhakulaṃ § 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi (Loc. pl.) tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6) § 39.2.30B7. te dāni ... kulāni upasaṃkramanti § 49.1.41B7. te dāni mahāntāni kulāny upasaṃkramanti kula-putra~ § 11.1.10B3. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ śraddhayā-d-āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ ... § 12.1.11A6. ye ca te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ ... āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ kula-putraka~ § 41.13.34B2. tasya dāni śreṣṭhikasya kulaputrakā gṛhaṃ ocaranti § 41.14.34B3. tehi dāni kulaputrakehi otāro labdho kula-varddhana~ “die Familie gedeihen lassend” § 4.15.5B2. ato śreyataro bhotu kumāro kulavarddhano (vs) (≒ § 6.13.8A4) kulika ⇒ agra-kulika~ kulikā~ für tulikā~? : § 18.17.16A4, § 40.12.33A5, § 59.1.48A6, § 60.5.48B7 ☞ § 18.11, Anm. 3 kulikā-taile# Bedeutung? § 53.11.45B2. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā ... dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ. atha khalu tulikāye nisnehiya dīpavartti okaḍḍhiya kulikātaile (für tulikā taile?) nirvvāpayitavyaṃ -kule (nadī-kule, udupāna-kule, puṣkiriṇī-kule) für -kūle : § 52.9.44B7 kulopaka~ (kula-upa°) ⇒ nagara-kulopaka~ kulmāṣa~ “saurer Fruchtschleim” § 62.2.49B5. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena saktukāṃ kulmāṣāṃ (Hs. °āsāṃ) ca (lies: vā?) mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayanti § 62.4.49B7. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktukān vā mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayitvā śvetamayena yeva khādituṃ § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu<ṃ> mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ kulmāsa~ für kulmāṣa~ : § 62.2.49B5 kuśala~ ⇒ anartha-kuśala~, abhinīhāra-kuśala~ § 34.6.28B5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “ye kṣatriyā kuśalā bhavanti, prāg eva te nairayikā bhavantî”ti § 39.29.32B1. yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi (Loc. pl.) dharmmehi no parihāṇi kuṣṭha~ eine Art Heilkraut ☞ § 13.17, Anm. 2 § 13.17.12B7. vihāro ... dhūpetavyo kuṣṭhena bhurjena vā saktuhi vā kusidā für kusīdā : § 37.5.30A4 kusīda~ “träge, faul” § 37.5.30A4. kusīdā (Hs. kusidā) hīnavīryā tīrthikāḥ, duḥprajñā tīrthikāḥ 206 kūṭa~ “Haufen” ⇒ tulākūṭa-mānakūṭa~ § 41.14.34B4. tehi ... gṛhasya madhyamāgāre mahāntaṃ kūṭaṃ kṛtaṃ kūṭaka~ “Haufen” § 18.17.16A5. atha khalu ekamante kūṭakaṃ karttavyaṃ Kūṭāgāraśālā~ (BHS, SWTF); vgl. DPPN, s.v. Kūṭāgārasālā § 41.4.33B7. Śāriputro sthaviro Vaiśālyām viharati Mahāvane Kūṭāgāraśālāyāṃ kūla~ ⇒ udupāna-kūla~, nadī-kūla~, puṣkiriṇī-kūla~ kṛ / hū : § 44.1.38B6. hūṣiyāṇaṃ für kṛṣiyāṇaṃ √kṛ ⇒ kara-, karo-, kare-, karitavya~, karttavya~, kāraya-, kārāpaya-, kārita-kāraṇa~, kāre-, kāhe- (Futur), kṛta~, kṛtaka~, kṛtikā~, kriya-, adarśanena priyaṃ √kṛ, adhi-√kṛ, antarā-√kṛ, evaṃ pi kṛtvā, evaṃ pi kariya, kalpaṃ √kṛ, pādato kṛtvā, prati-saṃ-s-kāraya-, prati-saṃ-s-karaya-, prati-saṃ-s-kare-, prati-saṃ-s-kāraya-, a-pratisaṃskṛta~, pradakṣiṇī-kare-, manasi-kare-, manasi-kāre-, samākulī-√kṛ, saṃpuṭ-√kṛ, sākṣāt √kṛ § 1.1.1B1. vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā (= § 2.1.2A7, § 3.1.3A6, § 4.1.4A5, § 5.1.6A4, § 20.1.19A5, § 20.4.19A7, § 20.9.19B5, § 21.1.20A6, § 27.1.23B3, § 31.1.25A7, § 42.1.36A1, § 44.1.38B6, § 48.1.41A3 usw.) § 4.11.5A4. kim vā ambhehi vihāra śūnyaṃ śakyaṃ karttuṃ (≒ § 6.10.8A1) § 4.17.5B5. ubhau puṇyāni kṛtvāna samaśīlavratā ubhau (vs) § 18.15.16A3. bhikṣuṇā ... vraṇamukhaṃ pocchitaṃ. tasya dāni kṣataṃ sarudhiraṃ kṛtaṃ § 18.19.16A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati akṛtvā udakakṛtyaṃ sāṃghikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ paribhuñjituṃ § 18.44.17A5. utkṣiptarathyāyāṃ kuḍyaṃ pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā uśvāso karttavyo § 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya kheṭa bādhati, upānahapuṭe kṛtvā bhūmiye marditavyaṃ § 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ ... bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno kapālānāṃ rāśiṃ kṛtvā § 25.17.23A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... udakakṛtyaṃ vā karttuṃ § 27.6.23B6. na kṣamati stūpaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ, saṃghaṃ vā upādhyāyācāryam vā vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ (≒ § 28.4.24A3) § 31.5.25B4. atha dāni vyāḍabhayaṃ vā corabhayaṃ vā bhavati, vṛddhaṃ bālaṃ madhye kṛtvā gantavyaṃ § 40.10.33A3. hastāṃ sunirmmāditāṃ kṛtvā bhājanaṃ sunirmmāditaṃ kṛtvā caukṣaṃ pānīyaṃ vāretavyaṃ § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... hastāṃ sudhotāṃ (Hs. sudhātāṃ) kṛtvā bhājanaṃ sudhotaṃ kṛtvā ... § 41.25.35B2. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā ... omuddhikāṃ pādadhovanikāṃ karttuṃ § 42.9.36B4. na dāni kṣamati sūcikābandhimaṃ karttuṃ § 42.16.37A1. anyasyâpi karttukāmo bhavati, āpṛcchitvā karttavyaṃ § 42.16.37A2. asukasya vā asukasya vā parikarmma kuryesi (Opt. 2. sg.; vgl. BHSG §§ 29.20~21) § 42.22.37A7. na kṣamati abhyavakāśe nagnasya nagnena parikarmma karttuṃ § 43.10.38A7. etā bhaiṣajyapiṣaṇikā śilā na dāni kārya kṛtvā yathā yeva pratiliptikā sthapetavyā § 43.16.38B5. bhaṇḍakaṃ ... na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ § 45.4.39B5. grāmapraveśanikaṃ nivāsanaṃ anupahastaṃ kṛtvā ... § 45.6.39B7. te bhikṣū uddhārakaṃ karttukāmā bhavanti ... § 47.4.40B6. śīrṣe vā skandhe vā cīvaraṃ kṛtvā gantavyaṃ § 50.5.43B1. dve piṇḍapātakā gṛhṇitavyā ātmano ca tasya ca śikkuḍḍitakaṃ kṛtvā vihārakaṃ āgantavyaṃ § 56.4.47A5. atha khalu sukhākaṃ utthitvā dviguṇīkṛtvā skandhe kṛtvā ca gantavyaṃ § 56.5.47A5. atha khalu yathā{khalu}prajñaptakaṃ dviguṇīkṛtvā tato gantavyaṃ § 56.5.47A5. nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ kṛtvā gantuṃ § 62.5.50A2. na kṣamati prahāṇam upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} ḍharaḍharāye vātakarmma karttuṃ (Hs. karttuḥ) usw. √kṛt ⇒ kartta-, kartte- 207 kṛta~ ⇒ kṛtena, uśvāsa-kṛta~, ekāṃsa-kṛta~, ekāṃsī-kṛta~, khaṃbha-kṛta~, praśvāsa-kṛta~, samudācāra-kṛta~, √kṛ § 19.19.18A7. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (☞ § 19.19, Anm. 2), ... (= § 22.4.21A1, § 53.11.45B1, § 53.17.45B6, § 56.1.47A3) § 20.9.19B5. tena dāni khādantena dantakāṣṭhaṃ tho<kā>vaśeṣaṃ kṛtaṃ § 22.1.20B6. so dāni yathāsukhe (Hs. °sukhaṃ) kṛte vihārakaṃ apaduriya praviśati § 41.2.33B6. te dāni bhikṣu paśyanti pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kṛtāṃ? § 41.14.34B4. tehi ... gṛhasya madhyamāgāre mahāntaṃ kūṭaṃ kṛtaṃ § 42.3.36A4. tehi ... dvāraṃ āghaṭṭiya bāhiravitaṇḍitaṃ kṛtaṃ § 42.3.36A4. te dāni dvāraṃ āgacchanti yāva bāhiravitaṇḍitaṃ kṛtaṃ § 53.18.45B7. yaṃ kālaṃ vibhātaṃ bhavati, ākāśaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (“[wenn] es hell geworden ist”), tato varccakuṭīye prasrāvakuṭīye ca dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 54.15.46B1. evaṃ tāva vāretavyaṃ yāva prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (= § 55.9.47A1) § 56.4.47A4. nâpi kṣamati yathāsukhe kṛte utthiya niṣīdanaṃ ... prasphoṭayituṃ § 56.6.47A6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte ... prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.7.47B5. atha dāni akṛto bhūmi-astāro bhavati, sa-upānahena prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśi- tavyaṃ § 57.7.47B5. prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte āgamayitavyaṃ kṛtaka~ “gemacht”; < Skt. kṛta + Suffix ka ⇒ saṃpuṭ-kṛtikā~ § 18.37.17A1. bhikṣū ... yaṃ paśyanti tatra śunakhena vā śṛgālena vā uśvāsaṃ kṛtakaṃ § 57.4.47B2. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, na kṣamati sopānahena pādena prahāṇaṃ upaviśituṃ kṛta-karmman~ “verputzt”# (?) ☞ § 18.35, Anm. 5 ⇒ kṛta-parikarmman~ § 18.35.16B7. kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, udakena dhovitavyā § 19.15.18A5. atha dāni kṛta{ṃ}karmmā pṛthivī bhavati, dhovayitavyā § 19.33.18B6. atha dāni kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, dhovitavyā § 23.3.21A5. jyeṣṭhako nāma vihārako, bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, ulloko bhavati prapāṇḍaro, bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā § 23.3.21A6. madhyamako nāma vihārako, ... bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā, ... § 24.3.22A1. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā kṛtakarmmāyāṃ vā akṛtakarmmāyāṃ vā bhittīyaṃ kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakam vā cchorayituṃ § 24.6.22A3. kṛtakarmmā bhūmi bhavati, na kṣamati bhūmīye cchorayituṃ kṛta-parikarmman~ (SWTF) “verputzt”# (?) ☞ § 18.35, Anm. 5 ⇒ kṛta-karmman~ § 23.3.21A6. na haỿva bhitti kṛtaparikarmmā. evaṃ kanīyasako kṛta-puṇya~ § 4.16.5B3. nirayaṃ pāpakarmmāṇo kṛtapuṇyā ca svarggatiṃ (vs) -kṛtikā~ ⇒ saṃpuṭ-kṛtikā~ kṛtena “wegen, für” § 41.16.34B6. kasya kṛtena tvaṃ atra dīpamūlaṃ allīno ’si? § 50.1.43A2. so dāni bhikṣu piṇḍapātasya kṛtena praviṣṭo § 52.1.44B1. te dāni teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā odhyāyanti “vayaṃ yyeva tāva imeṣāṃ kṛtena snehaṃ thapemaḥ, khajjakakhaṇḍakāni sthapemaḥ, ...” kṛtya~ ⇒ puro-kṛtya~, bahu-kṛtya~, bhakta-kṛtya~, Bhadrapāla-kṛtya~ √kṛṣ ⇒ apa-karṣa-, uk-kaḍḍha-, upa-kaṭṭha~, o-kaḍha-, kaḍḍha- § 44.1.38B6. sa cīvaraṃ cīvara{ṃ}vaṃśāto kṛṣiyāṇaṃ (Hs. hūṣi°) patito § 44.6.39A4. cīvaravaṃśakāto cīvarāṇi muṃciya ekaṃ dvitīyaṃ vā tṛtīyam vā kṛṣiyāṇaṃ (Hs. lūṣiyāṇaṃ) bhūmīyaṃ patitaṃ √k ⇒ ava-kīrṇṇa~, o-kira-, ujjhita-prakīrṇṇa~, pra-kīrṇṇa~, prakīrṇṇakaṃ, prakīrṇṇakasya, vi- kīrṇṇa~ √kḷp ⇒ kalpa-, kalpe-, śeyyāṃ (śayyāṃ) kalpaya- (kalpe-) kec-cira~ (Pkt) “wie lange”; vgl. Pkt. kec-ciraṃ, kec-cireṇa, Skt. kiyac-ciraṃ, kiyac-cireṇa; Pischel § 149 ☞ § 32.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ evac-cira~ § 32.2.27A5. so dāni sthaviro pṛcchati “āyuṣmaṃ, kecciro te āgatasya?” 208 kettika~# “wieviel”; vgl. Pkt. kettia, BHSD, s.v. kettaka (“how much”), DP, s.v. kittaka; AMg kittiya. Diese Formen sind wohl aus *kiyattaka entstanden (vgl. von Hinüber 2001: § 130) ☞ § 1.5, Anm. 2 § 1.5.1B5. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kettika pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi?; vgl. § 3.6.3B4. kati pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi -keraka~ ⇒ para-keraka~ *kelāpaya- “sich kümmern” oder “saubermachen lassen” (?); vgl. BHSD, s.v. kelāyati (“cleans up, puts in order; tends, looks after, cares for”) ☞ § 31.24, Anm. 5 § 31.24.26A7. (nevāsikā ...) saṃpraharṣayitavyā vaktavyā “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati (Passiv), dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyanti” § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. ... saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati (Passiv), dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyantî”ti § 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati, āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ kelāpīyati (Passiv). ...” keśa~ § 25.17.23A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa keśāṃ (Hs. keṣāṃ) otārayitum (☞ § 25.17, Anm. 3) § 40.11.33A4. na dāni ... keśā vā ālihitum vā niḍālam vā § 40.12.33A4. yadi koci atibahuṃ oṣṭhaṃ vā volayati keśā vā ālaya{ṃ}ti nilāṭe vā, apane- tavyaṃ keṣāṃ für keśāṃ : § 25.17.23A4 ko punar vvādo # “Was soll man da noch sagen (?); geschweige denn”; vgl. BHS. kaḥ punar vādaḥ (s. BHSD, s.v. vāda); Pā. ko pana vāda (s. CPD, 5ka, 3a) § 41.17.34B7. ko punar vvādo yo (für ye?) etasya mātāpitā vā jñātikā vā tehi eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati kocaka~# “Sitz aus Grasbüscheln” (?) ☞ § 14.7, Anm. 3 ⇒ kucca~, kuccaka~, kurcca~, kocavaka~ § 14.7.13A6. yaṃ sārāsāraṃ śayyāsanaṃ amilā vā astaraṇikā vā kocakā vā guḍuguḍukā vā makucakā vā te grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ nāpayitavyāḥ § 48.5.41B1. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā kalantarako paṭa vā, tato niṣīditavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā amilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati, tato apāśrayitavyaṃ kocavaka~ (BHS) “Decken aus Schafwolle”; vgl. Skt. kaucapaka, Pā. kojava, kojavaka ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 2, § 14.7, Anm. 3 ⇒ kucca~, kuccaka~, kurcca~, kocaka~ § 14.4.13A3. yaṃ tahiṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati kocavakā (Hs. °ko) vā urṇṇīyo vā caturasrakā vā kumbhīyo vā kaṭāhakāni vā sarvvaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ otāretavyaṃ § 17.10.15A4. śeyyāsanaṃ oṇṇiyo vā kocavakā (Hs. °ko) vā prāvārā vā bisiyo vā ... koci ⇒ ka~ + ci, etad~ ... ka~ + ci koṭ~ (1) “zehn Millionen” ⇒ prāṇi-koṭī-niyuta-śata-sahasra~ koṭ~ (2) “Töpfchen”# ☞ § 18.31, Anm. 1 ⇒ kuṭa, koṭika~, *koḍika~, koḍilla~ § 20.13.20A1. atha khalu kaṭāhake vā mallake vā koṭiyāṃ vā āviddhapuṭikāyām vā kheṭaṃ cchorayitavyaṃ koṭika~ “Töpfchen, Wasserkrug”# ☞ § 18.31, Anm. 1 ⇒ kuṭa, koṭ~ (2), *koḍika~, koḍilla~, dīpa- koṭika~ § 24.5.22A3. mallakaṃ vā koṭikam vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thapetavyā, tahiṃ kheṭo karttavyo koṭikā~ ⇒ dīpa-koṭikā~ *koḍika~# “Töpfchen” ☞ § 18.31, Anm. 1 ⇒ kuṭa, koṭ~ (2), koṭika~, koḍilla~ § 18.31.16B5. tena uśvāsaṃ karaṃtena mallakena vā koḍikena (Hs. koḍitena) vā cchorayi- tavyaṃ koḍitena für koḍikena : § 18.31.16B5 koḍilla~# “Töpfchen”; < *koḍa (< *koṭa-) + Suffix -illa ☞ § 18.31, Anm. 1 ⇒ kuṭa~, koṭ~ (2), koṭika~, *koḍika~ 209  § 18.35.16B7. tenâpi dāni uśvāsaṃ kariya mallakena vā koḍillena vā kaṭhallena vā cchoḍiyāṇa ... koṇa~ “Ecke” ⇒ koṇaka~, cīvara-koṇa~, prāsāda-koṇa~ § 19.16.18A5. atha dāni praśvāsakuṭī na bhavati, ekasmi koṇe sarvvasaṃghasya praśvāsa- ghaṭo sthāpayitavyo § 53.6.45A5. catuhi prāsādasya koṇe koṇe dīpako prajvālayitavyaḥ § 56.1.47A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa āgatā samānā skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti § 56.1.47A3. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭiya sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gacchanti § 56.3.47A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ okastena niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭayituṃ (≒ § 56.5.47A6) § 56.4.47A5. nâpi kṣamati yathāsukhe kṛte utthiya niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 56.6.47A6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte niṣīdanakaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭayituṃ koṇaka~# “Ecke; Zipfel (eines Gewandes)”; vgl. Skt. koṇa “Ecke” ⇒ cīvara-koṇaka~, vihāra- koṇaka~, koṇa~ § 44.6.39A4. so mārgganto {na} paśyati tasya cīvarakasya koṇakaṃ § 44.6.39A5. tato koṇakāto prabhṛti sukhākaṃ mocayitavyaṃ § 53.19.45B7. dīpavarttīyo niṣpīḍiyāṇaṃ ekaṃhi koṇake sthāpetavyāyo Konāka-muni~ (BHS) Name eines Buddha der Vorzeit ⇒ Kanaka-muni~ § 4.15.5B1. Krakucchanda Konākamuniñ ca Kāśyapaṃ (vs) kopaka~ ⇒ vāta-kopaka~ kopana~ ⇒ vāta-kopana~ kolaka~ (BHS, SWTF) “Zizyphus jujuba” § 48.8.41B4. labhyā ... khakkhaṭāni phalāni gṛhṇituṃ badarāṇi vā kolakāni vā āmalakāni ... kośa~ ⇒ prabhūta-dhana-dhānya-k°-koṣṭhāgāra~ Kośala~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-Kośala-Kuru-Pañcāla-Ceti-Vatsa-Matsya-... koṣṭha~ ⇒ dvāra-koṣṭha~ koṣṭhaka~ ⇒ ārāma-dvāra-koṣṭhaka-, dvāra-koṣṭhaka~ koṣṭhāgāra~ ⇒ prabhūta-dhana-dhānya-kośa-koṣṭhāgāra~ Kaumārabhṛtya~ (vgl. Pā. Komārabhacca) ⇒ Jīvaka Kaumārabhṛtya~ kauśalya~ ⇒ āpatti-kauśalya~, āyatana-k°, dhātu-k°, pratītya-samutpāda-k°, sūtra-k°, skandha-k°, sthānāsthāna-k° kk / ky : § 19.25.18B3. śiktena für śikkena § 50.5.43B1. śiktuḍḍitakaṃ wohl für *śikku° kk / kṣ : § 19.25.18B3. śikṣe wohl für śikke kkh / kh : § 26.5.23B1. nikhosiya für ni<k>khāsiya kkhatto ⇒ tri-kkhatto ky / kk ⇒ kk / ky Krakucchanda~ (BHS) Name eines Buddha der Vorzeit; vgl. SWTF II 132, s.v. Krakasunda § 4.15.5B1. Krakucchanda Konākamuniñ ca Kāśyapaṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A4. Krakucchanda (Hs. °ndo) ca Kanakamuniñ ca Kāśyapaṃ (vs) √kram ⇒ ati-krama-, ati-krāma-, anu-caṃkrama-, abhi-√kram, abhi-krānta~, ava-krānta~, ā- krānta~, upa-saṃ-√kram, caṃkrama-, dīrgha-caṃkramaṃ caṃkrama-, niṣ-krāma-, prati- √kram, prati-kramāpaya-, prati-krānta~, prati-krāmaya-, prati-saṃ-√kram kriya-; eine Passivform von √kṛ; vgl. BHSG § 37.13 (Mvu); v. Hinüber 2001: §§ 458f. § 31.24.26A7. (nevāsikā ...) saṃpraharṣayitavyā vaktavyā “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati, saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyanti” § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. ... dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyantî”ti § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati, 210  āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ kelāpīyati. ...” § 47.1.40B3. tān’ api dāni cīvarakāni omaïlamaïlāṇi pāṭitavipāṭitāni kriyanti kriyā~ “Beschluß” § 31.32.26B7. nevāsikehi sarvvam ārocayitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmanto, amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. pātranikubjanaṃ sa<ṃ>mutīkṛtaṃ. ...” yā kriyā ārocayitavyā kruddha-prasanna~# “ein Zorniger und ein Wohlwollender” § 4.20.6A3. kruddhaprasannānāṃ (°ānaṃ [m.c.]) mukhaṃ udīkṣiyaṃ (vs) √kruś ⇒ vi-krośa- √klam ⇒ klānta~, kilamma- klānta~ “erschöpft” § 31.28.26B3. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. mā śrāntā? mā klāntā? § 32.11.27B5. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. mâsi śrānto? mâsi klānto? klinnaka~ “feucht” ⇒ a-klinnaka~ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati ... klinnakāni vā puṣpāṇi praticchituṃ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati ... mālyam vā klinnakaṃ <gṛhṇituṃ> kv / kṣ : § 42.7.36B2. pakṣiṭṭikāya für pakviṭṭikāya kṣ / kk ⇒ kk / kṣ kṣ / kv ⇒ kv / kṣ kṣ / ṅk : § 18.14.16A2. lekṣaṭākhaṃḍehi für leṅkaṭakh° kṣ / ñj : § 43.15.38B3. raṃga-rakṣitaṃ wohl für raṃga-rañjitaṃ kṣ / dy : § 42.7.36B2. saṃdyiptā für saṃkṣiptā kṣ / sy : § 42.22.37A7. udakasya für uda<kena> kakṣa? (unsicher) kṣaṇa-muhūrtta~# “Augenblick”; vgl. DP, s.v. khaṇa-muhutta ☞ § 4.16, Anm. 3 § 4.16.5B2. bhadrakaṃ kṣaṇamuhūrttaṃ prasthitaṃ (vs) kṣata~ § 18.15.16A3. bhikṣuṇā ... vraṇamukhaṃ pocchitaṃ. tasya dāni kṣataṃ sarudhiraṃ kṛtaṃ kṣatriya~ § 34.3.28B3. atha khalu ye tahiṃ vṛddhatarakā kṣatriyā bhavanti, te tāva alliyitavyā § 34.6.28B5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “ye kṣatriyā kuśalā bhavanti, prāg eva te nairayikā bhavantî”ti. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “kṣatriyā nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo.” kṣatriya-kula~# “Kṣatriya-Familie” § 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi (Loc. pl.) tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6) kṣatriya-parṣā~# “Versammlung von Kṣatriyas”; vgl. SWTF. kṣatriya-pariṣad, °ya-parṣad, Pā. khattiya-parisā; BHS. parṣā ⇒ ārya-parṣā~, gṛhapati-parṣā~, tīrthika-parṣā~, brāhmaṇa- parṣā~, bhikṣu-parṣā~ § 34.1.28A7. kṣatriyaparṣā (Hs. °paryā) dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 34.2.28B2. evan nāma kṣatriyaparṣā (Hs. °paryāye) sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 34.3.28B3. kṣatriyaparṣāye kiñci kāryaṃ bhavati, na kṣamati gatāgatasya upasaṃkrami- tuṃ § 34.4.28B4. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryante<na> upānahā{ṃ}hi vā obaddhāhi kṣatriya- parṣāyam (Hs. °paryā°) upasaṃkramituṃ § 34.8.28B6. evaṃ kṣatriyaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5) √kṣan ⇒ kṣata~ kṣapitavyaṃ für kṣipit° : § 59.2.48A7 √kṣam ⇒ kṣamaya- § 1.10.2A1. nâpi kṣamati ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ § 1.10.2A2. śalākāṃ pi dāni gṛhṇantena na câpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahā- rūḍhena vā śalākāṃ gṛhṇituṃ § 4.10.5A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati praviśantehi bhaṇḍaṃ laṃghaṃtehi kāṃsabhājanaṃ laṃghaṃtehi dārakadārikāṃ laṃghaṃtehi gantuṃ § 14.15.13B3. na kṣamati tehi aśabdakarṇṇikāye āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantuṃ § 18.8.15B6. tāni kuṇḍakāni vā kaṭāhakāni vā nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ saprāṇakāni vā adhotakāni vā 211 § 18.21.16A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā kṣamayituṃ, yāva uśvāsena utpīḍito tti § 18.26.16B3. nâpi kṣamati sāṃghikena śeyyāsanena prāvṛtena varccakuṭī praviśituṃ. nâpi kṣamati kalpikehi cīvarehi prāvṛtehi varccakuṭīṃ praviśituṃ § 19.17.18A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati abhyāgam pradeśe ujjhituṃ § 19.20.18A7. tato pi na kṣamati so tahiṃ cchorayituṃ ... § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ ... nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ § 20.3.19A7. tena hi na kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ § 20.12.19B7. na kṣamati stūpavigrahe vā saṃghavigrahe vā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 24.3.22A1. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā kṛtakarmmāyāṃ vā akṛtakarmmāyāṃ vā bhittīyaṃ kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakam vā cchorayituṃ § 28.8.24A4. tan na kṣamati purato samaṃ vā gantuṃ. ohayitvā gantavyaṃ § 29.8.24B5. nâpi kṣamati “saṃghamadhye mā niṣīda” tti uktena samānena niṣīdituṃ § 31.2.25B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati nevāsikehi vihārasya dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ vihārasya paścādvastukasya kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjamānehi āsituṃ § 31.2.25B2. nâpi kṣamati āgantukehi vihāraṃ okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviśituṃ § 31.24.26A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati tehi āgantukehi nevāsikāṃ kutsiya haṃbhiya “āyuṣmann, adyâpi yūyaṃ iha vasatha. ...” § 32.8.27B3. na kṣamati oguṇṭhitakāyena. na kṣamati ohitahastena. na kṣamati upānahārūḍhena § 33.6.28A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena ālapituṃ “haṃgho he he” tti § 33.12.28A5. bhikṣū vā upāsakam vā dānapatim vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâpi kṣamati “bhāve” tti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā “āyuṣmaṃ” tti vā. atha khalu ... § 34.5.28B5. nâpi kṣamati āsane kṣiyādharmmam āpadyituṃ § 35.5.29A5. nâyaṃ kṣamati āsane kṣīyādharmmam āpadyituṃ § 39.3.31A1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... bhuñjituṃ § 41.24.35B1. na kṣamati upānahāhi ārdrapādena praveśayituṃ § 41.25.35B2. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā jhallajhallāye pādāṃ dhovituṃ ... omuddhikāṃ pādadhovanikāṃ karttuṃ § 42.9.36B4. na dāni kṣamati sūcikābandhimaṃ karttuṃ § 42.15.36B7. na dāni kṣamati ... praviśituṃ § 42.20.37A4. na dāni kṣamati tailena śoṣayituṃ § 42.20.37A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cūrṇṇaṃ rāśīya upanetuṃ § 43.15.38B3. tena ... na kṣamati ... dayituṃ § 44.4.39A2. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣūhi ... sthapayituṃ § 44.9.39A7. na dāni kṣamati vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ ... § 44.10.39A7. na kṣamati ... gṛhṇituṃ ... ujjhituṃ ... gṛhṇituṃ ... uccinituṃ § 44.11.39B1. na kṣamati cīvaraṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... § 45.4.39B5. na kṣamati ... nikṣipituṃ § 45.5.39B6. gocarāto nirddhāvitena nâpi kṣamati ... nivāsanaṃ nikṣipituṃ § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati ... nivāsayituṃ § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati ... snānaśāṭikāṃ utkṣipituṃ § 45.7.40A2. nâpi kṣamati ... mārggituṃ (= § 46.4.40A6, § 46.5.40A7, § 46.6.40B1) § 48.8.41B3. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena cīvarakena pratīcchituṃ ... praticchituṃ ... praticchituṃ ... nirmādituṃ ... nirmādayituṃ § 49.4.42A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā paścācchramaṇo praveśituṃ § 49.5.42A7. nâpi kṣamati tena dūraṃ pṛṣṭhato gantuṃ. nâpi kṣamati khureṇa khuraṃ hanantena § 49.7.42B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati “dinnā mama āṇattikā” ti adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ § 53.12.45B2. na kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ (Hs. °payitavyaṃ) § 55.2.46B3. (geṇḍuka~ ...) nâpi kṣamati khakkhaṭaṃ karttuṃ. nâpi kṣamati atiśithilaṃ § 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ (Hs. bhañjayitavyaṃ; ☞ § 61.3[Text], Anm. 1) et passim 212 kṣamaya- “sich erhalten” § 18.21.16A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā kṣamayituṃ, yāva uśvāsena utpīḍito tti √kṣal ⇒ pra-kṣālaya-, pra-kṣāle-, su-prakṣālita~ kṣāmati für kṣam° : § 31.35.27A1 kṣāra~ “Pottasche” § 17.10.15A5. anyehi udakaṃ pariharttavyaṃ, anyehi kṣāraṃ ānayitavyaṃ, anyehi dhovayitavyaṃ √kṣip (1) “werfen” ⇒ ut-√kṣip, u-kṣipta~, ut-kṣipta~, ni-√kṣip, pra-√kṣip, prati-kṣipta~, saṃ- kṣipta~ § 14.9.13A7. otariya rajjū{ye} vā kaḍevariyā vā abhyantare kṣipitavyā √kṣip (2) “niesen”#; vgl. Pā. khipati ☞ § 59.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ kṣva-, hacchīya- § 59.2.48A7. tena hi evaṃ kṣipitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni evaṃ kṣipitavyaṃ (Hs. kṣapit°); vgl. § 59.9.48B4. evaṃ kṣivitavyaṃ kṣipādharmmam für kṣiyā° : § 34.5.28B5, § 37.4.30A3 kṣipra~ “rasch, schnell” § 54.3.46A2. te ... yaṣṭī vārentā yo yeva bhikṣu pracalāyati taṃ yeva kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhananti, pāde vā āhananti § 55.3.46B5. yo yeva pracālayati taṃ yeva kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena urasi vā tāṇḍeti pārśvasmi vā āhananti § 54.7.46A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yaṣṭiṃ vārentena (Hs. cār°) kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye āhanituṃ § 54.8.46A5. nâpi kṣamati kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye āhanituṃ rajag[g]asma viya § 55.5.46B6. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ pracālayati, na kṣamati kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena āhanituṃ kṣiyā-dharmma~#, kṣīyā-dharmma~# “Zustand der Demütigung; Klage”; vgl. Pā. khīya-dhamma ☞ § 34.5, Anm. 3 § 34.5.28B5. nâpi kṣamati āsane kṣiyādharmmam (Hs. kṣipā°) āpadyituṃ § 35.5.29A5. nâyaṃ kṣamati āsane kṣīyādharmmam āpadyituṃ § 37.4.30A3. yāva na dāni kṣamati āsane kṣiyādharmmam (Hs. kṣipā°) āpadyituṃ kṣiva- ⇒ kṣva- kṣivikā~ ⇒ kṣvikā~ kṣīyā-dharmma~ ⇒ kṣiyā-dharmma~ kṣīrodakī-bhūta~# (kṣīra-uda°) “einig wie ein Gemisch aus Milch und Wasser seiend”; vgl. Pā. khīrodakī-bhūta § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ sahitānāṃ saṃmodamānānāṃ avivada- mānānāṃ ekoddeśakānāṃ kṣīrodakībhūtānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? kṣva-#, kṣīvaya-# “niesen”; vgl. Skt. kṣauti ☞ § 59.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ kṣipa-, hacchīya- § 59.4.48B1. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvayitavyaṃ ... § 59.5.48B2. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvitavyaṃ ... (= § 59.6. 48B3) § 59.5.48B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... sarvveṇa kaṇṭhe<na> kṣīvituṃ § 59.6.48B2. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇe sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena kṣīvituṃ § 59.7.48B4. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, ekama<ṃ>te gacchiya kṣīvitavyaṃ § 59.8.48B4. yadi tāva koci kṣīvati, na dāni vaktavyaṃ “jīva” ti § 59.8.48B4. atha dāni navako kṣīvati, “ārogê”ti vaktavyaṃ § 59.9.48B4. evaṃ kṣivitavyaṃ Uddāna (VII).50B1. evaṃ kṣīvitavyaṃ kṣvikā~# “Niesen” ☞ § 59.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ kṣva-, hacchīya- § 59.4.48A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya anābhogena kṣīvikā āgacchati, vinodayitavyaṃ § 59.4.48B1. atha dāni puno puno kṣīvikā āgacchati, prahāṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 59.5.48B1. atha dāni bhikṣusya kṣīvikā āgacchati, vinodayitavyā § 59.6.48B2. atha dāni bhikṣusya kṣīvikā āgacchati, vinodayitavyaṃ (= § 59.7.48B3) § 59.5.48B2. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno kṣīvikā āgacchati ānantarikasya vaktavyaṃ ... § 59.6.48B3. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno kṣivikā āgacchati, dharmmaśravaṇasya 213  āmantriya gantavyaṃ √*kṣuṭ ⇒ ut-khoṭaya-, nik-khoḍiya- kṣudra~ § 24.11.22A6. atha dāni kṣudro kheṭo, upāṃsulā ca bhūmī bhavati, cchorantako yyeva paryādānaṃ gacchati kṣudra-pāka~ (BHS[Mvu]) “überreif” § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... kṣudrapākāni vā phalāni praticchituṃ kṣema~ § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... satvān ... kṣeme same śive sthale abhaye nirvvāṇe pratiṣṭhāpaya- māno ... KH kh / k ⇒ k / kh kh / kkh ⇒ kkh / kh kh / ṣ Vgl. Weber 1872: 84~85; Pischel § 265; Oertel 1926: 56, § 29, ex. 6; AiGr I, S. 136~137, Nachträge S. 75; Vedic Variants II § 295; Renou, Gr, S. 4; Bloch/Master p.73; Handurukande 1967: xiii; Kuiper 1987: 152~154; BHSD, S. 532, śeṣita (für śekhita) śeṣayiṣyaṃ für śekhayiṣyaṃ : § 49.1.41B7 kh / s : § 60.5.48B7. sajjanako für khajj° kha#; kha kha kha # “laut” (Onomatopoetica für den Klang des Hustens) ☞ § 58.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ khala khala, khulu khulu § 58.4.48A3. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyikāye vā auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ § 58.5.48A4. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇikena upaviṣṭe<na> auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha” tti kāsituṃ § 58.6.48A5. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ khakkhaṭa~ “hart” § 26.1.23A5. atha dāni khakkhaṭa bhavati, jalpati “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, lecchaṃ (wohl für lehyaṃ) ayaṃ, ’peyyā ayaṃ, kaṭṭārikācchejjā ayaṃ.” § 48.8.41B4. labhyā dāni cīvarāntarikāya khakkhaṭāni phalāni gṛhṇituṃ § 55.2.46B3. (geṇḍuka~) ... nâpi kṣamati khakkhaṭaṃ karttuṃ. nâpi kṣamati atiśithilaṃ khajja- (1) (BHS[Mvu], Pā) < Skt. khādyate ⇒ khājja-, √khād, khāya-, khāditaka~, khāyitaka~, khādaya-, khāde- (1) “angefressen werden” § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... prāṇakehi khajjantaṃ (☞ § 11.2, Anm. 2) § 11.5.10B5. śayyāsanaṃ ... prāṇakehi vā khajjantaṃ varṣeṇa ovarṣayantam § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ... vātātapena opūriyaṃtāṃ prāṇakehi khajjantāṃ § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ... vātātapena opūriyantā{ṃ} prāṇakehi khajjantā{ṃ} § 13.2.12A7. adrākṣīd ... dvārā dvīpikāhi khajjantāṃ (Hs. °nto) § 13.2.12A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcāṃ pīṭhāṃ ... varṣeṇa ’varṣiyantāṃ prāṇakehi khajjantāṃ (≒ § 15.2.13B7, § 16.2.14A6, § 17.2.14B6) § 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ... dvā<rā> dvīpikāhi khajjantā § 13.3.12B1. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantā{ṃ} prāṇakehi khajjantā? (= § 16.3.14A7) § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... prāṇakehi khajjanti (= § 16.9.14B4) § 14.4.13A4. mañcā bhittiyo mocetvā pratipādakā dātavyā, yathā prāṇakehi dīpikāhi vā na khajjeyā § 17.12.15A7. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... prāṇakehi khajja<ṃ>ti, yo yeva paśyati, tena yyeva cchinnagaṇṭhikā kariyāṇa pratipādakehi sthāpayitavyā § 22.7.21A3. nâpi kṣamati sā cakkalī adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggikā vā paluggikā vā prāṇakehi vā khajjanti (p. präs., Nom. sg. fem.) 214  § 43.7.38A6. yathā na khajjeya (Opt. 3. pl.!) § 57.5.47B3. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “anekāyo upānahikāyo mūṣikena vā khajjeṃsu. ...” (2) “beschädigt werden” ☞ § 25.16, Anm. 1 § 25.16.23A3. nâpi kṣamati pātraṃ adhyupekṣituṃ phalakena vā khajjantaṃ khaṇḍaṃ vā cchidram vā khajja- (2) (Pā) “jucken, kratzen”; vgl. Skt. kharj (“das Jucken, Kratzen”) ☞ § 60.4, Anm. 1 ⇒ khajjanaka~ § 60.4.48B6. atha ca dāni bhikṣu prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā sukhākaṃ uvvaṭṭayitavyaṃ § 60.4.48B6. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo khajjati, khajjanako bhavati, prahāṇasyâmantriya gantavyaṃ § 60.5.48B7. koci se pradeśo khajjati, hastā ca se ’kalpiyā bhavanti, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni bhikṣusya koci pradeśo khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā parimardditavyaṃ § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni <na> pāreti vinodayituṃ, punaḥ punaḥ khajjati (Hs. khanati), ekatam’ aṃte gacchiya kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ khajjaka~ (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “feste Speise” ⇒ sarppi-khajjaka~, taila-khajjaka~ § 31.31.26B5. tato yadi nevāsikānāṃ vyañjanāni bhavanti, khajjakāni bhavanti, ... § 49.1.41B7. khajjakaṃ khādatha khajjaka-khaṇḍaka~#, khajja-khaṇḍaka~# “Portion fester Speise” § 52.1.44A7. teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā snehaṃ sthapenti, khajjakhaṇḍakāni thapenti § 52.1.44B1. vayaṃ yyeva tāva imeṣāṃ kṛtena snehaṃ thapemaḥ, khajjakakhaṇḍakāni sthapemaḥ ... § 52.4.44B3. śaktukā stokā bhavanti, śaktukā dātavyā, sneho dātavyo, khajjakhaṇḍakānaṃ saṃvibhāgo karttavyo khajjaka-caṃgerī~# “Korb für feste Speisen” ⇒ caṃgerī~ § 43.8.38A6. ete khajjakacaṃgerīyo vanaphalacaṅgerīyo haritakīcaṅgerīyo vā prasphoḍ- iya suprakṣālitāṃ kariya ekamante sthapetavyāḥ khajja-khaṇḍaka~ ⇒ khajjaka-khaṇḍaka~ khajjanaka~# “die Krätze habend” ⇒ khajja- (2) § 60.4.48B6. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo khajjati, khajjanako bhavati, prahāṇasyâmantriya gantavyaṃ § 60.5.48B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ khajjanako (Hs. sajj°) bhavati, puno puno kaṇḍūyati, ... khaṭaka~ (BHS) “Faustschlag” § 41.5.34A2. yatra yeva ayaṃ śramaṇako iryāpathaṃ vikopayiṣyati, tatraỿva se (Hs. śe) khaṭakaṃ dāsyāmi khaṭakhaṭāpaya-# “klopfen” (Onomatopoeticum); vgl. Skt. khaṭakhaṭāyate (“klopfen, knistern”) ☞ § 22.4, Anm. 4 ⇒ khala khala § 22.4.21A2. atha khalu khaṭakhaṭāpayitavyā (od. °vyaṃ; Hs. °vyo) kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā tato paścāc cakkalī utkṣipitavyā khaḍā~# “Höhle, Grube, (Abort-)Grube”; vgl. Pkt. khaḍḍā, BHS. khadā ☞ § 18.4, Anm. 2 ⇒ khannā § 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) mallakatalā khaḍā khaṇitavyā prapātaniśritā vā khaṇa- (Pā) “graben”; < Skt. khanati ⇒ √khan § 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) mallakatalā khaḍā khaṇitavyā prapātaniśritā vā khaṇuikā für khaṇḍikā : § 41.26.35B2 khaṇḍa~ (1) “angebrochen; zerbrochen” § 25.16.23A3. nâpi kṣamati pātraṃ adhyupekṣituṃ phalakena vā khajjantaṃ khaṇḍaṃ vā cchidram vā (2) “Stück, Teil” ⇒ asthi-khaṇḍa~, cela-khaṇḍa~, potta-khaṇḍa~, leṅkaṭa-khaṇḍa~, iṣṭa- khaṇḍa~ § 17.7.15A2. mitakaṃ dātavyaṃ “iman tava khaṇḍaṃ (‘Das ist dein Teil.’), imaṃ tava 215  khaṇḍan.” ti khaṇḍaka~ ⇒ khaṇḍa~, khajjaka-khaṇḍaka~, khajja-khaṇḍaka~, leṅkaṭa-khaṇḍaka~ khaṇḍa-phuṭṭa~# “Spalten und Risse”; vgl. v. Hinüber 1969: 128 = 2009: 27 § 16.8.14B3. vihārakāṇāṃ kālena kālaṃ khaṇḍaphuṭṭaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyaṃ khaṇḍikā~ “klein”# (?) ☞ § 41.26, Anm. 1 § 41.26.35B2. atha dāni khaṇḍikā (Hs. khaṇuikā) pādadhovanikā bhavati khatto ⇒ tri-kkhatto √khan ⇒ ni-khana-, ni-khane-, khaṇa-, khāniya~ § 19.4.17B6. mallatalakā khannā{ṃ} khanitavyā, madhye cchidrakaṃ karttavyaṃ § 23.4.1.21A7. catvāri pratipādakā karttavyā, mā bhūmī khanīya{ṃ}ti (3. pers. sg. Passiv; vgl. BHSG § 37.7) khanati für khajjati : § 60.7.49A1 khannā~# “Grube”; vgl. CDIAL 3874. khānya; Pkt. khaṇṇa “Grube”; Bengalī khānā “Grube, Teich, Schlucht” ⇒ khaḍā~ § 19.4.17B6. mallatalakā khannā{ṃ} khanitavyā, madhye cchidrakaṃ karttavyaṃ khaṃbha-kṛta~# “die Arme in die Hüften stemmend”; vgl. BHS. skambhā-kṛta, Pā. khambha-kata ☞ § 27.6, Anm. 1 § 27.6.23B7. na kṣamati ... upānahārūḍhena vā tiṣṭhituṃ khaṃbhakṛtena vā oguṇṭhita- śīrṣeṇa vā o{vā}hitahastena vā kharakaca kharakaca “laut” (Onomatopoeticum für das Geräusch des Kratzens) § 60.1.48B5. te ... śarkarāyaṃ pi śalākāyaṃ pi aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti (Hs. ṃti) kaṇḍūyanti § 60.3.48B5. na kṣamati ... śarkarāye vā <śalākāye vā> aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.5.48B6. nâpi kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa saṃkalikāya vā śarkkarakāya vā “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.6.49A1. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakāṇāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ khala- (< √skhal) ⇒ uk-khala-, pra-khala- khala khala # “laut” (Onomatopoeticum für den Klang des Hustens); vgl. Skt. khalakhalāyate, khaṭakhaṭāyate, Pā. khaṭakhaṭa-sadda ☞ § 58.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ khaṭakhaṭāpaya-, khulu khulu, kha kha kha § 58.1.48A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā muktehi pārśvehi “khala khala” tti kāsanti, yogācārāṃ bhikṣuṃ śabdena vyābahanti khalu ⇒ atha khalu, khu § 2.1.2B1. ko khalu nâgacchati? (= § 5.3.6A7) § 3.5.3B2. kiṃ khalv adya pakṣasya pratipadā dvitīyā ...? § 4.18.5B6. taṃ khu tasya svakaṃ bhavati na khalu yo tatra dahyati (vs) § 18.53.17B3. mā khalu te amanāpaṃ bhaviṣyati § 19.6.17B7. so jalpati “mā khalu me āyuṣman, omutrayasi” tti § 19.42.19A4. imaṃ khalu buddhaprajñaptaṃ bhaiṣajyaṃ. piba yadi jīvitukāmo ’si § 41.1.33B3. udake pi khalu mātrā § 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā § 41.10.34A6. labhyā khalu ito pānīyaṃ pātuṃ § 49.1.41B6. ahaṃ khalu te pityako bhavāmi (≒ § 49.2.42A5) § 49.1.42A3. āyuṣman, snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo, pilipilāpanti oṣṭhā, suṣṭhu khalu nirddhāpīyati § 49.2.42A5. mā khalu kasyaci ācikṣiṣyasi § 50.4.43A6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mā khalu adarśanaṃ gamiṣyasi.” usw. khājja-# “(von kleinen Tieren) angefressen werden”; < Skt. khādyate ⇒ khajja-, √khād, khāya-, khāditaka~, khāyitaka~, khādaya-, khāde- § 15.3.14A1. mañcā ca pīṭhā ca ... varṣeṇa ovarṣayantā prāṇakehi khājjantā khāṇukā~# eine Art Gefäß aus Holz oder eine Art Korb? ☞ § 17.6, Anm. 1 216  § 17.6.15A1. anyehi khāṇukā viśālikā vā piṇḍakā vā paripūriya dātavyā § 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā durvvā vā kaṇḍahastā vā karkkaṭakā vā ... √khād ⇒ khajja-, khājja-, khāya-, khādaya-, khāde-, khāditaka~, khāyitaka~ § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) prāṇakehi khādyati, pakṣīhi ohayiyate § 13.15.12B6. mañcā bhittito mocetvā pratipādikā dātavyāḥ yathā prāṇakehi na khādyeyā § 18.27.16B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena varccakuṭīṃ praveṣṭuṃ § 19.10.18A2. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... ohitahastena vā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena upaveṣṭuṃ § 20.1.19A6. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ mama āmrapotakaṃ ... uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi § 20.2.19A7. āmrapotako ropito ... tvayā so āgacchiya uppāḍiya bhaṃjiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditaṃ § 20.3.19A7. evaṃ nāma tvaṃ puṣpopagataṃ vṛkṣaṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādantā ekānte niṣaṇṇā āsanti pravāta- gandhikena mukhena § 20.6.19B2. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti § 20.6.19B3. evam ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti (≒ § 20.7.19B4) § 20.7.19B3. evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādatha § 20.8.19B4. evaṃ ca dāni yūyaṃ apramāṇāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādatha § 20.8.19B4. tena hi pramāṇikaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ § 20.9.19B5. aparo dāni bhikṣu dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati § 20.9.19B5. tena dāni khādantena dantakāṣṭhaṃ tho<kā>vaśeṣaṃ kṛtaṃ § 20.10.19B6. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ sarvvaṃ niravaśeṣaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādatha § 20.11.19B6. tato bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya kuccakaṃ śastrakena cchinditavyaṃ § 20.11.19B7. aparaṃ divasaṃ evam eva khādiya (für khāditavyaṃ?). evaṃ tāva khādayitavyaṃ yāva dantakāṣṭhasya catvāri aṅgulāni avaśiṣṭāni § 20.11.19B7. so eṣo bhikṣuḥ niravaśeṣaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati vinayātikrama āsādayati § 20.12.19B7. dantakāṣṭhaṃ pi nāma khādantena na kṣamati stūpavigrahe vā saṃghavigrahe vā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ (Hs. °dintaṃ) § 20.12.20A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati ... , kiñ câpi saṃghavigrahe dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, anāpattiḥ § 20.13.20A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena kheṭaṃ diśodiśaṃ cchorayituṃ ... § 20.14.20A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ pi dāni khādantena nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām ... vā bhikṣūṇāṃ agrato dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 20.15.20A2~3. nâpi kṣamati cetiyaṃ vandantena oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ohitahastena vā cetiyābhigṛhe vā prāsāde vā khādituṃ § 20.15.20A3. ekāṃsīkṛtena ekānte khāditavyaṃ § 20.16.20A3. nâpi kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya madhyena pāṭiyāna jihvāṃ nilehituṃ kāmabhoginā yathā § 20.17.20A3. nâpi kṣamati vibhūṣaṇābhiprāyeṇa dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ. atha khalu durggandhaprahāṇārthaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditavyaṃ § 20.18.20A4. antamasato aṃgulidantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditavyaṃ § 20.18.20A4. sa eṣo bhikṣuḥ sarvveṇa sarvvaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādati, vinayāti- kramam āsādayati § 26.9.23B2. atha dāni ... bhikṣu naỿva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, na mukhaṃ dhovati, ... § 31.16.26A2. ihaỿva yūyaṃ jātā ihaỿva mariṣyatha. jātā te śṛgālā ye tumbhāṇaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti § 31.24.26A7. yūyaṃ jātā, <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti § 32.5.27B1. evaṃ praśvāsaṃ karentasya, dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantasya ... na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 43.9.38A7. yathā na <khā>dyeṃsu § 49.1.41B7. khajjakaṃ khādatha § 50.9.43B5. yadi tāva ākāṃkṣati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ yaṃ rucyati, taṃ khāditavyaṃ § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhavanti, tato śvetamayena yeva khādanti, bilvāni 217  khādanti, vātakopanāni phalāni khādanti, kalāyā satilapallavaṃ khādanti § 62.4.50A1. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktukān vā mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayitvā śvetamayena yeva khādituṃ § 62.4.50A1. nâpi kṣamati bilvāni vā madanaphalāni vātakopakāni phalāni khādituṃ kalāyaṃ {vā} satilapallavaṃ vā § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu<ṃ> mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ khādaya- (Skt), khāde- (Pā) “essen, kauen” ⇒ √khād § 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyā), ... § 50.8.43B4. prakṛty’ eva tāva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ, hastā nirmmādayitavyā ... § 50.9.43B5. cchandayitavyo vaktavyo “ūnakaṃ pūrehi. yaṃ te rucyati taṃ khādehi.” khāditaka~ (BHS[Mvu]) “angefressen”; < Skt. khādita + Suffix ka ⇒ khāyitaka~, √khād § 15.7.14A3. cīvaravaṃśo tāva pratyavekṣitavyo. anekāye prāṇakehi khāditako bhavati khānima~# “gegraben; mit einer Grube versehen” ☞ § 18.7, Anm. 4 ⇒ khāniya~ § 18.7.15B5. yadi tāva sā khānimā varccakuṭī bhavati, tato varccakumbhikā bāhire-d-eva (Hs. bāhirodivā) karttavyā § 18.17.16A4. yā khānimā varccakuṭī bhavati, nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā ... khāniya~# “gegraben” < Skt. khānya (> Pkt. khaṇṇa) ⇒ khānima~ § 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) yadi vā khāniyā udakāntikā bhavati, prathamaṃ kalpiya- kāreṇa ohayiyāpetavyā khāya- (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “essen; kauen”; < Skt. khādati ⇒ khāyitaka~, √khād, khajja-, khājja-, khāditaka~, khādaya-, khāde- § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā āgacchiya uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāyitaṃ khāyitaka~# “angefressen, gebissen”; < Pā. khāyita + Suffix ka; vgl. S. 560 in diesem Band ⇒ khāditaka~, khāya-, √khād § 15.7.14A3. yadi tāva prāṇakehi khāyitako bhavati bhagnako vā, ... § 18.53.17B2. eṣo hi bhikṣuḥ dīrghakena khāyitako bhavati, ... khu (BHS, AMg); < *kkhu < *khalu < Skt. khalu; vgl. Pā. kho; Steiner 1997: 193ff.; Esposito 2004: 43 ⇒ khalu § 3.1.3A7. ko khu nâgacchati? (= § 4.1.4A6) § 4.18.5B6. taṃ khu tasya svakaṃ bhavati na khalu yo tatra dahyati (vs) khura~ “Ferse” ⇒ khurākhuraṃ § 49.5.42A7. nâpi kṣamati khureṇa khuraṃ hanantena (“zu dicht auf den Fersen” ☞ § 49.5, Anm. 1) khurākhuraṃ# “dicht auf den Fersen” ☞ § 8.6, Anm. 4 ⇒ khura~ § 8.6.9A2. nâpi dāni khurākhuraṃ. atha khalu nâtyāsanne nâtidūre khulu khulu # “laut” (Onomatopoeticum für den Klang des Hustens) ☞ § 58.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ khala khala, kha kha kha § 58.3.48A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇam upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “khulu khulu” tti kāsituṃ kheṭa~ (BHS) masc., neut.# “Schleim” ⇒ uccāra-prasrāva-kheṭa-siṃghāṇaka~, pakka-kheṭa~ § 18.18.16A6. kheṭaṃ vā siṃhāṇakam vā varcco vā tahi nikṣiptaṃ bhavati, ... § 20.13.20A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena kheṭaṃ diśodiśaṃ cchorayituṃ § 20.13.20A1. kaṭāhake vā mallake vā koṭiyāṃ vā āviddhapuṭikāyām vā kheṭaṃ cchorayi- tavyaṃ § 24.3.22A1. evaṃ kheṭe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 24.13.22A7, Uddāna [III].25A6) § 24.3.22A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati ... bhittīyaṃ kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakam vā cchorayituṃ § 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā ... tato tahiṃ kheṭo (Hs. °ṭe) karttavyo § 24.5.22A3. mallakaṃ vā koṭikam vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thapetavyā, tahiṃ kheṭo karttavyo § 24.8.22A5. caṃkramaśīrṣe vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thālikā vā kuṭaṃ mallakaṃ vā thape- tavyaṃ. tahiṃ kheṭo cchorayitavyo § 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya kheṭa bādhati, upānahapuṭe kṛtvā bhūmiye marditavyaṃ § 24.9.22A5. kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā utthitvā ekānte kṛtvā punaḥ upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 24.10.22A6. upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā mūle kheṭaṃ vyābahati, ekānte karttavyaṃ 218  § 24.11.22A6. etasya dāni bhikṣusya gocaraṃ praviśantasya adhvānamārggagatasya vā kheṭo (Hs. °eṭe) āgacchati, cchoriya pādena marditavyo § 24.11.22A6. atha dāni kṣudro kheṭo (Hs. °eṭe), upāṃsulā ca bhūmī bhavati, cchorantako yyeva paryādānaṃ gacchati. kiṃ câpi na marddati, anāpattiḥ § 24.12.22A7. stūpābhigṛhe vā <paśyati?> kheṭaṃ cchoritakaṃ ... § 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa aprayataṃ gṛhṇituṃ, uccāro vā prasrāvo vā kheṭaṃ vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā ... grahetuṃ § 59.4.48B1. saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvayitavyaṃ, yathā anantarikasya na vyābaheyyā kheṭena vā siṃghāṇakena vā § 59.5.48B2. saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvitavyaṃ, yathā ānantarikasya na vyābaheyyā kheṭen<a v>ā siṃhāṇakena vā kheṭa-kaṭāha~# “Spucknapf” ⇒ kheṭa-kaṭāhaka~ § 10.5.10A5. kheṭakaṭāhaṃ niṣkāśayitavyaṃ yāvat pādodakaṃ dāpayitavyaṃ § 24.3.22A2. atha khalu kheṭakaṭāhaṃ karttavyaṃ. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya vālikāye vā pāṣāṇasya vā patthaliddrakānāṃ vā pūrayitavyaṃ. tato tahiṃ kheṭo karttavyo § 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇâprasannaṃ gṛhṇituṃ kheṭakaṭāham vā uccārakaṭāhakam vā prasrāvakumbhakaṃ vā kheṭa-kaṭāhaka~ (Mvy 9440) “Spucknapf” ☞ § 8.5, Anm. 2 ⇒ kheṭa-kaṭāha~ § 8.5.9A1. kheṭakaṭāhako (Hs. khekaṭahako) nikkālayitavyo § 8.12.9B2. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, prasrāvakumbham upanāmayitavyaṃ § 10.5.10A6. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ praveśayitavyaṃ, prasrāvakumbhikā praveśayitavyā § 24.4.22A2. nâpi kṣamati kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ, mā saprāṇako bhaveya § 24.5.22A3. atha dāni kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ <na> bhavati, mallakaṃ vā koṭikam vā āviddha- puṭikā vā thapetavyā, tahiṃ kheṭo karttavyo kheṭa-siṃghāṇaka~# “Schleim und Rotz” ⇒ uccāra-prasrāva-kheṭa-siṃghāṇaka~, siṃhāṇaka~, siṃghāṇaka~ § 19.16.18A6. na dāni tahi kṣamati uccāro vā kheṭasiṃghāṇako vā prakṣipituṃ kho für ko : § 62.2.49B6 ☞ § 62.2(Text), Anm. 10 G g/k ⇒ k/g g/m: § 18.25.16B3. mantavyaṃ für gan° § 31.29.26B3. āmatā für āgatā g/l: § 18.41.17A4. nigamaṃca für nīlamaṃcaṃ g/ś: § 18.43.17A5. uggaṃkito für uśśaṃkito Gaṅgā~ § 26.1. he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu Gaṅgā ayaṃ Sarayū Ajiravatī Mahī Mahāmahī tti § 26.8.23B1. “he he he Gaṅgā ayaṃ sarvvaṃ” yāva “Mahī Candrabhāgā ayaṃ.” Gaṃgā-pānīya~# “Gangeswasser” § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Campāyāṃ Gaṃgāpānīya (Nom. neut. sg.) gaccha# Onomatopoeticum für den Laut der Blähung? oder “Geh!” ☞ § 62.2, Anm. 6 § 62.2.49B6. eko tāva pūtivātakarmmaṃ karoti. aparo “gaccha” tti. aparo “ḍharaḍha<ra>” tti gaccha- ⇒ √gam -gaḍena (kāṣṭha-gaḍena) für (kāṣṭha-)khaṃḍena? : § 60.5.48B7 gaṇa~ § 40.2.32B4. āgantukānāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ gaṇo āgato gaṇa für gaṇakā: § 20.6.19B2 gaṇaka~ “Buchhalter” § 20.6.19B2. yathā kumārakā vā dharmmiṣṭhā vā akṣadarśā vā gaṇa<kā> vā mahāmātrā 219  vā evam ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti § 20.7.19B4. yathā kumārakā vā dharmmiṣṭhā vā gaṇakā vā rājaputrā vā ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti gaṇaya- § 1.11.2A3. yaṃ kālaṃ śalākā vāritā bhavanti, bhikṣū gaṇitā bhavanti, sāmagrī ārocitā bhavati, ... (≒ § 2.9.3A1, § 3.10.4A1) gaṇṭhi~ (Pā) “Knoten; das Knüpfen, das Winden”; < Skt. granthi ☞ § 13.11, Anm. 1 ⇒ cchinna- gaṇṭhikā~ § 17.12.15A6. ete mañcā vā pīṭhā vā bhagnakā vā bhavanti, yo yaṃ paśyati, tena yyeva gaṇṭhī karttavyā gaṇṭhikā~ ⇒ cchinna-gaṇṭhikā~ gaṇṭhi-pāśa~#, gaṇṭhi-pāśaka~# “Knopf und Schlinge; Häkchen und Schnur”; < Skt. granthi + pāśa(ka) ☞ § 31.7, Anm. 3 § 31.7.25B6. tehi dāni prāvariya gaṇṭhipāśakaṃ (Hs. °pāsakaṃ) obandhiya āmantriya praveṣṭavyaṃ § 47.5.40B7. cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā gaṇṭhipāśaṃ (Hs. °pārśvaṃ) ābandhitvā praviśitavyaṃ gaṇḍa~ “Beule” ⇒ utpāta-gaṇḍa-piṭaka~, kāṣṭha-ga<ṃ>ḍa~ § 30.10.25A5. dakṣiṇe pārśve gaṇḍaṃ vā piṭakaṃ vā bhavati, ... § 32.10.27B4. yadi kasyaci vraṇo bhavati gaṇḍo vā piṭako vā, na dāni sahasā uppīḍitavyaṃ -gaṇḍiyakā~ ⇒ cchinna-gaṇṭhikā~ ☞ § 16.9, Anm. 4 gaṇḍī~ (BHS, Pā) “Sematerion”; vgl. Hu-von Hinüber 1991; ead. 1994: 291, Anm. 4; von Hinüber 1992: 36 mit Anm. 49 § 4.7.4B5. raṇaraṇā gaṇḍi āhaṇiya vaktavyaṃ: “āyuṣman vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho ...” § 4.7.4B6. tato raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍī āhaṇiya <praviśitavyaṃ> § 5.7.6B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiyāṇaṃ ārocitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ ... § 5.7.6B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiyāṇaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 6.7.7B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiya ... pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ § 17.5.14B7. tato raṇaraṇāye gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiya sarvvasaṃghena sannipatitavyaṃ § 17.8.15A2. sarvvasaṃghasya gaṇḍim ākoṭayitvā ... § 25.1.22B1. yavāgūye gaṇḍī ākoṭitā § 39.1.30B6. tehi dāni grāmāntikehi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ sthitāḥ § 39.1.30B6. āyuṣmaṃ deśakālo, āhanatha gaṇḍiṃ § 39.1.30B7. āhatā pi ’yaṃ gaṇḍī § 39.1.30B7. evaṃ yūyaṃ atyanukālye gaṇḍīṃ āhaniya bhuñjatha § 39.2.31A1. tathā tumhehiṃ pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍi āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjatha § 39.3.31A1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjituṃ § 39.5.31A3. pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ ... bhuñjituṃ § 39.8.31A4. grāmāntikehi gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjitavyaṃ § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 39.24.32A2. dānapatir āgato bhavati, āha “bhante, āhaṇatha gaṇḍiṃ. anukālyo ’va tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 39.13.31B1. gaṇḍī tāva vistareṇa āhaniyāṇaṃ, cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo (= § 39.25. 32A3) § 39.16.31B4. gaṇḍī<yaṃ> āhatāyaṃ vandiya cetiyaṃ <bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ> § 39.18.31B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjituṃ § 39.21.32A1. deśakāle gaṇḍiṃ āhaniya cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjitavyaṃ § 42.12.36B5. gaṇḍī ākoṭetavyā § 42.12.36B5. gaṇḍī ākoṭenti (? Hs. ākoṭetavyo) § 42.12.36B6. na dāni ... gaṇḍī ākoṭetavyā § 42.12.36B6. gaṇḍi ākoṭetvā agnir dātavyo § 42.13.36B6. jentākasya gaṇḍī ākoṭitā {je} jānitavyaṃ ... § 42.26.37B3. gaṇḍī āhanitavyā 220  usw. gata~ ⇒ agra-bhājana-gata~, adhvāna-mārgga-gata~, grāma-mūla-gata~, dhyānāntara-gata~, middhāntara-gata~, anurāgatam, ehi-svāgata~, svāgatam § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā ... na parikathāṃ karoti, utthiya gato § 4.2.4A7. so dāṇi paścād āgacchiyāṇa bhuṃjiyāṇa ... utthihi gato § 1.2.1B3. navakā bhikṣū pṛcchanti: “āyuṣmānn, āgato saṃghasthaviro?” bhikṣū āhaṃsu: “āgato ca gato ca” (≒ § 4.2.4A7) § 1.7.1B5. yadi dāni na gato saṃgho bhavati saṃghasthavireṇa yahiṃ bhaviṣyati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ ... § 24.7.22A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ divāvihāraṃ gato caṃkramati, ... § 31.1.25B1. te dāni vivaditā, bhagavato mūlaṃ gatāḥ (= § 32.2.27A6, § 39.2.31A1, § 50.2.43A5) § 31.35.27A2. nâpi kṣamati tehi nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho prayāto. gacchantu āyuṣmanto. gataṃ mārggasya śreyo (☞ § 31.35, Anm. 3)” § 32.1.27A4. so dāni apratisaṃmodiya gato § 41.13.34B2. so śreṣṭhi aparehiṃ jñātiśāle nimantritako gato varṣârātrikaṃ § 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako śreṣṭhinā saparivāreṇa gatena ... rakṣamāṇo āsati § 50.1.43A2. vihārakasya dvāramūle piṇḍapātakaṃ thapiya gato usw. gatāgatasya# “übereilt; überstürzt” ☞ § 4.5, Anm. 6; § 4.10, Anm. 2 § 4.5.4B2. eṣo dāni koci saṃghaṃ bhaktena śuvetanāya nimantreti, na dāni saṃgha- sthavireṇa gatāgatasya adhivāsayitavyaṃ § 4.10.5A2. nâpi dāni kṣamati gatāgatasya upaviśituṃ § 5.9.6B6. tato na kṣamati gatāgatasya upaviśituṃ § 6.5.7B2. eṣo dāni koci saṃghaṃ bhaktena nimantreti, ... nâpi kṣamati gatāgatasya adhivāsituṃ § 6.9.7B7. tato nâpi kṣamati praviṣṭehi gatāgatasya upaviśituṃ § 15.5.14A2. nâpi kṣamati gatāgatasya vihārake bhaṇḍaṃ praveśituṃ § 18.40.17A2. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇī-upāśraye gatāgatasya varccakuṭiṃ praviśituṃ § 34.3.28B3. kṣatriyaparṣāye kiñci kāryaṃ bhavati, na kṣamati gatāgatasya upasaṃkram- ituṃ § 35.3.29A3. nâyaṃ kṣamati gatāgatasya brāhmaṇaparṣām upasaṃkramituṃ § 36.3.29B2. gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kiñcit kāryam bhavati, na kṣamati gatāgatasya allīyituṃ § 37.3.30A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gatāgatasya tīrthikaparṣā upasaṃkramituṃ. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva tāva vṛddhatarakā pratisaritavyā § 38.2.30A5. nâyaṃ kṣamati gatāgatasya vṛddhāntam ukkasituṃ. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva tāva upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā āmantrayitavyo gatāgatāṃ# (gata-āg°) de- “hin- und hergehen”; vgl. Skt. gatāgata (“das Gehen und Kommen”) ☞ § 23.4.4, Anm. 2 ⇒ de- § 23.4.4.21B1. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi ṣaṭpañca gatā{ṃ}gatāṃ deti, anāpattiḥ gati~ “das Weggehen” ⇒ svar-ggati~ § 1.2.1B3. te pi navakā bhikṣū āhaṃsu “naỿva saṃghasthavirasya āgatiḥ prajñāyate na gatiḥ” § 1.3.1B4. naỿva saṃghasthavirasyâgatir nna gatiḥ prajñāyate (≒ § 4.3.4B1) § 4.2.4A7. naỿva saṃghasthavirasya āgatir ggatiḥ prajñāyati gandha~ § 18.36.17A1. āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, durlabho gandho (= § 19.34.18B7) § 18.46.17A6. nâpi dāni anuvātaṃ karttavyaṃ, mā sarvvasārthaṃ gandhena vyābaheyyā § 18.53.17B3. āyuṣman imasya bhaiṣajyasya gandho yādṛśo uccārasya § 19.17.18A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe ujjhituṃ, sarvvasaṃghasya mā gandhena vyābaheyyā § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacāriṃ gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ” § 20.5.19B2. ete bhikṣavo ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacārī gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ” 221  § 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, ... puṣpaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, gandho sajjayitavyo § 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti. cīvarakoṇenâpi nirvvāpenti. yogācārā bhikṣū gandhena vyābahanti § 62.2.49B6. ānantarikānāṃ baddhamuṣṭikāṃ jighrāpenti, āha “jighrâyuṣman, aho mṛṣṭo gandho. aho śobhano gandho.” § 62.11.50A7. vātakarmma ... nâpi dāni kṣamati anuvātaṃ karttuṃ, mā gandhena vyābaheyyā § 62.12.50B1. yathā sārthaṃ gandhena na vyābaheyyā, vātapathaṃ mocayitvā karttavyaṃ gandha-kārṣī~# “Überzug aus Duftstoff” ⇒ gomaya-kārṣī~, taila-kārṣī~ § 18.31.16B6. tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā (Hs. °vyaṃ) § 18.35.17A1. antamasato taṃhi pṛthivīpradeśe gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 19.15.18A5. kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, ... tato tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 19.33.18B6. sarvvatra cetiyagṛhe gandhakārṣī vā tailakārṣī vā dātavyā § 19.33.18B7. antamasato tahiṃ pṛthivīpradeśe tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā gandhika~ ⇒ pravāta-gandhika~ gandhodaka (°dha-ud°) “Duftwasser” § 1.8.1B7. vibhavo bhavati, śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyāyo puṣpehi okiritavyāyo (= § 2.6.2B6; ≒ § 3.7.3B5) √gam ⇒ adhi-√gam, anu-√gam, ā-gata~, ā-√gam, ā-gama-, ā-gamaya-, ā-game-, gata~, nir-gata~, nir-√gam, praty-ud-gaccha-, sam-ā-gata~, sam-ud-ā-gata~ § 1.1.1B2. te dāni ojjhāyanti: “ ... "gacchāma. samagrasya saṃghasya pādāni vandiṣyāma. deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayiṣyāma" saṃghasthaviro nâgacchati” § 1.8.1B7. pratikṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ siñcāpayitavyaṃ sanmārjayitavyaṃ (≒ § 3.7.3B5) § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati paripṛcchitavyā “kim vasiṣyatha atha gamiṣyatha?” yadi tāvâhaṃsu “gacchāma” tato deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ ... (≒ § 2.9.3A2) § 1.11.2A4. vaktavyaṃ “gacchatha tāva bāhyato āmuhūrttaṃ āgametha ...” § 2.1.2B2. gacchāma samagrasya saṃghasya pādāṃ vandiṣyāmaḥ § 3.10.4A2. kim vasiṣyatha atha gacchatha? § 4.1.4A6. gacchāma samagraṃ bhikṣusaṃghaṃ pariviṣiṣyāmaḥ (≒ § 6.3.7A7; ≒ § 5.3. 6A7. gacchāmaḥ ...) § 4.6.4B3. prakṛty’ eva māsavāriko pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo “gaccha, jānāhi kiṃ sajjiyatî”ti § 4.7.4B4. tena gacchiya pṛcchitavyaṃ “koci imaṃhi ... upāsako?” § 6.7.7B4. tena gacchiyāṇa tahiṃ gṛhaṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ § 4.8.4B7. kahiñci ca gantukāmo bhavati, ... § 5.6.6B3. gaccha, jānāhi ... jānāhi kiṃ sidhyati, kiṃ pacyati § 8.10.9A6. divāvihāraṃ gacchantasya pīṭhikā nayitavyā niṣīdanaṃ nayitavyaṃ ... § 11.13.11A3. sāṃghikaṃ śayanāsanaṃ ... uparito bhuṃjitavyaṃ, yathā nāśaṃ na gacche § 14.13.13B2. yathā sarvva pratisaṃskāraṃ gacche (☞ § 14.13, Anm. 1) tathā dātavyaṃ § 15.10.14A4. yadi sarvvarātro gacchati (“vergeht”) pratisaṃskārayantasya, ... § 18.4.15B3. ullā va<r>ccagharaṃ dhovanti (p. präs) gacchati § 18.29.16B5. nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā ... ūrūyo ’hayaṃtena gacchituṃ § 18.33.16B6. na kṣamati <yathā> uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā ūrūyo ohayantena gantuṃ § 18.49.17A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pratikṛty’ eva nivāsanaṃ oguhiya gacchituṃ § 18.51.17B1. nāvāye gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, yadi varcakuṭī bhavati, ... (≒ § 19.41.19A3) § 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ ... praśvāsena uppīḍito praśvāsakuṭīṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ ... § 19.20.18B1. tato pi na kṣamati so tahiṃ cchorayituṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣintasya (für varṣante?) stūpavigrahaṃ vā saṃghavigrahaṃ vā gacchati. atha khalu tahiṃ cchorayitavyaṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣante na anyena gacchati § 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo, yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso gaccheyā 222 § 22.1.20B7. tasya dāni tena nivaraṇena sarvvarātriṃ cittaṃ na samādhānaṃ gacchati (≒ § 27.1.23B4, § 27.2.23B5, § 28.1.24A1; ≒ § 28.2.24A2) § 22.4.21A1. tato vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ cakkalī utkṣipitavyā § 22.6.21A2. prahāṇato yaṃ kālaṃ utthito bhavati, vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, ... § 24.11.22A6. cchorantako yyeva paryādānaṃ gacchati (☞ § 24.11, Anm. 2) § 31.4.25B4. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ, mā dāni adarśanena parijāne “hṛtaṃ, hṛtaṃ me pātracīvaram” iti gacchantasya karttavyaṃ § 31.5.25B5. atha dāni corā saprasādā bhavanti, vṛddhehi agrato gantavyaṃ, yathā paśyitvā prasādena avivarjitā gaccheṃsu § 31.6.25B5. atha khalu ujjukena mā<r>gakena gantavyaṃ § 31.7.25B5. taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā “agrato gacchatha. ...” § 31.13.25B7. na dāni labhyā anyena gantuṃ. racchā cchiddrakā bhavati, anāpattiḥ § 31.35.27A2. nâpi kṣamati tehi nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho prayāto. gacchantu āyuṣmanto. gataṃ mārggasya śreyo.” § 31.37.27A3. teṣāṃ gacchamānānāṃ (Hs. °manonāṃ) pathyadanena vaikalpaṃ karttavyaṃ § 32.6.27B2. pustakaṃ vācantasya, pustakaṃ likhantasya, varccakuṭīṃ gacchantasya, ... § 32.7.27B3. <na kṣamati> ... cīvaraṃ prāvarantasya, tvaritaṃ vā gacchantasya § 32.12.27B6. atha dāni gantukāmo bhavati, āha “anyatra gamiṣyan” ti, vaktavyaṃ “gacchāhi” tti § 34.2.28B2. yūyaṃ dāni gacchiya teṣāṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā § 35.2.29A1. yūyaṃ dāni teṣāṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā § 37.2.30A1. yūyaṃ dāṇi gacchiyāṇa teṣāṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā § 37.1.29B7. NandanOpanandanā teṣāṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ madhye niṣaṇṇāḥ § 40.4.32B5. nâyaṃ kṣamati ... anyena gantuṃ § 41.2.33B5. yūyaṃ pādadhovanikāyāṃ gacchiya § 41.17.34B7. grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema (= § 41.18.35A1) § 41.31.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi utthiya gantavyaṃ § 41.31.35B7. dhūlī parivarjantena gantavyaṃ § 42.2.36A2. te ... pratikṛty’ eva gacchiya § 42.13.36B6. ye tahiṃ parṣāye tehi (Hs. tahiṃ) gantavyaṃ § 42.13.36B7. ye tasmiṃ pariveṇikā saṃti tehi gantavyaṃ § 42.15.37A1. na ... laṃghayantena gantavyaṃ § 42.15.37A1. saṃprajānanena gantavyaṃ § 42.23.37B1. yathāsthāne sthāpayitvā gantavyaṃ § 42.24.37B1. yathā bhavati tathā gantavyaṃ § 42.31.37B7. {ā}gacchantu āyuṣmanto § 47.1.40B3. sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittiyo ghasantā gacchanti § 47.1.40B3. vayaṃ ... talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ (= § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A4, § 48.2. 41A6) § 47.2.40B4. cīvarakāni kaḍḍhantā gacchatha § 49.1.42A1. āyuṣman, gaccha tvaṃ § 49.5.42A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā paścācchramaṇo gacchati § 49.5.42A7. nâpi kṣamati tena dūraṃ pṛṣṭhato gantuṃ § 49.5.42A7. nâtyātidūraṃ nâtyāsannaṃ gantavyaṃ § 49.5.42B1. nâpi kṣamati ghoḍena yathā oḍḍitāye grīvāye gantuṃ § 49.5.42B1. yugamātraṃ nidhyāyantena gantavyaṃ § 49.7.42B4. suvihita, gantavyaṃ § 49.7.42B6. evaṃ pi kariya gantavyaṃ § 50.4.43A7. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mā khalu adarśanaṃ gamiṣyasi.” § 50.7.43B3. tena gacchantena kālo nidhyāyitavyo § 50.7.43B3. gacchitvā tasya upanāmetavyaṃ § 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā. gomayapiṇḍikā vā paṭipaṭikāye sthapetavyā yathânupūrvveṇa gaccheya 223  § 57.5.47B3. upānahikāyo ... bhikṣū vā jānanto vā ajānanto vā gṛhītvā gaccheya § 59.7.48B4. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, ekama<ṃ>te gacchiya kṣīvitavyaṃ § 60.7.49A1. punaḥ punaḥ khajjati, ekatam’ aṃte gacchiya kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāṃ gacchiya caturddiśaṃ niṣīdanti § 62.11.50A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya vātakarmma āgacchati, ekamantaṃ gacchiya karttavyaṃ § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya sārthena sārddhaṃ gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, ... usw. gamika~ (BHS, Pā) “Abreisender” § 4.5.4B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti. āgantuko gamiko gṛhastho pravrajito strī puruṣo dārako dārikā § 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ ... etaṃ bhaktaṃ ... āgantukasya gamikasya gṛhasthasya pravrajitasyêti (= § 5.12.7A3, § 6.12.8A3) § 4.19.6A1. atha dāni gamikaṃ (lies: gamikasya) bhaktaṃ bhavati, nâyaṃ dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā § 5.5.6B2. bhikṣu bhikṣuṇī upāsako ’pāsikā āgantuko gamiko § 6.5.7B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti: ... gṛhastho pravrajito vāṇijako sārthavāho āgantuko gamiko? gard(d)abha~ “Esel” § 18.2.15B1. yathā uṣṭrā vā goṇā vā garddabhā vā cchagalakā vā evam ime śramaṇā prakīrṇṇakasya uśvāsaṃ karenti § 19.2.17B4. yathā uṣṭrā vā goṇā vā gardabhā vā cchagalakā vā eva<m i>me śramaṇakā prakīrṇṇakaṃ praśvāsaṃ karonti § 18.29.16B5. nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā garddabhena vā ūrūyo ’hayaṃtena gacchituṃ § 19.13.18A4. na kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā gardabhena vā ūrūyo omūtriyantena gantuṃ garbha-rūpa~ “Kleinkind” § 4.10.5A2. anekāyo tatra garbharūpāṇi sopāpitakāni (Hs. sopāyita°) bhaveṃsuḥ § 6.9.7B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi garbharūpā sovāpitāni bhaveṃsu garbhāni für parvvāṇi : § 29.4.24B2 √gal ⇒ gālaya- gala~ § 18.5.15B4. tatra kaṇṭhavāriṇī karttavyā kakṣamātrī vā galamātrī vā -gava~ ⇒ Indra-gava~ gātra~ § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... sacet paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati anāttamano. <na> ca paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati citte āttamano abhiraddho gāthā~ (1) “Vers, Strophe” § 1.6.1B5. catvāri pārājikā gāthāś ca śiṣṭakam (Hs. siṣṭakam) abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā § 1.12.2A6. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikāṃ dharmmāṃ uddiśiyānaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa- śrutikāye gāthāye (Acc. pl. fem.; vgl. BHSG § 9.92) ca, ... § 2.10.3A3. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikā uddiśitavyaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāyo ca § 7.4.8B2. triṃśato pi grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa<śruti>kāyo gāthāyo ca. ... śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca. ... śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaṃśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca (≒ § 9.4. 10A1~2) § 41.19.35A2. devatā gāthāṃ (Acc. pl.) bhāṣate (2) Gāthā (SWTF, Pā) § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ geyaṃ vyākaraṇaṃ gāthā ... gālaya- “verflüssigen” 224  § 17.10.15A5. kālena kālaṃ anyehi oṣā gālayitavyā (Hs. °vyo) guḍa-pānīya~# “Zuckerwasser” § 31.7.25B6. saṃghasya phāsuvihāraṃ upadahatha pādatailena guḍapānīyena pratiśrayeṇa purebhaktikena § 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya praveṣṭavyaṃ guḍuguḍuka~# eine Art Bettzeug oder Sitzkissen? § 14.7.13A6. yaṃ sārāsāraṃ śayyāsanaṃ amilā vā astaraṇikā vā kocakā vā {makucakā} guḍuguḍukā vā makucakā vā te grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ nāpayitavyāḥ guṇa~ (1) ⇒ ācāra-guṇa-sampanna~ § 37.5.30A4. yasya praśaṃsā tam anupraśaṃśe teṣāṃ guṇaṃ eva vade na doṣan (vs) guṇa~ (2) ⇒ du-guṇaṃ, dvi-guṇaṃ guṇa-vat~ § 8.11.9B1. atha dāni bhadrako bhavati guṇavāṃ śikṣākāmo, vaktavyaṃ “karohi” § 8.13.9B3. atha dāni bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo, vaktavyo “gṛhṇa” § 38.4.30A6. atha dāni so bhavati bhadrako guṇavān anuddhato śikṣākāmo anukūlo anunnaḍo acapalo, pṛcchitavyo “kiṃ kāryaṃ?” § 38.7.30B2. so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato anunnaḍo ... guṇika~ ⇒ dvi-guṇika~ guṇita~ ⇒ dvi-guṇita~ √guṇṭh ⇒ oguṇṭhita-śīrṣa~ √gup ⇒ gupta~, gopaya-, pra-gopaya- gupta~ ⇒ gopayati § 41.13.34B2. tasya gṛha<ṃ> guptañ ca surakṣitañ ca na pārenti otāraṃ vindanāya gupti~ ⇒ rakṣāvaraṇa-gupti~ § 12.14.12A2. {grīṣme śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ...} § 12.17.12A4. hemante śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ guru-kṛta~ “hoch geachtet” § 62.1.49B1. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisam- bhāvayitvā ... satkṛto gurukṛto mānitaḥ pūjitaḥ apacāyito gulikā~ ⇒ pāṭalā-gulikā~, campaka-gulikā~ √guh ⇒ o-guha- √gṛ ⇒ prati-jāgara- gṛha~ ⇒ ghara~, utsṛṣṭa-gṛha~, cetiya-gṛha~, nisṛṣṭa-gṛha~, agāra~, āgāra~ § 4.5.4B3. katamaṃ deśaṃ gṛhaṃ? ... kutomukhaṃ gṛhasya dvāraṃ? § 5.5.6B2. katamasmin deśe gṛhaṃ? ... kutomukhaṃ gṛhasya dvāraṃ? § 6.5.7B2. katame deśe gṛhaṃ? kutomukhaṃ? katamāye rathyāye? kutomukhaṃ gṛhasya dvāraṃ? § 6.7.7B4. tena gacchiyāṇa tahiṃ gṛhaṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ § 41.13.34B2. tasya dāni śreṣṭhikasya kulaputrakā gṛhaṃ ocaranti § 41.13.34B2. tasya gṛha<ṃ> guptañ ca surakṣitañ ca na pārenti otāraṃ vindanāya § 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako ... gṛhasya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsati § 41.14.34B3. te dāni taṃ gṛhaṃ okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviṣṭā § 41.14.34B4. etaṃ gṛhaṃ śūnyakaṃ § 41.14.34B4. gṛhasya madhyamāgāre mahāntaṃ kūṭaṃ kṛtaṃ § 41.15.34B4. so gṛhasya madhyāgāre upaviṣṭaḥ § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, ... gṛhapati~ ⇒ brāhmaṇa-gṛhapati~ gṛhapatika~ (BHS[Mvu, Śikṣ]) “Hausherr” § 36.6.29B4. nâpi dāni kṣamati kutsitum vā pansitum vā “gṛhapatikā nāma yūyaṃ tulākūṭamānakūṭehi divasaṃ lokaṃ muṣaṃtā āsatha.” gṛhapati-parṣā~# “Versammlung von Hausherren”; vgl. SWTF. gṛhapati-pariṣad, °ti-parṣad, Pā. gahapati-parisā; BHS. parṣā ⇒ ārya-parṣā~, kṣatriya-parṣā~, tīrthika-parṣā~, brāhmaṇa- parṣā~, bhikṣu-parṣā~ § 36.1.29A7. gṛhapatiparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 36.2.29B1) 225  § 36.3.29B2. evaṃ gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= § 36.8.29B6, Uddāna [IV].30B5) § 36.3.29B2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kiñcit kāryam bhavati, ... § 36.3.29B3. dīrghāyu, asti <me> kiñci gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ, allīyāma mā āllīyāmo? § 36.4.29B3. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramituṃ § 36.4.29B4. ekatam’ ante cchatropānahāṃ nikṣipiya gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā gṛhapati-mahattaraka~# “älterer Hausherr; der würdigste Hausherr” ⇒ brāhmaṇa-mahattaraka~ § 36.3.29B2. ye tatra gṛhapatimahattarakāḥ bhavanti, te prakṛty’ eva {te} pratisaritavyā gṛha-praveśaka~# “Einzug in ein Haus” ⇒ ghara-praveśaka~, ghara-praveśanika~, ghara- praveśika~ § 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ kimālambanaṃ <etaṃ> bhaktaṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā vevāhikam vā gṛhapraveśakam vā ... gṛha-stha~ § 4.5.4B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti. āgantuko gamiko gṛhastho pravrajito strī puruṣo dārako dārikā § 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ ... etaṃ bhaktaṃ ... āgantukasya gamikasya gṛhasthasya pravrajitasyêti (= § 5.12.7A3, § 6.12.8A3) § 6.5.7B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti: ... gṛhastho pravrajito vāṇijako sārthavāho āgantuko gamiko? gṛhi-ālapa~ für °-ālāpa~? : § 33.6.28A2, § 33.7.28A2 gṛh-ālāpa~# “Anrede nach Art der Laien”; < Skt. gṛhin + ālāpa; vgl. Pā. gih- (< Skt. gṛhin) als Vorderglied im Kompositum § 33.1.27B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti § 33.2.27B7. yūyaṃ gṛhī-ālāpena (Hs. °ālop°) ālāpayatha “amba, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, {a}haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti § 33.3.27B7~28A1. evaṃ yūyaṃ gṛhi-ālāpena ālapetha. tena hi na kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena ālapituṃ § 33.6.28A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena (Hs °ālapena) ālapituṃ “haṃgho he he” tti § 33.7.28A2. tenâpi na kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena (Hs. °ālapena) vyāharttuṃ “hā kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti § 33.14.28A6. te ete gṛhi-ālāpena ālapanti vā pravyāharanti vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsādayaṃti *gṛhi-liṅga-parityāga~ “das Aufgeben der Kennzeichen eines Laien”; vgl. Pā. gihi-liṅga § 37.5.30A4. duṣkaraṃ gṛhiliṅgaparityāgo (Hs. °liṅgāpari°), duṣkaraṃ vastisaṃyamo, duṣkaram araṇyavāso gṛhī-ālāpa~ ⇒ gṛh-ālāpa~ gṛhītaka~ (BHS[Mvu, Mmk]) “befallen”; gṛhīta + Suffix ka ☞ § 13.2, Anm. 1 § 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ ullāya gṛhītakāṃ acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ ... (≒ § 17.2.14B5) § 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ullaggakā ollāye gṛhītakāḥ acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā ... § 13.7.12B2. ullāye gṛhītako bhavati, piṇḍaṃ śāṭiya mṛttikāye limpitavyo § 17.8.15A2. ete vihārakā ullāye gṛhītakā bhavanti apratisaṃskṛtā vā uppaṃsulā vā ... § 17.8.15A2. anyehi tāvad yā bhitti ollāye gṛhītakāyo tāyo śāṭayitavyāyo § 23.1.21A4. adrākṣīd ... vihārāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ ullāye gṛhītakāṃ § 23.2.21A5. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā ollāye gṛhītakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā § 23.7.21B4. nâpi kṣamati vihārako adhyupekṣituṃ oddriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ollāye gṛhītako vā acokṣo vā § 23.8.21B6. ullāye gṛhītako bhavati, śāṭiyāṇaṃ liptopalipto ghaṣṭamaṣṭo karttavyo gṛhītvā ⇒ √grah gṛhṇa- (BHS; s. BHSG, S. 210b), gṛhṇā-; in der Handschrift ist häufig “gṛhn” anstelle von “gṛhṇ” geschrieben ⇒ √grah, grahe-, grāhaya-, grāhe-, pari-gṛhṇā, pari-gṛhīta~, pra-gṛhṇā-, su- gṛhīta~ § 1.10.2A2. śalākāṃ pi dāni gṛhṇantena na câpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā 226  upānahārūḍhena vā śalākāṃ gṛhṇituṃ § 1.10.2A2. atha khalu ekāṃsakṛtena hastān nirmmādiya oguṇṭhikāṃ apaniya upānahāṃ omuñciya śalākā{ṃ} gṛhṇitavyā § 4.11.5A3. dāyakadānapati jalpanti “paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha” tti ...(≒ § 5.10.6B7) § 4.11.5A4. cire hi kālo atikramati, paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 6.7.7B5. yāva sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāye pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ § 8.6.9A2. ātmano cīvarakaṃ gṛhṇiya pṛṣṭhato ’nugantavyaṃ § 8.10.9A7. uddeśaṃ gṛhṇiya ekamante svādhyāyatena āsitavyaṃ § 8.13.9B2. yadi vihāro prāpuṇati, āpṛcchitavyaṃ “amukaṃ vihāraṃ gṛhṇāmi.” § 8.13.9B3. vaktavyaṃ “mā gṛhṇa. mā saṃsarggadoṣo bhaviṣyatî”ti § 18.40.17A3. karakena vā dakānakena vā udakaṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 18.50.17A7. vāmena hastena aṅgajātaṃ gṛhṇiya draviḍena yathā udakasamīpaṃ gantuṃ § 19.42.19A3. purimapaścimakaṃ ca varjayitvā madhyamaṃ gṛhṇitavyo § 20.13.20A1. vāmena ca hastena kuccako gṛhṇitavyaḥ paścāt ekamantena cchorayitavyaḥ § 25.11.22B6~7. gṛhṇantena nâpi kṣamati ekahastena duve trayo vā pātrāṇi gṛhṇituṃ. atha khalu paramaṃ trayo pātrāṇi gṛhṇitavyāni. ekahastena dve gṛhṇitavyāḥ, apareṇa dāni ekaṃ § 25.13.23A1. nâpi kṣamati (... ☞ § 25.13, Anm. 2) “gṛhītaṃ na gṛhītan” ti, tato muñci- tavyaṃ § 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa aprayataṃ gṛhṇituṃ, uccāro vā prasrāvo vā ... anyam vā aprayat{t}aṃ grahetuṃ § 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ, mukhaṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 26.7.23B1. atha dāni upaviṣṭakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye dīyati, yathāvṛddhikāye gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 26.9.23B3. ānantaryasya pātraṃ dātavyaṃ, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, imaṃ mama yavāgūye pratyaṃśaṃ gṛhṇa.” § 31.4.25B3. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... nâpi dāni pātracīvaraṃ gṛhṇitvā adarśanena gantavyaṃ § 31.15.26A1. cetiyāṇaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi upānahā omuñcitvā kāṣṭhakena gṛhṇitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.23.26A6. yadi tāva jalpati “prāpuṇati” tti, vihārako gṛhṇitavyo, mañcapīṭhaṃ bisi caturasrako kuccaṃ bi<ṃ>bohanaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 31.26.26B1. nivāsiya prāvariya hastān nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 33.16.28A7. arthahetor nnāmaṃ gṛhṇāmi (☞ § 33.16, Anm. 2 zu nāmaṃ √grah). asuko me upādhyāyo. asuko me ācāryo § 40.10.33A3. pānīyaṃ gṛhṇantena gharttitavyaṃ ... § 40.13.33A6. apareṇa pānīyaghaṭikāṃ paṭicchantena cīvarāṃtarikāya vā patrāntarikāye vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 40.16.33B1. taṃ pi dāni gṛhṇiya ānīya kālena kālaṃ dātavyaṃ § 41.8.34A4. upānahāpocchananattakaṃ gṛhṇiya ... § 41.14.34B4. mārggiya mārggiya yaṃ labhatha taṃ gṛhṇatha § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... bhājanaṃ gṛhṇiya parimārjiya ... § 41.19.35A3. corehi gṛhīto saṃto mukto ācārakāraṇāt (vs) § 42.23.37B1. na kṣamati ātmano cīvarāṇi gṛhṇitvā parasya cīvarehi samākulīkṛtvā sthapetuṃ § 44.1.38B7. taṃ dāni tahiṃ cīvarakarṇṇake gṛhṇiya acchiyaṃ “caṭa” tti sarvaṃ phāṭitaṃ § 44.2.39A1. evaṃ ca tvaṃ bhikṣuḥ cīvarakaṃ cīvarakoṇake gṛhṇiya ... § 44.6.39A5. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ cīvarakoṇake gṛhṇiya “ḍu” tti acchituṃ § 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇâprasannaṃ gṛhṇituṃ ... upānahā gṛhṇituṃ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati ... vikṣuṇṇam vā pātraṃ (lies: patraṃ?) gṛhṇituṃ § 48.8.41B4. labhyā dāni cīvarāntarikāya khakkhaṭāni phalāni gṛhṇituṃ § 49.5.42B2. atha dāni na paśyati, hastena gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ ekato vā ekato vā uvvattayitavyo § 50.1.43A2. so dāni bhikṣu piṇḍapātaṃ gṛhṇiya (Hs. gṛhnitha |) āgato § 50.5.43A7. yadi tāva dāyakadānapati jalpanti “bhante, paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha”, ... 227  § 50.5.43B1. yadi tāva denti, dve piṇḍapātakā gṛhṇitavyā ... vihārakaṃ āgantavyaṃ § 50.6.43B2. atha dāni so dānapati tittiṇo bhavati, yattakaṃ dīyati tattakaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 50.6.43B2. nâpi dāni adhotakehi hastehi aprayatehi gṛhṇitavyaṃ. atha khalu prakṣālitvā nirmmādayitvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 52.6.44B4. atha dāni so praṇītabhojanasya mahārhasya pūraṃ pātraṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ āgacchati ... § 57.3.47B2. upānahā nikkhāsiya ekam pi ekena hastena pārṣṇivaddhrake gṛhṇiya dvitīyaṃ dvitīyena hastena pārṣṇivaddhrake gṛhṇiya ... Vgl. § 57.1.47B1. pārṣṇikāvaddhrakasmi gṛhītvā ... pārṣṇikāvaddhrake gṛhītvā § 57.5.47B4. upānahikāyo ... saṃpuṭikariyāṇaṃ vāmakena hastena gṛhṇiya nikuṭitakena <vāmā bāhāṃ> osārayitvā saṃprajānaṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ usw. √g ⇒ u-grāya-, upa-grāya- geṇḍuka~ “Ball” ☞ § 55.1, Anm. 2 § 55.1.46B3. tena hi geṇḍukaṃ (Nom. sg. masc.; vgl. BHSG § 8.26) nāma karttavyo § 55.2.46B3. geṇḍukaṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyo tṛṇānām vā palālānām vā leṅka<ṭa>kakhaṇḍakānām vā sūtrasya vā uṇṇāya vā. bāhyena paṭṭena nattakena veṣṭayitvā sūtrakena veṣṭayitavyo § 55.3.46B4. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ geṇḍukaṃ vārayaṃtā (Hs. cār°) iṣṭa- khaṇḍaṃ leṅkaṭakakhaṇḍena veṣṭayitvā vārenti (Hs. cār°) § 55.3.46B5. yo yeva pracālayati taṃ yeva kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena urasi vā tāṇḍeti pārśvasmi vā āhananti § 55.4.46B5. nâpi kṣamati āghātacittena vā duṣṭacittena vā geṇḍukaṃ (Hs. °kāṃ) vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°). atha khalu maitracittena hitacittena geṇḍuko vāritavyo (Hs. car°) § 55.4.46B6. nâpi kṣamati geṇḍukaṃ vārayantasya (Hs. cār°) cittaṃ pradūṣayituṃ § 55.5.46B6. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ pracālayati, na kṣamati kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena āhanituṃ § 55.5.46B6. atha khalu bhūyo geṇḍukam āsthapayitvā acchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo § 55.5.46B6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava geṇḍuko prāpuṇati. utthehi vārehi (Hs. cār°)” tti § 55.6.46B7. <duve vā> trayo vā vārā geṇḍukaṃ (Hs. °kāṃ) purato ābhāsayitvâcchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo, vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya, tava geṇḍuko prāpuṇati.” § 55.10.47A1. na kṣamati so geṇḍuko adhyupekṣituṃ pāṭitavipāṭito § 55.11.47A2. evaṃ geṇḍuke pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VII].50B1) geya~ (BHS, SWTF) “Geya” § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ geyaṃ vyākaraṇaṃ gāthā ... go~ ⇒ Indra-gava~, prabhūta-hasty-aśva-aja-gav’-eḍaka~ gocara~ ⇒ ācāra-gocara~, dūra-gocara~ ☞ § 8.6, Anm. 2 § 8.6.9A2. gocaraṃ praviśantasya grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni § 8.6.9A2. tena dāni gocarāto nirggatasya upādhyāyasya cīvarāṇi ... pratisāmayitavyāni § 18.38.17A2. ete dve bhikṣū gocaraṃ praviśanti, prakṛty’ eva tāva cchaḍḍayitavyaṃ § 19.35.18B7. eṣo bhikṣuḥ gocaraṃ praviśati, prakṛty’ eva tāva praśvāsaṃ kariya ... § 19.36.18B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ gocaraṃ praviṣṭaḥ praśvāsakṛto bhavati, nâpi kṣamati ... § 24.11.22A6. etasya dāni bhikṣusya gocaraṃ praviśantasya ... kheṭo āgacchati § 25.3.22B2. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya pātracīvaram ādāya gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ. gocarāto nirddhāviya āhāraṃ karīya pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ § 31.34.26B7. sarvve yeva gocaraṃ praviśanti, kiñ câpi ghaṭṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 40.1.32B2. gocaraṃ praviṣṭāḥ § 45.1.39B3. gocarāto nirddhāvitā (= § 46.1.40A4) § 45.2.39B4. gocarāto nirddhāvitāḥ § 45.4.39B5. bhikṣuṇā ... gocaraṃ praviśaṃtena ... § 45.4.39B6. cīvarāṇi prāvaritvā gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 45.5.39B6. gocarāto nirddhāvitena ... § 46.1.40A3. te ... gocarāye prasthitā § 46.2.40A5. yūyaṃ ... gocarāye prasthitā § 46.2.40A5. gocarāto nirddhāvitā 228  § 46.4.40A6. gocarāye prasthito bhavati § 46.5.40A7. gocarāto nirggatena nâpi kṣamati ... cīvaraṃ mārggituṃ § 47.1.40B2. te ... gocaraṃ praviśantā cīvaraṃ ka<ḍ>ḍhaṃtā praviśanti § 61.7.49A7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gocaraṃ vā praviśantena antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena maṭamaṭāye aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhituṃ goṇa~ (BHS, Pā) “Rind” § 18.2.15B1. yathā uṣṭrā vā goṇā vā garddabhā vā cchagalakā vā evam ime śramaṇā prakīrṇṇakasya uśvāsaṃ karenti (≒ § 19.2.17B4) § 18.29.16B5. nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā garddabhena vā ūrūyo ’hayaṃtena gacchituṃ § 18.33.16B6. na kṣamati <yathā> uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā ūrūyo ohayantena gantuṃ § 19.13.18A4. na kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā gardabhena vā ūrūyo omūtriyantena gantuṃ § 19.31.18B5. nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā ūrūyo omūtra<ya>ntena gantuṃ § 49.5.42B1. anekāye ... caṇḍo vā śvāno caṇḍo vā goṇo āgaccheya Gotama~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) ⇒ Gautama~ § 6.13.8A4. mahāmuniṃ Śākyamuniṃ ca Gotamaṃ (vs) gotra~ ⇒ kiṅ-gotraka~, sagotrīmātā § 33.5.28A2. sthaviro dāni bhagavantaṃ pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavāṃ, sthavirehi bhikṣūhi navakā bhikṣū ālapitavyā?” bhagavān āha “nāmena vā gotreṇa vā varṣāgreṇa vā.” § 33.6.28A2. atha khalu nāmena vā gotreṇa vā śabdāpayitavyo gotra-stha~ “heilig”# (?) ☞ § 40.8, Anm. 1 § 40.8.32B7. gotrasthaṃ (Hs. gogotrasthā) pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇa- pānīyaṃ, Rājagṛhe Tapodaṃ ... § 40.9.33A2. vaidyo āha “bhante, gotrasthena pānīyena akṣiṇī dhovāhi” tti § 40.9.33A2. na kṣamati gotrasthaṃ udakaṃ dātuṃ gopaya- ⇒ gupta~ § 43.16.38B5. bhaṇḍakaṃ ... na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ § 53.14.45B4. <vaktavyaṃ> “āyuṣmanto, prajñapetha śayyāyo. dīpaṃ gopayiṣyan.” ti § 53.15.45B5. (die Lampe) nirvvāpito bhavati, agni gopayitavyo tuṣehi vā karṣehi vā buṣena vā buṣikāya vā go-pālaka~ § 14.10.13B1. ye tatra bhavanti gopālakā vā paśupālakā vā teṣāṃ so vihāro anuparindi- tavyo gomaya~ § 13.16.12B7. atha dāni usvedako bhavati, śuddhena gomayena mardditavyaṃ § 17.9.15A3. anyair ggomaya pariharttavyaḥ, anyair udakaṃ pariharttavyaḥ § 18.31.16B5. (uśvāsaṃ ...) cchoriyāṇaṃ so pṛthivīpradeśo gomayena udvarttitavyo § 18.35.16B7. (uśvāsaṃ ...) cchoḍiyāṇa so pṛthivīpradeśo gomayena udvarttayitavyo § 21.7.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinasmi ... gomayaṃ vā cīvarakāni vā śoṣayituṃ § 21.9.20B5. prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā pradeśakaṃ gomayena upalimpiya cīvarakaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 25.3.22B2. nâpi kṣamati karkaśena vā cūrṇṇena karkaśena vā gomayena nirmmādayituṃ § 25.3.22B3. (pātraṃ ...) mūlarasena vā patrarasena vā puṣparasena vā nirvvālikena vā gomayena nirmmādayitavyaṃ § 25.10.22B6. antamasato pṛthivīpradeśaṃ pi gomayena upalimpiya thapetavyaṃ § 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇa ... gomayāni vā uccinituṃ gomaya-kārṣī~ (BHS) “Überzug aus Kuhdung”; vgl. Bailey 1955: 17 ⇒ gandha-kārṣī~, taila-kārṣī~ § 1.8.1B7. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ siñcāpayitavyaṃ sanmārjayitavyaṃ gomayakārṣī dātavyā (≒ § 2.6.2B6, § 3.7.3B5) § 8.9.9A6. vihārako siñcitavyo sammārjitavyo. kālena kālaṃ gomayakārṣī dātavyā (≒ § 13.14.12B6) § 13.8.12B3. atha dāni uppaṃsulo bhavati, gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 14.7.13A5. vihārako siñcitavyo sammārjitavyo gomayakārṣī dātavyā (≒ § 14.16.13B4, 229  § 23.9.21B7) § 15.9.14A4. gomayakārṣī dātavyā (= § 43.11.38B1, § 44.9.39A7) § 17.9.15A3. atha dāni upaṃsulakā vihārakā bhavanti, ... gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 18.31.16B6. tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā ... antamasato gomayakārṣī dātavyā{ḥ} § 19.15.18A5. tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā ... antamasato gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 19.29.18B5. tailakārṣī dātavyā. antamasato gomayakārṣī dātavyā gomaya-piṇḍikā~# “Kuhdungklumpen”; vgl. SWTF. gomaya-piṇḍa § 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā. gomayapiṇḍikā vā paṭipaṭikāye sthapetavyā yathânupūrvveṇa gaccheya gomaya-śāṭa~# “Verkleidung aus Kuhdung” oder “mit Kuhdung bestrichener Stoff” § 11.6.10B7. varṣāya ovṛṣṭo bhavati, cikhallikā opūre<ta>vyā, vaṃghorikā dātavyā, gomayaśāṭo dātavyo § 13.15.12B6. anvarddhamāsaṃ gomayaśāṭo dātavyo § 14.5.13A4. vihāro ... yāva gomayaśāṭo dātavyo, paribhāṇḍaṃ karttavyaṃ golaka~ “kugelförmiger Wassertopf ” (PW) ⇒ raṅga-golaka~, vyañjana-golaka~ § 40.5.32B5. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya, golakā vā maṇikā vā ... karakīyo vā <pūrayitavyā?> Gautama~ (BHS, SWTF) ⇒ Gotama~ § 4.15.5B1. mahāyaśaṃ Śākyamuniñ ca Gautamaṃ (vs) gaurava~ ⇒ dharmma-gaurava~ § 20.9.19B5. tena dāni bhagavān dṛṣṭo bhagavato gauraveṇa sarvvam abhyavahṛtaṃ gr / y : § 2.1.2B1. samayaṃ für samagraṃ gr / rg : § 57.12.48A1. pratyagralakā für °argalakā √grah ⇒ gṛhṇ-, grahe-, grāhaya-, grāhe-, pari-gṛhṇā-, pari-gṛhīta~, pra-gṛhṇā-, prati-√grah, prati-grāhaya-, prati-grahāpaya-, prati-grāhāpaya-, su-gṛhīta~ § 56.1.47A2. te ... skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti § 56.1.47A3. tato niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭiya sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gacchanti § 56.3.47A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ okastena niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭayituṃ (≒ § 56.5.47A6) § 56.4.47A5. nâpi kṣamati ... niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ (≒ § 56.6.47A6) § 57.1.47B1. te ... upānahā nikkhāsiya eka<ṃ> pi ekena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrakasmi gṛhītvā dvitīyaṃ dvitīyena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrake gṛhītvā ... prasphoṭanti Vgl. § 57.3.47B2. pārṣṇivaddhrake gṛhṇiya ... pārṣṇivaddhrake gṛhṇiya ... § 57.5.47B3. upānahikāyo ... bhikṣū vā jānanto vā ajānanto vā gṛhītvā gaccheya usw. graha~ ⇒ su-graha~, du-graha~ grahaṇa~ “Gefangenschaft” § 41.17.34B7. grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema rājakule pi vadhyema (= § 41.18.35A1) grahe- (BHS; vgl. BHSG, S. 211a; dass. § 34.21) ⇒ gṛhṇ-, grāhaya-, grāhe-, √grah § 8.5.9A2. peyāpātraṃ ... śo(dhitvā)(?) bhaktuddeśāto bhaktakaṃ grahetavyaṃ § 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa aprayataṃ gṛhṇituṃ, uccāro vā prasrāvo vā kheṭaṃ vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā vighaso vā saṃkāro vā anyam vā aprayat{t}aṃ grahetuṃ § 42.21.37A5. yadi tāva mitakaṃ dīyati uṣṇodakaṃ ghaṭena vā kuṇḍena vā, tena tathā yeva grahetavyaṃ grāma~ § 4.5.4B2. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ... bhaktaṃ grāme vihāre § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: ... kathaṃ grāme pratipattavyaṃ (≒ § 9.1.9B5) § 41.22.35A5. eṣo dāni bhikṣu yadā grāmāto nirggato bhavati § 4.18.6A1. grāme vā yadi vâraṇye nimne vā yadi vā sthale (vs) § 31.6.25B5. yadi dāni grāmasya nagarasya vā madhyena gantavyaṃ bhavati, ... § 47.4.40B6. yadi tāva ... dūre ca grāmo bhavati ... § 49.1.41B6. ehi āyuṣmaṃ, grāmaṃ praviśyāmaḥ (≒ § 49.2.42A5) 230 grāmake für grāma<nti>ke : § 39.4.31A2 grāmapraveśanaṃ für grāmapraveśana<ka>ṃ : § 45.4.39B6 grāma-praveśanaka~# “(ein) beim Betreten des Dorfes (anzulegendes Gewand)” ⇒ grāma- praveśanika~, grāma-praveśika~, ghara-praveśanika~ § 45.4.39B6. prakṛty’ eva tāva grāmapraveśanakaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 45.4.39B6. tato grāmapraveśana<ka>ṃ ca nivāsanaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 45.5.39B7. nâpi kṣamati ... grāmapraveśanakaṃ nivāsanaṃ nikṣipituṃ § 45.5.39B7. grāmapraveśanakaṃ ca nivāsanaṃ uvvelayitavyaṃ § 46.1.40A4. grāmapraveśanakāni cīvarāṇi nikṣipitvā § 46.2.40A5. ekanivasanā grāmapraveśanakāni cīvarāṇi mārggatha § 46.4.40A6. grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 46.4.40A6. prāvarantena grāma{ṃ}praveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 46.5.40A7. grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ nikṣipitvā § 46.5.40A7. grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ grāma-praveśanika~# “(ein) beim Betreten des Dorfes (anzulegendes Gewand)” ⇒ grāma- praveśanaka~, grāma-praveśika~ § 8.6.9A2. gocaraṃ praviśantasya grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni, vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi pratiśāmayitavyāni § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi ekānte sthapetavyāni § 45.1.39B3. gocarāto nirddhāvitā grāmapraveśanikāni nivāsanāni nikṣipiyāṇaṃ § 45.2.39B4. nagnaprāvṛtāḥ grāmapraveśanikāni <ni>vasanāni mārggatha § 45.2.39B5. grāmapraveśanikāni nivāsanāni nikṣipitvā § 45.4.39B5. grāmapraveśanikaṃ nivāsanaṃ anupahastaṃ kṛtvā § 46.1.40A4. ekanivasanā grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarakāni mārgganti § 46.2.40A5. grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi nikṣipitvā § 46.4.40A6. nâpi kṣamati ... grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi mārggituṃ grāma-praveśika~# “(ein) beim Betreten des Dorfes (anzulegendes Gewand)” ⇒ grāma- praveśanaka~, grāma-praveśanika~ § 41.22.35A5. tato grāmapraveśikaṃ cīvaraṃ prasphoṭitvā § 45.1.39B3. nagnaprāvṛtā grāmapraveśikāni nivasanāni mārgganti grāma-mūla-gata~# “nahe dem Dorf gekommen” § 47.5.40B6. yadā grāmamūlagato bhavati, ... grāmantika~# “zum Dorfbezirk gehörig” ⇒ grāmāntika~ § 14.1.13A1. te dāni āraṇyakā ... grāmantikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ okastāḥ grāmānta~ “Dorfbezirk (gemeint ist im Dorf selbst und in seiner unmittelbaren Umgebung)”#; vgl. PTSD, s.v. gāmanta ☞ § 41.5, Anm. 3 § 41.5.34A2. ime ... śramaṇakāḥ grāmānte iryāpathaṃ ṭhapayanti, nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti vikopenti grāmāntika~ (1) “zum Dorfbezirk gehörig”# ⇒ grāmantika~ § 12.11.11B6. atha dāni grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, ... § 14.11.13B1. atha dāni grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, ... § 14.3.13A2. na kṣamati āraṇyakehi ... grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ okkasituṃ § 14.4.13A3. sarvvaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ otāretavyaṃ § 14.10.13B1. dīrghāyu, gacchāma tāva <va>yaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ § 14.15.13B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ udakadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na saṃvasati, ... § 18.39.17A2. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantavyaṃ § 31.14.25B7. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ § 39.1.30B6. āraṇyakaṃ tāva śeyyāsanaṃ grāmāntikañ ca ekabhaktatarppaṇañ {ca} § 39.1.30B6. grāmāntike śeyyāsane § 39.1.30B6. te dāni āraṇyakā deśakāle grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ āgatā § 39.4.31A2. evaṃ grāmāntike vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 39.4.31A2. evaṃ grāma<nti>ke vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 39.5.31A2. etaṃ dāni grāmāntikaṃ ca śeyyāsanaṃ ... ekabhaktatarppaṇaṃ bhavati 231  § 39.5.31A2. tato yadi tāva grāmāntike śeyyāsane bhaktam pacyati § 39.16.31B3. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantavyaṃ § 39.16.31B4. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ Uddāna (V).39B2. evaṃ grāmāntike < vihāre> pratipadyitavyaṃ (2) “(ein) im Dorfbezirk wohnend(er Mönch)”# § 39.1.30B6. āraṇyakānāñ ca grāmāntikānāñ ca anugraho sādhīyati § 39.1.30B6. tehi dāni grāmāntikehi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ sthitāḥ § 39.1.30B7. te dāni grāmāntikā āhaṃsu § 39.2.30B7. te dāni grāmāntikā deśakālasmin kulāni upasaṃkramanti § 39.5.31A3. na dāni kṣamati grāmāntikehi ... bhuñjituṃ § 39.6.31A3. grāmāntikehi duve thālīyo (Hs. śālīyo) ādrāhayitavyāyo § 39.6.31A3. duve thālīyo ... ekā grāmāntikānāṃ. ekā āraṇyakānāṃ § 39.6.31A3. <yā> grāmāntikānāṃ thālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.8.31A4. grāmāntikehi gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjitavyaṃ § 39.9.31A5. tehi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakānāṃ pi ārocitavyaṃ § 39.10.31A7. eṣo dāni koci grāmāntikāṃ bhaktena nimantreti, ... § 39.17.31B5. nâpi dāni āraṇyakehi grāmāntikā kutsetavyā “bahukṛtyā bahukaraṇīyā jihvāgre<na> yūyaṃ rasāgrāṇi paryeṣatha” § 39.18.31B6. atha dāni āraṇyake śeyyāsane grāmāntikānāṃ ca āraṇyakānāñ ca bhaktaṃ sajjīyati, nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva ... bhuñjituṃ § 39.19.31B6. duve sthālīyo adrāhayitavyāyo. ekā āraṇyakānāṃ ekā grāmāntikānāṃ § 39.20.31B7. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, ... jānitavyaṃ, anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparo<dho> vā bhave corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ, yathā nâgacchantîti § 39.21.32A1. grāmāntikā<nāṃ> thālīy’ otāriya dhotôpaliptāṃ kariya thapitavyāḥ § 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nimantreti, ... § 39.28.32A5. nâpi dāni kṣamati grāmāntikehi yatr’ ollagnāye āsituṃ § 39.29.32A6. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... divasaṃ yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha” usw. grāmāraṇya-sama~# (grāma-ār°) “gleich im Dorf und in der Wildnis” § 41.6.34A2. sthaviro dāni grāmāraṇyasamena īryāpathena samanvāgato *grāmoparodha~ (°ma-upa°) “Gefahr im Dorf”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 157.4A5.5. nagaroparodha (= ib. § 157.4A5.6, § 221.8B3.1) § 39.20.31B7. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, ... jānitavyaṃ, anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparo<dho> vā bhave corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ, yathā nâgacchantîti grāhaka~ ⇒ lābha-grāhaka~ grāhaya- (1) “auswendig lernen lassen” § 7.4.8B1~2. upādhyāyena tāva śrāddhevihāriṃ upasaṃpādentakenaỿva ubhayato vinayo grāhayitavyo. ubhayato vinayaṃ na pārayati, ekato vinayo grāhayitavyo. ekato vinayaṃ na pārayati, pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa grāhayitavyo. pañca sūtrāṇi na pārayati, catvāri vā trīṇi duve ekaṃ sūtraṃ vistareṇa grāhayitavyo. ekaṃ sūtraṃ na pāreti <dvānavatīto grāhayitavyo. dvānavatīto na śaknoti> triṃśato pi grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa<śruti>kāyo gāthāyo ca. triṃśato pi na pāreti, dve aniyatāṃ grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca. dve aniyatā na pāreti, antamasato catvāri pārājikāṃ grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaṃśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca (≒ § 9.4.9B7~10A2) grāhaya- (2), grāhe-# “zuweisen” (wörtl. “ergreifen lassen”); < grāhayati ☞ § 12.10, Anm. 2 ⇒ lābha-grāhaka~, lābha-grāhin~ § 12.10.11B5. te<na> dāni samantena āṣāḍhamāsaṃ śayyāsanaṃ grāhetavyaṃ. vihārā pariveṇā agniśālā bhaktaśālā ... caṃkramā vṛkṣamūlā vihārakā grāhayitavyā grāhin~ ⇒ lābha-grāhin~ grīvā~ “Kehle, Hals” § 49.5.42A7. nâpi kṣamati ghoḍena yathā oḍḍitāye grīvāye gantuṃ § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgacchati, hastena grīvā parimarditavyā 232  § 58.5.48A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgato bhavati, grīvā marditavyā grīṣma~ § 4.11.5A4. atha dāni grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, ... (= § 6.10.8A1, § 50.5. 43B1) § 12.14.12A2. {grīṣme śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ...} grīṣma-kāla~# “Sommerzeit” § 4.8.4B6. atha dāni grīṣmakālo (Hs. grīṣmo kālo) bhavati, ... § 5.8.6B6. atha dāni grīṣmakālo bhavati, uṣṇasantāpena anukallatarakaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 6.8.7B6. atha dāni grīṣmakālo bhavati, anukālaṃ uṣṇa{ṃ}śaṃkena praviśitavyaṃ § 5.10.7A1. grīṣmakālo varṣārātro vā bhavati, cireṇa kālo atikramati § 44.8.39A6. grīṣmakā<lo> bhavati rajo vātarajo vā ukkalikā cīvaraṃ vināśeti § 47.4.40B6. yadi tāva grīṣmakālo bhavati ... glāna~ (BHS, SWTF) “krank” ⇒ glānaka~, a-glāna~, cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śayyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~ § 4.11.5A3. bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno paritto § 5.10.7A1. bhagavatânekaparyāyeṇa glāno parītto § 6.10.8A1. bhagavatā ca anekaparyāyeṇa glāno parindito (≒ § 50.5.43A7) § 18.14.16A2. atha dāni glāno bhavati ārśavyādhikaṃ vā praskandikaṃ vā, ... (☞ § 18.14, Anm. 1) § 19.42.19A3. atha dāni glāno bhavati bhikṣuḥ pāṇḍurogeṇa, vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā ...” § 19.42.19A4. tasya glānasya sumanāphullaṃ nakke dadiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “imaṃ ...” § 20.12.19B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati ... (= § 23.4.4.21B1) § 23.6.3.21B3. glāno vā aglāno vā {anāpattiḥ}, kiṃ câpi caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ § 27.8.23B7. atha dāni glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi ... ohitahasto vā tiṣṭhati, anāpattiḥ § 28.7.24A4. atha dāni glāno, ghṛtaṃ vā pītaṃ, ... kiñ câpi caṃkramati, <anāpattiḥ> § 31.4.25B3. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, na dāni ujjhitvā gantavyaṃ § 49.7.42B5. glānasya anukālyaṃ āhāraṃ datvā sahitakehi nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 50.5.43A7. dāyakadānapatī vaktavyāḥ “detha glānasya piṇḍapātaṃ.” § 57.10.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi sa-upānaho upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā mūle upaviśati, anāpattiḥ glānaka~ (BHS[Mvu]) “krank” ⇒ oheyya-glānaka~, glāna~ § 4.11.5A2. oheyyakānāṃ glānakānāṃ pratikṛty’ eva dāpitavyaṃ § 11.1.10B2. glānakānāñ ca bhikṣūṇāṃ anukampārthaṃ (= § 12.1.11A5) § 11.11.11A2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāviddhako vā bhavati virecanapītako vā glānako vā bhavati, vastraṃ puggalikaṃ antarīkaraṇaṃ dadiya caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ glānapratyayabhaiṣajya~ ⇒ cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śeyyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~ GH gh / dy : § 20.18.20A4. odyasayitavyāḥ für oghasa° gh / p : § 19.16.18A5. praśvāsapaṭe für praśvāsaghaṭo gh / pr : § 19.26.18B4. ghaṃśvato für praśvāso? gh / m(m) : § 42.8.36B3. nirghuṣṭikā für nirmmuṣṭikā gh / y : § 48.7.41B2. yasatena für ghasatena gh > h ⇒ o-hāṭaya- (< Skt. apa-√ghaṭ) ghaṃśvato für praśvāso?: § 19.26.18B4 √ghaṭ ⇒ ghaṭa-, ghaṭaya-, ghaṭe-, √ghaṭṭ, ghartta-, ā-√ghaṭṭ; bāhira-ghaṭita~, o-hāṭaya- ghaṭa~ “Topf, Kübel” ⇒ ghaṭā~, dadhi-ghaṭa~, dugdha-ghaṭa~, praśvāsa-ghaṭa~ § 19.16.18A5. mā aprakṛtikā (wohl für °iko) ghaṭasya {vā} bāhyena praśvāsaṃ cchoreyā ti § 19.22.18B2. ghaṭasyôpari cchidramallakaṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ § 42.11.36B5. kāṣṭhaṃ sejjetavyaṃ, bhaṇḍā sajjayitavyā, ghaṭā vā sajjetavyā kuṇḍā <vā> § 42.21.37A5. yadi tāva mitakaṃ dīyati uṣṇodakaṃ ghaṭena vā kuṇḍena vā, tena tathā yeva grahetavyaṃ 233 ghaṭa- (1), ghaṭe-# “(die Tür) verriegeln”; zur Verwechslung √ghaṭ / √ghaṭṭ, s. § 40.1, Anm. 3 ⇒ √ghaṭṭ, ghartta-, ā-√ghaṭṭ, bāhira-ghaṭita~, o-hāṭaya- § 31.33.26B7. kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 41.18.35A2. tena dārakena dvārāṇi sarvvāṇi ghaṭitāni ghaṭa- (2) “berühren, aneinander schlagen, anstoßen” ⇒ √ghaṭṭ (2) ghaṭaka~ “Topf; Urinkübel” ⇒ raṅga-ghaṭaka~ § 19.16.18A6. tatra kuṃtako alābutumbako vā thapayitavyo. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa ghaṭake prakṣipitavyaṃ § 19.18.18A7. atha dāni dvibhūmiko bhavati, dvitīyāyāṃ bhūmiyaṃ tathā yeva ghaṭako sthāpayitavyo ghaṭaya- “zustandebringen, verstärken” § 57.12.48A1. nâpi kṣamati upānahā adhyupekṣituṃ odriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ ghaṭayitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ pratyargalakā dātavyāḥ ghaṭa-siktaka~# “(mit Wasser) aus einem Krug begossen” § 20.1.19A5. so dāni taṃ unneti va<r>ddheti ghaṭasiktakaṃ (Hs. °ko) ekaputrakaṃ (Hs. °ko) viya § 20.1.19A6. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ mama āmrapotakaṃ (Hs. °ko) ghaṭasiktakaṃ (Hs. °ko) ekaputrakaṃ viya saṃvarddhita{vya}ṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi § 20.2.19A6. so dāni tena unnīto varddhito ghaṭasiktako ekaputrako viya ghaṭikā~ “Topf” ⇒ ghaṭṭa~, pānīya-ghaṭikā~, praśvāsa-ghaṭikā~ § 19.23.18B2. paudgalikapaudgalikāni praśvāsaghaṭikāni sthāpayitavyāni ghaṭikā vā karakā vā alābutumbukā vā § 19.25.18B4. oruhantena mallakaṃ ghaṭikā vā mañcakasya ca oruhantena (lies: adhastāt?) susthapitā karttavyā § 53.19.45B7. tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati, sāhariyāṇaṃ ghaṭikāyāṃ vā bhājane vā sthāpayi- tavyaṃ ghaṭikā-bandhima~# “mit Hilfe eines Riegels geschlossen” ☞ § 42.9, Anm. 2; zum -ima Suffix, vgl. § 18.7, Anm. 4 ⇒ sūcikā-bandhima~ § 42.9.36B4. kapāṭaṃ ... ghaṭikābandhimaṃ karttavyaṃ ghaṭe- ⇒ ghaṭa- √ghaṭṭ (1), ghaṭṭa- (Skt), ghaṭṭe- (Pā) “(das Tor, die Tür) verriegeln”; zur Verwechslung √ghaṭ / √ghaṭṭ, s. § 40.1, Anm. 3 ⇒ ghaṭṭitaka~, ghaṭa-, ghaṭe-, ghartta-, ā-√ghaṭṭ, pari-ghaṭṭa- § 31.34.27A1. sarvve yeva gocaraṃ praviśanti, kiñ câpi ghaṭṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 40.4.32B5. pānīyamaṇḍapaṃ ghaṭṭiya tāpitamudritaṃ (Hs. tāpiyam°) kariya ... § 41.13.34B3. putra dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsesi § 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako ... gṛhasya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsati § 42.2.36A2. te ... jentākaṃ prajvālīya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiya svedantā āsanti √ghaṭṭ (2) “berühren, aneinander schlagen, anstoßen” ⇒ saṃ-ghaṭṭe- § 25.15.23A3. <sthapetavyaṃ>(?) mañcasya vā pīṭhasya vā upari jālavātāyane vā pātramālake vā, yathā na ghaṭṭeṃsu § 54.9.46A5. yadi dakṣiṇato sthito bhavati, vāmajānukena tena cchatti pratyupasthitavyaṃ ghaṭ<ṭ>itavyā ghaṭṭa~# “Wassertopf, Krug”; vgl. Skt. ghaṭa (“Topf, Krug”) ⇒ ghaṭikā § 40.5.32B6. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya, golakā vā ... thaganakā vā āraṃjarā vā ghaṭṭā vā karakīyo vā <pūrayitavyā?> ghaṭṭitaka~# “verriegelt”; BHS. ghaṭṭita + Suffix ka ⇒ √ghaṭṭ (1) § 31.20.26A3. vihāro ... ghaṭṭitako bhavati, apāvuraṇena apaduriyāṇaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 50.1.43A2. yāva paśyati so vihārakaṃ ghaṭṭitakaṃ, ... ghaṭṭima~ ⇒ abhyantara-ghaṭṭima~, bāhira-ghaṭṭima~ ghaṭṭe- ⇒ √ghaṭṭ (1) ghaṇa~ (AMg), ghana~ (Skt, Pā) “fest” ⇒ ati-ghana~ § 18.53.17B3. (parakerako uccāro) ... udakena accāviya (für *alloḍiya?) ghanena narttakena parisrāviya, ... § 21.3.20B2. kaṭhinaṃ ... vaṃśānāṃ vā nalānām vā na<ṃ>galānāṃ vā kāṇḍānām vā 234  carukānām vā rohiṣāṇāṃ vā sūtrikāya vā rejjukāya vā ghaṇa<ṃ> vuṇitavyaṃ § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī ... kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā naḍānām vā naṅgalānām vā kaṇḍānām vā rejjukāye vā sūtrakāye (für sūtrikāye?) vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā ghara~ (BHS[Mvu, Mvy], Pā, AMg) ⇒ antara-gharaṃ, antara-ghare, cetiya-ghara~, varcca- ghara~, śūnya-ghara~, gṛha~, agāra~, āgāra~ ghara-praveśaka~#, ghara-praveśanika~#, ghara-praveśika~# “(Feier zum) Einzug in ein Haus” ⇒ gṛha-praveśaka~, grāma-praveśanika~ § 4.18.5B6. atha dāni gharapraveśanikaṃ bhavati nâyaṃ dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā § 5.12.7A3. bhaktaṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakaṃ vevāhikaṃ gharapraveśakaṃ ... § 6.12.8A2. jānitavyaṃ kimālambanaṃ etaṃ bhaktaṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakaṃ vevāhikaṃ vā gharapraveśikaṃ vā ghartta-# Eine Verschreibung für ghaṭ(ṭ)itavya~ (“man soll sich bemühen”) ? ☞ § 40.10, Anm. 2 § 40.10.33A3. pānīyaṃ gṛhṇantena gharttitavyaṃ, yathā eka hasto nirāmiṣo bhavati ghaṣṭa-maṣṭa~# “glättet und poliert”; < Skt. *ghṛṣṭa-mṛṣṭa ☞ § 23.8, Anm. 9 § 23.8.21B6. ullāye gṛhītako bhavati, śāṭiyāṇaṃ liptopalipto ghaṣṭamaṣṭo karttavyo ghasa- (Pkt) “reiben”; < Skt. *ghṛṣati; vgl. CDIAL 4450. gharṣati ☞ § 20.18, Anm. 3; § 25.6, Anm. 2 ⇒ o-ghasaya- § 25.6.22B4. nâpi kṣamati bhūmīye ghasantena <nirmmādayituṃ> § 47.1.40B3. sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittiyo ghasantā gacchanti § 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... sudhāpāṇḍulepanāyo bhittīyo ghasaṃtā upaviśaṃti § 48.2.41A5. sudhāpāṇḍulepanāhi bhittīhi ghasaṃtā praviśatha § 48.7.41B2. nâpi kṣamati antaraghare praviṣṭena sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittī ghasatena (Hs. yasatena) atikramituṃ | (Daṇḍa) ghāḍena für ghoḍena : § 49.5.42A7 ghātya~ ⇒ a-ghātya~ § 41.19.35A3. ghātyā bhavanty aghātyā (vs) √ghuṭ ⇒ nir-ghoṭaya-, nir-ghoṭe- ghuṇa-viddha~# “von Würmern zerfressen” ☞ § 31.16, Anm. 3 § 31.16.26A2. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullapitavyaṃ āgantukehi “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ ettha vasatha, ghuṇaviddhā tave, ...” ghṛta~ § 4.1.4A5. ghṛtaṃ thīyati māṃsaṃ thīyati vyañjanāni śītalībhavanti § 4.12.5A5. sūpasya ghṛtasya māṃsasya olaṃkānāṃ dadhisya § 28.7.24A4. atha dāni glāno, ghṛtaṃ vā pītaṃ, virecanaṃ vā pītaṃ, kiñ câpi ... ghṛta-pītaka~# “Schmelzbutter getrunken habend” ⇒ pīta~ § 20.12.19B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati śirāviddhako vā virecanapītako vā ghṛtapītako vā ... ghoḍa~ (Pkt) “Pferd”; < Skt. ghoṭa § 49.5.42A7. nâpi kṣamati ghoḍena (Hs. | ghāḍena) yathā oḍḍitāye grīvāye gantuṃ √ghrā ⇒ jighra-, jighrāpe- Ṅ ṅk / kṣ ⇒ kṣ / ṅk C c / ṭh : § 32.6.27B1. paṭhantasya für paca° c / dh : § 4.18.5B7. bhūrimecasā für °medhaso § 7.1.8A6. varcati für vardha<ṃ>ti § 40.14.33A6. pānīyacārikāye für pānīyadhārikāye? c / v ⇒ cāraya-, cāre-, cc / v, cc / vv, yeca / yeva, pakṣa-vārika~, māsa-vārika~ 235  § 4.17.5B5. careyā für vareyā § 5.6.6B2. ca für (’)va § 8.7.9A4. vaḍaṃvidhavāye für caṃḍav° § 8.9.9A6. siñcitavya~ für sīvi° (= § 55.10.47A1, § 56.7.47A7) § 8.12.9B1. candantasya für van° § 9.4.10A2. va für ca (= § 60.5.48B7) § 11.5.10B6. cā für vā (= § 25.13.22B7, § 47.7.41A1) § 11.6.10B7. vikhallikā für ci° § 11.9.11A2. śicitavyaṃ für sivi° § 12.8.11B4. yāca für yāva § 13.7.12B2. vilikhkhikā für cikkhalikā § 14.18.13B5. yāviya für yāciya § 15.7.14A3. cīvaraṃcaśo für cīvaravaṃśo § 15.7.14A3. tāca für tāva § 18.4.15B3. nivitavyā für nici° § 18.13.16A2. āvikṣitavyaṃ für ācikṣ° (= § 31.8.25B6) § 18.34.16B7. ceḍḍo für ve° § 18.37.17A1. vetiyaṃ für cetiyaṃ (= § 20.19.20A4, § 39.9.31A6) § 21.6.20B4. ukkavayitavyaṃ für ukkaca° § 25.15.23A2. kalāvīyaṃ für °ācīyaṃ § 27.1.23B4. yogavaro für yogācāro § 31.31.26B5. variya für cariya § 31.33.26B7. vâpi für câpi § 32.2.27A5. ecacciro für evacciro § 34.3.28B3. ca für va § 39.1.30B7. atiuvahne für atiuccahṇe § 39.5.31A3 eca für eva § 31.1.25A7, § 42.2.36A2. yāvanti für yācanti § 42.14.36B7. cīvaraṃcaśe für cīvaravaṃśe § 42.31.38A1. cāpiya wohl für vāpiya § 43.3.38A3. nityapavanā wohl für nityapacanā § 44.1.38B7. saṃca wohl für sarvaṃ bzw. sarvvaṃ § 54.13.46B1. cinīvaraṇaṃ für vinī° § 55.4.46B5. caritavyo für vār° § 56.1.47A2. vaṭavaṭa für caṭacaṭa § 56.1.47A3. vaḍavaḍā für caḍacaḍā (= § 56.3.47A4, § 56.5.47A6, § 56.6.47A6) § 57.11.47B7. vaḍavaḍa für caḍacaḍa ca ⇒ kiñ câpi, na câpi (1) “und; auch” § 1.2.1B3. navakā bhikṣū pṛcchanti: “āyuṣmānn, āgato saṃghasthaviro?” bhikṣū āhaṃsu: “āgato ca gato ca” (≒ § 4.2.4A7) § 8.7.9A5. vaktavyaṃ “kārehi dhūmaṃ. mā ca puno āmiṣacakṣu deśesi.” (≒ § 52.6.44B6) § 11.4.10B5. bhagavān āha “evaṃ ca yūyaṃ ... śayyāsanaṃ paribhuṃjatha. ...” § 20.1.19A5. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ ... khādasi § 20.8.19B4. evaṃ ca dāni yūyaṃ apramāṇāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādatha § 20.10.19B6. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ ... § 39.1.30B6. āraṇyakaṃ tāva śeyyāsanaṃ grāmāntikañ ca ekabhaktatarppaṇañ {ca} § 39.1.30B7. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ ... āgacchatha § 39.5.31A2. etaṃ dāni grāmāntikaṃ ca śeyyāsanaṃ āraṇyakañ ca śeyyāsanaṃ ca ekabhaktatarppaṇaṃ bhavati § 41.5.34A2. ime ... śramaṇakāḥ grāmānte iryāpathaṃ ṭhapayanti, nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti vikopenti § 41.14.34B3. ulkāyo ca dīpikāyo ca § 41.18.35A1. ahaṃ imasya dārakasya evaṃ ca evaṃ ca ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo 236  § 41.19.35A3. sthāneṣu ca aiśvaryaṃ labhanti ācāraguṇayuktāḥ (vs) § 41.19.35A3. ācāraṃ śikṣiyāṇa{ṃ} vinayaṃ ca (vs) (2 mal) § 41.22.35A6. pādopadhānakaṃ udaka-d<ak>āna<ka>ṃ pi ca uṣṭhapayitvā § 42.4.36A7. uṣṇena ca dhūmena ca santāpitā § 42.5.36B1. āvi caỿva raho ca § 42.24.37B2. yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tato āgacchantu § 42.24.37B2. tato yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tehi gantavyaṃ § 43.16.38B5. tac c’ eva{ṃ} cāturddiśaṃ sāṃghikaṃ ... § 44.1.38B6. aparo ca bhikṣuḥ virātre ... nirddhāvito bhavati § 44.2.39A1. tvaṃ ... cīvarakaṃ cīvarakoṇake gṛhṇiya acchosi ca (lies: va?) “caṭa” tti sarvvaṃ phāṭitaṃ § 45.4.39B6. tato grāmapraveśana<ka>ṃ ca nivāsanaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 45.5.39B7. grāmapraveśanakaṃ ca nivāsanaṃ uvvelayitavyaṃ § 45.7.40A3. rātriprāvaraṇaṃ nivāsanaṃ ca āvellayitavyaṃ § 46.6.40B2. ekaṃ ca āvellayitavyaṃ dvitīyaṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ § 47.1.40B3. sārddhevihārikā ca antevāsikā ca odhyāyanti § 47.4.40B6. yadi tāva grīṣmakālo bhavati, dūre ca grāmo bhavati ... § 48.1.41A3. mañcā ca pīṭhāṃ ca sāpāśrayā ca dārakadārikāhi pādehi marddita- parimardditā ... § 48.2.41A5. mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca trepaśyakā ca pādehi marditavimarditā § 48.6.41B1. atha dāni aśrāddhakulaṃ bhavati ..., tato ca stūpikaṃ vā sāṃghikaṃ vā kāryaṃ adhīnaṃ bhavati, ... § 49.6.42B2. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati tasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajayituṃ ... et passim (2) “aber, jedoch”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. ca 1; SWTF, s.v. ca 3 § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa no ca dakṣiṇām ādiśati, na parikathāṃ karoti § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... sacet paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati anāttamano. <na> ca paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati citte āttamano abhiraddho § 32.2.27A5. āyuṣman, evacciro tava āgatasya, na ca me pādavandako upasaṃkramasi § 32.2.27A5. so dān’ āha “vanditā mayā tava pādā. tvaṃ ca mama na pratisaṃmodesi.” § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... lābhāgrayaśograprāpto, lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātaśayyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārāṇāṃ tatra ca anupaliptaḥ padmam iva jalena (3) “wenn, falls”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. ca 2; SWTF, s.v. ca 5 § 49.1.41B6. ahaṃ ca tatra kiñcid eva akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyāmi, mā kasyaci ācikṣesi (≒ § 49.2.42A5) ca für va (= eva) : § 34.3.28B3 ca für (’)va (= eva) : § 5.6.6B2 cakkalī~ (Pā) “Türvorhang” ☞ § 22.2, Anm. 1 § 22.2.20B7. tena hi cakkalī nāma karttavyā. cakkalī tāvad bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā naḍānām vā naṅgalānām vā kaṇḍānām vā rejjukāye vā sūtrikāye vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā. tathā karttavyā, yathā dīrghako na saṃsakkati § 22.2.21A1. vihārasya dvārasmiṃ upari trayo kīlakāni ākoṭayitavyā, tahiṃ cakkalī bandhitavyā § 22.3.21A1. nidhāpiyāṇa cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ kīlakehi bandhiyāṇa tato otaritavyaṃ § 22.4.21A1. tato vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ cakkalī utkṣipitavyā § 22.4.21A2. khaṭakhaṭāpayitavyā kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā tato paścāc cakkalī utkṣipi- tavyā § 22.4.21A2. (vihāraṃ ...) praviśiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osārayitavyā, dvāraṃ bandhitavyaṃ § 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apadu{cca}ritavyaṃ cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ § 22.6.21A3. vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, yadi <tā>va prabhātaṃ bhavati, cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ upari bandhitavyā § 22.7.21A3. nâpi kṣamati sā cakkalī adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggikā vā paluggikā vā prāṇakehi 237  vā khajjanti § 22.8.21A3. evaṃ cakkalīye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [III].25A6) cakra~ ⇒ āmiṣa-cakra~, dharmma-cakra~, bala-cakra~ § 34.6.28B6. duve cakrāṇi dharmmacakraṃ balacakraṃ ca √cakṣ ⇒ ā-√cakṣ, ā-cikṣa- cakṣu~, cakṣus~ ⇒ āmiṣa-cakṣu~ § 40.9.33A2. bhikṣusya cakṣu (Nom. pl. neut.; vgl. BHSG § 12.61) duḥkhanti § 51.6.44A3. “cakṣur anityā yāva mano anityan.” ti sthātavyaṃ caṃkrama~ (BHS, SWTF) (1) “Übung des Auf- und Abgehens” ⇒ dīrgha-caṃkramaṃ caṃkrama-, sthāna-caṃkrama- niṣadyāyoga~, sthāna-caṃkrama-niṣadyānuyoga~, sthāna-caṃkramānuyukta~ § 23.4.4.21B1. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ caṃkrama<ṃ> caṃkramituṃ pattholiṃ (lies: panth°?) dhunantena § 28.11.24A6. evaṃ caṃkrame pratipadyitavyaṃ § 30.6.25A3. rātrīye purimaṃ yāmaṃ uddeśaprayuktena svādhyāyaprayuktena sthānena caṃkrameṇa vītināmayitavyaṃ (2) “Weg zur Übung des Auf- und Abgehens” ⇒ caṃkrama-śīrṣa~ § 3.6.3B4. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kahiṃ bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthāna- śālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā occhedake caṃkrame vā niṣadyāya? § 12.10.11B5. varccakuṭī udupāno jantāko caṃkramā vṛkṣamūlā vihārakā grāhayitavyā § 12.16.12A4. navakehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi (Loc. pl.) niṣadyāhi abhyavakāśe vītinām-ayitavyaṃ § 39.28.32A5. ārāmehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi (Loc. pl.) niṣadyāhi sthānacaṃkrama- niṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ caṃkrama- (Intensiv von √kram) ⇒ anu-caṃkrama-, dīrgha-caṃkramaṃ caṃkrama- § 11.11.11A3. vastraṃ puggalikaṃ antarīkaraṇaṃ dadiya caṃkramati § 18.52.17B2. atha dāni dve caṃkramante, vṛddhatarako navatarako ca, ... § 23.4.4.21B1. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ caṃkrama<ṃ> caṃkramituṃ pattholiṃ (lies: panth°?) dhunantena § 23.4.4.21B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati ekenântena. atha khalu samantena caṃkramitavyaṃ § 23.6.3.21B3. glāno vā aglāno vā {anāpattiḥ}, kiṃ câpi caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ § 24.7.22A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ divāvihāraṃ gato caṃkramati, śleṣmiko bhikṣu bhavati, ito ca <ito ca> cchorayanto caṃkramati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 28.2.24A2. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, evaṃ ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato caṃkramasi § 41.32.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi caṃkrama{n}ti bhūyo dhovitavyā § 28.3.24A3. evaṃ caṃkramitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [III].25A7); vgl. § 28.11. evaṃ caṃkrame pratipadyitavyaṃ § 28.3.24A3. nâyan tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato caṃkramituṃ § 28.4.24A3. nâpi kṣamati stūpam vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ, saṃghaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ, upādhyāyācāryam vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ § 28.5.24A3~4. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā sārddhaṃ caṃkramati, <na kṣamati> upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya atirekaṃ caṃkramituṃ. nâpi kṣamati samaṃ caṃkramayituṃ. atha khalu dve trayo vā padāni <ni>hīnakena caṃkramitavyaṃ § 28.6.24A4. saṃghamadhye vā caṃkramati, “mā caṃkramāhî”ti uktena na caṃkrami- tavyaṃ § 28.9.24A5. nâpi kṣamati veśikāsāmantakena caṃkramituṃ. nâpi kṣamati dyutikaraśālā- sāmantakena caṃkramituṃ, vadhabandhanāgārasāmantena caṃkramituṃ § 28.10.24A5~6. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe caṃkramituṃ. atha khalu cchannaprākaṭe pradeśe caṃkramitavyaṃ § 29.4.24B2. utthipitvā (vermutlich für *utthihitvā) vā ekānte caṃkramitavyaṃ usw. caṃkrama-śīrṣa~# “Ende des Weges zur Übung des Auf- und Abgehens”; vgl. Pā. caṅkamana-sīsa (PTSD, s.v., sīsa) 238  § 24.8.22A4. caṃkramaśīrṣe vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thālikā vā kuṭaṃ mallakaṃ vā thape- tavyaṃ. tahiṃ kheṭo cchorayitavyo caṃgerī~ “Korb” ⇒ khajjaka-caṃgerī~, vanaphala-caṅgerī~, haritakī-caṅgerī~ § 43.1.38A2. ... bhaktapīṭhikā māṇikaṃ caṃgeriyo śuṣyāyo paṭalakā caṃcūrya- (Intensiv von √car) “herumstreichen” § 50.1.43A2. ayaṃ pi deśakālaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ gṛhītvā ārāmacārikāṃ caṃcūryati caṭa# “Krach, Knall” (Onomatoeticum); vgl. CDIAL 4570. *caṭa- “crackle” ⇒ caṭacaṭa, caḍacaḍā § 44.1.38B7. taṃ dāni tahiṃ cīvarakarṇṇake gṛhṇiya acchiyaṃ “caṭa” tti (Hs. caṭanti) sarvaṃ phāṭitaṃ § 44.2.39A1. tvaṃ ... cīvarakaṃ cīvarakoṇake gṛhṇiya acchosi ca (lies: va?) “caṭa” tti (Hs. caṭanti) sarvvaṃ phāṭitaṃ caṭacaṭa “Krach, Knall” (Onomatoeticum); vgl. CDIAL 4570. *caṭa- ⇒ caṭa, caḍacaḍa, caḍacaḍā § 56.1.47A2. te ... skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa (Hs. vaṭavaṭa)” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti § 56.4.47A5. nâpi kṣamati yathāsukhe kṛte utthiya niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.1.47B1. te ... upānahā nikkhāsiya ... “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭanti § 57.3.47B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... upānahā nikkhāsiya ... “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ caḍacaḍa (Pkt), *caḍacaḍā “Krach, Knall” (Onomatoetica); vgl. Pkt. caḍacaḍa, CDIAL 4570. *caṭa- ⇒ caṭa, caṭacaṭa § 56.1.47A3. niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā (Hs. vaḍavaḍā)” tti prasphoṭiya sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gacchanti § 56.3.47A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ okastena niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā (Hs. vaḍavaḍā)” tti prasphoṭayituṃ (≒ § 56.5.47A6) § 56.6.47A6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte niṣīdanakaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā (Hs. vaḍavaḍā)” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.11.47B7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā pādāṃ dhovantena upānahāyo “caḍacaḍa (Hs. vaḍavaḍa)” tti prasphoṭayituṃ caṇḍa~ § 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ (“Hier ist der Teufel los!” ? ☞ § 31.17[Text], Anm. 1) ...” § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he nāvā <mucyati> pañcavarṣika <pravṛttaṃ> caṃḍa<ṃ> (Hs. ḍaṃya) muktaṃ (Hs. dukkaṃ) śramaṇa ... (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti § 31.32.26B6. amutra śunakhā caṇḍāḥ. amukaṃ aśrāddhakulaṃ § 49.5.42B1. anekāye ... caṇḍo vā śvāno caṇḍo vā goṇo āgaccheya caṇḍa-vidhavā~# “leidenschaftliche Witwe” § 8.7.9A4. asukāto veśikākulāto caṃḍavidhavāye (Hs. va<ṃ>ḍa{ṃ}vidhavāye) sthūla- kumārīye paṇḍakasya asukāye bhikṣuṇīye § 52.6.44B5. (praṇītabhojana~ ...) asukāye ceṭikāye dinnaṃ. asukāye caṇḍavidhavāye dinnaṃ. asukena paṇḍakena dinnaṃ. asukāye sthūlakumārīye dinnaṃ. ... catur~ § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa ... § 1.6.1B5. catvāri pārājikā gāthāś ca śiṣṭakam abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā (≒ § 2.10.3A3) § 1.12.2A6. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikāṃ dharmmāṃ uddiśiyānaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa- śrutikāye gāthāye ca § 20.10.19B6. tena hi śeṣāś catvāri aṅgulāni dantakāṣṭhasya varjyaṃ karttavyaṃ § 20.11.19B7. evaṃ tāva khādayitavyaṃ yāva dantakāṣṭhasya catvāri aṅgulāni avaśiṣṭāni § 23.4.1.21A7. yo dāni jyeṣṭhako bhavati vihāro ... catvāri (Nom. neut.) pratipādakā (Nom. pl. masc.; vgl. BHSG § 6.14) karttavyā § 29.3.24B1. dve nāgā catvāri nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti, catvāri aṣṭa ... anuparivārya niṣīdanti § 41.10.34A6. catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni § 12.15.12A2. caturṇṇāṃ pañcānām vā janānāṃ eko vihārako uddiśitavyo 239  § 53.6.45A5. catuhi (Loc. pl.; vgl. BHSG § 19.18; BLSF II 373.6) prāsādasya koṇe koṇe dīpako prajvālayitavyaḥ usw. caturaśraka~ (Skt), caturasraka~ (BHS) “viereckiges Kissen”#(?) ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 4 ⇒ caturasra~ (2) § 14.4.13A3. yaṃ tahiṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati kocavakā vā urṇṇīyo vā caturasrakā vā kumbhīyo vā kaṭāhakāni vā sarvvaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ otāretavyaṃ § 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo vā bisio vā caturasrakā vā omayilomayilā bhavanti pāṭitavipāṭitā § 14.16.13B5. pīṭhasyôpari yaṃ tatra jarjarabisi vā jarjaracaturaśrako vā taṃ sthāpayi- tavyaṃ § 15.5.14A2. mañcaṃ pīṭhaṃ pi caturasrakaṃ kurccaṃ bi<ṃ>bohanaṃ uddiṣṭaṃ bhavati § 17.10.15A4. śeyyāsanaṃ oṇṇiyo vā kocavakā vā prāvārā vā bisiyo vā caturasrako vā ... § 31.23.26A6. mañcapīṭhaṃ bisi caturasrako kuccaṃ bi<ṃ>bohanaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 31.29.26B4. mañcapīṭhaṃ bisī catu<ra>śrakaṃ kuccakaṃ bimbohanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ § 43.9.38A7. ete bhavanti vastrābharaṇakā vā pariśrāvaṇā vā caturasrakā vā sāharitvā ... caturasra~# (1) “viereckig”; vgl. Skt. caturaśra § 18.4.15B3. varccakuṭī ... parima<ṇḍa>laṃ vā caturasraṃ vā nicitavyā § 42.7.36B2. jentākaṃ karentena vaṭṭito vā karttavyo caturasro vā (2) “viereckiges Kissen” (?) ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 4 ⇒ caturaśraka~, caturasraka~ § 17.11.15A5. bisī sīvayitavyā, caturasrā vāpayitavyā, naṃgalāni utthāpayitavyāni caturasraka~ “viereckiges Kissen” (?) ⇒ caturaśraka~ caturtha~ Uddāna (IV).30B5. caturtho varggaḥ catur-diśaṃ “in alle vier Ecken” § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāṃ gacchiya caturddiśaṃ niṣīdanti caturddaśiko für cātur° : § 2.5.2B4 catur-bhāgam “in den vier Himmelsrichtungen”# ⇒ aṣṭabhāgam § 40.15.33A7. yadi aṣṭabhāga<ṃ> caturbhāgaṃ ca niṣaṇṇakā bhavanti, ekena madhyamaṃ vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ catuśrakaṃ für caturaśrakaṃ : § 31.29.26B4 catu-ṣaṣṭi~# “vierundsechzig”; vgl. Skt. catuḥ-ṣaṣṭi; Pā. catu-saṭṭhi § 29.3.24B1. dvātriṃśac catuṣaṣṭi nāgā anupa<ri>vārya niṣīdanti catuhi (Loc. pl. von catur) ⇒ catur~ candantasya für van° : § 8.12.9B1 Candrabhāgā~# Name eines Flusses ☞ § 26.8, Anm. 1 § 26.8.23B2. “he he he Gaṅgā ayaṃ sarvvaṃ” yāva “Mahī Candrabhāgā ayaṃ.” capala~ ⇒ a-capala~ capeṭikā~ (Skt) “Schlag mit der Hand” § 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti § 53.11.45B1. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ § 53.15.45B4. na dāni kṣamati mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā capeṭikāya vā nirvvāpayituṃ campaka-gulikā~# “Strauß von Campaka-Blumen” § 40.6.32B6. tehi bhājanehi prakṣipitavyā pāṭalāgulikā vā campakagulikā vā śarkarā vā Campā~ § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Campāyāṃ Gaṃgāpānīya √car ⇒ adhy-ā-cara-, anu-vi-cara-, uc-cāre-, upa-cīrṇṇa~, o-cara-, caṃcūrya- § 4.17.5B5. tām eva bhāryāṃ vareyā (Hs. car°) yâsyā śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) § 5.7.6B5. sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāya piṇḍāya caritavyaṃ § 31.31.26B5. yaṃ kālaṃ āgantukā piṇḍāye cariya (Hs. variya) vihāraṃ āgatā bhavanti, ... 240  § 36.6.29B6. te hi yūyaṃ niśrāya tathāgate brahmacaryaṃ caratha (Hs. °thā) mahato oghasya niḥsaraṇārthaṃ § 41.4.34A1. Veśālīṃ nagarīṃ piṇḍāya carati § 41.6.34A2. sthaviro ... Vaiśālīṃ piṇḍāya caritvā § 51.1.43B7. te dāni bhikṣū piṇḍāya caramāṇo antaraghare yāva uṭṭhāṇāto nirghoṭenti § 51.2.44A1. evaṃ piṇḍāye caritavyaṃ § 51.15.44A7. evaṃ piṇḍāya caritavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VI].45A1) § 52.3.44B2. eṣo dāni bhikṣu niśrayakaraṇīyo bhavati, nâpi dāni kṣamati piṇḍāya cariyāṇaṃ bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramituṃ § 52.5.44B4. ayaṃ ca piṇḍāya caritvā āgato bhavati ... caraṇaka~ ⇒ ārāma-caraṇaka~, vihāra-caraṇaka~ carathā für °tha : § 36.6.29B6 caritavyo für vār° : § 55.4.46B5 carima~ ⇒ a-pūrvva-carimam caruka~# oder carukā~# eine Art Rohr ? Vgl. Skt. cāruka (“der Same von Saccharum Sara” [PW, s.v.]) § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ ... vaṃśānāṃ vā nalānām vā na<ṃ>galānāṃ vā kāṇḍānām vā carukānām vā rohiṣāṇāṃ vā sūtrikāya vā rejjukāya vā ghaṇa<ṃ> vuṇitavyaṃ careyā für vareyā : § 4.17.5B5 carya~ ⇒ brahma-carya~ √cal ⇒ pra-calāya- calanaka~ “kurzer Unterrock” (pw.); vgl. BHSD, s.v. calana § 45.6.40A2. nâpi kṣamati heṣṭhena snānaśāṭikām vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakam vā osārayituṃ calanakaṃ yathā caṣaka~ “Becher” § 42.20.37A4. caṣakena vā karaṇḍikāya vā hastasaṃjñāya vā bhājanakena vā dātavyaṃ § 43.6.38A5. yaṃ tatra bhavati śatapotanako vā tāmrapātrā vā lohapātrā vā kaṭacchukā vā taṭṭukā vā caṣakā vā palīnakā vā ... cā für vā : § 11.5.10B6, § 25.13.22B7, § 47.7.41A1 cātur-daśika~ “auf den vierzehnten (Mondtag) fallend” (SWTF, s.v. cāturdaśika) ⇒ cātur-daśī~, pāñca-daśika~ § 1.5.1B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko pāñcadaśiko sandhipoṣadho bhaviṣyati? § 1.7.1B6. āyuṣman adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhi- poṣadho vā ... (≒ § 2.5.2B5) § 2.5.2B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko (Hs. catur°) vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhipoṣadho vā ... (= § 3.6.3B4) cātur-daśī~ “auf den vierzehnten (Mondtag) fallend” ⇒ cātur-daśika~, trayo-daśī~, pāñca-daśī~ § 12.11.11B6. trayodaśīyaṃ vā cāturddaśīyaṃ vā tena śayyāsanoddeśo karttavyo § 12.11.11B6. cāturddaśīyam vā pāñcadaśīyam vā śayyāsanoddeśo karttavyo cāturdiśa~ (BHS, SWTF) “die vier Himmelsrichtungen betreffend”; vgl. Pā. cātuddisa § 43.16.38B5. tac c’ eva{ṃ} cāturddiśaṃ sāṃghikaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ riktaparibhogaṃ na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ cāpiya wohl für vāpiya: § 42.31.38A1 √cāy ⇒ apa-cāyita~ cāra~ ⇒ piṇḍa-cāra~ cārantena für vāra<ya>ntena : § 2.8.2B7 cāraya-, cāre- für vāraya-, vāre- ⇒ vāraya-, vāre- cārika~ ⇒ piṇḍa-cārika~ cārika~ für vārika~ ⇒ dīpa-vārika~, pakṣa-vārika~, māsa-vārika~ cārikā~ ⇒ ārāma-cārikā~, vihāra-cārikā~ cārika~ für dhārika~ ⇒ pānīya-dhārikā~ ci (Pā) < Skt. cid ⇒ ka~ + ci, kadā-ci, kiñci, etad~ ... ka~ + ci, etad~ ... kiñci, ka~ + cid, kiñcid § 4.8.4B7. kahiñci ca gantukāmo bhavati, ... 241  § 49.1.41B7. so dāni na kahiṃci adhivāsayati √ci ⇒ uc-√ci, ni-√ci, saṃ-caya- cikkaṇa~ “verschmiert, verschmutzt, fettig” § 40.10.33A3. pātraṃ vā oṭṭhā cikkaṇaṃ bhavati, nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ § 44.11.39B1. cīvaraṃ ... cikkaṇaṃ (Hs. cikkanaṃ) vā apratisaṃskṛtaṃ vā omayila- mayilam vā pāṭitavipāṭitam vā § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati ... cikkaṇā (Hs. cikkannā) vā hastān nirmādituṃ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati ... cikkaṇā (Hs. cikkanā) vā oṣṭhāni (lies: oṣṭhā{ni}?) nirmādayi- tuṃ cikkana~ für cikkaṇa~ : § 44.11.39B1, § 48.8.41B4 cikkannā für cikkaṇā : § 48.8.41B4 cikhallikā~# “sumpfiger Boden”; vgl. cikhalla (“Sumpf”) ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 6 § 11.6.10B7. varṣāya ovṛṣṭo bhavati, cikhallikā (Hs. vi°) opūretavyā, vaṃghorikā dātavyā § 13.5.12B1. mūṣikokkārā vā cikkhallikā vā pratisaṃskārayitavyā § 13.7.12B2. mūṣa-ukkārā cikkhalikā (Hs. vilikhkhikā) pūretavyā § 23.8.21B6. cikkhal<l>ikā pūretavyā, vaṃghorikā dātavyā citta~ ⇒ amaitra-citta~, āghāta-citta~, duṣṭa-citta~, maitra-citta~, praduṣṭa-citta~, prasanna- citta~, hita-citta~ § 22.1.20B7. tasya dāni tena nivaraṇena sarvvarātriṃ cittaṃ na samādhānaṃ gacchati § 27.1.23B4. tasya dāni tena nīvaraṇena cittaṃ samādhānaṃ na gacchati (= § 27.2.23B5) § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo “cittaṃ samādhayiṣyāmî”ti (= § 28.1.24A1; ≒ § 28.2.24A2) § 27.2.23B5. aparo yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo “cittaṃ samādhayiṣyan” ti § 28.1.24A1. tasya dāni tena śabdena cittaṃ na samādhānaṃ gacchati § 30.4.25A2. na ca paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati citte āttamano abhiraddho § 53.10.45B1. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ no karenti” tti § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ (Hs. °itaṃ). atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinivaraṇaṃ me karentî”ti § 55.4.46B6. nâpi kṣamati geṇḍukaṃ vārayantasya cittaṃ pradūṣayituṃ. atha khalu cittaṃ pragopayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ mo karenti” tti cittaṃ für ca vṛttiṃ : § 49.7.42B4 cid ⇒ ka~ + cid, kiñcid cinīvaraṇaṃ für vinī° : § 54.13.46B1 cintantena für cinta<ya>ntena oder cintentena: § 41.31.35B7 cintaya- (Skt), cinte- (Pā) “denken, nachdenken, bedenken” § 39.9.31A7. cetiyaṃ vanditvā ekānte svādhyāyo karttavyo, dharmmam vā cintayantehi āsitavyaṃ § 41.31.35B7. na ... kṣamati ... middhāntaragatena vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ cinta<ya>ntena āsituṃ § 54.13.46B1. atha khalu cintetavyaṃ “bahukaro eṣo asmākaṃ vinīvaraṇaṃ karoti.” cira-kāla~ “lange Zeit” ⇒ cira-kālikam § 43.14.38B2. atha dāniṃ vṛddhatarakasya cirakālo bhavati, navatarakasya itvarakālikaṃ bhavati, ... cira-kālika~ “lange Zeit”# ⇒ cira-kāla~, itvara-kālikam § 43.14.38B3. ubhayeṣāṃ cirakālikaṃ bhavati, vṛddhatarakasya dātavyaṃ cira-rātrāya adv. “für lange Zeit, lange” § 4.18.5B7. hitāye vastupālānāṃ cirarātrāya kalpate (vs) cire adv. “lange (Zeit); langsam” ⇒ cireṇa § 4.11.5A4. atha dāni grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, cire hi kālo atikramati, ... cireṇa adv. “lange (Zeit); langsam” ⇒ cire § 5.10.7A1. grīṣmakālo varṣārātro vā bhavati, cireṇa kālo atikramati § 50.5.43B1. atha dāni grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, cireṇa kālo atikramati § 50.10.43B6. piṇḍapātanīhārako ca cireṇa āgacchati, kālo ca stokāvaśeṣo bhavati, nīhārakapiṇḍapātena ... panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ 242 cilimilikā~# “Fußbodenbelag”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. cilimilika; Pā. cilimikā, cimilikā; Pkt. cilimiligā, °miliyā ☞ § 17.10, Anm. 5 § 17.10.15A4. śeyyāsanaṃ oṇṇiyo vā kocavakā vā ... caturasrako vā bimbohanakā vā cilimilikā vā omayilamayilā vā pāṭitavipāṭitā vā acaukṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā cīrṇṇakena (cīvara-cīrṇṇakena) für (cīvara)-karṇṇakena : § 61.6.49A6 cīvara~ “Gewand, Mönchsgewand” ☞ § 18.26, Anm. 1 ⇒ pātra-cīvara~, saṃghāṭī-pātra-cīvara- dhāraṇa~, cīvaraka~ § 8.6.9A2. gocaraṃ praviśantasya grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni, vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi pratiśāmayitavyāni § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni § 8.9.9A6. cīvarāṇi dhovetavyāni sīvitavyāni (Hs. siñcit°) raṃjitavyāni § 18.26.16B3. nâpi kṣamati kalpikehi cīvarehi (☞ § 18.26, Anm. 1) prāvṛtehi varccakuṭīṃ praviśituṃ § 21.2.20A7. adrākṣīd ... anyataraṃ bhikṣuṃ bhūmau astariya cīvaraṃ sīvantaṃ § 21.2.20B1. bhagavan, idaṃ cīvaraṃ sivayāmi § 21.4.20B2. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣuḥ cīvaraṃ sīvitukāmo bhavati, upasthānaśālāyāṃ vā agniśālāyāṃ vā prāsāde vā prahāṇake <vā> kaṭhinaṃ prajñāpayitvā cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiyāṇaṃ taṃ cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 21.9.20B5. atha dāni kaṭhinaṃ na bhavati, mañcasya vā upari cīvaraṃ pīṭhasya vā upari cīvarakaṃ kariyāṇaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 31.21.26A4. yatra bhikṣūṇāṃ āsanaprajñaptir bhavati, tahiṃ cīvaraṃ (Hs. navakaṃ) tasmiṃ cīvarabisiyan thaviyāṇaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ vā upānahau vā thaviyāṇa, ... § 32.6.27B1. cīvaraṃ dhovantasya rajanikā pacantasya cīvarāṇi sīvantasya raṃjentasya ... § 32.7.27B3. <na kṣamati> ... nivāsantasya vā, cīvaraṃ prāvarantasya, ... § 40.16.33B1. na dāni kṣamati pāridhovaniyāto snāpituṃ (lies: snāyituṃ?) vā cīvaram vā dhovituṃ rañjanaṃ vā kaḍhituṃ § 41.22.35A5. tato grāmapraveśikaṃ cīvaraṃ prasphoṭitvā ... § 42.23.37B1. na kṣamati ātmano cīvarāṇi gṛhṇitvā parasya cīvarehi samākulīkṛtvā sthapetuṃ § 43.15.38B3. cīvaraṃ raṃjetvāna ... § 44.1.38B6. sa cīvaraṃ cīvara{ṃ}vaṃśāto kṛṣiyāṇaṃ (Hs. hūṣi°) patito § 44.3.39A1. evaṃ cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 44.12.39B1; Uddāna [V].39B2) § 44.4.39A2. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣūhi muktakaṃ cīvaraṃ sthapayituṃ § 44.5.39A2. cīvaraṃ sāharitvā abhyantaraparikarmma dviguṇ’ ante agrato karttavyo antarapīḍito § 44.5.39A3. cīvarehi ātmano cīvaraṃ veḍhayitavyaṃ § 44.5.39A3. ātmano cīvarehi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarā veḍhayitavyāḥ § 44.6.39A4. cīvaravaṃśakāto cīvarāṇi muṃciya ekaṃ dvitīyaṃ vā tṛtīyam vā kṛṣiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ patitaṃ § 44.7.39A5. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarāṇi upari sthāpayitavyāni § 44.7.39A6. ātmano cīvarāṇi upari sthāpayitavyāni § 44.8.39A7. rajo vātarajo vā ukkalikā cīvaraṃ vināśeti § 44.8.39A7. nêdāni upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarakehi ātmano cīvarā veḍhayitavyā § 44.8.39A7. ātmano cīvarehi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarā veḍhitavyā § 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇâprasannaṃ gṛhṇituṃ kheṭakaṭāham vā uccāra- kaṭāhakam vā prasrāvakumbhakaṃ vā § 44.11.39B1. na kṣamati cīvaraṃ adhyupekṣituṃ cikkaṇaṃ vā apratisaṃskṛtaṃ vā omayilamayilam vā pāṭitavipāṭitam vā § 45.4.39B6. cīvarāṇi prāvaritvā (Hs. pravāritvā) gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 46.1.40A4. grāmapraveśanakāni cīvarāṇi nikṣipitvā ... § 46.2.40A5. vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi nikṣipiya ... § 46.2.40A5. ekanivasanā grāmapraveśanakāni cīvarāṇi mārggatha § 46.2.40A5. grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi nikṣipitvā ... § 46.4.40A6. nâpi kṣamati ... grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi mārggituṃ 243  § 46.4.40A6. grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 46.4.40A7. prāvarantena grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 46.4.40A7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ § 46.5.40A7. grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ nikṣipitvā ... § 46.5.40A7. nâpi kṣamati ... ekanivasanakena vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ mārggituṃ § 46.5.40A7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastīkarttavyaṃ § 46.5.40B1. grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ § 47.1.40B2. te ... cīvaraṃ ka<ḍ>ḍhaṃtā praviśanti § 47.1.40B4. katham ... cīvarehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 48.1.41A4, § 48.2.41A6) § 47.3.40B6. evaṃ antaragharaṃ praviśantena cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 47.10.41A2) § 47.4.40B6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā antaragharaṃ praviśantena cīvaraṃ kaḍḍhantena praviśituṃ § 47.4.40B6. śīrṣe vā skandhe vā cīvaraṃ kṛtvā gantavyaṃ § 47.5.40B7. cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā ... § 47.6.40B7. parimaṇḍalaṃ cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā ... § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ dhūlīye pūritaṃ bhavati prasphoṭayitavyaṃ § 47.8.41A1. mā cīvaraṃ mā kaṇṭakaśākhā § 48.1.41A3. cīvarāṇi vināśayanti (lies: vināśiyanti?) (= § 48.2.41A5) § 48.1.41A4. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarāṇi dhoventā sīventā rañjentā talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ § 48.3.41A6. evaṃ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭehi cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ § 48.10.41B5. evaṃ antaraghare praviṣṭena cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VI]. 45A1) § 54.10.46A6. na dāni kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ‖ pe ‖ yāva atha khalu ekāṃsaṃ (Hs. ekāṃsīkṛtena) cīvaraṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ tena vāretavyaṃ cīvaraka~ (BHS) (1) “Gewand, Mönchsgewand” ⇒ cīvara~, vihāra-cīvaraka~ § 8.6.9A2. ātmano cīvarakaṃ gṛhṇiya pṛṣṭhato ’nugantavyaṃ § 18.9.16A1. tatra cīvaravaṃśā ... karttavyāḥ, yatra bhikṣū kalpikāni cīvarakāṇi vinikṣipiya varccakuṭī praviśanti § 21.6.20B4. tenâpi kaṭhinaṃ astarīya cīvarakaṃ yeva tathā sīvayitavyaṃ § 21.7.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinasmi ... gomayaṃ vā cīvarakāni vā śoṣayituṃ. atha khalu cīvarakaṃ sīvayitavyaṃ § 21.9.20B5. prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā pradeśakaṃ gomayena upalimpiya cīvarakaṃ sīvitavyaṃ. antamasato jānukānāṃ pi upari cīvarakaṃ thaviya sīvayitavyaṃ § 42.14.36B7. snāyantena cīvarakaṃ sāharitvā ekasthāne sthavitavyaṃ loḍhikena vā paṭikāya vā § 42.16.37A1. cīvarakāni sthāpitvā praviśitvā tasya tāva parikarmma karttavyaṃ § 44.1.38B7. cīvarakaṃ mārggati na labhati § 44.2.39A1. cīvarakaṃ cīvarakoṇake gṛhṇiya acchosi § 44.4.39A2. cīvarakāni sāharitāni kāriya ... cīvaravaṃśe sthapetavyāni § 44.6.39A4. bhikṣū kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya cīvarakāṇi (lies: cīvarakaṃ) mārggati § 44.6.39A4. so mārgganto {na} paśyati tasya cīvarakasya koṇakaṃ § 44.6.39A5. “mā cīvarakoṇako bhavatu. mā cīvarako (Nom. sg. neut.)” ti § 44.6.39A5. cīvarakaṃ dhoviya vihārakoṇake <tha>payitavyo § 44.6.39A5. taṃ cīvarakaṃ yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati ... § 44.7.39A6. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarakāni ... § 44.7.39A6. ātmano cīvarakāni heṣṭe sthapayitu<ṃ> § 44.8.39A7. nêdāni upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarakehi ātmano cīvarā veḍhayitavyā § 45.2.39B4. vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarakāni nikṣipitvā ... § 46.1.40A3. vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarakāni nikṣipiya ... (= § 46.4.40A6) § 46.1.40A4. ekanivasanā grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarakāni mārgganti § 46.1.40A4. ekanivāsanakā vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarakāni mārgganti 244  § 46.5.40A7. prāvaramāṇena vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvarakaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 46.6.40B1. cīvarakāṇāṃ dayārthaṃ anyaṃ leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ prāvaritukāmo bhavati ... § 46.6.40B1. cīvarakaṃ nikṣipiyāṇaṃ ... § 47.1.40B3. tān’ api dāni cīvarakāni omaïlamaïlāṇi pāṭitavipāṭitāni kriyanti § 47.1.40B3. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarakāṇi dhoventā siventā raṃjentā talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ § 47.2.40B4. cīvarakāni kaḍḍhantā gacchatha § 47.2.40B5. cīvarakāni dhovaṃtā sīvantā rañjentā ... (= § 48.2.41A6) § 47.2.40B5. kathaṃ ... cīvarake pratipadyitavyaṃ § 48.5.41A7. bhaginīyo āsanaṃ prajñapetha, mā cīvarakāni vinaśiṣyanti § 48.8.41B3. na kṣamati ... cīvarakena pratīcchituṃ sarppikhajjakaṃ vā tailakhajjakaṃ vā § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka karddamena vā nāsitaṃ bhavati (2) “(kleines) Stück Stoff, Gewandmaterial”#? § 21.9.20B5. atha dāni kaṭhinaṃ na bhavati, mañcasya vā upari cīvaraṃ pīṭhasya vā upari cīvarakaṃ kariyāṇaṃ sīvitavyaṃ cīvara-karṇṇaka~ (BHS [s. BHSD, s.v. -karṇaka]) “Ecke eines Mönchsgewandes”; vgl. Pā. cīvara- kaṇṇa ⇒ cīvara-koṇa~, cīvara-koṇaka~ § 44.1.38B7. taṃ dāni tahiṃ cīvarakarṇṇake gṛhṇiya acchiyaṃ “caṭa” tti sarvaṃ phāṭitaṃ § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, {yadi} cīvarakarṇṇakena (Hs. cīvaracīrṇṇakena) mukhaṃ pidhiya sukhākaṃ vijṛmbhitavyaṃ cīvara-karmman~# “Anfertigung von Gewändern”; vgl. Pā. cīvara-kamma~ § 40.16.33B1. bhikṣū cīvarakarmma karoṃti cīvara-kuṭī~ “Hütte für Gewänder”#; vgl. Pā. cīvara-kuṭī (“Hütte aus Gewändern”) § 42.10.36B4. bāhirato cīvarakuṭī karttavyā, nāgadantakavīthī karttavyā cīvara-koṇa~# “Zipfel eines Mönchsgewandes” ⇒ cīvara-koṇaka~, cīvara-karṇṇaka~, koṇa~ § 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti. cīvarakoṇenâpi nirvvāpenti § 53.11.45B1. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ § 53.15.45B4. na dāni kṣamati mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā capeṭikāya vā nirvvāpayituṃ § 61.7.49A7. cīvarakoṇena mukhaṃ pidhiya saṃprajānena vijṛmbhayitavyaṃ cīvara-koṇaka~# “Zipfel eines Mönchsgewandes” (Das Wort kommt auch in Mvu III 262.16, 18; 263.3, 264.2 vor) ⇒ cīvara-koṇa~, cīvara-karṇṇaka~, koṇaka~ § 44.1.38B7. sa cīvaraṃ ... sarvvaṃ karddamehi anupraviṣṭaṃ cīvarakoṇako avaśiṣṭo § 44.1.38B7. tena dāni mārggantena so cīvarakoṇako dṛṣṭo § 44.2.39A1. tvaṃ ... cīvarakaṃ cīvarakoṇake gṛhṇiya acchosi § 44.6.39A4. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ cīvarakoṇake gṛhṇiya “ḍu” tti acchituṃ § 44.6.39A5. “mā cīvarakoṇako bhavatu. mā cīvarako” ti cīvaracīrṇṇakena für cīvarakarṇṇakena : § 61.6.49A6 cīvaraṃcaśa~ für cīvaravaṃśa~ : § 15.7.14A3, § 42.14.36B7 cīvaraṃtarikāya für cīvarā° ⇒ cīvarāntarikā~ cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śayyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~#, cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śeyyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~# “die erforderlichen Dinge, nämlich Gewänder, Almosenspeisen und Arzneien für Krankheitsfälle”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. pariṣkāra; SWTF, s.v. cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śayanāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra; Pā. cīvara-piṇḍapāta- senāsana-gilānapaccayabhesajja-parikkhāra ⇒ jīvita-pariṣkāra~ § 36.6.29B6. bahukarā bhikṣavo brāhmaṇagṛhapatayo, yaṃ vo pratyupasthitā cīvara- piṇḍapātaśeyyāsanaglānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārehi § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... lābhāgrayaśograprāpto, lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātaśayyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārāṇāṃ cīvara-bis~# “Kissen (zur Ablage) von Mönchsgewändern” ☞ § 18.9, Anm. 3 ⇒ bis~ § 18.9.15B7. tatra cīvaravaṃśā vā cīvarabisi vā dīrghanāgadantā vā karttavyāḥ § 31.21.26A4. yatra bhikṣūṇāṃ āsanaprajñaptir bhavati, tahiṃ cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ cīvara- 245  bisiyan (Loc. sg. fem.; ☞ § 31.21[Text], Anm. 2, 3) thaviyāṇaṃ, ... cīvara-rajūṃ für cīvara-rajjūṃ : § 43.15.38B3 cīvara-rajju~ (Pā) “Wäscheleine für Mönchsgewänder” § 43.15.38B3. cīvararaj<j>ūṃ (Acc. sg. fem.!) na dāni cīvaraṃ raṃjetvāna tathā yeva vitanikā ujjhitvā gantavyaṃ cīvara-vaṃśa~# “Bambusstange für Mönchsgewänder”; vgl. Pā. cīvara-vaṃsa~ ⇒ cīvara- vaṃśaka~ § 14.7.13A6. yaṃ tatra śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ pīṭhasya upari sthāpayitavyaṃ cīvaravaṃśe sthāpayitavyaṃ bhittito muktaṃ § 15.7.14A3. praviśiya cīvaravaṃśo (Hs. cīvaraṃcaśo) tāva pratyavekṣitavyo § 18.9.15B7. tatra cīvaravaṃśā vā cīvarabisi vā dīrghanāgadantā vā karttavyāḥ § 30.5.25A3. dakṣiṇ<en>a śayyā prajñapetavyā, cīvaravaṃśasya heṣṭhato § 41.6.34A3. saṃghāṭīṃ ... abhyantareṇa dviguṇikāṃ kariya cīvaravaṃśe sthapayitvā ... § 42.14.36B7. cīvarakaṃ ... cīvaravaṃśe (Hs. cīvaraṃcaśe) vā thapetavyo jentākapīṭhe vā § 44.1.38B6. sa cīvaraṃ cīvara{ṃ}vaṃśāto kṛṣiyāṇaṃ (Hs. hūṣi°) patito § 44.4.39A2. cīvarakāni ... cīvaravaṃśe sthapetavyāni cīvara-vaṃśaka~# “Bambusstange für Mönchsgewänder” ⇒ cīvara-vaṃśa~ § 44.6.39A3. cīvaravaṃśakāto cīvarāṇi muṃciya ekaṃ dvitīyaṃ vā tṛtīyam vā kṛṣiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ patitaṃ cīvarāntarikā~# “Falten des Gewandes, Bausch des Gewandes”; < Skt. cīvara + antarikā ⇒ patrāntarikā~ § 40.13.33A5. apareṇa pānīyaghaṭikāṃ paṭicchantena cīvarāṃtarikāya (Hs. cīvara°) vā patrāntarikāye vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 48.8.41B4. labhyā dāni cīvarāntarikāya khakkhaṭāni phalāni gṛhnituṃ badarāṇi vā kolakāni ... √cur ⇒ coraya- cūrṇṇa~ § 25.3.22B2. nâpi kṣamati karkaśena vā cūrṇṇena karkaśena vā gomayena nirmmādayi- tuṃ § 42.2.36A3. sarvvaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ upayojiya ... jentākaṃ apaduriya nirddhāvitāḥ § 42.3.36A4. te ... cūrṇṇaṃ mārgganti na labhanti § 42.20.37A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cūrṇṇaṃ rāśīya upanetuṃ § 42.24.37B2. yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tato āgacchantu § 42.24.37B2. tato yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tehi gantavyaṃ § 42.26.37B4. tailaṃ bhaviṣyati, cūrṇṇaṃ bhaviṣyati, udakaṃ bhaviṣyati. <s>nāyaṃtu āyuṣmanto § 42.27.37B4. cūrṇṇaṃ praveśayitavyaṃ § 42.28.37B5. yadi tāva alpaṃ tailaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ bhavati, ... § 42.31.37B7. cūrṇṇaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati praveśayitavyaṃ ce / th : § 20.15.20A2. thatiyātigṛhe für cetiyābhigṛhe ceṭikā~ “Dienerin” § 52.6.44B5. (praṇītabhojana~ ...) asukāye ceṭikāye dinnaṃ ceḍḍo für veḍḍo : § 18.34.16B7 cetavyaṃ für siṃcetavyaṃ : § 18.12.16A1, 2 Ceti~ (BHS, Pā); vgl. Skt. Cedi ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 3 ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-Kośala- Kuru-Pañcāla-Ceti-Vatsa-Matsya-... cetiya~ (BHS[Mvu, LV], Pā) ⇒ nagara-cetiya~ § 8.12.9B1. cetiyaṃ vandantasya pṛṣṭhato ’nugantavyaṃ § 18.32.16B6. eṣo bhikṣuḥ cetiyaṃ vandaṃto uśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 18.37.17A1. ete dve bhikṣū cetiyaṃ (Hs. ve°) vandanti, yaṃ paśyanti tatra ... § 19.30.18B5. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandanto praśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 20.15.20A2. nâpi kṣamati cetiyaṃ vandantena ... khādituṃ § 20.19.20A4. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ (Hs. vet°) vandati ... § 31.15.26A1. cetiyāṇaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi upānahā omuñcitvā kāṣṭhakena gṛhṇitvā 246  praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.21.26A5. akalpiyakarakīto hastā nirmmādiyāṇa kalpiyakarakīto prakṣāliya tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ § 31.22.26A5. cetiyaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ, yatra nevāsikā bhavanti tatra gantavyaṃ § 32.6.27B2. hastā nirmmādantasya, cetiyaṃ vandantasya, pātraṃ nirmmādentasya, ... § 39.5.31A3. na dāni kṣamati ... cetiyaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ bhuñjituṃ § 39.9.31A6. cetiyaṃ (Hs. vetiyaṃ) vanditvā ekānte svādhyāyo karttavyo, dharmmam vā cintayantehi āsitavyaṃ § 39.13.31B1. cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo. cetiyaṃ vistareṇa vandiyāṇaṃ, ... (= § 39.25. 32A3) § 39.16.31B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ... āgacchiya pādāṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo; vgl. § 39.28.32A5. āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ukkasitavyaṃ pādāṃ prakṣāliya hastāṃ nirmmādiya stūpaṃ vistareṇa vanditavyaṃ § 39.16.31B5. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ ... gaṇḍī<yaṃ> āhatāyaṃ vandiya cetiyaṃ <bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ>; vgl. § 39.28. 32A6. vihāraṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ āraṇyakāṃ bhikṣūṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ ... gaṇḍīyaṃ āhatāyaṃ stūpaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ § 39.18.31B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjituṃ § 39.21.32A1. atha dāni nâgacchanti, deśakāle gaṇḍiṃ āhaniya cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjitavyaṃ § 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā cetiya-gṛha~# “Halle des Cetiya” ☞ § 18.35, Anm. 6 ⇒ cetiya-ghara~ § 19.33.18B6. sarvvatra cetiya{ṃ}gṛhe gandhakārṣī vā tailakārṣī vā dātavyā cetiya-ghara~ (Pā) “Halle des Cetiya” ☞ § 18.35, Anm. 6 ⇒ cetiya-gṛha~, ghara~ § 18.35.17A1. yadi tāva vibhavo bhavati, cetiyaghare tailakārṣī vā dātavyā cetiyābhigṛha~# (cetiya-abhi°) “das Gebiet eines Cetiya” ☞ § 18.52, Anm. 1 ⇒ stūpābhigṛha~, saṃghābhigṛha~, stūpa-vigraha~, saṃgha-vigraha~ § 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo, yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso gaccheyā § 20.15.20A2. nâpi kṣamati cetiyaṃ vandantena oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ohitahastena vā cetiyābhigṛhe (Hs. thatiyātig°) vā prāsāde vā khādituṃ cetovaśi-paramapārami-prāpta~ (SJW) “die höchste Vollkommenheit in der Beherrschung des eigenen Geistes erreicht habend”; vgl. Pā. cetovasi-ppatta ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 4 § 62.1.49B4. cetovaśiparamapāramiprāptā punar bbuddhā bhagavanto yehi yehi vihārehi ākāṃkṣanti, tehi tehi vihārehi viharanti cela-khaṇḍa~# “Stoffstück”; vgl. Pā. coḷa-khaṇḍa~ (z.B. Mil. 169. 31); vgl. auch leṅkaṭa-khaṇḍa~ § 41.22.35A6. celakhaṇḍena rajo prasphoṭitavyo cela-paṭṭa~# “Stoffstreifen”; vgl. Pā. cela-paṭṭikā; Pā. cola-paṭṭa (Vin II 266, 12; Mil. 74.2, 4), Pkt. cola-paṭṭa (Ratnach, s.v.) § 40.5.32B6. acchehi vā celapaṭṭehi (Hs. celaṣaṭṭehi) vā bandhitavyāyo cella-parikarmman~# “das Reinigen von Stoffen/Kleidern”; vgl. Pkt. cella < Skt. caila ☞ § 32.6, Anm. 5 § 32.6.27B2. cīvarāṇi sīvantasya raṃjentasya, cellaparikarmmam (Hs. ccall°) vā karentasya, ... cokṣa~ ⇒ a-cokṣa, caukṣa~, a-caukṣa~ cobhayaṃ für co<ra>bhayaṃ : § 39.8.31A5 cora~ “Dieb; Räuber” ⇒ caura~, ocoraka~ § 18.47.17A7. nâpi dāni apratisaṃviditena uvvattitavyaṃ, mā “coro vā ocorako vā” tti hanyeyā (≒ § 19.39.19A2) § 31.5.25B4. atha dāni corā saprasādā bhavanti, vṛddhehi agrato gantavyaṃ ... § 39.20.31B7. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, ... jānitavyaṃ, anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparo<dho> vā bhave corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ, yathā nâgacchantîti 247  § 41.18.35A1. tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati § 41.18.35A2. te dāni corā nirddhāpitāḥ § 41.19.35A3. corehi gṛhīto saṃto mukto ācārakāraṇāt (vs) § 51.6.44A2. na dāni ito vā ito vā nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “corā vā ocorakā bhavanti.” cora-bhaya~ (Pā) “Gefahr durch Räuber” ⇒ caura-bhaya~ ☞ § 1.12, Anm. 3 § 2.10.3A3. siṃhabhayam vā vyāghrabhayam vā corabhayam vā bhavati § 3.11.4A3. corabhayam vā na bhavati siṃhabhayaṃ vā vyāghrabhayaṃ vā na bhavati § 6.6.7B3. anekāye tahiṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya rājabhayaṃ vā corabhayam vā ... § 31.5.25B4. atha dāni vyāḍabhayaṃ vā corabhayaṃ vā bhavati, vṛddhaṃ bālaṃ madhye kṛtvā gantavyaṃ § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni siṃhabhayaṃ vā bhava{ṃ}ti vyāghrabhayaṃ vā corabhayaṃ vā, ... kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 39.8.31A5. anekāye āraṇyakānāṃ co<ra>bhayaṃ vā bhaveya udakabhayaṃ vā siṃhabhayaṃ vā vyāghrabhayaṃ vā coraya- “berauben” § 41.18.35A2. anyaṃ vayaṃ corayiṣyāmaḥ cora-senāpati~# “der Anführer einer Diebesbande” ⇒ senāpati~ § 41.15.34B4. yo teṣāṃ corasenāpatiḥ so gṛhasya madhyāgāre upaviṣṭaḥ § 41.15.34B4. so dāni corasenāpatiḥ pipāsitaḥ § 41.15.34B5. so dāni supratyavekṣitaṃ kariya corasenāpatisya all[ī]no § 41.16.34B6. tenâpi dāni corasenāpatinā ... sarvvam upalakṣitaṃ § 41.18.35A1. so dāni corasenāpati pānīyaṃ pibiya tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati ... § 41.21.35A5. anyo so corasenāpati eṣo brāhmaṇo colaka~ (Pā) “Lappen” § 41.22.35A6. colakaṃ dhovitvā niṣpīḍitvā upānahā nirmmādayitavyā § 41.22.35A6. colakaṃ niṣpīḍitvā thapetavyo caukṣa~ ⇒ a-caukṣa~, a-cokṣa § 40.5.32B6. yathā pānīyaṃ caukṣaṃ bhaveya § 40.10.33A3. caukṣaṃ pānīyaṃ vāretavyaṃ caukṣa-samudācāra~# “(jemand) mit tadellosen Sitten” ⇒ samudācāra~ § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako caukṣasamudācāro bhājanaṃ gṛhṇiya parimārjiya ... caura~ ⇒ cora~, ocoraka~ § 41.19.35A4. raudrā lohitapāṇī caurā tuṣyanti tādṛśā santā (vs) caura-bhaya~# “Gefahr durch Räuber” ⇒ cora-bhaya~ ☞ § 1.12, Anm. 3 § 1.12.2A5. yadi tāva ... na vā siṃhabhayam vā vyāghrabhayam vā caurabhayam vā <bhavati>, ... § 1.12.2A5. atha dāni ... siṃhabhayam vā vyāghrabhayam vā caurabhayam vā, ... cc / cch : § 51.12.44A6. ucchāreti für uccāreti ? cc / v ⇒ c / v, cc / vv § 46.4.40A7. āccellayitavyaṃ für āvellayitavyaṃ (= § 46.5.40A7, § 46.5.40B1) cc / vv ⇒ c / v, cc / v § 19.39.19A2, § 49.5.42B1, 2. uccatta-, uccanta für uvvatta- (⇒ uv-vatta-) § 45.4.39B6, § 45.5.39B7, § 45.6.40A1, § 45.7.40A3, § 46.4.40A7, § 46.5.40B1. uccel(l)aya- für uvvel(l)aya- § 45.6.40A2. occelaya- für ovvelaya- § 51.7.44A3. occarakaṃ für ovvara° (= § 51.8.44A4, § 51.11.44A5, § 51.14.44A7) § 60.4.48B6. uccaṭṭayitavyaṃ für uvvaṭṭ° ccallaparikarmmam für cella° : § 32.6.27B2 248  CH cch / cc ⇒ cc / cch cch / tk : § 12.8.11B4. mūṣika-ucchirā für °a-utkirā cch / tth : § 12.2.11A7. ucchitakāṃ für utthitakāṃ § 12.6.11B3. cchapayitavyā für tthap° § 18.15.16A3. potthitaṃ für pocchitaṃ § 19.33.18B6. uttacchiya für uttatthiya cch / sth : § 41.1.33B3. sthāriya für cchoriya cch / hy : § 26.1.23A5. lecchaṃ wohl für lehyaṃ cchagala~ ⇒ Śiva-cchagala~, cchagalaka~ cchagalaka~ “Ziegenbock” ⇒ Śiva-cchagala~ § 18.2.15B1. yathā uṣṭrā vā goṇā vā garddabhā vā cchagalakā vā evam ime śramaṇā prakīrṇṇakasya uśvāsaṃ karenti (≒ § 19.2.17B4) cchaḍḍaya-# “seine Notdurft verrichten”; < Skt. √chṛd (“auswerfen; erbrechen”); BHSD, s.v. chaḍḍeti (“abandons”) ☞ § 18.38, Anm. 2 ⇒ cchandita~, vi-cchaddaya- § 18.38.17A2. ete dve bhikṣū gocaraṃ praviśanti, prakṛty’ eva tāva cchaḍḍayitavyaṃ cchatti# “rasch, sofort” (Onomatopoeticum) ☞ § 18.25, Anm. 4; § 23.4.2, Anm. 2 ⇒ cchitti § 18.25.16B3. atha khalu samudācāraṃ kariya utthiya cchatti gantavyaṃ (Hs. man°) § 18.28.16B4. prahāṇasya āmantriyāṇa cchatti varccakuṭīyaṃ gantavyaṃ § 19.11.18A3. atha khalu prasrāvaṃ kṛtvā cchatti utthitavyaṃ § 19.27.18B4. agniśālāyāṃ vā upasthānaśālāyām vā upaviṣṭasya samudācāro bhavati, cchatti niṣkramitavyaṃ § 54.9.46A5. yadi dakṣiṇato sthito bhavati, vāmajānukena tena cchatti (Hs. °anti) pratyupasthitavyaṃ ghaṭ<ṭ>itavyā cchatra~ § 34.4.28B4. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryante<na> upānahāhi vā obaddhāhi kṣatriya- parṣāyam upasaṃkramituṃ (≒ § 35.4.29A4, § 36.4.29B3) § 34.4.28B4. ekānte cchattraṃ nikṣipiya upānahāy’ omuṃciya tato allīyitavyaṃ cchatropānahā~# (°tra-upā°) “Sonnenschirm und Sandalen” § 35.4.29A4. cchatropānahāṃ ekamante sthapiya brāhmaṇaparṣāyām upasaṃkrami- tavyaṃ § 36.4.29B4. ekatam’ ante cchatropānahāṃ nikṣipiya gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā 1 √chad ⇒ cchādaya-, cchāde-, prati-cchanna~, prati-cchādaya- 2 √chad ⇒ cchandaya- cchadana~ ⇒ apakka-cchadana~, apakva-cch°, iṣṭakā-cch°, kabhalla-cch°, kabhallakā-cch°, tṛṇa- cch°, phalaka-cch°, mṛttikā-cch°, sudhā-cch° cchanti für cchatti : § 54.9.46A5 cchanda~ § 12.9.11B4. yo na cchandāye na doṣāye na mohāye na bhayāye, prajñaptaṃ ca jānāti cchandaya- “anbieten” § 31.29.26B4. yadi tāva purebhakte āgatā bhavanti, purebhaktikena cchandayitavyāḥ § 31.29.26B4. deśakāle āgatā bhavanti, bhaktakṛtyena ccha<nda>yitavyāḥ § 31.29.26B4. vikāle āgatā bhavanti, vekālikena (Hs. vikā°) cchandayitavyāḥ § 31.29.26B4. pādamrakṣaṇena cchandayitavyā § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāva purebhakte āgato bhavati, purobhaktikena cchandayitavyo. deśakāle āgato bhavati, bhaktakṛtyena ccha<nda>yitavyo. vikāle āgato bhavati, vekālikena cchandayitavyo § 50.9.43B5. atha dāni so jalpati “āyuṣman, bhuṃja tvaṃ. bhuktaṃ mayê”ti, cchandayitavyo vaktavyo “ūnakaṃ pūrehi. yaṃ te rucyati taṃ khādehi.” cchandita~# “zurückgelassen; ausgeworfen”; vgl. Skt. √chṛd (“auswerfen; erbrechen”); BHSD, s.v. chaḍḍeti (“abandons”), Pkt. chaḍḍaï / chaṃḍaï (“wegwerfen”) ☞ § 4.15, Anm. 3; § 19.37, Anm. 1 ⇒ chaḍḍaya-, vi-cchaddaya- § 4.15.5B1. ayaṃ kumāro śivapathikāya cchandito (vs) 249  § 6.13.8A3. <ayaṃ> kumāro śivapathikā (? Hs. si{|}vapasikā) cchandito (? Hs. cchoto) (vs) § 19.37.19A1. kena imaṃhi panthe praśvāso kṛto rudhiraṃ viya cchanditaṃ? cchandiyāṇaṃ für cchinnagaṇṭhikā kariyāṇaṃ? : § 13.11.12B4 ☞ § 13.11, Anm. 3 cchanna~ “Platz unter einem Dach” ⇒ tṛṇa-cchanna~ § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) varṣeṇa ovarṣīyati vātātapena vā vināśīyati, cchanne praveśayitavyaṃ (Hs. praviśa°) ... prasphoṭiyāna cchanne praveśayitavyaṃ § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) pakṣīhi ohayiyate prasphoṭiyāna cchanne praveśayitavyaṃ § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... kākaśakuntehi vā ohayiyanti, cchanne sthapitavyā § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyanti, cchanne thapitavyā § 16.9.14B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... kākaśakuntakehi ohayiyanti cchanne sthāpayitavyāḥ (≒ § 17.12.15A7) § 19.25.18B3. tumbakaṃ bhavati, kalyato yeva ujjhitvā cchanne (Hs. °nnā) sthavitavyaṃ *cchanna-pradeśa~ “abgelegener Teil (des Hauses)” ⇒ ati-gupta~, ati-nikuñja~, atiniḥśabda- pradeśa~, ati-bhuṇḍa~, cchanna-prākaṭa~, pracchanna-prākaṭa~ § 18.43.17A5. cchannapradeśe (Hs. °praveśe) upaveṣṭavyaṃ cchanna-prākaṭa~# “abgelegen, doch sichtbar (od. öffentlich)” ⇒ pracchanna-prākaṭa~, ati- gupta~, ati-nikuñja~, atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~, ati-bhuṇḍa~, cchanna-pradeśa~ § 27.5.23B6. nâyaṃ kṣamati atigupte vā atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe tiṣṭhituṃ. atha khalu cchannaprākaṭe pradeśe sthātavyaṃ § 28.10.24A5. atha khalu cchannaprākaṭe pradeśe caṃkramitavyaṃ § 29.9.24B5. atha khalu cchannaprākaṭe pradeśe niṣīditavyaṃ cchapayitavyā für tthap° : § 12.6.11B3 cchayitavya~ für cchandayitavya~ : § 31.29.26B4, § 32.12.27B5 cchavi~ “Haut” § 44.11.39B1. kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ raṃjitavyaṃ sīvitavyaṃ yathā cchavi cchaṣitavyāḥ für ccha<nda>yitavyāḥ : § 31.29.26B4 cchātāyāṃ für cchāyāyāṃ : § 18.8.15B7 cchādanikā~# “das Decken (des Daches)” ☞ § 31.33, Anm. 5 ⇒ cchādaya-, cchāde- § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni ... bhikṣū ca paliguddhakā bhavanti, cchādanikā (Hs. cchāyan°) vā lepanikā vā karenti, kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 46.6.40B1. etāni dāni saṃghasya uṭṭhānakāni bhavanti cchādanikā vā lepanikā vā sammārjanako vā cchādaya- (Skt), cchāde- (Pā) “decken, bedecken” ⇒ cchādanikā~ § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) iṣṭakāhi vā upalair vvā cchādayitavyā § 18.4.15B4. (varccakuṭī ...) upari iṣṭāhi mṛttikāya ca cchādayitavyā{ni} § 18.6.15B4. śīrṣan tatrôpari cchādetavyaṃ cchāyanikā für cchādanikā? : § 31.33.26B7 cchāyā~ § 1.5.1B5. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kettika pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi (☞ § 1.5, Anm. 3)? § 3.6.3B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kati pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi? § 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... śoṣayitvā cchāyāyāṃ (Hs. cchātā°) sthāpayitavyāni cchitti# “sofort, rasch” (Onomatopoeticum); < *chit + iti? ☞ § 23.4.2, Anm. 2; § 18.25, Anm. 4 ⇒ cchatti § 23.4.2.21B1. dīpakaṃ praveśeti ... śeyyāṃ prajñapayantenaỿva cchitti nikkālayitavyo √chid ⇒ cchinna~ § 20.11.19B6. tato bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya kuccakaṃ śastrakena cchinditavyaṃ § 51.14.44A7. evaṃ yaṃ yaṃ kāryyaṃ cchindiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, ... cchidra~ “durchlöchert” § 25.16.23A3. nâpi kṣamati pātraṃ adhyupekṣituṃ phalakena vā khajjantaṃ khaṇḍaṃ vā cchidram vā cchidraka~# Vgl. Pā. chiddhaka (1) “Loch, Öffnung, Abfluß” § 19.4.17B6. mallatalakā khannā{ṃ} khanitavyā, madhye cchidrakaṃ karttavyaṃ 250  (2) “voller Schlaglöcher” § 31.13.25B7. na dāni labhyā anyena gantuṃ. racchā cchiddrakā bhavati, anāpattiḥ cchidra-mallaka~# “Platte mit einem Loch” § 19.16.18A5. praśvāsaghaṭo sthāpayitavyo tasyôpari cchidramallakaṃ (Hs. °kā) dātavyaṃ § 19.22.18B2. ghaṭasyôpari cchidramallakaṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.22.18B2. cchidramallakasyôpari kuntako vā alābutumbuko vā thapayitavyo cchinna~, cchinnaka~ § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi ... mṛtakam vā bhaveya, sandhi vā cchinno, agnidāho vā rājakulāto vā upadravo § 15.8.14A3. mañcakaś ... yadi tāva vibhagnako vā cchinnako vā bhavati, cchinna- gaṇṭhi<kā> karttavyā cchinnakaṇṭhi für cchinnagaṇṭhikā : § 15.8.14A3 cchinna-gaṇṭhikā~#, cchinna-gaṇḍiyakā~# “Ausbesserung der Schäden” (wörtl. “Knüpfen des Gerissenen” ?) ☞ § 13.11, Anm. 1, § 16.9, Anm. 4 ⇒ gaṇṭhi~ § 13.11.12B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā bhagnakā bhavanti, cchinnagaṇṭhikā karttavyā § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... prāṇakehi khajjanti cchandiyāṇaṃ (lies: cchinna- gaṇṭhikā kariyāṇaṃ? ☞ § 13.11, Anm. 3) pratipādikehi thapayitavyā § 15.8.14A3. mañcakaś ... yadi tāva vibhagnako vā cchinnako vā bhavati, cchinnagaṇṭhi<kā> (Hs. °kaṇṭhi) karttavyā § 16.9.14B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā bhagnā vā bhavanti, cchinnagaṇṭhikā karttavyā § 16.9.14B4. (mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... ) prāṇakehi khajjanti, cchinnagaṇḍiyakā kariya pratipādakehi sthāpayitavyā § 17.12.15A7. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... prāṇakehi khajja<ṃ>ti, yo yeva paśyati, tena yyeva cchinnagaṇṭhikā kariyāṇa pratipādakehi sthāpayitavyā cchinna-gaṇḍiyakā~ ⇒ cchinna-gaṇṭhikā~ cchinna-bhakta~ (BHS) “ohne Speise” ⇒ bhakta-ccheda~ § 50.7.43B3. atha paśyati “upakaṭṭho kālo antāntiko. na śakyaṃ sakāle saṃbhāvayituṃ. mā dāni ubhaye cchinnabhaktā bhaviṣyāma”, tena paribhuñjitavyaṃ cchejja~ ⇒ kaṭṭārikā-cchejja~ ccheda~ ⇒ bhakta-ccheda~ cchoḍaya- (BHS[Mvu]) “beseitigen”; vgl. AMg, JM choḍi(y)a ⇒ cchoraya- § 18.35.16B7. tenâpi dāni uśvāsaṃ kariya mallakena vā koḍillena vā kaṭhallena vā cchoḍiyāṇa so pṛthivīpradeśo gomayena udvarttayitavyo cchoto für cchandito? : § 6.13.8A3 cchorantaka~# “verlassend, ausspuckend”; cchoranta + Suffix ka; vgl. BHSG § 22.29 § 24.11.22A6. atha dāni kṣudro kheṭo, upāṃsulā ca bhūmī bhavati, cchorantako yyeva paryādānaṃ gacchati. kiṃ câpi na marddati, anāpattiḥ cchoraya- (BHS) “beseitigen, wegwerfen, verlassen”; vgl. CDIAL 5060 ⇒ cchoḍaya-, cchoritaka~ § 1.1.1B2. vayan tāva karmmāntān cchoriya (Hs. cchoraya) āgatā § 2.1.2B2. vayaṃ yeva tāva karmmāntā cchoriya āgatā (≒ § 5.1.6A5, § 5.3.6A7) § 3.1.3A7. vayaṃ yeva karmmāntāṃ cchoriya āgatā (= § 4.1.4A6) § 6.1.7A5. vayam eva tāva karmmāntāṃ cchoriya (Hs. cchoraya) āgatā (≒ § 6.3.7A7) § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... tāyo devasikaṃ cchorayitavyāyo vā, dahiya bhūyo vā thapayitavyāyo § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... tāyo cchoriya anyāyo sthāpayitavyāyo § 18.31.16B5. tena uśvāsaṃ karaṃtena mallakena vā koḍikena vā cchorayitavyaṃ. cchoriyāṇaṃ so pṛthivīpradeśo gomayena udvarttitavyo § 18.37.17A2. śunakhena ... uśvāsaṃ kṛtakaṃ, yo navako bhavati tena cchoritavyaṃ § 18.37.17A2. navatarako śaithiliko bāhuliko bhavati, vṛddhatareṇa cchoritavyaṃ § 19.15.18A5. tenâpi dāni praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa so pṛthivīpradeśo ... cchorayitavyo § 19.33.18B6. tenâpi praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa, yadi tāva āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, ... cchorayitavyaṃ (lies: °vyā) § 19.16.18A6. mā aprakṛtikā (wohl für °iko) ghaṭasya {vā} bāhyena praśvāsaṃ cchoreyā ti § 19.20.18A7. tato pi na kṣamati so tahiṃ cchorayituṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣintasya (für 251  varṣante?) stūpavigrahaṃ vā saṃghavigrahaṃ vā gacchati. atha khalu tahiṃ cchorayitavyaṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣante na anyena gacchati § 20.11.19B7. evaṃ tāva khādayitavyaṃ yāva dantakāṣṭhasya catvāri aṅgulāni avaśiṣṭāni, tato cchoritavyaṃ § 20.13.20A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena kheṭaṃ diśodiśaṃ cchorayituṃ kuccako vā vicchaddiya diśodiśaṃ cchorayituṃ § 20.13.20A1. atha khalu kaṭāhake vā mallake vā koṭiyāṃ vā āviddhapuṭikāyām vā kheṭaṃ cchorayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyo) § 20.13.20A1. vāmena ca hastena kuccako gṛhṇitavyaḥ paścāt ekamantena cchorayitavyaḥ § 20.19.20A4. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandati, paśyati dantapoṇaṃ, cchorayitavyo § 24.3.22A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā ... bhittīyaṃ kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakam vā cchorayituṃ § 24.4.22A2. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ cchoriya anyasya pūrayitavyaṃ § 24.6.22A3. kṛtakarmmā bhūmi bhavati, na kṣamati bhūmīye cchorayituṃ § 24.6.22A4. (Schleim) ekasya upānahāye tale cchorayitavyaṃ dvitīyena marddayitavya § 24.6.22A4. atha dāni uppaṃsulo vihāro bhavati, bhūmīye cchoriya pādena mardditavyo § 24.7.22A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ divāvihāraṃ gato caṃkramati, śleṣmiko bhikṣu bhavati, ito ca <ito ca> cchorayanto (Hs. cchoriy°) caṃkramati, vinayātikramam āsādayati. atha khalu cchoriyāṇa pādena marditavyaṃ § 24.8.22A5. caṃkramaśīrṣe vā āviddhapuṭikā vā ... mallakaṃ vā thapetavyaṃ. tahiṃ kheṭo cchorayitavyo. yaṃ kālaṃ gacchati, tato ekatam’ aṃte cchorayitavyo § 24.11.22A6. kheṭo āgacchati, cchoriya pādena marditavyo § 41.1.33B3. sarvvaṃ udakaṃ cchoriya (Hs. sthāriya) ... § 41.2.33B5. udakaṃ cchoriya ... § 41.9.34A5. dakānakaṃ dhoviya pānīyāvaśeṣaṃ cchoriya ātape śoṣitaṃ § 41.25.35B2. udakaṃ cchoriya (Hs. cchorayi) ... § 42.2.36A3. sarvvaṃ udakaṃ cchoriya ... cchorayi für cchoriya : § 41.25.35B2 cchoritaka~# “verlassen, ausgespuckt”; cchorita + Suffix ka § 24.12.22A7. <paśyati?> kheṭaṃ cchoritakaṃ kenaci aprakṛtijñena, pādena marditavyo J j / jj : § 43.15.38B3. cīvararajūṃ für cīvararajjūṃ j/p: Uddāna (V).39B2. jānīye für pānīye j/y: § 31.28.26B3. prajātā für prayāto (?); vgl. BHSD, s.vv. niryāta, nirjāta ☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1 § 42.27.37B4. yentākavārikā < jentākavārikā jaṃghā~ “Unterschenkel” § 32.9.27B3. sāmīcī karentena na kṣamati jānukena (☞ § 32.9[Text], Anm. 1) vā jaṃghāhi vā vandituṃ. atha khalu pādā vanditavyā § 41.7.34A4. sthavireṇa dāni vāmā jaṃghā dhovitā dakṣiṇā jaṃghā dhovitā § 41.23.35A7. vāmā tāva jaṃghā dhovitavyā (= § 41.27.35B4) § 41.23.35A7. dakṣiṇā tāva jaṃghā dhovitavyā (= § 41.28.35B5) § 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇā (Hs. dakṣiṇena) jaṃghā dhovitavyā § 41.28.35B5. vāmā jaṃghā dhovitavyā § 47.5.40B7. patraśākhāya vā tṛṇakehi vā pādā jaṃghā <ca> (oder pāda-jaṃghā?) prasphoṭitvā prāvaritvā praveṣṭavyaṃ jaṃghā-patha~# “Fußweg”; vgl. Pā. jaṅgha-magga (“a footpath”, PTSD, s.v.). § 25.8.22B4. pratisāmayantena nâpi kṣamati jaṃghāpathe vā sthāpayituṃ kapāṭe vā muṇḍavātāyane vā √jan ⇒ jāya- § 4.20.6A3. prītiṃ janehi suvihitā tathā hi dinnaṃ imaṃ dānan (vs) 252 jana~ ⇒ mahā-janika~ § 12.15.12A2. dviṇṇāṃ trayāṇāṃ janānāṃ eko vihārako uddiśitavyo ... caturṇṇāṃ pañcānām vā janānāṃ eko vihārako uddiśitavyo § 18.2.15B1. jano dāni odhyāyati “paśyatha bhaṇe śramaṇakā ...” (≒ § 20.6.19B2, § 20.7.19B3, § 51.1.44A1) § 19.2.17B4. jano dāni odhyāyanti “paśyatha bhaṇe śramaṇakā ...” § 19.37.19A1. mā jano odhyāye “kena imaṃhi panthe praśvāso kṛto ...?” § 20.19.20A4. atha dāni dve janā bhavanti ... (= § 41.28.35B4) § 35.3.29A2. samyag bhikṣavo jano odhyāyanti; vgl. § 51.1.44A1. samyag bhikṣavo jano odhyāyati § 43.14.38B2. dve janā yācaṃti § 52.6.44B5. suvihita, apratigrāhyo eṣo jano. mā bhūyo eteṣāṃ tena pratigṛhṇīhasi usw. janapada~ ⇒ Kāśi-janapada~, vigata-janapada~ jantāka~ (BHS) “Haus für Schwitzbäder” ☞ § 12.10, Anm. 7 ⇒ jentāka~, yentāka-vārika~ § 12.10.11B5. varccakuṭī udupāno jantāko caṃkramā vṛkṣamūlā vihārakā grāhayitavyā jambāla~ “Sumpf” ? ☞ § 18.43, Anm. 1 § 18.43.17A5. śūnyagharaṃ vā jambālam vā bhavati, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ jambhaya- “gähnen”#; vgl. Pā. jambhati, Skt. jṛṃbhati, jambhate (“gähnen”); BHS(Mvu). vijṛmbheti; Skt. jambhayati (“zermalmen, vernichten”) ⇒ jambhāya-, vi-√jṛmbh, vi-jṛmbhaya- § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti, aṅgāni bhañjayanti maṭamaṭāya phoḍenti amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ. yathā sīhā vā vyāghrā vā evaṃ jaṃbhayanti § 61.2.49A3. evaṃ jambhayitavyaṃ; vgl. § 61.9.49B1. evaṃ vijṛmbhitavyaṃ § 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ (Hs. bhañjayitavyaṃ; Silbenumstellung; ☞ § 61.3[Text], Anm. 1) § 61.4.49A4. na dāni aṃgāni “ṭaṭṭa ṭaṭṭa” tti phoṭantena mukhaṃ vivaritvā jambhayi- tavyaṃ § 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ <cīvarakoṇena> mukhaṃ pithitvā jambhayitavyaṃ jambhāya- (Pkt) “gähnen”; vgl. Pkt. jaṃbhāia, jaṃbhāyanta, jaṃbhāyamāṇ (“gähnend”) ☞ Uddāna (VII) (Text), Anm. 3 ⇒ jambhaya-, vi-√jṛmbh, vi-jṛmbhaya- Uddāna (VII).50B1. evaṃ jaṃbhā{va}yitavyaṃ jarā~ ⇒ anavarāgra-jāti-jarā-maraṇa-saṃsāra-kāntāra-naraka-vidurgga~ § 4.18.5B6. evam ādīpite loke mṛtyunā ca jarayā ca (vs) jarā-durbbala~# “altersschwach” § 1.12.2A4. yadi tāva ... bhikṣū vā na jarādurbbalā na vyādhidurbbalā vā bhavanti, ... (≒ § 3.11.4A3) § 1.12.2A5. atha dāni ... bhikṣū vā jarādurbbalā vā vyādhidurbbalā vā bhavanti, ... (≒ § 2.10.3A3) § 26.9.23B2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, ... (≒ § 29.5. 24B2, § 30.10.25A5, § 48.7. 41B2) § 42.25.37B2. bhikṣu jarādurbbalā vā vyādhidurbbalā vā bhavanti ... § 49.5.42B1. atha dāni duścakṣuko bhavati jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā, ... § 50.4.43A6. bhikṣu jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati na pratibalo gantuṃ jarjara~ (1) “zerrissen” § 14.16.13B5. pīṭhasyôpari yaṃ tatra jarjarabisi vā jarjaracaturaśrako vā taṃ sthāpayi- tavyaṃ jarjara~ (2) “Trommel”#; < Skt. jharjhara ☞ § 53.6, Anm. 1 ⇒ jharjhara~ § 53.6.45A5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, ... § 56.5.47A6. dvitīyasya (wohl für paścimasya) prahāṇasya jarjare āhate otaritavyaṃ § 57.3.47B2. atha khalu bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāṃ gacchiya caturddiśaṃ niṣīdanti 253 jala~ “Wasser” § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... lābhāgrayaśograprāpto, lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātaśayyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārāṇāṃ tatra ca anupaliptaḥ padmam iva jalena √jalp “sagen, sprechen”; vgl. S. 560f. in diesem Band § 2.9.3A2. yadi tāva jalpanti “gacchāma” ... atha dāni jalpanti “vasiṣyāma” tti (≒ § 3.10. 4A2) § 4.7.4B6. atha dāni te jalpanti “bhante etaṃ sidhyati ...” (≒ § 6.7.7B5) § 4.8.4B7. kasyacit bhikṣusya jalpitavyaṃ: “amukaṃ ...” § 4.11.5A3. dāyakadānapati jalpanti “paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha” tti (≒ § 5.10.6B7) § 8.7.9A5. asukesmi kule buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ, tato labdhaṃ § 12.12.11B7. atha dāni saṃghasthaviro jalpati “vihāraṃ yūyaṃ uddiśatha! ...” § 12.13.12A1. atha dāni teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā jalpanti “uddiśatha yūyaṃ eteṣāṃ ...” § 18.53.17B2. vaidyo jalpati “bhante, mahāvikaṭāṃ pāyetha” tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? § 19.6.17B7. so jalpati “mā khalu me āyuṣman, omutrayasi” tti § 19.42.19A3. vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā pūtimūtraṃ pibanāya dethê”tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? § 26.1.23A5. te dāni āyuṣmaṃto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ... yo (lies: yā?) tāva pelavā bhavati, jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāvāgu ...” § 26.1.23A5. atha dāni khakkhaṭa bhavati, jalpa<ṃ>ti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, lecchaṃ (wohl für lehyaṃ) ayaṃ, ’peyyā ayaṃ, kaṭṭārikācchejjā ayaṃ.” § 31.23.26A6. yadi tāva jalpati “prāpuṇati” tti, vihārako gṛhṇitavyo § 34.3.28B3. yadi tāva te jalpanti “bhante, mā allīyatha” tti, na kṣamati allīyituṃ. ... atha dāni jalpanti “allīyatha” tti, allīyitavyaṃ (≒ § 35.3.29A3, § 36.3.29B3) § 37.3.30A3. yadi tāva jalpanti “mā āllīyatha” tti, na kṣamati allīyituṃ. atha dāni jalpanti “allīyatha” tti, upasaṃkramitavyaṃ § 38.5.30B1. saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti § 38.6.30B1. yadi ... so ca bhikṣu bhavati kalahakārako bhaṇḍanakārako bhāṣyakāro adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā jalpāhi” tti § 38.6.30B2. “kasya tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? mā jalpāhi” tti § 38.7.30B2. saṃghasthavireṇa vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, jalpatha yathādharmmaṃ yathā- vinayaṃ yathā śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ.” ti § 39.14.31B2. pariveśakena pṛcchitavyaṃ “ko āraṇyakānāṃ lābhagrāh<ak>o?” yadi tāvaj jalpanti “ahaṃ pi ahaṃ pi” tti, vaktavyaṃ “āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ukaḍḍhatha” § 41.2.33B6. yūyaṃ jalpatha § 41.26.35B2. trīṇi vācāyo jalpayitavyāyo (Hs. °tavyo{|}yo) “ko vṛddhatarako vṛddho?” tti § 42.28.37B5. saṃghasaṃvyavahārako vā dānapati vā jalpati “viśvastā bhadantā snāyantu” tti § 49.2.42A4. tvaṃ Nandanasya sārddhevihāriṃ jalpasi § 50.2.43A3. so dāni tasya jalpati “āyuṣman, sādhu taṃ pātrakaṃ pi labhema.” § 50.5.43A7. yadi tāva dāyakadānapati jalpanti “bhante, paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha”, ... § 50.9.43B5. atha dāni so jalpati “āyuṣman, bhuṃja tvaṃ. bhuktaṃ mayê”ti § 52.6.44B6. asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno √jāgṛ ⇒ pratijāgarati jāta~ ⇒ kalaha-jāta~, bhaṇḍana-jāta~, saṃkula-jāta~, jātaka~ (3) § 31.16.26A2. ihaỿva yūyaṃ jātā ihaỿva mariṣyatha. jātā te śṛgālā ye tumbhāṇaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti § 31.24.26A7. he he śiṣṭā baṣṭā. yūyaṃ jātā (Hs. jānā), <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti § 41.12.34B1. tasya dāni eko putro acira<ṃ> jāto jātaka~ (1) “Geburt”# § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi jātakaṃ bhaveyaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya, ... § 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ kimālambanaṃ <etaṃ> bhaktaṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā vevāhikam 254  vā gṛhapraveśakam vā ... (≒ § 5.12.7A3, § 6.12.8A3) § 4.15.5A7. yadi tāva jātakaṃ (Hs. jānakaṃ) bhavati ... (= § 6.13.8A3) § 6.6.7B3. anekāye tahiṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya rājabhayaṃ vā corabhayam vā ... (2) Jātaka (BHS, SWTF, Pā) § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ geyaṃ vyākaraṇaṃ gāthā udānaṃ itivṛttakaṃ jātakaṃ vaipulyâdbhutadharmmā (3) “gewachsen” § 14.6.13A5. vihārasya catuḥpārśve kakṣaṃ jātakaṃ bhavati, so lavāpayitavyo jātakehi für jānukehi : § 29.2.24A7 jātarūpa~ ⇒ prabhūta-j°-rajata-vittopakaraṇa~ jāti~ ⇒ anavarāgra-jāti-jarā-maraṇa-saṃsāra-kāntāra-naraka-vidurgga~, kiṃ-jātika~ § 41.19.35A4. ācāreṇa anāryā āryā jātâvakrāntāḥ (lies: jātī ava° oder jātā ava° [m.c.] ?) (vs) jātu ⇒ mātu (lies jātu?) tyāyikaṃ jānaka~ (BHS, SWTF) “weise; Einsichtiger” § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... buddho buddhavihārehi jino jinavihārehi jānako jānakavihārehi sarvvajño sarvvajñavihārehi ... jānakaṃ für jātakaṃ : § 4.15.5A7 jānaka-vihāra~# “Verweilungszustand von Einsichtigen” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ jina-vihāra~, buddha-vihāra~, sarvvajña-vihāra~ § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... buddho buddhavihārehi jino jinavihārehi jānako jānakavihārehi sarvvajño sarvvajñavihārehi ... jānat~ “wissend” ⇒ jānā- jānā für jātā : § 31.24.26A7 jānā- (√jñā) (1) “wissen” § 1.5.1B4. yad aho saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, tad aho saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ ko śalākāṃ vārayiṣyati ... § 1.11.2A4. yaṃ kālaṃ dāyakadānapati nirddhāvitā bhavanti, tato sūtroddeśakena jānitavyaṃ (= § 3.10.4A3) § 2.7.2B6. dvitīyasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ (= § 5.5.6B1) § 4.5.4B2. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: kasyâdya bhaktaṃ ... grāme vihāre § 4.5.4B2. atha khalu saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ko ’yaṃ nimantreti § 4.6.4B3. prakṛty’ eva māsavāriko pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo “gaccha jānāhi (Impv.; vgl. BHSG §§ 28.63, 30.6) kiṃ sajjiyatî”ti § 4.12.5A4. tato saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ ārabhya deti, tathā yeva nimantraṇāy’ etavyaṃ § 5.6.6B3. gaccha, jānāhi ... jānāhi kiṃ sidhyati, kiṃ pacyati § 11.3.10B4. bhagavāṃ jānanto yyeva bhikṣūṃ pṛcchati (≒ § 15.3.14A1, § 17.3.14B6) § 12.3.11A7. bhagavān jānanto pṛcchati (= § 13.3.12A7, § 16.3.14A6, § 21.2.20B1) § 20.5.19B1. bhagavān jānanto yeva pṛcchati (= § 23.2.21A5, § 24.2.22A1, § 43.1.38A2) § 23.6.4.21B3. jānitavyaṃ, yadi tāva up<p>eḍanako so vihārako bhavati, nâpi tahiṃ kṣamati pādāṃ dhovituṃ, hastām vā nirmmādayituṃ § 26.3.23A6. tato jānitavyaṃ: kim ayaṃ yavāgū ubhayato sāṃghikā parṣāye ... § 32.10.27B4. pādāṃ vandantena jānitavyaṃ § 38.3.30A6. upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā jānitavyaṃ § 38.6.30B1. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ. yadi tāva tasya dugraho bhavati, ... § 39.20.31B7. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, ... jānitavyaṃ, anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparo<dho> vā bhave corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ, yathā nâgacchantîti § 41.14.34B4. ahaṃ pi na jānāmi § 42.13.36B6. jentākasya gaṇḍī ākoṭitā {je} jānitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyā) : kiṃ eṣo jentāko sarvva- sāṃghiko ... § 42.21.37A5. udakasya pratyayo jānitavyo “kathaṃ dīyati” § 42.24.37B1. jānitavyaṃ “kim ayaṃ jentāko ...” § 42.28.37B5. tailamātrā jānitavyā 255  § 47.1.40B4. ime pi (“jedoch”) na jānanti katham ... pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A4) § 48.4.41A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭo āsanena nimantrīyati, āsanaṃ jānitavyaṃ § 50.7.43B3. yadi jāna{n}ti śakyaṃ sakālena saṃbhāvayituṃ, gantavyaṃ § 57.5.47B3. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “anekāyo upānahikāyo mūṣikena vā khajjeṃsu. bhikṣū vā jānanto vā ajānanto vā gṛhītvā gaccheya” tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? usw. (2) “denken” ☞ § 52.1, Anm. 4 § 52.1.44B1. vayaṃ yyeva tāva imeṣāṃ kṛtena snehaṃ thapemaḥ, khajjakakhaṇḍakāni sthapemaḥ, jānāma (“wir dachten”) vayaṃ “yaṃ kālaṃ āgatā bhaviṣyanti, tato saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ”; vgl. § 52.1.44A7. paśyanti (“dachten”) “yaṃ kālam āgatā bhavanti, tato teṣāṃ saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ” jānīye für pānīye : Uddāna (V).39B2 jānu~ “Knie” ⇒ jānuka~ § 42.22.37A7. jānu-mātraṃ udakaṃ bhavati jānuka~ “Knie” ⇒ jānu~, vāma-jānuka~ § 21.9.20B6. antamasato jānukānāṃ pi upari cīvarakaṃ thaviya sīvayitavyaṃ § 29.1.24A6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ uṣṭ<r>aparyaṃkena prahāṇaṃ upaviśaṃti, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahanti § 29.2.24A7. satyaṃ bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikā, evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi (Hs. jātakehi) vyābahatha? § 29.6.24B4. tathā karttavyaṃ, yathânantaryaṃ jānukehi na vyābahati § 32.9.27B3. sāmīcī karentena na kṣamati jānukena (☞ § 32.9[Text], Anm. 1) vā jaṃghāhi vā vandituṃ. atha khalu pādā vanditavyā § 54.9.46A5. yadi vāmena sthitako bhavati, dakṣiṇena jānukena (Hs. °kehi) saṃghaṭṭe- tavyo jāya- (√jan) “entstehen” ⇒ √jan § 41.22.35A6. mā prāṇakā jāyeṃsu nīlikāya vā bhaveṃsu jāla-vātāyana~# “Gitterfenster”; vgl. Poṣ(Hu) 271, Anm. 2; Pā. jāla-vātapāna (Vin II 148.29) ☞ § 25.15, Anm. 3 ⇒ muṇḍa-vātāyana~ § 25.15.23A2. <sthapetavyaṃ>(?) mañcasya vā pīṭhasya vā upari jālavātāyane vā pātra- mālake vā, yathā na ghaṭṭeṃsu jālaya- (BHS) “(eine Lampe) anzünden”; < Skt. jvālayati; vgl. Pā. jāleti ⇒ jvālaya-, pra-jvala-, pra-jvālaya-, pra-jvāle- § 53.6.45A5. yadi tāva so dvibhūmiko saṃghārāmo bhavati, prathamaṃ tāva sopāna- maggulīye dīpako jālayitavyo jighra- (√ghrā) “riechen” ⇒ jighrāpe- § 62.2.49B6. ānantarikānāṃ baddhamuṣṭikāṃ jighrāpenti, āha “jighrâyuṣman, aho mṛṣṭo gandho. aho śobhano gandho.” *jighrāpe- “riechen lassen”; ein aus dem Präsensstamm jighra- von Skt. √ghrā gebildetes Kausativ; vgl. Skt. ghrāpayati ⇒ jighra- § 62.2.49B6. ānantarikānāṃ baddhamuṣṭikāṃ jighrāpenti (Hs. °āyenti), āha “jighrâyuṣman, aho mṛṣṭo gandho. aho śobhano gandho.” jighrāyenti für °āpenti : § 62.2.49B6 jina~ § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... buddho buddhavihārehi jino jinavihārehi jānako jānakavihārehi sarvvajño sarvvajñavihārehi ... jina-vihāra~# “eines Jinas Verweilungszustand” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ jānaka-vihāra~, buddha- vihāra~, sarvvajña-vihāra~ § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... buddho buddhavihārehi jino jinavihārehi jānako jānakavihārehi sarvvajño sarvvajñavihārehi ... jina-śāsana~ “die Lehre des Jina”; vgl. MW, s.v. § 4.19.6A2. mā pramajji jinaśāsane (vs) 256 jihma~ (BHS) “betrübt” ☞ § 26.1, Anm. 4, 6 § 26.1.23A5. te dāni bhikṣū utkṣiptā bhavanti jihmā veḍḍā niṣpratibhānāḥ jihvā~ § 20.16.20A3. nâpi kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya madhyena pāṭiyāna jihvāṃ nilehituṃ kāmabhoginā yathā. atha dāni bhikṣu jihvāṃ nilehitukāmo bhavati, kurccakena āmarjayitavyā jihvāgra~ (jihvā-a°) “Zungenspitze” § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... dantena dantaṃ ādhāya, jihvāgraṃ tālukāgre pratiṣṭhāpayitvā ... § 30.7.25A4. pādena pādam ādhāya, jihvāgraṃ tālukāgre pratiṣṭhāpayitvā, ... § 39.17.31B5. nâpi dāni āraṇyakehi grāmāntikā kutsetavyā “bahukṛtyā bahukaraṇīyā jihvāgre<na> yūyaṃ rasāgrāṇi paryeṣatha” jīva- (√jīv) § 18.53.17B3. pibāhi, yadi ’si jīvitukāmo § 19.42.19A4. imaṃ khalu buddhaprajñaptaṃ bhaiṣajyaṃ. piba yadi jīvitukāmo ’si § 59.8.48B4. yadi tāva koci kṣīvati, na dāni vaktavyaṃ “jīva” (☞ § 59.8, Anm. 1) ti Jīvaka~ Kaumārabhṛtya~#; vgl. Pā. Jīvaka Komārabhacca; BHS, SWTF. Jīvaka Kumārabhṛta § 42.1.36A1. Jīvako Kaumārabhṛtyo bhagavantaṃ yācati “anujānātu bhagavān, śrāvakānāṃ jentākaṃ. vātapittaśleṣmakānāṃ phāsu bhaviṣyati.” jīvikā~ “Lebensunterhalt” ☞ § 62.4, Anm. 6 § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto parapratibaddhāye jīvikāye ... jīvita~ § 4.16.5B3. sarvvasatvā mariṣyanti maraṇāntaṃ hi jīvitaṃ (vs) jīvita-pariṣkāra~ (BHS, SWTF) “Gebrauchsgegenstand”; vgl. Stache-Rosen 1959: 231; Pā. jīvita- parikkhāra~ ⇒ cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śeyyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~ § 41.1.33B4. udake pi khalu mātrā uktā bhagavatā tathaỿva sarvvehi bāhirakehi jīvitapariṣkārehi (Loc. pl.) § 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā tathaỿva sarvvehi jīvitapariṣkārehi (Loc. pl.) √jṛmbh ⇒ jambhaya, vi-√jṛmbh, vi-jṛmbhaya- je für je<ntāka ...>? : § 42.13.36B6 Jetavana~ (BHS, SWTF) § 49.1.42A1. na ca pratibalo Jetavanaṃ saṃbhāvayituṃ § 49.1.42A2. ye dāni bhikṣū Jetavanasyârāmadvārakoṣṭhakasamīpe sthānacaṃkrama- sthānaniṣadyāyogam anuyuktā viharanti ... jentāka~ (1) “Haus für Schwitzbäder”; vgl. Lüders 1940: 264, Anm. 1; EWAia III, 212 ☞ § 12.10, Anm. 7 ⇒ jantāka~, yentāka-vārika~ § 25.17.23A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ, jentākam vā praveśituṃ § 40.14.33A6. jentāke vārentena (Hs. cār°) oṣṭhā pānīyadhārikāye (?; Hs. pānīyacār°) patraṃ (Hs. pātraṃ) bandhitavyaṃ § 42.2.36A2. saṃghasya dāni jentāko § 42.2.36A2. te ... jentākaṃ prajvālīya ... § 42.2.36A3. āgameṃtu āyuṣmanto, na tāva jentāko tatto bhavati § 42.2.36A3. jentākaṃ apaduriya nirddhāvitāḥ § 42.2.36A3. praviśantu āyuṣmanto, jentāko tapto § 42.3.36A5. taṃ velaṃ jentākasya dvāraṃ muktaṃ § 42.4.36A6. saṃghasya jentāko § 42.6.36B1. evaṃ jentāke pratipadyitavyaṃ ( = § 42.6.36B2, § 42.32.38A1; Uddāna [V]. 39B2) § 42.7.36B2. jentākaṃ karentena vaṭṭito vā karttavyo caturasro vā § 42.11.36B5. tehi jentāke santānikā śāṭayitavyā ... § 42.11.36B5. jentāke pīṭhikā vā śuktikāyo vā dhovitavyā § 42.13.36B6. jentākasya gaṇḍī ākoṭitā ... § 42.13.36B6. eṣo jentāko sarvvasāṃghiko pāriveṇiko parṣāye 257  § 42.21.37A5. jentākaṃ praviśantena udakasya pratyayo (lies: pratya<ṃ>śo?) jānitavyo § 42.24.37B1. jānitavyaṃ: kim ayaṃ jentāko ekato sāṃghiko parṣāyaṃ pariveṇiko nimantritakānāṃ § 42.26.37B3. atha dāni jentāko sāṃghiko bhavati, dāyakadānapatī vā denti, gaṇḍī āhanitavyā ... § 42.27.37B4. tehi jentāko prajvalitavyo § 42.30.37B6. alpaśabdehi alpanirghoṣehi jentāke snāyitavyaṃ § 42.31.37B7~38A1. jentākaṃ siñciya sammārjiya câṃgārā ni<r>vāpiya jentākaṃ bāhiraghaṭitaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ (2) “Schwitzbad, Dampfbad” § 42.1.36A2. anujānātu bhagavān śrāvakānāṃ jentākaṃ § 42.24.37B1. etaṃ dāni jentākasya ārocitaṃ bhavati jentāka-pīṭha~#, jentāka-pīṭhaka~#, jentāka-pīṭhikā~# “Schemel im jentāka” § 42.14.36B7. cīvarakaṃ ... cīvaravaṃśe vā thapetavyo jentākapīṭhe vā § 42.27.37B4. jentākapīṭhakāni praveśayitavyāni § 42.31.37B7. jentākapīṭhikāni (Acc. pl. fem.! Eine Verschreibung für °pīṭhakāni?) dhoviya praveśayitavyāni jentāka-vārika~# “ein Mönch, der für den jentāka verantwortlich ist” ⇒ -vārika~, yentāka-vārika~ § 42.11.36B4. ya ... bhava<n>ti jentākavārikā vā ārāmikā vā, tehi jentāke santānikā śāṭayitavyā ... § 42.31.37B6. jentākavārikena tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati praveśayitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyaḥ) jj / j ⇒ j / jj jjh ⇒ jh jña~ ⇒ a-prakṛti-jña~, kāla-jña~, vela-jña~, samaya-jña, sarvva-jña~ √jñā ⇒ jānā-, anu-jānā-, anu-jāne-, ā-ṇape-, pari-jānā-, pra-jñapaya-, pra-jñape-, pra-jñāpaya-, pra-√jñā, saṃ-pra-jāna~, saṃ-pra-jānat~ § 3.5.3B3. yathā jñāpeta katimâdya sarvvehi jānitavyaṃ § 18.11.16A1. yathā jñāye (Pass., Opt., 3. sg.) “saprāṇakê”ty abhijñānaṃ § 40.12.33A5. yathā jñāye (Pass., Opt., 3. sg.) “akalpiyan” ti § 43.14.38B2. tena vṛddhatarakasya jñātavyaṃ (“erlauben”) jñātika~ (BHS, SWTF) “Verwandter” § 41.17.34B7. yo (für ye?) etasya mātāpitā vā jñātikā vā tehi eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati jñāti-śālā~# “Haus eines Verwandten” § 41.13.34B2. so śreṣṭhi aparehiṃ (Loc. sg.!) jñātiśāle (Hs. jñātisāle; Loc. sg. fem.! [vgl. BHSG §§ 9.77f.]; wahrscheinlich handelt es sich doch um einen Genusfehler) nimantritako gato varṣārātrikaṃ jñātisāle für jñātiśāle : § 41.13.34B2 jñāna~ “Erkenntnis” § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... āvarjayitvā Aṅga-Magadha-...-Avanti, jñāne dṛṣṭaparākramo ... jyeṣṭo für jyeṣṭho : § 35.6.29A6 jyeṣṭha~ ⇒ jyeṣṭhaka~ § 20.8.19B4. dantakāṣṭhāni nāma trīṇi jyeṣṭhaṃ madhyamaṃ kanīyasaṃ § 20.8.19B4. jyeṣṭhaṃ nāma ṣoḍaśāṅgulāni madhyamaṃ dvādaśāṅgulāni kanīyasam aṣṭāṅgulāni § 34.6.28B5. vaktavyaṃ “kṣatriyā nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo. ...” § 35.6.29A6. brāhmaṇa nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo śreṣṭho varṇṇo jyeṣṭhaka~# “der größte, längste” (= jyeṣṭha~) § 20.11.19B6. jyeṣṭhakāni dantakāṣṭhāni kārāpayitavyāni § 23.3.21A5. vihārā nāma trīṇi. jyeṣṭhako madhyamako kanīyasako § 23.3.21A5. jyeṣṭhako nāma vihārako, bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, ulloko bhavati prapāṇḍaro, bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā. evaṃ jyeṣṭhako § 23.4.1.21A6. yo dāni jyeṣṭhako bhavati vihāro, nâyaṃ kṣamati tahiṃ maṃcā vā pīṭhā vā praveśituṃ 258 √jval ⇒ jālaya-, jvālaya-, pra-jvala-, pra-jvālaya-, pra-jvāle- jvālaya- ⇒ jālaya-, pra-jvala-, pra-jvālaya-, pra-jvāle- § 15.6.14A2. pradīpo jvālayitavyo tṛṇolkā vā kaṇḍolkā vā prajvālayitavyā § 53.19.45B7. evaṃ devasikaṃ dīpo jvālayitavyo JH jjhaṭam für jjhāṭam : § 18.45.17A6 jharjhara~ “Trommel” ⇒ jarjara~ § 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo jhallajjhallāṃ#, jhallajhallāye#, jjhallajjhallāye# Onomatopoetica, die das Geräusch von überfließendem Wasser nachahmen: “platsch, platsch!”; vgl. Skt. jhalajjhalā ☞ § 18.12, Anm. 3 § 18.12.16A1. na dāni jjhallajjhalāye (Hs. °leye) udakaṃ siṃcetavyaṃ § 40.16.33A7. na dāni kṣamati jhallajhallāye ujjhituṃ § 41.1.33B2. pādadhovanikāyāṃ jhallajjhallāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ § 41.2.33B5. jjhallajjhallāye pādāṃ dhoviya § 41.25.35B2. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā jhallajhallāye pādāṃ dhovituṃ jhāṭa~ “Dickicht, Gebüsch” ⇒ jhāḍa~ § 18.45.17A6. ekatamaṃ jjhāṭam (Hs. jjhaṭam) vā vṛkṣaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariyāṇa upaviśi- tavyaṃ jhāḍa~ (Pkt) “Dickicht, Gebüsch”; < Skt. jhāṭa (lex.); vgl. CDIAL 5362; Oberlies 1993: 79; EWAia III. 217 ⇒ jhāṭa~ § 47.1.40B2. jhāḍe vā vṛkṣaśākhāyām vā lagnaṃ “ḍu” tti ka<ḍ>ḍhanti Ñ ñj / kṣ ⇒ kṣ / ñj Ṭ ṭ / ṭṭ : § 18.8.15B6. paṭipāṭṭikāya für paṭipāṭi° § 21.6.20B3. savvaṭiyāṇaṃ für samvaṭṭi° bzw. saṃvaṭṭi° ṭ/ḍ: § 47.7.41A1. aśvavaṭavā für °vaḍavā ṭ / t ⇒ ā-paṭita~, up-paṭa- § 23.8.21B6. sātayitavyā für śāṭa° ṭaṭṭa ṭaṭṭa # “knack! knack!” (Onomatopoeticum) ⇒ maṭamaṭa, maṭamaṭāya, maṭamaṭāye, amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ § 61.4.49A3. na dāni aṃgāni “ṭaṭṭa ṭaṭṭa” tti phoṭantena mukhaṃ vivaritvā jambhayi- tavyaṃ ṭapya ṭaṭapya # “geräuschvoll” (Onomatopoeticum) § 28.1.24A1. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgatvā tasya purato tālapādukāhi ābaddhāhi dīrgha- caṃkramaṃ caṃkramati ṭapya ṭaṭapya ṭapya ṭaṭapya tti ṭṭ / ṭ ⇒ ṭ / ṭṭ ṭṭ / ḍḍh : § 8.11.9A7. āvaḍḍhako für āvaṭṭako (= § 18.52.17B2) § 8.13.9B3. avaḍḍhako für āvaṭṭako ṭṭ / ṇ : § 55.2.46B3. paṇena für paṭṭena oder pāśena ṭṭ / dd : § 43.6.38A5. taddukā für taṭṭukā 259  ṬH ṭh / c ⇒ c / ṭh *ṭhapaya- “legen”; vgl. Pā = BHS. ṭhapeti § 41.5.34A2. ime itikitikāyaputrāḥ śramaṇakāḥ grāmānte iryāpathaṃ ṭhapayanti (Hs. paṭhay°), nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti vikopenti Ḍ ḍ/ṭ ⇒ ṭ/ḍ ḍa / u ⇒ u / ḍa ḍaddhā~# Bedeutung? § 43.1.38A2. droṇīyo [ḍa]ddhāyo (od. uddhāyo, udvāyo?; ☞ § 43.1[Text], Anm. 5) pariyo (od. ’pariyo?) bhaktapīṭhikā māṇikaṃ ... ḍaddhāpayantena für *uddhā°? : § 23.4.4.21B2 ḍaṃya (oder ḍaṃpa) für caṃḍa<ṃ>? § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he nāvā <mucyati> ... caṃḍa<ṃ> (Hs. ḍaṃya oder ḍaṃpa) muktaṃ (Hs. dukkaṃ) śramaṇa ... (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti √ḍī ⇒ oḍ-ḍita~ ḍu# Onomatopoeticum ☞ § 44.6, Anm. 2 § 44.6.39A5. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ cīvarakoṇake gṛhṇiya “ḍu” tti acchituṃ § 47.1.40B2. “ḍu” tti (?; Hs. dranti) acchanti § 47.1.40B3. jhāḍe vā vṛkṣaśākhāyām vā lagnaṃ “ḍu” tti (?; Hs. dranti) kaḍhanti § 47.8.41A2. cīvaraṃ ... na dāni “mā cīvaraṃ mā kaṇṭakaśākhā” tti “ḍu ḍu” tti (?; Hs. udranti) acchitavyaṃ ḍḍ / ḍḍh : § 26.1.23A5. veḍḍhā für veḍḍā ḍḍ / ṇḍ : § 19.36.19A1. kuṇḍa für kuḍḍa ḍḍ / ṇṇ : § 18.40.17A3. veṇṇā für veḍḍā ḍḍ | dd : § 17.11.15A5. oḍḍiṇṇakā für oddiṇṇ° § 20.18.20A4. apakkaladdunā für °laḍḍunā ḍḍh / ṭṭ ⇒ ṭṭ / ḍḍh ḍḍh / ḍḍ ⇒ ḍḍ / ḍḍh ḍḍh | ḍhḍh : ukkaḍhḍhiya für ukkaḍḍhiya: § 4.13.5A6 ḌH ḍharaḍhara#, ḍharaḍharāye# Onomatopoetica für den Laut der Blähung ☞ § 62.2, Anm. 7 ⇒ pharapharasya, pharapharāya § 62.2.49B6. eko tāva pūtivātakarmmaṃ karoti. aparo “gaccha” tti. aparo “ḍharaḍha<ra>” tti § 62.5.50A1. na kṣamati prahāṇam upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} ḍharaḍharāye vātakarmma karttuṃ ḍhukkakaṃ# “zusammengekommen; zusammen”; vgl. Pkt. ḍhukka (“nahegekommen”), Skt. √ḍhauk (“sich nähern”) ☞ § 62.6, Anm. 3 § 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ ḍhossa~ “aufgeblasener Tölpel”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 22, Anm. 4; CDIAL 5594 *ḍhussa, *ḍhossa (“swollen”) § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi ... ḍhossā vā viṭā vā vātaputro vā viheṭhanābhiprāyā nimantrayeṃsu § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ, mā naṃ ḍhossā vā viḍā vā vātaputrā vā bhuṃjeṃsu 260 ḍhossa-bhaya~# “Gefahr durch einen aufgeblasenen Tölpel” ☞ § 1.12, Anm. 3 § 6.6.7B3. anekāye tahiṃ ... bhaveya rājabhayaṃ vā corabhayam vā ḍhossabhayam vā vātaputrabhayam vā Ṇ ṇ / ṭṭ ⇒ ṭṭ / ṇ ṇ / n ⇒ ṇṇ / nn; ā-haṇa- (< ā-√han) § 4.11.5A3. tittino für tintiṇo § 11.8.11A1. madhyeṇa / § 20.16.20A3. madhyena § 44.11.39B1. cikkana~ für cikkaṇa~ (= § 48.8.41B4) § 48.8.41B4. ukkhinakā für ukkhīṇaka? § 49.7.42B5. ānantikā für āṇattikā ṇ / nn : § 48.8.41B4. cikkannā für cikkaṇā ṇ/l: § 43.9.38A7. kīṇakehi für kīlakehi ṇu / ṇḍ : § 41.26.35B2. khaṇuikā für khaṇḍikā ṇḍ / ḍḍ ⇒ ḍḍ / ṇḍ ṇḍ / ṇu ⇒ ṇu / ṇḍ ṇṇ / ḍḍ ⇒ ḍḍ / ṇṇ ṇṇ / nn : § 12.2.11A7. tudrinnakāṃ für ondriṇṇakāṃ § 14.14.13B3. unniyo für uṇṇiyo ṇṇ / l : § 55.2.46B3. ulāya für *urṇāya oder Pā. uṇṇāya (< Skt. ūrṇā “Wolle”) T t/k ⇒ k/t t/ṭ ⇒ ṭ/t t / tt : § 23.6.1.21B3. thapetti für °eti § 25.17.23A3. aprayattaṃ für °ataṃ t/d: § 31.6.25B5. tāni für dāni t / n ⇒ ts / ns § 4.15.5A7. jānakaṃ für jātakaṃ § 4.18.5B6. tihutaṃ für *nīhṛtaṃ od. nīhataṃ (< nirhṛtaṃ)? § 8.4.8B7. nāva für tāva § 29.2.24A7. jātakehi für jānukehi § 31.2.25B2. tevāsikehi für nevā° § 31.24.26A7. jānā für jātā § 42.18.37A3. snānena für snātena ? § 45.6.40A1. snānena für snātena § 49.1.42A2. ipsitānnāti für °āni § 62.5.50A2. vānakarmma für vātak° t / bh : § 1.7.1B6. atikramantu für abhikramantu § 5.1.6A5. bhāva für tāva § 12.14.12A2. bhava für tava § 14.18.13B5. atyantaghaṭṭimo für abhy° § 19.17.18A6. atyāgame für abhyāgame § 19.21.18B1. abhinikuñje für atinikuñje § 20.15.20A2. thatiyātigṛhe für cetiyābhigṛhe § 41.4.34A1. atikrāntena für abhikrāntena § 41.22.35A5. atyanta<ra>- für abhyantara- § 42.7.36B2. atyantare für abhyantare t/y: § 18.8.15B7. cchātāyāṃ für cchāyāyāṃ 261 t/v: § 39.29.32A7. prativekena für pravivek° ta / u ⇒ u / ta taṃ ⇒ tad~ taṃ kālaṃ (Skt) “zu dieser Zeit” ⇒ yaṃ kālaṃ, taṃ velaṃ § 19.19.18A7. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, taṃ kālaṃ praśvāsa- ghaṭikā nikkālayitavyā § 42.2.36A3. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣu sannipatitāḥ, taṃ kālaṃ sarvvaṃ tailaṃ upayojiya ... taṃ pi # “jedoch”; < Skt. tad api ⇒ evaṃ pi § 57.11.48A1. ta<ṃ> pi dāni na kṣamati vṛddhatarakasya vā anuvātaṃ prasphoṭayituṃ § 60.5.48B7. taṃ pi tathā dāni kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ, yathā ānantaryakaṃ śabdena na vyābahati § 62.6.50A2. taṃ pi dāni na kṣamati yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipituṃ taṃ velaṃ (BHS[Mvu]) “zu dieser Zeit” ⇒ taṃ kālaṃ, yaṃ kālaṃ § 32.4.27A7. so ca apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sārddham vācovāciṃ karoti, nâpi kṣamati tasya taṃ velaṃ pādāṃ vandituṃ § 32.5.27A7. uśvāsam vā upaviṣṭo bhavati, na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ pādāṃ vandituṃ § 32.5.27B1. evaṃ praśvāsaṃ karentasya, ... tvaritaṃ vā atikramati, na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 32.7.27B2. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ samavasthāye niṣaṇṇo bhavati, taṃ velaṃ allīyāṇaṃ śīrṣeṇa pādā{ṃ} vanditavyā, karkaṭagrāhikāye vanditavyā § 42.3.36A5. te dāni yaṃ kālaṃ ... saṃtāpitāḥ, taṃ velaṃ jentākasya dvāraṃ muktaṃ taṃhi (BHS[Mvu], Pā) Loc. sg. von tad~; vgl. BHSG § 21.21 § 18.35.17A1. antamasato taṃhi pṛthivīpradeśe gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā taṃhiṃ für tahiṃ : § 39.22.32A1 takṣa~ “Zimmermann” § 43.16.38B4. takṣāṇaṃ bhāṇḍaṃ bhavati kuṭhāro vā vāsīyo vā viharaṇako vā nikhādanako vā aṭṭilā vā taṭṭuka~ (BHS) “Platte”; vgl. Pā. taṭṭaka ☞ § 43.6, Anm. 2 § 43.6.38A5. yaṃ tatra bhavati śatapotanako vā tāmrapātrā vā lohapātrā vā kaṭacchukā vā taṭṭukā (Hs. taddukā) vā caṣakā vā palīnakā vā ... taṭṭhaka~ ⇒ pāda-taṭṭhaka~ taḍāga~ “Teich” § 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.14.26A1. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśantehi puṣkiriṇīyaṃ vā taḍāge vā oghe vā pādāṃ dhovitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 42.21.37A7. atha dāni ogho vā puṣkiriṇī vā taḍāgo vā bhavati, ... § 47.5.40B7. yadi tahiṃ ogho vā taḍāgam vā bhavati puṣkiriṇī vā, ... taṇḍula~ “Reiskorn” § 26.1.23A5. jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu ... nicuḍavuntikāye imaṃhi taṇḍulā mārggitavyā.” § 39.6.31A3. <yā> grāmāntikānāṃ thālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.6.31A4. yā āraṇyakānāṃ thālī ... tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.7.31A4. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ taṇḍulāni (Acc. pl. masc.) prakṣipituṃ § 39.7.31A4. prakṣipatha taṇḍulāni (Acc. pl. masc.) § 39.19.31B6~7. yā āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ. yā grāmāntikānāṃ sthālī, yadi tāva grāmāntikā āgatā bhavanti, tahiṃ pi taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.20.31B7~32A1. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, na kṣamati tahiṃ taṇḍulāṃ prakṣipituṃ. ... yadi tāva āgacchanti teṣāṃ pi taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyā § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati ... ukkhīṇaka vā taṇḍulā praticchituṃ § 48.8.41B5. labhyā dāni ... gṛhṇituṃ ... harītakī vā taṇḍulāni (Acc. pl. masc.) vā anokṣīṇakā vā ... tato (BHS, Pā); < Skt. tatas ⇒ yato § 1.11.2A3. yadi tāvâhaṃsu “gacchāma” tato deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ ... § 1.11.2A4. yaṃ kālaṃ dāyakadānapati nirddhāvitā bhavanti, tato sūtroddeśakena 262  jānitavyaṃ (= § 3.10.4A2) § 1.12.2A6. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikāṃ dharmmāṃ uddiśiyānaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa- śrutikāye gāthāye ca, tato yathāsukhaṃ karttavyaṃ (≒ § 2.10.3A4) § 1.13.2A6. atha dāni sarvvarātrikā bhavati, tato adhyeṣitavyaṃ “tvaṃ bhāṣayesî”ti § 2.9.3A1. yadā śalākā vāritā bhavanti ... tato dāyakadānapatī pṛcchitavyāḥ § 4.5.4B3. sākāraṃ soddeśaṃ pṛcchiyāṇaṃ tato ’dhivāsayitavyaṃ (= § 6.5.7B2; ≒ § 5.5. 6B2) § 4.8.4B7. yadā sajjaṃ bhaveya, tato mā paṭisaresi § 5.12.7A2. tato yadi tāva ... (= § 6.10.7B7, § 39.5.31A2, § 40.7.32B7, § 41.27.35B3 et passim) § 12.14.12A1. atha dāni bahuṃ bhavati, tato dvitīyakālikā uddiśitavyā § 19.20.18A7. tato pi na kṣamati ... § 19.24.18B3. tato vikāle bhūyo praveśitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyo) § 20.5.19B1. bhagavatā dantakāṣṭhaṃ pratikṣiptaṃ. tato ete bhikṣavo ekānte āsanti ... § 20.11.19B6. jyeṣṭhakāni dantakāṣṭhāni kārāpayitavyāni. tato bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya kuccakaṃ śastrakena cchinditavyaṃ § 20.11.19B7. evaṃ tāva khādayitavyaṃ yāva dantakāṣṭhasya catvāri aṅgulāni avaśiṣṭāni, tato cchoritavyaṃ § 22.3.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ otara{n}ti tato dvāraṃ muñcitavyaṃ § 22.6.21A3. vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, ... dvāraṃ apaduriya tato praviśitavyaṃ § 23.4.1.21A7. maṃcā vā pīṭhā vā ... praveśiyāṇaṃ tato tahiṃ pratipādakānāṃ upari thapetavyo § 30.7.25A4. nâpi dāni parivarttakaṃ yāvat sūryodgamanāt tato śayitavyaṃ § 31.31.26B5. tato yadi nevāsikānāṃ vyañjanāni bhavanti, khajjakāni bhavanti, tato yadi snehakā vā bhavanti, tehi āgantukānāṃ samvibhāgo karttavyo § 39.13.31B2. cetiyaṃ vistareṇa vandiyāṇaṃ, yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgatā bhavanti, tato bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 40.1.32B2. tato yyeva mukhaṃ tato yyeva hastāṃ nirmmādiyanti § 40.8.33A1. na kṣamati tato pānīyāto kalpiyakarakī ... pūrayituṃ § 40.8.33A1. tato pibanāye dātavyaṃ § 40.8.33A2. atha dāni śrāddho bhikṣur bhavati, tato eva śrīkuṇḍikāṃ pūreti, anāpattiḥ § 40.11.33A4. tato yyeva stokaṃ varjayitavyaṃ § 40.16.33B2. tato yeva pibati tato yeva pāridhovanīyaṃ karoti tato yeva hastāṃ dhovati § 41.22.35A5. tato grāmapraveśikaṃ cīvaraṃ prasphoṭitvā ... sthapetavyaṃ § 41.24.35B1. yaṃ kālaṃ adhvātā bhavanti tato praveśayitavyo § 42.24.37B2. yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tato āgacchantu § 42.24.37B2. tato yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tehi gantavyaṃ § 43.5.38A5. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhava<ṃ>ti, tato kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya sthāpayitavyāḥ § 43.7.38A6. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhavanti, tato kīlakehi ollapitvā sthapitavyā ... § 44.4.39A2. tato paṭṭikāye vā loḍhakena vā rejjukāye vā bandhitavyāni § 44.6.39A5. tato koṇakāto prabhṛti sukhākaṃ mocayitavyaṃ § 44.6.39A5. taṃ cīvarakaṃ yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati, tato paribhuñjayitavyaṃ § 45.4.39B6. tato grāmapraveśana<ka>ṃ ca nivāsanaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 45.5.39B7. tato vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 45.7.40A3. tato nivāsanaṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ § 48.5.41B1. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā ... paṭa vā, tato niṣīditavyaṃ § 48.6.41B1. atha dāni aśrāddhakulaṃ bhavati ..., tato ca stūpikaṃ vā sāṃghikaṃ vā kāryaṃ adhīnaṃ bhavati, ... § 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā ... śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati, tato apāśrayitavyaṃ § 49.1.42A1. yaṃ kālaṃ paśyati “na ... saṃbhāvayituṃ” ti, tato āha “āyuṣman, ...” § 49.1.42A2. so dāni tato yeva anuparivarttiya ... § 49.7.42B6. rathyāntaraṃ vā paśyati tato yyeva nivarttayitavyaṃ ... yato eva paśyati tato eva nivarttitavyaṃ 263  § 49.8.42B7. yato nirggato bhavati, tato ārocayitavyaṃ § 52.1.44B1. yaṃ kālam āgatā bhavanti, tato teṣāṃ saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ § 52.1.44B1. yaṃ kālaṃ āgatā bhaviṣyanti, tato saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ § 52.7.44B7. yaṃ kālaṃ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā anujñā dinnā bhavati, tato paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 52.9.44B7. atha dāni piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhitvā tato eva nadīkūle ... āhāraṃ kṛtvā pātraṃ nirmmādayitvā āgacchati, anāpattiḥ § 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā § 53.7.45A6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho prahāṇe upaviṣṭo bhavati, tato dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti § 53.11.45B1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāto dīpako ukkaḍhitavyo § 53.13.45B3. yadā bhikṣū pratikrāntā bhavaṃti, tato varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.14.45B4. <vaktavyaṃ> “... dīpaṃ gopayiṣyan.” ti. tato hastena tāva ovārayitavyo. tato vaktavyaṃ “mā <cirāyi>(?) āyuṣman eṣo nirvvāpayiṣyati.” § 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo § 56.5.47A6. yathāsāhaṭasya niṣīdanasya dvitīyo anto uvveliya prajñapayitavyaṃ, tato niṣīditavyaṃ et passim tatkālakāni : vā tatkālakāni für vāta-kopakāni : § 62.4.50A1 tatta~ (Pā, Pkt) “heiß”; < Skt. tapta ⇒ tapta~ § 42.2.36A3. āgameṃtu āyuṣmanto, na tāva jentāko tatto bhavati tattaka~ (BHS, Pā) “so viel” ☞ § 8.13, Anm. 6 ⇒ yattaka, yattikā~, yāvataka~ § 18.13.16A2. antamasato kumbhikāyaṃ ekasya paryāptaṃ bhaveyā, tattakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 50.6.43B2. atha dāni so dānapati tittiṇo bhavati, yattakaṃ dīyati tattakaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ tatra ⇒ tahi, tahiṃ § 3.7.3B5. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati, tena prakṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ § 14.10.13B1. ye tatra bhavanti gopālakā vā paśupālakā vā teṣāṃ so vihāro anuparindi- tavyo § 14.15.13B4. yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā ... § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) tatra kāṣṭhehi vā phalakehi vā ohāṭayitavyā § 19.16.18A6. tatra kuṃtako (Hs. tatraṃko) alābu-{o}tumbako vā thapayitavyo § 36.3.29B2. ye tatra gṛhapatimahattarakāḥ bhavanti, te prakṛty’ eva {te} pratisaritavyā § 41.5.34A2. yatra yeva ayaṃ śramaṇako iryāpathaṃ vikopayiṣyati, tatraỿva śe khaṭakaṃ dāsyāmi § 41.10.34A7. tena dāni brāhmaṇena tatraỿva sthāne sthitena § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... yatra dīpā dīpyanti tatra allīno § 41.29.35B6. tatraỿva sthapitavyaṃ § 42.5.36B1. tatra nāma (☞ § 42.5, Anm. 2) yūyaṃ ... adhyācariṣyatha § 43.3.38A3. māsavāriko vā daśāhavāriko vā tatra uddiśitavyo paṃcāhavāriko vā § 43.4.38A3. yaṃ tatra bhaṇḍaṃ bhavati ... § 43.5.38A4. yaṃ tatra bhava<ṃ>ti dugdhaghaṭā vā dadhighaṭā vā ... § 43.6.38A5. yaṃ tatra bhavati śatapotanako vā tāmrapātrā vā ... § 44.6.39A4. tatraỿva sarvvaṃ bhūmīye anupraviṣṭo bhavati § 49.1.41B6. ahaṃ ca tatra kiñcid eva akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyāmi (≒ § 49.2.42A5) § 54.11.46A6. atha dāni bahu pracālayanti, ... yo tatra navakataro bhavati, tasya yaṣṭī dātavyā § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... lābhāgrayaśograprāpto, lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātaśayyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārāṇāṃ tatra ca anupaliptaḥ padmam iva jalena usw. tathā § 4.9.5A1. tathā yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ 264  § 4.12.5A4. kiṃ ārabhya deti, tathā yeva nimantraṇāy’ etavyaṃ § 4.12.5A5. vaktavyaṃ “tathā dehi yathā sarvveṣāṃ samaṃ bhavati.” § 4.20.6A3. prītiṃ janehi suvihitā tathā hi dinnaṃ imaṃ dānan (vs) § 5.12.7A3. yathā bhavati tathā dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā § 6.14.8A4. tathā yeva dakṣiṇāyo vistareṇa karttavyāyo yathā saṃghasthavirasya bhaktāgre § 12.12.11B7. yaṃ saṃghasthaviro jalpati, tathā karttavyaṃ § 19.4.17B6. tathā (Hs. yadi) samantena setuḥ karttavyo, yathā ... bāhyena nirggacchati § 19.18.18A7. atha dāni dvibhūmiko bhavati, dvitīyāyāṃ bhūmiyaṃ tathā yeva ghaṭako sthāpayitavyo. tṛbhūmiko bhavati, tṛtīyāyāṃ bhūmau tathā yyeva sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo, yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso gaccheyā § 21.6.20B4. yadi aparo pi koci sīvayitukāmo bhavati, tenâpi kaṭhinaṃ astarīya cīvarakaṃ yeva tathā sīvayitavyaṃ § 29.6.24B4. tathā karttavyaṃ, yathânantaryaṃ jānukehi na vyābahati § 39.2.31A1. tathā tumhehiṃ pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍi āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjatha § 41.1.33B4. udake pi khalu mātrā uktā bhagavatā tathaỿva sarvvehi bāhirakehi jīvitapariṣkārehi § 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā tathaỿva sarvvehi jīvitapariṣkārehi § 42.9.36B4. nâpi dāni {kṣamati} tathā (Hs. tadā) karttavyaṃ yathā sukhena tapyati § 42.9.36B4. atha khalu tathā karttavyaṃ yathā yavaphalamātreṇa lagga<ti> § 42.13.36B7. atha dāni sarvvasāṃghiko bhavati, tathā eva <gantavya>ṃ § 42.21.37A5. yadi tāva mitakaṃ dīyati uṣṇodakaṃ ghaṭena vā kuṇḍena vā, tena tathā yeva grahetavyaṃ § 42.24.37B1. yathā bhavati tathā gantavyaṃ § 43.15.38B3. tathā yyeva upamakṣitaṃ vā raṃgarañjitaṃ vā ... § 43.15.38B3. cīvararaj<j>ūṃ na ... tathā yeva vitanikā ujjhitvā gantavyaṃ § 43.16.38B5. etā bhavanti vāsīyo vā kuddālakā vā niśreṇiyo vā, na dāni tathā yeva mṛttikāpraliptikā sthapetavyā § 48.6.41B1. nâpi kṣamati tathā yeva niṣīdituṃ § 49.6.42B3. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā pratibalo bhavati piṇḍapātam vā aṇṭhituṃ vihārakaṃ vâgantuṃ § 49.9.43A1. yathā yeva agrāsanaṃ ... paribhuñjasi, tathā yeva dakṣiṇām ādiśāhi § 57.6.47B4. (upānahikāyo ...) pratisandhismi tathā yeva saṃpuṭikṛtikāyo āsanasya heṣṭhe sthapitavyāyo § 57.6.47B4. upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā ... § 60.5.48B7. taṃ pi tathā dāni kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ, yathā ānantaryakaṃ śabdena na vyābahati § 61.4.49A4. tathā karttavyaṃ, yathânantarikaṃ śabdena na vyābahati (≒ § 62.6.50A2) usw. tathā für tato : § 58.4.48A4 tathāgata~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) § 11.1.10B1. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānās tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanti anuvicaranti (= § 12.1.11A4, § 21.1.20A7; ≒ § 11.1.10B3, § 12.1.11A6) § 11.1.10B3. te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā atīva udārāṇi prītiprāmodyāni pratilabhiṣyanti § 12.1.11A6. ye ca te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ tathāgatam evôddiśya āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ, te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā atirivôdārāṇi prītiprāmodyāni pratilabhiṣyanti § 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi (Loc. pl.) tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6) § 36.6.29B6. te hi yūyaṃ niśrāya tathāgate brahmacaryaṃ caratha mahato oghasya niḥsaraṇārthaṃ tad~ (Skt), taṃ (BHS, Pā) ⇒ taṃ pi, tena, tena hi, tahiṃ § 4.20.6A3. so ’yaṃ śreṣṭhāyatane pratiṣṭhito pātrasaṃhṛto lābho (vs) § 19.17.18A6. so dāni ujjhitavyo navakāntena vā yasya vā oheyyako bhavati 265 § 20.11.19B7. so eṣo bhikṣuḥ (“Wenn irgendein Mönch ...” ☞ § 20.11, Anm. 3) nir- avaśeṣaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati vinayātikrama āsādayati § 20.18.20A4. sa eṣo bhikṣuḥ (“Wenn irgendein Mönch ...”) sarvveṇa sarvvaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 41.10.34A6. yo pi so brāhmaṇānāṃ uṣṇodakakarako, so pi na evaṃ śucī § 41.13.34B2. kadāci dāni so śreṣṭhi ... gato varṣārātrikaṃ § 41.14.34B3. so eko dārako dṛṣṭo § 41.21.35A5. anyo so corasenāpati eṣo brāhmaṇo § 41.29.35B6. yadi tahiṃ koci bhikṣu bhavati navatarako, so vaktavyo “udakaṃ āsiñcihi” tti § 42.16.37A2. so prakṛty’ eva bhaṇito bhavati § 42.21.37A6. yo pratibalo bhavati ... so praviśatu § 44.1.38B6. so dāni vihārako uppeḍanako § 44.4.39A2. so uppeḍanako vihārako bhavati § 44.1.38B6. sa (Nom. sg. neut.) cīvaraṃ cīvara{ṃ}vaṃśāto kṛṣiyāṇaṃ patito § 1.3.1B3. tad eva sarvvaṃ bhagavān vistareṇa pratyārocayati (= § 7.2.8A7, § 9.2.9B6, § 28.2.24A2, § 42.4.36A6, § 47.2.40B5, § 49.2.42A5 et passim) § 28.8.24A4. tan na kṣamati purato samaṃ vā gantuṃ. ohayitvā gantavyaṃ § 43.16.38B5. tac c’ eva{ṃ} cāturddiśaṃ sāṃghikaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ riktaparibhogaṃ na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ § 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ sthavitaṃ. tan (Nom. sg. neut.) dāni ... bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno § 31.16.26A2. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullapitavyaṃ āgantukehi “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ (“nach wie vor”?) ettha vasatha, ghuṇaviddhā tave, ...” § 4.18.5B6. taṃ khu tasya svakaṃ bhavati na khalu yo (lies: yaṃ?) tatra dahyati (vs) § 40.14.33A6. taṃ yyeva karttavyaṃ § 41.20.35A4. taṃ pi dhik yo ’sya muñcati (vs) § 44.1.38B7. taṃ dāni ekena ākrāntaṃ dvitīyena ākrāntaṃ tṛtīyenâkrāntaṃ § 44.1.38B7. taṃ ... sarvaṃ phāṭitaṃ § 50.9.43B5. yadi tāva ākāṃkṣati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ yaṃ rucyati, taṃ (Nom.) khāditavyaṃ § 40.16.33B1. taṃ pi dāni gṛhṇiya ānīya kālena kālaṃ dātavyaṃ § 41.13.34B3. taṃ dāra<ka>ṃ rakṣapālaṃ thapiyāṇaṃ § 41.14.34B3. te dāni taṃ gṛhaṃ okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviṣṭā § 41.14.34B4. yaṃ labhatha taṃ gṛhṇatha § 44.2.39A1. śabdāpayatha taṃ bhikṣuṃ § 50.9.43B5. cchandayitavyo vaktavyo “ūnakaṃ pūrehi. yaṃ te rucyati taṃ khādehi.” § 20.9.19B5. tena dāni khādantena dantakāṣṭhaṃ tho<kā>vaśeṣaṃ kṛtaṃ. tena dāni bhagavān dṛṣṭo bhagavato gauraveṇa sarvvam abhyavahṛtaṃ § 40.1.32B2. tena dāni kālena tena samayena āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā pānīyaṃ pratijāgaranti § 41.21.35A4. anyo ’sau tena kālena tena samaye[na] .. .. bhavati agrakulikasya putro § 41.26.35B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tena pādā dhovitā bhava<ṃ>ti § 41.27.35B4. tenaỿva hastena udakaṃ āsiñcituṃ § 42.15.36B7. yo praviśati tenântaraṃ dātavyaṃ § 42.21.37A5. yadi tāva mitakaṃ dīyati uṣṇodakaṃ ghaṭena vā kuṇḍena vā, tena tathā yeva grahetavyaṃ § 42.21.37A6. yo pratibalo bhavati ... tena praveṣṭavyaṃ § 43.3.38A3. tena saṃghasya anugraho sādhayitavyo, bhikṣusaṃgho pariveṣāpayitavyo § 43.12.38B1. yo yatra abhiyukto bhavati, tena taṃ pratisāmetavyaṃ § 43.14.38B2. tena vṛddhatarakasya jñātavyaṃ § 43.15.38B3. tena dhovanikā vā rajanikā vā kariya na kṣamati ... dayituṃ § 44.1.38B7. tena dāni mārggantena so cīvarakoṇako dṛṣṭo § 49.7.42B4. āgamiṣyaṃ ahaṃ yena vā tena <vā?> sārddhaṃ § 51.14.44A7. evaṃ yaṃ yaṃ kāryyaṃ cchindiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, dātukāmā bhavati, na tena gantavyaṃ 266 § 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, ... vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti. tena sa vārayitavyo, iminā upaviśitavyaṃ § 54.9.46A6. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava yaṣṭi prāpuṇati. vārehi.” tena vāretavyaṃ, iminā upaviśitavyaṃ § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye (Dat. sg. masc.; ☞ § 31.19[Text], Anm. 1, 2) bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako, so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā” § 42.11.36B4. ya (pl. masc.?) tāye {t}ārthāyaỿva bhava<n>ti § 41.19.35A3. tasmān nareṇa satataṃ ācāraguṇena bhavitavyaṃ (vs) § 4.18.5B6. taṃ khu tasya svakaṃ bhavati na khalu yo (lies: yaṃ?) tatra dahyati (vs) § 18.13.16A2. riktakāṃ varccakumbhikāṃ paśyati, ... yasya oheyyako bhavati, tasya ācikṣitavyaṃ § 18.23.16B2. iminā ca parāṅmukhena bhavitavyaṃ. tasya câvakāśo dātavyaḥ. tena ca parāṅmukhena upaviśitavyaṃ antaraṃ dātavyaṃ § 18.13.16A2. riktakāṃ varccakumbhikāṃ paśyati, ... yasya oheyyako bhavati, tasya ācikṣitavyaṃ § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro ... niṣaṇṇo ... aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgacchiya tasya purato sthito. tasya dāni tena nīvaraṇena cittaṃ samādhānaṃ na gacchati (≒ § 27.2.23B5) § 32.4.27A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu āgantuko āgato bhavati, tasya koci bhikṣu parijñātako bhavati, so ca apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sārddham vācovāciṃ karoti, nâpi kṣamati tasya taṃ velaṃ pādāṃ vandituṃ § 41.10.34A6. sthavireṇa dāni tasya brāhmaṇasya prasannacittasya catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni § 41.13.34B2. tasya dāni śreṣṭhikasya kulaputrakā gṛhaṃ ocaranti § 42.16.37A1. tasya tāva parikarmma karttavyaṃ § 42.25.37B2~3. tasya sārddhevihārikā bhavanti antevāsikā vā, tehi vaktavyaṃ § 43.16.38B5. yasyaỿva{ṃ} kāryam bhavati, tasyaỿva{n} dātavyaṃ § 50.2.43A3. so dāni tasya jalpati “āyuṣman, sādhu taṃ pātrakaṃ pi labhema.” § 54.13.46B1. yadi koci pracālayati tasya dātavyā. te<na> pi dāni tahiṃ na āghāto bandhitavyo § 42.13.36B6. ye tasmiṃ pariveṇikā saṃti tehi gantavyaṃ § 31.21.26A4. tahiṃ cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ cīvarabisiyan (Loc. sg. fem.; ☞ § 31.21[Text], Anm. 2, 3) thaviyāṇaṃ, ... § 18.35.17A1. antamasato taṃhi (Loc. sg.; vgl. BHSG § 21.21) pṛthivīpradeśe gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 26.3.23A7. (yavāgū ...) pārṣikā bhavati, tāye parṣāye gantavyaṃ § 11.1.10B2. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ ... te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā ... § 12.1.11A6. ye ca te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ ... te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā ... § 20.6.19B2. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti § 31.16.26A2. jātā te śṛgālā ye tumbhāṇaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti (☞ § 31.16, Anm. 5) § 31.24.26A7. yūyaṃ jātā, <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti § 41.1.33B2. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā (= § 48.1.41A3) § 42.12.36B5. te dāni agni datvā ... § 52.1.44A7. te dāni niśrayakaraṇīyā piṇḍāya caranti § 53.1.45A2. te dāni bhikṣū andhakāre prahāṇe upaviśaṃti ukkhalantā prakkhalantā § 34.6.28B5. nâpi kṣamati te (Acc. pl. masc.; vgl. BHSG §§ 21.30~31) nindituṃ “ye kṣatriyā kuśalā bhavanti, prāg eva te nairayikā bhavantî”ti § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te (Acc. pl. masc.) nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ...” § 36.6.29B6. te (Acc. pl. masc.) hi yūyaṃ niśrāya tathāgate brahmacaryaṃ caratha mahato oghasya niḥsaraṇārthaṃ § 41.18.35A1. tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati § 4.15.5B2. ye devatā santi abhiprasannā tā naṃ rakṣaṃtu tā ca naṃ pālayantu (vs) § 17.8.15A2. anyehi tāvad yā bhitti ollāye gṛhītakāyo tāyo (Nom. pl. fem.; vgl. BHSG § 9.89) śāṭayitavyāyo 267  § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... tāyo (Nom. pl. fem.) devasikaṃ cchorayi- tavyāyo vā, dahiya bhūyo vā thapayitavyāyo ... tāyo (Acc. pl. fem.; vgl. BHSG § 9.90; Hs. tayo) cchoriya anyāyo sthāpayitavyāyo § 18.17.16A4. tāyo (Acc. pl. fem.) varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā varccakuṭīye prakṣipituṃ § 14.15.13B3. na kṣamati tehi aśabdakarṇṇikāye āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantuṃ § 31.1.25A7. tehi dāṇi āyuṣmantehi § 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 34.1.28B1. te dāni tehi niṣaṇṇehi na pārenti kāryāṇi karttuṃ (= § 35.1.28B7, § 36.1. 29A7, § 37.1.29B7) § 40.5.32B5. tehi kalyata eva utthiya hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... § 41.14.34B3. tehi dāni kulaputrakehi otāro labdho § 41.14.34B4. tehi dāni mārggiya mārggiya ... mahāntaṃ kūṭaṃ kṛtaṃ § 41.25.35B2. āgamitavyaṃ yāva tehi dhovitā pādā tti § 42.13.36B6. ye tahiṃ parṣāye tehi (Hs. tahiṃ) gantavyaṃ § 42.13.36B6. ye tasmiṃ pariveṇikā saṃti tehi gantavyaṃ § 42.11.36B5. tehi jentāke santānikā śāṭayitavyā ... § 42.25.37B2~3. tasya sārddhevihārikā bhavanti antevāsikā vā, tehi vaktavyaṃ § 53.10.45B1. tehi dīpacārikehi na kṣamati āghāto vā pra<dveṣo> vedayituṃ § 42.19.37A3. na dāni kṣamati tehi agni prajuhitvā ... prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi § 41.15.34B4. yo teṣāṃ corasenāpatiḥ so gṛhasya madhyāgāre upaviṣṭaḥ § 52.1.44B1. te dāni teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā odhyāyanti “vayaṃ yyeva ...” § 48.1.41A3. teṣāṃ sārddhevihārikā antevāsikā odhyāyanti § 4.18.5B7. yā tatra devatā asyā tāsāṃ dakṣiṇām ādiśe (vs) § 40.6.32B6. tehi (Loc. pl.) bhājanehi prakṣipitavyā pāṭalāgulikā vā campakagulikā vā śarkarā vā § 41.17.34B7. yo (für ye?) etasya mātāpitā vā jñātikā vā tehi (Loc. pl.) eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati § 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... tehi (Loc. pl.) prajñaptehi upaviśaṃti § 48.2.41A5. yūyaṃ ... <t>ehi (Loc. pl.) prajñaptehi niṣīdatha § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi (Loc. pl.) bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ usw. usw. tadā § 18.13.16A2. riktakāṃ varccakumbhikāṃ paśyati, na tadā adhyupekṣitavyaṃ § 18.33.16B6. atha dāni sahasā utpīḍito bhavati, tadā na kṣamati ... gantuṃ § 18.34.16B7. atha dāni bhikṣūhi dṛṣṭo bhavati, tadā na kṣamati vaktuṃ § 18.52.17B2. atha dāni so bhavati śaithiliko vā ... aśikṣākāmo, tadā svayaṃ ujjhitavyaṃ § 28.8.24A4. anuparivarttantena tadā na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā <anu>parivarttituṃ § 41.21.35A5. tadâpi etasya eṣo ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo usw. tadā für tathā : § 42.9.36B4 taddukā für taṭṭukā : § 43.6.38A5 taddhaka~ ⇒ pāda-taddhaka~ tanuka~ “dünn” § 26.8.23B1. yadi tāva tanukā bhavati, na vaktavyaṃ “he he he Gaṅgā ...” tantuka~ “Faden” § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti. yadi tāva <ta>ntuka nikṣipiyāṇaṃ uttheti, jāni- tavyaṃ “dāhiti eṣā” tti tantra für tatra : § 4.18.5B7 √tap ⇒ tapta~, tatta~, tāpaya-, tāpita-mudrita~, praty-o-tāpe-, saṃ-tāpita~ § 42.9.36B4. nâpi dāni {kṣamati} tathā karttavyaṃ yathā sukhena tapyati tapari für upari : § 19.3.17B6 taparpaṇāgre für tarpaṇāgre : § 57.9.47B6 268 Tapoda~ (BHS) Name eines Flusses; vgl. BHS, SWTF, Pā. Tapodā ☞ § 40.8, Anm. 2 § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, Rājagṛhe Tapodaṃ (Hs. Tayotaṃ) ... tapta~ ⇒ tatta~ § 42.2.36A3. praviśantu āyuṣmanto, jentāko tapto tama~ (?) ⇒ udakatama~ tayo für tāyo (Acc. pl. fem. von tad~) : § 18.17.16A5 Tayotaṃ für Tapodaṃ : § 40.8.33A1 -tara-ka~ (Komparativ + Suffix ka) ⇒ anukalla-tarakaṃ, navaka-taraka~, nava-taraka~, praṇīta- taraka~, vṛddha-taraka~ tarikā~ ⇒ upasthala-tarikā~ taruṇa~ “jung” § 31.7.25B5. sāye vāsôpagatā bhavanti, taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā taruṇa-bhikṣu~# “junger Mönch” § 31.5.25B4. yadi dāni ośyā bhavati, taruṇabhikṣūhi agrato gantavyaṃ ośyā pratibāhantehi taruṇikā~ (Pā) “jung(e Frau)” ⇒ mahantikā~ § 18.40.17A3. nâpi kṣamati taruṇikā pṛcchituṃ, mā veḍḍā bhaveya tti § 18.42.17A4. na dāni taruṇikā strī pṛcchitavyā, mā prahāsaṃ deyā tarpaṇa~ “Erfrischung” ⇒ eka-bhakta-tarpaṇa~ § 31.18.26A2. kasya śuve bhaktaṃ tarpaṇaṃ purobhaktikaṃ vā? tarpaṇāgra~# (°paṇa-agra) “die Halle für Erfrischungen” ☞ § 11.10, Anm. 2 ⇒ agra~ (2), bhaktāgra~ § 11.10.11A2. na kṣamati sāṃghikena śayyāsanena prāvṛtena bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>am vā upaviśituṃ § 57.9.47B6. nâpi kṣamati saṃghamadhye bhaktāgre ta{pa}rpaṇāgre vā samīcīyaṃ vā sa- upānahena niṣīdituṃ § 58.4.48A3. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyikāye vā auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ § 59.5.48B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā upaviṣṭena auddhatyā<bhi>prāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhe<na> kṣīvituṃ § 60.5.48B6. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā samāvāyikānāṃ vā ... kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.5.48B6. atha dāni bhikṣu bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, ... § 61.6.49A5. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā ... aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhayituṃ § 62.8.50A4. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa vātakarmma karttuṃ tarhi “dann, da, darum” § 22.4.21A1. cakkalī utkṣipitavyā. nâpi dāni sahasā. anekāyo mā tarhi (für tahiṃ?) dīrghako praviṣṭo bhaveya tti § 53.7.45A6. dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti tala~ “Sohle” ⇒ ākāśa-tala~, mallaka-tala~, malla-talaka~, hasta-tala~ § 24.6.22A4. (Schleim) ekasya upānahāye tale cchorayitavyaṃ dvitīyena marddayitavya § 41.8.34A4~5. ekasya upānahā talaṃ pocchitaṃ dvitīyasya upānahā talaṃ pocchitaṃ § 41.24.35A7~35B1. ekasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ dvitīyasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ (= § 41.29.35B5) talaka~ ⇒ malla-talaka~ tala-vilaya~# “Schaden an der Handfläche” (?); die Wendung talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ bedeutet vermutlich “unsere Hände werden wund” ☞ § 47.1, Anm. 4 § 47.1.40B3. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarakāṇi dhoventā siventā raṃjentā talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ (≒ § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A4, § 48.2.41A6) tave# “ihr” (Nom. pl. 2. Person)? ☞ § 31.16, Anm. 2 ⇒ tvaṃ § 31.16.26A2. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullapitavyaṃ āgantukehi “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ ettha vasatha, ghuṇaviddhā tave, NandOpanandanā yūyaṃ nāgarājāno, ...” 269 tahi (BHS [BHSG § 21.22, nur in Versen], Pkt. [Hemacandras Siddhahemaśabdānuśāsana VIII, 2.161]) “dort, dorthin”; Verschreibung für tahiṃ? ⇒ tahiṃ, tatra, amukahiṃ, ekahi, ekahiṃ, kahiṃ, yahiṃ § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi jātakaṃ bhaveyaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya, ... § 12.14.12A1. atha dāni tahi koci bhavati āṭakkarasiṃhanādiko ... § 14.3.13A3. atha khalu ucchāhetavyā. tahi eko vā dvau vā trayo vā yāvatakā ucchahanti § 18.7.15B6. kiñ câpi tahi yyeva udakaṃ patati, anāpattiḥ § 18.18.16A6. kheṭaṃ vā siṃhāṇakam vā varcco vā tahi nikṣiptaṃ bhavati, uccikāye tahiṃ sarvvaṃ prakṣipitavyaṃ § 18.22.16B1. yadi tāva tahi (Hs. tāta vahi) koci pūrvvapraviṣṭo bhavati, ... § 18.51.17B1. yadi varcakuṭī bhavati, tahi karttavyaṃ § 19.16.18A6. na dāni tahi kṣamati uccāro vā kheṭasiṃghāṇako vā prakṣipituṃ § 47.4.40B6. yahiṃ lagnaṃ tahi lagnaṃ; yahiṃ pāṭitaṃ tahiṃ pāṭitaṃ tahiṃ (BHS [BHSG § 21.22], Pā, Pkt) “dort, dorthin” ⇒ tahi, tatra, amukahiṃ, ekahi, ekahiṃ, kahiṃ, yahiṃ § 1.7.1B6. saṃghasthavireṇa yahiṃ bhaviṣyati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ § 3.6.3B4. yahiṃ bhavati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ “abhikramantu ...” § 5.7.6B3. tena praviśiyāṇaṃ tahiṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ § 5.9.6B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi (Loc. pl.) dārakadārikā vā sovāpitā bhaveṃsu § 6.9.7B7. anekāye tahiṃ (Hs. tehiṃ) āsanehi garbharūpā sovāpitāni bhaveṃsu § 6.6.7B3. anekāye tahiṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya rājabhayaṃ vā corabhayam vā ... § 6.7.7B4. tena gacchiyāṇa tahiṃ gṛhaṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ § 8.7.9A4. vāretavyo vaktavyo “mā tahiṃ gaccha!” § 12.8.11B4. yaṃ tahiṃ pariveṇe bhavati bhaṇḍaṃ niyatakaṃ sarvvaṃ samudānitavyaṃ § 13.17.12B7. vihāro usvedako bhavati, na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati hastaśaucaṃ vā karttuṃ ... § 18.17.16A5. atha dāni prapātaniśritā bhavanti, kiṃcâpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati ... § 18.41.17A4. atha khalu yo puruṣāṇāṃ nīlamaṃco tahiṃ gantavyaṃ § 18.43.17A5. śūnyagharaṃ vā jambālam vā bhavati, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ § 18.51.17B1. kāṣṭhakaṃ antarā karttavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateyā § 19.16.18A6. tatra kuṃtako alābutumbako vā thapayitavyo. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa ghaṭake prakṣipitavyaṃ § 19.18.18A7. tṛbhūmiko bhavati, tṛtīyāyāṃ bhūmau tathā yyeva sthāpayitavyaṃ. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ karitavyaṃ § 19.20.18A7. tato pi na kṣamati so tahiṃ cchorayituṃ yahiṃ deve varṣintasya (für varṣante?) stūpavigrahaṃ vā saṃghavigrahaṃ vā gacchati § 19.22.18B1. vikāle praveśiyāṇaṃ (Hs. praviś°) tahiṃ yyeva sthāne sthāpayitavyo § 19.33.18B7. antamasato tahiṃ pṛthivīpradeśe tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 19.36.19A1. atha khalu yā ukṣiptarathyā bhavati tuṇḍarathyā <vā?> tahiṅ gantavyaṃ § 22.2.21A1. vihārasya dvārasmiṃ upari trayo kīlakāni ākoṭayitavyā, tahiṃ cakkalī bandhitavyā § 22.2.21A1. (cakkalī ...) osāriyāṇaṃ heṣṭhe dve kīlakān āpīḍiyāṇa tahiṃ bandhitavyaṃ . § 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.14.26A1. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ. atha dāni āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, tahiṅ gantavyaṃ § 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.21.26A4. yatra bhikṣūṇāṃ āsanaprajñaptir bhavati, tahiṃ cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ cīvara- bisiyan thaviyāṇaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ vā upānahau vā thaviyāṇa, ... § 31.27.26B1. atha dāni tahiṃ vihārake anugraho bhavati, ... § 34.3.28B3. ye tahiṃ vṛddhatarakā kṣatriyā bhavanti, te tāva alliyitavyā § 35.3.29A3. ye tahiṃ brāhmaṇamahattarakā bhavanti, te pratikṛty’ eva upasaṃkramitavyā § 39.6.31A3. <yā> grāmāntikānāṃ thālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.6.31A3. yā āraṇyakānāṃ thālī ... tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.7.31A4. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ taṇḍulāni prakṣipituṃ 270  § 39.10.31A7. nâsti mama tahiṃ śraddhā nâpi prasādo § 39.22.32A1. atha dāni āhaṃsuḥ “nâsti mama ta{ṃ}hiṃ śraddhā, nâsti prasādo”, ... § 39.19.31B6~7. yā āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ. yā grāmāntikānāṃ sthālī, yadi tāva grāmāntikā āgatā bhavanti, tahiṃ pi taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 41.29.35B6. yadi tahiṃ koci bhikṣu bhavati navatarako, so vaktavyo “udakaṃ āsiñcihi” tti § 42.13.36B6. yadi tāva parṣāye bhavati, ye tahiṃ parṣāye tehi (Hs. tahiṃ) gantavyaṃ § 44.1.38B7. taṃ dāni tahiṃ cīvarakarṇṇake gṛhṇiya acchiyaṃ “caṭa” tti sarvaṃ phāṭitaṃ § 44.6.39A4. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ cīvarakoṇake gṛhṇiya “ḍu” tti acchituṃ § 47.4.40B6. yahiṃ lagnaṃ tahi lagnaṃ yahiṃ pāṭitaṃ tahiṃ pāṭitaṃ § 47.5.40B7. yadi tahiṃ ogho vā taḍāgam vā bhavati puṣkiriṇī vā, tahiṃ pādāṃ prakṣālitvā § 48.4.41A7. yadi tāva āsanaṃ bhavati dhūlīye vā mrakṣitaṃ ... , na kṣamati tahiṃ upaviśituṃ § 48.5.41A7. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā astarikā vā ... tato niṣīdi- tavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā ... śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati, tato apāśrayitavyaṃ § 49.7.42B5. anyasya haste pātraṃ datvā, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti śāṭakā vā ... suvarṇṇam vā, na dāni tahiṃ aśabdakarṇṇikāye nirggantavyaṃ § 54.13.46B1. yadi koci pracālayati tasya dātavyā. te<na> pi dāni tahiṃ na āghāto bandhitavyo et passim tahiṃ für tehi (oder tehiṃ?) : § 42.13.36B6 tāca für tāva : § 15.7.14A3 tāḍe- ⇒ tāṇḍe- tāṇḍe-# oder *tāḍe-? “schlagen”; vgl. Skt. tāḍayati (“schlagen”); vgl. Gā. taḍeti, Pā. tāḷeti, Pkt. tāleï; Skt. taṇḍate (“schlagen” nur in Dhātupāṭha) § 55.3.46B5. yo yeva pracālayati taṃ yeva kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena urasi vā tāṇḍeti (oder lies: tā{ṇ}ḍeti?) pārśvasmi vā āhananti tāta “oh Vater!” § 33.1.27B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti (≒ § 33.2.27B7) tādṛśa~, tādṛśī~ ⇒ yādṛśa~, yādṛśī~ § 26.8.23B2. yādṛśī dīyati, tādṛśī praticchit<avya>ā. dāyakavaśo na pratigrāhakavaśo § 34.5.28B5. atha khalu ārogyāpiya, yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ dīyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 35.5.29A5. ārogyāpayitvā <yā>dṛśaṃ āsanaṃ labhyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 35.5.29A5. atha khalu yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ dīyati, tādṛśe upaviśitavyaṃ § 36.5.29B4. ārogyāpiya yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ labhyate, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 37.4.30A3. atha khalu yādṛśaṃ <āsanaṃ> labhyate, tādṛśe (Hs. °dṛśo) upaviśitavyaṃ § 41.19.35A4. raudrā lohitapāṇī caurā tuṣyanti tādṛśā santā (vs) § 55.2.46B4. (geṇḍuka~ ...) tādṛśo karttavyo yo bhūmīyaṃ āpaṭito yugamātraṃ uppaṭati tāni für dāni : § 31.6.25B5 tāpaya- ⇒ praty-o-tāpe-, tāpita-mudrita~ § 42.27.37B4. tehi jentāko prajvalitavyo ... udakaṃ tāpayitavyaṃ tāpita-mudrita~# “versiegelt” ☞ § 40.1, Anm. 4 § 40.1.32B2. pānīyamaṇḍapaṃ parighaṭṭiya tāpitamudritaṃ kariya gocaraṃ praviṣṭāḥ § 40.1.32B3. kin dāni ayaṃ pānīyamaṇḍapo tāpitamudrito thapito? § 40.2.32B4. kin dāni ayaṃ pānīyamaṇḍapo tāpitamudrito kariya thapito? § 40.4.32B5. pānīyamaṇḍapaṃ ghaṭṭiya tāpitamudritaṃ (Hs. tāpiya°) kariya anyena gantuṃ tāpiya-(mudrita~) für tāpita-(mudrita~) ? : § 40.4.32B5 tāmra-pātra~ “kupferne Schale” 271  § 43.6.38A5. yaṃ tatra bhavati śatapotanako vā tāmrapātrā vā lohapātrā vā ... tāye (Dat. sg. masc.) ⇒ tad~ tāla-pādukā~# “Schuh aus Palmenblättern”; vgl. Pā. tāla-patta-pādukā ☞ § 28.1, Anm. 2 § 28.1.24A1. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgatvā tasya purato tālapādukāhi ābaddhāhi dīrgha- caṃkramaṃ caṃkramati ṭapya ṭaṭapya ṭapya ṭaṭapya tti tālukāgra~ (tāluka-a°) “vorderer Gaumen” § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati, pādena pādaṃ ādhāya, dantena dantaṃ ādhāya, jihvāgraṃ tālukāgre pratiṣṭhāpayitvā ... § 30.7.25A4. pādena pādam ādhāya, jihvāgraṃ tālukāgre pratiṣṭhāpayitvā tāva (Pā; Mvu, BhiVin[Ma-L], LV, SP usw.) ⇒ mā tāva, yadi tāva, tāvat, yadi tāvat § 1.1.1B2. paśyatha bhaṇe vayan tāva karmmāntān cchoriya āgatā (≒ § 5.1.6A5) § 1.11.2A4. vaktavyaṃ “gacchatha tāva bāhyato āmuhūrttaṃ āgametha ...” § 1.11.2A4. bhikṣusaṃgho tāva poṣadhaṃ kariṣyati § 2.1.2B2. vayaṃ yeva tāva karmmāntā cchoriya āgatā (≒ § 5.3.6A7) § 34.2.28B2. vayaṃ yeva tāva niṣaṇṇā “kāryāṇi kāray<iṣyām>a” tti (= § 35.1.28B7) § 2.9.3A2. muhūrttan tāva bāhyato āgametha. saṃgho tāva poṣadhaṃ kariṣyati § 3.10.4A2. vaktavyaṃ “bāhyato tāva yūyaṃ muhūrttam āgametha. ...” § 7.4.8B1. upādhyāyena tāva śrāddhevihāriṃ upasaṃpādentakenaỿva ... § 10.4.10A4. antevāsinā tāva kalyato yeva utthantakena eva ācāryasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ § 12.5.11B2. eṣā dāni saṃghasya varṣopanāyikā bhavati, prakṛtyaỿva tāva dāyakadānapati pratisaritavyā, tato vihārakā pratisaṃskarttavyāḥ § 14.6.13A5. samantena vihārasya tāva pratikṛty’ eva agniharaṇī karttavyā ... § 14.10.13B1. dīrghāyu, gacchāma tāva <va>yaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ § 14.15.13B4. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva tāva yaṃ ... bhāṇḍam ... sthāpayitavyaṃ § 15.7.14A3. praviśiya cīvaravaṃśo tāva (“zunächst”; Hs. tāca) pratyavekṣitavyo § 17.6.15A1. anyehi tāva mṛttikā mardditavyā, anyehi khāṇukā ... paripūriya dātavyā § 18.21.16A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā kṣamayituṃ, yāva uśvāsena utpīḍito tti § 18.22.16B1. iminā āgamayitavyaṃ tāva yāva utthita iti § 19.7.18A1. tāva na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā āgamayituṃ, yāva praśvāsena prapīḍito bhavati § 20.11.19B7. evaṃ tāva khādayitavyaṃ yāva dantakāṣṭhasya catvāri aṅgulāni avaśiṣṭāni § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena ... § 25.3.22B2. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya pātracīvaram ādāya gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyā) ... § 34.3.28B3. atha khalu ye tahiṃ vṛddhatarakā kṣatriyā bhavanti, te tāva alliyitavyā § 36.2.29B1. vayaṃ yeva tāva sannipatitā “karmmāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 37.3.30A2. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva tāva vṛddhatarakā pratisaritavyā § 38.2.30A5. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva tāva upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā āmantrayitavyo § 39.1.30B6. āraṇyakaṃ tāva (“zu jener Zeit”?) śeyyāsanaṃ grāmāntikañ ca ekabhakta- tarppaṇañ {ca} § 39.3.31A1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... bhuñjituṃ § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati”, vaktavyaṃ “prāgo tāva adyâpi. āraṇyakâpi tāva nâgacchanti” § 39.24.32A2. dānapatir āgato bhavati, āha “bhante, āhaṇatha gaṇḍiṃ. anukālyo ’va tāva adyâpi bhavati”, vaktavyaṃ “prāgo tāva adyâpi grāmāntikā ca bhikṣavo nâgacchanti” § 39.16.31B4. yadi tāva anukalyo adyâpi tāva bhavati, ... § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi no parihāṇi.” § 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo § 41.17.34B7. asmākaṃ tāva eṣo ... hitakāmo § 41.23.35A6. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva pādāṃ dhovantena ... āsiṃcitavyaṃ § 41.23.35A7. vāmā tāva jaṃghā dhovitavyā (= § 41.27.35B4) § 41.23.35A7. dakṣiṇā tāva jaṃghā dhovitavyā (= § 41.28.35B5) 272  § 42.2.36A3. āgameṃtu āyuṣmanto, na tāva jentāko tatto bhavati § 42.16.37A1. tasya tāva parikarmma karttavyaṃ § 45.4.39B5. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyata evôtthitvā § 45.4.39B6. prakṛty’ eva tāva grāmapraveśanakaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 45.5.39B7. prakṛty’ eva tāva vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivasanaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 45.7.40A2. pratikṛty’ eva tāva rātrīprāvaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ upahastīkarttavyaṃ § 46.3.40A6. pratikṛty’ eva tāva grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 46.5.40A7. prakṛty’ eva tāva vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastīkarttavyaṃ § 46.6.40B2. prakṛty’ eva tāva upahastīkarttavyaṃ § 47.1.40B3. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarakāṇi dhoventā ... talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ (≒ § 47.2. 40B5, § 48.1.41A4) § 49.4.42A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā paścācchramaṇo praveśituṃ § 51.3.44A1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati piṇḍacārikena yāva uṭṭhānāto nirghoṭayituṃ § 52.1.44B1. vayaṃ yyeva tāva imeṣāṃ kṛtena snehaṃ thapemaḥ, ... § 53.6.45A5. yadi tāva so dvibhūmiko saṃghārāmo bhavati, prathamaṃ tāva sopāna- maggulīye dīpako jālayitavyo § 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo § 53.17.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, prahāṇaśālāyān tāva prathamaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.18.45B6. atha dāni na tāva nirbhāti, na kṣamati nirvvāpayituṃ § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena aṣṭahastâyāmena karttavyā muṣṭi- mātrī sthūlatvena § 54.7.46A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yaṣṭiṃ cārentena kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye āhanituṃ § 54.13.46B1. atha khalu cintetavyaṃ “bahukaro eṣo asmākaṃ vinīvaraṇaṃ karoti.” tena tāva vāretavyā § 54.15.46B1. evaṃ tāva vāretavyaṃ yāva prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (= § 55.9.47A1) § 56.3.47A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ okastena niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.3.47B2. atha khalu bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ § 58.4.48A4. a<na>ntariko vaktavyo “āyuṣman, mama tāva piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhê”ti § 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭena ... (= § 61.3.49A3) § 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayi- tavyā ... § 62.2.49B6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho upaviṣṭo bhavati, eko tāva pūtivātakarmmaṃ karoti. aparo “gaccha” tti. aparo “ḍharaḍha<ra>” tti usw. tāvat ⇒ tāva, yadi tāvat § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī tāvad bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā ... ti (BHS, Pā) ⇒ kin ti dāni, tti, iti, itti § 1.3.1B3. bhagavān āha: “satyaṃ Nandana, evaṃ nāma saṃghasya poṣadho?” ti ... <yāva> “navakā bhikṣū ojjhāyanti ...” ti § 18.42.17A4. utsṛṣṭagṛhaṃ gantavyaṃ. pṛcchitavyaṃ “rikto ukkharo” ti § 19.16.18A6. mā aprakṛtikā (wohl für °iko) ghaṭasya {vā} bāhyena praśvāsaṃ cchoreyā ti § 25.13.23A1. nâpi kṣamati (... ☞ § 25.13, Anm. 2) “gṛhītaṃ na gṛhītan” ti, tato muñci- tavyaṃ § 32.12.27B6. āha “anyatra gamiṣyan” ti, vaktavyaṃ “gacchāhi” tti § 33.11.28A4~5. nâpi kṣamati “ambe” ti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā § 33.12.28A5. nâpi kṣamati “bhāve” tti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā “āyuṣmaṃ” tti vā § 40.16.33B1. atha dāni ... bhājanaṃ ca atiriktaṃ ti, labhyā dāni ... yācituṃ § 44.6.39A5. “mā cīvarakoṇako bhavatu. mā cīvarako” ti § 50.8.43B4. nâpi kṣamati nīhārapiṇḍapātenâpi “adhyeṣṭo mayā piṇḍapātanīhārako” ti 273  adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ et passim ti für te : § 32.2.27A5 tittino für tintiṇo : § 4.11.5A3 tithikā für thitikā : § 31.18.26A2 tintiṇa~ (Pā, Pkt) “geizig” ☞ § 4.11, Anm. 2 § 4.11.5A3. atha dāni so manuṣyo anācīrṇṇadāno vā bhavati, tintiṇo (Hs. tittino) vā bhavati, ... § 50.6.43B2. atha dāni so dānapati tittiṇo bhavati, yattakaṃ dīyati tattakaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ tila~ ⇒ sa-tila-pallava~ § 51.8.44A3. eṣā strī dhānāṃ vā pīṣayati, tilam vā mudgam vā kalāyām vā daleti tiṣṭha- ⇒ √sthā tihutaṃ für *nīhṛtaṃ oder nīhataṃ (< nirhṛtaṃ)? : § 4.18.5B6 tīrthika~ (BHS, SWTF) “Anhänger einer anderen Sekte” § 37.5.30A3~4. nâpi kṣamati kutsitum vā paṃsitum vā “aśrāddhā tīrthikāḥ, ahrīkā tīrthikāḥ, anotrāpino tīrthikāḥ, mithyādṛṣṭikā tīrthikāḥ, kusīdā hīnavīryā tīrthikāḥ, duḥprajñā tīrthikāḥ.” tīrthika-parṣā~# “Versammlung von Angehörigen anderer Sekten” ⇒ ārya-parṣā~, kṣatriya- parṣā~, gṛhapati-parṣā~, brāhmaṇa-parṣā~, bhikṣu-parṣā~ § 37.1.29B7. tīrthikaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 37.2.30A1) § 37.3.30A2. evaṃ tīrthikaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= § 37.7.30A5, Uddāna [IV].30B5) § 37.3.30A2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya kiṃci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryam bhavati, nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gatāgatasya tīrthikaparṣā upasaṃkramituṃ § 37.3.30A2. āyuṣmaṃ, asti me kiñci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryaṃ, āllīyāma mā āllīyāmo vā? tu § 4.17.5B5. vidhinā devalokaṃ (Hs. °lokas; vgl. § 4.17, Anm. 3) tu modantu kāmakāmino (vs) § 41.19.35A2. ācāraguṇasampannāḥ ye bhavanti tu mānavāḥ / labhanti vipulāṃ arthāṃ ... // (vs) § 36.6.29B5. sāgārās tu (“fürwahr”?; ☞ § 36.6, Anm. 5; Hs. sāgārāṣṭraṃ) ’nagārāṇāṃ saṃprayacchanti dakṣiṇāṃ (vs) tu / o ⇒ o / tu tu / nta : § 7.4.8B1. upasaṃpādetukena für °entakena § 20.12.19B7. khādintaṃ für khādituṃ § 53.11.45B1. nirvvāpayantaṃ für °payituṃ tucchakaṃ für tumbakaṃ: § 19.25.18B3 tuṇḍa-rathyā~# “Sackgasse”? (wörtl. “schnabelförmige Straße”) ⇒ utkṣipta-rathyā~, ukṣipta- rathyā~, saṃbādha-rathyā~ § 19.36.19A1. atha khalu yā ukṣiptarathyā bhavati tuṇḍarathyā <vā?> tahiṅ gantavyaṃ tudrinnakāṃ für ondriṇṇakāṃ : § 12.2.11A7 tumaṃ (BHS[Mvu]; Pkt); = Skt. tvam; vgl. BHSG §§ 20.8f.; Pischel § 421 ⇒ tvaṃ § 55.7.47A1. atha dāni āha “āsa tumaṃ, ahaṃ vārayiṣyan (Hs. cār°)” ti Vgl. § 53.8.45A7. “āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣyan” ti (= § 53.9.45B1) tumbaka~ “Flaschengurke” § 19.25.18B3. tumbakaṃ (Hs. tucchakaṃ) bhavati, kalyato yeva ujjhitvā cchanne sthavi- tavyaṃ, mā phuṭṭeṃsu § 19.25.18B3. sāyaṃ praveśentena kunta vā tumbakā vā śikke uvvinitvā mañcakasthāne ullapitavyaṃ tumbuka~ ⇒ alābu-tumbuka~ tumbhāṇaṃ#, tumhāṇaṃ (Gen. pl. 2. Pers.; vgl. Pkt. tumhāṇaṃ) ⇒ tvaṃ tumbhehi, tumhehiṃ (Instr. pl. 2. Pers.) ⇒ tvaṃ tumhe (Nom. pl. 2. Pers.; vgl. BHSG § 20.43 [Mvu]) ⇒ tvaṃ tulākūṭa-mānakūṭa~# “Verfälschung von Waagen und Maßen”; vgl. BHS. tulākūṭa, mānakūṭa ☞ § 36.6, Anm. 3 274  § 36.6.29B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati kutsitum vā pansitum vā “gṛhapatikā nāma yūyaṃ tulākūṭamānakūṭehi divasaṃ lokaṃ muṣaṃtā āsatha.” tulikā~ (Pā) (1), tūlikā~ (Skt) “Baumwollbausch; Rispe, Wedel, Docht” ☞ § 18.11, Anm. 3 § 18.11.16A1. varccakumbhikā saprāṇakā bhavati, ... tṛṇam vā tūlikā vā upari sthāpetavyā, yathā jñāye saprāṇakêty abhijñānaṃ § 18.16.16A4. tulikā (Hs. olikā) vā sthāpayitavyā, mṛttikāmayā varttikā karttavyā § 18.17.16A4. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchayatā tāyo varttikāyo vā tulikāyo (Hs. kuli°) vā varccakuṭīye prakṣipituṃ § 40.12.33A5. taṃ bhājanaṃ ekānte sthapitvā, tṛṇaṃ vā kulikaṃ (lies: tulikā?) vā upari dātavyā abhijñānaṃ, yathā jñāye “akalpiyan” ti § 59.1.48A6. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyāḥ tulikāye (Hs. kuli°) nakkaṃ vijjhanti, sūtrakaṃ pi vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ nakke prakṣipanti § 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... tulikāya vā nakkaṃ vijjhituṃ sūtraṃ vaṭṭiya nakkasmin prakṣipituṃ § 60.5.48B7. kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya (Hs. kul°) vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ tulikā~ (2) “Greifzange”? § 53.11.45B2. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā ... dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ. atha khalu tulikāye nisnehiya dīpavartti okaḍḍhiya kulikātaile nirvvāpayitavyaṃ √tuṣ ⇒ tuṣṭa~ § 41.19.35A4. raudrā lohitapāṇī caurā tuṣyanti tādṛśā santā (vs) tuṣa~ “Spreu” § 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā (☞ § 53.4, Anm. 5) § 53.15.45B5. (die Lampe) nirvvāpito bhavati, agni gopayitavyo tuṣehi vā karṣehi vā buṣena vā buṣikāya vā tuṣṭa~ § 41.10.34A6. so dāni brāhmaṇo tasya ācāragocaraṃ paśyiya tuṣṭo § 41.11.34A7. yasya bhagavān katham ayaṃ brāhmaṇa sthavirasyâcāragocareṇa tuṣṭo? § 41.11.34A7. na etarhi eva-m-anyadâpi eṣo etasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.16.34B6. so dāni senāpati tasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.18.35A1. bhavanto ahaṃ imasya dārakasya evaṃ ca evaṃ ca ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.21.35A5. tadâpi etasya eṣo ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.21.35A5. etarhi pi eṣo sthavirasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo tūlikā~ ⇒ tulikā~ tūṣṇīka~ “schweigend” § 51.5.44A2. nêdāni vaktavyaṃ “piṇḍapātaṃ mahāpuṇye dehi.” atha khalu tūṣṇīkena uddeśe sthātavyaṃ tṛṇa~ § 11.7.10B7. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ evam eva paribhuṃjituṃ apratyā- staraṇaṃ vā tṛṇaṃ vā antarākṛtvā leṅkaṭakaṃ vā § 18.11.16A1. varccakumbhikā saprāṇakā bhavati, ... tṛṇam vā tūlikā vā upari sthāpetavyā § 40.12.33A5. taṃ bhājanaṃ ekānte sthapitvā, tṛṇaṃ vā kulikaṃ (lies: tulikā?) vā upari dātavyā abhijñānaṃ, yathā jñāye “akalpiyan” ti § 41.16.34B6. mā atra pānīyasmiṃ tṛṇo vā bhave prāṇako vā ... § 55.2.46B3. geṇḍukaṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyo tṛṇānām vā palālānām vā leṅka<ṭa>kakhaṇḍakānām vā sūtrasya vā uṇṇāya vā tṛṇaka~ “Gras, Grashalm”# § 47.5.40B7. patraśākhāya vā tṛṇakehi vā pādā jaṃghā <ca> prasphoṭitvā ... tṛṇa-cchadana~# “Decke bzw. Dach aus Gras” ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 3 ⇒ apakka-cchadana~, apakva- cch°, kabhalla-cch°, phalaka-cch°, mṛttikā-cch°, sudhā-cch° § 11.6.10B6. yadi tāva tṛṇacchadano bhavati, tṛṇapūlako dātavyo (≒ § 12.5.11B3) § 14.5.13A4. atha khalu yadi tāva tṛṇacchadano vā bhavati, tṛṇapulako dātavyo § 23.7.21B5. atha dāni oddriṇṇako bhavati, tṛṇacchadano bhavati, tṛṇapulako dātavyo ... tṛṇa-cchanna~# “mit Gras bedeckt” 275  § 18.6.15B5. (varccakuṭī ...) tṛṇacchannā vā karttavyā § 43.11.38B1. kalpikakuṭī ... tṛṇacchannā bhavati tṛṇa-pulaka~ (Skt), tṛṇa-pūlaka~# “Grasbüschel” § 11.6.10B6. yadi tāva tṛṇacchadano bhavati, tṛṇapūlako dātavyo (≒ § 12.5.11B3, § 13.6. 12B2) § 14.5.13A4. atha khalu yadi tāva tṛṇacchadano vā bhavati, tṛṇapulako dātavyo § 23.7.21B5. atha dāni oddriṇṇako bhavati, tṛṇacchadano bhavati, tṛṇapulako dātavyo ... § 43.11.38B1. kalpikakuṭī ... yadi tāva tṛṇacchannā bhavati, tṛṇapulako dātavyo tṛṇa-praveśik~# “gelagertes Heu” (?); vgl. Skt. praveśati “to lay, store up” (MW, s.v.) ☞ § 43.11, Anm. 2 § 43.11.38B1. atha dāni tṛṇapraveśikā bhavanti, ekānte sthapetavyaṃ tṛṇolkā~ (tṛṇā-u°) “Grasfackel” § 15.6.14A2. pradīpo jvālayitavyo tṛṇolkā vā kaṇḍolkā vā prajvālayitavyā tṛtīya~ § 19.18.18A7. tṛbhūmiko bhavati, tṛtīyāyāṃ bhūmau tathā yyeva sthāpayitavyaṃ § 44.1.38B7. taṃ dāni ekena ākrāntaṃ dvitīyena ākrāntaṃ tṛtīyenâkrāntaṃ § 44.6.39A4. cīvaravaṃśakāto cīvarāṇi muṃciya ekaṃ dvitīyaṃ vā tṛtīyam vā kṛṣiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ patitaṃ √tṛp ⇒ saṃ-tarpita~ tṛ-pādaka~# “Dreifuß”; vgl. Skt. tripāda (“dreifüssiges Gestell”) ☞ § 23.4.1, Anm. 5 § 23.4.1.21A7. āsandakaṃ tṛpādakaṃ vā praveśeti, tasyâpi leṅkaṭakehi pādakā bandhi- tavyā § 23.6.1.21B3. pīṭhakam vā pīṭhikām vā tṛpādakam vā vinā pratipādakehi thapeti anāpattiḥ tṛ-puṭa~# ⇒ puṭa~ tṛ-bhūmika~# “dreistöckig” ⇒ dvi-bhūmika~ § 19.18.18A7. tṛbhūmiko bhavati, tṛtīyāyāṃ bhūmau tathā yyeva sthāpayitavyaṃ. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ karitavyaṃ tṛṣādakam für tṛpāda° : § 23.6.1.21B3 √t ⇒ o-tara- (1), o-tara- (2), o-tāraya-, o-tāre- te ⇒ tvaṃ § 4.5.4B3. pṛcchitavyaṃ “... kiṅgotrako ’si? kiṃkarmmikā te mātāpitarau? ...” (= § 6.5. 7B2) § 4.16.5B2. adya te sudivasaṃ sumahābalaṃ (vs) § 4.16.5B2. adya te suvihitehi dakṣiṇā agrabhājanagatā virocati (vs) § 27.2.23B5. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, eva<ṃ> ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhasi § 28.2.24A2. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, evaṃ ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato caṃkramasi § 32.2.27A5. so dāni sthaviro pṛcchati “āyuṣmaṃ, kecciro te āgatasya?” § 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi. saṃgho te uttari upaparīkṣiṣyati § 49.1.41B6. ahaṃ khalu te pityako bhavāmi (≒ § 49.2.42A5) § 49.2.42A6. duṣkṛtaṃ te Upanandana § 50.9.43B5. cchandayitavyo vaktavyo “ūnakaṃ pūrehi. yaṃ te rucyati taṃ khādehi.” te (Acc. pl. masc.; vgl. BHSG §§ 21.30~31) ⇒ tad~ te / o ⇒ o / te tena (1) “in der Richtung, dorthin, dort” (BHS, SWTF, Pā) ⇒ yena ... tena (2) “dann; daher” ⇒ tena hi § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... so pi *pratibodhiyānaṃ (?; Hs. pratibodhanāṃ) tena (“dann”) purimaṃ kāyaṃ abhyunnāmeti, pṛṣṭhimaṃ kāyaṃ abhivilokayati § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... sacet paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati anāttamano. <na> ca paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati citte āttamano abhiraddho § 41.16.34B6. mā atra pānīyasmiṃ tṛṇo vā bhave prāṇako vā tena senāpatisya aphāsu 276  bhaveya § 52.6.44B5. suvihita, apratigrāhyo eṣo jano. mā bhūyo eteṣāṃ tena pratigṛhṇīhasi tena hi “dann; daher”; vgl. DP II, S. 266, s.v. tena hi (“therefore; now then; well then”) ⇒ tena § 2.4.2B4. tena hi evaṃ dvitīyasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 4.4.4B1. tena hi saṃghasthavireṇa evaṃ bhaktāgre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 20.3.19A7. tena hi na kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ § 20.5.19B2. tena hi anujānāmi dantakāṣṭhaṃ prāmāṇikaṃ mahāntaṃ ṣoḍaśāṅgulaṃ § 20.8.19B4. tena hi pramāṇikaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ § 20.10.19B6. tena hi śeṣāś catvāri aṅgulāni dantakāṣṭhasya varjyaṃ karttavyaṃ § 1.4.1B4. tena hi evaṃ saṃghasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 39.4.31A2. tena hi evaṃ āraṇyake vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 40.3.32B4. tena hi evaṃ pānīye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 41.3.33B6. tena hi evaṃ pādā dhovitavyā § 42.1.36A2. tena hi anujānāmi § 42.6.36B1. tena hi evaṃ snāne pratipadyitavyaṃ § 43.2.38A2. tena hi evaṃ bhaṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 44.3.39A1. tena hi evaṃ cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ § 45.3.39B5. tena hi evaṃ nivāsitavyaṃ § 46.3.40A6. tena hi evaṃ prāvaritavyaṃ § 47.3.40B5. tena hi evaṃ ... cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ § 48.3.41A6. tena hi-y-evaṃ ... cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ § 49.3.42A6. tena hi evaṃ pureśramaṇena pratipadyitavyaṃ, evaṃ paścācchramaṇena pratipadyitavyaṃ § 55.1.46B3. tena hi geṇḍukaṃ nāma karttavyo § 61.2.49A3. tena hi evaṃ jambhayitavyaṃ et passim tevāsikehi für nevā° : § 31.2.25B2 tehiṃ für tahiṃ : § 6.9.7B7 taila~ ⇒ taila-mātrā~, pāda-taila~ § 19.5.17B6. (das Pissoir) dhoviya tailena mrakṣayitavyā § 42.2.36A3. sarvvaṃ tailaṃ upayojiya ... § 42.3.36A4. te dāni tailaṃ mārgganti na labhanti § 42.20.37A4. na dāni kṣamati tailena śoṣayituṃ (☞ § 42.20, Anm. 1). atha khalu minīya dātavyaṃ § 42.24.37B2. yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tato āgacchantu § 42.24.37B2. tato yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tehi gantavyaṃ § 42.25.37B3. vayaṃ tailaṃ dāsyāma § 42.26.37B4. tailaṃ bhaviṣyati, cūrṇṇaṃ bhaviṣyati, udakaṃ bhaviṣyati. <s>nāyaṃtu āyuṣmanto § 42.27.37B4. tailam praveśayitavyaṃ § 42.28.37B5. yadi tāva alpaṃ tailaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ bhavati, mitakaṃ dātavyaṃ, tailaṃ saṃcayitavyaṃ, udakaṃ bhāvayitavyaṃ § 42.31.37B6. jentākavārikena tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati praveśayitavyaṃ § 53.4.45A4. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā ... tehi prakṛty’ eva tāva dīpavarttikāyo varttitavyāyo, dīpakoṭikāni sajjayitavyāni, tailaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ § 53.11.45B2. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā ... dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ. atha khalu tulikāye nisnehiya dīpavartti okaḍḍhiya kulikātaile (Bedeutung?) nirvvāpayitavyaṃ § 53.19.45B7. tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati, sāhariyāṇaṃ ghaṭikāyāṃ vā bhājane vā sthāpayi- tavyaṃ taila-kārṣī~# “Überzug aus Öl” ⇒ gandha-kārṣī~, gomaya-kārṣī~ § 18.31.16B6. tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā (Hs. °vyaṃ) ... antamasato gomaya- kārṣī dātavyā{ḥ} § 18.35.17A1. cetiyaghare tailakārṣī vā dātavyā ... gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 18.36.17A1. durlabho gandho, antamasato tailakārṣī dātavyā (= § 19.34.18B7) 277  § 19.15.18A5. kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, ... tato tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 19.29.18B5. tailakārṣī dātavyā. antamasato gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 19.33.18B6. sarvvatra cetiyagṛhe gandhakārṣī vā tailakārṣī vā dātavyā § 19.33.18B7. antamasato tahiṃ pṛthivīpradeśe tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā taila-khajjaka~# “mit Öl gekochte feste Speise” ⇒ sarppi-khajjaka~ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati ... cīvarakena pratīcchituṃ sarppikhajjakaṃ vā tailakhajjakaṃ vā taila-mātrā~# “Maße von Öl” § 42.28.37B5. evaṃ pi kariya tailamātrā jānitavyā tk / cch ⇒ cch / tk tt / t ⇒ t / tt tt / nt ⇒ nti für tti § 2.2.2B3. montikā für motti° (= § 2.3.2B3, § 3.2.3B1, § 3.3.3B1) § 5.2.6A6. muntikā für muttikā § 4.11.5A3. tittino für tintiṇo § 10.4.10A4. utthattakena für °antakena § 18.4.15B3. vovatti für dhovanti § 18.53.17B2. bhatte für bhante § 31.28.26B3. ettu für entu § 42.2.36A2. svedattā für svedantā § 47.1.40B3. bhintiyo für bhittiyo § 49.5.42B1. uccantitavyaṃ für uvvattitavyaṃ § 49.7.42B5. ānantikā für āṇattikā § 54.9.46A5. cchanti für cchatti tta für tti : § 42.4.36A6 tti (Pkt) < ti < Skt. iti; vgl. v. Hinüber 2001: § 277; Steiner 1997: 189f.; Bollée 2002: 258; Esposito 2004: 42, 44 ⇒ iti, itti, ti, cchatti, cchitti § 1.11.2A4 (Hs. nti), § 2.5.2B5, § 4.11.5A3 (Hs. nti), § 18.8.15B7, § 39.9.31A5 (Hs. nti), § 39.10.31A7 (Hs. nti), § 39.10.31A7, § 40.9.33A2, § 40.16.33B1, § 41.15.34B6, § 41.26.35B3 (Hs. nti), § 41.29.35B6 (Hs. nti), § 42.4.36A6 (Hs. tta), § 42.16.37A1 (Hs. nti), § 42.16.37A2, § 42.21.37A6, § 42.24.37B2 (Hs. nti), § 42.28.37B5(Hs. nti), § 42.31.37B7 (Hs. nti), § 44.1.38B7 (Hs. nti), § 44.2.39A1 (Hs. nti), § 44.6.39A5 (Hs. nti), § 47.1.40B2 (Hs. nti), § 47.1.40B3 (Hs. nti), § 47.8.41A2 (Hs. nti) et passim § 6.7.7B4. jānitavyaṃ “vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho” tti § 18.21.16B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā kṣamayituṃ, yāva uśvāsena utpīḍito tti § 18.30.16B5. mā veḍḍo bhaveya tti (≒ § 18.34.16B7, § 18.40.17A3, § 19.14.18A4) § 22.4.21A1. anekāyo mā tarhi dīrghako praviṣṭo bhaveya tti (Hs. nti) § 23.6.4.21B4. pādām vā dhovati ... “rajonigrahaṃ kāheti” tti, anāpattiḥ § 25.4.22B3. (pātraṃ ...) mā pakvena vā ... kapitthena pakvena vā nālikereṇa bhaṃjeya tti § 26.1.23A5. jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu Gaṅgā ayaṃ Sarayū Ajiravatī Mahī Mahāmahī tti. ...” § 32.12.27B6. āha “anyatra gamiṣyan” ti, vaktavyaṃ “gacchāhi” tti § 33.2.27B7. yūyaṃ gṛhī-ālāpena ālāpayatha “amba, atte, ... he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti § 33.6.28A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena ālapituṃ “haṃgho he he” tti § 33.7.28A3. “vandāmi upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā. kiṃ āṇapesi?” tti, “kiṃ karemi?” tti § 33.12.28A5. nâpi kṣamati “bhāve” tti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā “āyuṣmaṃ”tti vā § 38.5.30B1. saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti § 41.25.35B2. āgamitavyaṃ yāva tehi dhovitā pādā tti (Hs. nti) § 49.5.42B1. anekāye ... caṇḍo vā śvāno caṇḍo vā goṇo āgaccheya tti (Hs. nti), yadi tāva dakṣiṇenântenâgacchati ... et passim tth / cch ⇒ cch / tth tth / nth : § 18.45.17A6. yatthesmiṃ für panthesmiṃ; § 18.45.17A6. yatthesmi für panthesmi § 23.4.4.21B1. pattholiṃ für *pantholiṃ? -tthita~, -tthitaka~, -tthapita, -thāpitaka~ ⇒ du-tthita~, su-tthita~, du-tthitaka~, du-tthapita~, du- 278  tthāpitaka~, su-tthapita~ tp / ty : § 50.2.43A3. katyāhaṃ für *katpāhaṃ? ☞ § 50.2(Text), Anm. 1 ty / tp ⇒ tp / ty √tyaj ⇒ pari-tyakta~ tyāga-sampanna~# “freigebig” § 4.17.5B5. śīlavāṃ tyāgasampanno samyagdṛṣṭi ca yo iha (vs) √trap ⇒ o-trapa- trayo-daśī~ ⇒ cātur-daśī~, pāñca-daśī~ § 12.11.11B6. trayodaśīyaṃ vā cāturddaśīyaṃ vā tena śayyāsanoddeśo karttavyo tri~ ⇒ tṛ-pādaka~, tṛ-bhūmika~ § 14.3.13A3. tahi eko vā dvau vā trayo vā yāvatakā ucchahanti § 14.13.13B2. tahiṃ ekameko vâ<ṃ>śaśo dātavyo dve vā dve vā trayo vā trayo vā § 22.2.20B7. vihārasya dvārasmiṃ upari trayo kīlakāni ā<ko>ṭayitavyā § 25.9.22B5. atha dāni ujjuko kīlako bhavati, duve trayo vā āveḍhakā dātavyāḥ § 25.11.22B6. gṛhṇantena nâpi kṣamati ekahastena duve trayo vā pātrāṇi gṛhṇituṃ § 25.11.22B7. atha khalu paramaṃ trayo pātrāṇi gṛhṇitavyāni § 28.5.24A4. atha khalu dve trayo vā padāni <ni>hīnakena caṃkramitavyaṃ § 31.7.25B5. sāye vāsôpagatā bhavanti, taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā § 40.4.32B5. eko vā dvayo vā trayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... udvedho nirmmuṣṭikā trayo hastā karttavyā § 55.6.46B7. <duve vā> trayo vā vārā geṇḍukāṃ purato ābhāsayitvā ... § 20.8.19B4. dantakāṣṭhāni nāma trīṇi (Hs. triṇi) jyeṣṭhaṃ madhyamaṃ kanīyasaṃ § 23.3.21A5. vihārā nāma trīṇi. jyeṣṭhako madhyamako kanīyasako § 41.26.35B2. trīṇi (vgl. BHSG § 6.16) vācāyo jalpayitavyāyo § 12.15.12A2. dviṇṇāṃ trayāṇāṃ janānāṃ eko vihārako uddiśitavyo usw. triṃśat~ § 7.4.8B2. <dvānavatīto na śaknoti> triṃśato pi grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa- <śruti>kāyo gāthāyo ca. triṃśato pi na pāreti, ... § 9.4.10A1. dvānavatīto na śaknoti, triṃśatito grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca. triṃśatito na pāreti, ... tri-kkhatto# ind. “dreimal”; vgl. Gā. trikhato; BHS. tri-kṣutto (Mvu), tri-khattuṃ (Mvu), tri-khuttaṃ (Mvu); BHSD, s.v. 1-kṛtvā; Schneider 1960: 271f. = 2002: 63f.; SWTF. tri-khuttam; Pā. tikkhattuṃ; AMg. ti-kkhutto; Pischel § 451; Skt. tri-kṛtvas § 54.8.46A5. atha khalu pārśve sthitvā trikkhatto purato yaṣṭi kārayitavyā triṇi für trīṇi : § 20.8.19B4 ⇒ tri tri-puṭa~ ⇒ -puṭa~ trihi für tehi : § 31.24.26A7 trepaśyaka~# oder °akā~# eine Art Sitzgelegenheit ☞ § 48.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ sāpāśraya~, upāśraya~ § 48.2.41A5. dārakadārikāhi mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca trepaśyakā ca pādehi marditavimarditā traividya-prāpta~# “die Kenntnis der drei Veden erlangt habend” § 37.5.30A4. (tīrthikāḥ ...) sarvvāśrāmiṇânopavāde kadāci traividyaprāptāḥ bahuśrutā tvaṃ (BHS, Pā); < Skt. tvam ⇒ tave, tumaṃ, te, vo § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo “tvaṃ (Hs. ayaṃ sānaṃ) śalākāṃ vāresi” “tvaṃ śalākāṃ praticchesi” “tvaṃ prātimokṣasūtram uddiśesi” “tvaṃ bhāṣesi” “tvaṃ parikathāṃ karesi” “tvaṃ dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśesi” § 21.3.20B1. evan taṃ tvaṃ bhūmīya astarīya cīvaraṃ sivayasi § 20.1.19A5. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ ... khādasi § 41.16.34B6. kasya kṛtena tvaṃ atra dīpamūlaṃ allīno ’si? § 44.2.39A1. evaṃ ca tvaṃ ... acchosi § 49.1.42A1. āyuṣman, gaccha tvaṃ § 49.2.42A4. tvaṃ Nandanasya sārddhevihāriṃ jalpasi § 49.7.42B4. āsa tvaṃ, sahitakā{ṃ} bhuñjiya nirddhāviṣyāmaḥ § 50.9.43B5. atha dāni so jalpati “āyuṣman, bhuṃja tvaṃ. bhuktaṃ mayê”ti 279  § 50.9.43B5. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, bhuṃja tvaṃ. nâhaṃ bhuṃjiṣyaṃ.” § 52.7.44B6. suvihita, paribhuṃjāhi tvaṃ. nâhaṃ paribhuñjiṣyan § 53.8.45A7. “āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣyan.” ti. tena vārayitavyo (≒ § 53.9.45A7) § 55.7.47A1. atha dāni āha “āsa tumaṃ (vgl. BHSG §§ 20.8f.), ahaṃ vārayiṣyan” ti § 2.11.3A4~5. tvayā bhāṣitavyaṃ tvayā bhāṣitavyaṃ (= § 3.12.4A4) § 20.2.19A7. āmrapotako ropito ... tvayā so āgacchiya uppāḍiya bhaṃjiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditaṃ § 49.1.42A1. na me tvayā sārddhaṃ phāsu bhavati ... § 31.37.27A3. upāsaka! dānapati! ime bhikṣavo tvayā sārddhaṃ gamiṣyanti. ime bhikṣu tava parininditā bhavantu § 32.2.27A5. āyuṣman, evacciro tava āgatasya, na ca me pādavandako upasaṃkramasi § 32.2.27A6. tadā tava mayā pādā vanditā § 34.6.28B6. tavâhaṃ hitopasaṃhāreṇa rakṣāvaraṇaguptiye sukhaṃ ca phāsukañ ca viharāmi § 41.18.35A2. so dāni dārakasyâha “haṃgho dārakā, imaṃ vayaṃ tava sarvvaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ demi.” § 49.1.41B7. āgacchâhaṃ tava śekhayiṣyaṃ (Hs. śeṣay°) § 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti § 53.8.45A7. atha khalu so pi acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo, vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya tava (Hs. tatra) dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti § 54.9.46A6. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava yaṣṭi prāpuṇati. vārehi” § 54.12.46A7. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya, tava yaṣṭī prāpuṇati.” § 55.5.46B6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava geṇḍuko prāpuṇati. utthehi vārehi” tti § 55.6.46B7. vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya, tava geṇḍuko prāpuṇati.” § 38.8.30B3. āyuṣman, sarvve tvaṃ (Gen. sg.; vgl. BHSG § 20.35) etaṃ kāryaṃ samagreṇa saṃghena suvyupaśāntaṃ § 3.10.4A2. yūyaṃ, yūyam (= § 20.7.19B3, § 20.8.19B4, § 20.10.19B6 et passim) § 39.13.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha tumhe (Nom. pl.; vgl. BHSG § 20.43 [Mvu]). āraṇyakâpi eṣyantî”ti § 39.25.32A2. atha dāni āha “āhaṇatha tumhe. grāmāntikâpi eṣyantî”ti § 31.16.26A2. ghuṇaviddhā tave (Nom. pl.?), NandOpanandanā yūyaṃ nāgarājāno § 39.2.31A1. kin dāni yuṣmābhiḥ sarvvāṇi bhaktakāni utkṣiptāni? § 34.2.28B2. te dāni tumbhehi (Instr. pl.) niṣaṇṇehi na pārenti kāryāṇi karttuṃ § 39.2.31A1. tathā tumhehiṃ (Instr. pl.; vgl. BHSG §§ 20.53f. tumhehi [Mvu]) pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍi āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjatha § 31.24.26A7. yūyaṃ jātā, <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti § 41.18.35A1. ko (für ho?) bhaṇe ko ahaṃ yuṣmākaṃ? § 41.18.35A1. yadi yuṣmākaṃ anukūlaṃ bhave § 47.2.40B5. yuṣmākaṃ sārddhevihārikā antevāsikā odhyāyanti (= § 48.2.41A5) § 14.10.13B1. vihāro anuparinditavyo ... “eṣo tumhākaṃ vihārako anuparindito bhavatu.” § 14.18.13B6. “dīrghāyu, eṣo vihārako tumhāṇaṃ (= Pkt; vgl. Pischel § 420) anuparindito bhavatu. ...” § 41.14.34B4. dāraka kahiṃ tumhāṇaṃ hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇaṃ vā? § 31.16.26A2. jātā te śṛgālā ye tumbhāṇaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti usw. tvaritam “in Eile, eilends” § 32.5.27B1. tvaritaṃ vā atikramati, na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 32.7.27B3. <na kṣamati> ... cīvaraṃ prāvarantasya, tvaritaṃ vā gacchantasya tvarita-tvaritaṃ# “in Eile, eilig, rasch” § 42.3.36A4. te dāni bhikṣu śītapraṣṭavyena spṛṣṭāḥ tvaritatvaritaṃ praviṣṭā § 49.1.42A1. so dāni śuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati § 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvitaṃ 280  § 49.1.42A3. ayaṃ upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati § 50.10.43B6. atha dāni nīhārakapiṇḍapāto na pratyudgacchati, kālo ca atikramati piṇḍapātanīhārakena tvaritatvaritam āgantavyaṃ ts / ns : § 14.17.13B5. uppatsulako für uppansu° (= uppaṃsu°) § 36.6.29B4. patsitum für pansi° (= paṃsi°) TH th / ce ⇒ ce / th th / d : § 42.9.36B4. tadā für tathā th / dh : § 39.21.32A1. thātoyaliptāṃ für dhotôpaliptāṃ ☞ § 39.21(Text), Anm. 1 th / dhv : § 24.11.22A6. athānamārggagatasya für adhvāna° § 41.29.35B6. athātā yāṃ für adhvātā pā<dā>ṃ th / y : § 31.31.26B5. piṇḍāthe für piṇḍāye § 50.1.43A2. gṛhnitha | für gṛhṇiya § 53.11.45B1. capeṭikātha für °kāya th / rṣ ⇒ th / ṣ § 36.8.29B6. gṛhapatiyathā für °patiparṣā § 42.13.36B6. yathāyo für parṣāye | (Daṇḍa) th / v : § 11.5.10B5. thā für vā § 24.8.22A4. vālikāye für thālikā{ye} ? § 39.26.32A3. parithapakena für pariveṣakena ☞ § 39.26(Text), Anm. 3 § 40.15.33A6. vālikāya für thālikāya ? th / vv : § 18.47.17A7. uthattitavyaṃ für uvvatti° th / ś : § 39.6.31A3 śālīyo für thālīyo th / ṣ ⇒ th / rṣ § 26.3.23A7. pārthikā für pārṣikā § 49.7.42B6. paryethamāṇasya für paryeṣamāṇasya § 51.8.44A4. piṣiyāṇaṃ für pithiy° th / s : § 6.13.8A3. si{|}vapasikā für śivapathikā? thaganaka~# oder thaganakā~# “Gefäß mit Deckel” (?) ☞ § 40.5, Anm. 2 § 40.5.32B6. maṇikā vā uṣṭrikā vā thaganakā vā āraṃjarā vā ghaṭṭā vā karakīyo vā <pūrayitavyā?> thatiyātigṛhe für cetiyābhigṛhe: § 20.15.20A2 thapaya- (BHS), thape- (BHS: vgl. BHSG, S. 237a, s.v. sthapaya-ti); zur Verwendung von thapeti als Hilfsverb, vgl. § 25.8, Anm. 5 ⇒ thapitaka~, ut-tatthapaya-, ut-thapaya-, thave-, thāpe-, du- tthapita~, du-tthāpitaka~, su-sthapita~, sthapaya-, sthape-, sthave-, sthāpaya-, sthāpe-, √sthā usw. § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... uppādakā bhavanti samaṃ tthapayitavyā (Hs. cchap°) § 13.11.12B4. dutthitakā bhavanti, sutthitā thapetavyā § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena opūriyanti, naivāte thapitavyāḥ, varṣeṇa ovarṣiyanti, cchanne thapitavyā § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... prāṇakehi khajjanti cchandiyāṇaṃ (lies: cchinna- gaṇṭhikā kariyāṇaṃ?) pratipādikehi thapayitavyā § 13.13.12B5. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā uppādakā bhavanti, samaṃ (Hs. samāṃ) thapitavyāḥ § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... dahiya bhūyo vā thapayitavyāyo § 19.4.17B6. udakabhramaṇasya upari thapetavyā sudhāya samaṃtena lipitavyā § 19.16.18A6. tatra kuṃtako alābu-{o}tumbako vā thapayitavyo § 19.22.18B2. cchidramallakasyôpari kuntako vā alābutumbuko vā thapayitavyo § 20.11.19B6. tato bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya kuccakaṃ śastrakena cchinditavyaṃ, dhoviyāṇaṃ thapayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyo) § 21.5.20B3. atha khalu bāhyena kaṭhinasmi pādāni thapiyāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ sīvayitavyaṃ § 22.6.21A3. cakkalī ... na dāni kṣamati divasata osarayitvā thapayituṃ 281  § 23.4.1.21A7. maṃcā vā pīṭhā vā ... praveśiyāṇaṃ tato tahiṃ pratipādakānāṃ upari thapetavyo § 23.6.1.21B2. kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ vinā pratipādakehi mañcakaṃ thapeti, anāpattiḥ § 23.6.1.21B3. pīṭhakam vā pīṭhikām vā tṛpādakam vā vinā pratipādakehi thapeti ... § 24.5.22A3. mallakaṃ vā koṭikam vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thapetavyā, tahiṃ kheṭo karttavyo § 24.8.22A5. caṃkramaśīrṣe vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thālikā vā kuṭaṃ mallakaṃ vā thape- tavyaṃ. tahiṃ kheṭo cchorayitavyo § 25.2.22B2. bhagavān āha “evaṃ ca tvaṃ muṇḍavātapāne pātraṃ thapesi. ...” § 25.9.22B5. pātraprasevikā nāgadantake vā kīlake vā ukkaciya thapetavyā § 25.9.22B6. atha dāni nāgadantako bhavati, kiñ câpi evam eva thapeti, anāpattiḥ § 25.10.22B6. pātraprasevikā na bhavati, pātrapīṭhake thapetavyaṃ ... antamasato pṛthivī- pradeśaṃ pi gomayena upalimpiya thapetavyaṃ § 39.7.31A4. atha dāni nâgacchanti, nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ taṇḍulāni prakṣipituṃ. atha khalu kaḍhantī thapitavyā § 39.21.32A1. grāmāntikā<nāṃ> thālīy’ otāriya dhotôpaliptāṃ kariya thapitavyāḥ § 39.26.32A4. pariveṣakena sarvveṣāṃ ekasthāne piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo § 40.1.32B3. kin dāni ayaṃ pānīyamaṇḍapo tāpitamudrito thapito § 40.2.32B4. kin dāni ayaṃ pānīyamaṇḍapo tāpitamudrito kariya thapito § 40.5.32B6. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya, golakā vā maṇikā vā ... subhāvitā kariya thapetavyā § 40.15.33A6. omhāya vā thālikāya vā bhājanehi vā thapitavyaṃ § 41.13.34B3. taṃ dāra<ka>ṃ rakṣapālaṃ thapiyāṇaṃ ... § 41.22.35A6. colakaṃ niṣpīḍitvā thapetavyo § 42.14.36B7. cīvarakaṃ ... cīvaravaṃśe vā thapetavyo jentākapīṭhe vā § 44.5.39A3. evaṃ sarvvehi vandiya thapetavyāni § 44.6.39A5. cīvarakaṃ dhoviya vihārakoṇake <tha>payitavyo (oder <sthā>pa°) § 50.1.43A2. vihārakasya dvāramūle piṇḍapātakaṃ thapiya gato § 52.1.44A7. teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā snehaṃ sthapenti, khajjakhaṇḍakāni thapenti § 52.1.44B1. vayaṃ yyeva tāva imeṣāṃ kṛtena snehaṃ thapemaḥ, khajjakakhaṇḍakāni sthapemaḥ ... usw. thapitaka~# “hingestellt”; < thapita + Suffix ka; vgl. BHSG § 22.29; RgsGr § 30.11 § 4.10.5A2. anekāyo tatra ... kāṃsabhājanāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ § 6.9.7B7. anekāye tahiṃ ... bhājanakāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ thave-# “legen, stellen”; < Skt. sthāpayati > Pkt. ṭhavei, ṭhavai; vgl. S. 559 in diesem Band ⇒ sthave-, thapaya-, thape-, thāpe-, sthapaya-, sthape-, sthāpaya-, sthāpe-, √sthā usw. § 21.9.20B6. antamasato jānukānāṃ pi upari cīvarakaṃ thaviya sīvayitavyaṃ § 31.21.26A4. yatra bhikṣūṇāṃ āsanaprajñaptir bhavati, tahiṃ cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ cīvara- bisiyan thaviyāṇaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ vā upānahau vā thaviyāṇa, ... thā für vā : § 11.5.10B5 thātoyaliptāṃ für dhotôpaliptāṃ : § 39.21.32A1 ☞ § 39.21(Text), Anm. 1 thāpe- (BHS; vgl. BHSG, S. 237a, s.v. sthapaya-ti) “hinstellen”; < Skt. sthāpayati ⇒ sthāpaya-, sthāpe-, ut-thāpaya-, u-ṣṭhapaya-, du-tthāpitaka~, thapaya-, thave-, sthapaya-, sthape-, sthave-, √sthā usw. § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhikā vā ... uppādakā bhavanti, samaṃ thāpeyitavyā thālikā~ (Pā) “kleiner Topf; kleine Schale”; vgl. Skt. sthālī~, Pkt. thalliyā~ ☞ § 24.9, Anm. 4 ⇒ vaṃśa-tthālikā~, thālī~, sthālī~ § 24.8.22A4. caṃkramaśīrṣe vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thālikā (Hs. vālikāye) vā kuṭaṃ mallakaṃ vā thapetavyaṃ. tahiṃ kheṭo cchorayitavyo § 40.15.33A6. omhāya vā thālikāya (Hs. vālikāya) vā bhājanehi vā thapitavyaṃ thālī~ (Pā) “Topf”; < Skt. sthālī ⇒ sthālī~, thālikā~ § 39.6.31A3. grāmāntikehi duve thālīyo (Hs. śālīyo) ādrāhayitavyāyo § 39.6.31A3. <yā> grāmāntikānāṃ thālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.6.31A3. yā āraṇyakānāṃ thālī ... tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ 282  § 39.21.32A1. atha dāni nâgacchanti, ... grāmāntikā<nāṃ> thālīy’ otāriya dhotôpaliptāṃ (Hs. thātôyaliptāṃ) kariya thapitavyāḥ *thitikā~ “eine (vorher bestimmte) Reihenfolge” ☞ § 31.18, Anm. 2 ⇒ sthitikā~ § 31.18.26A2. nâpi dāni vaktavyaṃ “kā bhaktakānā thitikā (Hs. tithikā)? ...” thīya-# “hart werden”; < (mit Saṃprasāraṇa) Skt. styāyati; vgl. v. Hinüber 2001: § 131 § 4.1.4A5. ghṛtaṃ thīyati māṃsaṃ thīyati vyañjanāni śītalībhavanti thoka~ (Pā) < Skt. stoka (“wenig, klein”) ⇒ thoki~, stoka~ § 4.12.5A5. atha dāni so thokinā arthiko bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “mama thokaṃ dehi heṣṭhā bahuṃ” § 20.9.19B5. tena dāni khādantena dantakāṣṭhaṃ tho<kā>vaśeṣaṃ kṛtaṃ thoki~# “wenig, klein” ⇒ thoka~, stoka~ § 4.12.5A5. atha dāni so thokinā arthiko bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “mama thokaṃ dehi heṣṭhā bahuṃ” tholikāyāṃ (vaṃśa-ttholikāyāṃ) für °thālikāyāṃ? : § 24.9.22A5 D d/t ⇒ t/d d / th ⇒ th / d d / dh ⇒ nd / ndh § 8.12.9B2. dhātavyaṃ für dā° d/p: § 8.5.9A2. nirmmāpayitavyaṃ für nirmmāda° d / bh : § 43.4.38A4. sūryādimukham für sūryābhimukhaṃ? d/y: § 31.33.26B7. cchāyanikā für cchādanikā? ☞ § 31.33(Text), Anm. 4 d/v: § 4.17.5B3. vedāhikaṃ für vevāh° § 18.43.17A5. -praveśa~ für -pradeśa~? § 20.13.20A1. dicchaddiya für vicchaddiya § 40.9.33A2. vā für dātuṃ § 42.25.37B3. vāsyāma für dāsyāma d/h: § 53.9.45A7. suvidita für suvihita -d- als Sandhikonsonant; vgl. BHSG § 4.64; Geiger § 73.4; Sn(tr.N) 181 (ad Sn, S. 16); EV I (2nd ed.) 216 (ad Th 406), ib. 317 (ad Th 1127) § 11.1.10B3. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ śraddhayā-d-āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ ... § 18.7.15B5. varccakumbhikā bāhire-d-eva (Hs. bāhirodivā) karttavyā dakānaka~# “kleiner Wassereimer”; < udaka + ānaka ☞ § 18.40, Anm. 4 ⇒ udaka-dakānaka~ § 18.40.17A3. karakena vā dakānakena vā udakaṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya § 41.6.34A3. pānīyasya dakānakaṃ pūrīya ... § 41.9.34A5. upānahikāyo nikṣipiya dakānakāto vāmāye kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjayitvā ... § 41.9.34A5. hastāṃ dhoviya dakānakaṃ dhoviya § 41.10.34A6. yathâpi imaṃ bhavatā Śāriputreṇa dakānakaṃ upacīrṇṇaṃ § 41.22.35A6. dakāna<kāto ’da>kaṃ kalācīyaṃ āvarjetvā colakaṃ dhovitvā ... dakṣiṇa~ (1) “rechter” ⇒ dakṣiṇato, ati-dakṣiṇam, abhidakṣiṇam § 8.4.8B7. tato prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśitavyo paścā vāmaṃ praveśiya § 10.4.10A5. prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśayitavyo, paścād vāmaṃ pādaṃ praveśiyāṇa § 25.13.23A1. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ vāmena hastena allīpayituṃ. atha khalu ... dakṣiṇena hastena pātraṃ allīpayitavyaṃ § 30.4.25A1. siṃho bhikṣavo mṛgarājā dakṣiṇena pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpayati § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati ... dakṣiṇāṃ bāhaṃ śirasy upanidhāya, ... § 30.5.25A3. tathā karttavyā yathā saṃpa<ti>tako yeva dakṣiṇena pārśvena śayyāṃ kalpeti § 30.5.25A3. na kṣamati vāmena śayyāṃ prajñapetuṃ. dakṣiṇ<en>a śayyā prajñapetavyā 283  § 30.7.25A4. rātrīye madhyame yāme dakṣiṇena pārśvena siṃhaśeyyā kalpayitavyā § 41.7.34A3. sthaviro dāni dakṣiṇena hastena udakaṃ āsiñcati § 41.7.34A4. dakṣiṇā jaṃghā dhovitā § 41.7.34A4. dakṣiṇo pādo dhovito § 41.9.34A5. dakṣiṇena hastena upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhoviya ... § 41.23.35A7. dakṣiṇā tāva jaṃghā dhovitavyā (= § 41.28.35B5) § 41.23.35A7. dakṣiṇo pādo dhovayitavyo § 41.27.35B3. dakṣiṇena hastena udakaṃ āsiñcitavyaṃ § 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇā (Hs. dakṣiṇena) jaṃghā dhovitavyā § 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇo pādo dhovitavyo (= § 41.28.35B5) § 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇena hastena pādā dhovitavyā § 49.5.42B1. yadi tāva dakṣiṇenântenâgacchati, vāmenântena uvvattitavyaṃ. vāmenântenâgacchati, dakṣiṇenântena uvvattitavyaṃ § 54.9.46A5. yadi vāmena sthitako bhavati, dakṣiṇena jānukena (Hs. °kehi) saṃghaṭṭe- tavyo (2) “südlich” § 4.19.6A1. dakṣiṇā paścimā ca sa sarvvo ca loko saṃkulajāto (vs) § 18.3.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) dakṣiṇena vā paścimena vā kārāpayitavyā vātapathaṃ muktvā § 19.3.17B5. (praśvāsakuṭī ...) dakṣiṇena vā paścimena vā kārāpayitavyā vātapatha<ṃ> muktvā dakṣiṇato “auf der rechten Seite, (von) rechts”; < Skt. dakṣiṇatas; Pā. dakkhiṇato ⇒ vāmato § 42.9.36B3. yadi tāva bhraṣṭikā dakṣiṇato bhavati, vāmato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.9.36B4. dakṣiṇato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 54.9.46A5. yadi dakṣiṇato sthito bhavati, vāmajānukena tena cchatti pratyupasthitavyaṃ ghaṭ<ṭ>itavyā dakṣiṇa-hasta~# “die rechte Hand” ☞ § 41.23, Anm. 1 § 41.23.35A7. dakṣiṇahastena udakaṃ āsiṃcitavyaṃ dakṣiṇa-hastikaṃ# “auf der rechten Seite, rechts” ⇒ vāma-hastikam § 49.5.42B2. vaktavyaṃ: “upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā vāmahastikam vā dakṣiṇahastikaṃ vā uvvatta” tti dakṣiṇā~ (1) “Geschenk, Gabe” § 36.6.29B5. sāgārās tu (Hs. sāgārāṣṭraṃ) ’nagārāṇāṃ saṃprayacchanti dakṣiṇāṃ (vs) (2) “das religiöse Verdienst”; vgl. Poṣ(Hu) 295, Anm. 2; SWTF II 416, s.v. dakṣiṇā, 1 § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa no ca dakṣiṇām ādiśati, na parikathāṃ karoti § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ... ko prātimokṣasūtraṃ uddiśiṣyati, ko dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśiṣyati, ko parikathāṃ kariṣyati (≒ § 2.7.2B7, § 3.8.3B6) § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśesi” (≒ § 3.8.3B7) § 4.2.4A6. so dāṇi paścād āgacchiyāṇa bhuṃjiyāṇa saṃkṣiptena dakṣiṇām ādiśiya na parikathāṃ karoti § 4.13.5A7. saṃghasthavireṇa ... parikathā karttavyā, dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā § 4.15.5A7. yadi tāva jātakaṃ bhavati, nâyaṃ dakṣiṇā ādi<śi>tavyā § 4.15.5B1. nâyaṃ evaṃ dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā. atha khalu dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā (= § 4.16.5B3, § 4.17.5B4, § 6.13.8A3; ≒ § 4.19.6A2, § 4.20.6A3) § 4.16.5B2. adya te suvihitehi dakṣiṇā agrabhājanagatā virocati (vs) § 4.18.5B6. gharapraveśanikaṃ bhavati nâyaṃ dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā § 4.18.5B7. yā tatra devatā asyā tāsāṃ dakṣiṇām ādiśe (vs) § 4.19.6A2. atha khalu “diśā sauvastikā” dakṣiṇā vistareṇa {dakṣiṇā} ādiśitavyā yathā pātrapratisaṃyukte. evaṃ dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā § 6.14.8A4. tathā yeva dakṣiṇāyo vistareṇa karttavyāyo yathā saṃghasthavirasya bhaktāgre § 49.9.42B7. pureśramaṇo na pratibalo bhavati dakṣiṇām ādiśituṃ, āhaṃsu “ādiśa dakṣiṇāṃ” 284  § 49.9.43A1. tathā yeva dakṣiṇām ādiśāhi usw. dakṣiṇānta~# “die rechte Seite” ⇒ vāmānta~ § 41.27.35B3. tato yadi tāva dakṣiṇānte pādadhovanikā bhava{ṃ}ti ... dagdha~ § 14.1.13A2. so dāni vihārako vanadavena āgacchiyāṇa dagdho dagdhikā~# “ausgebrannt” (fem. Form von *dagdha + Suffix ka) § 53.15.45B5. yadi dīpavartti dagdhikā bhavati, palikhāṭir vvā okaḍḍhitavyo daṇḍa-karmman~ “Bestrafung, Strafe” ☞ § 2.2, Anm. 1; Nolot 1999: 82f. § 2.2.2B2. asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmman dadāti. dvitīyasthavirasya mottikā § 2.3.2B3. asmākaṃ bhagavāṃ daṇḍakarmman deti. dvitīyasthavirasya mottikā (≒ § 5.2. 6A6) § 3.2.3A7. asmākaṃ bhagavāṃ daṇḍakarmman deti. eṣāṃ mottiko (≒ § 3.3.3B1) § 5.3.6B1. asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmma deti. dvitīyasthavirasya muttikā § 6.2.7A6. asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmman deti. imeṣāṃ muktikā (= § 8.2.8B6, § 10.2.10A3) § 6.3.7B1. asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmman deti. imeṣāṃ mottikā § 26.6.23B1. atha dāni daṇḍakarmma pratidinnaṃ (lies: dinnaṃ? ☞ § 26.6, Anm. 1) bhavati, ... daṇḍāśani-bhejja~# (daṇḍa-aś°) “mit der harten Spitze eines Stockes zu durchbohren”; < Skt. daṇḍa + aśani (“Donnerkeil, Pfeilspitze”; Pā. asani) + bhedya ☞ § 26.8, Anm. 2 ⇒ kaṭṭārikā- cchejja~ § 26.8.23B2. atha dāni atighanā bhavati, na vaktavyaṃ “nâyaṃ yavāgū, odano ayaṃ, daṇḍāśanibhejjā (Hs. daṇḍāsani°) ayaṃ.” datvā, dadā-, dadiya, dadiyāṇaṃ ⇒ √dā dadhi~ § 4.12.5A5. sūpasya ghṛtasya māṃsasya olaṃkānāṃ dadhisya dadhi-ghaṭa~# “Kanne für saure Milch” § 43.5.38A4. yaṃ tatra bhava<ṃ>ti dugdhaghaṭā vā dadhighaṭā vā vyañjanagolakā vā ... danta~ § 20.18.20A4. atha dāni dantakāṣṭhaṃ na bhavati, aṅgāreṇa vā apakkalaḍḍunā vā dantā oghasayitavyāḥ (Hs. odya°) § 30.4.25A1. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati, pādena pādaṃ ādhāya, dantena dantaṃ ādhāya ... danta-kāṣṭha~ “Zahnreinigungsholz” ⇒ aṃguli-danta-kāṣṭha~, danta-poṇa~ § 8.5.9A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ dhoviya upanāmayitavyaṃ. mukhodakam āsiñcitavyaṃ § 18.27.16B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena varccakuṭīṃ praveṣṭuṃ § 19.10.18A2. nâpi dāni kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ohitahastena vā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena upaveṣṭuṃ § 19.10.18A3. atha khalu ekāṃsakṛtena ekānte dantakāṣṭhaṃ sthāpayitvā upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā āgacchiya uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāyitaṃ § 20.1.19A6. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ mama āmrapotakaṃ ... uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi § 20.2.19A7. āmrapotako ropito ... tvayā so āgacchiya uppāḍiya bhaṃjiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditaṃ § 20.3.19A7. evaṃ nāma tvaṃ puṣpopagataṃ vṛkṣaṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi § 20.3.19A7. tena hi na kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādantā ekānte niṣaṇṇā āsanti pravāta- gandhikena mukhena § 20.5.19B1. bhagavatā dantakāṣṭhaṃ pratikṣiptaṃ § 20.5.19B2. tena hi anujānāmi dantakāṣṭhaṃ prāmāṇikaṃ mahāntaṃ ṣoḍaśāṅgulaṃ § 20.6.19B2. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti § 20.6.19B3. evam ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti (≒ § 20.7.19B4) § 20.7.19B3. evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādatha § 20.8.19B4. evaṃ ca dāni yūyaṃ apramāṇāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādatha 285  § 20.8.19B4. tena hi pramāṇikaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ § 20.8.19B4. dantakāṣṭhāni nāma trīṇi jyeṣṭhaṃ madhyamaṃ kanīyasaṃ § 20.9.19B5. aparo dāni bhikṣu dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati § 20.10.19B6. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ sarvvaṃ niravaśeṣaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādatha § 20.10.19B6. tena hi śeṣāś catvāri aṅgulāni dantakāṣṭhasya varjyaṃ karttavyaṃ § 20.11.19B6. jyeṣṭhakāni dantakāṣṭhāni kārāpayitavyāni. tato bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya kuccakaṃ śastrakena cchinditavyaṃ § 20.11.19B7. evaṃ tāva khādayitavyaṃ yāva dantakāṣṭhasya catvāri aṅgulāni avaśiṣṭāni § 20.11.19B7. so eṣo bhikṣuḥ niravaśeṣaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati vinayātikrama āsādayati § 20.12.19B7. dantakāṣṭhaṃ pi nāma khādantena na kṣamati stūpavigrahe vā saṃgha- vigrahe vā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 20.14.20A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ pi dāni khādantena nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām ... vā bhikṣūṇāṃ agrato dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 20.16.20A3. nâpi kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya madhyena pāṭiyāna jihvāṃ nilehituṃ kāmabhoginā yathā § 20.17.20A3. nâpi kṣamati vibhūṣaṇābhiprāyeṇa dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ. atha khalu durggandhaprahāṇārthaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditavyaṃ § 20.18.20A4. atha dāni dantakāṣṭhaṃ na bhavati, ... § 20.18.20A4. sa eṣo bhikṣuḥ sarvveṇa sarvvaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 20.20.20A5. evaṃ dantakāṣṭhe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [II].20A6) § 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyā) ... § 26.9.23B2. atha dāni ... bhikṣu naỿva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, na mukhaṃ dhovati, ... § 32.5.27B1. evaṃ praśvāsaṃ karentasya, dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantasya ... na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 50.1.43A2. ayaṃ pi deśakālaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ gṛhītvā ārāmacārikāṃ caṃcūryati § 50.8.43B4. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva tāva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ, ... usw. danta-poṇa~ (BHS[BHSD, s.v. poṇa], Pā) “Zahnreinigungsmittel” < Skt. danta-pavana ⇒ danta- kāṣṭha~ § 20.19.20A4. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandati, paśyati dantapoṇaṃ, cchorayitavyo ... uddhṛtavyo ... uddhṛtavyo dape- (BHS, Pā) “geben”; BHSG § 38.52, S. 215b, dā (8) -dape-ti ⇒ dāpe-, dāpaya-, daya- (1) § 8.6.9A3. cīvarāṇi ... ātmano skandhe dapiya śīrṣaṃ onāmiya purato gantavyaṃ § 9.1.9B4. te dāni āyuṣmanto Nand<an>Opanandano ṣaḍvarggikā ca niśrayaṃ dapiya naỿva antevāsi ovadanti, na anuśāsanti daya- (1) (BHS) “geben”; BHSG § 38.52, S. 215b, dā (3) -daya-ti ⇒ dape-, √dā § 43.15.38B3. tena ... na kṣamati tathā yyeva upamakṣitaṃ vā raṃgarañjitaṃ vā ... dayituṃ (lies: dapitum?) daya- (2) “(den Schmutz) abwischen”#?; < Skt. √day (“teilen; zerstören; zerfallen lassen”) oder √dai, dāyati (“reinigen”)? ☞ § 18.14, Anm. 4 § 18.14.16A2. leṅkaṭakhaṃḍehi vā bhastrāyanakehi vā sukumārehi dayitavyaṃ dayā~ “Rücksicht” § 46.6.40B1. cīvarakāṇāṃ dayārthaṃ anyaṃ leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ prāvaritukāmo bhavati ... dari-niśrita~# “sich am Rand eines Lochs befindend” ⇒ prapāta-niśrita~ § 25.5.22B3. nâpi kṣamati dariniśritena vā pātraṃ nirmmādayituṃ darśa~ ⇒ akṣa-darśa~ darśana~ ⇒ a-darśanena darśana-patha~ “Gesichtsfeld” ☞ § 34.5, Anm. 1 ⇒ a-darśanapathe, darśana-śravaṇa-patha~, darśanopacāra~, darśanopavicāra~ § 34.5.28B4. darśanapathe upasaṃkramitvā na dāni vaktavyaṃ “sukham bhavanto, sukhaṃ mārṣa.” (= § 35.5.29A4, § 36.5.29B4) darśana-śravaṇa-patha~# “Sicht- und Hörweite” § 51.4.44A2. nâpi <kṣamati> adarśanapathe sthātuṃ. atha khalu ud<d>eśe sthātavyaṃ 286  darśanaśravaṇapathe darśanopacāra~# (darśana-upa°) “Sichtweite”; vgl. Pā. dassanūpacāra (Vin II 20.19, III 93.29, 105.20) ⇒ a-darśanapathe, darśanopavicāra~, darśana-patha~ § 34.4.28B4. ekānte cchattraṃ nikṣipiya upānahāy’ omuṃciya tato allīyitavyaṃ. nâpi dāni darśanopacāre nikṣipitavyaṃ. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva nikṣipitavyaṃ (≒ § 35.4.29A4) § 36.4.29B4. ekatam’ ante cchatropānahāṃ nikṣipiya gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā. nâpi darśanopacāre nikṣipitavyaṃ. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva nikṣipitavyaṃ darśanopavicāra~# (darśana-upa°) “Sichtweite”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 234.8A8.7~8B8.1; BhiKaVā 15a5 (Schmidt 1993: 252.8) ⇒ a-darśanapathe, darśanopacāra~, darśana-patha~ § 52.3.44B2. atha khalu darśanopavicāre āsitavyaṃ dale-# “enthülsen”; vgl. Skt. dalati, dālayati; BHS = Pā. dāleti § 51.8.44A3. eṣā strī dhānāṃ vā pīṣayati, tilam vā mudgam vā kalāyām vā dale{n}ti dava~ ⇒ vana-dava~ daśa~ § 4.17.5B4. istrī pi vidhavā nagnā sace ’syā daśa bhrātaro (vs) daśa-aṣṭa~# “achtzehn” § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā vaṃśasya vā nalasya vā naṃgalasya vā rohiṣasya vā daśa-aṣṭahastāṃ dīrghatvena Daśārṇa~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-...-Vatsa-Matsya-Śūrasena-Śibi-Daśārṇa-Aśvaki-Avanti~ daśāha-vārika~# (daśa-aha°) “ein Mönch, der zehn Tage lang Dienst hat” ⇒ pakṣa-vārika~, paṃcāha-vārika~, māsa-vārika~, vārika~ § 43.3.38A3. māsavāriko vā daśāhavāriko vā tatra uddiśitavyo paṃcāhavāriko vā √dah ⇒ a-drāhaya-, ā-drāhaya-, dagdha~, dahāpaya- § 4.18.5B6. taṃ khu tasya svakaṃ bhavati na khalu yo tatra dahyati (vs) § 8.9.9A6. pātraṃ dahitavyaṃ (“durch Brennen zu härten” ☞ § 8.9, Anm. 5) rañjitavyaṃ § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... dahiya bhūyo vā thapayitavyāyo § 18.17.16A5. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “ko imāyo dahiṣyatî”ti ... § 25.16.23A3. pātraṃ ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ dahitavyaṃ pacitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ (☞ § 25.16, Anm. 2) § 42.12.36B6. mā evam eva kāṣṭhaṃ dahyeya dahāpaya- (BHS[Mvu]; BHSG § 38.53, S. 215a, s.v. dah) “verbrennen lassen”; Kaus. von Skt. √dah; vgl. Pā. dahāpeti (Vin IV 33.23; DP I 262b) ⇒ √dah § 14.6.13A5. kakṣaṃ ... yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati niṣprāṇakaṃ, tato ’gninā dahāpayitavyo √dā ⇒ dape-, daya- (1), dāpaya-, dāpe-, dinna~, dīya-, de-, ā-dāya, samā-dāpaya- § 1.8.1B7. gomayakārṣī dātavyā (☞ § 1.8, Anm. 3) (= § 2.6.2B6, § 3.7.3B5, § 13.8.12B3 usw.) ⇒ gomayakārṣī § 2.2.2B2. asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmman dadāti § 4.11.5A3. dīrghāyu avaśyan teṣāṃ dātavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ § 8.8.9A5. vījanavāto dātavyo, bhaktavisarggo karttavyo § 8.12.9B2. antamasato hastena samavadhānaṃ dātavyaṃ (Hs. dhā°) § 9.2.9B6. satyaṃ ... evan nāma yūyaṃ niśrayaṃ detha niśrayaṃ dadiyāṇa ...? § 9.3.9B7. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ niśrayaṃ dadiyaṃ (Abs.) antevāsikāṃ naỿva ovadatha nânuśāsatha § 9.6.10A2. eṣo ācāryo niśrayaṃ dadiya antevāsi naỿva ovadati nânuśāsati ... § 11.6.10B7. yadi tāva tṛṇacchadano bhavati, tṛṇapūlako dātavyo, ... apakkā dātavyā, ... kabhallikā dātavyā, ... mṛtpiṇḍo dātavyo, ... vaṃghorikā dātavyā, gomayaśāṭo dātavyo (≒ § 12.5.11B2~3, § 13.6.12B2, § 23.7.21B5) § 11.8.11A1. samantena sūtreṇa siviyāṇaṃ tato madhyeṇa dīrghasūtrāṇi dātavyāni § 11.9.11A2. kālena kālaṃ sivitavyaṃ, kālena kālaṃ ātape dātavyaṃ § 11.11.11A2. vastraṃ puggalikaṃ antarīkaraṇaṃ dadiya caṃkramati § 11.12.11A3. sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ ... pratyāstaraṇaṃ dadiya tato paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 13.15.12B6. mañcā bhitti<yo> mocetvā pratipādikā dātavyāḥ (≒ § 14.4.13A4) § 13.15.12B7. anvarddhamāsaṃ gomayaśāṭo dātavyo 287 § 14.5.13A5. gomayaśāṭo dātavyo, ... śvetavarṇṇā dātavyā (Hs. °vyaṃ) § 14.11.13B1. evaṃ hy eva sarvvaṃ pratisaṃskāro karttavyaḥ yāva śvetavarṇṇā dātavyā § 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo vā bisio vā ... dhovitvā sivitavyā, pratyaggalāni dātavyāni § 17.8.15A3. anyehi mṛttikā pariharttavyā, anyehi lepo dātavyaḥ § 18.4.15B3. yāni sārāṇi ca dṛḍhāni ca sthūlāni ca kāṣṭhāni tāny adhastā dātavyāni § 18.13.16A2. antamasato kumbhikāyaṃ ekasya paryāptaṃ bhaveyā, tattakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 18.31.16B6. tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā (Hs. °vyaṃ) ... antamasato gomaya- kārṣī dātavyā{ḥ} (≒ § 19.15.18A5) § 18.35.17A1. cetiyaghare tailakārṣī vā dātavyā ... gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 18.36.17A1. durlabho gandho, antamasato tailakārṣī dātavyā (= § 19.34.18B7) § 18.53.17B3. tasya bhikṣusya sumanāphullāni nāsikye dadiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ ... § 19.42.19A4. tasya glānasya sumanāphullaṃ nakke dadiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ ... § 19.16.18A5. praśvāsaghaṭo sthāpayitavyo tasyôpari cchidramallakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 24.4.22A3. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ ... ātape vā dātavyo {yo} bhūyo praveśayitavyo § 25.9.22B5. atha dāni ujjuko kīlako bhavati, duve trayo vā āveḍhakā dātavyāḥ § 31.34.27A1. sarvve yeva gocaraṃ praviśanti ... eko vā rakṣapālo dātavyo (☞ § 31.34, Anm. 1) § 31.34.27A1. “ ... yadi keci āgantukā āgaccheṃsu, tato dvāraṃ dadesi (Opt. 2. sg.; vgl. BHSG §§ 29.20~21).” ... yadi tāva keci āgantukā āgacchanti, teṣāṃ dvāraṃ dātavyaṃ § 32.6.27B1. na kṣamati mṛttikākarmma karentasya ‖ pe ‖ pātrapākaṃ dadantasya, ... § 39.15.31B3. yadi tāvat sakāle āgacchanti, bhuñjanāya dātavyo. atha dāni vikāle āgacchanti, na vâgacchanti, aparejjukāto śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ dātavyaṃ (= § 39.27.32A4~5) § 40.8.33A1. na kṣamati ... hastodakapādodakaṃ vā pānīyaṃ dātuṃ § 40.8.33A2. tato pibanāye dātavyaṃ § 40.9.33A2. labhyā dāni pātrapūraṃ dātuṃ (Hs. vā) § 40.9.33A2. na kṣamati gotrasthaṃ udakaṃ dātuṃ § 40.9.33A3. pāridhovanīyaṃ udakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 40.12.33A5. taṃ bhājanaṃ ekānte sthapitvā, tṛṇaṃ vā kulikaṃ (lies: tulikā?) vā upari dātavyā abhijñānaṃ, yathā jñāye “akalpiyan” ti § 40.16.33B1. āha “āyuṣman, dehi bhūyo. ānīya dāsyāmi” tti § 40.16.33B1. taṃ pi dāni gṛhṇiya ānīya kālena kālaṃ dātavyaṃ § 41.5.34A2. yatra yeva ayaṃ śramaṇako iryāpathaṃ vikopayiṣyati, tatraỿva se khaṭakaṃ dāsyāmi § 41.26.35B3. antaraṃ dātavyaṃ § 42.12.36B5. agnir dātavyo (= § 42.12.36B6) § 42.12.36B5. agni datvā ... agniṃ datvā ... § 42.15.36B7. yo praviśati tenântaraṃ dātavyaṃ § 42.20.37A4. minīya dātavyaṃ (zweimal) § 42.20.37A4. caṣakena vā karaṇḍikāya vā hastasaṃjñāya vā bhājanakena vā dātavyaṃ § 42.20.37A5. cūrṇṇaṃ ... piṇḍikam vā vaṭṭiya (Hs. paṭṭiya) dātavyaṃ § 42.21.37A7. vayaṃ udakaṃ dāsyāmaḥ § 42.25.37B3. vayaṃ tailaṃ dāsyāma (Hs. vāsyāma) § 42.28.37B5. mitakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 43.11.38B1. kalpikakuṭī ... yadi tāva tṛṇacchannā bhavati, tṛṇapulako dātavyo, gomaya- kārṣī dātavyā § 43.14.38B2. navatarakasya dātavyaṃ § 43.14.38B2. vṛddhatarakasya dātavyaṃ (= § 43.14.38B3) § 43.16.38B5. yasyaỿva{ṃ} kāryam bhavati, tasyaỿva{n} dātavyaṃ § 44.9.39A7. gomayakārṣī dātavyā, vaṃghorikā dātavyā § 48.7.41B3. antamasato saṃkacchikâpi skandhe datvā apāśrayitavyaṃ § 49.1.42A1. paśyati “mā imasya dātavyaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti § 49.7.42B5. anyasya haste pātraṃ datvā, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ § 49.7.42B5. glānasya anukālyaṃ āhāraṃ datvā sahitakehi nirddhāvitavyaṃ (Hs. °itavyā) § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī ... jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” ti. ... jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati” (≒ 288  § 51.8.44A4, § 51.10.44A5, § 51.11.44A5, § 51.12.44A6) § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti. yadi tāva tantuka nikṣipiyāṇaṃ uttheti, jānitavyaṃ “dāhiti (mi. Futur; vgl. Pischel § 533, Geiger § 153, v. Hinüber 2001: § 467) eṣā” tti. atha dāni bhūyo prasārayati, jānitavyaṃ “na dāhiti eṣā” tti § 51.14.44A7. evaṃ yaṃ yaṃ kāryyaṃ cchindiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, dātukāmā bhavati, na tena gantavyaṃ § 52.4.44B3. śaktukā stokā bhavanti, śaktukā dātavyā, sneho dātavyo § 53.9.45B1. atha dāni bhikṣu śrāddhako bhavati, āha “suvihita, āsa tvaṃ, ahaṃ vārayiṣyan” ti, dātavyo § 54.11.46A6. atha dāni bahu pracālayanti, ... yo tatra navakataro bhavati, tasya yaṣṭī dātavyā § 54.12.46A7. na kṣamati yaṣṭī tasya dātuṃ § 57.12.48A1. upānahā ... kālena kālaṃ pratyargalakā dātavyāḥ usw. dāḍīyaṃ für vāmāyaṃ : § 25.15.23A2 dāṇi (Pkt) “nun”; vgl. Steiner 1997: 181f. ⇒ dāni, atha dāniṃ § 4.2.4A6. so dāṇi paścād āgacchiyāṇa bhuṃjiyāṇa ... § 7.3.8B1. bhagavān āha “evaṃ dāṇi yūyaṃ upasaṃpādiya naỿv’ ovadatha nânuśāsatha ...” § 31.1.25A7. tehi dāṇi āyuṣmantehi ṣaḍvarggikehi āgantukā dṛṣṭāḥ § 37.2.30A1. yūyaṃ dāṇi gacchiyāṇa teṣāṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā dāna~ ⇒ an-ācīrṇṇa-dāna~ § 4.18.5B6. yo nīharati dānena dinnaṃ taṃ āhu tihutaṃ (lies: *nīhṛt°) (vs) § 4.20.6A3. suduṣkaraṃ pravrajitasya dānaṃ (vs) § 4.20.6A3. prītiṃ janehi suvihitā tathā hi dinnaṃ imaṃ dānan (vs) dāna für dāni : § 41.15.34B4 *dāna-patānī~ “Gabenherrin”; vgl. Pā. gaha-patānī (< Skt. gṛhapatnī) ☞ § 33.11(Text), Anm. 1 § 33.11.28A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ upāsakāṃ vā dānapatānīṃ (Hs. °patīnāṃ) vā vihārasvāminīṃ vā śabdāpitukāmo bhavati, ... “upāsake” tti vā “dānapatti” ti vā ... śabdāpayitavyaṃ dāna-pati~ “Gabenherr” ⇒ dāyaka-dānapati~, dāna-pattī~ § 6.7.7B4. koci imaṃhi evannāmako upāsako dānapatī (sg.) vā vāṇijako (Hs. °akā) vā? § 31.37.27A3. upāsaka! dānapati! ime bhikṣavo tvayā sārddhaṃ gamiṣyanti § 33.12.28A5. bhikṣū vā upāsakam vā dānapatim vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâpi kṣamati “bhāve” tti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā “āyuṣmaṃ” tti vā. atha khalu <“upāsaka” ti vā> “dānapati” tti (Hs. °patti ti) vā § 39.12.31A7. dānapati āgato bhavati, āraṇyakā ca nâgacchanti § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī (sg.) āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 39.13.31B1. dānapatī (sg.) āha “bhante, āhanetha tumhe. āraṇyakâpi eṣyantî”ti § 39.24.32A2. yadi tāva grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, dānapatir āgato bhavati § 42.20.37A5. atha dāni dānapati āhaṃsuḥ § 42.28.37B5. saṃghasaṃvyavahārako vā dānapati vā jalpati “viśvastā bhadantā snāyantu” tti § 50.6.43B2. atha dāni so dānapati tittiṇo bhavati, yattakaṃ dīyati tattakaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ dānapatīnāṃ für *°patānīṃ? (Metathese der Vokale) : § 33.11.28A4 dāna-pattī~# “Gabenherrin”; vgl. Pkt. pattī < Skt. patnī ⇒ dānapati~ § 33.11.28A5. eṣo bhikṣuḥ upāsakāṃ vā dānapatānīṃ vā vihārasvāminīṃ vā śabdāpitu- kāmo bhavati, ... “upāsake” tti vā “dānapatti” ti vā “vihārasvāmini” ti vā śabdāpayitavyaṃ dāni (BHS, Pā) “nun”; vgl. Roth 1972 = 1986: 109f. ⇒ dāṇi, atha dāni, atha dāniṃ, kin ti dāni, na dāni, nâpi dāni § 1.1.1B1. saṃghasya dāni poṣadho (= § 2.1.2A7) § 1.1.1B1. “ko dāni nâgacchati?” (= § 5.1.6A5, § 6.1.7A5) § 1.1.1B1. te dāni ojjhāyanti: “paśyatha bhaṇe ...” § 1.3.1B3. so dāni śabdāpito (= § 2.3.2B3, § 5.3.6A6, § 20.2.19A6, § 44.2.39A1, § 49.2.42A4 et passim) 289  § 1.7.1B5. yadi dāni na gato saṃgho bhavati ... § 1.10.2A2. śalākāṃ pi dāni gṛhṇantena na câpi kṣamati ... śalākāṃ gṛhṇituṃ § 3.6.3B3. eṣo dāni saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, ... § 19.14.18A4. atha dāni kenaci bhikṣuṇā dṛṣṭo, nâpi dāni kṣamati vaktuṃ ... § 19.17.18A6. so dāni ujjhitavyo navakāntena vā yasya vā oheyyako bhavati § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyaṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropitako § 20.1.19A5. so dāni taṃ unneti va<r>ddheti ghaṭasiktakaṃ ekaputrakaṃ viya § 20.1.19A5. so dāni tena dṛṣṭo § 20.1.19A5. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ ... khādasi § 20.2.19A6. so dāni tena unnīto varddhito ghaṭasiktako ekaputrako viya § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādantā ekānte niṣaṇṇā āsanti pravātagandhikena mukhena § 20.8.19B4. evaṃ ca dāni yūyaṃ apramāṇāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādatha § 20.9.19B5. aparo dāni bhikṣu dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati § 20.14.20A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ pi dāni khādantena nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām ... vā bhikṣūṇāṃ agrato dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 31.6.25B5. yadi dāni (Hs. tāni) grāmasya nagarasya vā madhyena gantavyaṃ bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... gantuṃ ... § 33.4.28A1. āyuṣmān dāni Upālī ... bhagavantam upasaṃkramiya pṛcchati ... § 34.1.28A7. kṣatriyaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 34.5.28B5. darśanapathe upasaṃkramitvā na dāni vaktavyaṃ “sukham bhavanto, ...” (= § 35.5.29A4, § 36.5.29B4) § 39.1.30B6. tehi dāni grāmāntikehi § 39.10.31A7. eṣo dāni koci grāmāntikāṃ bhaktena nimantreti, ... § 40.1.32B2. tena dāni kālena tena samayena āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā pānīyaṃ pratijāgaranti § 40.9.33A2. labhyā dāni pātrapūraṃ dātuṃ; § 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni ... dhovituṃ § 40.16.33B1. labhyā dāni ... yācituṃ; § 40.16.33B1. taṃ pi dāni ... dātavyaṃ § 41.1.33B2. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā (= § 48.1.41A3) § 41.1.33B4. kiṃ dāni ayaṃ pādadhovanikā omuddhikṛtā? § 41.4.33B7. sthaviro dāni (= § 41.5.34A1, § 41.6.34A2, § 41.6.34A3, § 41.7.34A3) § 41.7.34A4. sthavireṇa dāni vāmā jaṃghā dhovitā § 41.10.34A6. sthavireṇa dāni ... catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni § 41.14.34B3. tehi dāni kulaputrakehi otāro labdho § 48.8.41B4. labhyā dāni (“jedoch”) ... § 49.1.42A3. suṣṭhu khalu nirddhāpīyati, yathâpi dāni ... § 50.7.43B3. mā dāni ubhaye cchinnabhaktā bhaviṣyāma § 50.10.43B7. mā dāni vayaṃ ubhaye ’va bhaktacchedaṃ kariṣyāma § 54.11.46A6. atha dāni bahu pracālayanti, na dāni te sarvve balīvandā viya utthapetavyā § 60.5.48B7. taṃ pi tathā dāni kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ, yathā ānantaryakaṃ śabdena na vyābahati § 62.6.50A2. taṃ pi dāni na kṣamati yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipituṃ et passim dāniṃ (BHS) ⇒ atha dāniṃ dāniyā# (oder dāniyā#) eine Art Zimmermannsgerät (?) § 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā dāpaya- “geben” (mit nicht-kausativer Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG §§ 38.58f.) ⇒ √dā, dape, dāpe- § 4.11.5A3. oheyyakānāṃ glānakānāṃ pratikṛty’ eva dāpitavyaṃ § 5.10.6B7. oheyyaglānakānāṃ piṇḍapāto dāpayitavyo (= § 6.10.7B7) § 10.5.10A5. kheṭakaṭāhaṃ niṣkāśayitavyaṃ yāvat pādodakaṃ dāpayitavyaṃ dāpe- (Pā) “geben lassen” ⇒ dape-, √dā, dāpaya- § 4.13.5A7. saṃghasthavireṇa ... pātrodakaṃ dāpetavyaṃ dāyaka~ “Geber, Spender” ⇒ pānīya-dāyaka~ § 4.18.6A1. divā vā yadi vā rātrau devā rakṣantu dāyakān (vs) 290  § 26.8.23B2. yādṛśī dīyati, tādṛśī praticchit<avya>ā. dāyakavaśo na pratigrāhakavaśo dāyaka-dānapati~# “Geber und Gabenherren; Gabenherren” (Das Wort, immer im Plural, kommt auch in den folgenden Texten vor: BhiVin[Ma-L] § 166, 5B1.3, 5, 7; Mvu III 43, 2, 8, 11, 12; ib. 349, 15; Divy 428.28; Avś I 89.5; SHT III 888 b B2; Śbh I 14.21, 126.16, 188.16, 272.17; Śikṣ 269.9; vgl. Śikṣ 138.6. dāyaka~ dānapati~) § 1.1.1B1. dāyakadānapatī pṛcchanti § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati (Nom.pl.) paripṛcchitavyā “kim vasiṣyatha atha gamiṣyatha?” § 1.11.2A4. yaṃ kālaṃ dāyakadānapati (Nom. pl.) nirddhāvitā bhavanti, tato sūtroddeśakena jānitavyaṃ (≒ § 2.9.3A2) § 1.13.2A6. dāyakadānapati (Nom. pl.) dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyā samādāpayi- tavyā samuttejayitavyā saṃpraharṣayitavyā udyojayitavyā (≒ § 2.11.3A5, § 3.12.4A4) § 2.1.2B1. dāyakadānapati dāni deyadharmmāṇi ādāya pratipālenti § 2.9.3A1. dāyakadānapatī pṛcchitavyāḥ § 3.1.3A6. dāyakadānapati (Nom. pl.) pṛcchanti (= § 4.1.4A6, § 5.1.6A5, § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A4, 7A6) § 3.10.4A1. dāyakadānapati (Nom. pl.) pṛcchitavyāḥ § 4.2.4A7. nâpi dāyakadānapatiṃ (Acc. pl.) dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayati samādāpayati § 4.11.5A3. atha dāni dāyakadānapati (Nom. pl.) jalpanti “paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha” § 12.5.11B2. prakṛtyaỿva tāva dāyakadānapati pratisaritavyā § 42.26.37B3. atha dāni jentāko sāṃghiko bhavati, dāyakadānapatī vā denti, gaṇḍī āhanitavyā ... § 50.5.43A7. dāyakadānapatī vaktavyāḥ “detha glānasya piṇḍapātaṃ.” § 50.5.43A7. yadi tāva dāyakadānapati jalpanti “bhante, paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha”, ... usw. dāraṃ für dāra<ka>ṃ : § 41.13.34B3 dāraka~ ⇒ dāraka-dārikā~ § 4.5.4B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti. āgantuko gamiko gṛhastho pravrajito strī puruṣo dārako dārikā § 41.13.34B3. taṃ dāra<ka>ṃ rakṣapālaṃ thapiyāṇaṃ § 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako ... (= § 41.15.34B5) § 41.14.34B3. so eko dārako dṛṣṭo § 41.14.34B4. dāraka kahiṃ tumhāṇaṃ hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇaṃ vā? § 41.15.34B5. so dāni corasenāpatiḥ pipāsitaḥ tasya dārakasyâha “haṃgho dāraka, pipāsito ’smi. icchāmi pānīyaṃ pātuṃ.” § 41.16.34B6. tasya dārakasya pānīyaṃ dentasya ... § 41.16.34B6. so dāni pṛcchati “haṃgho dāraka, kasya kasya kṛtena tvaṃ atra dīpamūlaṃ allīno ’si?” § 41.17.34B7. yadi vayam imasya dārakasya evaṃ dharmmiṣṭhasya imaṃ hiraṇya- suvarṇṇaṃ harāma, ... § 41.18.35A1. ahaṃ imasya dārakasya evaṃ ca evaṃ ca ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.18.35A2. so dāni dārakasyâha “haṃgho dārakā (Voc. sg.), imaṃ vayaṃ tava sarvvaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ demi.” § 41.18.35A2. tena dārakena dvārāṇi sarvvāṇi ghaṭitāni dāraka-dārikā~ § 4.10.5A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... dārakadārikāṃ laṃghaṃtehi gantuṃ ... atha khalu ... dārakadārikāṃ parivarjantehi praviśitavyaṃ § 6.9.7B6. tato na kṣamati ... dārakadārikā laṃghayantehi praviśituṃ. atha khalu ... dārakadārikāṃ pariharantehi praviśitavyaṃ § 5.9.6B6. dārakadārikāṃ parivarjayantehi praviśitavyaṃ § 5.9.6B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi (Loc. pl.) dārakadārikā vā sovāpitā bhaveṃsu § 48.1.41A3. mañcā ca pīṭhāṃ ca sāpāśrayā ca dārakadārikehi (lies: °āhi) pādehi mardditaparimardditā ... § 48.2.41A5. dārakadārikāhi mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca trepaśyakā ca pādehi marditavimarditā dārikā~ ⇒ dāraka-dārikā~ 291  § 4.5.4B3. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti. āgantuko gamiko gṛhastho pravrajito strī puruṣo dārako dārikā dāsa~ ⇒ prabhūta-dāsī-d°-karmmakara-pauruṣeya~ dāsī~ ⇒ prabhūta-d°-dāsa-karmmakara-pauruṣeya~ dāha~ ⇒ agni-dāha~ dāhi- (mi. Futur von √dā; vgl. Pischel § 533, Geiger § 153, v. Hinüber 2001: § 467) ⇒ √dā § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti. yadi tāva tantuka nikṣipiyāṇaṃ uttheti, jānitavyaṃ “dāhiti eṣā” tti. atha dāni bhūyo prasārayati, jānitavyaṃ “na dāhiti eṣā” tti dicchaddiya für vicchaddiya: § 20.13.20A1 dinna~ (BHS[BHSG § 34.16], Pā) “gegeben”; vgl. S. 560 in diesem Band ⇒ √dā § 4.18.5B6. yo nīharati dānena dinnaṃ taṃ āhu tihutaṃ (lies: *nīhṛt°) (vs) § 4.20.6A3. prītiṃ janehi suvihitā tathā hi dinnaṃ imaṃ dānan (vs) § 8.4.8B7. yaṃ kālaṃ abhyanujñā dinnā bhavati, tato dvāraṃ sukhākaṃ apaduriyāṇa ... (≒ § 10.4.10A5) § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ ātape dinnaṃ (≒ § 11.3.10B4) § 49.7.42B5. dinnā mama āṇattikā § 52.6.44B5. (praṇītabhojana~ ...) asukāye ceṭikāye dinnaṃ. asukāye caṇḍavidhavāye dinnaṃ. asukena paṇḍakena dinnaṃ. asukāye sthūlakumārīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpabhikṣuṇīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpaśrāmaṇerīye dinnaṃ § 52.6.44B6. asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno § 52.7.44B7. yaṃ kālaṃ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā anujñā dinnā bhavati, tato paribhuñjitavyaṃ divasa~ “Tag”; divasaṃ “den ganzen Tag” ☞ § 36.6, Anm. 2 § 1.6.1B5. yasmin pradeśe yaṃ divasaṃ saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, ... § 10.5.10A6. evaṃ aparaṃ divasaṃ prasrāvakumbhikā niṣkāśayitavyā § 20.11.19B7. aparaṃ divasaṃ evam eva khāditavyaṃ § 32.2.27A5. amukaṃ divasaṃ tvaṃ amukena bhikṣuṇā sārddhaṃ vācaṃvāciṃ karosi § 36.6.29B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati kutsitum vā pansitum vā “gṛhapatikā nāma yūyaṃ tulākūṭamānakūṭehi divasaṃ (“den ganzen Tag”) lokaṃ muṣaṃtā āsatha.” § 39.29.32A7. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... śṛgālâpi āraṇye vasanti. divasaṃ (“den ganzen Tag”) yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha” divasatas# “am Tag” § 22.6.21A3. cakkalī ... na dāni kṣamati divasata osarayitvā thapayituṃ divā “am Tage” § 3.6.3B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... sandhipoṣadho vā divā <vā> rātrau vā poṣadho (Hs. °dhe) § 4.18.6A1. divā vā yadi vā rātrau devā rakṣantu dāyakān (vs) divā-poṣadha~# “Poṣadha-Feier am Tage” ⇒ poṣadha~, rātri-poṣadha~ § 2.5.2B4. kiṃ rātripoṣadho bhaviṣyati divāpoṣadho purebhaktaṃ bhaviṣyati paścād- bhaktaṃ? divā-vihāra~ (BHS, Pā) “Aufenthalt am Tage, das Verweilen während des Tages” (SWTF, s.v.) ☞ § 8.10, Anm. 1 § 8.10.9A6. divāvihāraṃ gacchantasya pīṭhikā nayitavyā niṣīdanaṃ nayitavyaṃ ... § 8.11.9A7. atha dāni divāvihāraṃ gantukāmo bhavati, āpṛcchitvā gantavyaṃ § 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto āgacchantasya pīṭhikā ānayitavyā, niṣīdanaṃ ānayitavyaṃ ... § 24.7.22A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ divāvihāraṃ gato caṃkramati, ... divya~ § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... svayaṃbhū divyehi vihārehi <viharanto> brāhmehi vihārehi āryehi vihārehi āniṃjyehi vihārehi sātatyehi vihārehi ... √diś ⇒ ud-deśaya~, deśaya-, vy-apa-diśa- diśā~ ⇒ catur-diśaṃ 292  § 4.19.6A1. sarvvā diśā subhayā samākulā sa uttarā sa purastimā (vs) § 4.19.6A2. “diśā sauvastikā” dakṣiṇā vistareṇa ādiśitavyā diśo-diśaṃ# “in alle Richtungen”; vgl. Pā. diso disaṃ, disodisaṃ, SWTF, s.vv. diśaṃ-diśam, diśo- diśas (= Skt) § 20.13.20A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena kheṭaṃ diśodiśaṃ cchorayituṃ kuccako vā vicchaddiya diśodiśaṃ cchorayituṃ √dīp ⇒ dīpaya-, dīpya-, ā-√dīp, ā-dīpaya-, ā-dīpe- dīpa~ “Lampe” ⇒ dīpaka~, dīpikā~ (1), pradīpa~ § 8.12.9B2. dīpo prajvālayitavyo, kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ § 10.5.10A6. dīpaṃ ādīpiya śayyāṃ prajñapiya sukhaṃ pratikrāmayitavyo § 23.6.2.21B3. mandamukhīm vā prajvāleti, anāpattiḥ. dīpaṃ vā praveśeti, anāpattiḥ § 31.25.26A7. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... yatra dīpā dīpyanti tatra allīno § 53.1.45A2. tena hi dīpo nāma karttavyo § 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti. cīvarakoṇenâpi nirvvāpenti § 53.3.45A3. evaṃ dīpe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 53.20.45B7) § 53.5.45A4~5. dīpavārikena dīpam ādīpentena pratham{ān}am eva bhagavato śarīra- kuṭikāyāṃ dīpo ādīpitavyo § 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti § 53.8.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracalāyati, ... so pi acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo, vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti § 53.10.45B1. nâpi kṣamati tena upārambhaṇābhiprāyeṇa dīpo vārayituṃ § 53.11.45B2. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ § 53.12.45B2. atha dāni navakā bhikṣū prahāṇaśālāyāṃ pratikramanti, na kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ § 53.13.45B3. yadā bhikṣū pratikrāntā bhavaṃti, tato varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.13.45B3. varccakuṭīyaṃ nirvvāpayitvā, racchā<yāṃ> dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.13.45B4. sopānaśīrṣe nirvvāpayitvā prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.14.45B4. <vaktavyaṃ> “āyuṣmanto, prajñapetha śayyāyo. dīpaṃ gopayiṣyan.” ti § 53.16.45B5. tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo § 53.17.45B6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmanto, dīpo praveśīyatî”ti. “dīpo praveśayati” tti § 53.19.45B7. evaṃ devasikaṃ dīpo jvālayitavyo usw. dīpaka~ “Lampe” ⇒ dīpa~, dīpikā~ (1), pradīpa~ § 10.5.10A6. dīpako prajvālayitavyo, śayyā prajñapayitavyā § 23.4.2.21B1. nâpi tahiṃ kṣamati mandamukhī prajvālayituṃ, dīpako vā praveśayituṃ. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śeyyāṃ prajñapayitukāmo bhavati, kiñ câpi dīpakaṃ praveśeti, anāpattiḥ § 53.6.45A5. yadi tāva so dvibhūmiko saṃghārāmo bhavati, prathamaṃ tāva sopāna- maggulīye dīpako jālayitavyo. catuhi prāsādasya koṇe koṇe dīpako prajvālayitavyaḥ, varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo, paścāt prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo § 53.7.45A6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho prahāṇe upaviṣṭo bhavati, tato dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti § 53.11.45B1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāto dīpako ukkaḍhitavyo § 53.12.45B2. atha khalu bahi prāsādakoṇehi dīpakā nirvvāpayitavyā, sopānamaggulīyaṃ prāsādakuṭīyaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.13.45B3. sarvvarātriṃ varccakuṭīyañ ca prasrāvakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo § 53.17.45B6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ sahasā dīpakaṃ praveśayituṃ § 53.17.45B6. prahāṇaśālāyān tāva prathamaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo 293  § 53.18.45B7. yaṃ kālaṃ vibhātaṃ bhavati, ākāśaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato varccakuṭīye prasrāvakuṭīye ca dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo dīpa-koṭika~#, dīpa-koṭikā~# “Lampenschale” (Gemeint ist ein Gefäß, in dem Öl ist) ☞ § 53.4, Anm. 4 § 53.4.45A4. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā ... tehi prakṛty’ eva tāva dīpavarttikāyo varttitavyāyo, dīpakoṭikāni sajjayitavyāni, tailaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ § 53.19.45B7. dīpakoṭikāyo ekasthāne sthāpayitavyā dīpa-mūla~# “unter der Lampe” § 41.16.34B6. kasya kṛtena tvaṃ atra dīpamūlaṃ (Hs. dīyam°) allīno ’si? dīpacārika~ für dīpavārika~ ⇒ dīpa-vārika~ dīpaya- “erstrahlen lassen” ⇒ dīpya- § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ ... śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ dīpayamānānāṃ sukhañ ca phāsuñ ca viharantānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? dīpa-vartti~ “Docht” ⇒ dīpa-varttikā~ § 53.11.45B2. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā ... dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ. atha khalu tulikāye nisnehiya dīpavartti okaḍḍhiya kulikātaile nirvvāpayitavyaṃ § 53.15.45B5. yadi dīpavartti dagdhikā bhavati, palikhāṭir vvā okaḍḍhitavyo § 53.19.45B7. dīpavarttīyo niṣpīḍiyāṇaṃ ekaṃhi koṇake sthāpetavyāyo dīpa-varttikā~# “Lampendocht” ⇒ dīpa-vartti~ § 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā ... tehi prakṛty’ eva tāva dīpavarttikāyo varttitavyāyo, dīpakoṭikāni sajjayitavyāni, tailaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ dīpa-vārika~ “Lampenwart” ⇒ vārika~ § 53.2.45A2. āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā dīpavārikā § 53.4.45A3. eṣo dāni saṃghārāmo purimaṃ paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ pratijāgrīyati, dīpa- vārikā (Hs. °cāri°) uddiśitavyā ... § 53.5.45A4. dīpavārikena dīpam ādīpentena pratham{ān}am eva bhagavato śarīra- kuṭikāyāṃ dīpo ādīpitavyo § 53.7.45A6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho prahāṇe upaviṣṭo bhavati, tato dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti § 53.10.45B1. tehi dīpavārikehi (Hs. °cāri°) na kṣamati āghāto vā pra<dveṣo> vedayituṃ § 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo dīpikā~ (1) “Lampe” ⇒ dīpa~, dīpaka~, pradīpa~ § 41.14.34B3. te dāni ulkāyo ca dīpikāyo ca prajvāliyāṇaṃ mārgganti dīpikā~# (2) “Termite”; < *udīpikā < (Metathese) Skt. upadīkā (“Termite”) ☞ § 13.2, Anm. 3 ⇒ dvīpikā § 14.4.13A4. mañcā bhittiyo mocetvā pratipādakā dātavyā, yathā prāṇakehi dīpikāhi vā na khajjeyā dīpya- ⇒ dīpaya-, ā-√dīp § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... yatra dīpā dīpyanti tatra allīno dīya-; zu Passiv auf -īyati; vgl. BHSG §§ 37.2f., 215b (Mvu) ⇒ √dā § 4.12.5A4. bhojanaṃ dīyati, mahanto piṇḍo parigṛhīto bhavati, ... § 4.12.5A5. āha “na hi. āryasya etaṃ evaṃ dīyati.” § 26.7.23B1. atha dāni upaviṣṭakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye dīyati, yathāvṛddhikāye gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 26.8.23B2. yādṛśī dīyati, tādṛśī praticchit<avya>ā. dāyakavaśo na pratigrāhakavaśo § 34.5.28B5. atha khalu ārogyāpiya, yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ dīyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ (≒ § 35.5.29A5) § 40.9.33A2. “icchāmi pānīyaṃ dīyamānan” ti § 42.21.37A5. udakasya pratyayo (lies: pratya<ṃ>śo?) jānitavyo “kathaṃ dīyati” § 42.21.37A5. yadi tāva mitakaṃ dīyati uṣṇodakaṃ ghaṭena vā kuṇḍena vā, tena tathā yeva grahetavyaṃ § 50.6.43B1. yadi tāvad yāvadarthaṃ bhaktaṃ dīyati, prakṛty’ eva ātmano bhaktato tasya pātraṃ pūretavyaṃ § 50.6.43B2. atha dāni so dānapati tittiṇo bhavati, yattakaṃ dīyati tattakaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ 294 dīyamūlaṃ für dīpamūlaṃ : § 41.16.34B6 dīrghaka~ (BHS) ein Euphemismus für “Schlange”; vgl. Pā. dīgha § 18.53.17B2. eṣo hi bhikṣuḥ dīrghakena khāyitako bhavati, ... § 22.1.20B6. śītalakaṃ ca tena ākrāntaṃ tasya bhavati “dīrghako mayā ākrānto.” § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī ... tathā karttavyā, yathā dīrghako na saṃsakkati § 22.4.21A1. cakkalī utkṣipitavyā. nâpi dāni sahasā. anekāyo mā tarhi (für tahiṃ?) dīrghako praviṣṭo bhaveya tti dīrgha-caṃkramaṃ caṃkrama- # “sich in der Übung des langen Auf- und Abgehens üben” ☞ § 11.11, Anm. 1 § 11.11.11A2. na kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ sāṃghikaṃ prāvariyaṃ dīrghaca<ṃ>kramaṃ caṃkramituṃ § 28.1.24A1. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgatvā tasya purato tālapādukāhi ābaddhāhi dīrgha- caṃkramaṃ caṃkramati ṭapya ṭaṭapya ṭapya ṭaṭapya tti § 41.1.33B3. karddamaṃ marddantā pāṃsu marddentā dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramanti § 41.2.33B5. karddamaṃ marddantā pāṃsu marddantā dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramatha § 41.32.35B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pādehi dhovitehi dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramituṃ dīrghatva~ “Länge” ⇒ āyāma~ § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā vaṃśasya vā nalasya vā naṃgalasya vā rohiṣasya vā daśa-aṣṭahastāṃ dīrghatvena dīrgha-nāgadanta~# “langer Kleiderhaken” ⇒ nāga-dantaka~ § 18.9.15B7. tatra cīvaravaṃśā vā cīvarabisi vā dīrghanāgadantā (Hs. °nta) vā karttavyāḥ dīrgha-sūtra~ “langer Faden” § 11.8.11A1. samantena sūtreṇa siviyāṇaṃ tato madhyeṇa dīrghasūtrāṇi dātavyāni dīrghāyu~# “Langlebiger!” (Eine Anrede von einem Mönch bzw. von einer Nonne an einen Laien); < Skt. dīrgha + āyuṣ ☞ § 1.1, Anm. 2 § 1.1.1B1. āhaṃsu “no dīrghāyu (Voc. pl.)” § 2.1.2B1. āhaṃsu “no h’ etaṃ dīrghāyu (Voc. pl.)” (= § 5.1.6A5, § 6.1.7A5) § 3.1.3A7. āhaṃsu “no hîdaṃ dīrghāyu (Voc. pl.)” (= § 6.3.7A7) § 4.1.4A6. āhaṃsu “no h’ edaṃ dīrghāyu (Voc. pl.)” § 4.11.5A3. dīrghāyu (Voc. sg.) avaśyan teṣāṃ dātavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ § 5.7.6B3. ārogyaṃ dīrghāyu (Voc. sg.) ... § 14.10.13B1. ye tatra bhavanti gopālakā vā paśupālakā vā ... te vaktavyāḥ “dīrghāyu (Voc. pl.), ... eṣo tumhākaṃ vihārako anuparindito bhavatu.” § 14.18.13B6. ye tatra prativeśikā bhavanti, teṣām anuparinditavyaṃ “dīrghāyu (Voc. pl.), eṣo vihārako tumhāṇaṃ anuparindito bhavatu. ...” § 34.3.28B3. atha khalu ye tahiṃ vṛddhatarakā kṣatriyā bhavanti, te tāva alliyitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “dīrghāyu (Voc. pl.), kṣatriyaparṣāye imaṃ va kāryaṃ allīyāmi” tti § 35.3.29A3. “dīrghāyu (Voc. pl.), asti me kiñcid brāhmaṇaparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ allīyāma” tti § 36.3.29B3. “dīrghāyu (Voc. pl.), asti <me> kiñci gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ, allīyāma mā āllīyāmo?” tti § 50.5.43A7. “dīrghāyu (Voc. pl.), bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno pari<ṃ>dito. ...” dīrghodakaṃ für pātrodakaṃ : § 4.13.5A7 du / u ⇒ u / du duḥkha~ § 41.10.34A6. catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni, duḥkham āryasatyaṃ ... duḥkha- (BHS) “schmerzen”; vgl. Pā. dukkhati ⇒ duḥkhāpaya-, duḥkhāya- § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, śīrṣam vā duḥkhati, ... § 40.9.33A2. bhikṣusya cakṣu duḥkhanti duḥkha-nirodha~ (BHS, SWTF) “Aufhebung des Leidens” ☞ § 41.10, Anm. 4 § 41.10.34A6. catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni, duḥkhanirodham āryasatyaṃ ... duḥkhaṃ-nirodha-gāminī-pratipad~# “Pfad, der zur Vernichtung des Leidens führt”; vgl. BHSD s.vv. āryasatya, pratipad ☞ § 41.10, Anm. 4 § 41.10.34A7. catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni, ... duḥkhaṃnirodhagāminīpratipadam āryasatyaṃ 295 duḥkha-śāyin~# “einer, der schlechter schläft” § 30.9.25A5. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ duḥkhaśāyī bhavati, pāraśyena pāraśyaṃ pallaṭṭanto śayati, anāpattiḥ duḥkha-samudaya~ (BHS, SWTF) “die Entstehung des Leidens” § 41.10.34A6. catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni, duḥkham āryasatyaṃ, duḥkhasamudayam āryasatyaṃ ... duḥkhāpaya- (BHS[Mvu]) “belästigen”; vgl. Pā. dukkhāpeti ⇒ duḥkha-, duḥkhāya- § 32.10.27B4. atha khalu tathā vanditavyaṃ, yathā na duḥkhāpiye (Passiv, Opt.) pādehi vandayantehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs) duḥkhāya- “schmerzen”; vgl. Skt. duḥkhayati, Pā. dukkhayati, Pkt. dukkheï; Skt. duḥkhāyate (“Schmerz empfinden”) ⇒ duḥkha-, duḥkhāpaya- § 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyā ... duḥ-prajña~# “unverständig”; = Skt. duṣ-prajña; vgl. Pā. duppañña § 37.5.30A4. kusīdā hīnavīryā tīrthikāḥ, duḥprajñā tīrthikāḥ dukkaṃ für muktaṃ? § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he ... caṃḍa<ṃ> (Hs. ḍaṃya) muktaṃ (Hs. dukkaṃ) (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti du-guṇaṃ# “zweifach, doppelt”; vgl. BHSD, duguṇa; Sp 1206.16. paṭisaṃharitvā duguṇakaraṇaṃ ⇒ dvi-guṇika~, dvi-guṇaṃ, dvi-guṇita~ § 44.4.39A2. cīvarakāni sāharitāni kāriya antaramukha<ṃ> duguṇântaraṃ (< duguṇaṃ antaraṃ) kariya cīvaravaṃśe sthapetavyāni dugdha-ghaṭa~# “Milchkanne”; vgl. CDIAL 6392. *dugdhaghaṭa (“pot for milk”) § 43.5.38A4. yaṃ tatra bhava<ṃ>ti dugdhaghaṭā vā dadhighaṭā vā vyañjanagolakā vā ... du-graha~# “schädliche Entscheidung”?; vgl. Skt. durgraha, Pā. duggaha ☞ § 38.4, Anm. 4 ⇒ su- graha~ § 38.4.30A7. yadi tāva tasya dugraho bhavati (Hs. vā) vaktavyaṃ, “mā allīya.” atha dāni tasya sugraho (Hs. saṃgraho) bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “āllīya” tti, allīyitavyaṃ § 38.6.30B1. yadi tāva tasya dugraho bhavati, so ca bhikṣu bhavati kalahakārako ..., vaktavyaṃ “mā jalpāhi” tti du-tthapita~# “schlecht hingestellt”; < dus +sthpita ☞ § 12.6, Anm. 2 ⇒ du-tthāpitaka~, du- tthita~, du-tthitaka~, su-tthapita~, su-thapita~, thapaya-, sthapaya-, sthape-, √sthā usw. § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... dutthapitā bhavanti, sutthapitā karttavyā du-tthāpitaka~# “schlecht hingestellt”; < dus +sthpita + Suffix ka ⇒ du-tthapita~, du-tthita~, du- tthitaka~, su-tthapita~, su-thapita~ § 16.9.14B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... dutthāpitakā (Hs. utthāpitakā) bhavanti, susthitā karttavyā du-tthita~# “schlecht hingestellt”; < dus + sthita ⇒ du-tthitaka~, du-tthapita~, du-tthāpitaka~, su- tthita~, su-sthita~, ut-thitaka~ § 13.13.12B5. mañcā vā pīṭhā ... dutthitā bhavanti, susthitā thapitavyāḥ du-tthitaka~# “schlecht hingestellt”; < dus + sthita + Suffix ka ⇒ du-tthita~, du-tthapita~, du- tthāpitaka~, su-tthita~, ut-thitaka~ § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... utthitakā (lies: dutthitakā?) bhavanti, sutthitā thapetavyā § 13.13.12B5. pādakā utthitakā (lies: dutthitakā?) bhavanti, suthapitā karttavyāḥ § 17.12.15A6. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... dutthitakā bhavanti, susthitakā karttavyā du-puṭa~# ⇒ puṭa~ dur-abhirama~ (SWTF, Pā) “schwer, Freude zu finden; mühsam” ☞ § 39.29, Anm. 8 § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “ ... duṣkaraṃ pravivekena dur- abhiramaṃ ekaṃ paraṃ rātri vinayamāno mānasaṃ ādhyātmaṃ vê”ti dur-āvāsaka~# “mühsam zum Wohnen” § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni prāntāni viviktāni vigatajanapadāni manuṣyarahaśayyakāni pratisaṃlayanasāropyāni ...” durggandha-prahāṇārthaṃ# (°hāṇa-arth°) “um üblen Geruch zu beseitigen” 296  § 20.17.20A3. nâpi kṣamati vibhūṣaṇābhiprāyeṇa dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ. atha khalu durggandhaprahāṇārthaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāditavyaṃ dur-bbala~ ⇒ jarā-durbbala~, vyādhi-durbbala~ dur-labha~, dur-llabha~ § 18.36.17A1. āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, durlabho gandho (= § 19.34.18B7) § 20.11.19B6. atha dāni bhikṣū āraṇyake śeyyāsane prativasanti, kalpiyakāro durllabho bhavati, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? durvv~# eine Art Geschirr (?) § 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā durvvā vā kaṇḍahastā vā karkkaṭakā vā ... duve (BHS, Pā, Pkt) “zwei”; vgl. BHSG § 19.3; Schneider 1960: 251f. = 2002: 49f. ⇒ dvaya~, dvi~ § 7.4.8B2. catvāri vā trīṇi duve ekaṃ sūtraṃ vistareṇa grāhayitavyo § 25.9.22B5. atha dāni ujjuko kīlako bhavati, duve trayo vā āveḍhakā dātavyāḥ § 25.11.22B6. gṛhṇantena nâpi kṣamati ekahastena duve trayo vā pātrāṇi gṛhṇituṃ § 31.7.25B5. sāye vāsôpagatā bhavanti, taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā § 34.6.28B6. duve cakrāṇi dharmmacakraṃ balacakraṃ ca § 39.6.31A3. grāmāntikehi duve thālīyo (Hs. śālīyo) ādrāhayitavyāyo § 39.19.31B6. duve sthālīyo adrāhayitavyāyo. ekā āraṇyakānāṃ ekā grāmāntikānāṃ § 50.4.43A7. tena adhyiṣṭena samānena duve pātrāṇy ādāya praviśitavyaṃ duś-cakṣuka~# “ein schlechtes Sehvermögen habend”; vgl. Skt. duś-cakṣas § 49.5.42B1. atha dāni duścakṣuko bhavati jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā, ... √duṣ ⇒ praduṣṭa-citta~, duṣṭa-citta~, pra-dūṣaya- duṣ-kara~ “schwer zu tun” ⇒ su-duṣkara~ § 37.5.30A4. duṣkaraṃ (Nom. sg. masc.; BHSG § 8.26; ☞ § 37.5[Text], Anm. 6) gṛhi- liṅgaparityāgo, duṣkaraṃ vastisaṃyamo, duṣkaram araṇyavāso § 39.29.32A7. (āraṇyakā) ... vaktavyā “ ... duṣkaraṃ pravivekena durabhiramaṃ ekaṃ paraṃ rātri vinayamāno mānasaṃ ādhyātmaṃ vê”ti duṣ-kṛta~ “Übeltat” § 27.2.23B5. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, eva<ṃ> ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhasi § 28.2.24A2. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, evaṃ ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato caṃkramasi § 29.2.24A7. duṣkṛtaṃ bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikāḥ evaṃ ca yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha § 30.2.24B7. duṣkṛtaṃ vo bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ... § 41.2.33B6. duṣkṛtaṃ vo ... (= § 42.4.36A7) § 49.2.42A6. duṣkṛtaṃ te Upanandana ... duṣṭa-citta~ (SWTF) “Haß, böse Gesinnung” ⇒ praduṣṭa-citta~, pra-dūṣaya- § 55.4.46B5. nâpi kṣamati āghātacittena vā duṣṭacittena vā geṇḍukaṃ vārayituṃ dūra~ ⇒ āsanna~ § 12.11.11B6. yadi tāva āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, dūre dūre (Hs. dūro) pariveṇā bhava<ṃ>ti ... § 18.24.16B2. nâpi dāni dūrato yeva nivāsa<na>ṃ oguhiya upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 47.4.40B6. yadi tāva grīṣmakālo bhavati, dūre ca grāmo bhavati ... § 49.5.42A7. nâpi kṣamati tena dūraṃ pṛṣṭhato gantuṃ § 50.10.43B7. atha dāni dūre saṃghārāmo bhavati, piṇḍapātanīhārakena yatraỿva pānīyaṃ paśyati, tatraỿva bhuṃjitavyaṃ dūra-gocara~# “(hinsichtlich des Klosters) entfernt vom Gebiet des Almosengangs” § 49.7.42B5. atha dāni dūragocaro saṃghārāmo bhavati, ... § 50.10.43B5. atha dāni dūragocaro saṃghārāmo bhavati, ... nīhārakapiṇḍapātena ... panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ dūra-dūre# “zu weit entfernt” § 1.12.2A4. yadi tāva nâtyā<ti>śītam bhavati nâtyātiuṣṇaṃ, na dūradūre vihārakā bhavanti, ... 297  § 2.10.3A3~4. dūradūre vā pariveṇā bhavanti ... na dūradūre pariveṇā bhavanti § 3.11.4A3. na dūradūre vā pariveṇā bhavanti dūre-dūraṃ# “in weitem Abstand” § 40.15.33A7. atha dāni paṭipāṭikāye dūredūraṃ prahāṇasya upaviṣṭā bhavanti, ekena vāretavyaṃ dūrvvā-sādvala~# “Wiese von Dūrvā-Gras (Panicum Dactylon)”; vgl. Skt. śādvala (“Grasplatz, Wiese”) § 25.5.22B4. pātraṃ ... karṣadhāne vā vālikādhāne vā dūrvvāsādvale vā nirmmādayi- tavyaṃ dūṣitavyaṃ für kaṃḍūyitavyaṃ : § 60.2.48B5 dṛ / o ⇒ o / dṛ dṛḍha~ § 18.4.15B3. yāni sārāṇi ca dṛḍhāni ca sthūlā<ni> ca kāṣṭhāni tāny adhastā dātavyāni √dṛś ⇒ dṛṣṭa~, pra-darśita~, saṃ-darśaya- § 11.2.10B3. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ utpādakaṃ ... (≒ § 12.2.11A6) § 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... vihārakāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ ... (≒ § 15.2. 13B7) § 21.2.20A7. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... bhikṣuṃ bhūmau astariya cīvaraṃ sīvantaṃ § 41.21.35A5. naỿtad evaṃ draṣṭavyaṃ § 43.1.38A1. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... vihārakehi bhaṇḍaṃ ujjhitāvakīrṇṇe tiṣṭhati ... usw. dṛṣṭa~ § 18.30.16B5. atha dāni bhikṣuṇā dṛṣṭo bhavati, ... (≒ § 18.34.16B7) § 19.14.18A4. atha dāni kenaci bhikṣuṇā dṛṣṭo, nâpi dāni kṣamati vaktuṃ ... § 20.1.19A5. so dāni tena dṛṣṭo § 20.9.19B5. tena dāni bhagavān dṛṣṭo § 41.5.34A1. sthaviro dāni apareṇa brāhmaṇena dṛṣṭo § 41.14.34B4. so eko dārako dṛṣṭo § 44.1.38B7. tena dāni mārggantena so cīvarakoṇako dṛṣṭo usw. dṛṣṭa-parākrama~# “die Macht gezeigt habend” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... āvarjayitvā Aṅga-Magadha-...-Avanti, jñāne dṛṣṭaparākramo ... de- (BHS[s. BHSG 215a, de-ti], Pā) “geben” ⇒ √dā, gatāgatāṃ de- § 2.3.2B3. asmākaṃ bhagavāṃ daṇḍakarmman deti (= § 3.2.3A7, § 3.3.3B1, § 5.2.6A6, § 6.2.7A6, § 6.3.7B1; ≒ § 5.3.6B1) § 4.11.5A4. “laghu kālo atikramati. detha yūyan” ti (≒ § 5.10.7A1) § 4.12.5A4. tato saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ ārabhya deti § 4.12.5A5. vaktavyaṃ “tathā dehi yathā sarvveṣāṃ samaṃ bhavati.” § 9.2.9B6. satyaṃ ... evan nāma yūyaṃ niśrayaṃ detha niśrayaṃ dadiyāṇa ...? § 9.4.9B7. ācāryeṇa tāva niśrayaṃ dentena antevāsi ubhayato vinayaṃ grāhayitavyo § 10.1.10A3. te dāni bhikṣū niśrayan deṃti § 11.14.11A4. antarīkaraṇaṃ dātavyaṃ. na deti, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 18.42.17A4. na dāni taruṇikā strī pṛcchitavyā, mā prahāsaṃ deyā § 19.42.19A3. vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā pūtimūtraṃ pibanāya dethê”tti § 32.7.27B3. <na kṣamati> andhakāre vā, uddeśaṃ dentasya <vā>, uddiśantasya vā, ... § 39.2.31A1. upāsike detha bhaktāni § 40.16.33B1. āha “āyuṣman, dehi bhūyo. ānīya dāsyāmi” tti § 40.16.33B1. kiñ câpi deti, anāpattiḥ § 41.16.34B6. tasya dārakasya pānīyaṃ dentasya ... § 41.18.35A2. imaṃ vayaṃ tava sarvvaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ demi § 42.2.36A3. āyuṣmanto, detha dvāraṃ § 42.26.37B3. atha dāni jentāko sāṃghiko bhavati, dāyakadānapatī vā denti, gaṇḍī āhanitavyā ... 298  § 50.5.43A7. dāyakadānapatī vaktavyāḥ “detha glānasya piṇḍapātaṃ.” § 50.5.43B1. yadi tāva denti, dve piṇḍapātakā gṛhṇitavyā ... vihārakaṃ āgantavyaṃ § 51.5.44A2. nêdāni vaktavyaṃ “piṇḍapātaṃ mahāpuṇye dehi.” deya-dharmma~ (BHS, SWTF) “schenkenswertes Ding, verdienstvolle Gabe”; vgl. Pā. deyya- dhamma § 1.1.1B2. deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayiṣyāma (≒ § 3.1.3A7) § 1.11.2A3. deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyaṃ § 2.1.2B1. dāyakadānapati dāni deyadharmmāṇi ādāya pratipālenti § 2.1.2B1~2. deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayiṣyāmo ... deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayi- ṣyāmaḥ ... deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitvā gatāḥ § 2.9.3A2. deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ (Hs. °ā) deyadharmmo anumodāpayi- tavyo § 3.10.4A2. deyadharmma pratiṣṭhāpayitavyo deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyo deva~ § 1.1.1B1. bhagavān Śrāvastyāṃ viharati śāstā devānāñ ca manuṣyāṇāñ ca vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā (= § 2.1.2A7, § 3.1.3A6, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4, § 7.1.8A5, § 20.1.19A5, § 20.4.19A7, § 28.1.24A1 usw.) § 62.1.49B1. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisambhāvayitvā Śrāvastyāṃ viharati śāstā devānāñ ca manuṣyāṇāñ ca ... § 4.18.6A1. divā vā yadi vā rātrau devā rakṣantu dāyakān (vs) § 19.20.18A7~B1. tato pi na kṣamati so tahiṃ cchorayituṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣintasya (für varṣante?) stūpavigrahaṃ vā saṃghavigrahaṃ vā gacchati. atha khalu tahiṃ cchorayitavyaṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣante na anyena gacchati devatā~ § 4.15.5B2. ye devatā santi abhiprasannā (vs) (= § 6.13.8A4); vgl. Mvu I 294.23. yā devatā santi abhiprasannā § 4.18.5B7. imasmi āgāre (lies: ’gāre [m.c.]) nivasantu devatāḥ (vs) § 4.18.5B7. yā tatra devatā asyā tāsāṃ dakṣiṇām ādiśe (vs) § 41.19.35A2. devatā gāthāṃ bhāṣate deva-bhāva~# “die Existenz als Gott” § 4.20.6A2. dhanadhānyapriyāṇi vā devabhāvaṃ vā manuṣyam vā (vs) deva-manuṣya~ “Götter und Menschen” § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... amṛtam analpakena devamanuṣyāṃ saṃvibhajanto, prāṇikoṭī- niyutaśatasahasrāṇi amṛtam anuprāpayanto, ... deva-loka~ § 4.17.5B5. vidhinā devalokaṃ (Hs. °lokas; ☞ § 4.17, Anm. 3) tu modantu kāmakāmino (vs) devaśikaṃ für devasikaṃ : § 53.19.45B7 devasikam (BHS, Pā) “jeden Tag” § 3.5.3B3. yo dāni bhavati māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko tena ekam ekaṃ saṃsārayitavyaṃ devasikaṃ § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... tāyo devasikaṃ cchorayitavyāyo vā, dahiya bhūyo vā thapayitavyāyo § 22.6.21A3. vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, yadi tāva prabhātaṃ bhavati, cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ upari bandhitavyā. dvāraṃ apaduriya tato praviśitavyaṃ. evaṃ devasikaṃ § 53.19.45B7. evaṃ devasikaṃ (Hs. devaśi°) dīpo jvālayitavyo devānukampita~# (deva-anu°) “(einer,) dem die Götter gnädig sind”; vgl. SWTF, s.v. devānu- kampitapoṣa § 4.18.6A1. devānukampito poṣo sadā bhadrāṇi paśyati (vs) devāntarā#, devāntareṇa# (deva + antarā, antareṇa) “zwischen zwei Schauern” ☞ § 4.8, Anm. 3 § 4.8.4B7. atha dāni varṣārātro kālo bhavati, devāntarā yeva anukālyaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 5.8.6B6. atha dāni varṣārātrakālo bhavati devāntareṇa praviśitavyaṃ § 6.8.7B6. varṣārātro bhavati, devāntareṇa anukallaṃ praviśitavyaṃ deśa~ 299  § 4.5.4B3. katamaṃ deśaṃ gṛhaṃ? § 5.5.6B2. katamasmin deśe gṛhaṃ? § 6.5.7B2. katame deśe gṛhaṃ? kutomukhaṃ? katamāye rathyāye? § 5.6.6B3. asuke deśe asukāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ itthaṃnāmo nāma upāsako deśa-kāla~ “die festgelegte Stelle und die festgelegte Zeit; der rechte Ort und die rechte Zeit” ⇒ kāle § 31.29.26B4. deśakāle āgatā bhavanti, bhaktakṛtyena ccha<nda>yitavyāḥ § 32.12.27B5. deśakāle āgato bhavati, bhaktakṛtyena ccha<nda>yitavyo § 39.1.30B6. te dāni āraṇyakā deśakāle grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ āgatā § 39.1.30B6. āyuṣmaṃ deśakālo, āhanatha gaṇḍiṃ § 39.2.30B7. te dāni grāmāntikā deśakālasmin kulāni upasaṃkramanti § 39.16.31B4. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 39.28.32A6. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, vihāraṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ āraṇyakāṃ bhikṣūṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 39.21.32A1. atha dāni nâgacchanti, deśakāle gaṇḍiṃ āhaniya cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjitavyaṃ § 50.1.43A2. ayaṃ pi deśakālaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ gṛhītvā ārāmacārikāṃ caṃcūryati deśanā~ ⇒ dharmma-deśanā~ deśaya- (Skt), deśe- (BHS; vgl. BHSG, S. 215b) “zeigen; lehren” § 8.7.9A5. vaktavyaṃ “kārehi dhūmaṃ. mā ca puno āmiṣacakṣu deśesi.” § 20.4.19A7. bhagavān mahatīye bālakinīye bhikṣuparṣāye dharmman deśayati doṣa~ ⇒ udaka-doṣa~, saṃsargga-doṣa~, hima-doṣa~ § 12.9.11B4. yo na cchandāye na doṣāye na mohāye na bhayāye, prajñaptaṃ ca jānāti § 37.5.30A4. “yasya praśaṃsā tam anupraśaṃśe teṣāṃ guṇaṃ eva vade na doṣan” ti (vs) dd / ṭṭ ⇒ ṭṭ / dd dd / ddh : § 62.2.49B6. paddamuṣṭikāṃ für baddhamu° ddh / vv ⇒ rddh / rvv dy / kṣ ⇒ kṣ / dy dy / gh ⇒ gh / dy dyutikara-śālā~# “Spielhölle”; vgl. Skt. dyūtakara (“Glücksspieler”) ☞ § 28.9, Anm. 2 § 28.9.24A5. nâpi kṣamati dyutikaraśālā-sāmantakena caṃkramituṃ § 29.9.24B5. nâpi kṣamati veśikāsāmantena dyutikaraśālā-sāmantakena niṣīdituṃ dranti ⇒ udranti für “ḍu” tti? : § 47.1.40B2, § 47.1.40B3 draviḍa~ § 18.10.16A1. nâpi dāni draviḍena viya prasrāvakaraṇaṃ gṛhṇitvā varccakumbhikā gantavyaṃ § 18.50.17B1. na kṣamati nivāsanaṃ oguhiya vāmena hastena aṅgajātaṃ gṛhṇiya draviḍena yathā udakasamīpa<ṃ> gantuṃ droṇī~ “Wanne, Kufe” § 43.1.38A2. droṇīyo [ḍa]ddhāyo (od. uddhāyo?) pariyo (od. ’pariyo?) bhaktapīṭhikā ... droṇī-śramaṇaka~# “dickes (faules) Mönchlein” ☞ § 17.5, Anm. 2 § 17.5.15A1. ahan dharmmakathiko ... ya ete droṇīśramaṇakā te pratisaṃskariṣyanti dvaya~ “zwei”# ⇒ duve, dvi~ § 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo, navakānte paṭipaṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, eko vā dvayo vā trayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti § 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā, eko vā dvayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti, navakānto vā paṭipāṭikāye vā yasya vā prāpuṇati dvā-triṃśat~ § 29.3.24B1. ṣoḍaśa <dvātriṃśad>, dvātriṃśac catuṣaṣṭi nāgā anupa<ri>vārya niṣīdanti dvā-daśa~ § 20.8.19B5. jyeṣṭhaṃ nāma ṣoḍaśāṅgulāni madhyamaṃ dvādaśāṅgulāni kanīyasam aṣṭāṅgulāni § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena dvādaśahastāṃ āyāmato 300  karttavyaṃ aṣṭahastāṃ vistāreṇa dvā-navati~ § 9.4.10A1. ekaṃ sūtraṃ na pāreti, dvānavatīto grāhayitavyo. dvānavatīto na śaknoti, triṃśatito grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca dvāra~ § 3.5.3B3. kīlakā nikhanetvā dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ § 4.5.4B3. katamāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ? kutomukhaṃ gṛhasya dvāraṃ? (= § 5.5.6B2; ≒ § 6.5. 7B2) § 4.13.5A6. nâpi kṣamati ... dvāraṃ paśyiya layyalayāye bhuṃjiyāṇa utthihiya gantuṃ § 4.13.5A7. na dāni ... utthāya āsanāto gantavyaṃ, “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya § 5.11.7A2. na kṣamati dvitīyasthavireṇa hantahantāye bhuñjiyāṇaṃ “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ § 6.11.8A2. na kṣamati labdhālabdhaṃ hantahantāye bhuñjiya “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ § 8.4.8B7. sārdhevihāriṇā ... upādhyāyasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ § 10.4.10A4. antevāsinā tāva kalyato yeva ... ācāryasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ § 8.4.8B7. yaṃ kālaṃ abhyanujñā dinnā bhavati, tato dvāraṃ sukhākaṃ apaduriyāṇa ... (≒ § 10.4.10A5) § 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd ... dvārā {hi} dvīpikāhi khajjantāṃ (≒ § 13.3.12A7) § 22.2.20B7. vihārasya dvārasmiṃ upari trayo kīlakāni ā<ko>ṭayitavyā § 22.3.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ otara{n}ti tato dvāraṃ muñcitavyaṃ § 22.4.21A2. (vihāraṃ ...) praviśiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osārayitavyā, dvāraṃ bandhitavyaṃ § 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apaduritavyaṃ cakkalī utkṣip- iyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ § 22.6.21A3. vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, yadi tāva prabhātaṃ bhavati, cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ upari bandhitavyā. dvāraṃ apaduriya tato praviśitavya § 31.1.25A7. te ... dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ § 31.1.25A7. dvāraṃ yācanti na labhanti § 31.19.26A3. nâpi dāni nevāsikehi dvāraṃ bandhitvā kākavāhāṃ bhaṃjantehi āsitavyaṃ § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako, so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā” § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, na kṣamati tehi nivāsikehi dvāraṃ ca bandhiya vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhāṃ bhañjantehi āsituṃ § 31.33.26B7. kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 31.34.27A1. āyuṣmaṃ, dvāraṃ bandhiya dvārakoṣṭhakasya upari āsāhi § 31.34.27A1. “ ... yadi keci āgantukā āgaccheṃsu, tato dvāraṃ dadesi.” ... yadi tāva keci āgantukā āgacchanti, teṣāṃ dvāraṃ dātavyaṃ § 41.13.34B3. putra dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsesi § 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako ... gṛhasya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsati § 41.18.35A2. tena dārakena dvārāṇi sarvvāṇi ghaṭitāni § 42.2.36A2. te ... jentākaṃ prajvālīya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiya svedantā āsanti § 42.2.36A2. āgatā bhikṣū dvāraṃ yācanti § 42.2.36A3. āyuṣmanto, detha dvāraṃ § 42.3.36A4. tehi āyuṣmantehi ṣaḍvarggikehi dvāraṃ āghaṭṭiya ... § 42.3.36A4. te dāni dvāraṃ āgacchanti § 42.3.36A5. taṃ velaṃ jentākasya dvāraṃ muktaṃ § 42.7.36B2. jentākaṃ karentena ... vidiśaṃ dvāraṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā karttavyā yena dvāraṃ (Hs. dvārā) <sāmantena?> § 42.19.37A4. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi dvāra-koṣṭha~ (BHS), dvāra-koṣṭhaka~ (BHS) “das Torhaus” ☞ § 12.10, Anm. 5 ⇒ ārāma-dvāra- koṣṭhaka- § 3.5.3B2. vaṃśavidalikāhi vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā sūtreṇa āvuṇitvā dvārakoṣṭhake vā prāsāde vā kalpiyakuṭikāyāṃ vā bandhitavyaṃ ... dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ 301  § 12.10.11B5. bhaktaśālā upasthānaśālā dvārakoṣṭhako varccakuṭī ... grāhayitavyā § 31.34.27A1. “āyuṣmaṃ, dvāraṃ bandhiya dvārakoṣṭhakasya upari āsāhi ...” tena upari dvārakoṣṭhasya āsitavyaṃ dvāra-mūla~# “Türschwelle” § 50.1.43A2. yadā nâgacchati, vihārakasya dvāramūle piṇḍapātakaṃ thapiya gato § 57.4.47B3. atha khalu upānahikāyo dvāramūle nikkhāsiya praviśitvā ... dvi~ “zwei”; vgl. BHSG §§ 19.2f. ⇒ duve, dvaya~ § 14.3.13A3. tahi eko vā dvau vā trayo vā yāvatakā ucchahanti § 7.4.8B2. dve aniyatāṃ grāhayitavyo. ... dve aniyatā na pāreti, ... § 14.13.13B2. tahiṃ ekameko vâ<ṃ>śaśo dātavyo dve vā dve vā trayo vā trayo vā § 18.37.17A1. ete dve bhikṣū cetiyaṃ vandanti, yaṃ paśyanti tatra ... § 18.38.17A2. ete dve bhikṣū gocaraṃ praviśanti, prakṛty’ eva tāva cchaḍḍayitavyaṃ § 18.52.17B2. atha dāni dve caṃkramante, vṛddhatarako navatarako ca, ... § 20.19.20A4. atha dāni dve janā bhavanti ... (= § 41.28.35B4) § 21.6.20B3. bhittīye dve kīlakā nikhaniya ... § 22.2.21A1. (cakkalī ...) osāriyāṇaṃ heṣṭhe dve kīlakān āpīḍiyāṇa tahiṃ bandhitavyaṃ § 24.12.22A7. atha dāni dve janā bhavaṃti, yo navako bhavati, tena mardditavyaṃ § 28.5.24A4. atha khalu dve trayo vā padāni <ni>hīnakena caṃkramitavyaṃ § 29.3.24B1. ekaṃ nāgaṃ dve nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti § 43.14.38B2. atha dāni dve janā yācaṃti § 50.5.43B1. yadi tāva denti, dve piṇḍapātakā gṛhṇitavyā ... vihārakaṃ āgantavyaṃ § 50.8.43B4. vihārasya prahāṇake dve āsanāni prajñapiya ... § 12.15.12A2. dviṇṇāṃ trayāṇāṃ janānāṃ eko vihārako uddiśitavyo § 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi (Loc. pl.) tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6) usw. dvi-guṇaṃ “zweifach, doppelt” ⇒ du-guṇaṃ, dvi-guṇika~, dvi-guṇita~ § 44.5.39A2. cīvaraṃ sāharitvā abhyantaraparikarmma dviguṇ’ ante agrato karttavyo antarapīḍito § 56.3.47A4. atha khalu vihārake vā bāhyato vā niṣīdana prasphoṭiyāṇaṃ dviguṇaṃ kṛtvā prahāṇaṃ okasitavyaṃ § 56.4.47A5. atha khalu sukhākaṃ utthitvā dviguṇīkṛtvā skandhe kṛtvā ca gantavyaṃ § 56.5.47A5. atha khalu yathā{khalu}prajñaptakaṃ dviguṇīkṛtvā tato gantavyaṃ dvi-guṇika~# “zweifach” ⇒ dvi-guṇita~, du-guṇaṃ, dvi-guṇaṃ § 41.6.34A3. saṃghāṭīṃ prasphoṭiya sāhariya abhyantareṇa dviguṇikāṃ kariya ... dvi-guṇita~# “doppelt so groß” ⇒ dvi-guṇika~, du-guṇaṃ, dvi-guṇaṃ § 11.8.11A1. nâpi kṣamati ... paṭikām vā loḍḍhakam vā pratyāstaraṇaṃ karttuṃ. atha khalu dviguṇitā nāma karttavyā viśiṣṭā mañcāto vā dvitīya~ ⇒ dvitīya~ prahāṇa~ § 1.9.2A1. tena yathâdhyeṣṭena śalākā vārayitavyā, dvitīyena pratīcchitavyā § 3.5.3B2. sarvvehi jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ khalv adya pakṣasya pratipadā dvitīyā yāvat pañcadaśī § 8.13.9B2. atha dāni dvitīyena saha prāpuṇati vihāraṃ, upādhyāyena jānitavyaṃ: yadi ... § 18.44.17A5. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena purato parāṅmukhena sthātavyaṃ § 19.36.19A1. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena pṛṣṭhato sthātavyaṃ parāṅmukhena § 19.18.18A6. atha dāni dvibhūmiko bhavati, dvitīyāyāṃ bhūmiyaṃ tathā yeva ghaṭako sthāpayitavyo Uddāna (II).20A6. dvitīyo varggaḥ § 24.6.22A4. (Schleim) ekasya upānahāye tale cchorayitavyaṃ dvitīyena marddayitavya § 29.4.24B2. dvitīyo pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo § 41.8.34A4. ekasya upānaho vaddhro pocchito dvitīyasya upānahā vaddhro pocchito § 41.24.35B1. ekasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ dvitīyasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ (= § 41.29.35B5) § 41.29.35B5. ekasya upānahāye vadhro pocchitavyo dvitīyasya vadhrako pocchitavyo 302  § 42.7.36B2. ekāye vātapānīye vīthīye dvauvikā(?) bhavati dvitīyā karttavyā § 44.1.38B7. taṃ dāni ekena ākrāntaṃ dvitīyena ākrāntaṃ tṛtīyenâkrāntaṃ § 44.6.39A4. cīvaravaṃśakāto cīvarāṇi muṃciya ekaṃ dvitīyaṃ vā tṛtīyam vā kṛṣiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ patitaṃ § 44.6.39A4. ekena ’krāntaṃ, dvitīyena ākrāntaṃ § 46.6.40B2. ekaṃ ca āvellayitavyaṃ dvitīyaṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ § 56.5.47A6. yathāsāhaṭasya niṣīdanasya dvitīyo anto (☞ § 56.5, Anm. 4) uvveliya pra- jñapayitavyaṃ, tato niṣīditavyaṃ § 57.1.47B1. te ... upānahā nikkhāsiya eka<ṃ> pi ekena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrakasmi gṛhītvā dvitīyaṃ dvitīyena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrake gṛhītvā ... prasphoṭanti § 61.5.49A5. ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyā ... tāṃ sammiñjiya dvitīyā sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyā. eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ sammiñjiya dvitīyo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo dvitīya~ prahāṇa~ # “die zweite (d.h. mittlere) Nachtwache (, in der man nicht meditiert sondern schläft)” ☞ § 18.28, Anm. 1 ⇒ paścima~ prahāṇa~, purima~ prahāṇa~ § 56.5.47A5. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ paśyati “dvitīye prahāṇe avītakaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti ... § 56.5.47A6. dvitīyasya (wohl für paścimasya; ☞ § 56.5, Anm. 3) prahāṇasya jarjare āhate otaritavyaṃ dvitīya-kālikasya# “wiederholt” ☞ § 12.14, Anm. 2 ⇒ dvitīya-kālikā~ § 26.6.23B1. atha dāni daṇḍakarmma pratidinnaṃ bhavati, pārṣṇivadhrā omuñcitavyā, dvitīyakālikasya lābhagrāha<ka>ṃ adhyeṣitvā gantavyaṃ dvitīya-kālikā~# “Wiederholung, eine zweite Runde”? ☞ § 12.14, Anm. 2 ⇒ dvitīya-kālikasya § 12.14.12A1. atha dāni bahuṃ bhavati, tato dvitīyakālikā uddiśitavyā dvitīya-sthavira~# “der Zweitälteste der Gemeinde” § 1.1.1B1. āyuṣmāṃ Nandano saṃghasthaviro. Upanandano dvitīyasthaviro (= § 2.1.2B1, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4) § 2.1.2B1. dvitīyasthaviro nâgacchati (= § 5.1.6A5, 6) § 2.1.2B2. dvitīyasthaviro pi nâgacchati § 2.2.2B2. asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmman dadāti dvitīyasthavirasya mottikā (= § 2.3. 2B3) § 2.4.2B4. tena hi evaṃ dvitīyasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ (≒ § 2.12.3A5~6) § 2.6.2B6. dvitīyasthavireṇa prakṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ siñcāpayitavyaṃ § 2.7.2B6. dvitīyasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ § 3.2.3A7. saṃghasthaviro ca dvitīyasthaviro ca odhyāyanti (= § 6.2.7A6, § 6.3.7B1) § 5.6.6B2. dvitīyasthavireṇa aparejjukāy’ eva māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo usw. dvi-puṭa~ (BHS) ⇒ -puṭa~ dvi-bhūmika~# “zweistöckig; das obere Stockwerk” ⇒ tṛ-bhūmika~ § 19.18.18A6. atha dāni dvibhūmiko (Hs. °bhūmako) bhavati, dvitīyāyāṃ bhūmiyaṃ tathā yeva ghaṭako sthāpayitavyo § 32.5.27B1. dvibhūmikam vā ukkasati, tvaritaṃ vā atikramati, na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 53.6.45A5. yadi tāva so dvibhūmiko (Hs. °ikā) saṃghārāmo bhavati, prathamaṃ tāva sopānamaggulīye dīpako jālayitavyo dvīpikā~# “Termite”; ∈ *(u)dīpikā < (Metathese) Skt. upadīkā (“Termite”); vgl. BHS. dvīpika ☞ § 13.2, Anm. 3 ⇒ dīpikā~ (2) § 13.2.12A7. adrākṣīd ... dvārā dvīpikāhi khajjantāṃ (Hs. °nto) § 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ... dvā<rā> dvīpikāhi khajjantā dvauvikā~# Bedeutung ist unklar; wohl eine Verschreibung ☞ § 42.7, Anm. 6 § 42.7.36B2. ekāye vātapānīye vīthīye dvauvikā bhavati dvitīyā karttavyā 303  DH dh / c ⇒ c / dh dh / th ⇒ th / dh dh / d ⇒ d / dh dh / p : § 42.7.36B2. vātadhānīye für vātapānīye dh / v ⇒ rdh / v, rddh / rvv, vodhi- / dhovi- § 7.1.8A6. dhipa für viya § 7.4.8B2. dhā für vā § 9.5.10A2. dhārayitavyo für vā° § 12.3.11B1. dharmmāṃ für varṣāṃ § 12.6.11B3. dhuṇitavyā für vuṇitavyā § 18.4.15B3. vovatti für dhovanti § 19.4.17B6. suvāya für sudhāya § 22.3.21A1. nivāpiyāṇa für nidhāp° § 22.5.21A2. piviyāṇaṃ für pidhi° § 26.6.23B1. pāṣṇivavrā für pārṣṇivadhrā § 29.3.24B1. anuparidhārya für °parivārya § 39.20.31B7. nivyāyantena für nidhyāy° § 39.29.32B1. saṃrāviya für °rādhiya § 41.22.35A6. pādopavānakaṃ für pādopadhānakaṃ § 47.9.41A2. suvāpāṇḍulepanā für sudhāpāṇḍulepanā § 47.9.41A2. śambāvarathyā für sambādharathyā dh / ṣ : § 21.7.20B4. śodhayituṃ für śoṣayituṃ dhana~ ⇒ prabhūta-dh°-dhānya-kośa-koṣṭhāgāra~, mahādhana~, vibhava-dhana-dhānya~ dhana-dhānya-priya~# “Geld, Getreide und was einem lieb ist” § 4.20.6A2. dhanadhānyapriyāṇi vā devabhāvaṃ vā manuṣyam vā (vs) √dham ⇒ √dhmā dhara~ ⇒ vinaya-dhara~ Dhara-pānīya~# “Wasser aus Dhara” ☞ § 40.8, Anm. 5 § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Śākete Dharapānīyaṃ dharmma~ ⇒ kṣiyā-dharmma~, deya-dharmma~, pāyattika-dharmma~, yathā-dharmmaṃ § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa ... § 1.12.2A6. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikāṃ dharmmāṃ uddiśiyānaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa- śrutikāye gāthāye ca § 1.14.2A7. na pratipadyati, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikramati (= § 5.14.7A4, § 7.8. 8B5, § 9.7.10A3, § 19.43, § 20.20 usw.) § 57.13.48A1. na pratipadyati, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikramati (= § 58.7.48A6, § 62.13.50B1) § 32.13.27B6. na pratipadyati ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati (= § 33.17.28A7, § 34.8.28B6, § 35.8.29A6, § 37.7.30A5, § 40.17.33B2, § 41.33.36A1, § 42.32.38A1, § 43.17.38B6, § 44.12.39B2, § 45.8.40A3, § 46.7.40B2, § 47.10.41A2, § 48.10.41B6, § 49.10.43A1, § 50.11.43B7, § 54.17.46B2, § 59.9.48B4 usw.) § 20.4.19A7. bhagavān mahatīye bālakinīye bhikṣuparṣāye dharmman deśayati § 38.8.30B3. saṃghena tat kāryaṃ dharmmeṇa vinayena śāstuḥ śāsanena vyupaśamayi- tavyaṃ § 39.9.31A7. cetiyaṃ vanditvā ekānte svādhyāyo karttavyo, dharmmam vā cintayantehi āsitavyaṃ § 39.29.32B1. vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi (Loc. pl.; ☞ § 39.29 [Text], Anm. 6) no parihāṇi § 42.5.36B1. idam evaṃrūpaṃ pāpakarmmam akuśalan dharmmam adhyācariṣyatha dharmma-kathika~ (BHS) “Verkünder der Lehre” § 17.5.15A1. ahan dharmmakathiko, ahaṃ vinayadharo, aham āraṇyako, piṇḍacāriko ... 304 dharmma-gaurava~ (SWTF) “Ehrfurcht vor dem Dharma”#; vgl. Pā. dhamma-gārava § 54.12.46A7. tena dharmmagauraveṇa pratyutthāya gṛhītavyaṃ § 55.6.46B7. tenâpi dāni dharmmagauraveṇa pratyutthāya ’puṇoti, niṣīditavyaṃ dharmma-cakra~ “das Rad der Lehre” § 34.6.28B6. duve cakrāṇi dharmmacakraṃ balacakraṃ ca § 36.6.29B5. āmiṣacakraṃ niśrāya dharmmacakraṃ pravarttati (vs) dharmmatāvasthaprāptena für °sthāprāptena : § 41.4.34A1 dharmmatāvasthāprāpta~# (°tā-ava°) “das Festhalten an allgemeinem Brauch erlangt habend” ☞ § 41.4, Anm. 4 § 41.4.34A1. sthitena dharmmatāvasthāprāptena (Hs. °sthapra°) smṛto saṃprajāno ... dharmma-deśanā~ (BHS, SWTF) “Darlegung der Lehre”; vgl. Pā. dhamma-desanā § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. bahukarā yūyaṃ bhāraṃ vahatha. dharmmadeśanāṃ karetha. ...” ti Dharmma-pada~ (BHS, SWTF) § 41.20.35A4. bhagavān etasmin vastuni Dharmmapadaṃ bhāṣate dharmma-vṛṣṭi~ “der Dharma-Regen” (vgl. SJW, s.v.; Mvu III 305.9, Rk[K] 104.15, 114.6 usw.) § 1.13.2A6. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇaṃ sarvvarātriṃ dharmmavṛṣṭiye vītināmiyānaṃ ... (≒ § 2.11.3A5) § 3.12.4A4. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇaṃ sarvvarātri dharmmavṛṣṭiyer vvītināmiyāna dharmma-śravaṇa~ (BHS, SWTF) “Halle zum Hören der Lehre, Predigthalle”#; vgl. Pā. dhamma- sabhā ☞ § 59.6, Anm. 1 ⇒ dharmmaśravaṇasya ā-mantraya- § 59.6.48B2. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇe sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena kṣīvituṃ § 61.6.49A6. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>aṃ vā dharmmaśravaṇe vā aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhayituṃ § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, ... dharmma- śravaṇe{na} vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 62.9.50A5. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇe vā sāmāyikāyām vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} pharapharasya vātakarmma karttuṃ dharmmaśravaṇasya ā-mantraya- # “den mit der Verwaltung der Halle zum Hören der Lehre beauftragten (Mönch) um Erlaubnis bitten”? ☞ § 18.28, Anm. 3 ⇒ prahāṇasya ā-mantraya-, ā-mantraya- § 58.5.48A5. atha dāni puno puno kāsā vīyati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 59.6.48B3. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno kṣivikā āgacchati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, ... dharmmaśravaṇe{na} vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 62.9.50A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno vātakarmma āgacchati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā āmantrayitvā gantuṃ dharmma-śravaṇika~ (BHS) “die Lehre hörend” § 58.5.48A4. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇikena upaviṣṭe<na> auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha” tti kāsituṃ dharmmāṃ für varṣāṃ : § 12.3.11B1 dharmmiṣṭha~ (1) “überaus tugendhaft” § 41.17.34B7. yadi vayam imasya dārakasya evaṃ dharmmiṣṭhasya imaṃ hiraṇya- suvarṇṇaṃ harāma, ... § 41.18.35A1. yadi vayaṃ etasya dharmmiṣṭhasya etaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ harema, ... (2) “Richter”# (?); vgl. Skt. dharmastha ☞ § 20.6, Anm. 3 § 20.6.19B2. yathā kumārakā vā dharmmiṣṭhā vā akṣadarśā vā gaṇa<kā> vā mahāmātrā vā evam ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti § 20.7.19B4. yathā kumārakā vā dharmmiṣṭhā vā gaṇakā vā rājaputrā vā ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti dharmī~ (BHS; vgl. BHSD, s.v. 3 dharma; vgl. auch Pā. dhamm kathā) “den Dharma betreffend, religiös” ⇒ dhārmī~ 305  § 1.13.2A6. dāyakadānapati dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyā ... (= § 3.12.4A4) § 4.2.4A7. nâpi dāyakadānapatiṃ dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayati samādāpayati ... dharmmīya (pāpicaka-dharmmīya) für (pāyattika-)dharmmāya? : § 40.16.33B1 dhā für vā : § 7.4.8B2 √dhā ⇒ upa-daha-, ohita-hasta~, pi-tha-, pi-the-, pi-√dhā, sam-ā-dhaya- dhātavyaṃ für dā° : § 8.12.9B2 dhātu-kauśalya~ (SWTF) “die Fähigkeit, mit den Elementen umzugehen” ☞ § 7.6, Anm. 1 § 9.5.10A2. śekhayitavyo dhātukauśalyaṃ skandhak° āyatanak° pratītyasamutpādak° dhāna~ ⇒ karṣa-dhāna~, vālikā-dhāna~ dhānā~ “Getreide” § 51.8.44A3. eṣā strī dhānāṃ (Hs. dhārāṃ) vā pīṣayati, tilam vā mudgam vā kalāyām vā daleti dhānya~ “Getreide” ⇒ dhana-dhānya-priya~, prabhūta-dhana-dhānya-kośa-koṣṭhāgāra~, vibhava- dhana-dhānya~ § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohana{n}ti, yadi tāva kaṇḍikāpūrakam ukkaḍḍhiya ovvarakaṃ praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā.” ti dhāra- “tragen” § 34.4.28B4. nâpi kṣamati cchatreṇa dhāryantena upānahāhi vā obaddhāhi kṣatriya- parṣāyam upasaṃkramituṃ (≒ § 35.4.29A4, § 36.4.29B3) dhāraṇa~ ⇒ saṃghāṭī-pātra-cīvara-dhāraṇa~ dhārayitavyo für vārayitavyo : § 9.5.10A2 dhārāṃ für dhānāṃ : § 51.8.44A3 dhārikā~ ⇒ pānīya-dhārikā~ dhāriṇī~ ⇒ kaṇṭha-vāriṇī~ oder kaṇṭha-dhāriṇī~ dhārmī~ (BHS; vgl. BHSD, s.v. 3 dharma; vgl. auch Pā. dhamm kathā) “den Dharma betreffend, religiös” ⇒ dharmī~ § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati ... dhārmmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyāḥ § 2.9.3A2. dhārmyā kathayā saṃdarśiya samādāpiya samuttejiya sampraharṣayitvā udyojayitavyā (= § 3.10.4A2) § 2.11.3A5. dāyakadānapati dhārmmyā kathayā (Hs. dhārmmyakathayā) sandarśiya samā- dāpiya samuttejiya saṃpraharṣayitvā udyojayitavyā dhārmmyakathayā für dhārmyā kathayā : § 2.11.3A5 1 √dhāv ⇒ ud-dhāpaya-, nid-dhāva-, ni-dhāva-, nir-ddhāva-, nir-ddhāpa- 2 √dhāv ⇒ dhota~, dhopaya-, dhova-, dhovaya-, dhovita-pāda~, su-dhota~ dhik § 41.20.35A4. dhig brāhmaṇasya hantāraṃ taṃ pi dhik yo ’sya muñcati (vs) dhipa für viya : § 7.1.8A6 √dhu ⇒ dhuna- dhuṇitavyā für vuṇitavyā : § 12.6.11B3 dhuna- (BHS, Pā) “schütteln; aufwirbeln” ⇒ *ud-dhāpaya- § 23.4.4.21B1. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ caṃkrama<ṃ> caṃkramituṃ pantholiṃ dhunantena dhūpa~ “der beim Verbrennen von Räucherwerk aufsteigende Rauch” ☞ § 32.6, Anm. 6 ⇒ dhūma~ § 32.6.27B2. dhūpam vā pibantasya, akṣiṇī vā añjantasya, ... dhūpe- (Pā) “ausräuchern”; vgl. DP, s.v. dhūpeti2; Skt. dhūmāyati § 13.17.12B7. vihāro ... dhūpetavyo kuṣṭhena bhurjena vā saktuhi vā dhūma~ “Rauch” ☞ § 8.7, Anm. 7 zu dhūmaṃ √kṛ; § 32.6, Anm. 6 ⇒ dhūpa~ § 8.7.9A5. vaktavyaṃ “kārehi dhūmaṃ. mā ca puno āmiṣacakṣu deśesi.” § 52.6.44B6. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, karohi dhūmaṃ. mā ca punaḥ āmiṣacakṣuḥ <deśesi>.” § 31.24.26A7. (nevāsikā ...) saṃpraharṣayitavyā vaktavyā “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyanti” § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. ... saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyantî”ti § 42.3.36A4. te ... uṣṇena ca dhūmena ca saṃtāpitāḥ udakaṃ na labhanti § 42.3.36A5. dhūmena ca uṣṇena ca marāma 306  § 42.3.36A5. dhūmena ca uṣṇena ca suṣṭhu saṃtāpitāḥ § 42.4.36A7. ete dāni bhikṣū uṣṇena ca dhūmena ca santāpitā nirddhāvitā bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārggayanti, na labhanti dhūl~ “Staub” § 41.31.35B7. dhūlī parivarjantena gantavyaṃ § 47.1.40B3. naỿva dhūliṃ pariharanti § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ dhūlīye pūritaṃ bhavati prasphoṭayitavyaṃ § 48.1.41A3. mañcā ... dhūlīya karddamena makṣitaparimakṣitā § 48.2.41A5. mañcañ ... dhūlīye kardamehi vināśitak<ā> § 48.4.41A7. yadi tāva āsanaṃ bhavati dhūlīye vā mrakṣitaṃ karddamena vā vināśitakaṃ omaïlamaïlaṃ vā prajñaptakaṃ bhavati, ... § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka ... dhūlīye vā otaritaṃ bhavati √dhṛ ⇒ dhāra- dhota~ (Pā) “gewaschen”; vgl. Skt. dhauta ⇒ a-dhotaka~, su-dhota~ § 39.21.32A1. atha dāni nâgacchanti, ... grāmāntikā<nāṃ> thālīy’ otāriya dhotôpaliptāṃ (< dhotāṃ upa°; Hs. thātôyaliptāṃ; ☞ § 39.21[Text], Anm. 1) kariya thapitavyāḥ § 41.9.34A5. kalācīya udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhotā dhopaya-# “waschen”; vgl. PTSD, s.v. dhopati; PTC, s.v. dhopeti, DP, s.v. dhovati; BHSD, s.v. dhopati; CDIAL 6886. *dhauvati; Oguibénine 1996: 66; Yuyama 2003: 17; Skt. dhāvayati ⇒ dhovaya-, dhove-, dhova- § 8.6.9A3. pādodakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādā dhopayitavyā; vgl. § 10.5.10A5. pādā dhovayitavyā § 13.17.12B7. na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati ... mukham vā dhopituṃ (oder lies: dho<pa>yituṃ; Hs. dhoyituṃ) dhoyituṃ für dhopituṃ oder dho<pa>yituṃ : § 13.17.12B7 dhova- (BHS[Mvu, Śikṣ(Bhikṣu-prakīrṇaka der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins), Mmk], Pā) “waschen”; vgl. Skt. dhāvati, dhāvayati ⇒ dhovaya-, dhove-, su-dhovitvā, dhopaya- § 1.8.1B7. vibhavo bhavati, śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyāyo puṣpehi okiritavyāyo (= § 2.6.2B6) § 3.7.3B5. vibhavo bhavati śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyā puṣpehi okiritavyā § 8.5.9A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ dhoviya upanāmayitavyaṃ. mukhodakam āsiñcitavyaṃ § 11.9.11A2. kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ (Hs. vodhi°), kālena kālaṃ sivitavyaṃ § 12.7.11B4. śayyāsanaṃ bhavati omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhoviya sīvitavyaṃ § 12.18.12A5. kālena kālaṃ śayyāsanaṃ sīvitavyaṃ dhovitavyaṃ (Hs. vodhi°) § 13.12.12B5. śayyāsanaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ sīvayitavyaṃ rañjayitavyaṃ § 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo vā bisio vā caturasrakā vā omayilomayilā bhavanti pāṭitavipāṭitā, dhovitvā (Hs. °tva) sivitavyā, pratyaggalāni dātavyāni § 16.6.14B1. (śeyyāsanaṃ ...) dhoviṣyanti rañjiṣyanti sīviṣyanti § 16.8.14B3. śeyyāsanaṃ dhovitavyaṃ sivitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ § 17.10.15A5. anyehi kṣāraṃ ānayitavyaṃ, anyehi dhovayitavyaṃ (Hs. vodhayi°) § 18.8.15B7. tena tāni kuṇḍakāni ... kālena kālaṃ dhovayitavyā<ni> § 19.5.17B6. (Das Pissoir) dhoviya tailena mrakṣayitavyā § 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya praśvāsabhaṇḍakaṃ dhoviya (Hs. vodhiya) pratigupte pradeśe ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.25.18B3. mallakaṃ bhavati, ekānte ujjhitvā dhovitvā ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ § 18.4.15B3. ullā varccagharaṃ dhovanti (< dhovantī; p. präs, Nom. sg. fem.; Hs. vovatti) § 18.35.16B7. kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, udakena dhovitavyā (Hs. °vyaṃ) § 19.33.18B6. atha dāni kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, dhovitavyā § 20.11.19B6. tato bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya kuccakaṃ śastrakena cchinditavyaṃ, dhoviyāṇaṃ thapayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyo) § 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinaṃ astariyāṇaṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ... § 23.4.3.21B1. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ pādāṃ dhovituṃ, hastāṃ dhovituṃ, mukhaṃ dhovituṃ § 23.6.4.21B3. nâpi tahiṃ kṣamati pādāṃ dhovituṃ, hastām vā nirmmādayituṃ § 23.6.4.21B4. pādām vā dhovati, mukham vā dhovati, hastam vā nirmmādayati 307 § 25.17.23A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... pādaṃ vā mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ § 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā ... mukhaṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... § 26.9.23B2. naỿva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, na mukhaṃ dhovati, na hastā nirmmādayati, ... § 31.14.26A1. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśantehi puṣkiriṇīyaṃ vā taḍāge vā oghe vā pādāṃ dhovitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.21.26A5. yadi tāva ācikṣanti pādadhovanikāyāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ... tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ § 31.25.26A7. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ § 32.6.27B1. cīvaraṃ dhovantasya, rajanikā pacantasya, cīvarāṇi sīvantasya raṃjentasya ... § 32.6.27B2. pādāṃ dhovantasya, hastā nirmmādantasya, cetiyaṃ vandantasya, ... § 39.8.31A5. āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī otāriyāṇaṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ (Hs. vodhiyāṇaṃ) sthāne sthapayitavyā § 39.16.31B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ... āgacchiya pādāṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo § 40.1.32B2. pātrapariśrāvaṇāni dhovanti § 40.9.33A2. vaidyo āha “bhante, gotrasthena pānīyena akṣiṇī dhovāhi” tti § 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni pāridhovanikāto mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ § 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni pāridhovanikāto ... pātrapariśrāvaṇaṃ vā dhovituṃ § 40.16.33B1. na dāni kṣamati pāridhovaniyāto snāpituṃ (lies: snāyituṃ?) vā cīvaram vā dhovituṃ rañjanaṃ vā kaḍhituṃ § 40.16.33B2. tato yeva hastāṃ dhovati § 41.1.33B3. pādadhovanikāyāṃ jhallajjhallāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ... § 41.1.33B3. mātrāye yūyam āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha § 41.2.33B5. jjhallajjhallāye pādāṃ dhoviya ... § 41.2.33B6. mātrāye āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha § 41.3.33B6. evaṃ pādā dhovitavyā ( = § 41.3.33B7, § 41.33.36A1) § 41.3.33B7. evaṃ bhikṣavo pādāṃ dhovatha § 41.6.34A3. pādāṃ dhovati § 41.7.34A4. vāmena hastena pādāṃ dhovati § 41.7.34A4. sthavireṇa dāni vāmā jaṃghā dhovitā, dakṣiṇā jaṃghā dhovitā, vāmo pādo dhovito, dakṣiṇo pādo dhovito § 41.9.34A5. dakṣiṇena hastena upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhoviya niṣpīḍitvā ātape śoṣayetaṃ § 41.9.34A5. hastāṃ dhoviya dakānakaṃ dhoviya ... § 41.22.35A6. colakaṃ dhovitvā niṣpīḍitvā ... § 41.23.35A7. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva pādāṃ dhovantena ... āsiṃcitavyaṃ § 41.23.35A7. vāmena hastena pādā{ṃ} dhovitavyā § 41.23.35A7. vāmā tāva jaṃghā dhovitavyā (= § 41.27.35B4) § 41.23.35A7. dakṣiṇā tāva jaṃghā dhovitavyā (= § 41.28.35B5) § 41.24.35B1. upānahāpocchanakaṃ (Hs. °āyocch°) dhovitavyaṃ § 41.24.35B1. kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhovitavyā § 41.25.35B2. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā jhallajhallāye pādāṃ dhovituṃ § 41.25.35B2. āgamitavyaṃ yāva tehi dhovitā pādā tti § 41.26.35B3. tena pādā dhovitā bhava<ṃ>ti § 41.27.35B3. vāmena hastena pādā dhovitavyā § 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇā (Hs. dakṣiṇena) jaṃghā dhovitavyā § 41.27.35B4. vāmo pādo dhovitavyo (= § 41.28.35B5) § 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇo pādo dhovitavyo (= § 41.28.35B5) § 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇena hastena pādā dhovitavyā § 41.28.35B5. ekena dhovitavyaṃ § 41.28.35B5. vāmā jaṃghā dhovitavyā § 41.29.35B6. upānahāpocchano dhoviya pīḍiya tatraỿva sthapitavyaṃ § 41.31.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi utthiya gantavyaṃ 308  § 41.32.35B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pādehi dhovitehi dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramituṃ § 41.32.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi caṃkrama{n}ti bhūyo dhovitavyā § 41.32.36A1. atha dāni hemantakālo bhavati, bhikṣuḥ paśyati “ko bhūyo dhoviṣyatî?”ti § 42.11.36B5. jentāke pīṭhikā vā śuktikāyo vā dhovitavyā § 42.31.37B7. jentākapīṭhikāni (lies: °pīṭhakāni?) dhoviya praveśayitavyāni § 42.31.37B7. śuktiyo dhoviya praveśayitavyāyo § 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā § 44.6.39A5. cīvarakaṃ dhoviya vihārakoṇake <tha>payitavyo § 44.11.39B1. kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ raṃjitavyaṃ sīvitavyaṃ yathā cchavi § 47.2.40B5. cīvarakāni dhovaṃtā sīvantā rañjentā ... (= § 48.2.41A6) § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ ... karddamena vā vināśitaṃ bhavati dhovitavyaṃ § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka karddamena vā vināśitaṃ bhavati, dhovitavyaṃ § 51.12.44A6. eṣā strī kāṃsabhājanaṃ mārjati, bhikṣu paśyiyāṇaṃ hastāṃ dhovati, ... § 56.7.47A7. niṣīdanaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 57.11.47B7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā pādāṃ dhovantena upānahāyo “caḍacaḍa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.11.48A1. nadīkūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā pādāṃ dhoviya prasphoṭeti usw. dhovana~ (BHS, Pā) “das Waschen” ⇒ pāda-dhovana~, dhovanikā~ § 41.2.33B5. bhikṣū āgacchanti pādadhovanikāye pādāṃ dhovanāye dhovanikā~# “das Waschen”; vgl. Skt. dhāvanikā ⇒ pāda-dhovanikā~, pāridhovanikā~, dhovana~ § 40.9.33A2. eṣo dāni dhovanikāṃ vā rajanikām vā kareti, tasya udakena kāryam bhavati, ... § 43.14.38B2. eṣo bhikṣu dhovanikā vā <rajanikā vā> karttukāmo bhavati, ... § 43.15.38B3. tena dhovanikā vā rajanikā vā kariya na kṣamati tathā yyeva ... dayituṃ dhovanīya~ ⇒ pāda-dhovanīya~ dhovaya-#, dhove-# “waschen” ⇒ dhova-, dhopaya- § 8.9.9A6. cīvarāṇi dhovetavyāni sīvitavyāni raṃjitavyāni § 8.12.9B1. pādā dhovayitavyā, pādā mrakṣetavyā § 10.5.10A5. pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādā dhovayitavyā, pādā mrakṣayitavyā § 13.10.12B3. śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ bhavati pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhovayitavyaṃ rañjetavyaṃ § 19.15.18A5. atha dāni kṛta{ṃ}karmmā pṛthivī bhavati, dhovayitavyā; vgl. § 18.35.16B7. kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, udakena dhovitavyā § 21.5.20B2. tenâpi pādāṃ dhovayitvā kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiya ... § 21.5.20B3. bhikṣuḥ pādā<ṃ> na{ṃ} dhovayitukāmo bhavati ... § 41.23.35A7. vāmo pādo dhovayitavyo dakṣiṇo pādo dhovayitavyo § 47.1.40B3. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarakāṇi dhoventā siventā raṃjentā talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ; vgl. § 47.2.40B5, § 48.2.41A6. cīvarakāni dhovantā ... § 48.1.41A4. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarāṇi dhoventā sīventā rañjentā talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ dhovita-pāda~# “gewaschener Fuß” § 41.3.33B6. evaṃ dhovitapādehi (Loc. pl. masc.) pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 41.3.33B7, § 41.33.36A1) dhoveti ⇒ dhovayati √dhmā ⇒ adhvāta~, adhvāpaya-, adhvāvaya- dhy / vy ⇒ dh / v √dhyā ⇒ o-dhyāya-, o-jjhāya-, ni-dhyāya- dhyānāntara-gata~# (dhyāna-anta°) “sich in die Meditation vertiefend, sich in der Meditation befindend”; vgl. SWTF. dhyānāntara § 18.25.16B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati varcakuṭīyaṃ upaviṣṭena dhyānāntaragatena vā middhāntaragatena vā uddeśaṃ vā svādhyāyam vā manasikarentena āsituṃ § 19.11.18A3. nâpi dāni tahiṃ dhyānāntar<agat>eṇa vā svādhyāyam vā karentena aśubhasamāpattim vā samāpannena āsitavyaṃ 309 dhyānāntareṇa für dhyānāntar<agat>eṇa : § 19.11.18A3 ☞ § 19.11, Anm. 1 dhr / vr ⇒ dh / v dhruvam § 42.5.36B1. metraṃ kāyakarmma ... sabrahmacāriṣu dhruvaṃ pratyupasthāpayitavyaṃ āvi caỿva raho ca dhv / th ⇒ th / dhv dhv / rth : § 31.35.27A2. sādhvo für sārtho N n/k ⇒ k/n n/ṇ ⇒ ṇ/n n/t ⇒ t/n n / nn : § 41.6.34A3. upānahā-yocchanno für u°-pocchano n/r: § 18.40.17A3. kanakena vermutlich für karakena § 51.8.44A3. dhārāṃ für dhānāṃ n/l: § 44.8.39A6. ukkanikā für ukkalikā? § 23.3.21A5. māṣa-kāna-vallā für °-kāla-° n/v: § 4.8.4B7. yena für yeva? § 53.19.45B7. nā für vā n / sn : § 42.26.37B4. nāyaṃtu für <s>nāyaṃtu na (1) ⇒ na câpi, na dāni, nâpi, nâpi dāni, naỿva, no (1) § 1.7.1B5. yadi dāni na gato saṃgho bhavati saṃghasthavireṇa yahiṃ bhaviṣyati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ ... § 18.40.17A3. atha khalu pṛcchitavyaṃ “bhagini, kiṃ riktā vā varccakuṭī nê”ti § 19.33.18B6. atha dāni vibhavo na bhavati, antamasato ... gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 40.17.33B2. na pratipadyati (= § 41.33.36A1, § 42.32.38A1, § 43.17.38B6, § 44.12. 39B2, § 47.10.41A2) § 41.1.33B3. naỿva karddamaṃ pariharanti na pāṃsu § 41.2.33B5. naỿva pāṃsu pariharatha na karddamaṃ § 41.13.34B2. tasya gṛha<ṃ> guptañ ca surakṣitañ ca na pārenti otāraṃ vindanāya § 41.14.34B4. ahaṃ pi na jānāmi § 41.19.35A3. ācāraṃ śikṣitaṃ śreyo anācāraṃ na śikṣitaṃ (vs) § 41.20.35A4. na brāhmaṇasya prahareya (vs) § 41.20.35A4. nâsya muṃceya brāhmaṇo (vs) § 41.24.35B1. na kṣamati upānahāhi ārdrapādena praveśayituṃ § 41.26.35B3. atha dāni koci vṛddhatarako na bhavati § 41.30.35B6. nâpi kṣamati ... upaviśituṃ § 42.2.36A3. āgameṃtu āyuṣmanto, na tāva jentāko tatto bhavati § 42.3.36A6. udakaṃ mārgganti, na labhanti § 42.4.36A7. udakaṃ mārggayanti na labhanti § 42.5.36A7. nâhaṃ ... vadāmi? § 42.18.37A3. na snāne navapratipannena vā parikarmma karttavyaṃ § 42.22.37A7. na kṣamati ... karttuṃ § 42.23.37B1. na kṣamati ... sthapetuṃ § 42.25.37B3. nâhaṃ snāpayiṣyāmi § 43.7.38A6. yathā na khajjeya § 43.9.38A7. yathā na <khā>dyeṃsu § 43.15.38B3. tena ... na kṣamati ... dayituṃ § 44.6.39A4. so mārgganto {na} paśyati tasya cīvarakasya koṇakaṃ § 44.8.39A7. nêdāni (wohl für | [Daṇḍa] na dāni) (= § 51.5.44A2) § 45.4.39B5. na kṣamati ... nikṣipituṃ § 47.1.40B3. naỿva dhūliṃ pariharanti, na kardamaṃ pariharanti 310  § 47.1.40B4. ime pi na jānanti ... (= § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A4) § 47.5.40B7. atha dāni udakaṃ na bhavati, ... § 48.2.41A6. ime na jānanti ... § 48.4.41A7. na kṣamati tahiṃ upaviśituṃ § 48.6.41B1. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato ... § 48.7.41B2. na kṣamati ... apāśrayituṃ § 48.7.41B3. na vā bhikṣusya viśrambhakulaṃ bhavati, ... § 51.7.44A3. jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati” (= § 51.10.44A5) § 51.8.44A4. jānitavyaṃ “eṣā na dāsyati” (= § 51.11.44A5) § 51.9.44A4. jānitavyaṃ “na dāhiti eṣā” et passim na (2) ⇒ naṃ na câpi § 1.10.2A2. śalākāṃ pi dāni gṛhṇantena na câpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā śalākāṃ gṛhṇituṃ na dāni ⇒ nâpi dāni § 4.8.4B7. na dāni tena “āmantritaṃ mayā” ti Bhadrapālakṛtyehi haṇṭhitavyaṃ § 11.6.10B6. na dāni vihāro adhyupekṣitavyo oddirṇṇako praluggako acaukṣo vā ... § 13.17.12B7. vihāro usvedako bhavati, na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati hastaśaucaṃ vā karttuṃ ... § 18.42.17A4. na dāni taruṇikā strī pṛcchitavyā, mā prahāsaṃ deyā § 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo, yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso gaccheyā § 39.5.31A3. na dāni kṣamati (= § 42.15.36B7, § 42.19.37A3) § 40.5.32B6. (Ein Wassergefäß) na dāni kukkuṭapāśakena bandhitvā sthāpetavyaṃ § 40.11.33A4. na dāni ... prakṣipitavyā ... ālihitum ... § 40.16.33A7. na dāni kṣamati (= § 40.16.33B1) § 42.9.36B4. na dāni kṣamati sūcikābandhimaṃ karttuṃ § 42.16.37A1. yadi dāni ..., na dāni bāhirato vikrośitavyaṃ § 42.18.37A2. parikramma karentehi na dāni svedena vā malena vā usphoṣetavyo upāntake § 42.18.37A3. parikarmma karentena na dāni apūrvvacarimaṃ ubhaya bāhā prasāretavyā § 42.20.37A4. na dāni kṣamati tailena śoṣayituṃ § 43.10.38A7. etā bhaiṣajyapiṣaṇikā śilā na dāni kārya kṛtvā yathā yeva pratiliptikā sthapetavyā § 43.15.38B3. cīvararaj<j>ūṃ na dāni ... ujjhitvā gantavyaṃ § 43.16.38B5. etā bhavanti vāsīyo vā kuddālakā vā niśreṇiyo vā, na dāni tathā yeva mṛttikāpraliptikā sthapetavyā § 43.16.38B5. bhaṇḍakaṃ ... na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ § 44.5.39A3. na dāni ... cīvaraṃ veḍhayitavyaṃ § 44.9.39A7. na dāni kṣamati vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ ... § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ ... na dāni ... udranti acchitavyaṃ § 49.9.42B7. na dāni paścācchramaṇena vaktavyaṃ § 54.13.46A7. na dāni tena otāraprekṣiṇā vāretavyā § 59.8.48B4. yadi tāva koci kṣīvati, na dāni vaktavyaṃ “jīva” ti § 62.5.50A2. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇaśālāyām upaviṣṭasya vātakarmma āgacchati, na dāni osaritvā indriyāṇi karttavyaṃ § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya sārthena sārddhaṃ gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, na dāni sārthasya agrato sthitvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ usw. naṃ (BHS[Mvu; BHSG § 21.48]) < enaṃ (Acc. sg. masc. von enad~); vgl. Thommen
1903:
40;
DP, s.v. na6 § 4.15.5B1. śunakhā śṛgālā ca naṃ laṃghayantu (vs); vgl. § 6.13.8A3. c’ enaṃ la° (vs) § 4.15.5B2. tā naṃ rakṣaṃtu tā ca naṃ pālayantu (vs) § 6.13.8A4. tā naṃ rakṣantu (vs) 311  § 4.15.5B2. yathā naṃ icchati mātā yathā naṃ icchati pitā (vs) § 16.5.14B1. “yadi āgantukānāṃ mātu ātyāyikaṃ bhaviṣyati, tato naṃ pratisaṃs- kariṣyantî”ti § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ, mā naṃ ḍhossā vā viḍā vā vātaputrā vā bhuṃjeṃsu nakula-mūṣika~# “Mungos und Mäuse” ⇒ mūṣaka~ § 43.1.38A2. sthālīyo piṭharikā ... nakulamūṣikehi (Hs. nakūla-) ālupyamānā ... nakūla- für nakula- : § 43.1.38A2 nakka~#, nakkā~# “Nase”; vgl. Skt. nakr (“Nase”), Pkt. ṇakka; CDIAL 6909. *nakka- ⇒ nāsā~, nāsikya~ § 19.42.19A4. tasya glānasya sumanāphullaṃ nakke dadiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “imaṃ ...” § 59.1.48A6. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyāḥ tulikāye nakkaṃ vijjhanti, sūtrakaṃ pi vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ nakke prakṣipanti § 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... tulikāya vā nakkaṃ vijjhituṃ sūtraṃ vaṭṭiya nakkasmin prakṣipituṃ § 59.4.48A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya anābhogena kṣīvikā āgacchati vinodayitavyaṃ, nirālaṃ parimarditavyaṃ, nakkā vā parimarditavyā nakkā~ ⇒ nakka~ nagara~ § 31.6.25B5. yadi dāni grāmasya nagarasya vā madhyena gantavyaṃ bhavati, ... § 41.12.34B1. bhūtapūrvvam bhikṣavo atītam adhvānaṃ eta<r>hiṃ ca nagaraṃ Vārāṇasī Kāśijanapado nagara-kulopaka~ (kula-upa°)# “(bestimmte) Familien in der Stadt (um Almosen) aufsuchend; in (bestimmten) Familien in der Stadt verkehrend(er Mönch)”; vgl. BHS. kulopaka (BHSD, s.v. upaka); Pā. kulūpaka § 49.1.42A3. snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo ... yathâpi dāni nagarakulopakena pityakena sārddhaṃ praviṣṭasya ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāvisya nagara-cetiya~ “Cetiya in der Stadt” ☞ § 31.6, Anm. 1 § 31.6.25B5. na dāni kṣamati nagaracetiyāni abhidakṣiṇaṃ karentehi vā gantuṃ apavāmaṃ vā karentehi nagara-dvāra~ § 49.7.42B6. nagaradvāre paśyati nagaradvārato nivarttitavyaṃ nagarī~ § 41.4.33B7. Vaiśālīn nagarīṃ piṇḍāya praviṣṭo § 41.4.34A1. Veśālīṃ nagarīṃ piṇḍāya carati nagalānāṃ für naṃga° : § 21.3.20B1 nagna~ § 4.17.5B4. nagnā nadī anodikā nagnaṃ rāṣṭraṃ arājakaṃ (vs) § 32.6.27B2. varccakuṭīṃ gacchantasya, nagnasya vā ekanivasanakasya (Hs. °kena) vā § 42.22.37A7. na kṣamati abhyavakāśe nagnasya nagnena parikarmma karttuṃ nagna-prāvṛta~# “nackt, ohne Bekleidung” § 45.1.39B3. te ... nagnaprāvṛtā grāmapraveśikāni nivasanāni mārgganti ... nagnaprāvṛtā vihāracaraṇakāni nivāsanāni mārgganti § 45.2.39B4. nagnaprāvṛtāḥ grāmapraveśanikāni <ni>vasanāni mārggatha § 45.2.39B5. nagnaprāvṛtāḥ vihāracara<ṇa>kāni ni{r}vāsanāni mārggatha § 45.7.40A2. nâpi kṣamati nivāsanaṃ nikṣipitvā nagnaprāvṛtena rātrīprāvaraṇa<ṃ> nivāsanaṃ mārggituṃ naṅgala~# eine Art Rohr? ☞ § 17.11, Anm. 3 § 17.11.15A6. bisī sīvayitavyā, caturasrā vāpayitavyā, naṃgalāni utthāpayitavyāni § 18.5.15B4. kaṇṭhavāriṇī karttavyā ... vaṃśehi vā nalena vā naṃgalehi vā phalakair vvā § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ ... vaṃśānāṃ vā nalānām vā na<ṃ>galānāṃ vā kāṇḍānām vā carukānām vā rohiṣāṇāṃ vā sūtrikāya vā rejjukāya vā ghaṇa<ṃ> vuṇitavyaṃ § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī ... kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā naḍānām vā naṅgalānām vā kaṇḍānām vā rejjukāye vā sūtrakāye (für sūtrikāye?) vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā 312  § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā vaṃśasya vā nalasya vā naṃgalasya vā rohiṣasya vā daśa-aṣṭahastāṃ dīrghatvena naḍa~ “Schilfrohr” ⇒ nala~ nattaka~ “Lappen, Lumpen”; vgl. Skt. naktaka (“dass.”), laktaka; Pā. nantaka; Poṣ(Hu) 150 ☞ § 41.8, Anm. 2; § 55.2, Anm. 2 ⇒ upānahā-pocchana-nattaka~ § 55.2.46B3. (geṇḍuka~ ...) bāhyena paṭṭena nattakena veṣṭayitvā sūtrakena veṣṭayitavyo √nad ⇒ un-nada- nadī~ § 4.17.5B4. nagnā nadī anodikā nagnaṃ rāṣṭraṃ arājakaṃ (vs) § 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ nadī-kūla~ “Flußufer” § 52.9.44B7. nadīkūle (Hs. °kule) vā udupānakūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā āhāraṃ kṛtvā pātraṃ nirmmādayitvā āgacchati, anāpattiḥ § 57.11.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ adhvānam āgato bhavati, upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, nadīkūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā pādāṃ dhoviya prasphoṭeti, anāpattiḥ Nandana~ ⇒ NandanOpanandanā~ § 1.1.1B1. āyuṣmāṃ Nandano saṃghasthaviro. Upanandano dvitīyasthaviro (= § 2.1.2A7, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4) § 1.3.1B3. bhagavān āha: “śabdāpayatha Nandanaṃ” § 49.1.41B6. āyuṣmato Nandanasya Upanandano nāma bhrātā § 49.2.42A4. tvaṃ Nandanasya sārddhevihāriṃ jalpasi Nandanonandanopanandanā für NandanOpanandanā : § 41.2.33B6 NandanOpanandanā~# (°dana-Upa°) “Nandana und Upanandana” ⇒ Nandana~ § 7.1.8A5. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā ṣaḍvarggikāś ca § 9.1.9B4. te dāni āyuṣmanto Nand<an>Opanandano ṣaḍvarggikā ca § 20.6.19B2, § 20.7.19B3, § 40.1.32B2, § 40.1.32B2, § 40.2.32B3, § 40.2.32B3(Hs. NandOpanandanā), § 41.1.33B2, § 41.2.33B4, § 41.2.33B5, § 41.2.33B6(Hs. NandanonandanOpanandanā), § 47.1.40B2, § 47.2.40B4, § 48.1.41A3, § 48.2.41A4, 5 usw. NandOpanandanā~ (Nanda-Upa°) “Nanda und Upanandana” (Nāga-Könige) ☞ § 31.16, Anm. 4 § 31.16.26A2. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullapitavyaṃ āgantukehi “... ghuṇaviddhā tave, NandOpanandanā yūyaṃ nāgarājāno, ...” NandOpanandanā für NandanOpanandanā : § 9.1.9B4, § 40.2.32B3 √nam ⇒ abhy-un-nāme-, upa-nāmaya-, upa-nāme-, o-nāme-, vīti-nāmaya- namato für vāmato : § 42.9.36B3 naya- ⇒ nāpaya-, apa-√nī, ā-√nī, un-nīya-, upa-ne-, pra-ṇetavya~, vi-naya-, sam-ud-ā-naya- § 8.10.9A6. divāvihāraṃ gacchantasya pīṭhikā nayitavyā niṣīdanaṃ nayitavyaṃ, pustako nayitavyo, kuṇḍikā nayitavyā nara~ § 41.19.35A3. tasmān nareṇa satataṃ ācāraguṇena bhavitavyaṃ (vs) naraka~ ⇒ anavarāgra-jāti-jarā-maraṇa-saṃsāra-kāntāra-naraka-vidurgga~ narttaka~ “Schilfrohr” § 18.53.17B3. (parakerako uccāro) ... udakena accāviya (für *alloḍiya?) ghanena narttakena parisrāviya, ... nala~ (Skt), naḍa~ (Skt) “Schilfrohr” § 18.5.15B4. kaṇṭhavāriṇī karttavyā ... vaṃśehi vā nalena vā naṃgalehi vā phalakair vvā § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ ... vaṃśānāṃ vā nalānām vā na<ṃ>galānāṃ vā kāṇḍānām vā carukānām vā rohiṣāṇāṃ vā sūtrikāya vā rejjukāya vā ghaṇa<ṃ> vuṇitavyaṃ § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī ... kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā naḍānām vā naṅgalānām vā kaṇḍānām vā rejjukāye vā sūtrakāye (für sūtrikāye?) vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā vaṃśasya vā nalasya vā naṃgalasya vā rohiṣasya vā daśa-aṣṭahastāṃ dīrghatvena nala-vidalikā~# “Schilfrohrbrettchen”; vgl. Skt. veṇu-vidala (“gespaltenes Bambusrohr”) ⇒ vaṃśa- 313  vidalikā~ § 3.5.3B2. avaśyaṃ vaṃśavidalikāhi vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā sūtreṇa āvuṇitvā ... dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ § 18.16.16A4. tena hi na kṣamati vaṃśaśalākāhi kaṇḍavidalikena vā nala<vidalikāya> kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā asthikhaṇḍena vā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchituṃ nava~ § 4.18.5B6. praśastam āryehi navaṃ niveśanaṃ (vs) § 16.7.14B2. ye mañcā vā pīṭhā vā navā ca sārā ca sudhotā ca te āgantukānāṃ sthāpayitavyā navaka~ “jung; (an Ordinationsalter) jung” ⇒ navaka-tara~, navaka-taraka~, navakānta~, nava- taraka~, saṃgha-navaka~ § 1.2.1B2. navakā bhikṣū pṛcchanti: “āyuṣmānn, āgato saṃghasthaviro?” (≒ § 4.2.4A7) § 1.2.1B3. te pi navakā bhikṣū āhaṃsu ... § 1.3.1B3. navakā bhikṣū ojjhāyanti (≒ § 4.3.4B1) § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ yadā navakāḥ santarpitā bhavanti ... § 5.11.7A2. yaṃ kālaṃ navakā bhikṣū ugrāyanti vā ... § 12.16.12A3. vṛddhānāñ ca mañcā prajñāpayitavyāḥ navakānāṃ pīṭhāḥ prajñāpayitavyāḥ § 12.16.12A3. navakānāṃ saṃstaraṇā prajñāpayitavyāḥ § 12.16.12A4. navakehi parya<ṃke>na vītināmayitavyaṃ § 12.16.12A4. navakehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi ... vītināmayitavyaṃ § 16.5.14B1. ye vihārakā navakā ca supratisaṃskṛtā ca, te āgantukānāṃ sthāpayitavyā § 16.6.14B2. yaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ navakaṃ sudhotaṃ ca suraktaṃ ca, taṃ ... § 18.37.17A1. śunakhena ... uśvāsaṃ kṛtakaṃ, yo navako bhavati tena cchoritavyaṃ § 18.52.17B2. dve caṃkramante, vṛddhatarako navatarako ca, navakena ujjhitavyaṃ § 20.19.20A4~5. atha dāni dve janā bhavanti yo navako bhavati tena uddhṛtavyo. atha dāni navako śaithiliko bāhuliko bhavati, vṛddhatareṇa uddhṛtavyo § 24.12.22A7. atha dāni dve janā bhavaṃti, yo navako bhavati, tena mardditavyaṃ § 33.4.28A1. kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirā bhikṣū ālapitavyā? § 33.5.28A1. kathaṃ bhagavāṃ, sthavirehi bhikṣūhi navakā bhikṣū ālapitavyā? § 42.17.37A2. yadi tāva agni bahalako bhavati, navakehi agrato sthātavyaṃ agni prati- bāhentehi § 42.29.37B5. navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirāṇāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ kāyaparicaryā karttavyā § 42.29.37B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati navakehi bhikṣūhi uccahantehi snāyituṃ § 53.12.45B2. atha dāni navakā bhikṣū prahāṇaśālāyāṃ pratikramanti, na kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ § 53.17.45B6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ sahasā dīpakaṃ praveśayituṃ “mā navakā bhikṣu sahasā viprakaṭa utthiheṃsu” tti § 59.8.48B4. atha dāni navako kṣīvati, “ārogê”ti vaktavyaṃ navakaṃ für cīvaraṃ : § 31.21.26A4 navaka-tara~# “(an Ordinationsalter) jünger” ⇒ navaka-taraka~, nava-taraka~, vṛddha-tara~, vṛddha-taraka~ § 24.12.22A7. atha dāni navakataro śaithiliko bāhuliko vā bhavati, vṛddhatarakena marditavyaṃ § 54.11.46A6. atha dāni bahu pracālayanti, ... yo tatra navakataro bhavati, tasya yaṣṭī dātavyā navaka-taraka~# “(an Ordinationsalter) jünger” ⇒ navaka-tara~, nava-taraka~, vṛddha-tara~, vṛddha-taraka~ § 62.6.50A3. atha khalu yena navakatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipitavyaṃ § 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ navakānta~ (°ka-anta) (BHS) “der (nach dem Ordinationsalter) jüngste Mönch” ☞ § 18.8, Anm. 1 zur Wendung navakānte vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati ⇒ vṛddhānta~, saṃgha- navaka~ § 18.8.15B6. navakānte vā paṭipāṭ{ṭ}ikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, tena tāni ... 314  § 19.5.17B6. (das Pissoir) tailena mrakṣayitavyā navakāntena vā uddiṣṭakena vā paṭipāṭi- kāye{na} vā yasya vā prāpuṇeti § 19.17.18A6. so dāni ujjhitavyo navakāntena vā yasya vā oheyyako bhavati § 19.19.18A7. kenâyaṃ nikkālayitavyo? navakāntena vā paṭipāṭi{pāṭi}kāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati § 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo, navakānte paṭipaṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, eko vā dvayo vā trayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti § 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā, eko vā dvayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti, navakānto (Hs. °kāntena) vā paṭipāṭikāye vā yasya vā prāpuṇati § 54.2.46A1. <sā vārayitavyā> navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā punaḥ prāpuṇati § 54.6.46A3. (yaṣṭi ...) navakāntato vāretavyā (Hs. cār°) § 54.7.46A4. maitracittena yaṣṭī vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°) vṛddhāntāto navakāntaṃ § 55.2.46B4. so (= geṇḍuka~) vārayitavyo (Hs. cār°) navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā puna prāpuṇati § 57.8.47B6. atha dāni vṛddhatarakā āsanti, bhikṣū ca {ā}gantukāmo bhavati, upānahāyo ābandhiya navakānte saṃprajānaṃ gantavyaṃ nava-taraka~ (SWTF) “(an Ordinationsalter) jünger” ⇒ navaka-tara~, navaka-taraka~, vṛddha- tara~, vṛddha-taraka~ § 18.37.17A2. atha dāni navatarako śaithiliko bāhuliko bhavati, ... § 18.52.17B2. dve caṃkramante, vṛddhatarako navatarako ca, navakena ujjhitavyaṃ § 41.29.35B6. yadi tahiṃ koci bhikṣu bhavati navatarako, so vaktavyo “udakaṃ āsiñcihi” tti § 43.14.38B2. navatarakasya itvarakālikaṃ bhavati, navatarakasya dātavyaṃ *nava-pratipanna~ “einer, der gerade in den Orden eingetreten ist” (wörtl. “neu eingetreten”) ☞ § 42.18, Anm. 2 § 42.18.37A3. na snāne navapratipannena (Hs. navāprati°) vā parikarmma karttavyaṃ nava-vidha~ § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ geyaṃ vyākaraṇaṃ gāthā ... √naś ⇒ naṣṭa~, vi-naśa-, vi-nāśaya-, vi-nāśe-, vināśitaka~ naśakye für nāsikye : § 18.53.17B3 naṣṭa~ ☞ § 18.2, Anm. 4 zu den idiomatischen Ausdruck naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ ([Ihre Asketenwürde] ist verschwunden, vergangen”) § 18.2.15B1. jano dāni odhyāyati “ ... naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ. kuto eṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ?” § 20.6.19B3. naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ. kuto imeṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ? (= § 20.7.19B4, § 34.1.28B1, § 34.2.28B2, § 35.1.29A1, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 36.2.29B2, § 37.1.29B7, § 37.2.30A1, § 51.1.44A1; ≒ § 19.2.17B4) nā für na : § 23.3.21A6 nā für vā : § 53.19.45B7 nāga~ “Elefant” § 29.3.24A7f. evaṃ bhikṣavo niṣīdatha, yathā nāgā (Hs. nāga) haimavatāḥ (Hs. hima°), ekaṃ nāgaṃ dve nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti, dve nāgā catvāri nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti ... dvātriṃśac catuṣaṣṭi nāgā anupa<ri>vārya niṣīdanti § 41.4.34A1. smṛto saṃprajāno nāgo (Hs. mārgo) viya kāritakāraṇo Veśālīṃ nagarīṃ piṇḍāya carati nāga-dantaka~ “Haken, der einem Elefantenzahn gleicht”# ☞ § 25.9, Anm. 2 ⇒ dīrgha- nāgadanta~ § 25.9.22B5. pātraprasevikā nāgadantake vā kīlake vā ukkaciya thapetavyā § 25.9.22B5. atha dāni nāgadantako bhavati, kiñ câpi evam eva thapeti, anāpattiḥ nāgadantaka-vīthī~# “Reihe von Kleiderhaken” § 42.10.36B4. bāhirato cīvarakuṭī karttavyā, nāgadantakavīthī karttavyā nāga-rāja(n)~ “Schlangenkönig” ☞ § 31.16, Anm. 4 § 31.16.26A2. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullapitavyaṃ āgantukehi “... ghuṇaviddhā tave, NandOpanandanā yūyaṃ nāgarājāno, ...” nānā-varṇṇita~# “vielfältig” 315  § 8.7.9A4. (die Almosenspeise) nānā{nā}varṇṇitaṃ bhavati, pṛcchitavyo “suvihita, kuto idaṃ labdhaṃ?” nāpaya-# “bringen lassen”; Kausativ von Skt. √nī; vgl. BHS. ā-nāpaya-, ā-nāpe- (BHSG § 38.54, S. 219a), Pā. ā-nāpeti § 14.7.13A6. yaṃ sārāsāraṃ śayyāsanaṃ amilā vā astaraṇikā vā kocakā vā guḍuguḍukā vā makucakā vā te grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ nāpayitavyāḥ nâpi ⇒ nâpi dāni § 1.10.2A1. nâpi kṣamati ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ ... nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ § 20.14.20A1. nâpi kṣamati ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ (= § 20.14.20A2) § 42.30.37B6. nâpi kṣamati ... snāyituṃ § 44.4.39A2. nâpi kṣamati ... sthapayituṃ § 44.6.39A4. nâpi kṣamati ... acchituṃ § 44.7.39A6. nâpi kṣamati ... sthāpayituṃ § 45.5.39B6. nâpi kṣamati ... nivāsanaṃ nikṣipituṃ et passim nâpi dāni § 1.8.1B6. nâpi dāni “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ olaggikāya āsitavyaṃ § 4.6.4B3. nâpi dāni “adhivāsita<ṃ> mayê”ti yatr’ ollagnāye āsitavyaṃ § 18.24.16B2. nâpi dāni dūrato yeva nivāsa<na>ṃ oguhiya upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 18.19.16A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... sāṃghikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ paribhuñjituṃ § 19.17.18A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati abhyāgam pradeśe ujjhituṃ § 20.13.20A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... cchorayituṃ ... cchorayituṃ § 22.4.21A1. cakkalī utkṣipitavyā. nâpi dāni sahasā § 31.18.26A2. nâpi dāni vaktavyaṃ “ko itthaṃ? kativarṣo? utthiha!” § 39.18.31B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva ... bhuñjituṃ § 41.27.35B4. nâpi dāni kṣamati tenaỿva hastena udakaṃ āsiñcituṃ § 41.31.35B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... āsituṃ § 41.32.35B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... caṃkramituṃ § 42.9.36B4. nâpi dāni {kṣamati} tathā karttavyaṃ yathā sukhena tapyati § 42.20.37A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cūrṇṇaṃ rāśīya upanetuṃ § 42.29.37B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... snāyituṃ § 43.11.38A7. nâpi dāni kalpikakuṭī adhyupekṣitavyā oddriṇṇakā vā ... usw. nābhi~ § 42.22.37A7. nābhi-mātraṃ vā udakaṃ, anāpattiḥ § 42.22.37B1. upaviṣṭena karttavyaṃ, yathā nābhi praticchannā bhaveya nāma ⇒ evaṃ nāma, pi nāma § 4.7.4B4. koci imaṃhi itthannāmo nāma upāsako? (= § 5.7.6B3) § 5.6.6B3. asuke deśe asukāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ itthaṃnāmo nāma upāsako § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ geyaṃ ... abhivinayo nāma prātimokṣo saṃkṣiptavistaraprabhedena § 11.8.11A1. atha khalu dviguṇitā nāma karttavyā viśiṣṭā mañcāto vā § 18.3.15B2. tena hi varccakuṭī nāma karttavyā § 19.3.17B5. tena hi praśvāsakuṭī nāma karttavyā § 20.8.19B4. dantakāṣṭhāni nāma trīṇi jyeṣṭhaṃ madhyamaṃ kanīyasaṃ § 20.8.19B4. jyeṣṭhaṃ nāma ṣoḍaśāṅgulāni madhyamaṃ dvādaśāṅgulāni kanīyasam aṣṭāṅgulāni § 22.2.20B7. tena hi cakkalī nāma karttavyā § 23.3.21A5~6. vihārā nāma trīṇi. jyeṣṭhako madhyamako kanīyasako. jyeṣṭhako nāma vihārako ... madhyamako nāma vihārako ... § 34.6.28B5. vaktavyaṃ “kṣatriyā nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo. ...” § 35.6.29A6. brāhmaṇa nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo śreṣṭho varṇṇo 316  § 36.6.29B5. gṛhapatikā nāma yūyaṃ tulākūṭamānakūṭehi divasaṃ lokaṃ muṣaṃtā āsatha § 42.5.36B1. tatra nāma (☞ § 42.5, Anm. 2) yūyaṃ ... adhyācariṣyatha § 49.1.41B6. āyuṣmanto Nandanasya Upanandano nāma bhrātā § 53.1.45A2. tena hi dīpo nāma karttavyo § 54.1.46A1. tena hi yaṣṭī nāma vārayitavyā § 55.1.46B3. tena hi geṇḍukaṃ nāma karttavyo usw. nāmaka~ ⇒ evaṃ-nāmaka~, kin-nāmaka~ nāman~ ⇒ iti-nāman~, itthan-nāma~, evaṃ-nāma~, evaṃ-nāmaka~, kin-nāmaka~ § 33.5.28A2. sthaviro dāni bhagavantaṃ pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavāṃ, sthavirehi bhikṣūhi navakā bhikṣū ālapitavyā?” bhagavān āha “nāmena vā gotreṇa vā varṣāgreṇa vā.” § 33.6.28A2. atha khalu nāmena vā gotreṇa vā śabdāpayitavyo § 33.16.28A7. arthahetor nnāmaṃ gṛhṇāmi (☞ § 33.16, Anm. 2 zu nāmaṃ √grah). asuko me upādhyāyo. asuko me ācāryo nāmā für nāma : § 28.2.24A2 nāyaṃtu für snāyaṃtu : § 42.26.37B4 nālikera~ “Kokosnuß” § 25.4.22B3. nâpi kṣamati bilvasya vā pakvasya kapitthasya pakvasya nālikerasya heṣṭhe nirmmādayituṃ, mā ... pakvena vā kapitthena pakvena vā nālikereṇa bhaṃjeya tti nāva für tāva: § 8.4.8B7 nāvā~ (Pā) “Schiff”; vgl. Pkt. ṇāvā; Skt. nau; vgl. Yuyama 1972: 32 § 18.51.17B1. nāvāye gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, yadi varcakuṭī bhavati, ... (≒ § 19.41.19A2) § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he nāvā <mucyati> pañcavarṣika <pravṛttaṃ> ... (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti § 31.35.27A2. nâpi kṣamati tehi nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho prayāto. gacchantu āyuṣmanto. gataṃ mārggasya śreyo.” nāvāre für nāvāye : § 19.41.19A2 nāśa~ § 11.13.11A3. sāṃghikaṃ śayanāsanaṃ ... uparito bhuṃjitavyaṃ, yathā nāśaṃ na gacche nāsā~ “Nase” ⇒ nakka~, nakkā~, nāsikya~ § 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... vinodetavyā ni{la}lāṭam vā parimarditavyaṃ, nāsā vā parimarditavyā nāsikya~ “Nase” (Lex.) ⇒ nakka~, nakkā~, nāsā~ § 18.53.17B3. tasya bhikṣusya sumanāphullāni nāsikye (Hs. naśakye) dadiyāṇaṃ ... nāsitaṃ für <vi>nāśitaṃ : § 48.9.41B5 nāsite# eine Art Gerät des Tischlers (?) § 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā ni / o ⇒ o / ni ni- / nis- ⇒ *ni-lehaya- < Skt. *nir-lekhayati ☞ § 20.16, Anm. 1 niḥsaraṇa~ “das Entkommen” § 36.6.29B6. te hi yūyaṃ niśrāya tathāgate brahmacaryaṃ caratha mahato oghasya niḥsaraṇārthaṃ niḥ-sāraya- “herausbringen” § 31.8.25B6. praviśiya yācitvā saṃghasya yathāsukhaparibhogaṃ, niḥsārayitavyaṃ (?; Hs. °sāreyetavyaṃ) pādatailaṃ, vekālikaṃ purebhaktikaṃ bhikṣitavyaṃ nikuñja~ ⇒ *ati-nikuñja~ nikuṭitakena# adv. “niedergebeugt, nach innen gebeugt” (?); < ni + √kuṭ (“sich krümmen”)?; vgl. Skt. kuṭita “krumm” ☞ § 57.5, Anm. 2 ⇒ abhinikuṭitakena § 57.5.47B4. upānahikāyo ... saṃpuṭikariyāṇaṃ vāmakena hastena gṛhṇiya nikuṭitakena <vāmā bāhāṃ> osārayitvā saṃprajānaṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ § 57.6.47B4. bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā nikuṭitakena vāmā bāhāṃ osāriya saṃprajānaṃ nirddhāvitavyaṃ 317 nikubjana~ ⇒ pātra-nikubjana~ nikūla~ ⇒ ukūla-nikūla~ nik-kālaya-# “herausbringen”; < Skt. niṣ-kālayati; vgl. CDIAL 7484 ⇒ niṣ-kāśaya-, niṣ-kāsaya- § 8.5.9A1. kheṭakaṭāhako nikkālayitavyo prasrāvakumbhikā nikkālayitavyā § 19.19.18A7. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, taṃ kālaṃ praśvāsaghaṭikā nikkālayitavyā. kenâyaṃ nikkālayitavyo (für °tavyā)? § 23.4.2.21B1. dīpakaṃ praveśeti ... śeyyāṃ prajñapayantenaỿva cchitti nikkālayitavyo (Hs. °tavyā) § 50.1.43A1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā bhikṣu adhyeṣṭo “āyuṣman, icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyamānaṃ.” (≒ § 50.2.43A4) § 50.4.43A6. piṇḍapātanīhārako adhyeṣitavyo, vaktavyam “āyuṣman, icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyantaṃ (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs).” ti nik-khāsa-# “(Sandalen) ablegen”; < Skt. niṣ-kāsayati ☞ § 26.5, Anm. 1 § 26.5.23B1. upānahā ni<k>khāsiya (Hs. °khosiya) ekāṃsakṛtena yavāgū praticchitavyā § 57.1.47B1. te ... prahāṇa okastāḥ samānā āsanehi upaviśiyāṇaṃ upānahā nikkhāsiya ... prasphoṭanti § 57.3.47B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇa upaviṣṭena upānahā nikkhāsiya (Hs. nikkhosiya) ... prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.4.47B3. atha khalu upānahikāyo dvāramūle nikkhāsiya praviśitvā ... § 57.7.47B5. niṣīdanaṃ prajñapayitvā upānahāyo nikkhāsitvā paryaṃkena niṣīditavyaṃ § 57.10.47B7. atha khalu upānahikāyo nikkhāsiyāṇaṃ praṇāmaṃ kṛtvā upaviśitavyaṃ ni-kkhoḍiya-# “(mit Vogelmist) beworfen werden, (von Krähen und [anderen] Vögeln mit Mist) beschmutzt werden” (?); < ni + √*kṣuṭ (“niederwerfen”)? ☞ § 43.1, Anm. 3, § 38.8, Anm. 1 ⇒ ut-khoṭaya~# § 43.1.38A2. odanamānikāyo hastā kākaśakuntehi nikkhoḍiyantā droṇīyo ... nikkhosiya für nikkhāsiya : § 57.3.47B2 ni-√kṣip § 4.13.5A6. na bhuñjitvā hastaṃ nikṣipiya āsitavyaṃ § 18.18.16A6. kheṭaṃ vā siṃhāṇakam vā varcco vā tahi nikṣiptaṃ bhavati, uccikāye tahiṃ sarvvaṃ prakṣipitavyaṃ § 18.27.16B4. dantakāṣṭhaṃ ... ekānte nikṣipitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 34.4.28B4. ekānte cchattraṃ nikṣipiya upānahāy’ omuṃciya tato allīyitavyaṃ. nâpi dāni darśanopacāre nikṣipitavyaṃ. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva nikṣipitavyaṃ § 35.4.29A4. nâpi dāni darśanopacāre nikṣipitavyaṃ. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva nikṣipitavyaṃ § 36.4.29B4. ekatam’ ante cchatropānahāṃ nikṣipiya gṛhapatiparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā. nâpi darśanopacāre nikṣipitavyaṃ. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva nikṣipitavyaṃ § 41.6.34A3. sthaviro dāni vihārakesmin pātraṃ nikṣipiya § 41.9.34A5. upānahikāyo nikṣipiya dakānakāto vāmāye kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjayitvā ... § 45.1.39B3. te ... vihāracaraṇakāni nivāsanāni nikṣipiyāṇaṃ ... grāmapraveśanikāni nivāsanāni nikṣipiyāṇaṃ ... § 45.2.39B4. vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarakāni nikṣipitvā ... § 45.2.39B5. grāmapraveśanikāni nivāsanāni nikṣipitvā ... § 45.4.39B6. na kṣamati ... vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivasanaṃ nikṣipituṃ § 45.5.39B7. nâpi kṣamati ... grāmapraveśanakaṃ nivāsanaṃ nikṣipituṃ § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati nivāsanaṃ nikṣipitvā ... (= § 45.7.40A2) § 46.1.40A3. vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarakāni nikṣipiya ... (= § 46.4.40A6) § 46.1.40A4. grāmapraveśanakāni cīvarāṇi nikṣipitvā ... § 46.2.40A5. vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi nikṣipiya ... § 46.2.40A5. grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi nikṣipitvā ... § 46.5.40A7. grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ nikṣipitvā ... § 46.6.40B1. cīvarakaṃ nikṣipiyāṇaṃ ... § 50.2.43A4. āyuṣman, yadā (lies: tadā?) so mayā piṇḍapātako vihārasya purato nikṣipto § 50.2.43A4. āyuṣman, evaṃ ca tvaṃ śūnyake vihārake pātraṃ nikṣipiya gacchasi 318  § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti. yadi tāva tantuka nikṣipiyāṇaṃ uttheti, jānitavyaṃ “dāhiti eṣā” tti usw. ni-khana- (Skt), ni-khane- (BHS) “eingraben, eintreiben” § 3.5.3B3. kīlakā nikhanetvā dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ § 21.6.20B3. bhittīye dve kīlakā nikhaniya rajjue bandhiya tahiṃ ukkacayitavyaṃ nikhādanaka~ “Meißel, Holzmeißel”; vgl. Pā. nikhādana (“ein bestimmtes scharfes Instrument, Meißel”); CDIAL 7156 ☞ § 43.16, Anm. 8 § 43.16.38B4. takṣāṇaṃ bhāṇḍaṃ bhavati kuṭhāro vā vāsīyo vā viharaṇako vā nikhādanako vā aṭṭilā vā nikhosiya für ni<k>khāsiya : § 26.5.23B1 ⇒ nik-khāsa- ni-gaccha- § 18.18.16A6. yathā uccārapraśrāvakheṭasiṃghāṇakaṃ sarvvaṃ tahiṃ nigacche nigamaṃca für nīlamaṃcaṃ : § 18.41.17A4 niguhitavyaṃ für oguhi° : § 18.24.16B2 nigraha~ ⇒ rajo-nigraha~ nicāpiya für ni<r>vāpiya?: § 42.31.38A1 ni-√ci “aufbauen” ⇒ √ci § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) parima<ṇḍa>laṃ vā caturasraṃ vā nicitavyā (Hs. nivi°) nicuḍa-vuntikā~# “Nicuḍa-Fächer”?; < Skt. nicula (eine Art Baum) + Skt. vṛntikā (“Stiel, Stengel”)? § 26.1.23A5. jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu ... nicuḍavuntikāye imaṃhi taṇḍulā mārggitavyā.” niḍāla~# “Stirn”; vgl. Skt. niṭāla, Pkt. ṇiḍāla; vgl. auch CDIAL 10970. lalāṭa; EWAia II 475, lalāta ☞ § 59.4, Anm. 2 ⇒ nirāla~, nilāṭa~, nilāṭi~ § 40.11.33A4. na dāni ... keśā vā ālihitum vā niḍālam vā *nitya-pacana~ “(ein Mönch,) der ständig kocht, Küchenpersonal” § 43.3.38A3. etaṃ dāni saṃghasya anugraho bhavati, nityapacanā (Hs. °pavanā) vā uddiśitavyā nityapavanā für nityapacanā : § 43.3.38A3 nidāna~ (BHS, SWTF) “Einleitung(ssätze)” ☞ § 1.1, Anm. 1 zu vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā § 1.1.1B1. vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā (= § 2.1.2A7, § 3.1.3A6, § 4.1.4A5, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4, § 7.1.8A5, § 13.1.12A6, § 20.1.19A5, § 20.4.19A7, § 48.1.41A2 usw.) nid-dhāva-# “hinausgehen”; < Skt. nir-dhāvati ⇒ ni-dhāpa-, nir-dhāpa-, nir-ddhāva-, ni-dhāva- § 31.35.27A1. yaṃ kālaṃ te nevāsikā (wohl für āgantukā) niddhāvitā bhavanti, ... nidrā-rata~# “sich am Schlafen erfreuend”; vgl. Pā. niddā-rata ☞ § 11.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ karmma- rata~, bhāṣya-rata~ § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ ... na nidrārāmāḥ na nidrāratāḥ, na nidrārāmatānuyogam anuyuktā viharanti (= § 12.1.11A5) nidrārāma~ (SWTF) (nidrā-ā°) “am Schlafen Freude habend”; vgl. Pā. niddārāma ☞ § 11.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ karmmārāma~, bhāṣyārāma~ § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ ... na nidrārāmāḥ na nidrāratāḥ, na nidrārāmatānuyogam anuyuktā viharanti (= § 12.1.11A5) nidrārāmatānuyoga~# (nidrā-ārā°-anu°) “Hingabe an Freude am Schlafen” ☞ § 11.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ karmmārāmatānuyoga~, bhāṣyārāmatānuyoga~ § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ ... na nidrārāmāḥ na nidrāratāḥ, na nidrārāmatānuyogam anuyuktā viharanti (= § 12.1.11A5) *ni-dhāpa- “hinausgehen”; ∈ Skt. nir-dhāvati ☞ § 22.3, Anm. 1 ⇒ nid-dhāva-, ni-dhāva-, nir- dhāpa- § 22.3.21A1. nidhāpiyāṇa (Hs. nivāp°) cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ kīlakehi bandhiyāṇa tato otaritavyaṃ (Hs. osāritavyaṃ) ni-dhāva-# “hinausgehen”; vgl. Skt. nir-dhāvati ☞ § 14.9, Anm. 2 ⇒ nid-dhāva-, ni-dhāpa-, nir- dhāpa- § 14.9.13A7. sarvvehi nidhāvitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyā) § 14.18.13B5. sarvvehi bhikṣūhi nidhāvantehi ekena vihārako abhyantaghaṭṭimo karttavyo 319 nidhyāpayitavyo für nidhyāyitavyo : § 50.7.43B3 ni-dhyāya- (ni-√dhyā) “achten; betrachten, blicken; gedenken” § 39.7.31A4. ekena bhikṣuṇā vihārakaṃ ukkasiya nidhyāyitavyaṃ § 39.20.31B7. ekena bhikṣuṇā vihāraṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ “kiṃ grāmāntikā āgacchanti na hi?” tti § 49.1.42A1. so dāni ... tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati kālaṃ nidhyāyamāno § 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti ... tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvitaṃ kālaṃ nidhyāyantaṃ § 49.1.42A3. ayaṃ ... tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati kālaṃ nidhyāyamāno § 49.5.42B1. atha khalu yugamātraṃ nidhyāyantena (“betrachtend”) gantavyaṃ § 50.7.43B3. tena gacchantena kālo nidhyā{pa}yitavyo. yadi jāna{n}ti śakyaṃ sakālena saṃbhāvayituṃ, gantavyaṃ § 51.6.44A2. na dāni ito vā ito vā nidhyāyantena (“blickend”) āsitavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “corā vā ocorakā bhavanti.” § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohanati, ... parivarttiyāṇaṃ bhūyo nidhyāyati, jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati”, gantavyaṃ § 51.8.44A4. atha dāni parivarttiya nidhyāyati, jānitavyaṃ “eṣā na dāsyatî”ti √nind § 26.1.23A4. te dāni āyuṣmaṃto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ekatyaṃ yavāgūṃ nindanti, ekatyaṃ praśaṃsanti § 26.10.23B3. ete vilambakā yavāgūḥ nindanti vā praśaṃsanti vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsādayanti § 34.6.28B5. nâpi kṣamati te (Acc. pl.) nindituṃ “ye kṣatriyā kuśalā bhavanti, prāg eva te nairayikā bhavantî”ti § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te (Acc. pl.) nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ...” tti ni-√pat § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) atha dāni prapātaniśritā vā, ... antarā kāṣṭhaṃ dātavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateya (Hs. niyat°) § 18.51.17B1. kāṣṭhakaṃ antarā karttavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateyā nipātin~ ⇒ paścān-nipātin~ nimantitakehi für nimantritakehi : § 42.24.37B2 nimantraṇa~ “Einladung” § 4.12.5A4. kiṃ ārabhya deti, tathā yeva nimantraṇāy’ etavyaṃ § 50.4.43A6. etaṃ dāni sarvvasaṃghasya antaraghare nimantraṇam bhavati, ... ni-mantraya- (Skt), ni-mantre-# “einladen” ⇒ nimantritaka~, upa-ni-mantraya- § 4.5.4B2. eṣo dāni koci saṃghaṃ bhaktena śuvetanāya nimantreti, ... (≒ § 6.5.7B1) § 4.5.4B2. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ko ’yaṃ nimantreti (≒ § 6.5.7B2) § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi ... ḍhossā vā viṭā vā vātaputro vā viheṭhanābhiprāyā nimantrayeṃsu (≒ § 6.6.7B4) § 4.7.4B5. bhikṣusaṃgho tena nimantrito § 5.6.6B3. tena bhikṣusaṃgho nimantrito § 5.5.6B1. eṣo dāni koci bhikṣusaṃghaṃ bhaktena nimantrayati, ... § 5.5.6B1. dvitīyasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ko nimantreti § 6.7.7B4. “kim vā etat?” ti, vaktavyaṃ “bhikṣusaṃgho tena bhaktena nimantrito.” § 5.7.6B4. tena bhikṣusaṃgho bhaktena nimantrito § 39.9.31A5. yadi koci upāsako saṃghaṃ bhaktena nimantrayati § 39.10.31A7. eṣo dāni koci grāmāntikāṃ bhaktena nimantreti, ... § 39.10.31A7. āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantrehi § 39.11.31A7. atha dāni āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñapti karttavyā § 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nima{ṃ}ntreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñaptiḥ karttavyā, ... § 39.22.32A1. eṣo dāni koci āraṇyakānāṃ bhaktenôpanimantrayati, vaktavyaṃ “grāmānti- kānām api nimantrehî”ti § 48.4.41A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭo āsanena nimantrīyati, ... 320  § 49.1.41B7. te dāni mahāntāni kulāny upasaṃkramanti nimantrīyanti : “ārya, bhakta- kṛtyaṃ karetha. ...” § 49.8.42B7. atha dāni nimantreti upalakṣitavyaṃ paścācchramaṇena § 49.8.42B7. amukena upādhyāyo nimantrito § 52.8.44B7. yadi koci nimantreti, yadi arthiko bhavati, praticchitavyaṃ usw. nimantritaka~# “eingeladen”; < nimantrita + Suffix ka § 26.3.23A7. nimantritakā vā bhavanti, tehi nimantritakehi gantavyaṃ § 41.13.34B2. so śreṣṭhi aparehiṃ jñātiśāle nimantritako gato varṣārātrikaṃ § 42.24.37B1. jānitavyaṃ: kim ayaṃ jentāko ekato sāṃghiko parṣāyaṃ pariveṇiko nimantritakānāṃ § 42.24.37B2. nimantritakānāṃ bhavati, nimant<r>itakehi gantavyaṃ nimantritikā~# “für die Eingeladenen bestimmt” § 26.3.23A6. kim ayaṃ yavāgū ubhayato sāṃghikā parṣāye pariveṇikā nimantritikā{yāṃ} (od. lies: nimantritakānāṃ?) nimantritikāyāṃ für nimantritakānāṃ oder nimantritikā{yāṃ}? : § 26.3.23A6 nimuṣṭika~, *nirmmuṣṭika~ “ohne die geballte Faust”#; hasta~ nimuṣṭika~/nirmuṣṭika~ bedeutet “ein Hasta ohne die geballte Faust”, d.h. ein Hasta (44~46 cm) abzüglich der Länge der Mittelhand und des Mittelfingers, nämlich die Länge des Unterarmes (etwa 25 cm) ☞ § 18.4, Anm. 14, § 42.8, Anm. 4 § 18.4.15B4. tac ca mukhāni karttavyāni hastām vā āyāmena nimuṣṭikam (Hs. °ṣṭakam) vā hastam vistāreṇa § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... udvedho nirmmuṣṭikā (Hs. nirghuṣṭikā) trayo hastā karttavyā vistāreṇa nimuṣṭikā vā nimna~ § 4.18.6A1. grāme vā yadi vâraṇye nimne vā yadi vā sthale (vs) niyataka~# “bestimmt”; < niyata + Suffix ka § 12.8.11B4. yaṃ tahiṃ pariveṇe bhavati bhaṇḍaṃ niyatakaṃ sarvvaṃ samudānitavyaṃ § 14.14.13B3. bhaṇḍaṃ niyatakaṃ bhavati, samudānetavyaṃ niyateya für nipateya : § 18.4.15B3 niyuta~ “Million” ⇒ prāṇi-koṭī-niyuta-śata-sahasra~ niraya~ ⇒ nairayika~ § 4.16.5B3. nirayaṃ pāpakarmmāṇo kṛtapuṇyā ca svarggatiṃ (vs) § 35.6.29A6. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti nir-avaśeṣa~ § 20.10.19B6. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ sarvvaṃ niravaśeṣaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādatha § 20.11.19B7. so eṣo bhikṣuḥ niravaśeṣaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati vinayātikrama āsādayati nir-āmiṣa~ “frei von Speiseresten, frei von durch Speise entstandenen Schmutz; sauber, rein”# ☞ § 25.10, Anm. 2 ⇒ sāmiṣī-kṛta~ § 25.10.22B6. (pātraṃ) ... kāṣṭham vā iṣṭakam vā upalam vā nirāmiṣaṃ nirmmādiya tasya upari sthapetavyaṃ § 40.10.33A3. pānīyaṃ gṛhṇantena gharttitavyaṃ, yathā eka hasto nirāmiṣo bhavati nirāla~# “Stirn”; < Skt. niṭāla ☞ § 59.4, Anm. 2 ⇒ niḍāla~, nilāṭa~, nilāṭi~ § 59.4.48A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya anābhogena kṣīvikā āgacchati vinodayitavyaṃ, nirālaṃ parimarditavyaṃ, nakkā vā parimarditavyā nirodha~ ⇒ duḥkha-nirodha~ nirodha-samāpatti~ (BHS, SWTF) “die Erreichung der Aufhebung (des Leidens)” § 41.31.35B7. na ... kṣamati ... middhāntaragatena vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ cinta<ya>ntena āsituṃ nir-ovarṣa~# “vor dem Regen geschützter Ort”; vgl. Skt. nirāvarṣa ☞ § 16.9, Anm. 3 ⇒ o- varṣaya-, nivāte § 16.9.14B4. (mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... ) varṣeṇa ovarṣiyanti, nirovarṣe sthāpayitavyā (≒ § 17.12.15A7) 321 nir-gaccha- ⇒ nir-√gam nir-gata~ ⇒ nir-√gam § 8.6.9A2. tena dāni gocarāto nirggatasya upādhyāyasya cīvarāṇi ... pratisāmayitavyāni § 41.22.35A5. eṣo dāni bhikṣu yadā grāmāto nirggato bhavati, ... § 46.5.40A7. gocarāto nirggatena nâpi kṣamati ... cīvaraṃ mārggituṃ § 49.8.42B7. yato nirggato bhavati, tato ārocayitavyaṃ nir-√gam ⇒ nir-gata~ § 19.4.17B6. tathā samantena setuḥ karttavyo, yathā pa<ti>tako yeva praśvāsako bāhyena nirggacchati § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti ... suvarṇṇam vā, na dāni tahiṃ aśabdakarṇṇikāye nirggantavyaṃ. atha khalu pratisaṃviditena nirggantavyaṃ nirghuṣṭikā für nirmmuṣṭikā : § 42.8.36B3 nir-ghoṭaya-#, nir-ghoṭe-# “(einander) anstoßen”; vgl. Skt. √ghuṭ (“sich widersetzen”) ☞ § 51.1, Anm. 1 § 51.1.44A1. te dāni bhikṣū piṇḍāya caramāṇo antaraghare yāva uṭṭhāṇāto nirghoṭenti § 51.1.44A1. paśyatha bhaṇe, śramaṇakāḥ yāva uṭṭhāṇāto nirghoṭenti § 51.3.44A2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati piṇḍacārikena yāva uṭṭhānāto nirghoṭayituṃ nirghoṣa~ ⇒ alpa-nirghoṣa~ nir-dhāpa-# “hinausgehen”; Hypersanskritismus für Skt. nir-1√dhāv (“herauslaufen”) ☞ § 22.3, Anm. 1 ⇒ nid-dhāva-, nir-dhāva-, ni-dhāva-, *ud-dhāpaya § 41.18.35A2. te dāni corā nirddhāpitāḥ § 49.1.42A3. āyuṣman, snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo, pilipilāpanti oṣṭhā, suṣṭhu khalu nirddhāpīyati (Passiv mit medialer Bedeutung?) § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo kāso āgacchati, bāhirato nirddhāpiya kāsitavyaṃ nir-dhāva- “herauskommen, hinausgehen, herauslaufen, hinauslaufen” ⇒ nid-dhāva-, nir-dhāpa-, ni-dhāva- § 1.11.2A4. yaṃ kālaṃ dāyakadānapati nirddhāvitā bhavanti, tato sūtroddeśakena jānitavyaṃ (= § 3.10.4A3; ≒ § 2.9.3A2) § 18.32.16B6. eṣo bhikṣuḥ cetiyaṃ vandaṃto uśvāsakṛto bhavati, samudācāra- mātrakenaỿva nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 25.3.22B2. gocarāto nirddhāviya āhāraṃ karīya pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ § 41.5.34A2. ime ... śramaṇakāḥ ... nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti, vikopenti § 41.6.34A2. sthaviro ... Vaiśālīṃ piṇḍāya caritvā nirddhāvito vihāraṃ āgato § 42.2.36A3. jentākaṃ apaduriya nirddhāvitāḥ § 42.4.36A7. nirddhāvitā bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārggayanti § 44.1.38B6. aparo ca bhikṣuḥ virātre uśvāsakārako vā praśvāsakārako vā nirddhāvito bhavati § 44.6.39A3. atha dāni bhikṣu virātrakāle uśvāsakāro vā praśvāsakāro vā nirddhāvati, ... § 45.1.39B3. gocarāto nirddhāvitā (= § 46.1.40A4) § 45.2.39B5. gocarāto nirddhāvitāḥ § 45.5.39B6. gocarāto nirddhāvitena nâpi kṣamati ... nivāsanaṃ nikṣipituṃ § 46.2.40A5. gocarāto nirddhāvitā § 49.1.42A1. so dāni śuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati § 49.1.42A2. so ... tasyaỿva anupadam eva nirddhāvito § 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvitaṃ § 49.1.42A3. ayaṃ upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati § 49.7.42B4. āsa tvaṃ, sahitakā{ṃ} bhuñjiya nirddhāviṣyāmaḥ § 49.7.42B4. ubhayehi bhuñjiya nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 49.7.42B5. glānasya anukālyaṃ āhāraṃ datvā sahitakehi nirddhāvitavyaṃ (Hs. °itavyā) § 49.7.42B6. yadi tāva so śirāviddho eva nirddhāvati, ayaṃ praviṣṭo bhavati ... § 51.11.44A5. eṣā strī bhikṣuṃ paśyiyāṇaṃ ... riktā nirddhāvati, jānitavyaṃ “eṣā na dāsyati” 322  § 57.6.47B4. bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā nikuṭitakena vāmā bāhāṃ osāriya saṃprajānaṃ nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 57.8.47B6. bhikṣuṇā yāva vṛddhatarakā nirddhāvitā paścād utthapitvā upānahāyo ābandhiya gantavyaṃ § 61.4.49A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, nirddhāviya vijṛmbhitavyaṃ § 62.7.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣu na pāreti saṃprajāna vātakarmma karttuṃ, nirddhāviyāṇaṃ vātakarmma karttavyaṃ nir-√bhā “erglänzen; dämmern” ⇒ vi-bhāta~ § 53.18.45B6. atha dāni na tāva nirbhāti, na kṣamati nirvvāpayituṃ nirmmādana~ ⇒ hasta-nirmmādana~ nirmmādaya- (BHS), nirmmāde-# “reinigen”; a-nirmmādita~#, a-nirmmāditaka~# “nicht gereinigt” ⇒ su-nirmmādita~ § 1.10.2A1. nâpi kṣamati śalākāṃ vārayantena a-nirmmādiya hastāṃ śalākāṃ vārayituṃ § 1.10.2A2. atha khalu hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... śalākā vārayitavyā ... hastān nirmmādiya ... śalākā{ṃ} gṛhṇitavyā § 2.8.2B7~3A1. hastehi vā anirmmāditehi śalākāṃ vārayituṃ. ... hastān nirmmādiyānaṃ ... hastehi vā anirmmāditehi śalākāṃ praticchituṃ. ... hastān nirmmādiyāṇa ... śalākā praticchitavyā § 3.9.3B7~4A1. na kṣamati anirmmāditakehi hastehi ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ ... hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... śalākā vārayitavyā ... anirmmāditakehi hastehi ... praticchituṃ ... hastāṃ nirmmādiyāṇa ... śalākā praticchitavyā § 8.5.9A1. hastāṃ nirmmādiya hastanirmmādanaṃ dātavyaṃ (= § 8.8.9A5) § 8.5.9A2. pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ (Hs. nirmmāpa°). pātraṃ pratiśāmayitavyaṃ § 13.17.12B7. na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati ... pātraṃ (Hs. pādam) vā nirmmādayituṃ § 23.4.5.21B2. na kṣamati tahiṃ ... pātraṃ vā nirmmādayituṃ § 23.6.4.21B4. pādām vā dhovati, mukham vā dhovati, hastām vā nirmmādayati § 25.1.22B1. so dāni hastāṃ nirmmādiya vihārakaṃ praviṣṭo § 25.3.22B2. gocarāto nirddhāviya āhāraṃ karīya pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ. nâpi kṣamati karkaśena vā cūrṇṇena karkaśena vā gomayena nirmmādayituṃ § 25.5.22B4. pātraṃ ... karṣadhāne vā vālikādhāne vā dūrvvāsādvale vā nirmmādayi- tavyaṃ § 25.6.22B4. nâpi kṣamati sthitakena pātraṃ nirmmādayituṃ § 25.6.22B4. atha khalu upaviṣṭakena nirmmādayitavyaṃ § 25.10.22B6. (pātraṃ) ... kāṣṭham vā iṣṭakam vā upalam vā nirāmiṣaṃ nirmmādiya tasya upari sthapetavyaṃ § 25.14.23A1. nirmmādayantena prathamaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano § 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā ... mukhaṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... § 31.21.26A5. akalpiyakarakīto hastā nirmmādiyāṇa kalpiyakarakīto prakṣāliya ... § 39.16.31B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ... āgacchiya pādāṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo § 40.1.32B2. tato yyeva hastāṃ nirmmādiyanti (Passiv mit Bedeutung des Mediums) § 31.26.26B1. kalyato yeva utthiya nivāsiya prāvariya hastān nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 31.28.26B3. pādāṃ prakṣāletha, hastāṃ nirmmādetha, pānīyaṃ pibatha, viśramatha § 32.11.27B5. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, ... pādāṃ prakṣālehi, hastāṃ nirmmādehi, viśramāhi § 32.6.27B2. pādāṃ dhovantasya, hastā nirmmādantasya, cetiyaṃ vandantasya, pātraṃ nirmmādentasya, ... § 39.28.32A5. pādāṃ prakṣāliya hastāṃ nirmmādiya stūpaṃ vistareṇa vanditavyaṃ § 40.5.32B5. tehi kalyata eva utthiya hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... § 40.10.33A4. pātraṃ vā oṭṭhā cikkaṇaṃ bhavati, nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ § 40.12.33A5. puno vā nirmmādayitavyaṃ § 40.14.33A6. pibantena oṣṭhā patraśākhāye nirmmādayitvā agroṣṭhakehi pātavyaṃ 323  § 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni ... hastaṃ vā nirmmādayituṃ § 41.22.35A6. colakaṃ dhovitvā niṣpīḍitvā upānahā nirmmādayitavyā § 41.29.35B6. hastān nirmmādiyāṇaṃ § 43.6.38A5. ... taṭṭukā vā caṣakā vā palīnakā vā nirmmāditā kārāpiya ... § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... cikkaṇā vā hastān nirmādituṃ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati ... cikkaṇā vā oṣṭhāni (lies: oṣṭhā{ni}?) nirmādayituṃ § 50.6.43B2. nâpi dāni adhotakehi hastehi aprayatehi gṛhṇitavyaṃ. atha khalu prakṣālitvā nirmmādayitvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 50.8.43B4. prakṛty’ eva tāva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ, hastā nirmmādayitavyā § 50.10.43B6. nīhārakapiṇḍapātena hastā nirmmādiyāṇaṃ pānīyasya kuṇḍikāṃ pūriyāṇaṃ panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ usw. nirmmāpayitavyaṃ für nirmmāda° : § 8.5.9A2 nirmmuṣṭika~ ⇒ nimuṣṭika~ nirvvāṇa~ § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... satvān ... kṣeme same śive sthale abhaye nirvvāṇe pratiṣṭhā- payamāno ... nir-vāpaya- (Skt), nir-vāpe- (BHS [Mvu; BHSG, S. 230b]) “löschen” § 42.31.37B7. jentākaṃ siñciya sammārjiya câṃgārā nicāpiya (lies: ni<r>vāpiya oder nivāpiya?; ☞ § 42.31, Anm. 7) jentākaṃ bāhiraghaṭitaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ § 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti. cīvarakoṇenâpi nirvvāpenti § 53.11.45B2. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ (Hs. °payantaṃ). atha khalu tulikāye nisnehiya dīpavartti okaḍḍhiya kulikātaile nirvvāpayitavyaṃ § 53.15.45B5. na dāni kṣamati mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā capeṭikāya vā nirvvāpayi- tuṃ § 53.12.45B2. atha dāni navakā bhikṣū prahāṇaśālāyāṃ pratikramanti, na kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ (Hs. °payitavyaṃ). atha khalu bahi prāsādakoṇehi dīpakā nirvvāpayitavyā, sopānamaggulīyaṃ prāsādakuṭīyaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.13.45B3~4. yadā bhikṣū pratikrāntā bhavaṃti, tato varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo. varccakuṭīyaṃ nirvvāpayitvā, racchā<yāṃ> dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo. racchāyāṃ nirvvāpayitvā, sopānaśīrṣe <dīpo> nirvvāpayitavyaḥ (Hs. °āḥ). sopānaśīrṣe nirvvāpayitvā prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.14.45B4. na dāni sahasākārasya apratisaṃviditvā nirvvāpetavyo (Hs. °vyā) § 53.14.45B4. tato vaktavyaṃ “mā <cirāyi>(?) āyuṣman, eṣo nirvvāpayiṣyati (‘Diese [Lampe] wird erlöschen!’; ☞ § 53.14, Anm. 5)” § 53.15.45B5. (die Lampe) nirvvāpito bhavati, agni gopayitavyo tuṣehi vā karṣehi vā buṣena vā buṣikāya vā § 53.17.45B6. prahāṇaśālāyān tāva prathamaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.18.45B6. atha dāni na tāva nirbhāti, na kṣamati nirvvāpayituṃ § 53.18.45B7. yaṃ kālaṃ vibhātaṃ bhavati, ākāśaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato varccakuṭīye prasrāvakuṭīye ca dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo nir-vālika~# “sandfrei” § 25.3.22B3. (pātraṃ ...) mūlarasena vā patrarasena vā puṣparasena vā nirvvālikena vā gomayena nirmmādayitavyaṃ nirvāsanāni für nivāsanāni : § 45.2.39B5 nilalāṭam für nilāṭaṃ : § 61.4.49A4 ☞ § 61.4(Text), Anm. 2 nilāṭa~#, nilāṭi~# “Stirn”; vgl. Skt. niṭāla, niṭila, lalāṭa, Pkt. ṇilāḍa; vgl. auch CDIAL 10970. lalāṭa; EWAia II 475, lalāta ☞ § 40.12, Anm. 2; § 49.7, Anm. 1; § 59.4, Anm. 2 ⇒ nirāla~, niḍāla~ § 40.12.33A5. yadi koci atibahuṃ oṣṭhaṃ vā volayati keśā vā ālaya{ṃ}ti nilāṭe (Acc. sg. neut.!? ☞ § 40.12, Anm. 3) vā, apanetavyaṃ § 49.7.42B3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāṃ vindhāpayitukāmo bhavati bāhuśirāṃ vâṅgulya- 324  śirāṃ vā nilāṭiṃ vā ... § 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... vinodetavyā ni{la}lāṭam (nilāṭa × Skt. lalāṭa) vā parimarditavyaṃ, nāsā vā parimarditavyā nilāṭi~ ⇒ nilāṭa~ *ni-lehaya- “(die Zunge) abschaben”; < Skt. *nir-lekhayati; vgl. Skt. nir-√likh (“ätzen, auskratzen”), jihvā-nirlekhana (“Zungenschaber”), BHS. jihvā-nirlekhanika (“dass.”) ☞ § 20.16, Anm. 1 ⇒ likha- § 20.16.20A3. nâpi kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya madhyena pāṭiyāna jihvāṃ nilehituṃ kāmabhoginā yathā. atha dāni bhikṣu jihvāṃ nilehitukāmo bhavati, kurccakena āmarjayitavyā nivaraṇa~ ⇒ nīvaraṇa~ ni-vartta- “zurückbringen” (= nivarttaya-?; vgl. BHSG § 38.25f.) § 49.7.42B6. nagaradvāre paśyati nagaradvārato nivarttitavyaṃ. panthe paśyati, panthāto nivarttitavyaṃ. yato eva paśyati tato eva nivarttitavyaṃ ni-varttaya- “zurückbringen” § 49.7.42B6. rathyāntaraṃ vā paśyati tato yyeva nivarttayitavyaṃ ni-√vas § 4.18.5B7. imasmi āgāre (lies: ’gāre [m.c.]) nivasantu devatāḥ (vs) nivasana~ (Skt) “Untergewand” ⇒ nivāsana~, eka-nivasana~, eka-nivasanaka~ § 18.20.16A7. bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena uppīḍito nivasanaṃ oguhiya varccakuṭiṃ praviśati § 18.24.16B2. samanantaraṃ upaviśitavyaṃ ca nivasanaṃ oguhitavyaṃ (Hs. niguh°) ca § 45.2.39B4. nagnaprāvṛtāḥ grāmapraveśanikāni <ni>vasanāni mārggatha § 45.1.39B3. nagnaprāvṛtā grāmapraveśikāni nivasanāni mārgganti § 45.4.39B6. na kṣamati ... vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivasanaṃ nikṣipituṃ § 45.5.39B7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivasanaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ nivāte “an einem Ort, wo es keinen Wind gibt” ☞ § 16.9, Anm. 2 ⇒ naivāta~, nir-ovarṣa~ § 16.9.14B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena opūriyanti, nivāte sthāpayitavyā § 17.12.15A6. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena vā opūriyanti, ... nivāte sthāpayitavyā nivāpiyāṇa für nidhāp° : § 22.3.21A1 ni-vāsa-# “sich ankleiden” ⇒ ni-vāsaya-, prā-vara- § 32.7.27B3. <na kṣamati> ... nivāsantasya vā, cīvaraṃ prāvarantasya, ... Uddāna (VI).45A1. evam nivāsitavyaṃ nivāsaṃ für nivāsanaṃ : § 18.24.16B2, § 18.33.16B7 nivāsakāni wohl für nivāsanāni : § 45.1.39B3 nivāsana~ (BHS, Pā) “Untergewand” (wahrscheinlich ein Synonym für Pā. antaravāsaka, s. dazu BD IV 60, Anm. 1; vgl. auch SWTF I 80b, antar-vāsa) ⇒ nivasana~, eka-nivasana~, eka- nivasanaka~, eka-nivāsanaka~ § 18.22.16B1. na kṣamati nivāsanaṃ oguhiya aśabdakarṇṇikāye varcakuṭī praviśituṃ § 18.24.16B2. nâpi dāni dūrato yeva nivāsa<na>ṃ oguhiya upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 18.33.16B7. ekamante nivāsa<na>ṃ o<gu>hiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 18.49.17A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pratikṛty’ eva nivāsanaṃ oguhiya gacchituṃ. atha khalu nivāsanaṃ (Hs. vinā°) oguhitavyaṃ ca upaviśitavyañ ca § 18.50.17A7. na kṣamati nivāsanaṃ oguhiya ... udakasamīpa<ṃ> gantuṃ § 18.50.17B1. atha khalu utthihitavyaṃ ca nivāsanaṃ osaritavyaṃ § 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ ... praśvāsakuṭīṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ nivāsanaṃ o<gu>hi- yāṇaṃ “praśvāsaṃ kariṣyan” ti <praviśati?> § 45.1.39B3. te ... kalyata eva vihāracaraṇakāni nivāsanāni nikṣipiyāṇaṃ, nagnaprāvṛtā grāmapraveśikāni nivasanāni mārgganti. gocarāto nirddhāvitā grāmapraveśanikāni nivāsanāni nikṣipiyāṇaṃ, nagnaprāvṛtā vihāracaraṇakāni nivāsanāni (Hs. nivāsakāni) mārgganti § 45.2.39B5. grāmapraveśanikāni nivāsanāni nikṣipitvā ... § 45.2.39B5. nagnaprāvṛtāḥ vihāracara<ṇa>kāni ni{r}vāsanāni mārggatha § 45.4.39B5. grāmapraveśanikaṃ nivāsanaṃ anupahastaṃ kṛtvā ... § 45.4.39B6. tato grāmapraveśana<ka>ṃ ca nivāsanaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ 325  § 45.4.39B6. vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ uvvelayitavyaṃ § 45.5.39B6. vihāracaraṇa<ka>ṃ nivāsanaṃ anupahastaṃ kariyāṇaṃ ... § 45.5.39B7. nâpi kṣamati ... grāmapraveśanakaṃ nivāsanaṃ nikṣipituṃ § 45.5.39B7. tato vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 45.5.39B7. grāmapraveśanakaṃ ca nivāsanaṃ uvvelayitavyaṃ § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati nivāsanaṃ nikṣipitvā ... § 45.6.40A1. nivāsanaṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ § 45.6.40A1. nivāsanaṃ nivāsayitvā ... § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati ... uparimeṇa nivāsanasya snānaśāṭikāṃ utkṣipituṃ § 45.6.40A2. nivāsanaṃ ovvellayitavyaṃ § 45.7.40A2. nâpi kṣamati nivāsanaṃ nikṣipitvā nagnaprāvṛtena rātrīprāvaraṇa<ṃ> nivāsanaṃ (Hs. nivāsinaṃ) mārggituṃ § 45.7.40A2. pratikṛty’ eva tāva rātrīprāvaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ upahastīkarttavyaṃ § 45.7.40A3. tato nivāsanaṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ rātriprāvaraṇaṃ nivāsanaṃ ca āvellayi- tavyaṃ § 45.8.40A3. evaṃ nivāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ Antaroddāna 50B2. āraṇyakā nevāsikā (lies: nivāsanaṃ?) ca pradīpo ca sapta varggāḥ prakāśitāḥ ni-vāsaya- (Skt, BHS) “sich ankleiden”; vgl. Pā. nivāseti ⇒ ni-vāsa-, prā-vara- § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: ... kathaṃ nivāsayitavyaṃ, kathaṃ prāvaritavyaṃ (= § 9.1.9B5) § 25.3.22B2. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya pātracīvaram ādāya gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 31.26.26B1. kalyato yeva utthiya nivāsiya prāvariya hastān nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 41.4.33B7. sthaviro dāni kālasyaỿva nivāsayitvā ... § 44.1.38B7. so dāni aparejjukāto kalyata eva nivāsiya prāvariya ... § 44.6.39A4. bhikṣū kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya ... § 45.3.39B5. tena hi evaṃ nivāsitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni evaṃ nivāsayitavyaṃ? § 45.6.39B7. snānaśāṭakaṃ vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakam vā nivāsiya snātukāmo bhavati § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati ... snānaśāṭakaṃ vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakaṃ nivāsayituṃ § 45.6.40A1. nivāsanaṃ nivāsayitvā ... nivāsika~ (SWTF, Pā) “(im Kloster) ansässig(er Mönch)”# ⇒ nevāsika~, naivāsika~ § 31.3.25B2. evaṃ nivāsikehi pratipadyitavyaṃ § 31.33.26B7. na kṣamati tehi nivāsikehi (Hs. °kāhi) dvāraṃ ca bandhiya vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhāṃ bhañjantehi āsituṃ nivāsikāhi für °kehi : § 31.33.26B7 nivāsinaṃ für nivāsanaṃ : § 45.7.40A2 nivitavyā für nici° : § 18.4.15B3 ni-viṣṭa~ “gelagert” ⇒ saṃ-ni-viṣṭa~ § 18.47.17A6. sārthe niviṣṭasmiṃ (Hs. nisṛṣṭasmiṃ) samudācāro bhavati, ekānte upaviśiya karttavyaṃ niveśana~ § 4.18.5B6. praśastam āryehi navaṃ niveśanaṃ (vs) ni-veśaya- “einsetzen”; vgl. Skt. niveśayati § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi niveśayamāno (Kaus. mit medialer Endung), phalabhāgiyān satvāṃ phalehi pratiṣṭhāpayamāno ... nivyāyantena für nidhyāy° : § 39.20.31B7 niśraya~ (BHS, SWTF) “Betreuung (der frisch ordinierten Mönche in den ersten –– in der Regel –– fünf Jahren” (SWTF III 48b) ☞ § 9.1, Anm. 1 § 9.1.9B4. te dāni āyuṣmanto Nand<an>Opanandano ṣaḍvarggikā ca niśrayaṃ dapiya naỿva antevāsi ovadanti, na anuśāsanti § 9.2.9B6. satyaṃ ... evan nāma yūyaṃ niśrayaṃ detha niśrayaṃ dadiyāṇa antevāsikāṃ na ovadatha nânuśāsatha? § 9.3.9B7. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ niśrayaṃ dadiyaṃ antevāsikāṃ naỿva ovadatha nânuśāsatha 326  § 9.4.9B7. ācāryeṇa tāva niśrayaṃ dentena antevāsi ubhayato vinayaṃ grāhayitavyo § 10.1.10A3. te dāni bhikṣū niśrayan deṃti. te antevāsikā ācārikasya niśrayaṃ gṛhṇiya ... niśraya-karaṇīya~# “unter Aufsicht stehend”; vgl. Pā. nissaya-karaṇīya ☞ § 52.1, Anm. 1 § 52.1.44A7. te dāni niśrayakaraṇīyā piṇḍāya caranti § 52.3.44B2. eṣo dāni bhikṣu niśrayakaraṇīyo bhavati, nâpi dāni kṣamati piṇḍāya cariyāṇaṃ bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramituṃ niśrāya (BHS[Mvu]) “mit Hilfe, mittels”; Pā. nissāya § 36.6.29B5. āmiṣacakraṃ (Hs. amiṣa°) niśrāya dharmmacakraṃ pravarttati (vs) § 36.6.29B6. te hi yūyaṃ niśrāya tathāgate brahmacaryaṃ caratha mahato oghasya niḥsaraṇārthaṃ ni-śrita~ ⇒ dari-niśrita~, prapāta-niśrita~ niśreṇ~ “eine Leiter” ⇒ kaḍevarikā~, kaḍevariyā~ § 14.18.13B5. prativeśikulāto niśreṇi yāciya tato otaritavyaṃ § 43.16.38B4. etā bhavanti vāsīyo vā kuddālakā vā niśreṇiyo vā, na dāni tathā yeva mṛttikāpraliptikā sthapetavyā ni-ṣaṇṇa~ § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādantā ekānte niṣaṇṇā āsanti pravātagandhikena mukhena § 21.5.20B3. atha dāni niṣaṇṇo bāhirakāṃ pādāṃ kṛtvā sūtraṃ valento āsati, anāpattiḥ § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo “cittaṃ samādhayiṣyāmî”ti (= § 28.1.24A1; ≒ § 27.2.23B5, § 28.2.24A2) § 29.4.24B1. bhikṣu paryaṅkena niṣaṇṇo bhavati, śrānto bhavati, parvvāṇi āmilāyanti, ... § 32.7.27B2. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ samavasthāye niṣaṇṇo bhavati, ... § 34.1.28B1. te dāni tehi niṣaṇṇehi na pārenti kāryāṇi karttuṃ (= § 35.1.28B7, § 36.1. 29A7, § 37.1.29B7) § 34.2.28B2. te dāni tumbhehi niṣaṇṇehi na pārenti kāryāṇi karttuṃ (= § 35.2.29A1) § 35.1.28B7. te dāni odhyāyanti “vayaṃ yeva tāva niṣaṇṇā "kāryāṇi kariṣyāma" tti ...” § 36.2.29B2. ime pi śramaṇakā āgacchiya madhye niṣaṇṇā (= § 37.1.29B7) § 37.2.30A1. yūyaṃ dāṇi gacchiyāṇa teṣāṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā § 62.10.50A6. nâpi kṣamati antaragharaṃ niṣaṇṇena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ usw. niṣaṇṇaka~ (BHS); niṣaṇṇa + Suffix ka § 35.2.29A2. ime pi śramaṇakā āgacchiyāṇa madhye niṣaṇṇakā § 40.15.33A7. yadi aṣṭabhāga<ṃ> caturbhāgaṃ ca niṣaṇṇakā bhavanti, ekena madhyamaṃ vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ niṣadanti für niṣīd° : § 56.1.47A2 niṣadyā~ (BHS) “das Sitzen”; vgl. Poṣ(Hu) 297, Anm. 3 ⇒ sthāna-caṃkrama-niṣadyāyoga~, sthāna-caṃkrama-niṣadyānuyoga~ § 2.5.2B5. kahiṃ bhaviṣyati upasthānaśālāyām vā prahāṇaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā ucchedanake vā niṣadyāya vā? § 3.6.3B4. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kahiṃ bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā occhedake caṃkrame vā niṣadyāya? § 12.16.12A4. navakehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi (Loc.) abhyavakāśe vītinām- ayitavyaṃ § 39.28.32A5. ārāmehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi (Loc.) sthānacaṃkrama- niṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ § 29.10.24B6. evaṃ niṣadye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 49.1.42A1. na me tvayā sārddhaṃ phāsu bhavati kathāya vā niṣadyāya vā ni-ṣīda- “sich hinsetzen” § 29.2.24A7. satyaṃ bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikā, evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahatha? § 29.2.24A7. duṣkṛtaṃ ... evaṃ ca yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha § 29.3.24A7. tena hi <na> kṣamati uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdituṃ 327  § 29.3.24A7~B1. evaṃ bhikṣavo niṣīdatha, yathā nāgā haimavatāḥ, ekaṃ nāgaṃ dve nāgā anuparivārya niṣīdanti, ... niṣīdanti ... niṣīdanti ... na kṣamati uṣṭraparyaṅkena niṣīdituṃ. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva svasti<ka>paryaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīditavyaṃ § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ... pratisaṃlīnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ § 29.6.24B3. āmuhūrttakaṃ viśramiya bhūyo svastikaparyaṅkena niṣīditavyaṃ § 29.6.24B3~4. atha dāni bhikṣu na pāreti svastikaparyaṅkena niṣīdituṃ, arddhaparyaṅkena niṣīditavyaṃ § 29.6.24B4. atha dāni arddhaparyaṅkenâpi na pāreti niṣīdituṃ, ubhau pādau osāriya susaṃvṛtena niṣīditavyaṃ § 29.7.24B4~5. na kṣamati stūpaṃ pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ, saṃgham vā pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ, upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariya niṣīdituṃ, vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ § 29.8.24B5. nâpi kṣamati “saṃghamadhye mā niṣīda” tti uktena samānena niṣīdituṃ. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyācāryehi “mā niṣīda” tti uktena niṣīdituṃ § 29.9.24B5~6. nâpi kṣamati ... atibhuṃḍe vā pradeśe niṣīdituṃ. atha khalu cchannaprākaṭe pradeśe niṣīditavyaṃ Uddāna (III).25A7. evaṃ niṣīditavyaṃ § 48.2.41A5. yūyaṃ ... <t>ehi prajñaptehi niṣīdatha § 48.5.41B1. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā ... paṭa vā tato niṣīditavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyā) § 48.6.41B1. nâpi kṣamati tathā yeva niṣīdituṃ § 55.6.46B7. tenâpi dāni dharmmagauraveṇa pratyutthāya ’puṇoti, niṣīditavyaṃ § 56.1.47A2. te ... prahāṇa āgatā samānā skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti (Hs. niṣadanti) § 56.5.47A6. yathāsāhaṭasya niṣīdanasya dvitīyo anto uvveliya prajñapayitavyaṃ, tato niṣīditavyaṃ § 57.7.47B5. niṣīdanaṃ prajñapayitvā upānahāyo nikkhāsitvā paryaṃkena niṣīditavyaṃ § 57.9.47B6. nâpi kṣamati saṃghamadhye bhaktāgre tarpaṇāgre vā samīcīyaṃ vā sa- upānahena niṣīdituṃ § 62.2.49B6. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāṃ gacchiya caturddiśaṃ niṣīdanti usw. niṣīdana~ (BHS, SWTF) “Sitzmatte”; vgl. Pā. nisīdana ⇒ niṣīdanaka~ § 8.10.9A6. divāvihāraṃ gacchantasya pīṭhikā nayitavyā, niṣīdanaṃ nayitavyaṃ ... § 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto āgacchantasya pīṭhikā ānayitavyā, niṣīdanaṃ ānayitavyaṃ ... § 56.1.47A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa āgatā samānā skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti § 56.1.47A3. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭiya sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gacchanti § 56.2.47A3. evaṃ niṣīdane pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 56.8.47A7, Uddāna [VII].50B1) § 56.3.47A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ okastena niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭayituṃ (≒ § 56.5.47A6) § 56.3.47A4. vihārake vā bāhyato vā niṣīdana prasphoṭiyāṇaṃ dviguṇaṃ kṛtvā prahāṇaṃ okasitavyaṃ § 56.4.47A4. nâpi kṣamati yathāsukhe kṛte utthiya niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 56.5.47A5. nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ kṛtvā gantuṃ § 56.5.47A6. yathāsāhaṭasya niṣīdanasya dvitīyo anto uvveliya prajñapayitavyaṃ, tato niṣīditavyaṃ § 56.7.47A7. nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 57.7.47B5. niṣīdanaṃ prajñapayitvā upānahāyo nikkhāsitvā paryaṃkena niṣīditavyaṃ niṣīdanaka~ (Pā) “Sitzmatte”#; vgl. DP, s.v. niṣīdanaka (“sitting down; for sitting on”) ⇒ niṣīdana~ § 56.4.47A4. ātmano pratisandhismi sukhākaṃ niṣīdanakaṃ pīṭhake prajñapayitavyaṃ § 56.6.47A6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte niṣīdanakaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā 328  “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭayituṃ niṣ-kāśaya-, niṣ-kāsaya- “hinausbringen”; Kaus. von niṣ-√kas ⇒ nik-kālaya- § 10.5.10A5. kheṭakaṭāhaṃ niṣkāśayitavyaṃ (Hs. °āṃ) yāvat pādodakaṃ dāpayitavyaṃ § 10.5.10A6. evaṃ aparaṃ divasaṃ prasrāvakumbhikā niṣkāśayitavyā § 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā niṣ-kāsaya- ⇒ niṣ-kāśaya- niṣ-√kram ⇒ niṣ-krāma- § 19.27.18B4. agniśālāyāṃ vā upasthānaśālāyām vā upaviṣṭasya samudācāro bhavati, cchatti niṣkramitavyaṃ niṣ-krāma- § 42.15.36B7. eko niṣkrāmati, eko praviśati niṣpiḍitvā für niṣpīḍitvā : § 41.22.35A6 (zweimal) niṣ-pīḍaya- ⇒ √pīḍ § 41.9.34A5. upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhoviya niṣpīḍitvā ātape śoṣayetaṃ § 41.22.35A6. colakaṃ dhovitvā niṣpīḍitvā (Hs. °piḍitvā) upānahā nirmmādayitavyā § 41.22.35A6. colakaṃ niṣpīḍitvā (Hs. °piḍitvā) thapetavyo § 53.19.45B7. dīpavarttīyo niṣpīḍiyāṇaṃ (Hs. niṣpeḍi°) ekaṃhi koṇake sthāpetavyāyo niṣpeḍiyāṇaṃ für niṣpīḍi° : § 53.19.45B7 (vgl. BHSG § 3.59) niṣ-pratibhāna~ (BHS) “fassungslos” ☞ § 26.1, Anm. 4, 8 § 26.1.23A5. te dāni bhikṣū utkṣiptā bhavanti jihmā veḍḍā niṣpratibhānāḥ niṣ-prāṇaka~ (BHS) “frei von Lebewesen” § 14.6.13A5. kakṣaṃ ... yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati niṣprāṇakaṃ, tato ’gninā dahāpayi- tavyo nisṛtā für niśritā : § 18.7.15B6 nisṛṣṭa-gṛha~# “verlassenes Haus” ☞ § 18.42, Anm. 1 ⇒ utsṛṣṭa-gṛha~, śūnya-ghara~, śūnyāgāra- gāta~ § 31.12.25B7. nisṛṣṭagṛhaṃ bhavati, anāmantriya praviśati, anāpattiḥ nisṛṣṭasmiṃ für niviṣṭasmiṃ : § 18.47.17A6 *nisnehaya-# oder *nisneha-# “(den Docht) vom Öl trennen”; < *niḥ-snehayati oder *niḥ-snehati, Denominativ von niḥ-sneha (“kein Öl enthaltend”) § 53.11.45B2. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā ... dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ. atha khalu tulikāye nisnehiya dīpavartti okaḍḍhiya kulikātaile nirvvāpayitavyaṃ ni-hara- § 4.18.5B6. ādīptasmiṃ āgāre yo (lies: yaṃ?) niharati bhaṇḍakaṃ (vs) niharttavyā für nīh° : § 50.7.43B3 nihinakena für nihīnakena : § 28.5.24A4 *nihīnaka~ “Abstand (hinter jemandem) haltend”; vgl. Skt. nihīna (“niedrigen Standes”) ☞ § 28.5, Anm. 1 ⇒ o-hayitvā § 28.5.24A4. atha khalu dve trayo vā padāni <ni>hīnakena (Hs. hin°) caṃkramitavyaṃ √nī ⇒ naya-, nāpaya-, apa-√nī, ā-√nī, un-nīya-, upa-ne-, pra-ṇetavya~, vi-naya-, sam-ud-ā-naya- nīla-mañca~# “eine Stelle, die als Abort dient; öffentliche Bedürfnisanstalt”? ☞ § 18.41, Anm. 1; Band I, S. XIII § 18.41.17A3~4. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, nīlamañcaṃ gantavyaṃ. nâpi dāni kṣamati strīṇāṃ nīlamañcaṃ (Hs. nigamaṃca) gantuṃ. atha khalu yo puruṣāṇāṃ nīlamaṃco tahiṃ gantavyaṃ § 18.42.17A4. nīlamañco na bhavati, utsṛṣṭagṛhaṃ gantavyaṃ nīlikā~ “Schimmel”? ☞ § 41.22, Anm. 8 § 41.22.35A6. mā prāṇakā jāyeṃsu nīlikāya vā bhaveṃsu nīvaṇena für nīva<ra>ṇena : § 27.1.23B4 nī-varaṇa~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā), ni-varaṇa~ (BHS) “Hindernis” ⇒ vi-nivaraṇa~, vi-nīvaraṇa~ § 22.1.20B6. tasya dāni tena nivaraṇena sarvvarātriṃ cittaṃ na samādhānaṃ gacchati § 27.1.23B4. tasya dāni tena nīva<ra>ṇena cittaṃ samādhānaṃ na gacchati nī-hara- (BHS, Pā), nī-√hṛ “hinaustragen; aus (dem Dorf) mitnehmen”; < Skt. nirharati 329  § 4.18.5B6. yo nīharati dānena dinnaṃ taṃ āhu tihutaṃ (lies: *nīhṛtaṃ od. nīhataṃ [< nirhṛtaṃ]) (vs) § 50.7.43B3. yadi upakaṭṭho kālo bhavati, na dāni tena bhuñjantena āsitavyaṃ. atha khalu ubhaye piṇḍapātā nīharttavyā (Hs. nih°) nīhāraka~ ⇒ piṇḍapāta-nīhāraka~ nīhāra-piṇḍapāta~#, nīhāra-piṇḍapātaka~#, nīhāraka-piṇḍapāta~#, nīhārika-piṇḍapāta~# “(ein Mönch), der (einen anderen) damit beauftragt, Almosenspeise (aus dem Dorf) mitzubringen”; vgl. SWTF. nirhṛta-piṇḍapāta ☞ § 50.3, Anm. 1 ⇒ piṇḍapāta-nīhāraka~, piṇḍapāta- hāraka~ § 50.3.43A5. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati nīhārikapiṇḍapātena piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ § 50.3.43A6. evaṃ nīhārapiṇḍapātakena pratipadyitavyaṃ § 50.11.43B7. evaṃ nīhārapiṇḍapātena pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VI].45A1) § 50.8.43B4. nâpi kṣamati nīhārapiṇḍapātenâpi “adhyeṣṭo mayā piṇḍapātanīhārako” ti adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ § 50.10.43B6. nīhārakapiṇḍapātena hastā nirmmādiyāṇaṃ pānīyasya kuṇḍikāṃ pūri- yāṇaṃ panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B6. atha dāni nīhārakapiṇḍapāto na pratyudgacchati, kālo ca atikramati piṇḍapātanīhārakena tvaritatvaritam āgantavyaṃ nī-√hṛ ⇒ nī-hara- √nud ⇒ vi-nodaya- nevāsika~ (Pā) “(im Kloster) ansässig(er Mönch)” ⇒ nivāsika~, naivāsika~ § 15.3.14A1. vayaṃ bhagavan āgantukā. ye nevāsikā te <prati>saṃskariṣyanti § 16.3.14A7. vayaṃ bhagavan nevāsikā. ye āgantukā te pratisaṃskariṣyanti § 16.4.14A7. evaṃ nevāsikehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 16.10.14B4. evaṃ nevāsikehi śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 17.3.14B7. ye bhagavaṃ āgantukā ca nevāsikā ca te pratisaṃskariṣyanti § 31.2.25B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati nevāsikehi vihārasya dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ vihārasya paścādvastukasya kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjamānehi āsituṃ § 31.16.26A1. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullap<itavyaṃ āg>ant<uk>ehi “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ ettha vasatha ...” § 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. ...” § 31.19.26A3. nâpi dāni nevāsikehi dvāraṃ bandhitvā kākavāhāṃ bhaṃjantehi āsitavyaṃ § 31.21.26A4. nevāsikā pṛcchitavyāḥ “āyuṣmaṃ, pādadhovanikā kahiṃ? ...” § 31.22.26A5. cetiyaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ, yatra nevāsikā bhavanti tatra gantavyaṃ § 31.22.26A5. nevāsikehi varṣāgraṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ “kativarṣo āyuṣman?” § 31.22.26A6. yadi tāva āgantuko vṛddhatarako bhavati, nevāsikena utthiya pādā vandi- tavyā, āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 31.22.26A6. atha dāni nevāsiko vṛddhatarako bhavati, ārogyāpiya evaṃ kariyāṇaṃ āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 31.24.26A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati tehi āgantukehi nevāsikāṃ kutsiya haṃbhiya “āyuṣmann, adyâpi yūyaṃ iha vasatha. ...” § 31.27.26B1. nevāsikehi vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mā piṇḍāya praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha.” § 31.27.26B2. nevāsikehi vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, āgametha sahitakā piṇḍāye praviś- iṣyāmaḥ”, tato sahitakehi praviśitavyaṃ § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he nāvā <mucyati> ...” tti § 31.31.26B5. tato yadi nevāsikānāṃ vyañjanāni bhavanti, khajjakāni bhavanti, ... § 31.32.26B6. nevāsikehi sarvvam ārocayitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmanto, amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. ...” § 31.35.27A2. nâpi kṣamati tehi nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho prayāto. gacchantu āyuṣmanto. gataṃ mārggasya śreyo.” § 32.1.27A4. so dāni āgantuko allīya tasya nevāsikasya pādāṃ vanda{n}ti § 32.3.27A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati āgantukena nevāsikasya vācovāciṃ karentasya pādāṃ 330  vandituṃ Uddāna (IV).30B4. evaṃ nevāsikehi pratipadyitavyaṃ Antaroddāna 50B2. āraṇyakā nevāsikā (lies: nivāsanaṃ?) ca pradīpo ca sapta varggāḥ prakāśitāḥ nairayika~ (BHS) “Höllenwesen” ⇒ niraya~ § 34.6.28B5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “ye kṣatriyā kuśalā bhavanti, prāg eva te nairayikā bhavantî”ti naỿva § 1.2.1B3. te pi navakā bhikṣū āhaṃsu “naỿva saṃghasthavirasya āgatiḥ prajñāyate na gatiḥ” (≒ § 1.3.1B3, § 4.2.4A7) § 26.9.23B2. atha dāni ... bhikṣu naỿva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, na mukhaṃ dhovati, ... § 41.1.33B3. naỿva karddamaṃ pariharanti na pāṃsu § 41.2.33B5. naỿva pāṃsu pariharatha na karddamaṃ § 47.1.40B3. naỿva dhūliṃ pariharanti § 49.1.42A1. naỿva eṣo pratibalo piṇḍāya aṇṭhituṃ et passim naivāta~# “windgeschützter Ort”; eine Vṛddhi-Form von Skt. nivāta (“windstill; windgeschützter Ort”) ☞ § 13.11, Anm. 2 ⇒ nivāte § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena opūriyanti, naivāte thapitavyāḥ naivāsika~ (BHS) “(im Kloster) ansässig(er Mönch)”; vgl. Deeg 2005a: 108f. ⇒ nivāsika~, nevāsika~ § 16.5.14A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati naivāsikehi ye vihārakā oddriṇṇakā ... te āgantukānāṃ sthāpayituṃ Uddāna (II).20A6. evaṃ naivāsikehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ no (1) “nein, keineswegs” ⇒ na § 1.1.1B1. āhaṃsu “no dīrghāyu” § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa no ca dakṣiṇām ādiśati, na parikathāṃ karoti § 2.1.2B1. āhaṃsu “no h’ etaṃ dīrghāyu” (= § 5.1.6A5, § 6.1.7A5) § 3.1.3A7. āhaṃsu “no hîdaṃ dīrghāyu” (= § 6.3.7A7) § 4.1.4A6. āhaṃsu “no h’ edaṃ dīrghāyu” § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi no parihāṇi.” no (2) (Pā) “uns”; < Skt. nas ⇒ ahaṃ, mo § 53.10.45B1. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ no (Hs. nau) karenti” tti nau~ ⇒ nāvā~ nau für no : § 53.10.45B1 nt / tt ⇒ tt / nt nt / nn : § 16.9.14B4. -śakunnakehi für -śakuntakehi; § 17.2.14B6. -śakunnehi für -śakuntehi nta / tu ⇒ tu / nta nti für tti : § 1.11.2A4, § 2.9.3A2, § 3.6.3B4, § 4.11.5A3, § 39.9.31A5, § 39.10.31A7, § 41.25.35B2, § 41.26.35B3, § 41.29.35B6, § 42.16.37A1, § 42.24.37B2, § 42.28.37B5, § 42.31.37B7, § 44.1.38B7, § 44.2.39A1, § 44.6.39A5, § 47.1.40B2, § 47.1.40B3, § 49.5.42B1 et passim nth / tth ⇒ tth / nth nd / ndh : § 32.2.27A6. vandhintasya für vandant° ndh / nd ⇒ nd / ndh nn / ṇ ⇒ ṇ / nn nn / ṇṇ ⇒ ṇṇ / nn nn / n ⇒ n / nn nn / nt ⇒ nt / nn nm / mm ⇒ sanm / samma ns / ts ⇒ ts / ns 331  P p / gh ⇒ gh / p p/j ⇒ j/p p/d ⇒ d/p p / dh ⇒ dh / p p / ph : § 62.6.50A2. piccakam für phicca° (= § 62.8.50A4) p/b: § 62.2.49B6. paddamuṣṭikāṃ für baddhamu° p/m: § 4.18.5B7. vastumālānāṃ für vastupālānāṃ § 13.15.12B6. omasvediko für opa° § 61.1.49A2. paṭapaṭāva für maṭamaṭāya p / y ⇒ allīpa- für allīya-, āllīpa- für āllīya-, lp / ly, pyeva / yyeva § 11.5.10B6. ohapiyante für ohayi°; § 12.3.11B1. ohapiyantāṃ für ohayi° (= § 17.3. 14B6); § 12.6.11B3. ohapiyanti für ohayi°; § 17.12.15A6. ohapiyanti für ohayi° § 7.1.8A6. dhipa für viya § 8.13.9B3. pattikāṃ für yatti° § 14.12.13B2. pratisaṃskāroyetavyā für °kārāpetavyā § 17.2.14B5. ullāpe für ullāye (= § 23.1.21A4, § 23.8.21B6) § 18.4.15B3. niyateya für nipateya § 18.29.16B5. ūrūpo für ūrūyo (= § 18.33.16B6, § 19.13.18A4) § 18.45.17A6. yatthesmiṃ für panthesmiṃ; § 18.45.17A6. yatthesmi für panthesmi § 18.51.17B1. upathayitavyā für upathapi° § 18.53.17B3. amanāyaṃ für °āpaṃ § 19.4.17B6. yatako für pa<ti>tako § 23.3.21A6. ullāpo für ulloyo (zweimal) § 25.5.22B3. yatitaṃ für pat° § 31.19.26A3. tāpe ārthāpe für tāye ārthāye § 34.3.28B3. allipitavyā für alliyi° § 34.5.28B5. kṣipādharmmam für kṣiyā° (= § 37.4.30A3) § 36.8.29B6. gṛhapatiyathā für °patiparṣā § 39.21.32A1. thātoyaliptāṃ für dhotôpaliptāṃ ☞ § 39.21(Text), Anm. 1 § 39.29.32A6. yaṃsetavyā für paṃs° § 40.10.33A3. yatraśākhāya für patraśākhāya § 40.11.33A4. yātavyaṃ für pātavyaṃ § 40.16.33B1. snāpituṃ für snāyituṃ (?) § 41.6.34A3. upānahā-yocchanno für u°-pocchano § 41.8.34A4. upānahā-yocchana-nattakaṃ für u°-pocchana-n° § 41.8.34A4. yocchito für p° § 41.8.34A4. yocchitaṃ für p° § 41.9.34A5 upānahā-yocchanakaṃ für upānahā-pocchanakaṃ (= § 41.24.35B1) § 41.16.34B6. dīyamūlaṃ für dīpamūlaṃ § 41.29.35B6. athātā yāṃ für adhvātā pā<dā>ṃ § 42.13.36B6. yathāyo für parṣāye |(Daṇḍa) § 42.25.37B3. snāpitukāmo für snāyitukāmo (?) § 48.1.41A3. māyāśrayā für sâpāśrayā § 62.2.49B5. kalāpā für kalāyā oder kalāyaṃ § 62.2.49B6. jighrāyenti für °āpenti p/v: § 28.8.24A4. anuvarivarttantena für anupariv° § 42.20.37A5. paṭṭiya für vaṭṭiya -p- > -v- ⇒ sthave- (< sthapayati) -p- < -v- ⇒ nir-ddhāpa- (< nir-1√dhāv), *ud-dhāpaya-(< *ud-dhāvaya-) p/ṣ: § 19.6.17B7. uṣpīḍito für uppīḍito § 23.6.1.21B3. tṛṣādakam für tṛpāda° § 39.26.32A3. parithapakena für pariveṣakena ☞ § 39.26(Text), Anm. 3 332  § 42.18.37A2. uṣāntake für upāntake § 43.11.38B1. sthaṣetavyaṃ für sthapetavyaṃ paṃsaya- (BHS), paṃse-# “schmähen”; AMg. paṃseï ☞ § 36.6, Anm. 1 § 36.6.29B4. nâpi dāni kṣamati kutsitum vā pansitum (Hs. patsi°) vā “gṛhapatikā nāma yūyaṃ tulākūṭamānakūṭehi divasaṃ lokaṃ muṣaṃtā āsatha.” § 37.5.30A3. nâpi kṣamati kutsitum vā paṃsitum vā “aśrāddhā tīrthikāḥ ...” § 39.29.32A6. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... divasaṃ yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha” pakka-kheṭa~# “eingetrockneter Schleim”; < pakva (“fest, eingetrocknet”) + kheṭa ☞ § 24.1, Anm. 2 § 24.1.22A1. adrākṣīd ... vihārakā<nā>ṃ pakkakheṭena vā pakkasiṃghāṇakena bhittīyo vināśitāyo siṃghāṇakavarttīhi lambantīhi § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo pakkakheṭena pakka- siṃghāṇakena varttīhi lambantīhi? pakka-siṃghāṇaka~# “eingetrockneter Nasenschleim”; < pakva + siṃghāṇaka ☞ § 24.1, Anm. 2 § 24.1.22A1. adrākṣīd ... vihārakā<nā>ṃ pakkakheṭena vā pakkasiṃghāṇakena bhittīyo vināśitāyo siṃghāṇakavarttīhi lambantīhi § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo pakkakheṭena pakka- siṃghāṇakena varttīhi lambantīhi? pakva~ “reif” § 25.4.22B3. nâpi kṣamati bilvasya vā pakvasya kapitthasya pakvasya nālikerasya heṣṭhe nirmmādayituṃ, mā pakvena vā bilvena pakvena vā kapitthena pakvena vā nālikereṇa bhaṃjeya tti pakviṭṭikā~# “gebrannter Ziegel, Backstein”; < pakva + iṣṭikā; vgl. Skt. pakveṣṭakā § 42.7.36B2. bhūmi astaritavyā upalehi vā pakviṭṭikāya (Hs. pakṣiṭṭikāya) vā pakṣa~ § 3.5.3B2. sarvvehi jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ khalv adya pakṣasya pratipadā dvitīyā yāvat pañcadaśī § 43.13.38B2. pakṣasya für pakṣa<vārika>sya pakṣacāriko für pakṣavāriko : § 3.5.3B3, § 5.6.6B3, § 6.6.7B3 pakṣa-vārika~# “ein Mönch, der einen halben Monat lang Dienst hat” ⇒ daśāha-vārika~, paṃcāha-vārika~, māsa-vārika~, vārika~ § 3.5.3B3. yo dāni bhavati māsavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) vā pakṣavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) tena ekam ekaṃ saṃsārayitavyaṃ devasikaṃ § 4.6.4B3. prakṛty’ eva māsavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) pakṣavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) vā preṣayitavyo ... (≒ § 6.6.7B3) § 5.6.6B3. dvitīyasthavireṇa aparejjukāye ’va māsavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) vā pakṣavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) vā preṣayitavyo § 43.4.38A4. māsavārikehi vā pakṣavārikehi vā kalpiyakāraṃ śabdāviya ... § 43.13.38B2. māsavārikasya vā pakṣa<vārika>sya vā adhīnaṃ bhavati § 43.14.38B2. māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko vā yācitavyo pakṣiṭṭikāya für pakviṭṭikāya : § 42.7.36B2 pakṣin~ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... prāṇakehi khajjantaṃ pakṣihi (Inst. pl.) ohayiyantaṃ § 11.5.10B5. śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... pakṣīhi vā oh<ay>iyantaṃ § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) prāṇakehi khādyati, pakṣīhi ohayiyate § 21.8.20B5. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... pakṣīhi vā ohayiyantaṃ √pac ⇒ pātra-pāka~ § 4.7.4B5. “bhikṣusaṃgho tena nimantrito. kiṃ sidhyati vā pacyati vā?” ... “kasya bhaktaṃ? kasya sidhyati? kasya pacyatî?”ti § 5.6.6B3. jānāhi kiṃ sidhyati, kiṃ pacyati § 5.7.6B4. kiṃ sidhyati vā kiṃ pacyati vā? ... na sidhyati na pacyati § 5.7.6B5. bhante etaṃ sidhyati, etaṃ pacyati (≒ § 6.7.7B5) 333  § 25.16.23A3. pātraṃ ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ dahitavyaṃ pacitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ (☞ § 25.16, Anm. 2) § 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ. “āyuṣman, kiṃ sidhyati? kiṃ pacyati? kiṃ bhaktakānāṃ sthitikā?” § 32.6.27B1. cīvaraṃ dhovantasya, rajanikā pacantasya, cīvarāṇi sīvantasya raṃjentasya ... § 39.5.31A3. grāmāntike śeyyāsane bhaktam pacyati pacana~ ⇒ nitya-pacana~ pañca~ ⇒ ṣaṭ-pañca~ § 1.6.1B5. saṃghasthavireṇa pañca sūtrāṇi (☞ § 1.6, Anm. 1) vistareṇa svādhyāyitavyāni § 7.4.8B1~2. ekato vinayaṃ na pārayati, pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa grāhayitavyo. pañca sūtrāṇi na pārayati, catvāri vā trīṇi duve ekaṃ sūtraṃ ... (≒ § 9.4.10A1) § 11.1.10B1. pañcârthavaśāṃ (= § 15.1.13B7, § 21.1.20A6, § 43.1.38A1 usw.) § 12.9.11B4. pañcehi aṅgehi samanvāgato bhikṣuḥ ... katamehi pañcahi? ... imehi pañcahi § 12.15.12A2. caturṇṇāṃ pañcānām vā janānāṃ eko vihārako uddiśitavyo pañcadaśī~ § 3.5.3B2. sarvvehi jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ khalv adya pakṣasya pratipadā dvitīyā yāvat pañcadaśī pañcadhā § 4.20.6A2. pañcadhā (Hs. °dho) manasi priyaṃ (Hs. prīyan) (vs) pañcama~ § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti Uddāna (V).39B3. pañcamo varggaḥ pañcavarṣika~ (BHS) “Pañcavarṣika-Fest” § 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. pañcavarṣikaṃ pravṛttaṃ. sārtho prayāto (Hs. yathā pāṭito)” § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he nāvā <mucyati> pañcavarṣika <pravṛttaṃ> ... (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti Pañcāla~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-Kośala-Kuru-Pañcāla-Ceti-Vatsa-Matsya-... pañcāha~ (°ñca-aha) § 13.14.12B6. pañcāhe pañcāhe śayyāsanaṃ pratyotāpetavyaṃ paṃcāha-vārika~# “ein Mönch, der fünf Tage lang Dienst hat” ⇒ daśāha-vārika~, pakṣa-vārika~, māsa-vārika~, vārika~ § 43.3.38A3. māsavāriko vā daśāhavāriko vā tatra uddiśitavyo paṃcāhavāriko vā pañcāhika~ (BHS[Mvu]) “jeden fünften Tag stattfindend” § 11.1.10B1. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānās tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanti anuvicaranti (= § 12.1.11A5, § 21.1.20A7; ≒ § 11.1.10B3, § 12.1.11A6) § 11.2.10B3. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanto anuvicaranto ... (= § 12.2.11A6, § 13.2.12A6, § 15.2.13B7, § 16.2.14A5, § 17.2.14B5, § 21.2.20A7, § 24.1.21B7, § 43.1.38A1; ≒ § 23.1.21A4) 1 √paṭ ⇒ pāṭaya-, pāṭita~, pāṭita-vipāṭita~, vi-pāṭita~ 2 √paṭ (< Skt. √pat) ⇒ ā-paṭita~, up-paṭa- paṭa~ (BHS, SWTF) “Stoff” § 48.5.41B1. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā kalantarako paṭa vā, tato niṣīditavyaṃ paṭaka~ “Stoff” § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti śāṭakā vā paṭakā vā hārā vā arddhahārā vā hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇam vā paṭapaṭāva für maṭamaṭāya : § 61.1.49A2 paṭalaka~ “Körbchen” § 43.1.38A2. ... māṇikaṃ caṃgeriyo śuṣyāyo paṭalakā{ṃ} paṭikā~ “Stoffstreifen” ⇒ paṭtikā~ 334 paṭiccha- (Pā) “annehmen”; < Skt. prati-√iṣ ⇒ praticcha-, pratīccha- § 40.13.33A5. apareṇa pānīyaghaṭikāṃ paṭicchantena cīvarāṃtarikāya vā patrāntarikāye vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ paṭipaṭikā~# “Reihe” ☞ § 18.8. Anm. 1 ⇒ paṭipāṭikā~ § 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo, navakānte paṭipaṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, eko vā dvayo vā trayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti § 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā. gomayapiṇḍikā vā paṭipaṭikāye sthapetavyā yathânupūrvveṇa gaccheya paṭipāṭikā~ (BHS) “Reihenfolge” ☞ § 18.8, Anm. 1 zur Wendung navakānte vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati ⇒ paṭipaṭikā~ § 4.7.4B6. sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāya piṇḍāya praviśitavyaṃ § 4.11.5A3. dāyakadānapati jalpanti “paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha” tti ... (≒ § 5.10.6B7) § 4.11.5A4. atha dāni grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, cire hi kālo atikramati, paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇitavyaṃ (≒ § 50.5.43B1) § 5.7.6B5. sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāya piṇḍāya caritavyaṃ § 5.10.7A1. oheyyaglānakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye piṇḍapāto gṛhṇitavyo (= § 6.10.8A1) § 6.7.7B5. yāva sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāye pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ § 6.10.8A1. bhante oheyyaglānakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye (Hs. °kāyo) piṇḍapātaṃ gṛhṇatha § 18.8.15B6. navakānte vā paṭipāṭ{ṭ}ikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, tena tāni kuṇḍakāni kālena kālaṃ pūrayitavyāni ... § 19.5.17B6. (das Pissoir) tailena mrakṣayitavyā navakāntena vā uddiṣṭakena vā paṭipāṭi- kāye{na} vā yasya vā prāpuṇeti § 19.19. kenâyaṃ nikkālayitavyo? navakāntena vā paṭipāṭi{pāṭi}kāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati § 26.7.23B1. upaviṣṭakānāṃ <paṭi>pāṭikāye dīyati, yathāvṛddhikāye gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 40.15.33A7. atha dāni paṭipāṭikāye dūredūraṃ prahāṇasya upaviṣṭā bhavanti, ekena vāretavyaṃ § 50.5.43A7. yadi tāva dāyakadānapati jalpanti “bhante, paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha”, ... § 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā, eko vā dvayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti, navakānto (Hs. °kāntena) vā paṭipāṭikāye vā yasya vā prāpuṇati § 54.2.46A1. <sā vārayitavyā> navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā punaḥ prāpuṇati § 55.2.46B4. so (= geṇḍuka~) vārayitavyo (Hs. cār°) navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā puna prāpuṇati paṭipāṭikāyo für °kāye : § 6.10.8A1 paṭi-sare- “Rücksicht nehmen” (vgl. BHSD, s.v. pratisarati [“attends to, pays attention to”]; Pā. paṭisarati [“to think back upon, to mention”] < Skt. prati-√smṛ) oder “laufen”; < Skt. prati- √sṛ (“laufen”)? ☞ § 4.8, Anm. 5 § 4.8.4B7. yadā sajjaṃ bhaveya, tato mā paṭisaresi paṭe (praśvāsapaṭe) für (praśvāsa-)ghaṭo : § 19.16.18A5 paṭṭa~ “Stoffstreifen” ⇒ cela-paṭṭa~ § 55.2.46B3. (geṇḍuka~ ...) bāhyena paṭṭena (od. pāśena; Hs. paṇena) nattakena veṣṭayitvā sūtrakena veṣṭayitavyo paṭṭikā~, paṭikā~ “Stoffstreifen”# ☞ § 11.8, Anm. 2 § 11.8.11A1. nâpi kṣamati ... paṭikām vā loḍḍhakam vā pratyāstaraṇaṃ karttuṃ § 12.10.11B6. ettakaṃ prāvaraṇaṃ tato likhitavyaṃ bhurjake phalake vā paṭṭikāyām vā § 42.14.36B7. snāyantena cīvarakaṃ sāharitvā ekasthāne sthavitavyaṃ loḍhikena vā paṭikāya vā § 44.4.39A2. tato paṭṭikāye vā loḍhakena vā rejjukāye vā bandhitavyāni paṭṭiya für vaṭṭiya : § 42.20.37A5 paṭhantasya für paca° : § 32.6.27B1 paṭhayanti für ṭhapayanti : § 41.5.34A2 paṇena für paṭṭena oder pāśena : § 55.2.46B3 paṇḍaka~ “Einer, der mit einem (psychischen oder physischen) sexuellen Defekt versehen ist; ein Impotenter” ☞ § 8.7, Anm. 5 335  § 8.7.9A4. asukāto veśikākulāto caṃḍavidhavāye sthūlakumārīye paṇḍakasya asukāye bhikṣuṇīye § 52.6.44B5. (praṇītabhojana~ ...) asukāye caṇḍavidhavāye dinnaṃ. asukena paṇḍakena dinnaṃ. asukāye sthūlakumārīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpabhikṣuṇīye dinnaṃ ... paṇḍara-vipāṇḍara~# “ganz weiß”; vgl. Skt. pāṇḍara~, Pā. paṇḍara § 48.7.41B2. na kṣamati sāpāśrayaṃ vā upāśrayam vā omayilomayilaṃ vā paṇḍara{ṃ}- vipāṇḍaraṃ (eine Verschreibung von pāṭita-vipāṭitam “zerrissen”?) apāśrayituṃ paṇḍita~ § 4.18.5B7. yasmiṃ pradeśe medhāvī vāsaṃ kalpeti paṇḍito (vs) √pat ⇒ ā-paṭita~, up-paṭa-, patitaka~, pātaya-, saṃ-ni-√pat, *saṃpatitaka~ § 18.7.15B6. kiñ câpi tahi yyeva udakaṃ patati, anāpattiḥ § 25.5.22B3. nâpi kṣamati dariniśritena vā pātraṃ nirmmādayituṃ, mā patitaṃ bhañjeya tti § 39.20.31B7. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, ... jānitavyaṃ, anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparo<dho> vā bhave corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ, yathā nâgacchantîti § 44.1.38B6~7. sa cīvaraṃ cīvaravaṃśāto kṛṣiyāṇaṃ patito. evaṃ bhūmīye patito (Nom. sg. neut.) § 44.6.39A4. ekaṃ dvitīyaṃ vā tṛtīyam vā kṛṣiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ patitaṃ patānī~ ⇒ dāna-patānī~ patitaka~ (Pā) “niedergefallen”; patita + Suffix ka § 19.4.17B6. tathā samantena setuḥ karttavyo, yathā pa<ti>tako yeva praśvāsako bāhyena nirggacchati pativratānugā für vratānugā : § 4.17.5B4 patīnāṃ (dāna-patīnāṃ) für *°patānīṃ? (Metathese der Vokale) : § 33.11.28A4 pattikāṃ für yattikāṃ : § 8.13.9B3 pattī~ (< Skt. patnī) ⇒ dāna-pattī~ patthaliddrak~# “Asche”? ☞ § 24.3, Anm. 5 ⇒ pantholi~ § 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya vālikāye vā pāṣāṇasya vā patthaliddrakānāṃ vā pūrayitavyaṃ pattholiṃ für *pantholiṃ? : § 23.4.4.21B1 patra~ “Blätter” § 40.14.33A6. jentāke vārentena oṣṭhā pānīyadhārikāye (?; Hs. pānīyacārikāye) pātraṃ (wohl für patraṃ) bandhitavyaṃ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... vikṣuṇṇam vā pātraṃ (wohl für patraṃ) gṛhṇituṃ patra-rasa~# “Saft von Blättern” § 25.3.22B3. (pātraṃ ...) mūlarasena vā patrarasena vā puṣparasena vā nirvvālikena vā gomayena nirmmādayitavyaṃ patra-śākhā~# “Blätter und Zweige” § 40.10.33A3. prakṣālayitvā patraśākhāya (Hs. yatraś°) vā <nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ> § 40.14.33A6. pibantena oṣṭhā patraśākhāye nirmmādayitvā agroṣṭhakehi pātavyaṃ § 40.15.33A6. bhājanāni patraśākhāhi (Hs. yatraś°) sthapitavyāni § 47.5.40B7. patraśākhāya vā tṛṇakehi vā pādā jaṃghā <ca> prasphoṭitvā ... patrāntarikā~# (patra-an°) wörtl. “zwischen Baumblättern” oder “in Baumblättern”; < Skt. pattra + antarikā ☞ § 40.13, Anm. 3 ⇒ cīvarāntarikā~ § 40.13.33A5. apareṇa pānīyaghaṭikāṃ paṭicchantena cīvarāṃtarikāya vā patrāntarikāye (Hs. pātrā°) vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ patsitum für pansitum bzw. paṃsitum : § 36.6.29B4 patha~ ⇒ jaṃghā-patha~, darśana-patha~, darśana-śravaṇa-patha~, vāta-patha~ pathikā~ ⇒ śiva-pathikā~ pathy-adana~ (Skt) “Wegzehrung”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. § 31.37.27A3. teṣāṃ gacchamānānāṃ pathyadanena vaikalpaṃ karttavyaṃ √pad ⇒ ā-√pad, ut-padya-, ut-pādaya-, upa-saṃ-pāde-, nava-pratipanna~, prati-padya-, prati- panna~, sam-ā-panna~, saṃ-pādaya- 336 pada~ ⇒ pāda~ § 28.5.24A4. atha khalu dve trayo vā padāni <ni>hīnakena caṃkramitavyaṃ paddamuṣṭikāṃ für baddhamu° : § 62.2.49B6 padma~ “Lotus” § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... lābhāgrayaśograprāpto, lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātaśayyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārāṇāṃ tatra ca anupaliptaḥ padmam iva jalena panīyaṃ für pānīyaṃ: § 40.8.33A1 pantha~ (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “Weg”; vgl. Skt. panthan ⇒ adhvan~, mārgga~ § 18.45.17A6. nâpi kṣamati panthesmiṃ (Hs. yatthe°) uśvāsaṃ karttuṃ § 18.45.17A6. mā odhyāyeṃsu “ken’ imaṃhi panthesmi (Hs. yatthe°) antrāṇi vikīrṇṇāni?” § 19.37.19A1. nâpi kṣamati panthesmiṃ praśvāsaṃ karttuṃ § 19.37.19A1. kena imaṃhi panthe praśvāso kṛto rudhiraṃ viya cchanditaṃ? § 19.37.19A2. atha khalu ekānte praśvāso karttavyo. panthāto ussariya ekānte karttavyaṃ § 49.7.42B6. panthe paśyati, panthāto nivarttitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B6. nīhārakapiṇḍapātena hastā nirmmādiyāṇaṃ pānīyasya kuṇḍikāṃ pūriyāṇaṃ panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ. yatra yeva taṃ paśyati, tatra yeva panthāto uvvattiyāṇaṃ sahitakehi bhuñjitavyaṃ *pantholi~? “Staub”? ☞ § 23.4.4, Anm. 1 ⇒ patthaliddrak~ § 23.4.4.21B1. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ caṃkrama<ṃ> caṃkramituṃ pantholiṃ (Hs. pattho°) dhunantena § 23.4.4.21B2. atha khalu samantena caṃkramitavyaṃ, na paṃtholi<ṃ> (Hs. paṃboli) uddhāpayantena paṃboli für *paṃtholi? : § 23.4.4.21B2 payasu für phāsu: § 42.1.36A2 payasukhañ für phāsukañ : § 34.6.28B6 ☞ § 34.6(Text), Anm. 3 para~ § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “ ... duṣkaraṃ pravivekena dur- abhiramaṃ ekaṃ paraṃ rātri vinayamāno mānasaṃ ādhyātmaṃ vê”ti § 42.23.37B1. na kṣamati ātmano cīvarāṇi gṛhṇitvā parasya cīvarehi samākulīkṛtvā sthapetuṃ para-keraka~ (BHS) “eines anderen”; < para-*kāryaka; vgl. BHSD, s.v. -keraka (“belonging to”) ☞ § 18.53, Anm. 5 § 18.53.17B3. atha dāni parakerako uccāro bhavati, pratigrahāpayitavyo para-pratibaddha~ (SWTF) “von anderen abhängig”; vgl. Pā. para-paṭibaddha ☞ § 62.4, Anm. 6 § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto parapratibaddhāye jīvikāye ... paramaṃ “höchstens” § 25.11.22B7. atha khalu paramaṃ trayo pātrāṇi gṛhṇitavyāni. ekahastena dve gṛhṇitavyāḥ, apareṇa dāni ekaṃ parāṅ-mukhena “mit abgewandtem Gesicht” § 18.23.16B2. iminā ca parāṅmukhena bhavitavyaṃ. tasya câvakāśo dātavyaḥ. tena ca parāṅmukhena upaviśitavyaṃ antaraṃ dātavyaḥ § 18.44.17A5. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena purato parāṅmukhena sthātavyaṃ § 19.36.19A1. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena pṛṣṭhato sthātavyaṃ parāṅmukhena parā-√mṛś § 4.10.5A2. atha khalu hastena parā{ṃ}mṛśiyāṇa jānitavyaṃ parāhṇa~ ⇒ *atiparahṇe pari / prati ⇒ kiṃkara-pariśrāvaka~ parikathā “Predigt” ☞ § 1.2, Anm. 2 § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa no ca dakṣiṇām ādiśati, na parikathāṃ karoti § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ... ko dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśiṣyati, ko parikathāṃ kariṣyati (≒ § 2.7.2B7, § 3.8.3B6) § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ prātimokṣasūtram uddiśesi” “tvaṃ bhāṣesi” “tvaṃ parikathāṃ karesi” 337  § 2.7.2B7. tvaṃ parikathāṃ kārayesi (Hs. °yasi) § 2.9.3A2. parikathā karttavyā § 3.8.3B7. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati so adhyeṣitavyo: ... “tvaṃ parikathāṃ kārayesi” § 4.2.4A6. so dāṇi paścād āgacchiyāṇa bhuṃjiyāṇa saṃkṣiptena dakṣiṇām ādiśiya na parikathāṃ karoti § 4.13.5A7. parikathā karttavyā, dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā § 52.6.44B6. asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno parikarmma “herum, rund” (?) ⇒ abhyantara-parikarmma parikarmman~ ⇒ kṛta-parikarmman~, cella-parikarmman~ § 42.16.37A1. tasya tāva parikarmma karttavyaṃ § 42.16.37A2. asukasya vā asukasya vā parikarmma kuryesi § 42.18.37A2. parikramma karentehi ... § 42.18.37A3. na snāne navapratipannena vā parikarmma karttavyaṃ § 42.18.37A3. parikarmma karentena na ... bāhā prasāretavyā § 42.18.37A3. apareṇa parikarmma kārayitavyaṃ § 42.22.37A7. na kṣamati abhyavakāśe nagnasya nagnena parikarmma karttuṃ pari-gṛhṇā-, pari-gṛhṇa- (BHS; BHSG, S. 210b), pari-gṛhīta~ § 4.12.5A4. bhojanaṃ dīyati, mahanto piṇḍo parigṛhīto bhavati, ... § 39.26.32A4. grāmāntikānāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ piṇḍapātaṃ parigṛhṇatha (Hs.°gṛhna°) § 40.13.33A5. ekinā hastena pānīyaṃ parigṛhṇitavyaṃ parigraha~ § 4.18.5B7. śirīyĕ lakṣmī<yĕ>(?) parigraheṇa ca (vs) pari-ghaṭṭa-# “verriegeln” ☞ § 40.1, Anm. 3 § 40.1.32B2. pānīyamaṇḍapaṃ parighaṭṭiya tāpitamudritaṃ kariya gocaraṃ praviṣṭāḥ paricaryā~ ⇒ kāya-paricaryā~ pari-jānā- (pari-√jñā) § 31.4.25B4. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ, mā dāni adarśanena parijāne (Opt.) “hṛtaṃ, hṛtaṃ me pātracīvaram” iti gacchantasya karttavyaṃ parijñātaka~# “bekannt”; Skt. pari-jñāta + Suffix ka § 32.1.27A4. tasya dāni aparo bhikṣuḥ vṛddhatarako parijñātako bhavati § 32.4.27A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu āgantuko āgato bhavati, tasya koci bhikṣu parijñātako bhavati, ... paritta~ “anvertraut”# ☞ § 4.11, Anm. 3 ⇒ parītta~, parinda-, anu-parinda- § 4.11.5A3. bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno paritto pari-tyakta~ § 14.4.13A3. “kiṃ vayaṃ parityaktāḥ?” “kissa vayaṃ vasāmaḥ?” parityāga~ ⇒ gṛhi-liṅga-parityāga~ parithapakena für pariveṣakena : § 39.26.32A3 ☞ § 39.26(Text), Anm. 3 paridito für parindito : § 50.5.43A7 paridhovaniya~# “Waschwasser (für die Füße)” ☞ § 40.7, Anm. 2 ⇒ paridhovanīya~, pāridhovanikā~, pāridhovanya~, pāda-dhovanīya~ Uddāna (V).39B2. evaṃ paridhovaniye pratipadyitavyaṃ; vgl. § 40.3.32B4. evaṃ pāda- dhovanīye pratipadyitavyaṃ paridhovanīya~# “Waschwasser (für die Füße) betreffend” ☞ § 40.7, Anm. 2 ⇒ paridhovaniya~, pāridhovanikā~, pāridhovanya~, pāda-dhovanīya~ § 40.7.32B7. paridhovanīyena (Hs. parivodhan°) pānīyena śirikuṇḍikā pūrayitavyā parininditā für parinditā : § 31.37.27A3 pari-nir-vvā- “ins Nirvāṇa eingehen”☞ § 4.16, Anm. 6 § 4.16.5B3. apare mārggam bhāvayitvā parinirvvānti anāśravā (vs) parinda- (BHS) “anvertrauen”; vgl. BHSG, S. 220. parinda-ti, parīnda-ti; BHSD, s.v. parindāmi ☞ § 4.11, Anm. 3 ⇒ paritta~, parītta~, anu-parinda- § 6.10.8A1. bhagavatā ca anekaparyāyeṇa glāno parindito § 50.5.43A7. bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno pari<ṃ>dito 338  § 14.18.13B6. ye tatra prativeśikā bhavanti, teṣām anuparinditavyaṃ “dīrghāyu, eṣo vihārako tumhāṇaṃ anuparindito bhavatu. ...” evaṃ parindiya gantavyaṃ § 31.37.27A3. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāptaṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, yadi koci sārtho prayāto bhavati, te bhikṣu vāṇijakasya sārthavāhasya parinditavyā, vaktavyaṃ “upāsaka, dānapati, ime bhikṣavo tvayā sārddhaṃ gamiṣyanti. ime bhikṣu tava pari{ni}nditā bhavantu.” pari-pūraya~ “füllen; verstopfen” ⇒ pūraya- § 13.9.12B3. udakabhramā vā praṇālibhramā vā paripūritā bhavanti, śodhayitavyāḥ § 17.6.15A1. anyehi khāṇukā viśālikā vā piṇḍakā vā paripūriya dātavyā § 50.8.43B4. pānīyaṃ parisrāvayitavyaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ paripūriyāṇaṃ ... pari-√pṛcch § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati paripṛcchitavyā “kim vasiṣyatha atha gamiṣyatha?” § 8.12.9B2. sukhaṃ pratikramāpayitavyaṃ, uddiśitvā vā paripṛcchitvā vā pari-prāpaya- (BHS) “erfüllen” ⇒ pari-prāpta~ § 31.36.27A2. yadi tāva stūpikena vā kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, stūpikaṃ kāryaṃ pari- prāpayitavyaṃ. sāṃghikena kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, sāṃghikaṃ kāryaṃ pari- prāpayitavyaṃ pari-prāpta~ (BHS) “erfüllt”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. pariprāpayati ⇒ pari-prāpaya- § 31.37.27A2. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāpta<ṃ> kāryaṃ bhavati, ... paribhāṇḍa~ “das Verputzen”; vgl. PTSD, s.v. paribhaṇḍa (“a plastered flooring”) ☞ § 14.5, Anm. 3 § 14.5.13A5. gomayaśāṭo dātavyo, paribhāṇḍaṃ karttavyaṃ, śvetavarṇṇā dātavyā pari-√bhuj, pari-bhuñja ⇒ √bhuj § 11.4.10B5. yūyaṃ apratyāstaraṇakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ paribhuṃjatha § 11.7.10B7. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ evam eva paribhuṃjituṃ ... § 11.12.11A3. nâpi kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ paudgalikaparibhogena paribhuñjituṃ. ... pratyāstaraṇaṃ dadiya tato paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 18.19.16A6. nâpi ... kṣamati akṛtvā udakakṛtyaṃ sāṃghikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ paribhuñjituṃ § 26.10.23B3. yaṃ kālaṃ praticchitā bhavati, tato paribhuñjitavyā § 44.6.39A5. taṃ cīvarakaṃ yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati, tato paribhuñjayitavyaṃ § 49.9.43A1. yathā yeva agrāsanaṃ agrodakaṃ agrapiṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjasi, ... § 50.7.43B4. atha paśyati “upakaṭṭho kālo antāntiko. na śakyaṃ sakāle saṃbhāvayituṃ. mā dāni ubhaye cchinnabhaktā bhaviṣyāma”, tena paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 52.5.44B4. atha dāni upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā piṇḍapātako bhavati, ayaṃ ca piṇḍāya caritvā āgato bhavati, sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 52.6.44B4. āha “upādhyāyācārya, paribhuṃjāhi” tti § 52.7.44B6~7. atha dāni āha “upādhyāyācārya, bhuñjāhi”, yadi tāva <kāṃkṣati>, paribhuñjitavyaṃ. atha dāni na kāṃkṣati, vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, paribhu<ṃ>jāhi tvaṃ. nâhaṃ paribhuñjiṣyan.” ti. yaṃ kālaṃ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā anujñā dinnā bhavati, tato paribhuñjitavyaṃ paribhoga~ ⇒ paudgalika-paribhoga~, yathāsukha-paribhoga~, rikta-paribhoga~, bhoga~ § 12.14.12A2. {grīṣme śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ...} § 12.17.12A4. hemante śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ pari-makṣita~ ⇒ makṣita-parimakṣita~ parimaṇḍala~ “vollständig; rund” § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) parima<ṇḍa>laṃ (“rund”) vā caturasraṃ vā nicitavyā § 47.6.40B7. parimaṇḍalaṃ cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā antaragharaṃ praviśitavyaṃ pari-marda- “reiben, pressen” § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgacchati, hastena grīvā parimarditavyā § 59.4.48A7~48B1. atha dāni bhikṣusya anābhogena kṣīvikā āgacchati vinodayitavyaṃ, nirālaṃ parimarditavyaṃ, nakkā vā parimarditavyā § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni bhikṣusya koci pradeśo khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā parimardditavyaṃ § 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... vinodetavyā ni{la}lāṭam vā parimarditavyaṃ, nāsā vā parimarditavyā 339 pari-marddita~ ⇒ marddita-parimarddita~ parimalaṃ für parimaṇḍalaṃ : § 18.4.15B3 pari-mārja-, pari-mārjaya- ⇒ √mṛj § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako caukṣasamudācāro bhājanaṃ gṛhṇiya parimārjiya ... pariyo# Bedeutung? § 43.1.38A2. ... droṇīyo [ḍa]ddhāyo pariyo (od. ’pariyo?) bhaktapīṭhikā māṇikaṃ ... pari-varja-# “meiden, vermeiden, herumgehen” (= pari-varjaya-) ⇒ pari-varjaya-, varja- § 4.10.5A1~2. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjantehi kāṃsabhājanaṃ parivarjantehi dāraka- dārikāṃ {sa} parivarjantehi praviśitavyaṃ; vgl. § 5.9.6B6. bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjayantehi yāva dārakadārikāṃ parivarjayantehi praviśitavyaṃ § 4.17.5B5. asatiṃ parivarjeyā mārggaṃ pratibhayaṃ yathā (vs) § 41.31.35B7. dhūlī parivarjantena gantavyaṃ § 47.7.41A1. parivarjitavyā bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā hasti ... § 47.7.41A1. kaṇṭakaśākhā parivarjantena sudhāpāṇḍulepanāyo <bhittīḥ> parivarjantena praviśitavyaṃ pari-varjaya- ⇒ pari-varja-, varjaya- § 5.9.6B6. bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjayantehi yāva dārakadārikāṃ parivarjayantehi praviśi- tavyaṃ; vgl. § 4.10.5A1~2. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjantehi kāṃsabhājanaṃ parivarjantehi dārakadārikāṃ {sa} parivarjantehi praviśitavyaṃ; § 6.9.7B6. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ pariharantehi dārakadārikāṃ pariharantehi praviśi-tavyaṃ pari-vartta- “sich umdrehen” § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohanati, ... parivarttiyāṇaṃ bhūyo nidhyāyati, jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati”, gantavyaṃ § 51.8.44A4. atha dāni parivarttiya nidhyāyati, jānitavyaṃ “eṣā na dāsyatî”ti parivarttakaṃ# “sich umdrehend”; vgl. Skt. parivartaka ☞ § 30.7, Anm. 2; § 30.9, Anm. 1 ⇒ pallaṭṭa- § 30.7.25A4. nâpi dāni parivarttakaṃ yāvat sūryodgamanāt tato śayitavyaṃ parivarttitaṃ für <anu>parivarttituṃ : § 28.8.24A5 parivāra~ § 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako śreṣṭhinā saparivāreṇa gatena ... rakṣamāṇo āsati pari-√viṣ (BHS) “dienen”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. pariviṣati; BHSG, S. 231a, s.v. viṣ; Pā. parivisati § 4.1.4A6. gacchāma samagraṃ bhikṣusaṃghaṃ pariviṣiṣyāmaḥ (Hs. pariviśi°) (≒ § 5.3. 6A7, § 6.1.7A5) § 5.1.6A5. gacchāma samagraṃ bhikṣusaṃghaṃ pariviṣiṣyāma (Hs. pariviśi°) (= § 6.3. 7A7) pariveṇa~ (BHS, Pā) “Mönchszelle” ☞ § 2.10, Anm. 1, § 12.10, Anm. 4 § 2.10.3A3~4. dūradūre vā pariveṇā bhavanti ... na dūradūre pariveṇā bhavanti § 3.11.4A3. na dūradūre vā pariveṇā bhavanti § 12.8.11B4. yaṃ tahiṃ pariveṇe bhavati bhaṇḍaṃ niyatakaṃ sarvvaṃ samudānitavyaṃ § 12.10.11B5. vihārā pariveṇā agniśālā bhaktaśālā upasthānaśālā ... grāhayitavyā § 12.11.11B6. yadi tāva āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, dūre dūre pariveṇā bhavaṃti, ... atha dāni grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, āsanne āsanne pariveṇā bhavanti pariveṇika~# (1) “in Zellen wohnende Mönche betreffend” ⇒ pāriveṇika~ § 4.5.4B2. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ kasyâdya bhaktaṃ ubhayato sāṃghikaṃ sarvva{ṃ}sāṃghikaṃ pariveṇikaṃ pāṭiya<kaṃ> bhaktaṃ grāme vihāre § 26.3.23A6. kim ayaṃ yavāgū ubhayato sāṃghikā parṣāye pariveṇikā nimantritikā{yāṃ} § 26.3.23A7. (yavāgū ...) pariveṇikā bhavati, tehi pariveṇikehi gantavyaṃ § 42.13.36B6. atha dāni pariveṇiko bhavati, ye tasmiṃ pariveṇikā saṃti tehi gantavyaṃ § 42.24.37B1. jānitavyaṃ: kim ayaṃ jentāko ekato sāṃghiko parṣāyaṃ pariveṇiko nimantritakānāṃ § 42.24.37B2. pariveṇiko bhavati, pariveṇikena gantavyaṃ (2) “ein in einer Zelle wohnender Mönch” ⇒ pāriveṇika~ § 26.3.23A7. (yavāgū ...) pariveṇikā bhavati, tehi pariveṇikehi gantavyaṃ 340  § 42.13.36B6. atha dāni pariveṇiko bhavati, ye tasmiṃ pariveṇikā saṃti tehi gantavyaṃ § 42.24.37B2. pariveṇiko bhavati, pariveṇikena gantavyaṃ pariveśaka~ (Skt), pariveṣaka~ (Skt) “jemand, der die Speisen hereinbringt; Aufträger von Speisen”; vgl. Pā. parivesaka § 39.14.31B2. pariveśakena (Hs. °veśāvakena) pṛcchitavyaṃ “ko āraṇyakānāṃ lābha- grāh<ak>o?” § 39.26.32A3. pariveṣakena (Hs. parithapak°) vaktavyaṃ “ko grāmāntikānāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ lābhagrāhī?” § 39.26.32A4. atha dāni teṣāṃ na koci lābhagrāhako bhavati, pariveṣakena sarvveṣāṃ ekasthāne piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo pariveśāpayitavyo für pariveṣāpayitavyo : § 43.3.38A3 pariveśāvakena wohl für pariveśakena : § 39.14.31B2 ☞ § 39.14(Text), Anm. 1 pariveṣaka~ ⇒ pariveśaka- pari-veṣāpaya- (BHS[BHSG, S. 231b]) “dienen” § 43.3.38A3. tena saṃghasya anugraho sādhayitavyo, bhikṣusaṃgho pariveṣāpayitavyo (Hs. pariveśāp°) pariśaṅkiya~ ⇒ uśśaṃkiya-pariśaṅkiya~ pariśuṣka~ ⇒ śuṣka~ § 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... yaṃ kālaṃ pariśuṣkāni bhavanti, tato pūretavyāni pariśrāvaka~ ⇒ kiṃkara-pariśrāvaka~ pariśrāvaṇa~ (BHS) “Wasserfilter”; vgl. BHS. parisrāvaṇa, Pā. parissāvana ⇒ pātra-pariśrāvaṇa~, pari-srāvaya- § 43.9.38A7. ete bhavanti vastrābharaṇakā vā pariśrāvaṇā vā caturasrakā vā sāharitvā ... pari-śrāvaya-# “filtern” ⇒ pari-srāvaya- pariṣkāra~ ⇒ cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śeyyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~, jīvita-pariṣkāra~ pari-srāvaya~ (BHS), pari-śrāvaya~# “fließen lassen; filtern”; Kaus. von Skt. pari-√sru; vgl. BHSD, s.vv. parisrāvaṇa, parisrāvita; Pā. parissāveti § 18.53.17B3. (parakerako uccāro) ... udakena accāviya (für *alloḍiya?) ghanena narttakena parisrāviya (“aufgesaugt hat” ☞ § 18.53, Anm. 8), ... § 39.11.31A7. atha dāni āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñapti karttavyā § 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñaptiḥ karttavyā, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, puṣpaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, ... § 40.1.32B2. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya ... ( = § 40.4.32B5) § 40.5.32B5. tehi kalyata eva utthiya hastāṃ nirmmādiya pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya ... § 40.7.32B7. anyaṃ pibanāye pānīyaṃ bhavati anyaṃ pādadhovanīyaṃ pariśrāvitavyaṃ § 50.8.43B4. hastā nirmmādayitavyā, pānīyaṃ parisrāvayitavyaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ pari- pūriyāṇaṃ ... pari-hara- § 6.9.7B6. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ pariharantehi dārakadārikāṃ pariharantehi praviśi- tavyaṃ; vgl. § 4.10.5A1~2. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjantehi kāṃsabhājanaṃ parivarjantehi dārakadārikāṃ {sa} parivarjantehi praviśitavyaṃ; § 5.9.6B6. bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjayantehi yāva dārakadārikāṃ parivarjayantehi praviśitavyaṃ § 17.6.15A2. anyehi lippitavyaṃ, anyehi majjitavyaṃ, anyehi udakaṃ pariharitavyaṃ § 17.6.15A1. anyehi khāṇukā ... paripūriya dātavyā, anyehi pariharitavyaṃ § 17.8.15A3. anyehi udakaḥ pariharitavyaḥ, anye<hi> mṛttikā pariharttavyā § 17.9.15A3~4. śarkaroṭakā vā apakkapāṃsuko vā pariharitavyo ākoṭayitavyo .... anyair ggomaya pariharttavyaḥ, anyair udakaṃ pariharttavyaḥ § 17.10.15A5. anyehi udakaṃ pariharttavyaṃ, anyehi kṣāraṃ ānayitavyaṃ § 41.1.33B3. naỿva karddamaṃ pariharanti na pāṃsu § 41.2.33B5. naỿva pāṃsu pariharatha na karddamaṃ § 47.1.40B3. naỿva dhūliṃ pariharanti, na kardamaṃ pariharanti parihāṇi “Abnahme” § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni 341  adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi no parihāṇi.” parītta~ “anvertraut” ☞ § 4.11, Anm. 3 ⇒ paritta~, parinda-, anu-parinda- § 5.10.7A1. bhagavatânekaparyāyeṇa glāno parītto paryaṅka~ ⇒ arddha-paryaṅka~, uṣṭra-paryaṅka~, svastika-paryaṅka~ § 12.16.12A4. navakehi parya<ṃke>na vītināmayitavyaṃ § 29.4.24B1. atha dāni bhikṣu paryaṅkena niṣaṇṇo bhavati, śrānto bhavati, parvvāṇi āmilāyanti, nâpi kṣamati ubhayāni sandhī maṭamaṭāye prasārituṃ § 30.8.25A4. rātrīye paścime yāme paryaṅkena vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktena sthānacaṃkramānuyuktena vā § 57.7.47B5. niṣīdanaṃ prajñapayitvā upānahāyo nikkhāsitvā paryaṃkena niṣīditavyaṃ paryanta~ ⇒ kāla-paryantaṃ § 12.12.12A1. tato vihārakā uddiśitavyāḥ, vṛddhāntato prabhṛti yāva avarṣaka-paryantaṃ paryā~ für parṣā~ : § 20.4.19A7, § 26.3.23A6, 7, § 34.1.28A7, § 34.2.28B2, § 34.3.28B3, § 34.4. 28B4, § 35.1.28B7, § 37.1.29B7, § 38.2.30A5, § 42.13.36B6 paryādāna~ (BHS) “Ende, Verschwinden” ☞ § 24.11, Anm. 2 § 24.11.22A6. cchorantako yyeva paryādānaṃ gacchati. kiṃ câpi na marddati, anāpattiḥ pary-āpta~ § 12.14.12A2. tahi koci bhavati āṭakkarasiṃhanādiko “paryāpto. ... ko vihārako?” ti § 18.13.16A2. kumbhikāyaṃ ekasya paryāptaṃ (Hs. °āstaṃ) bhaveyā, tattakaṃ dātavyaṃ paryāya~ ⇒ aneka-paryāyeṇa § 23.5.21B2. atha dāni madhya<mako vihāra>ko bhavati, madhyamake pi eṣo eva paryāyo ananyo adhikṛto paryāstaṃ für °āptaṃ : § 18.13.16A2 paryethamāṇasya für paryeṣamāṇasya : § 49.7.42B6 -paryeptiṃ für -paryeṣṭiṃ : § 49.7.42B6 pary-eṣa- (BHS) “suchen, begehren”; vgl. Pā. pariyesati § 4.7.4B6. svakasvakāṃ vṛttiṃ paryeṣatha (= § 5.7.6B5) § 39.17.31B5. nâpi dāni āraṇyakehi grāmāntikā kutsetavyā “bahukṛtyā bahukaraṇīyā jihvāgre<na> yūyaṃ rasāgrāṇi paryeṣatha” § 49.7.42B6. bhikṣusya ātmano āhāraparyeṣṭiṃ paryeṣamāṇasya (Hs. paryetha°) vikālo bhavati paryeṣṭi~ ⇒ āhāra-paryeṣṭi~ parvvata~ § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo ... (= § 28.1.24A1; ≒ § 27.2.23B5, § 28.2.24A2) parvvan~ § 29.4.24B2. atha dāni bhikṣu paryaṅkena niṣaṇṇo bhavati, śrānto bhavati, parvvāṇi (Hs. garbhāni) āmilāyanti, nâpi kṣamati ubhayāni sandhī maṭamaṭāye prasārituṃ parṣā~ (1) (BHS) “Versammlung” ⇒ asma-parṣā~, ārya-parṣā~, kṣatriya-parṣā~, gṛhapati-parṣā~, tīrthika-parṣā~, brāhmaṇa-parṣā~, bhikṣu-parṣā~ (2) “eine Gruppe von mehreren Mönchen/Nonnen”# (ein gegensätzlicher Begriff zu saṃgha und pāriveṇika) ☞ § 26.3, Anm. 1 ⇒ pārṣikā~ § 26.3.23A6. kim ayaṃ yavāgū ubhayato sāṃghikā parṣāye pariveṇikā nimantritikā{yāṃ} § 26.3.23A7. (yavāgū ...) pārṣikā bhavati, tāye parṣāye gantavyaṃ § 42.13.36B6. jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ eṣo jentāko sarvvasāṃghiko pāriveṇiko parṣāye (Hs. yathāyo) § 42.13.36B6. yadi tāva parṣāye (Hs. paryāye) bhavati, ye tahiṃ parṣāye (Hs. paryāye) tehi (Hs. tahiṃ) gantavyaṃ § 42.24.37B1. jānitavyaṃ: kim ayaṃ jentāko ekato sāṃghiko parṣāyaṃ (Gen. sg.) pariveṇiko nimantritakānāṃ § 42.24.37B2. atha dāni parṣāye bhavati, tehi gantavyaṃ palāla~ “Stroh” § 55.2.46B3. geṇḍukaṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyo tṛṇānām vā 342  palālānām vā leṅka<ṭa>kakhaṇḍakānām vā sūtrasya vā uṇṇāya vā palikhāṭi~# “Stummel (des Dochtes)”? § 53.15.45B5. yadi dīpavartti dagdhikā bhavati, palikhāṭir vvā okaḍḍhitavyo paliguddhaka~# “beschäftigt” ☞ § 31.33, Anm. 4 § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni ... bhikṣū ca paliguddhakā bhavanti, cchādanikā vā lepanikā vā karenti, kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ palīnak~# eine Art Gefäß? § 43.6.38A5. ... taṭṭukā vā caṣakā vā palīnakā vā {palīnakā vā} nirmmāditā kārāpiya ... paluggaka~#, palugnaka~#, paluggikā~# “zerbrochen”; vgl. BHS. pralugna; Pā. palugga; Skt. pra + rugṇa ⇒ praluggaka~, praluggikā~ § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ondriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ utthitakāṃ ... (≒ § 13.2. 12A7) § 12.3.11A7. kasyême bhikṣavo vihārakā odriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā ... § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā paluggakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} vātātapena opūriyantā{ṃ} § 12.5.11B2. ye vihārakā uddiṇṇakā paluggakā bhavanti ... § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ondriṇṇakā paluggakā bhavanti, muṃjā karttitavyā ... (≒ § 13.11.12B3, § 17.11.15A5) § 12.18.12A5. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā oddriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā adhyupekṣituṃ § 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ ullāya gṛhītakāṃ acokṣāṃ (≒ § 16.2.14A5, § 17.2.14B5) § 13.3.12A7. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} paluggakā{ṃ} utpādakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} ... § 13.5.12B1. vihārakā ... yadi tāva ondriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā bhavanti, ... § 13.13.12B5. mañcā vā pīṭhā ... ondriṇṇakā bhavanti palugnakā vā, muñjā karttitavyā ... § 14.5.13A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati so vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ ondriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ... § 15.3.14A1. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtāḥ (≒ § 16.3.14A6, § 16.5.14A7, § 17.5.14B7) § 16.9.14B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... oddriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā bhavanti, ... § 21.8.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggakaṃ vā paluggakaṃ vātātapena vināśiyantaṃ ... § 22.7.21A3. nâpi kṣamati sā cakkalī adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggikā vā paluggikā vā prāṇakehi vā khajjanti § 23.1.21A4. adrākṣīd ... vihārāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ (Hs. pallu°) ullāye gṛhītakāṃ § 23.2.21A5. vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā ollāye gṛhītakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā § 23.7.21B4. nâpi kṣamati vihārako adhyupekṣituṃ oddriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ollāye gṛhītako vā acokṣo vā § 57.12.48A1. nâpi kṣamati upānahā adhyupekṣituṃ odriṇṇakā vā paluggakā vā usw. pallaṃka~ (Pā, Pkt) “Sitzposition mit untergeschlagenen Beinen”; vgl. CDIAL 7964. palyaṅka; Skt. paryaṅka; SWTF, s.vv., paryaṅka, paryaṅga § 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiyāṇaṃ taṃ cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiya cīvaraṃ sīvayitavyaṃ pallaṭṭa- (Pkt) “sich umdrehen”; < Skt. pari-vartate ☞ § 30.9, Anm. 1 ⇒ parivarttakaṃ § 30.9.25A5. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ duḥkhaśāyī bhavati, pāraśyena pāraśyaṃ pallaṭṭanto śayati, anāpattiḥ pallava~ ⇒ sa-tila-pallava~ palluggakāṃ für palu° : § 23.1.21A4 pavana~ ⇒ nitya-pacana~ √paś “sehen; denken, überlegen” ⇒ paśyillaka~ § 1.1.1B2. te dāni ojjhāyanti: “paśyatha bhaṇe (☞ § 1.1, Anm. 4) ...” (= § 5.1.6A5) § 4.13.5A6. nâpi kṣamati ... dvāraṃ paśyiya layyalayāye bhuṃjiyāṇa utthihiya gantuṃ § 4.13.5A7. na dāni ... utthāya āsanāto gantavyaṃ, “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya § 4.18.6A1. devānukampito poṣo sadā bhadrāṇi paśyati (vs) § 5.11.7A2. na kṣamati dvitīyasthavireṇa hantahantāye bhuñjiyāṇaṃ “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ (≒ § 6.11.8A2) 343  § 17.12.15A6. yo yaṃ paśyati, tena yyeva gaṇṭhī karttavyā. ... yo ye paśyati tena yeva ... yo yeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yyeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yeva paśyati ... § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ, mā anye bhikṣū na paśyeṃsu § 18.2.15B1. jano dāni odhyāyati “paśyatha bhaṇe śramaṇakā ...” (≒ § 19.2.17B4, § 20.6. 19B2, § 20.7.19B3, § 51.1.44A1) § 34.1.28B1. te dāni odhyāyanti “paśyatha bhaṇe vayaṃ yeva sannipatitā "karmmāṇi kariṣyāma" tti ...” (≒ § 34.2.28B2, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 36.2.29B1, § 37.1. 29B7) § 18.17.16A5. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “ko imāyo dahiṣyatî”ti ... § 18.37.17A1. ete dve bhikṣū cetiyaṃ vandanti, yaṃ paśyanti tatra śunakhena vā śṛgālena vā uśvāsaṃ kṛtakaṃ, ... § 19.32.18B6. atha dāni koci bhikṣu paśyati, nâyaṃ vaktavyo “ko eṣo? kim vā? ...” § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacāriṃ gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ” § 20.5.19B1. ete bhikṣavo ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacārī gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ” § 20.19.20A4. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandati, paśyati dantapoṇaṃ, cchorayitavyo § 25.1.22B1. so dāni hastāṃ nirmmādiya vihārakaṃ praviṣṭo, paśyati kapālikānāṃ rāśiṃ § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... sacet paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati anāttamano. <na> ca paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati citte āttamano abhiraddho § 31.5.25B4. atha dāni corā saprasādā bhavanti, vṛddhehi agrato gantavyaṃ, yathā paśyitvā prasādena avivarjitā gaccheṃsu § 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya praveṣṭavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu (“denken”) “samāmapayi (?) ime pravrajitā karonti.” § 41.1.33B4. te dāni bhikṣu paśyanti tāṃ pādadhovanikāṃ ṛktāṃ § 41.2.33B6. te dāni bhikṣu paśyanti pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kṛtāṃ § 41.10.34A6. so dāni brāhmaṇo tasya ācāragocaraṃ paśyiya tuṣṭo § 41.32.36A1. bhikṣuḥ paśyati (“überlegt, denkt”) “ko bhūyo dhoviṣyatî?”ti § 44.6.39A4. so mārgganto {na} paśyati tasya cīvarakasya koṇakaṃ § 48.2.41A6. sārddhevihārikā antevāsikā odhyāyanti “paśyatha bhaṇe, ...” § 49.1.42A1. paśyati (“denkt”) “mā imasya dātavyaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti § 49.1.42A1. yaṃ kālaṃ paśyati (“denkt”) “naỿva eṣo pratibalo piṇḍāya aṇṭhituṃ. ...” ti § 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti ... tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvitaṃ kālaṃ nidhyāyantaṃ § 49.5.42B2. atha dāni na paśyati, hastena gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ ekato vā ekato vā uvvattayitavyo § 49.7.42B6. rathyāntaraṃ vā paśyati ... nagaradvāre paśyati ... panthe paśyati ... yato eva paśyati tato eva nivarttitavyaṃ § 50.1.43A2. yāva paśyati so vihārakaṃ ghaṭṭitakaṃ § 50.7.43B3. atha paśyati (“denkt”) “upakaṭṭho kālo antāntiko. na śakyaṃ sakāle saṃ- bhāvayituṃ. mā dāni ubhaye cchinnabhaktā bhaviṣyāma”, tena paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B7. piṇḍapātanīhārakena yatraỿva pānīyaṃ paśyati, tatraỿva bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 51.6.44A2. na dāni ito vā ito vā nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “corā vā ocorakā bhavanti.” § 51.10.44A5. eṣā strī upaviṣṭikā āsati. bhikṣūn paśyiyāṇaṃ uttheti, ... § 51.11.44A5. eṣā strī bhikṣuṃ paśyiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, ... § 51.12.44A5. eṣā strī kāṃsabhājanaṃ mārjati, bhikṣu paśyiyāṇaṃ hastāṃ dhovati, ... § 52.1.44A7. teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā snehaṃ sthapenti, khajjakhaṇḍakāni thapenti, paśyanti (“dachten”) “yaṃ kālam āgatā bhavanti, tato teṣāṃ saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ”; vgl. § 52.1.44B1. jānāma (“wir dachten”) vayaṃ “yaṃ kālaṃ āgatā bhaviṣyanti, tato saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ” § 56.5.47A5. bhikṣuḥ paśyati (“denkt”) “dvitīye prahāṇe avītakaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti ... § 57.5.47B3. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati (“denkt”) “anekāyo upānahikāyo mūṣikena vā khajjeṃsu. bhikṣū vā jānanto vā ajānanto vā gṛhītvā gaccheya” tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? usw. paśu~ § 4.20.6A2. putram vā paśum vā ārabhya (vs) 344 paśu-pālaka~ § 14.10.13B1. ye tatra bhavanti gopālakā vā paśupālakā vā teṣāṃ so vihāro anuparindi- tavyo paścā (BHS) “danach” ⇒ paścāt § 8.4.8B7. tato prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśitavyo paścā vāmaṃ praveśiya ... paścāc-chramaṇa~ (BHS, SWTF) “ein (als Begleiter) hinterhergehender Mönch”; vgl. Pā. pacchā- samaṇa ☞ § 49.3, Anm. 1 ⇒ pure-chramaṇa~ § 49.3.42A6. evaṃ paścācchramaṇena pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 49.10.43A1, Uddāna [VI]. 45A1) § 49.4.42A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā paścācchramaṇo praveśituṃ § 49.4.42A7. tena paścācchramaṇo praveśayitavyo § 49.5.42A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā paścācchramaṇo gacchati § 49.5.42B2. paścācchramaṇena vaktavyaṃ: “upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā vāmahastikam vā dakṣiṇahastikaṃ vā uvvatta” tti § 49.6.42B2. eṣo ca dāni bhikṣu <ta>sya (?) sārddhevihārī vā antevāsī vā paścāc- chramaṇaṃ (Hs. °chravaṇaṃ) praveśe{n}ti § 49.6.42B3. paścācchramaṇo kālena kālaṃ visarjayitavyo § 49.7.42B3. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati paścācchramaṇasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajitu<ṃ> § 49.8.42B7. atha dāni nimantreti upalakṣitavyaṃ paścācchramaṇena § 49.9.42B7. na dāni paścācchramaṇena vaktavyaṃ § 49.9.43A1. atha khalu ādiśitavyaṃ paścācchramaṇena paścācchravaṇaṃ für paścācchramaṇaṃ : § 49.6.42B2 paścāt “danach” ⇒ paścā § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā ... § 4.2.4A6. so dāṇi paścād āgacchiyāṇa bhuṃjiyāṇa ... § 10.4.10A5. prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśayitavyo, paścād vāmaṃ pādaṃ praveśiyāṇa § 20.13.20A1. vāmena ca hastena kuccako gṛhṇitavyaḥ paścāt ekamantena cchorayitavyaḥ § 19.42.19A4. purimapaścimakañ ca varjyaṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ, tataḥ paścāt pratigrāhay- itavyaṃ § 22.4.21A2. atha khalu khaṭakhaṭāpayitavyā kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā tato paścāc cakkalī utkṣipitavyā § 25.14.23A1~2. nirmmādayantena prathamaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. śoṣayantena prathamaṃ ... śoṣayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. pratisāmayantena prathamaṃ ... pratisāmayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano § 42.12.36B5. te dāni agni datvā paścād gaṇḍī ākoṭenti § 42.12.36B6. na dāni agniṃ datvā paścād gaṇḍī ākoṭetavyā § 42.31.37B7. atha dāni koci paścāt praviśati ... § 53.6.45A6. varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo, paścāt prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo § 57.8.47B6. bhikṣuṇā yāva vṛddhatarakā nirddhāvitā paścād utthapitvā upānahāyo ābandhiya gantavyaṃ paścād-bhaktam adv. “nach der Mahlzeit; am Nachmittag”; vgl. SWTF, s.v.; BHSD, s.v.; vgl. auch Pā. pacchābhattaṃ ⇒ pure-bhaktam, pure-bhakte, pūrvvaṃ-bhaktam § 1.5.1B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kiṃ pūrvvaṃbhaktaṃ, kiṃ paścādbhaktaṃ? § 1.7.1B6. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... purebhaktam vā paścādbhaktam vā § 2.5.2B5. kiṃ rātripoṣadho bhaviṣyati divāpoṣadho purebhaktaṃ bhaviṣyati paścād- bhaktaṃ? § 3.6.3B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... purobhaktaṃ vā paścādbhaktam vā § 40.13.33A5. paścādbhaktaṃ pānīyaṃ vārentena (Hs. cār°) ... paścād-vastuka~#, paścā-vastuka~# “der hintere Teil (des Klosters)” ☞ § 31.1, Anm. 3 § 31.1.25A7. te ... dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjantā āsanti § 31.1.25B1. yūyaṃ dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ vihārasya paścādvastukasya kākavāhaṃ 345  bhañjantā āsatha § 31.2.25B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati nevāsikehi vihārasya dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ vihārasya paścādvastukasya kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjamānehi āsituṃ § 31.19.26A3. atha dāni paścādvastuke mṛttikākarmmaṃ karonti, ... § 31.33.26B7. na kṣamati tehi nivāsikehi dvāraṃ ca bandhiya vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhāṃ bhañjantehi āsituṃ paścān-nipātin~# “sich später (als andere Leute) niederlegend”; vgl. Pā. pacchānipātin~ § 41.12.34B2. so dāni mātāpitṇāṃ pūrvvotthāyī paścānnipātī priyavādī manaāpavādī kiṃkarapariśrāvako paścā-vastuka~ ⇒ paścād-vastuka~ paścima~ “letzter; westlicher” ⇒ paścima~ prahāṇa~ § 4.19.6A1. dakṣiṇā paścimā ca sa sarvvo ca loko saṃkulajāto (vs) § 18.3.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) dakṣiṇena vā paścimena vā kārāpayitavyā vātapathaṃ muktvā § 19.3.17B5. (praśvāsakuṭī ...) dakṣiṇena vā paścimena vā kārāpayitavyā vātapatha<ṃ> muktvā § 30.8.25A4. rātrīye paścime yāme paryaṅkena vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktena ... § 53.4.45A3. eṣo dāni saṃghārāmo purimaṃ paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ (☞ § 18.28, Anm. 1) pratijāgrīyati, dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā § 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo paścima~ prahāṇa~ # “die Meditation in der letzten Nachtwache” ☞ § 18.28, Anm. 1 ⇒ purima~ prahāṇa~, dvitīya~ prahāṇa~ § 18.28.16B4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ purime vā paścime vā prahāṇe upaviṣṭo ... § 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apaduritavyaṃ cakkalī utkṣip- iyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ § 56.5.47A6. dvitīyasya (wohl für paścimasya; ☞ § 56.5, Anm. 3) prahāṇasya jarjare āhate otaritavyaṃ paścimaka~ ⇒ purima-paścimaka~ paśyillaka~# “umsichtig, vorsichtig” (?) < √paś + Suffix -illa (= Skt. -ila) ☞ § 47.9, Anm. 1 § 47.9.41A2. sambādharathyā bhavati susaṃvṛtena paśyillakena atikrāmitavyaṃ √pā ⇒ piba-, *pāyita~, pāye-, pīta~, pītaka~ § 40.10.33A4. pātraṃ vā oṭṭhā cikkaṇaṃ bhavati, nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ § 40.11.33A4. agroṣṭhehi pātavyaṃ (Hs. yātavyaṃ) § 40.14.33A6. agroṣṭhakehi pātavyaṃ § 41.10.34A6. labhyā khalu ito pānīyaṃ pātuṃ § 41.15.34B5. icchāmi pānīyaṃ pātuṃ pāṃsu~ “Staub” ⇒ apakka-pāṃsuka~, apakva-pāṃsuka~ § 41.1.33B3. naỿva karddamaṃ pariharanti na pāṃsu § 41.1.33B3. karddamaṃ marddantā pāṃsu marddentā dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramanti § 41.2.33B5. naỿva pāṃsu pariharatha na karddamaṃ § 41.2.33B5. karddamaṃ marddantā pāṃsu marddantā dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramatha § 57.11.47B7. upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, ... pāṃsuka~ “Pulver (aus ungebrannten Ziegeln)” (?) ⇒ apakka-pāṃsuka~, apakva-pāṃsuka~ § 23.9.21B6. uppeḍanako bhavati, pāṃsukena vā śarkaroṭena vā pratyāstaritavyo pāṃsukūlika~ (SWTF) “(ein Mönch), der sich in Lumpen kleidet”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. pāṃśukūlika, Pā. paṃsukūlika § 17.5.15A1. ahan dharmmakathiko, ahaṃ vinayadharo, aham āraṇyako, piṇḍacāriko, pāṃsukūliko (Hs. °kuliko) pāka~ ⇒ pātra-pāka~ pāñca-daśika~ (SWTF) “auf den fünfzehnten (Mondtag) fallend” ⇒ cātur-daśika~, pāñca-daśī~ § 1.5.1B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko pāñcadaśiko sandhipoṣadho bhaviṣyati? § 1.7.1B6. āyuṣman adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhipoṣadho vā (≒ § 2.5.2B5) 346  § 2.5.2B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhipoṣadho vā (= § 3.6.3B4) pāñca-daśī~ ⇒ pāñca-daśika~, trayo-daśī~, cātur-daśī~ § 12.11.11B6. cāturddaśīyam vā pāñcadaśīyam vā śayyāsanoddeśo karttavyo pāṭaya- ⇒ pāṭita~, pāṭita-vipāṭita~, vi-pāṭita~ § 20.16.20A3. nâpi kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya madhyena pāṭiyāna jihvāṃ nilehituṃ kāmabhoginā yathā pāṭalā-gulikā~# “Strauß von Pāṭalā-Blumen” § 40.6.32B6. tehi bhājanehi prakṣipitavyā pāṭalāgulikā vā campakagulikā vā śarkarā vā Pāṭaliputra~ § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, Rājagṛhe Tapodaṃ ... pāṭikāye für paṭipāṭikāye : § 26.7.23B1 pāṭita~ “zerrissen” ⇒ pāṭita-vipāṭita~, vi-pāṭita~ § 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. pañcavarṣikaṃ pravṛttaṃ. sārtho prayāto (?; Hs. yathā pāṭito)” § 47.4.40B6. yahiṃ lagnaṃ tahi lagnaṃ; yahiṃ pāṭitaṃ tahiṃ pāṭitaṃ § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka ... pāṭitaṃ vā vipāṭitaṃ bhavati, sīvitavyaṃ pāṭita-vipāṭita~# “zerrissen” ☞ § 11.2, Anm. 4 ⇒ pāṭita~, vi-pāṭita~ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ ātape dinnaṃ (≒ § 11.3.10B4) § 11.9.11A1. na kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ vā pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ vā adhyupekṣituṃ (≒ § 13.12.12B4) § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilemayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 12.3.11B1. śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 12.7.11B4. śayyāsanaṃ bhavati omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhoviya sīvitavyaṃ § 12.18.12A5. nâpi kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 13.10.12B3. śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ bhavati pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhovayitavyaṃ rañjetavyaṃ § 14.7.13A6. yaṃ tatra śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ ... § 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo vā bisio vā caturasrakā vā omayilomayilā bhavanti pāṭitavipāṭitā ... § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... śeyyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 15.3.14A1. śeyyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 16.2.14A6. adrākṣīd ... śeyyāsanaṃ omayilemayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 17.10.15A4. śeyyāsanaṃ oṇṇiyo vā kocavakā vā prāvārā vā ... bimbohanakā vā cilimilikā vā omayilamayilā vā pāṭitavipāṭitā vā acaukṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā § 44.11.39B1. cīvaraṃ ... omayilamayilam vā pāṭitavipāṭitam vā § 47.1.40B3. tān’ api dāni cīvarakāni omaïlamaïlāṇi pāṭitavipāṭitāni kriyanti § 55.10.47A1. na kṣamati so geṇḍuko adhyupekṣituṃ pāṭitavipāṭito (Hs. °itā) § 56.7.47A7. nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ usw. pāṭiyaka~ (BHS) “eine Einzelperson betreffend”; < *prātiyeka < *prātyeka (vgl. Skt. pratyeka)? ⇒ pāḍiyakka-pāḍiyakka~ § 4.5.4B2. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ kasyâdya bhaktaṃ ubhayato sāṃghikaṃ sarvva{ṃ}sāṃghikaṃ pariveṇikaṃ pāṭiya<kaṃ> bhaktaṃ grāme vihāre pāṭha~ “Rezitation” ☞ Zwischen-Zusammenfassung, Anm. 1 ⇒ pāṭhaka~ Kolophon 50B2. Ābhisamācārikāḥ samāptāḥ āryaMahāsāṃghikānāṃ Lokottaravādināṃ madhyuddeśapāṭhakānāṃ pāṭhena pāṭhaka~ ⇒ madhyuddeśa-pāṭhaka~, pāṭha~ pāḍiyakka-pāḍiyakka~ (Pkt) “je einzeln”; < Skt. pratyeka; vgl. Pā. pāṭiyekka, BHS. pāṭiyaka ☞ § 31.3, Anm. 1 ⇒ pāṭiyaka~ § 31.3.25B2. ete dāni bhikṣu āgantukā {ā}gacchanti, sarvvehi pāḍiyakkapāḍiyak{a}kāni apāvuraṇāni upasthāpayitavyāni pāṇḍara~ 347  § 49.1.42A1. so dāni śuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati § 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvitaṃ § 49.1.42A3. ayaṃ upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati pāṇḍu ⇒ sudhā-pāṇḍu-lepana~ pāṇḍu-roga~ “Gelbsucht” § 19.42.19A3. atha dāni glāno bhavati bhikṣuḥ pāṇḍurogeṇa, vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā ...” pātaya- ⇒ √pat § 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ sthavitaṃ. tan dāni vātamaṇḍalikāye āgacchiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno kapālānāṃ rāśiṃ kṛtvā pātra~ “Almosenschale” ⇒ tāmra-pātra~, peyā-pātra~, loha-pātra~, saṃghāṭī-pātra-cīvara- dhāraṇa~ § 4.20.6A3. pātreṇa bhaikṣaṃ abhisāharitvā (vs) § 6.7.7B5. yāva sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāye pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ § 6.7.7B5. yāvat pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 8.5.9A2. pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ. pātraṃ pratiśāmayitavyaṃ § 8.8.9A6. pātraṃ śodhetavyaṃ, pātraṃ pratisāmetavyaṃ § 8.9.9A6. pātraṃ dahitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ § 13.17.12B7. na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati ... pātraṃ (Hs. pādam) vā nirmmādayituṃ § 23.4.5.21B2. na kṣamati tahiṃ ... pātraṃ vā nirmmādayituṃ § 25.1.22B1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā muṇḍavātapāṇe pātraṃ sthavitaṃ § 25.2.22B2. bhagavān āha “evaṃ ca tvaṃ muṇḍavātapāne pātraṃ thapesi. ...” § 25.2.22B2. evaṃ pātre pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 25.18.23A4, Uddāna [III].25A6) § 25.3.22B2. gocarāto nirddhāviya āhāraṃ karīya pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ § 25.11.22B6. gṛhṇantena nâpi kṣamati ekahastena duve trayo vā pātrāṇi gṛhṇituṃ § 25.11.22B7. paramaṃ trayo pātrāṇi gṛhṇitavyāni. ekahastena dve gṛhṇitavyāḥ, apareṇa dāni ekaṃ § 25.12.22B7. atha dāni pratyandhakārako vihārako bhavati, na kṣamati pātreṇa pātraṃ mārggituṃ (☞ § 25.12, Anm. 2). atha khalu hastena mārggitavyaṃ § 25.13.22B7~23A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ upādhyāyasya vâcāryasya vā pātram allīpayati, nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ vāmena hastena allīpayituṃ. atha khalu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā dakṣiṇena hastena pātraṃ allīpayitavyaṃ § 25.16.23A3. nâpi kṣamati pātraṃ adhyupekṣituṃ phalakena vā khajjantaṃ khaṇḍaṃ vā cchidram vā. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ dahitavyaṃ pacitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ § 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa aprayataṃ gṛhṇituṃ, uccāro vā prasrāvo vā kheṭaṃ vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā vighaso vā saṃkāro vā anyam vā aprayat{t}aṃ grahetuṃ § 25.17.23A3. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa keśāṃ otārayitum vā pādaṃ vā mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ, jentākam vā praveśituṃ, udakakṛtyaṃ vā karttuṃ § 31.26.26B1. kalyato yeva utthiya nivāsiya prāvariya hastān nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 32.6.27B2. hastā nirmmādantasya, cetiyaṃ vandantasya, pātraṃ nirmmādentasya, ... § 40.10.33A3. pātraṃ vā oṭṭhā cikkaṇaṃ bhavati, nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ § 41.6.34A3. sthaviro dāni vihārakesmin pātraṃ nikṣipiya ... § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... vikṣuṇṇam vā pātraṃ (wohl für patraṃ) gṛhṇituṃ § 49.7.42B5. anyasya haste pātraṃ datvā, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ § 50.1.43A2. so dāni āha “ānehi pātraṃ.” § 50.4.43A7. tena adhyiṣṭena samānena duve pātrāṇy ādāya praviśitavyaṃ § 50.6.43B1. prakṛty’ eva ātmano bhaktato tasya pātraṃ pūretavyaṃ § 52.6.44B4. atha dāni so praṇītabhojanasya mahārhasya pūraṃ pātraṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ āgacchati ... § 60.5.48B7. ānantarikasya pātraṃ dātavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mama piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍhesi” § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, yadi tāva bhaktāgre vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, anantarikasya pātraṃ datvā gantavyaṃ 348  § 62.8.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vātakarmma puno <puno> āgacchati, anantarikasya pātraṃ datvā gantavyaṃ usw. pātraṃ für patraṃ : § 40.14.33A6; § 48.8.41B4; vgl. MW, s.v. pātra pātraka~ “Almosenschale” § 50.2.43A3. so dāni tasya jalpati “āyuṣman, sādhu taṃ pātrakaṃ pi labhema.” pātra-cīvara~ (SWTF) “Almosenschale und Gewand”; vgl. Pā. patta-cīvara~ § 25.3.22B2. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya pātracīvaram ādāya gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 31.4.25B3~4. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... anupāletavyo, pātracīvaraṃ ālambi- tavyaṃ. nâpi dāni pātracīvaraṃ gṛhṇitvā adarśanena gantavyaṃ. atha khalu avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ, mā dāni adarśanena parijāne “hṛtaṃ, hṛtaṃ me pātracīvaram” iti gacchantasya karttavyaṃ § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāvad vastukāmo bhavati, pātracīvaraṃ pratisāmayitavyaṃ, vihārako uddiśitavyo § 41.4.33B7. sthaviro dāni kālasyaỿva nivāsayitvā pātracīvaram ādāya pātra-nikubjana~# “das Umkehren der Almosenschale” (ein bildhafter Ausdruck für eine über einen Laienanhänger auf Beschluß der Mönchsgemeinde verhängte Strafe, die darin besteht, daß die Mönche nicht mehr zum Hause des Betreffenden um Almosen gehen; vgl. AN[Übers] IV, S. 189, Anm. 137); BhiVin(Ma-L) § 295.10B3.6f. pātranikubjanā-sammuti-pratisaṃyuktaṃ; Mvy 9252. pātra-nikubjanam; Pā. patta-nikkujjana; Nolot 1999: 80f. ☞ § 31.32, Anm. 2 § 31.32.26B6. amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. pātranikubjanaṃ sa<ṃ>mutīkṛtaṃ. amutra śunakhā caṇḍāḥ. amukaṃ aśrāddhakulaṃ pātra-pariśrāvaṇa~# “Almosenschale und Wasserfilter” ⇒ pariśrāvaṇa~ § 40.1.32B2. pātrapariśrāvaṇāni dhovanti § 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni pāridhovanikāto ... pātrapariśrāvaṇaṃ vā dhovituṃ pātra-pāka~# “das Erhitzen einer Almosenschale” ☞ § 32.6, Anm. 3 § 32.6.27B1. na kṣamati mṛttikākarmma karentasya ‖ pe ‖ pātrapākaṃ dadantasya, ... pātra-pīṭhaka~# “Ständer für Almosenschalen”; vgl. v. Hinüber 1992: 44f. ☞ § 25.10, Anm. 1 § 25.10.22B6. pātraprasevikā na bhavati, pātrapīṭhake thapetavyaṃ. atha dāni pātra- pīṭhakaṃ na bhavati, ... pātra-pūra~ (BHS; s. BHSD, s.v. pūra [2]) “eine Almosenschale voll (Wasser)” § 40.9.33A2. labhyā dāni pātrapūraṃ dātuṃ (Hs. vā) Pātra-pratisaṃyukta~ “der Abschnitt über die Almosenschale” ☞ § 4.19, Anm. 2, 3; S. 565f. in diesem Band § 4.19.6A2. “diśā sauvastikā” dakṣiṇā vistareṇa ādiśitavyā yathā Pātrapratisaṃyukte pātra-prasevikā~# “Beutel für die Almosenschale” ☞ § 25.8, Anm. 4 ⇒ prasevikā~ § 15.7.14A3. anyo kīlako ākoṭayitavyo pātraprasevikā (Hs. °veśikā) sthāpayitavyā § 25.8.22B5. atha khalu pātraprasevikāyāṃ (Hs. °veśikāyāṃ) prakṣipiya sthapetavyaṃ § 25.9.22B5. pātraprasevikā nāgadantake vā kīlake vā ukkaciya thapetavyā § 25.10.22B6. pātraprasevikā na bhavati, pātrapīṭhake thapetavyaṃ pātra-mālaka~# “Nische (od. Plattform) für Almosenschalen”; vgl. Pa. patta-māḷaka ☞ § 25.15, Anm. 4 § 25.15.23A3. <sthapetavyaṃ>(?) mañcasya vā pīṭhasya vā upari jālavātāyane vā pātra- mālake vā, yathā na ghaṭṭeṃsu pātra-saṃhṛta~# “mit der Almosenschale gesammelt” § 4.20.6A3. so ’yaṃ śreṣṭhāyatane pratiṣṭhito pātrasaṃhṛto lābho (vs) pātrāntarikāye für patrāntarikāye: § 40.13.33A5. pātrodaka~ (pātra-u°) (SWTF) “Wasser zum Reinigen der Almosenschale”; vgl. Pā. pattodaka ☞ § 4.13, Anm. 6; § 40.7, Anm. 6 § 4.13.5A7. atha khalu saṃghasthavireṇa āgametavyaṃ, dīrghodakaṃ (lies: pātrodakaṃ) dāpetavyaṃ § 40.7.32B7. bhikṣūṇāṃ hastodakasya pātrodakasya pāribhogikasya kumbhikā ca karakā ca pūrayitavyā 349 pāda~ ⇒ ādra-pāda~, dhovita-pāda~, pada~, pādato kṛtvā § 1.1.1B2. samagrasya saṃghasya pādāni (Hs. pādāna) vandiṣyāma § 2.1.2B2. gacchāma samagrasya saṃghasya pādāṃ vandiṣyāmaḥ (≒ § 3.1.3A7) § 5.1.6A5. gacchāma ... āryamiśrāṇāñ ca pādāṃ vandiṣyāmaḥ (≒ § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7) § 8.4.8B7. tato prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśitavyo paścā vāmaṃ praveśiya ... § 10.4.10A5. prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśayitavyo, paścād vāmaṃ pādaṃ praveśiyāṇa § 8.6.9A3. pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādā dhopayitavyā § 8.12.9B1. pādā dhovayitavyā, pādā mrakṣetavyā (≒ § 10.5.10A5) § 13.17.12B7. na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati ... pātraṃ (Hs. pādam) vā nirmmādayituṃ § 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinaṃ astariyāṇaṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ... § 21.5.20B2. tenâpi pādāṃ dhovayitvā kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiya ... § 21.5.20B3. atha dāni niṣaṇṇo bāhirakāṃ pādāṃ kṛtvā sūtraṃ valento āsati, anāpattiḥ § 21.5.20B3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ pādā<ṃ> na{ṃ} dhovayitukāmo bhavati, na kṣamati, ... § 21.5.20B3. bāhyena kaṭhinasmi pādāni (Acc. pl.) thapiyāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ sīvayitavyaṃ § 23.4.1.21A7. atha dāni pratipādako na bhavati, leṅkaṭakehi pādā bandhitavyā § 23.4.3.21B1. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ pādāṃ dhovituṃ, hastāṃ dhovituṃ, mukhaṃ dhovituṃ § 24.6.22A4. atha dāni uppaṃsulo vihāro bhavati, bhūmīye cchoriya pādena mardditavyo § 24.7.22A4. atha khalu cchoriyāṇa pādena marditavyaṃ § 24.12.22A7. <paśyati?> kheṭaṃ cchoritakaṃ kenaci aprakṛtijñena, pādena marditavyo § 25.17.23A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... pādaṃ vā mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ § 29.4.24B2. atha khalu eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ āmuhūrtte viśrāmiya sammiñjiya, dvitīyo pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo § 29.6.24B4. ubhau pādau osāriya susaṃvṛtena niṣīditavyaṃ § 30.4.25A1. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati, pādena pādaṃ ādhāya, dantena dantaṃ ādhāya ... § 30.7.25A4. pādena pādam ādhāya, jihvāgraṃ tālukāgre pratiṣṭhāpayitvā, ... § 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.14.26A1. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśantehi puṣkiriṇīyaṃ vā taḍāge vā oghe vā pādāṃ dhovitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.21.26A4. yadi tāva ācikṣanti pādadhovanikāyāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ... § 31.22.26A6. yadi tāva āgantuko vṛddhatarako bhavati, nevāsikena utthiya pādā vandi- tavyā, āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 31.25.26A7. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ § 31.28.26B3. pādāṃ prakṣāletha, hastāṃ nirmmādetha, pānīyaṃ pibatha, viśramatha § 32.11.27B5. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, ... pādāṃ prakṣālehi, hastāṃ nirmmādehi, viśramāhi § 32.3.27A6. nâpi kṣamati pādehi vandiyamāṇehi na pratisaṃmodituṃ § 32.11.27B4. na dāni meṇḍhena viya āsitavyaṃ pādehi vandayaṃtehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs). atha khalu pratisaṃmodayitavyaṃ § 32.10.27B4. yathā na duḥkhāpiye pādehi vandayantehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs) § 32.4.27A7. evaṃ pādā vanditavyāḥ; § 32.13.27B6. evaṃ pādā vanditavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B4) § 32.7.27B2. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ samavasthāye niṣaṇṇo bhavati, taṃ velaṃ allīyāṇaṃ śīrṣeṇa pādā{ṃ} vanditavyā, karkaṭagrāhikāye vanditavyā § 39.28.32A5. pādāṃ prakṣāliya hastāṃ nirmmādiya stūpaṃ vistareṇa vanditavyaṃ § 41.1.33B3. pādadhovanikāyāṃ jhallajjhallāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ § 41.1.33B3. mātrāye yūyam āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha § 41.2.33B5. jjhallajjhallāye pādāṃ dhoviya § 41.2.33B5. bhikṣū āgacchanti pādadhovanikāye pādāṃ dhovanāye § 41.2.33B6. mātrāye āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha § 41.3.33B6. evaṃ pādā dhovitavyā ( = § 41.3.33B7, § 41.33.36A1; Uddāna [V].39B2) 350  § 41.3.33B7. evaṃ bhikṣavo pādāṃ dhovatha § 41.6.34A3. pādāṃ dhovati § 41.7.34A4. vāmena hastena pādāṃ dhovati § 41.7.34A4. vāmo pādo dhovito § 41.7.34A4. dakṣiṇo pādo dhovito § 41.23.35A7. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva pādāṃ dhovantena ... āsiṃcitavyaṃ § 41.23.35A7. vāmena hastena pādā{ṃ} dhovitavyā § 41.23.35A7. vāmo pādo dhovayitavyo § 41.23.35A7. dakṣiṇo pādo dhovayitavyo § 41.25.35B2. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā jhallajhallāye pādāṃ dhovituṃ § 41.25.35B2. āgamitavyaṃ yāva tehi dhovitā pādā tti § 41.26.35B3. tena pādā dhovitā bhava<ṃ>ti § 41.27.35B3. vāmena hastena pādā dhovitavyā § 41.27.35B4. vāmo pādo dhovitavyo (= § 41.28.35B5) § 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇo pādo dhovitavyo (= § 41.28.35B5) § 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇena hastena pādā dhovitavyā § 41.31.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi utthiya gantavyaṃ § 41.32.35B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pādehi dhovitehi dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramituṃ § 41.32.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi caṃkrama{n}ti bhūyo dhovitavyā § 47.5.40B7. yadi tahiṃ ogho vā taḍāgam vā bhavati puṣkiriṇī vā, tahiṃ pādāṃ prakṣālitvā § 47.5.40B7. patraśākhāya vā tṛṇakehi vā pādā jaṃghā <ca> (oder pāda-j°?) prasphoṭitvā prāvaritvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 48.1.41A3. mañcā ca pīṭhāṃ ca sāpāśrayā ca dārakadārikāhi (Hs. °ehi) pādehi marddita- parimardditā ... § 48.2.41A5. dārakadārikāhi mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca trepaśyakā ca pādehi marditavimarditā § 54.3.46A2. te ... yaṣṭī vārentā yo yeva bhikṣu pracalāyati taṃ yeva kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhananti, pāde vā āhananti § 57.4.47B3. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, na kṣamati sopānahena pādena prahāṇaṃ upaviśituṃ § 57.11.47B7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā pādāṃ dhovantena upānahāyo “caḍacaḍa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.11.48A1. nadīkūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā pādāṃ dhoviya prasphoṭeti § 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ... eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayi- tavyo. taṃ sammiñjiya dvitīyo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo usw. pādaka~ ⇒ ādra-pādaka~ § 13.13.12B5. pādakā utthitakā (lies: dutthitakā?) bhavanti, suthapitā karttavyāḥ § 21.5.20B3. na kṣamati adhotakehi pādakehi kaṭhinaṃ okramituṃ § 23.4.1.21A7. āsandakaṃ tṛpādakaṃ vā praveśeti, tasyâpi leṅkaṭakehi pādakā bandhi- tavyā *pāda-jaṃghā “Füße und Unterschenkel” § 47.5.40B7. patraśākhāya vā tṛṇakehi vā pādājaṃghā (lies: entweder pādā jaṃghā <ca> oder pāda-jaṃghā) prasphoṭitvā prāvaritvā praveṣṭavyaṃ pāda-taṭṭhaka~# “Waschschüssel für die Füße”? oder “Gegenstand zum Abkratzen von Schmutz von den Füßen”? oder “Fußbank”? ☞ § 8.6, Anm. 8 ⇒ pādopadhānaka~ § 8.6.9A3. pādodakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādā dhopayitavyā (≒ § 10.5.10A5) § 41.6.34A3. pādataṭṭhakaṃ (Hs. pādataddhakaṃ) upanāmayitvā upānahikāyo upanāmiya upānahāpocchan{n}o upanāmiya pādāṃ dhovati pādataddhakaṃ wohl für pādataṭṭhakaṃ : § 41.6.34A3 pāda-taila~# “Fußöl” ☞ § 31.7, Anm. 2 ⇒ pāda-mrakṣaṇa~ § 31.7.25B6. saṃghasya phāsuvihāraṃ upadahatha pādatailena guḍapānīyena pratiśrayeṇa purebhaktikena 351  § 31.8.25B6. praviśiya yācitvā saṃghasya yathāsukhaparibhogaṃ, niḥsārayitavyaṃ pāda- tailaṃ, vekālikaṃ purebhaktikaṃ bhikṣitavyaṃ pādato kṛtvā # “indem man die Beine gegen jemanden oder etwas ausstreckt”; vgl. Skt. pādataḥ √kṛ § 30.11.25A5~6. na kṣamati stūpaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śayyāṃ kalpayituṃ, saṃghaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ, vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā upādhyāyācāryaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ pāda-dhovana~ (Pā) “das Waschen der Füße”; vgl. Skt. pāda-dhāvana~ ⇒ pāda-śauca~, dhovana~, dhovanikā~ § 41.1.33B3. bhikṣu āgacchanti pādadhovanāya pāda-dhovanikā~# “Wanne zum Waschen der Füße” ☞ § 31.21, Anm. 3 ⇒ pāridhovanikā~, dhovanikā~ § 31.21.26A4. pādadhovanikā kahiṃ? kalpiyakarakī kahiṃ? akalpi<ya>karakī kahi? § 31.21.26A4. yadi tāva ācikṣanti pādadhovanikāyāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ... tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ § 40.7.32B7. pādadhovanikā pūrayitavyā § 41.1.33B2. pādadhovanikāyāṃ jhallajjhallāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ ... § 41.1.33B3. pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kariya ... § 41.1.33B4. te dāni bhikṣu paśyanti tāṃ pādadhovanikāṃ ṛktāṃ § 41.1.33B4. kiṃ dāni ayaṃ pādadhovanikā omuddhikṛtā? § 41.2.33B5. pādadhovanikāyāṃ gacchiya jjhallajjhallāye pādāṃ dhoviya ... § 41.2.33B5. pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kariya ... § 41.2.33B5. bhikṣū āgacchanti pādadhovanikāye pādāṃ dhovanāye § 41.2.33B6. te dāni bhikṣu paśyanti pādadhovanikāṃ omuddhikāṃ kṛtāṃ? § 41.25.35B2. sarvvasaṃghasya pādadhovanikā bhavati, ... § 41.25.35B2. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā ... omuddhikāṃ pādadhovanikāṃ karttuṃ § 41.25.35B2. acchaṭikāṃ karentena pādadhovanikāyāṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 41.26.35B2. khaṇḍikā (Hs. khaṇuikā) pādadhovanikā bhavati § 41.27.35B3. tato yadi tāva dakṣiṇānte pādadhovanikā bhava{ṃ}ti ... § 41.27.35B4. atha dāni vāmānte pādadhovanikā bhavati § 41.30.35B6. nâpi kṣamati pādadhovanikāyāṃ oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa ohitahastena vā {pāda- dhovanikāyā} upaviśituṃ § 41.31.35B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pādadhovanikāyāṃ ... āsituṃ Uddāna (V).39B2. evaṃ pādadhovanike (Loc. sg. fem.! Aber vermutlich eine Verschreibung für dhovitapādehi) pratipadyitavyaṃ § 57.3.47B2. atha khalu bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ pāda-dhovanīya~# “Waschwasser für die Füße” ⇒ paridhovaniya~, paridhovanīya~, pāridhovanikā~, pāridhovanya~ § 40.3.32B4. evaṃ pādadhovanīye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 40.7.32B7. anyaṃ pibanāye pānīyaṃ bhavati anyaṃ pādadhovanīyaṃ pāda-mrakṣaṇa~ (SWTF) “Salbe für die Füße”#; vgl. SWTF, s.v. pāda-mrakṣaṇa (“das Salben der Füße”) ☞ § 31.29, Anm. 4 ⇒ pāda-taila~ § 31.29.26B4. pādamrakṣaṇena cchandayitavyā pāda-vandaka~ “die Füße zu verehren beabsichtigend”; vgl. § 44.1, Anm. 3; BHSG §§ 22.2f. ⇒ uśvāsa-kāraka~, praśvāsa-kāraka~ § 32.2.27A5. āyuṣman, evacciro tava āgatasya, na ca me pādavandako upasaṃkramasi pāda-śauca~ “das Reinigen der Füße” ⇒ hasta-śauca~, pāda-dhovana~ § 13.17.12B7. na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati hastaśaucaṃ vā karttuṃ pādaśaucaṃ vā, ... pādājaṃghā entweder für pādā jaṃghā <ca> oder pāda-jaṃghā : § 47.5.40B7 pādukā~ ⇒ tāla-pādukā~ pādodaka~ (°da-uda°) ⇒ hastodaka-p° § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... pādodakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ § 10.5.10A5. kheṭakaṭāhaṃ niṣkāśayitavyaṃ yāvat pādodakaṃ dāpayitavyaṃ pādodakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, 352 *pādopadhānaka~ (°da-upa°) “Fußbank”; vgl. Skt. pādopadhāna~, Pā. pādūpadhāna~ (CPD, s.v. upadhāna) ⇒ pāda-taṭṭhaka~ § 41.22.35A6. pādopadhānakaṃ (Hs. °opavānakaṃ) udakadakānakaṃ pi ca uṣṭhapayitvā pādopavānakaṃ für pādopadhānakaṃ : § 41.22.35A6 pānīya~ ⇒ Dhara-pānīya~, Gaṃgā-pānīya~, guḍa-pānīya~, Śoṇa-pānīya~ § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ yadā navakāḥ ... upagrāyanti pānīyaṃ vā pibanti § 5.11.7A2. yaṃ kālaṃ navakā bhikṣū ugrāyanti vā pānīyam vā pibanti § 8.8.9A5. piṇḍapāta upanāmayitavyo bhuñjantasya pānīyaṃ vāritavyaṃ § 31.28.26B3. pādāṃ prakṣāletha, hastāṃ nirmmādetha, pānīyaṃ pibatha, viśramatha § 39.11.31A7. atha dāni āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñapti karttavyā § 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñaptiḥ karttavyā, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, puṣpaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, ... § 40.1.32B2. āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā pānīyaṃ pratijāgaranti § 40.1.32B2. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya ... § 40.1.32B3. āgantukā bhikṣū ... pānīyaṃ mārggenti § 40.2.32B4. pānīyaṃ mārgganti § 40.3.32B4. evaṃ pānīye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 40.17.33B2) § 40.4.32B5. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya ... § 40.5.32B5. tehi kalyata eva utthiya hastāṃ nirmmādiya pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya ... § 40.5.32B6. yathā pānīyaṃ caukṣaṃ bhaveya § 40.7.32B7. anyaṃ pibanāye pānīyaṃ bhavati anyaṃ pādadhovanīyaṃ § 40.7.32B7. paridhovanīyena pānīyena śirikuṇḍikā pūrayitavyā § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ (Hs. gogotrasthā) pānīyaṃ (Hs. panīyaṃ) bhavati § 40.8.33A1. na kṣamati tato pānīyāto (Abl. sg. neut.) kalpiyakarakī ... pūrayituṃ § 40.8.33A1. na kṣamati ... hastodakapādodakaṃ vā pānīyaṃ dātuṃ § 40.9.33A2. vaidyo āha “bhante, gotrasthena pānīyena akṣiṇī dhovāhi” tti § 40.9.33A2. “icchāmi pānīyaṃ dīyamānan” ti § 40.10.33A3. bhaktāgreṇa pānīyaṃ vārentena ... § 40.10.33A3. caukṣaṃ pānīyaṃ vāretavyaṃ § 40.10.33A3. pānīyaṃ gṛhṇantena gharttitavyaṃ § 40.12.33A4. pānīyaṃ vārentena ... § 40.13.33A5. paścādbhaktaṃ pānīyaṃ vārentena ... § 40.13.33A5. ekinā hastena pānīyaṃ parigṛhṇitavyaṃ § 41.6.34A3. pānīyasya dakānakaṃ pūrīya ... § 41.10.34A6. labhyā khalu ito pānīyaṃ pātuṃ § 41.15.34B5. icchāmi pānīyaṃ pātuṃ § 41.16.34B6. tasya dārakasya pānīyaṃ dentasya § 41.16.34B6. senāpati, pānīyaṃ pratyavekṣituṃ § 41.16.34B6. mā atra pānīyasmiṃ tṛṇo vā bhave prāṇako vā ... § 41.18.35A1. so dāni corasenāpati pānīyaṃ pibiya tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati ... Uddāna (V).39B2. evaṃ pānīye (Hs. jānīye!) pratipadyitavyaṃ § 50.8.43B4. pānīyaṃ parisrāvayitavyaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ paripūriyāṇaṃ ... § 50.10.43B6. nīhārakapiṇḍapātena hastā nirmmādiyāṇaṃ pānīyasya kuṇḍikāṃ pūriyāṇaṃ panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B7. piṇḍapātanīhārakena yatraỿva pānīyaṃ paśyati, tatraỿva bhuṃjitavyaṃ usw. pānīya-ghaṭikā~# “Wassertopf, Krug” § 40.13.33A5. apareṇa pānīyaghaṭikāṃ paṭicchantena cīvarāṃtarikāya vā patrāntarikāye vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ pānīya-dāyaka~# “jemand, der Wasser schenkt” § 41.19.35A3. labhanti vipulāṃ arthāṃ yathā pānīyadāyakaḥ (vs) *pānīya-dhārikā~ “Wassergefäß”; vgl. Skt. dhāraka (“Behälter; Wasserkrug” [PW, s.v.]) 353  § 40.14.33A6. jentāke vārentena oṣṭhā pānīyadhārikāye (?; Hs. pānīyacārikāye) patraṃ bandhitavyaṃ pānīyadhārikāṃ für pānīya-vārika~: § 40.9.33A2 pānīya-maṇḍapa~ (Pā; Avś II 86) “Wasserpavillon” § 40.1.32B2. pānīyamaṇḍapaṃ parighaṭṭiya tāpitamudritaṃ kariya gocaraṃ praviṣṭāḥ § 40.1.32B3. kin dāni ayaṃ pānīyamaṇḍapo tāpitamudrito thapito § 40.2.32B4. kin dāni ayaṃ pānīyamaṇḍapo tāpitamudrito kariya thapito § 40.4.32B5. pānīyamaṇḍapaṃ ghaṭṭiya tāpitamudritaṃ (Hs. tāpiyam°) kariya ... pānīya-vārika~ (BHS) “ein Mönch, der für Trinkwasser verantwortlich ist” ☞ § 40.4. Anm. 3 ⇒ vārika~ § 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo § 40.9.33A2. pānīyavārikāṃ (Hs. p°-dhārikāṃ) yācati, “icchāmi pānīyaṃ dīyamānan” ti pānīyāvaśeṣa~# (°nīya-ava°) “Rest des Wassers” § 41.9.34A5. dakānakaṃ dhoviya pānīyāvaśeṣaṃ cchoriya ātape śoṣitaṃ pāpa~ ⇒ puṇya-pāpa-phalopaga~ pāpa-karmman~ § 4.16.5B3. nirayaṃ pāpakarmmāṇo kṛtapuṇyā ca svarggatiṃ (vs) § 42.5.36B1. tatra nāma yūyaṃ idam evaṃrūpaṃ pāpakarmmam akuśalan dharmmam adhyācariṣyatha pāpa-bhikṣuṇī~# “böse Nonne”; vgl. Pā. pāpa-bhikkhunī § 52.6.44B5. (praṇītabhojana~ ....) asukena paṇḍakena dinnaṃ. asukāye sthūlakumārīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpabhikṣuṇīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpaśrāmaṇerīye dinnaṃ pāpa-śrāmaṇerī~# “böse Novizin”; vgl. Pā. pāpa-sāmaṇerī § 52.6.44B5. (praṇītabhojana~ ....) asukena paṇḍakena dinnaṃ. asukāye sthūlakumārīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpabhikṣuṇīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpaśrāmaṇerīye dinnaṃ pāpicaka-dharmmīya für pāyattika-dharmmāya? : § 40.16.33B1 pāpīyas~ “böse” § 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “ ... na ca vo Māraḥ pāpīyāṃ avatāram adhigamiṣyati saddharmmasya antarddhānāya sa<ṃ>mohāya.” pāyattika-dharmma~# “gerechte Handlung durch Wiedergutmachung”? ☞ § 40.16, Anm. 5 § 40.16.33B1. labhyā dāni pāyattikadharmmāya (Hs. pāpicakadharmmīya) yācituṃ *pāyita~? “getrunken” ☞ § 8.5, Anm. 9 ⇒ √pā, pīta~ § 8.5.9A1. peyā ukkaḍhitavyā. peyā peyi{ṃ}tā (für *pāyitā?) peyāpātraṃ śodhitavyaṃ pāye-# “trinken lassen”; < Skt. pāyayati ⇒ √pā § 18.53.17B2. vaidyo jalpati “bhante mahāvikaṭāṃ pāyetha” tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? pāraya- (Skt), pāre-# “können, vermögen”; Kaus. von √pṛ § 7.4.8B1~2. ubhayato vinayaṃ na pārayati, ekato vinayo grāhayitavyo. ekato vinayaṃ na pārayati, ... pañca sūtrāṇi na pārayati, ... ekaṃ sūtraṃ na pāreti <dvānavatīto grāhayitavyo.> ... triṃśato pi na pāreti, dve aniyatāṃ grāhayitavyo ... dve aniyatā na pāre{ṃ}ti, ... § 9.4.9B7~10A1. ubhayato pi vinayaṃ na pāreti, ... ekato vinayaṃ na pāreti, ... pañca sūtrāṇi na pāreti, ... ekaṃ sūtraṃ na pāreti, ... triṃśatito na pāreti, ... dve aniyatā na pāreti § 29.6.24B3. atha dāni bhikṣu na pāreti svastikaparyaṅkena niṣīdituṃ, arddhaparyaṅkena niṣīditavyaṃ § 29.6.24B4. atha dāni arddhaparyaṅkenâpi na pāreti niṣīdituṃ, ubhau pādau osāriya susaṃvṛtena niṣīditavyaṃ § 34.1.28B1. te dāni tehi niṣaṇṇehi na pārenti kāryāṇi karttuṃ (= § 35.1.28B7, § 36.1. 29A7, § 37.1.29B7) § 34.2.28B2. te dāni tumbhehi niṣaṇṇehi na pārenti kāryāṇi karttuṃ (= § 35.2.29A1) § 41.13.34B2. tasya gṛha<ṃ> guptañ ca surakṣitañ ca na pārenti otāraṃ vindanāya § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānakaṃ kāsayitavyaṃ § 58.5.48A5. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ § 59.4.48B1. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvayitavyaṃ ... 354  § 59.5.48B2. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvitavyaṃ ... (= § 59.6. 48B3) § 59.7.48B3. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, ekama<ṃ>te gacchiya kṣīvitavyaṃ § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni <na> pāreti vinodayituṃ, punaḥ punaḥ khajjati (Hs. khanati), ekatam’ aṃte gacchiya kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ § 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ <cīvarakoṇena> mukhaṃ pithitvā jambhayitavyaṃ § 62.7.50A3. atha dāni bhikṣu na pāreti saṃprajāna vātakarmma karttuṃ, nirddhāviyāṇaṃ vātakarmma karttavyaṃ pāraśyena pāraśyaṃ # “von einer Seite auf die andere (drehen)”? (= pārśvena pārśvaṃ) § 30.9.25A5. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ duḥkhaśāyī bhavati, pāraśyena pāraśyaṃ pallaṭṭanto śayati, anāpattiḥ pārājika~ (BHS, SWTF) “Pārājika-Vergehen” § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa ... § 1.6.1B5. catvāri pārājikā gāthāś ca śiṣṭakam abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā § 1.12.2A6. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikāṃ dharmmāṃ uddiśiyānaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa- śrutikāye gāthāye ca § 2.10.3A3. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikā uddiśitavyaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāyo ca § 7.4.8B2. dve aniyatā na pāreti, antamasato catvāri pārājikāṃ grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaṃśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca (≒ § 9.4.10A2) pāridhovanikā~# “Waschwasser (für die Füße)” oder “Wanne zum Waschen der Füße”? ☞ § 40.7, Anm. 2 ⇒ paridhovaniya~, paridhovanīya~, pāridhovanya~, pāda-dhovanikā~ § 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni pāridhovanikāto mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ, hastaṃ vā nirmmādayituṃ, pātrapariśrāvaṇaṃ vā dhovituṃ pāridhovanya~# (1) “Waschwasser (für die Füße)”; (2) “Waschwasser (für die Füße) betreffend” ☞ § 40.7, Anm. 2 ⇒ paridhovaniya~, paridhovanīya~, pāridhovanikā~, pāda-dhovanīya~ (1) “Waschwasser (für die Füße)” § 40.16.33B1. na dāni kṣamati pāridhovaniyāto snāpituṃ (lies: snāyituṃ?) vā cīvaram vā dhovituṃ rañjanaṃ vā kaḍhituṃ § 40.16.33B2. tato yeva pāridhovanīyaṃ karoti (2) “Waschwasser (für die Füße) betreffend” § 40.9.33A3. atha khalu pāridhovanīyaṃ udakaṃ dātavyaṃ pāribhogika~ (BHS, Pā) “für den Gebrauch geeignet” oder “auf Gebrauchsgegenstände bezüglich”? ☞ § 40.7, Anm. 7 § 40.7.32B7. bhikṣūṇāṃ hastodakasya pātrodakasya pāribhogikasya kumbhikā ca karakā ca pūrayitavyā pāriveṇika~# “in Zellen wohnende Mönche betreffend”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 68, 2B2.5. pāriveṇikā; Roth 1968: 340f. ⇒ pariveṇika~ § 42.13.36B6. jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ eṣo jentāko sarvvasāṃghiko pāriveṇiko parṣāye pāre- ⇒ pāraya- pārthikā für pārṣikā : § 26.3.23A7 pārśva~ “Rippengegend; Seite” ⇒ muktehi pārśvehi, pāraśyena pāraśyaṃ § 18.7.15B5. aparasmin pārśve varccakuṭīkā karttavyā § 30.1.24B6. uttānakâpi śeyyā kalpenti, vāmenâpi pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpenti (≒ § 30.2. 24B7) § 30.3.25A1. na kṣamati vāmena vā pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ § 30.3.25A1. vāmena pārśvena kāmopabhoginaḥ śeyyāṃ kalpaya<n>ti § 30.4.25A1. siṃho bhikṣavo mṛgarājā dakṣiṇena pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpayati § 30.5.25A3. (śeyyā ...) tathā karttavyā yathā saṃpa<ti>tako yeva dakṣiṇena pārśvena śayyāṃ kalpeti § 30.7.25A4. rātrīye madhyame yāme dakṣiṇena pārśvena siṃhaśeyyā kalpayitavyā § 30.10.25A5. jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, dakṣiṇe pārśve gaṇḍaṃ vā piṭakaṃ vā bhavati, kiñ câpi vāmena pārśvena śayati, anāpattiḥ 355  § 54.8.46A5. atha khalu pārśve sthitvā trikkhatto purato yaṣṭi kārayitavyā § 55.3.46B5. yo yeva pracālayati taṃ yeva kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena urasi vā tāṇḍeti pārśvasmi vā āhananti pārśvaṃ für (gaṇṭhi-)pāśaṃ? : § 47.5.40B7 *pārṣikā~ “für (irgendeine) Gruppe (von Mönchen) bestimmt” ⇒ parṣā~ § 26.3.23A7. (yavāgū ...) pārṣikā (Hs. pārthikā) bhavati, tāye parṣāye gantavyaṃ pārṣṇikā-vaddhraka~#, pārṣṇi-vaddhaka~#, *pārṣṇi-vadhra~, pārṣṇi-vaddhraka~ “Fersenriemen” ☞ § 26.6, Anm. 2 ⇒ vadhra~, vadhraka~, aṃsi-vaddhaka~ § 26.6.23B1. atha dāni daṇḍakarmma pratidinnaṃ (lies: dinnaṃ?) bhavati, pārṣṇivadhrā (Hs. pāṣṇivavrā) omuñcitavyā, dvitīyakālikasya lābhagrāha<ka>ṃ adhyeṣitvā gantavyaṃ § 57.1.47B1. te ... upānahā nikkhāsiya eka<ṃ> pi ekena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrakasmi gṛhītvā dvitīyaṃ dvitīyena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrake (Hs. °kaṃ) gṛhītvā ... prasphoṭanti § 57.3.47B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... upānahā nikkhāsiya ekam pi ekena hastena pārṣṇivaddhrake gṛhṇiya dvitīyaṃ dvitīyena hastena pārṣṇivaddhrake gṛhṇiya “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.7.47B5. prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśitavyaṃ. vṛddhānte upānahāyo pārṣṇivaddhake osāriya praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ pāla~ ⇒ rakṣa-pāla~ pālaka~ ⇒ go-pālaka~, paśu-pālaka~ pālaya- ⇒ anu-pāle-, prati-pālaya-, prati-pāle- § 4.15.5B2. tā naṃ rakṣaṃtu tā ca naṃ pālayantu (vs) pāśa~ ⇒ gaṇṭhi-pāśa~ pāśaka~ ⇒ kukkuṭa-pāśaka~, gaṇṭhi-pāśaka~ pāṣāṇa~ “Stein” § 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya vālikāye vā pāṣāṇasya vā patthaliddrakānāṃ vā pūrayitavyaṃ pāṣṇivavrā für pārṣṇivadhrā : § 26.6.23B1 -pāsakaṃ (gaṇṭhi-pāsakaṃ) für -pāśakaṃ : § 31.7.25B6 pi (BHS, Pā) ⇒ pi nāma, pi ... pi, api, evaṃ pi, evaṃ pi kṛtvā, evaṃ pi kariya, taṃ pi § 1.2.1B3. te pi navakā bhikṣū āhaṃsu ... § 1.10.2A2. śalākāṃ pi dāni gṛhṇantena na câpi kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā upānahārūḍhena vā śalākāṃ gṛhṇituṃ § 3.1.3A7. ime pi āryamiśrā osara<ṃ>tikāye nâgacchanti (≒ § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7) § 4.1.4A6. saṃghasthaviro pi nâgacchati § 4.17.5B4. istrī pi vidhavā nagnā sace ’syā daśa bhrātaro (vs) § 4.17.5B4. istri pi peśalā bhavatu śrāddhā bhavatu vratānugā (vs) § 4.17.5B4. puruṣo pi peśalo bhavatu śrāddho bhavatu vratānugo (vs) § 5.3.6A7. saṃghasthaviro pi odhyāyati “asmākaṃ bhagavān ...” § 19.3.17B5. praśvāsakuṭī pi dāni bhikṣuṇā kārayantena na kṣamati ... kārāpayituṃ § 19.20.18A7. tato pi na kṣamati ... § 20.14.20A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ pi dāni khādantena nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām ... vā bhikṣūṇāṃ agrato dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 21.5.20B2. atha dāni aparo pi koci sīvayi<tu>kāmo bhavati, ... (≒ § 21.6.20B4) § 23.5.21B2. madhyamake pi eṣo eva paryāyo ananyo adhikṛto § 25.10.22B6. antamasato pṛthivīpradeśaṃ pi gomayena upalimpiya thapetavyaṃ § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... so pi *pratibodhiyānaṃ (?; Hs. pratibodhanāṃ) tena purimaṃ kāyaṃ abhyunnāmeti ... § 34.1.28B1. ime pi śramaṇakā āgacchiya madhye niṣaṇṇāḥ (≒ § 34.2.28B2, § 35.1.28B7, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 36.2.29B2, § 37.1.29B7) § 39.1.30B7. āhatā pi ’yaṃ gaṇḍī, bhukta<ṃ> pi (oder lies: “bhukt’ api”) amhehi § 39.9.31A5. āraṇyakānāṃ pi ārocetha § 39.9.31A6. tehi pi dāni āraṇyakehi 356  § 39.16.31B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi yatra p’ ullaggikāye āsituṃ § 39.9.31A6. āraṇyakānāṃ pi ārocitavyaṃ § 39.10.31A7. āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantrehi § 39.10.31A7. vayaṃ pi na praticchāma § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante, āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 39.14.31B2. pariveśakena pṛcchitavyaṃ “ko āraṇyakānāṃ lābhagrāh<ak>o?” yadi tāvaj jalpanti “ahaṃ pi ahaṃ pi” tti, vaktavyaṃ “āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ukaḍḍhatha” § 39.26.32A4. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “ahaṃ pi ahaṃ pi” tti, ... § 39.18.31B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjituṃ § 40.16.33B1. taṃ pi dāni ... dātavyaṃ § 41.1.33B3. udake pi khalu mātrā § 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā § 41.10.34A6. yo pi so brāhmaṇānāṃ uṣṇodakakarako, so pi na evaṃ śucī § 41.14.34B4. ahaṃ pi na jānāmi § 41.20.35A4. taṃ pi dhik yo ’sya muñcati (vs) § 41.22.35A6. pādopadhānakaṃ udaka-d<ak>āna<ka>ṃ pi ca uṣṭhapayitvā § 41.26.35B3. evaṃ pi upaviśitavyaṃ § 42.3.36A5. te dāni uṣṇena ca santāpitāḥ bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārgganti, na labhanti § 42.3.36A6. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā (= § 42.4.36A7) § 42.4.36A7. bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārggayanti § 47.1.40B4. ime pi (“jedoch”) na jānanti ... (= § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A4) § 48.6.41B1. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato ... § 50.1.43A2. ayaṃ pi (“aber”) deśakālaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ gṛhītvā ārāmacārikāṃ caṃcūryati § 50.1.43A3. so dāni bhikṣuḥ ... āgameti “idānīṃ pi eṣyati muhūrttaṃ pi eṣyati” § 50.2.43A3. ayuṣman, sādhu taṃ pātrakaṃ pi labhema § 52.1.44B1. ime pi (“aber”) bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramanti § 54.13.46B1. yadi koci pracālayati tasya dātavyā. te<na> pi (“aber”) dāni tahiṃ na āghāto bandhitavyo § 55.6.46B7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracālayati, na kṣamati so pi adhyupekṣituṃ § 57.1.47B1. te ... upānahā nikkhāsiya eka<ṃ> pi ekena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrakasmi gṛhītvā dvitīyaṃ dvitīyena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrake gṛhītvā ... prasphoṭanti (≒ § 57.3. 47B2) § 57.11.48A1. ta<ṃ> pi dāni na kṣamati vṛddhatarakasya vā anuvātaṃ prasphoṭayituṃ § 59.1.48A6. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyāḥ tulikāye nakkaṃ vijjhanti, sūtrakaṃ pi vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ nakke prakṣipanti usw. pi nāma § 20.12.19B7. dantakāṣṭhaṃ pi nāma khādantena na kṣamati stūpavigrahe vā saṃgha- vigrahe vā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ; vgl. § 20.14.20A1. dantakāṣṭhaṃ pi dāni khādantena nâpi kṣamati ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ pi ... pi “entweder ... oder” ☞ § 30.1, Anm. 3 ⇒ api § 41.17.34B7. yadi vayam imasya dārakasya evaṃ dharmmiṣṭhasya imaṃ hiraṇya- suvarṇṇaṃ harāma, praticorehi pi muṣyema grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema rājakule pi vadhyema § 41.18.35A1. yadi vayaṃ etasya dharmmiṣṭhasya etaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ harema, praticorehi vā vayaṃ muṣyema grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema rājakule pi vadhyema § 60.1.48B5. te ... śarkarāyaṃ pi śalākāyaṃ pi aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyanti piccakam für phicca° : § 62.6.50A2, § 62.8.50A4 piṭaka~ “Pustel” ⇒ utpāta-gaṇḍa-piṭaka~ § 30.10.25A5. jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, dakṣiṇe pārśve gaṇḍaṃ vā piṭakaṃ vā bhavati, ... 357  § 32.10.27B4. yadi kasyaci vraṇo bhavati gaṇḍo vā piṭako vā, na dāni sahasā uppīḍitavyaṃ piṭharikā~ (BHS) “Pfanne” § 43.1.38A2. sthālīyo piṭharikā (Hs. pīṭharikā) adhotakā anupaliptā nakulamūṣikehi ālupyamānā ... § 43.4.38A4. yaṃ tatra bhaṇḍaṃ bhavati lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā sthālī vā piṭharikā vā ... piṇḍa~ ⇒ mṛt-piṇḍa~, mṛttikā-piṇḍa~, sudhā-piṇḍa~ § 4.7.4B6. sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāya piṇḍāya praviśitavyaṃ § 4.12.5A4. bhojanaṃ dīyati, mahanto piṇḍo parigṛhīto bhavati, ... § 4.13.5A5. nâpi kṣamati saṃghasthavireṇa labdho piṇḍo ... utthihiya gantuṃ § 4.13.5A7. na dāni ... utthāya āsanāto gantavyaṃ, “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya § 5.7.6B5. sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāya piṇḍāya caritavyaṃ § 5.11.7A1. na kṣamati dvitīyasthavireṇa hantahantāye bhuñjiyāṇaṃ “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ (≒ § 6.11.8A2) § 13.7.12B2. ullāye gṛhītako bhavati, piṇḍaṃ (“den schimmeligen Belag”?) śāṭiya mṛttikāye limpitavyo § 31.27.26B2. āyuṣman, mā piṇḍāya praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha § 31.30.26B5. āyuṣmaṃ, mā piṇḍāye praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha § 31.27.26B2. nevāsikehi vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, āgametha sahitakā piṇḍāye praviś- iṣyāmaḥ”, tato sahitakehi praviśitavyaṃ § 31.31.26B5. yaṃ kālaṃ āgantukā piṇḍāye (Hs. °āthe) cariya vihāraṃ āgatā bhavanti, ... § 41.4.33B7. Vaiśālīn nagarī[ṃ] piṇḍāya praviṣṭo § 41.4.34A1. Veśālīṃ nagarīṃ piṇḍāya carati § 41.6.34A2. sthaviro ... Vaiśālīṃ piṇḍāya caritvā ... § 49.1.42A1. naỿva eṣo pratibalo piṇḍāya aṇṭhituṃ § 51.1.43B7. te dāni bhikṣū piṇḍāya caramāṇo antaraghare yāva uṭṭhāṇāto nirghoṭenti § 51.2.44A1. evaṃ piṇḍāye caritavyaṃ § 51.15.44A7. evaṃ piṇḍāya caritavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VI].45A1) § 52.1.44A7. te dāni niśrayakaraṇīyā piṇḍāya caranti § 52.3.44B2. eṣo dāni bhikṣu niśrayakaraṇīyo bhavati, nâpi dāni kṣamati piṇḍāya cariyāṇaṃ bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramituṃ § 52.5.44B4. ayaṃ ca piṇḍāya caritvā āgato bhavati ... usw. piṇḍaka~ (1) “Almosengang” § 31.27.26B2. atha dāni <na> bhavati, āgantukānāṃ {piṇḍakānāṃ} (oder lies piṇḍa<cāri>kānāṃ?) piṇḍabhaktāni uddiśitavyāni § 39.9.31A6. mā piṇḍakena vihariṣyatha (2) “rund”# § 17.6.15A1. anyehi khāṇukā viśālikā vā piṇḍakā vā paripūriya dātavyā piṇḍa-cāra~ (Pā) “Almosengang” ⇒ piṇḍa-cārikā~ § 8.7.9A4. yadi piṇḍacāro aṇṭhito bhavati, upanāmayitavyo § 52.3.44B3. piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhiyāṇaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā allīpayitavyaṃ § 52.9.44B7. atha dāni piṇḍacāraṃ aṇṭhitvā tato eva nadīkūle ... āhāraṃ kṛtvā pātraṃ nirmmādayitvā āgacchati, anāpattiḥ § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto parapratibaddhāye jīvikāye ... piṇḍa-cārika~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) (1) “Bettelgänger” § 17.5.15A1. ahan dharmmakathiko, ahaṃ vinayadharo, aham āraṇyako, piṇḍacāriko, pāṃsukūliko § 31.27.26B2. atha dāni <na> bhavati, āgantukānāṃ {piṇḍakānāṃ} (oder lies piṇḍa<cāri>kānāṃ?) piṇḍabhaktāni uddiśitavyāni § 51.3.44A1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati piṇḍacārikena yāva uṭṭhānāto nirghoṭayituṃ § 52.2.44B2. evaṃ piṇḍacārikena pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 52.10.44B7, Uddāna [VI].45A1) 358  § 52.3.44B2. imehi śaknoma piṇḍacārikehi mukhe kavalaṃ prakṣipituṃ (2) “durch Bettelgang erworbene Almosenspeise”(?)# ☞ § 31.31, Anm. 1 § 31.31.26B5. atha dāni piṇḍacāriko bhavati, yaṃ kālaṃ āgantukā piṇḍāye cariya vihāraṃ āgatā bhavanti, ... § 31.31.26B6. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato yadi tahiṃ kiñci piṇḍacārikaṃ praṇītatarakaṃ bhavati, āgantukānāṃ sārāṇīyaṃ karttavyaṃ piṇḍa-cārikā~# “Almosengang” ⇒ piṇḍa-cāra~ § 49.7.42B4. tenâpi dāni piṇḍacārikaṃ vā aṇṭhiyāṇa vihāraṃ vâgacchiya āhāraṃ kṛtvā ... piṇḍa-pāta~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “Almosenspeise” ⇒ agra-piṇḍapāta~, cīvara-piṇḍapāta- śayyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~, nīhāra-piṇḍapāta~, nīhāra-piṇḍapātaka~, nīhāraka-piṇḍapāta~, nīhārika-piṇḍapāta~, piṇḍapātaka~ § 4.11.5A3. dīrghāyu avaśyan teṣāṃ dātavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ § 4.20.6A3. kulāt kulaṃ cariya (lies: cāriya [m.c.]) piṇḍapātaṃ (vs) § 5.10.6B7. oheyyaglānakānāṃ piṇḍapāto dāpayitavyo (= § 6.10.7B7) § 5.10.7A1. oheyyaglānakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye piṇḍapāto gṛhṇitavyo (= § 6.10.8A1) § 6.7.7B5. yāva sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāye pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ § 6.10.8A1. bhante oheyyaglānakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye piṇḍapātaṃ gṛhṇatha § 8.8.9A5. piṇḍapāto ukkaḍhitavyo piṇḍapāta upanāmayitavyo § 39.14.31B2. vaktavyaṃ “āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ukaḍḍhatha.” tehi āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapāto ukkaḍḍhayitavyo. ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikakalpiyakuṭīyaṃ sthāpayitavyo § 39.26.32A4. pariveṣakena sarvveṣāṃ ekasthāne piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo § 39.26.32A4. vaktavyaṃ “grāmāntikānāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ piṇḍapātaṃ parigṛhṇatha” tti § 49.6.42B3. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā pratibalo bhavati piṇḍapātam vā aṇṭhituṃ vihārakaṃ vâgantuṃ § 50.1.43A1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā bhikṣu adhyeṣṭo “āyuṣman, icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyamānaṃ.” (≒ § 50.2.43A4) § 50.1.43A2. so dāni bhikṣu piṇḍapātasya kṛtena praviṣṭo § 50.3.43A5. nâpi kṣamati piṇḍapātanīhārakena piṇḍapātam ānayitvā śūnyake vihārake osariya gantuṃ § 50.4.43A6. piṇḍapātanīhārako adhyeṣitavyo, vaktavyam “āyuṣman, icchāmi piṇḍapātaṃ nikkāliyantaṃ.” ti § 50.5.43A7. dāyakadānapatī vaktavyāḥ “detha glānasya piṇḍapātaṃ.” § 50.7.43B3. yadi upakaṭṭho kālo bhavati, na dāni tena bhuñjantena āsitavyaṃ. atha khalu ubhaye piṇḍapātā nīharttavyā § 51.5.44A2. nêdāni vaktavyaṃ “piṇḍapātaṃ mahāpuṇye dehi.” atha khalu tūṣṇīkena uddeśe sthātavyaṃ § 58.4.48A4. a<na>ntariko vaktavyo “āyuṣman, mama tāva piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhê”ti § 59.5.48B2. ānantarikasya vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, mama piṇḍapātam ukkaḍḍhesi” § 60.5.48B7. ānantarikasya pātraṃ dātavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mama piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍhesi” usw. piṇḍapātaka~# “Almosenspeise” ⇒ piṇḍa-pāta~, nīhāra-piṇḍapātaka~ § 50.1.43A2. vihārakasya dvāramūle piṇḍapātakaṃ thapiya gato § 50.2.43A4. āyuṣman, yadā (lies: tadā?) so mayā piṇḍapātako vihārasya purato nikṣipto § 50.5.43B1. yadi tāva denti, dve piṇḍapātakā gṛhṇitavyā ... vihārakaṃ āgantavyaṃ § 52.5.44B3. atha dāni upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā piṇḍapātako bhavati, ayaṃ ca piṇḍāya caritvā āgato bhavati, sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ ... piṇḍapāta-nīhāraka~ (Pā); vgl. BHS. piṇḍapāta-nirhāraka (s. BHSD, s.v. nirhāraka) ⇒ piṇḍapāta- hāraka~, nīhāra-piṇḍapāta~, nīhāra-piṇḍapātaka~, nīhāraka-piṇḍapāta~, nīhārika- piṇḍapāta~ ☞ § 50.2, Anm. 3, § 50.3, Anm. 1 (1) “das Herausbringen/Mitbringen von Almosenspeise”# § 50.2.43A4. evaṃ ca tvaṃ mama piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karesi (2) “jemand, der Almosenspeise herausbringt/mitbringt” (= Pā) 359  § 50.3.43A5. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati nīhārikapiṇḍapātena piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ adhyeṣitvā adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ § 50.3.43A5. nâpi kṣamati piṇḍapātanīhārakena piṇḍapātam ānayitvā śūnyake vihārake osariya gantuṃ § 50.3.43A6. evaṃ piṇḍapātanīhārakena (Hs. °pātenī°) pratipadyitavyaṃ; vgl. § 50.11. 43B7. evaṃ piṇḍapātahārakena pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VI].45A1) § 50.4.43A6. nimantraṇam bhavati, bhikṣu jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, na pratibalo gantuṃ, piṇḍapātanīhārako adhyeṣitavyo § 50.8.43B4. nâpi kṣamati nīhārapiṇḍapātenâpi “adhyeṣṭo mayā piṇḍapātanīhārako” ti adarśanena priyaṃ karttuṃ § 50.10.43B6. piṇḍapātanīhārako ca cireṇa āgacchati, kālo ca stokāvaśeṣo bhavati, nīhārakapiṇḍapātena ... panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B6. atha dāni nīhārakapiṇḍapāto na pratyudgacchati, kālo ca atikramati piṇḍapātanīhārakena tvaritatvaritam āgantavyaṃ § 50.10.43B7. atha dāni dūre saṃghārāmo bhavati, piṇḍapātanīhārakena yatraỿva pānīyaṃ paśyati, tatraỿva bhuṃjitavyaṃ piṇḍapāta-hāraka~# “jemand, der Almosenspeise herausbringt/mitbringt” ⇒ piṇḍapāta-nīhāraka~ § 50.11.43B7. evaṃ piṇḍapātahārakena pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VI].45A1) piṇḍa-bhakta~#, piṇḍa-bhaktaka~# “erbettelte Speise”; vgl. Jā II 246.27. piṇḍa-bhatta~ § 31.27.26B2. atha dāni <na> bhavati, āgantukānāṃ {piṇḍakānāṃ} piṇḍabhaktāni uddiśitavyāni § 31.30.26B5. atha dāni bhaktakāni bhavanti, āgantukā<nā>ṃ piṇḍabhaktakāni uddiśitavyāni piṇḍikā~ “Kügelchen” ⇒ gomaya-piṇḍikā~ § 42.20.37A4. cūrṇṇaṃ ... piṇḍikam vā vaṭṭiya (Hs. paṭṭiya) dātavyaṃ piṇḍe- (Pā) “anhäufen”; < Skt. piṇḍayati § 39.29.32A7. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... śṛgālâpi āraṇye vasanti. divasaṃ yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha” pitṛ~ ⇒ mātā-pitṛ~, mātā-pitṛ-kaṇṭha~ § 4.15.5B2. yathā naṃ icchati (lies: °atī oder °ate [m.c.]) pitā (vs) § 6.13.8A4. yathā icchati se mātā yathā icchati se pitā (Hs. mātā) (vs) § 33.9.28A3. eṣo bhikṣu mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā bhaginīm vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâyaṃ kṣamati śabdāpayituṃ “ambe” tti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā § 33.10.28A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya <mātā vā> pitā vā bhaginī vā śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti pravyāharttuṃ pitṛyaka~, pityaka~# “Onkel väterlicherseits”; Hyperformen für Skt. *pitryaka (vgl. Skt. pitrya “vom Vater kommend, väterlich; der älteste Bruder [die Stelle des Vaters vertretend]” [PW. s.v.]); vgl. Pkt. pittiya, pittiyaa “Onkel” (Bruder des Vaters) < Skt. pitrya, pitriya (s. CDIAL 8188; CDIAL-Ad 8188); Skt. pitṛvya “Onkel” ☞ § 49.1, Anm. 2 § 49.1.41B6. ahaṃ khalu te pityako bhavāmi § 49.1.41B6. pi<t>yako bhavāhi, mātulako bhavāhi § 49.1.42A3. yathâpi dāni nagarakulopakena pityakena sārddhaṃ praviṣṭasya ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāvisya § 49.2.42A5. ahaṃ khalu te pitṛyako bhavāmi pitta~ ⇒ vāta-pitta-śleṣmaka~, vāta-pitta-śleṣmika~ pitthitvā für pithitvā : § 13.17.12B7 pi-tha- (BHS, SWTF) “zuschließen”; < Skt. api-√dhā; vgl. Pā. pithīyati ⇒ pi-the-, pi-√dhā § 13.17.12B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati vihāro pi{t}thitvā sthapituṃ § 51.8.44A4. yadi tāva śilāpūrakāṃ pithiyāṇaṃ (Hs. piṣiy°) ovvarakaṃ praviśati, jāni- tavyaṃ “eṣā dāsyati” § 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ <cīvarakoṇena> mukhaṃ pithitvā jambhayitavyaṃ pi-the- (BHS) “verhüllen”; < Skt. api-√dhā ⇒ pi-tha-, pi-√dhā § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, śīrṣam vā duḥkhati, 360  arddha śīrṣasya pithetavyaṃ eko ca karṇṇo pi-√dhā (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “zuschließen”; < Skt. api-√dhā ⇒ pi-tha-, pi-the- § 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apadu{cca}ritavyaṃ cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ (Hs. pivi°) cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ § 42.19.37A4. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi § 61.6.49A6. cīvarakarṇṇakena mukhaṃ pidhiya sukhākaṃ vijṛmbhitavyaṃ § 61.7.49A7. cīvarakoṇena mukhaṃ pidhiya saṃprajānena vijṛmbhayitavyaṃ pipāsita~ “durstig” § 41.15.34B5. so dāni corasenāpatiḥ pipāsitaḥ tasya dārakasyâha “haṃgho dāraka, pipāsito ’smi. icchāmi pānīyaṃ pātuṃ.” piba- ⇒ √pā-, pīta~ § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ yadā navakāḥ ... upagrāyanti pānīyaṃ vā pibanti § 5.11.7A2. yaṃ kālaṃ navakā bhikṣū ugrāyanti vā pānīyam vā pibanti § 18.53.17B3. pibāhi, yadi ’si jīvitukāmo § 19.42.19A4. imaṃ khalu buddhaprajñaptaṃ bhaiṣajyaṃ. piba yadi jīvitukāmo ’si § 31.28.26B3. pādāṃ prakṣāletha, hastāṃ nirmmādetha, pānīyaṃ pibatha, viśramatha § 32.6.27B2. dhūpam vā pibantasya (☞ § 32.6, Anm. 6), akṣiṇī vā añjantasya, ... § 40.14.33A6. pibantena oṣṭhā patraśākhāye nirmmādayitvā agroṣṭhakehi pātavyaṃ § 40.16.33B2. tato yeva pibati § 41.15.34B6. senāpati pibāhi § 41.18.35A1. so dāni corasenāpati pānīyaṃ pibiya tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati ... pibana~ (BHS) “das Trinken” ☞ § 39.15, Anm. 1 ⇒ bhuñjana~ § 19.42.19A3. vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā pūtimūtraṃ pibanāya dethê”tti § 40.7.32B7. anyaṃ pibanāye pānīyaṃ bhavati anyaṃ pādadhovanīyaṃ § 40.8.33A1. tato pibanāye dātavyaṃ pilipilāpa-# “glänzen”? ☞ § 49.1, Anm. 9 § 49.1.42A3. āyuṣman, snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo, pilipilāpanti oṣṭhā, suṣṭhu khalu nirddhāpīyati piviyāṇaṃ für pidhi° : § 22.5.21A2 piṣiyāṇaṃ für pithiy° : § 51.8.44A4 pihitvā ⇒ pi-√dhā pīṭha~ “Sitz, Schemel” ⇒ pīṭhaka~, jentāka-pīṭha~, mañca-pīṭha~ § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ondriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ utthitakāṃ ... (≒ § 16.2. 14A6) § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā paluggakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} vātātapena opūriyantā{ṃ} § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ondriṇṇakā paluggakā bhavanti, muṃjā karttitavyā ... (≒ § 12.18.12A5, § 13.11.12B3) § 12.18.12A5. muñjā karttitavyā, balbajā karttitavyā, tato mañcā ca pīṭhā ca vuṇitavyā (≒ § 15.8.14A4) § 12.16.12A3. vṛddhānāñ ca mañcā prajñāpayitavyāḥ navakānāṃ pīṭhāḥ prajñāpayitavyāḥ § 12.12.11B7. āyuṣman amuke vihārake ettakā mañcā ettakā pīṭhāḥ ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ § 13.3.12A7. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} paluggakā{ṃ} utpādakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} ... § 13.11.12B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā bhagnakā bhavanti, cchinnagaṇṭhikā karttavyā § 14.7.13A6. maṃcasya upari pīṭhā sthāpayitavyā. yaṃ tatra śayyāsanaṃ ... pīṭhasya upari sthāpayitavyaṃ § 14.16.13B4~5. mañcasya upari pīṭhaṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ. pīṭhasyôpari yaṃ tatra jarjarabisi vā jarjaracaturaśrako vā taṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ § 17.11.15A5. sarvvehi muñjā vā balbajā vā karttitavyā, mañcā vā vātavyā pīṭhā vātavyā § 21.9.20B5. atha dāni kaṭhinaṃ na bhavati, mañcasya vā upari cīvaraṃ pīṭhasya vā upari cīvarakaṃ kariyāṇaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 23.4.1.21A7. nâyaṃ kṣamati tahiṃ maṃcā vā pīṭhā vā praveśituṃ § 23.4.1.21A7. pīṭhaṃ praveśeti. pīṭhasyâpi evaṃ yyeva 361  § 48.1.41A3. mañcā ca pīṭhāṃ (Hs. ryāṇaṃ) ca sāpāśrayā ca § 48.2.41A5. mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca trepaśyakā ca usw. pīṭhaka~ “Sitz, Schemel” ⇒ pīṭha~, jentāka-pīṭhaka~, pātra-pīṭhaka~ § 12.10.11B6. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ... § 23.6.1.21B3. pīṭhakam vā pīṭhikām vā tṛpādakam vā vinā pratipādakehi thapeti, anāpattiḥ § 41.6.34A3. pīṭhakā (Acc. sg. neut. oder eine Verschreibung für pīṭhikā?) prajñāpiya, pādataṭṭhakaṃ (Hs. °taddhakaṃ) upanāmayitvā upānahikāyo upanāmiya upānahā- pocchan{n}o upanāmiya pādāṃ dhovati § 56.4.47A4. ātmano pratisandhismi sukhākaṃ niṣīdanakaṃ pīṭhake prajñapayitavyaṃ pīṭharikā für piṭharikā : § 43.1.38A2 pīṭhikā~ “Schemel” ☞ § 23.6.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ jentāka-pīṭhikā~ § 8.5.9A1. prasrāvakumbhikā nikkālayitavyā pīṭhikā prajñapayitavyā § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa pīṭhikā prajñapayitavyā ... § 8.10.9A6. divāvihāraṃ gacchantasya pīṭhikā nayitavyā niṣīdanaṃ nayitavyaṃ ... § 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto āgacchantasya pīṭhikā ānayitavyā, niṣīdanaṃ ānayitavyaṃ ... § 23.6.1.21B3. pīṭhakam vā pīṭhikām vā tṛpādakam vā vinā pratipādakehi thapeti, anāpattiḥ § 42.11.36B5. jentāke pīṭhikā vā śuktikāyo vā dhovitavyā usw. √pīḍ ⇒ antara-pīḍita~, ā-pīḍaya-, ut-pīḍita~, up-pīḍita~, up-pīḍaya-, up-pīlita~, niṣ-pīḍaya-, pra- pīḍita~ § 41.24.35B1. upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhovitavyaṃ pīḍiya ātape śoṣayitavyaṃ § 41.29.35B6. upānahāpocchano dhoviya pīḍiya tatraỿva sthapitavyaṃ pīta~ ⇒ pītaka~, √pā, *pāyita~, piba- § 28.7.24A4. atha dāni glāno, ghṛtaṃ vā pītaṃ, virecanaṃ vā pītaṃ, kiñ câpi caṃkramati, <anāpattiḥ> pītaka~ ⇒ virecana-pītaka~, ghṛta-pītaka~, pīta~ pīṣaya- (BHS) “zermahlen” § 51.8.44A3. eṣā strī dhānāṃ vā pīṣayati, tilam vā mudgam vā kalāyām vā daleti puggalika~ (Pā) “persönlich”; vgl. BHS, SWTF. paudgalika ☞ § 11.11, Anm. 4 § 11.11.11A2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāviddhako vā bhavati virecanapītako vā glānako vā bhavati, vastraṃ puggalikaṃ antarīkaraṇaṃ dadiya caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ -puṭa~ (BHS) ⇒ upānaha-puṭa~ § 11.8.11A1. yadi tāva kambalasya bhavati, ekapuṭaṃ vā dvipuṭam vā karttavyaṃ. atha dāni karpāsasya bhavati dvipuṭaṃ (Hs. °ṭā) vā tripuṭaṃ (Hs. °ṭā) vā karttavyaṃ § 25.15.23A2. prasevikā karttavyā dupuṭā tṛpuṭā puṭikā~ ⇒ āviddha-puṭikā~ puṇya~ “Verdienst” ⇒ kṛta-puṇya~, mahā-puṇya~ § 4.17.5B5. ubhau puṇyāni kṛtvāna samaśīlavratā ubhau (vs) § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi (Loc. pl.) niveśayamāno puṇya-pāpa-phalopaga~ (°phala-upa°) (SWTF) § 4.16.5B3. yathākarmma gamiṣyanti puṇyapāpaphalopagāḥ (vs) puṇya-bhāgiya~# “zum Erwerb von Verdienst vorbestimmt” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ -bhāgiya~, -bhāgīya~, phala-bhāgiya~, vāsanā-bhāgīya~ § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi niveśayamāno putra~ ⇒ itikitikāya-putra~, kula-putra~, rāja-putra~, vāta-putra~ § 4.20.6A2. putram vā paśum vā ārabhya (vs) § 41.12.34B1. tasya dāni eko putro acirajāto § 41.13.34B3. putra dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsesi § 41.21.35A5. anyo ’sau ... bhavati agrakulikasya putro putraka~ ⇒ eka-putraka~, kula-putraka~ puna (Pā); vgl. Pkt. puṇa ⇒ punar, puno 362  § 3.5.3B2. bhante katamâdya? ... katamā puna hiyo ’bhūṣi? § 55.2.46B4. so (= geṇḍuka~) vārayitavyo navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā puna prāpuṇati punar ⇒ puna, puno, ko punar vvādo § 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi § 52.6.44B6. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, karohi dhūmaṃ. mā ca punaḥ āmiṣacakṣuḥ <deśesi>.”; vgl. § 8.7.9A5. mā ca puno āmiṣacakṣu deśesi § 54.2.46A2. <sā vārayitavyā> navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā punaḥ prāpuṇati § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni <na> pāreti vinodayituṃ, punaḥ punaḥ khajjati (Hs. khanati), ekatam’ aṃte gacchiya kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ § 62.1.49B4. cetovaśiparamapāramiprāptā punar bbuddhā bhagavanto yehi yehi vihārehi ākāṃkṣanti, tehi tehi vihārehi viharanti puno (Pā) ⇒ puna, punar, bhūyo § 8.7.9A5. vaktavyaṃ “kārehi dhūmaṃ. mā ca puno āmiṣacakṣu deśesi.”; vgl. § 52.6. 44B6. mā ca punaḥ āmiṣacakṣuḥ <deśesi> § 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi § 40.12.33A5. puno vā nirmmādayitavyaṃ § 59.4.48B1. atha dāni puno puno kṣīvikā āgacchati, prahāṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 59.5.48B2. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno kṣīvikā āgacchati ānantarikasya vaktavyaṃ ... § 59.6.48B3. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno kṣivikā āgacchati, dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 60.5.48B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ khajjanako bhavati, puno puno kaṇḍūyati, ... § 61.4.49A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, ... (= § 61.6.49A6) § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya antaraghare vā upaviṣṭasya puno puno vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, utthiya gantavyaṃ § 62.7.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno vātakarmma āgacchati, ... (= § 62.9.50A5, § 62.10.50A6) § 62.8.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vātakarmma puno <puno> āgacchati, ... purato (Pā) < Skt. puratas § 8.6.9A3. cīvarāṇi ... ātmano skandhe dapiya śīrṣaṃ onāmiya purato gantavyaṃ § 18.7.15B6. varccakumbhikāye purato kalpiyakaraki sthāpayitavyā udakasya pūrṇṇa § 18.9.15B7. varccakuṭīye purato kuṭī vā śālā vā karttavyā § 18.44.17A5. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena purato parāṅmukhena sthātavyaṃ § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgacchiya tasya purato sthito § 27.2.23B5. tvaṃ dāni tasya purato āgacchiya sthito § 27.2.23B5. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, eva<ṃ> ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhasi § 27.3.23B6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhituṃ § 28.1.24A1. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgatvā tasya purato tālapādukāhi ābaddhāhi dīrgha- caṃkramaṃ caṃkramati ṭapya ṭaṭapya ṭapya ṭaṭapya tti § 28.3.24A3. nâyan tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato caṃkramituṃ § 28.8.24A4. tan na kṣamati purato samaṃ vā gantuṃ. ohayitvā gantavyaṃ § 50.2.43A4. āyuṣman, yadā (lies: tadā?) so mayā piṇḍapātako vihārasya purato nikṣipto § 54.8.46A5. atha khalu pārśve sthitvā trikkhatto purato yaṣṭi kārayitavyā § 55.6.46B7. <duve vā> trayo vā vārā geṇḍukaṃ purato ābhāsayitvâcchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo usw. purastima~ “östlich” § 4.19.6A1. sarvvā diśā subhayā samākulā sa uttarā sa purastimā (vs) § 18.3.15B2. varccakuṭīṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena nâpi kṣamati vihārasya purastimena vā uttareṇa vā kārāpayituṃ purima~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “vorderer; früher, erster” § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... so pi *pratibodhiyānaṃ (?; Hs. pratibodhanāṃ) tena purimaṃ kāyaṃ abhyunnāmeti, pṛṣṭhimaṃ kāyaṃ abhivilokayati § 30.6.25A3. rātrīye purimaṃ yāmaṃ ... sthānena caṃkrameṇa vītināmayitavyaṃ 363  § 53.4.45A3. eṣo dāni saṃghārāmo purimaṃ paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ (☞ § 18.28, Anm. 1) pratijāgrīyati, dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā purima-paścimaka~# “Anfang und Ende” § 19.42.19A3. yadi tāva ātmanako praśvāso bhavati, purimapaścimakaṃ ca varjayitvā madhyamaṃ gṛhṇitavyo. evam tasya pratigrahaḥ § 19.42.19A4. (praśvāso ...) atha dāni anyātako bhavati, purimapaścimakañ ca varjyaṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ purima~ prahāṇa~ # “die Meditation in der ersten Nachtwache”? ⇒ paścima~ prahāṇa~, dvitīya~ prahāṇa~ § 18.28.16B4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ purime vā paścime vā prahāṇe upaviṣṭo ... puruṣa~ § 4.5.4B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti. āgantuko gamiko ... pravrajito strī puruṣo dārako dārikā § 4.17.5B4. puruṣo pi peśalo bhavatu śrāddho bhavatu vratānugo (vs) § 18.41.17A4. atha khalu yo puruṣāṇāṃ nīlamaṃco tahiṃ gantavyaṃ § 33.15.28A6. strī vā puruṣo vā mahanto bhavati, na dāni mātāpitṛkaṃṭhena ālapitavyā. “mahallako”, “mahallake” ti vā vaktavyā pure-bhaktam#, pure-bhakte#, puro-bhaktam (BHS) “vor der Mahlzeit; am Vormittag”#; vgl. Pā. purebhattaṃ  ⇒  pūrvvaṃ-bhaktam, paścād-bhaktam § 1.7.1B6. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... purebhaktam vā paścādbhaktam vā § 2.5.2B5. kiṃ rātripoṣadho bhaviṣyati divāpoṣadho purebhaktaṃ (Hs. °bhakti) bhaviṣyati paścādbhaktaṃ? § 3.6.3B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... purobhaktaṃ vā paścādbhaktam vā § 31.29.26B3. yadi tāva purebhakte āgatā bhavanti, purebhaktikena cchandayitavyāḥ § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāva purebhakte āgato bhavati, purobhaktikena cchandayitavyo purebhakti für purebhaktaṃ: § 2.5.2B5 pure-bhaktika~#, puro-bhaktika~# “Morgenmahlzeit, Frühstück” § 23.4.5.21B2. na kṣamati tahiṃ bhaktakṛtyaṃ purebhaktikaṃ vā karttuṃ, pātraṃ vā nirmmādayituṃ § 23.6.5.21B4. bhaktakṛtyam vā purobhaktikam vā karoti, pātram vā nirmmādayati, anāpattiḥ § 31.7.25B6. saṃghasya phāsuvihāraṃ upadahatha pādatailena guḍapānīyena pratiśrayeṇa purebhaktikena § 31.8.25B6. praviśiya yācitvā saṃghasya yathāsukhaparibhogaṃ, niḥsārayitavyaṃ pāda- tailaṃ, vekālikaṃ purebhaktikaṃ bhikṣitavyaṃ § 31.18.26A3. kasya śuve bhaktaṃ tarpaṇaṃ purobhaktikaṃ vā? § 31.29.26B3. yadi tāva purebhakte āgatā bhavanti, purebhaktikena cchandayitavyāḥ § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāva purebhakte āgato bhavati, purobhaktikena cchandayitavyo § 32.5.27B1. snāyati vā ekanivasano vā bhavati, bhaktakṛtyaṃ karoti, purebhaktikam vā karoti, ... na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 39.9.31A6. śuve bhaktaṃ vā purebhaktikaṃ vā yavāgūpānaṃ vā bhaviṣyati § 49.1.41B7. purebhaktikaṃ karetha pure-śramaṇa~# “ein (dem Begleiter) vorangehender Mönch”; vgl. Pā. pure-samaṇa ☞ § 49.3, Anm. 1 ⇒ paścāc-chramaṇa~ § 49.3.42A6. evaṃ pureśramaṇena pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 49.10.43A1, Uddāna [VI]. 45A1) § 49.5.42A7. tenâpi dāni pureśramaṇena nâpi kṣamati ghoḍena yathā oḍḍitāye grīvāye gantuṃ § 49.9.42B7. pureśramaṇo na pratibalo bhavati dakṣiṇām ādiśituṃ puro-kṛtya~# “das Bereitlegen (für das nächste Mal)” (?); < Skt. puras + √kṛ (“vornhin stellen, voranstellen usw.”) § 43.16.38B5. purokṛtyaṃ sukhaṃ bhaviṣyati puro-bhaktam ⇒ pure-bhaktam puro-bhaktika~ ⇒ pure-bhaktika~ puro-bhakte ⇒ pure-bhaktam 364 pulaka~ ⇒ tṛṇa-pulaka~ puṣkiriṇī~ (BHS, SWTF) “Teich”; vgl. Skt. puṣkariṇī § 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.14.26A1. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśantehi puṣkiriṇīyaṃ vā taḍāge vā oghe vā pādāṃ dhovitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Vārāṇasyāṃ Buddhavicīrṇṇā nāma puṣkiriṇī § 42.21.37A7. atha dāni ogho vā puṣkiriṇī vā taḍāgo vā bhavati, ... § 47.5.40B7. yadi tahiṃ ogho vā taḍāgam vā bhavati puṣkiriṇī vā, ... puṣkiriṇī-kūla~# “Ufer eines Teiches” § 52.9.44B7. nadīkūle vā udupānakūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle (Hs. °kule) vā āhāraṃ kṛtvā pātraṃ nirmmādayitvā āgacchati, anāpattiḥ § 57.11.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ adhvānam āgato bhavati, upānahāyo ca pāṃsunā opūritā bhavanti, nadīkūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā pādāṃ dhoviya prasphoṭeti, anāpattiḥ puṣpa~ § 1.8.1B7. vibhavo bhavati, śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyāyo puṣpehi okiritavyāyo (= § 2.6.2B6) § 3.7.3B5. vibhavo bhavati śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyā puṣpehi okiritavyā § 8.12.9B1. āgatasya samānasya hastanirmādanaṃ dātavyaṃ, puṣpāṇi dātavyāni § 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, ... puṣpaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, gandho sajjayitavyo § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... klinnakāni vā puṣpāṇi praticchituṃ puṣpa-rasa~ “Saft von Blumen” § 25.3.22B3. (pātraṃ ...) mūlarasena vā patrarasena vā puṣparasena vā nirvvālikena vā gomayena nirmmādayitavyaṃ puṣpopagata~# “mit Blumen versehen, blühend” § 20.3.19A7. evaṃ nāma tvaṃ puṣpopagataṃ vṛkṣaṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi pustaka~ “Buch” ☞ § 8.10, Anm. 2 § 8.10.9A6. divāvihāraṃ gacchantasya pīṭhikā nayitavyā, niṣīdanaṃ nayitavyaṃ, pustako nayitavyo, kuṇḍikā nayitavyā § 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto āgacchantasya pīṭhikā ānayitavyā, niṣīdanaṃ ānayitavyaṃ, pustako (Hs. prastako) ānayitavyo, kuṇḍikā ānayitavyā ... § 32.6.27B2. pustakaṃ vācantasya, pustakaṃ likhantasya, varccakuṭīṃ gacchantasya, ... pūjita~ “angebetet” § 62.1.49B1. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisam- bhāvayitvā ... satkṛto gurukṛto mānitaḥ pūjitaḥ apacāyito ... *pūti-karmman~ ⇒ pūti-vāta-karmman~ *pūti-mūtra~ “stinkender Urin”; vgl. BHS. pūti-mukta, Pā. pūti-mutta ☞ § 19.42, Anm. 1 § 19.42.19A3. atha dāni glāno bhavati bhikṣuḥ pāṇḍurogeṇa, vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā pūtimūtraṃ (Hs. pratim°) pibanāya dethê”tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? pūti-vāta-karmman~# “übelriechender Wind; Blähung”; vgl. Skt. pūti-vāta (“Blähung”), vāta- karman (dass.) § 62.2.49B6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho upaviṣṭo bhavati, eko tāva pūtivātakarmmaṃ karoti. aparo “gaccha” tti. aparo “ḍharaḍha<ra>” tti § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ (Hs. pratikarmmaṃ) aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko vātaṃ na iccheyyā? ...” pūra~ ⇒ pātra-pūra~, pūrṇṇa~ § 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ ... acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ udakasya pūrāṃ § 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ... acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā udakasya pūrā{ṃ} § 52.6.44B4. atha dāni so praṇītabhojanasya mahārhasya pūraṃ pātraṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ āgacchati ... pūrak~ ⇒ kaṇḍikā-pūraka~, śilā-pūrak~ pūraya- (Skt), pūre- (BHS, Pā) ⇒ o-pūraya-, o-pūre-, pari-pūraya~ 365  § 12.8.11B4. mūṣika-utkirā vā yāva vaṃghorikā pūretavyā § 13.7.12B2. mūṣa-ukkārā cikkhalikā pūretavyā § 13.8.12B2. yadi tāva uppeḍanako vihārako bhavati, śakkāroṭena vā pūretavyo (Hs. °vyā) apakvapāṃsukena vā § 18.7.15B5. sthāpetavyāni kāṣṭhakuṇḍāni vā mṛttikākuṇḍāni vā udak<en>a pūrayitavyāni § 18.8.15B7. tena tāni kuṇḍakāni kālena kālaṃ pūrayitavyāni ... § 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... yaṃ kālaṃ pariśuṣkāni bhavanti, tato pūretavyāni § 18.13.16A2. riktakāṃ varccakumbhikāṃ paśyati, svayaṃ vā pūrayitavyaṃ § 23.8.21B6. cikkhal<l>ikā pūretavyā, vaṃghorikā dātavyā § 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya vālikāye vā pāṣāṇasya vā patthaliddrakānāṃ vā pūrayitavyaṃ § 24.4.22A3. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ cchoriya anyasya pūrayitavyaṃ § 40.7.32B7. paridhovanīyena pānīyena śirikuṇḍikā pūrayitavyā, ākalpiyakarkkarī pūr°, pādadhovanikā pūr°, varccakumbhikā pūr° ... kumbhikā ca karakā ca pūr° § 40.8.33A1. tato pānīyāto ... varccakumbhikā vā pūrayituṃ § 40.8.33A2. atha dāni śrāddho bhikṣur bhavati, tato eva śrīkuṇḍikāṃ pūreti, anāpattiḥ § 41.6.34A3. pānīyasya dakānakaṃ pūrīya ... § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... bhājanaṃ sudhotaṃ kṛtvā udakasya pūriya § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ dhūlīye pūritaṃ (“völlig bedeckt”; oder ’pūritaṃ < opūr°?; ☞ § 47.8, Anm. 2) bhavati prasphoṭayitavyaṃ § 50.6.43B1. yadi tāvad yāvadarthaṃ bhaktaṃ dīyati, prakṛty’ eva ātmano bhaktato tasya pātraṃ pūretavyaṃ § 50.9.43B5. cchandayitavyo vaktavyo “ūnakaṃ pūrehi (“Stille deinen Hunger!”; ☞ § 50.9, Anm. 1) yaṃ te rucyati taṃ khādehi.” § 50.10.43B6. nīhārakapiṇḍapātena hastā nirmmādiyāṇaṃ pānīyasya kuṇḍikāṃ pūriyāṇaṃ panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ pūrṇṇa~ ⇒ pūra~ § 18.7.15B6. varccakumbhikāye purato kalpiyakaraki sthāpayitavyā udakasya pūrṇṇa pūrvva~ § 19.3.17B5. praśvāsakuṭī ... na kṣamati vihārasya uttareṇa pūrvveṇa kārāpayituṃ pūrvva-praviṣṭa~# “früher eingetreten” § 18.20.16A7. tahiṃ ca aparo bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo § 18.22.16B1. yadi tāva tahi koci pūrvvapraviṣṭo bhavati tena pratyacchaṭikā karttavyā (≒ § 19.8.18A2) § 19.6.17B7. tahiṃ ca bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo praśvāsaṃ karoti § 41.25.35B2. yadi tāva koci bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo bhavati pūrvvaṃ-bhaktam# adv. “vor der Mahlzeit; am Vormittag”; vgl. SWTF, s.v. pūrvabhaktam, °bhakte ⇒ pure-bhaktam, pure-bhakte, puro-bhaktam, paścād-bhaktam § 1.5.1B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kiṃ pūrvvaṃbhaktaṃ, kiṃ paścādbhaktaṃ? pūrvvotthāyin~ “früher (als andere) aufstehend” § 41.12.34B2. so dāni mātāpitṇāṃ pūrvvotthāyī paścānnipātī priyavādī manaāpavādī kiṃkarapariśrāvako pūlaka~ ⇒ tṛṇa-pūlaka~ √pṛ ⇒ pāraya-, pāre- √pṛcch ⇒ prati-√pṛcch, ā-√pṛcch § 1.1.1B1. dāyakadānapatī pṛcchanti § 3.1.3A6. dāyakadānapati (Nom. pl.) pṛcchanti (= § 4.1.4A6, § 5.1.6A5, § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7) § 1.2.1B2. navakā bhikṣū pṛcchanti: “āyuṣmānn, āgato saṃghasthaviro?” (≒ § 4.2.4A7) § 2.1.2B1. te dāni pṛcchanti “ārya samagro bhikṣusaṃgho?” § 2.9.3A1. tato dāyakadānapatī pṛcchitavyāḥ § 3.10.4A1. dāyakadānapati pṛcchitavyāḥ § 4.5.4B3. pṛcchitavyaṃ “kinnāmako ’si? kiṅgotrako ’si?” (= § 6.5.7B2) § 4.5.4B3. sākāraṃ soddeśaṃ pṛcchiyāṇaṃ tato ’dhivāsayitavyaṃ (= § 6.5.7B2) 366  § 5.5.6B2. sākāraṃ soddeśaṃ pṛcchiya tato ’dhivāsayitavyaṃ § 8.4.8B7. vanditvā sukhaśayitaṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyo) § 8.7.9A4. nānāvarṇṇitaṃ bhavati, pṛcchitavyo “suvihita, kuto idaṃ labdhaṃ?” § 10.4.10A5. antevāsinā ... ācāryasya sukharātri pṛcchitavyā § 18.40.17A3. nâpi kṣamati taruṇikā pṛcchituṃ, mā veḍḍā bhaveya tti § 20.5.19B1. bhagavān jānanto yeva pṛcchati (= § 23.2.21A5, § 24.2.22A1, § 43.1.38A2) § 26.2.23A6. te dāni śabdāpitāḥ, etad eva pṛcchiyanti (Passiv; vgl. BHSG § 37.9) § 32.2.27A5. so dāni sthaviro pṛcchati “āyuṣmaṃ, kecciro te āgatasya?” § 38.5.30A7. saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti § 41.14.34B4. te dāni pṛcchanti § 41.16.34B6. so dāni pṛcchati § 41.18.35A1. tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati § 52.6.44B4. “suvihita, kuto imaṃ?” ti pṛcchitavyo usw. pṛthivī~ “Fußboden” § 18.35.16B7. yadi tāva āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, uttatthapitavyā § 18.35.16B7. kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, udakena dhovitavyā § 19.15.18A5. atha dāni kṛta{ṃ}karmmā pṛthivī bhavati, dhovayitavyā § 19.33.18B6. atha dāni kṛtakarmmā pṛthivī bhavati, dhovitavyā § 19.15.18A4. so pṛthivīpradeśo, yadi tāvad āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā uttatthiyāṇaṃ cchorayitavyo (≒ § 19.33.18B6) pṛthivī-pradeśa~ (SWTF, SJW) “eine Stelle auf dem Boden” § 18.31.16B5. (uśvāsaṃ ...) cchoriyāṇaṃ so pṛthivīpradeśo gomayena udvarttitavyo § 18.35.16B7. (uśvāsaṃ ...) cchoḍiyāṇa so pṛthivīpradeśo gomayena udvarttayitavyo § 18.35.17A1. antamasato taṃhi pṛthivīpradeśe gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 19.15.18A4. tenâpi dāni praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa so pṛthivīpradeśo, yadi tāvad āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā uttatthiyāṇaṃ cchorayitavyo § 19.33.18B7. antamasato tahiṃ pṛthivīpradeśe tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 25.10.22B6. antamasato pṛthivīpradeśaṃ pi gomayena upalimpiya thapetavyaṃ pṛṣṭato für pṛṣṭhato : § 29.7.24B4 pṛṣṭhatas § 8.6.9A2. ātmano cīvarakaṃ gṛhṇiya pṛṣṭhato ’nugantavyaṃ § 8.12.9B1. cetiyaṃ vandantasya pṛṣṭhato ’nugantavyaṃ § 18.44.17A5. utkṣiptarathyāyāṃ kuḍyaṃ pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā uśvāso karttavyo § 18.45.17A6. ekatamaṃ jjhāṭam vā vṛkṣaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariyāṇa upaviśitavyaṃ § 19.36.19A1. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena pṛṣṭhato sthātavyaṃ parāṅmukhena § 27.6.23B6. na kṣamati stūpaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ, saṃghaṃ vā upādhyāyā- cāryam vā vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ § 28.4.24A3. nâpi kṣamati stūpam vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ, saṃghaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ, upādhyāyācāryam vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ § 28.8.24A5. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā <anu>parivarttituṃ § 29.7.24B4. na kṣamati stūpaṃ pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ, saṃgham vā pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ, upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariya niṣīdituṃ, vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato (Hs. pṛṣṭato) karīya niṣīdituṃ § 49.5.42A7. nâpi kṣamati tena dūraṃ pṛṣṭhato gantuṃ pṛṣṭhima~ (BHS[Mvu]) “hinter” § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... so pi *pratibodhiyānaṃ (?; Hs. pratibodhanāṃ) tena purimaṃ kāyaṃ abhyunnāmeti, pṛṣṭhimaṃ kāyaṃ abhivilokayati § 41.5.34A2. so dāni praduṣṭacitto sthavirasya pṛṣṭhimena pṛṣṭhimaṃ anubaddho √p ⇒ pūraya-, pūre-, pūrṇṇa~, o-pūraya-, o-pūre-, pari-pūraya~ pe (BHS, Pā) “usw.; wie oben”; Abkürzung von peyālaṃ ⇒ peyālaṃ, yāva § 4.12.5A5. evaṃ ‖ pe ‖ sūpasya ghṛtasya māṃsasya olaṃkānāṃ ... § 32.6.27B1. na kṣamati mṛttikākarmma karentasya ‖ pe ‖ pātrapākaṃ dadantasya, ... § 40.2.32B3. ‖ pe ‖ yāva (= § 40.13.33A5, § 41.22.35A6) 367  § 40.14.33A6. ... agroṣṭhakehi pātavyaṃ. ‖ pe ‖ taṃ yyeva karttavyaṃ § 54.10.46A6. na dāni kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ‖ pe ‖ yāva atha khalu ekāṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ tena vāretavyaṃ pecchesi für pocch° : § 18.16.16A3 Petaleya~# ein sonst nicht belegter Ortsname ☞ § 40.8, Anm. 4 § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Śrāvastyāṃ Petaleyaṃ peyā~ (Skt) “Reisschleim” ☞ § 8.5, Anm. 7 ⇒ a-peyya~ § 8.5.9A1. peyā ukkaḍhitavyā. peyā peyi{ṃ}tā (für pāyitā?) peyāpātraṃ śodhitavyaṃ *peyā-pātra~ “Reisschleimschale” § 8.5.9A1. peyā ukkaḍhitavyā. peyā peyi{ṃ}tā (für pāyitā?) pe<yā>pātraṃ śodhitavyaṃ peyālaṃ (BHS, SWTF) “usw.; wie oben”; vgl. Pā. peyyāla ⇒ pe, yāva § 11.3.10B4. śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ peyālaṃ yāva omayilamayilaṃ ... peyiṃtā für *pāyitā? : § 8.5.9A1 peyya~ ⇒ a-peyya~ pelava~ “zart, weich” § 26.1.23A4. (yavāgū~ ...) yo (lies: yā?) tāva pelavā (Hs. tpala{ṃ}vā) bhavati, jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāvāgu ...” (☞ § 26.1 [Text], Anm. 3) peśala~ “gefällig, freundlich” § 4.17.5B4. istri pi peśalā bhavatu śrāddhā bhavatu vratānugā (vs) § 4.17.5B4. puruṣo pi peśalo (Hs. °lā) bhavatu śrāddho bhavatu vratānugo (vs) poccha-#, pocchaya-#, pocche-# “wischen, abstreichen”; vgl. Pā. puñchati, Pkt. puṃchaï, pucchaï usw.; BHSD, s.vv. puñchati, poñchate; CDIAL 9011. proñchati (“wipes off”); EWAia, III. Band, s.v. proñch ☞ § 18.15, Anm. 4 § 18.15.16A3. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā vaṃśaśalākāhi vraṇamukhaṃ pocchitaṃ (Hs. potth°) § 18.16.16A3. evaṃ ca tvaṃ vaṃśaśalākāhi vraṇamukhaṃ pocchesi (Hs. pecch°) § 18.16.16A4. tena hi na kṣamati vaṃśaśalākāhi kaṇḍavidalikena vā nala<vidalikāya> kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā asthikhaṇḍena vā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchituṃ § 18.17.16A4. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchayatā tāyo varttikāyo vā tulikāyo ... prakṣipituṃ § 41.8.34A4~5. ekasya upānaho vaddhro pocchito dvitīyasya upānahā vaddhro pocchito. ekasya upānahā talaṃ pocchitaṃ dvitīyasya upānahā talaṃ pocchitaṃ § 41.24.35A7. ekasyopānahāye vaddhro pocchitavyo, aparasya vaddhro pocchitavyo § 41.24.35B1. ekasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ dvitīyasya upānahāye talaṃ pocchitavyaṃ (= § 41.29.35B5) § 41.29.35B5. ekasya upānahāye vadhro pocchitavyo dvitīyasya vadhrako pocchitavyo § 57.3.47B2. bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ pocchana~ ⇒ upānahā-pocchana~, upānahā-pocchana-nattaka~ pocchaya-, pocche- ⇒ poccha- potaka~ ⇒ āmra-potaka~ potta-khaṇḍa~# “Stoffstücke”; vgl. Pkt. potta (“Tuch, Kleid”) ☞ § 54.5, Anm. 4 § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā ... ubhayato agre pottakhaṇḍehi veḍhayitavyā potthitaṃ für pocchitaṃ : § 18.15.16A3 poṣa~ (BHS) “Person, Mensch”; vgl. SWTF, s.v.; BLSF I 233, Anm. 276; vgl. auch Pā. poso, Norman CP III 86f. § 4.18.6A1. devānukampito poṣo sadā bhadrāṇi paśyati (vs) poṣadha “Poṣadha”; term.techn. zur Bez. einer Feier im Saṃgha; vgl. BHSD s. vv. poṣadha, upoṣadha, posatha, SWTF, s.v. poṣatha; Poṣ(Hu) 1ff. ⇒ divā-poṣadha~, rātri-poṣadha~, sandhi-poṣadha~ § 1.1.1B1. saṃghasya dāni poṣadho (= § 2.1.2A7, § 2.3.2B3) § 1.3.1B3. evaṃ nāma saṃghasya poṣadho § 1.4.1B4. evaṃ saṃghasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 1.14.2A7, Uddāna [I]) § 1.5.1B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko pāñcadaśiko sandhipoṣadho 368  bhaviṣyati? § 1.11.2A4. bhikṣusaṃgho tāva poṣadhaṃ kariṣyati (≒ § 2.9.3A2) § 3.6.3B3. eṣo dāni saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, ... § 3.6.3B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhipoṣadho vā divā <vā> rātrau vā poṣadho (Hs. °dhe) usw. poṣadha-sthāna~# “Platz für die Poṣadha-Feier” § 1.8.1B7. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ siñcāpayitavyaṃ sanmārjayitavyaṃ gomayakārṣī dātavyā (≒ § 2.6.2B6) § 3.7.3B5. tena prakṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ poṣadhasthānaṃ siñcitavyaṃ paudgalika-paribhoga~# “persönlicher Gebrauch” ☞ § 11.12, Anm. 1 § 11.12.11A3. nâpi kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ paudgalikaparibhogena paribhuñji- tuṃ paudgalika-paudgalika~# “persönlich”; vgl. BHS, SWTF. paudgalika § 19.23.18B2. atha dāni saṃghe praśvāsaghaṭo na bhavati, paudgalikapaudgalikāni praśvāsaghaṭikāni sthāpayitavyāni ghaṭikā vā karakā vā alābutumbukā vā pauruṣa~ § 1.5.1B5. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kettika pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi (☞ § 1.5, Anm. 3)? § 3.6.3B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kati pauruṣāhi cchāyāhi pauruṣeya~ ⇒ prabhūta-dāsī-dāsa-karmmakara-pauruṣeya~ pt / ṣṭ : § 49.7.42B6. -paryeptiṃ für -paryeṣṭiṃ pt / st : § 18.13.16A2. paryāstaṃ für °āptaṃ pyeva für yyeva : § 17.12.15A6 prakaraṇa~ § 18.2.15B1. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣūhi śrutaṃ (= § 19.2.17B5, § 19.6.18A1, § 20.1. 19A6, § 40.1.32B3, § 45.1.39B4, § 46.1.40A4, § 47.1.40B4, § 48.1.41A4 usw.) § 1.2.1B3. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣū bhagavato ārocayeṃsu/°eṃsuḥ (= § 4.2.4A7, § 5.2. 6A6, § 7.1.8A7, § 20.6.19B3, § 20.9.19B5, § 22.1.20B7, § 41.1.33B4 usw.) § 2.2.2B3. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣū bhagavato ārocayanti § 3.2.3B1. bhikṣū etam prakaraṇaṃ ārocayanti § 25.1.22B1. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ so bhikṣuḥ bhagavato ārocaye § 27.1.23B4. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ so yogācāro bhagavato ārocaye (= § 28.1.24A1) usw. pra-kāśita~ “erläutert” Antaroddāna 50B2. saṃghasthaviro ca śayyāsana kaṭhina āgantukā ca āraṇyakā nevāsikā (lies: nivāsanaṃ?) ca pradīpo ca sapta varggāḥ prakāśitāḥ pra-kīrṇṇa~ “ausgestreut, wirr” ⇒ a-prakīrṇṇavāca~, ujjhita-prakīrṇṇa~, prakīrṇṇakaṃ, prakīrṇṇakasya prakīrṇṇakaṃ, prakīrṇṇakasya adv. “überall”# ☞ § 18.2, Anm. 3 ⇒ pra-kīrṇṇa~ § 18.2.15B1. te dāni bhikṣū prakīrṇṇakasya ucchvāsaṃ karonti § 18.2.15B1. yathā uṣṭrā vā goṇā vā ... evam ime śramaṇā prakīrṇṇakasya uśvāsaṃ karenti § 19.2.17B4. te dāni bhikṣuḥ prakīrṇṇakaṃ praśvāsaṃ karonti § 19.2.17B4. yathā uṣṭrā vā ... eva<m i>me śramaṇakā prakīrṇṇakaṃ praśvāsaṃ karonti prakṛti ⇒ a-prakṛtika~, a-prakṛti-jña~ prakṛt’ eva für prakṛty’ eva : § 46.5.40A7 prakṛty’ eva#, prakṛtyaỿva# “schon vorher, im Voraus”; vgl. BHS. prakṛtya ⇒ pratikṛty’ eva § 2.6.2B6. dvitīyasthavireṇa prakṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ siñcāpayitavyaṃ § 3.7.3B5. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati, tena prakṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ § 4.6.4B3. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva māsavāriko pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo ... § 6.6.7B3. yo pratibalas tena prakṛty’ eva māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo § 12.5.11B2. eṣā dāni saṃghasya varṣopanāyikā bhavati, prakṛtyaỿva tāva dāyakadānapati pratisaritavyā, tato vihārakā pratisaṃskarttavyāḥ § 18.38.17A2. ete dve bhikṣū gocaraṃ praviśanti, prakṛty’ eva tāva cchaḍḍayitavyaṃ 369  § 19.35.18B7. eṣo bhikṣuḥ gocaraṃ praviśati, prakṛty’ eva tāva praśvāsaṃ kariya ... § 36.3.29B3. ye tatra gṛhapatimahattarakāḥ bhavanti, te prakṛty’ eva {te} pratisaritavyā § 36.4.29B4. nâpi darśanopacāre nikṣipitavyaṃ. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva nikṣipitavyaṃ § 38.2.30A5. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva tāva upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā āmantrayitavyo § 42.16.37A2. so prakṛty’ eva bhaṇito bhavati § 42.21.37A5. atha dāni prakṛty’ eva āhaṃsuḥ § 45.4.39B6. prakṛty’ eva tāva grāmapraveśanakaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 45.5.39B7. prakṛty’ eva tāva vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivasanaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 46.5.40A7. prakṛt<y’> eva tāva vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastīkarttavyaṃ § 46.6.40B2. prakṛty’ eva tāva upahastīkarttavyaṃ § 50.6.43B1. yadi tāvad yāvadarthaṃ bhaktaṃ dīyati, prakṛty’ eva ātmano bhaktato tasya pātraṃ pūretavyaṃ § 50.8.43B4. atha khalu prakṛty’ eva tāva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ, ... § 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā ... tehi prakṛty’ eva tāva dīpavarttikāyo varttitavyāyo, dīpakoṭikāni sajjayitavyāni, tailaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ prakkāletha für prakṣāl° oder pakkhāl°? : § 31.28.26B3 ☞ § 31.28(Text), Anm. 4 pra-kṣālaya- (Skt), pra-kṣāle-# “waschen, spülen, reinigen” ⇒ su-prakṣālita~ § 31.9.25B7. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.21.26A5. akalpiyakarakīto hastā nirmmādiyāṇa kalpiyakarakīto prakṣāliya tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ § 31.28.26B3. pādāṃ prakṣāletha (Hs. prakkāl°), hastāṃ nirmmādetha, pānīyaṃ pibatha, viśramatha § 32.11.27B5. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, ... pādāṃ prakṣālehi, hastāṃ nirmmādehi, viśramāhi § 39.28.32A5. pādāṃ prakṣāliya hastāṃ nirmmādiya stūpaṃ vistareṇa vanditavyaṃ § 40.10.33A3. prakṣālayitvā patraśākhāya vā <nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ> § 40.11.33A4. tenaỿva antena prakṣālayantena ujjhitavyaṃ § 41.6.34A3. pātraṃ nikṣipiya, hastāṃ prakṣāliya ... § 47.5.40B7. yadi tahiṃ ogho vā taḍāgam vā bhavati puṣkiriṇī vā, tahiṃ pādāṃ prakṣālitvā ... § 50.6.43B2. nâpi dāni adhotakehi hastehi aprayatehi gṛhṇitavyaṃ. atha khalu prakṣālitvā nirmmādayitvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ pra-√kṣip “hineinwerfen, hinstecken” § 18.17.16A4. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchayatā tāyo varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā varccakuṭīye prakṣipituṃ § 18.17.16A5. kiṃcâpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati saṃkaraṃ vā anāpattiḥ § 18.18.16A6. kheṭaṃ vā siṃhāṇakam vā varcco vā tahi nikṣiptaṃ bhavati, uccikāye tahiṃ sarvvaṃ prakṣipitavyaṃ § 19.16.18A6. tatra kuṃtako alābutumbako vā thapayitavyo. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa ghaṭake prakṣipitavyaṃ. na dāni tahi kṣamati uccāro vā kheṭasiṃghāṇako vā prakṣipituṃ § 25.8.22B5. atha khalu pātraprasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiya sthapetavyaṃ. nâpi kṣamati sthitakena prakṣipituṃ. atha khalu upaviṣṭakena prakṣipitavyaṃ § 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena (Passiv mit aktiver Bedeutung; vgl. BHSG §§ 37.22f.) kalācīyaṃ vāmāyaṃ aṃsivaddhakaṃ prakṣipitvā samavasthāya upaviṣṭakena utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ. mañcasya vā pīṭhasya vā upari prakṣipitavyaṃ § 39.6.31A3. <yā> grāmāntikānāṃ thālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.6.31A3. yā āraṇyakānāṃ thālī ... tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.7.31A4. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ taṇḍulāni prakṣipituṃ § 39.7.31A4. prakṣipatha taṇḍulāni § 39.19.31B6~7. yā āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ. yā grāmāntikānāṃ sthālī, yadi tāva grāmāntikā āgatā bhavanti, tahiṃ pi taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.20.31B7~32A1. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, na kṣamati tahiṃ taṇḍulāṃ 370  prakṣipituṃ. ... yadi tāva āgacchanti teṣāṃ pi taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyā § 40.6.32B6. tehi bhājanehi prakṣipitavyā pāṭalāgulikā vā campakagulikā vā śarkarā vā § 40.11.33A4. na dāni atibahu oṣṭha prakṣipitavyā § 41.1.33B3. ā<r>drapādakaṃ upānahāhi (Loc. pl.; Hs. upanāhāhi) prakṣipiya ... § 41.2.33B5. ārdrapādāṃ upānahāsu prakṣipiya ... § 41.29.35B6. adhvātā pā<dā>ṃ upānahāyāṃ prakṣipitavyaṃ § 42.2.36A3. sarvvaṃ kāṣṭhaṃ agnau prakṣipiya ... § 52.3.44B2. imehi śaknoma piṇḍacārikehi mukhe kavalaṃ prakṣipituṃ § 59.1.48A6. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyāḥ tulikāye nakkaṃ vijjhanti, sūtrakaṃ pi vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ nakke prakṣipanti § 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa tulikāya vā nakkaṃ vijjhituṃ sūtraṃ vaṭṭiya nakkasmin prakṣipituṃ usw. pra-khala-# “straucheln”; < Skt. pra-√skhal ⇒ uk-khala- § 53.1.45A2. te dāni bhikṣū andhakāre prahāṇe upaviśaṃti ukkhalantā prakkhalantā pragalbha~ ⇒ a-pragalbha~ pra-gṛhṇā- “entgegennehmen” § 36.6.29B5. anāgārā pragṛhṇanti pratissayavinodanā<ṃ> (Hs. pratisaṃya{mya}v°) (vs) pra-gopaya- “verbergen; unter Kontrolle halten” § 55.4.46B6. nâpi kṣamati geṇḍukaṃ vārayantasya cittaṃ pradūṣayituṃ. atha khalu cittaṃ pragopayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ mo karenti” tti pra-ghuṣṭa~# “laut”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. saṃpraghuṣṭa § 42.30.37B6. kiñ câpi praghuṣṭena svareṇa praśnā visarjenti, anāpattiḥ pra-calāya- (BHS), pra-cālaya- (SWTF) “einnicken, nicken”; vgl. Poṣ(Hu) 150 (pra-calāyati / pra- cālayati); Pā. pacalāyati, pacālesi (Th 200; vgl. dazu EV I [2nd ed.] 184 [falsch]) ☞ § 53.7, Anm. 2 § 53.7.45A6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho prahāṇe upaviṣṭo bhavati, tato dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti § 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti § 53.8.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracalāyati, na kṣamati so ’dhyupekṣituṃ § 54.12.46A7. atha dāni bhikṣu<sya> upādhyāyācāryā pracalāyanti, na kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ § 55.6.46B7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracālayati, na kṣamati so pi adhyupekṣituṃ § 54.1.46A1. te dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇe pracalāyaṃti § 54.3.46A2. te ... yaṣṭī vārentā yo yeva bhikṣu pracalāyati taṃ yeva kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhananti, pāde vā āhananti § 55.3.46B4. yo yeva pracālayati taṃ yeva kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena urasi vā tāṇḍeti pārśvasmi vā āhananti § 54.8.46A4. ete dāni bhikṣuḥ pracalāyanti, nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ § 54.11.46A6. atha dāni bahu pracālayanti, na dāni te sarvve balīvandā viya utthapetavyā § 54.13.46B1. yadi koci pracālayati tasya dātavyā § 55.5.46B6. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ pracālayati, na kṣamati kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena āhanituṃ pracālaya- ⇒ pracalāya- √prach ⇒ √pṛcch, ā-√pṛcch, pari-√pṛcch pracchanna-prākaṭa~# “abgelegen, doch sichtbar” ⇒ cchanna-pradeśa~, cchanna-prākaṭa~, ati- gupta~, ati-nikuñja~, atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~, ati-bhuṇḍa~ § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ. ... nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ. ... atha khalu pracchannaprākaṭe sthāpayi- tavyaṃ prajātā für prayāto?; vgl. BHSD, s.vv. niryāta, nirjāta ☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1 § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he ... śramaṇa sārtho (Hs. mātā) 371  prayāto (Hs. prajātā)” tti pra-juha-# “(Feuer) anzünden”; < Skt. pra-√hu (“als Opfer hingeben”) ⇒ ā-juha- § 42.19.37A3. na dāni kṣamati tehi agni prajuhitvā ... prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi prajña~ ⇒ duḥ-prajña~ pra-jñapaya- (BHS, SWTF), pra-jñape- (BHS), pra-jñāpaya- (BHS, SWTF) “bereiten, herrichten”; vgl. Pā. paññāpeti ⇒ prajñaptaka~, buddha-prajñapta~ § 4.9.5A1. praviśa<ṃ>tehi jānitavyaṃ: kathaṃ āsanā prajñaptāḥ § 4.9.5A1. kadāci maṅgalakaraṇīye atidakṣiṇaṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati, ... atha dāni pretakaraṇīye anuvāmaṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati, ... § 8.5.9A1. prasrāvakumbhikā nikkālayitavyā pīṭhikā prajñapayitavyā § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa pīṭhikā prajñapayitavyā ... § 8.12.9B1. śayyā prajñapayitavyā § 11.12.11A3. atha khalu sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ prajñapayitavyaṃ § 12.9.11B5. yo na cchandāye na doṣāye na mohāye na bhayāye, prajñaptaṃ ca jānāti § 12.16.12A3. vṛddhānāñ ca mañcā prajñāpayitavyāḥ navakānāṃ pīṭhāḥ prajñāpayitavyāḥ ... vṛddhānāṃ pīṭhāḥ prajñāpayitavyāḥ navakānāṃ saṃstaraṇā prajñāpayitavyāḥ § 15.9.14A4. āstaraṇaṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ § 21.4.20B2. upasthānaśālāyāṃ vā agniśālāyāṃ vā prāsāde vā prahāṇake <vā> kaṭhinaṃ prajñāpayitvā cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 23.4.2.21B1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śeyyāṃ prajñapayitukāmo bhavati, kiñ câpi dīpakaṃ praveśeti, anāpattiḥ. śeyyāṃ prajñapayantenaỿva cchitti nikkālayitavyo § 30.5.25A3. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva śeyyāṃ prajñapeṃtena abhidakṣiṇaṃ prajñapayitavyā § 30.5.25A3. na kṣamati vāmena śayyāṃ prajñapetuṃ. dakṣiṇ<en>a śayyā prajñapetavyā § 31.25.26B1. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ § 41.6.34A3. pīṭhakā prajñāpiya, pādataṭṭhakaṃ (Hs. °taddhakaṃ) upanāmayitvā upānahikāyo upanāmiya upānahāpocchan{n}o upanāmiya pādāṃ dhovati § 41.22.35A6. ārāmacaraṇakaṃ prāvaritvā āsanaṃ prajñapetavyaṃ § 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... tehi prajñaptehi (Loc. pl.) upaviśaṃti § 48.2.41A5. yūyaṃ ... <t>ehi prajñaptehi (Loc. pl.) niṣīdatha § 48.5.41A7. bhaginīyo āsanaṃ prajñapetha, mā cīvarakāni vinaśiṣyanti § 48.5.41A7. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā astarikā vā ... tato niṣīdi- tavyaṃ § 48.6.41B1. (e)ka saṃkacchikāṃ (Hs. saṃkalikāṃ) prajñapiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 48.7.41B2. bhaginī prajñapehi kuḍḍasmiṃ yahiṃ apāśrayitavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā amilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati, tato apāśrayitavyaṃ § 50.8.43B4. vihārasya prahāṇake dve āsanāni prajñapiya adhiṣṭhānāṃ pratigrāhāpiya āsitavyaṃ § 53.14.45B4. <vaktavyaṃ> “āyuṣmanto, prajñapetha śayyāyo. dīpaṃ gopayiṣyan.” ti § 56.1.47A2. te ... prahāṇa āgatā samānā skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti § 56.4.47A4. ātmano pratisandhismi sukhākaṃ niṣīdanakaṃ pīṭhake prajñapayitavyaṃ § 56.5.47A6. yathāsāhaṭasya niṣīdanasya dvitīyo anto uvveliya prajñapayitavyaṃ, tato niṣīditavyaṃ § 57.7.47B5. niṣīdanaṃ prajñapayitvā upānahāyo nikkhāsitvā paryaṃkena niṣīditavyaṃ prajñaptaka~ (BHS) “bereitet, hergerichtet, aufgestellt”; < prajñapta + Suffix ka § 48.4.41A7. āsanaṃ bhavati ... karddamena vā vināśitakaṃ omaïlamaïlaṃ vā prajñaptakaṃ bhavati § 56.5.47A5. rātriñ ca śayyāsanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ āsati, nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ kṛtvā gantuṃ. atha khalu yathā{khalu}prajñaptakaṃ dviguṇīkṛtvā tato gantavyaṃ prajñapti~ ⇒ āsana-prajñapti~ pra-√jñā 372  § 1.2.1B3. te pi navakā bhikṣū āhaṃsu “naỿva saṃghasthavirasya āgatiḥ prajñāyate na gatiḥ” § 1.3.1B4. naỿva saṃghasthavirasyâgatir nna gatiḥ prajñāyate (≒ § 4.3.4B1) § 4.2.4A7. naỿva saṃghasthavirasya āgatir ggatiḥ prajñāyati (Passiv mit der transitiven Endung) prajñāpaka~ ⇒ śayyāsana-prajñāpaka~ pra-jñāpaya- ⇒ pra-jñapaya- prajñāvaitakṣiyā Verschreibung? ☞ § 39.29, Anm. 2 § 39.29.32A6. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ prajñāvaitakṣiyā. śṛgālâpi āraṇye vasanti. ...” pra-jvala- ⇒ jālaya-, jvālaya-, pra-jvālaya-, pra-jvāle- § 42.27.37B4. tehi jentāko prajvalitavyo pra-jvālaya-, pra-jvāle-# “anzünden; brennen lassen” ⇒ jālaya-, jvālaya-, pra-jvala- § 8.5.9A1. hemantakālo bhavati, mandamukhi prajvālayitavyā § 8.6.9A4. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... śītaṃ bhavati, mandamukhī prajvālayitavyā § 8.12.9B1. hemantakālo bhavati, mandamukhī prajvālayitavyā § 8.12.9B2. dīpo prajvālayitavyo, kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ § 10.5.10A6. dīpako prajvālayitavyo, śayyā prajñapayitavyā § 15.6.14A2. pradīpo jvālayitavyo tṛṇolkā vā kaṇḍolkā vā prajvālayitavyā § 23.4.2.21A7. nâpi tahiṃ kṣamati mandamukhī prajvālayituṃ, dīpako vā praveśayituṃ § 23.6.2.21B3. mandamukhīm vā prajvāleti, anāpattiḥ. dīpaṃ vā praveśeti, anāpattiḥ § 41.14.34B3. te dāni ulkāyo ca dīpikāyo ca prajvāliyāṇaṃ mārgganti § 42.2.36A2. te ... pratikṛty’ eva gacchiya jentākaṃ prajvālīya (Absolutiv; vgl. BHSG § 35.18) dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiya svedantā āsanti § 53.6.45A5~6. catuhi prāsādasya koṇe koṇe dīpako prajvālayitavyaḥ, varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo, paścāt prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo § 53.13.45B3. sarvvarātriṃ varccakuṭīyañ ca prasrāvakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo § 53.16.45B5. tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo praṇāma~ “Verbeugung” § 38.5.30A7. allīya vṛddhāntāto prabhṛti sarvveṣāṃ praṇāmo karttavyo § 57.7.47B5. prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśitavyaṃ. vṛddhānte upānahāyo pārṣṇivaddhake osāriya praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ § 57.10.47B7. atha khalu upānahikāyo nikkhāsiyāṇaṃ praṇāmaṃ kṛtvā upaviśitavyaṃ praṇāli-bhrama~# “Abfluß” ⇒ pranāḍikā-bhrama~ pra-ṇīta~ (BHS, SWTF) “vorzüglich”; vgl. Pā. paṇīta § 52.5.44B4. sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ, lūhaṃ ca praṇītaṃ ca ekañ ca aparaṃ ca praṇīta-taraka~# “vorzüglicher” § 31.31.26B6. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato yadi tahiṃ kiñci piṇḍacārikaṃ praṇītatarakaṃ bhavati, āgantukānāṃ sārāṇīyaṃ karttavyaṃ praṇīta-bhojana~ (BHS, SWTF) “vorzügliche Speise”; vgl. Pā. paṇīta-bhojana § 52.6.44B4. atha dāni so praṇītabhojanasya mahārhasya pūraṃ pātraṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ āgacchati ... praṇetavya~ § 40.15.33A7. ekena madhyama<ṃ> vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ, apareṇa praṇetavyaṃ prati / pari ⇒ pari / prati prati- für pūti- § 19.42.19A3. prati-(mūtraṃ) für pūti-(m°) § 62.2.49B6. pratikarmmaṃ für pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ prati-√kāṅkṣ “erwarten” § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi no parihāṇi.” pratikṛty’ eva (BHS) “schon vorher, im Voraus”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. pratikṛtya (“in advance”), Pā. paṭikacca, paṭigacca ☞ § 1.8, Anm. 2 ⇒ prakṛty’ eva, prakṛtyaỿva § 1.8.1B6. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ 373  § 4.8.4B7~5A1. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva āgantavyaṃ § 4.11.5A2. oheyyakānāṃ glānakānāṃ pratikṛty’ eva dāpitavyaṃ § 14.6.13A5. samantena vihārasya tāva pratikṛty’ eva agniharaṇī karttavyā ... § 14.15.13B4. pratikṛty’ eva tāva yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam ... sthāpayitavyaṃ § 18.49.17A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati pratikṛty’ eva nivāsanaṃ oguhiya gacchituṃ § 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ ... § 34.4.28B4. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva nikṣipitavyaṃ (= § 35.4.29A4) § 35.3.29A3. ye tahiṃ brāhmaṇamahattarakā bhavanti, te pratikṛty’ eva upasaṃkramitavyā § 37.3.30A2. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva tāva vṛddhatarakā pratisaritavyā § 39.1.30B6. tehi dāni grāmāntikehi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ sthitāḥ § 39.2.31A1. tathā tumhehiṃ pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍi āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjatha § 39.3.31A1. pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjituṃ § 39.5.31A3. pratikṛty’ eva (Hs. eca) gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ cetiyaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ bhuñjituṃ § 39.18.31B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjituṃ § 42.2.36A2. te ... pratikṛty’ eva gacchiya jentākaṃ prajvālīya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiya svedantā āsanti § 45.7.40A2. pratikṛty’ eva tāva rātrīprāvaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ upahastīkarttavyaṃ § 46.4.40A6. pratikṛty’ eva tāva grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 57.3.47B2. atha khalu bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ prati-√kram ⇒ prati-krānta~, prati-kramāpaya-, prati-krāmaya-, prati-saṃ-√kram (1) “zurückkehren” § 45.7.40A2. eṣo bhikṣu vikāle pratikramati, nâpi kṣamati nivāsanaṃ nikṣipitvā nagnaprāvṛtena rātrīprāvaraṇaṃ nivāsanaṃ mārggituṃ (2) “sich zurückziehen, zur Ruhe gehen” ☞ § 15.9, Anm. 3 § 15.9.14A4. āstaraṇaṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ § 22.4.21A2. (vihāraṃ ...) praviśiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osārayitavyā, dvāraṃ bandhitavyaṃ, tato pratikramitavyaṃ § 31.25.26B1. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ (3) “stehenbleiben” (= prati-saṃ-√kram, pari-√kram) ☞ § 52.1, Anm. 3 § 44.4.39A1. ete dāni saṃbahulā {saṃbahulā} bhikṣūḥ ekahi vihārake pratikramanti, ... Vgl. § 44.1.38B6. aparehiṃ vihārake saṃbahulā bhikṣū pratisaṃkramati § 52.1.44B1. te pi dāni bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramanti § 52.1.44B1. ime pi bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramanti § 52.3.44B2. eṣo dāni bhikṣu niśrayakaraṇīyo bhavati, nâpi dāni kṣamati piṇḍāya cariyāṇaṃ bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramituṃ § 53.12.45B2. atha dāni navakā bhikṣū prahāṇaśālāyāṃ pratikramanti, na kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ pratikramaṇa~ “Rückkehr”#; vgl. Pā. paṭikkamana ☞ § 18.39, Anm. 2 § 18.39.17A2. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantavyaṃ. pratikramaṇam vâgantavyaṃ prati-kramāpaya-# “zur Ruhe gehen lassen”; vgl. Pā. paṭikkamāpeti ⇒ prati-krāmaya- § 8.12.9B2. sukhaṃ pratikramāpayitavyaṃ, uddiśitvā vā paripṛcchitvā vā prati-krānta~ “zurückgekehrt, zurückgekommen” § 41.4.34A1. prāsādikena abhikrāntena pratikrāntena ālokitavilokitena sammiñjita- prasāritena saṃghāṭīpātracīvaradhāraṇena § 53.13.45B3. yadā bhikṣū pratikrāntā bhavaṃti, tato varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpo nirvvāpayi- tavyo prati-krāmaya-# “zur Ruhe gehen lassen” ⇒ prati-kramāpaya- § 10.5.10A6. dīpaṃ ādīpiya śayyāṃ prajñapiya sukhaṃ pratikrāmayitavyo prati-kṣipta~ “verboten” § 20.5.19B1. bhagavatā dantakāṣṭhaṃ pratikṣiptaṃ prati-gupta~ 374  § 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya praśvāsabhaṇḍakaṃ dhoviya pratigupte pradeśe ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ prati-√grah § 52.6.44B5. suvihita, apratigrāhyo eṣo jano. mā bhūyo eteṣāṃ tena pratigṛhṇīhasi pratigraha~ “die Gabe, die man empfängt” ☞ § 18.53, Anm. 4 § 18.53.17B2. yadi tāva ātmano uccāro bhavati, so eva tasya pratigraho § 19.42.19A3. yadi tāva ātmanako praśvāso bhavati, purimapaścimakaṃ ca varjayitvā madhyamaṃ gṛhṇitavyo. evam tasya pratigrahaḥ prati-grahāpaya-#, prati-grāhāpaya-# “empfangen lassen; geben; reservieren”; vgl. Pā. paṭiggahāpe- ☞ § 18.53, Anm. 6; § 50.8, Anm. 3 ⇒ prati-grāhaya- § 18.53.17B3. atha dāni parakerako uccāro bhavati, pratigrahāpayitavyo § 50.8.43B4. vihārasya prahāṇake dve āsanāni prajñapiya adhiṣṭhānāṃ pratigrāhāpiya (“reserviert habend” oder “eingenommen habend”; ☞ § 50.8, Anm. 3) āsitavyaṃ pratigrāhaka~ “Empfänger” § 26.8.23B2. yādṛśī dīyati, tādṛśī praticchit<avya>ā. dāyakavaśo na pratigrāhakavaśo prati-grāhaya- “empfangen lassen; geben” ☞ § 18.53, Anm. 6 ⇒ prati-grahāpaya-, prati- grāhāpaya- § 19.42.19A4. purimapaścimakañ ca varjyaṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ, tataḥ paścāt pratigrāhayitavyaṃ prati-grāhāpaya- ⇒ prati-grahāpaya- pratigrāhya~ ⇒ a-pratigrāhya~ praticora~# “Gegner eines Diebs; feindlicher Dieb” § 41.17.34B7. yadi vayam imasya dārakasya evaṃ dharmmiṣṭhasya imaṃ hiraṇya- suvarṇṇaṃ harāma, praticorehi pi muṣyema, grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema, ... § 41.18.35A1. yadi vayaṃ etasya dharmmiṣṭhasya etaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ harema, praticorehi vā vayaṃ muṣyema, grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema praticcha- (BHS) “entgegennehmen”; < Skt. prati-√iṣ ⇒ paṭiccha-, pratīccha- § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ko śalākāṃ vārayiṣyati, ko praticchiṣyati, ... (≒ § 2.7.2B6, § 3.8.3B6) § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ śalākāṃ praticchesi” ... tena yathâdhyeṣṭena śalākā vārayitavyā, dvitīyena pratīcchitavyā § 2.7.2B7. tvaṃ praticcheṣyasi § 2.8.3A1. śalākāṃ pi praticchantena na kṣamati oguṇṭhikākṛtena ... śalākāṃ praticchituṃ (≒ § 3.9.4A1) § 3.8.3B7. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati so adhyeṣitavyo: ... “tvaṃ śalākāṃ praticchesi” § 26.5.23A7~23B1. nâpi kṣamati yavāgū upānahārūḍhena vā praticchituṃ, oguṇṭhikā- kṛtena vā samaṃtaprāvṛtena vā praticchituṃ, ... ekāṃsakṛtena yavāgū praticchitavyā § 26.8.23B2. yādṛśī dīyati, tādṛśī praticchit<avya>ā. dāyakavaśo na pratigrāhakavaśo § 26.10.23B3. yaṃ kālaṃ praticchitā bhavati, tato paribhuñjitavyā § 39.10.31A7. vaktavyaṃ “vayaṃ pi na praticchāmê”tti § 39.22.32A1. vaktavyaṃ “vayaṃ pi na praticchāmo” nti § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... ukkhīṇaka vā taṇḍulā praticchituṃ, klinnakāni vā puṣpāṇi praticchituṃ, kṣudrapākāni vā phalāni praticchituṃ § 52.8.44B7. yadi koci nimantreti, yadi arthiko bhavati, praticchitavyaṃ prati-cchanna~ ⇒ prati-cchādaya- § 42.22.37A7. udakasya (lies: uda<kena> kakṣa?) praticchannaṃ bhavati § 42.22.37B1. yathā nābhi praticchannā bhaveya prati-cchādaya- ⇒ prati-cchanna~ § 42.15.36B7. ekena hastena agrato praticchāditvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 42.18.37A3. hastena agrato praticchādayitavyaṃ prati-√jāgṛ (Skt), prati-jāgara- (BHS) “bewachen, beaufsichtigen; unterhalten”; vgl. BHS. prati- jāgarti, °jāgarati, °jāgrati; SWTF. prati-jāgṛ ⇒ prati-jāgrīya- § 40.1.32B2. āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā pānīyaṃ pratijāgaranti § 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā (☞ § 53.4, Anm. 5) 375 prati-jāgrīya-# “wach bleiben”; wörtl. “es wird dafür gesorgt, wach zu bleiben” (?) ☞ § 53.4, Anm. 2 ⇒ prati-√jāgṛ, prati-jāgara- § 53.4.45A3. eṣo dāni saṃghārāmo purimaṃ paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ pratijāgrīyati, dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā ... prati-dinna~# “(eine Strafe ist) verhängt” oder “(eine Strafe ist) aufgehoben”? ☞ § 26.6, Anm. 1 § 26.6.23B1. atha dāni daṇḍakarmma pratidinnaṃ (lies: dinnaṃ?) bhavati, ... prati-padya- ⇒ prati-padyitavya~, prati-panna~ § 1.14.2A7. na pratipadyati, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikramati (= § 4.21.6A4, § 5.14.7A4, § 7.8.8B5, § 10.6.10A7 usw.) § 32.13.27B6. na pratipadyati, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati (= § 33.17.28A7, § 34.8.28B6, § 35.8.29A6, § 37.7.30A5 usw.) § 57.13.48A1. na pratipadyati, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikramati (= § 58.7.48A6, § 62.13.50B1) § 31.38.27A3. na pratipadyanti, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmaṃti § 8.14.9B4. na pratipadyate, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati § 2.12.3A6. na pratipadyeti (vgl. BHSG § 38.21, S. 219, s.v. pad-) abhisamācārikāṃ dharmmān atikramati (= § 22.8.21A4) § 3.13.4A4. na pratipadyanti vinayātikramam āsādayanti § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: katham upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ, katham ācārye p°, kathaṃ vṛddhatarake p°, kathaṃ saṃghamadhye p°, kathaṃ grāme pratipattavyaṃ, kathaṃ āraṇye pratipattavyaṃ prati-padyitavya~# “zu verfahren; sich zu verhalten”; vgl. Pā. paṭipajjitabba ⇒ prati-padya-, prati- panna~ § 1.4.1B4. tena hi evaṃ saṃghasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 1.14.2A7. evaṃ saṃghasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: katham upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ, katham ācārye p°, kathaṃ vṛddhatarake p°, kathaṃ saṃghamadhye p°, kathaṃ grāme pratipattavyaṃ, kathaṃ āraṇye pratipattavyaṃ ... kathaṃ saṃghāṭīpātracīvaradhāraṇe p° (≒ § 9.1.9B5) § 12.16.12A3. vṛddhehi saṃstaraṇe pratipadyitavyaṃ (“erhalten”?) § 19.7.18A1. tena hi evaṃ praśvāse pratipadyitavyaṃ § 19.43. evaṃ praśvāse pratipadyitavyaṃ ... p° ... p° ... p° ... evaṃ dantakāṣṭhe p° ti § 20.20.20A5. evaṃ dantakāṣṭhe pratipadyitavyaṃ Uddāna (II).20A5. evaṃ śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 39.4.31A2. evaṃ āraṇyake vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 39.4.31A2. evaṃ grāmāntike vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 40.3.32B4. evaṃ pānīye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 40.17.33B2) § 40.3.32B4. evaṃ pādadhovanīye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 41.3.33B6. evaṃ dhovitapādehi pratipadyitavyaṃ ( = § 41.3.33B7, § 41.33.36A1) § 42.6.36B1. evaṃ snāne pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 42.32.38A1) § 42.6.36B1. evaṃ jentāke pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 42.6.36B2, § 42.32.38A1) § 43.2.38A2. evaṃ bhaṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 43.2.38A3) § 43.17.38B5. evaṃ bhāṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 44.3.39A1. evaṃ cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 44.12.39B1) Uddāna (V).39B2~3. evam araṇye pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ grāmāntike pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ pānīye pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ paridhovaniye pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ pādā dhovitavyā; evaṃ pādadhovanike pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ snāne pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ jentāke pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ bhaṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ; evaṃ cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ § 45.8.40A3. evaṃ nivāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 47.1.40B4. katham ... cīvarehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 48.1.41A4, § 48.2.41A6) § 47.2.40B5. kathaṃ ... cīvarake pratipadyitavyaṃ § 47.3.40B6. evaṃ ... cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 47.10.41A2, § 48.3.41A6, § 48.10.41B5) usw. 376 pratipadā~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “der erste Tag (einer Monatshälfte)”#; vgl. Skt. pratipad (“Anfangstag einer Monatshälfte” [PW, s.v.]) § 3.5.3B2. sarvvehi jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ khalv adya pakṣasya pratipadā dvitīyā yāvat pañcadaśī pratipaditavyaṃ für pratipadyitavyaṃ : § 5.13.7A3 prati-panna~ ⇒ nava-pratipanna~ prati-pādaka~, prati-pādikā~ “Unterlage (, auf der ein [ganzes] Bettgestell oder seine Füße stehen)”# ☞ § 13.11, Anm. 4 § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... prāṇakehi khajjanti cchandiyāṇaṃ (lies: cchinnagaṇṭhikā kariyāṇaṃ?) pratipādikehi thapayitavyā § 13.15.12B6. vihāro opasvediko bhavati, mañcā bhitti<yo> mocetvā pratipādikā dātavyāḥ yathā prāṇakehi na khādyeyā § 14.4.13A4. mañcā bhittiyo mocetvā pratipādakā dātavyā, yathā prāṇakehi dīpikāhi vā na khajjeyā § 14.7.13A6. mañcāḥ pratipādakehi sthāpayitavyā bhittito muktāḥ (≒ § 14.16.13B4) § 15.9.14A4. mañcako pratipādake<hi> sthāpayitavyo § 16.9.14B4. (mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... ) prāṇakehi khajjanti, cchinnagaṇḍiyakā kariya pratipādakehi sthāpayitavyā § 17.12.15A7. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... cchinnagaṇṭhikā kariyāṇa pratipādakehi sthāpayitavyā § 23.4.1.21A7. nâyaṃ kṣamati tahiṃ maṃcā vā pīṭhā vā praveśituṃ. atha khalu catvāri (Nom. neut.; vgl. BHSG § 6.14) pratipādakā karttavyā, mā bhūmī khanīyati. praveśiyāṇaṃ tato tahiṃ pratipādakānāṃ upari thapetavyo § 23.4.1.21A7. atha dāni pratipādako na bhavati, leṅkaṭakehi pādā bandhitavyā § 23.6.1.21B2. kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ vinā pratipādakehi mañcakaṃ thapeti, anāpattiḥ § 23.6.1.21B3. pīṭhakam vā pīṭhikām vā tṛpādakam vā vinā pratipādakehi thapeti, anāpattiḥ prati-pālaya-, prati-pāle-# “warten” ⇒ anu-pāle-, pālaya- § 2.1.2B1. dāyakadānapati dāni deyadharmmāṇi ādāya pratipālenti § 2.1.2B2. te dāni muhūrttamātraṃ pratipāliya āsitvā deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitvā gatāḥ § 39.9.31A6. yadi arthikā bhaviṣyanti pratipālayiṣyanti prati-√pṛcch § 8.5.9A1. uddiśitvā pratipṛcchitvā kheṭakaṭāhako nikkālayitavyo pratibaddha~ ⇒ para-pratibaddha~ pratibala~ § 1.9.1B7. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo “tvaṃ śalākāṃ vāresi” ... § 2.5.2B4. saṃghasthaviro na pratibalo bhavati (= § 2.6.2B5, § 2.7.2B6, § 2.11.3A4, § 3.6.3B3, § 5.11.7A1, § 6.5.7B1 usw.) § 2.7.2B7. yo pratibalo bhaviṣyati, so adhyeṣitavyo “tvaṃ śalākāṃ vārayiṣyasi” ... § 3.6.3B3. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati tena jānitavyaṃ § 3.8.3B6. saṃghasthaviro na pratibalo bhavati dvitīyasthaviro na pratibalo bhavati, yo tatra pratibalo bhavati tena jānitavyaṃ (= § 6.5.7B1; ≒ § 6.6.7B3, § 6.11.8A2) § 3.8.3B6. yadi tāvat pratibalo bhavati, ātmanā sarvvaṃ karttavyaṃ § 7.6.8B3. atha dāni na pratibalo bhavati uddiśituṃ, āpattikauśalyaṃ śikṣitavyo ... § 14.3.13A3. yo pratibalo vastuṃ, yadi utsahanti teṣāṃ āhāreṇa upastambhaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.21.37A5. yo pratibalo bhavati udakaṃ upasthāpetuṃ, ...(zweimal) § 49.1.42A1. naỿva eṣo pratibalo piṇḍāya aṇṭhituṃ. na ca pratibalo Jetavanaṃ saṃbhāvayituṃ § 49.4.42A6. yo na pratibalo tasya ca ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajituṃ ... yo pratibalo tasya ca ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajituṃ § 49.6.42B2. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati tasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajayituṃ ... § 49.6.42B3. atha dāni na pratibalo bhavati, ... (= § 49.7.42B4) § 49.6.42B3. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā pratibalo bhavati piṇḍapātam vā aṇṭhituṃ vihārakaṃ vâgantuṃ 377  § 49.7.42B3. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati paścācchramaṇasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajitu<ṃ> § 49.9.42B7. pureśramaṇo na pratibalo bhavati dakṣiṇām ādiśituṃ § 50.4.43A6. bhikṣu jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, na pratibalo gantuṃ et passim prati-bāha-#, prati-bāhe-# “abwehren, abwenden”; < Skt. prati-√bādh; vgl. Pa. paṭibāhati, paṭi- bāheti; BHS. prativahati, prativāhayati ☞ § 31.5, Anm. 2; § 14.4, Anm. 1 ⇒ ud-baha- bzw. ud-vaha-, √bādh, vy-ā-bha-, vy-ā-vha- § 31.5.25B4. yadi dāni ośyā bhavati, taruṇabhikṣūhi agrato gantavyaṃ ośyā prati- bāhantehi § 42.17.37A2. yadi tāva agni bahalako bhavati, navakehi agrato sthātavyaṃ agni pratibāhentehi *prati-bodha- “erwachen”; vgl. Skt. prati-√budh; BHSG, S. 222a, (3) bodha-ti § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... so pi *pratibodhiyānaṃ (?; Hs. pratibodhanāṃ) tena purimaṃ kāyaṃ abhyunnāmeti, pṛṣṭhimaṃ kāyaṃ abhivilokayati pratibodhanāṃ für °bodhiyānaṃ oder °bodhiyāṇaṃ? : § 30.4.25A2 pratibhaya~ “gefährlich” § 4.17.5B5. asatiṃ parivarjeyā mārggaṃ pratibhayaṃ yathā (vs) pratibhāna~ ⇒ niṣ-pratibhāna~ pratibhānaka~ ⇒ yathā-pratibhānakaṃ prati-mānita~ § 4.18.6A1. bhoja<ne>nā vastupālā satkṛtā pratimānitā (vs) prati-√labh § 11.1.10B3. te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā atīva udārāṇi prītiprāmodyāni pratilabhiṣyanti (≒ § 12.1.11A6) pratiliptaka~# “beschmiert” ⇒ mṛttikā-praliptikā~ § 43.10.38A7. etā bhaiṣajyapiṣaṇikā śilā na dāni kārya kṛtvā yathā yeva pratiliptikā sthapetavyā prati-√vas § 20.11.19B6. atha dāni bhikṣū āraṇyake śeyyāsane prativasanti ... prati-vāha-, prati-vāhe- ⇒ prati-bāha-, prati-bāhe- prativekena für pravivek° : § 39.29.32A7 prativeśika~# “Nachbar”; vgl. BHS. prativeśaka ⇒ prativeśi-kula~ § 14.18.13B6. ye tatra prativeśikā bhavanti, teṣām anuparinditavyaṃ prativeśi-kula~# “Nachbarhaus”; Skt. prativeśin + kula ⇒ prativeśika~ § 14.18.13B5. prativeśikulāto niśreṇi yāciya tato otaritavyaṃ prati-śāmaya- (BHS), prati-śāme-# “weglegen, wegstellen; aufräumen”; vgl. SWTF III 182, prati- śam (“weglegen”) ⇒ prati-sāmaya-, prati-sāme- § 8.5.9A2. pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ. pātraṃ pratiśāmayitavyaṃ § 8.6.9A2. vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi pratiśāmayitavyāni § 8.8.9A6. bhājanaṃ bhaktopadhānaṃ śayyāsanaṃ pratiśāmetavyaṃ cīvarāṇi pratiśraya~ “Obdach” § 31.7.25B6. saṃghasya phāsuvihāraṃ upadahatha pādatailena guḍapānīyena pratiśrayeṇa purebhaktikena § 31.8.25B6. ācikṣitavyaṃ “labdho pratiśrayo” prati-ṣṭhāpaya- “hinstellen, aufstellen; darbringen; emporheben” § 1.1.1B2. deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayiṣyāma § 1.11.2A3. deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyaṃ (≒ § 2.9.3A2) § 2.1.2B1~2. deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayiṣyāmo ... deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayi- ṣyāmaḥ ... deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitvā gatāḥ § 3.1.3A7. deyadharmmañ ca pratiṣṭhāpayiṣyāmaḥ § 3.10.4A2. deyadharmma pratiṣṭhāpayitavyo deyadharmmam anumodāpayitavyo § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati, pādena pādaṃ ādhāya, dantena dantaṃ ādhāya, 378  jihvāgraṃ tālukāgre pratiṣṭhāpayitvā ... (≒ § 30.7.25A4) § 62.1.49B2~3. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi niveśayamāno, phalabhāgiyān satvāṃ phalehi pratiṣṭhāpayamāno (Kaus. mit medialer Endung) ... kṣeme same śive sthale abhaye nirvvāṇe pratiṣṭhāpayamāno ... prati-ṣṭhita~ § 4.20.6A3. so ’yaṃ śreṣṭhāyatane pratiṣṭhito pātrasaṃhṛto lābho (vs) pratisaṃyukta~ “Abschnitt” ☞ § 4.19, Anm. 2 ⇒ pātra-pratisaṃyukta~ pratisaṃlayana-sāropya~ (BHS) “für einsame Meditation geeignet”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. pratisaṃ- layana; SWTF. pratisaṃlayana-sārūpya, Pā. paṭisallāna-sāruppa § 39.29.32A7. (āraṇyakā) ... vaktavyā “durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni prāntāni viviktāni vigatajanapadāni manuṣyarahaśayyakāni pratisaṃlayanasāropyāni ...” pratisaṃlīnaka~# “zurückgezogen”; < BHS. pratisaṃlīna + Suffix ka; Pā. paṭisallīna § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ekānte bhavati ucchedake vā vṛkṣamūlake vā vihāre vā pratisaṃlīnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ prati-saṃ-√vid Kaus. “mitteilen, verkünden” ⇒ a-pratisaṃviditena, a-pratisaṃviditvā, pratisaṃviditena pratisaṃviditena “nachdem man sich abgemeldet hat”#; BHS. pratisaṃvidita, Pā. paṭisaṃvidita ⇒ saṃviditena, a-pratisaṃviditena, aśabdakarṇṇikāye § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti ... suvarṇṇam vā, ... atha khalu pratisaṃviditena nirggantavyaṃ prati-saṃ-s-karaya-#, prati-saṃ-s-kare-# “reparieren; instand halten”; vgl. Skt. pratisaṃskaroti, Pā. paṭisaṅkharoti ⇒ kare-, prati-saṃ-s-kāraya-, prati-saṃ-s-kārāpe-, prati-saṃ-s-√kṛ § 12.1.11A4. te dāni bhikṣū upagacchanikākāle vihārān na pratisaṃskarenti § 15.10.14A4. yadi sarvvarātro gacchati pratisaṃskārayantasya, sarvvarātrī pratisaṃs- karayitavyaṃ pratisaṃskāra~ (BHS) “Reparatur” ⇒ pratisaṃskāraṇa~ § 14.11.13B1. evaṃ hy eva sarvvaṃ pratisaṃskāro karttavyaḥ yāva śvetavarṇṇā dātavyā § 14.13.13B2. yathā sarvva pratisaṃskāraṃ (Hs. °kāro) gacche (☞ § 14.13, Anm. 1) tathā dātavyaṃ pratisaṃskāraṇa~ (BHS) “Reparatur” ⇒ pratisaṃskāra~ § 12.14.12A2. pratisaṃskāraṇārthaṃ eṣo ca{ṃ} uddiśīyati prati-saṃ-s-kāraya- (BHS) “reparieren; instand halten” ⇒ prati-saṃ-s-karaya-, prati-saṃ-s-kare-, prati-saṃ-s-kārāpe-, prati-saṃ-s-√kṛ § 13.5.12B1. mūṣikokkārā vā cikkhallikā vā pratisaṃskārayitavyā § 15.10.14A4. yadi sarvvarātro gacchati pratisaṃskārayantasya, sarvvarātrī pratisaṃs- karayitavyaṃ § 17.7.15A2. imaṃ tvayā pratisaṃskārayitavyaṃ prati-saṃ-s-kārāpe-# “reparieren lassen” ⇒ prati-saṃ-s-karaya-, prati-saṃ-s-kare-, prati-saṃ-s- kāraya-, prati-saṃ-s-√kṛ § 14.12.13B2. tāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā. yadi tāva sasvāmikā bhavati, tena pratisaṃskārāpetavyā (Hs. °kāroyetavyā) prati-saṃ-s-√kṛ ⇒ a-pratisaṃskṛta~, prati-saṃ-s-karaya-, prati-saṃ-s-kare-, prati-saṃ-s-kāraya-, prati-saṃ-s-kārāpe-, su-pratisaṃskṛta~ § 12.3.11B1. ye varṣāṃ upagacchiṣyanti, te pratisaṃskariṣyanti § 12.5.11B2. prakṛtyaỿva tāva dāyakadānapati pratisaritavyā, tato vihārakā pratisaṃs- karttavyāḥ § 12.13.12A1. upādhyāyācāryā jalpanti “... vayaṃ pratisaṃskariṣyāma” tti § 13.3.12B1. ye bhagavān varṣāṃ vasiṣyanti te pratisaṃskariṣyanti § 13.9.12B3. muṇḍaharmmiyā pratisaṃskarttavyā § 14.12.13B2. tāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā. ... uddiṣṭakā dani yasya bhavati, tena pratisaṃskarttavyā § 14.13.13B2. atha dāni naỿva sasvāmiko bhavati, nâpi uddiṣṭako, sarvvasaṃghena pratisaṃskarttavyo § 16.8.14B3. vihārakāṇāṃ kālena kālaṃ khaṇḍaphuṭṭaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyaṃ 379  § 17.5.15A1. ahan dharmmakathiko ... . ya ete droṇīśramaṇakā te pratisaṃskariṣyanti § 21.8.20B5. kaṭhinaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ bandhitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyaṃ § 22.7.21A3. (cakkalī ...) kālena kālaṃ bandhitavyā, kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyā § 55.10.47A2. (geṇḍuka~ ...) kālena kālaṃ sīvayitavyo kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyo usw. prati-saṃ-√kram “stehenbleiben“ oder “zusammenkommen”#? ☞ § 44.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ prati-√kram § 44.1.38B6. aparehiṃ vihārake saṃbahulā bhikṣū pratisaṃkramati Vgl. § 44.4.39A1. ete dāni saṃbahulā bhikṣūḥ ekahi vihārake pratikramanti, ... pratisaṃdhi~ “Platz”#? ☞ § 56.4, Anm. 1 § 56.4.47A4. ātmano pratisandhismi sukhākaṃ niṣīdanakaṃ pīṭhake prajñapayitavyaṃ § 57.6.47B4. (upānahikāyo ...) pratisandhismi tathā yeva saṃpuṭikṛtikāyo āsanasya heṣṭhe sthapitavyāyo § 57.7.47B5. vṛddhānte ... praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ. abhinikuṭitakena prāñjalīkṛtena gantavyaṃ yāvat pratisandhi prati-saṃ-moda- (BHS), prati-saṃ-modaya- (BHS), prati-saṃ-mode-# “einen Gruß erwidern, begrüßen”; vgl. Pā. paṭisaṃmodeti § 32.1.27A4. so dāni anyavijñānasamaṃmī(?) na samanvāharati, na taṃ pratisaṃmodati. so dāni apratisaṃmodiya gato § 32.2.27A5. so dān’ āha “vanditā mayā tava pādā. tvaṃ ca mama na pratisaṃmodesi.” § 32.2.27A6. evaṃ ca yaṃ tvaṃ mama pādāṃ vandantasya na pratisaṃmodesi § 32.3.27A7. nâpi kṣamati pādehi vandiyamāṇehi na pratisaṃmodituṃ § 32.4.27A7. evaṃ pratisaṃmoditavyaṃ (= § 32.13.27B6); Uddāna (IV).30B5. evaṃ <prati>sammoditavyaṃ § 32.11.27B4. na dāni meṇḍhena viya āsitavyaṃ pādehi vandayaṃtehi. atha khalu prati- saṃmodayitavyaṃ “svāgatam āyuṣmanto, ...” § 33.3.28A1. tena hi na kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena ālapituṃ. tena hi pratisaṃmoditavyaṃ § 39.16.31B4. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 39.28.32A6. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, vihāraṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ āraṇyakāṃ bhikṣūṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ prati-sara- “zugehen, zulaufen, herantreten” ☞ § 12.5, Anm. 2; § 36.3, Anm. 1 ⇒ allīya-, ā-llīya- § 12.5.11B2. prakṛtyaỿva tāva dāyakadānapati pratisaritavyā ... § 36.3.29B3. ye tatra gṛhapatimahattarakāḥ bhavanti, te prakṛty’ eva {te} pratisaritavyā § 37.3.30A2. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva tāva vṛddhatarakā pratisaritavyā prati-sāmaya-#, prati-sāme-# “weglegen, wegstellen; aufräumen”; vgl. BHS. pratiśāmayati, Pā. paṭisāmeti ⇒ prati-śāmaya-, prati-śāme- § 8.6.9A3. upādhyāyasya cīvarāṇi prasphoṭiya sāhariya pratisāmayitavyāni § 8.8.9A6. pātraṃ śodhetavyaṃ, pātraṃ pratisāmetavyaṃ § 25.8.22B4. pratisāmayantena nâpi kṣamati jaṃghāpathe vā sthāpayituṃ kapāṭe vā muṇḍavātāyane vā § 25.14.23A1~2. pratisāmayantena prathamaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā prati- sāmayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāvad vastukāmo bhavati, pātracīvaraṃ pratisāmayitavyaṃ, vihārako uddiśitavyo § 43.12.38B1. evaṃ yat kiñcit saṃghasya bhāṇḍaṃ ... taṃ pratisāmetavyaṃ *pratissaya-vinodana~ “Drohungen vertreibend”; vgl. Pā. parissaya-vinodana (It 112.4); *pratissaya < Pā. parissaya (“Gefahr”) < Pkt. parissava (“Abflüsse”) < Skt. parisrava (“Fluß”) ☞ § 36.6, Anm. 6 § 36.6.29B5. anāgārā pragṛhṇanti pratissayavinodanā<ṃ> (Hs. pratisaṃya{mya}v°) (vs) pratīccha- ⇒ paṭiccha-, praticcha- § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ śalākāṃ praticchesi” ... tena yathâdhyeṣṭena śalākā vārayitavyā, dvitīyena pratīcchitavyā § 4.12.5A5. atha dān’ āha “bhaviṣyatî”ti pratīcchitavyaṃ § 48.8.41B3. na kṣamati ... cīvarakena pratīcchituṃ sarppikhajjakaṃ vā tailakhajjakaṃ vā 380 pratītya-samutpāda-kauśalya~# “die Fähigkeit, mit der bedingten Entstehung umzugehen” ☞ § 7.6, Anm. 1 § 7.6.8B4. āpattikauśalyaṃ śikṣitavyo sūtrakauśalyaṃ skandhakauśalyaṃ āyatana- kauśalyaṃ pratītyasamutpādakauśalyaṃ sthānāsthānakauśalyaṃ § 9.5.10A2. śekhayitavyo dhātukauśalyaṃ skandhak° āyatanak° pratītyasamutpādak° pratyaṃśa~ (BHS, SWTF) “Anteil; Verteilung” § 26.9.23B3. ānantaryasya pātraṃ dātavyaṃ, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, imaṃ mama yavāgūye pratyaṃśaṃ gṛhṇa.” § 42.21.37A5. jentākaṃ praviśantena udakasya pratyayo (lies: pratya<ṃ>śo?) jānitavyo “kathaṃ dīyati” praty-aggala~#, praty-argalaka~# “Flicken”; vgl. DP, s.vv. aggala, aggaḷa (“a patch”); BHSD, s.v. argalaka (“patch [on sandals]”); BhiVin(Ma-L) § 178.6A2.3. pratyargalakāni ☞ § 14.14, Anm. 4 § 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo vā bisio vā caturasrakā vā omayilomayilā bhavanti pāṭitavipāṭitā, dhovitvā sivitavyā, pratyaggalāni dātavyāni § 57.12.48A1. upānahā ... kālena kālaṃ ghaṭayitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ pratyargalakā (Hs. °agralakā) dātavyāḥ pratyagra~ ⇒ a-pratyagra~ pratyagralakā für °argalakā : § 57.12.48A1 ⇒ praty-aggala~, praty-argalaka~ praty-acchaṭikā~# “Erwiderung durch Schnippen mit den Fingern” ⇒ acchaṭikā~ § 18.22.16B1. yadi tāva tahi koci pūrvvapraviṣṭo bhavati tena pratyacchaṭikā karttavyā (≒ § 19.8.18A2) praty-andhakāraka~# “(bei Tage oder in der Nacht) dunkel”; vgl. BHS. praty-andhakāra (“a counterpart of night” [BHSD, s.v.], “Schatten verbreitend” [Schmidt, Nachtr., s.v.]) § 25.12.22B7. atha dāni pratyandhakārako vihārako bhavati, na kṣamati pātreṇa pātraṃ mārggituṃ. atha khalu hastena mārggitavyaṃ praty-amitra~ “Gegner” § 41.17.34B7. asmākaṃ tāva eṣo vadhakānāṃ pratyarthikānāṃ pratyamitrāṇāṃ arthakāmo hitakāmo pratyaya~ ⇒ cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śayyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~ § 42.21.37A5. udakasya pratyayo (lies: pratya<ṃ>śo?) jānitavyo “kathaṃ dīyati” pratyarthika~ “Feind” § 41.17.34B7. asmākaṃ tāva eṣo vadhakānāṃ pratyarthikānāṃ pratyamitrāṇāṃ artha- kāmo hitakāmo pratyalīyanti für pratyallī° oder pratyālī°: § 10.2.10A4 praty-allīya-# “sich an jdn. wenden” ☞ § 8.2, Anm. 2 ⇒ praty-ā-līya- § 10.1.10A3. te antevāsikā ācārikasya niśrayaṃ gṛhṇiya naỿva allīyanti na pratyallīyanti § 10.2.10A4. ye dāni asmākaṃ <na> allīyanti na pratyal<l>īyanti, kathaṃ ime ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ? praty-avekṣa- (praty-ava-√īkṣ) ⇒ su-pratyavekṣita~ § 4.10.5A2. atha khalu hastena āsanaṃ pratyavekṣitavyaṃ § 5.9.6B7. hastehi pratyavekṣiyāṇaṃ anantarikāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 6.9.7B7. hastena pratyavekṣiyāṇa ānantariyāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi ... upaviśitavyaṃ § 13.5.12B1. ete dāni bhikṣavo varṣopagatā bhavanti, te{na}hi vihārakā pratyavekṣitavyā § 15.7.14A3. praviśiya cīvaravaṃśo tāva pratyavekṣitavyo § 15.8.14A3. mañcakaś ca pratyavekṣitavyaḥ § 25.15.23A2. ullapantena kīlakaṃ hastena pratyavekṣitvā <ullapitavyaṃ> § 41.16.34B6. senāpati, pānīyaṃ pratyavekṣituṃ praty-ā-rocaya-# “wiedergeben, erzählen”; vgl. BHSD, ārocayati; BhiVin(Ma-L) § 15, BI.4.6. pratyārociti § 1.3.1B3. tad eva sarvvaṃ bhagavān vistareṇa pratyārocayati (= § 2.3.2B3, § 3.3.3B1, § 4.3.4B1, § 7.2.8A7, § 9.2.9B6, § 37.2.30A1, § 42.4.36A6, § 47.2.40B5 § 49.2.42A5 usw.; ≒ § 36.2.29B1) praty-ā-līya- “sich an jdn. wenden”# ☞ § 8.2, Anm. 2 ⇒ praty-allīya- 381  § 8.2.8B6. kathaṃ ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ, ye ime asmākaṃ naỿv’ allīyaṃti (Hs. na avallīyaṃti) na pratyālīyanti? praty-ā-stara- (Skt [Lex.]) “bestreuen” § 23.9.21B6. uppeḍanako bhavati, pāṃsukena vā śarkaroṭena vā pratyāstaritavyo pratyāstaraṇa~, pratyāstaraṇaka~# “Bezug; Zwischendecke” ☞ § 11.4, Anm. 1, § 11.7, Anm. 1 ⇒ a-pratyāstaraṇa~, a-pratyāstaraṇaka~ § 11.7.10B7. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ evam eva paribhuṃjituṃ apratyāstaraṇaṃ ... atha khalu pratyāstaraṇaṃ karttavyaṃ § 11.8.11A1. nâpi kṣamati ... paṭikām vā loḍḍhakam vā pratyāstaraṇaṃ karttuṃ § 11.12.11A3. sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ ... pratyāstaraṇaṃ dadiya tato paribhuñjitavyaṃ praty-ut-thā- “aufstehen” § 54.12.46A7. tena dharmmagauraveṇa pratyutthāya gṛhītavyaṃ § 55.6.46B7. tenâpi dāni dharmmagauraveṇa pratyutthāya ’puṇoti, niṣīditavyaṃ praty-ud-gaccha- “entgegengehen” § 50.10.43B6. nīhārakapiṇḍapātena hastā nirmmādiyāṇaṃ pānīyasya kuṇḍikāṃ pūriyāṇaṃ panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B6. atha dāni nīhārakapiṇḍapāto na pratyudgacchati, kālo ca atikramati piṇḍapātanīhārakena tvaritatvaritam āgantavyaṃ praty-upa-√sthā “herantreten, bevorstehen” § 54.9.46A5. yadi dakṣiṇato sthito bhavati, vāmajānukena tena cchatti pratyupasthitavyaṃ ghaṭ<ṭ>itavyā praty-upa-sthāpayitavya~ “zu erweisen” ⇒ praty-upa-sthita~ § 42.5.36B1. metraṃ kāyakarmma ... sabrahmacāriṣu dhruvaṃ pratyupasthāpayitavyaṃ āvi caỿva raho ca praty-upa-sthita~ (BHS) “aufwartend” ⇒ praty-upa-sthāpayitavya~ § 36.6.29B6. bahukarā bhikṣavo brāhmaṇagṛhapatayo, yaṃ vo pratyupasthitā cīvara- piṇḍapātaśeyyāsanaglānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārehi praty-o-tāpe-# “in die Sonne stellen”; vgl. CPD, s.v. otāpeti (< ut + √tap, “to warm up; to dry”) ☞ § 13.14, Anm. 2 § 13.14.12B6. pañcāhe pañcāhe śayyāsanaṃ pratyotāpetavyaṃ prathamaṃ “erst” § 8.4.8B7. tato prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśitavyo paścā vāmaṃ praveśiya § 10.4.10A5. prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśayitavyo, paścād vāmaṃ pādaṃ praveśiyāṇa § 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) yadi vā khāniyā udakāntikā bhavati, prathamaṃ kalpiya- kāreṇa ohayiyāpetavyā § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) atha dāni prapātaniśritā vā, ... antarā kāṣṭhaṃ dātavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateya § 18.51.17B1. kāṣṭhakaṃ antarā karttavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateyā § 25.14.23A1~2. nirmmādayantena prathamaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ nirmmādayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. śoṣayantena prathamaṃ ... śoṣayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano. pratisāmayantena prathamaṃ ... pratisāmayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano § 53.5.45A4. dīpavārikena dīpam ādīpentena pratham{ān}am eva bhagavato śarīra- kuṭikāyāṃ dīpo ādīpitavyo § 53.6.45A5. yadi tāva so dvibhūmiko saṃghārāmo bhavati, prathamaṃ tāva sopāna- maggulīye dīpako jālayitavyo § 53.17.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, prahāṇaśālāyān tāva prathamaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo prathamaka~ (BHS) “erster” § 5.13.7A3. yathā prathamake śikṣāpade evaṃ dvitīyasthavireṇa bhaktāgre pratipadyi- tavyaṃ prathamam ⇒ prathamaṃ prathamānam für prathamam? : § 53.5.45A4 pradakṣiṇī-kare-# < Skt. pradakṣiṇī-√kṛ ⇒ kare-, √kṛ usw. § 31.15.26A1. cetiyāṇaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi upānahā omuñcitvā kāṣṭhakena gṛhṇitvā 382  praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.20.26A4. saṃghārāmaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi āgantavyaṃ pra-darśita~ § 41.10.34A6. sthavireṇa dāni tasya brāhmaṇasya prasannacittasya catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni pradīpa~ “Lampe” ⇒ dīpa~, dīpaka~, dīpikā~ (1) § 15.6.14A2. pradīpo jvālayitavyo tṛṇolkā vā kaṇḍolkā vā prajvālayitavyā § 53.3.45A3. evaṃ dīpe pratipadyitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni evaṃ pradīpe pratipadyitavyaṃ Uddāna (VII).50B1. <evam> pradīpe pratipadyitavyaṃ Antaroddāna 50B2. āraṇyakā nevāsikā (lies: nivāsanaṃ?) ca pradīpo ca sapta varggāḥ prakāśitāḥ praduṣṭa-citta~# “böse Absicht habend”; vgl. Pā. paduṭṭha-citta~ ⇒ duṣṭa-citta~, pra-dūṣaya- § 41.5.34A2. so dāni praduṣṭacitto sthavirasya pṛṣṭhimena pṛṣṭhimaṃ anubaddho pra-dūṣaya- (BHS, SWTF) (zusammen mit cittaṃ) “Groll hegen”; vgl. Pā. padūseti, padoseti ⇒ praduṣṭa-citta~, duṣṭa-citta~ § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ (Hs. °itaṃ). atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinivaraṇaṃ me karentî”ti § 55.4.46B6. nâpi kṣamati geṇḍukaṃ vārayantasya cittaṃ pradūṣayituṃ. atha khalu cittaṃ pragopayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ mo karenti” tti pradeśa~ ⇒ *atiniḥśabda-pradeśa~, *cchanna-pradeśa~, pṛthivī-pradeśa~, pradeśaka~ § 1.6.1B5. yasmin pradeśe yaṃ divasaṃ saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, ... § 4.18.5B7. yasmiṃ pradeśe medhāvī vāsaṃ kalpeti paṇḍito (vs) § 19.17.18A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe ujjhituṃ § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ ... nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ § 19.24.18B3. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya praśvāsabhaṇḍakaṃ dhoviya pratigupte pradeśe ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.36.18B7. praśvāsakṛto bhavati, nâpi kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe praśvāsaṃ karttuṃ § 27.5.23B6. nâyaṃ kṣamati atigupte vā atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe tiṣṭhituṃ. atha khalu cchannaprākaṭe pradeśe sthātavyaṃ § 28.10.24A5. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe caṃkramituṃ. atha khalu cchanna- prākaṭe pradeśe caṃkramitavyaṃ § 29.9.24B5~6. nâpi kṣamati ... atibhuṃḍe vā pradeśe niṣīdituṃ. atha khalu cchanna- prākaṭe pradeśe niṣīditavyaṃ § 60.5.48B7. koci se pradeśo khajjati, hastā ca se ’kalpiyā bhavanti, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni bhikṣusya koci pradeśo khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā parimardditavyaṃ pradeśaka~# “Ort, Platz” ⇒ pradeśa~ § 21.9.20B5. prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā pradeśakaṃ gomayena upalimpiya cīvarakaṃ sīvitavyaṃ pranāḍikā-bhrama~#, praṇāli-bhrama~# “Abfluß”; vgl. Skt. pranāḍī, praṇālī, praṇālikā usw. ☞ § 13.9, Anm. 1 ⇒ udaka-bhrama~ § 13.9.12B3. udakabhramā vā praṇālibhramā vā paripūritā bhavanti, śodhayitavyāḥ § 13.14.12B6. udakabhramāḥ pranāḍikābhramā vā kālena kālaṃ śodhitavyāḥ prapāṇḍara~ (BHS) “strahlend weiß, sehr weiß”; vgl. Skt. prapāṇḍura ☞ § 23.3, Anm. 5 § 23.3.21A5. jyeṣṭhako nāma vihārako, bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, ulloko bhavati prapāṇḍaro (Hs. °ṇḍarā), bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā § 23.3.21A6. madhyamako nāma vihārako, <bhūmi> bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā, na ca bhavati ulloyo prapāṇḍaro § 23.3.21A6. bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, nâpi bhavati ulloyo prapāṇḍaro, na haỿva bhitti kṛtaparikarmmā. evaṃ kanīyasako prapāta-niśrita~# “am Rand eines Steilhanges liegend” ⇒ dari-niśrita~ § 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) mallakatalā khaḍā khaṇitavyā prapātaniśritā (Hs. °taṃ) vā 383  § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) atha dāni prapātaniśritā vā, ullā varccagharaṃ dhovanti gacchati, antarā kāṣṭhaṃ dātavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateya § 18.7.15B6. atha dāni prapātaniśrita (Hs. °nisṛtā) bhavati varcakuṭī, kiñ câpi tahi yyeva udakaṃ patati, anāpattiḥ § 18.17.16A5. atha dāni prapātaniśritā bhavanti, kiṃ câpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati saṃkaraṃ vā anāpattiḥ pra-pīḍita~ “bedrängt” ⇒ ut-pīḍita~, up-pīḍita~, √pīḍ § 19.7.18A1. tāva na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā āgamayituṃ, yāva praśvāsena prapīḍito bhavati pra-bhāta~ § 22.6.21A3. vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, yadi tāva prabhātaṃ bhavati, cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ upari bandhitavyā pra-bhūta~ § 41.14.34B4. tehi dāni mārggiya mārggiya prabhūtaṃ hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ gṛhasya madhyamāgāre mahāntaṃ kūṭaṃ kṛtaṃ prabhūta-jātarūpa-rajata-vittopakaraṇa~# (vitta-upa°) “viel Gold, Silber und Vermögen besitzend” ☞ § 41.12, Anm. 3 § 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo ... prabhūtajātarūparajatavittopakaraṇo ... prabhūta-dāsī-dāsa-karmmakara-pauruṣeya~ (SWTF) “viele Sklavinnen, Sklaven, Arbeiter und Tagelöhner besitzend” ☞ § 41.12, Anm. 3 § 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo ... prabhūtadāsīdāsakarmmakarapauruṣeyo prabhūta-dhana-dhānya-kośa-koṣṭhāgāra~ (°ṣṭha-ag°) (SWTF) “viel Geld, Vorräte, Schatzkammern und Vorratshäuser besitzend” ☞ § 41.12, Anm. 3 § 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo mahādhano mahābhogo prabhūtadhanadhānya- kośakoṣṭhāgāro ... prabhūta-hasty-aśva-aja-gav’-eḍaka~# “eine Menge Elefanten, Pferde, Ziegen, Kühe und Schafe besitzend” ☞ § 41.12, Anm. 3 § 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo ... prabhūtahastyaśva-ajagav’-eḍako ... prabhṛti § 12.12.12A1. tato vihārakā uddiśitavyāḥ, vṛddhāntato prabhṛti yāva avarṣakaparyantaṃ § 38.5.30A7. allīya vṛddhāntāto prabhṛti sarvveṣāṃ praṇāmo karttavyo § 44.6.39A5. tato koṇakāto prabhṛti sukhākaṃ mocayitavyaṃ prabheda~ ⇒ saṃkṣipta-vistara-prabheda~ pra-majja-# “nachlässig sein”; < Skt. pramādyati, °ate; vgl. Pā. pamajjati § 4.19.6A2. mā pramajji jinaśāsane (vs) pramāṇa~ ⇒ a-pramāṇa~ pramāṇika~ (BHS, SWTF), prāmāṇika~ (BHS, SWTF) “maßgerecht”; vgl. BHSD, s.vv. pramāṇika (“having a measure, limited, restricted”), prāmāṇika (3) (“extensive”) § 20.5.19B2. tena hi anujānāmi dantakāṣṭhaṃ prāmāṇikaṃ mahāntaṃ ṣoḍaśāṅgulaṃ § 20.8.19B4. tena hi pramāṇikaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ pra-mārja-, pra-mārjaya- ⇒ √mṛj § 40.11.33A4. oṣṭha pramārjitvā agroṣṭhehi pātavyaṃ pra-yata~ ⇒ a-prayata~ pra-yāta~ “abgereist” § 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. pañcavarṣikaṃ pravṛttaṃ. sārtho prayāto (?; Hs. yathā pāṭito)” § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he ... śramaṇa sārtho (Hs. mātā) prayāto (Hs. prajātā) (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti § 31.35.27A2. nâpi kṣamati tehi nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho prayāto. gacchantu āyuṣmanto. gataṃ mārggasya śreyo.” § 31.37.27A3. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāptaṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, yadi koci sārtho prayāto bhavati, te bhikṣu vāṇijakasya sārthavāhasya parinditavyā pra-yukta~ ⇒ uddeśa-prayukta~, manasikāra-prayukta~, svādhyāya-prayukta~ pralaggakā für praluggakā : § 16.7.14B2 pralaggikā für praluggikā: § 43.11.38A7 384 praluggaka~#, praluggikā~# “zerbrochen”; vgl. BHS. pralugna; Pā. palugga; Skt. pra + rugṇa ⇒ paluggaka~, palugnaka~, paluggikā~ § 11.6.10B6. na dāni vihāro adhyupekṣitavyo, oddirṇṇako praluggako acaukṣo vā ... § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... vihārakān ondriṇṇakāṃ praluggakāṃ acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ oddiṇṇakāṃ praluggakāṃ acaukṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... mañcā ca pīṭhā ca uddriṇṇakā praluggakā uppādakā utthitakā § 16.7.14B2. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā praluggakā (Hs. °laggakā) vā oddriṇṇakā vā § 43.11.38A7. kalpikakuṭī ... oddriṇṇakā vā praluggikā (Hs. pralaggi°) vā acaukṣā vā pra-vartta- § 36.6.29B5. āmiṣacakraṃ (Hs. amiṣa°) niśrāya dharmmacakraṃ pravarttati (vs) pravarddhaka~ “arrogant”#?; wörtl. “vermehrend, steigernd” (PW, s.v. pravardhaka) § 38.3.30A6. yadi tāva so bhavati usreṇako vā pravarddhako vā anarthakuśalo vā ... pravāta-gandhika~# “den Geruch, der durch den Wind (weg)geweht (od. getragen) wird, habend” § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādantā ekānte niṣaṇṇā āsanti pravātagandhikena mukhena § 20.5.19B1. tato ete bhikṣavo ekānte āsanti pravātagandhikena mukhena pravāritvā wohl für prāvaritvā : § 45.4.39B6 praviveka~ (BHS, SWTF) “Abgeschiedenheit, Einsamkeit” § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “ ... duṣkaraṃ pravivekena (Hs. prativek°) durabhiramaṃ ekaṃ paraṃ rātri vinayamāno mānasaṃ ādhyātmaṃ vê”ti pra-√viś ⇒ pūrvva-praviṣṭa~, anu-pra-viṣṭa~, √viś § 4.7.4B6. sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāya piṇḍāya praviśitavyaṃ § 4.7.4B6. bhante etaṃ sidhyati. praviśati bhikṣusaṃgho § 4.8.4B6. yadi tāva hemanto bhavati, anukālaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 4.8.4B6. atha dāni grīṣmakālo bhavati, śītalakasaṃgena anukālyaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 4.8.4B7. atha dāni varṣārātro kālo bhavati, devāntarā yeva anukālyaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 4.9.5A1. praviśa<ṃ>tehi jānitavyaṃ: kathaṃ āsanā prajñaptāḥ § 4.10.5A2. kāṃsabhājanaṃ parivarjantehi dārakadārikāṃ parivarjantehi praviśitavyaṃ § 4.18.5B7. praviśya vṛddhiye varāye bhūrīye (vs) § 5.7.6B3. tena praviśiyāṇaṃ (Hs. pravisi°) tahiṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ § 5.7.6B5. bhante etaṃ sidhyati, etaṃ pacyati, praviśantu āryamiśrāḥ! § 5.8.6B6. anukallatarakaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 6.7.7B5. yāva sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāye pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ § 6.9.7B6. tato na kṣamati bhaṇḍam vā ... dārakadārikā laṃghayantehi praviśituṃ. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ pariharantehi dārakadārikāṃ pariharantehi praviśitavyaṃ § 6.9.7B7. tato nâpi kṣamati praviṣṭehi gatāgatasya upaviśituṃ § 8.6.9A2. gocaraṃ praviśantasya grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni § 12.16.12A4. atha dāni evaṃ pi alpāvakāśo bhavati, vṛddhehi cchanne praviśitavyaṃ § 18.20.16A7. bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena uppīḍito nivasanaṃ oguhiya varccakuṭiṃ praviśati § 18.26.16B3. atha khalu sthāpayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 18.27.16B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena varccakuṭīṃ praveṣṭuṃ § 18.39.17A2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ praviṣṭo samāno samudācāra{ṃ}kṛto bhavati, ... § 19.36.18B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ gocaraṃ praviṣṭaḥ praśvāsakṛto bhavati, nâpi kṣamati ... § 22.4.21A1. cakkalī utkṣipitavyā. nâpi dāni sahasā. anekāyo mā tarhi dīrghako praviṣṭo bhaveya tti § 22.4.21A2. (vihāraṃ ...) praviśiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osārayitavyā, dvāraṃ bandhitavyaṃ § 22.6.21A3. vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, ... dvāraṃ apaduriya tato praviśitavyaṃ § 24.11.22A6. etasya dāni bhikṣusya gocaraṃ praviśantasya ... kheṭo āgacchati, ... § 31.1.25A7. te dāni okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviṣṭāḥ § 31.7.25B6. tehi dāni prāvariya gaṇṭhipāśakaṃ obandhiya āmantriya praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.8.25B6. praviśiya yācitvā saṃghasya yathāsukhaparibhogaṃ ... § 31.9.25B7. pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.12.25B7. nisṛṣṭagṛhaṃ bhavati, anāmantriya praviśati, anāpattiḥ § 31.14.26A1. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśantehi puṣkiriṇīyaṃ vā taḍāge vā oghe vā pādāṃ 385  dhovitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.20.26A3. atha dāni apadurako vihāro bhavati, praviśitavyaṃ. atha dāni ghaṭṭitako bhavati, apāvuraṇena apaduriyāṇaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati aparejjukāto kalyato utthihantakenaỿva bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ § 31.27.26B2. mā piṇḍāya praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha (≒ § 31.30.26B5) § 31.27.26B2. nevāsikehi vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, āgametha sahitakā piṇḍāye praviś- iṣyāmaḥ”, tato sahitakehi praviśitavyaṃ § 31.32.26B6. amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. ... § 39.16.31B4. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ (Hs. pravis°) grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 39.28.32A6. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, vihāraṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ āraṇyakāṃ bhikṣūṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 40.1.32B3. gocaraṃ praviṣṭāḥ § 41.4.33B7. Vaiśālīn nagarī[ṃ] piṇḍāya praviṣṭo § 41.14.34B3. te dāni taṃ gṛhaṃ okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviṣṭā § 41.25.35B2. acchaṭikāṃ karentena pādadhovanikāyāṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 41.32.36A1. antamasato leṅkaṭakhaṇḍena vāmahastena vā āmarjiya praviśitavyaṃ § 42.2.36A3. praviśantu āyuṣmanto, jentāko tapto § 42.3.36A4. te ... tvaritatvaritaṃ praviṣṭā § 42.15.36B7. praviśatena na dāni kṣamati bāhā bhrāmayantena praviśituṃ § 42.15.36B7. eko niṣkrāmati, eko praviśati § 42.15.36B7. yo praviśati tenântaraṃ dātavyaṃ § 42.16.37A1. cīvarakāni sthāpitvā praviśitvā tasya tāva parikarmma karttavyaṃ § 42.15.36B7. ekena hastena agrato praticchāditvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 42.21.37A5. jentākaṃ praviśantena udakasya pratyayo (lies: pratya<ṃ>śo?) jānitavyo § 42.21.37A6. yo pratibalo bhavati ... so praviśatu § 42.21.37A6. yo pratibalo bhavati ... tena praveṣṭavyaṃ § 42.21.37A6. upādhyāyācāryā praviśatha § 42.21.37A6. praveṣṭavyaṃ (= § 42.21.37A7, § 47.5.40B7) § 42.21.37A6. praviśantu āryamiśrāḥ § 42.31.37B7. atha dāni koci paścāt praviśati ... § 45.4.39B5. bhikṣuṇā ... gocaraṃ praviśaṃtena ... § 45.4.39B6. cīvarāṇi prāvaritvā gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 47.1.40B2. te ... gocaraṃ praviśantā cīvaraṃ ka<ḍ>ḍhaṃtā praviśanti § 47.1.40B4. katham antaraghare praviśantehi cīvarehi pratipadyitavyaṃ § 47.2.40B4. yūyaṃ antaragharaṃ praviśantā cīvarakāni kaḍḍhantā gacchatha § 47.2.40B5. kathaṃ antaragharaṃ praviśantehi cīvarake pratipadyitavyaṃ § 47.3.40B5. evaṃ antaragharaṃ praviśantena cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 47.3.40B6, § 47.10.41A2) § 47.4.40B6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā antaragharaṃ praviśantena cīvaraṃ kaḍḍhantena praviśituṃ § 47.5.40B7. cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā gaṇṭhipāśaṃ ābandhitvā praviśitavyaṃ § 47.6.40B7. antaragharaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 47.7.41A1. kaṇṭakaśākhā parivarjantena ... praviśitavyaṃ § 48.1.41A3. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā antaragharaṃ praviṣṭā samānā ... § 48.1.41A4. ime pi na jānanti kathaṃ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭehi cīvarehi pratipadyitavyaṃ (≒ § 48.2.41A6) § 48.2.41A5. yūyaṃ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭā samānā ... § 48.2.41A5. sudhāpāṇḍulepanāhi bhittīhi ghasaṃtā praviśatha § 48.3.41A6. evaṃ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭehi cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ § 48.4.41A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭo āsanena nimantrīyati, ... § 48.7.41B2. nâpi kṣamati antaraghare praviṣṭena ... atikramituṃ § 48.8.41B3. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena cīvarakena pratīcchituṃ sarppi- 386  khajjakaṃ vā tailakhajjakaṃ vā § 48.10.41B5. evaṃ antaraghare praviṣṭena cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [VI]. 45A1) § 49.1.41B6. ehi āyuṣmaṃ, grāmaṃ praviśyāmaḥ (≒ § 49.2.42A5) § 49.1.42A3. nagarakulopakena pityakena sārddhaṃ praviṣṭasya ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāvisya § 49.7.42B6. yadi tāva so śirāviddho eva nirddhāvati, ayaṃ praviṣṭo bhavati ... § 50.1.43A2. so dāni bhikṣu piṇḍapātasya kṛtena praviṣṭo § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohanati, yadi tāva kaṇḍikāpūrakam ukkaḍḍhiya ovvarakaṃ praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā.” ti § 51.8.44A4. yadi tāva śilāpūrakāṃ pithiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, ... § 51.14.44A7. evaṃ yaṃ yaṃ kāryyaṃ cchindiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, ... § 57.4.47B3. atha khalu upānahikāyo dvāramūle nikkhāsiya praviśitvā vṛddhānte añjaliṃ kṛtvā yathāvṛddhikāye upaviśitavyaṃ § 57.7.47B5. atha dāni akṛto bhūmi-astāro bhavati, sa-upānahena prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśi- tavyaṃ § 61.7.49A7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gocaraṃ vā praviśantena antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena maṭamaṭāye aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhituṃ usw. pra-viś für pra-veś § 11.5.10B6. praviśayitavyaṃ für praveś° § 19.22.18B1. praviśiyāṇaṃ wohl für praveś° § 23.4.1.21A7. praviśituṃ für praveś° § 42.19.37A3. praviśiyitvā wohl für praveś° pra-viṣṭa~ ⇒ pra-√viś praviṣṭaka~ (BHS) ⇒ pra-√viś, upaviṣṭaka~ § 42.16.37A1. upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā praviṣṭako bhavati pravisa- für praviśa- § 5.7.6B3. pravisiyāṇaṃ für praviśi° (= § 39.16.31B4) § 19.35.18B7. pravisati für °viśati § 31.8.25B6. pravisiya für °viśiya pra-vṛtta~ § 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. pañcavarṣikaṃ pravṛttaṃ. sārtho prayāto (Hs. yathā pāṭito)” pravṛttaka~ ⇒ iti-pravṛttaka~ pravedayituṃ wohl für pra<dveṣo> vedayituṃ : § 53.10.45B1 -praveśa~ für -pradeśa~? : § 18.43.17A5 praveśaka~ ⇒ gṛha-praveśaka~, ghara-praveśaka~ praveśanika~ ⇒ grāma-praveśanika~, ghara-praveśanika~ pra-veśaya- (Skt), pra-veśe- (BHS) § 8.4.8B7. prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśitavyo paścā vāmaṃ praveśiya (Hs. °śaya) § 10.4.10A5. prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśayitavyo, paścād vāmaṃ pādaṃ praveśiyāṇa (Hs. °veśayāṇa) § 10.5.10A6. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ praveśayitavyaṃ, prasrāvakumbhikā praveśayitavyā § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) varṣeṇa ovarṣīyati vātātapena vā vināśīyati, cchanne praveśayitavyaṃ (Hs. praviśa°) ... prasphoṭiyāna cchanne praveśayitavyaṃ § 15.5.14A2. nâpi kṣamati gatāgatasya vihārake bhaṇḍaṃ praveśituṃ § 19.22.18B1. vikāle praveśiyāṇaṃ (Hs. praviś°) tahiṃ yyeva sthāne sthāpayitavyo § 19.24.18B3. tato vikāle bhūyo praveśitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyo) § 19.25.18B3. sāyaṃ praveśentena kunta vā tumbakā vā śikke uvvinitvā mañcakasthāne ullapitavyaṃ § 23.4.1.21A7. yo dāni jyeṣṭhako bhavati vihāro, nâyaṃ kṣamati tahiṃ maṃcā vā pīṭhā vā praveśituṃ (Hs. °viśituṃ) § 23.4.1.21A7. maṃcā vā pīṭhā vā ... praveśiyāṇaṃ tato tahiṃ pratipādakānāṃ upari 387  thapetavyo § 23.4.1.21A7. pīṭhaṃ praveśeti. pīṭhasyâpi evaṃ yyeva § 23.4.2.21B1. nâpi tahiṃ kṣamati mandamukhī prajvālayituṃ, dīpako vā praveśayituṃ. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śeyyāṃ prajñapayitukāmo bhavati, kiñ câpi dīpakaṃ praveśeti, anāpattiḥ § 23.6.2.21B3. mandamukhīm vā prajvāleti, anāpattiḥ. dīpaṃ vā praveśeti, anāpattiḥ § 24.4.22A3. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ ... ātape vā dātavyo {yo} bhūyo praveśayitavyo § 25.17.23A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ, jentākam vā praveśituṃ § 31.7.25B5. sāye vāsôpagatā bhavanti, taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā § 41.24.35B1. na kṣamati upānahāhi ārdrapādena praveśayituṃ § 41.24.35B1. yaṃ kālaṃ adhvātā bhavanti tato praveśayitavyo § 42.19.37A3. udakaṃ praveśayitvā (Hs. praviśiyitvā) § 42.27.37B4. jentākapīṭhakāni praveśayitavyāni tailam praveśayitavyaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ praveśayitavyaṃ śuktiyo praveśayitavy<āy>o § 42.31.37B6~7. jentākavārikena tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati praveśayitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyaḥ), cūrṇṇaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati praveśayitavyaṃ, jentākapīṭhikāni dhoviya praveśayitavyāni, śuktiyo dhoviya praveśayitavyāyo § 42.31.37B7. vayam etaṃ praveśayiṣyāma (Hs. °iśyāma) § 42.31.37B7. tehi praveśayitavyaṃ § 43.4.38A4. (lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ...) kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya sthāpayitavyāni yathāsthānaṃ § 43.5.38A5. kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya sthāpayitavyāḥ § 43.6.38A5. kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya yathāsthāne praveśayitavyāni (wohl für sthāpayi- tavyāni) § 49.4.42A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā paścācchramaṇo praveśituṃ § 49.4.42A7. tena paścācchramaṇo praveśayitavyo § 49.6.42B2. eṣo ca dāni bhikṣu <ta>sya (?) sārddhevihārī vā antevāsī vā paścāc- chramaṇaṃ praveśe{n}ti § 49.6.42B2. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati tasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajayituṃ, praveśayitavyo § 49.6.42B3. atha dāni na pratibalo bhavati, praveśito ca tena bhavati, paścācchramaṇo kālena kālaṃ visarjayitavyo § 53.17.45B6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ sahasā dīpakaṃ praveśayituṃ § 53.17.45B6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmanto, dīpo praveśīyatî (Passiv; vgl. BHSG § 37.6; ib., S. 231a)”ti. “dīpo praveśayati (‘Eine Lampe kommt herein!’; vgl. BHSG § 38.23, s.v. viś)” tti usw. praveśik~ ⇒ grāma-praveśika~, ghara-praveśika~, tṛṇa-praveśik~ -praveśikā für -prasevikā : § 15.7.14A3. pātra-praveśikā für °prasevikā; § 25.8.22B5. pātra- praveśikāyāṃ für °prasevikāyāṃ praveśe- ⇒ praveśaya- pravesikā für prasevikā : § 25.15.23A2 pra-vy-ā-hara- “sagen, sprechen; antworten#” ⇒ vy-ā-hara- § 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā <kiṃ bhaṇasi>” tti pravyā- harituṃ § 33.10.28A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya <mātā vā> pitā vā bhaginī vā śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti pravyāharttuṃ § 33.14.28A6. te ete gṛhi-ālāpena ālapanti vā pravyāharanti vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsādayaṃti § 33.17.28A7. evaṃ pravyāharttavyaṃ (Hs.°ttavyā) (= Uddāna [IV].30B5) pra-vrajita~ “Wanderasket” § 4.5.4B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti. āgantuko gamiko gṛhastho pravrajito strī puruṣo dārako dārikā § 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ ... etaṃ bhaktaṃ ... āgantukasya gamikasya gṛhasthasya 388  pravrajitasyêti (= § 5.12.7A3, § 6.12.8A3) § 4.20.6A2. atha dāni pravrajitasya bhavati, nâyaṃ dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā § 4.20.6A3. suduṣkaraṃ pravrajitasya dānaṃ (vs) § 6.5.7B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti: ... gṛhastho pravrajito vāṇijako sārthavāho āgantuko gamiko? § 11.1.10B3. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ śraddhayā-d-āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ ... (≒ § 12.1.11A6) § 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya praveṣṭavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “samāmapayi (?) ime pravrajitā karonti.” pra-√śaṃs ⇒ pra-śasta~, anu-pra-√śaṃs § 26.1.23A4. te dāni āyuṣmaṃto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ekatyaṃ yavāgūṃ nindanti, ekatyaṃ praśaṃsanti (Hs. °saṃs°) § 26.10.23B3. ete vilambakā yavāgūḥ nindanti vā praśaṃsanti (Hs. °saṃs°) vā, vinayāti- kramaṃ āsādayanti praśaṃsā~ § 37.5.30A4. yasya praśaṃsā tam anupraśaṃśe teṣāṃ guṇaṃ eva vade na doṣan (vs) pra-śasta~ ⇒ pra-√śaṃs § 4.18.5B6. praśastam āryehi navaṃ niveśanaṃ (vs) praśādīyanti für prasād° : § 31.24.26A7 praśna~ § 42.30.37B6. atha dāni praśno sthāpīyati, kiñ câpi praghuṣṭena svareṇa praśnā visarjenti, anāpattiḥ praśrāvakaraṇaṃ für prasrāva° : § 18.10.16A1; uccāra-praśrāva für °-prasrāva : § 18.18.16A6 praśvāsa~# “Urin; das Urinieren”; praśvāsaṃ + √kṛ “Wasser lassen; urinieren”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 142, Anm. 2 ⇒ praśvāsaka~, prasrāva~, uccāra~, ucchvāsa~, uśvāsa~ § 19.2.17B4. te dāni bhikṣuḥ prakīrṇṇakaṃ praśvāsaṃ karonti § 19.2.17B4. yathā uṣṭrā vā ... eva<m i>me śramaṇakā prakīrṇṇakaṃ praśvāsaṃ karonti § 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako praśvāsena uppīḍito ... § 19.6.17B7. praśvāsakuṭīṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ ... “praśvāsaṃ kariṣyan” ti <praviśati?> § 19.6.17B7. tahiṃ ca bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo praśvāsaṃ karoti § 19.7.18A1. evaṃ praśvāse pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 19.43.19A4) § 19.7.18A1. tāva na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā āgamayituṃ, yāva praśvāsena prapīḍito bhavati § 19.8.18A2. iminā tāva āgamayitavyaṃ yāva praśvāso kṛto § 19.9.18A2. iminā avakāśo dātavyo. tato ubhayehi praśvāso karttavyo § 19.13.18A3. atha dāni praśvāsena uppīḍito bhavati, na kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa ... § 19.13.18A4. atha khalu ekatam’ aṃte upaviśiya praśvāso karttavyo § 19.15.18A4. tenâpi dāni praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa so pṛthivīpradeśo ... cchorayitavyo § 19.16.18A5. mā aprakṛtikā (wohl für °iko) ghaṭasya {vā} bāhyena praśvāsaṃ cchoreyā ti § 19.16.18A6. tatra kuṃtako alābutumbako vā thapayitavyo. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa ghaṭake prakṣipitavyaṃ § 19.18.18A7. tṛbhūmiko bhavati, tṛtīyāyāṃ bhūmau tathā yyeva sthāpayitavyaṃ. tahiṃ praśvāsaṃ karitavyaṃ § 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya ... § 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo, yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso (Hs. ghaṃśvato) gaccheyā § 19.31.18B6. atha khalu ekamantena praśvāso karttavyo § 19.33.18B6. tenâpi praśvāsaṃ kariyāṇa, ... cchorayitavyaṃ § 19.35.18B7. gocaraṃ praviśati, prakṛty’ eva tāva praśvāsaṃ kariya praviśitavyaṃ § 19.36.18B7. praśvāsakṛto bhavati, nâpi kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe praśvāsaṃ karttuṃ § 19.36.19A1. kuḍḍa agrato kariyāṇa praśvāso karttavyo § 19.37.19A1. nâpi kṣamati panthesmiṃ praśvāsaṃ karttuṃ § 19.37.19A1. kena imaṃhi panthe praśvāso kṛto rudhiraṃ viya cchanditaṃ? § 19.37.19A1. atha khalu ekānte praśvāso karttavyo. panthāto ussariya ekānte karttavyaṃ § 19.42.19A3. yadi tāva ātmanako praśvāso bhavati, purimapaścimakaṃ ca varjayitvā 389  madhyamaṃ gṛhṇitavyo. evam tasya pratigrahaḥ § 19.43. evaṃ praśvāse pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [II].20A6) § 32.5.27B1. evaṃ praśvāsaṃ karentasya, dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantasya ... na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ praśvāsaka~# “Urin” ⇒ praśvāsa~, prasrāva~, uccāra~, ucchvāsa~, uśvāsa~ § 19.4.17B6. tathā samantena setuḥ karttavyo, yathā pa<ti>tako yeva praśvāsako bāhyena nirggacchati praśvāsa-kāra~ “sein Wasser zu lassen beabsichtigend, urinieren wollend” ☞ § 44.1, Anm. 3 ⇒ praśvāsa-kāraka~, uśvāsa-kāra~ § 44.6.39A3. atha dāni bhikṣu virātrakāle uśvāsakāro vā praśvāsakāro vā nirddhāvati, ... praśvāsa-kāraka~ “sein Wasser zu lassen beabsichtigend, urinieren wollend” ☞ § 44.1, Anm. 3 ⇒ praśvāsa-kāra~, uśvāsa-kāraka~, pāda-vandaka~ § 44.1.38B6. aparo ca bhikṣuḥ virātre uśvāsakārako vā praśvāsakārako vā nirddhāvito bhavati praśvāsa-kuṭī~# “Pissoir”; ⇒ prasrāva-kuṭī~, varcca-kuṭikā~, varc(c)a-kuṭī~, varcca-kuṭīkā~ § 19.3.17B5. tena hi praśvāsakuṭī nāma karttavyā. praśvāsakuṭī pi dāni bhikṣuṇā kārayantena na kṣamati vihārasya uttareṇa pūrvveṇa kārāpayituṃ § 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ ... praśvāsena uppīḍito praśvāsakuṭīṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ ... § 19.7.18A1. atha khalu samudācāramātrakenaỿva praśvāsakuṭīṃ gantavyaṃ § 19.8.18A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati aśabdakarṇṇikāye praśvāsakuṭīṃ praviśituṃ. atha khalu acchaṭikāṃ karantena praśvāsakuṭiṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 19.12.18A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇa upaviṣṭako praśvāsakṛto bhavati, utthiyāṇaṃ praśvāsakuṭīṃ gantavyaṃ § 19.16.18A5. atha dāni praśvāsakuṭī na bhavati, ekasmi koṇe sarvvasaṃghasya praśvāsaghaṭo sthāpayitavyo praśvāsa-kṛta~# “(ein Bedürfnis) verspürend, sein Wasser zu lassen” ☞ § 19.12, Anm. 1 ⇒ uśvāsa-kṛta~, samudācāra-kṛta~ § 19.12.18A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇa upaviṣṭako praśvāsakṛto bhavati, utthiyāṇaṃ praśvāsakuṭīṃ gantavyaṃ § 19.30.18B5. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandanto praśvāsakṛto bhavati, samudācāramātrakeṇa eva gantavyaṃ § 19.36.18B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ gocaraṃ praviṣṭaḥ praśvāsakṛto bhavati, nâpi kṣamati ... § 19.37.19A1. eṣo bhikṣuḥ sārthena samānam adhvānaṃ gacchati, praśvāsakṛto bhavati ... praśvāsa-ghaṭa~# “Urin-Topf (oder -Kübel)” ⇒ praśvāsa-ghaṭikā~, praśvāsa-bhaṇḍaka~, prasrāva-kumbha~, prasrāva-kumbhaka~, prasrāva-kumbhikā~ § 19.16.18A5. atha dāni praśvāsakuṭī na bhavati, ekasmi koṇe sarvvasaṃghasya praśvāsaghaṭo (Hs. °sapaṭe) sthāpayitavyo § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ § 19.23.18B2. atha dāni saṃghe praśvāsaghaṭo na bhavati, paudgalikapaudgalikāni praśvāsaghaṭikāni sthāpayitavyāni ghaṭikā vā karakā vā alābutumbukā vā praśvāsa-ghaṭikā~# “Urin-Topf (oder -Kübel)” ⇒ praśvāsa-ghaṭa~, praśvāsa-bhaṇḍaka~, prasrāva-kumbha~, prasrāva-kumbhaka~, prasrāva-kumbhikā~ § 19.19.18A7. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, taṃ kālaṃ praśvāsaghaṭikā nikkālayitavyā § 19.23.18B2. paudgalikapaudgalikāni praśvāsaghaṭikāni (Nom. pl. fem.!; vgl. BHSG § 9.98) sthāpayitavyāni ghaṭikā vā karakā vā alābutumbukā vā praśvāsapaṭe für °saghaṭo : § 19.16.18A5 praśvāsa-bhaṇḍaka~# “Urin-Gefäß” ⇒ praśvāsa-ghaṭa~, praśvāsa-ghaṭikā~, praśvāsa-bhaṇḍaka~, prasrāva-kumbha~, prasrāva-kumbhaka~, prasrāva-kumbhikā~ § 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya praśvāsabhaṇḍakaṃ dhoviya pratigupte pradeśe ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ praṣṭavya~ ⇒ śīta-praṣṭavya~ prasaṃsanti für praśaṃs° : § 26.1.23A4, § 26.10.23B3 pra-sanna~ ⇒ a-prasanna~, kruddha-prasanna~, śraddhā-prasanna~ 390  § 52.6.44B6. asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno prasanna-citta~ (BHS, SWTF) “erfreuten Herzens; zufrieden” § 41.10.34A6. so dāni prasannacitto āha § 41.10.34A6. sthavireṇa dāni tasya brāhmaṇasya prasannacittasya catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni prasāda~ “Mitleid; Vertrauen” § 31.5.25B4. atha dāni corā sa-prasādā bhavanti, vṛddhehi agrato gantavyaṃ, yathā paśyitvā prasādena avivarjitā gaccheṃsu § 39.10.31A7. nâsti mama tahiṃ śraddhā nâpi prasādo § 39.22.32A1. atha dāni āhaṃsuḥ “nâsti mama ta{ṃ}hiṃ śraddhā, nâsti prasādo”, ... pra-sādaya- “erfreuen” § 31.24.26A7. (nevāsikā ...) saṃpraharṣayitavyā vaktavyā “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyanti (Passiv; Hs. praśād°)” § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. ... saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyantî”ti pra-sāraya- (Skt), pra-sāre-# “ausstrecken; ausspannen”; vgl. Pā. pasāreti ⇒ sammiñjita-prasārita~ § 29.4.24B2. parvvāṇi āmilāyanti, nâpi kṣamati ubhayāni sandhī maṭamaṭāye prasārituṃ § 29.4.24B2. atha khalu eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ āmuhūrtte viśrāmiya sammiñjiya, dvitīyo pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati ... vāmaṃ bāhām anukāyaṃ prasārayitvā § 30.7.25A4. dakṣiṇāṃ bāhāṃ śirasy upanidhāya, vāmāṃ bāhāṃ anukāyaṃ prasāritvā ... § 42.18.37A3. na dāni apūrvvacarimaṃ ubhaya bāhā prasāretavyā § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti. ... bhūyo prasārayati (“ausspannen”), jānitavyaṃ “na dāhiti eṣā” tti § 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayi- tavyā ... tāṃ sammiñjiya dvitīyā sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyā. eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ sammiñjiya dvitīyo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo prasevikā~# “Beutel (für die Almosenschale)”; vgl. Skt. prasevaka ⇒ pātra-prasevikā~ § 25.15.23A2. prasevikā (Hs. °vesikā) karttavyā dupuṭā tṛpuṭā. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena ... utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ praskandikā~# “Diarrhö, Durchfall” ☞ § 18.14, Anm. 1 § 18.14.16A2. atha dāni glāno bhavati ārśavyādhikaṃ vā praskandikaṃ vā ... prastako für pustako : § 8.12.9B1 pra-sthita~ § 4.16.5B2. bhadrakaṃ (Hs. °kā) kṣaṇamuhūrttaṃ prasthitaṃ (Hs. °itā) (vs) § 46.1.40A3. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikā gocarāye prasthitā § 46.2.40A5. yūyaṃ kalyato yeva gocarāye prasthitā § 46.4.40A6. kalyato yeva gocarāye prasthito bhavati pra-sphoṭa-# “ausschütteln” ⇒ pra-sphoḍa-, pra-sphoṭaya-, pra-sphoṭe-, phoḍe-, phoṭa- § 57.1.47B1. te ... upānahā nikkhāsiya ... “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭanti pra-sphoṭaya- (Skt), pra-sphoṭe-# “ausschütteln”; vgl. Pā. papphoṭeti, pappoṭheti ⇒ pra-sphoṭa-, pra-sphoḍa-, phoḍe-, phoṭa- § 8.6.9A3. upādhyāyasya cīvarāṇi prasphoṭiya sāhariya pratisāmayitavyāni § 8.9.9A6. śayyāsanaṃ prasphoṭayitavyaṃ § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) pakṣīhi ohayiyate prasphoṭiyāna cchanne praveśayitavyaṃ § 41.6.34A3. saṃghāṭīṃ prasphoṭiya sāhariya abhyantareṇa dviguṇikāṃ kariya ... § 41.22.35A5. tato grāmapraveśikaṃ cīvaraṃ prasphoṭitvā ... § 41.22.35A6. celakhaṇḍena rajo prasphoṭitavyo § 41.24.35A7. upānahāyo prasphoṭitvā saṃpuṭīkṛtvā ... § 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā ... prasphoṭiya sudhotāṃ suprakṣālitāṃ kariya ātape śoṣayitavyā § 46.5.40B1. prasphoṭayitvā sāharitvā ekānte sthapayitavyaṃ § 47.5.40B7. patraśākhāya vā tṛṇakehi vā pādā jaṃghā <ca> prasphoṭitvā prāvaritvā 391  praveṣṭavyaṃ § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ dhūlīye pūritaṃ bhavati prasphoṭayitavyaṃ § 48.6.41B1. leṅkaṭakhaṇḍena rajoharaṇakena vā prasphoṭiya ’ka saṃkacchikāṃ prajñapiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 48.6.41B2. antamasato hastenâpi prasphoṭiya āmarjiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka ... dhūlīye vā otaritaṃ bhavati, prasphoṭayitavyaṃ § 56.1.47A2. te ... prahāṇa āgatā samānā skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti § 56.1.47A3. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭiya sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gacchanti § 56.3.47A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ okastena niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭayituṃ (≒ § 56.5.47A6) § 56.3.47A4. vihārake vā bāhyato vā niṣīdana prasphoṭiyāṇaṃ (Hs. °ṭayāṇaṃ) dviguṇaṃ kṛtvā prahāṇaṃ okasitavyaṃ § 56.4.47A5. nâpi kṣamati yathāsukhe kṛte utthiya niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 56.6.47A6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte niṣīdanakaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.3.47B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... upānahā nikkhāsiya ... “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.11.47B7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā pādāṃ dhovantena upānahāyo “caḍacaḍa” tti prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.11.48A1. nadīkūle vā puṣkiriṇīkūle vā pādāṃ dhoviya prasphoṭeti § 57.11.48A1. ta<ṃ> pi dāni na kṣamati vṛddhatarakasya vā anuvātaṃ prasphoṭayituṃ (Hs. °ṭayitavyaṃ) *pra-sphoḍa-# oder *pra-sphoḍaya- “ausschütteln”; vgl. Pkt. papphoḍai < Skt. prasphoṭayati ⇒ pra-sphoṭa-, pra-sphoṭaya-, pra-sphoṭe-, phoḍe-, phoṭa- § 43.8.38A6. ete khajjakacaṃgerīyo vanaphalacaṅgerīyo haritakīcaṅgerīyo vā prasphoḍiya suprakṣālitāṃ kariya ekamante sthapetavyāḥ prasrāva~ “Urin; das Urinieren” ⇒ praśvāsa~, praśvāsaka~, uccāra~, ucchvāsa~, uccāra- prasrāva-kheṭa-siṃghāṇaka~, uśvāsa~ § 19.11.18A3. atha khalu prasrāvaṃ kṛtvā cchatti utthitavyaṃ § 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo (Hs. vartt°), yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso gaccheyā § 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa aprayataṃ gṛhṇituṃ, uccāro vā prasrāvo vā kheṭaṃ vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā ... grahetuṃ prasrāva-karaṇa~ “das Membrum virile”# § 18.10.16A1. nâpi dāni draviḍena viya prasrāvakaraṇaṃ (Hs. praśrā°) gṛhṇitvā varccakumbhikā gantavyaṃ prasrāva-kuṭī~ (BHS) “Pissoir”; vgl. Poṣ(Hu) 289, Anm. 6 ⇒ praśvāsa-kuṭī~, varc(c)a-kuṭī~, varcca-kuṭikā~, varcca-kuṭīkā~ § 53.13.45B3. vibhavo bhavati, sarvvarātriṃ varccakuṭīyañ ca prasrāvakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo § 53.18.45B7. yaṃ kālaṃ vibhātaṃ bhavati, ākāśaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato varccakuṭīye prasrāvakuṭīye ca dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo prasrāva-kumbha~#, prasrāva-kumbhaka~# “Urinflasche” ⇒ prasrāva-kumbhikā~, varcca- kumbhikā~, praśvāsa-ghaṭa~, praśvāsa-ghaṭikā~, praśvāsa-bhaṇḍaka~ § 8.12.9B2. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, prasrāvakumbham upanāmayitavyaṃ § 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇâprasannaṃ gṛhṇituṃ kheṭakaṭāham vā uccārakaṭāhakam vā prasrāvakumbhakaṃ vā prasrāva-kumbhikā~# “Urinflasche” ⇒ prasrāva-kumbha~, prasrāva-kumbhaka~, varcca- kumbhikā~, praśvāsa-ghaṭa~, praśvāsa-ghaṭikā~, praśvāsa-bhaṇḍaka~ § 8.5.9A1. kheṭakaṭāhako nikkālayitavyo prasrāvakumbhikā nikkālayitavyā § 10.5.10A6. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ praveśayitavyaṃ, prasrāvakumbhikā praveśayitavyā § 10.5.10A6. evaṃ aparaṃ divasaṃ prasrāvakumbhikā niṣkāśayitavyā 392 *prasvedati “schwitzt”; vgl. Skt. prasvedate (“in Schweiß geraten”) § 42.19.37A4. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi pra-hara- § 41.20.35A4. na brāhmaṇasya prahareya (vs) prahāṇa~ (1) “Meditation” (BHS); vgl. Poṣ(Hu) 298~299, Anm. 3; ☞ § 19.19, Anm. 2 zur Wendung prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati ⇒ dvitīya~ prahāṇa~, paścima~ prahāṇa~, purima~ prahāṇa~, prahāṇika~ § 19.6.17B7. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako praśvāsena uppīḍito ... § 19.19.18A7. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, taṃ kālaṃ praśvāsa- ghaṭikā nikkālayitavyā § 22.4.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato ... § 19.12.18A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇa upaviṣṭako praśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 22.6.21A2. prahāṇato yaṃ kālaṃ utthito bhavati, vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, ... § 40.15.33A7. atha dāni paṭipāṭikāye dūredūraṃ prahāṇasya upaviṣṭā bhavanti, ekena vāretavyaṃ § 42.19.37A4. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi § 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti § 53.4.45A3. eṣo dāni saṃghārāmo purimaṃ paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ (☞ § 18.28, Anm. 1) pratijāgrīyati, dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā § 53.6.45A5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, ... § 53.11.45B1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāto dīpako ukkaḍhitavyo § 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, ... § 53.17.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, prahāṇaśālāyān tāva prathamaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 54.15.46B1. evaṃ tāva vāretavyaṃ yāva prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (= § 55.9.47A1) § 56.1.47A2. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭiya sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gacchanti § 56.6.47A6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte niṣīdanakaṃ ... prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.3.47B2. bhikṣuṇā pratikṛty’ eva tāva pādadhovanikāye upānahāyo pocchiya prahāṇasya jarjare <āhate> otaritavyaṃ § 57.6.47B4. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā ... nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 57.7.47B5. prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte āgamayitavyaṃ § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāṃ gacchiya caturddiśaṃ niṣīdanti (2) “Meditationsraum”# ⇒ prahāṇasya ā-mantraya- § 7.7.8B4. evaṃ svādhyāyati, araṇye vasati, prahāṇe upaviśati, so evâsya ovādo § 7.7.8B5. upādhyāyo ... na svādhyāyati, na araṇye vasati, na prahāṇe upaviśati § 22.3.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ otara{n}ti tato dvāraṃ muñcitavyaṃ § 22.5.21A2. paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ, dvāraṃ apadu{cca}ritavyaṃ cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ dvāraṃ pidhiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ prahāṇaṃ otaritavyaṃ § 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya kheṭa bādhati, upānahapuṭe kṛtvā bhūmiye marditavyaṃ § 29.1.24A6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ uṣṭ<r>aparyaṃkena prahāṇaṃ upaviśaṃti § 29.2.24A7. satyaṃ bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikā, evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahatha? § 29.2.24A7. duṣkṛtaṃ ... evaṃ ca yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha § 29.3.24A7. tena hi <na> kṣamati uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdituṃ § 29.5.24B2. na kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa prahāṇe upaveṣṭuṃ § 40.15.33A6. prahāṇe vārentena (Hs. cā°) yadi bhūmyāstaro bhavati, ... 393  § 53.1.45A2. te dāni bhikṣū andhakāre prahāṇe upaviśaṃti ukkhalantā prakkhalantā § 53.7.45A6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho prahāṇe upaviṣṭo bhavati, tato dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti § 54.1.46A1. te dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇe pracalāyaṃti § 55.1.46B2. te dāni bhikṣu{ṃ} prahāṇasmiṃ yaṣṭiṃ vārayantā śītena kilamma<ṃ>ti § 56.1.47A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa āgatā samānā skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti § 56.3.47A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ okastena niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭayituṃ (≒ § 56.5.47A6) § 57.1.47A7. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa okastāḥ samānā āsanehi upaviś- iyānaṃ upānahā nikkhāsiya ... prasphoṭanti § 56.3.47A4. atha khalu vihārake vā bāhyato vā niṣīdana prasphoṭiyāṇaṃ dviguṇaṃ kṛtvā prahāṇaṃ okasitavyaṃ § 57.3.47B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇa upaviṣṭena upānahā nikkhāsiya ... § 57.4.47B3. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, na kṣamati sopānahena pādena prahāṇaṃ upaviśituṃ § 57.6.47B4. (upānahikāyo ...) pratisandhismi tathā yeva saṃpuṭikṛtikāyo āsanasya heṣṭhe sthapitavyāyo. sthapitvā prahāṇam upaviśitavyaṃ § 58.1.48A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭāḥ ... (= § 59.1.48A6, § 61.1.49A2) § 58.3.48A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇam upaviṣṭena ... “khulu khulu” tti kāsituṃ § 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭena ... (= § 61.3.49A3) § 60.1.48B4. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇam upaviṣṭāḥ samānā ... § 60.3.48B5. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇa upaviṣṭena ... kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.4.48B6. atha ca dāni bhikṣu prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako khajjati, ... § 61.4.49A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇam upaviṣṭasya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... § 62.5.50A1. na kṣamati prahāṇam upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} ḍharaḍharāye vātakarmma karttuṃ usw. (3) ⇒ durggandha-prahāṇārthaṃ prahāṇaka~ “Meditationsraum”# ⇒ prahāṇa~ (2) § 21.4.20B2. upasthānaśālāyāṃ vā agniśālāyāṃ vā prāsāde vā prahāṇake <vā> kaṭhinaṃ prajñāpayitvā cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 22.1.20B6. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇakaṃ upaviṣṭo § 50.8.43B4. vihārasya prahāṇake dve āsanāni prajñapiya adhiṣṭhānāṃ pratigrāhāpiya āsitavyaṃ prahāṇa-śālā~ “Meditationsraum”; vgl. BHSD, S. 390a, Z. 13f.; Poṣ(Hu) 267, Anm. 1; Lüders 1940: 612, Z.1; ib. 614, Anm. 3; Bailey 1955: 24 § 1.5.1B5. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kahim bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā? (≒ § 3.6.3B4) § 1.7.1B6. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... amukahiṃ bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā § 2.5.2B5. kahiṃ bhaviṣyati upasthānaśālāyām vā prahāṇaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā ucchedanake vā niṣadyāya vā? § 21.9.20B5. prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā pradeśakaṃ gomayena upalimpiya cīvarakaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 53.6.45A6. varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo, paścāt prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo § 53.11.45B1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāto dīpako ukkaḍhitavyo § 53.12.45B2. atha dāni navakā bhikṣū prahāṇaśālāyāṃ pratikramanti, na kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ § 53.13.45B4. sopānaśīrṣe nirvvāpayitvā prahāṇaśālāyāṃ (Hs. prahāṇarolāyāṃ) dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo 394  § 53.17.45B5. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ sahasā dīpakaṃ praveśayituṃ § 53.17.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, prahāṇaśālāyān tāva prathamaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 57.4.47B2. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, na kṣamati sopānahena pādena prahāṇaṃ upaviśituṃ § 57.7.47B5. atha dāni akṛto bhūmi-astāro bhavati, sa-upānahena prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśi- tavyaṃ § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāṃ gacchiya caturddiśaṃ niṣīdanti § 62.5.50A2. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇaśālāyām upaviṣṭasya vātakarmma āgacchati, na dāni osaritvā indriyāṇi karttavyaṃ prahāṇasya ā-mantraya- “den mit der Verwaltung des Meditationsraumes beauftragten (Mönch) um Erlaubnis bitten”? ☞ § 18.28, Anm. 3 ⇒ dharmmaśravaṇasya ā-mantraya-, ā-mantraya- § 18.28.16B4. prahāṇasya āmantriyāṇa cchatti varccakuṭīyaṃ gantavyaṃ § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo kāso āgacchati, bāhirato nirddhāpiya kāsitavyaṃ. prahāṇasya vā āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 59.4.48B1. atha dāni puno puno kṣīvikā āgacchati, prahāṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 60.4.48B6. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo khajjati, khajjanako bhavati, prahāṇasyâmantriya gantavyaṃ § 61.4.49A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, nirddhāviya vijṛmbhitavyaṃ. prahāṇasya vā āmantriya gantavyaṃ § 62.7.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno vātakarmma āgacchati, prahāṇasya āmant<r>iya gantavyaṃ prahāṇika~ (BHS) “meditierend”; vgl. BHSD, s.vv. prhāṇika; SWTF III 235 prāhāṇika; Lüders 1961: 83; Damsteegt 1978: 247; Poṣ(Hu) 298~299, Anm. 3; IBInsc I 650 ⇒ prahāṇa~ § 42.19.37A3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi prahāsa~ “Gelächter” § 18.42.17A4. na dāni taruṇikā strī pṛcchitavyā, mā prahāsaṃ deyā prākaṭa~ ⇒ ati-prākaṭa~, pracchanna-prākaṭa~ prākārā für prāvārā : § 17.10.15A4 prāg eva (BHS, SWTF) “um so mehr, erst recht; zumeist”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. prāg eva (“formerly; how much more [or less], a fortiori, not to speak of”); SWTF III 226a prāk (2) ☞ § 34.6, Anm. 1 ⇒ prāgo § 34.6.28B5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “ye kṣatriyā kuśalā bhavanti, prāg eva te nairayikā bhavantî”ti prāgo# “(zu) früh”; vgl. Skt. prāk, prage, BHS. atiprāgas, Pā. ati-ppago ☞ § 39.12, Anm. 1 ⇒ prāg eva § 39.12.31B1. vaktavyaṃ “prāgo tāva adyâpi. āraṇyakâpi tāva nâgacchanti” § 39.24.32A2. dānapatir āgato bhavati, āha “bhante, āhaṇatha gaṇḍiṃ. anukālyo ’va tāva adyâpi bhavati”, vaktavyaṃ “prāgo tāva adyâpi. grāmāntikā ca bhikṣavo nâgacchanti” prāñjalī-kṛta~ (BHS[Mvu], SWTF) “die zusammengelegten Händen vorstreckend” (als Geste des Respekts); vgl. Pā. pañjalī-kata § 57.7.47B5. vṛddhānte ... praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ. abhinikuṭitakena prāñjalīkṛtena gantavyaṃ yāvat pratisandhi prāṇaka~ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... prāṇakehi khajjantaṃ pakṣihi ohayiyantaṃ § 11.5.10B5. śayyāsanaṃ ... prāṇakehi vā khajjantaṃ varṣeṇa ovarṣayantam § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) prāṇakehi khādyati, pakṣīhi ohayiyate § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ... vātātapena opūriyaṃtāṃ prāṇakehi khajjantāṃ § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ... vātātapena opūriyantā{ṃ} prāṇakehi khajjantā{ṃ} § 13.2.12A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcāṃ pīṭhāṃ ... varṣeṇa ’varṣiyantāṃ prāṇakehi khajjantāṃ (≒ § 15.2.13B7, § 16.2.14A6) § 13.3.12B1. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantā{ṃ} prāṇakehi khajjantā? 395  § 13.15.12B6. mañcā bhittito mocetvā pratipādikā dātavyāḥ, yathā prāṇakehi na khādyeyā § 14.4.13A4. mañcā bhittiyo mocetvā pratipādakā dātavyā, yathā prāṇakehi dīpikāhi vā na khajjeyā § 15.7.14A3. cīvaravaṃśo tāva pratyavekṣitavyo. anekāye prāṇakehi khāditako bhavati § 15.7.14A3. yadi tāva prāṇakehi khāyitako bhavati bhagnako vā, ... § 18.8.15B6. tāni kuṇḍakāni vā kaṭāhakāni vā nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ saprāṇakāni vā adhotakāni vā § 18.11.16A1. atha dāni varccakumbhikā saprāṇakā bhavati, na dāni <kṣamati> vaktuṃ, “āyuṣmanto, saprāṇakā varccakuṭikā.” ... yathā jñāye saprāṇakêty abhijñānaṃ § 22.7.21A3. nâpi kṣamati sā cakkalī adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggikā vā paluggikā vā prāṇakehi vā khajjanti § 24.4.22A2. nâpi kṣamati kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ, mā saprāṇako bhaveya § 41.16.34B6. mā atra pānīyasmiṃ tṛṇo vā bhave prāṇako vā ... § 41.22.35A6. mā prāṇakā jāyeṃsu nīlikāya vā bhaveṃsu § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... prāṇakehi khajjanti ... (≒ § 15.3.14A1) usw. prāṇi-koṭī-niyuta-śata-sahasra~# “hunderttausend Myriaden Koṭis von Lebewesen” § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... amṛtam analpakena devamanuṣyāṃ saṃvibhajanto, prāṇikoṭī- niyutaśatasahasrāṇi amṛtam anuprāpayanto, ... prātimokṣa~ (BHS, SWTF) § 7.5.8B3. abhivinayo nāma prātimokṣo saṃkṣiptavistaraprabhedena prātimokṣa-sūtra~ (SWTF) § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ... ko prātimokṣasūtraṃ uddiśiṣyati, ko dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśiṣyati, ko parikathāṃ kariṣyati (≒ § 2.7.2B6, § 3.8.3B6) § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ prātimokṣasūtram uddiśesi” “tvaṃ bhāṣesi” “tvaṃ parikathāṃ karesi” § 1.12.2A5. yadi tāva vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ śrotukāmā bhavanti, vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ uddiśitavyaṃ (≒ § 3.11.4A3) § 2.10.3A4. tato vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ ussārayitavyaṃ prānta~ (BHS, SWTF) “abgelegen” § 39.29.32A7. durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni prāntāni (Hs. prāptāni) viviktāni vigatajanapadāni manuṣyarahaśayyakāni pratisaṃlayanasāropyāni prāpuṇa- (BHS[Mvu, Sukh]) “jmd (Gen.) zukommen; zustehen”#; < Skt. pra-√āp; vgl. SWTF, III 231a, prāp (2); Pā. pāpuṇati ☞ § 8.13, Anm. 1; § 18.8, Anm. 1 zur Wendung navakānte vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati ⇒ prāpuṇe- § 8.13.9B2. yadi vihāro prāpuṇati, āpṛcchitavyaṃ “amukaṃ vihāraṃ gṛhṇāmi.” § 8.13.9B2. atha dāni dvitīyena saha prāpuṇati vihāraṃ, upādhyāyena jānitavyaṃ: yadi ... § 18.8.15B6. navakānte vā paṭipāṭ{ṭ}ikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, tena tāni ... § 19.19.18A7. kenâyaṃ nikkālayitavyo? navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati § 31.23.26A6. pṛcchitavyaṃ “āyuṣman, asti etāvativarṣasya vihārako prāpuṇati?” § 31.23.26A6. yadi tāva jalpati “prāpuṇati” tti, vihārako gṛhṇitavyo § 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo, navakānte paṭipaṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, eko vā dvayo vā trayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti § 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā, eko vā dvayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti, navakānto (Hs. °kāntena) vā paṭipāṭikāye vā yasya vā prāpuṇati § 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti § 53.8.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracalāyati, ... so pi acchaṭikāye upasthapetavyo, vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti § 54.2.46A2. <sā vārayitavyā> navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā punaḥ prāpuṇati § 55.2.46B4. so (= geṇḍuka~) vārayitavyo navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā puna prāpuṇati § 54.9.46A6. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava yaṣṭi prāpuṇati. vārehi (Hs. cār°)” 396  § 54.12.46A7. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya, tava yaṣṭī prāpuṇati.” § 55.5.46B6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava geṇḍuko prāpuṇati. utthehi vārehi (Hs. cār°)” tti § 55.6.46B7. vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya, tava geṇḍuko prāpuṇati.” prāpuṇe- (BHS[Mvu]) “jmd (Gen.) zukommen”#; < Skt. pra-√āp ⇒ prāpuṇa- § 19.5.17B7. (das Pissoir) tailena mrakṣayitavyā navakāntena vā uddiṣṭakena vā paṭipāṭikāye{na} vā yasya vā prāpuṇeti prāpta~ ⇒ traividya-prāpta~, dharmmatāvasthā-prāpta~, lābhāgra-yaśogra-prāpta~ prāptāni für prāntāni : § 39.29.32A7 prāmāṇika~ ⇒ pramāṇika~ prāmodya~ ⇒ prīti-prāmodya~ prā-vara- (BHS, SWTF) “sich anziehen”; < Skt. prā-√vṛ ⇒ prā-vare-, prā-vṛta~, ni-vāsaya- § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: ... kathaṃ nivāsayitavyaṃ, kathaṃ prāvaritavyaṃ (= § 9.1.9B5) § 11.11.11A2. na kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ sāṃghikaṃ prāvariyaṃ (Abs.) dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramituṃ § 11.14.11A3. atha dāni hemantakālo bhavati, sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ prāvariya śayati ... § 25.3.22B2. bhikṣuṇā tāva kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya pātracīvaram ādāya gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 31.7.25B6. tehi dāni prāvariya gaṇṭhipāśakaṃ obandhiya āmantriya praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.9.25B7. pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā (lies: prāvaritvā?) anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.26.26B1. kalyato yeva utthiya nivāsiya prāvariya hastān nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 32.7.27B3. <na kṣamati> ... nivāsantasya vā, cīvaraṃ prāvarantasya, ... § 41.22.35A6. ārāmacaraṇakaṃ prāvaritvā āsanaṃ prajñapetavyaṃ § 44.1.38B7. so dāni aparejjukāto kalyata eva nivāsiya prāvariya ... § 44.6.39A4. bhikṣū kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya ... § 45.4.39B6. cīvarāṇi prāvaritvā (Hs. pravāritvā) gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 46.3.40A6. evaṃ prāvaritavyaṃ (= § 46.7.40B2) § 46.4.40A6. prāvarantena grāmapraveśanakaṃ cīvaraṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 46.5.40A7. prāvaramāṇena vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvarakaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 46.6.40B1. bhikṣu ... anyaṃ leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ prāvaritukāmo bhavati § 47.5.40B7. cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā ... praviśitavyaṃ § 47.5.40B7. prāvaritvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 47.6.40B7. prāvaritvā gantavyaṃ § 47.6.40B7. parimaṇḍalaṃ cīvaraṃ prāvaritvā ... prāvaraṇa~ “Decke” ⇒ rātrī-prāvaraṇa~, prāvāra~ § 12.10.11B6. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ettakaṃ prāvaraṇaṃ tato likhitavyaṃ (≒ § 12.12.11B7) § 14.15.13B4. yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā upaskaro vā śraddhāprasannehi upāsakakulehi sthāpayitavyaṃ prā-vare-# “sich anziehen”; < Skt. prā-√vṛ ⇒ prā-vara- § 31.9.25B7. pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā (lies: prāvaritvā?) anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ prāvāra~ “Decke” ⇒ prāvaraṇa~ § 17.10.15A4. śeyyāsanaṃ oṇṇiyo vā kocavakā vā prāvārā (Hs. prākārā) vā bisiyo vā ... prā-vṛta~ ⇒ nagna-prāvṛta~, samanta-prāvṛta~, prā-vara- § 11.10.11A2. na kṣamati sāṃghikena śayyāsanena prāvṛtena bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>am vā upaviśituṃ § 18.26.16B3. nâpi kṣamati sāṃghikena śeyyāsanena prāvṛtena varccakuṭī praviśituṃ § 18.26.16B3. nâpi kṣamati kalpikehi cīvarehi prāvṛtehi varccakuṭīṃ praviśituṃ prāsāda~ § 3.5.3B2. vaṃśavidalikāhi vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā sūtreṇa āvuṇitvā dvārakoṣṭhake vā prāsāde vā kalpiyakuṭikāyāṃ vā bandhitavyaṃ ... dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ § 20.15.20A2. nâpi kṣamati cetiyaṃ vandantena oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ohitahastena vā 397  cetiyābhigṛhe vā prāsāde vā khādituṃ § 21.4.20B2. upasthānaśālāyāṃ vā agniśālāyāṃ vā prāsāde vā prahāṇake <vā> kaṭhinaṃ prajñāpayitvā cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 53.6.45A5. catuhi prāsādasya koṇe koṇe dīpako prajvālayitavyaḥ prāsāda-kuṭī~# “Treppenhaus”? § 53.12.45B2. atha khalu bahi prāsādakoṇehi dīpakā nirvvāpayitavyā, sopānamaggulīyaṃ prāsādakuṭīyaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo prāsāda-koṇa~# “Ecke eines Gebäudes” § 53.12.45B2. atha khalu bahi prāsādakoṇehi (Loc.) dīpakā nirvvāpayitavyā, sopāna- maggulīyaṃ prāsādakuṭīyaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo prāsādika~ (BHS, SWTF) “schön, anziehend, anmutig” § 41.4.33B7. prāsādikena abhikrāntena pratikrāntena ālokitavilokitena sammiñjita- prasāritena saṃghāṭīpātracīvaradhāraṇena priya~ ⇒ adarśanena priyaṃ √kṛ, dhana-dhānya-priya~ § 4.20.6A3. pañcadhā manasi priyaṃ (Nom. sg. neut.; Hs. prīyan) (vs) priya-vādin~ § 41.12.34B2. so dāni mātāpitṇāṃ pūrvvotthāyī paścānnipātī priyavādī manaāpavādī kiṃkarapariśrāvako prīti~ § 4.20.6A3. prītiṃ janehi suvihitā tathā hi dinnaṃ imaṃ dānan (vs) prīti-prāmodya~ (SWTF) “Freude und Wohlgefühl” § 11.1.10B3. te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā atīva udārāṇi prītiprāmodyāni pratilabhiṣyanti (≒ § 12.1.11A6) prīyan für priyaṃ (Nom. sg. neut.) : § 4.20.5B7 √pruṣ ⇒ u-sphoṣe- prekṣin~ ⇒ otāra-prekṣin~ preta~ § 30.3.25A1. omuddhakā bhikṣavo pretā śeyyāṃ kalpayanti preta-karaṇīya~# “Totenfeier”; vgl. Skt. preta-karman § 4.9.5A1. atha dāni pretakaraṇīye anuvāmaṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati, tathā yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ preṣaya- (Kausativ von pra-√iṣ) § 4.6.4B3. prakṛty’ eva māsavāriko pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo “gaccha jānāhi kiṃ sajjiyatî”ti § 5.6.6B3. dvitīyasthavireṇa aparejjukāye ’va māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo § 6.6.7B3. yo pratibalas tena prakṛty’ eva māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo PH ph / p ⇒ p / ph pharapharasya wohl für °pharāya : § 62.9.50A5 pharapharāya# Onomatopoeticum für den Laut der Blähung ☞ § 62.2, Anm. 7 ⇒ ḍharaḍhara, ḍharaḍharāye § 62.9.50A5. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇe vā sāmāyikāyām vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} pharapharāya (Hs. °pharasya) vātakarmma karttuṃ § 62.10.50A6. nâpi kṣamati antaragharaṃ niṣaṇṇena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ § 62.11.50A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā vṛddhatarakasya vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ phala~ ⇒ puṇya-pāpa-phalopaga~, madana-phala~, srotāpatti-phala~ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... kṣudrapākāni vā phalāni praticchituṃ § 48.8.41B4. labhyā dāni cīvarāntarikāya khakkhaṭāni phalāni gṛhṇituṃ § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi niveśayamāno, phalabhāgiyān 398  satvāṃ phalehi (Loc. pl.) pratiṣṭhāpayamāno § 62.2.49B5. tato śvetamayena yeva khādanti, bilvāni khādanti, vātakopanāni phalāni khādanti, kalāyā satilapallavaṃ khādanti § 62.4.50A1. nâpi kṣamati bilvāni vā madanaphalāni vātakopakāni phalāni khādituṃ kalāyaṃ {vā} satilapallavaṃ vā § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu<ṃ> mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ phalaka~ (1) “Brett” § 12.10.11B6. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ettakaṃ prāvaraṇaṃ tato likhitavyaṃ bhurjake phalake vā paṭṭikāyām vā § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) tatra kāṣṭhehi vā phalakehi vā ohāṭayitavyā § 18.5.15B4. kaṇṭhavāriṇī karttavyā ... vaṃśehi vā nalena vā naṃgalehi vā phalakair vvā § 23.7.21B5. phalakacchadano bhavati, phalakaṃ dātavyaṃ phalaka~ (2) “Spalte, Spaltung”#; vgl. Skt. √phal (“bersten, zerplatzen”), Pā. phālaka (“Spaltung”) ☞ § 25.16, Anm. 1 § 25.16.23A3. nâpi kṣamati pātraṃ adhyupekṣituṃ phalakena vā khajjantaṃ khaṇḍaṃ vā cchidram vā phalaka-cchadana~# “Decke bzw. Dach aus Brettern” ⇒ apakka-cchadana~, apakva-cch°, kabhalla-cch°, tṛṇa-cch°, mṛttikā-cch°, sudhā-cch° § 23.7.21B5. phalakacchadano bhavati, phalakaṃ dātavyaṃ phala-bhāgiya~# “zur Erreichung der (vier) Früchte (d.h. der vier Stufen der auf dem Wege zum Erlösung) vorbestimmt” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ -bhāgiya~, -bhāgīya~, puṇya-bhāgiya~, vāsanā-bhāgīya~ § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi niveśayamāno, phalabhāgiyān satvāṃ phalehi pratiṣṭhāpayamāno ... phāṭita~# “zerfetzt, zerrissen”; < Skt. sphāṭita; vgl. Pkt. phāḍia § 44.1.38B7. (cīvaraṃ ... ) “caṭa” tti sarvvaṃ (Hs. saṃca) phāṭitaṃ § 44.2.39A1. cīvarakaṃ ... “caṭa” tti sarvvaṃ phāṭitaṃ phāsu (BHS, SWTF, Pā), phāsuṃ# “angenehm, wohl” ☞ § 31.7, Anm. 1 ⇒ phāsukaṃ, a-phāsu, a- phāsuṃ § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ ... śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ dīpayamānānāṃ sukhañ ca phāsuñ ca viharantānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? § 42.1.36A2. vātapittaśleṣmakānāṃ phāsu (Hs. payasu) bhaviṣyati § 42.3.36A5. utpātagaṇḍapiṭakānāṃ vātapittaśleṣmikānāṃ phāsu bhaviṣyati § 49.1.42A1. na me tvayā sārddhaṃ phāsu bhavati kathāya vā niṣadyāya vā. ekasyaỿva mama phāsu bhavati phāsukaṃ (Pā) “angenehm”; vgl. Pkt. phāsuya, Jaina-Skt. prāsuka; Caillat 1960: 41 = 2011: 25f.; ead. 1961 = 2011: 49f. ⇒ phāsu, phāsuṃ, a-phāsu, a-phāsuṃ § 34.6.28B6. tavâhaṃ hitopasaṃhāreṇa rakṣāvaraṇaguptiye sukhaṃ ca phāsukañ (Hs. payasukhañ; ☞ § 34.6[Text], Anm. 3) ca viharāmi phāsu-vihāra~ (Pā) “das Wohlbefinden”; vgl. BHS. sparśa-vihāra ☞ § 31.7, Anm. 1 § 31.7.25B5. saṃghasya phāsuvihāraṃ upadahatha pādatailena guḍapānīyena pratiśrayeṇa purebhaktikena phiccaka~# “Gesäßhälfte”; < Skt. sphic, sphij (“Hüfte, Hinterbacke”) + Suffix ka ☞ § 62.6, Anm. 2 § 62.6.50A2. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati saṃprajāna ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipiyāṇaṃ hastena vivaritvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.6.50A2. taṃ pi dāni na kṣamati yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakam (Hs. picca°) utkṣipituṃ § 62.6.50A3. atha khalu yena navakatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipitavyaṃ § 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ § 62.6.50A3. nâyaṃ kṣamati saṃghanavakena yena saṃghasthaviro tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipituṃ § 62.8.50A4. atha khalu ekaṃ phiccakaṃ (Hs. picca°) utkṣipiya vātakarmma karttavyaṃ 399  § 62.9.50A5. atha khalu ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipitvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.10.50A6. atha khalu ekaṃ phiccakaṃ ukṣipitvā saṃprajānan vātakarmma karttavyaṃ phuṭṭa- “bersten, platzen” < Skt. √sphuṭ; vgl. CDIAL 13845. *sphuṭyati > Pkt. phuṭṭaï (“bersten” usw.) ☞ § 18.8, Anm. 2 § 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... atha tāni kāṣṭhamayāni bhavanti, na kṣamati ātape śoṣayituṃ, mā phuṭṭiṃsu tti § 19.25.18B3. tumbakaṃ bhavati, kalyato yeva ujjhitvā cchanne sthavitavyaṃ, mā phuṭṭeṃsu phuṭṭa~ ⇒ khaṇḍa-phuṭṭa~ phulla~ ⇒ sumanā-phulla~ phoṭa- “schütteln”; < Skt. sphoṭati (“aufspringen”), Skt. sphoṭayati (“schütteln”) ⇒ phoḍe-, pra- sphoṭa-, pra-sphoṭaya-, pra-sphoṭe-, pra-sphoḍa- § 61.4.49A4. na dāni aṃgāni “ṭaṭṭa ṭaṭṭa” tti phoṭantena mukhaṃ vivaritvā jambhayi- tavyaṃ phoḍe-# “schütteln”; < *phoṭeti < Skt. sphoṭayati; vgl. Pā. apphoṭeti (< ā-sphoṭayati); Pkt. phoḍei ☞ § 61.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ phoṭa-, pra-sphoṭa-, pra-sphoṭaya-, pra-sphoṭe-, pra-sphoḍa- § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti, aṅgāni bhañjayanti maṭamaṭāya phoḍenti amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ B b/p ⇒ p/b b / v : In unserer Handschrift sind die Akṣaras b und v identisch ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 1 baṃghorikā~ ⇒ vaṃghorikā~ badara~ “Zizyphus jujuba” § 48.8.41B4. labhyā ... khakkhaṭāni phalāni gṛhṇituṃ badarāṇi vā kolakāni vā āmalakāni ... *baddha-muṣṭika~ “die geballte Faust”; vgl. Skt. baddha-muṣṭi § 62.2.49B6. ānantarikānāṃ baddhamuṣṭikāṃ (Hs. paddam°) jighrāpenti, āha “jighrâyuṣman, aho mṛṣṭo gandho. aho śobhano gandho.” √bandh ⇒ anu-baddha~, ā-√bandh, o-bandha- § 3.5.3B2. vaṃśavidalikāhi vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā sūtreṇa āvuṇitvā dvārakoṣṭhake vā prāsāde vā kalpiyakuṭikāyāṃ vā bandhitavyaṃ ... dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ § 14.8.13A7. yadi tāva vihāro uppīḍanako bhavati, na kṣamati lenāni bandhituṃ (“schließen”). atha khalu muktakā karttavyā § 21.6.20B4. bhittīye dve kīlakā nikhaniya rajjue bandhiya tahiṃ ukkacayitavyaṃ § 21.8.20B5. kaṭhinaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ bandhitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyaṃ § 22.2.21A1. vihārasya dvārasmiṃ upari trayo kīlakāni ākoṭayitavyā, tahiṃ cakkalī bandhitavyā § 22.2.21A1. (cakkalī ...) osāriyāṇaṃ heṣṭhe dve kīlakān āpīḍiyāṇa tahiṃ bandhitavyaṃ . § 22.3.21A1. nidhāpiyāṇa cakkalī osāriyāṇaṃ kīlakehi bandhiyāṇa tato otaritavyaṃ § 22.4.21A2. (vihāraṃ ...) praviśiyāṇaṃ cakkalī osārayitavyā, dvāraṃ bandhitavyaṃ § 22.6.21A3. yadi <tā>va prabhātaṃ bhavati, cakkalī utkṣipiyāṇaṃ upari bandhitavyā § 22.7.21A3. (cakkalī ...) kālena kālaṃ bandhitavyā, kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyā § 23.4.1.21A7. atha dāni pratipādako na bhavati, leṅkaṭakehi pādā bandhitavyā § 23.4.1.21A7. āsandakaṃ tṛpādakaṃ vā praveśeti, tasyâpi leṅkaṭakehi pādakā bandhi- tavyā § 31.1.25A7. te ... dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjantā āsanti (≒ § 31.1.25B1) § 31.2.25B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati nevāsikehi vihārasya dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ vihārasya paścādvastukasya kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjamānehi āsituṃ § 31.19.26A3. nâpi dāni nevāsikehi dvāraṃ bandhitvā kākavāhāṃ bhaṃjantehi āsitavyaṃ § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, na kṣamati tehi nivāsikehi 400  dvāraṃ ca bandhiya vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhāṃ bhañjantehi āsituṃ § 31.34.27A1. āyuṣmaṃ, dvāraṃ bandhiya dvārakoṣṭhakasya upari āsāhi § 40.5.32B6. (Ein Wassergefäß) na dāni kukkuṭapāśakena bandhitvā sthāpetavyaṃ § 40.5.32B6. acchehi vā celapaṭṭehi vā bandhitavyāyo § 40.14.33A6. jentāke vārentena oṣṭhā pānīyadhārikāye (?; Hs. pānīyacārikāye) patraṃ (Hs. pātraṃ) bandhitavyaṃ § 42.19.37A4. na dāni kṣamati ... udakabhramaṃ bandhitvā dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi § 44.4.39A2. cīvarakāni ... tato paṭṭikāye vā loḍhakena vā rejjukāye vā bandhitavyāni § 45.4.39B6. kāyabandhanaṃ bandhayitvā cīvarāṇi prāvaritvā gocaraṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena ... ubhayehiṃ antehi lohakena bandhitavyā § 54.13.46B1. yadi koci pracālayati tasya dātavyā. te<na> pi dāni tahiṃ na āghāto bandhitavyo bandhana~ ⇒ kāya-bandhana~, vadha-bandhanāgāraśālā~ bandhima~ ⇒ ghaṭikā-bandhima~, sūcikā-bandhima~; zum -ima Suffix, vgl. § 18.7, Anm. 4 bala-cakra~ “das Rad der Macht” ☞ § 34.6, Anm. 2 § 34.6.28B6. duve cakrāṇi dharmmacakraṃ balacakraṃ ca balīvanda~# “Ochse”; vgl. Skt. balvarda, balivanda (Kāṭhaka), Pā. balivadda, Pkt. balvadda § 54.11.46A6. atha dāni bahu pracālayanti, na dāni te sarvve balīvandā viya utthapetavyā balbaja~ “Balbaja-Gras (Eleusine indica)” § 12.6.11B3. muṃjā karttitavyā, balbajā karttitavyā mañcā vuṇitavyā (≒ § 12.18.12A5, § 13.13.12B5, § 15.8.14A4, § 16.9.14B3) § 17.11.15A5. sarvvehi muñjā vā balbajā vā karttitavyā, mañcā vā vātavyā pīṭhā vātavyā baṣṭa~ “Tor, Dummkopf”; vgl. KEWA II 422, baṣṭaḥ ☞ § 31.24, Anm. 2 § 31.24.26A7. he he śiṣṭā baṣṭā. yūyaṃ jātā, <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti baha- ⇒ vy-ā-baha- bahalaka~# “glühend, stark (vom Feuer)”; vgl. Skt. bahala~ (“dick; intensiv”) § 42.17.37A2. yadi tāva agni bahalako bhavati, navakehi agrato sthātavyaṃ agni prati- bāhentehi bahi (Pā, Pkt) “draußen”; vgl. Skt. bahis § 53.12.45B2. atha khalu bahi prāsādakoṇehi dīpakā nirvvāpayitavyā, sopānamaggulīyaṃ prāsādakuṭīyaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo bahu~ § 4.12.5A5. vaktavyaṃ “mama thokaṃ dehi heṣṭhā bahuṃ” § 12.14.12A1. atha dāni bahuṃ bhavati, tato dvitīyakālikā uddiśitavyā § 12.16.12A3. atha dāni ekavastukaṃ bhavati, bhikṣū ca bahu bhavaṃti, ... § 17.7.15A2. atha dāni bahuṃ lippitavyaṃ bhavati, bhikṣū ca śāṭhyena karenti, ... § 42.28.37B5. atha dāni bahuṃ bhavati, ... § 54.11.46A6. atha dāni bahu pracālayanti, na dāni te sarvve balīvandā viya utthapetavyā bahuṃ für lahuṃ : § 5.8.6B6 bahu-kara~ (BHS, SWTF) “viel bewirkend, sehr hilfreich” § 36.6.29B6. bahukarā bhikṣavo brāhmaṇagṛhapatayo, yaṃ vo pratyupasthitā cīvara- piṇḍapātaśeyyāsanaglānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārehi § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. bahukarā yūyaṃ bhāraṃ vahatha. dharmmadeśanāṃ karetha. ...” ti § 54.13.46B1. atha khalu cintetavyaṃ “bahukaro eṣo asmākaṃ vinīvaraṇaṃ karoti.” bahu-karaṇīya~ “viel zu tun habend, viel beschäftigt” § 39.17.31B5. nâpi dāni āraṇyakehi grāmāntikā kutsetavyā “bahukṛtyā bahukaraṇīyā jihvāgre<na> yūyaṃ rasāgrāṇi paryeṣatha” bahu-kṛtya~ (BHS, SWTF) “viel zu tun habend, viel beschäftigt”; vgl. Pā. bahukicca § 39.17.31B5. nâpi dāni āraṇyakehi grāmāntikā kutsetavyā “bahukṛtyā bahukaraṇīyā jihvāgre<na> yūyaṃ rasāgrāṇi paryeṣatha” 401 bahu-śruta~ § 37.5.30A4. (tīrthikāḥ ...) sarvvāśrāmiṇânopavāde kadāci traividyaprāptāḥ bahuśrutā √bādh ⇒ ud-baha- bzw. ud-vaha-, prati-bāha-, prati-bāhe-, vy-ā-bha-, vy-ā-vha- § 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya kheṭa bādhati, upānahapuṭe kṛtvā bhūmiye marditavyaṃ bāla~ § 31.5.25B4. atha dāni vyāḍabhayaṃ vā corabhayaṃ vā bhavati, vṛddhaṃ bālaṃ madhye kṛtvā gantavyaṃ bālakin~ (f. °inī~) (Pā) “mit Toren/Jungen, Unreifen versehen”; vgl. PTSD, s.v. bālakin (“having fools, consisting of fools”); wohl < bālaka (“Junge; Narr, Tor”) + -in (fem. inī) Suffix ☞ § 20.4, Anm. 2 § 20.4.19A7. bhagavān mahatīye bālakinīye (Hs. bālāk°) bhikṣuparṣāye dharmman deśayati bālākinīye für bālakinīye: § 20.4.19A7 √bāh ⇒ prati-bāha-, prati-bāhe- bāhā~ (BHS[Mvu], Pā, AMg) “der Arm”; vgl. Skt. bāhu ⇒ ubhaya-bāhā~ § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati ... dakṣiṇāṃ bāhaṃ (Acc. sg.) śirasy upanidhāya, vāmaṃ bāhām anukāyaṃ prasārayitvā § 30.7.25A4. dakṣiṇāṃ bāhāṃ śirasy upanidhāya, vāmāṃ bāhāṃ anukāyaṃ prasāritvā ... § 42.15.36B7. bāhā bhrāmayantena praviśituṃ § 42.18.37A3. na dāni apūrvvacarimaṃ ubhayabāhā (od. ubhaya<ṃ> bāhā?) prasāretavyā § 57.6.47B4. upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā nikuṭitakena vāmā bāhāṃ osāriya saṃprajānaṃ nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayi- tavyā ... bāhira~ ⇒ bāhirato, bāhire bāhiraka~ (BHS[Mvu, SP], Pā) (1) “außen befindlich”# ⇒ bāhiraka~ bhakta~ § 21.5.20B3. atha dāni niṣaṇṇo bāhirakāṃ pādāṃ kṛtvā sūtraṃ valento āsati, anāpattiḥ (2) “materiell”#; vgl. Pā. bāhira; BHSD, s.v. bāhira § 41.1.33B4. udake pi khalu mātrā uktā bhagavatā tathaỿva sarvvehi bāhirakehi jīvitapariṣkārehi bāhiraka~ bhakta~ # “Speise, die von draußen (ins Kloster) gebracht wird; das Essen draußen” Dieser Ausdruck bedeutet, daß Laien die Mönche mit Essen versorgen, indem sie entweder zum Kloster kommen oder vielleicht auch an ihrem Wohnort bleiben und die Gemeinde zum Essen einladen ☞ § 4.1, Anm. 1 § 4.1.4A5. saṃghasya dāni bāhirakaṃ bhaktaṃ (= § 4.3.4B1, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4; ≒ § 5.3.6A6, § 6.3.7A6) § 31.27.26B1. atha dāni tahiṃ vihārake anugraho bhavati, bāhirakaṃ (Hs. vihārakaṃ) vā bhakta<ṃ> bhavati, ... § 31.30.26B4. atha aparejjukāto yadi tāva bāhirakaṃ bhaktaṃ bhavati, anugraho vā bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, mā piṇḍāye praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha.” bāhira-ghaṭita~# “von außen verriegelt” ☞ § 42.31, Anm. 8 ⇒ bāhira-ghaṭṭima~, bāhira- vitaṇḍita~ § 42.31.38A1. jentākaṃ bāhiraghaṭitaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ bāhira-ghaṭṭima~# “von außen verriegelt” ☞ § 14.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ bāhira-ghaṭita~, bāhira- vitaṇḍita~, abhyantara-ghaṭṭima~ § 14.1.13A1. te dāni āraṇyakā vihāraṃ bāhira{ṃ}ghaṭṭimaṃ (Hs. °ṭṭiyaṃ) kariyāṇa grāmantikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ okastāḥ § 14.9.13A7. atha dāni uppaṃsulakā vihārakā bāhiraghaṭṭimā karttavyāḥ § 14.17.13B5. atha dāni uppansulako vihāro bhavati, lenāni bāhiraghaṭṭimāni karttavyāni § 42.31.38A1. jentākaṃ bāhiraghaṭitaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ bāhirato (Pā) “draußen”; vgl. Vism. 254.27. bāhirato ⇒ bāhire § 42.7.36B2. vātapānīyā vīthī karttavyā abhyantare viśālā bāhirato saṃkṣiptā § 42.10.36B4. bāhirato cīvarakuṭī karttavyā, nāgadantakavīthī karttavyā 402  § 42.16.37A1. na dāni bāhirato vikrośitavyaṃ § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo kāso āgacchati, bāhirato nirddhāpiya kāsitavyaṃ bāhira-vitaṇḍita~# “von außen verriegelt” (?) ☞ § 42.3, Anm. 2 ⇒ bāhira-ghaṭita~, bāhira- ghaṭṭima~ § 42.3.36A4. tehi ... dvāraṃ āghaṭṭiya bāhiravitaṇḍitaṃ kṛtaṃ § 42.3.36A4. te dāni dvāraṃ āgacchanti yāva bāhiravitaṇḍitaṃ kṛtaṃ bāhire (BHS[Mvu, SP], Pā) “draußen” ⇒ bāhirato § 18.7.15B5. yadi tāva sā khānimā varccakuṭī bhavati, tato varccakumbhikā bāhire-d-eva (Hs. bāhirodivā) karttavyā, yathā taṃ udakaṃ anyena gacchati bāhirodivā für bāhire-d-eva ? : § 18.7.15B5 bāhulika~ (BHS, SWTF) “(hinsichtlich des Lebenwandels) üppig, schwelgerisch, verschwenderisch” ☞ § 8.11, Anm. 1 § 8.11.9A7. yadi so bhavati śaithiliko vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako vā aśikṣākāmo ... § 8.13.9B3. yadi so bhavati śaithiliko vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako vâśikṣākāmo, ... § 18.37.17A2. atha dāni navatarako śaithiliko bāhuliko bhavati, ... § 18.52.17B2. atha dāni so bhavati śaithiliko vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako vā aśikṣākāmo, ... § 20.19.20A5. atha dāni navako śaithiliko bāhuliko bhavati, vṛddhatareṇa uddhṛtavyo § 24.12.22A7. atha dāni navakataro śaithiliko bāhuliko vā bhavati, vṛddhatarakena mardi- tavyaṃ bāhu-śirā~# “Ader im Arm”; ∈ Skt. bāhu + sirā ⇒ aṅgulya-śirā~, śirā~ § 49.7.42B3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāṃ vindhāpayitukāmo bhavati bāhuśirāṃ vâṅgulya- śirāṃ vā nilāṭiṃ vā bāhyato “draußen” ⇒ bāhyena, bāhyena bāhyaṃ § 1.11.2A4. vaktavyaṃ “gacchatha tāva bāhyato (“nach draußen”) āmuhūrttaṃ āgametha ...” § 3.10.4A2. vaktavyaṃ “bāhyato tāva yūyaṃ muhūrttam āgametha. ...” § 2.9.3A2. muhūrttan tāva bāhyato āgametha § 42.3.36A5. te dāni uṣṇena ca santāpitāḥ bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārgganti, na labhanti § 42.4.36A7. nirddhāvitā bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārggayanti § 56.3.47A4. vihārake vā bāhyato vā niṣīdana prasphoṭiyāṇaṃ dviguṇaṃ kṛtvā prahāṇaṃ okasitavyaṃ bāhyena “draußen” ⇒ bāhyena bāhyaṃ, bāhyatas § 14.9.13A7. rajjū vā kaḍevariyā vā abhyantare kṣipitavyā, bāhyena vā acchitavyā § 19.4.17B6. tathā samantena setuḥ karttavyo, yathā pa<ti>tako yeva praśvāsako bāhyena nirggacchati § 19.16.18A5. mā aprakṛtikā (wohl für °iko) ghaṭasya {vā} bāhyena praśvāsaṃ cchoreyā ti § 21.5.20B3. atha khalu bāhyena kaṭhinasmi pādāni thapiyāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ sīvayitavyaṃ § 55.2.46B3. (geṇḍuka~ ...) bāhyena paṭṭena nattakena veṣṭayitvā sūtrakena veṣṭayitavyo bāhyena bāhyaṃ # “immer noch draußen” § 52.1.44B1. te pi dāni bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramanti § 52.1.44B1. ime pi bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramanti § 52.3.44B2. eṣo dāni bhikṣu niśrayakaraṇīyo bhavati, nâpi dāni kṣamati piṇḍāya cariyāṇaṃ bāhyena bāhyaṃ pratikramituṃ bibohanaṃ für biṃbo° : § 15.5.14A2, § 31.23.26A6 biṃbohana~ (Pā), bimbohanaka~# (bimba-upa°) “Schlummerrolle; Kissen”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. bimbopadhāna (“pillow, cushion”), SWTF III 256a, dass. ☞ § 17.10, Anm. 4 § 15.5.14A2. mañcaṃ pīṭhaṃ pi caturasrakaṃ kurccaṃ bi<ṃ>bohanaṃ uddiṣṭaṃ bhavati § 17.10.15A4. śeyyāsanaṃ .... bisiyo vā caturasrako vā bimbohanakā vā cilimilikā vā § 31.23.26A6. mañcapīṭhaṃ bisi caturasrako kuccaṃ bi<ṃ>bohanaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 31.29.26B4. mañcapīṭhaṃ bisī catu<ra>śrakaṃ kuccakaṃ bimbohanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā amilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati, tato apāśrayitavyaṃ bilva~ “Bilva-Frucht (Aegle Marmelos)” ☞ § 62.4, Anm. 2 § 25.4.22B3. nâpi kṣamati bilvasya vā pakvasya kapitthasya pakvasya nālikerasya heṣṭhe 403  nirmmādayituṃ, mā pakvena vā bilvena pakvena vā ... bhaṃjeya tti § 62.2.49B5. tato śvetamayena yeva khādanti, bilvāni khādanti, vātakopanāni phalāni khādanti, kalāyā satilapallavaṃ khādanti § 62.4.50A1. nâpi kṣamati bilvāni vā madanaphalāni vātakopakāni phalāni khādituṃ kalāyaṃ {vā} satilapallavaṃ vā biśio für bisio: § 14.14.13B3 bis~ (Pkt) “Polster”; vgl. Skt. bṛsī, Pā. bhisi, Pkt. bisī, bhisī ☞ § 14.14, Anm. 3 ⇒ cīvara-bis~ § 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo vā bisio (Nom. pl. fem.; Hs. biśio) vā caturasrakā vā omayilomayilā bhavanti pāṭitavipāṭitā, ... § 14.16.13B5. pīṭhasyôpari yaṃ tatra jarjarabisi vā jarjaracaturaśrako vā taṃ sthāpayi- tavyaṃ § 17.10.15A4. śeyyāsanaṃ oṇṇiyo vā kocavakā vā prāvārā vā bisiyo vā caturasrako vā ... § 17.11.15A5. bisī sīvayitavyā, caturasrā vāpayitavyā § 31.23.26A6. mañcapīṭhaṃ bisi caturasrako kuccaṃ bi<ṃ>bohanaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 31.29.26B4. mañcapīṭhaṃ bisī catu<ra>śrakaṃ kuccakaṃ bimbohanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ buddha~ § 4.15.5B1. buddhaṃ Vipaśyiñ ca Śikhi<ṃ> ca Viśvabhuṃ (vs) (≒ § 6.13.8A4) § 4.15.5B1. etehi buddhehi maharddhikehi (Loc. pl. masc.) ye devatā santi abhiprasannā (vs) (= § 6.13.8A4) § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... buddho buddhavihārehi jino jinavihārehi jānako jānakavihārehi sarvvajño sarvvajñavihārehi ... § 62.1.49B4. cetovaśiparamapāramiprāptā punar bbuddhā bhagavanto yehi yehi vihārehi ākāṃkṣanti, tehi tehi vihārehi viharanti buddha-prajñapta~# “vom Buddha angeordnet” ⇒ pra-jñapaya-, prajñaptaka~ § 19.42.19A4. imaṃ khalu buddhaprajñaptaṃ bhaiṣajyaṃ. piba yadi jīvitukāmo ’si buddha-vacana~ (SWTF, Pā) “Buddhawort” § 8.7.9A5. asukesmi kule buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ, tato labdhaṃ § 52.6.44B6. asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno Buddhavicīrṇṇā~ (BHS) Name eines Lotusteiches in Benares § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Vārāṇasyāṃ Buddhavicīrṇṇā nāma puṣkiriṇī buddha-vihāra~# “eines Buddhas Verweilungszustand” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ jānaka-vihāra~, jina- vihāra~, sarvvajña-vihāra~ § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... buddho buddhavihārehi jino jinavihārehi jānako jānakavihārehi sarvvajño sarvvajñavihārehi ... √budh “wachen” § 54.9.46A5. yadi na budhyati, acchaṭikā karttavyā buṣa~ “Spreu, Hülsen, Getreideabfall”; vgl. Skt. busa, buśa (Lex.), bṣa (Lex.); Pkt. busa; Pā. bhusa ☞ § 53.15, Anm. 3 ⇒ buṣikā~ § 53.15.45B5. (die Lampe) nirvvāpito bhavati, agni gopayitavyo tuṣehi vā karṣehi vā buṣena vā buṣikāya vā buṣikā~# “Spreu, Hülsen, Getreideabfall”; vgl. Pkt. busiā; Pā. bhusikā ☞ § 53.15, Anm. 3 ⇒ buṣa~ § 53.15.45B5. (die Lampe) nirvvāpito bhavati, agni gopayitavyo tuṣehi vā karṣehi vā buṣena vā buṣikāya vā bodhisatvā für sudhovitvā (eine Metathese) : § 43.16.38B5 brahma-carya~ § 36.6.29B6. te hi yūyaṃ niśrāya tathāgate brahmacaryaṃ caratha (Hs. °thā) mahato oghasya niḥsaraṇārthaṃ brahma-cārin~ § 4.18.5B7. śīlavā tatra bhojeyā saṃyatāṃ brahmacāriṇo (vs) brāhma~ § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... svayaṃbhū divyehi vihārehi <viharanto> brāhmehi vihārehi āryehi vihārehi āniṃjyehi vihārehi sātatyehi vihārehi ... 404 brāhmaṇa~ § 35.6.29A6. brāhmaṇa (Nom. pl.) nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo śreṣṭho varṇṇo § 41.5.34A1. sthaviro dāni apareṇa brāhmaṇena dṛṣṭo. tasya brāhmaṇasya bhavati “ime itikitikāyaputrāḥ śramaṇakāḥ ...” § 41.10.34A5. so dāni brāhmaṇo tasya ācāragocaraṃ paśyiya tuṣṭo § 41.10.34A6. yo pi so brāhmaṇānāṃ uṣṇodakakarako, so pi na evaṃ śucī § 41.10.34A6. sthavireṇa dāni tasya brāhmaṇasya prasannacittasya catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni § 41.10.34A7. tena dāni brāhmaṇena tatraỿva sthāne sthitena srotāpattiphalaṃ sākṣāt kṛtaṃ § 41.11.34A7. katham ayaṃ brāhmaṇa sthavirasyâcāragocareṇa tuṣṭo? § 41.20.35A4. na brāhmaṇasya prahareya nâsya muṃceya brāhmaṇo dhig brāhmaṇasya hantāraṃ taṃ pi dhik yo ’sya muñcati (vs) § 41.21.35A5. anyo so corasenāpati eṣo brāhmaṇo brāhmaṇa-kula~ “Brahmanenfamilie” § 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi (Loc. pl.) tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6) brāhmaṇa-gṛhapati~ “Brahmane und Hausherr” § 36.6.29B6. bahukarā bhikṣavo brāhmaṇagṛhapatayo, yaṃ vo pratyupasthitā cīvara- piṇḍapātaśeyyāsanaglānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārehi brāhmaṇa-parṣā~# “Versammlung von Brahmanen”; vgl. SWTF. brāhmaṇa-pariṣad, Pā. brāhmaṇa- parisā; BHS. parṣā ⇒ ārya-parṣā~, kṣatriya-parṣā~, gṛhapati-parṣā~, tīrthika-parṣā~, bhikṣu-parṣā~ § 35.1.28B7. brāhmaṇaparṣā (Hs. °paryā) dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāmo” ti § 35.2.29A1. brāhmaṇaparṣā sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 35.3.29A2. evaṃ brāhmaṇaparṣā upasaṃkramitavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B5) § 35.3.29A3. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya kiṃci brāhmaṇaparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, nâyaṃ kṣamati gatāgatasya brāhmaṇaparṣām upasaṃkramituṃ § 35.3.29A3. “dīrghāyu, asti me kiñcid brāhmaṇaparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ allīyāma” tti § 35.4.29A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cchatreṇa vā dhāryantena upānahāhi <vā> ābaddhāhi brāhmaṇaparṣā āllīyituṃ § 35.4.29A4. cchatropānahāṃ ekamante sthapiya brāhmaṇaparṣāyām upasaṃkrami- tavyaṃ § 35.8.29A6. evaṃ brāhmaṇaparṣāye pratipadyitavyaṃ brāhmaṇa-mahattaraka~# “älterer Brahmane; der würdigste Brahmane” ⇒ gṛhapati-mahattaraka~ § 35.3.29A3. ye tahiṃ brāhmaṇamahattarakā bhavanti, te pratikṛty’ eva upasaṃkrami- tavyā BH bh / t ⇒ t / bh bh / d ⇒ d / bh bh / bhr : § 42.8.36B2. bhaṣṭikā für bhraṣṭikā bh / m : § 43.16.38B5. maṇḍakaṃ vermutlich für bhaṇḍakaṃ bhakta~ ⇒ eka-bhakta-tarppaṇa~, cchinna-bhakta~, paścād-bhaktam, pure-bhaktam, pure-bhakte, puro-bhaktam, pūrvvaṃ-bhaktam, bāhiraka~ bhakta~ ☞ § 8.5, Anm. 11 § 4.1.4A5. saṃghasya dāni bāhirakaṃ bhaktaṃ (= § 4.3.4B1, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4; ≒ § 5.3. 6A6) § 4.5.4B2. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: kasyâdya bhaktaṃ ubhayato sāṃghikaṃ sarvva- sāṃghikaṃ pariveṇikaṃ pāṭiya<kaṃ> bhaktaṃ grāme vihāre § 4.5.4B2. eṣo dāni koci saṃghaṃ bhaktena śuvetanāya nimantreti, ... § 4.7.4B5. bhaktāni bhavanti, bhaktāni uddiśitavyāni. bhaktāni na bhavanti, raṇaraṇā 405  gaṇḍi āhaṇiya vaktavyaṃ ... (≒ § 5.7.6B4) § 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ kimālambanaṃ <etaṃ> bhaktaṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā vevāhikam vā gṛhapraveśakam vā ... (≒ § 5.12.7A3, § 6.12.8A3) § 4.19.6A1. atha dāni gamikasya (Hs. °ikaṃ) bhaktaṃ bhavati, nâyaṃ dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā § 6.5.7B1. eṣo dāni koci saṃghaṃ bhakt<en>a nimantreti § 6.7.7B4. nâsti koci imaṃhi evaṃnāmako. ... kasya bhaktaṃ? kathaṃ bhaktaṃ? § 31.18.26A2. kasya śuve bhakta<ṃ> tarpaṇaṃ purobhaktikaṃ vā? § 31.27.26B1. atha dāni tahiṃ vihārake anugraho bhavati, bāhirakaṃ (Hs. vihārakaṃ) vā bhakta<ṃ> bhavati, ... § 31.30.26B4. atha aparejjukāto yadi tāva bāhirakaṃ bhaktaṃ bhavati, anugraho vā bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, mā piṇḍāye praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha.” § 39.2.31A1. upāsike detha bhaktāni § 39.3.31A2. kalyato yeva sarvvāṇi bhaktāni utkṣipituṃ § 39.5.31A3. tato yadi tāva grāmāntike śeyyāsane bhaktam pacyati § 39.9.31A5. yadi koci upāsako saṃghaṃ bhaktena nimantrayati § 39.9.31A6. śuve bhaktaṃ vā purebhaktikaṃ vā yavāgūpānaṃ vā bhaviṣyati § 39.10.31A7. eṣo dāni koci grāmāntikāṃ bhaktena nimantreti, ... § 39.22.32A1. eṣo dāni koci āraṇyakānāṃ bhaktenôpanimantrayati, ... § 39.11.31A7. atha dāni āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñapti karttavyā § 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, ... § 39.18.31B6. atha dāni āraṇyake śeyyāsane grāmāntikānāṃ ca āraṇyakānāñ ca bhaktaṃ sajjīyati, nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva ... bhuñjituṃ § 50.6.43B1. yadi tāvad yāvadarthaṃ bhaktaṃ dīyati, prakṛty’ eva ātmano bhaktato tasya pātraṃ pūretavyaṃ usw. bhaktaka~ (BHS) “Speise” ☞ § 8.5, Anm. 11; § 31.27, Anm. 3 § 6.7.7B5. anugraho na bhavati, bhaktakāni bhavanti, bhaktakāni uddiśitavyāni § 6.7.7B5. atha dāni bhaktakāni na bhavanti, ... pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ § 8.5.9A2. peyāpātraṃ ... śo(dhitvā)(?) bhaktuddeśāto bhaktakaṃ grahetavyaṃ § 31.18.26A2. nâpi dāni vaktavyaṃ “kā bhaktakānā thitikā (Hs. tithikā)? ...” § 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ. “āyuṣman, kiṃ sidhyati? kiṃ pacyati? kiṃ bhaktakānāṃ sthitikā?” § 31.27.26B2. atha dāni bhaktakāni <bhavanti, bhaktakāni> uddiśitavyāni. atha dāni bhaktakāni na bhavanti, ... § 31.30.26B5. atha dāni bhaktakāni bhavanti, āgantukānāṃ piṇḍabhaktakāni uddiśitavyāni § 39.2.30B7. te<hi> dāni āraṇyakehi ... bhaktakāni sarvvāṇi ukṣiptāni § 39.2.31A1. kin dāni yuṣmābhiḥ sarvvāṇi bhaktakāni utkṣiptāni? bhakta-kṛtya~ (BHS, SWTF) “Nahrungseinnahme, Mahl” § 23.4.5.21B2. na kṣamati tahiṃ bhaktakṛtyaṃ purebhaktikaṃ vā karttuṃ, pātraṃ vā nirmmādayituṃ § 23.6.5.21B4. bhaktakṛtyam vā purobhaktikam vā karoti, pātram vā nirmmādayati, anāpattiḥ § 31.29.26B4. deśakāle āgatā bhavanti, bhaktakṛtyena ccha<nda>yitavyāḥ § 32.12.27B5. deśakāle āgato bhavati, bhaktakṛtyena ccha<nda>yitavyo § 32.5.27B1. snāyati vā ekanivasano vā bhavati, bhaktakṛtyaṃ karoti, purebhaktikam vā karoti, ... na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 49.1.41B7. ārya, bhaktakṛtyaṃ karetha bhakta-ccheda~ (BHS, SWTF) “Entbehrung von Essen, Fasten”; vgl. Pā. bhatta-ccheda ⇒ cchinna- bhakta~ § 50.10.43B7. piṇḍapātanīhārakena yatraỿva pānīyaṃ paśyati, tatraỿva bhuṃjitavyaṃ. “mā dāni vayaṃ ubhaye ’va bhaktacchedaṃ kariṣyāma.” bhakta-pīṭhikā~# “Schemel, der beim Essen gebraucht wird” (?) § 43.1.38A2. ... bhaktapīṭhikā māṇikaṃ caṃgeriyo śuṣyāyo paṭalakā 406 bhakta-visargga~# “Darreichung von Speise”; vgl. Pā. bhatta-vissagga; SWTF III 273a. bhakta- visarjana-vṛtta ☞ § 8.5, Anm. 11 § 8.5.9A2. bhaktuddeśāto bhaktakaṃ grahetavyaṃ. bhaktavisarggo karttavyo § 8.8.9A5. vījanavāto dātavyo, bhaktavisarggo karttavyo bhakta-śālā~ “Refektorium (im Kloster); Speisesaal”; vgl. Gräfe 62, von Hinüber 1992: 43, Anm. 63 ⇒ bhaktāgra~ § 12.10.11B5. vihārā pariveṇā agniśālā bhaktaśālā upasthānaśālā ... grāhayitavyā § 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā bhaktaśālāyām vā kalpiyaśālāyām vā ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati aparejjukāto kalyato utthihantakenaỿva bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ § 53.4.45A4. agni ... bhaktaśālāyāṃ {vā paṭipāṭikāye} sthapetavyo (Hs.°tavyā) bhaktāgra~ (BHS) “Refektorium (im Kloster); Speisesaal (im Haus des Gastgebers)”; vgl. Pā. bhattagga ☞ § 4.4, Anm. 1 ⇒ bhakta-śālā~, agra~ (2), tarpaṇāgra~ § 4.4.4B1. saṃghasthavireṇa evaṃ bhaktāgre pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 4.4.4B2) § 4.21.6A4. evaṃ dvitīyasthavireṇa bhaktāgre pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10A7) § 5.4.6B1. evaṃ dvitīyasthavireṇa bhaktāgre pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 5.13.7A3, § 5.14. 7A3, Uddāna [I].10A7) § 6.4.7B1. sarvvehi evaṃ bhaktāgre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 6.15.8A5. evaṃ sarvvehi bhaktāgre pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10A7) § 11.10.11A2. na kṣamati sāṃghikena śayyāsanena prāvṛtena bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>am vā upaviśituṃ § 39.9.31A6. yadi na sajjaṃ bhavati, na dāni bhaktāgraṃ avaṣṭabhayitavyo (Nom. sg. neut.) āsayitavyaṃ § 40.10.33A3. bhaktāgreṇa pānīyaṃ vārentena § 57.9.47B6. nâpi kṣamati saṃghamadhye bhaktāgre tarpaṇāgre vā samīcīyaṃ vā sa- upānahena niṣīdituṃ § 58.4.48A3. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyikāye vā auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ § 59.5.48B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā upaviṣṭena auddhatyā<bhi>prāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhe<na> kṣīvituṃ § 60.5.48B6. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā samāvāyikānāṃ vā ... kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.5.48B6. atha dāni bhikṣu bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, ... § 61.6.49A5. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā ... aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhayituṃ § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, yadi tāva bhaktāgre vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, anantarikasya pātraṃ datvā gantavyaṃ § 62.8.50A4. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa vātakarmma karttuṃ bhaktuddeśa~# (°kta-udd°) “Speiseverteiler”; vgl. Pā. bhattuddesaka (“issuer of meals”, CPD, s.v. uddesaka), BHS. bhaktoddeśaka (BHSD, s.v. uddeśaka), SWTF III 273b, dass. ☞ § 8.5, Anm. 10 ⇒ śayyāsanoddeśa~ § 8.5.9A1. peyāpātraṃ śodhitavyaṃ. śo(dhitvā)(?) bhaktuddeśāto bhaktakaṃ grahetavyaṃ bhaktopadhāna~# (bhakta-upa°) “die Unterlage für das Essen” ☞ § 8.8, Anm. 6 § 8.8.9A5. bhājanaṃ bhaktopadhānaṃ śayyāsanaṃ pratiśāmetavyaṃ cīvarāṇi √bhakṣ § 49.1.41B7. khajjakaṃ khādatha. vanaphalaṃ bhakṣatha bhagavat~ § 1.1.1B1. bhagavān Śrāvastyām viharati (= § 2.1.1A7, § 4.1.4A5 et passim) § 1.3.1B3. bhagavān āha ( = § 39.3.31A1 et passim) § 1.2.1B3. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣū bhagavato ārocayeṃsu/°eṃsuḥ (= § 4.2.4A7, § 5.2.6A6, § 7.1.8A7, § 20.6.19B3, § 20.9.19B5, § 22.1.20B7, § 41.1.33B4 usw.) § 18.2.15B1. bhikṣū bhagavato ārocayeṃsu (= § 19.2.17B5, § 19.6.18A1, § 20.1.19A6, 407  § 35.1.29A1, § 40.1.32B3, § 45.1.39B4, § 46.1.40A4, § 47.1.40B4, § 48.1.41A4 usw.) § 1.3.1B4. āha “āma bhagavan” (= § 5.3.6B1 usw.) § 4.11.5A3. bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno paritto (≒ § 5.10.7A1) § 6.10.8A1. bhagavatā ca anekaparyāyeṇa glāno parindito (≒ § 50.5.43A7) § 11.3.10B4. bhagavāṃ jānanto yyeva bhikṣūṃ pṛcchati § 13.3.12B1. ye bhagavān (Voc.) varṣāṃ vasiṣyanti te pratisaṃskariṣyanti § 11.3.10B4. bhagavāṃ jānanto yyeva bhikṣūṃ pṛcchati (≒ § 15.3.14A1, § 17.3.14B6 usw.) § 20.5.19B1. bhagavatā dantakāṣṭhaṃ pratikṣiptaṃ § 20.9.19B5. tena dāni bhagavān dṛṣṭo bhagavato gauraveṇa sarvvam abhyavahṛtaṃ § 31.1.25B1. te dāni vivaditā, bhagavato mūlaṃ gatāḥ (= § 32.2.27A6, § 39.2.31A1, § 50.2.43A5) § 33.5.28A1. sthaviro dāni bhagavantaṃ pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavāṃ (Voc.), sthavirehi bhikṣūhi navakā bhikṣū ālapitavyā?” § 36.6.29B5. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhaga<va>tā “bahukarā bhikṣavo brāhmaṇagṛhapatayo ...” § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha ...” § 39.1.30B5. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tam artham abhisam- bhāvayitvā Śrāvastyām viharati ... § 41.1.33B4. udake pi khalu mātrā uktā bhagavatā § 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā § 41.11.34A7. bhikṣū dāni bhagavantam āhaṃsu § 41.11.34A7. yasya bhagavān (Voc.) katham ... tuṣṭo? § 41.20.35A4. bhagavān etasmin vastuni Dharmmapadaṃ bhāṣate § 42.1.36A1. bhagavān Rājagṛhe viharati § 42.1.36A1. Jīvako Kaumārabhṛtyo bhagavantaṃ yācati § 42.1.36A2. anujānātu bhagavān śrāvakānāṃ jentākaṃ § 42.3.36A6. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā (= § 42.4.36A7) § 53.5.45A4. pratham{ān}am eva bhagavato śarīrakuṭikāyāṃ dīpo ādīpitavyo § 62.1.49B1. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisam- bhāvayitvā Śrāvastyāṃ viharati śāstā devānāñ ca manuṣyāṇāñ ca ... § 62.1.49B4. cetovaśiparamapāramiprāptā punar bbuddhā bhagavanto yehi yehi vihārehi ākāṃkṣanti, tehi tehi vihārehi viharanti usw. bhaginī~ “Schwester” § 18.40.17A3. atha khalu pṛcchitavyaṃ “bhagini, kiṃ riktā vā varccakuṭī nê”ti § 33.9.28A3. eṣo bhikṣu mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā bhaginīm vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâyaṃ kṣamati śabdāpayituṃ “ambe” tti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā § 33.10.28A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya <mātā vā> pitā vā bhaginī vā śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti pravyāharttuṃ § 48.5.41A7. bhaginīyo āsanaṃ prajñapetha, mā cīvarakāni vinaśiṣyanti § 48.7.41B2. bhaginī prajñapehi kuḍḍasmiṃ yahiṃ apāśrayitavyaṃ bhagna~ § 16.9.14B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā bhagnā vā bhavanti, cchinnagaṇṭhikā karttavyā bhagnaka~ (BHS) “zerbrochen, gespalten”; < bhagna + Suffix ka ⇒ bhagna~, vi-bhagnaka~ § 13.11.12B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā bhagnakā bhavanti, cchinnagaṇṭhikā karttavyā § 15.7.14A3. yadi tāva prāṇakehi khāyitako bhavati bhagnako (Hs. °akā) vā, ... § 17.12.15A6. ete mañcā vā pīṭhā vā bhagnakā vā bhavanti, ... √bhaj ⇒ saṃ-vi-√bhaj bhaja- für bhañja- : § 31.19.26A3. bha<ṃ>jantehi; § 61.6.49A6. bha<ṃ>jantena (= § 61.7. 49A7); vgl. BHSG, S. 222b, 2. bhaj-, bhañj- (2) bhaja-ti √bhañj, bhañja- (BHS[BHSG, S. 222b], Pā) ⇒ bhañjaya-, aṅgāni √bhañj, kāka-vāhṃ bhañja-, bhagna~, bhagnaka~, vi-bhagnaka~ § 20.2.19A7. āmrapotako ropito ... tvayā so āgacchiya uppāḍiya bhaṃjiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ 408  khāditaṃ § 25.4.22B3. (pātraṃ ...) mā pakvena vā ... kapitthena pakvena vā nālikereṇa bhaṃjeya (“zerbrochen wird”; ☞ § 25.4[Text], Anm. 1) tti § 25.5.22B3. nâpi kṣamati dariniśritena vā pātraṃ nirmmādayituṃ, mā patitaṃ bhañjeya (Hs. °aya) tti § 31.1.25A7. te ... dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjantā (Hs. bhaṃjantaṃ |) āsanti (≒ § 31.1.25B1) § 31.2.25B2. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjamānehi āsituṃ § 31.19.26A3. nâpi dāni nevāsikehi dvāraṃ bandhitvā kākavāhāṃ bha<ṃ>jantehi āsitavyaṃ § 31.33.26B7. na kṣamati ... vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhāṃ bhañjantehi āsituṃ § 61.3.49A3. aṅgāni bhañjantena (= § 61.8.49B1); § 61.5.49A5. aṅgāni bhañjituṃ; § 61.6.49A6. aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena (= § 61.7.49A7) ⇒ aṅgāni √bhañj bhañjaya- (BHS[BHSG, S. 222b], Pā) “(die Glieder) recken” ☞ § 61.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ aṅgāni √bhañj § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti, aṅgāni bhañjayanti maṭamaṭāya phoḍenti amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ bhañjayitavyaṃ für jaṃbhayitavyaṃ (Silbenumstellung) oder jaṃbhayituṃ : § 61.3.49A3 bhañjentaṃ für bhante taṃ oder bhadantā : § 19.42.19A3 bhaṭṭa~ “Herr” ⇒ bhaṭṭā~ § 33.1.27B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti (≒ § 33.2.27B7) § 33.12.28A5. bhikṣū vā upāsakam vā dānapatim vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâpi kṣamati “bhāve” tti vā “bhaṭṭe (Voc. sg.)” ti vā “āyuṣmaṃ” tti vā bhaṭṭā~ (BHS[Mvu]) “Frau” ⇒ bhaṭṭa~ § 33.9.28A3. eṣo bhikṣu mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā bhaginīm vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâyaṃ kṣamati śabdāpayituṃ “ambe” tti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā § 33.11.28A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ upāsakāṃ vā dānapatānīṃ vā vihārasvāminīṃ vā śabdāpitu- kāmo bhavati, nâpi kṣamati “ambe” ti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā bhaṇa- “sagen, sprechen” ☞ § 33.1, Anm. 2 zu kiṃ bhaṇasi § 33.1.27B7. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti (≒ § 33.2.27B7) § 33.7.28A2. tenâpi na kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena vyāharttuṃ “hā kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti § 33.10.28A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya <mātā vā> pitā vā bhaginī vā śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti pravyāharttuṃ § 33.13.28A5. bhikṣū vā tehi śabdāpayati (lies: °piyati?), nâyaṃ kṣamati, “hā kiṃ bhaṇasi” ti vyāharttuṃ § 42.16.37A2. so prakṛty’ eva bhaṇito bhavati “asukasya vā asukasya vā parikarmma kuryesi” tti, ... bhaṇe (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “sage ich” (Anrede eines Untergebenen durch einen Höherstehender) ☞ § 1.1, Anm. 4 zu paśyatha bhaṇe (“Seht!; Hört mal!”) § 1.1.1B2. te dāni ojjhāyanti: “paśyatha bhaṇe ...” (= § 5.1.6A5) § 18.2.15B1. jano dāni odhyāyati “paśyatha bhaṇe śramaṇakā ...” (≒ § 19.2.17B4, § 20.6. 19B2, § 20.7.19B3, § 51.1.44A1) § 34.1.28B1. te dāni odhyāyanti “paśyatha bhaṇe vayaṃ yeva sannipatitā "karmmāṇi kariṣyāma" tti ...” (≒ § 34.2.28B2, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 36.2.29B1, § 37.1. 29B7) § 41.18.35A1. ko (für ho?) bhaṇe (“denn”) ko ahaṃ yuṣmākaṃ? § 48.2.41A6. sārddhevihārikā antevāsikā odhyāyanti “paśyatha bhaṇe, ...” bhaṇḍa~ (Pā) “Gegenstand; Geschirr”; vgl. Skt. bhṇḍa ⇒ bhaṇḍaka~, bhāṇḍa~, māna-bhaṇḍa~, vaḍḍhaki-bhaṇḍa~ § 4.10.5A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... bhaṇḍaṃ laṃghaṃtehi ... gantuṃ. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjantehi ... praviśitavyaṃ § 5.9.6B6. tato nâpi kṣamati bhaṇḍaṃ laṃgha{ṃ}yantehi praviśituṃ. atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ parivarjayantehi ... praviśitavyaṃ 409  § 6.9.7B6. tato na kṣamati bhaṇḍam vā laṃghayantehi (Hs. °yatena) praviśituṃ ... atha khalu bhaṇḍaṃ pariharantehi ... praviśitavyaṃ § 12.8.11B4. yaṃ tahiṃ pariveṇe bhavati bhaṇḍaṃ niyatakaṃ sarvvaṃ samudānitavyaṃ § 14.14.13B3. bhaṇḍaṃ niyatakaṃ bhavati, samudānetavyaṃ § 15.5.14A2. nâpi kṣamati gatāgatasya vihārake bhaṇḍaṃ praveśituṃ § 42.11.36B5. bhaṇḍā (Nom. pl. neut.) sajjayitavyā § 43.1.38A1. vihārakehi bhaṇḍaṃ ujjhitāvakīrṇṇe tiṣṭhati § 43.2.38A2. evaṃ bhaṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 43.2.38A3; Uddāna [V].39B2) § 43.4.38A3. yaṃ tatra bhaṇḍaṃ bhavati lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā sthālī vā piṭharikā vā ... bhaṇḍaka~ (Pā) “Gegenstand; Habe”; vgl. Skt. bhāṇḍaka ⇒ praśvāsa-bhaṇḍaka~, bhaṇḍa~, bhāṇḍa~ § 4.18.5B6. ādīptasmiṃ āgāre yo (lies: yaṃ?) niharati bhaṇḍakaṃ (vs) § 43.16.38B5. tac c’ eva{ṃ} cāturddiśaṃ sāṃghikaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ (Hs. maṇḍa°) rikta- paribhogaṃ na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ bhaṇḍana-kāraka~ (SWTF, Pā) “Zank stiftend” ☞ § 38.3, Anm. 6 § 38.3.30A6. yadi tāva so bhavati ... anarthakuśalo vā abhinīhārakuśalo vā kalahakārako vā bhaṇḍanakārako vā bhāṣyakārako vā adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā allīyāhi” tti § 38.6.30B1. yadi ... so ca bhikṣu bhavati kalahakārako bhaṇḍanakārako bhāṣyakāro adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā jalpāhi” tti bhaṇḍana-jāta~ (SWTF, Pā) “durch Zank charakterisiert, zänkisch” ☞ § 38.6, Anm. 6 § 38.6.30B2. kasya tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? bhatte für bhante : § 18.53.17B2 bhadanta (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “Ehrwürdiger, Herr” § 19.42.19A3. vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā (od. bhante taṃ; Hs. bhañjentaṃ) pūtimūtraṃ pibanāya dethê”tti § 42.20.37A5. yāvadarthaṃ bhadantā upaneṃtu (Hs. upanetuṃ) § 42.28.37B5. atha dāni bahuṃ bhavati, saṃghasaṃvyavahārako vā dānapati vā jalpati “viśvastā bhadantā snāyantu” tti bhadra~ § 4.18.6A1. devānukampito poṣo sadā bhadrāṇi paśyati (vs) bhadraka~ § 4.16.5B2. bhadrakaṃ (Hs. °kā) kṣaṇamuhūrttaṃ prasthitaṃ (Hs. °itā) (vs) § 8.11.9A7. atha dāni bhadrako bhavati guṇavāṃ śikṣākāmo, vaktavyaṃ “karohi” § 8.13.9B3. atha dāni bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo, vaktavyo “gṛhṇa” § 38.4.30A6. atha dāni so bhavati bhadrako guṇavān anuddhato śikṣākāmo anukūlo anunnaḍo acapalo, pṛcchitavyo “kiṃ kāryaṃ?” § 38.7.30B2. so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato anunnaḍo ... Bhadrapāla-kṛtya~# “das Benehmen von Bhadrapāla”? ☞ § 4.8, Anm. 7 § 4.8.4B7. na dāni tena “āmantritaṃ mayā” ti Bhadrapālakṛtyehi haṇṭhitavyaṃ bhante (Pā) “o Herr!, Ihr Herren!” ⇒ bhavat~ § 3.5.3B2. bhante katamâdya? § 4.7.4B6. atha dāni te jalpanti “bhante etaṃ sidhyati ...” (≒ § 5.7.6B5, § 6.7.7B5) § 5.7.6B3. āha “bhante kiṃ kariṣyasi?” § 5.7.6B4. bhante kisya upāsako? kahiṃ upāsako? § 5.10.6B7. dāyakadānapati jalpanti “bhante paṭipāṭikāya gṛhnatha” tti § 18.53.17B2. vaidyo jalpati “bhante (Hs. °atte) mahāvikaṭāṃ pāyetha” tti, ... § 19.42.19A3. vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā (od. bhante taṃ; Hs. bhañjentaṃ) pūtimūtraṃ pibanāya dethê”tti § 33.4.28A1. “kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirā bhikṣū ālapitavyā?” bhagavān āha “"ārye (Hs. ālape)" ti vā "bhante (pl.)" ti vā "āyuṣmante" ti <vā>.” § 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati ... vaktavyaṃ “ārye” vā “bhante” vā “āyuṣman” ti § 34.3.28B3. yadi tāva te jalpanti “bhante (pl.), mā allīyatha” tti, na kṣamati allīyituṃ (≒ § 35.3.29A3, § 36.3.29B3) 410  § 39.12.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante (pl.), āhanetha gaṇḍiṃ. kālo pi tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 39.13.31B1. dānapatī āha “bhante (pl.), āhanetha tumhe. āraṇyakâpi eṣyantî”ti § 39.24.32A2. dānapatir āgato bhavati, āha “bhante (pl.), āhaṇatha gaṇḍiṃ. anukālyo ’va tāva adyâpi bhavati” § 40.9.33A2. vaidyo āha “bhante, gotrasthena pānīyena akṣiṇī dhovāhi” tti § 42.24.37B2. bhante (pl.), ... āgacchantu § 50.5.43A7. yadi tāva dāyakadānapati jalpanti “bhante (pl.), paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha”, ... usw. bhaya~ ⇒ a-bhaya~, udaka-bh°, cora-bh°, caura-bh°, ḍhossa-bh°, rāja-bh°, vātaputra-bh°, vyāghra-bh°, vyāḍa-bh°, siṃha-bh°, su-bh° § 12.9.11B5. yo na cchandāye na doṣāye na mohāye na bhayāye, prajñaptaṃ ca jānāti bhava für tava : § 12.14.12A2 bhava- ⇒ √bhū, bho- § 1.6.1B5. yasmin pradeśe yaṃ divasaṃ saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, ... § 1.7.1B6. yadi dāni na gato saṃgho bhavati ... § 1.11.2A3. yaṃ kālaṃ śalākā vāritā bhavanti, bhikṣū gaṇitā bhavanti, sāmagrī ārocitā bhavati, ...(≒ § 2.9.3A1, § 3.10.4A1) § 2.7.2B7. yo pratibalo bhaviṣyati, so adhyeṣitavyo “tvaṃ śalākāṃ vārayiṣyasi” ... § 4.1.4A6. ghṛtaṃ thīyati māṃsaṃ thīyati vyañjanāni śītalībhavanti § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi jātakaṃ bhaveyaṃ (Opt. 3. sg.) mṛtakam vā bhaveya, ... § 4.8.4B7. atha dāni varṣārātro kālo bhavati, ... § 4.8.4B7. yadi tāva saṃjñam bhavati, mahanto ca kālo bhavati, ... § 4.8.4B7. yadā sajjaṃ bhaveya, tato mā paṭisaresi § 4.10.5A2. anekāyo tatra garbharūpāṇi sopāpitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ, kāṃsabhājanāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ; § 5.9.6B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi dārakadārikā vā sovāpitā bhaveṃsu; § 6.9.7B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi garbharūpā sovāpitāni bhaveṃsu, bhājanakāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ § 4.11.5A3. hemanto ca kālo bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “na hi” tti § 4.17.5B4. istri pi peśalā bhavatu śrāddhā bhavatu vratānugā (vs) § 4.17.5B4. puruṣo pi peśalo bhavatu śrāddho bhavatu vratānugo (vs) § 6.6.7B3. anekāye tahiṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya rājabhayaṃ vā corabhayam vā ... § 6.13.8A4. ato śreyataro bhava{ṃ}tu (lies: bhotu) kumāro kulavarddhano (vs) § 8.4.8B7. yaṃ kālaṃ abhyanujñā dinnā bhavati, tato dvāraṃ sukhākaṃ apaduriyāṇa ... (≒ § 10.4.10A5) § 14.10.13B1. vihāro anuparinditavyo ... “eṣo tumhākaṃ vihārako anuparindito bhavatu.” (≒ § 14.18.13B6) § 18.13.16A2. antamasato kumbhikāyaṃ ekasya paryāptaṃ bhaveyā, tattakaṃ dātavyaṃ § 18.23.16B2. iminā ca parāṅmukhena bhavitavyaṃ. tasya câvakāśo dātavyaḥ § 18.30.16B5. mā veḍḍo bhaveya tti (= § 18.34.16B7, § 18.40.17A3, § 19.14.18A4) § 18.36.17A1. atha dāni āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati durlabho gandho § 18.40.17A3. anekāye bhikṣuṇikā upaviṣṭā bhaveya § 18.43.17A5. mā uśśaṃkito bhaveyaṃ (Opt. 3. sg.; vgl. BHSG § 29.31) § 19.19.18A7. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, taṃ kālaṃ praśvāsa- ghaṭikā nikkālayitavyā § 19.23.18B2. atha dāni saṃghe praśvāsaghaṭo na bhavati, ... § 19.26.18B4. bhājanaṃ na bhavati, varṣā-udakaṃ ca bhavati, ... § 20.11.19B6. kalpiyakāro durllabho bhavati § 20.12.19B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati śirāviddhako vā virecanapītako vā ghṛtapītako vā ... § 22.4.21A1. anekāyo mā tarhi (für tahiṃ?) dīrghako praviṣṭo bhaveya tti § 24.4.22A2. nâpi kṣamati kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ, mā saprāṇako bhaveya § 31.6.25B5. yadi dāni grāmasya nagarasya vā madhyena gantavyaṃ bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... § 31.28.26B2. atha dāni āgantukā bhikṣū vihāra āgatā bhavanti, ... 411 § 31.29.26B3~4. yadi tāva purebhakte āgatā bhavanti, ... deśakāle āgatā bhavanti, ... vikāle āgatā bhavanti, ... § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāva purebhakte āgato bhavati, ... deśakāle āgato bhavati, ... vikāle āgato bhavati, ... § 31.35.27A1. yaṃ kālaṃ te nevāsikā (wohl für āgantukā) niddhāvitā bhavanti, ... § 31.37.27A2~3. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāptaṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, yadi koci sārtho prayāto bhavati, ... § 31.37.27A3. upāsaka! dānapati! ... ime bhikṣu tava parininditā bhavantu § 32.5.27A7. uśvāsam vā upaviṣṭo bhavati, na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ pādāṃ vandituṃ § 39.6.31A3. yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgatā bhavanti, ... § 39.8.31A5. anekāye āraṇyakānāṃ co<ra>bhayaṃ vā bhaveya udakabhayaṃ vā § 39.9.31A6. yadi arthikā bhaviṣyanti pratipālayiṣyanti, ... § 39.9.31A6. yadi na sajjaṃ bhavati, na dāni bhaktāgraṃ avaṣṭabhayitavyo āsayitavyaṃ § 39.13.31B2. yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgatā bhavanti, tato bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 39.19.31B7. yā grāmāntikānāṃ sthālī, yadi tāva grāmāntikā āgatā bhavanti, tahiṃ pi taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.20.31B7. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, ... jānitavyaṃ, anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparo<dho> vā bhave corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ, yathā nâgacchantîti § 40.5.32B6. yathā pānīyaṃ caukṣaṃ bhaveya § 40.6.32B7. sarvvaṅ karttavyaṃ, yathā sugandhā bhaveṃsu (Opt. 3. pl.) § 41.5.34A1. tasya brāhmaṇasya bhavati § 41.5.34A2. ime ... śramaṇakāḥ ... nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti, vikopenti § 39.9.31A6. śuve bhaktaṃ ... bhaviṣyati § 41.16.34B6. mā atra pānīyasmiṃ tṛṇo vā bhave prāṇako vā ... § 41.16.34B6. tena senāpatisya aphāsu bhaveya § 41.17.34B7. tasya bhavati senāpatisya § 41.17.34B7. tehi eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati § 41.18.35A2. yadi yuṣmākaṃ anukūlaṃ bhave, ... § 41.19.35A3. ghātyā bhavanty aghātyā (vs) § 41.19.35A3. vadhyā bhavanty avadhyā (vs) § 41.19.35A3. tasmān nareṇa satataṃ ācāraguṇena bhavitavyaṃ (vs) § 41.21.35A5. anyo ’sau ... bhavati agrakulikasya putro § 41.22.35A5. eṣo dāni bhikṣu yadā grāmāto nirggato bhavati § 41.22.35A6. mā prāṇakā jāyeṃsu nīlikāya vā bhaveṃsu § 41.24.35B1. yaṃ kālaṃ adhvātā bhavanti tato praveśayitavyo § 41.25.35B2. sarvvasaṃghasya pādadhovanikā bhavati, ... § 41.25.35B2. yadi tāva koci bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo bhavati, ... § 41.26.35B2. atha dāni khaṇḍikā pādadhovanikā bhavati, ... § 41.26.35B3. yadi tāva koci vṛddhatarako bhavati, antaraṃ dātavyaṃ § 41.26.35B3. tena pādā dhovitā bhava<ṃ>ti § 41.26.35B3. atha dāni koci vṛddhatarako na bhavati ... § 41.27.35B3. dakṣiṇānte pādadhovanikā bhava{ṃ}ti ... § 41.29.35B6. yadi tahiṃ koci bhikṣu bhavati navatarako, so vaktavyo “udakaṃ āsiñcihi” tti § 41.32.36A1. atha dāni hemantakālo bhavati (= § 6.8.7B5) § 42.1.36A2. vātapittaśleṣmakānāṃ phāsu (Hs. payasu) bhaviṣyati § 42.2.36A3. āgameṃtu āyuṣmanto, na tāva jentāko tatto bhavati § 42.3.36A5. utpātagaṇḍapiṭakānāṃ vātapittaśleṣmikānāṃ phāsu bhaviṣyati § 42.7.36B2. ekāye vātapānīye vīthīye dvauvikā (?) bhavati dvitīyā karttavyā § 42.11.36B4. ya (pl. masc.) tāye {t}ārthāyaỿva bhava<n>ti jentākavārikā vā ārāmikā vā, ... § 42.13.36B6. yadi tāva parṣāye bhavati, ye tahiṃ parṣāye tehi gantavyaṃ § 42.13.36B6. atha dāni pariveṇiko bhavati, ye tasmiṃ pariveṇikā saṃti tehi gantavyaṃ § 42.13.36B7. atha dāni sarvvasāṃghiko bhavati, ... § 42.16.37A1. yadi dāni upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā praviṣṭako bhavati, ... 412 § 42.16.37A1. anyasyâpi karttukāmo bhavati § 42.16.37A2. so prakṛty’ eva bhaṇito bhavati § 42.17.37A2. yadi tāva agni bahalako bhavati, ... § 42.17.37A2. atha dāni agnir mmando bhavati, ... § 42.19.37A3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, ... § 42.21.37A6. yo pratibalo bhavati udakaṃ upasthāpetuṃ, ... § 42.21.37A7. atha dāni ogho vā puṣkiriṇī vā taḍāgo vā bhavati, ... § 42.22.37A7. udakasya (lies: uda<kena> kakṣa?) praticchannaṃ bhavati § 42.22.37A7. jānumātraṃ udakaṃ bhavati § 42.22.37B1. yathā nābhi praticchannā bhaveya § 42.24.37B1. etaṃ dāni jentākasya ārocitaṃ bhavati § 42.24.37B1. yathā bhavati tathā gantavyaṃ § 42.24.37B1. yadi tāva ekato sāṃghiko bhavati, ... § 42.25.37B2. bhikṣu jarādurbbalā vā vyādhidurbbalā vā bhavanti § 42.25.37B3. tasya sārddhevihārikā bhavanti antevāsikā vā § 42.25.37B3. yadi snāpitukāmo bhavati ... § 42.26.37B3. atha dāni jentāko sāṃghiko bhavati, ... § 42.26.37B4. tailaṃ bhaviṣyati, cūrṇṇaṃ bhaviṣyati, udakaṃ bhaviṣyati § 42.31.37B6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣū snātā bhavanti ... § 43.3.38A3. etaṃ dāni saṃghasya anugraho bhavati § 43.4.38A3. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃghena bhuktaṃ bhavati ... § 43.4.38A4. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhavanti ... ( = § 43.7.38A6) § 43.5.38A4. yaṃ tatra bhava<ṃ>ti dugdhaghaṭā vā dadhighaṭā vā ... § 43.5.38A5. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhava<ṃ>ti ... § 43.6.38A5. yaṃ tatra bhavati śatapotanako vā tāmrapātrā vā ... § 43.7.38A5. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā ... § 43.9.38A6. ete bhavanti vastrābharaṇakā vā pariśrāvaṇā vā caturasrakā vā ... § 43.13.38B1. ete bhavanti raṅgagolakā vā raṅgaghaṭakā vā ... § 43.13.38B2. māsavārikasya vā pakṣa<vārika>sya vā adhīnaṃ bhavati § 43.14.38B2. eṣo bhikṣu dhovanikā vā <rajanikā vā> karttukāmo bhavati, ... § 43.14.38B2. atha dāniṃ vṛddhatarakasya cirakālo bhavati, navatarakasya itvarakālikaṃ bhavati,... § 43.14.38B2. navatarakasya itvarakālikaṃ bhavati, ... § 43.14.38B3. ubhayeṣāṃ cirakālikaṃ bhavati, vṛddhatarakasya dātavyaṃ § 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā § 43.16.38B4. takṣāṇaṃ bhāṇḍaṃ bhavati kuṭhāro vā vāsīyo vā viharaṇako vā nikhādanako vā aṭṭilā vā § 43.16.38B4. etā bhavanti vāsīyo vā kuddālakā vā niśreṇiyo vā, na dāni tathā yeva mṛttikāpraliptikā sthapetavyā § 44.6.39A5. “mā cīvarakoṇako bhavatu. mā cīvarako” ti § 45.6.39B7. upalepanaṃ vā saṃmārjanaṃ vā <karttukāmā> bhava<n>ti § 46.4.40A6. kalyato yeva gocarāye prasthito bhavati § 46.6.40B1. etan (lies: etāni) dāni saṃghasya uṭṭhānakāni bhavanti § 46.6.40B1. bhikṣu ... anyaṃ leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ prāvaritukāmo bhavati § 47.1.40B2. kaṇṭakaśākhāhi lagnaṃ bhavati § 47.4.40B6. yadi tāva grīṣmakālo bhavati dūre ca grāmo bhavati ... § 47.5.40B7. yadā grāmamūlagato bhavati, yadi tahiṃ ogho vā taḍāgam vā bhavati puṣkiriṇī vā, ... § 47.6.40B7. atha dāni hemanto bhavati, prāvaritvā gantavyaṃ § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ dhūlīye pūritaṃ bhavati prasphoṭayitavyaṃ § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ ... karddamena vā vināśita{vya}ṃ bhavati dhovitavyaṃ § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ ... kaṇṭakaśākhāyāṃ vā lagnaṃ bhavati § 47.9.41A2. sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittī bhavati varjayitavyā 413  § 47.9.41A2. sambādharathyā bhavati susaṃvṛtena paśyillakena atikrāmitavyaṃ § 48.4.41A7. yadi tāva āsanaṃ bhavati dhūlīye vā mrakṣitaṃ karddamena vā vināśitakaṃ omaïlamaïlaṃ vā prajñaptakaṃ bhavati, ... § 48.5.41A7. yadi tāva bhikṣusya viśrambhakulaṃ bhavati, ... § 48.5.41A7. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā astarikā vā ... tato niṣīditavyaṃ § 48.6.41B1. atha dāni aśrāddhakulaṃ bhavati bhikṣusya vā aviśrambhakulaṃ bhavati, ... § 48.6.41B1. stūpikaṃ vā sāṃghikaṃ vā kāryaṃ adhīnaṃ bhavati § 48.6.41B1. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato ... § 48.7.41B2. bhikṣuḥ jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati (≒ § 50.4.43A6) § 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā amilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati, tato apāśrayitavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. atha dāni aśrāddhakulaṃ bhavati na vā bhikṣusya viśrambhakulaṃ bhavati, ... § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka ... vināśitaṃ bhavati ... dhūlīye vā otaritaṃ bhavati ... pāṭitaṃ vā vipāṭitaṃ bhavati § 49.1.41B6. ahaṃ khalu te pityako bhavāmi § 49.1.41B6. pi<t>yako bhavāhi, mātulako bhavāhi (“Möget ihr auch mein Onkel väterlicherseits oder mein Onkel mütterlicherseits sein, ...”) § 49.1.42A1. paśyati “mā imasya dātavyaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti § 49.1.42A1. na me tvayā sārddhaṃ phāsu bhavati kathāya vā niṣadyāya vā § 49.1.42A2. teṣāṃ bhavati yathā “ayaṃ ...” § 49.1.42A3. bhavitavyam ayaṃ vipralabdho § 49.2.42A5. ahaṃ khalu te pitṛyako bhavāmi § 49.5.42B1. atha dāni duścakṣuko bhavati jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā, ... § 49.7.42B4. yaṃ kālaṃ śirā viddhā bhavati, ubhayehi bhuñjiya nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 49.8.42B7. yato nirggato bhavati, tato ārocayitavyaṃ § 50.7.43B3. atha paśyati “ ... mā dāni ubhaye cchinnabhaktā bhaviṣyāma” § 51.6.44A2. na dāni ito vā ito vā nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “corā vā ocorakā bhavanti.” § 52.1.44B1. yaṃ kālaṃ āgatā bhaviṣyanti, tato saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ § 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā § 56.5.47A5. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ paśyati “dvitīye prahāṇe avītakaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti ... et passim bhavat~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) Ehrwürdiger, Herr; ehrwürdig” ⇒ bhante § 34.5.28B5. darśanapathe upasaṃkramitvā na dāni vaktavyaṃ “sukham bhavanto, sukhaṃ mārṣa.” (= § 35.5.29A4, § 36.5.29B4) § 41.10.34A6. yathâpi imaṃ bhavatā Śāriputreṇa dakānakaṃ upacīrṇṇaṃ § 41.18.35A1. (der Anführer der Diebesbande sagt seinen Leuten) bhavanto (Voc.) ahaṃ imasya dārakasya evaṃ ca evaṃ ca ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo bhaṣṭikā für bhraṣṭikā : § 42.8.36B2 bhastrāyanaka~# “Leder”?; < Skt. bhastrā + Suffix -āyana ☞ § 18.14, Anm. 3 § 18.14.16A2. leṅkaṭakhaṃḍehi vā bhastrāyana{ṃ}kehi vā sukumārehi dayitavyaṃ √bhā ⇒ nir-√bhā, vi-bhāta~ bhāga~ ⇒ aṣṭabhāgam, caturbhāgam, vibhakta-bhāga~ -bhāgiya~ (Pā), -bhāgīya~ (BHS, SWTF) ⇒ puṇya-bhāgiya~, phala-bhāgiya~, vāsanā-bhāgīya~ bhājana~ “Gefäß” ⇒ bhājanaka~, agra-bhājana-gata~ § 6.9.7B6. tato na kṣamati ... bhājanam vā laṃghayantehi praviśituṃ § 8.8.9A5. bhājanaṃ bhaktopadhānaṃ śayyāsanaṃ pratiśāmetavyaṃ cīvarāṇi § 19.26.18B4. bhājanaṃ na bhavati, varṣā-udakaṃ ca bhavati, ... § 19.41.19A3. atha dāni varccakuṭī na bhavati, bhājane kṛtvā ujjhitavyaṃ § 24.9.22A5. atha dāni bhūmyastāro bhavati, bhājane karttavyaṃ kuntake vā alābuke vā vaṃśatthālikāyāṃ vā 414  § 40.6.32B6. tehi bhājanehi prakṣipitavyā pāṭalāgulikā vā campakagulikā vā śarkarā vā § 40.10.33A3. hastāṃ sunirmmāditāṃ kṛtvā bhājanaṃ sunirmmāditaṃ kṛtvā caukṣaṃ pānīyaṃ vāretavyaṃ § 40.12.33A5. taṃ bhājanaṃ ekānte sthapitvā, tṛṇaṃ vā kulikaṃ vā upari dātavyā abhijñānaṃ, yathā jñāye “akalpiyan” ti § 40.15.33A6. bhājanāni patraśākhāhi sthapitavyāni § 40.15.33A6. omhāya vā thālikāya vā bhājanehi vā thapitavyaṃ § 40.16.33B1. atha dāni ... bhājanaṃ ca atiriktaṃ ti, labhyā dāni ... yācituṃ § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako caukṣasamudācāro bhājanaṃ gṛhṇiya parimārjiya ... § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... hastāṃ sudhotāṃ kṛtvā bhājanaṃ sudhotaṃ kṛtvā udakasya pūriya ... § 42.15.37A1. na dāni āsanāni vā bhājanāni vā ... laṃghayantena gantavyaṃ § 42.20.37A4. minīya dātavyaṃ mānabhaṇḍe<na> vā bhājanena vā hastasaṃjñāya vā § 53.19.45B7. tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati, sāhariyāṇaṃ ghaṭikāyāṃ vā bhājane vā sthāpayi- tavyaṃ bhājanaka~ (BHS[Mvu]) “Gefäß” ⇒ bhājana~ § 6.9.7B7. anekāye tahiṃ ... bhājanakāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ § 42.20.37A4. caṣakena vā karaṇḍikāya vā hastasaṃjñāya vā bhājanakena vā dātavyaṃ bhāṇḍa~ ⇒ bhaṇḍa~, bhaṇḍaka~, māna-bhaṇḍa~, vaḍḍhaki-bhaṇḍa~ § 14.15.13B4. sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā upaskaro vā ... § 43.1.38A2. kim iyaṃ bhikṣavo bhāṇḍaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ tiṣṭhati? § 43.12.38B1. evaṃ yat kiñcit saṃghasya bhāṇḍaṃ ... pratisāmetavyaṃ § 43.16.38B4. takṣāṇaṃ bhāṇḍaṃ bhavati kuṭhāro vā vāsīyo vā viharaṇako vā nikhādanako vā aṭṭilā vā § 43.17.38B5. evaṃ bhāṇḍe pratipadyitavyaṃ bhāra~ § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. bahukarā yūyaṃ bhāraṃ vahatha. dharmmadeśanāṃ karetha. ...” ti bhāryā~ § 4.17.5B5. tām eva bhāryāṃ vareyā (Hs. car°) yâsyā śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) bhāva~ (1) ⇒ deva-bhāva~ bhāva~ (2) “gnädiger Herr” § 33.1.27B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti (≒ § 33.2.27B7) § 33.12.28A5. bhikṣū vā upāsakam vā dānapatim vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâpi kṣamati “bhāve (Voc. sg.)” tti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā “āyuṣmaṃ” tti vā bhāvaya- (1) “verwirklichen” § 4.16.5B3. apare mārggam bhāvayitvā parinirvvānti anāśravā (vs) (2) “vermengen, vermischen” ☞ § 42.28, Anm. 1 § 42.28.37B5. yadi tāva alpaṃ tailaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ bhavati, mitakaṃ dātavyaṃ, tailaṃ saṃcayitavyaṃ, udakaṃ bhāvayitavyaṃ √bhāṣ § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo ... “tvaṃ prātimokṣasūtram uddiśesi” “tvaṃ bhāṣesi” “tvaṃ parikathāṃ karesi” § 1.13.2A6. atha dāni sarvvarātrikā bhavati, tato adhyeṣitavyaṃ “tvaṃ bhāṣayesî”ti. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇaṃ (Hs. bhāṣamāṇaṃ) sarvvarātriṃ dharmmavṛṣṭiye vītināmiyānaṃ ... § 2.7.2B7. ko bhāṣiṣyati? ko dakṣiṇāṃ ādiśiṣyati? § 2.11.3A5. tvayā bhāṣitavyaṃ tvayā bhāṣitavyaṃ § 2.11.3A5. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇa (Hs. bhāṣaṇāya) sarvvarātriṃ dharmmavṛṣṭiye vītināmiyāna § 3.8.3B7. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati so adhyeṣitavyo: ... “tvaṃ bhāṣesi” § 3.12.4A3. bhāṣaṇakā adhyeṣitavyāḥ: “tvayā bhāṣitavyaṃ tvayā bhāṣitavyan” ti. 415  yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇaṃ ... § 41.19.35A2. devatā gāthāṃ bhāṣate § 41.20.35A4. bhagavān ... Dharmmapadaṃ bhāṣate bhāṣaṇaka~ (BHS) “Redner” § 3.12.4A3. atha dāni sarvvarātrikā bhavati, bhāṣaṇakā adhyeṣitavyāḥ: “tvayā bhāṣitavyaṃ tvayā bhāṣitavyan” ti bhāṣaṇāya für bhāṣiyāṇa : § 2.11.3A5 bhāṣya-kāra~#, bhāṣya-kāraka~# “eine Kontroverse verursachend”; vgl. Pā. bhassa-kāraka ☞ § 38.3, Anm. 6 § 38.3.30A6. yadi tāva so bhavati ... anarthakuśalo vā abhinīhārakuśalo vā kalahakārako vā bhaṇḍanakārako vā bhāṣyakārako vā adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā allīyāhi” tti § 38.6.30B1. yadi ... so ca bhikṣu bhavati kalahakārako bhaṇḍanakārako bhāṣyakāro adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā jalpāhi” tti bhāṣya-rata~# “sich am Reden erfreuend”; vgl. Pā. bhassa-rata ☞ § 11.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ karmma- rata~, nidrā-rata~ § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ ... na bhāṣyārāmāḥ na bhāṣyaratāḥ, na bhāṣyārāmatānu- yogam anuyuktā viharanti (= § 12.1.11A5) bhāṣyārāma~ (SWTF) (bhāṣya-ā°) “am Reden Freude habend”; vgl. Pā. bhassārāma ☞ § 11.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ karmmārāma~, nidrārāma~ § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ ... na bhāṣyārāmāḥ na bhāṣyaratāḥ, na bhāṣyārāmatānu- yogam anuyuktā viharanti (= § 12.1.11A5) bhāṣyārāmatānuyoga~# (bhāṣya-ārā°-anu°) “Hingabe an Freude am Reden”; vgl. SWTF, s.v. bhāṣyārāmatā ☞ § 11.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ karmmārāmatānuyoga~, nidrārāmatānuyoga~ § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ ... na bhāṣyārāmāḥ na bhāṣyaratāḥ, na bhāṣyārāmatānuyogam anuyuktā viharanti (= § 12.1.11A5) √bhikṣ § 31.8.25B6. praviśiya yācitvā saṃghasya yathāsukhaparibhogaṃ, niḥsārayitavyaṃ pāda- tailaṃ, vekālikaṃ purebhaktikaṃ bhikṣitavyaṃ (Hs. bhai°) bhikṣu~ ⇒ taruṇa-bhikṣu~ § 1.1.1B1. bhikṣū āhaṃsu “saṃghasthaviro nâgacchati” § 1.2.1B3. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣū bhagavato ārocayeṃsu/°eṃsuḥ (= § 4.2.4A7, § 5.2. 6A6, § 7.1.8A7, § 20.6.19B3, § 20.9.19B5, § 22.1.20B7, § 41.1.33B4 usw.) § 1.11.2A3. yaṃ kālaṃ śalākā vāritā bhavanti, bhikṣū gaṇitā bhavanti, sāmagrī ārocitā bhavati, ... (= § 3.10.4A1) § 1.12.2A5. yadi tāva ... bhikṣū vā sukhopaviṣṭā bhavanti, ... § 2.1.2B1. saṃghasthaviro āgato bhikṣu (Nom. pl.) āgatā dvitīyasthaviro nâgacchati § 3.1.3A6. bhikṣu (Nom. pl.) osarantikāye na āgacchanti § 3.3.3B1. satyaṃ bhikṣavo (Voc.) evaṃ dāni ... § 5.5.6B1. bhikṣu bhikṣuṇī upāsako ’pāsikā āgantuko gamiko (≒ § 6.5.7B2) § 8.2.8B6. te dāni bhikṣū odhyāyanti “asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmman deti, ...” § 14.18.13B5. sarvvehi bhikṣūhi nidhāvantehi ekena vihārako abhyantaghaṭṭimo karttavyo § 18.2.15B1. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣūhi śrutaṃ (= § 19.2.17B5, § 19.6.18A1, § 20.1. 19A6, § 40.1.32B3, § 45.1.39B4, § 46.1.40A4, § 47.1.40B4, § 48.1.41A4 usw.) § 18.20.16A7. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣuḥ (Nom. pl.) bhagavato ārocayeṃsuḥ § 18.29.16B4. atha dāni bhikṣū (Nom. sg.) utpīḍito bhavati, ... § 18.45.17A5. ete bhikṣu (Nom. pl.) sārthena sārddham adhvānaṃ gacchaṃti, ... § 18.53.17B3. tasya bhikṣusya sumanāphullāni nāsikye dadiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ, ... § 19.2.17B4. te dāni bhikṣuḥ (Nom. pl.) prakīrṇṇakaṃ praśvāsaṃ karonti § 19.21.18B1. mā anye bhikṣū na paśyeṃsu § 19.30.18B5. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandanto praśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyaṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropitako § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā āgacchiya uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khāyitaṃ § 20.2.19A6. satyaṃ bhikṣu (Voc.) evaṃ nāma ...? § 20.2.19A6. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyāṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropito 416 § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādantā ekānte niṣaṇṇā āsanti pravātagandhikena mukhena § 20.5.19B1. kiṃ ete bhikṣavo (Voc.) bhikṣū ekānte āsanti kalahitakā viya manye? § 20.5.19B1. bhikṣū āhaṃsu § 20.5.19B1. tato ete bhikṣavo ekānte āsanti pravātagandhikena mukhena § 20.11.19B6. atha dāni bhikṣū āraṇyake śeyyāsane prativasanti ... § 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati ... upādhyāyācāryāṇām vā agrato vṛddhatarakānām vā bhikṣūṇāṃ agrato dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 20.19.20A4. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandati, paśyati dantapoṇaṃ, cchorayitavyo § 23.4.4.21B1. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, ... § 23.2.21A5. kiṃ ime bhikṣu (Voc. pl.) vihārakā oddriṇṇakā ... apratisaṃskṛtā? § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave (Voc. pl.) vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo ...? § 24.11.22A6. etasya dāni bhikṣusya gocaraṃ praviśantasya adhvānamārggagatasya vā ... § 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ, mukhaṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya pātraṃ gṛhṇiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 27.2.23B5. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, evaṃ ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhasi (≒ § 28.2.24A2) § 29.3.24A7. bhagavān tān bhikṣūn āmantrayati § 31.3.25B2. ete dāni bhikṣu āgantukā {ā}gacchanti, sarvvehi ... § 31.7.25B5. sāye vāsôpagatā bhavanti, taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā § 31.28.26B2. atha dāni āgantukā bhikṣū vihāra āgatā bhavanti, ... § 31.37.27A3. te bhikṣu (Nom. pl.) vāṇijakasya sārthavāhasya parinditavyā § 33.2.27B7. satyaṃ bhikṣava (Voc.) ṣaḍvarggikāḥ, evaṃ nāma ... § 33.4.28A1. kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirā bhikṣū ālapitavyā? § 33.5.28A1. kathaṃ bhagavāṃ, sthavirehi bhikṣūhi navakā bhikṣū ālapitavyā? § 33.6.28A2. eṣo dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā śabdāpayati, ... § 33.10.28A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya <mātā vā> pitā vā bhaginī vā śabdāpayati, ... § 33.12.28A5. bhikṣū (Nom. sg.) vā upāsakam vā dānapatim vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati § 35.3.29A2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya kiṃci brāhmaṇaparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, ... § 36.3.29B2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kiñcit kāryam bhavati, ... § 37.3.30A2. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya kiṃci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryam bhavati, ... § 38.2.30A5. etaṃ dāni bhikṣusya āryaparṣāye kāryam bhavati, ... § 39.16.31B4. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ (Acc. pl.) pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ; vgl. § 39.28.32A6. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, vihāraṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ āraṇyakāṃ bhikṣūṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 40.1.32B3. āgantukā bhikṣū āgatāḥ § 40.2.32B3. bhagavān āha “satyaṃ bhikṣavo (Voc.) NandanOpanandanā ...?” (= § 47.2. 40B4, § 48.2.41A5) § 41.2.33B4. bhagavān āha “satyaṃ bhikṣavo NandanOpanandanā ṣaḍvarggikā ca ...” § 40.2.32B4. āgantukānāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ gaṇo § 40.7.32B7. bhikṣūṇāṃ hastodakasya ... karakā ca pūrayitavyā § 40.16.33B1. atha dāni bhikṣū cīvarakarmma karoṃti ... § 41.1.33B3. bhikṣu (Nom. pl.) āgacchanti pādadhovanāya § 41.1.33B4. te dāni bhikṣu (Nom. pl.) paśyanti ( = § 41.2.33B6) § 41.3.33B7. bhagavān dāni bhikṣūn āmantrayati § 41.11.34A7. bhikṣū dāni bhagavantam āhaṃsu § 41.21.35A4. syād vo bhikṣavo evam asyâ<syā>d § 41.23.35A6. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva pādāṃ dhovantena ... āsiṃcitavyaṃ § 41.25.35B2. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā ... dhovituṃ § 41.29.35B6. yadi tahiṃ koci bhikṣu bhavati navatarako, so vaktavyo “udakaṃ āsiñcihi” tti § 41.32.36A1. atha dāni hemantakālo bhavati, bhikṣuḥ paśyati “ko bhūyo dhoviṣyatî?”ti § 42.2.36A2. āgatā bhikṣū dvāraṃ yācanti 417 § 42.2.36A3. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣu (Nom. pl. masc.) sannipatitāḥ § 42.3.36A4. te dāni bhikṣu (Nom. pl. masc.) ... praviṣṭā § 42.4.36A6. bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikāḥ (= § 42.4.36A7, § 42.5.36A7, § 45.2.39B4, § 46.2. 40A5) § 42.4.36A7. ete dāni bhikṣū § 42.15.37A1. na ... vṛddhatarakaṃ vā bhikṣuṃ laṃghayantena gantavyaṃ § 42.19.37A3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi § 42.25.37B2. bhikṣu (Nom. pl. masc.) jarādurbbalā vā vyādhidurbbalā vā bhavanti § 42.29.37B5. navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirāṇāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ kāyaparicaryā karttavyā § 42.29.37B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati navakehi bhikṣūhi uccahantehi snāyituṃ § 42.31.37B6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣū snātā bhavanti § 43.1.38A2. kim iyaṃ bhikṣavo bhāṇḍaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ tiṣṭhati? § 43.14.38B2. eṣo bhikṣu dhovanikā vā <rajanikā vā> karttukāmo bhavati, ... § 44.1.38B6. saṃbahulā bhikṣū pratisaṃkrama<ṃ>ti § 44.1.38B6. aparo ca bhikṣuḥ virātre ... nirddhāvito bhavati § 44.2.39A1. śabdāpayatha taṃ bhikṣuṃ § 44.2.39A1. evaṃ ca tvaṃ bhikṣu{ḥ} (Voc. sg.) cīvarakaṃ ... acchosi § 44.4.39A1. ete dāni saṃbahulā {saṃbahulā} bhikṣūḥ ekahi vihārake pratikramanti, ... § 44.4.39A2. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣūhi muktakaṃ cīvaraṃ sthapayituṃ § 44.6.39A3. bhikṣu virātrakāle ... nirddhāvati § 44.6.39A4. aparejjukāto bhikṣū (Nom. sg.) kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya cīvarakāṇi mārggati § 45.6.39B7. te bhikṣū uddhārakaṃ karttukāmā bhavanti § 45.7.40A2. eṣo bhikṣu vikāle pratikramati, ... § 46.6.40B1. bhikṣu cīvarakāṇāṃ dayârthaṃ anyaṃ leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ prāvaritukāmo bhavati § 47.4.40B6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā antaragharaṃ praviśantena cīvaraṃ kaḍḍhantena praviśituṃ § 47.8.41A1. bhikṣusya yatnaṃ karentasya § 48.5.41A7. bhikṣusya viśrambhakulaṃ bhavati § 48.6.41B1. atha dāni aśrāddhakulaṃ bhavati bhikṣusya vā aviśrambhakulaṃ bhavati, ... § 48.7.41B2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati § 48.7.41B3. na vā bhikṣusya viśrambhakulaṃ bhavati § 48.9.41B5. bhikṣusya yatnaṃ karentasya ... § 49.1.42A2. ye dāni bhikṣū ... anuyuktā viharanti § 49.4.42A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā paścācchramaṇo praveśituṃ § 49.5.42A7. eṣo dāni bhikṣu upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā paścācchramaṇo gacchati § 49.6.42B2. eṣo ca dāni bhikṣu <ta>sya (?) sārddhevihārī vā antevāsī vā paścāc- chramaṇaṃ praveśe{n}ti § 49.7.42B3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāṃ vindhāpayitukāmo bhavati ... § 49.7.42B5. bhikṣusya ātmano āhāraparyeṣṭiṃ paryeṣamāṇasya vikālo bhavati § 51.10.44A5. eṣā strī upaviṣṭikā āsati. bhikṣūn paśyiyāṇaṃ uttheti, ... § 52.3.44B2. eṣo dāni bhikṣu niśrayakaraṇīyo bhavati, ... § 53.1.45A2. te dāni bhikṣū andhakāre prahāṇe upaviśaṃti ukkhalantā prakkhalantā § 53.8.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā pracalāyati, na kṣamati so ’dhyupekṣituṃ (≒ § 55.6.46B7) § 53.9.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣu śrāddhako bhavati, ... § 53.17.45B6. mā navakā bhikṣu (Nom. pl.) sahasā viprakaṭa utthiheṃsu § 54.1.46A1. te dāni bhikṣuḥ (Nom. pl.) prahāṇe pracalāyaṃti § 54.3.46A2. te ... yaṣṭī vārentā yo yeva bhikṣu pracalāyati taṃ yeva kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhananti, pāde vā āhananti § 54.3.46A2. te dāni bhikṣu (Nom. pl.) viheṭhiyantā ārāvaṃ muñca<ṃ>ti § 55.3.46B5. te dāni bhikṣū viheṭhayamānā ārāvaṃ muñcanti 418  § 54.8.46A4. ete dāni bhikṣuḥ (Nom. pl.) pracalāyanti, nâpi kṣamati adhyupekṣituṃ § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi (Loc. pl.) yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ § 55.1.46B2. te dāni bhikṣu{ṃ} (Nom. pl.) prahāṇasmiṃ yaṣṭiṃ vārayantā śītena kilamma<ṃ>ti § 56.1.47A3. yogācārāṃ bhikṣuṃ (Acc. pl.; vgl. BHSG § 12.55) śabdena vyābahanti § 57.1.47B1. yogācārāṃ bhikṣūṃ śabdena vyābahanti (= § 59.1.48A6) § 61.1.49A2. yogācārāṃ bhikṣūn śabdena vyābahanti (≒ § 62.2.49B7) § 57.5.47B3. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “anekāyo ...” § 57.5.47B3. bhikṣū (Nom. sg.) vā jānanto vā ajānanto vā gṛhītvā gaccheya § 57.8.47B6. atha dāni vṛddhatarakā āsanti, bhikṣū (Nom. sg.) ca {ā}gantukāmo bhavati, ... § 57.10.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, ... § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgacchati, hastena grīvā parimarditavyā § 58.4.48A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāsikā āgacchati, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ § 58.5.48A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgato bhavati, grīvā marditavyā § 58.6.48A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya ukkāsikā āgacchati, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ § 59.4.48A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya anābhogena kṣīvikā āgacchati vinodayitavyaṃ ... § 59.5.48B1. atha dāni bhikṣusya kṣīvikā āgacchati, vinodayitavyā (≒ § 59.6.48B2, § 59.7. 48B3) § 60.5.48B6. atha dāni bhikṣu bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, ... § 61.4.49A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇam upaviṣṭasya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... § 61.4.49A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, ... (= § 61.6.49A6) § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya bhūyo bhūyo vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... § 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayi- tavyā ... § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... (= § 61.8.49B1) § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya antaraghare vā upaviṣṭasya puno puno vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, utthiya gantavyaṃ § 62.7.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno vātakarmma āgacchati, ... (= § 62.9.50A5, § 62.10.50A6; ≒ § 62.8.50A4, § 62.11.50A7) § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto parapratibaddhāye jīvikāye ... § 62.5.50A2. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇaśālāyām upaviṣṭasya vātakarmma āgacchati, ... § 62.7.50A3. atha dāni bhikṣu na pāreti saṃprajāna vātakarmma karttuṃ, ... § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya sārthena sārddhaṃ gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, ... usw. bhikṣuṇikā~ (BHS) “Nonne” § 18.40.17A3. anekāye bhikṣuṇikā upaviṣṭā bhaveya bhikṣuṇī~ (BHS, SWTF) ⇒ pāpa-bhikṣuṇī~ § 5.5.6B1. bhikṣu bhikṣuṇī upāsako ’pāsikā āgantuko gamiko (≒ § 6.5.7B2) § 8.7.9A4. caṃḍavidhavāye sthūlakumārīye paṇḍakasya asukāye bhikṣuṇīye bhikṣuṇī-upāśraya~# “Wohnsitz von Nonnen” ☞ § 18.40, Anm. 1 § 18.40.17A2. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇī-upāśraye gatāgatasya varccakuṭiṃ praviśituṃ bhikṣu-parṣā~# “Mönchsversammlung”; vgl. SWTF, s.v. bhikṣu-pariṣad; BHSD, s.v. parṣā ⇒ parṣā~, ārya-parṣā~, kṣatriya-parṣā~, gṛhapati-parṣā~, tīrthika-parṣā~, brāhmaṇa-parṣā~ § 20.4.19A7. bhagavān mahatīye bālakinīye bhikṣuparṣāye (Hs. °paryāye) dharmman deśayati bhikṣu-saṃgha~ “Mönchsgemeinde” ⇒ saṃgha~ § 1.1.1B1. dāyakadānapatī pṛcchanti: “ārya kiṃ samagro bhikṣusaṃgho?” (≒ § 4.1.4A6, § 5.1.6A5, § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7) § 1.11.2A4. bhikṣusaṃgho tāva poṣadhaṃ kariṣyati § 2.1.2B1. samagraṃ (Hs. samayaṃ) ca bhikṣusaṃgham vandiṣyāmaḥ § 2.1.2B1. te dāni pṛcchanti “ārya samagro bhikṣusaṃgho?” (≒ § 3.1.3A6) § 4.7.4B4. bhikṣusaṃgho tena nimantrito § 4.7.4B6. bhante etaṃ sidhyati. praviśati bhikṣusaṃgho 419  § 43.3.38A3. tena saṃghasya anugraho sādhayitavyo, bhikṣusaṃgho pariveṣāpayitavyo § 43.4.38A3. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃghena bhuktaṃ bhavati ... § 53.7.45A6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho prahāṇe upaviṣṭo bhavati, ... § 62.2.49B6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho upaviṣṭo bhavati, ... usw. bhitti~ § 13.15.12B6. vihāro opasvediko bhavati, mañcā bhitti<yo> mocetvā pratipādikā dātavyāḥ § 14.4.13A4. mañcā bhittiyo mocetvā pratipādakā dātavyā, yathā prāṇakehi dīpikāhi vā na khajjeyā § 14.7.13A6. mañcāḥ pratipādakehi sthāpayitavyā bhittito muktāḥ § 14.7.13A7. yaṃ tatra śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ ... pīṭhasya upari sthāpayitavyaṃ cīvaravaṃśe sthāpayitavyaṃ bhittito muktaṃ (“mit Abstand von der Wand”) § 14.16.13B4. maṃcā pratipādakehi sthā<payi>tavyā bhittito muktaṃ § 17.8.15A2. anyehi tāvad yā bhitti (Nom. pl.) ollāye gṛhītakāyo tāyo śāṭayitavyāyo § 21.6.20B3. kaṭhinaṃ samvaṭ<ṭ>iyāṇaṃ bhittīye dve kīlakā nikhaniya rajjue bandhiya tahiṃ ukkacayitavyaṃ § 23.3.21A5. jyeṣṭhako nāma vihārako, bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, ulloko bhavati prapāṇḍaro, bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā § 23.3.21A6. madhyamako nāma vihārako, ... bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā, ... § 23.3.21A6. na haỿva bhitti kṛtaparikarmmā. evaṃ kanīyasako § 24.1.22A1. adrākṣīd ... vihārakā<nā>ṃ pakkakheṭena vā pakkasiṃghāṇakena bhittīyo vināśitāyo siṃghāṇakavarttīhi lambantīhi § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo pakkakheṭena pakka- siṃghāṇakena varttīhi lambantīhi? § 24.3.22A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā kṛtakarmmāyāṃ vā akṛtakarmmāyāṃ vā bhittīyaṃ kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakam vā cchorayituṃ § 47.1.40B3. sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittiyo (Hs. bhintiyo) ghasantā gacchanti § 47.9.41A2. sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittī (Nom. sg.) bhavati varjayitavyā § 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... sudhāpāṇḍulepanāyo bhittīyo ghasaṃtā upaviśaṃti § 48.2.41A5. sudhāpāṇḍulepanāhi bhittīhi (Loc. pl.) ghasaṃtā praviśatha § 48.7.41B2. nâpi kṣamati antaraghare praviṣṭena sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittī ghasatena atikramituṃ √bhid ⇒ daṇḍāśani-bhejja~ bhintiyo für bhittiyo : § 47.1.40B3 bhinna~ § 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ ... vātamaṇḍalikāye āgacchiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno kapālānāṃ rāśiṃ kṛtvā bhiṣaṅka~ ⇒ mahābhiṣaṅka~ bhaikṣitavyaṃ für bhikṣitavyaṃ : § 31.8.25B6 bhaiṣajya~ ⇒ cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śayyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~ § 18.53.17B3. āyuṣman imasya bhaiṣajyasya gandho yādṛśo uccārasya § 19.42.19A4. imaṃ khalu buddhaprajñaptaṃ bhaiṣajyaṃ. piba yadi jīvitukāmo ’si bhukta~ ⇒ √bhuj § 39.1.30B7. bhukta<ṃ> pi (oder lies: “bhukt’ api”) amhehi § 43.4.38A3. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃghena bhuktaṃ bhavati ... § 49.1.42A2. so ... mahātmehi kulehi ipsitānnāni bhuktā (lies: bhuktvā) ... § 49.1.42A4. āyuṣman, kuto me ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāni (= § 49.2.42A5) § 49.7.42B5. “bhuktaṃ na ’bhuktan” ti anyasya haste pātraṃ datvā, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ § 50.9.43B5. atha dāni so jalpati “āyuṣman, bhuṃja tvaṃ. bhuktaṃ mayê”ti bhuktāvin~ (BHS) “gegessen habend” § 8.8.9A5. bhuktāvisya (Hs. °viśya) pātraṃ apakarṣitavyaṃ apakkāraṃ ca § 49.1.42A3. yathâpi dāni nagarakulopakena pityakena sārddhaṃ praviṣṭasya ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāvisya | (Hs. °visyā) bhuktāviśya für °visya : § 8.8.9A5 420 √bhuj, bhuñja- ⇒ bhukta~, bhuktāvin~, bhuñjantaka~, bhoje-, pari-√bhuj § 4.2.4A6. so dāṇi paścād āgacchiyāṇa bhuṃjiyāṇa saṃkṣiptena dakṣiṇām ādiśiya ... § 4.13.5A6. nâpi kṣamati ... dvāraṃ paśyiya layyalayāye bhuṃjiyāṇa utthihiya gantuṃ § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu odanasampattir vvā āgamaṃtena bhuṃjitavyaṃ, vyañjanasampattir vvā āgamaṃtena bhuñjitavyaṃ § 4.13.5A6. na bhuñjitvā hastaṃ nikṣipiya āsitavyaṃ § 5.11.7A1. na kṣamati dvitīyasthavireṇa hantahantāye bhuñjiyāṇaṃ “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ § 5.11.7A2. odanasampatti āgamayantena bhuñjitavyaṃ. vyañjana-sampattim vā āgamayantena bhuñjitavyaṃ § 6.11.8A2. na kṣamati labdhālabdhaṃ hantahantāye bhuñjiya “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ § 8.8.9A5. piṇḍapāta upanāmayitavyo bhuñjantasya pānīyaṃ vāritavyaṃ § 11.13.11A3. sāṃghikaṃ śayanāsanaṃ mahantaṃ bhavati, uparito bhuṃjitavyaṃ ... § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ, mā naṃ ḍhossā vā viḍā vā vātaputrā vā bhuṃjeṃsu § 31.27.26B2. āyuṣman, mā piṇḍāya praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha (≒ § 31.30.26B5) § 39.1.30B7. evaṃ yūyaṃ atyanukālye gaṇḍīṃ āhaniya bhuñjatha § 39.2.31A1. pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍi āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjatha § 39.3.31A1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... bhuñjituṃ § 39.5.31A3. na dāni kṣamati ... bhuñjituṃ § 39.8.31A5. grāmāntikehi gaṇḍīṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ bhuñjitavyaṃ § 39.13.31B2. yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgatā bhavanti, tato bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 39.25.32A3. yadi tāva grāmāntikā āgatā bhavanti, bhuñjitavyaṃ § 39.18.31B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjituṃ § 39.21.32A1. atha dāni nâgacchanti, deśakāle gaṇḍiṃ āhaniya cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjitavyaṃ § 39.28.32A6. gaṇḍīyaṃ āhatāyaṃ stūpaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ § 49.1.42A2. so ... mahātmehi kulehi ipsitānnāni bhukt<v>ā ... § 49.7.42B4. āsa tvaṃ, sahitakā{ṃ} bhuñjiya nirddhāviṣyāmaḥ § 49.7.42B4. ubhayehi bhuñjiya nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 49.8.42B7. ārocayitavyaṃ “amukena upādhyāyo nimantrito. amukena (lies: amukasya?) vā antaraghare bhuṃja” ti § 50.7.43B3. yadi upakaṭṭho kālo bhavati, na dāni tena bhuñjantena āsitavyaṃ § 50.9.43B5. yaṃ kālaṃ āgato bhavati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ sahitakehi bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 50.9.43B5. atha dāni so jalpati “āyuṣman, bhuṃja tvaṃ. bhuktaṃ mayê”ti § 50.9.43B5. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, bhuṃja tvaṃ. nâhaṃ bhuṃjiṣyaṃ.” § 50.10.43B6. tatra yeva panthāto uvvattiyāṇaṃ sahitakehi bhuñjitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B7. piṇḍapātanīhārakena yatraỿva pānīyaṃ paśyati, tatraỿva bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 52.3.44B2. nâpi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā bhuṃjantānāṃ tena dāni uṣṭhihitvā āsitavyaṃ § 52.7.44B6. atha dāni āha “upādhyāyācārya, bhuñjāhi”, yadi tāva <kāṃkṣati>, paribhuñjitavyaṃ usw. bhuñjana~ (Pā) “Essen” ☞ § 39.15, Anm. 1 ⇒ pibana~ § 39.15.31B3. yadi tāvat sakāle āgacchanti, bhuñjanāya dātavyo § 39.27.32A4. yadi tāva kāle āgacchanti, bhuñjanāye dātavyaṃ bhuñjantaka~# “essend”; < bhuñjanta + Suffix ka; vgl. BHSG § 22.29 § 4.13.5A6. na dāni saṃghasthavireṇa bhuṃjantakenaỿva utthāya āsanāto gantavyaṃ, “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya bhurja~# “Birkenrinde”; vgl. Skt. bhūrja ⇒ bhurjaka~ § 13.17.13A1. vihāro ... dhūpetavyo kuṣṭhena bhurjena (lies: bhūr°?) vā saktuhi vā bhurjaka~# “Birkenrinde”; vgl. Skt. bhūrja ☞ § 12.10, Anm. 9 ⇒ bhurja~ § 12.10.11B6. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ettakaṃ 421  prāvaraṇaṃ tato likhitavyaṃ bhurjake (lies: bhūr°?) phalake vā paṭṭikāyām vā √bhū ⇒ abhi-sam-bhāvaya-, abhi-saṃ-bhuṇa-, bhava-, bhāvaya-, bhūta~, bho-, su-bhāvita~ § 3.5.3B2. bhante katamâdya? ... katamā puna hiyo ’bhūṣi? bhūta~ ⇒ a-kālī-bhūta~, kṣīrodakī-bhūta~ § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti bhūtapūrvvam “früher; in früherer Zeit” § 41.12.34B1. bhūtapūrvvam bhikṣavo atītam adhvānaṃ eta<r>hiṃ ca nagaraṃ Vārāṇasī Kāśijanapado bhūmaka~ ⇒ *dvi-bhūmika (Hs. dvi-bhūmaka) bhūmi~ § 19.18.18A7. atha dāni dvibhūmiko bhavati, dvitīyāyāṃ bhūmiyaṃ tathā yeva ghaṭako sthāpayitavyo. tṛbhūmiko bhavati, tṛtīyāyāṃ bhūmau tathā yyeva sthāpayitavyaṃ § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyaṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropitako § 20.2.19A6. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyāṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropito § 21.2.20A7. adrākṣīd ... anyataraṃ bhikṣuṃ bhūmau astariya cīvaraṃ sīvantaṃ § 21.3.20B1. evan taṃ tvaṃ bhūmīya astarīya cīvaraṃ sivayasi § 23.3.21A5. jyeṣṭhako nāma vihārako, bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā § 23.3.21A6. kin ti dāni kanīyasako? bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā § 23.4.1.21A7. catvāri pratipādakā karttavyā, mā bhūmī (vgl. BHSG § 10.28) khanīya{ṃ}ti § 24.6.22A3. kṛtakarmmā bhūmi bhavati, na kṣamati bhūmīye cchorayituṃ § 24.6.22A4. atha dāni uppaṃsulo vihāro bhavati, bhūmīye cchoriya pādena mardditavyo § 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya kheṭa bādhati, upānahapuṭe kṛtvā bhūmi{ṃ}ye mardi- tavyaṃ § 24.11.22A6. atha dāni kṣudro kheṭo, upāṃsulā ca bhūmī (vgl. BHSG § 10.28) bhavati, ... § 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ sthavitaṃ. tan dāni vātamaṇḍalikāye āgacchiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno kapālānāṃ rāśiṃ kṛtvā § 25.6.22B4. nâpi kṣamati bhūmīye ghasantena <nirmmādayituṃ> § 42.7.36B2. bhūmi astaritavyā upalehi vā pakviṭṭikāya vā § 42.8.36B3. bhūmito arddhahasta upasthalatarikā karttavyā § 44.1.38B7. evaṃ bhūmīye patito § 44.6.39A4. ekaṃ dvitīyaṃ vā tṛtīyam vā kṛṣiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ patitaṃ § 44.6.39A4. tatraỿva sarvvaṃ bhūmīye anupraviṣṭo bhavati § 55.2.46B4. (geṇḍuka~ ...) tādṛśo karttavyo yo bhūmīyaṃ āpaṭito yugamātraṃ uppaṭati bhūmi-astāra~ ⇒ bhūmy-astāra~ bhūmika~ ⇒ tṛ-bhūmika~, *dvi-bhūmika bhūmy-astāra~#, bhūmy-āstara~#, bhūmi-astāra~# “mit Matten ausgelegt”; vgl. Pā. bhumm- attharaṇa (“Matte”) ☞ § 24.9, Anm. 2 ⇒ a-stara-, astaraṇa~, astaraṇika~, astarikā~, āstaraṇa~ § 24.9.22A5. atha dāni bhūmyastāro bhavati, bhājane karttavyaṃ kuntake vā alābuke vā vaṃśatthālikāyāṃ vā § 40.15.33A6. prahāṇe vārentena yadi bhūmyāstaro bhavati, ... § 57.4.47B2. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, na kṣamati sopānahena pādena prahāṇaṃ upaviśituṃ § 57.7.47B5. atha dāni akṛto bhūmi-astāro bhavati, sa-upānahena prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśi- tavyaṃ bhūmy-āstara~ ⇒ bhūmy-astāra~ bhūyo# “weiter, wieder, erneut”; < Skt. bhūyas; vgl. Pā. bhiyyo ⇒ puno § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... dahiya bhūyo vā thapayitavyāyo § 19.24.18B3. tato vikāle bhūyo praveśitavyaṃ § 24.4.22A3. kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ ... ātape vā dātavyo {yo} bhūyo praveśayitavyo § 29.6.24B3. āmuhūrttakaṃ viśramiya bhūyo svastikaparyaṅkena niṣīditavyaṃ § 40.16.33B1. āha “āyuṣman, dehi bhūyo. ānīya dāsyāmi” tti § 41.32.35B7. pādehi dhovitehi caṃkramanti bhūyo dhovitavyā 422  § 41.32.36A1. atha dāni hemantakālo bhavati, bhikṣuḥ paśyati “ko bhūyo dhoviṣyatî?”ti § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohanati, ... parivarttiyāṇaṃ bhūyo nidhyāyati, jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati”, gantavyaṃ § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti. ... bhūyo prasārayati, jānitavyaṃ “na dāhiti eṣā” tti § 51.10.44A5. eṣā strī ... bhikṣūn paśyiyāṇaṃ ... utthiyāṇaṃ bhūyo upaviśati, jānitavyaṃ “na eṣā dāsyati.” § 52.6.44B5. suvihita, apratigrāhyo eṣo jano. mā bhūyo eteṣāṃ tena pratigṛhṇīhasi § 55.5.46B6. atha khalu bhūyo geṇḍukam āsthapayitvā acchaṭikāye utthāpayitavyo § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo kāso āgacchati, bāhirato nirddhāpiya kāsitavyaṃ § 58.4.48A4. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo ukkāsikā āgacchati, ... gantavyaṃ § 60.4.48B6. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo khajjati, khajjanako bhavati, prahāṇasyâmantriya gantavyaṃ § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya bhūyo bhūyo vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... bhūri~ “reichlich, groß” § 4.18.5B7. praviśya vṛddhiye varāye bhūrīye (lies: °riye [m.c.]) (vs) *bhūri-medhas~ “erkenntnisreich”; vgl. Pā. bhūri-medhasa ☞ § 4.18, Anm. 3 § 4.18.5B7. yaṃ vibhavadhanadhānyena sambhavo bhūrimedhaso (Gen. sg. von °medhas; Hs. °mecasā) (vs) bhūrja~, bhūrjaka~ ⇒ bhurja~, bhurjaka~ bhṛtaka~ “Diener” § 14.6.13A5. samantena vihārasya tāva pratikṛty’ eva agniharaṇī karttavyā bhṛtakehi ca karmmakarehi ca bhejja~ ⇒ daṇḍāśani-bhejja~ bhaikṣa~ § 4.20.6A3. pātreṇa bhaikṣaṃ abhisāharitvā (vs) bhaiṣajya-piṣaṇaka~# “zum Zerreiben von Arzeneien dienend” ☞ § 43.10, Anm. 1 § 43.10.38A7. etā bhaiṣajyapiṣaṇikā śilā na dāni kārya kṛtvā yathā yeva pratiliptikā sthapetavyā bho- (BHS) < Skt. bhava-ti; vgl. BHSG, S. 224a, s.v. bhū (2) bho-ti § 4.15.5B2. ato śreyataro bhotu kumāro kulavarddhano (vs) § 6.13.8A4. ato śreyataro bhava{ṃ}tu (lies: bhotu) kumāro kulavarddhano (vs) bhoga~ ⇒ mahā-bhoga~, paribhoga~ § 12.14.12A2. vaktavyo “na eṣo tava kiñcit bhogārthaṃ vadiṣanti (für uddiśīyati?). ...” bhogin~ ⇒ kāma-bhogin~ bhojana~ ⇒ praṇīta-bhojana~ § 4.12.5A4. bhojanaṃ dīyati, mahanto piṇḍo parigṛhīto bhavati, ... § 4.18.6A1. bhoja<ne>nā (< [m.c.] °nena) vastupālā satkṛtā pratimānitā (vs) § 49.1.42A3. yathâpi dāni nagarakulopakena pityakena sārddhaṃ praviṣṭasya ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāvisya § 49.1.42A4. āyuṣman, kuto me ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāni (= § 49.2.42A5) bhoje- (Pā; vgl. Mvu I 309.10. bhojehi) “speisen”; < Skt. bhojayati § 4.18.5B7. śīlavā tatra bhojeyā saṃyatāṃ brahmacāriṇo (vs) bhr / bh ⇒ bh / bhr √bhraṃś ⇒ bhraṣṭa~ √bhram ⇒ bhrānta~, bhrāmaya- bhrama~ ⇒ udaka-bhrama~, ulka-bhrama~, pranāḍikā-bhrama~, praṇāli-bhrama~ bhraṣṭa~ “verschwunden, vergangen” ☞ § 18.2, Anm. 4 zu den idiomatischen Ausdruck naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ ([Ihre Asketenwürde] ist verschwunden, vergangen”) § 18.2.15B1. jano dāni odhyāyati “ ... naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ. kuto eṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ?” § 20.6.19B3. naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ. kuto imeṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ? (= § 20.7.19B4, § 34.1.28B1, § 34.2.28B2, § 35.1.29A1, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 36.2.29B2, § 37.1.29B7, § 37.2.30A1, § 51.1.44A1; ≒ § 19.2.17B4) bhraṣṭikā~# “Herd, Ofen”; vgl. Skt. bhraṣṭra (“Röstpfanne”), bhraṣṭraka (“Röstpfanne”), bhrāṣṭra (“Herd” [Schmidt, Nachtr., s.v.]); vgl. auch CDIAL 9656, 9684 423  § 42.8.36B2. bh<r>aṣṭikā karttavyā yena dvāraṃ (Hs. dvārā) <sāmantena?> § 42.9.36B3. yena bhraṣṭikā sāmantena {karttavyaṃ} kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.9.36B3. yadi tāva bhraṣṭikā dakṣiṇato bhavati, vāmato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.9.36B3. atha vā vāmato bhraṣṭikā bhavati, dakṣiṇato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.12.36B5. kāṣṭhaṃ bhraṣṭikāyāṃ ājuhitavyaṃ bhrātṛ~ § 4.17.5B4. istrī pi vidhavā nagnā sace ’syā daśa bhrātaro (vs) § 49.1.41B6. āyuṣmanto Nandanasya Upanandano nāma bhrātā bhrānta~ § 47.7.41A1. parivarjitavyā bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā hasti bhrānto vā ratho § 49.5.42B1. anekāye bhrānto vā hasti āgaccheya bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā ratho bhrāmaya- “schwenken” § 42.15.36B7. praviśatena na dāni kṣamati bāhā bhrāmayantena praviśituṃ M m/g ⇒ g/m m/p ⇒ p/m m / bh ⇒ bh / m m / y ⇒ rmm / ryy § 4.8.4B6. (’)tikrayiṣyati für (’)tikrami° § 12.4.11B1. varṣopanāmikā~ für °nāyikā~ (= § 12.5.11B2, § 12.19.12A5) § 12.6.11B3. saye für samaṃ § 14.1.13A1. bāhira{ṃ}ghaṭṭiyaṃ für °ṭṭimaṃ § 14.7.13A6. yuktāḥ für muktāḥ § 18.48.17A7. yā für mā § 1.13.2A6. bhāṣamāṇaṃ für bhāṣiyāṇaṃ m/v: § 49.6.42B2. paścācchravaṇaṃ für paścācchramaṇaṃ m/ś: § 14.13.13B2. aśamo für a<ṃ>śaśo m/s: § 8.5.9A1. sukhodakam für mukho° § 21.5.20B3. mūtraṃ für sū° § 42.28.37B5. sitakaṃ für mitakaṃ § 42.28.37B5. maṃcayitavyaṃ für saṃca° § 48.1.41A3. māyāśrayā für sâpāśrayā § 49.1.42A3. sukhavarṇṇao für mukha° § 55.6.46B7. abhāmayitvā für ābhāsay° -m- als Sandhikonsonant; vgl. BHSG § 4.59; RgsGr §§ 4.156~157; v. Hinüber 2001: § 272 § 41.11.34A7. na etarhi eva-m-anyadâpi eṣo etasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo makucaka~# oder makucak~#? eine Art Bettzeug oder Sitzkissen? § 14.7.13A6. yaṃ sārāsāraṃ śayyāsanaṃ amilā vā astaraṇikā vā kocakā vā {makucakā} guḍuguḍukā vā makucakā vā te grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ nāpayitavyāḥ makṣita-parimakṣita~# “ganz und gar beschmiert”; < Skt. mrakṣita ⇒ upa-makṣita~, √mrakṣ § 48.1.41A3. mañcā ... dhūlīya karddamena makṣitaparimakṣitā Magadha~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-Kośala-Kuru-Pañcāla-Ceti-... maṅgala-karaṇīya~# “Maṅgala-Zeremonie”; vgl. Skt. maṅgala-karaṇa § 4.9.5A1. kadāci maṅgalakaraṇīye atidakṣiṇaṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati, tathā yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ majja- (Pā) “fegen” (= saṃmārjati) oder “verstreichen”; < Skt. mārjati ⇒ √mṛj, mārja- § 17.6.15A2. anyehi lippitavyaṃ, anyehi majjitavyaṃ, anyehi udakaṃ pariharitavyaṃ majja- ⇒ pra-majja- mañca~ (1) “Bett” ⇒ mañcaka~, nīla-mañca~, mañca-pīṭha~ § 11.8.11A1. atha khalu dviguṇitā nāma karttavyā viśiṣṭā mañcāto vā 424  § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ondriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ utthitakāṃ ... (≒ § 16.2. 14A6) § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā paluggakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} vātātapena opūriyantā{ṃ} § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ondriṇṇakā paluggakā bhavanti, muṃjā karttitavyā, balbajā karttitavyā mañcā vuṇitavyā ... (≒ § 12.18.12A5, § 13.11.12B3, § 15.8.14A4) § 12.12.11B7. āyuṣman amuke vihārake ettakā mañcā ettakā pīṭhāḥ ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ... § 12.16.12A3. vṛddhānāñ ca mañcā prajñāpayitavyāḥ navakānāṃ pīṭhāḥ prajñāpayitavyāḥ § 13.3.12A7. mañcā pīṭhā ondriṇṇakā{ṃ} paluggakā{ṃ} utpādakā{ṃ} utthitakā{ṃ} ... § 13.11.12B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā bhagnakā bhavanti, cchinnagaṇṭhikā karttavyā § 13.15.12B6. vihāro opasvediko bhavati, mañcā bhitti<yo> mocetvā pratipādikā dātavyāḥ § 14.4.13A4. mañcā bhittiyo mocetvā pratipādakā dātavyā, yathā prāṇakehi dīpikāhi vā na khajjeyā § 14.7.13A6. mañcāḥ pratipādakehi sthāpayitavyā bhittito muktāḥ. maṃcasya upari pīṭhā sthāpayitavyā (≒ § 14.16.13B4) § 17.11.15A5. sarvvehi muñjā vā balbajā vā karttitavyā, mañcā vā vātavyā pīṭhā vātavyā § 21.9.20B5. atha dāni kaṭhinaṃ na bhavati, mañcasya vā upari cīvaraṃ pīṭhasya vā upari cīvarakaṃ kariyāṇaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 23.4.1.21A6. nâyaṃ kṣamati tahiṃ maṃcā vā pīṭhā vā praveśituṃ usw. (2) “Bank ohne Rückenlehne”# ☞ § 48.1, Anm. 1 § 48.1.41A3. mañcā ca pīṭhāṃ ca sāpāśrayā ca dārakadārikāhi pādehi marddita- parimardditā ... § 48.2.41A5. dārakadārikāhi mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca trepaśyakā ca pādehi marditavimarditā mañcaka~ “Bett” ⇒ mañca~ (1) § 12.10.11B5. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ... § 15.8.14A3. mañcakaś ca pratyavekṣitavyaḥ § 19.25.18B4. oruhantena mallakaṃ ghaṭikā vā mañcakasya ca oruhantena (lies: adhastāt?) susthapitā karttavyā § 15.9.14A4. mañcako pratipādake<hi> sthāpayitavyo § 23.6.1.21B2. kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ vinā pratipādakehi mañcakaṃ thapeti, anāpattiḥ mañcaka-sthāna~# “Bettstelle” § 19.25.18B3. sāyaṃ praveśentena kunta vā tumbakā vā śikke uvvinitvā mañcakasthāne ullapitavyaṃ mañca-pīṭha~ “Bett und Schemel” § 31.23.26A6. mañcapīṭhaṃ bisi caturasrako kuccaṃ bi<ṃ>bohanaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 31.29.26B4. mañcapīṭhaṃ bisī catu<ra>śrakaṃ kuccakaṃ bimbohanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ maṃcayitavyaṃ für saṃcayitavyaṃ : § 42.28.37B5 maṭamaṭa#, maṭamaṭāya#, maṭamaṭāye# “knack! knack!” Onomatopoetica; vgl. PW, s.v. maṭāmaṭāy-; CDIAL 9722. *maṭ ⇒ amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ, ṭaṭṭa ṭaṭṭa § 29.4.24B2. parvvāṇi āmilāyanti, nâpi kṣamati ubhayāni sandhī maṭamaṭāye prasārituṃ § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti, aṅgāni bhañjayanti maṭamaṭāya (Hs. paṭapaṭāva) phoḍenti amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ § 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa osaritvā indriyāṇi maṭamaṭa aṅgā<ni> bhañjantena yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ § 61.5.49A5. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇam upaviṣṭakena maṭamaṭāya aṅgāni bhañjituṃ § 61.7.49A7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gocaraṃ vā praviśantena antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena maṭamaṭāye aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhituṃ § 61.8.49B1. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā agrato maṭamaṭāye aṃgāni bhaṃjantena vijṛmbhituṃ maḍamaḍaṃ ⇒ amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ, maṭamaṭa maṇika~ “großer Wassertopf” ⇒ māṇikā~, odana-mānikā~ § 40.5.32B5. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya, golakā vā maṇikā vā ... karakīyo vā <pūrayitavyā?> maṇḍakaṃ für bhaṇḍakaṃ : § 43.16.38B5 425 maṇḍapa~ ⇒ pānīya-maṇḍapa~ maṇḍala-māḍa~ (BHS) “Rundhalle, Pavillon” ☞ § 1.5, Anm. 5 § 1.5.1B5. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kahim bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā? § 1.7.1B6. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... amukahiṃ bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā § 2.5.2B5. kahiṃ bhaviṣyati upasthānaśālāyām vā prahāṇaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā ucchedanake vā niṣadyāya vā? § 3.6.3B4. adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... kahiṃ bhaviṣyati prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthāna- śālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā ...? § 21.9.20B5. prahāṇaśālāyām vā upasthānaśālāyām vā maṇḍalamāḍe vā pradeśakaṃ gomayena upalimpiya cīvarakaṃ sīvitavyaṃ Matsa für Matsya : § 62.1.49B3 Matsya~ (Hs. Matsa); vgl. Pā, Pkt. Maccha ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-...-Vatsa-Matsya-Śūrasena- Śibi-Daśārṇa-Aśvaki-Avanti~ Mathurā~ § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Mathurāyāṃ Yamunā √mad ⇒ pra-majja- madana-phala~ “Frucht von Vanguiera spinosa” oder im allgemeinen “berauschende Frucht” ☞ § 62.4, Anm. 3 § 62.4.50A1. nâpi kṣamati bilvāni vā madanaphalāni vātakopakāni phalāni khādituṃ kalāyaṃ {vā} satilapallavaṃ vā madhya~ ⇒ saṃgha-madhye § 11.8.11A1. samantena sūtreṇa siviyāṇaṃ tato madhyeṇa dīrghasūtrāṇi dātavyāni § 19.4.17B6. mallatalakā khannā{ṃ} khanitavyā, madhye cchidrakaṃ karttavyaṃ § 20.16.20A3. nâpi kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya madhyena pāṭiyāna jihvāṃ nilehituṃ kāmabhoginā yathā § 31.5.25B4. atha dāni vyāḍabhayaṃ vā corabhayaṃ vā bhavati, vṛddhaṃ bālaṃ madhye kṛtvā gantavyaṃ § 31.6.25B5. yadi dāni grāmasya nagarasya vā madhyena gantavyaṃ bhavati, ... § 34.1.28B1. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā āgacchiya teṣāṃ madhye niṣaṇṇāḥ (≒ § 36.1.29A7) § 35.1.28B7. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā āgacchiyāṇaṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā § 37.1.29B7. te dāni ... NandanOpanandanā teṣāṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ madhye niṣaṇṇāḥ § 34.1.28B1. ime pi śramaṇakā āgacchiya madhye niṣaṇṇāḥ (≒ § 34.2.28B2, § 35.1.28B7, § 36.2.29B2, § 37.1.29B7) § 35.2.29A2. ime pi śramaṇakā āgacchiyāṇa madhye niṣaṇṇakā § 36.1.29A7. ime pi śramaṇakā madhye āgacchiyāṇaṃ niṣaṇṇāḥ § 34.2.28B2. yūyaṃ dāni gacchiya teṣāṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā § 35.2.29A1. yūyaṃ dāni teṣāṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā § 37.2.30A1. yūyaṃ dāṇi gacchiyāṇa teṣāṃ madhye niṣaṇṇā § 38.2.30A5. vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācāryā! saṃghasya madhye (Hs. °dhyaṃ) me kiñcit kāryaṃ. āllīyāmi mā allīyāmi?” tti usw. madhyaṃ für madhye : § 38.2.30A5 madhyantikaṃ# “mittags”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. madhyantika; Pā. majjhantika § 7.5.8B3. śekhayitavyo anuśāsayitavyo kālyaṃ madhyantikaṃ sāyaṃ abhidharmmeṇa vā abhivinayena vā madhyama~ § 19.42.19A3. yadi tāva ātmanako praśvāso bhavati, purimapaścimakaṃ ca varjayitvā madhyamaṃ gṛhṇitavyo. evam tasya pratigrahaḥ § 20.8.19B4. dantakāṣṭhāni nāma trīṇi jyeṣṭhaṃ madhyamaṃ kanīyasaṃ § 20.8.19B5. jyeṣṭhaṃ nāma ṣoḍaśāṅgulāni madhyamaṃ dvādaśāṅgulāni kanīyasam 426  aṣṭāṅgulāni § 30.7.25A4. rātrīye madhyame yāme dakṣiṇena pārśvena siṃhaśeyyā kalpayitavyā § 40.15.33A7. ekena madhyama<ṃ> vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ, apareṇa praṇetavyaṃ madhyamaka~ § 23.3.21A5. vihārā nāma trīṇi. jyeṣṭhako madhyamako kanīyasako § 23.3.21A6. kin ti dāni madhyamako? madhyamako nāma vihārako, <bhūmi> bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, bhitti bhavati kṛtakarmmā, ... evaṃ madhyamako § 23.5.21B2. atha dāni madhya<mako vihāra>ko bhavati, madhyamake pi eṣo eva paryāyo ananyo adhikṛto madhyamāgāra~# (°ama-āg°) “zentrales Gebäude”? ⇒ madhyāgāra~ § 41.14.34B4. tehi dāni mārggiya mārggiya prabhūtaṃ hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ gṛhasya madhyamāgāre mahāntaṃ kūṭaṃ kṛtaṃ madhyāgāra~# (°ama-āg°) “zentrales Gebäude” (?) ⇒ madhyamāgāra~ § 41.15.34B4. so gṛhasya madhyāgāre upaviṣṭaḥ madhyuddeśa-pāṭhaka~ (°dhya-udd°) “(das Prātimokṣa) in der "Mittleren Sprache" (zwischen Prakrit und Sanskrit) rezitierend” ☞ Zwischen-Zusammenfassung, Anm. 1; S. 556f. in diesem Band ⇒ uddeśa~, ekoddeśaka~, sūtroddeśaka~ Kolophon 50B2. Ābhisamācārikāḥ samāptāḥ āryaMahāsāṃghikānāṃ Lokottaravādināṃ madhyuddeśapāṭhakānāṃ pāṭhena √man ⇒ mānita~, prati-mānita~, saṃ-√man manaapavādī für manaāpavādī : § 41.12.34B2 *manaāpa-vādin~ “gefällig redend” § 41.12.34B2. so dāni mātāpitṇāṃ pūrvvotthāyī paścānnipātī priyavādī manaāpavādī (Hs. manaapa°; jedoch wohl für manaāpacārī; ☞ § 41.12, Anm. 5) kiṃkarapariśrāvako manas~ § 4.20.6A3. pañcadhā manasi priyaṃ (Hs. prīyan) (vs) § 51.6.44A3. “cakṣur anityā yāva mano anityan.” ti sthātavyaṃ manasi-kare-#, manasi-kāre-# “bedenken”; vgl. BHS. manasi-karoti, SWTF. manasi-kṛ ⇒ kare-, kāre- § 18.25.16B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati varcakuṭīyaṃ upaviṣṭena dhyānāntaragatena vā middhāntaragatena vā uddeśaṃ vā svādhyāyam vā manasikarentena āsituṃ § 51.6.44A2. atha khalu ṣaḍāyatanaṃ manasikarentena sthātavyaṃ § 54.13.46B1. atha khalu ṣaḍāya<ta>na manasikarentena vāretavyā § 55.7.47A1. atha khalu ṣaḍāyatana manasikarentena āsitavyaṃ (für vāretavyaṃ?) manasikāra-prayukta~# “sich im Nachdenken übend” § 39.16.31B4. tatraỿva sthānacaṃkramaniṣadyāyogam anuyuktehi viharitavyaṃ uddeśa- prayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā § 39.28.32A6. ārāmehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi ... sthānacaṃkramaniṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā § 41.31.35B7. uddeśaprayuktena vā manasikāraprayuktena vā middhāntaragatena vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ cinta<ya>ntena āsituṃ manasena für mānasena : § 41.4.34A1 manuṣya~ § 1.1.1B1. bhagavān Śrāvastyāṃ viharati śāstā devānāñ ca manuṣyāṇāñ ca vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā (= § 2.1.2A7, § 3.1.3A6, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4, § 7.1.8A5, § 20.1.19A5, § 20.4.19A7, § 28.1.24A1 usw.) § 62.1.49B1. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisam- bhāvayitvā Śrāvastyāṃ viharati śāstā devānāñ ca manuṣyāṇāñ ca ... § 4.11.5A3. atha dāni so manuṣyo anācīrṇṇadāno vā bhavati, ... § 4.20.6A2. dhanadhānyapriyāṇi vā devabhāvaṃ vā manuṣyam vā (vs) § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, ... manuṣya-raha-śayyaka~# “(ein Ort, wo man) vor den Menschen verborgen schlafen kann”; vgl. BHS. manuṣya-raha-śayyāka, °sayyaka, °seyyaka (Mvu); wohl Hypersanskritismen für Pā. manussa-rāhaseyyaka (“in Verborgenheit vor den Menschen”; < *rahaseyya < *rahasiyya < 427  rahasiya < Skt. rahasya) ☞ § 39.29, Anm. 6 § 39.29.32A7. (āraṇyakā) ... vaktavyā “durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni prāntāni viviktāni vigatajanapadāni manuṣyarahaśayyakāni pratisaṃlayanasāropyāni ...” mano-karmman~# “Handlung des Gedankens, Tat mit dem Geist”; vgl. Pā. manokamma; SWTF III 327a. manaskarman § 42.5.36B1. maitraṃ manokarmmaṃ sabrahmacāriṣu dhruvaṃ pratyupasthāpayi- tavyaṃ ... mano-jña~ “schön” § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” mano-rama~ § 4.18.5B6. vibhaktabhāgaṃ ruciraṃ manoramaṃ praśastam āryehi navaṃ niveśanaṃ (vs) mantavyaṃ für gan° : § 18.25.16B3 √mantray ⇒ ā-mantraya-, upa-ni-mantraya-, ni-mantraya-, ni-mantre- manda~ “schwach” § 42.17.37A2. atha dāni agnir mmando bhavati, vṛddhehi agrato sthātavyaṃ manda-mukh~# “Kohlenbecken”; vgl. Pā. mandā-mukhi § 8.5.9A1. hemantakālo bhavati, mandamukhi prajvālayitavyā § 8.6.9A4. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... śītaṃ bhavati, mandamukhī prajvālayitavyā § 8.12.9B1. hemantakālo bhavati, mandamukhī prajvālayitavyā § 23.4.2.21A7. nâpi tahiṃ kṣamati mandamukhī prajvālayituṃ, dīpako vā praveśayituṃ § 23.6.2.21B3. mandamukhīm vā prajvāleti, anāpattiḥ. dīpaṃ vā praveśeti, anāpattiḥ manye wörtlich “ich denke” ☞ § 20.5, Anm. 1 zu die Wendung viya manye (“als ob”) § 20.5.19B1. kiṃ ete bhikṣavo bhikṣū ekānte āsanti kalahitakā viya manye? -maya~ ⇒ kāṣṭha-maya~, mṛttikā-maya~, śilā-maya~, śveta-maya~ mara- (BHS[BHSG, S. 226a], Pā) “sterben” § 31.16.26A2. ihaỿva yūyaṃ jātā ihaỿva mariṣyatha § 42.3.36A5. dhūmena ca uṣṇena ca marāma maraṇa~ ⇒ anavarāgra-jāti-jarā-maraṇa-saṃsāra-kāntāra-naraka-vidurgga~ maraṇānta~ (°raṇa-anta) “mit dem Sterben endend” § 4.16.5B3. sarvvasatvā mariṣyanti maraṇāntaṃ hi jīvitaṃ (vs) mar(d)da- “streichen, reiben; pressen, drücken; zerreiben; vermengen” ⇒ mardditaka~, marddita- parimarddita~, mardita-vimardita~, marddaya-, mardde-, pari-marda- § 13.16.12B7. atha dāni usvedako bhavati, śuddhena gomayena mardditavyaṃ § 17.6.15A1. anyehi tāva mṛttikā mardditavyā § 24.6.22A4. atha dāni uppaṃsulo vihāro bhavati, bhūmīye cchoriya pādena mardditavyo § 24.7.22A4. atha khalu cchoriyāṇa pādena marditavyaṃ § 24.9.22A5. prahāṇe āsantasya kheṭa bādhati, upānahapuṭe kṛtvā bhūmiye marditavyaṃ § 24.11.22A6. kheṭo āgacchati, cchoriya pādena marditavyo. amardiya gacchati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 24.11.22A7. cchorantako yyeva paryādānaṃ gacchati. kiṃ câpi na marddati, anāpattiḥ § 24.12.22A7. atha dāni dve janā bhavaṃti, yo navako bhavati, tena mardditavyaṃ. atha dāni navakataro śaithiliko bāhuliko vā bhavati, vṛddhatarakena marditavyaṃ § 41.1.33B3. karddamaṃ marddantā pāṃsu marddentā dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramanti § 41.2.33B5. karddamaṃ marddantā pāṃsu marddantā dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramatha § 58.5.48A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgato bhavati, grīvā marditavyā § 62.2.49B5. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena saktukāṃ kulmāṣāṃ ca (lies: vā?) mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayanti § 62.4.49B7. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktukān vā mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayitvā śvetamayena yeva khādituṃ usw. marddaya-, mardde-# “trampeln; stampfen; zerreiben”; < Skt. mardayati; Pā. maddeti ⇒ mar(d)da- § 17.8.15A3. anyehi mṛttikā marddetavyā § 24.6.22A4. (Schleim) ekasya upānahāye tale cchorayitavyaṃ dvitīyena marddayitavya 428  § 41.1.33B3. karddamaṃ marddantā pāṃsu marddentā dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramanti mardditaka~# “vermengt, gemengt”; < mardita + Suffix ka § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu<ṃ> mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ marddita-parimarddita~# “völlig zerstampft, zerdrückt” ⇒ mardita-vimardita~ § 48.1.41A3. mañcā ca pīṭhāṃ ca sāpāśrayā ca dārakadārikāhi (Hs. °ehi) pādehi marddita- parimardditā ... mardita-vimardita~# “zerstampft, zerdrückt” ⇒ marddita-parimarddita~ § 48.2.41A5. dārakadārikāhi mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca trepaśyakā ca pādehi marditavimarditā mardde- ⇒ marddaya- mala~ ⇒ akṣi-mala~ § 42.18.37A2. na dāni svedena vā malena vā usphoṣetavyo upāntake malla~ “Gefäß” ⇒ mallaka~, mallika~ § 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya ... mallaka~ “Gefäß” ⇒ cchidra-mallaka~, mallika~, malla~ § 18.31.16B5. tena uśvāsaṃ karaṃtena mallakena vā koḍikena vā cchorayitavyaṃ § 18.35.16B7. tenâpi dāni uśvāsaṃ kariya mallakena vā koḍillena vā kaṭhallena vā cchoḍiyāṇa ... § 19.25.18B3. mallakaṃ bhavati, ekānte ujjhitvā dhovitvā ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.25.18B4. oruhantena mallakaṃ ghaṭikā vā mañcakasya ca oruhantena (lies: adhastāt?) susthapitā karttavyā § 20.13.20A1. atha khalu kaṭāhake vā mallake vā koṭiyāṃ vā āviddhapuṭikāyām vā kheṭaṃ cchorayitavyaṃ § 24.5.22A3. mallakaṃ vā koṭikam vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thapetavyā, tahiṃ kheṭo karttavyo § 24.8.22A5. caṃkramaśīrṣe vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thālikā vā kuṭaṃ mallakaṃ vā thape- tavyaṃ. tahiṃ kheṭo cchorayitavyo mallaka-tala~# “dessen Boden mit einem Gefäß versehen seiend”; mallaka (“Topf, Napf, Gefäß”) + tala (“Boden”) ☞ § 18.4, Anm. 3 ⇒ malla-talaka~ § 18.4.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) mallakatalā khaḍā khaṇitavyā prapātaniśritā vā mallaka-talaka~# “einen mit einem Gefäß versehenen Boden habend”; < malla (“Gefäß”) + tala (“Boden”) ☞ § 19.4, Anm. 2 ⇒ malla-tala~ § 19.4.17B6. mallatalakā khannā{ṃ} khanitavyā, madhye cchidrakaṃ karttavyaṃ mallika~# “Topf”; vgl. Skt. Lex. = BHS. malla (“Gefäß”), Skt. mallikā (“irdenes Geschirr”) ☞ § 18.51, Anm. 3 ⇒ mallaka~, malla~ § 18.51.17B1. varccakuṭī na bhavati, kaṭāhena vā mallikena vā ujjhitavyaṃ Mallī~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-Kośala-Kuru-Pañcāla-Ceti-... maṣṭa~ ⇒ ghaṣṭa-maṣṭa~ mahat~ ⇒ mahantikā~ § 4.8.4B7. yadi tāva saṃjñam bhavati, mahanto ca kālo bhavati, ... § 4.12.5A4. bhojanaṃ dīyati, mahanto piṇḍo parigṛhīto bhavati, ... § 11.13.11A3. atha dāni sāṃghikaṃ śayanāsanaṃ mahantaṃ bhavati, ... § 14.12.13B1. etāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā § 20.4.19A7. bhagavān mahatīye bālakinīye bhikṣuparṣāye dharmman deśayati § 20.5.19B2. tena hi anujānāmi dantakāṣṭhaṃ prāmāṇikaṃ mahāntaṃ ṣoḍaśāṅgulaṃ § 33.15.28A6. strī vā puruṣo vā mahanto bhavati, na dāni mātāpitṛkaṃṭhena ālapitavyā. “mahallako”, “mahallake” ti vā vaktavyā § 36.6.29B6. te hi yūyaṃ niśrāya tathāgate brahmacaryaṃ caratha mahato oghasya niḥsaraṇārthaṃ § 41.14.34B4. gṛhasya madhyamāgāre mahāntaṃ kūṭaṃ kṛtaṃ § 49.1.41B7. te dāni mahāntāni (Nom. pl. neut.) kulāny upasaṃkramanti mahattaraka~ ⇒ gṛhapati-mahattaraka~, brāhmaṇa-mahattaraka~ mahantikā~ (BHS) “alt(e Frau)”# ⇒ taruṇikā~ § 18.42.17A4. na dāni taruṇikā strī pṛcchitavyā. ... mahantikā pṛcchitavyā maharddhika~ (BHS, SWTF) “von großer übernatürlicher Macht” 429  § 4.15.5B1. etehi buddhehi maharddhikehi (Loc. pl. masc.) ye devatā santi abhiprasannā (vs) (= § 6.13.8A4) mahallaka~ (BHS) “der Alte”, mahallakā~# “die Alte” ☞ § 33.15, Anm. 1 § 33.15.28A6. strī vā puruṣo vā mahanto bhavati, na dāni mātāpitṛkaṃṭhena ālapitavyā. “mahallako”, “mahallake” ti vā vaktavyā mahā-janika~# “eine große Menschenmenge, viele Menschen” § 8.12.9B2. yadi mahājaniko bhavati, antamasato hastena samavadhānaṃ dātavyaṃ mahātman~ “vornehm, edel” § 49.1.42A2. so dāni tato yeva anuparivarttiya mahātmehi kulehi ipsitānnāni bhukt<v>ā ... § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, ... mahā-dhana~ § 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo mahādhano mahābhogo ... mahā-puṇya~ “großer Verdienst”# § 51.5.44A2. nêdāni vaktavyaṃ “piṇḍapātaṃ mahāpuṇye (☞ § 51.5, Anm. 1) dehi.” atha khalu tūṣṇīkena uddeśe sthātavyaṃ mahā-prapāta~# “großer Abgrund” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... anavarāgrajātijarāmaraṇasaṃsārakāntāranarakavidurggān mahā- prapātato abhyuddharitvā kṣeme same śive sthale abhaye nirvvāṇe pratiṣṭhāpayamāno... mahābhiṣaṅka~#(?) “mächtig”? ☞ § 4.18, Anm. 2 § 4.18.5B7. mahābhiṣaṅkana (lies: °ṅkāna [m.c.] ?) ca anukampikā (vs) mahā-bhoga~ § 41.12.34B1. tatra dāni agrakuliko āḍhyo mahādhano mahābhogo ... Mahāmahī~# Name eines Flusses ☞ § 26.1, Anm. 1 § 26.1.23A5. he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu Gaṅgā ayaṃ Sarayū Ajiravatī Mahī Mahāmahī tti mahā-mātra~ “Minister” § 20.6.19B2. yathā kumārakā vā dharmmiṣṭhā vā akṣadarśā vā gaṇa<kā> vā mahāmātrā vā evam ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti mahā-muni~ § 6.13.8A4. mahāmuniṃ Śākyamuniṃ ca Gotamaṃ (vs) mahā-yaśas~ § 4.15.5B1. mahāyaśaṃ (Acc. sg.) Śākyamuniñ ca Gautamaṃ (vs) mahārha~ (mahā-ar°) “köstlich, erlesen” § 52.6.44B4. atha dāni so praṇītabhojanasya mahārhasya pūraṃ pātraṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ āgacchati ... Mahāvana~ (BHS) Name eines Haines § 41.4.33B7. Śāriputro sthaviro Vaiśālyām viharati Mahāvane Kūṭāgāraśālāyāṃ mahā-vikaṭa~ (Pā) “großes unreinliches Ding” (nämlich Kot, Urin, Asche oder Ton); vgl. PTSD, s.v. vikaṭa; BHSD, s.v. vikṛta ☞ § 18.53, Anm. 3 § 18.53.17B2. vaidyo jalpati “bhante mahāvikaṭāṃ pāyetha” tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? mahā-śabda~ ⇒ uccaśabda-mahāśabda~ Mahāsāṃghika~ ⇒ ārya-Mahāsāṃghika~ Lokottaravādin~ Mahī~ Name eines Flusses § 26.1.23A5. he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu Gaṅgā ayaṃ Sarayū Ajiravatī Mahī Mahāmahī tti § 26.8.23B2. “he he he Gaṅgā ayaṃ sarvvaṃ” yāva “Mahī Candrabhāgā ayaṃ.” mā; vgl. BHSG § 42 ⇒ mā tāva § 4.8.4B6~7. mā kālo ’tikramiṣyatîti ... mā kālo atikramiṣyatîti § 4.8.4B7. yadā sajjaṃ bhaveya, tato mā paṭisaresi § 4.13.5A6. mā h’ eva otrapeṃsu § 4.19.6A2. mā pramajji jinaśāsane (vs) § 8.7.9A4. vāretavyo vaktavyo “mā tahiṃ gaccha!” § 8.7.9A5. vaktavyaṃ “kārehi dhūmaṃ. mā ca puno āmiṣacakṣu deśesi.” § 52.6.44B6. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, karohi dhūmaṃ. mā ca punaḥ āmiṣacakṣuḥ <deśesi>.” 430 § 8.11.9A7. yadi so bhavati śaithaliko vā ... vaktavyaṃ “mâśrayo utpadyeyā” § 8.13.9B3. vaktavyaṃ “mā gṛhṇa. mā saṃsarggadoṣo bhaviṣyatî”ti § 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... kāṣṭhamayāni bhavanti, na kṣamati ātape śoṣayituṃ, mā phuṭṭiṃsu tti § 18.20.16A7. so dān’ āha “mā me āyuṣmaṃ ohayesi.” § 18.30.16B5. mā veḍḍo bhaveya tti (= § 18.34.16B7, § 18.40.17A3, § 19.14.18A4, § 19.32.18B6) § 18.42.17A4. na dāni taruṇikā strī pṛcchitavyā, mā prahāsaṃ deyā § 18.43.17A5. mā uśśaṃkito bhaveyaṃ § 18.45.17A6. mā odhyāyeṃsu “ken’ imaṃ<hi> panthesmi antrāṇi vikīrṇṇāni?” § 18.46.17A6. nâpi dāni anuvātaṃ karttavyaṃ, mā sarvvasārthaṃ gandhena vyābaheyyā (≒ § 18.48.17A7, § 19.38.19A2) § 18.47.17A7. nâpi dāni apratisaṃviditena uvvattitavyaṃ, mā “coro vā ocorako vā” tti hanyeyā (≒ § 19.39.19A2) § 18.53.17B3. mā khalu te amanāpaṃ bhaviṣyati § 19.6.17B7. so jalpati “mā khalu me āyuṣman, omutrayasi” tti § 19.16.18A5. mā aprakṛtikā (wohl für °iko) ghaṭasya {vā} bāhyena praśvāsaṃ cchoreyā ti § 19.17.18A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe ujjhituṃ, sarvvasaṃghasya mā gandhena vyābaheyyā § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ, mā anye bhikṣū na paśyeṃsu § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ, mā naṃ ḍhossā vā viḍā vā vātaputrā vā bhuṃjeṃsu § 19.25.18B3. tumbakaṃ bhavati, kalyato yeva ujjhitvā cchanne sthavitavyaṃ, mā phuṭṭeṃsu § 19.37.19A1. mā jano odhyāye “kena imaṃhi panthe praśvāso kṛto ...?” § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacāriṃ gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ” § 20.5.19B1. ete bhikṣavo ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacārī gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ” § 22.4.21A1. cakkalī utkṣipitavyā. nâpi dāni sahasā. anekāyo mā (☞ § 22.4, Anm. 2) tarhi dīrghako praviṣṭo bhaveya tti § 23.4.1.21A7. catvāri pratipādakā karttavyā, mā bhūmī khanīya{ṃ}ti § 24.4.22A2. nâpi kṣamati kheṭakaṭāhakaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ, mā saprāṇako bhaveya § 25.4.22B3. mā pakvena vā bilvena pakvena vā kapitthena pakvena vā nālikereṇa bhaṃjeya tti § 25.5.22B3. nâpi kṣamati dariniśritena vā pātraṃ nirmmādayituṃ, mā patitaṃ bhañjeya tti § 27.7.23B7. nâpi kṣamati “saṃghamadhye mā tiṣṭha” ti ukto tiṣṭhituṃ § 28.6.24A4. “mā caṃkramāhî”ti uktena na caṃkramitavyaṃ § 29.8.24B5. nâpi kṣamati “saṃghamadhye mā niṣīda” tti uktena samānena niṣīdituṃ. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyācāryehi “mā niṣīda” tti uktena niṣīdituṃ § 31.4.25B4. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ, mā dāni adarśanena parijāne “hṛtaṃ, hṛtaṃ me pātracīvaram” iti gacchantasya karttavyaṃ § 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya praveṣṭavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “samāmapayi (?) ime pravrajitā karonti.” § 31.27.26B2. āyuṣman, mā piṇḍāya praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha (≒ § 31.30.26B5) § 31.28.26B3. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. mā śrāntā? mā klāntā? § 32.11.27B4. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. mâsi śrānto? mâsi klānto? § 34.3.28B3. yadi tāva te jalpanti “bhante, mā allīyatha” tti, na kṣamati al<l>īyituṃ § 36.3.29B3. yadi tāva jalpanti “bhante mā āllīyatha” tti, na kṣamati āllīyituṃ § 37.3.30A3. yadi tāva jalpanti “mā āllīyatha” tti, na kṣamati allīyituṃ § 36.3.29B3. dīrghāyu, asti <me> kiñci gṛhapatiparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ, allīyāma mā āllīyāmo? § 37.3.30A2. asti me kiñci tīrthikaparṣāye kāryaṃ, āllīyāma mā āllīyāmo vā (Hs. tha)? § 38.2.30A6. saṃghasya madhye me kiñcit kāryaṃ. āllīyāmi mā allīyāmi? § 38.3.30A6. yadi tāva so bhavati ... anarthakuśalo vā abhinīhārakuśalo vā kalahakārako 431  vā bhaṇḍanakārako vā bhāṣyakārako vā adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā allīyāhi” tti § 38.6.30B1. yadi ... so ca bhikṣu bhavati kalahakārako bhaṇḍanakārako bhāṣyakāro adhikaraṇiko vā, vaktavyaṃ “mā jalpāhi” tti § 38.6.30B2. “kasya tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? mā jalpāhi” tti § 39.9.31A6. mā piṇḍakena vihariṣyatha § 41.16.34B6. mā atra pānīyasmiṃ tṛṇo vā bhave prāṇako vā, tena senāpatisya aphāsu bhaveya § 41.22.35A6. mā prāṇakā jāyeṃsu nīlikāya vā bhaveṃsu § 42.12.36B6. mā evam eva kāṣṭhaṃ dahyeya § 42.31.37B7. mā ādīnavam utpādaye § 44.6.39A5. “mā cīvarakoṇako bhavatu. mā cīvarako” ti § 47.8.41A1~2. cīvaraṃ ... na dāni “mā cīvaraṃ mā kaṇṭakaśākhā” tti “ḍu ḍu” tti (?; Hs. udra nti) acchitavyaṃ § 48.5.41A7. bhaginīyo āsanaṃ prajñapetha, mā cīvarakāni vinaśiṣyanti § 49.1.41B6. mā kasyaci ācikṣesi § 49.1.42A1. paśyati “mā (vgl. BHSG § 42.6) imasya dātavyaṃ bhaviṣyatî”ti § 49.2.42A5. mā khalu kasyaci ācikṣiṣyasi § 50.4.43A6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, mā khalu adarśanaṃ gamiṣyasi.” § 50.7.43B3. atha paśyati “upakaṭṭho kālo antāntiko. na śakyaṃ sakāle saṃbhāvayituṃ. mā dāni ubhaye cchinnabhaktā bhaviṣyāma”, tena paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B7. piṇḍapātanīhārakena yatraỿva pānīyaṃ paśyati, tatraỿva bhuṃjitavyaṃ. “mā dāni vayaṃ ubhaye ’va bhaktacchedaṃ kariṣyāma.” § 51.6.44A2. na dāni ito vā ito vā nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “corā vā ocorakā bhavanti.” § 52.6.44B5. suvihita, apratigrāhyo eṣo jano. mā bhūyo eteṣāṃ tena pratigṛhṇīhasi § 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā § 53.7.45A6. dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti § 53.17.45B6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ sahasā dīpakaṃ praveśayituṃ “mā navakā bhikṣu sahasā viprakaṭa utthiheṃsu” tti § 62.11.50A7. vātakarmma ... nâpi dāni kṣamati anuvātaṃ karttuṃ, mā gandhena vyābaheyyā usw. √mā ⇒ minīya, mitaka~ mā tāva “nicht doch!”; vgl. Skt. mā tāvat § 41.17.34B7. tasya bhavati senāpatisya “mā tāva mā tāva. asmākaṃ tāva eṣo vadhakānāṃ pratyarthikānāṃ pratyamitrāṇāṃ arthakāmo hitakāmo. ...” māṃsa~ § 4.1.4A5. ghṛtaṃ thīyati māṃsaṃ thīyati vyañjanāni śītalībhavanti § 4.12.5A5. sūpasya ghṛtasya māṃsasya olaṃkānāṃ dadhisya § 31.16.26A2. ihaỿva yūyaṃ jātā ihaỿva mariṣyatha. jātā te śṛgālā ye tumbhāṇaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti § 31.24.26A7. yūyaṃ jātā, <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti māḍa~ ⇒ maṇḍala-māḍa~ māṇavaka~ “junger Mann; junger Brahmane” § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti māṇikā~ oder māṇika~ “hölzerne Tonne”#? ☞ § 43.1, Anm. 8 ⇒ maṇika~, odana-mānikā~ § 43.1.38A2. ... bhaktapīṭhikā māṇikaṃ (wohl für māṇikā [Nom. pl. fem. oder masc.]) caṃgeriyo śuṣyāyo paṭalakā § 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā durvvā vā kaṇḍahastā vā karkkaṭakā vā ... mātā für sārtho? : § 31.28.26B3 ☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1 432 mātā-pitṛ~ § 4.5.4B3. pṛcchitavyaṃ “... kiṅgotrako ’si? kiṃkarmmikā te mātāpitarau? ...” (= § 6.5. 7B2) § 5.5.6B2. kiṃkarmmikā se mātāpitarau? § 41.12.34B2. so dāni mātāpitṛbhir unnīyati varddhīyati § 41.12.34B2. so dāni mātāpitṇāṃ pūrvvotthāyī paścānnipātī priyavādī manaāpavādī kiṃkarapariśrāvako § 41.17.34B7. yo (für ye?) etasya mātāpitā vā jñātikā vā tehi eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati mātā-pitṛ-kaṇṭha~# “familiär-vertrauliche Stimme” ? ☞ § 33.15, Anm. 2 § 33.15.28A6. strī vā puruṣo vā mahanto bhavati, na dāni mātāpitṛkaṃṭhena ālapitavyā mātu (oder mātta; lies jātu?) tyāyikaṃ # “sehr dringend” ? ☞ § 16.5, Anm. 1 § 16.5.14B1. “yadi āgantukānāṃ mātu ātyāyikaṃ bhaviṣya{n}ti, tato naṃ pratisaṃs- kariṣyantî”ti § 16.6.14B1. yadi āgantukānāṃ mātu atyāyikaṃ bhaviṣyati, tato dhoviṣyanti rañjiṣyanti sīviṣyanti § 16.7.14B2. yadi āgantukānāṃ mātu atyāyikaṃ (Hs. °yakaṃ) bhaviṣyati, tato vuṇiṣyanti mātulaka~ “Onkel mütterlicherseits” § 49.1.41B6. pi<t>yako bhavāhi, mātulako bhavāhi mātṛ~ ⇒ mātā-pitṛ~, sagotrīmātā § 4.15.5B2. yathā naṃ icchati (lies: °atī oder °ate [m.c.]) mātā (vs) § 6.13.8A4. yathā icchati se mātā yathā icchati se pitā (vs) § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he ... śramaṇa sārtho (Hs. mātā) prayāto (Hs. prajātā) (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti § 33.9.28A3. eṣo bhikṣu mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā bhaginīm vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâyaṃ kṣamati śabdāpayituṃ “ambe” tti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā mātṛ-grāma~ § 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati mātṛgrāmasya agrato dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ mātta ⇒ mātu (oder mātta) tyāyikaṃ -mātra~, -mātrī~ ⇒ -mātraka~ § 2.1.2B2. te dāni muhūrtta-mātraṃ pratipāliya āsitvā § 18.5.15B4. tatra kaṇṭhavāriṇī karttavyā kakṣa-mātrī vā gala-mātrī § 42.9.36B4. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā yavaphala-mātreṇa lagga<ti> § 42.22.37A7. nābhi-mātraṃ vā udakaṃ, anāpattiḥ § 42.22.37A7. jānu-mātraṃ udakaṃ bhavati § 49.5.42B1. atha khalu yuga-mātraṃ nidhyāyantena gantavyaṃ § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena aṣṭahastâyāmena karttavyā muṣṭi- mātrī sthūlatvena § 55.2.46B4. (geṇḍuka~ ...) tādṛśo karttavyo yo bhūmīyaṃ āpaṭito yuga-mātraṃ uppaṭati -mātraka~ ⇒ -mātra~ § 18.21.16B1. atha khalu samudācāramātrakeṇaỿva varccakuṭiṃ gantavyaṃ § 18.32.16B6. eṣo bhikṣuḥ cetiyaṃ vandaṃto uśvāsakṛto bhavati, samudācāra- mātrakenaỿva nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 19.7.18A1. atha khalu samudācāramātrakenaỿva praśvāsakuṭīṃ gantavyaṃ § 19.30.18B5. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandanto praśvāsakṛto bhavati, samudācāramātrakeṇa eva gantavyaṃ mātrajñatā~ (BHS, SWTF) “Maßhalten”; vgl. Pā. mattaññutā ⇒ mātrā~ § 42.3.36A6. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā (= § 42.4.36A7) mātrā~ ⇒ taila-mātrā~, mātrāye, mātrajñatā~ § 41.1.33B3. udake pi khalu mātrā uktā bhagavatā tathaỿva sarvvehi bāhirakehi jīvita- pariṣkārehi § 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā tathaỿva sarvvehi jīvitapariṣkārehi mātrāye# adv. “in Maßen, in kleinem Maße, maßvoll”; vgl. Skt. mātrayā (“in kleinem Maße, maßvoll”) 433  § 18.12.16A2. udakakṛtyaṃ karentena ... māt<r>āye ’va <siṃ>cetavyaṃ § 40.16.33A7. mātrāye upanāmetavyaṃ § 41.1.33B3. mātrāye yūyam āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha § 41.2.33B6. mātrāye āyuṣmanto pādāṃ dhovatha § 42.3.36A6. stokastokaṃ āyuṣman mātrāye upanetha, udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā § 42.4.36A7. stokaṃ stokaṃ āyuṣman mātrāye upanetha. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā § 42.20.37A5. evaṃ pi kṛtvā mātrāye upanetavyaṃ (= § 42.21.37A6) § 42.21.37A7. mātrāye upanetavyaṃ -mātrī~ ⇒ -mātra~ mānakūṭa~ ⇒ tulākūṭa-mānakūṭa~ māna-bhaṇḍa~# “Meßgefäß”; vgl. Skt. māna-bhāṇḍa~ ⇒ bhaṇḍa~, bhāṇḍa~ § 42.20.37A4. mānabhaṇḍe<na> vā bhājanena vā hastasaṃjñāya vā bhājanakena vā dātavyaṃ mānava~ § 41.19.35A2. ācāraguṇasampannāḥ ye bhavanti tu mānavāḥ (vs) mānasa~ § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “ ... duṣkaraṃ pravivekena dura- bhiramaṃ ekaṃ paraṃ rātri vinayamāno mānasaṃ ādhyātmaṃ vê”ti § 41.4.34A1. antarggatehi indriyehi abahirggatena mānasena (Hs. man°) māna-hata~# “durch Hochmut zugrunde gegangen” § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti mānikā~ ⇒ odana-mānikā~ mānita~ “geschätzt” § 62.1.49B1. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisam- bhāvayitvā ... satkṛto gurukṛto mānitaḥ pūjitaḥ apacāyito māyā für mayā : § 50.2.43A4 Māra~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) § 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “ ... na ca vo Māraḥ pāpīyāṃ avatāram adhigamiṣyati saddharmmasya antarddhānāya sa<ṃ>mohāya.” mārgga~ ⇒ adhvāna-mārgga-gata~, mārgaka~, adhvan~, pantha~ § 4.16.5B3. apare mārggam bhāvayitvā parinirvvānti anāśravā (vs) § 4.17.5B5. asatiṃ parivarjeyā mārggaṃ pratibhayaṃ yathā (vs) § 31.35.27A2. nâpi kṣamati tehi nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho prayāto. gacchantu āyuṣmanto. gataṃ mārggasya śreyo (☞ § 31.35, Anm. 3)” § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati, hastena vivaritvā mārggato udvarttitvā saṃprajānaṃ karttavyaṃ mārgga- “suchen”; vgl. BHSG, S. 225a ⇒ mārggaya-, mārgge- § 25.12.22B7. atha dāni pratyandhakārako vihārako bhavati, na kṣamati pātreṇa pātraṃ mārggituṃ (☞ § 25.12, Anm. 2). atha khalu hastena mārggitavyaṃ § 26.1.23A5. jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu ... nicuḍavuntikāye imaṃhi taṇḍulā mārggitavyā.” § 40.2.32B4. pānīyaṃ mārgganti § 41.14.34B3. te dāni ulkāyo ca dīpikāyo ca prajvāliyāṇaṃ mārgganti § 41.14.34B4. mārggiya mārggiya yaṃ labhatha taṃ gṛhṇatha § 41.14.34B4. tehi dāni mārggiya mārggiya ... mahāntaṃ kūṭaṃ kṛtaṃ § 42.3.36A4. te dāni tailaṃ mārgganti na labhanti § 42.3.36A4. te ... cūrṇṇaṃ mārgganti na labhanti § 42.3.36A5. te dāni uṣṇena ca santāpitāḥ bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārgganti, na labhanti § 44.1.38B7. cīvarakaṃ mārggati na labhati § 44.1.38B7. tena dāni mārggantena so cīvarakoṇako dṛṣṭo § 44.6.39A4. bhikṣū kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya cīvarakāṇi (lies: cīvarakaṃ) mārggati 434  § 44.6.39A4. so mārgganto {na} paśyati tasya cīvarakasya koṇakaṃ § 45.1.39B3. nagnaprāvṛtā grāmapraveśikāni nivasanāni mārgganti § 45.1.39B4. nagnaprāvṛtā vihāracaraṇakāni nivāsanāni mārgganti § 45.2.39B4. yūyaṃ ... grāmapraveśanikāni nivāsanāni mārggatha § 45.2.39B5. yūyaṃ ... vihāracara<ṇa>kāni ni{r}vāsanāni mārggatha § 45.7.40A2. nâpi kṣamati ... nagnaprāvṛtena rātrīprāvaraṇa<ṃ> nivāsanaṃ mārggituṃ § 46.1.40A4. ekanivasanā grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarakāni mārgganti § 46.1.40A4. ekanivāsanakā vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarakāni mārgganti § 46.2.40A5. ekanivasanā grāmapraveśanakāni cīvarāṇi mārggatha § 46.2.40A5. ekanivasanakā vihāracīvarakāni mārggatha § 46.4.40A6. nâpi kṣamati ... grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi mārggituṃ § 46.5.40A7. nâpi kṣamati ... ekanivasanakena vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ mārggituṃ (Hs. mārggitaṃ) § 46.6.40B2. nâpi kṣamati ... ekanivasanakena leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ mārggituṃ mārgaka~ “Weg”# ⇒ mārgga~ § 31.6.25B5. atha khalu ujjukena mā<r>gakena gantavyaṃ mārggaya- (Skt), mārgge-# “suchen”; vgl. Pā. maggati, maggeti (Sadd V 1667) ⇒ mārgga- § 40.1.32B3. āgantukā bhikṣū ... pānīyaṃ mārggenti § 42.4.36A7. bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārggayanti na labhanti mārgo für nāgo : § 41.4.34A1 mārja- “abwischen, reinigen” ⇒ √mṛj, majja- § 51.12.44A5. eṣā strī kāṃsabhājanaṃ mārjati, bhikṣu paśyiyāṇaṃ hastāṃ dhovati, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā” tti mārṣa~ (BHS) “mein Herr!”; vgl. Skt. māriṣa, Pā. mārisa ☞ § 34.5, Anm. 2 § 34.5.28B5. darśanapathe upasaṃkramitvā na dāni vaktavyaṃ “sukham bhavanto, sukhaṃ mārṣa (Voc. pl.; vgl. BHSG § 8.87).” (= § 35.5.29A4, § 36.5.29B4) mālaka~ ⇒ pātra-mālaka~ -mālānāṃ für (vastu-)pālānāṃ : § 4.18.5B7 mālya~ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... mālyam vā klinnakaṃ <gṛhṇituṃ> § 48.8.41B4. labhyā ... gṛhṇituṃ ... mālyam vā aklinnakaṃ (Hs. ākli°) śimbaṭīyo vā māṣakānavallā für māṣakālavarṇṇā : § 23.3.21A5 māṣa-kāla-varṇṇa~# “schwarze Farbe wie die Urdbohnen habend” ☞ § 23.3, Anm. 3 § 23.3.21A5. jyeṣṭhako nāma vihārako, bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā (Hs. °vallā) ... § 23.3.21A6. madhyamako nāma vihārako, <bhūmi> bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, ... § 23.3.21A6. kin ti dāni kanīyasako? bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, ... māṣavārika~ für māsavārika~ : § 43.13.38B1 māsa~ ⇒ āṣāḍha-māsa~, anvarddhamāsaṃ māsa-cārika~ für māsa-vārika~ : § 3.5.3B3, § 5.6.6B2, § 6.6.7B3 māsa-vārika~# “ein Mönch, der einen Monat lang Dienst hat” ⇒ daśāha-vārika~, pakṣa-vārika~, paṃcāha-vārika~, vārika~ § 3.5.3B3. yo dāni bhavati māsavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) vā pakṣavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) tena ekam ekaṃ saṃsārayitavyaṃ devasikaṃ § 4.6.4B3. prakṛty’ eva māsavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) pakṣavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) vā preṣayi- tavyo ... (≒ § 6.6.7B3) § 5.6.6B2. dvitīyasthavireṇa aparejjukāye ’va māsavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) vā pakṣavāriko (Hs. °cāriko) vā preṣayitavyo § 43.3.38A3. māsavāriko vā daśāhavāriko vā tatra uddiśitavyo paṃcāhavāriko vā § 43.4.38A4. māsavārikehi vā pakṣavārikehi vā kalpiyakāraṃ śabdāviya ... § 43.13.38B1. māsavārikasya (Hs. māṣav°) vā pakṣa<vārika>sya vā adhīnaṃ bhavati § 43.14.38B2. māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko vā yācitavyo mitaka~# “gemessen; mäßig”; < p.pt. mita von √mā + ka ⇒ √mā, minīya § 17.7.15A2. mitakaṃ dātavyaṃ “iman tava khaṇḍaṃ, imaṃ tava khaṇḍan.” ti § 42.21.37A5. yadi tāva mitakaṃ dīyati uṣṇodakaṃ ghaṭena vā kuṇḍena vā, tena tathā 435  yeva grahetavyaṃ § 42.28.37B5. yadi tāva alpaṃ tailaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ bhavati, mitakaṃ (Hs. sitakaṃ) dātavyaṃ mithyā-dṛṣṭika~ (BHS) “falsche Ansichten habend”; vgl. Pā. micchā-diṭṭhika ⇒ samyag-dṛṣṭi~ § 37.5.30A3. aśrāddhā tīrthikāḥ, ahrīkā tīrthikāḥ, anotrāpino tīrthikāḥ, mithyādṛṣṭikā tīrthikāḥ, kusīdā hīnavīryā tīrthikāḥ, duḥprajñā tīrthikāḥ middhāntara-gata~# (middha-anta°) “sich im Schlaf befindend; in Schlaf versunken”; vgl. BHS = Pā. middha § 18.25.16B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati varcakuṭīyaṃ upaviṣṭena dhyānāntaragatena vā middhāntaragatena vā uddeśaṃ vā svādhyāyam vā manasikarentena āsituṃ § 41.31.35B7. middhāntaragatena vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ cinta<ya>ntena āsituṃ minīya# “maßvoll”; Absolutiv von *minā- (√mā; “messen”); vgl. CDIAL 10132. *mināti, Pā. mināti, Pkt. miṇaï; BHSG, S. 225a, s.v. mā- ⇒ mitaka~ § 42.20.37A4. na dāni kṣamati tailena śoṣayituṃ (☞ § 42.20, Anm. 1). atha khalu minīya dātavyaṃ § 42.20.37A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cūrṇṇaṃ rāśīya upanetuṃ. minīya dātavyaṃ miśra~ ⇒ ārya-miśra~ mukta~ ⇒ muktehi pārśvehi, √muc muktaka~ (Skt) § 14.8.13A7. na kṣamati lenāni bandhituṃ. atha khalu muktakā (Nom. pl. neut.) karttavyā § 44.4.39A2. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣūhi muktakaṃ cīvaraṃ sthapayituṃ muktikā~# “Befreiung (von Strafen)” ☞ § 2.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ muttikā~, mottikā~ § 6.2.7A6. asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmman deti. imeṣāṃ muktikā (= § 8.2.8B6, § 10.2. 10A3) muktehi pārśvehi # “aus vollem Halse” (wörtl. “mit gelösten Rippen”) ☞ § 58.1, Anm. 2 § 58.1.48A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyā muktehi pārśvehi “khala khala” tti kāsanti, yogācārāṃ bhikṣuṃ śabdena vyābahanti § 58.3.48A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇam upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “khulu khulu” tti kāsituṃ § 58.4.48A3~4. auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ (= § 58.6.48A5) § 58.5.48A4. auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha” tti kāsituṃ § 58.4.48A3. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyikāye vā auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ § 58.5.48A4. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇikena upaviṣṭe<na> auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha” tti kāsituṃ § 58.6.48A5. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ muktvā ⇒ √muc mukha~ ⇒ antara-mukham, kuto-mukham, parāṅ-mukhena, vraṇa-mukha~ § 4.20.6A3. kruddhaprasannānāṃ mukhaṃ udīkṣiyaṃ (vs) § 13.17.12B7. na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati ... mukham vā dhopituṃ § 18.4.15B4. (varccakuṭī ...) tac ca mukhāni (“Löcher”) karttavyāni § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādantā ekānte niṣaṇṇā āsanti pravāta- gandhikena mukhena § 20.5.19B1. tato ete bhikṣavo ekānte āsanti pravātagandhikena mukhena § 23.4.3.21B1. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ pādāṃ dhovituṃ, hastāṃ dhovituṃ, mukhaṃ dhovituṃ § 23.6.4.21B4. pādām vā dhovati, mukham vā dhovati, hastam vā nirmmādayati § 25.17.23A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... pādaṃ vā mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ § 26.4.23A7. pratikṛty’ eva tāva bhikṣuṇā ... mukhaṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... § 26.9.23B2. naỿva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, na mukhaṃ dhovati, na hastā nirmmādayati, ... § 40.1.32B2. tato yyeva mukhaṃ ... nirmmādiyanti § 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni pāridhovanikāto mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ § 49.1.42A1. so dāni śuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati § 49.1.42A2. te dāni taṃ paśyanti upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ 436  nirddhāvitaṃ § 49.1.42A3. ayaṃ upaśuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati § 52.3.44B2. imehi śaknoma piṇḍacārikehi mukhe kavalaṃ prakṣipituṃ § 61.4.49A4. na dāni aṃgāni “ṭaṭṭa ṭaṭṭa” tti phoṭantena mukhaṃ vivaritvā jambhayi- tavyaṃ § 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ <cīvarakoṇena> mukhaṃ pithitvā jambhayitavyaṃ § 61.6.49A6. cīvarakarṇṇakena mukhaṃ pidhiya sukhākaṃ vijṛmbhitavyaṃ § 61.7.49A7. cīvarakoṇena mukhaṃ pidhiya saṃprajānena vijṛmbhayitavyaṃ mukhara~ ⇒ a-mukhara~ mukha-varṇṇa~ “Gesichtsfarbe” oder “Farbe des Mundes”# § 49.1.42A3. āyuṣman, snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo (Hs. sukha°), pilipilāpanti oṣṭhā, suṣṭhu khalu nirddhāpīyati mukha-vāta~ (BHS[Mvu]) “Ausblasen” § 53.11.45B1. nâpi kṣamati capeṭikāya vā mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā dīpaṃ nirvvāpayituṃ § 53.15.45B4. na dāni kṣamati mukhavātena vā cīvarakoṇena vā capeṭikāya vā nirvvāpayi- tuṃ mukh~ ⇒ manda-mukh~ mukhodaka~ (Pā) (°kha-u°) “Mundwasser” ☞ § 8.5, Anm. 5 § 8.5.9A1. mukhodakaṃ dāpayitavyaṃ. dantakāṣṭhaṃ dhoviya upanāmayitavyaṃ. mukhodakam (Hs. sukh°) āsiñcitavyaṃ √muc, muñca- ⇒ o-muñca-, muktaka~, mocaya-, moce- § 14.7.13A6. mañcāḥ pratipādakehi sthāpayitavyā bhittito muktāḥ (Hs. yuktāḥ) § 14.7.13A7. yaṃ tatra śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ ... pīṭhasya upari sthāpayitavyaṃ cīvaravaṃśe sthāpayitavyaṃ bhittito muktaṃ (“mit Abstand von der Wand”) § 14.16.13B4. maṃcā pratipādakehi sthā<payi>tavyā bhittito muktaṃ § 14.17.13B5. yadi tāva uppīḍanako vihāro bhavati, tato lenāni muktāni (“offen”) sthāpetavyāni § 18.3.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) dakṣiṇena vā paścimena vā kārāpayitavyā vātapathaṃ muktvā (“vermeidend”; ☞ § 18.3, Anm. 2) § 19.3.17B5. (praśvāsakuṭī ...) dakṣiṇena vā paścimena vā kārāpayitavyā vātapatha<ṃ> muktvā (“vermeidend”) § 62.11.50A7. vātakarmma ... nâpi dāni kṣamati anuvātaṃ karttuṃ ... apavātaṃ karttavyaṃ, vātapathaṃ muñcitvā (“vermeidend”) § 22.3.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ otara{n}ti tato dvāraṃ muñcitavyaṃ § 25.13.23A1. nâpi kṣamati (... ☞ § 25.13, Anm. 2) “gṛhītaṃ na gṛhītan” ti, tato muñci- tavyaṃ § 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ (“Hier ist der Teufel los!” ?; ☞ § 31.17[Text], Anm. 1) ...” § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he nāvā <mucyati>. pañcavarṣika <pravṛttaṃ>. caṃḍa<ṃ> (Hs. ḍaṃya) muktaṃ (Hs. dukkaṃ) śramaṇa sārtho (Hs. mātā) prayāto (Hs. prajātā) (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti § 31.35.27A2. nâpi kṣamati tehi nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho prayāto. gacchantu āyuṣmanto. gataṃ mārggasya śreyo.” § 41.18.35A2. muñcema vayaṃ etaṃ etasya hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ § 41.19.35A3. corehi gṛhīto saṃto mukto ācārakāraṇāt (vs) § 41.20.35A4. nâsya muṃceya (“entflieht”) brāhmaṇo (vs) § 41.20.35A4. taṃ pi dhik yo ’sya muñcati (“entflieht”) (vs) § 42.3.36A5. taṃ velaṃ jentākasya dvāraṃ muktaṃ § 44.6.39A4. cīvaravaṃśakāto cīvarāṇi muṃciya ekaṃ dvitīyaṃ vā tṛtīyam vā kṛṣiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ patitaṃ § 54.3.46A2. te dāni bhikṣu viheṭhiyantā ārāvaṃ muñca<ṃ>ti “āyuṣmaṃ, hato ’smi. hato ’smî”ti 437  § 55.3.46B5. te dāni bhikṣū viheṭhayamānā ārāvaṃ muñcanti “āyuṣman, hato ’smi. hato ’smi.” muñciya für omuñciya : § 3.9.4A1 muñja~ “Muñja-Gras (Saccharum Munja)” § 12.6.11B3. muṃjā karttitavyā, balbajā karttitavyā mañcā vuṇitavyā (≒ § 12.18.12A5, § 13.13.12B5, § 15.8.14A4, § 16.9.14B3) § 13.11.12B3. muñjā karttitavyā, mañcā vuṇitavyā pīṭhikā vuṇitavyā § 17.11.15A5. sarvvehi muñjā vā balbajā vā karttitavyā, mañcā vā vātavyā pīṭhā vātavyā muṇḍa-vātapāṇa~#, muṇḍa-vātapāna~#, muṇḍa-vātāyana~# “nicht verschließbare Fenster-öffnung”; wörtl. “kahle Fensteröffnung”, d.h. Fensteröffnung ohne Fensterladen ☞ § 25.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ jāla-vātāyana~ § 25.1.22B1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā muṇḍavātapāṇe (Hs. muṇḍev°) pātraṃ sthavitaṃ § 25.2.22B2. bhagavān āha “evaṃ ca tvaṃ muṇḍavātapāne pātraṃ thapesi. ...” § 25.8.22B5. pratisāmayantena nâpi kṣamati jaṃghāpathe vā sthāpayituṃ kapāṭe vā muṇḍavātāyane vā muṇḍa-vātāyana~ ⇒ muṇḍa-vātapāṇa~ muṇḍa-harmmiya~# “Gebäude mit einem Flachdach”; muṇḍa (“stumpf[es Dach]”) + harmmiya (“pavillonartiges Gebäude”) ☞ § 13.9, Anm. 2 ⇒ muṇḍa-vātapāṇa~ § 13.9.12B3. muṇḍaharmmiyā pratisaṃskarttavyā muttikā~# “Befreiung (von Strafen)” ☞ § 2.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ muktikā~, mottikā~ § 5.2.6A6. asmākaṃ bhagavāṃ daṇḍakarmman deti. dvitīyasthavirasya muttikā (Hs. muntikā) § 5.3.6B1. dvitīyasthavirasya muttikā √mud ⇒ abhi-pra-moda-, moda-, prati-saṃ-moda-, saṃ-moda- mudga~ “Hülsenfrucht” (Phaseolus Mungo) § 51.8.44A3. eṣā strī dhānāṃ vā pīṣayati, tilam vā mudgam vā kalāyām vā daleti mudrita~ ⇒ tāpita-mudrita~ muni ⇒ Kanaka-muni~, Konāka-muni~, mahā-muni~, Śākya-muni~ muntikā für muttikā : § 5.2.6A6 √muṣ “bestehlen” § 36.6.29B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati kutsitum vā pansitum vā “gṛhapatikā nāma yūyaṃ tulākūṭamānakūṭehi divasaṃ lokaṃ muṣaṃtā āsatha.” § 41.17.34B7. yadi vayam imasya dārakasya evaṃ dharmmiṣṭhasya imaṃ hiraṇya- suvarṇṇaṃ harāma, praticorehi pi muṣyema (Pass. Opt. 1. pl.), grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema, ... § 41.18.35A1. yadi vayaṃ etasya dharmmiṣṭhasya etaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ harema, praticorehi vā vayaṃ muṣyema, grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema muṣṭi~ “die geballte Faust” ⇒ nimuṣṭika~, nirmmuṣṭika~, baddha-muṣṭika~ § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena aṣṭahastâyāmena karttavyā muṣṭi- mātrī sthūlatvena muṣṭika~ ⇒ nimuṣṭika~, nirmmuṣṭika~, baddha-muṣṭika~ muhūrttaṃ adv. “für eine kurze Weile” ⇒ muhūrttakaṃ, ā-muhūrttakaṃ, ā-muhūrttaṃ, ā-muhūrtte § 2.1.2B2. te dāni muhūrttamātraṃ pratipāliya āsitvā ... § 2.9.3A2. muhūrttan tāva bāhyato āgametha § 3.10.4A2. bāhyato tāva yūyaṃ muhūrttam āgametha § 50.1.43A3. so dāni bhikṣuḥ ... āgameti “idānīṃ pi eṣyati muhūrttaṃ pi eṣyati” muhūrttakaṃ adv. “für eine kurze Weile” ⇒ muhūrttaṃ, ā-muhūrttakaṃ, ā-muhūrttaṃ, ā-muhūrtte § 50.1.43A2. so dāni muhūrttakaṃ āgamiyāṇaṃ yadā nâgacchati, vihārakasya dvāramūle piṇḍapātakaṃ thapiya gato mūtra~ § 19.28.18B5. atha dāni uppīlito bhavati, akaṃthāyena viya mūtreṇa siñcantena na gantavyaṃ mūtraṃ für sū° : § 21.5.20B3 mūla~ ⇒ dīpa-mūla~, dvāra-mūla~, grāma-mūla-gata~, vṛkṣa-mūla~ 438 mūlaṃ (Skt; BHS) “zu” ⇒ mūle § 31.1.25B1. te dāni vivaditāḥ, bhagavato mūlaṃ gatāḥ (= § 32.2.27A6, § 39.2.31A1, § 50.2.43A5) mūle (BHS, SWTF) “in der Nähe von” ⇒ mūlaṃ, agrato § 24.10.22A6. upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā mūle kheṭaṃ vyābahati, ekānte karttavyaṃ § 57.10.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi sa-upānaho upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā mūle upaviśati, anāpattiḥ mūla-rasa~ “Saft von Wurzeln” § 25.3.22B3. (pātraṃ ...) mūlarasena vā patrarasena vā puṣparasena vā nirvvālikena vā gomayena nirmmādayitavyaṃ mūṣa-ukkāra~#, mūṣa-ukkira~#, mūṣika-ukkira~#, mūṣika-utkira~#, mūṣikokkāra~# (°ika-ukk°) “Maulwurfshügel”; vgl. Skt. mūṣikotkara (“Maulwurfshaufen”), Pā. mūsikukkura (Sp 756.17. v.l.; CPD, s.v. ukkura), BHS. mūṣī-utkira ☞ § 12.8, Anm. 2 § 12.8.11B4. mūṣika-utkira (Hs. °-ucchirā) vā yāva vaṃghorikā pūretavyā § 13.5.12B1. mūṣikokkārā vā cikkhallikā vā pratisaṃskārayitavyā § 13.7.12B2. mūṣa-ukkārā cikkhallikā pūretavyā § 15.9.14A4. mūṣa-ukkirā vā bhava<ṃ>ti, ākoṭayitavyā § 23.8.21B6. saṃtānikā śāṭayitavyā, mūṣika-ukkiro vâkoṭayitavyo mūṣaka~ “Maus” ⇒ nakula-mūṣika~ § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti mūṣika~ “Maus” ⇒ nakula-mūṣika~ § 57.5.47B3. atha dāni bhikṣu paśyati “anekāyo upānahikāyo mūṣikena vā khajjeṃsu ...” mūṣika-ukkira~, mūṣika-utkirā~, mūṣikokkāra~ ⇒ mūṣa-ukkāra~ usw. √mṛ ⇒ mara- § 4.16.5B3. sarvvasatvā mariṣyanti maraṇāntaṃ hi jīvitaṃ (vs) √mṛkṣ ⇒ √mrakṣ mṛga-rājan~ (SWTF) “König der Tiere”; vgl. Skt. mṛga-rāja; Pā. miga-rājā § 30.4.25A1. evaṃ bhikṣavo śeyyāṃ kalpetha yathā siṃho mṛgarājā (Hs. °rāja). siṃho bhikṣavo mṛgarājā dakṣiṇena pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpayati √mṛj ⇒ majja-, mārja-, ā-marjaya-, pari-mārja-, pra-mārja-, sam-mārjaya- mṛtaka~ “Tod, Todesfall” § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi jātakaṃ bhaveyaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya, ... § 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ kimālambanaṃ <etaṃ> bhaktaṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā vevāhikam vā gṛhapraveśakam vā ... (≒ § 5.12.7A3, § 6.12.8A3) § 4.16.5B2. atha dāni mṛtakaṃ bhavati nâyaṃ kṣamati evaṃ dakṣiṇā ādiśituṃ § 6.6.7B3. anekāye tahiṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya rājabhayaṃ vā corabhayam vā ... mṛttikā~ “Lehm, Ton” ⇒ mṛttikā-maya~, sudhā-mṛttikā-lepa~ § 13.7.12B2. ullāye gṛhītako bhavati, piṇḍaṃ śāṭiya mṛttikāye limpitavyo § 17.6.15A1. anyehi tāva mṛttikā mardditavyā § 17.8.15A3. anyehi mṛttikā marddetavyā ... anye<hi> mṛttikā pariharttavyā § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) upari iṣṭāhi mṛttikāya ca cchādayitavyā{ni} § 18.6.15B4. ākāśatalaṃ vā liṃpitavyaṃ mṛttikāya vā sudhāya vā § 18.7.15B5. tahiṃ sthāpetavyaṃ karīṣo mṛttikā vā ūṣo vā mṛttikā-karmman~# “Arbeit mit Ton” § 31.19.26A3. atha dāni paścādvastuke mṛttikākarmmaṃ karonti § 32.6.27B1. na kṣamati mṛttikākarmma karentasya ‖ pe ‖ pātrapākaṃ dadantasya, ... mṛttikā-kuṇḍa~# “irdener Krug” § 18.7.15B5. tahiṃ sthāpetavyā<ni> kāṣṭhakuṇḍāni vā mṛttikākuṇḍāni vā mṛttikā-cchadana~# “Decke bzw. Dach aus Ton” ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 3 ⇒ apakka-cchadana~, apakva-cch°, kabhalla-cch°, tṛṇa-cch°, phalaka-cch°, sudhā-cch° § 11.6.10B7. mṛttikācchadano bhavati, mṛtpiṇḍo dātavyo § 23.7.21B5. mṛttikācchadano bhavati, mṛttikāpiṇḍo dātavyo mṛttikā-piṇḍa~# “Tonklumpen” ⇒ mṛt-piṇḍa~, sudhā-piṇḍa~ 439  § 12.8.11B4. mṛttikāpiṇḍo dāpayitavyo § 23.7.21B5. mṛttikācchadano bhavati, mṛttikāpiṇḍo dātavyo mṛttikā-praliptikā~# “beschmutzt mit Lehm” ⇒ pratiliptaka~ § 43.16.38B5. etā bhavanti vāsīyo vā kuddālakā vā niśreṇiyo vā, na dāni tathā yeva mṛttikāpraliptikā sthapetavyā mṛttikā-maya~# “aus Ton, lehmig” § 18.16.16A4. tulikā vā sthāpayitavyā, mṛttikāmayā varttikā karttavyā § 40.5.32B6. appihāṇā karttavyā śilāmayā vā mṛttikāmayā vā kāṣṭhamayā vā mṛt-piṇḍa~ “Tonklumpen” ⇒ mṛttikā-piṇḍa~, sudhā-piṇḍa~ § 11.6.10B7. mṛttikācchadano bhavati mṛtpiṇḍo dātavyo mṛtyu~ § 4.18.5B6. evam ādīpite loke mṛtyunā ca jarayā ca (vs) √mṛd ⇒ mar(d)da-, marddaya-, mardde-, mardditaka~, marddita-parimarddita~, mardita- vimardita~, pari-marda- √mṛś ⇒ parā-√mṛś mṛṣṭa~ “angenehm” § 62.2.49B6. ānantarikānāṃ baddhamuṣṭikāṃ jighrāpenti, āha “jighrâyuṣman, aho mṛṣṭo gandho. aho śobhano gandho.” me enklitischer Acc. (BHS, Pā, Pkt), Gen. (Skt), Dat. (Skt) und Instr. (BHS, Pā, Pkt); vgl. BHSG § 20.13, Pischel § 415, DP I, s.v. ahaṃ, Salomon 2008: 436b, s.v. mi/me ⇒ ahaṃ, no (2) § 18.20.16A7. so dān’ āha “mā me āyuṣmaṃ, ohayesi.” § 19.6.17B7. so jalpati “mā khalu me āyuṣman, omutrayasi” tti § 21.1.20A7. kacci me śrāvakāḥ na karmmārāmāḥ na karmmaratāḥ na karmmārāmatānu- yogam anuyuktā viharanti (≒ § 11.1.10B2, § 12.1.11A5) § 32.2.27A5. āyuṣman, evacciro tava āgatasya, na ca me pādavandako upasaṃkramasi § 35.3.29A3. “dīrghāyu, asti me kiñcid brāhmaṇaparṣāyāṃ kāryaṃ allīyāma” tti § 38.2.30A6. saṃghasya madhye me kiñcit kāryaṃ. āllīyāmi mā allīyāmi? § 38.5.30B1. saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti § 49.1.42A1. na me tvayā sārddhaṃ phāsu bhavati ... § 49.1.42A4. āyuṣman, kuto me ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāni (= § 49.2.42A5) § 52.6.44B6. asukasya me (Instr.) vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno § 54.16.46B2. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinivaraṇaṃ me (für mo [Gen. pl.; vgl. BHSG § 20.58]?; ☞ § 54.16[Text], Anm. 5) karentî”ti usw. -mecasā für (bhūri-)medhaso : § 4.18.5B7 meṇḍha~ “Widder” § 32.11.27B4. na dāni meṇḍhena viya āsitavyaṃ pādehi vandayaṃtehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs) metra~ (BHS) “liebevoll” ⇒ maitra~ § 42.5.36A7. metraṃ kāyakarmma ... sabrahmacāriṣu dhruvaṃ pratyupasthāpayitavyaṃ ... medhas~ ⇒ *bhūri-medhas~ medhāvin~ § 4.18.5B7. yasmiṃ pradeśe medhāvī vāsaṃ kalpeti paṇḍito (vs) -melake (pātra-melake) für °mālake : § 25.15.23A3 maitra~ “liebevoll” ⇒ metra~ § 42.5.36B1. maitraṃ vācākarmmaṃ maitraṃ manokarmmaṃ sabrahmacāriṣu dhruvaṃ pratyupasthāpayitavyaṃ maitra-citta~ “Wohlwollen” § 54.7.46A4. atha khalu maitracittena yaṣṭī vārayitavyā vṛddhāntāto navakāntaṃ § 55.4.46B5. nâpi kṣamati āghātacittena vā duṣṭacittena vā geṇḍukaṃ vārayituṃ. atha khalu maitracittena hitacittena geṇḍuko vāritavyo mo (BHS[Mvu]) “uns”; Gen. pl. von ahaṃ; vgl. BHSG § 20.58 ☞ § 55.4(Text), Anm. 3 ⇒ ahaṃ, no (2) 440  § 55.4.46B6. atha khalu cittaṃ pragopayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ mo karenti” tti Vgl. § 53.10. 45B1. vinīvaraṇaṃ no karenti; § 54.13.46B1. asmākaṃ vinīvaraṇaṃ karoti mocaya- (Skt), moce- (BHS[BHSG, S. 225b]) “abrücken, herausziehen; vermeiden” ⇒ √muc § 13.15.12B6. vihāro opasvediko bhavati, mañcā bhitti<yo> mocetvā pratipādikā dātavyāḥ § 14.4.13A4. mañcā bhittiyo mocetvā pratipādakā dātavyā § 44.6.39A5. tato koṇakāto prabhṛti sukhākaṃ mocayitavyaṃ § 47.8.41A2. kaṇṭakaśākhāyāṃ vā lagnaṃ bhavati, ... stokastokaṃ mocayitavyaṃ § 62.12.50B1. yathā sārthaṃ gandhena na vyābaheyyā, vātapathaṃ mocayitvā (“vermeidend”; ☞ § 18.3, Anm. 2) karttavyaṃ mottikā~# “Befreiung (von Strafen)” ☞ § 2.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ muttikā~, muktikā~ § 2.2.2B3. asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmman dadāti dvitīyasthavirasya mottikā (Hs. montikā) § 2.3.2B3. dvitīyasthavirasya mottikā (Hs. montikā) § 3.2.3B1. asmākaṃ bhagavāṃ daṇḍakarmman deti. eṣāṃ mottikā (Hs. montikā) § 3.3.3B1. imeṣāṃ mottikā (Hs. montikā) § 6.3.7B1. asmākaṃ bhagavān daṇḍakarmman deti. imeṣāṃ mottikā moda- § 4.17.5B5. vidhinā devalokaṃ tu modantu kāmakāmino (vs) montikā für mottikā : § 2.2.2B3, § 2.3.2B3, § 3.2.3B1, § 3.3.3B1 moha~ § 12.9.11B5. yo na cchandāye na doṣāye na mohāye na bhayāye, prajñaptaṃ ca jānāti mp / yy : § 8.1.8B6. allimpaṃti für alliyyaṃti mm / gh ⇒ gh / mm mm / nm ⇒ sanm / samma √mrakṣ “bestreichen” ⇒ makṣita-parimakṣita~, upa-makṣita~, mrakṣaya-, mrakṣe- § 48.4.41A7. yadi tāva āsanaṃ bhavati dhūlīye vā mrakṣitaṃ (“[mit Staub] bedeckt”) karddamena vā vināśitakaṃ omaïlamaïlaṃ vā prajñaptakaṃ bhavati, ... mrakṣaṇa~ ⇒ pāda-mrakṣaṇa~ mrakṣaya-, mrakṣe-# “salben” § 8.12.9B1. pādā dhovayitavyā, pādā mrakṣetavyā (Hs. °tavyo) § 10.5.10A5. pādataṭṭhakaṃ upanāmayitavyaṃ, pādā dhovayitavyā, pādā mrakṣayitavyā § 19.5.17B6. (das Pissoir) dhoviya tailena mrakṣayitavyā § 31.25.26A7. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ √mlā ⇒ ā-milāya- mv / vv : § 21.6.20B3. savvaṭiyāṇaṃ für samvaṭṭi° bzw. saṃvaṭṭi° mh / ḷh ⇒ ḷh / mh Y y / gr ⇒ gr / y y<j ⇒ j>y y/t ⇒ t/y y / th ⇒ th / y y/d ⇒ d/y y/p ⇒ p/y y/m ⇒ m/y y/r: § 19.41.19A2. nāvāre für nāvāye y/v: § 61.1.49A2. paṭapaṭāva für maṭamaṭāya y/ś: § 42.21.37A5. pratyayo für pratya<ṃ>śo (?) y / ṣ, yy / ṣy ⇒ paryā~ für parṣā~ § 4.11.5A2. oheṣyakānāṃ für oheyya° § 4.13.5A6. laṣyalayāye für layya° 441  § 12.2.11A7. varyena ovaryiyantāṃ für varṣena ovarṣiyantāṃ § 12.12.12A1. avaryaka für avarṣaka § 12.14.12A2. utthiṣyaṃ für utthiyyaṃ § 17.2.14B6. oharṣiyantāṃ für ohayiyantāṃ § 31.29.26B4. cchaṣitavyāḥ für ccha<nda>yitavyāḥ § 31.36.27A2. kārṣa für kāryaṃ § 50.6.43B2. yūyaṃ für yūṣaṃ § 53.5.45A5. utpādayeṣyā für °eyyā § 60.2.48B5. saṃdūṣitavyaṃ für kaṃḍūyitavyaṃ § 60.2.48B5. dūṣitavyaṃ für kaṃḍūyitavyaṃ -y- als Gleitlaut; vgl. RgsGr § 4.159; v. Hinüber 2001: § 270; Sn(tr.N) 234 (ad Sn 352); Oberlies 2001: § 25; Karashima 2002a: § 6.2 § 48.3.41A6. tena hi-y-evaṃ ... cīvare pratipadyitavyaṃ yaṃ (1) “daß, so daß; wie; wenn, als; da, weil” (BHS, Pā; Skt. yad) ⇒ yad~ § 12.12.11B7. yaṃ (“wie”) saṃghasthaviro jalpati, tathā karttavyaṃ § 4.18.5B7. yaṃ (Möge ...!) vibhavadhanadhānyena sambhavo bhūrimedhaso (vs) § 18.37.17A1. ete dve bhikṣū cetiyaṃ vandanti, yaṃ (“wenn”) paśyanti tatra śunakhena vā śṛgālena vā uśvāsaṃ kṛtakaṃ, ... § 36.6.29B6. bahukarā bhikṣavo brāhmaṇagṛhapatayo, yaṃ (“weil”; ☞ § 36.6, Anm. 8) vo pratyupasthitā cīvarapiṇḍapātaśeyyāsanaglānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārehi § 42.31.37B7. yaṃ kāṣṭhaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati yathāsthāne sthāpetavyaṃ § 43.4.38A3. yaṃ tatra bhaṇḍaṃ bhavati lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ... omuddhikā sthapitavyā sūryābhimukhaṃ § 43.5.38A4. yaṃ tatra bhava<ṃ>ti dugdhaghaṭā vā dadhighaṭā vā vyañjanagolakā vā ... § 43.6.38A5. yaṃ tatra bhavati śatapotanako vā tāmrapātrā vā ... (2) emphatische Partikel # (= eva, yeva)? ⇒ ye, yeva, yyeva § 17.12.15A6. yo yaṃ paśyati, tena yyeva gaṇṭhī karttavyā. ... yo ye paśyati tena yeva ... yo yeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yyeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yeva paśyati tena yyeva yaṃ kālaṃ (Pā) “wenn” ⇒ taṃ kālaṃ, taṃ velaṃ, yadā § 1.11.2A2. yaṃ kālaṃ śalākā vāritā bhavanti, bhikṣū gaṇitā bhavanti, sāmagrī ārocitā bhavati, dāyakadānapati paripṛcchitavyā “kim vasiṣyatha atha gamiṣyatha?” (≒ § 3.10. 4A1) § 1.11.2A4. yaṃ kālaṃ dāyakadānapati nirddhāvitā bhavanti, tato sūtroddeśakena jānitavyaṃ (= § 3.10.4A2) § 5.11.7A2. yaṃ kālaṃ navakā bhikṣū ugrāyanti vā ... § 8.4.8B7. yaṃ kālaṃ abhyanujñā dinnā bhavati, tato dvāraṃ sukhākaṃ apaduriyāṇa ... (≒ § 10.4.10A5) § 14.6.13A5. kakṣaṃ ... yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati niṣprāṇakaṃ, tato ’gninā dahāpayitavyo § 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... yaṃ kālaṃ pariśuṣkāni bhavanti, tato pūretavyāni § 19.19.18A7. karṇṇikaṃ (lies: *kallikaṃ?) yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, taṃ kālaṃ praśvāsaghaṭikā nikkālayitavyā § 21.4.20B2. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣuḥ cīvaraṃ sīvitukāmo bhavati, ... § 21.6.20B3. yaṃ kālaṃ cīvaraṃ sīvitaṃ bhavati, kaṭhinaṃ samvaṭ<ṭ>iyāṇaṃ ... § 22.3.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣuḥ prahāṇaṃ otara{n}ti tato dvāraṃ muñcitavyaṃ § 22.4.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato ... (= § 56.1.47A2) § 22.6.21A2. prahāṇato yaṃ kālaṃ utthito bhavati, vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, ... § 24.8.22A5. yaṃ kālaṃ gacchati, tato ekatam’ aṃte cchorayitavyo § 26.10.23B3. yaṃ kālaṃ praticchitā bhavati, tato paribhuñjitavyā § 31.23.26A6. yaṃ kālaṃ viśrānto bhavati, pṛcchitavyaṃ “āyuṣman, asti etāvativarṣasya vihārako prāpuṇati?” § 31.31.26B5. atha dāni piṇḍacāriko bhavati, yaṃ kālaṃ āgantukā piṇḍāye cariya vihāraṃ āgatā bhavanti, ... § 31.35.27A1. yaṃ kālaṃ te nevāsikā (wohl für āgantukā) niddhāvitā bhavanti, ... 442  § 31.37.27A2. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāptaṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, yadi koci sārtho prayāto bhavati ... § 32.7.27B2. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ samavasthāye niṣaṇṇo bhavati, taṃ velaṃ allīyāṇaṃ śīrṣeṇa pādā{ṃ} vanditavyā, karkaṭagrāhikāye vanditavyā § 41.12.34B2. yaṃ kālaṃ saptavarṣo ’ṣṭavarṣo vā, so dāni mātāpitṇāṃ pūrvvotthāyī ... § 41.24.35B1. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ adhvātā bhavanti tato praveśayitavyo § 41.26.35B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tena pādā dhovitā bhava<ṃ>ti upaviśitavyaṃ § 42.2.36A3. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣu sannipatitāḥ ... § 42.3.36A4. {te dāni} yaṃ kālaṃ tehi ... dvāraṃ āghaṭṭiya bāhiravitaṇḍitaṃ kṛtaṃ, te dāni ... § 42.3.36A5. te dāni yaṃ kālaṃ ... saṃtāpitāḥ, taṃ velaṃ ... § 42.31.37B6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣū snātā bhavanti ... § 43.4.38A3. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃghena bhuktaṃ bhavati ... § 43.4.38A4. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhavanti ... § 43.5.38A5. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhava<ṃ>ti, ... § 43.7.38A6. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhavanti § 44.6.39A5. taṃ cīvarakaṃ yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati ... § 48.5.41A7. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ prajñaptaṃ bhavati āmilā vā astarikā vā ... tato niṣīdi- tavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā amilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati, tato apāśrayitavyaṃ § 49.1.42A1. yaṃ kālaṃ paśyati “na ... saṃbhāvayituṃ” ti, tato āha “āyuṣman, ...” § 49.7.42B4. yaṃ kālaṃ śirā viddhā bhavati, ubhayehi bhuñjiya nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 50.9.43B4. yaṃ kālaṃ āgato bhavati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ sahitakehi bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 52.1.44A7. teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā snehaṃ sthapenti, khajjakhaṇḍakāni thapenti paśyanti “yaṃ kālam āgatā bhavanti, tato teṣāṃ saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ” § 52.1.44B1. yaṃ kālaṃ āgatā bhaviṣyanti, tato saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ § 52.7.44B6. yaṃ kālaṃ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā anujñā dinnā bhavati, tato paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 53.6.45A5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, ... § 53.7.45A6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho prahāṇe upaviṣṭo bhavati, tato dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti § 53.11.45B1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato prahāṇaśālāto dīpako ukkaḍhitavyo § 53.17.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, prahāṇaśālāyān tāva prathamaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo § 53.18.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ vibhātaṃ bhavati, ākāśaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato varccakuṭīye prasrāvakuṭīye ca dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 57.6.47B4. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā ... nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayi- tavyā. yaṃ kālaṃ viśrānto bhavati, tāṃ sammiñjiya dvitīyā sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyā § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhavanti, tato śvetamayena yeva khādanti, ... § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, tato ... § 62.2.49B6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣusaṃgho upaviṣṭo bhavati, ... usw. yaṃsetavyā für paṃs° : § 39.29.32A6 yatako für pa<ti>tako : § 19.4.17B6 yato (BHS, Pā); < Skt. yatas ⇒ tato § 49.7.42B6. yato eva paśyati tato eva nivarttitavyaṃ § 49.8.42B7. yato nirggato bhavati, tato ārocayitavyaṃ yatitaṃ für patitaṃ : § 25.5.22B3 yattaka~ (BHS, Pā) “um soviel” ☞ § 8.13, Anm. 6 ⇒ yattikā~, yāvataka~, tattaka~ 443  § 40.4.32B5. atha khalu pānīyavāriko tāva uddiśitavyo, navakānte paṭipaṭikāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati, eko vā dvayo vā trayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti § 50.6.43B2. atha dāni so dānapati tittiṇo bhavati, yattakaṃ dīyati tattakaṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 53.4.45A3. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā, eko vā dvayo vā yattakā vā abhisaṃbhuṇanti, navakānto (Hs. °kāntena) vā paṭipāṭikāye vā yasya vā prāpuṇati yattikā~ (BHS) “um soviel” ☞ § 8.13, Anm. 6 ⇒ yattaka~, yāvataka~ § 8.13.9B3. atha dāni utthāpīyati, yattikāṃ (Hs. patti°) vārāṃ āpṛcchitavyaṃ yatthesmiṃ für panthesmiṃ : § 18.45.17A6; § 18.45.17A6. yatthesmi für panthesmi yatna~ § 47.8.41A1. bhikṣusya yatnaṃ karentasya ... (= § 48.9.41B5) yatra ⇒ yahiṃ § 1.8.1B6. nâpi dāni “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ olaggikāya āsitavyaṃ § 3.6.3B5. nâyaṃ <kṣamati> “ārocitaṃ mayā” ti yatr’ (Hs. pātr(’)) ollaggikāye āsituṃ § 4.6.4B3. nâpi dāni “adhivāsita<ṃ> mayê”ti yatr’ ollagnāye āsitavyaṃ (≒ § 5.6.6B2) § 6.6.7B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati “adhivāsitaṃ mayê”ti yatr’ (Hs. tatr(’)) ollagikāye āsituṃ § 31.21.26A4. yatra bhikṣūṇāṃ āsanaprajñaptir bhavati, tahiṃ cīvaraṃ tasmiṃ cīvara- bisiyan thaviyāṇaṃ, kuṇḍikāṃ vā upānahau vā thaviyāṇa, ... § 31.22.26A5. cetiyaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ, yatra nevāsikā bhavanti tatra gantavyaṃ § 39.16.31B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi yatra p’ ullaggikāye āsituṃ § 39.28.32A5. nâpi dāni kṣamati grāmāntikehi yatr’ ollagnāye āsituṃ § 41.5.34A2. yatra yeva ayaṃ śramaṇako iryāpathaṃ vikopayiṣyati, tatraỿva se khaṭakaṃ dāsyāmi § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... yatra dīpā dīpyanti tatra allīno § 43.12.38B1. yo yatra abhiyukto bhavati, tena taṃ pratisāmetavyaṃ § 50.10.43B6. yatra yeva taṃ paśyati, tatra yeva panthāto uvvattiyāṇaṃ ... usw. yatra-śākhāya für patra-śākhāya: § 40.10.33A3 yathā ⇒ yathâpi § 1.9.2A1. tena yathâdhyeṣṭena śalākā vārayitavyā, dvitīyena pratīcchitavyā § 2.11.3A5. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇa sarvvarātriṃ dharmmavṛṣṭiye vītināmiyāna ... § 3.5.3B3. yathā jñāpeta katimâdya sarvvehi jānitavyaṃ § 4.12.5A5. vaktavyaṃ “tathā dehi yathā sarvveṣāṃ samaṃ bhavati.” § 4.15.5B2. yathā naṃ icchati mātā yathā naṃ icchati pitā (vs) § 6.13.8A4. yathā icchati se mātā yathā icchati se pitā (vs) § 4.17.5B5. asatiṃ parivarjeyā mārggaṃ pratibhayaṃ yathā (vs) § 4.19.6A2. “diśā sauvastikā” dakṣiṇā vistareṇa ādiśitavyā yathā pātrapratisaṃyukte § 6.14.8A4. tathā yeva dakṣiṇāyo vistareṇa karttavyāyo yathā saṃghasthavirasya bhaktāgre § 5.12.7A3. yathā bhavati tathā dakṣiṇā ādiśitavyā § 5.13.7A3. yathā prathamake śikṣāpade evaṃ dvitīyasthavireṇa bhaktāgre pratipadyi- tavyaṃ § 11.13.11A3. sāṃghikaṃ śayanāsanaṃ ... uparito bhuṃjitavyaṃ, yathā nāśaṃ na gacche § 13.15.12B6. vihāro opasvediko bhavati, mañcā bhitti<yo> mocetvā pratipādikā dātavyāḥ, yathā prāṇakehi na khādyeyā (≒ § 14.4.13A4) § 13.17.12B7. vihāro ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ apāvuritavyo, yathā vātaṃ labheyyā § 14.3.13A3. teṣāṃ āhāreṇa upastambhaṃ karttavyaṃ, yathā na vihanyeṃsu § 14.12.13B1. etāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā § 18.4.15B3. (varccakuṭī ...) atha dāni prapātaniśritā vā, ... antarā kāṣṭhaṃ dātavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateya § 18.7.15B5. varccakumbhikā bāhire-d-eva karttavyā, yathā taṃ udakaṃ anyena gacchati § 18.11.16A1. saprāṇakā bhavati ... yathā jñāye “saprāṇakê”ty abhijñānaṃ § 18.50.17B1. na kṣamati ... aṅgajātaṃ gṛhṇiya draviḍena yathā udakasamīpa<ṃ> gantuṃ § 18.51.17B1. kāṣṭhakaṃ antarā karttavyaṃ, yathā tahiṃ prathamaṃ nipateyā § 19.4.17B6. tathā samantena setuḥ karttavyo, yathā ... praśvāsako bāhyena nirggacchati 444 § 19.13.18A3. na kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa vā goṇena vā ... ūrūyo omūtriyantena gantuṃ (≒ § 19.31.18B5) § 19.26.18B4. na dāni tathā prasrāvo karttavyo, yathā cetiyābhigṛhaṃ upari praśvāso gaccheyā § 20.6.19B2. yathā kumārakā vā dharmmiṣṭhā vā akṣadarśā vā gaṇakā vā mahāmātrā vā evam ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti (≒ § 20.7.19B3) § 20.16.20A3. nâpi kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya madhyena pāṭiyāna jihvāṃ nilehituṃ kāmabhoginā yathā § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī ... tathā karttavyā, yathā dīrghako na saṃsakkati § 25.15.23A3. <sthapetavyaṃ>(?) ... jālavātāyane vā pātramālake vā, yathā na ghaṭṭeṃsu § 25.17.23A4. (hinsichtlich einer Almosenschale) yathā akṣismiṃ (☞ § 25.17, Anm. 5) § 29.6.24B4. tathā karttavyaṃ, yathânantaryaṃ jānukehi na vyābahati § 31.5.25B4. atha dāni corā saprasādā bhavanti, vṛddhehi agrato gantavyaṃ, yathā paśyitvā prasādena avivarjitā gaccheṃsu § 38.7.30B3. saṃghasthavireṇa vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, jalpatha yathādharmmaṃ yathā- vinayaṃ yathā śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ.” ti § 39.20.31B7. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, ... jānitavyaṃ, anekāye grāmāntikānāṃ grāmoparo<dho> vā bhave corā vā patitā bhaveṃsuḥ, yathā (“so daß”) nâgacchantîti § 40.5.32B6. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya, golakā vā maṇikā vā ... subhāvitā kariya thapetavyā, yathā pānīyaṃ caukṣaṃ bhaveya § 40.6.32B7. sarvvaṅ karttavyaṃ, yathā sugandhā bhaveṃsu § 40.10.33A3. pānīyaṃ gṛhṇantena gharttitavyaṃ, yathā eka hasto nirāmiṣo bhavati § 40.12.33A5. taṃ bhājanaṃ ekānte sthapitvā, tṛṇaṃ vā kulikaṃ vā upari dātavyā abhijñānaṃ, yathā jñāye “akalpiyan” ti § 41.3.33B7. evaṃ bhikṣavo pādāṃ dhovatha yathā Śāriputro sthaviro § 41.18.35A2. te dāni āhaṃsuḥ “yathā senāpatikasya rucyati” § 41.19.35A3. yathā pānīyadāyakaḥ (vs) § 42.9.36B4. nâpi dāni {kṣamati} tathā karttavyaṃ yathā sukhena tapyati § 42.9.36B4. atha khalu tathā karttavyaṃ, yathā yavaphalamātreṇa lagga<ti> § 42.22.37B1. upaviṣṭena karttavyaṃ, yathā nābhi praticchannā bhaveya § 42.24.37B1. yathā bhavati tathā gantavyaṃ § 43.7.38A6. tato kīlakehi ollapitvā sthapitavyā, yathā na khajjeya § 43.9.38A7. kīlakehi ollapitvā sthapayitavyā, yathā na <khā>dyeṃsu § 43.10.38A7. etā bhaiṣajyapiṣaṇikā śilā na dāni kārya kṛtvā yathā yeva pratiliptikā sthapetavyā § 44.11.39B1. kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ raṃjitavyaṃ sīvitavyaṃ yathā cchavi § 45.6.40A1. kāmabhoginā yathā § 45.6.40A2. calanakaṃ yathā § 49.1.42A2. teṣāṃ bhavati yathā “ayaṃ ... vipralabdho” § 49.5.42A7. nâpi kṣamati ghoḍena yathā oḍḍitāye grīvāye gantuṃ § 49.6.42B3. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā pratibalo bhavati piṇḍapātam vā aṇṭhituṃ vihārakaṃ vâgantuṃ § 49.9.42B7. yathā yeva agrāsanaṃ agrodakaṃ agrapiṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjasi, tathā yeva dakṣiṇām ādiśāhi § 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā. gomayapiṇḍikā vā paṭipaṭikāye sthapetavyā yathânupūrvveṇa gaccheya § 56.5.47A5. rātriñ ca śayyāsanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ āsati, nâpi kṣamati niṣīdanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ kṛtvā gantuṃ. atha khalu yathā{khalu}prajñaptakaṃ dviguṇīkṛtvā tato gantavyaṃ § 56.5.47A6. yathāsāhaṭasya niṣīdanasya dvitīyo anto uvveliya prajñapayitavyaṃ, tato niṣīditavyaṃ § 59.4.48B1. saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvayitavyaṃ, yathā anantarikasya na vyābaheyyā kheṭena vā siṃghāṇakena vā § 59.5.48B2. saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvitavyaṃ, yathā ānantarikasya na vyābaheyyā kheṭen<a v>ā 445  siṃhāṇakena vā § 60.5.48B7. taṃ pi tathā dāni kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ, yathā ānantaryakaṃ śabdena na vyābahati § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti ... yathā sīhā vā vyāghrā vā evaṃ jaṃbhayanti § 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ § 62.12.50B1. yathā sārthaṃ gandhena na vyābaheyyā, vātapathaṃ mocayitvā karttavyaṃ et passim yathā für parṣā § 36.8.29B6. gṛhapatiyathā für °patiparṣā § 42.13.36B6. yathāyo für parṣāye | (Daṇḍa) yathā-karmma “den Taten entsprechend” § 4.16.5B3. yathākarmma gamiṣyanti puṇyapāpaphalopagāḥ (vs) yathā-dharmmaṃ “gemäß der Lehre” § 38.7.30B2. saṃghasthavireṇa vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, jalpatha yathādharmmaṃ yathā- vinayaṃ yathā śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ.” ti yathâpi § 39.8.31A5. anekāye āraṇyakānāṃ co<ra>bhayaṃ vā bhaveya ... vyāghrabhayaṃ vā, yathâpi te nâgacchanti § 41.10.34A6. yathâpi imaṃ bhavatā Śāriputreṇa dakānakaṃ upacīrṇṇaṃ § 49.1.42A3. oṣṭhā suṣṭhu khalu nirddhāpīyati, yathâpi dāni nagarakulopakena pityakena sārddhaṃ praviṣṭasya ipsitānnāni bhojanāni bhuktāvisya yathā-pratibhānakaṃ# “was jmd gut scheint; nach jmds Gefallen”; vgl. Skt. prati-√bhā (“gut scheinen, gefallen, zusagen”) § 49.1.41B7. ārya, bhaktakṛtyaṃ karetha. purebhaktikaṃ karetha. ... yathāpratibhānakaṃ karetha yathā-vinayaṃ# “gemäß den Ordensregeln” § 38.7.30B3. saṃghasthavireṇa vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, jalpatha yathādharmmaṃ yathā- vinayaṃ yathā śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ.” ti yathā-vṛddhikāye# “nach der Reihenfolge gemäß dem Ordinationsalter”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. yathā- vṛddhikā; SWTF, s.v. yathāvṛddhikayā ⇒ vṛddhi~ § 6.9.7B7. hastena pratyavekṣiyāṇa ānantariyāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi yathāvṛddhikāye upaviśitavyaṃ § 26.7.23B1. atha dāni upaviṣṭakānāṃ paṭipāṭikāye dīyati, yathāvṛddhikāye gṛhṇitavyaṃ § 57.4.47B3. atha khalu upānahikāyo dvāramūle nikkhāsiya praviśitvā vṛddhānte añjaliṃ kṛtvā yathāvṛddhikāye upaviśitavyaṃ yathāsukha-paribhoga~# “Lebensmittel, die man sich wünscht” § 31.8.25B6. praviśiya yācitvā saṃghasya yathāsukhaparibhogaṃ, niḥsārayitavyaṃ pāda- tailaṃ, vekālikaṃ purebhaktikaṃ bhikṣitavyaṃ yathā-sukhaṃ (Skt), yathā-sukhe# “zur Genüge” ☞ § 19.19, Anm. 2 zur Wendung prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati § 1.12.2A6. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikāṃ dharmmāṃ uddiśiyānaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa- śrutikāye gāthāye ca, tato yathāsukhaṃ karttavyaṃ (≒ § 2.10.3A4) § 1.13.2A7. yathāsukhaṃ karttavyaṃ, abhipramodantu āyuṣmanto (≒ § 2.11.3A5, § 3.12. 4A4) § 19.19.18A7. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (☞ § 19.19, Anm. 2), taṃ kālaṃ praśvāsaghaṭikā nikkālayitavyā § 22.4.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato ... § 22.1.20B6. so dāni yathāsukhe (Hs. °sukhaṃ) kṛte vihārakaṃ apaduriya praviśati § 38.9.30B4. yathāsukhaṃ kariya gantavyaṃ § 53.11.45B1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (☞ § 19.19, Anm. 2), tato prahāṇaśālāto dīpako ukkaḍhitavyo § 53.17.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, prahāṇaśālāyān tāva prathamaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo 446  § 54.15.46B1. evaṃ tāva vāretavyaṃ yāva prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (= § 55.9.47A1) § 56.1.47A2. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭiya sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gacchanti § 56.4.47A4. nâpi kṣamati yathāsukhe kṛte utthiya niṣīdanaṃ ... prasphoṭayituṃ § 56.6.47A6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte niṣīdanakaṃ ... prasphoṭayituṃ § 57.6.47B4. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā ... nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 57.7.47B5. prahāṇasya yathāsukhe kṛte āgamayitavyaṃ yathā-sukhe ⇒ yathā-sukhaṃ yathā-sthāna~ “rechter Platz, üblicher Ort” § 42.23.37B1. yathāsthāne sthāpayitvā gantavyaṃ § 42.31.37B7. yaṃ kāṣṭhaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati yathāsthāne sthāpetavyaṃ § 43.4.38A4. (lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ...) kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya sthāpayitavyāni yathāsthānaṃ § 43.6.38A5. kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya yathāsthāne praveśayitavyāni (wohl für sthāpayi- tavyāni) § 43.10.38A7. atha khalu sudhovitvā yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyā § 43.15.38B4. sāharitvā yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyaṃ § 43.16.38B5. atha khalu sudhovitvā yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyo yad~ (Skt), yaṃ (BHS, Pā) ⇒ yaṃ, yaṃ kālaṃ, yena, yahiṃ § 14.3.13A3. yo pratibalo vastuṃ, yadi utsahanti teṣāṃ āhāreṇa upastambhaṃ karttavyaṃ § 41.10.34A6. yo pi so brāhmaṇānāṃ uṣṇodakakarako, so pi na evaṃ śucī § 41.15.34B4. yo teṣāṃ corasenāpatiḥ so ... § 41.20.35A4. taṃ pi dhik yo ’sya muñcati (vs) § 42.15.36B7. yo praviśati tenântaraṃ dātavyaṃ § 42.21.37A5. yo (Hs. yā) pratibalo bhavati ... so praviśatu § 42.21.37A6. yo pratibalo bhavati ... tena praveṣṭavyaṃ § 4.18.5B6. ādīptasmiṃ āgāre yo (lies: yaṃ?) niharati bhaṇḍakaṃ | taṃ khu tasya svakaṃ bhavati na khalu yo (lies: yaṃ?) tatra dahyati || (vs) § 26.1.23A4. yo (lies: yā?) tāva pelavā bhavati, jalpanti “he he he ...” § 41.17.34B7. yo (für ye?) etasya mātāpitā vā jñātikā vā tehi eṣo kathaṃ amaitracitto bhaviṣyati § 43.12.38B1. yo yatra abhiyukto bhavati, tena taṃ pratisāmetavyaṃ § 49.4.42A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā paścācchramaṇo praveśituṃ, yo na pratibalo tasya ca ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajituṃ § 50.9.43B5. cchandayitavyo vaktavyo “ūnakaṃ pūrehi. yaṃ (Nom. sg. neut.; vgl. BHSG § 21.11) te rucyati taṃ khādehi.” § 50.9.43B5. yadi tāva ākāṃkṣati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ yaṃ rucyati, taṃ khāditavyaṃ § 1.5.1B4. yad aho saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, tad aho saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ § 43.12.38B1. evaṃ yat kiñcit saṃghasya bhāṇḍaṃ ... pratisāmetavyaṃ § 4.17.5B5. tām eva bhāryāṃ vareyā yâsyā (< yā asyā [Opt. von √as]; Hs. yo asyā) śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) § 4.17.5B4~5. samyagdṛṣṭi ca yā (☞ § 4.17[Text], Anm. 3) iha ... samyagdṛṣṭi ca yo (dass.) iha (vs) § 18.17.16A4. yā khānimā varccakuṭī bhavati, nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchayatā tāyo varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā varccakuṭīye prakṣipituṃ § 41.14.34B4. yaṃ labhatha taṃ gṛhṇatha § 51.14.44A7. evaṃ yaṃ yaṃ kāryyaṃ cchindiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, dātukāmā bhavati, na tena gantavyaṃ § 49.7.42B4. āgamiṣyaṃ ahaṃ yena vā tena <vā?> sārddhaṃ § 18.13.16A2. yasya oheyyako (☞ § 18.13, Anm. 2) bhavati, tasya ācikṣitavyaṃ § 19.5.17B6. (das Pissoir) tailena mrakṣayitavyā navakāntena vā uddiṣṭakena vā paṭipāṭi- kāye{na} vā yasya vā prāpuṇeti 447  § 19.17.18A6. so dāni ujjhitavyo navakāntena vā yasya vā oheyyako bhavati § 19.19.18A7. kenâyaṃ nikkālayitavyo? navakāntena vā paṭipāṭi{pāṭi}kāya vā yasya vā prāpuṇati § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako (☞ § 18.13, Anm. 2), so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā” § 37.5.30A4. yasya praśaṃsā tam anupraśaṃśe teṣāṃ guṇaṃ eva vade na doṣan (vs) § 41.11.34A7. yasya bhagavān katham ayaṃ brāhmaṇa sthavirasyâcāragocareṇa tuṣṭo? § 42.24.37B2. yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tato āgacchantu § 42.24.37B2. tato yasyâsti tailaṃ ca cūrṇṇaṃ ca tehi gantavyaṃ § 43.16.38B5. yasyaỿva{ṃ} kāryam bhavati, tasyaỿva{n} dātavyaṃ § 54.2.46A2. <sā vārayitavyā> navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā punaḥ prāpuṇati (≒ § 55.2.46B4) § 1.6.1B5. yasmin pradeśe yaṃ divasaṃ saṃghasya poṣadho bhavati, saṃghasthavireṇa pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa svādhyāyitavyāni ... § 4.18.5B7. yasmiṃ pradeśe medhāvī vāsaṃ kalpeti paṇḍito (vs) § 8.2.8B6. kathaṃ ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ, ye ime asmākaṃ naỿv’ allīyaṃti na pratyālīyanti?; vgl. § 10.2.10A3. ye (Hs. yā) dāni asmākaṃ na allīyanti na pratyallīyanti, kathaṃ ime ambhehi ovaditavyāḥ anuśāsitavyāḥ? § 11.1.10B2. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ ... te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā ... § 12.1.11A6. ye ca te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ ... te ca tathāgataṃ dṛṣṭvā ... § 17.5.15A1. ya ete droṇīśramaṇakā te pratisaṃskariṣyanti; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 210. 7A8.2. yā eṣā kumārībhūtā ... sā ... § 31.16.26A2. jātā te śṛgālā ye tumbhāṇaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti (☞ § 31.16, Anm. 5) § 31.24.26A7. yūyaṃ jātā, <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti (☞ § 31.16, Anm. 5) § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako, so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā” § 41.19.35A2. ācāraguṇasampannāḥ ye bhavanti tu mānavāḥ / labhanti vipulāṃ arthāṃ ... // (vs) § 42.13.36B6. ye tahiṃ parṣāye tehi (Hs. tahiṃ) gantavyaṃ § 42.13.36B6. ye tasmiṃ pariveṇikā saṃti tehi gantavyaṃ § 42.11.36B4. ya (Nom. pl. masc.) tāye {t}ārthāyaỿva bhava<n>ti jentākavārikā vā ārāmikā vā ... § 38.5.30A7. yā (lies: ye oder {yā}?) vṛddhatarakā yāvad vṛddhāntaṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti § 4.15.5B2. ye (Nom. pl. fem.; ein Genusfehler?) devatā santi abhiprasannā (vs); vgl. Mvu I 294.23. yā devatā santi abhiprasannā et passim yad-arthaṃ “wewegen, weshalb” § 39.1.30B5. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tam artham abhisam- bhāvayitvā ... (≒ § 62.1.49B1) yadā ⇒ yaṃ kālaṃ § 2.9.3A1. yadā śalākā vāritā bhavanti ... tato dāyakadānapatī pṛcchitavyāḥ § 2.9.3A2. yadā kāle (yadā {kāle} oder yaṃ kālaṃ) dāyakadānapati nirddhāvitā bhavanti, ... § 4.8.4B7. yadā sajjaṃ bhaveya, tato mā paṭisaresi § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ, yadā (“bis”) navakāḥ santarpitā bhavanti § 41.22.35A5. eṣo dāni bhikṣu yadā grāmāto nirggato bhavati, tato ... § 47.5.40B6. yadā grāmamūlagato bhavati ... § 50.1.43A2. so dāni muhūrttakaṃ āgamiyāṇaṃ, yadā (“als”) nâgacchati, vihārakasya dvāramūle piṇḍapātakaṃ thapiya gato § 50.2.43A4. so dāni āha “āyuṣman, yadā (lies: tadā?) so mayā piṇḍapātako vihārasya purato nikṣipto.” § 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā 448  ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā § 53.13.45B3. yadā bhikṣū pratikrāntā bhavaṃti, tato varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo usw. yadi ⇒ yadi tāva, yadi tāvat, yadi vā § 1.7.1B5. yadi dāni na gato saṃgho bhavati saṃghasthavireṇa yahiṃ bhaviṣyati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ ... § 3.5.3B2. yadi dāni koci pṛcchati “bhante katamâdya?”, ... § 14.3.13A3. yo pratibalo vastuṃ, yadi utsahanti teṣāṃ āhāreṇa upastambhaṃ karttavyaṃ § 19.4.17B6. tathā (Hs. yadi) samantena setuḥ karttavyo, yathā ... bāhyena nirggacchati § 19.42.19A4. imaṃ khalu buddhaprajñaptaṃ bhaiṣajyaṃ. piba yadi jīvitukāmo ’si § 31.5.25B4. yadi dāni ośyā bhavati, taruṇabhikṣūhi agrato gantavyaṃ ośyā pratibāhantehi § 31.9.25B6. tehi dāni yadi tahiṃ ogho vā bhavati nadī taḍāgaṃ vā puṣkiriṇī vā udupāno vā, tahiṃ pādān prakṣāletvā prāvaretvā anyonyaṃ āmantrayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.31.26B5. tato yadi nevāsikānāṃ vyañjanāni bhavanti, khajjakāni bhavanti, tato yadi snehakā vā bhavanti, tehi āgantukānāṃ samvibhāgo karttavyo § 31.31.26B6. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato yadi tahiṃ kiñci piṇḍacārikaṃ praṇītatarakaṃ bhavati, āgantukānāṃ sārāṇīyaṃ karttavyaṃ § 39.9.31A6. yadi arthikā bhaviṣyanti pratipālayiṣyanti § 39.9.31A6. yadi na sajjaṃ bhavati ... § 40.15.33A6. prahāṇe vārentena yadi bhūmyāstaro bhavati, ... § 41.18.35A1. yadi yuṣmākaṃ anukūlaṃ bhave ... § 41.29.35B6. yadi tahiṃ koci bhikṣu bhavati navatarako, so vaktavyo “udakaṃ āsiñcihi” tti § 42.25.37B3. yadi snāpitukāmo (lies: snāyitu°?) bhavati ... § 47.5.40B7. yadi tahiṃ ogho vā taḍāgam vā bhavati puṣkiriṇī vā ... § 49.1.41B7. yadi tvaṃ tatra kiṃci akalpiyaṃ adhyācariṣyasi, ... § 52.8.44B7. yadi koci nimantreti, yadi arthiko bhavati, praticchitavyaṃ § 59.8.48B4. yadi tāva koci kṣīvati, na dāni vaktavyaṃ “jīva” ti. atha khalu yadi vṛddha- tarako bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “vandāmi” tti usw. yadi tāva # “Wenn nun ...” ⇒ yadi tāvat § 1.11.2A3. yadi tāvâhaṃsu “gacchāma” tato deyadharmmaṃ pratiṣṭhāpayitavyaṃ ... (≒ § 2.9.3A2) § 1.11.2A4. yadi tāva nâtyā<ti>śītam bhavati nâtyātiuṣṇaṃ na dūradūre vihārakā bhavanti, ... § 1.12.2A5. yadi tāva vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ śrotukāmā bhavanti, ... § 2.10.3A3. yadi tāva atiśītam vā atiuṣṇam vā bhavati ... § 3.7.3B5. atha khalu yadi tāva saṃghasthaviro na pratibalo bhavati ... (= § 6.6.7B3, § 6.11.8A2) § 4.7.4B4. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “nâsti asmākaṃ koci evaṃnāma upāsako” § 4.7.4B5. yadi tāva anugraho bhavati, anugraho sādhayitavyo (= § 6.7.7B4; ≒ § 5.7.6B4) § 5.12.7A2. tato yadi tāva ... (= § 6.10.7B7, § 6.13.8A3, § 39.5.31A2, § 40.7.32B7, § 41.27.35B3 usw.) § 11.5.10B5. atha khalu yadi tāva ... (= § 11.6.10B6, § 14.5.13A4, § 15.6.14A2) § 14.12.13B2. yadi tāva sasvāmikaṃ bhavati, tena pratisaṃskārāpetavyā § 18.53.17B2. yadi tāva ātmano uccāro bhavati, so eva tasya pratigraho § 31.30.26B4. atha aparejjukāto yadi tāva bāhirakaṃ bhaktaṃ bhavati, ... § 39.6.31A3. yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgatā bhavanti, ... § 39.7.31A4. yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgacchanti, ... § 39.13.31B1. cetiyaṃ vistareṇa vandiyāṇaṃ, yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgatā bhavanti, tato bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 39.25.32A3. ceti<yaṃ> vistareṇa vandiyāṇaṃ, yadi tāva grāmāntikā āgatā bhavanti, bhuñjitavyaṃ § 39.19.31B6. yā grāmāntikānāṃ sthālī, yadi tāva grāmāntikā āgatā bhavanti, tahiṃ pi 449  taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 39.26.32A3. yadi tāva āhaṃsu “ahaṃ pi ahaṃ pi” tti, ... § 41.25.35B2. yadi tāva koci bhikṣuḥ pūrvvapraviṣṭo bhavati, ... § 41.26.35B3. yadi tāva koci vṛddhatarako bhavati, ... § 42.9.36B3. yadi tāva bhraṣṭikā dakṣiṇato bhavati, vāmato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.13.36B6. yadi tāva parṣāye bhavati, ye tahiṃ parṣāye tehi (Hs. tahiṃ) gantavyaṃ § 42.17.37A2. yadi tāva agni bahalako bhavati, ... § 42.21.37A5. yadi tāva mitakaṃ dīyati uṣṇodakaṃ, ... § 42.24.37B1. yadi tāva ekato sāṃghiko bhavati, ... § 42.28.37B4. yadi tāva alpaṃ tailaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ bhavati, ... § 43.11.38B1. yadi tāva tṛṇacchannā bhavati, ... § 44.4.39A1. yadi tāva so uppeḍanako vihārako bhavati, ... § 47.4.40B6. atha khalu yadi tāva grīṣmakālo bhavati, ... § 48.4.41A7. yadi tāva āsanaṃ bhavati dhūlīye vā mrakṣitaṃ ... § 48.5.41A7. yadi tāva bhikṣusya viśrambhakulaṃ bhavati, ... § 49.5.42B1. yadi tāva dakṣiṇenântenâgacchati, ... § 49.6.42B2. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati tasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajayituṃ, praveśayitavyo § 49.7.42B5. yadi tāva na viddhā śirā bhavati, ... § 49.7.42B6. yadi tāva so śirāviddho eva nirddhāvati, ayaṃ praviṣṭo bhavati ... § 50.5.43A7. yadi tāva dāyakadānapati jalpanti “bhante, paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇatha”, ... § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohanati, yadi tāva kaṇḍikāpūrakam ukkaḍḍhiya ovvarakaṃ praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “dāsyati eṣā.” ti § 52.7.44B6. atha dāni āha “upādhyāyācārya, bhuñjāhi”, yadi tāva <kāṃkṣati>, paribhuñjitavyaṃ. atha dāni na kāṃkṣati, vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, paribhu<ṃ>jāhi tvaṃ.” § 53.6.45A5. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya jarjaro āhato bhavati, yadi tāva so dvibhūmiko saṃghārāmo bhavati, prathamaṃ tāva sopānamaggulīye dīpako jālayitavyo § 53.7.45A6. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti § 57.4.47B2. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, ... § 59.8.48B4. yadi tāva koci kṣīvati, na dāni vaktavyaṃ “jīva” ti § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, yadi tāva bhaktāgre vā upaviṣṭako bhavati, anantarikasya pātraṃ datvā gantavyaṃ usw. yadi tāvat “Wenn nun ...” ⇒ yadi tāva § 3.8.3B6. yadi tāvat pratibalo bhavati, ātmanā sarvvaṃ karttavyaṃ § 18.40.17A3. yadi tāvad āha “ārya, riktā varccakuṭī” ti, ... praviśitavyaṃ § 19.15.18A4. so pṛthivīpradeśo, yadi tāvad āhatyā pṛthivī bhavati, kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā uttatthiyāṇaṃ cchorayitavyo § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāvad vastukāmo bhavati, pātracīvaraṃ pratisāmayitavyaṃ, ... § 50.6.43B1. yadi tāvad yāvadarthaṃ bhaktaṃ dīyati, prakṛty’ eva ātmano bhaktato tasya pātraṃ pūretavyaṃ yadi vā “oder” § 4.18.6A1. grāme vā yadi vâraṇye nimne vā yadi vā sthale (vs) § 4.18.6A1. divā vā yadi vā rātrau devā rakṣantu dāyakān (vs) √yam ⇒ saṃ-yata~, saṃ-pra-yaccha- Yamunā~ § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Mathurāyāṃ Yamunā yava-phala~ “Gerstenkorn”# ☞ § 42.9, Anm. 3 § 42.9.36B4. atha khalu tathā karttavyaṃ yathā yavaphalamātreṇa lagga<ti> yavāgū~ “Reisbrühe” ⇒ yāgu~ § 25.1.22B1. yavāgūye gaṇḍī ākoṭitā § 26.1.23A4. te dāni āyuṣmaṃto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ekatyaṃ yavāgūṃ nindanti, ekatyaṃ 450  praśaṃsanti § 26.1.23A5. atha dāni khakkhaṭa bhavati, jalpaṃti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū ...” § 26.2.23A6. evaṃ yavāgūye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 26.11.23B3, Uddāna [III].25A6) § 26.3.23A6. eṣo dāni yavāgūye samayo ārocito bhavati, tato jānitavyaṃ: kim ayaṃ yavāgū ubhayato sāṃghikā parṣāye pariveṇikā nimantritikā{yāṃ} § 26.5.23A7. nâpi kṣamati yavāgū upānahārūḍhena vā praticchituṃ § 26.8.23B2. atha dāni atighanā bhavati, na vaktavyaṃ “nâyaṃ yavāgū, odano ayaṃ, daṇḍāśanibhejjā ayaṃ.” § 26.9.23B3. ānantaryasya pātraṃ dātavyaṃ, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, imaṃ mama yavāgūye pratyaṃśaṃ gṛhṇa.” § 26.10.23B3. ete vilambakā yavāgūḥ nindanti vā praśaṃsanti vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsādayanti usw. yavāgū-pāna~# “Reisbrühe”; Pā. yāgu-pāna ☞ § 39.9, Anm. 1 § 39.9.31A6. śuve bhaktaṃ vā purebhaktikaṃ vā yavāgūpānaṃ vā bhaviṣyati yaśas~ ⇒ lābhāgra-yaśogra-prāpta~ yaṣṭ~ “Stock” § 54.1.46A1. tena hi yaṣṭī nāma vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°) (☞ § 54.1, Anm. 1) § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena aṣṭahastâyāmena karttavyā § 54.3.46A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ yaṣṭī vārentā yo yeva bhikṣu pracalāyati taṃ yeva kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhananti, pāde vā āhananti § 54.4.46A3. evaṃ yaṣṭīye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 54.17.46B2. evaṃ yaṣṭīyaṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā vaṃśasya vā nalasya vā naṃgalasya vā rohiṣasya vā daśa-aṣṭahastāṃ dīrghatvena, ubhayato agre pottakhaṇḍehi veḍhayitavyā § 54.6.46A3. yaṣṭi dāni vārentena na dāni oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā vāretavyā ohitahastena vā upānahārūḍhena vā yaṣṭi vāretavyā. atha khalu ekāṃsīkṛtena vārayitavyā § 54.7.46A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yaṣṭiṃ vārentena (Hs. cār°) kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye āhanituṃ § 54.8.46A5. nâpi kṣamati kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye āhanituṃ rajag[g]asma viya § 54.7.46A4. nâpi kṣamati viheṭhanābhiprāyeṇa yaṣṭī vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°). atha khalu maitracittena yaṣṭī (Hs. yaṣṭā) vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°) vṛddhāntāto navakāntaṃ § 54.8.46A5. atha khalu pārśve sthitvā trikkhatto purato yaṣṭi kārayitavyā (“den Stock schwingen”?; ☞ § 54.8, Anm. 2) § 54.9.46A6. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava yaṣṭi prāpuṇati. vārehi (Hs. cār°).” tena vāretavyaṃ (Hs. cār°), iminā upaviśitavyaṃ § 54.11.46A6. atha dāni bahu pracālayanti, ... yo tatra navakataro bhavati, tasya yaṣṭī dātavyā § 54.12.46A7. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācārya, tava yaṣṭī prāpuṇati.” § 54.12.46A7. na kṣamati yaṣṭī tasya dātuṃ. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣya<ṃ>.” tena yeva yaṣṭī vāretavyaṃ § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ § 55.1.46B2. te dāni bhikṣu{ṃ} prahāṇasmiṃ yaṣṭiṃ vārayantā śītena kilamma<ṃ>ti yasatena für ghasatena : § 48.7.41B2 yahiṃ (BHS[BHSG § 21.22], Pā); vgl. Pkt. jahiṃ ⇒ amukahiṃ, ekahi, ekahiṃ, kahiṃ, tahi, tahiṃ, yatra § 1.7.1B6. yadi dāni na gato saṃgho bhavati saṃghasthavireṇa yahiṃ bhaviṣyati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ § 2.5.2B5. yahim bhavati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ: “āyuṣman adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā” § 3.6.3B4. yahiṃ bhavati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ “abhikramantu āyuṣmanto” ti § 19.20.18A7. tato pi na kṣamati so tahiṃ cchorayituṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣintasya (für varṣante?) stūpavigrahaṃ vā saṃghavigrahaṃ vā gacchati. atha khalu tahiṃ cchorayitavyaṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣante na anyena gacchati 451  § 47.4.40B6. yahiṃ lagnaṃ tahi<ṃ> lagnaṃ; yahiṃ pāṭitaṃ tahiṃ pāṭitaṃ § 48.7.41B2. bhaginī prajñapehi kuḍḍasmiṃ yahiṃ apāśrayitavyaṃ yā für mā : § 18.48.17A7 yā für yo : § 42.21.37A5 √yā ⇒ pra-yāta~ yāgu~ (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “Reisbrühe” ⇒ yavāgū~ § 26.1.23A5. te dāni āyuṣmaṃto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ... yo (lies: yā?) tāva pelavā bhavati, jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu ...” yāca für yāva : § 12.8.11B4 yāca- § 14.18.13B5. prativeśikulāto niśreṇi yāciya (Hs. yāviya) tato otaritavyaṃ § 31.1.25A7. yācanti (Hs. yāvanti) na labhanti § 31.8.25B6. praviśiya yācitvā saṃghasya yathāsukhaparibhogaṃ niḥsārayitavyaṃ pāda- tailaṃ, vekālikaṃ purebhaktikaṃ bhikṣitavyaṃ § 40.9.33A2. pānīyavārikāṃ (Hs. pānīyadhārikāṃ) yācati § 40.16.33B1. labhyā dāni pāyattikadharmmāya (Hs. pāpicakadharmmīya) yācituṃ § 42.1.36A2. Jīvako Kaumārabhṛtyo bhagavantaṃ yācati § 42.2.36A2. bhikṣū dvāraṃ yācanti (Hs. yāvanti) § 43.14.38B2. māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko vā yācitavyo (Hs. °vyā) § 43.14.38B2. dve janā yācaṃti (Hs. yāṃcaratīti) yāṃcaratīti wohl für yācaṃti : § 43.14.38B2 yātavyaṃ für pātavyaṃ: § 40.11.33A4 yādṛśa~, yādṛśī~ ⇒ tādṛśa~, tādṛśī~ § 18.53.17B3. āyuṣman imasya bhaiṣajyasya gandho yādṛśo uccārasya § 26.8.23B2. yādṛśī dīyati, tādṛśī praticchit<avya>ā. dāyakavaśo na pratigrāhakavaśo § 34.5.28B5. atha khalu ārogyāpiya, yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ dīyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 35.5.29A5. ārogyāpayitvā <yā>dṛśaṃ āsanaṃ labhyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ ... atha khalu yādṛśaṃ (Hs. tā°) āsanaṃ dīyati, tādṛśe upaviśitavyaṃ § 36.5.29B4. ārogyāpiya yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ labhyate, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 37.4.30A3. atha khalu yādṛśaṃ <āsanaṃ> labhyate, tādṛśe (Hs. °dṛśo) upaviśitavyaṃ yāpaya- (BHS, SWTF[IV 16a]) “leben” § 4.15.5B1. aṃguṣṭhasnehena yāpaye saptarātraṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A3. aṅguṣṭhasnehena yāpayati saptarātraṃ (vs) yāma~ “Nachtwache” § 30.6.25A3. rātrīye purimaṃ yāmaṃ uddeśaprayuktena svādhyāyaprayuktena sthānena caṃkrameṇa vītināmayitavyaṃ § 30.7.25A4. rātrīye madhyame yāme dakṣiṇena pārśvena siṃhaśeyyā kalpayitavyā § 30.8.25A4. rātrīye paścime yāme paryaṅkena vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktena sthānacaṃkramānuyuktena vā § 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo yāva (BHS[Mvu], Pā) ⇒ yāvat, yāvad-artham § 1.6.1B5. saṃghasthavireṇa pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa svādhyāyitavyāni yāva ’ntamasato catvāri pārājikā gāthāś ca śiṣṭakam abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā § 2.7.2B7. “tvaṃ praticcheṣyasi” yāva “tvaṃ parikathāṃ kārayesî”ti § 3.12.4A4. dāyakadānapati dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyā yāva udyojayitavyā § 4.3.4B1. tad eva sarvvaṃ bhagavān vistareṇa pratyārocayati yāva ... (= § 9.2.9B6, § 42.4.36A7, § 49.2.42A5 usw.) § 11.3.10B4. śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ peyālaṃ yāva omayilamayilaṃ ... § 12.8.11B4. mūṣika-utkirā vā yāva (Hs. yāca) vaṃghorikā pūretavyā § 12.10.11B5. ka<r>mmaṃ kṛtvā yāva (lies: yeva?) te<na> dāni samantena āṣāḍhamāsaṃ śayyāsanaṃ grāhetavyaṃ § 13.1.12A6. vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā yāva (= § 39.1.30B6, § 43.1.38A1) § 18.21.16B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā kṣamayituṃ, yāva uśvāsena utpīḍito tti 452  § 18.22.16B1. iminā āgamayitavyaṃ tāva yāva utthita iti § 19.8.18A2. iminā tāva āgamayitavyaṃ yāva praśvāso kṛto § 20.11.19B7. evaṃ tāva khādayitavyaṃ yāva dantakāṣṭhasya catvāri aṅgulāni avaśiṣṭāni § 23.1.21A4. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānā {yāva} vistareṇa kṛtvā yāvad adrākṣīd § 26.8.23B1. “he he he Gaṅgā ayaṃ sarvvaṃ” yāva “Mahī Candrabhāgā ayaṃ.” § 37.4.30A3. yāva na dāni kṣamati āsane kṣiyādharmmam āpadyituṃ § 40.2.32B3. pe yāva (= § 40.13.33A5, § 41.22.35A6) § 40.13.33A6. yāva tenaỿva anta{ra}kena ujjhitavyaṃ § 41.25.35B2. āgamitavyaṃ yāva tehi dhovitā pādā tti § 42.3.36A4. te dāni dvāraṃ āgacchanti yāva bāhiravitaṇḍitaṃ kṛtaṃ § 50.1.43A2. yāva paśyati so vihārakaṃ ghaṭṭitakaṃ, ... § 50.1.43A3. so dāni bhikṣuḥ vihāram āgatvā āgameti ... yāva akālībhūtaṃ § 51.1.44A1. te dāni bhikṣū piṇḍāya caramāṇo antaraghare yāva uṭṭhāṇāto nirghoṭenti § 51.1.44A1. paśyatha bhaṇe, śramaṇakāḥ yāva uṭṭhāṇāto nirghoṭenti § 51.3.44A1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati piṇḍacārikena yāva uṭṭhānāto nirghoṭayituṃ § 51.6.44A3. “cakṣur anityā yāva mano anityan.” ti sthātavyaṃ § 54.10.46A6. na dāni kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ‖ pe ‖ yāva atha khalu ekāṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ tena vāretavyaṃ § 54.15.46B1. evaṃ tāva vāretavyaṃ yāva prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (= § 55.9.47A1) § 57.8.47B6. bhikṣuṇā yāva vṛddhatarakā nirddhāvitā paścād utthapitvā upānahāyo ābandhiya gantavyaṃ usw. yāva-kīyaṃ# “so lange”; vgl. Pā. yāva-kīvaṃ, kīvaṃ, Skt. kiyant, ved. kīvant ☞ § 39.29, Anm. 11 § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi no parihāṇi.” yāvat ⇒ yāva, yāvad-artham § 3.5.3B2. sarvvehi jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ khalv adya pakṣasya pratipadā dvitīyā yāvat pañcadaśī § 6.7.7B5. yāvat pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ § 8.13.9B3. yāvan na utthāpīyati, sā evam e<va> āpṛcchanikā § 21.1.20A7. vistareṇa yāvad § 23.1.21A4. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānā {yāva} vistareṇa kṛtvā yāvad adrākṣīd § 30.7.25A4. nâpi dāni parivarttakaṃ yāvat sūryodgamanāt tato śayitavyaṃ § 36.2.29B1. etad eva sarvvaṃ bhagavāṃ vistareṇa pratyārocayati, yāvat “paśyatha bhaṇe ...” § 38.5.30A7. ye (?; Hs. yā) vṛddhatarakā yāvad vṛddhāntaṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ ... § 57.7.47B5. vṛddhānte ... praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ. abhinikuṭitakena prāñjalīkṛtena gantavyaṃ yāvat pratisandhi usw. yāvataka~ (BHS[Mvu], Pā) ⇒ yattaka~, yattikā~ § 14.3.13A3. atha khalu ucchāhetavyā. tahi eko vā dvau vā trayo vā yāvatakā ucchahanti yāvad-artham adv. “nach Bedarf, wie nötig” § 42.20.37A5. yāvadarthaṃ bhadantā upaneṃtu § 42.21.37A7. kiñ câpi yāvadarthaṃ upanenti, anāpattiḥ § 50.6.43B1. yadi tāvad yāvadarthaṃ bhaktaṃ dīyati, prakṛty’ eva ātmano bhaktato tasya pātraṃ pūretavyaṃ yāvanti für yācanti: § 31.1.25A7, § 42.2.36A2; yāviya für yāciya : § 14.18.13B5 yukta~ ⇒ oharapāra-yukta~ yuktāḥ für muktāḥ : § 14.7.13A6 yuga~ “Joch” § 49.5.42B1. atha khalu yugamātraṃ nidhyāyantena gantavyaṃ § 55.2.46B4. (geṇḍuka~ ...) tādṛśo karttavyo yo bhūmīyaṃ āpaṭito yugamātraṃ uppaṭati √yuj ⇒ anu-yukta~, abhi-yuka~, ud-yojaya-, upa-yojaya-, yukta~ 453 yuṣmābhiḥ ⇒ tvaṃ yūyaṃ ⇒ tvaṃ yūyaṃ für yūṣaṃ : § 50.6.43B2 yūṣa~ “Brühe” § 50.6.43B2. na dāni apratyagraṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ. ekānte yūṣaṃ (Hs. yūyaṃ) sākavyañjanaṃ vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ ye (1) Nom. pl. fem. von yad~ § 4.15.5B2. ye devatā santi abhiprasannā (vs) (= § 6.13.8A4); vgl. Mvu I 294.23. yā devatā santi abhiprasannā ye (2) emphatische Partikel (= eva, yeva) ☞ § 31.24, Anm. 3 ⇒ yaṃ, yeva, yyeva § 17.12.15A6. upādakā bhavanti, yo ye paśyati tena yeva samaṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ ... yo yeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yyeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yeva paśyati tena yyeva ... § 31.24.26A7. yūyaṃ jātā, <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti § 36.1.29A7. te dāni odhyāyanti, “pasyatha bhaṇe, vayaṃ ye (oder lies: ye<va>?) tāva sannipatitā "kāryāṇi kariṣyāma" tti, ...” yeca für yeva : § 3.1.3A7, § 4.1.4A6, § 4.12.5A4, § 5.13.7A3, § 17.3.14B6, § 21.6.20B4, § 25.3. 22B2, § 35.1.28B7, § 43.16.38B5, § 47.1.40B3, § 54.3.46A2. usw. yena (BHS, SWTF, Pā, episches Skt [vgl. Oberlies 2003: 329]) “wo” ⇒ yena ... tena § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā karttavyā yena dvāraṃ (Hs. dvārā) <sāmantena?> § 42.9.36B3. yena bhraṣṭikā sāmantena {karttavyaṃ} kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ yena ... tena (BHS, SWTF, Pā, episches Skt [vgl. Oberlies 2003: 329]) “dahin, wo; in der Richtung, wo”; vgl. Pkt. jeṇa ...teṇa (z.B. Bollée 2002: 35) ⇒ yena § 62.6.50A2. taṃ pi dāni na kṣamati yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipituṃ § 62.6.50A3. atha khalu yena navakatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipitavyaṃ § 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ § 62.6.50A3. nâyaṃ kṣamati saṃghanavakena yena saṃghasthaviro tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipituṃ yena für yeva? : § 4.8.4B7 yentāka-vārika~# “ein Mönch, der für den jentāka (eine Anstalt für Schwitzbäder) verantwortlich ist” (Vermutlich ein Hypersanskritismus für jentāka-v°) ☞ § 42.27, Anm. 1 ⇒ jentāka-vārika~, vārika~ § 42.27.37B4. yentākavārikā adhyeṣitavyāḥ yeva (BHS[Mvu], Pā) < ye (eine emphatische Partikel) + eva; vgl. Norman 1967: 162f. = CP I 48f.; vgl. auch Steiner 1997: 199ff.; S. 559 in diesem Band ⇒ yyeva, yaṃ, ye § 2.1.2B2. vayaṃ ye<va> tāva karmmāntā cchoriya āgatā § 3.1.3A7. vayaṃ yeva (Hs. yeca) karmmāntāṃ cchoriya āgatā (= § 4.1.4A6) § 4.8.4B7. devāntarā yeva (Hs. yena) anukālyaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 4.9.5A1. tathā yeva upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 4.12.5A4. kiṃ ārabhya deti, tathā yeva nimantraṇāy’ etavyaṃ § 10.4.10A4. antevāsinā tāva kalyato yeva utthantakena eva ... § 17.12.15A6. yo yaṃ paśyati, tena yyeva gaṇṭhī karttavyā. ... yo ye paśyati tena yeva ... yo yeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yyeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yeva paśyati tena yyeva § 18.24.16B2. nâpi dāni dūrato yeva nivāsa<na>ṃ oguhiya upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 19.18.18A7. atha dāni dvibhūmiko bhavati, dvitīyāyāṃ bhūmiyaṃ tathā yeva ghaṭako sthāpayitavyo § 19.25.18B3. tumbakaṃ bhavati, kalyato yeva ujjhitvā cchanne sthavitavyaṃ § 20.5.19B1. bhagavān jānanto yeva pṛcchati (= § 23.2.21A5, § 24.2.22A1, § 43.1.38A2) § 21.6.20B4. yadi aparo pi koci sīvayitukāmo bhavati, tenâpi kaṭhinaṃ astarīya cīvarakaṃ yeva tathā sīvayitavyaṃ § 30.5.25A3. (śeyyā ...) tathā karttavyā yathā saṃpa<ti>tako yeva dakṣiṇena pārśvena śayyāṃ kalpeti § 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.34.26B7. sarvve yeva gocaraṃ praviśanti, kiñ câpi ghaṭṭenti, anāpattiḥ 454  § 37.1.29B7. paśyatha bhaṇe, vayaṃ yeva{ṃ} tāva sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāmo” ti § 39.2.30B7. aparejjukāto kalyato yeva (Hs. yevā) utthihiya § 39.3.31A2. kalyato yeva sarvvāṇi bhaktāni utkṣipituṃ § 40.1.32B2. kalyato yeva ... utthiyāṇa § 40.16.33B2. tato yeva pibati tato yeva pāridhovanīyaṃ karoti tato yeva hastāṃ dhovati § 42.21.37A5. yadi tāva mitakaṃ dīyati uṣṇodakaṃ ghaṭena vā kuṇḍena vā, tena tathā yeva grahetavyaṃ § 43.10.38A7. etā bhaiṣajyapiṣaṇikā śilā na dāni kārya kṛtvā yathā yeva pratiliptikā sthapetavyā § 43.15.38B3. cīvararaj<j>ūṃ na ... tathā yeva vitanikā ujjhitvā gantavyaṃ § 43.16.38B5. etā bhavanti vāsīyo vā kuddālakā vā niśreṇiyo vā, na dāni tathā yeva (Hs. yeca) mṛttikāpraliptikā sthapetavyā § 44.6.39A4. bhikṣū kalyato yeva nivāsiya prāvariya § 46.2.40A5. yūyaṃ kalyato yeva gocarāye prasthitā § 46.4.40A6. kalyato yeva gocarāye prasthito bhavati § 47.1.40B3. vayaṃ yeva (Hs. yeca) tāva ... (= § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A4) § 48.6.41B1. nâpi kṣamati tathā yeva niṣīdituṃ § 49.1.42A2. so dāni tato yeva anuparivarttiya ... § 49.9.42B7. yathā yeva agrāsanaṃ agrodakaṃ agrapiṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjasi, tathā yeva dakṣiṇām ādiśāhi § 50.10.43B6. yatra yeva taṃ paśyati, tatra yeva panthāto uvvattiyāṇaṃ ... § 54.3.46A2. te ... yaṣṭī vārentā yo yeva bhikṣu pracalāyati taṃ yeva kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhananti, pāde vā āhananti § 55.3.46B4~5. yo yeva pracālayati taṃ yeva kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena urasi vā tāṇḍeti pārśvasmi vā āhananti § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhavanti, tato śvetamayena yeva khādanti, bilvāni khādanti, vātakopanāni phalāni khādanti, kalāyā satilapallavaṃ khādanti § 62.4.50A1. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktukān vā mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayitvā śvetamayena yeva khādituṃ usw. -y-evaṃ ⇒ -y- yevaṃ für yeva : § 37.1.29B7 yevā für yeva : § 39.2.30B7 yogavaro für yogācāro : § 27.1.23B4 yoga-sampanna~# “tüchtig” § 4.17.5B4. śīlavatī yogasampannā samyagdṛṣṭi ca yā iha (vs) yogācāra~ (yoga-ā°) (BHS, SWTF) “Yoga übender (Mönch)” ☞ § 27.1, Anm. 1 § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo “cittaṃ samādhayiṣyāmî”ti (= § 28.1.24A1) § 27.2.23B5. aparo yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo “cittaṃ samādhayiṣyan” ti (≒ § 28.2.24A2) § 27.1.23B4. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ so yogācāro (Hs. yogavaro) bhagavato ārocaye (= § 28.1. 24A2) § 27.2.23B5. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, eva<ṃ> ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhasi § 28.2.24A2. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, evaṃ ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato caṃkramasi § 27.3.23B6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhituṃ § 28.3.24A3. nâyan tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato caṃkramituṃ § 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti. cīvarakoṇenâpi nirvvāpenti. yogācārā bhikṣū gandhena vyābahanti § 56.1.47A3. yogācārāṃ bhikṣuṃ śabdena vyābahanti (= § 58.1.48A2) § 57.1.47B1. yogācārāṃ bhikṣūṃ śabdena vyābahanti (= § 59.1.48A6; ≒ § 60.1.48B5, § 61.1.49A2, § 62.2.49B7) yocchati für pocchati : § 41.8.34A4 455 yy / mp ⇒ mp / yy yy / ṣy ⇒ y / ṣ yy / sy : § 12.17.12A4. utthāsyaṃ für utthāyyaṃ yyeva (Pkt) Vgl. Pkt. yyeva, yyevva, jjeva, jjevva < yeva; vgl. auch Steiner 1997: 199ff.; S. 559 in diesem Band ⇒ yeva, ye, yaṃ § 11.3.10B4. bhagavāṃ jānanto yyeva bhikṣūṃ pṛcchati § 17.12.15A6~7. yo yaṃ paśyati, tena yyeva gaṇṭhī karttavyā. ... yo ye paśyati tena yeva ... yo yeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yyeva (Hs. pyeva) paśyati tena yyeva (Hs. pyeva) ... yo yeva paśyati tena yyeva ... yo yeva paśyati tena yyeva (Hs. pyeva) § 18.7.15B6. kiñ câpi tahi yyeva udakaṃ patati, anāpattiḥ § 19.18.18A7. tṛbhūmiko bhavati, tṛtīyāyāṃ bhūmau tathā yyeva sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.22.18B1. vikāle praveśiyāṇaṃ tahiṃ yyeva sthāne sthāpayitavyo § 19.25.18B3. ku<ṃ>tako bhavati, evaṃ yyeva karttavyaṃ § 23.4.1.21A7. pīṭhaṃ praveśeti. pīṭhasyâpi evaṃ yyeva § 24.11.22A6. cchorantako yyeva paryādānaṃ gacchati. kiṃ câpi na marddati, anāpattiḥ § 31.27.26B2. āyuṣman, mā piṇḍāya praviśatha. iha yyeva bhuṃjiṣyatha (≒ § 31.30.26B5) § 39.9.31A6. kallato (Hs. karṇṇato) yyeva āgacchatha § 40.1.32B2. tato yyeva mukhaṃ tato yyeva hastāṃ nirmmādiyanti § 40.11.33A4. tato yyeva stokaṃ varjayitavyaṃ § 40.14.33A6. taṃ yyeva karttavyaṃ § 43.15.38B3. tathā yyeva upamakṣitaṃ vā raṃgarañjitaṃ vā ... § 49.7.42B6. rathyāntaraṃ vā paśyati tato yyeva nivarttayitavyaṃ § 52.1.44B1. vayaṃ yyeva tāva imeṣāṃ kṛtena snehaṃ thapemaḥ, ... R Verlust von r § 12.10.11B5. ka<r>mmaṃ § 29.1.24A6. uṣṭ<r>aparyaṃkena § 31.6.25B5. mā<r>gakena § 41.1.33B3. ā<r>drapādakaṃ § 42.24.37B2. nimant<r>itakehi § 62.7.50A4. āmant<r>iya usw. r/ṃ ⇒ ṃ/r r/y ⇒ y/r ra / u ⇒ u / ra ra / ū ⇒ ū / ra √rakṣ ⇒ su-rakṣita~ § 4.15.5B2. tā naṃ rakṣaṃtu tā ca naṃ pālayantu (vs) § 6.13.8A4. tā naṃ rakṣantu (vs) § 4.18.6A1. divā vā yadi vā rātrau devā rakṣantu dāyakān (vs) § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako, so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā” § 41.13.34B3. putra dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsesi § 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako ... gṛhasya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiyāṇaṃ rakṣamāṇo āsati rakṣa-pāla~ “Wächter” § 31.34.27A1. sarvve yeva gocaraṃ praviśanti ... eko vā rakṣapālo dātavyo § 41.13.34B3. taṃ dāra<ka>ṃ rakṣapālaṃ thapiyāṇaṃ ... rakṣāvaraṇa-gupti~ (BHS[Mvu]) (rakṣā-āva°) “Schutz, Obhut und Fürsorge”; vgl. Pā. rakkhāvaraṇa- gutti (DN I 62.4, AN III 149.23) § 34.6.28B6. tavâhaṃ hitopasaṃhāreṇa rakṣāvaraṇaguptiye sukhaṃ ca phāsukañ ca viharāmi 456 raṅga~ ⇒ rajanikā~, rañjana~ § 21.7.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinasmi (Hs. °sya) raṅgaṃ (Hs. °ṅge) vā śoṣayituṃ (Hs. śodha°) gomayaṃ vā cīvarakāni vā śoṣayituṃ (Hs. śodha°) § 40.16.33B2. tato yeva hastāṃ dhovati raṅgam vā karoti raṅgakaṭahakā für raṅgakaṭāhakā : § 43.13.38B1 *raṅga-kaṭāhaka~ “Farbgefäß” ⇒ kaṭāhaka~ § 43.13.38B1. ete bhavanti raṅgagolakā vā raṅgaghaṭakā vā raṅgakuṇḍakā vā raṅga- kaṭāhakā (Hs. °kaṭahakā) vā, ... raṅga-kuṇḍaka~# “Farbtopf” ⇒ kuṇḍaka~ § 43.13.38B1. ete bhavanti raṅgagolakā vā raṅgaghaṭakā vā raṅgakuṇḍakā vā raṅga- kaṭāhakā vā, ... raṅga-golaka~# “kugelförmiger Topf für Farben” ⇒ golaka~, vyañjana-golaka~ § 43.13.38B1. ete bhavanti raṅgagolakā vā raṅgaghaṭakā vā raṅgakuṇḍakā vā raṅga- kaṭāhakā vā, ... raṅga-ghaṭaka~# “Farbkrug” ⇒ ghaṭaka~ § 43.13.38B1. ete bhavanti raṅgagolakā vā raṅgaghaṭakā vā raṅgakuṇḍakā vā raṅga- kaṭāhakā vā, ... raṃga-rakṣitaṃ wohl für raṃga-rañjitaṃ : § 43.15.38B3 *raṃga-rañjita~ “befleckt (lit. gefärbt) mit Farbe” ☞ § 43.15, Anm. 1 § 43.15.38B3. upamakṣitaṃ vā raṃgarañjitaṃ (Hs. °rakṣitaṃ) vā adhotakam vā anupaliptakam vā dayituṃ racchā~ (Pā) “Straße; Weg”; < Skt. rathyā ⇒ rathyā~ § 31.13.25B7. na dāni labhyā anyena gantuṃ. racchā cchiddrakā bhavati, anāpattiḥ § 53.13.45B3. varccakuṭīyaṃ nirvvāpayitvā, racchā<yāṃ> (“Weg [zur Toilette?]”) dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo. racchāyāṃ nirvvāpayitvā, sopānaśīrṣe <dīpo> nirvvāpayitavyaḥ √raj ⇒ raṃga-rañjita~, rañja-, rañje- rajag[g]asma# Bedeutung?; vgl. Pā. rajagga~ (“Staubhaufen”) ☞ § 54.8, Anm. 1 § 54.8.46A5. nâpi kṣamati kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye āhanituṃ rajag[g]asma (od. rajag[v]asma) viya rajata~ ⇒ prabhūta-jātarūpa-rajata-vittopakaraṇa~ rajanikā~# “Farbe (zum Färben von Gewändern); Färben von Gewändern” ☞ § 32.6, Anm. 4 ⇒ raṅga~, rañjana~ § 32.6.27B1. cīvaraṃ dhovantasya, rajanikā pacantasya, cīvarāṇi sīvantasya raṃjentasya ... § 40.9.33A2. eṣo dāni dhovanikāṃ vā rajanikām vā kareti, tasya udakena kāryam bhavati, ... § 43.15.38B3. tena dhovanikā vā rajanikā vā kariya na kṣamati tathā yyeva ... dayituṃ rajas~ ⇒ rajag[g]asma, rajo-haraṇaka~, vāta-rajas~ § 41.22.35A6. celakhaṇḍena rajo prasphoṭitavyo § 44.8.39A6. rajo vātarajo vā ukkalikā cīvaraṃ vināśeti rajo-nigraha~# “das Binden des Staubes”; < rajas + nigraha (“das Niederhalten, Festhalten”) § 23.6.4.21B4. pādām vā dhovati, mukham vā dhovati, hastam vā nirmmādayati, “rajonigrahaṃ kāheti” tti, anāpattiḥ rajo-haraṇaka~# “Staubwedel”; vgl. Skt. rajoharaṇa; BHS. rajopaharaṇa § 48.6.41B1. leṅkaṭakhaṇḍena rajoharaṇakena vā prasphoṭiya ’ka saṃkacchikāṃ prajñapiya upaviśitavyaṃ rajj~ ⇒ cīvara-rajju~, rejju~, rejjukā~ § 14.9.13A7. ekena abhyantaraghaṭṭimaṃ vihārakaṃ kariya, rejjūye vā kaḍevarikāya vā otaritavyaṃ. otariya rajjū{ye} vā kaḍevariyā vā abhyantare kṣipitavyā § 21.6.20B3. bhittīye dve kīlakā nikhaniya rajjue (Instr.) bandhiya tahiṃ ukkacayitavyaṃ √rañj ⇒ rañja-, rañjaya-, rañje-, su-rakta~ rañja- (Pā) “färben” ⇒ rañjaya-, rañje-, su-rakta~ § 8.9.9A6. cīvarāṇi dhovetavyāni sīvitavyāni raṃjitavyāni § 8.9.9A6. pātraṃ dahitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ § 16.6.14B1. (śeyyāsanaṃ ...) dhoviṣyanti rañjiṣyanti sīviṣyanti 457  § 16.8.14B3. śeyyāsanaṃ dhovitavyaṃ sivitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ § 25.16.23A3. pātraṃ ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ dahitavyaṃ pacitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ (☞ § 25.16, Anm. 2) § 44.11.39B1. kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ raṃjitavyaṃ sīvitavyaṃ yathā cchavi rañjana~ “Farbe (zum Färben von Gewändern)” ⇒ rajanikā~, raṅga~ § 40.16.33B1. na dāni kṣamati pāridhovaniyāto snāpituṃ (lies: snāyituṃ?) vā cīvaram vā dhovituṃ rañjanaṃ vā kaḍhituṃ rañjaya- (Skt), rañje- (Pā) “färben” ⇒ rañja- § 13.10.12B3. śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ bhavati pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhovayitavyaṃ rañjetavyaṃ (☞ § 13.10, Anm. 1) § 13.12.12B5. śayyāsanaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ sīvayitavyaṃ rañjayitavyaṃ (Hs. rañjiyatavyaṃ) (☞ § 13.10, Anm. 1) § 32.6.27B1. cīvaraṃ dhovantasya, rajanikā pacantasya, cīvarāṇi sīvantasya raṃjentasya ... § 43.15.38B3. cīvaraṃ raṃjetvāna ... § 47.1.40B3. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarakāṇi dhoventā siventā raṃjentā talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ § 47.2.40B5. cīvarakāni dhovaṃtā sīvantā rañjentā ... (= § 48.2.41A6) § 48.1.41A4. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarāṇi dhoventā sīventā rañjentā talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ raṇaraṇā#, raṇaraṇāya#, raṇaraṇāye# Onomatopoetica; vgl. Skt. raṇaraṇāyita § 4.7.4B5. raṇaraṇā gaṇḍi āhaṇiya vaktavyaṃ: “āyuṣman vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho ...” § 4.7.4B6. tato raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍī āhaṇiya <praviśitavyaṃ> § 5.7.6B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiyāṇaṃ ārocitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ: “āyuṣma<ṃ>to vipralabdho ...” § 5.7.6B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiyāṇaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 6.7.7B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiya ... pātrāṇi gṛhṇiya praviśitavyaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ § 17.5.14B7. tato raṇaraṇāye gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiya sarvvasaṃghena sannipatitavyaṃ rata~ ⇒ karmma-rata~, nidrā-rata~, bhāṣya-rata~ ratha~ § 47.7.41A1. parivarjitavyā ... bhrānto vā hasti bhrānto vā ratho § 49.5.42B1. anekāye bhrānto vā hasti āgaccheya bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā ratho rathyā~ ⇒ utkṣipta-rathyā~, ukṣipta-rathyā~, tuṇḍa-rathyā~, saṃbādha-rathyā~, racchā~ § 4.5.4B3. katamaṃ deśaṃ gṛhaṃ? katamāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ? § 5.5.6B2. katamasmin deśe gṛhaṃ? katamāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ? § 6.5.7B2. katame deśe gṛhaṃ? kutomukhaṃ? katamāye rathyāye? § 5.6.6B3. asuke deśe asukāyāṃ rathyāyāṃ itthaṃnāmo nāma upāsako § 49.7.42B6. rathyāntaraṃ vā paśyati tato yyeva nivarttayitavyaṃ √ram § 31.35.27A2. atha khalu samāśvāsitavyaṃ “vasantu āyuṣmanto, ramaṃtu ayuṣmanto.” rasa~ ⇒ patra-rasa~, puṣpa-rasa~, mūla-rasa~ rasāgra~ (rasa-a°) (BHS) “die köstlichste (Speise)”; vgl. Pā. rasagga ☞ § 39.17, Anm. 1 § 39.17.31B5. nâpi dāni āraṇyakehi grāmāntikā kutsetavyā “bahukṛtyā bahukaraṇīyā jihvāgre<na> yūyaṃ rasāgrāṇi paryeṣatha” rahas ⇒ manuṣya-raha-śayyaka~ § 42.5.36B1. metraṃ kāyakarmma ... sabrahmacāriṣu dhruvaṃ pratyupasthāpayitavyaṃ āvi caỿva raho ca rāja-kula~ “Königshof” § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi ... mṛtakam vā bhaveya, sandhi vā cchinno, agnidāho vā rājakulāto vā upadravo § 41.17.34B7. praticorehi pi muṣyema grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema rājakule pi vadhyema (≒ § 41.18.35A1) Rājagṛha~ § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, Rājagṛhe Tapodaṃ ... 458  § 42.1.36A1. bhagavān Rājagṛhe viharati rājan~ ⇒ nāga-rāja(n)~, mṛga-rājan~ rāja-putra~ § 20.7.19B4. yathā kumārakā vā dharmmiṣṭhā vā gaṇakā vā rājaputrā vā ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti rāja-bhaya~ (Pā) “Gefahr von Seiten des Königs” ☞ § 1.12, Anm. 3 § 6.6.7B3. anekāye tahiṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā bhaveya rājabhayaṃ vā corabhayam vā ... rātra~ ⇒ cira-rātrāya, varṣā-rātra~, varṣā-rātra-kāla~, sarvva-rātra~ rātri~ “Nacht” ⇒ sukha-rātri~ § 3.6.3B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho ... sandhipoṣadho vā divā <vā> rātrau vā poṣadho (Hs. °dhe) § 4.18.6A1. divā vā yadi vā rātrau devā rakṣantu dāyakān (vs) § 30.6.25A3. rātrīye purimaṃ yāmaṃ uddeśaprayuktena svādhyāyaprayuktena sthānena caṃkrameṇa vītināmayitavyaṃ § 30.7.25A4. rātrīye madhyame yāme dakṣiṇena pārśvena siṃhaśeyyā kalpayitavyā § 30.8.25A4. rātrīye paścime yāme paryaṅkena vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktena ... § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “ ... duṣkaraṃ pravivekena dur- abhiramaṃ ekaṃ paraṃ rātri vinayamāno mānasaṃ ādhyātmaṃ vê”ti § 56.5.47A5. rātriñ ca śayyāsanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ āsati, ... -rātri~, -rātrika~ ⇒ sarvva-rātr, sarvva-rātrim, sarvva-rātrika~ rātri-poṣadha~# “nächtliche Poṣadha-Feier” ⇒ divā-poṣadha~, poṣadha~ § 2.5.2B4. kiṃ rātripoṣadho bhaviṣyati divāpoṣadho purebhaktaṃ bhaviṣyati paścād- bhaktaṃ? rātrī-prāvaraṇa~# “während der Nacht getragenes (Untergewand)” ⇒ rātrī-prāvaraṇaka~ § 45.7.40A2. nâpi kṣamati ... nagnaprāvṛtena rātrīprāvaraṇa<ṃ> nivāsanaṃ mārggituṃ § 45.7.40A3. rātriprāvaraṇaṃ nivāsanaṃ ca āvellayitavyaṃ rātrī-prāvaraṇaka~# “während der Nacht getragenes (Untergewand)” ⇒ rātrī-prāvaraṇa~ § 45.7.40A2. pratikṛty’ eva tāva rātrīprāvaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ upahastīkarttavyaṃ √rādh ⇒ abhi-raddha~, saṃ-rādhaya- rāśi~ § 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ sthavitaṃ. tan dāni vātamaṇḍalikāye āgacchiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno kapālānāṃ rāśiṃ kṛtvā § 25.1.22B1. so dāni hastāṃ nirmmādiya vihārakaṃ praviṣṭo, paśyati kapālikānāṃ rāśiṃ § 42.20.37A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati cūrṇṇaṃ rāśīya upanetuṃ rāṣṭra~ § 4.17.5B4. nagnā nadī anodikā nagnaṃ rāṣṭraṃ arājakaṃ (vs) ri / ṛ ⇒ ṛ / ri rikta~ “leer” ⇒ ritta~, ṛkta~, riktaka~ § 18.40.17A3. atha khalu pṛcchitavyaṃ “bhagini, kiṃ riktā vā varccakuṭī nê”ti § 18.40.17A3. yadi tāvad āha “ārya, riktā varccakuṭī” ti, ... praviśitavyaṃ § 18.42.17A4. utsṛṣṭagṛhaṃ gantavyaṃ. pṛcchitavyaṃ “rikto ukkharo” ti § 51.11.44A5. eṣā strī bhikṣuṃ paśyiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati ... riktā (“mit leeren Händen”) nirddhāvati, jānitavyaṃ “eṣā na dāsyati”, gantavyaṃ riktaka~ “leer” ⇒ rikta~, ritta~, ṛkta~ § 18.13.16A2. riktakāṃ varccakumbhikāṃ paśyati, na tadā adhyupekṣitavyaṃ rikta-paribhoga~# “(vorläufig) nicht zu gebrauchen” (?) (lit. “vom geleerten Gebrauch”) § 43.16.38B5. tac c’ eva{ṃ} cāturddiśaṃ sāṃghikaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ riktaparibhogaṃ na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ ritta~ (Pā) “leer”; < Skt. rikta ⇒ rikta~, ṛkta~, riktaka~ § 14.1.13A1. aparaṃ dāni āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ himadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na vasati (≒ § 14.3. 13A2) § 14.15.13B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ udakadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na saṃvasati, ... √ruc ⇒ ā-roca-, ā-rocaya-, ā-roce-, rucya-, vi-roca- rucya- (BHS[BHSG, S. 227b]) “gefallen”; vgl. Pā. ruccati, Skt. rocate 459  § 12.12.11B7. “ ... katamo tava vihārako rucyati?” yo saṃghasthavirasya vihārako rucyati, so dātavyo § 41.18.35A2. te dāni āhaṃsuḥ “yathā senāpatikasya rucyati” § 50.9.43B5. cchandayitavyo vaktavyo “ūnakaṃ pūrehi. yaṃ te rucyati taṃ khādehi.” § 50.9.43B5. yadi tāva ākāṃkṣati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ yaṃ rucyati, taṃ khāditavyaṃ rucira~ § 4.18.5B6. vibhaktabhāgaṃ ruciraṃ manoramaṃ praśastam āryehi navaṃ niveśanaṃ (vs) √ruj ⇒ √luj rudhira~ § 18.15.16A3. bhikṣuṇā ... vraṇamukhaṃ pocchitaṃ. tasya dāni kṣataṃ sa-rudhiraṃ kṛtaṃ § 19.37.19A1. kena imaṃhi panthe praśvāso kṛto rudhiraṃ viya cchanditaṃ? √ruh ⇒ o-ruha-, ropita~, ropitaka~ rūpa~ ⇒ garbha-rūpa~ “Kleinkind” rejju~# “Seil”; < Skt. rajj~ ☞ § 14.9, Anm. 4 ⇒ rejjukā~, rajj~ § 14.9.13A7. ekena abhyantaraghaṭṭimaṃ vihārakaṃ kariya, rejjūye vā kaḍevarikāya vā otaritavyaṃ. otariya rajjū{ye} vā kaḍevariyā vā abhyantare kṣipitavyā rejjukā~# “Seil” ☞ § 14.9, Anm. 4; § 42.11, Anm. 2 ⇒ rejju~, rajj~ § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ ... vaṃśānāṃ vā nalānām vā na<ṃ>galānāṃ vā kāṇḍānām vā carukānām vā rohiṣāṇāṃ vā sūtrikāya vā rejjukāya vā ghaṇa<ṃ> vuṇitavyaṃ § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī ... kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā naḍānām vā naṅgalānām vā kaṇḍānām vā rejjukāye vā sūtrakāye (für sūtrikāye?) vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā § 44.4.39A2. tato paṭṭikāye vā loḍhakena vā rejjukāye vā bandhitavyāni ropita~ “gepflanzt”; p. pt. von Skt. ropayati ⇒ ropitaka~ § 20.2.19A6. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyāṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropito ropitaka~# “gepflanzt”; < ropita + Suffix ka ⇒ ropita~ § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyaṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropitako rohiṣa~ eine Art Gras ☞ § 21.3, Anm. 6 § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ ... vaṃśānāṃ vā nalānām vā na<ṃ>galānāṃ vā kāṇḍānām vā carukānām vā rohiṣāṇāṃ vā sūtrikāya vā rejjukāya vā ghaṇa<ṃ> vuṇitavyaṃ § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā vaṃśasya vā nalasya vā naṃgalasya vā rohiṣasya vā daśa-aṣṭahastāṃ dīrghatvena raudra~ § 41.19.35A4. raudrā lohitapāṇī caurā tuṣyanti tādṛśā santā (vs) rg / gr ⇒ gr / rg rṇ / l : § 55.2.46B3. ulāya für *urṇāya oder Pā. uṇṇāya (< Skt. ūrṇā “Wolle”) rṇṇ / ll : § 5.8.6B6. anukarṇṇatarakaṃ für °kallatarakaṃ § 6.8.7B6. anukarṇṇaṃ für anukallaṃ § 13.7.12B2. urṇṇāye für ullāye; § 18.4.15B3. urṇṇā für ullā § 19.19.18A7. karṇṇikaṃ für *kallikaṃ?; § 39.9.31A6. karṇṇato für kallato § 23.3.21A5. māṣakānavallā für °varṇṇā § 25.15.23A2. kīrṇṇakaṃ für *kīllakaṃ oder kīlakaṃ rth / dhv ⇒ dhv / rth rddh / rvv § 42.18.37A3. sarvvevihārika~ für sārddhevihārika~ (= § 42.25.37B3, § 47.1.40B3, § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A3) § 42.21.37A6. sārvvevihārika~ für sārddhevihārika~ (= § 48.2.41A5, § 49.1.41B6) § 49.1.42A1. sārvvaṃ für sārddhaṃ § 49.2.42A4. sārvvevihāriṃ für sārddhevihāriṃ rdh / v : § 8.4.8B7. sāvevihāriṇā für sārdhevi° rmm / ryy ⇒ m / y § 51.14.44A7. kārmmaṃ für kāryyaṃ rmm / rṣ : § 12.3.11B1. dharmmāṃ für varṣāṃ ry / rṣ ⇒ y / ṣ 460 ryy / rmm ⇒ rmm / ryy rvv / rddh ⇒ rddh / rvv rṣ / rmm ⇒ rmm / rṣ rṣ / ry ⇒ y / ṣ L l/g ⇒ g/l l/ṇ ⇒ ṇ/l l / ṇṇ ⇒ ṇṇ / l l/n ⇒ n/l l / rṇ ⇒ rṇ / l l / ll : § 23.1.21A4. palluggakāṃ für palu° § 23.8.21B6. cikkhalikā für °allikā § 32.7.27B2. alīyāṇaṃ für allī° √lakṣ ⇒ upa-√lakṣ-, vi-lakṣe- lakṣmī~ § 4.18.5B7. śirīyĕ lakṣmī<yĕ>(?) parigraheṇa ca (vs) √lag ⇒ lagga~, lagga-, lagna~, ullaggaka~, ullaggikā~, ullaggikāye lagga~ (Pā) “berührt, angesteckt”; < Skt. lagna ⇒ lagna~ § 42.9.36B4. atha khalu tathā karttavyaṃ yathā yavaphalamātreṇa lagga (Nom. sg. neut. oder eine Verschreibung für laggati ?) lagga- (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “hängenbleiben, haften; berühren”; Denominativ vom Partizip Präteritum lagna; vgl. BHSG § 28.19, S. 228a § 42.9.36B4. atha khalu tathā karttavyaṃ yathā yavaphalamātreṇa lagga<ti> (oder lagga [Nom. sg. neut. -a]?) lagna~ ⇒ lagga~ § 47.1.40B2. kaṇṭakaśākhāhi lagnaṃ bhavati § 47.1.40B3. jhāḍe vā vṛkṣaśākhāyām vā lagnaṃ “ḍu” tti ka<ḍ>ḍhanti § 47.4.40B6. yahiṃ lagnaṃ tahi<ṃ> lagnaṃ § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ ... kaṇṭakaśākhāyāṃ vā lagnaṃ bhavati ... laghu, laghuṃ ⇒ lahu, lahuṃ § 4.11.5A4. “laghu kālo atikramati. detha yūyan” ti (≒ § 5.10.7A1) § 5.10.6B7. yadi tāva hemantakālo bhavati, laghu kālo atikramati, ... (= § 6.10.7B7, § 50.5.43A7) § 6.8.7B6. yadi tāva hemantakālo bhavati, ... laghuṃ kālo atikrāmati § 6.10.8A1. laghu kālo atikramati laṃgha-, laṃghaya- “springen, hinwegsteigen” § 4.10.5A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati praviśantehi bhaṇḍaṃ laṃghaṃtehi kāṃsabhājanaṃ laṃghaṃtehi dārakadārikāṃ laṃghaṃtehi gantuṃ § 4.15.5B1. śunakhā śṛgālā ca naṃ laṃghayantu (vs) § 6.13.8A3. śunakhā śṛgā<lā> c’ enaṃ laṃghayantaṃ (Impv. 3. pl. < Skt. -ntāṃ) (vs) § 5.9.6B6. tato nâpi kṣamati bhaṇḍaṃ laṃgha{ṃ}yantehi praviśituṃ § 6.9.7B6. tato na kṣamati bhaṇḍam vā laṃghayantehi (Hs. °yatena) praviśituṃ, bhājanam vā laṃghayantehi praviśituṃ dārakadārikā laṃghayantehi praviśituṃ § 42.15.37A1. na dāni āsanāni vā bhājanāni vā vṛddhatarakaṃ vā bhikṣuṃ laṃghayantena gantavyaṃ laḍḍu~ ⇒ *apakka-laḍḍu~ laddu für laḍḍu: § 20.18.20A4. apakka-laḍḍunā (Hs. °laddunā) √lap ⇒ ā-lapa-, ā-lape-, ā-lāpaya-, ā-lāpe-, ul-lapa~ (1) lapa- (< *lapayati [Kausativ von Skt. √lī]?) ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 5 ⇒ ul-lapa- (2), ol-lapa- (“aufhängen, anhängen”) labdha~ ⇒ √labh 461  § 4.13.5A5. nâpi kṣamati saṃghasthavireṇa labdho piṇḍo ... utthihiya gantuṃ § 4.13.5A7. na dāni ... utthāya āsanāto gantavyaṃ, “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya § 5.11.7A1. na kṣamati dvitīyasthavireṇa hantahantāye bhuñjiyāṇaṃ “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ § 6.11.8A2. na kṣamati labdhālabdhaṃ hantahantāye bhuñjiya “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ § 8.7.9A4. nānāvarṇṇitaṃ bhavati, pṛcchitavyo “suvihita, kuto idaṃ labdhaṃ?” § 31.8.25B6. ācikṣitavyaṃ “labdho pratiśrayo” § 41.14.34B3. tehi dāni kulaputrakehi otāro labdho § 52.4.44B3. yadi tāva labdhaṃ bhavati, upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā saṃgraho karttavyo labdhālabdhaṃ# (°bdha-alabdh°) “kaum, daß man (etwas) entgegengenommen hat” § 6.11.8A1. na kṣamati labdhālabdhaṃ hantahantāye bhuñjiya “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ √labh ⇒ labdha~, prati-√labh, dur-labha~ § 13.17.12B7. vihāro ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ apāvuritavyo yathā vātaṃ labheyyā § 31.1.25A7. āgantukānāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ gaṇo āgato dvāraṃ yācanti, na labhanti § 35.5.29A5. ārogyāpayitvā <yā>dṛśaṃ āsanaṃ labhyati, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ § 36.5.29B4. yādṛśaṃ āsanaṃ labhyate, tādṛśe āsane upaviśitavyaṃ (≒ § 37.4.30A3) § 40.1.32B3. āgantukā bhikṣū ... pānīyaṃ mārggenti, na labhanti § 40.2.32B4. pānīyaṃ mārgganti, na labhanti § 41.14.34B4. mārggiya mārggiya yaṃ labhatha taṃ gṛhṇatha § 41.19.35A3. labhanti vipulāṃ arthāṃ yathā pānīyadāyakaḥ (vs) § 41.19.35A3. sthāneṣu ca aiśvaryaṃ labhanti ācāraguṇayuktāḥ (vs) § 42.3.36A4. te dāni tailaṃ mārgganti na labhanti § 42.3.36A4. te ... cūrṇṇaṃ mārgganti na labhanti § 42.3.36A4. udakaṃ na labhanti § 42.3.36A6. udakaṃ mārgganti, na labhanti § 42.4.36A7. bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārggayanti na labhanti § 44.1.38B7. cīvarakaṃ mārggati na labhati § 50.2.43A3. so dāni tasya jalpati “āyuṣman, sādhu taṃ pātrakaṃ pi labhema (“wenn ich zurückbekommen würde”; ☞ § 50.2, Anm. 1).” § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu<ṃ> mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ usw. labhyā (BHS) “erlaubt; dürfen”; vgl. Pā. labbhā; SWTF IV 57a, labhyam § 31.13.25B7. na dāni labhyā anyena gantuṃ. racchā cchiddrakā bhavati, anāpattiḥ § 40.9.33A2. labhyā dāni pātrapūraṃ dātuṃ § 40.16.33A7. labhyā dāni pāridhovanikāto mukhaṃ vā dhovituṃ, hastaṃ vā nirmmādayituṃ, pātrapariśrāvaṇaṃ vā dhovituṃ § 40.16.33B1. labhyā (Hs. lebhyā) dāni pāyattikadharmmāya yācituṃ § 41.10.34A6. labhyā khalu ito pānīyaṃ pātuṃ § 48.8.41B4. labhyā dāni cīvarāntarikāya khakkhaṭāni phalāni gṛhnituṃ badarāṇi vā kolakāni ... √lamb § 24.1.22A1. adrākṣīd ... vihārakā<nā>ṃ pakkakheṭena vā pakkasiṃghāṇakena bhittīyo vināśitāyo siṃghāṇakavarttīhi lambantīhi (Hs. °ntehi) § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo pakkakheṭena pakka- siṃghāṇakena varttīhi lambantīhi? *layyalayāye Onomatopoeticum ☞ § 4.13, Anm. 2 ⇒ hantahantāye § 4.13.5A6. nâpi kṣamati ... dvāraṃ paśyiya layyalayāye (Hs. laṣya°) bhuṃjiyāṇa utthihiya gantuṃ lavāpaya- (BHS) “abhauen lassen”; Kaus. von Skt. √lū (“schneiden”) § 14.6.13A5. vihārasya catuḥpārśve kakṣaṃ jātakaṃ bhavati, so lavāpayitavyo laṣyalayāye für layyalayāye : § 4.13.5A6 462 lahuṃ (BHS, Pā) “schnell”; < Skt. laghu ⇒ laghuṃ § 5.8.6B6. yadi tāva hemantakālo bhavati, ... lahuṃ (Hs. bahuṃ) kālo atikramati § 6.10.8A1. atha dāni grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, na lahuṃ kālo atikramati § 50.5.43B1. bhagavatā anekaparyāyeṇa glāno pari<ṃ>dito. lahuṃ ca kālo atikrāmati lāṅgula~ “Schwanz” ☞ § 30.4, Anm. 2 § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati ... lāṅgulaṃ (Hs. aṅgu°) anukāyaṃ āyacchi{hi}tvā ... lābha~ § 4.20.6A3. so ’yaṃ śreṣṭhāyatane pratiṣṭhito pātrasaṃhṛto lābho (vs) lābha-grāha~ ⇒ lābha-grāhaka~ lābha-grāhaka~#, lābha-grāhin~# “Verteiler der erhaltenen Güter (oder Almosen?)” ☞ § 26.6, Anm. 3 ⇒ grāhaya- § 26.6.23B1. atha dāni daṇḍakarmma pratidinnaṃ bhavati, pārṣṇivadhrā omuñcitavyā, dvitīyakālikasya lābhagrāha<ka>ṃ adhyeṣitvā gantavyaṃ § 39.14.31B2. pariveśakena pṛcchitavyaṃ “ko āraṇyakānāṃ lābhagrāh<ak>o?” § 39.26.32A3. pariveṣakena vaktavyaṃ “ko grāmāntikānāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ lābhagrāhī?” § 39.26.32A4. atha dāni teṣāṃ na koci lābhagrāhako bhavati, pariveṣakena sarvveṣāṃ ekasthāne piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo lābhāgra-yaśogra-prāpta~# (lābha-ag°-yaśas-ag°) “Höhepunkt von Gewinn und Ruhm erreicht habend” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... lābhāgrayaśograprāpto, lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātaśayyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārāṇāṃ lābhin (BHS, SWTF) “erlangend” § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... lābhāgrayaśograprāpto, lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātaśayyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajyapariṣkārāṇāṃ likha- ⇒ *ni-lehaya- § 3.5.3B2. avaśyaṃ vaṃśavidalikāhi vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā sūtreṇa āvuṇitvā ... dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ § 12.10.11B6. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ettakaṃ prāvaraṇaṃ tato likhitavyaṃ bhurjake phalake vā paṭṭikāyām vā § 12.12.11B7. taṃ likhitaṃ saṃghasthavirasya allīpitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman ...” § 32.6.27B2. pustakaṃ vācantasya, pustakaṃ likhantasya, varccakuṭīṃ gacchantasya, ... liṅga~ ⇒ gṛhi-liṅga-parityāga~ √lip ⇒ lippa-, limpa-, an-upalipta~, an-upaliptaka~, upa-lipta~, upa-limpa-, prati-liptaka~, mṛttikā-praliptikā~, liptopalipta~, su-lipta~ § 19.4.17B6. udakabhramaṇasya upari thapetavyā sudhāya samaṃtena lipitavyā liptopalipta~# (lipta-upa°) “(mit Ton, Tünche usw.) vollkommen bestrichen” ☞ § 23.8, Anm. 8; § 43.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ upa-lipta~ § 23.8.21B6. ullāye gṛhītako bhavati, śāṭiyāṇaṃ liptopalipto ghaṣṭamaṣṭo karttavyo § 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya ... § 43.4.38A4. lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ... liptopaliptaṃ (oder °liptāṃ?; Hs. °liptiṃ) kariya ... liptopaliptiṃ wohl für liptopaliptaṃ : § 43.4.38A4 lippa- (Pā) “bestreichen”#; vgl. Skt. limpati; Pā. lippati < Skt. lipyate ⇒ limpa-, upa-limpa-, √lip § 17.6.15A1. anyehi khāṇukā ... paripūriya dātavyā, anyehi pariharitavyaṃ, anyehi lippitavyaṃ (od. lipyi°), anyehi majjitavyaṃ ... § 17.7.15A2. atha dāni bahuṃ lippitavyaṃ (od. lipyi°) bhavati, bhikṣū ca śāṭhyena karenti limpa- ⇒ lippa-, upa-limpa-, √lip § 13.7.12B2. ullāye gṛhītako bhavati, piṇḍaṃ śāṭiya mṛttikāye limpitavyo § 18.6.15B4. ākāśatalaṃ vā liṃpitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyā) mṛttikāya vā sudhāya vā √lih ⇒ ā-liha- √lī ⇒ allīna~, alliya-, alliyya-, allīya-, ā-llīya-, ā-laya-, pratisaṃlīnaka~, praty-allīya-, praty-ā- līya-, vo-laya-, allīpaya-, ul-lapa- (2), ol-lapa- √luj ⇒ paluggaka~, palugnaka~, paluggikā~, praluggaka~, praluggikā~ √lup ⇒ ā-lupya- 463 √lū ⇒ lavāpaya- lūṣiyāṇaṃ wohl für kṛṣiyāṇaṃ : § 44.6.39A4 lūha~ (BHS, SWTF) “(in bezug auf Nahrung) grob, schlecht” § 52.5.44B4. sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ, lūhaṃ ca praṇītaṃ ca ekañ ca aparaṃ ca lekṣaṭākhaṃḍehi für leṅkaṭakh° : § 18.14.16A2 leṅkaka-khaṇḍakānām für leṅkaṭaka-kha° : § 55.2.46B3 leṅkaṭa~#, leṅkaṭaka~# “Stoffstück” ☞ § 11.7, Anm. 2 § 11.7.10B7. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ evam eva paribhuṃjituṃ apratyāstaraṇaṃ vā tṛṇaṃ vā antarākṛtvā leṅkaṭakaṃ vā § 23.4.1.21A7. atha dāni pratipādako na bhavati, leṅkaṭakehi pādā bandhitavyā § 23.4.1.21A7. āsandakaṃ tṛpādakaṃ vā praveśeti, tasyâpi leṅkaṭakehi pādakā bandhi- tavyā leṅkaṭa-khaṇḍa~#, leṅkaṭa-khaṇḍaka~# “Stoffstück” ☞ § 11.7, Anm. 2 ⇒ leṅkaṭa-khaṇḍaka~, cela-khaṇḍa~ § 18.14.16A2. leṅkaṭakhaṃḍehi (Hs. lekṣaṭākh°) vā bhastrāyanakehi vā sukumārehi dayi- tavyaṃ § 41.32.36A1. antamasato leṅkaṭakhaṇḍena vāmahastena vā āmarjiya praviśitavyaṃ § 45.6.39B7. snānaśāṭakaṃ vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakam vā nivāsiya snātukāmo bhavati § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati ... snānaśāṭakaṃ vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakaṃ nivāsayituṃ § 45.6.40A1. snānaśāṭikā vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakaṃ āveḍhayitavyaṃ § 45.6.40A2. nâpi kṣamati heṣṭhena snānaśāṭikām vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakam vā osārayituṃ § 46.6.40B1. bhikṣu ... anyaṃ leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ prāvaritukāmo bhavati § 46.6.40B2. nâpi kṣamati ... ekanivasanakena leṅkaṭakhaṇḍaṃ mārggituṃ § 48.6.41B1. atha khalu leṅkaṭakhaṇḍena rajoharaṇakena vā prasphoṭiya ’ka saṃkacchikāṃ prajñapiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 55.2.46B3. geṇḍukaṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyo tṛṇānām vā palālānām vā leṅka<ṭa>kakhaṇḍakānām vā sūtrasya vā uṇṇāya vā § 55.3.46B4. te ... geṇḍukaṃ vārayaṃtā iṣṭakhaṇḍaṃ leṅkaṭakakhaṇḍena veṣṭayitvā vārenti leṅkaṭa-khaṇḍaka~ ⇒ leṅkaṭa-khaṇḍa~ lecchaṃ wohl für lehyaṃ : § 26.1.23A5 lena~ (BHS, Pā) “Wohnstätte, Zelle”#; vgl. Skt. layana ☞ § 14.8, Anm. 2 § 14.8.13A7. yadi tāva vihāro uppīḍanako bhavati, na kṣamati lenāni bandhituṃ § 14.17.13B5. yadi tāva uppīḍanako vihāro bhavati, tato lenāni muktāni sthāpetavyāni § 14.17.13B5. atha dāni uppansulako vihāro bhavati, lenāni bāhiraghaṭṭimāni karttavyāni lepa~ ⇒ sudhā-mṛttikā-lepa~ § 17.8.15A3. anyehi mṛttikā pariharttavyā, anyehi lepo dātavyaḥ, anyaiḥ saṃmārjitavyaṃ lepana~ ⇒ sudhā-pāṇḍu-lepana~ lepanikā~# “das Anstreichen (des Gebäudes)”; vgl. Skt. lepana “Anstreichen, Bestreichen, Tünchen”; BhiVin(Ma-L) § 174.5B7.6. lepanikā vā kartuṃ ☞ § 31.33, Anm. 5 ⇒ upalepana~ § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni ... bhikṣū ca paliguddhakā bhavanti, cchādanikā vā lepanikā vā karenti, kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 46.6.40B1. etāni dāni saṃghasya uṭṭhānakāni bhavanti cchādanikā vā lepanikā vā sammārjanako vā lebhyā für labhyā : § 40.16.33B1 lehya~ § 26.1.23A5. atha dāni khakkhaṭa bhavati, jalpa<ṃ>ti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, lecchaṃ (wohl für lehyaṃ) ayaṃ, ’peyyā ayaṃ, kaṭṭārikācchejjā ayaṃ.” √lok ⇒ abhi-vi-lokaya-, ālokita-vilokita~ loka~ ⇒ iha-loka~, deva-loka~ § 4.18.5B6. evam ādīpite loke mṛtyunā ca jarayā ca (vs) § 4.19.6A2. dakṣiṇā paścimā ca sa sarvvo ca loko saṃkulajāto (vs) § 35.6.29A6. dvihi kulehi tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ loke utpadyanti, kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā 464  § 36.6.29B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati kutsitum vā pansitum vā “gṛhapatikā nāma yūyaṃ tulākūṭamānakūṭehi divasaṃ lokaṃ muṣaṃtā āsatha.” Lokottaravādin~ ⇒ ārya-Mahāsāṃghika~ Lokottaravādin~ loḍḍhaka~#, loḍhaka~ (BHS) “Gürtel aus Stoff” ☞ § 11.8, Anm. 3 ⇒ loḍhika~, lohaka~ § 11.8.11A1. nâpi kṣamati ... paṭikām vā loḍḍhakam vā pratyāstaraṇaṃ karttuṃ § 44.4.39A2. tato paṭṭikāye vā loḍhakena vā rejjukāye vā bandhitavyāni loḍhaka~ ⇒ loḍḍhaka~ loḍhika~# “Gürtel aus Stoff”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. loṭhakā “a kind of girdle” ☞ § 11.8, Anm. 3 ⇒ loḍḍhaka~, loḍhaka~, lohaka~ § 42.14.36B7. snāyantena cīvarakaṃ sāharitvā ekasthāne sthavitavyaṃ loḍhikena vā paṭikāya vā lohaka~ “Metall(ringen)”# oder “Binden aus Stoff”# (< loḍhaka)? ☞ § 54.2, Anm. 1 § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena ... ubhayehiṃ antehi lohakena bandhitavyā loha-pātra~# “Schale aus Eisen (od. Kupfer)”; vgl. Pā. lohapatta (z.B. Vin III 169.27) § 43.6.38A5. yaṃ tatra bhavati śatapotanako vā tāmrapātrā vā lohapātrā vā ... lohikā~ “eiserner Topf” § 43.4.38A3. yaṃ tatra bhaṇḍaṃ bhavati lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā sthālī vā piṭharikā vā ... lohita-pāṇi~# “blutbeschmierte Hände habend” § 41.19.35A4. raudrā lohitapāṇī caurā tuṣyanti tādṛśā santā (vs) lp / ly : kalpatas für kalyatas : § 10.4.10A4, § 40.1.32B2, § 44.6.39A4, § 45.1.39B3, § 45.4.39B5 ly / lp ⇒ lp / ly ll / rṇṇ ⇒ rṇṇ / ll ll / l ⇒ l / ll V v/k ⇒ k/v v/t ⇒ t/v v / th ⇒ th / v v/d ⇒ d/v v / dh ⇒ dh / v v/n ⇒ n/v v- < p- ⇒ p- > v- -v- < -p- ⇒ -p- > -v- -v- > -p- ⇒ -p- < -v- v / b : In unserer Handschrift sind die Akṣaras b und v identisch ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 1 v / bh ⇒ bh / v v/m ⇒ m/v v/y ⇒ y/v va (BHS, Pā) = Skt. eva ⇒ eva, vā (2) § 34.3.28B3. vaktavyaṃ “dīrghāyu kṣatriyaparṣāye imaṃ va (Hs. ca) kāryaṃ allīyāmi” tti § 39.24.32A2. dānapatir āgato bhavati, āha “bhante, āhaṇatha gaṇḍiṃ. anukālyo (’)va tāva adyâpi bhavati” va für ca : § 9.4.10A2, § 60.5.48B7 vaṃśa~ ⇒ cīvara-vaṃśa~ § 18.5.15B4. kaṇṭhavāriṇī karttavyā ... vaṃśe<hi> vā nalena vā naṃgalehi vā phalakair vā § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ ... vaṃśānāṃ vā nalānām vā na<ṃ>galānāṃ vā kāṇḍānām vā carukānām vā rohiṣāṇāṃ vā sūtrikāya vā rejjukāya vā ghaṇa<ṃ> vuṇitavyaṃ § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī ... kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā naḍānām vā naṅgalānām vā kaṇḍānām vā rejjukāye vā sūtrakāye (für sūtrikāye?) vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā vaṃśasya vā nalasya vā naṃgalasya vā rohiṣasya vā daśa-aṣṭahastāṃ dīrghatvena 465 *vaṃśa-tthālikā~ “Bambusschälchen” ☞ § 24.9, Anm. 4 § 24.9.22A5. atha dāni bhūmyastāro bhavati, bhājane karttavyaṃ kuntake vā alābuke vā vaṃśatthālikāyāṃ (Hs. °ttholikā°) vā vaṃśa-ttholikāyāṃ für °tthālikāyāṃ? : § 24.9.22A5 vaṃśa-vidalikā~# “Bambusbrettchen”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. vidalikā (“splinter [of bamboo]”); BhiVin(Ma-L) § 256.9B5.1. vaṃsavidalikāya; Śay-v 13.28. vaṃśavidalikayā (= MSV[D] II 129.14) ⇒ nala-vidalikā~ § 3.5.3B2. avaśyaṃ vaṃśavidalikāhi (Hs. vaṃsa°) vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā sūtreṇa āvuṇitvā ... dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ vaṃśa-śalākā~ “Bambusstäbchen” § 18.15.16A3. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā vaṃśaśalākāhi vraṇamukhaṃ pocchitaṃ § 18.16.16A3. evaṃ ca tvaṃ vaṃśaśalākāhi vraṇamukhaṃ pocchesi § 18.16.16A4. na kṣamati vaṃśaśalākāhi kaṇḍavidalikena vā ... vraṇamukhaṃ pocchituṃ vaṃsavidalikāhi für vaṃśa°: § 3.5.3B2 vaṃghorikā~# oder baṃghorikā~# “Kies; Kiesel”? ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 8 § 11.6.10B7. varṣāya ovṛṣṭo bhavati, cikhallikā opūre<ta>vyā, vaṃghorikā dātavyā, gomayaśāṭo dātavyo § 12.8.11B4. mūṣika-utkirā vā yāva vaṃghorikā pūretavyā § 23.8.21B6. cikkhal<l>ikā pūretavyā, vaṃghorikā dātavyā § 44.9.39A7. gomayakārṣī dātavyā, vaṃghorikā dātavyā √vac ⇒ ukta~, vāca- § 1.11.2A4. vaktavyaṃ “gacchatha tāva ...” § 3.10.4A2. vaktavyaṃ “bāhyato tāva yūyaṃ muhūrttam āgametha!” § 5.7.6B5. raṇaraṇāya gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiyāṇaṃ ārocitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ ... § 31.22.26A5. yatra nevāsikā bhavanti tatra gantavyaṃ. allīyāṇaṃ nâpi kṣamati vaktuṃ “vandāmî”tti. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman vandiṣyan” ti § 39.7.31A4. yadi tāva āraṇyakā āgacchanti, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman ...” § 39.10.31A7. eṣo ... nimantreti vaktavyaṃ “āraṇyakānāṃ ...” § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni ...” § 41.29.35B6. yadi tahiṃ koci bhikṣu bhavati navatarako, so vaktavyo “udakaṃ āsiñcihi” tti § 49.5.42B2. paścācchramaṇena vaktavyaṃ: “upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā vāmahastikam vā dakṣiṇahastikaṃ vā uvvatta” tti § 58.4.48A4. atha dāni bhūyo bhūyo ukkāsikā āgacchati, a<na>ntariko vaktavyo “...” usw. vacana~ ⇒ buddha-vacana~ vaccagharaṃ für varccagh° : § 18.4.15B3 vaṃjāyatehi für varjaya° : § 39.26.32A3 vaṭavaṭa für caṭacaṭa : § 56.1.47A2 vaṭṭa- (Pā, Pkt) “zusammenrollen, zusammendrehen” < Skt. vartayati, vgl. MW, s.v. (“make anything round [as a thunderbolt, a pill &c.]”), CDIAL 11356 vartáyati ☞ § 42.20, Anm. 4 ⇒ vaṭṭita~, saṃ-vaṭṭaya-, √vṛt § 42.20.37A5. cūrṇṇaṃ ... piṇḍikam vā vaṭṭiya (Hs. paṭṭiya) dātavyaṃ § 59.1.48A6. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyāḥ tulikāye nakkaṃ vijjhanti, sūtrakaṃ pi vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ nakke prakṣipanti § 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa tulikāya vā nakkaṃ vijjhituṃ sūtraṃ vaṭṭiya nakkasmin prakṣipituṃ vaṭṭita~ (BHS[Mvu]) “rund, kreisförmig”; < Skt. vartita ⇒ vaṭṭa- § 42.7.36B2. jentākaṃ karentena vaṭṭito vā karttavyo caturasro vā vaḍaṃvidhavāye für caṃḍav° : § 8.7.9A4 vaḍavaḍa für caḍacaḍa : § 57.11.47B7 vaḍavaḍā für caḍacaḍā : § 56.1.47A3, § 56.3.47A4, § 56.5.47A6, § 56.6.47A6 vaḍavā~ ⇒ aśva-vaḍavā~ vaḍḍhaki-bhaṇḍa~# “Gerät des Tischlers”; vgl. Pā. vaḍḍhaki~ < Skt. vardhaki~ (“Zimmermann”); 466  vgl. auch Mvu II 464.20f. vardhaki-bhāṇḍāni “durch Tischler hergestellte Gegenstände” § 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā vatta- ⇒ *uv-vatta-, *uv-vattaya- Vatsa~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-Kośala-Kuru-Pañcāla-Ceti-Vatsa-Matsya-... √vad ⇒ a-vivadamāna~, o-vada-, vi-√vad § 12.14.12A2. vaktavyo “na eṣo tava kiñcit bhogārthaṃ vadiṣanti (für uddiśīyati?). ...” § 37.5.30A4. yasya praśaṃsā tam anupraśaṃśe teṣāṃ guṇaṃ eva vade na doṣan (vs) § 42.5.36A7. nâhaṃ ... anekaparyāyeṇa metraṃ kāyakarmma vadāmi ... vaddhaka~ (< Skt. vadhraka) ⇒ aṃsi-vaddhaka~, pārṣṇi-vaddhaka~ vaddheti für varddheti: § 20.1.19A5 vaddhra~ ⇒ vadhra~ √vadh § 41.17.34B7. praticorehi pi muṣyema grahaṇaṃ pi gacchema rājakule pi vadhyema (Pass. Opt. 1. pl.) (≒ § 41.18.35A1) vadhaka~ “Mörder” § 41.17.34B7. asmākaṃ tāva eṣo vadhakānāṃ pratyarthikānāṃ pratyamitrāṇāṃ arthakāmo hitakāmo vadha-bandhanāgāra~# (°bandhana-āg°) “Richtplätze, Gefängnisse” ☞ § 27.4, Anm. 1 § 28.9.24A5. nâpi kṣamati ... vadhabandhanāgāra-sāmantena caṃkramituṃ vadha-bandhanāgāraśālā~# (°bandhana-āg°) “Richtplätze, Gefängnisse oder (öffentliche?) Hallen” ☞ § 27.4, Anm. 1 § 27.4.23B6. nâpi kṣamati ... vadhabandhanāgāraśālā-sāmantena vā tiṣṭhituṃ § 29.9.24B5. nâpi kṣamati ... vadhabandhanāgāraśālā-sāmantakena niṣīdituṃ vadhya~ ⇒ a-vadhya~ § 41.19.35A3. vadhyā bhavanty avadhyā (vs) vadhra~, vaddhra~, vadhraka~ “Riemen” ⇒ pārṣṇikā-vaddhraka~, pārṣṇi-vaddhaka~, pārṣṇi- vadhra~, pārṣṇi-vaddhraka~ § 41.8.34A4. ekasya upānaho vaddhro pocchito dvitīyasya upānahā vaddhro pocchito § 41.24.35A7. ekasyôpānahāye vaddhro pocchitavyo, aparasya vaddhro pocchitavyo § 41.29.35B5. ekasya upānahāye vadhro pocchitavyo. dvitīyasya vadhrako pocchitavyo vana-dava~# “Waldbrand” § 14.1.13A2. so dāni vihārako vanadavena āgacchiyāṇa dagdho vana-phala~ § 49.1.41B7. khajjakaṃ khādatha. vanaphalaṃ bhakṣatha vanaphala-caṅgerī~# “Korb für Waldfrüchte” ⇒ caṃgerī~ § 43.8.38A6. ete khajjakacaṃgerīyo vanaphalacaṅgerīyo haritakīcaṅgerīyo vā prasphoḍ- iya suprakṣālitāṃ kariya ekamante sthapetavyāḥ √vand ⇒ pāda-vandaka~ § 1.1.1B2. samagrasya saṃghasya pādāni (Hs. pādāna) vandiṣyāma § 2.1.2B1. samagraṃ (Hs. samayaṃ) ca bhikṣusaṃgham vandiṣyāmaḥ § 2.1.2B2. gacchāma samagrasya saṃghasya pādāṃ vandiṣyāmaḥ § 3.1.3A7. {ā}gacchāma samagrasya <saṃghasya> pādāṃ vandiṣyāma § 5.1.6A5. gacchāma ... āryamiśrāṇāñ ca pādāṃ vandiṣyāmaḥ (≒ § 5.3.6A7) § 6.1.7A5. āryamiśrāṇāṃ ca pādāṃ vandiṣyāma (≒ § 6.3.7A7) § 8.4.8B7. vanditvā sukhaśayitaṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ § 8.12.9B1. cetiyaṃ vandantasya (Hs. can°) pṛṣṭhato ’nugantavyaṃ § 18.32.16B6. eṣo bhikṣuḥ cetiyaṃ vandaṃto (Hs. °dito) uśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 19.30.18B5. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandanto praśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 20.15.20A2. nâpi kṣamati cetiyaṃ vandantena ... khādituṃ § 20.19.20A4. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandati, paśyati dantapoṇaṃ, cchorayitavyo § 31.21.26A5. pādadhovanikāyāṃ pādāṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ akalpiyakarakīto hastā nirmmādiyāṇa kalpiyakarakīto prakṣāliya tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ § 31.22.26A5. cetiyaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ, yatra nevāsikā bhavanti tatra gantavyaṃ 467  § 31.22.26A5. yatra nevāsikā bhavanti tatra gantavyaṃ. allīyāṇaṃ nâpi kṣamati vaktuṃ “vandāmî”tti. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman vandiṣyan” ti § 31.22.26A6. yadi tāva āgantuko vṛddhatarako bhavati, nevāsikena utthiya pādā vandi- tavyā, āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 32.1.27A4. so dāni āgantuko allīya tasya nevāsikasya pādāṃ vanda{n}ti § 32.2.27A5. so dān’ āha “vanditā mayā tava pādā. tvaṃ ca mama na pratisaṃmodesi.” § 32.2.27A6. tadā tava mayā pādā vanditā § 32.2.27A6. so dāni āha “āyuṣman, vācovāciṃ karentasya pādāṃ vandasi?” § 32.2.27A6. evaṃ ca yaṃ tvaṃ mama pādāṃ vandantasya na pratisaṃmodesi § 32.3.27A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati āgantukena nevāsikasya vācovāciṃ karentasya pādāṃ vandituṃ. nâpi kṣamati pādehi vandiyamāṇehi na pratisaṃmodituṃ § 32.4.27A7. evaṃ pādā vanditavyāḥ; § 32.13.27B6. evaṃ pādā vanditavyā (= Uddāna [IV].30B4) § 32.4.27A7. so ca apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sārddham vācovāciṃ karoti, nâpi kṣamati tasya taṃ velaṃ pādāṃ vandituṃ § 32.6.27B2. hastā nirmmādantasya, cetiyaṃ vandantasya, pātraṃ nirmmādentasya, ... § 32.7.27B2~3. allīyāṇaṃ śīrṣeṇa pādā vanditavyā, karkaṭagrāhikāye vanditavyā § 32.9.27B3. sāmīcī karentena na kṣamati jānukena (☞ § 32.9[Text], Anm. 1) vā jaṃghāhi vā vandituṃ. atha khalu pādā vanditavyā § 32.10.27B3. pādāṃ vandantena jānitavyaṃ § 32.10.27B4. atha khalu tathā vanditavyaṃ, yathā na duḥkhāpiye pādehi vandayantehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs; vgl. BHSG § 37.18) § 32.11.27B4. na dāni meṇḍhena viya āsitavyaṃ pādehi vandayaṃtehi (aktive Form in der Funktion des Passivs) § 33.7.28A2. vaktavyaṃ “vandāmi upādhyāyaṃ vā ācāryam vā ...” tti § 39.5.31A3. na dāni kṣamati ... cetiyaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ bhuñjituṃ § 39.9.31A6. cetiyaṃ vanditvā ekānte svādhyāyo karttavyo, dharmmam vā cintayantehi āsitavyaṃ § 39.13.31B1. cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo. cetiyaṃ vistareṇa vandiyāṇaṃ, ... (= § 39.25. 32A3) § 39.16.31B4. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ... āgacchiya pādāṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo § 39.16.31B4. gaṇḍī<yaṃ> āhatāyaṃ vandiya cetiyaṃ <bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ> § 39.28.32A6. gaṇḍīyaṃ āhatāyaṃ stūpaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ § 39.18.31B6. nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjituṃ § 39.21.32A1. atha dāni nâgacchanti, deśakāle gaṇḍiṃ āhaniya cetiyaṃ vandiya bhuñjitavyaṃ § 39.28.32A5. pādāṃ prakṣāliya hastāṃ nirmmādiya stūpaṃ vistareṇa vanditavyaṃ § 44.5.39A3. evaṃ sarvvehi vandiya thapetavyāni § 49.8.42B6~7. atha dāni koci vandati, vaktavyaṃ “amuko vandati” § 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā § 59.8.48B4. yadi tāva koci kṣīvati, ... yadi vṛddhatarako bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “vandāmi” tti -vandaka~ ⇒ pāda-vandaka~ vandhintasya für vandant° : § 32.2.27A6 vara~ § 4.18.5B7. praviśya vṛddhiye varāye bhūrīye (lies: °riye [m.c.]) (vs) vara- “wählen (zur Frau)”; vgl. Skt. 2√vṛ; Pā. varati § 4.17.5B5. tām eva bhāryāṃ vareyā (Hs. car°) yâsyā śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) variya für cariya : § 31.31.26B5 vargga~ “Kapitel” Uddāna (II).20A6. dvitīyo varggaḥ; Uddāna (IV).30B5. caturtho varggaḥ; Uddāna (V). 468  39B3. pañcamo varggaḥ; Uddāna (VI).45A1. ṣaṣṭho varggaḥ Antaroddāna 50B2. saṃghasthaviro ca śayyāsana kaṭhina āgantukā ca āraṇyakā nevāsikā (lies: nivāsanaṃ?) ca pradīpo ca sapta varggāḥ prakāśitāḥ varc(c)a~# “Notdurft”; < Skt. varcas; vgl. Pā. vacca ⇒ prasrāva~ § 18.18.16A5. varcca karaṃtena tathā karttavyaṃ, yathā ... § 18.18.16A6. kheṭaṃ vā siṃhāṇakam vā varcco (Hs. °rcce) vā tahi nikṣiptaṃ bhavati § 18.21.16A7. evaṃ varcce pratipadyitavyaṃ Uddāna (II).20A6. evaṃ varce pratipadyitavyaṃ varcca-kuṭikā~#, varcca-kuṭīkā~# “Waschraum” ☞ § 18.7, Anm. 2 ⇒ varcca-kuṭī~, kuṭikā~ § 18.7.15B5. aparasmin pārśve varccakuṭīkā karttavyā § 18.11.16A1. atha dāni varccakumbhikā saprāṇakā bhavati, na dāni <kṣamati> vaktuṃ, “āyuṣmanto, saprāṇakā varccakuṭikā” varc(c)a-kuṭī~# “Abort, Toilette (zur Darmentleerung)”; vgl. Poṣ(Hu) 289, Anm. 5; SWTF, s.v. varcaḥ-kuṭi; Pā. vaccakuṭī ⇒ varcca-kuṭikā~, varcca-kuṭīkā~, praśvāsa-kuṭī~, prasrāva-kuṭī~ § 12.10.11B5. vihārā pariveṇā agniśālā bhaktaśālā upasthānaśālā dvārakoṣṭhako varccakuṭī udupāno jantāko caṃkramā vṛkṣamūlā vihārakā grāhayitavyā § 18.3.15B2. tena hi varccakuṭī nāma karttavyā. varccakuṭīṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpaya- māṇena nâpi kṣamati vihārasya purastimena vā uttareṇa vā kārāpayituṃ § 18.7.15B5. yadi tāva sā khānimā varccakuṭī bhavati, tato varccakumbhikā ... § 18.7.15B6. atha dāni prapātaniśrita bhavati varcakuṭī, ... § 18.9.15B7. varccakuṭīye purato kuṭī vā śālā vā karttavyā § 18.9.16A1. yatra bhikṣū kalpikāni cīvarakāṇi vinikṣipiya varccakuṭī praviśanti § 18.17.16A4. yā khānimā varccakuṭī bhavati, nâpi kṣamati ... varccakuṭīye prakṣipituṃ § 18.20.16A7. bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena uppīḍito nivasanaṃ oguhiya varccakuṭiṃ praviśati § 18.21.16B1. atha khalu samudācāramātrakeṇaỿva varccakuṭiṃ gantavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyā) § 18.22.16B1. na kṣamati nivāsanaṃ oguhiya aśabdakarṇṇikāye varcakuṭī praviśituṃ § 18.25.16B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati varcakuṭīyaṃ upaviṣṭena dhyānāntaragatena ... āsituṃ § 18.26.16B3. nâpi kṣamati kalpikehi cīvarehi prāvṛtehi varccakuṭīṃ praviśituṃ § 18.28.16B4. prahāṇasya āmantriyāṇa cchatti varccakuṭīyaṃ gantavyaṃ § 18.40.17A2. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇī-upāśraye gatāgatasya varccakuṭiṃ praviśituṃ § 18.51.17B1. yadi varcakuṭī bhavati, tahi karttavyaṃ § 18.51.17B1. varccakuṭī na bhavati, kaṭāhena vā mallikena vā ujjhitavyaṃ § 19.41.19A3. nāvāye gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, yadi varccakuṭī bhavati, tahiṃ karttavyaṃ. atha dāni varccakuṭī na bhavati, bhājane kṛtvā ujjhitavyaṃ § 32.6.27B2. pustakaṃ vācantasya, pustakaṃ likhantasya, varccakuṭīṃ gacchantasya, ... § 53.6.45A6. varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo § 53.13.45B3. vibhavo bhavati, sarvvarātriṃ varccakuṭīyañ ca prasrāvakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo § 53.13.45B3. yadā bhikṣū pratikrāntā bhavaṃti, tato varccakuṭīyaṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.18.45B7. yaṃ kālaṃ vibhātaṃ bhavati, ākāśaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato varccakuṭīye prasrāvakuṭīye ca dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo usw. varcca-kuṭīkā~ ⇒ varcca-kuṭikā~ varcca-kumbhikā~# “Krug für das Wasser, mit dem man sich das Gesäß nach dem Stuhlgang reinigt”; BHSD, s.vv. varcaḥkumbhikā, varcask° ☞ § 18.7, Anm. 5 ⇒ prasrāva-kumbhaka~ § 18.7.15B5. yadi tāva sā khānimā varccakuṭī bhavati, tato varccakumbhikā bāhire-d-eva karttavyā, yathā taṃ udakaṃ anyena gacchati § 18.7.15B6. varccakumbhikāye purato kalpiyakaraki sthāpayitavyā udakasya pūrṇṇa § 18.10.16A1. nâpi dāni draviḍena viya prasrāvakaraṇaṃ gṛhṇitvā varccakumbhikā gantavyaṃ § 18.11.16A1. atha dāni varccakumbhikā{ṃ} saprāṇakā bhavati, ... § 18.13.16A2. riktakāṃ varccakumbhikāṃ paśyati, na tadā adhyupekṣitavyaṃ § 40.7.32B7. varccakumbhikā pūrayitavyā § 40.8.33A1. tato pānīyāto ... varccakumbhikā vā pūrayituṃ 469 *varcca-ghara~ “Abort”? § 18.4.15B3. ullā va<r>ccagharaṃ dhovanti (p.präs) gacchati varcati für vardha<ṃ>ti : § 7.1.8A6 varja- ⇒ varjaya-, pari-varja- § 39.14.31B2. atha dāni āraṇyakā nâgatā bhavanti, anantarikānāṃ āsanāni varjantehi āsitavyaṃ varjaya- ⇒ varja-, varjyaṃ √kṛ, pari-varjaya- § 5.9.6B7. anantarikāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi upaviśitavyaṃ (≒ § 6.9.7B7) § 19.42.19A3. yadi tāva ātmanako praśvāso bhavati, purimapaścimakaṃ ca varjayitvā madhyamaṃ gṛhṇitavyo. evam tasya pratigrahaḥ § 39.26.32A3. atha dāni grāmāntikā nâgacchanti, <anantarikāṇāṃ> āsanāni varjayantehi (Hs. vaṃjāy°) upaviśitavyaṃ § 40.11.33A4. tato yyeva stokaṃ varjayitavyaṃ § 47.9.41A2. sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittī bhavati varjayitavyā Varji~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-Varji-Kāśi-Kośala-Kuru-Pañcāla-Ceti-... varjyaṃ √kṛ # “wegwerfen” ⇒ varjaya- § 19.42.19A4. atha dāni anyātakaṃ bhavati purimapaścimakañ ca varjyaṃ kṛtvā gṛhnitavyaṃ § 20.10.19B6. tena hi śeṣāś catvāri aṅgulāni dantakāṣṭhasya varjyaṃ karttavyaṃ varṇṇa~ § 34.6.28B5. vaktavyaṃ “kṣatriyā nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo. ...” § 35.6.29A6. brāhmaṇa nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo śreṣṭho varṇṇo varṇṇita~ ⇒ nānā-varṇṇita~ vartta- § 53.4.45A4. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā ... tehi prakṛty’ eva tāva dīpavarttikāyo varttitavyāyo, dīpakoṭikāni sajjayitavyāni, tailaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ varttavyo für karttavyo: § 8.8.9A5, § 19.26.18B4 vartti~ ⇒ dīpa-vartti~ varttikā~ “Kugel”#?; vgl. PTSD, s.v. vaṭṭi (“a lump, ball”) ☞ § 18.16, Anm. 6 ⇒ dīpa-varttikā~ § 18.16.16A4. tulikā vā sthāpayitavyā, mṛttikāmayā varttikā karttavyā § 18.17.16A4. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchayatā tāyo varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā varccakuṭīye prakṣipituṃ varttī~ “Tropfen” ⇒ siṃghāṇaka-varttī~ § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo pakkakheṭena pakka- siṃghāṇakena varttīhi lambantīhi? var(d)dha- § 7.1.8A6. te dāni Indragavā viya varddhayanti, Śivacchagalā viya vardha<ṃ>ti (Hs. varcati) § 9.1.9B5. te dāni Indragavā viya varddhanti Śivacchagalā viya varddhanti varddhaya- (Skt), *varddhe- (vgl. BHSG, 232a) ⇒ saṃ-varddhaya- § 7.1.8A6. te dāni Indragavā viya varddhayanti, Śivacchagalā viya vardha<ṃ>ti § 20.1.19A5. so dāni taṃ unneti va<r>ddheti ghaṭasiktakaṃ ekaputrakaṃ viya § 20.2.19A6. so dāni tena unnīto varddhito ghaṭasiktako ekaputrako viya § 41.12.34B2. so dāni mātāpitṛbhir unnīyati varddhīyati varddhana~ ⇒ kula-varddhana~ varya~ für varṣa~ : § 12.2.11A7. varyena für varṣena; § 12.12.12A1. avaryaka für avarṣaka varṣa~ ⇒ aṣṭa-varṣa~, sapta-varṣa~, varṣā~ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... vātātapena vināśiyantaṃ varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantaṃ § 11.5.10B5. śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... varṣeṇa ovarṣa{par}yantam § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) varṣeṇa ovarṣīyati ... cchanne praveśayitavyaṃ § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ... varṣena ovarṣiyantāṃ ... (≒ § 15.2, § 16.2. 14A6, § 17.2.14B6) § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantā{ṃ} kākaśakuntehi ohayiyantā{ṃ} § 13.2.12A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcāṃ pīṭhāṃ ... varṣeṇa ’varṣiyantāṃ prāṇakehi khajjantāṃ 470  § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... varṣeṇa ovarṣiyanti, cchanne thapitavyā § 15.3.14A1. mañcā ca pīṭhā ca ... varṣeṇa ovarṣayantā prāṇakehi khājjantā § 16.9.14B4. (mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... ) varṣeṇa ovarṣiyanti, nirovarṣe sthāpayitavyā (≒ § 17.12.15A7) § 17.3.14B6. mañcā pīṭhā ca ... varṣeṇa ’varṣiyaṃtā prāṇakehi khajjantā § 21.8.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggakaṃ vā paluggakaṃ vātātapena vināśiyantaṃ varṣeṇa vā ovarṣayantaṃ ... § 39.29.32A7. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... śṛgālâpi āraṇye vasanti. divasaṃ yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha” varṣa- ⇒ o-varṣya-, o-varṣaya-, o-vṛṣṭa~ § 19.20.18A7~B1. tato pi na kṣamati so tahiṃ cchorayituṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣintasya (für varṣante?) stūpavigrahaṃ vā saṃghavigrahaṃ vā gacchati. atha khalu tahiṃ cchorayitavyaṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣante na anyena gacchati varṣa-vusta~# “die Regenzeit verbracht habend”; vgl. SWTF IV 84a, varṣoṣita; Pā. vassaṃ vuttha, vutthavassa; BHSD, SWTF, s.v. vusta § 14.2.13A2. evaṃ varṣavustehi śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 14.19.13B6. evaṃ varṣavustehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [II].20A6) varṣā~ ⇒ varṣa~ (1) “Regen” § 11.6.10B7. varṣāya ovṛṣṭo bhavati, cikhallikā opūretavyā, vaṃghorikā dātavyā ... (2) “Regenzeit” § 12.3.11B1. ye varṣāṃ (Hs. dharmmāṃ) upagacchiṣyanti, te pratisaṃskariṣyanti § 12.17.12A4. varṣāsu śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ... § 13.3.12B1. ye bhagavān varṣāṃ vasiṣyanti te pratisaṃskariṣyanti varṣā-udaka~# “Regenwasser”; vgl. CDIAL 11400. *varṣodaka-(“rain-water”), Pā. vassodaka § 19.26.18B4. bhājanaṃ na bhavati, varṣā-udakaṃ ca bhavati, ... varṣāgra~ (varaṣa-ag°) (BHS) “der Beginn des (Ordinations-)Alters” § 31.22.26A5. nevāsikehi varṣāgraṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ “kativarṣo āyuṣman?” § 33.5.28A2. sthaviro dāni bhagavantaṃ pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavāṃ, sthavirehi bhikṣūhi navakā bhikṣū ālapitavyā?” bhagavān āha “nāmena vā gotreṇa vā varṣāgreṇa vā.” varṣā-rātra~ “die Regenzeit” ⇒ varṣā-rātra-kāla~ § 4.8.4B7. atha dāni varṣārātro kālo bhavati, devāntarā yeva anukālyaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 6.8.7B6. varṣārātro bhavati, devāntareṇa anukallaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 4.11.5A4. atha dāni grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, ... (= § 6.10.8A1, § 50.5. 43B1) § 5.10.7A1. grīṣmakālo varṣārātro vā bhavati, cireṇa kālo atikramati varṣā-rātra-kāla~# “die Regenzeit” ⇒ varṣā-rātra~ § 5.8.6B6. atha dāni varṣārātrakālo bhavati devāntareṇa praviśitavyaṃ varṣārātrikā~# (varṣ-ā°) “Ārātrikā-Zeremonie in der Regenzeit” (?) ☞ § 41.13, Anm. 5 § 41.13.34B2. so śreṣṭhi aparehiṃ (Loc. sg.) jñātiśāle nimantritako gato varṣārātrikaṃ varṣāvāsika~ (varṣ-āv°)# “für den Regenzeit-Aufenthalt (notwendige) Dinge; d.h. Lebensmittel und andere Dinge, die die Mönche während der Regenzeit brauchen”; vgl. Pā. vassāvāsika ☞ § 12.12, Anm. 3 § 12.12.11B7. vihāraṃ yūyaṃ uddiśatha, varṣāvāsikaṃ samaṃ kariṣyāma varṣopagata~# (varṣā-u°) “in die Regenzeit eingetreten seiend”; vgl. Pā. vassupagata ☞ § 13.4, Anm. 1 § 13.4.12B1. evaṃ varṣopagatehi śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 13.18.13A1, Uddāna [II].20A5) § 13.5.12B1. ete dāni bhikṣavo varṣopagatā bhavanti, te{na}hi vihārakā pratyavekṣitavyā varṣopanāyika~# (varṣā-u°) “Eintritt in die Regenzeit”; vgl. BHS. varṣopanāyikā, Pā. vassūpanāyikā, vassupa° ☞ § 12.4, Anm. 1 § 12.4.11B1. tena hi evaṃ varṣopanāyike śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni evaṃ varṣopanāyike (Hs. °nāmike) śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ? § 12.5.11B2. eṣā dāni saṃghasya varṣopanāyikā (Hs. °nāmikā) bhavati, prakṛtyaỿva tāva 471  dāyakadānapati pratisaritavyā, tato vihārakā pratisaṃskarttavyāḥ § 12.19.12A5. evaṃ varṣopanāyike (Hs. °nāmike) śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ Uddāna (II).20A5. evaṃ varṣopanāyike (Hs. °iko) śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ √val ⇒ vale- valabhī~ “Decke” ☞ § 18.6, Anm. 1 § 18.6.15B4. kuḍḍa utthapiyāṇaṃ valabhī kārayitavyā vale- (Pā) “zwirnen”; < Skt. vlayati (“macht rollen”); CDIAL 11405.(2). valayati ☞ § 21.5, Anm. 2 § 21.5.20B3. atha dāni niṣaṇṇo bāhirakāṃ pādāṃ kṛtvā sūtraṃ valento āsati, anāpattiḥ vallarika~ ⇒ sa-vallarika~ vallā (māṣa-kāna-vallā) für °varṇṇā : § 23.3.21A5 vaśa~ ⇒ artha-vaśa~ § 26.8.23B2. yādṛśī dīyati, tādṛśī praticchit<avya>ā. dāyakavaśo na pratigrāhakavaśo vaśiṣyatha für vas° : § 3.10.4A1 1 √vas ⇒ adhi-vāsaya-, adhy-ā-√vas, ni-√vas, ni-vāsaya-, prati-√vas, varṣa-vusta~, saṃ-√vas § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati paripṛcchitavyā “kim vasiṣyatha atha gamiṣyatha?” (≒ § 2.9. 3A2) § 1.11.2A4. atha dāni āhaṃsu “vasiṣyāma” tti, vaktavyaṃ “gacchatha tāva ...” § 2.9.3A2. atha dāni jalpanti “vasiṣyāma” tti § 3.10.4A1. kim vasiṣyatha (Hs. vaś°) atha gacchatha? § 7.7.8B4. evaṃ svādhyāyati, araṇye vasati, prahāṇe upaviśati, so evâsya ovādo § 7.7.8B5. upādhyāyo ... na svādhyāyati, na araṇye vasati, na prahāṇe upaviśati § 13.3.12B1. ye bhagavān varṣāṃ vasiṣyanti te pratisaṃskariṣyanti § 14.1.13A1. aparaṃ dāni āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ himadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na vasati (≒ § 14.3. 13A2) § 14.3.13A3. yo pratibalo vastuṃ, yadi utsahanti teṣāṃ āhāreṇa upastambhaṃ karttavyaṃ § 14.4.13A3. “kiṃ vayaṃ parityaktāḥ?” “kissa vayaṃ vasāmaḥ?” § 31.16.26A2. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullapitavyaṃ āgantukehi “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ ettha vasatha, ghuṇaviddhā tave, ...” § 31.24.26A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati tehi āgantukehi nevāsikāṃ kutsiya haṃbhiya “āyuṣmann, adyâpi yūyaṃ iha vasatha. ...” § 31.35.27A2. atha khalu samāśvāsitavyaṃ “vasantu āyuṣmanto, ramaṃtu ayuṣmanto.” § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāvad vastukāmo bhavati, pātracīvaraṃ pratisāmayitavyaṃ, vihārako uddiśitavyo § 39.29.32A7. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... śṛgālâpi āraṇye vasanti. divasaṃ yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha” 2 √vas ⇒ ni-vāsa-, ni-vāsaya- vasti-saṃyama~# “Einschränkung hinsichtlich des Aufenthaltsortes”? ☞ § 37.5, Anm. 3 § 37.5.30A4. duṣkaraṃ gṛhiliṅgaparityāgo, duṣkaraṃ vastisaṃyamo, duṣkaram araṇya- vāso vastu~ (1) “Angelegenheit” § 41.20.35A4. bhagavān etasmin vastuni Dharmmapadaṃ bhāṣate (2) “Gebäude; Wohnraum, Halle, Saal”# ☞ § 12.16, Anm. 2 ⇒ vastu-pāla~, eka-vastuka~ § 14.12.13B1. etāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā vastuka~ ⇒ paścād-vastuka~, paścā-vastuka~ vastu-pāla~ “Schutzgeist eines Hauses”; vgl. Skt. vāstu-pāla ☞ § 12.16, Anm. 2 § 4.18.5B7. hitāye vastupālānāṃ (Hs. °mālānāṃ) cirarātrāya kalpate (vs) § 4.18.6A1. bhoja<ne>nā vastupālā satkṛtā pratimānitā (vs) vastumālānāṃ für vastupālānāṃ : § 4.18.5B7 vastra~ § 11.11.11A2. vastra<ṃ> puggalikaṃ antarīkaraṇaṃ dadiya caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ vastrābharaṇaka~# (vastra-ābh°) “Tragebeutel für Kleider”? ☞ § 43.9, Anm. 1 § 43.9.38A7. ete bhavanti vastrābharaṇakā vā pariśrāvaṇā vā caturasrakā vā sāharitvā ... 472 √vah § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. bahukarā yūyaṃ bhāraṃ vahatha. dharmmadeśanāṃ karetha. ...” ti vaha- ⇒ vy-ā-baha- vā für dātuṃ : § 40.9.33A2 vā (1) ⇒ atha vā, yadi vā § 2.10.3A3. yadi tāva atiśītam vā atiuṣṇam vā bhavati, bhikṣū vā jarādurbbalā vā vyādhidurbbalā vā bhavanti dūradūre vā pariveṇā bhavanti siṃhabhayam vā vyāghrabhayam vā corabhayam vā bhavati, bhikṣū vā na vistareṇa śrotukāmā bhavanti § 6.7.7B4. “kim vā etat?” ti, vaktavyaṃ “bhikṣusaṃgho tena bhaktena nimantrito.” § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... tāyo devasikaṃ cchorayitavyāyo vā, dahiya bhūyo vā thapayitavyāyo § 18.40.17A3. atha khalu pṛcchitavyaṃ “bhagini, kiṃ riktā vā varccakuṭī nê”ti § 19.16.18A5. mā aprakṛtikā (wohl für °iko) ghaṭasya {vā} bāhyena praśvāsaṃ cchoreyā ti § 19.17.18A6. so dāni ujjhitavyo navakāntena vā yasya vā oheyyako bhavati § 38.4.30A7. pṛcchitavyo “kiṃ kāryaṃ?” āha “asukam vā asukam vā” § 39.8.31A5. anekāye āraṇyakānāṃ co<ra>bhayaṃ vā bhaveya udakabhayaṃ vā siṃha- bhayaṃ vā vyāghrabhayaṃ vā § 49.6.42B3. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā pratibalo bhavati piṇḍapātam vā aṇṭhituṃ vihārakaṃ vâgantuṃ § 49.7.42B4~5. tenâpi dāni piṇḍacārikaṃ vā aṇṭhiyāṇa vihāraṃ vâgacchiya § 51.6.44A2. na dāni ito vā ito vā (“hierhin und dorthin”; ☞ § 51.6, Anm. 1) nidhyāya- ntena āsitavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “corā vā ocorakā bhavanti.” § 55.3.46B5. yo yeva pracālayati taṃ yeva kṣipreṇa geṇḍukena urasi vā tāṇḍeti pārśvasmi vā āhananti et passim vā (2) = eva; vgl. BHSD, s.v. vā (2) “= eva, precisely, just”; PW, s.v. vā (4) ⇒ eva, yeva, yyeva, va § 18.30.16B5. nâpi kṣamati vaktuṃ “ko vā eṣo? kathaṃ vā eṣo?”, mā veḍḍo bhaveya tti (≒ § 18.34.16B7, § 19.14.18A4) § 19.2.17B4. naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ. kuto vā imeṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ?; vgl. § 20.6.19B3. naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ. kuto imeṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ? (=
§ 20.7.19B4, § 34.1.28B1, § 34.2.28B2 usw.) § 19.32. nâyaṃ vaktavyo “ko eṣo? kim vā? katham vā etaṃ?” ti, mā veḍḍo bhaveya tti § 32.2.27A5. so dān’ āha “kadā vā? kim vā?” § 24.12.22A7. eṣo bhikṣuḥ stūpaṃ vandati stūpābhigṛhe vā <paśyati?> kheṭaṃ cchoritakaṃ kenaci aprakṛtijñena, pādena marditavyo § 31.1.25B1. “āyuṣmaṃ kuto vā praviṣṭāḥ?”, āhaṃsuḥ “okkhandiyāṇaṃ praviṣṭāḥ.” § 33.9.28A4. eṣo bhikṣu mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā bhaginīm vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, ... atha khalu “sālohite” ti vā śabdāpayitavyāḥ § 49.8.42B7. amukena (lies: amukasya?) vā antaraghare bhuṃja § 57.11.48A1. ta<ṃ> pi dāni na kṣamati vṛddhatarakasya vā anuvātaṃ prasphoṭayituṃ 1 √vā ⇒ nir-vāpaya-, nir-vāpe-, pari-nir-vā- 2 √vā “nähen; flechten; flicken” ⇒ vāpaya-, vuṇ-, ā-vuṇ-, uv-vin- § 17.11.15A5. sarvvehi muñjā vā balbajā vā karttitavyā, mañcā vā vātavyā pīṭhā vātavyā, bisī sīvayitavyā, caturasrā vāpayitavyā (“weben”) vāca~ ⇒ a-prakīrṇṇavāca~ vāca-# “lesen” ⇒ √vac § 32.6.27B2. pustakaṃ vācantasya, pustakaṃ likhantasya, varccakuṭīṃ gacchantasya, ... vācaṃ-vāci~#, vāco-vāci~#, vāco-vācikā~# “Streitgespräch” ☞ § 32.1, Anm. 1 § 32.1.27A4. so ca apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sārddhaṃ vācovācikāṃ karoti § 32.2.27A6. amukaṃ divasaṃ tvaṃ amukena bhikṣuṇā sārddhaṃ vācaṃvāciṃ karosi § 32.2.27A6. so dāni āha “āyuṣman, vācovāciṃ karentasya pādāṃ vandasi?” § 32.3.27A6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati āgantukena nevāsikasya vācovāciṃ karentasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 32.4.27A7. so ca apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sārddham vācovāciṃ karoti 473 vācā~ § 41.26.35B2. trīṇi vācāyo jalpayitavyāyo “ko vṛddhatarako vṛddho?” tti vācā-karmman~ (Skt) “Tat mit Worten”; vgl. SWTF IV, S. 88. vāk-karman § 42.5.36B1. maitraṃ vācākarmmaṃ maitraṃ manokarmmaṃ sabrahmacāriṣu dhruvaṃ pratyupasthāpayitavyaṃ vāco-vāci~, vāco-vācikā~ ⇒ vācaṃ-vāci~ vāṇija~ “Kaufmann” § 52.6.44B6. asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno vāṇijaka~ “Kaufmann” § 5.5.6B2. upāsako ’pāsikā āgantuko gamiko vāṇijako sārthavāho § 6.5.7B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti: ... gṛhastho pravrajito vāṇijako sārthavāho āgantuko gamiko? § 6.7.7B4. koci ima<ṃ>hi evannāmako upāsako dānapatī vā vāṇijako (Hs. °akā) vā? § 31.37.27A3. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāptaṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, yadi koci sārtho prayāto bhavati, te bhikṣu vāṇijakasya sārthavāhasya parinditavyā vāta~ (1) “Wind” ⇒ anu-vātam, vījana-vāta~, mukha-vāta~, nivāte, naivāta~ § 13.17.12B7. vihāro ... atha khalu kālena kālaṃ apāvuritavyo yathā vātaṃ labheyyā (2) “Blähung” (SWTF) ⇒ vāta-karmman~, pūti-vāta-karmman~ § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko (Hs. kho) vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” vāta-karmman~ “Blähung” ⇒ vāta~, pūti-vāta-karmman~ § 62.3.49B7. evaṃ vātakarmme pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 62.13.50B1); Uddāna (VII). 50B2. evaṃ vātakarmme (Hs. °rmma) pratipadyitavyaṃ § 62.5.50A2. na kṣamati prahāṇam upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} ḍharaḍharāye vātakarmma (Hs. vānak°) karttuṃ § 62.5.50A2. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇaśālāyām upaviṣṭasya vātakarmma āgacchati, na dāni osaritvā indriyāṇi karttavyaṃ § 62.6.50A2. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati saṃprajāna ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipiyāṇaṃ hastena vivaritvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.7.50A3. atha dāni bhikṣu na pāreti saṃprajāna vātakarmma karttuṃ, nirddhāviyāṇaṃ vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.7.50A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya puno puno vātakarmma āgacchati, ... (= § 62.9.50A5, § 62.10.50A6; ≒ § 62.8.50A4, § 62.11.50A7) § 62.8.50A4. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa vātakarmma karttuṃ. atha khalu eka<ṃ> phiccakaṃ utkṣipiya vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.9.50A5. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇe vā sāmāyikāyām vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ § 62.9.50A5. atha khalu ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipitvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ (Hs. °vyaḥ) § 62.10.50A6. nâpi kṣamati antaragharaṃ niṣaṇṇena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ § 62.10.50A6. atha khalu ekaṃ phiccakaṃ ukṣipitvā saṃprajānan vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.11.50A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā vṛddhatarakasya vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ § 62.12.50A7. na dāni sārthasya (Hs. sārthena) agrato sthitvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ vāta-kopaka~# “blähend” ⇒ vāta-kopana~ § 62.4.50A1. nâpi kṣamati bilvāni vā madanaphalāni vātakopakāni (Hs. vā tatkālakāni) phalāni khādituṃ kalāyaṃ {vā} satilapallavaṃ vā § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu<ṃ> mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ vāta-kopana~ “blähend”#; vgl. pw, s.v. vāta-kopana (“den Wind [als Humor] aufregend”) ⇒ vāta- kopaka~ § 62.2.49B5. tato śvetamayena yeva khādanti, bilvāni khādanti, {s}vātakopan{at}āni 474  phalāni khādanti, kalāyā satilapallavaṃ khādanti vātadhānīye für vātapānīye : § 42.7.36B2 vāta-patha~# “Windrichtung, Strömung des Windes”; vgl. Skt. vāyu-patha ☞ § 18.3, Anm. 2 § 18.3.15B2. (varccakuṭī ...) dakṣiṇena vā paścimena vā kārāpayitavyā vātapathaṃ muktvā § 19.3.17B5. (praśvāsakuṭī ...) dakṣiṇena vā paścimena vā kārāpayitavyā vātapatha<ṃ> muktvā § 62.11.50A7. vātakarmma ... nâpi dāni kṣamati anuvātaṃ karttuṃ ... apavātaṃ karttavyaṃ, vātapathaṃ muñcitvā § 62.12.50B1. yathā sārthaṃ gandhena na vyābaheyyā, vātapathaṃ mocayitvā karttavyaṃ vātapāṇa~ ⇒ muṇḍa-vātapāṇa~ vātapānīya~# “Fensteröffnung betreffend, von einer Fensteröffnung”; wahrscheinlich bezeichnet vātapānīyā vīthī eine Fensteröffnung ☞ § 42.7, Anm. 4 § 42.7.36B2. vātapānīyā (Hs. °nīyaṃ) vīthī karttavyā abhyantare viśālā bāhirato saṃkṣiptā § 42.7.36B2. ekāye vātapānīye (Hs. vātadhānīye) vīthīye dvauvikā(?) bhavati dvitīyā karttavyā vāta-pitta-śleṣmaka~# “an Störung von Wind, Galle oder Schleim leidend”; vgl. Pā. vāta-pitta- semha~ ⇒ vāta-pitta-śleṣmika~ § 42.1.36A2. vātapittaśleṣmakānāṃ phāsu (Hs. payasu) bhaviṣyati vāta-pitta-śleṣmika~# “an Störung von Wind, Galle oder Schleim leidend” ⇒ vāta-pitta-śleṣmaka~ § 42.3.36A5. utpātagaṇḍapiṭakānāṃ vātapittaśleṣmikānāṃ phāsu bhaviṣyati vāta-putra~ “Schwindler” (wörtl. “der Sohn des Windes” [= vātasuta]); vgl. Lüders 1973: 110f. § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi ... ḍhossā vā viṭā vā vātaputro vā viheṭhanābhiprāyā nimantrayeṃsu § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ, mā naṃ ḍhossā vā viḍā vā vātaputrā vā bhuṃjeṃsu vātaputra-bhaya~ “Gefahr durch einen Schwindler” ☞ § 1.12, Anm. 3 § 6.6.7B3. anekāye tahiṃ ... bhaveya rājabhayaṃ vā corabhayam vā ḍhossabhayam vā vātaputrabhayam vā vāta-maṇḍalikā~ (Pā) “Wirbelwind”; vgl. Skt. vāta-maṇḍalī § 25.1.22B1. pātraṃ sthavitaṃ. tan dāni vātamaṇḍalikāye āgacchiyāṇaṃ bhūmīyaṃ pātito bhinno kapālānāṃ rāśiṃ kṛtvā vāta-rajas~# “vom Wind (aufgewirbelter) Staub” (?) (Verschreibung für vātātapo “Wind und Hitze”?) ☞ § 44.8, Anm. 1 § 44.8.39A6. rajo vātarajo vā ukkalikā cīvaraṃ vināśeti vātātapa~ (vāta-āt°) “Wind und Hitze” § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... vātātapena vināśiyantaṃ varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantaṃ § 11.5.10B5. śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... vātātapena vā vināśiyantaṃ § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) varṣeṇa ovarṣīyati vātātapena vā vināśīyati § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... mañcām pīṭhā ... vātātapena opūriyaṃtāṃ (≒ § 17.2.14B6) § 12.3.11B1. mañcā pīṭhā ... vātātapena opūriyantā prāṇakehi khajjantā (≒ § 17.3.14B6) § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena otariyanti, kākaśakuntehi vā ohayiyanti § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena opūriyanti, naivāte thapitavyāḥ § 16.9.14B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena opūriyanti, nivāte sthāpayitavyā § 17.12.15A6. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... vātātapena vā opūriyanti, ... nivāte sthāpayitavyā § 21.8.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggakaṃ vā paluggakaṃ vātātapena vināśiyantaṃ ... vātāyana~ ⇒ jāla-vātāyana~, muṇḍa-vātāyana~ vāda~ ⇒ ko punar vvādo vādin~ ⇒ priya-vādin~, manaāpa-vādin~ vānakarmma für vātak° : § 62.5.50A2 vāpaya- (BHS) “weben”# ⇒ 2√vā § 17.11.15A5. sarvvehi muñjā vā balbajā vā karttitavyā, mañcā vā vātavyā pīṭhā vātavyā, bisī sīvayitavyā, caturasrā vāpayitavyā 475 vâpi für câpi : § 31.33.26B7 vābaheyā für vyābaheyā : § 18.48.17A7 vāma~ ⇒ anu-vāmam, apa-vāmaṃ § 8.4.8B7. prathamaṃ dakṣiṇo pādo praveśitavyo paścā vāmaṃ (Hs. vāmo) praveśiya ... § 18.50.17A7. na kṣamati nivāsanaṃ oguhiya vāmena hastena aṅgajātaṃ gṛhṇiya ... § 20.13.20A1. vāmena ca hastena kuccako gṛhṇitavyaḥ paścāt ekamantena cchorayitavyaḥ § 25.13.22B7. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ vāmena hastena allīpayituṃ. atha khalu ... dakṣiṇena hastena pātraṃ allīpayitavyaṃ § 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena kalācīyaṃ vāmāyaṃ (Hs. dāḍīyaṃ) aṃsi- vaddhakaṃ prakṣipitvā ... prakṣipitavyaṃ § 30.1.24B6. uttānakâpi śeyyā kalpenti, vāmenâpi pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpenti § 30.3.25A1. na kṣamati vāmena vā pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ § 30.3.25A1. vāmena pārśvena kāmopabhoginaḥ śeyyāṃ kalpaya<n>ti § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati ... vāmaṃ (Acc. fem.) bāhām anukāyaṃ prasārayitvā § 30.5.25A3. na kṣamati vāmena śayyāṃ prajñapetuṃ. dakṣiṇ<en>a śayyā prajñapetavyā § 41.7.34A4. vāmena hastena pādāṃ dhovati § 41.7.34A4. sthavireṇa dāni vāmā jaṃghā dhovitā § 41.7.34A4. vāmo pādo dhovito § 41.9.34A5. upānahikāyo nikṣipiya dakānakāto vāmāye kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjayitvā § 41.23.35A7. vāmena hastena pādā{ṃ} dhovitavyā § 41.23.35A7. vāmā tāva jaṃghā dhovitavyā (= § 41.27.35B4) § 41.23.35A7. vāmo pādo dhovayitavyo § 41.27.35B3. vāmena hastena pādā dhovitavyā § 41.27.35B4. vāmo pādo dhovitavyo (= § 41.28.35B5) § 41.27.35B4. vāmena hastena udakaṃ āsiñcitavyaṃ § 41.28.35B5. vāmā jaṃghā dhovitavyā § 49.5.42B1. yadi tāva dakṣiṇenântenâgacchati, vāmenântena uvvattitavyaṃ. vāmenântenâgacchati, dakṣiṇenântena uvvattitavyaṃ § 54.9.46A5. yadi vāmena sthitako bhavati, dakṣiṇena jānukena saṃghaṭṭetavyo § 57.6.47B4. upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā nikuṭitakena vāmā bāhāṃ osāriya saṃprajānaṃ nirddhāvitavyaṃ usw. vāmaka~ “link, links befindlich” § 57.5.47B3. upānahikāyo ... saṃpuṭikariyāṇaṃ vāmakena hastena gṛhṇiya nikuṭitakena <vāmā bāhāṃ> osārayitvā saṃprajānaṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ vāma-jānuka~# “das linke Knie” § 54.9.46A5. yadi dakṣiṇato sthito bhavati, vāmajānukena tena cchatti pratyupasthitavyaṃ ghaṭ<ṭ>itavyā vāmato (Pā) “auf der linken Seite, (von) links”; < Skt. vāmatas ⇒ dakṣiṇato § 42.9.36B3. yadi tāva bhraṣṭikā dakṣiṇato bhavati, vāmato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.9.36B3. atha vā vāmato (Hs. namato) bhraṣṭikā bhavati, dakṣiṇato kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ vāma-hasta~ § 41.32.36A1. antamasato leṅkaṭakhaṇḍena vāmahastena vā āmarjiya praviśitavyaṃ vāma-hastikam# “auf der linken Seite, links” ⇒ dakṣiṇa-hastikaṃ § 49.5.42B2. vaktavyaṃ: “upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā vāmahastikam vā dakṣiṇahastikaṃ vā uvvatta” tti vāmānta~# “die linke Seite” ⇒ dakṣiṇānta~ § 41.27.35B4. atha dāni vāmānte pādadhovanikā bhavati vāra~ “Mal” § 55.6.46B7. <duve vā> trayo vā vārā geṇḍukāṃ purato ābhāsayitvā ... vāraka~ “Gefäß” § 40.15.33A7. ekena madhyama<ṃ> vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ, apareṇa praṇetavyaṃ 476 vāraya- (1) (Skt), vāre- (Pā) “abwehren lassen” oder “fernhalten” § 7.6.8B4. ācāraṃ śekhayitavyo anācārato vārayitavyo (Hs. cār°) § 9.5.10A2. ācāraṃ śekhayitavyo anācārato vārayitavyo (Hs. dhār°) § 8.7.9A4. uśśaṃkiyapariśaṅkiyāṇi kulāni vyapadiśati, vāretavyo vaktavyo “mā tahiṃ gaccha!” vāraya- (2) (BHS), vāre- (BHS) “geben, entgegennehmen lassen, weitergeben” ☞ § 53.7, Anm. 1, § 54.1, Anm. 1 § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ko śalākāṃ vārayiṣyati (Hs. cār°), ko praticchiṣyati, ... (≒ § 2.7.2B6, § 3.8.3B6) § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo “tvaṃ śalākāṃ vāresi (Hs. cāreṣi)” ... tena yathâdhyeṣṭena śalākā vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°) § 1.10.2A1~2. nâpi kṣamati śalākāṃ vārayantena (Hs. cār°) anirmmādiya hastāṃ śalākāṃ vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°). nâpi kṣamati ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ (Hs. cārayantaṃ). atha khalu ... śalākā vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°) (≒ § 3.9.3B7) § 1.11.2A3. yaṃ kālaṃ śalākā vāritā (Hs. cār°) bhavanti, bhikṣū gaṇitā bhavanti, sāmagrī ārocitā bhavati, dāyakadānapati paripṛcchitavyā ...(≒ § 2.9.3A1, § 3.10.4A1) § 2.7.2B7. tvaṃ śalākāṃ vārayiṣyasi (Hs. cār°) § 2.8.2B7~3A1. tato śalākāṃ vāra<ya>ntena (Hs. cār°) ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°). ... śalākā vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°) § 3.8.3B7. yo tatra pratibalo bhavati so adhyeṣitavyo: “tvaṃ śalākāṃ vārayesi (Hs. cār°)” § 8.8.9A5. piṇḍapāta ... bhuñjantasya pānīyaṃ vāritavyaṃ (Hs. cār°; “ausschenken”) § 40.10.33A3. bhaktāgreṇa pānīyaṃ vārentena ... § 40.10.33A3. caukṣaṃ pānīyaṃ vāretavyaṃ § 40.12.33A4. pānīyaṃ vārentena upalakṣayitavyaṃ § 40.13.33A5. paścādbhaktaṃ pānīyaṃ vārentena (Hs. cār°) ... § 40.14.33A6. jentāke vārentena (Hs. cār°) oṣṭhā pānīyadhārikāye (?; Hs. pānīyacār°) patraṃ (Hs. pātraṃ) bandhitavyaṃ § 40.15.33A6. prahāṇe vārentena (Hs. cār°) yadi bhūmyāstaro bhavati, ... § 40.15.33A7. ekena madhyama<ṃ> vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ, apareṇa praṇetavyaṃ § 40.15.33A7. ekena vāretavyaṃ (Hs. cār°) § 53.7.45A6. dīpavārikena dīpako vārayitavyo (Hs. cār°) “mā tarhi koci pracalāyatî”ti § 53.7.45A7. yadi tāva koci pracalāyati, acchaṭikaṃ kariya utthāpayitavyo, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava dīpo prāpuṇatî”ti. tena sa vārayitavyo (Hs. cār°) § 53.8.45A7. “āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣyan (Hs. cār°).” ti. tena vārayitavyo (Hs. cār°) § 53.9.45B1. atha dāni bhikṣu śrāddhako bhavati, āha “suvihita, āsa tvaṃ, ahaṃ vārayiṣyan (Hs. cār°)” ti, dātavyo § 53.10.45B1. nâpi kṣamati tena upārambhaṇābhiprāyeṇa dīpo vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°) § 54.1.46A1. tena hi yaṣṭī nāma vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°) (☞ § 54.1, Anm. 1) § 54.3.46A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ yaṣṭī vārentā yo yeva bhikṣu pracalāyati taṃ yeva kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye ure vā āhananti, pāde vā āhananti § 54.6.46A3~4. navakāntato vāretavyā (Hs. cār°). yaṣṭi dāni vārentena (Hs. cār°) na dāni oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā vāretavyā (Hs. cār°) ohitahastena vā upānahārūḍhena vā yaṣṭi vāretavyā (Hs. cār°). atha khalu ekāṃsīkṛtena vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°) § 54.7.46A4. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yaṣṭiṃ vārentena (Hs. cār°) kṣiprāye yaṣṭīye āhanituṃ § 54.7.46A4. nâpi kṣamati viheṭhanābhiprāyeṇa yaṣṭī vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°). atha khalu maitracittena yaṣṭī vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°) vṛddhāntāto navakāntaṃ § 54.9.46A6. utthāpiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava yaṣṭi prāpuṇati. vārehi (Hs. cār°).” tena vāretavyaṃ (Hs. cār°), iminā upaviśitavyaṃ § 54.10.46A6. na dāni kṣamati oguṇṭhitaśīrṣeṇa vā ‖ pe ‖ yāva atha khalu ekāṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ kṛtvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ tena vāretavyaṃ (Hs. cār°) § 54.12.46A7. vaktavyaṃ “āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣya<ṃ> (Hs. cār°).” tena yeva yaṣṭī vāretavyaṃ (Hs. cār°) § 54.13.46A7~46B1. na dāni tena otāraprekṣiṇā vāretavyā (Hs. cār°). atha khalu 477  ṣaḍāya<ta>na manasikarentena vāretavyā (Hs. cār°) § 54.14.46B1. atha dāni śraddhako bhikṣur bhavati, āha “sagotrīmātā, āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣyāmi (Hs. cār°)”, dātavyā § 55.8.47A1. atha dāni śrāddhako bhikṣur bhavati, āha “sagotrīmātā, āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣyan (Hs. cār°)” ti, dātavyaṃ § 54.15.46B1. evaṃ tāva vāretavyaṃ (Hs. cār°) yāva prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati (= § 55.9.47A1) § 54.16.46B2. nâpi kṣamati tehi bhikṣūhi yaṣṭī vārentehi (Loc. pl.; Hs. cār°) cittaṃ pradūṣituṃ § 55.1.46B2. te dāni bhikṣu{ṃ} prahāṇasmiṃ yaṣṭiṃ vārayantā (Hs. cār°) śītena kilamma<ṃ>ti § 55.2.46B4. so (= geṇḍuka~) vārayitavyo (Hs. cār°) navakāntena vā paṭipāṭikāya vā yasya vā puna prāpuṇati § 55.3.46B4. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ geṇḍukaṃ vārayaṃtā (Hs. cār°) iṣṭa- khaṇḍaṃ leṅkaṭakakhaṇḍena veṣṭayitvā vārenti (Hs. cār°) § 55.4.46B5. nâpi kṣamati āghātacittena vā duṣṭacittena vā geṇḍukaṃ vārayituṃ (Hs. cā°). atha khalu maitracittena hitacittena geṇḍuko vāritavyo (Hs. car°) § 55.4.46B6. nâpi kṣamati geṇḍukaṃ vārayantasya (Hs. cā°) cittaṃ pradūṣayituṃ § 55.5.46B6. vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, tava geṇḍuko prāpuṇati. utthehi vārehi (Hs. cār°)” tti. tena (Hs. imena) vārayitavyo (Hs. cār°), imena upaviśitavyaṃ § 55.7.47A1. atha dāni āha “āsa tumaṃ, ahaṃ vārayiṣyan (Hs. cār°)” ti, tena yeva vārayitavyo (Hs. cār°) usw. vārā~ (SWTF) “Reihenfolge, das An-der-Reihe-Sein” § 8.13.9B3. atha dāni utthāpīyati, yattikāṃ vārāṃ āpṛcchitavyaṃ Vārāṇasī~ § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Vārāṇasyāṃ Buddhavicīrṇṇā nāma puṣkiriṇī § 41.12.34B1. bhūtapūrvvam bhikṣavo atītam adhvānaṃ eta<r>hiṃ ca nagaraṃ Vārāṇasī Kāśijanapado vārika~ ⇒ jentāka-vārika~, daśāha-v°, dīpa-v°, pakṣa-v°, paṃcāha-v°, pānīya-v°, māsa-v°, yentāka-v° vāriṇī~ ⇒ kaṇṭha-vāriṇī~ vāre- ⇒ vāraya- (2) vālikā~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “Sand” ⇒ nir-vvālika~ § 24.3.22A2. kapālaṃ vā mallam vā kuṇḍikam vā dakānakam vā liptopaliptaṃ kariya vālikāye vā pāṣāṇasya vā patthaliddrakānāṃ vā pūrayitavyaṃ vālikā-dhāna~# “sandiger Platz” ☞ § 25.5, Anm. 3 ⇒ karṣa-dhāna~ § 25.5.22B4. pātraṃ ... karṣadhāne vā vālikādhāne vā dūrvvāsādvale vā nirmmādayi- tavyaṃ vālikāya für thālikāya ?: § 40.15.33A6 vālikāye für thālikā{ye} ? : § 24.8.22A4 vāśī~ ⇒ vāsī~ vāsa~ ⇒ araṇya-vāsa~ § 4.18.5B7. yasmiṃ pradeśe medhāvī vāsaṃ kalpeti paṇḍito (vs) § 31.7.25B5. sāye vāsôpagatā (< vāsa upa° < vāsaṃ upa°) bhavanti, taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā vāsanā~ (BHS) “Eindrücke (als Ergebnis von Taten in vergangenen Zeiten)” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 2 § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... phalabhāgiyān satvāṃ phalehi pratiṣṭhāpayamāno, vāsanā- bhāgīyān satvān vāsanāyām avasthāpayamāṇo vāsanā-bhāgīya~# “der Eindrücke (als Ergebnis von Taten in vergangenen Zeiten) teilhaftig” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ -bhāgiya~, -bhāgīya~, puṇya-bhāgiya~, phala-bhāgiya~ § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi niveśayamāno, phalabhāgiyān satvāṃ phalehi pratiṣṭhāpayamāno, vāsanābhāgīyān satvān vāsanāyām avasthāpaya- 478  māṇo vāsin~ ⇒ itvāra-vāsin~ vāsī~ “Messer”; Skt. vāśī (v.l. vāsī), BHS. vāsī (vgl. BHSD, s.v. vāsī-candana-kalpa), Pā. vāsi, Pkt. vās § 43.16.38B4. takṣāṇaṃ bhāṇḍaṃ bhavati kuṭhāro vā vāsīyo vā viharaṇako vā nikhādanako vā aṭṭilā vā § 43.16.38B4. etā bhavanti vāsīyo vā kuddālakā vā niśreṇiyo vā, na dāni tathā yeva mṛttikāpraliptikā sthapetavyā vāsyāma für dāsyāma : § 42.25.37B3 √vāh ⇒ prati-bāha-, prati-bāhe- vāhṃ ⇒ kāka-vāhṃ bhañja- vikaṭa~ ⇒ mahā-vikaṭa~ vi-kāla~ “Abend” (Skt), “außer der Zeit” (BHS, Pā; vgl. Franke 1913: 5, Anm. 7) ⇒ ati-vikāle, ati- vikālaka~, kāle, vekālika~, sa-kāle, sa-kālena § 19.22.18B1. vikāle praveśiyāṇaṃ (Hs. praviś°) tahiṃ yyeva sthāne sthāpayitavyo § 19.24.18B3. tato vikāle bhūyo praveśitavyaṃ § 31.29.26B4. vikāle āgatā bhavanti, vekālikena cchandayitavyāḥ § 32.12.27B5. vikāle āgato bhavati, vekālikena cchandayitavyo § 39.15.31B3. atha dāni vikāle āgacchanti, na vâgacchanti, aparejjukāto śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ dātavyaṃ (≒ § 39.27.32A4) § 45.7.40A2. eṣo bhikṣu vikāle pratikramati, nâpi kṣamati nivāsanaṃ nikṣipitvā nagnaprāvṛtena rātrīprāvaraṇaṃ nivāsanaṃ mārggituṃ § 49.7.42B6. bhikṣusya ātmano āhāraparyeṣṭiṃ paryeṣamāṇasya vikālo bhavati vikālikena für vekāl° : § 31.29.26B4 vi-kīrṇṇa~ “ausgestreut” § 18.45.17A6. mā odhyāyeṃsu “ken’ imaṃ<hi> panthesmi antrāṇi vikīrṇṇāni?” vi-kopaya- (BHS), vi-kope- (BHS, Pā) § 41.5.34A2. yatra yeva ayaṃ śramaṇako iryāpathaṃ vikopayiṣyati § 41.5.34A2. ime ... śramaṇakāḥ grāmānte iryāpathaṃ ṭhapayanti, nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti vikopenti vi-krośa- § 42.16.37A1. na dāni bāhirato vikrośitavyaṃ vi-kṣuṇṇa~ “zerkleinert, zerbrochen” § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... vikṣuṇṇam vā pātraṃ (lies: patraṃ?) gṛhṇituṃ vikhallikā für cikh° : § 11.6.10B7 vigata-janapada~# “menschenleer”; vgl. Pā. vijanavāta, °vāda und vijanapāta ☞ § 39.29, Anm. 5 § 39.29.32A7. (āraṇyakā) ... vaktavyā “durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni prāntāni viviktāni vigatajanapadāni manuṣyarahaśayyakāni pratisaṃlayanasāropyāni ...” vigraha~ ⇒ saṃgha-vigraha~, stūpa-vigraha~, cetiyābhigṛha~, saṃghābhigṛha~, stūpābhigṛha~ vigraha-vivādāpanna~# (°vivāda-āp°) “in Zwist und Auseinandersetzungen verwickelt” ☞ § 38.6, Anm. 6 § 38.6.30B2. kasya tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? vighasa~ “Speisereste” § 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... kheṭaṃ vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā vighaso vā saṃkāro vā anyam vā aprayat{t}aṃ grahetuṃ vi-ghnaya-# “sich hinwegsetzen”; < Skt. vi-√han (“abschlagen, abwehren”); vgl. CDIAL 11679. *vighnati § 39.9.31A6. tehi pi dāni āraṇyakehi na vighnayitavyaṃ *vi-cchaddaya- “ausspucken”; < Skt. *vi-cchardayati (“ejects, leaves”, CDIAL 11689); vgl. Pā. vi- cchaḍḍeti (“to throw out, to vomit” [PTSD, s.v.]), Pkt. vicchaḍḍia, °ddia ⇒ cchanda-, cchaḍḍaya- § 20.13.20A1. nâpi dāni kṣamati dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādantena ... kuccako vā vicchaddiya 479  (Hs. dicch°) diśodiśaṃ cchorayituṃ vi-√jṛmbh (Skt), vi-jṛmbhaya-# “gähnen”; vgl. BHS(Mvu). vi-jṛṃbheti (BHSG, S. 213b) ⇒ jambhaya-, jambhāya- § 61.4.49A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, nirddhāviya vijṛmbhi- tavyaṃ § 61.6.49A6. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>aṃ vā dharmmaśravaṇe vā aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhayituṃ § 61.6.49A6. cīvarakarṇṇakena mukhaṃ pidhiya sukhākaṃ vijṛmbhitavyaṃ § 61.7.49A7. cīvarakoṇena mukhaṃ pidhiya saṃprajānena vijṛmbhayitavyaṃ (Hs. vijṛmbhāy°) § 61.7.49A7. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gocaraṃ vā praviśantena antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena maṭamaṭāye aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhituṃ § 61.8.49B1. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā agrato maṭamaṭāye aṃgāni bhaṃjantena vijṛmbhituṃ § 61.9.49B1. evaṃ vijṛmbhitavyaṃ; vgl. § 61.2.49A3. evaṃ jambhayitavyaṃ vi-jṛmbhaya- ⇒ vi-√jṛmbh vijṛmbhāyitavyaṃ für vijṛmbhay° : § 61.7.49A7 vijṛmbhikā~ “Gähnen” § 61.4.49A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya prahāṇam upaviṣṭasya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... § 61.4.49A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā puno puno āgacchati, ... (= § 61.6.49A6) § 61.6.49A6. atha dāni bhikṣusya vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... (= § 61.8.49B1) § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya bhūyo bhūyo vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... § 61.7.49A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya antaraghare vā upaviṣṭasya puno puno vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, utthiya gantavyaṃ vijjha- (BHS[Mvu], Pā) “bohren, durchbohren”; < Skt. vidhyati (√vyadh); vgl. BHSG, S. 232b § 59.1.48A6. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyāḥ tulikāye nakkaṃ vijjhanti, sūtrakaṃ pi vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ nakke prakṣipanti § 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa tulikāya vā nakkaṃ vijjhituṃ sūtraṃ vaṭṭiya nakkasmin prakṣipituṃ vijñāna ⇒ anya-vijñāna-samaṃmī viṭa~ “Leichtlebiger” ☞ § 4.6, Anm. 5 ⇒ viḍa~ § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi ... ḍhossā vā viṭā vā vātaputro vā viheṭhanābhiprāyā nimantrayeṃsu viḍa~ “Leichtlebiger”#; < Skt. viṭa ☞ § 4.6, Anm. 5 ⇒ viṭa~ § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ, mā naṃ ḍhossā vā viḍā vā vātaputrā vā bhuṃjeṃsu vi-taṇḍita~ ⇒ bāhira-vitaṇḍita~ vitanikā~# “ausgebreitet”; ein Derivat von Skt. vi-√tan “sich ausbreiten” § 43.15.38B3. cīvararaj<j>ūṃ na dāni ... vitanikā ujjhitvā gantavyaṃ vittopakaraṇa~ (vitta-upa°) ⇒ prabhūta-jātarūpa-rajata-vittopakaraṇa~ √vid ⇒ a-pratisaṃviditena, pratisaṃviditena, vedaya-, saṃ-√vid, saṃviditena vidalikā~ (BHS) ⇒ kaṇḍa-vidalik~, nala-vidalikā~, vaṃśa-vidalikā~ vidiśam# “nach (irgendeiner) Zwischenrichtung” § 42.7.36B2. jentākaṃ karentena ... vidiśaṃ dvāraṃ karttavyaṃ vidurgga~ ⇒ anavarāgra-jāti-jarā-maraṇa-saṃsāra-kāntāra-naraka-vidurgga~ vidūra~ ⇒ a-vidūreṇa viddha~ “durchbohrt” ⇒ vindhāpaya-, ghuṇa-viddha~, śirā-viddha~ § 49.7.42B4. yaṃ kālaṃ śirā viddhā bhavati, ubhayehi bhuñjiya nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 49.7.42B5. yadi tāva na viddhā śirā bhavati, ... viddhaka~ ⇒ śirā-viddhaka~ vidyā~ ⇒ traividya-prāpta~ -vidha~ ⇒ nava-vidha~ vidhavā~ ⇒ caṇḍa-vidhavā~ § 4.17.5B4. istrī pi vidhavā nagnā sace ’syā daśa bhrātaro (vs) 480 vidhi~ § 4.17.5B5. vidhinā devalokaṃ tu modantu kāmakāmino (vs) vinaya~ ⇒ abhi-vinaya~, ubhayato vinaya~, ekato vinaya~, yathā-vinayaṃ § 38.8.30B3. saṃghena tat kāryaṃ dharmmeṇa vinayena śāstuḥ śāsanena vyupaśamayi- tavyaṃ § 41.19.35A3. ācāraṃ śikṣiyāṇa{ṃ} vinayaṃ ca (vs) (2 mal) vi-naya- “sich erziehen” § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “ ... duṣkaraṃ pravivekena dur- abhiramaṃ ekaṃ paraṃ rātri vinayamāno mānasaṃ ādhyātmaṃ vê”ti vinaya-dhara~ (BHS, SWTF) “Vinaya-Experte, Vinaya-Kenner” § 17.5.15A1. ahan dharmmakathiko, ahaṃ vinayadharo, aham āraṇyako, piṇḍacāriko ... vinayātikramam (vinaya-ati°)# ā-sādaya- “eine Übertretung der Regeln begehen”; diese Wendung ist für die Schule der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins charakteristisch ☞ § 3.13, Anm. 1 § 3.13.4A4. na pratipadyanti vinayātikramam āsādayanti § 7.7.8B5. na ovadati vinayāti<kra>maṃ āsādayati § 9.6.10A2. eṣo ācāryo ... antevāsi naỿva ovadati, nânuśāsati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 11.14.11A4. antarīkaraṇaṃ dātavyaṃ. na deti, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 17.5.15A1. te vinayātikramam āsādayanti § 20.11.19B7. so eṣo bhikṣuḥ niravaśeṣaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati vinayātikrama āsādayati § 20.18.20A4. sa eṣo bhikṣuḥ sarvveṇa sarvvaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 24.7.22A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ divāvihāraṃ gato caṃkramati, śleṣmiko bhikṣu bhavati, ito ca <ito ca> cchorayanto caṃkramati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 24.11.22A6. kheṭo ... marditavyo. amardiya gacchati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 26.10.23B3. ete vilambakā yavāgūḥ nindanti vā praśaṃsanti vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsādayanti § 27.7.23B7. upādhyāyācāryehi vā uktena samānena “mā tiṣṭhê”ti tiṣṭhati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 31.3.25B3. ekasyâpi apāvuraṇi na bhavati, sarvve vinayātikramaṃ āsādayaṃti § 33.14.28A6. te ete gṛhi-ālāpena ālapanti vā pravyāharanti vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsādayaṃti vi-naśa- § 48.5.41A7. bhaginīyo āsanaṃ prajñapetha, mā cīvarakāni vinaśiṣyanti vinā § 23.6.1.21B2. kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ vinā pratipādakehi mañcakaṃ thapeti, anāpattiḥ § 23.6.1.21B3. pīṭhakam vā pīṭhikām vā tṛpādakam vā vinā pratipādakehi thapeti vi-nāśaya- (Skt), vi-nāśe-# “beschädigen”; vgl. Pā. vināseti ⇒ vināśitaka~ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd ... śayyāsanaṃ ... vātātapena vināśiyantaṃ varṣeṇa ovarṣiyantaṃ § 11.5.10B5. śayyāsanaṃ ... vātātapena vā vināśiyantaṃ § 11.5.10B5. śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ... vātātapena vā vināśiyantaṃ § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) varṣeṇa ovarṣīyati vātātapena vā vināśīyati § 21.8.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ ullaggakaṃ vā paluggakaṃ vātātapena vināśiyantaṃ (Hs. vināsi°) varṣeṇa vā ovarṣayantaṃ ... § 24.1.22A1. adrākṣīd ... vihārakā<nā>ṃ pakkakheṭena vā pakkasiṃghāṇakena bhittīyo vināśitāyo (Hs. vinās°) siṃghāṇakavarttīhi lambantīhi § 44.8.39A7. rajo vātarajo vā ukkalikā cīvaraṃ vināśeti § 47.8.41A1. cīvaraṃ ... karddamena vā vināśita{vya}ṃ bhavati dhovitavyaṃ § 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... tehi prajñaptehi upaviśaṃti, cīvarāṇi vināśayanti (lies: vināśiyanti?; Passiv; vgl. BHSG § 37.18) § 48.2.41A5. cīvarāṇi vināśayanti (lies: vināśiyanti?; Passiv; vgl. BHSG § 37.18) § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka karddamena vā vināśitaṃ (Hs. nāsitaṃ) bhavati vināśitaka~# “beschädigt”; < vināśita + Suffix ka § 48.2.41A5. mañcañ ca pīṭhañ ca ... dhūlīye kardamehi vināśitak<ā> § 48.4.41A7. āsanaṃ bhavati dhūlīye vā mrakṣitaṃ karddamena vā vināśitakaṃ (Hs. 481  vināsi°) ... vināsanaṃ für nivāsanaṃ : § 18.49.17A7 vināsitāyo usw. für vināśi° : § 24.1.22A1. vināsitāyo für vināś°; § 21.8.20B4. vināsiyantaṃ für vināś°; § 48.4. 41A7. vināsitakaṃ für vināśi° vi-ni-√kṣip “ablegen” § 18.9.16A1. tatra cīvaravaṃśā ... karttavyāḥ, yatra bhikṣū kalpikāni cīvarakāṇi vinikṣipiya varccakuṭī praviśanti vi-nivaraṇa~ (BHS), vi-nīvaraṇa~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “frei von Hindernissen (bei der Meditation)” ⇒ nī-varaṇa~, ni-varaṇa~ § 53.10.45B1. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ no karenti” tti § 54.13.46B1. atha khalu cintetavyaṃ “bahukaro eṣo asmākaṃ vinīvaraṇaṃ (Hs. cin°) karoti.” § 54.16.46B2. atha khalu cittam utpādayitavyaṃ “vinivaraṇaṃ me (für mo?) karentî”ti § 55.4.46B6. nâpi kṣamati geṇḍukaṃ vārayantasya cittaṃ pradūṣayituṃ. atha khalu cittaṃ pragopayitavyaṃ “vinīvaraṇaṃ mo karenti” tti vinodana~ ⇒ pratissaya-vinodana~ vi-nodaya- “vertreiben, (den Husten, das Niesen u.ä) unterdrücken” § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānakaṃ kāsayitavyaṃ § 58.5.48A5. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ § 59.4.48A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya anābhogena kṣīvikā āgacchati, vinodayitavyaṃ ... § 59.5.48B1. atha dāni bhikṣusya kṣīvikā āgacchati, vinodayitavyā § 59.6.48B2. atha dāni bhikṣusya kṣīvikā āgacchati, vinodayitavyaṃ (= § 59.7.48B3) § 59.4.48B1. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvayitavyaṃ ... § 59.5.48B2. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvitavyaṃ ... (= § 59.6. 48B3) § 59.7.48B3. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, ekama<ṃ>te gacchiya kṣīvitavyaṃ § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni <na> pāreti vinodayituṃ, punaḥ punaḥ khajjati (Hs. khanati), ekatam’ aṃte gacchiya kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ § 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... vinodetavyā nilāṭam vā parimarditavyaṃ, nāsā vā parimarditavyā § 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ <cīvarakoṇena> mukhaṃ pithitvā jambhayitavyaṃ vindana~# “das Finden, Erlangen” § 41.13.34B2. tasya gṛha<ṃ> guptañ ca surakṣitañ ca na pārenti otāraṃ vindanāya vindhāpaya-# “durchbohren lassen, (Adern) öffnen lassen” ⇒ viddha~ § 49.7.42B3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāṃ vindhāpayitukāmo bhavati bāhuśirāṃ vâṅgulya- śirāṃ vā nilāṭiṃ vā ... Vipaśyin~ (BHS, SWTF) Name eines Buddha der Vorzeit § 4.15.5B1. buddhaṃ Vipaśyiñ ca Śikhi<ṃ> ca Viśvabhuṃ (vs) (≒ § 6.13.8A4) vi-pāṭita~ “zerrissen” ⇒ pāṭita-vipāṭita~, pāṭita~ § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka ... pāṭitaṃ vā vipāṭitaṃ bhavati, sīvitavyaṃ vipāṇḍara~ ⇒ paṇḍara-vipāṇḍara~ vipula~ § 41.19.35A3. labhanti vipulāṃ arthāṃ yathā pānīyadāyakaḥ (vs) vi-pra-kaṭa~# “unterbrochen”; vgl. Pā. vippakata, BHS. viprakṛta ☞ § 53.17, Anm. 1 § 53.17.45B6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ sahasā dīpakaṃ praveśayituṃ “mā navakā bhikṣu sahasā viprakaṭa utthiheṃsu” tti vi-pra-labdha~ “getäuscht” § 4.7.4B5. jānitavyaṃ “vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho” ti (= § 5.7.6B4, § 6.7.7B4) § 4.7.4B6. āyuṣman vipralabdho bhikṣusaṃgho (≒ § 5.7.6B5) § 49.1.42A4. evaṃ ca evaṃ câsmi vipralabdho (= § 49.2.42A5) vibhakta-bhāga~# “gut aufgeteilt” § 4.18.5B6. vibhaktabhāgaṃ ruciraṃ manoramaṃ praśastam āryehi navaṃ niveśanaṃ (vs) vi-bhagnaka~# “zerbrochen”; vibhagna + Suffix ka ⇒ bhagnaka~, bhagna~ 482  § 15.8.14A3. mañcakaś ... yadi tāva vibhagnako vā cchinnako vā bhavati, cchinna- gaṇṭhi<kā> karttavyā vibhava~ “möglich” § 1.8.1B7. vibhavo bhavati, śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyāyo puṣpehi okiritavyāyo (= § 2.6.2B6; ≒ § 3.7.3B5) § 18.31.16B6. tato yadi tāva vibhavo bhavati, tailakārṣī vā gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 18.35.17A1. yadi tāva vibhavo bhavati, ... atha dāni na vibhavo bhavati, ... § 19.15.18A5. atha dāni nâsti vibhavo, antamasato gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 19.33.18B6. atha dāni vibhavo na bhavati, antamasato ... gandhakārṣī vā dātavyā § 53.13.45B2~3. vibhavo bhavati, sarvvarātriṃ varccakuṭīyañ ca prasrāvakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo. atha dāni vibhavo na bhavati, ... vibhava-dhana-dhānya~# “Vermögen, Geld und Getreide” § 4.18.5B7. yaṃ vibhavadhanadhānyena sambhavo bhūrimedhaso (vs) vi-bhāta~ “hell geworden” ⇒ nir-√bhā § 53.18.45B6. yaṃ kālaṃ vibhātaṃ bhavati, ākāśaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato varccakuṭīye prasrāvakuṭīye ca dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo vibhūṣaṇābhiprāya~# (°ṣaṇa-abhi°) “die Absicht gut auszusehen” § 20.17.20A3. nâpi kṣamati vibhūṣaṇābhiprāyeṇa dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ vi-mardita~ ⇒ mardita-vimardita~ viya (BHS[Mvu], Pā, JM, AMg) “wie, gleichsam”; vgl. Pischel § 336; in der buddhistischen Sanskrit- Literatur kommt die Form viya nur in den Texten von Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins vor; vgl. S. 559 in diesem Band ⇒ iva § 7.1.8A6. te dāni Indragavā viya varddhayanti, Śivacchagalā viya (Hs. dhipa) vardhaṃti § 9.1.9B4~5. te dāni Indragavā viya varddhanti Śivacchagalā viya varddhanti § 18.10.16A1. nâpi dāni draviḍena viya prasrāvakaraṇaṃ gṛhṇitvā ... § 19.28.18B4. atha dāni uppīlito bhavati, akaṃthāyena viya mūtreṇa siñcantena na gantavyaṃ § 19.37.19A1. kena imaṃhi panthe praśvāso kṛto rudhiraṃ viya cchanditaṃ? § 20.1.19A5. so dāni taṃ unneti va<r>ddheti ghaṭasiktakaṃekaputrakaṃ viya § 20.1.19A6. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ mama āmrapotakaṃ ghaṭasiktakaṃ ekaputrakaṃ viya saṃvarddhita{vya}ṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi § 20.2.19A7. so dāni tena unnīto varddhito ghaṭasiktako ekaputrako viya § 20.5.19B1. kiṃ ete bhikṣavo bhikṣū ekānte āsanti kalahitakā viya manye? (☞ § 20.5, Anm. 1 zu die Wendung viya manye) § 32.11.27B4. na dāni meṇḍhena viya āsitavyaṃ pādehi vandayaṃtehi § 41.4.34A1. smṛto saṃprajāno nāgo viya kāritakāraṇo Veśālīṃ nagarīṃ piṇḍāya carati § 54.11.46A6. atha dāni bahu pracālayanti, na dāni te sarvve balīvandā viya utthapetavyā virātra-kāle# adv. “zur späten Nacht” ⇒ virātre § 44.6.39A3. atha dāni bhikṣu virātrakāle uśvāsakāro vā praśvāsakāro vā nirddhāvati, ... virātre adv. “zur späten Nacht” ⇒ virātra-kāle § 44.1.38B6. aparo ca bhikṣuḥ virātre uśvāsakārako vā praśvāsakārako vā nirddhāvito bhavati virecana~ “Purgiermittel” § 28.7.24A4. atha dāni glāno, ghṛtaṃ vā pītaṃ, virecanaṃ vā pītaṃ, kiñ câpi caṃkramati, <anāpattiḥ> virecana-pītaka~# “ein Purgiermittel getrunken habend” ☞ § 11.11, Anm. 3 ⇒ pīta~ § 11.11.11A2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāviddhako vā bhavati virecanapītako vā glānako vā bhavati, vastraṃ puggalikaṃ antarīkaraṇaṃ dadiya caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ § 20.12.19B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati śirāviddhako vā virecanapītako vā ghṛtapītako vā ... vi-roca- ⇒ √ruc § 4.16.5B3. adya te suvihitehi dakṣiṇā agrabhājanagatā virocati (vs) vi-lakṣe-# “ignorieren”; < Skt. vi-lakṣayati ☞ § 42.3, Anm. 5 § 42.3.36A5. te dāni hasanti ca vilakṣenti (Hs. vilekṣanti) ca 483 vilambaka~ “zögernd”#; vgl. Skt. vi-√lamb ☞ § 26.10, Anm. 1 § 26.10.23B3. ete vilambakā yavāgūḥ nindanti vā praśaṃsanti vā, vinayātikramaṃ āsādayanti vilaya~ ⇒ tala-vilaya~ vilikhkhikā für cikkhalikā : § 13.7.12B2 vilekṣanti für vilakṣenti : § 42.3.36A5 vi-lokita~ ⇒ ālokita-vilokita~ vi-√vad “sich streiten” ⇒ a-vivadamāna~ § 31.1.25B1. te dāni vivaditāḥ, bhagavato mūlaṃ gatāḥ (= § 32.2.27A6, § 39.2.31A1, § 50.2.43A5) vi-vara- “öffnen” § 61.4.49A4. na dāni aṃgāni “ṭaṭṭa ṭaṭṭa” tti phoṭantena mukhaṃ vivaritvā jambhayi- tavyaṃ § 62.6.50A2. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati saṃprajāna ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipiyāṇaṃ hastena vivaritvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati, hastena vivaritvā mārggato udvarttitvā saṃprajānaṃ karttavyaṃ vi-varjita~ ⇒ a-vivarjita~ vi-vikta~ “abgeschieden” § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni prāntāni viviktāni vigatajanapadāni manuṣyarahaśayyakāni pratisaṃlayanasāropyāni ...” √viś ⇒ anu-pra-viṣṭa~, upa-√viś, upa-viṣṭa~, ni-viṣṭa~, ni-veśaya-, pūrvva-praviṣṭa~, pra-√viś, pra- veśaya-, saṃ-ni-viṣṭa~ viśāla~ “breit” ⇒ viśālikā~ § 42.7.36B2. vātapānīyā vīthī karttavyā abhyantare viśālā bāhirato saṃkṣiptā § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... heṣṭhato viśālā hi upari saṃkṣiptā viśālikā~ (1) “breit”# ⇒ viśāla~ § 17.6.15A1. anyehi khāṇukā viśālikā vā piṇḍakā vā paripūriya dātavyā (2) eine Art Gerät des Tischlers (?) “breite Korb”# (?) ☞ § 43.16, Anm. 4 § 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā vi-śiṣṭa~ “größer”# § 11.8.11A1. atha khalu dviguṇitā nāma karttavyā viśiṣṭā mañcāto vā vi-śrama- “sich ausruhen” ⇒ vi-śramaya-, vi-śrāmaya-, vi-śrānta~ § 31.28.26B3. pādāṃ prakṣāletha, hastāṃ nirmmādetha, pānīyaṃ pibatha, viśramatha § 32.11.27B5. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, ... pādāṃ prakṣālehi, hastāṃ nirmmādehi, viśramāhi vi-śramaya-, vi-śrāmaya- “sich ausruhen” ⇒ vi-śrama- § 29.4.24B2. eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ āmuhūrtte viśrāmiya sammiñjiya, dvitīyo pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo § 29.6.24B3. āmuhūrttakaṃ viśramiya bhūyo svastikaparyaṅkena niṣīditavyaṃ viśrambha-kula~# “vertraute Familie” ⇒ a-viśrambha-kula~ § 48.5.41A7. yadi tāva bhikṣusya viśrambhakulaṃ (Hs. visram°) bhavati, ... § 48.7.41B3. atha dāni aśrāddhakulaṃ bhavati na vā bhikṣusya viśrambhakulaṃ bhavati, ... vi-śrānta~ “ausgeruht” ⇒ vi-śrama-, vi-śramaya-, vi-śrāmaya- § 31.23.26A6. yaṃ kālaṃ viśrānto bhavati, pṛcchitavyaṃ “āyuṣman, asti etāvativarṣasya vihārako prāpuṇati?” § 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayi- tavyā. yaṃ kālaṃ viśrānto bhavati, tāṃ sammiñjiya dvitīyā sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyā vi-śrāmaya- ⇒ vi-śramaya- Viśvabhū~ (BHS, SWTF) Name eines Buddha der Vorzeit; vgl. SWTF IV 138. Viśvabhuj § 4.15.5B1. buddhaṃ Vipaśyiñ ca Śikhi<ṃ> ca Viśvabhuṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A4. buddhaṃ Vipaśyiñ ca Śikhiñ ca Viśvabhuva<ṃ> (vgl. BHSG § 12.26) (vs) 484 vi-śvasta~ “ohne Sorge” § 42.28.37B5. saṃghasaṃvyavahārako vā dānapati vā jalpati “viśvastā (Hs. visvastā) bhadantā snāyantu” tti √viṣ ⇒ pari-√viṣ, pari-veṣāpaya- visayitavyaṃ für sivayi° : § 17.10.15A5 visargga~ ⇒ bhakta-visargga~ vi-sarjaya- “beseitigen” ⇒ vi-sarje- § 19.24.18B2. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya ... § 24.5.22A3. mallakaṃ vā koṭikam vā āviddhapuṭikā vā thapetavyā, tahiṃ kheṭo karttavyo. kālena kālaṃ visarjayitavyo § 49.6.42B3. paścācchramaṇo kālena kālaṃ visarjayitavyo § 49.7.42B4. atha dāni na pratibalo bhavati, kālena kālaṃ visarjayitavyo vi-sarje-# “beantworten”; < Skt. visarjayati (“answers [a question], replies” BHSD, S. 503); vgl. BHSG, S. 236a ⇒ vi-sarjaya- § 42.30.37B6. kiñ câpi praghuṣṭena svareṇa praśnā visarjenti, anāpattiḥ vistareṇa (1) (BHS[BHSD, s.v. vistara 2], SWTF) “in vollem Worlaut; ausführlich” ☞ § 1.1, Anm. 1 zu vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā ⇒ saṃkṣipta-vistara-prabheda~ § 1.1.1B1. vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā (= § 2.1.2A7, § 3.1.3A6, § 4.1.4A5, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4, § 7.1.8A5, § 20.1.19A5, § 20.4.19A7, § 48.1.41A2 usw.) § 13.1.12A6. vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā yāva (= § 39.1.30B6, § 43.1.38A1) § 1.3.1B3. tad eva sarvvaṃ bhagavān vistareṇa pratyārocayati (= § 2.3.2B3, § 4.3.4B1, § 7.2.8A7, § 37.2.30A1 et passim) § 1.6.1B5. saṃghasthavireṇa pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa svādhyāyitavyāni § 7.4.8B1~2. pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa grāhayitavyo. pañca sūtrāṇi na pārayati, catvāri vā trīṇi duve ekaṃ sūtraṃ vistareṇa grāhayitavyo (≒ § 9.4.10A1) § 1.12.2A5. yadi tāva vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ śrotukāmā bhavanti, vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ uddiśitavyaṃ (≒ § 3.11.4A3) § 1.12.2A6. atha dāni ... bhikṣū ca na vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ śrotukāmā bhavanti, ... (≒ § 2.10.3A3) § 2.10.3A4. bhikṣū ca sukhopaviṣṭā bhavanti vistareṇa śrotukāmā tato vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ ussārayitavyaṃ § 4.19.6A2. “diśā sauvastikā” dakṣiṇā vistareṇa ādiśitavyā yathā pātrapratisaṃyukte § 6.14.8A4. tathā yeva dakṣiṇāyo vistareṇa karttavyāyo yathā saṃghasthavirasya bhaktāgre § 10.5.10A6. vistareṇa yathā śraddhevihārisya yāva dīpaṃ ādīpiya śayyāṃ prajñapiya ... § 15.1.13B7. pañcārthavaśāṃ vistareṇa kṛtvā yāvad (= § 16.1.14A5) § 21.1.20A7. vistareṇa yāvad § 23.1.21A4. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānā {yāva} vistareṇa kṛtvā yāvad adrākṣīd (2) “ausgiebig; langsam”# § 39.13.31B1. gaṇḍī tāva vistareṇa āhaniyāṇaṃ, cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo. cetiyaṃ vistareṇa vandiyāṇaṃ, ... (= § 39.25.32A3) § 39.16.31B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ... āgacchiya pādāṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo § 39.28.32A5. pādāṃ prakṣāliya hastāṃ nirmmādiya stūpaṃ vistareṇa vanditavyaṃ vistāreṇa “in der Breite” § 18.4.15B4. tac ca mukhāni karttavyāni hastām vā āyāmena nimuṣṭikam vā hastam vistāreṇa § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena dvādaśahastāṃ āyāmato karttavyaṃ aṣṭahastāṃ vistāreṇa § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... udvedho nirmmuṣṭikā trayo hastā karttavyā vistāreṇa nimuṣṭikā vā visrambhakulaṃ für viśrambhakulaṃ : § 48.5.41A7 visvastā für viśvastā : § 42.28.37B5 485 vihaṭhiyantā für viheṭhi° : § 54.3.46A2 vi-hanya- “umkommen” § 14.3.13A3. teṣāṃ āhāreṇa upastambhaṃ karttavyaṃ, yathā na vihanyeṃsu vi-hara- § 1.1.1B1. bhagavān Śrāvastyām viharati (= § 3.1.3A6, § 20.1.19A4, § 20.4.19A7, § 20.6.19B2, § 20.9.19B5, § 21.1.20A6, § 40.1.32B2 usw.) § 62.1.49B1. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisambhāvayitvā Śrāvastyāṃ viharati śāstā devānāñ ca manuṣyāṇāñ ca § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ na karmmārāmā na karmmaratāḥ na karmmārāmatānu- yogam anuyuktā viharanti (≒ § 12.1.11A5, § 21.1.20A7) § 11.1.10B2. kacci me śrāvakāḥ ... na bhāṣyārāmāḥ na bhāṣyaratāḥ, na bhāṣyārāmatānuyogam anuyuktā viharanti, na nidrārāmāḥ na nidrāratāḥ, na nidrārāmatānuyogam anuyuktā viharanti (= § 12.1.11A5) § 34.6.28B6. tavâhaṃ hitopasaṃhāreṇa rakṣāvaraṇaguptiye sukhaṃ ca phāsukañ ca viharāmi § 38.6.30B2. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ ... śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ dīpayamānānāṃ sukhañ ca phāsuñ ca viharantānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? § 38.6.30B2. kasya tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto (Nom. sg. masc.; BHSG § 18.6) saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? § 49.1.42A2. ye dāni bhikṣū ... sthānacaṃkrama{sthāna}niṣadyāyogam anuyuktā viharanti § 39.9.31A6. mā piṇḍakena vihariṣyatha § 39.16.31B4. tatraỿva sthānacaṃkramaniṣadyāyogam anuyuktehi (Hs. °yuktena) viharitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā § 41.4.33B7. Śāriputro sthaviro Vaiśālyām viharati Mahāvane Kūṭāgāraśālāyāṃ § 42.1.36A1. bhagavān Rājagṛhe viharati § 62.1.49B4. cetovaśiparamapāramiprāptā punar bbuddhā bhagavanto yehi yehi vihārehi ākāṃkṣanti, tehi tehi vihārehi viharanti viharakā für vihārakā : § 17.9.15A3 viharaṇaka~ Wahrscheinlich eine Art Messer oder Axt ☞ § 43.16, Anm. 7 § 43.16.38B4. takṣāṇaṃ bhāṇḍaṃ bhavati kuṭhāro vā vāsīyo vā viharaṇako vā nikhādanako vā aṭṭilā vā vihāra~ (1) “Kloster” (BHS, SWTF, Pā) § 4.5.4B2. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ... bhaktaṃ grāme vihāre § 4.11.5A3. kim vā ambhehi vihāra śūnyaṃ śakyaṃ karttuṃ § 12.10.11B5. vihārā pariveṇā agniśālā bhaktaśālā upasthānaśālā ... grāhayitavyā § 14.8.13A7. yadi tāva vihāro uppīḍanako bhavati, na kṣamati lenāni bandhituṃ § 14.10. ye tatra bhavanti gopālakā vā paśupālakā vā teṣāṃ so vihāro anuparinditavyo § 18.3.15B2. varccakuṭīṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena nâpi kṣamati vihārasya purastimena vā uttareṇa vā kārāpayituṃ § 19.3.17B5. praśvāsakuṭī pi dāni bhikṣuṇā kārayantena na kṣamati vihārasya (Hs. vī°) uttareṇa pūrvveṇa kārāpayituṃ § 31.1.25A7. te ... dvāraṃ bandhiyāṇaṃ vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhaṃ bhaṃjantā āsanti (≒ § 31.1.25B1) § 31.20.26A3. atha dāni apadurako vihāro bhavati, praviśitavyaṃ § 31.28.26B2. atha dāni āgantukā bhikṣū vihāra āgatā bhavanti, ... § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, na kṣamati tehi nivāsikehi dvāraṃ ca bandhiya vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhāṃ bhañjantehi āsituṃ § 39.4.31A2. tena hi evaṃ āraṇyake vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 39.4.31A2. evaṃ grāmāntike vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ § 39.28.32A6. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, vihāraṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ āraṇyakāṃ bhikṣūṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 41.6.34A2. sthaviro ... vihāraṃ āgato § 49.7.42B4. tenâpi dāni piṇḍacārikaṃ vā aṇṭhiyāṇa vihāraṃ vâgacchiya ... 486  § 50.8.43B4. vihārasya prahāṇake dve āsanāni prajñapiya adhiṣṭhānāṃ pratigrāhāpiya āsitavyaṃ usw. (2) “Zelle, (wo einige Mönche wohnen); Wohngebäude”# ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 1 ⇒ vihāraka~ (2) § 8.4.8B7. sārdhevihāriṇā tāva kalyata eva utthaṃtena upādhyāyasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ § 8.13.9B2. yadi vihāro prāpuṇati, āpṛcchitavyaṃ, “amukaṃ vihāraṃ gṛhṇāmi.” § 10.4.10A4. antevāsinā tāva kalyato yeva ... ācāryasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ § 11.6.10B6. na dāni vihāro adhyupekṣitavyo, oddirṇṇako praluggako acaukṣo vā ... § 12.1.11A4. te dāni bhikṣū upagacchanikākāle vihārān na pratisaṃskarenti § 12.12.11B7. atha dāni saṃghasthaviro jalpati “vihāraṃ (pl. ?) yūyaṃ uddiśatha! ...” ... tato vihārakā uddiśitavyāḥ § 12.13.12A1. na kṣamati śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ vihāra (pl. ?) uddiśituṃ. atha dāni teṣāṃ upādhy- āyācāryā jalpanti “uddiśatha ...” tato śrāmaṇerakāṇāṃ pi vihārakā uddiśitavyā § 13.15.12B6. vihāro opasvediko bhavati, mañcā bhitti<yo> mocetvā ... § 13.17.12B7. vihāro usvedako bhavati, na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati hastaśaucaṃ vā karttuṃ ... § 14.1.13A1. te dāni āraṇyakā vihāraṃ bāhira{ṃ}ghaṭṭimaṃ kariyāṇa ... § 14.5.13A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati so vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ ondriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ... § 22.2.20B7. vihārasya dvārasmiṃ upari trayo kīlakāni ā<ko>ṭayitavyā § 22.4.21A1. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ cakkalī utkṣipitavyā § 22.6.21A2. prahāṇato yaṃ kālaṃ utthito bhavati, vihāraṃ gacchiyāṇaṃ, ... § 23.1.21A4. adrākṣīd bhagavān ... vihārāṃ oddriṇṇakāṃ paluggakāṃ ullāye gṛhītakāṃ ... § 23.3.21A5. tena hi evaṃ vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ. vihārā nāma trīṇi. jyeṣṭhako madhyamako kanīyasako ... § 23.4.1.21A6. yo dāni jyeṣṭhako bhavati vihāro, ... § 23.10.21B7. evaṃ vihāre pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [III].25A6) § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ekānte bhavati ucchedake vā vṛkṣamūlake vā vihāre vā prati- saṃlīnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ § 43.16.38B5. bhaṇḍakaṃ ... na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ § 44.9.39A7. na dāni kṣamati vihāro adhyupekṣituṃ uppaṃsulo vā acaukṣo vā § 50.1.43A3. so dāni bhikṣuḥ vihāram āgatvā āgameti § 50.2.43A4. āyuṣman, yadā (lies: tadā?) so mayā piṇḍapātako vihārasya purato nikṣipto (3) “das Verweilen” ⇒ divā-vihāra~ (4) “Verweilungszustand” (BHS, SWTF, Pā) § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... svayaṃbhū divyehi vihārehi <viharanto> brāhmehi vihārehi āryehi vihārehi āniṃjyehi vihārehi sātatyehi vihārehi buddho buddhavihārehi jino jinavihārehi jānako jānakavihārehi sarvvajño sarvvajñavihārehi. cetovaśiparamapārami- prāptā punar bbuddhā bhagavanto yehi yehi vihārehi ākāṃkṣanti, tehi tehi vihārehi viharanti vihāraka~ (Pā) (1) “Kloster”# ⇒ vihāra~ (1) § 5.10.7A1. kim asmābhiḥ vihārako śūnyako karttavyo? § 6.10.8A1. “ ... kiṃ ambhehi śakyam vihārako śūnyako kartun” ti § 12.12.11B7. amuke vihārake ettakā mañcā ettakā pīṭhāḥ ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ... Vgl. § 12.10.11B5. asuke vihāre ettakā mañcakā pīṭhakā vā ettakaṃ āstaraṇaṃ ... § 14.10.13B1. vihāro anuparinditavyo ... “eṣo tumhākaṃ vihārako anuparindito bhavatu.” (≒ § 14.18.13B6) § 14.18.13B5. sarvvehi bhikṣūhi nidhāvantehi ekena vihārako abhyantaghaṭṭimo karttavyo § 31.27.26B1. atha dāni tahiṃ vihārake anugraho bhavati, ... § 49.6.42B3. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā pratibalo bhavati piṇḍapātam vā aṇṭhituṃ vihārakaṃ vâgantuṃ § 50.5.43B1. yadi tāva denti, dve piṇḍapātakā gṛhṇitavyā ... vihārakaṃ āgantavyaṃ (2) “Zelle, (wo einige Mönche wohnen), (Mönchs-)Wohnstätte” (= Pā) ⇒ vihāra~ (2) 487  § 1.12.2A4. yadi tāva nâtyā<ti>śītam bhavati nâtyātiuṣṇaṃ, na dūradūre vihārakā bhavanti, ... § 8.9.9A6. vihārako siñcitavyo sammārjitavyo. kālena kālaṃ gomayakārṣī dātavyā (≒ § 13.14.12B6, § 14.7.13A5) § 12.2.11A7. adrākṣīd ... vihārakān ondriṇṇakāṃ praluggakāṃ acokṣāṃ apratisaṃskṛtāṃ § 12.3.11A7. kasyême bhikṣavo vihārakā odriṇṇakā paluggakā acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā § 12.10.11B5. vihārā pariveṇā agniśālā ... caṃkramā vṛkṣamūlā vihārakā grāhayitavyā § 12.12.11B7. “āyuṣman amuke vihārake (“im Kloster”) ettakā mañcā ... katamo tava vihārako rucyati?” yo saṃghasthavirasya vihārako rucyati, so dātavyo § 12.15.12A2. atha dāni stokā vihārakā bhavanti, dviṇṇāṃ trayāṇāṃ janānāṃ eko vihārako uddiśitavyo ... eko vihārako uddiśitavyo § 13.5.12B1. ete dāni bhikṣavo varṣopagatā bhavanti, te{na}hi vihārakā pratyavekṣitavyā § 13.6.12B2. yadi tāva vihārako sudhācchadano ... iṣṭakācchadano ... apakvacchadano ... kabhallacchadano ... tṛṇacchadano bhavati ... § 13.8.12B2. yadi tāva uppeḍanako vihārako bhavati, ... § 16.8.14B2. vihārakāṇāṃ kālena kālaṃ khaṇḍaphuṭṭaṃ pratisaṃskarttavyaṃ § 22.1.20B6. so dāni yathāsukhe kṛte vihārakaṃ apaduriya praviśati § 23.2.21A5. kiṃ ime bhikṣu vihārakā oddriṇṇakā paluggakā ... acaukṣā apratisaṃskṛtā? § 23.3.21A5~6. vihārā nāma trīṇi. jyeṣṭhako madhyamako kanīyasako. jyeṣṭhako nāma vihārako ... madhyamako nāma vihārako ... § 23.7.21B4. nâpi kṣamati vihārako adhyupekṣituṃ oddriṇṇako vā paluggako vā ... § 23.9.21B7. upāṃsulako vihārako bhavati, kālena kālaṃ siñcitavyo saṃmārjitavyo § 24.1.22A1. adrākṣīd ... vihārakā<nā>ṃ pakkakheṭena vā pakkasiṃghāṇakena bhittīyo vināśitāyo siṃghāṇakavarttīhi lambantīhi § 24.2.22A1. kiṃ imāyo bhikṣave vihārakānāṃ bhittiyo ...? § 25.12.22B7. atha dāni pratyandhakārako vihārako bhavati, na kṣamati pātreṇa pātraṃ mārggituṃ. atha khalu hastena mārggitavyaṃ § 31.23.26A6. pṛcchitavyaṃ “āyuṣman, asti etāvativarṣasya vihārako prāpuṇati?” § 31.23.26A6. yadi tāva jalpati “prāpuṇati” tti, vihārako gṛhṇitavyo § 31.29.26B4. vihārako (Hs. vikā°) uddiśitavyo § 32.12.27B5. yadi tāvad vastukāmo bhavati, ... vihārako uddiśitavyo § 39.7.31A4. ekena bhikṣuṇā vihārakaṃ ukkasiya nidhyāyitavyaṃ § 41.6.34A3. sthaviro dāni vihārakesmin pātraṃ nikṣipiya § 43.1.38A1. vihārakehi (Loc. pl.) bhaṇḍaṃ ujjhitāvakīrṇṇe tiṣṭhati § 44.1.38B6. aparehiṃ vihārake saṃbahulā bhikṣū pratisaṃkrama<ṃ>ti § 44.1.38B6. so dāni vihārako uppeḍanako § 44.4.39A1. bhikṣūḥ ekahi vihārake prati<saṃ>kramanti § 44.4.39A2. so uppeḍanako vihārako bhavati § 44.7.39A6. so uppaṃsulako vihārako bhavati § 49.6.42B3. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā pratibalo bhavati piṇḍapātam vā aṇṭhituṃ vihārakaṃ vâgantuṃ § 50.1.43A2. yāva paśyati so vihārakaṃ ghaṭṭitakaṃ, ... § 50.2.43A4. āyuṣman, evaṃ ca tvaṃ śūnyake vihārake pātraṃ nikṣipiya gacchasi § 50.3.43A5. nâpi kṣamati piṇḍapātanīhārakena piṇḍapātam ānayitvā śūnyake vihārake osariya gantuṃ § 56.3.47A4. vihārake vā bāhyato vā niṣīdana prasphoṭiyāṇaṃ dviguṇaṃ kṛtvā prahāṇaṃ okasitavyaṃ usw. vihārakaṃ für bāhirakaṃ (Metathese der Vokale) : § 31.27.26B1 vihāra-koṇaka~# “Ecke der Wohnstätte” ⇒ koṇaka~ § 44.6.39A5. cīvarakaṃ dhoviya vihārakoṇake (Hs. °ṇako) <tha>payitavyo vihāracarakāni für vihāracaraṇakāni : § 45.2.39B5 vihāracaraṇaṃ für vihāracaraṇakaṃ : § 45.5.39B6 vihāra-caraṇaka~# “(ein) im Kloster zu tragendes (Gewand)” ⇒ ārāma-caraṇaka~, grāma- 488  praveśika~, vihāra-cīvaraka~ § 8.6.9A2. gocaraṃ praviśantasya grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni, vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi pratiśāmayitavyāni § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi upanāmayitavyāni § 45.1.39B3. te ... kalyata eva vihāracaraṇakāni nivāsanāni nikṣipiyāṇaṃ § 45.1.39B3. nagnaprāvṛtā vihāracaraṇakāni nivāsanāni mārgganti § 45.2.39B4. vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarakāni nikṣipitvā § 45.2.39B5. nagnaprāvṛtāḥ vihāracara<ṇa>kāni ni{r}vāsanāni mārggatha § 45.4.39B6. na kṣamati ... vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivasanaṃ nikṣipituṃ § 45.4.39B6. vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ uvvelayitavyaṃ § 45.5.39B6. vihāracaraṇa<ka>ṃ nivāsanaṃ anupahastaṃ kariyāṇaṃ § 45.5.39B7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivasanaṃ upahastaṃ karttavyaṃ § 45.5.39B7. tato vihāracaraṇakaṃ nivāsanaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 46.1.40A3. vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarakāni nikṣipiya (= § 46.4.40A6) § 46.1.40A4. ekanivāsanakā vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarakāni mārgganti § 46.2.40A5. vihāracaraṇakāni cīvarāṇi nikṣipiya § 46.4.40A7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ uvvellayitavyaṃ § 46.5.40A7. nâpi kṣamati ... ekanivasanakena vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ mārggituṃ § 46.5.40A7. vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvaraṃ upahastīkarttavyaṃ § 46.5.40A7. prāvaramāṇena vihāracaraṇakaṃ cīvarakaṃ āvellayitavyaṃ § 46.5.40B1. evaṃ ārāmacaraṇakaṃ vā āvellayitavyaṃ vihāracaraṇakaṃ vā uvvellayi- tavyaṃ vihāra-cārikā~ (Pā) “Rundgang durchs Kloster”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. cārikā; Poṣ(Hu) 357, Anm. 5 ⇒ ārāma-cārikā~ § 11.1.10B1. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānās tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanti anuvicaranti (= § 12.1.11A5, § 21.1.20A7; ≒ § 11.1. 10B3, § 12.1.11A6) § 11.2.10B3. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanto anuvicaranto ... (= § 12.2.11A6, § 13.2.12A6, § 15.2.13B7, § 16.2.14A5, § 17.2.14B5, § 21.2.20A7, § 24.1.21B7; ≒ § 23.1.21A4, § 43.1.38A1) vihāra-cīvaraka~# “ein im Kloster zu tragendes Gewand”; vgl. Vin III 212.20, 23. vihāra-cīvara, BD II 46, Anm. 2 ⇒ vihāra-caraṇaka~ § 46.2.40A5. ekanivasanakā vihāracīvarakāni mārggatha vihāra-svāminī~ “Kloster-Stifterin”, “Frau eines Kloster-Stifters” (vgl. Sircar 1966: 371, s.v. vihārasvāminī; IBInsc I 1001) “Klosterherrin” oder “Inhaberin des Klosters” (vgl. Schopen 1996) § 33.11.28A4~5. eṣo bhikṣuḥ upāsakāṃ vā dānapatānīṃ vā vihārasvāminīṃ vā śabdāpitu- kāmo bhavati, ... “upāsake” tti vā “dānapatti” ti vā “vihārasvāmini” ti vā śabdāpayi- tavyaṃ -vihārika~ ⇒ sārddhe-vihārika~ -vihārin~ ⇒ śraddhe-vihārin~, śrāddha-v°, śrāddhe-v°, sārddha-v°, sārddhe-v° viheṭhanābhiprāya~ (°an-abhi°) (BHS) “die Absicht, zu schaden (peinigen), habend” ⇒ upārambhaṇābhiprāya~, auddhatyābhiprāya~ § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi ... ḍhossā vā viṭā vā vātaputro vā viheṭhanābhiprāyā nimantrayeṃsu § 6.6.7B3. anekāye tahiṃ ... viheṭhanābhiprāyā nimantrayeṃsu § 54.7.46A4. nâpi kṣamati viheṭhanābhiprāyeṇa yaṣṭī vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°) vi-heṭhaya- (BHS, SWTF) “peinigen, schaden”; vgl. Pā. viheṭheti § 54.3.46A2. te dāni bhikṣu viheṭhiyantā (Hs. vihaṭh°) ārāvaṃ muñca<ṃ>ti “āyuṣmaṃ, hato ’smi. hato ’smî”ti § 55.3.46B5. te dāni bhikṣū viheṭhayamānā (“gepeinigt werdend”; vgl. BHSG § 37.18) ārāvaṃ muñcanti “āyuṣman, hato ’smi. hato ’smi.” vījana-vāta~# “Luft mittels Fächer” § 8.8.9A5. vījanavāto dātavyo, bhaktavisarggo karttavyo 489 vītaka~ ⇒ a-vītaka~ vīti-nāmaya- (BHS) “verbringen”; vgl. BHSD, s.vv. vyatināmayati, vītināmeti (= Pā) § 1.13.2A6. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇaṃ sarvvarātriṃ dharmmavṛṣṭiye vītināmiyānaṃ ... § 2.11.3A5. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇa sarvvarātriṃ dharmmavṛṣṭiye vītināmiyāna (Hs. vītināmiya | na) ... § 3.12.4A4. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇaṃ sarvvarātri dharmmavṛṣṭiyer vvītināmiyāna ... § 12.16.12A4. navakehi parya<ṃke>na vītināmayitavyaṃ § 12.16.12A4. navakehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi abhyavakāśe vītināmayi- tavyaṃ § 30.6.25A3. rātrīye purimaṃ yāmaṃ uddeśaprayuktena svādhyāyaprayuktena sthānena caṃkrameṇa vītināmayitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyā) § 30.8.25A4. rātrīye paścime yāme paryaṅkena vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktena sthānacaṃkramānuyuktena vā § 39.28.32A6. ārāmehi vṛkṣamūlehi ... sthānacaṃkramaniṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyā) uddeśaprayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā vīthī~ “Weg”; wahrscheinlich bezeichnet vātapānīyā vīthī eine Fensteröffnung ☞ § 42.7, Anm. 4 ⇒ udviddha-vīthī~, nāgadantaka-vīthī~ § 42.7.36B2. vātapānīyā (Hs. °nīyaṃ) vīthī karttavyā abhyantare viśālā bāhirato saṃkṣiptā § 42.7.36B2. ekāye vātapānīye vīthīye dvauvikā(?) bhavati dvitīyā karttavyā vīya- “bekommen”; Passiv von √vī (veti “to go, approach” [MW]); Verschreibung? ☞ § 58.5, Anm. 3 § 58.5.48A5. atha dāni puno puno kāsā vīyati (oder kās’ āvīyati?), dharmmaśravaṇasya āmantriya gantavyaṃ vīrya~ ⇒ hīna-vīrya~ vīhārasya für vihārasya : § 19.3.17B5 vuktanti# Bedeutung ist unklar; wohl eine Verschreibung § 60.7.49A1. nâpi kṣamati osariya indriyāṇi vuktanti kaṇḍūyituṃ vuṇ-# “flechten”; vgl. CDIAL 11773 (2). *vunāti (< Skt. √vā, √ve, vayati “webt, flicht”) ☞ § 3.5, Anm. 2, § 12.6, Anm. 1 ⇒ ā-vuṇ-, uv-vin-, 2√vā § 12.6.11B3. muṃjā karttitavyā, balbajā karttitavyā mañcā vuṇitavyā (Hs. dhuṇi°) § 12.18.12A5. muñjā karttitavyā, balbajā karttitavyā, tato mañcā ca pīṭhā ca vuṇitavyā (≒ § 13.13.12B5, § 16.9.14B3) § 13.11.12B4. muñjā karttitavyā, mañcā vuṇitavyā (Hs. vraṇi°) pīṭhikā vuṇitavyā (Hs. vraṇi°) (≒ § 15.8.14A4) § 16.7.14B2. yadi āgantukānāṃ mātu atyāyikaṃ bhaviṣyati, tato vuṇiṣyanti § 21.3.20B2. kaṭhinaṃ ... vaṃśānāṃ vā nalānām vā na<ṃ>galānāṃ vā kāṇḍānām vā carukānām vā rohiṣāṇāṃ vā sūtrikāya vā rejjukāya vā ghaṇa<ṃ> vuṇitavyaṃ § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī ... kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā naḍānām vā naṅgalānām vā kaṇḍānām vā rejjukāye vā sūtrakāye (für sūtrikāye?) vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā vuntikā~ ⇒ nicuḍa-vuntikā~ vusta~ ⇒ varṣa-vusta~ 1 √vṛ ⇒ anu-pari-vāraya-, apā-vura-, o-vāraya, prā-vara-, prā-vṛta~, vāraya- (1), vi-vara- 2 √vṛ ⇒ vara-, vāraya- (2), vāre- vṛkṣa~ § 18.45.17A6. ekatamaṃ jjhāṭam vā vṛkṣaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kariyāṇa upaviśitavyaṃ § 20.3.19A7. evaṃ nāma tvaṃ puṣpopagataṃ vṛkṣaṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi vṛkṣa-mūla~ (Skt) “Fuß eines Baumes” ☞ § 12.10, Anm. 8 § 12.10.11B5. varccakuṭī udupāno jantāko caṃkramā vṛkṣamūlā vihārakā grāhayitavyā § 12.16.12A4. navakehi vṛkṣamūlehi (Loc.) caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi abhyavakāśe vītinām- ayitavyaṃ § 39.28.32A5. ārāmehi vṛkṣamūlehi (Loc.) caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi sthānacaṃkrama- niṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ ... § 29.5.24B3. atha dāni ekānte bhavati ucchedake vā vṛkṣamūlake vā vihāre vā pratisaṃlīnako, kiñ câpi oguṇṭhitaśīrṣo niṣīdati, anāpattiḥ 490 vṛkṣa-śākhā~# “Zweig eines Baumes” § 47.1.40B2. jhāḍe vā vṛkṣaśākhāyām vā lagnaṃ “ḍu” tti ka<ḍ>ḍhanti √vṛj ⇒ varja-, varjaya-, ā-varjaya-, ā-varje-, pari-varja-, pari-varjaya-, a-vivarjita~ √vṛt ⇒ anu-pari-vartta-, ud-varttaya-, uv-vaṭṭaya-, *uv-vatta-, *uv-vattaya-, ni-vartta-, ni-varttaya-, pari-vartta-, pra-vartta-, pra-vṛtta~, vaṭṭa-, vartta-, saṃ-vaṭṭaya- vṛtti~ § 4.7.4B6. svakasvakāṃ vṛttiṃ paryeṣatha (= § 5.7.6B5) § 49.4.42A6~7. yo na pratibalo tasya ca ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajituṃ ... yo pratibalo tasya ca ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajituṃ § 49.6.42B2. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati tasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajayituṃ, praveśayitavyo § 49.7.42B4. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati paścācchramaṇasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ (Hs. c<a v>ittaṃ) saṃvibhajitu<ṃ> vṛddha~ § 12.16.12A3. vṛddhānāñ ca mañcā prajñāpayitavyāḥ navakānāṃ pīṭhāḥ prajñāpayitavyāḥ § 12.16.12A3. vṛddhānāṃ pīṭhāḥ prajñāpayitavyāḥ § 12.16.12A3. vṛddhehi saṃstaraṇe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 12.16.12A4. vṛddhehi (Hs. vṛddhihi) cchanne praviśitavyaṃ § 18.40.17A3. atha khalu vṛddhā pṛcchitavyā § 20.19.20A5. atha dāni navako śaithiliko bāhuliko bhavati, vṛddhatareṇa uddhṛtavyo § 31.5.25B4. atha dāni vyāḍabhayaṃ vā corabhayaṃ vā bhavati, vṛddhaṃ bālaṃ madhye kṛtvā gantavyaṃ § 42.17.37A2. atha dāni agnir mmando bhavati, vṛddhehi agrato sthātavyaṃ vṛddha-tara~ (SWTF) “(an Ordinationsalter) älter” ⇒ vṛddha-taraka~, nava-taraka~, navaka- tara~, navaka-taraka~ § 18.37.17A2. navatarako śaithiliko bāhuliko bhavati, vṛddhatareṇa cchoritavyaṃ § 37.3.30A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā gatāgatasya tīrthikaparṣā upasaṃkramituṃ. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva tāva vṛddhatarakā pratisaritavyā vṛddha-taraka~ (BHS, SWTF) “(an Ordinationsalter) älter” ⇒ vṛddha-tara~, navaka-tara~, navaka-taraka~, nava-taraka~ § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: ... kathaṃ vṛddhatarake pratipadyitavyaṃ § 9.1.9B5. na jānanti: ... kathaṃ vṛddhatarakeṣu pratipadyitavyaṃ § 18.52.17B2. dve caṃkramante, vṛddhatarako navatarako ca, navakena ujjhitavyaṃ § 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati ... upādhyāyācāryāṇām vā agrato vṛddhatarakānām vā bhikṣūṇāṃ agrato dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 24.12.22A7. atha dāni navakataro śaithiliko bāhuliko vā bhavati, vṛddhatarakena marditavyaṃ § 27.6.23B6. na kṣamati ... saṃghaṃ vā upādhyāyācāryam vā vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ § 29.7.24B4. na kṣamati ... vṛddha<ta>rakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ § 30.11.25A6. na kṣamati ... vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā ... śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ § 31.22.26A5. yadi tāva āgantuko vṛddhatarako bhavati, nevāsikena utthiya pādā vandi- tavyā, āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 31.22.26A6. atha dāni nevāsiko vṛddhatarako bhavati, ārogyāpiya evaṃ kariyāṇaṃ āsanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 32.1.27A4. tasya dāni aparo bhikṣuḥ vṛddhatarako parijñātako bhavati § 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā <kiṃ bhaṇasi>” tti pravyā- harituṃ § 34.3.28B3. atha khalu ye tahiṃ vṛddhatarakā kṣatriyā bhavanti, te tāva alliyitavyā § 38.5.30A7. ye (?; Hs. yā) vṛddhatarakā yāvad vṛddhāntaṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ ... § 41.26.35B3. trīṇi vācāyo jalpayitavyāyo “ko vṛddhatarako vṛddho?” tti § 41.26.35B3. yadi tāva koci vṛddhatarako bhavati, ... § 41.26.35B3. atha dāni koci vṛddhatarako na bhavati, ... § 42.15.37A1. na ... vṛddhatarakaṃ vā bhikṣuṃ laṃghayantena gantavyaṃ 491  § 43.14.38B2. tena vṛddhatarakasya jñātavyaṃ § 43.14.38B2. vṛddhatarakasya cirakālo bhavati, ... § 43.14.38B2. vṛddhatarakasya dātavyaṃ (= § 43.14.38B3) § 57.8.47B6. bhikṣuṇā yāva vṛddhatarakā nirddhāvitā paścād utthapitvā upānahāyo ābandhiya gantavyaṃ § 57.8.47B6. atha dāni vṛddhatarakā āsanti, bhikṣū ca {ā}gantukāmo bhavati, ... § 57.11.48A1. ta<ṃ> pi dāni na kṣamati vṛddhatarakasya vā anuvātaṃ prasphoṭayituṃ § 58.6.48A5. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ § 59.7.48B3. nâpi kṣamati sāmāyikāyām vā upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena kṣīvituṃ § 59.8.48B4. yadi tāva koci kṣīvati, ... yadi vṛddhatarako bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “vandāmi” tti § 60.6.49A1. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakāṇāṃ vā agrato auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 61.8.49A7. na kṣamati upādhyāyācāryāṇām vṛddhatarakānāṃ vā agrato maṭamaṭāye aṃgāni bhaṃjantena vijṛmbhituṃ § 62.6.50A2. taṃ pi dāni na kṣamati yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakam utkṣipituṃ § 62.6.50A3. atha dāni vṛddhatarako ca navakatarako ca ekasthāne ḍhukkakaṃ bhavati, ... kiñ câpi yena vṛddhatarako tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipati, anāpattiḥ § 62.11.50A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā vṛddhatarakasya vā agrato auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa pharapharāya vātakarmma karttuṃ vṛddhānta~ (°ddha-anta) (BHS, SWTF) “der (nach dem Ordinationsalter) älteste Mönch” ⇒ navakānta~ § 12.12.12A1. tato vihārakā uddiśitavyāḥ, vṛddhāntato prabhṛti yāva avarṣakaparyantaṃ § 38.2.30A5. nâyaṃ kṣamati gatāgatasya vṛddhāntam ukkasituṃ § 38.5.30A7. allīya vṛddhāntāto prabhṛti sarvveṣāṃ praṇāmo karttavyo § 38.5.30A7. ye (?; Hs. yā) vṛddhatarakā yāvad vṛddhāntaṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti § 54.7.46A4. atha khalu maitracittena yaṣṭī vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°) vṛddhāntāto navakāntaṃ § 57.4.47B3. atha khalu upānahikāyo dvāramūle nikkhāsiya praviśitvā vṛddhānte añjaliṃ kṛtvā yathāvṛddhikāye upaviśitavyaṃ § 57.7.47B5. prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśitavyaṃ. vṛddhānte upānahāyo pārṣṇivaddhake osāriya praṇāmaṃ karttavyaṃ vṛddhi~ ⇒ yathā-vṛddhikāye (1) “Wachstum, Zunahme” § 4.18.5B7. praviśya vṛddhiye varāye bhūrīye (vs) § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī (Nom. sg.; vgl. BHSG § 10.28) yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā ...” (2) “(Ordinations)Alter”# ☞ § 41.26, Anm. 2 § 41.26.35B3. trīṇi vācāyo jalpayitavyāyo “ko vṛddhatarako vṛddho (< Loc. sg. fem. vṛddhau)?” tti √vṛdh ⇒ varddha-, varddhaya-, saṃ-varddhaya- √vṛṣ ⇒ varṣa-, o-varṣaya-, o-varṣya-, o-vṛṣṭa~ vṛṣṭi~ ⇒ dharmma-vṛṣṭi~ √ve ⇒ 2√vā vekālika~# “leichte Speise zur Unzeit”; vgl. Skt. vaikālika (“Abendessen”) ☞ § 31.8, Anm. 1 ⇒ vi- kāla~ § 31.8.25B6. praviśiya yācitvā saṃghasya yathāsukhaparibhogaṃ, niḥsārayitavyaṃ pāda- tailaṃ, vekālikaṃ purebhaktikaṃ bhikṣitavyaṃ § 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.29.26B4. vikāle āgatā bhavanti, vekālikena (Hs. vikā°) cchandayitavyāḥ § 32.12.27B5. vikāle āgato bhavati, vekālikena cchandayitavyo 492 veḍḍa~# “beschämt, verlegen”; < Skt. √vrīḍ; vgl. AMg. veḍa, viḍḍa ☞ § 18.30, Anm. 1; § 26.1, Anm. 4 § 18.30.16B5. nâpi kṣamati vaktuṃ “ko vā eṣo? kathaṃ vā eṣo?”, mā veḍḍo bhaveya tti (≒ § 18.34.16B7, § 19.14.18A4, § 19.32.18B6) § 18.40.17A3. nâpi kṣamati taruṇikā pṛcchituṃ, mā veḍḍā (Hs. veṇṇā) bhaveya tti § 26.1.23A5. te dāni bhikṣū utkṣiptā bhavanti jihmā veḍḍā (Hs. veḍḍhā) niṣpratibhānāḥ veḍḍhā für veḍḍā : § 26.1.23A5 veḍhaya-# “umhüllen, einwickeln”; < *veṭhayati < *veṭṭhayati~ < Skt. veṣṭayati; vgl. CDIAL 12132. veṣṭayati; Pā. veṭheti, Pkt. veḍheï ☞ § 44.5, Anm. 2 ⇒ ā-veḍhaya-, āveḍhaka~, ā-vellaya-, uv-vel(l)aya-, veṣṭaya- § 44.5.39A3. na dāni ... cīvarehi ātmano cīvaraṃ veḍhayitavyaṃ § 44.5.39A3. ātmano cīvarehi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarā veḍhayitavyāḥ § 44.8.39A7. nêdāni upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarakehi ātmano cīvarā veḍhayitavyā § 44.8.39A7. ātmano cīvarehi upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ cīvarā veḍhitavyā § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā ... ubhayato agre pottakhaṇḍehi veḍhayitavyā veṇṇā für veḍḍā : § 18.40.17A3 vetiya~ für cetiya~ : § 18.37.17A1, § 20.19.20A4, § 31.6.25B5, § 39.9.31A6, § 39.13.31B1, § 39.25. 32A3 vedaya- “empfinden” § 53.10.45B1. tehi dīpavārikehi na kṣamati āghāto vā pra<dveṣo> vedayituṃ vedāhikaṃ für vevā° : § 4.17.5B3 velaṃ ⇒ taṃ velaṃ vela-jña~ (BHS) “die Gelegenheiten kennend”; < Skt. velā + jña; vgl. BHSG § 9.6 ☞ § 33.4 (Text), Anm. 2 § 33.4.28A1. āyuṣmān dāni Upālī kālajño velajño samayajño bhagavantam upasaṃkram- iya pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, ...?” vevāhika~ (Pā) “Hochzeit”#; < Skt. vaivāhika § 4.14.5A7. jānitavyaṃ kimālambanaṃ <etaṃ> bhaktaṃ jātakaṃ mṛtakam vā vevāhikam vā gṛhapraveśakam vā ... (≒ § 5.12.7A3, § 6.12.8A3) § 4.17.5B3. atha dāni vevāhikaṃ (Hs. vedāh°) bhavati, ... Veśālī~# Vgl. Pā. Vesāli ⇒ Vaiśālī~ § 41.4.34A1. smṛto saṃprajāno nāgo viya kāritakāraṇo Veśālīṃ nagarīṃ piṇḍāya carati veśikakulāto für veśikāk° : § 8.7.9A4 veśikā~# “Hetäre”; ∈ *veśiyā (vgl. Pā, Pkt. vesiyā) < Skt. veśyā ☞ § 27.4, Anm. 1 § 27.4.23B6. nâpi kṣamati veśikā-sāmantakena vā tiṣṭhituṃ, vadhabandhanāgāraśālā- sāmantena vā tiṣṭhituṃ § 28.9.24A5. nâpi kṣamati veśikā-sāmantakena (Hs. vesikā-s°) caṃkramituṃ § 29.9.24B5. nâpi kṣamati veśikā-sāmantena (Hs. vesikā-s°) dyutikaraśālāsāmantakena niṣīdituṃ veśikā-kula~# “Haus von Hetären” § 8.7.9A4. asukāto veśikākulāto (Hs. veśikak°) caṃḍavidhavāye sthūlakumārīye paṇḍakasya asukāye bhikṣuṇīye.” √veṣṭ ⇒ veṣṭaya-, veḍhaya-, ā-veḍhaya-, āveḍhaka~, ā-vellaya-, uv-vel(l)aya-, ov-vellaya- veṣṭaya- “umhüllen, einwickeln” ⇒ veḍhaya-, ā-veḍhaya-, ā-vellaya- § 55.2.46B3. (geṇḍuka~ ...) bāhyena paṭṭena nattakena veṣṭayitvā sūtrakena veṣṭayitavyo § 55.3.46B4. te ... geṇḍukaṃ vārayaṃtā iṣṭakhaṇḍaṃ leṅkaṭakakhaṇḍena veṣṭayitvā vārenti vesikāsāmantakena für veśikā° : § 28.9.24A5 vesikāsāmantena für veśikā° : § 29.9.24B5 vaikalpa~# “das Geben, Versorgen, Ausrüsten mit” ☞ § 31.37, Anm. 2 § 31.37.27A3. teṣāṃ gacchamānānāṃ pathyadanena vaikalpaṃ karttavyaṃ Vaidehaka~ (BHS, SWTF) Name eines Berges § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo ... (= § 28.1.24A1; ≒ § 27.2.23B5, § 28.2.24A2) 493 vaidya~ “Arzt” § 18.53.17B2. vaidyo jalpati “bhante, mahāvikaṭāṃ pāyetha” tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? § 19.42.19A3. vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā pūtimūtraṃ pibanāya dethê”tti, kiṃ karttavyaṃ? § 40.9.33A2. vaidyo āha “bhante, gotrasthena pānīyena akṣiṇī dhovāhi” tti vaipulya~ (BHS, SWTF) “Vaipulya” § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ ... vaipulyâdbhutadharmmā (Hs. °âdbhutādh°) Vaiśālī~ ⇒ Veśālī~ § 41.4.33B7. ekam idaṃ bhikṣavo samayaṃ Śāriputro sthaviro Vaiśālyām viharati Mahāvane Kūṭāgāraśālāyāṃ § 41.6.34A2. sthaviro dāni grāmāraṇyasamena īryāpathena samanvāgato Vaiśālīṃ piṇḍāya caritvā nirddhāvito vihāraṃ āgato vo ⇒ tvaṃ § 30.2.24B7. duṣkṛtaṃ vo (= § 41.2.33B6, § 42.4.36A7) § 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “ ... na ca vo Māraḥ pāpīyāṃ avatāram adhigamiṣyati saddharmmasya antarddhānāya sa<ṃ>mohāya.” § 41.21.35A4. syād vo bhikṣavo evam asyâ<syā>d vodhitavyaṃ, vodhiya usw. für dhovi° : § 11.9.11A2. vodhitavyaṃ für dhovi° (= § 12.18.12A5, § 17.10.15A5); § 19.24. 18B2. vodhiya für dhoviya; § 39.8.31A5. vodhiyāṇaṃ für dhoviyāṇaṃ vo-laya-# “niedersetzen”; vermutlich < Skt. *vy-ava-layati (vgl. BHSG, S. 229b, s.v. 1lī) ☞ § 40.12, Anm. 1 ⇒ ā-laya- § 40.12.33A4. yadi koci atibahuṃ oṣṭhaṃ vā volayati keśā vā ālaya{ṃ}ti nilāṭe vā, apane- tavyaṃ vovatti für dhovanti : § 18.4.15B3 vy / dhy ⇒ dh / v vy / ṣy : § 12.14.12A2. utthāpayiṣyaṃ für utthāpayi<ta>vyaṃ? (= § 12.17.12A4) vyañjana~ “Beilage” § 4.1.4A5. ghṛtaṃ thīyati māṃsaṃ thīyati vyañjanāni śītalībhavanti § 31.31.26B5. tato yadi nevāsikānāṃ vyañjanāni bhavanti, khajjakāni bhavanti, ... vyañjana-golaka~# “kugelförmiger Topf für Beilagen” ⇒ golaka~, raṅga-golaka~ § 43.5.38A4. yaṃ tatra bhava<ṃ>ti dugdhaghaṭā vā dadhighaṭā vā vyañjanagolakā vā ... vyañjana-sampatti~# “die Vollkommenheit von Beilagen” § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu odanasampattir vvā āgamaṃtena bhuṃjitavyaṃ, vyañjana- sampattir vvā āgamaṃtena bhuñjitavyaṃ (≒ § 5.11.7A2) § 6.11.8A2. tena odanasampattī vā āgametavyaṃ vyañjanasampattī vā āgamaṃtena bhuñjitavyaṃ √vyadh ⇒ vijjha-, viddha~, vindhāpaya- vy-apa-diśa- “nennen” § 8.7.9A4. uśśa<ṃ>kiyapariśaṅkiyāṇi kulāni vyapadiśati, vāretavyo ... √vyā ⇒ a-vītaka~ vyākaraṇa~ (BHS, SWTF) “Vyākaraṇaṃ” § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ geyaṃ vyākaraṇaṃ gāthā ... vyāghra~ “Tiger” § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti ... yathā sīhā vā vyāghrā vā evaṃ jaṃbhayanti § 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ vyāghra-bhaya~# “Gefahr durch Tiger” ☞ § 1.12, Anm. 3 ⇒ vyāḍa-bhaya~ § 1.12.2A5. yadi tāva ... na vā siṃhabhayam vā vyāghrabhayam vā caurabhayam vā <bhavati> § 1.12.2A5. atha dāni ... siṃhabhayam vā vyāghrabhayam vā caurabhayam vā, ... (≒ § 2.10.3A3) § 3.11.4A3. corabhayam vā na bhavati siṃhabhayaṃ vā vyāghrabhayaṃ vā na bhavati § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni siṃhabhayaṃ vā bhava{ṃ}ti vyāghrabhayaṃ vā corabhayaṃ 494  vā, ... kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 39.8.31A5. anekāye āraṇyakānāṃ co<ra>bhayaṃ vā bhaveya udakabhayaṃ vā siṃhabhayaṃ vā vyāghrabhayaṃ vā vyāḍa-bhaya~# “Gefahr durch Raubtiere” ☞ § 1.12, Anm. 3 ⇒ vyāghra-bhaya~ § 31.5.25B4. atha dāni vyāḍabhayaṃ vā corabhayaṃ vā bhavati, vṛddhaṃ bālaṃ madhye kṛtvā gantavyaṃ vyādhika~ ⇒ ārśa-vyādhika~ vyādhi-durbbala~# “von einer Krankheit geschwächt” § 1.12.2A4. bhikṣū vā na jarādurbbalā na vyādhidurbbalā vā bhavanti, ... (≒ § 3.11.4A3) § 1.12.2A5. bhikṣū vā jarādurbbalā vā vyādhidurbbalā vā bhavanti, ... (≒ § 2.10.3A3, § 42.25.37B2) § 26.9.23B2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, ... (≒ § 29.5. 24B2, § 30.10.25A5, § 48.7. 41B2) § 49.5.42B1. atha dāni duścakṣuko bhavati jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā, ... § 50.4.43A6. bhikṣu jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati na pratibalo gantuṃ vy-ā-baha-#, vy-ā-bāha-# oder vy-ā-vha-# “belästigen”; < Skt. √bādh (“bedrängen, plagen”) × Skt. √vadh bzw. √badh (“schlagen, töten”) ☞ § 14.4, Anm. 1; § 19.17, Anm. 3 ⇒ ud-baha- bzw. ud-vaha-, prati-bāha-, prati-bāhe-, √bādh § 18.46.17A6. nâpi dāni anuvātaṃ karttavyaṃ, mā sarvvasārthaṃ gandhena vyābaheyyā § 18.48.17A7. nâpi dāni anuvātaṃ karttavyaṃ, mā sarvvasārthaṃ gandhena v<y>ābaheyā § 19.17.18A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe ujjhituṃ, sarvvasaṃghasya mā gandhena vyābaheyyā § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacāriṃ gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ” § 20.5.19B2. ete bhikṣavo ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacārī gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ” § 24.10.22A6. upādhyāyācāryāṇāṃ vā mūle kheṭaṃ vyābahati, ekānte karttavyaṃ § 29.1.24A6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ uṣṭ<r>aparyaṃkena prahāṇaṃ upaviśaṃti, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahanti § 29.2.24A7. satyaṃ bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikā, evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ uṣṭraparyaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīdatha, anantarikānāṃ jānukehi vyābahatha? § 29.6.24B4. tathā karttavyaṃ, yathânantaryaṃ jānukehi na vyābahati § 53.2.45A2. te dāni prahāṇāto utthitā capeṭikāye dīpaṃ nirvvāpenti. cīvarakoṇenâpi nirvvāpenti. yogācārā bhikṣū gandhena vyābahanti § 56.1.47A3. yogācārāṃ bhikṣuṃ śabdena vyābahanti (Hs. vyāharanti) § 57.1.47B1. yogācārāṃ bhikṣūṃ śabdena vyābahanti (= § 59.1.48A6; ≒ § 60.1.48B5, § 61.1.49A2, § 62.2.49B7) § 58.1.48A2. yogācārāṃ bhikṣuṃ śabdena vyābahanti § 56.4.47A4. ātmano pratisandhismi sukhākaṃ niṣīdanakaṃ pīṭhake prajñapayitavyaṃ. tathā karttavyaṃ yathā ānantarikaṃ na vyābahati § 59.4.48B1. saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvayitavyaṃ, yathā anantarikasya na vyābaheyyā kheṭena vā siṃghāṇakena vā § 59.5.48B2. saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvitavyaṃ, yathā ānantarikasya na vyābaheyyā kheṭen<a v>ā siṃhāṇakena vā § 60.5.48B7. taṃ pi tathā dāni kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ, yathā ānantaryakaṃ śabdena na vyābahati § 61.4.49A4. tathā karttavyaṃ, yathânantarikaṃ śabdena na vyābahati (≒ § 62.6.50A2) § 62.11.50A7. vātakarmma ... nâpi dāni kṣamati anuvātaṃ karttuṃ, mā gandhena vyābaheyyā § 62.12.50B1. yathā sārthaṃ gandhena na vyābaheyyā, vātapathaṃ mocayitvā karttavyaṃ vy-ā-hara- “anreden” ⇒ pra-vy-ā-hara- § 33.7.28A2. tenâpi na kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena (Hs °ālap°) vyāharttuṃ “hā kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti § 33.13.28A5. bhikṣū vā tehi śabdāpayati (lies: °piyati?), nâyaṃ kṣamati, “hā kiṃ bhaṇasi” ti vyāharttuṃ vyāharanti für vyābahanti : § 56.1.47A3 vy-upa-śamaya- “zur Ruhe bringen, erledigen” ⇒ vy-upa-śānta~, su-vyupaśānta~ § 38.8.30B3. saṃghena tat kāryaṃ dharmmeṇa vinayena śāstuḥ śāsanena vyupaśamayi- 495  tavyaṃ (Hs. vyupasam°) vy-upa-śānta~ “erledigt” ⇒ vy-upa-śamaya-, su-vyupaśānta~ § 38.8.30B3. saṃghena tat kāryaṃ ... vyupaśamayitavyaṃ. vyupaśāntaṃ kariya so bhikṣu pṛcchitavyo “āyuṣman, kiṃ vyupaśāntaṃ etaṃ kāryaṃ?”. yadi tāva āha “vyupaśāntaṃ”, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, sarvve tvaṃ etaṃ kāryaṃ samagreṇa saṃghena suvyupaśāntaṃ (Hs. saṃvyupa°) ...” vyupasamayitavyaṃ für vyupaśam° : § 38.8.30B3 √vye ⇒ a-vītaka~ vr / dhr ⇒ dh / v vraṇa~ “Wunde” § 32.10.27B4. yadi kasyaci vraṇo (Hs. °ṇā) bhavati gaṇḍo vā piṭako vā, na dāni sahasā uppīḍitavyaṃ vraṇa-mukha~ (BHS [s.v., vraṇa], SJW) “After”#; vgl. Pā. vaṇa-mukha ☞ § 18.15, Anm. 3 § 18.15.16A3. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā vaṃśaśalākāhi vraṇamukhaṃ pocchitaṃ § 18.16.16A3. evaṃ ca tvaṃ vaṃśaśalākāhi vraṇamukhaṃ pocchesi § 18.16.16A4. tena hi na kṣamati vaṃśaśalākāhi kaṇḍavidalikena vā nala<vidalikāya> kāṣṭhena vā kaṭhallena vā asthikhaṇḍena vā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchituṃ § 18.17.16A4. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā vraṇamukhaṃ pocchayatā tāyo varttikāyo vā tulikāyo ... prakṣipituṃ vraṇitavyā für vuṇi° : § 13.11.12B4, § 15.8.14A4 vrata~ ⇒ sama-śīla-vrata~ vratānuga~# (°ata-anu°) “eine Observanz befolgend; einer Observanz gehorsam” § 4.17.5B4. istri pi peśalā bhavatu śrāddhā bhavatu {pati}vratānugā (vs) § 4.17.5B4. puruṣo pi peśalo bhavatu śrāddho bhavatu vratānugo (vs) vv / cc ⇒ cc / vv vv / th ⇒ th / vv vv / ddh ⇒ ddh / vv vv / mv ⇒ mv / vv Ś ś/g ⇒ g/ś ś / th ⇒ th / ś ś/m ⇒ m/ś ś/y ⇒ y/ś ś/ṣ: § 4.1.4A6. pariviṣiṣyāmaḥ für pariviśi° (= § 5.3.6A7, § 6.1.7A5) § 5.1.6A5. pariviṣiṣyāma für pariviśi° § 18.14.16A2. ārṣavyādhikaṃ für ārśa° § 25.17.23A4. keṣāṃ für keśāṃ § 42.31.37B7. praveśayiśyāma für °iṣyāma ś / s ⇒ śy / sy, śr / sr, śv / sv, pariśrāvaṇa~, pari-srāvaya~, pari-śrāvaya~ § 1.6.1B5. siṣṭakam für śiṣṭakam § 1.10.2A2. ekāṃśa-kṛtena für ekāṃsa-k° (= § 3.9.3B7, 4A1, § 26.5.23B1) § 1.12.2A5. atisitam für atiśītam § 2.10.3A3. atisītam für atiśītam § 3.5.3B2. vaṃsavidalikāhi für vaṃśa° § 4.13.5A7. ādisitavyā für ādiśitavyā (= § 6.11.8A2) § 5.7.6B3. pravisiyāṇaṃ für praviśi° § 6.13.8A3. si{|}vapasikā für śivapathikā? § 8.9.9A6. śayyāśanaṃ für °āsanaṃ § 8.11.9A7. asikṣākāmo für aśikṣākāmo § 10.5.10A5. niṣkāśayitavya~ / Skt. niṣ-kāsayati (= § 10.5.10A6) § 11.8.11A1. śiviyāṇaṃ für siv° 496  § 11.9.11A2. śicitavyaṃ für sivi° § 14.14.13B3. biśio für bisio § 15.7.14A3. pātrapraveśikā für °sevikā; § 25.8.22B5. pātra-praveśikāyāṃ für °sevikāyāṃ § 18.7.15B6. nisṛtā für niśritā § 18.53.17B3. śe für ’si § 19.35.18B7. pravisati für °viśati § 20.15.20A3. ekāṃśīkṛtena für ekāṃsī° § 21.8.20B4. vināsiyantaṃ für vināśi° § 23.1.21A4. pañcārthavasāṃ für °vaśāṃ § 23.8.21B6. sātayitavyā für śāṭa° § 23.9.21B7. śatānikā für saṃtānikā § 24.1.22A1. vināsitāyo für vināś° § 25.5.22B4. sādvale für śādvale § 26.1.23A4. prasaṃsanti für °śaṃs° (= § 26.10.23B3) § 26.8.23B2. daṇḍāsanibhejjā für daṇḍāśani° § 28.9.24A5. vesikāsāmantakena für veśikā° § 29.9.24B5. vesikāsāmantena für veśikā° § 31.7.25B6. gaṇṭhipāsakaṃ für °pāśakaṃ § 31.8.25B6. pravisiya für °viśiya § 31.24.26A7. praśādīyanti für prasād° § 35.6.29A5. śūkaro für sū° § 38.8.30B3. vyupasamayitavyaṃ für vyupaśam° § 39.17.31B5. sobhanaṃ für śobhanaṃ § 40.8.33A1. Śākete / Skt. Sāketa § 41.5.34A2. śe für se (= § 60.5.48B7) § 41.13.34B2. jñātisāle für jñātiśāle § 47.9.41A2. śambāvarathyā für sambādharathyā § 48.4.41A7. vināsitakaṃ für vināśitakaṃ § 48.9.41B5. nāsitaṃ für <vi>nāśitaṃ § 49.7.42B3f. śirā~ für Skt. sirā § 53.19.45B7. devaśikaṃ für devasikaṃ § 55.7.47A1. āśa für āsa § 58.3.48A3. kāśo für kāso § 58.5.48A4. kāśituṃ für kāsi° § 62.1.49B3. Kāsi für Kāśi § 52.4.44B3. śaktuka~ (= § 62.4.49B7) / § 62.2.49B5. saktuka~ √śaṃs ⇒ anu-pra-√śaṃs, pra-√śaṃs, pra-śasta~ √śak § 9.4.10A1. dvānavatīto na śaknoti, triṃśatito grāhayitavyo ... § 52.3.44B2. imehi śaknoma piṇḍacārikehi mukhe kavalaṃ prakṣipituṃ śakunta~ ⇒ kāka-śakunta~ śakuntaka~ ⇒ kāka-śakuntaka~ -śakunnakehi für -śakuntakehi : § 16.9.14B4 -śakunnehi für -śakuntehi : § 17.2.14B6 śakkāroṭa~#, śarkaroṭa~#, *śarkaroṭaka~ “Kies, Kieselstein”; Skt. śarkara + Suffix -oṭa (vgl. AiGr II 2, § 352) ☞ § 13.8, Anm. 2 § 13.8.12B2. yadi tāva uppeḍanako vihārako bhavati, śakkāroṭena vā pūretavyo apakva- pāṃsukena vā § 17.9.15A3. vihārakā uppeḍanakā bhavanti, śarkaroṭakā (Hs. °karāṭakā) vā apakka- pāṃsuko vā pariharitavyo ākoṭayitavyo § 23.9.21B6. uppeḍanako bhavati, pāṃsukena vā śarkaroṭena vā pratyāstaritavyo śaktu~ ⇒ saktu~ śaktuka~ ⇒ saktuka~ śakyam 497  § 4.11.5A4. kim vā ambhehi vihāra śūnyaṃ śakyaṃ karttuṃ § 6.10.8A1. “ ... kiṃ ambhehi śakyam vihārako śūnyako kartun” ti § 50.7.43B3. yadi jāna{n}ti śakyaṃ sakālena saṃbhāvayituṃ, gantavyaṃ § 50.7.43B3. upakaṭṭho kālo antāntiko. na śakyaṃ sakāle saṃbhāvayituṃ √śaṅk ⇒ *uś-śaṃkita~, uśśaṃkiya-pariśaṅkiya~ śaṃka~ ⇒ uṣṇa-śaṃka~ √śaṭ ⇒ śāṭaya- śata~ ⇒ aṣṭa-śata~, prāṇi-koṭī-niyuta-śata-sahasra~ śata-potanaka~# eine Art Geschirr? ☞ § 43.6, Anm. 1 § 43.6.38A5. yaṃ tatra bhavati śatapotanako vā tāmrapātrā vā lohapātrā vā ... śatānikā für saṃtānikā : § 23.9.21B7 śabda~ ⇒ alpa-śabda~, uccaśabda-mahāśabda~ § 28.1.24A1. tasya dāni tena śabdena cittaṃ na samādhānaṃ gacchati (≒ § 28.2.24A2) § 56.1.47A3. yogācārāṃ bhikṣuṃ śabdena vyābahanti (= § 58.1.48A2) § 57.1.47B1. yogācārāṃ bhikṣūṃ śabdena vyābahanti (= § 59.1.48A6; ≒ § 60.1.48B5, § 61.1.49A2, § 62.2.49B7) § 60.5.48B7. taṃ pi tathā dāni kaṇḍūyitavyaṃ, yathā ānantaryakaṃ śabdena na vyābahati § 61.4.49A4. tathā karttavyaṃ, yathânantarikaṃ śabdena na vyābahati (≒ § 62.6.50A2) § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” śabdāpaya- (BHS, SWTF; vgl. BHSG § 38.56) “herbeirufen, kommen lassen” ⇒ śabdāvaya- § 1.3.1B3. bhagavān āha: “śabdāpayatha Nandanaṃ” (= § 4.3.4A7, § 49.2.42A4) § 2.3.2B3. bhagavān āha “śabdāpayatha Upanandanaṃ” (= § 5.3.6A6) § 6.3.7A6. bhagavān āha: “śabdāpayatha bhikṣūn” (= § 10.3.10A4) § 7.2.8A7. bhagavān āha. “śabdāpayatha NandanOpanandanāṃ ṣaḍvarggikāṃś ca.” (≒ § 41.2.33B4 usw.) § 1.3.1B3. so dāni śabdāpito (= § 2.3.2B3, § 5.3.6A6, § 20.2.19A6, § 27.2.23B4, § 44.2.39A1, § 49.2.42A4 usw.) § 18.16.16A3. bhagavān āha “śabdāva<ya>tha bhikṣuṃ.” so dāni śabdāpito § 20.7.19B3. śabdāpayatha NandanOpanandanāṃ (= § 40.2.32B3, § 48.2.41A4) § 20.7.19B3. te dāni śabdāpitā (= § 41.2.33B4, § 48.2.41A4) § 3.3.3B1. te dāni śabdāpitāḥ (= § 6.3.7A6, § 40.2.32B3, § 42.4.36A6, § 45.2.39B4, § 46.2.40A4, § 47.2.40B4 usw.) § 26.2.23A6. śabdāpayatha ṣaḍvarggikāṃ (= § 30.2.24B7, § 42.4.36A6, § 45.2.39B4 usw.); § 46.2.40A4. śabdāpayatha ṣaḍvarggikān (= § 29.2.24A6, § 62.3.49B7 usw.) § 33.6.28A2. eṣo dāni bhikṣusya upādhyāyo vā ācāryo vā śabdāpayati, ... § 33.6.28A2. atha khalu nāmena vā gotreṇa vā śabdāpayitavyo § 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā <kiṃ bhaṇasi>” tti pravyā- harituṃ § 33.9.28A3~4. eṣo bhikṣu mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā bhaginīm vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, nâyaṃ kṣamati śabdāpayituṃ “ambe” tti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā. atha khalu “sālohite (Voc. pl. masc.)” ti vā śabdāpayitavyāḥ § 33.11.28A4~5. eṣo bhikṣuḥ upāsakāṃ vā dānapatānīṃ vā vihārasvāminīṃ vā śabdāpitu- kāmo bhavati, nâpi kṣamati “ambe” ti vā “atte” ti vā “bhaṭṭe” ti vā. atha khalu “upāsake” tti vā “dānapatti” ti vā “vihārasvāmini” ti vā śabdāpayitavyaṃ § 33.12.28A5. bhikṣū vā upāsakam vā dānapatim vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, ... § 33.13.28A5. bhikṣū vā tehi śabdāpayati (lies: °piyati?; vgl. jedoch BHSG § 37.18), ... § 47.2.40B4. śabdāpayatha NandanOpanandanāḥ § 41.18.35A1. tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati § 20.2.19A6. śabdāpayatha taṃ bhikṣuṃ (= § 27.2.23B4, § 44.2.39A1) usw. śabdāvaya- (BHS; vgl. BHSG § 38.70) “herbeirufen, kommen lassen” ⇒ śabdāpaya- § 4.3.4B1. bhagavān āha “śabdāpayatha Nandanaṃ.” so dāni śabdāvito § 18.16.16A3. bhagavān āha “śabdāva<ya>tha bhikṣuṃ.” so dāni śabdāpito 498  § 33.2.27B7. bhagavān āha “śabdāpayatha ṣaḍvarggikāṃ.” te dāni śabdāvitāḥ § 43.4.38A4. māsavārikehi vā pakṣavārikehi vā kalpiyakāraṃ śabdāviya ... √śam ⇒ prati-śāmaya-, prati-śāme-, prati-sāmaya-, prati-sāme-, vy-upa-śamaya-, vy-upa-śānta~ śambāvarathyā für sambādharathyā : § 47.9.41A2 śaya- § 30.7.25A4. nâpi dāni parivarttakaṃ yāvat sūryodgamanāt tato śayitavyaṃ § 30.9.25A5. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ duḥkhaśāyī bhavati, pāraśyena pāraśyaṃ pallaṭṭanto śayati (Hs. śayiti), anāpattiḥ § 30.10.25A5. kiñ câpi vāmena pārśvena śayati, anāpattiḥ śayita~ ⇒ sukha-śayita~ śayiti für śayati : § 30.9.25A5 -śayyaka~ ⇒ manuṣya-raha-śayyaka~ śayyā~ “Lagerstatt, Bett; das Liegen” ⇒ śeyyā~, śeyyāṃ (śayyāṃ) kalpaya- (kalpe-), siṃha-śeyyā~ (1) “Lagerstatt, Bett” § 8.12.9B1. śayyā prajñapayitavyā § 10.5.10A6. dīpako prajvālayitavyo, śayyā prajñapayitavyā § 10.5.10A6. dīpaṃ ādīpiya śayyāṃ prajñapiya sukhaṃ pratikrāmayitavyo § 30.5.25A3. na kṣamati vāmena śayyāṃ prajñapetuṃ. dakṣiṇ<en>a śayyā prajñapetavyā, cīvaravaṃśasya heṣṭhato § 53.14.45B4. <vaktavyaṃ> “āyuṣmanto, prajñapetha śayyāyo. dīpaṃ gopayiṣyan.” ti (2) “das Liegen” § 30.12.25A6. eva<ṃ> śayyāṃ (lies: śayyāyāṃ oder śayyāye?) pratipadyitavyaṃ śayyāṃ kalpe- ⇒ śeyyāṃ (śayyāṃ) kalpaya- (kalpe-) śayyāśanaṃ für śayyāsanaṃ : § 8.9.9A6 śayyāsana~ “Unterkunft, Lagerstätte; Bettzeug, Sitzkissen und -bezüge, Mobiliar”; vgl. S. 557 in diesem Band ☞ § 11.10, Anm. 1 ⇒ śeyyāsana~, cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śayyāsana- glānapratyayabhaiṣajya-pariṣkāra~ § 8.8.9A5. bhājanaṃ bhaktopadhānaṃ śayyāsanaṃ pratiśāmetavyaṃ cīvarāṇi § 8.9.9A6. śayyāsanaṃ (Hs. °āśanaṃ) prasphoṭayitavyaṃ § 11.2.10B4. adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ ... śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ utpādakaṃ utthitakaṃ (≒ § 12.2.11A6) § 11.3.10B4. kasyêmaṃ bhikṣavo śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ ... ātape dinnaṃ? § 11.4.10B5. yūyaṃ apratyāstaraṇakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ paribhuṃjatha § 11.4.10B5. tena hi evaṃ śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 11.5.10B5. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ utpādakam vā ... § 11.10.11A2. na kṣamati sāṃghikena śayyāsanena prāvṛtena bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>am vā upaviśituṃ (☞ § 11.10, Anm. 1) § 11.11.11A2. na kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ sāṃghikaṃ prāvariyaṃ dīrghaca<ṃ>kramaṃ caṃkramituṃ § 11.12.11A3. nâpi kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ paudgalikaparibhogena pari- bhuñjituṃ. atha khalu sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ prajñapayitavyaṃ. pratyāstaraṇaṃ dadiya tato paribhuñjitavyaṃ § 11.14.11A3. atha dāni hemantakālo bhavati, sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ prāvariya śayati ... § 12.4.11B1. evaṃ varṣopanāyike śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ; vgl. Uddāna (II). 20A5. evaṃ varṣopanāyike śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 12.11.11B6. atha dāni grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, ...; vgl. § 14.11.13B1. atha dāni grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, ... § 12.3.11A7. śayyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 12.10.11B5. te<na> dāni samantena āṣāḍhamāsaṃ śayyāsanaṃ grāhetavyaṃ § 12.11.11B6. āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, ... grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, ... § 12.17.12A4. hemante śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ... varṣāsu śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ § 12.18.12A5. kālena kālaṃ śayyāsanaṃ sīvitavyaṃ dhovitavyaṃ § 13.4.12B1. evaṃ varṣopagatehi śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 13.18.13A1, Uddāna 499  [II].20A5) § 13.10.12B3. śayyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ bhavati pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhovayitavyaṃ rañjetavyaṃ § 13.14.12B6. pañcāhe pañcāhe śayyāsanaṃ pratyotāpetavyaṃ § 14.1.13A1. te dāni āraṇyakā ... grāmantikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ okastāḥ § 14.2.13A2. evaṃ varṣavustehi śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ: vgl. § 14.19.13B6. evaṃ varṣavustehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [II].20A6) § 14.4.13A3. yaṃ tahiṃ śayyāsanaṃ (“Bettzeug/Sitzkissen und -bezüge”) bhavati kocavakā vā urṇṇīyo vā caturasrakā vā kumbhīyo vā kaṭāhakāni vā sarvvaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ (“Unterkunft”) otāretavyaṃ § 14.7.13A6. yaṃ sārāsāraṃ śayyāsanaṃ (“Bettzeug/Sitzkissen und -bezüge”) amilā vā astaraṇikā vā kocakā vā guḍuguḍukā vā makucakā vā te grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ (“Unterkunft”) nāpayitavyāḥ § 16.3.14A6. śayyāsanaṃ omayilemayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 16.4.14A7. tena hi evaṃ nevāsikehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni evaṃ nevāsikehi śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ? § 17.13. evaṃ sarvvehi śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ; vgl. § 17.4. e° s° śeyyāsane pr° § 56.5.47A5. rātriñ ca śayyāsanaṃ yathāprajñaptakaṃ āsati, ... Antaroddāna 50B2. saṃghasthaviro ca śayyāsana kaṭhina āgantukā ca usw. śayyāsana-prajñāpaka~ “einer, der Unterkünfte (Śayyāsana) zuweist”; Pā. senāsana-paññāpaka ☞ § 12.9, Anm. 1 § 12.9.11B4. pañcehi aṅgehi samanvāgato bhikṣuḥ śayyāsanaprajñāpaka-saṃmutīye saṃmanyitavyo śayyāsanoddeśa~# (°āsana-udd°) “Unterkunftszuweisung” ⇒ bhaktuddeśa~ § 12.11.11B6. trayodaśīyaṃ vā cāturddaśīyaṃ vā tena śayyāsanoddeśo karttavyo ... cātur- ddaśīyam vā pāñcadaśīyam vā śayyāsanoddeśo karttavyo śaraṇa~ § 4.15.5B1. ayaṃ kumāro śaraṇaṃ upetu (vs) (= § 6.13.8A3) śarīra-kuṭikā~# “Reliquienschrein” § 53.5.45A4. dīpavārikena dīpam ādīpentena pratham{ān}am eva bhagavato śarīra- kuṭikāyāṃ dīpo ādīpitavyo śarkar~ “Kieselstein, Stein” § 40.6.32B6. tehi bhājanehi prakṣipitavyā pāṭalāgulikā vā campakagulikā vā śarkarā vā § 60.1.48B5. te ... prahāṇam upaviṣṭāḥ samānā śarkarāyaṃ pi śalākāyaṃ pi aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyanti § 60.3.48B5. na kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śarkarāye vā <śalākāye vā> aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.5.48B6. nâpi kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa saṃkalikāya vā śarkkarakāya vā “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ śarkarāṭakā für śarkaroṭakā : § 17.9.15A3 śarkaroṭa~#, *śarkaroṭaka~ “Kies, Kieselstein” ⇒ śakkāroṭa~ śalākā~ (BHS, SWTF) “Stäbchen (zum Zählen der Mönche); Stäbchen” ⇒ vaṃśa-śalākā~ § 1.8.1B7. vibhavo bhavati, śalākā gandhodakena dhovitavyāyo puṣpehi okiritavyāyo (= § 2.6.2B6; ≒ § 3.7.3B5) § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ: ko śalākāṃ vārayiṣyati (Hs. cār°), ko praticchiṣyati, ... (≒ § 2.7.2B6, § 3.8.3B6) § 1.9.2A1. yo pratibalo bhavati, so adhyeṣitavyo “tvaṃ śalākāṃ vāresi (Hs. cāreṣi)” “tvaṃ śalākāṃ praticchesi” ... tena yathâdhyeṣṭena śalākā vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°), dvitīyena pratīcchitavyā § 1.10.2A1~2. nâpi kṣamati śalākāṃ vārayantena (Hs. cār°) anirmmādiya hastāṃ śalākāṃ vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°). nâpi kṣamati ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ (Hs. cārayantaṃ). atha khalu ... śalākā vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°). śalākāṃ pi dāni gṛhṇantena na câpi kṣamati ... śalākāṃ gṛhṇituṃ. atha khalu ... śalākā{ṃ} gṛhṇitavyā 500  § 1.11.2A3. yaṃ kālaṃ śalākā vāritā (Hs. cār°) bhavanti, bhikṣū gaṇitā bhavanti, sāmagrī ārocitā bhavati, dāyakadānapati paripṛcchitavyā ... (≒ § 3.10.4A1) § 2.7.2B7. tvaṃ śalākāṃ vārayiṣyasi (Hs. cār°) § 2.8.2B7~3A1. tato śalākāṃ vārantena (Hs. cār°) ... śalākāṃ vārayituṃ (Hs. cār°). ... śalākā vārayitavyā (Hs. cār°). śalākāṃ pi praticchantena ... śalākāṃ praticchituṃ. ... śalākā praticchitavyā (≒ § 3.9.3B7) § 2.9.3A1. yadā śalākā vāritā (Hs. cār°) bhavanti bhikṣū gaṇitā bhavanti sāmagrī ārocitā bhavati § 60.1.48B5. te ... śarkarāyaṃ pi śalākāyaṃ (Hs. śalik°) pi aṅgaṃ “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyanti śalikāyaṃ für śalākāyaṃ : § 60.1.48B5 śastraka~ “Messer” § 20.11.19B6. tato bhikṣuṇā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādiya kuccakaṃ śastrakena cchinditavyaṃ śāka-vyañjana~ ⇒ sāka-vyañjana~ Śāketa~# Bezeichnung der Stadt Ayodhyā; vgl. Skt. Sāketa; BHS. Sāketā § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Śākete Dharapānīyaṃ Śākya-muni~ (BHS, SWTF) § 4.15.5B1. mahāyaśaṃ Śākyamuniñ ca Gautamaṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A4. mahāmuniṃ Śākyamuniṃ ca Gotamaṃ (vs) śākhā~ ⇒ kaṇṭaka-śākhā~, patra-śākhā~, vṛkṣa-śākhā~ śāṭa~ ⇒ gomaya-śāṭa~ śāṭaka~ “Tuch; Gewand” ⇒ snāna-śāṭaka~ § 48.7.41B3. yaṃ kālaṃ tahiṃ biṃbohanaṃ vā amilā vā astarikā vā kocako vā śāṭako vā prajñapto bhavati, tato apāśrayitavyaṃ § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti śāṭakā vā paṭakā vā hārā vā arddhahārā vā hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇam vā śāṭaya~ (BHS) “entfernen”; vgl. Pā. śāṭeti, Pkt. sāḍei ☞ § 13.7, Anm. 3 § 13.7.12B2. ullāye gṛhītako bhavati, piṇḍaṃ śāṭiya mṛttikāye limpitavyo § 13.15.12B6. santānikā śāṭitavyā (Hs. °vyo) § 17.8.15A2. anyehi tāvad yā bhitti ollāye gṛhītakāyo tāyo śāṭayitavyāyo § 23.8.21B6. kālena kālaṃ śodhayitavyo, saṃtānikā śāṭayitavyā (Hs. sāta°) § 23.8.21B6. ullāye gṛhītako bhavati, śāṭiyāṇaṃ liptopalipto ghaṣṭamaṣṭo karttavyo § 23.9.21B7. upāṃsulako vihārako bhavati, ... saṃtānikā (Hs. śatān°) śāṭayitavyā § 42.11.36B5. tehi jentāke santānikā śāṭayitavyā ... śāṭikā~ ⇒ snāna-śāṭikā~ śāṭhya~ “Hinterlist” § 17.7.15A2. atha dāni bahuṃ lippitavyaṃ bhavati, bhikṣū ca śāṭhyena karenti, ... śādvala~ ⇒ dūrvvā-sādvala~ śāyin~ ⇒ duḥkha-śāyin~ Śāriputra~ (BHS, SWTF) § 41.3.33B7, § 41.4.33B7, § 41.10.34A6, § 41.21.35A5 śālā~ ⇒ agni-śālā~, upasthāna-śālā~, kalpiya-śālā~, jñāti-śālā~, dyutikara-śālā~, prahāṇa-śālā~, bhakta-śālā~, vadha-bandhanāgāraśālā~ § 18.9.15B7. varccakuṭīye purato kuṭī vā śālā vā karttavyā § 42.19.37A4. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ prahāṇiko bhavati, na dāni kṣamati ... dvāraṃ pihitvā śālaṃ bandhitvā prahāṇaṃ āsituṃ prasvedaṃtehi śālīyo für thālīyo : § 39.6.31A3 √śās ⇒ anu-√śās śāsana~ ⇒ jina-śāsana~ § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ ... śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ dīpayamānānāṃ sukhañ ca phāsuñ ca viharantānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? § 38.7.30B3. saṃghasthavireṇa vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, jalpatha yathādharmmaṃ yathā- vinayaṃ yathā śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ.” ti 501  § 38.8.30B3. saṃghena tat kāryaṃ dharmmeṇa vinayena śāstuḥ śāsanena vyupaśamayi- tavyaṃ śāstṛ~ § 1.1.1B1. bhagavān Śrāvastyāṃ viharati śāstā devānāñ ca manuṣyāṇāñ ca vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā (= § 2.1.2A7, § 3.1.3A6, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4, § 7.1.8A5, § 20.1.19A5, § 20.4.19A7, § 28.1.24A1 et passim) § 62.1.49B1. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisam- bhāvayitvā Śrāvastyāṃ viharati śāstā devānāñ ca manuṣyāṇāñ ca ... § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ ... śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ dīpayamānānāṃ sukhañ ca phāsuñ ca viharantānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? § 38.7.30B3. saṃghasthavireṇa vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, jalpatha yathādharmmaṃ yathā- vinayaṃ yathā śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ.” ti § 38.8.30B3. saṃghena tat kāryaṃ dharmmeṇa vinayena śāstuḥ śāsanena vyupaśamayi- tavyaṃ *śikka~ “Tragenetz”; < Skt. śikya; vgl. Pā. sikkā; vgl. auch von Hinüber 1992: 39f. ☞ § 19.25, Anm. 2 § 19.25.18B3. *śikkena (Hs. śiktena) uvvinitvā sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.25.18B3. sāyaṃ praveśentena kunta vā tumbakā vā *śikke (Hs. śikṣe) uvvinitvā mañcakasthāne ullapitavyaṃ *śikkuḍḍitaka~# “in einem Tragenetz aufgehängt”; śikka (< Skt. śikya [“Tragenetz”]) + uḍḍita (“bound, tied; stuck in a sling or net” [CPD, s.v.]; < Skt. ud-√ḍī) ☞ § 50.5, Anm. 2 § 50.5.43B1. yadi tāva denti, dve piṇḍapātakā gṛhṇitavyā ātmano ca tasya ca śikkuḍḍitakaṃ (Hs. śiktu°) kṛtvā vihārakaṃ āgantavyaṃ § 50.5.43B1. atha dāni grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, cireṇa kālo atikramati, paṭipāṭikāya gṛhṇitavyaṃ, śikkuḍḍitakaṃ (Hs. śiktu°) kṛtvā vihārakaṃ gantavyaṃ śiktena wohl für *śikkena: § 19.25.18B3 śiktuḍḍitakaṃ wohl für *śikku° : § 50.5.43B1 √śikṣ ⇒ śekhaya- § 7.6.8B3. āpattikauśalyaṃ śikṣitavyo sūtrakauśalyaṃ skandhakauśalyaṃ ... § 41.19.35A3. ācāraṃ śikṣitaṃ śreyo anācāraṃ na śikṣitaṃ (vs) § 41.19.35A3. ācāraṃ śikṣiyāṇa{ṃ} (m.c.) vinayaṃ ca (vs) śikṣā~ ⇒ a-śikṣā-kāma~ śikṣā-kāma~# “Śikṣā (die Ordensregeln) liebend” ⇒ a-śikṣā-kāma~ ☞ § 8.11, Anm. 2 § 8.11.9B1. atha dāni bhadrako bhavati guṇavāṃ śikṣākāmo, vaktavyaṃ “karohi” § 8.13.9B3. atha dāni bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo, vaktavyo “gṛhṇa” § 38.4.30A6. atha dāni so bhavati bhadrako guṇavān anuddhato śikṣākāmo anukūlo anunnaḍo acapalo, pṛcchitavyo “kiṃ kāryaṃ?” § 38.7.30B2. so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato anunnaḍo ... śikṣā-pada~ (BHS, SWTF) “Sittenregel, Schulungsregel” § 5.13.7A3. yathā prathamake śikṣāpade evaṃ dvitīyasthavireṇa bhaktāgre pratipadyi- tavyaṃ śikṣe wohl für śikke: § 19.25.18B3 Śikhin~ (BHS, SWTF) Name eines Buddha der Vorzeit § 4.15.5B1. buddhaṃ Vipaśyiñ ca Śikhi<ṃ> ca Viśvabhuṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A4. buddhaṃ Vipaśyiñ ca Śikhiñ ca Viśvabhuva<ṃ> (vs) śicitavyaṃ für sivi° : § 11.9.11A2 śithila~ ⇒ ati-śithila~ Śibi~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-...-Vatsa-Matsya-Śūrasena-Śibi-Daśārṇa-Aśvaki-Avanti~ śimbaṭī~# “Hülsenfrucht”?; vgl. Pkt. siṃbalī ☞ § 48.8, Anm. 5 § 48.8.41B5. labhyā dāni ... gṛhṇituṃ ... mālyam vā aklinnakaṃ śimbaṭīyo vā śiras~ § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... śeyyāṃ kalpayati ... dakṣiṇāṃ bāhaṃ śirasy upanidhāya, ... § 30.7.25A4. dakṣiṇāṃ bāhāṃ śirasy upanidhāya, vāmāṃ bāhāṃ anukāyaṃ prasāritvā ... śirā~# “Ader, Blutgefäß”; ∈ Skt. sirā ☞ § 11.11, Anm. 2 ⇒ bāhu-śirā~, aṅgulya-śirā~ 502  § 49.7.42B3. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāṃ vindhāpayitukāmo bhavati bāhuśirāṃ vâṅgulya- śirāṃ vā nilāṭiṃ vā § 49.7.42B4. yaṃ kālaṃ śirā viddhā bhavati, ubhayehi bhuñjiya nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 49.7.42B5. yadi tāva na viddhā śirā bhavati, ... śirā-viddha~#, śirā-viddhaka~# “sich einem Aderlaß unterzogen habend”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 252.9A4.4. śirā-viddhā, § 242.8A11.4. śirā-viddhikā ☞ § 11.11, Anm. 2 § 49.7.42B6. yadi tāva so śirāviddho eva nirddhāvati, ayaṃ praviṣṭo bhavati ... § 11.11.11A2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śirāviddhako vā bhavati virecanapītako vā glānako vā bhavati, vastraṃ puggalikaṃ antarīkaraṇaṃ dadiya caṃkramati, anāpattiḥ § 20.12.19B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati śirāviddhako vā virecanapītako vā ghṛtapītako vā ... śirā-viddhaka~ ⇒ śirā-viddha~ śiri-kuṇḍikā~ ⇒ śrī-kuṇḍikā~ śir~ (BHS; vgl. BHSG § 3.108) § 4.18.5B7. śirīyĕ lakṣmī<yĕ>(?) parigraheṇa ca (vs) śilā~ “Stein” § 43.10.38A7. etā bhaiṣajyapiṣaṇikā śilā na dāni kārya kṛtvā yathā yeva pratiliptikā sthapetavyā śilā-pūrak~# “steinerner Mörser”? ☞ § 51.7, Anm. 3 ⇒ kaṇḍikā-pūraka~ § 51.8.44A4. yadi tāva śilāpūrakāṃ pithiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, jānitavyaṃ “eṣā dāsyati” śilā-maya~ “steinern” § 40.5.32B6. appihāṇā karttavyā śilāmayā (Hs. śīlamayā) vā mṛttikāmayā vā kāṣṭhamayā vā śiva~ § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... satvān ... kṣeme same śive sthale abhaye nirvvāṇe pratiṣṭhāpaya- māno ... Śiva-cchagala~# “Śivas Ziege” ☞ § 7.1, Anm. 3 § 7.1.8A6. te dāni Indragavā viya varddhayanti, Śivacchagalā viya vardha<ṃ>ti § 9.1.9B5. te dāni Indragavā viya varddhanti, Śivacchagalā viya varddhanti śiva-pathikā~ (BHS) “Leichenstätte” ☞ § 4.15, Anm. 2 § 4.15.5B1. ayaṃ kumāro śivapathikāya cchandito (vs) § 6.13.8A3. <ayaṃ> kumāro śivapathikā (?; Hs. si{|}vapasikā) cchandito (Hs. cchoto) (vs) Śivi~ = Śibi~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-...-Vatsa-Matsya-Śūrasena-Śibi-Daśārṇa-Aśvaki-Avanti~ śiviyāṇaṃ für siv° : § 11.8.11A1 √śiṣ ⇒ ava-śiṣṭa~, śiṣṭaka~ § 31.24.26A7. he he śiṣṭā (“zurückgelassen”) baṣṭā. yūyaṃ jātā, <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti śiṣṭaka~# “übrig”; < śiṣṭa + Suffix ka § 1.6.1B5. catvāri pārājikā gāthāś ca śiṣṭakam (Hs. siṣṭakam) abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā § 1.12.2A6. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikāṃ dharmmāṃ uddiśiyānaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa- śrutikāye gāthāye ca § 2.10.3A3. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikā uddiśitavyaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāyo ca § 7.4.8B2. triṃśato pi grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa<śruti>kāyo gāthāyo ca. triṃśato pi na pāreti, dve aniyatāṃ grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca. ... antamasato catvāri pārājikāṃ grāhayitavyo śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaṃśrutikāyo gāthāyo ca (≒ § 9.4.10A1~2) √śī ⇒ śaya- śīta~ “Kälte” § 8.6.9A4. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... śītaṃ bhavati, mandamukhī prajvālayitavyā § 55.1.46B2. te dāni bhikṣu{ṃ} prahāṇasmiṃ yaṣṭiṃ vārayantā śītena kilamma<ṃ>ti śīta-praṣṭavya~# “Gefühl der Kälte, Frost” § 42.3.36A4. te dāni bhikṣu śītapraṣṭavyena spṛṣṭāḥ tvaritatvaritaṃ praviṣṭā 503 śītala~ “kalt” § 4.1.4A5. odano śītalo bhavati. sūpo śītalo bhavati. ghṛtaṃ thīyati māṃsaṃ thīyati vyañjanāni śītalībhavanti śītalaka~ (BHS[Mvu]) “etwas Kühles”; vgl. AMg. sīyalaga § 22.1.20B6. so ... vihārakaṃ apaduriya praviśati. śītalakaṃ ca tena ākrāntaṃ śītalaka-saṃgena# “während es kühl ist” (wörtl. “im Zusammenhang mit der Kühle” ?) ☞ § 4.8, Anm. 2 § 4.8.4B6. atha dāni grīṣmakālo bhavati, śītalakasaṃgena anukālyaṃ praviśitavyaṃ śīrṣa~ (1) “Haupt, Kopf” ⇒ oguṇṭhita-śīrṣa~ § 8.6.9A3. cīvarāṇi ... ātmano skandhe dapiya śīrṣaṃ onāmiya purato gantavyaṃ § 29.5.24B2. atha dāni jarādurbbalo vā vyādhidurbbalo vā bhavati, śīrṣam vā duḥkhati, arddha śīrṣasya pithetavyaṃ eko ca karṇṇo § 32.7.27B2. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ samavasthāye niṣaṇṇo bhavati, taṃ velaṃ allīyāṇaṃ śīrṣeṇa pādā{ṃ} vanditavyā, karkaṭagrāhikāye vanditavyā § 47.4.40B6. śīrṣe vā skandhe vā cīvaraṃ kṛtvā gantavyaṃ (2) “Dach; das obere Ende” ⇒ caṃkrama-śīrṣa~ § 18.6.15B4. śīrṣan (?; Hs. °rṣīn) (“Dach”) tatrôpari cchādetavyaṃ śīrṣīn für śīrṣan? : § 18.6.15B4 śīla~ ⇒ sama-śīla-vrata~ § 4.17.5B5. ubhau śīlehi (Hs. °ohi) saṃvṛtā (vs) § 4.17.5B5. tām eva bhāryāṃ vareyā yâsyā śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) śīlamaya~ für śilā-maya~: § 40.5.32B6 śīla-vat~ § 4.17.5B4. śīlavatī yogasampannā samyagdṛṣṭi ca yā iha (vs) § 4.17.5B5. śīlavāṃ tyāgasampanno samyagdṛṣṭi ca yo iha (vs) § 4.18.5B7. śīlavā tatra bhojeyā saṃyatāṃ brahmacāriṇo (vs) śukti~, śuktikā~# wohl “Reinigungsstein”# oder “Bimsstein”#; vgl. Pā. sutti bzw. sotti ☞ § 42.11, Anm. 3 § 42.27.37B4. cūrṇṇaṃ praveśayitavyaṃ, śuktiyo praveśayitavy<āy>o § 42.31.37B7. jentākapīṭhikāni dhoviya praveśayitavyāni, śuktiyo dhoviya praveśayi- tavyāyo § 42.11.36B5. jentāke pīṭhikā vā śuktikāyo vā dhovitavyā śuktikā~ ⇒ śukti~ śuci~ § 41.10.34A6. yo pi so brāhmaṇānāṃ uṣṇodakakarako, so pi na evaṃ śucī śuddha~ § 13.16.12B7. atha dāni usvedako bhavati, śuddhena gomayena mardditavyaṃ √śudh ⇒ śuddha~, śodhaya-, śodhe-, śodhitaka~ śunakha~ (BHS[Mvu]) “Hund”; vgl. Skt. śunaka, Pā. sunakha ⇒ śvāna~ § 4.15.5B1. śunakhā śṛgālā ca naṃ laṃghayantu (vs) § 6.13.8A3. śunakhā śṛgā<lā> c’ enaṃ laṃghayantaṃ (vs) § 18.37.17A1. bhikṣū ... yaṃ paśyanti tatra śunakhena vā śṛgālena vā uśvāsaṃ kṛtakaṃ § 31.32.26B6. amutra śunakhā caṇḍāḥ. amukaṃ aśrāddhakulaṃ śuve (BHS[Mvu]) “für den morgigen Tag”; vgl. Skt. śvas ⇒ śuvetanāya § 31.18.26A2. kasya śuve bhaktaṃ tarpaṇaṃ purobhaktikaṃ vā? § 39.9.31A6. śuve bhaktaṃ vā purebhaktikaṃ vā yavāgūpānaṃ vā bhaviṣyati śuvetanāya (BHS[Mvu]) “für den morgigen Tag”; vgl. Pā. svātanāya, Skt. śvastana (Adjektiv) ⇒ śuve § 4.5.4B2. eṣo dāni koci saṃghaṃ bhaktena śuvetanāya nimantreti, na dāni ... adhivāsayi- tavyaṃ √śuṣ ⇒ śoṣaya- śuṣka~ “getrocknet” ⇒ su-śuṣka~, upaśuṣka~, pariśuṣka~ § 14.6.13A5. kakṣaṃ ... yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati niṣprāṇakaṃ, tato ’gninā dahāpayi- 504  tavyo § 43.4.38A4. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhavanti, ... ( = § 43.7.38A6) § 43.5.38A5. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhava<ṃ>ti, ... § 44.6.39A5. taṃ cīvarakaṃ yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkaṃ bhavati, ... § 49.1.42A1. so dāni śuṣkena mukhena pāṇḍarehi oṣṭhehi tvaritatvaritaṃ nirddhāvati § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhavanti, tato śvetamayena yeva khādanti, ... śuṣyā~# eine Art Korb? § 43.1.38A2. ... bhaktapīṭhikā māṇikaṃ caṃgeriyo śuṣyāyo paṭalakāṃ śūkaro für sū° : § 35.6.29A5 śūnya~ § 4.11.5A3. kim vā ambhehi vihāra śūnyaṃ śakyaṃ karttuṃ śūnyaka~ (BHS) § 5.10.7A1. kim asmābhiḥ vihārako śūnyako karttavyo? § 6.10.8A1. “ ... kiṃ ambhehi śakyam vihārako śūnyako kartun” ti § 41.14.34B4. etaṃ gṛhaṃ śūnyakaṃ § 50.2.43A4. āyuṣman, evaṃ ca tvaṃ śūnyake vihārake pātraṃ nikṣipiya gacchasi § 50.3.43A5. nâpi kṣamati piṇḍapātanīhārakena piṇḍapātam ānayitvā śūnyake vihārake osariya gantuṃ śūnya-ghara~# “(menschen)leeres Haus” ⇒ nisṛṣṭa-gṛha~, utsṛṣṭa-gṛha~, śūnyāgāra-gāta~ § 18.43.17A4. śūnyagharaṃ vā jambālam vā bhavati, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ *śūnyāgāra-gata~ (śūnya-g°) “in einem (menschen)leeren Haus wohnend”; vgl. Pā. suññāgāra- gata § 39.29.32A6. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā (Hs. °ranātā) yūyaṃ prajñāvaitakṣiyā. śṛgālâpi āraṇye vasanti. ...” Śūrasena~ ⇒ Aṅga-Magadha-Mallī-...-Vatsa-Matsya-Śūrasena-Śibi-Daśārṇa-Aśvaki-Avanti~ śṛgāla~ § 4.15.5B1. śunakhā śṛgālā ca naṃ laṃghayantu (vs) § 6.13.8A3. śunakhā śṛgā<lā> c’ enaṃ laṃghayantaṃ (vs) § 18.37.17A1. bhikṣū ... yaṃ paśyanti tatra śunakhena vā śṛgālena vā uśvāsaṃ kṛtakaṃ § 31.16.26A2. ihaỿva yūyaṃ jātā ihaỿva mariṣyatha. jātā te śṛgālā ye tumbhāṇaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti § 31.24.26A7. yūyaṃ jātā, <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti § 39.29.32A7. nâpi dāni grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā kutsetavyā paṃsetavyā “śūnyāgāragatā yūyaṃ ... śṛgālâpi āraṇye vasanti. divasaṃ yūyaṃ varṣāṇi piṇḍentā āsatha” śe für ’si : § 18.53.17B3 śe für se : § 41.5.34A2, § 60.5.48B7 śekhaya- (BHS[Mvu]) “unterweisen, belehren”; vgl. AMg. sehai ⇒ √śikṣ § 7.5.8B3. śekhayitavyo anuśāsayitavyo kālyaṃ madhyantikaṃ sāyaṃ abhidharmmeṇa vā abhivinayena vā § 7.6.8B4. ācāraṃ śekhayitavyo anācārato vārayitavyo (= § 9.5.10A2) § 9.5.10A2. śekhayitavyo dhātukauśalyaṃ skandhakauśalyaṃ āyatanakauśalyaṃ ... § 49.1.41B7. āgacchâhaṃ tava śekhayiṣyaṃ (Hs. śeṣayiṣyaṃ) śeyyā~ (BHS) “Lagerstatt, Bett”; vgl. Pā. seyyā ⇒ śayyā~, śeyyāṃ (śayyāṃ) kalpaya- (kalpe-), siṃha-śeyyā~ § 23.4.2.21B1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ śeyyāṃ prajñapayitukāmo bhavati, kiñ câpi dīpakaṃ praveśeti, anāpattiḥ. śeyyāṃ prajñapayantenaỿva cchitti nikkālayitavyo § 30.5.25A3. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva śeyyāṃ prajñapeṃtena abhidakṣiṇaṃ prajñapayitavyā § 31.25.26B1. a<ti>vikālako pādāṃ dhoviya mrakṣiya dīpaṃ ādīpiya śeyyāṃ prajñapiya pratikramitavyaṃ śeyyāṃ (śayyāṃ) kalpaya- (kalpe-) “liegen”; vgl. SWTF, s.v. kḷp, 2, c, ε. śayyāṃ kalpaya- (“[sich] ein Bett bereiten: sich hinlegen, schlafen”); Pā. seyyaṃ kappeti ☞ § 30.1, Anm. 1 § 30.1.24B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ omuddhakâpi śeyyāṃ kalpenti, uttānakâpi 505  śeyyā<ṃ> kalpenti, vāmenâpi pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpenti § 30.2.24B7. satyaṃ ... yūyaṃ omuddhakâpi śeyyāṃ kalpetha, vāmenâpi pārśvena śayyāṃ kalpetha? § 30.3.24B7~25A1. tena hi na kṣamati uttānakena śeyyāṃ kalpituṃ. na kṣamati omuddhakena śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ. na kṣamati vāmena vā pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ § 30.3.25A1. omuddhakā bhikṣavo pretā śeyyāṃ kalpayanti. uttānakā bhikṣavo āsurā śeyyāṃ kalpayanti. vāmena pārśvena kāmopabhoginaḥ śeyyāṃ kalpaya<n>ti § 30.4.25A1. evaṃ bhikṣavo śeyyāṃ kalpetha yathā siṃho mṛgarājā. siṃho bhikṣavo mṛgarājā dakṣiṇena pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpayati § 30.5.25A3. (śeyyā ...) tathā karttavyā yathā saṃpa<ti>tako yeva dakṣiṇena pārśvena śayyāṃ kalpeti § 30.7.25A4. rātrīye madhyame yāme dakṣiṇena pārśvena siṃhaśeyyā kalpayitavyā § 30.11.25A5~6. na kṣamati stūpaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śayyāṃ kalpayituṃ, saṃghaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ, vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā upādhyāyācāryaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ Uddāna (III).25A7. evaṃ śeyyā kalpayitavyaṃ śeyyāsana~# “Unterkunft, Lagerstätte; Bettzeug, Sitzkissen und -bezüge, Mobiliar”; vgl. S. 557 in diesem Band ⇒ śayyāsana~, cīvara-piṇḍapāta-śeyyāsana-glānapratyayabhaiṣajya- pariṣkāra~ § 14.10.13B1. dīrghāyu, gacchāma tāva <va>yaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ § 14.11.13B1. atha dāni grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, ...; vgl. § 12.11.11B6. atha dāni grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ bhavati, ... § 14.15.13B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ udakadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na saṃvasati, ... § 14.15.13B4. na kṣamati tehi aśabdakarṇṇikāye āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantuṃ § 14.18.13B6. gacchāma vayaṃ āraṇyakāni (Hs. ara°) śeyyāsanāni § 14.19.13B6. evaṃ varṣavustehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 15.2.13B7. adrākṣīd ... śeyyāsanaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ § 15.4.14A1. evaṃ āgantukehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 15.11.14A4) § 16.4.14A7. tena hi evaṃ nevāsikehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni evaṃ nevāsikehi śayyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ? § 16.6.14B1. nâpi kṣamati śeyyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ āgantukānāṃ sthāpayituṃ (“zuweisen”) § 16.6.14B2. yaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ navakaṃ sudhotaṃ ca suraktaṃ ca, taṃ āgantukānāṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ § 17.4. evaṃ sarvvehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ; vgl. § 17.13. e° s° śayyāsane pr° § 17.10.15A4. nâpi dāni adhyupekṣitavyaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ oṇṇiyo vā kocavakā vā prāvārā vā bisiyo vā caturasrako vā bimbohanakā vā cilimilikā vā omayilamayilā vā pāṭitavipāṭitā vā acaukṣā vā apratisaṃskṛtā vā § 18.19.16A6. nâpi ... kṣamati akṛtvā udakakṛtyaṃ sāṃghikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ paribhuñjituṃ § 18.26.16B3. nâpi kṣamati sāṃghikena śeyyāsanena (“Bettdecke”) prāvṛtena varccakuṭī praviśituṃ § 18.36.17A1. atha dāni āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati durlabho gandho § 18.39.17A2. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantavyaṃ § 20.11.19B6. atha dāni bhikṣū āraṇyake śeyyāsane prativasanti ... Uddāna (II).20A5~6. evaṃ śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ | evaṃ varṣopanāyike śe° prati° | evaṃ varṣopagatehi śe° prati° | evaṃ varṣavustehi śe° prati° | evaṃ āgantukehi śe° prati° | evaṃ naivāsikehi śe° prati° | evaṃ hi sarvvehi śe° prati° | § 31.14.25B7~26A1. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ. atha dāni āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, tahiṅ gantavyaṃ § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ bhavati, na kṣamati tehi nivāsikehi dvāraṃ ca bandhiya vihārasya paścāvastuke kākavāhāṃ bhañjantehi āsituṃ § 39.1.30B6. āraṇyakaṃ tāva śeyyāsanaṃ grāmāntikañ ca ekabhaktatarppaṇañ {ca} § 39.1.30B6. grāmāntike śeyyāsane āraṇyakānāñ ca grāmāntikānāñ ca anugraho sādhīyati § 39.1.30B6. te dāni āraṇyakā deśakāle grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ āgatā 506  § 39.5.31A2. etaṃ dāni grāmāntikaṃ ca śeyyāsanaṃ āraṇyakañ ca śeyyāsanaṃ ca ekabhaktatarppaṇaṃ bhavati § 39.5.31A2. grāmāntike śeyyāsane bhaktam pacyati § 39.16.31B3. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ gantavyaṃ § 39.28.32A5. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ukkasitavyaṃ § 39.18.31B6. atha dāni āraṇyake śeyyāsane grāmāntikānāṃ ca āraṇyakānāñ ca bhaktaṃ sajjīyati, nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva ... bhuñjituṃ § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni prāntāni viviktāni vigatajanapadāni manuṣyarahaśayyakāni pratisaṃlayanasāropyāni ...” § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati, āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ kelāpīyati. ...” § 39.29.32B1. uktaṃ cêdaṃ bhagavatā “yāvakīyaṃ ca bhikṣavo āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni adhyāvasiṣyatha, tāva vṛddhī yeva pratikāṃkṣitavyā kuśalehi dharmmehi no parihāṇi.” usw. śeṣa~ “übrig” § 20.10.19B6. tena hi śeṣāś (Nom. pl. neut.) catvāri aṅgulāni dantakāṣṭhasya varjyaṃ karttavyaṃ § 42.31.37B6~7. tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati, praveśayitavyaṃ. cūrṇṇaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati, praveśayitavyaṃ § 42.31.37B7. yaṃ kāṣṭhaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati, yathāsthāne sthāpetavyaṃ § 53.19.45B7. tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati, sāhariyāṇaṃ ghaṭikāyāṃ vā bhājane vā sthāpayi- tavyaṃ śeṣayiṣyaṃ ⇒ kh / ṣ für śekhayiṣyaṃ : § 49.1.41B7 śaithaliko für śaithiliko : § 8.11.9A7 śaithilika~ (BHS) “lax, lose”; vgl. Skt. śithila ☞ § 8.11, Anm. 1 § 8.11.9A7. yadi so bhavati śaithiliko (Hs. śaithaliko) vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako vā aśikṣākāmo, ... § 8.13.9B2. yadi so bhavati śaithiliko vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako vâśikṣākāmo, ... § 18.37.17A2. atha dāni navatarako śaithiliko bāhuliko bhavati, ... § 18.52.17B2. atha dāni so bhavati śaithiliko vā bāhuliko vā āvaṭṭako vā aśikṣākāmo, ... § 20.19.20A5. atha dāni navako śaithiliko bāhuliko bhavati, vṛddhatareṇa uddhṛtavyo § 24.12.22A7. atha dāni navakataro śaithiliko bāhuliko vā bhavati, vṛddhatarakena mardi- tavyaṃ Śoṇa-pānīya~# “Wasser aus Śoṇa (einem Nebenfluß des Ganges, Sone)” § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, Rājagṛhe Tapodaṃ ... śodhaya-, śodhe-# ⇒ śodhitaka~ § 8.5.9A1. peyā ukkaḍhitavyā. peyā peyi{ṃ}tā (für *pāyitā?) pe<yā>pātraṃ śodhitavyaṃ. śo(dhitvā)(?) bhaktuddeśāto bhaktakaṃ grahetavyaṃ § 8.8.9A6. pātraṃ śodhetavyaṃ, pātraṃ pratisāmetavyaṃ § 13.9.12B3. udakabhramā vā praṇālibhramā vā paripūritā bhavanti, śodhayitavyāḥ § 13.14.12B6. udakabhramāḥ pranāḍikābhramā vā kālena kālaṃ śodhitavyāḥ § 15.9.14A4. vihārako śodhayitavyo sammārjayitavyo § 23.8.21B6. kālena kālaṃ śodhayitavyo, saṃtānikā śāṭayitavyā śodhayituṃ für śoṣayituṃ : § 21.7.20B4 śodhitaka~# “gereinigt” < śodhita + Suffix ka § 13.2.12A6. adrākṣīd ... vihārakāṃ ... udakasya pūrāṃ, udakabhramām aśodhi<ta>kāṃ § 13.3.12A7. ime bhikṣavo vihārakā ... udakasya pūrā{ṃ} udakabhramā aśodhitakā śobhana~ “gut; schön, angenehm” § 31.24.26A7. (nevāsikā ...) saṃpraharṣayitavyā vaktavyā “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyanti” § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ (Hs. so°) kriyati. ... dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyantî”ti § 39.29.32A7. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati, 507  āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ kelāpīyati. ...” § 62.2.49B6. ānantarikānāṃ baddhamuṣṭikāṃ jighrāpenti, āha “jighrâyuṣman, aho mṛṣṭo gandho. aho śobhano (Hs. sobh°) gandho.” śoṣaya- “trocknen”; Kaus. von √śuṣ § 18.8.15B7. tena tāni kuṇḍakāni ... kālena kālaṃ ātape śoṣayitavyāni § 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... kāṣṭhamayāni bhavanti, na kṣamati ātape{na} śoṣayituṃ § 18.8.15B7. (kuṇḍakāni) ... śoṣayitvā cchāyāyāṃ sthāpayitavyāni § 21.7.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinasmi raṅgaṃ vā śoṣayituṃ (Hs. śodha°) gomayaṃ vā cīvarakāni vā śoṣayituṃ (Hs. śodha°). atha khalu cīvarakaṃ sīvayitavyaṃ § 25.14.23A1. śoṣayantena prathamaṃ upādhyāyasya vā ācāryyasya vā śoṣayitavyaṃ, paścād ātmano § 41.9.34A5. upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhoviya niṣpīḍitvā ātape śoṣayitaṃ (Hs. °yetaṃ) § 41.9.34A5. dakānakaṃ dhoviya pānīyāvaśeṣaṃ cchoriya ātape śoṣitaṃ § 41.24.35B1. upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhovitavyaṃ pīḍiya ātape śoṣayitavyaṃ § 42.20.37A4. na dāni kṣamati tailena śoṣayituṃ (☞ § 42.20, Anm. 1). atha khalu minīya dātavyaṃ § 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā ... prasphoṭiya sudhotāṃ suprakṣālitāṃ kariya, ātape śoṣayitavyā § 62.2.49B5. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena saktukāṃ kulmāṣāṃ ca (lies: vā?) mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayanti § 62.4.49B7. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktukān vā mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayitvā śvetamayena yeva khādituṃ śoṣayetaṃ für śoṣayitaṃ : § 41.9.34A5 śy / sy : § 8.8.9A5. bhuktāviśya für °visya śr / sr ⇒ ś / s § 4.16.5B3. anāśravā für anāsravā § 18.10.16A1. praśrāvakaraṇaṃ für prasrāva° § 18.18.16A6. uccārapraśrāva für °prasrāva § 41.10.34A7. śrotāpattiphalaṃ für srotāpattiphalaṃ § 48.5.41A7. visrambhakulaṃ für viśrambhakulaṃ § 48.6.41B1. avisrambhakulaṃ für aviśrambhakulaṃ śraddhaka~ ⇒ śrāddhaka~ śraddhā~ § 4.17.5B5. ubhau śraddhāya sampannā ubhau śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) § 11.1.10B3. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ śraddhayā-d-āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ ... § 39.10.31A7. nâsti mama tahiṃ śraddhā nâpi prasādo § 39.22.32A1. atha dāni āhaṃsuḥ “nâsti mama ta{ṃ}hiṃ śraddhā, nâsti prasādo”, ... śraddhā-prasanna~ (BHS; BHSD, s.v. śraddha; BhiVin[Ma-L] §§ 144, 251) “fromm” § 14.15.13B4. yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā upaskaro vā śraddhāprasannehi (Loc. pl.) upāsakakulehi sthāpayitavyaṃ śraddhe-vihārin~# “ein vertrauensvoller (, gemeinsam mit seinem Erzieher wohnender) Schüler” (śraddha- ∈ saddhaṃ < Skt. sārdhaṃ); vgl. BHS. sārdhaṃ-vihārin, Pā. saddhiṃ- vihārin ☞ § 7.3, Anm. 1 ⇒ śrāddha-vihārin~, śrāddhe-v°, sārddha-v°, sārddhe-v°, sārddhe- vihārika~ § 7.7.8B4. upādhyāyo śraddhevihāri upasaṃpādiya na ovadati, na anuśāsati, na uddiśati ... § 7.8.8B5. evam upādhyāyena śraddhevihārismiṃ pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10B1) § 8.14.9B4. evaṃ śraddhevihāriṇā upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10B1) § 10.5.10A6. vistareṇa yathā śraddhevihārisya yāva dīpaṃ ādīpiya śayyāṃ prajñapiya ... √śram ⇒ vi-śrama-, vi-śramaya-, vi-śrāmaya-, vi-śrānta~, śrānta~ śramaṇa~ ⇒ paścāc-chramaṇa~, pure-śramaṇa~ § 18.2.15B1. yathā uṣṭrā vā goṇā vā garddabhā vā cchagalakā vā evam ime śramaṇā prakīrṇṇakasya uśvāsaṃ karenti § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he nāvā <mucyati> pañcavarṣika <pravṛttaṃ> caṃḍa<ṃ> (Hs. ḍaṃya) muktaṃ (Hs. dukkaṃ) śramaṇa (Voc.) sārtho 508  (Hs. mātā) prayāto (Hs. prajātā) (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti śramaṇaka~ (BHS, SWTF) “Mönchlein; armseliger Śramaṇa” (pejorativ) ⇒ droṇī-śramaṇaka~ § 18.2.15B1. jano dāni odhyāyati “paśyatha bhaṇe śramaṇakā ...” (≒ § 19.2.17B4, § 20.6. 19B2, § 20.7.19B3, § 51.1.44A1) § 19.2.17B4. yathā uṣṭrā vā ... eva<m i>me śramaṇakā prakīrṇṇakaṃ praśvāsaṃ karonti § 20.6.19B2. evam ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti (≒ § 20.7.19B4) § 34.1.28B1. ime pi śramaṇakā āgacchiya madhye niṣaṇṇāḥ (≒ § 34.2.28B2, § 35.1.28B7, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.2.29B2, § 37.1.29B7) § 41.5.34A2. ime itikitikāyaputrāḥ śramaṇakāḥ grāmānte iryāpathaṃ ṭhapayanti, nirddhāvitā ca bhavanti vikopenti § 41.5.34A2. ayaṃ śramaṇako iryāpathaṃ vikopayiṣyati usw. śravaṇa~ ⇒ darśana-śravaṇa-patha~, dharmma-śravaṇa~ śravaṇika~ ⇒ dharmma-śravaṇika~ śrāddha~ (BHS, SWTF) “gläubig, vertrauensvoll, respektvoll”; vgl. Pā. saddha ⇒ a-śrāddha~, a- śrāddha-kula~, śrāddhaka~ § 4.17.5B4. istri pi peśalā bhavatu śrāddhā bhavatu vratānugā (vs) § 4.17.5B4. puruṣo pi peśalo bhavatu śrāddho bhavatu vratānugo (vs) § 11.1.10B3. ye te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ śraddhayā-d-āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ ... § 12.1.11A6. ye ca te śrāddhāḥ kulaputrāḥ ... āgārād anagārikāṃ pravrajitāḥ § 40.8.33A2. atha dāni śrāddho bhikṣur bhavati, tato eva śrīkuṇḍikāṃ pūreti, anāpattiḥ śrāddhaka~#, śraddhaka~# “respektvoll, Wohlwollen zeigend” ⇒ śrāddha~ § 53.9.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣu śrāddhako bhavati, āha “suvihita, āsa tvaṃ, ahaṃ vārayiṣyan” ti, dātavyo § 54.14.46B1. atha dāni śraddhako bhikṣur bhavati, āha “sagotrīmātā, āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣyāmi”, dātavyā § 55.8.47A1. atha dāni śrāddhako bhikṣur bhavati, āha “sagotrīmātā, āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣyan” ti, dātavyaṃ śrāddha-vihārin~#, śrāddhe-vihārin~# “ein vertrauensvoller (gemeinsam mit seinem Erzieher wohnender) Schüler” (śrāddha- ∈ saddhaṃ < Skt. sārdhaṃ); vgl. BHS. sārdhaṃ-vihārin, Pā. saddhiṃ-vihārin ☞ § 7.3, Anm. 1 ⇒ śraddhe-vihārin~, sār(d)dhe-vihārin~, sārddhe- vihārika~ § 7.3.8B1. tena hi evaṃ upādhyāyena śrāddhavihāresmiṃ (Loc. sg.) pratipadyitavyaṃ. kin ti dāni upādhyāyena śraddhevihāresmiṃ (Loc. sg.) pratipadyitavyaṃ? § 7.4.8B1. upādhyāyena tāva śrāddhevihāriṃ upasaṃpādentakenaỿva ... śrānta~ “ermüdet” ⇒ √śram § 29.4.24B1. bhikṣu paryaṅkena niṣaṇṇo bhavati, śrānto bhavati, parvvāṇi āmilāyanti, ... § 31.28.26B3. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. mā śrāntā? mā klāntā? § 32.11.27B4. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. mâsi śrānto? mâsi klānto? śrāmaṇera~ (BHS, SWTF) “Novize” ⇒ śrāmaṇeraka~ § 12.13.12A1. na kṣamati śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ vihāra uddiśituṃ. atha dāni teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā jalpanti “uddiśatha ...” tato śrāmaṇerakāṇāṃ pi vihārakā uddiśitavyā § 31.19.26A3. ye tāye ārthāye bhavanti, ārāmikā śrāmaṇero vā yasya oheyyako, so vaktavyo “dvāraṃ rakṣanto āsā” § 39.15.31B3. atha dāni vikāle āgacchanti, na vâgacchanti, aparejjukāto śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ dātavyaṃ § 39.27.32A5. atha dāni vikāle āgatā bhavanti, na vā āgacchanti, aparejjukāto śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ vā ārāmikānām vā dātavyo śrāmaṇeraka~ (BHS, SWTF) “Novize” ⇒ śrāmaṇera~ § 12.13.12A1. na kṣamati śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ vihāra uddiśituṃ. atha dāni teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā jalpanti “uddiśatha ...” tato śrāmaṇerakāṇāṃ pi vihārakā uddiśitavyā śrāmaṇerī~ ⇒ pāpa-śrāmaṇerī~ śrāmaṇya~ (BHS, SWTF) “Asketentum, Asketenwürde”; vgl. Pā. sāmañña ☞ § 18.2, Anm. 4 zu kuto eṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ “Wo ist ihre Asketenwürde?” 509  § 18.2.15B1. jano dāni odhyāyati “ ... naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ. kuto eṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ?” § 20.6.19B3. naṣṭaṃ bhraṣṭaṃ. kuto imeṣāṃ śrāmaṇyaṃ? (=
 § 20.7.19B4, § 34.1.28B1, § 34.2.28B2, § 35.1.29A1, § 35.2.29A2, § 36.1.29A7, § 36.2.29B2, § 37.1.29B7, § 37.2.30A1, § 51.1.44A1; ≒ § 19.2.17B5) śrāvaka~ (BHS, SWTF)  “Hörer, Schüler” § 21.1.20A7. kacci me śrāvakāḥ na karmmārāmāḥ na karmmaratāḥ na karmmārāmatānu- yogam anuyuktā viharanti (≒ § 11.1.10B2, § 12.1.11A5) § 42.1.36A2. anujānātu bhagavān śrāvakānāṃ jentākaṃ Śrāvastī~ § 1.1.1B1. bhagavān Śrāvastyām viharati (= § 3.1.3A6, § 20.1.19A4, § 20.4.19A7, § 20.6.19B2, § 20.9.19B5, § 21.1.20A6, § 40.1.32B2 usw.) § 62.1.49B1. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tad artham abhisambhāvayitvā Śrāvastyāṃ viharati śāstā devānāñ ca manuṣyāṇāñ ca § 40.8.33A1. gotrasthaṃ pānīyaṃ bhavati, yathā Pāṭaliputre Śoṇapānīyaṃ, ... Śrāvastyāṃ Petaleyaṃ √śri ⇒ apā-śraya-, niśrāya, prapāta-niśrita~ śrī-kuṇḍikā~#, śiri-kuṇḍikā~# wörtl. “Glückstopf”, konkrete Bedeutung nicht klar ☞ § 40.7, Anm. 1 § 40.7.32B7. paridhovanīyena pānīyena śirikuṇḍikā pūrayitavyā § 40.8.33A2. atha dāni śrāddho bhikṣur bhavati, tato eva śrīkuṇḍikāṃ pūreti, anāpattiḥ √śru ⇒ śruta~ § 1.12.2A5. yadi tāva vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ śrotukāmā bhavanti, ... § 1.12.2A6. atha dāni ... bhikṣū ca na vistareṇa prātimokṣasūtraṃ śrotukāmā bhavanti, ... (≒ § 2.10.3A3) § 2.10.3A4. bhikṣū ca sukhopaviṣṭā bhavanti vistareṇa śrotukāmā § 3.11.4A3. bhikṣū vā ... sukhopaviṣṭā bhavanti, vistareṇa śrotukāmā bhavanti śruta~ ⇒ bahu-śruta~ § 18.2.15B1. etaṃ prakaraṇaṃ bhikṣūhi śrutaṃ (= § 19.2.17B5, § 19.6.18A1, § 20.1. 19A6, § 40.1.32B3, § 45.1.39B4, § 46.1.40A4, § 47.1.40B4, § 48.1.41A4 usw.) -śrutika~ ⇒ abhīkṣṇa-śrutika~ śreya-tara~ (BHS)  “glücklicher”; vgl. Pā. seyyatara § 4.15.5B2. ato śreyataro bhotu kumāro kulavarddhano (vs) § 6.13.8A4. ato śreyataro bhava{ṃ}tu (lies: bhotu) kumāro kulavarddhano (vs) śreyas § 31.35.27A2. nâpi kṣamati tehi nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho prayāto. gacchantu āyuṣmanto. gataṃ mārggasya śreyo (☞ § 31.35, Anm. 3)” § 41.19.35A3. ācāraṃ śikṣitaṃ śreyo anācāraṃ na śikṣitaṃ (vs) śreṣṭha~ § 35.6.29A6. brāhmaṇa nāma yūyaṃ agro varṇṇo jyeṣṭho varṇṇo śreṣṭho varṇṇo śreṣṭhāyatana~# (°ṣṭha-āya°) “die vorzüglichste Stätte” ☞ § 4.20, Anm. 3 § 4.20.6A3. so ’yaṃ śreṣṭhāyatane pratiṣṭhito pātrasaṃhṛto lābho (vs) śreṣṭhin~ § 41.13.34B2. kadāci dāni so śreṣṭhi (Nom. sg.) aparehiṃ (Loc. sg.) jñātiśāle nimantritako gato varṣārātrikaṃ § 41.13.34B3. so dāni dārako śreṣṭhinā saparivāreṇa gatena ... rakṣamāṇo āsati śreṣṭhika~ (BHS) “reicher Kaufmann, Gildemeister” § 41.13.34B2. tasya dāni śreṣṭhikasya kulaputrakā gṛhaṃ ocaranti śrotāpattiphalaṃ für srotāpattiphalaṃ : § 41.10.34A7 śleṣmaka~ ⇒ vāta-pitta-śleṣmaka~ śleṣmika~ (BHS) “verschleimt”; vgl. Skt. ślaiṣmika, Pā. semhika ☞ § 24.7, Anm. 2 ⇒ vāta-pitta-ś° § 24.7.22A4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ divāvihāraṃ gato caṃkramati, śleṣmiko bhikṣu bhavati, ito ca <ito ca> cchorayanto caṃkramati, vinayātikramam āsādayati śv / sv ⇒ ś / s § 42.28.37B5. visvastā für viśvastā √śvas ⇒ u-śvāsita~, vi-śvasta~, sam-ā-śvāsaya- 510 śvāna~ “Hund” ⇒ śunakha~ § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti § 49.5.42B1. anekāye ... caṇḍo vā śvāno caṇḍo vā goṇo āgaccheya śveta-maya~# “Quark” ☞ § 62.2, Anm. 3 § 62.2.49B5. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena saktukāṃ kulmāṣāṃ ca (lies: vā?) mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayanti § 62.2.49B5. yaṃ kālaṃ śuṣkā bhavanti, tato śvetamayena yeva khādanti, bilvāni khādanti, vātakopanāni phalāni khādanti, kalāyā satilapallavaṃ khādanti § 62.4.49B7. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktukān vā mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayitvā śvetamayena yeva khādituṃ § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu<ṃ> mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ śveta-varṇṇā~ (BHS) “weiße Farbe; Kreide”; vgl. Schmidt, Nachtr. s.v. ☞ § 14.5, Anm. 4 § 14.5.13A5. gomayaśāṭo dātavyo, paribhāṇḍaṃ karttavyaṃ, śvetavarṇṇā dātavyā § 14.11.13B1. evaṃ hy eva sarvvaṃ pratisaṃskāro karttavyaḥ yāva śvetavarṇṇā dātavyā Ṣ ṣ / kh ⇒ kh / ṣ ṣ / th ⇒ th / ṣ ṣ / dh ⇒ dh / ṣ ṣ/p ⇒ p/ṣ ṣ/y ⇒ y/ṣ ṣ/ś ⇒ ś/ṣ ṣ/s: § 1.9.2A1. cāreṣi für vāresi § 1.9.2A1. uddiśeṣi für uddiśesi § 3.8.3B7. ādiśeṣi für ādiśesi § 32.2.27A6. karoṣi für °osi § 43.13.38B1. māṣavārika~ für māsavārika~ § 62.2.49B5. kulmāsa~ für kulmāṣa~ ṣaṭ-pañca~ “sechs- oder fünf(mal)” § 23.4.4.21B1. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi ṣaṭ{a}pañca gatāgatāṃ deti, anāpattiḥ ṣaḍ-āyatana~ (BHS, SWTF) “die sechs "Grundlagen", i.e. die sechs Sinnesvermögen”; vgl. SWTF IV 238a, BHSD, s.v. āyatana; Pā. saḷāyatana; DP I 320a, āyatana 3. “sphere of perception, the sense-organs (including mind) and their objects” § 51.6.44A2. atha khalu ṣaḍāyatanaṃ manasikarentena sthātavyaṃ. “cakṣur anityā yāva mano anityan.” ti sthātavyaṃ § 54.13.46B1. atha khalu ṣaḍāya<ta>na manasikarentena vāretavyā § 55.7.47A1. atha khalu ṣaḍāyatana manasikarentena āsitavyaṃ (für vāretavyaṃ?) ṣaḍāyana für ṣaḍāyatana : § 54.13.46B1 ṣaḍ-varggika~ (BHS, SWTF) “die Gruppe der sechs (boshaften Mönche)” ☞ § 7.1, Anm. 2 § 7.1.8A5. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā ṣaḍvarggikāś ca ... (≒ § 41.1.33B2) § 29.1.24A6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ... (= § 26.1.23A4, § 31.1.25A7, § 33.1. 27B6, § 42.2.36A2, § 45.1.39B3, § 46.1.40A3, § 54.3.46A2 usw.) § 31.1.25B1. tehi dāṇi āyuṣmantehi ṣaḍvarggikehi āgantukā dṛṣṭāḥ § 41.2.33B4. śabdāpayatha NandanOpanandanāṃ ṣaḍvarggikāṃ ca § 41.2.33B5. NandanOpanandanā ṣaḍvarggikā ca (= § 41.2.33B6) § 42.4.36A6. śabdāpayatha ṣaḍvarggikāṃ (= § 45.2.39B4); § 46.2.40A4. śabdāpayatha ṣaḍvarggikān (= § 29.2.24A6, § 62.3.49B7 usw.) § 29.2.24A7. bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikā (Voc); § 42.4.36A6. bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikāḥ (Voc.) (= § 42.4.36A7, § 42.5.36A7, § 45.2.39B4, § 46.2.40A5 usw.) 511  usw. ṣaṣṭha~ § 35.6.29A6. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti Uddāna (VI).45A1. ṣaṣṭho varggaḥ ṣoḍaśa~ § 20.5.19B2. tena hi anujānāmi dantakāṣṭhaṃ prāmāṇikaṃ mahāntaṃ ṣoḍaśāṅgulaṃ § 20.8.19B4. jyeṣṭhaṃ nāma ṣoḍaśāṅgulāni madhyamaṃ dvādaśāṅgulāni kanīyasam aṣṭāṅgulāni ṣṭ / pt ⇒ pt / ṣṭ ṣṭ / ṣṭh : § 29.7.24B4. pṛṣṭato für pṛṣṭhato § 35.6.29A6. jyeṣṭo für °ṣṭho ṣy / yy ⇒ y / ṣ ṣy / vy ⇒ vy / ṣy S s / kh ⇒ kh / s s / th ⇒ th / s s/m ⇒ m/s s/ṣ ⇒ ṣ/s sa-upānaha~ ⇒ sopānaha~ saṃ / sā ⇒ abhi-sā-hara-, sā-hara-; vgl. BHSG § 3.3; v. Hinüber 2001: § 112, § 283 saṃ-yata~ § 4.18.5B7. śīlavā tatra bhojeyā saṃyatāṃ brahmacāriṇo (vs) saṃyama~ ⇒ vasti-saṃyama~ saṃ-rādhaya- “erfreuen” ⇒ saṃ-pra-harṣaya- § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati. bahukarā yūyaṃ bhāraṃ vahatha. ... kulāni prasādīyantî”ti. evaṃ saṃrādhayitavyāḥ § 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā “durāvāsakāni āraṇyakāni śeyyāsanāni ...” tti evaṃ saṃrādhiya (Hs. °rāviya) gantavyaṃ saṃrāviya für °rādhiya : § 39.29.32B1 *saṃ-vaṭṭaya- “zusammenfalten, zusammenrollen”; < Skt. saṃvartayati (“zusammenrollen”); vgl. Pkt. saṃvaṭṭei (“einwickeln, umhüllen” ☞ § 21.6, Anm. 2 ⇒ vaṭṭa- § 21.6.20B3. kaṭhinaṃ samvaṭ<ṭ>iyāṇaṃ (Hs. savvaṭi°) bhittīye dve kīlakā nikhaniya rajjue bandhiya tahiṃ ukkacayitavyaṃ samvatsarika~ “jährlich” § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” saṃ-varddhaya- ⇒ varddhaya- § 20.1.19A6. evaṃ ca dāni tvaṃ mama āmrapotakaṃ ghaṭasiktakaṃ ekaputrakaṃ viya saṃvarddhita{vya}ṃ uppāḍiya dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādasi saṃ-√vas § 14.15.13B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ udakadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na saṃvasati, ... saṃ-√vid “sich zusammenfinden, sich versammeln” § 14.13.13B2. sāmagrīye saṃviditvā tahiṃ ekameko vâ<ṃ>śaśo (Hs. vâśamo) dātavyo dve vā dve vā trayo vā trayo vā saṃviditena “nachdem man sich abgemeldet hat”# ⇒ pratisaṃviditena, a-pratisaṃviditena, aśabdakarṇṇikāye § 19.39.19A2. na dāni apratisaṃviditena uvvattitavyaṃ ... atha khalu saṃviditena uvvattitavyaṃ saṃ-vi-√bhaj ⇒ saṃvibhāga~ § 31.11.25B7. atha dāni ubhaṃḍito bhavati, saṃvibhajitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ 512  § 31.15.26A1. atha dāni ubbhaṃḍito, saṃvibhajitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 49.4.42A6~7. yo na pratibalo tasya ca ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajituṃ ... yo pratibalo tasya ca ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajituṃ § 49.6.42B2. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati tasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvibhajayituṃ, praveśayitavyo § 49.7.42B4. yadi tāva pratibalo bhavati paścācchramaṇasya ātmano ca vṛttiṃ saṃvi- bhajitu<ṃ> ... § 52.1.44B1. teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā snehaṃ sthapenti, khajjakhaṇḍakāni thapenti paśyanti “yaṃ kālam āgatā bhavanti, tato teṣāṃ saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ” § 52.1.44B1. yaṃ kālaṃ āgatā bhaviṣyanti, tato saṃvibhajiṣyāmaḥ § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... amṛtam analpakena devamanuṣyāṃ saṃvibhajanto, prāṇikoṭī- niyutaśatasahasrāṇi amṛtam anuprāpayanto, ... saṃvibhāga~ ⇒ saṃ-vi-√bhaj § 31.31.26B6. tato yadi nevāsikānāṃ vyañjanāni bhavanti, khajjakāni bhavanti, tato yadi snehakā vā bhavanti, tehi āgantukānāṃ samvibhāgo karttavyo § 52.4.44B3. śaktukā stokā bhavanti, śaktukā dātavyā, sneho dātavyo, khajjakhaṇḍakānaṃ saṃvibhāgo karttavyo saṃ-vṛta~ ⇒ su-saṃvṛta~ § 4.17.5B5. ubhau śraddhāya sampannā ubhau śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) § 4.17.5B5. tām eva bhāryāṃ vareyā yâsyā śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) saṃvyavahāraka~ ⇒ saṃgha-saṃvyavahāraka~ saṃvyupaśāntaṃ wohl für suvyu° : § 38.8.30B3 ☞ § 38.8(Text), Anm. 5 saṃ-sakka-# “hineinkriechen”; vgl. BHS. avasakkati, osakkati, -sakkati; Pā. o-sakkati ☞ § 22.2, Anm. 3 § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī ... tathā karttavyā, yathā dīrghako na saṃsakkati saṃsargga-doṣa~# “Sünde durch den Umgang (mit anderen Menschen)” § 8.13.9B3. vaktavyaṃ “mā gṛhṇa. mā saṃsarggadoṣo bhaviṣyatî”ti saṃsāra~ ⇒ anavarāgra-jāti-jarā-maraṇa-saṃsāra-kāntāra-naraka-vidurgga~ saṃ-sāraya- “verschieben” § 3.5.3B3. yo dāni bhavati māsavāriko vā pakṣavāriko tena ekam ekaṃ saṃsārayitavyaṃ devasikaṃ saṃstaraṇa~ “Matte” ⇒ astaraṇa~, astaraṇika~, astarikā~, āstaraṇa~ § 12.16.12A3. navakānāṃ saṃstaraṇā prajñāpayitavyāḥ § 12.16.12A3. vṛddhehi saṃstaraṇe pratipadyitavyaṃ saṃ-hṛta~ ⇒ pātra-saṃhṛta~, sā-haṭa~ sakalikāya für saṃka° : § 60.5.48B7 sa-kāle#, sa-kālena# “zur rechten Zeit, rechtzeitig”; vgl. Skt. sa-kālam ⇒ kāle, deśa-kāla~, vi- kāla~ § 39.15.31B3. yadi tāvat sakāle āgacchanti, bhuñjanāya dātavyo. atha dāni vikāle āgacchanti, na vâgacchanti, aparejjukāto śrāmaṇerāṇāṃ dātavyaṃ; vgl. § 39.27. 32A4. yadi tāva kāle āgacchanti, bhuñjanāye dātavyaṃ ... § 50.7.43B3. yadi jāna{n}ti śakyaṃ sakālena saṃbhāvayituṃ, gantavyaṃ § 50.7.43B3. upakaṭṭho kālo antāntiko. na śakyaṃ sakāle saṃbhāvayituṃ sakka- ⇒ saṃ-sakka- saktu~, śaktu~ “gröblich gemahlenes Korn; Grieß” ⇒ saktuka~ § 13.17.13A1. vihāro ... dhūpetavyo kuṣṭhena bhurjena vā saktuhi vā § 62.4.50A1. atha dāni bhikṣu piṇḍacāram aṇṭhanto ... śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktu (Acc. pl.; vgl. BHSG § 12.61; lies: śaktu<ṃ>?) mardditakān labhati vātakopakāni vā phalāni, kiñ câpi khādeti, anāpattiḥ saktuka~ (BHS), śaktuka~ (BHS) “Gerstenbrei”; vgl. Skt. saktu, AMg. sattuga ☞ § 62.2, Anm. 1 ⇒ saktu~ § 52.4.44B3. śaktukā stokā bhavanti, śaktukā dātavyā, sneho dātavyo, khajjakhaṇḍakānaṃ saṃvibhāgo karttavyo § 62.2.49B5. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena 513  saktukāṃ kulmāṣāṃ ca (lies: vā?) mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayanti § 62.4.49B7. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa śvetamayena kulmāṣān vā śaktukān vā mardiyāṇaṃ ātape śoṣayitvā śvetamayena yeva khādituṃ sagotrīmātā# “Bruder!” (?) (< “aus derselben Sippe und Mutter stammend” [*sa-gotrin + sa-mātṛ?]) ☞ § 42.25, Anm. 1 § 42.25.37B3. sagotrīmātā (Hs. sugotrī°), gacchatha yūyaṃ. nâhaṃ snāpayiṣyāmi § 54.14.46B1. atha dāni śraddhako bhikṣur bhavati, āha “sagotrīmātā, āsa tvaṃ. ahaṃ vārayiṣyāmi”, dātavyā (≒ § 55.8.47A1) sa-gaurava~ “respektvoll”; vgl. SWTF IV 258a § 42.29.37B6. anyonyasya sagauravehi snāyitavyaṃ saṃkacchikā~ (Pā) Ein Gewand, welches unter den drei Gewändern getragen wird und zur Bedeckung des Oberkörpers zwischen Schultern und Nabel dient. Ursprünglich war es ein Gewand für eine Nonne, später trugen es aber auch Mönche.; vgl. BHS. saṃkakṣikā ☞ § 48.7, Anm. 7 § 48.6.41B1. atha khalu leṅkaṭakhaṇḍena rajoharaṇakena vā prasphoṭiya ’ka saṃkacchikāṃ (Hs. saṃkalikāṃ) prajñapiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. antamasato saṃkacchikâpi skandhe datvā apāśrayitavyaṃ saṃkara~ “Abfall, Kehricht” ⇒ saṃkāra~ § 18.17.16A5. kiṃcâpi tahiṃ apalekhām vā prakṣipati saṃkaraṃ vā anāpattiḥ saṃkalikā~ (SWTF) “Kette”; vgl. Pā. saṅkhalikā, Skt. śṛṅkhalā, BHS. śaṅkalā ☞ § 60.5, Anm. 2 ⇒ saṃkacchikā~ § 60.5.48B6. nâpi kṣamati ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa saṃkalikāya vā śarkkarakāya vā “kharakaca kharakaca” tti kaṇḍūyituṃ § 60.5.48B7. kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ saṃkāra~ (BHS, SWTF) “Abfall, Kehricht” ⇒ saṃkara~ § 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa ... kheṭaṃ vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā vighaso vā saṃkāro vā anyam vā aprayat{t}aṃ grahetuṃ § 44.10.39B1. na kṣamati cīvareṇa ... saṃkāraṃ vā ujjhituṃ saṃkula-jāta~# “voller Wirren”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. -jāta § 4.19.6A2. dakṣiṇā paścimā ca sa sarvvo ca loko saṃkulajāto (vs) saṃ-kṣipta~ § 1.2.1B2. so dāni paścād āgatvā saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikān dharmmān uddeśiyāṇa ... § 1.12.2A6. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikāṃ dharmmāṃ uddiśiyānaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇa- śrutikāye gāthāye ca § 2.10.3A3. saṃkṣiptena catvāri pārājikā uddiśitavyaṃ śiṣṭakaṃ abhīkṣṇaśrutikāye gāthāyo ca § 4.2.4A6. so dāṇi paścād āgacchiyāṇa bhuṃjiyāṇa saṃkṣiptena dakṣiṇām ādiśiya na parikathāṃ karoti § 42.7.36B2. vātapānīyā vīthī karttavyā abhyantare viśālā bāhirato saṃkṣiptā (Hs. saṃdyiptā) § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... heṣṭhato viśālā hi upari saṃkṣiptā saṃkṣipta-vistara-prabheda~# “kurze und/oder ausführliche Form” § 7.5.8B3. abhivinayo nāma prātimokṣo saṃkṣiptavistaraprabhedena saṃga~ ⇒ śītalaka-saṃgena saṃgraha~ “Freundlichkeit” § 52.4.44B3. yadi tāva labdhaṃ bhavati, upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā saṃgraho karttavyo. ... śaktukā dātavyā, sneho dātavyo, khajjakhaṇḍakānaṃ saṃvibhāgo karttavyo saṃgraho für sugraho : § 38.4.30A7 ☞ § 38.4(Text), Anm. 2 saṃgha~ ⇒ bhikṣu-saṃgha~, sarvva-saṃgha~ § 1.1.1B1. saṃghasya dāni poṣadho (= § 2.1.2A7) § 1.3.1B3. evaṃ nāma saṃghasya poṣadho § 1.7.1B5. yadi dāni na gato saṃgho bhavati ... 514  § 4.1.4A5. saṃghasya dāni bāhirakaṃ bhaktaṃ (= § 4.3.4B1, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4; ≒ § 5.3.6A6) § 4.5.4B2. eṣo dāni koci saṃghaṃ bhaktena śuvetanāya nimantreti, ... (≒ § 6.5.7B1) § 19.23.18B2. atha dāni saṃghe praśvāsaghaṭo na bhavati § 27.6.23B6. na kṣamati ... saṃghaṃ vā upādhyāyācāryam vā vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ § 28.4.24A3. nâpi kṣamati ... saṃghaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ § 29.7.24B4. na kṣamati ... saṃgham vā pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ § 30.11.25A5. na kṣamati ... saṃghaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śeyyāṃ kalpayituṃ § 31.7.25B5. saṃghasya phāsuvihāraṃ upadahatha pādatailena guḍapānīyena pratiśrayeṇa purebhaktikena § 31.8.25B6. praviśiya yācitvā saṃghasya yathāsukhaparibhogaṃ ... § 38.2.30A5. vaktavyaṃ “upādhyāyācāryā! saṃghasya madhye me kiñcit kāryaṃ. āllīyāmi mā allīyāmi?” tti § 38.6.30B2. kasya tvaṃ ... kalahajāto bhaṇḍanajāto vigrahavivādāpanno viharanto saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? § 38.8.30B3. saṃghena tat kāryaṃ dharmmeṇa vinayena śāstuḥ śāsanena vyupaśamayi- tavyaṃ § 38.8.30B4. punaḥ karmmāya utkhoṭayasi puno câsmaparṣaṃ upasaṃkramesi. saṃgho te uttari upaparīkṣiṣyati § 39.9.31A5. yadi koci upāsako saṃghaṃ bhaktena nimantrayati § 42.2.36A2. saṃghasya dāni jentāko § 42.4.36A6. saṃghasya jentāko § 43.3.38A3. etaṃ dāni saṃghasya anugraho bhavati § 43.3.38A3. tena saṃghasya anugraho sādhayitavyo § 43.12.38B1. evaṃ yat kiñcit saṃghasya bhāṇḍaṃ ... pratisāmetavyaṃ § 46.6.40B1. saṃghasya uṭṭhānakāni bhavanti usw. saṃ-ghaṭṭe-# “anstoßen”; < Skt. saṃghaṭṭayati § 54.9.46A5. yadi vāmena sthitako bhavati, dakṣiṇena jānukena (Hs. °kehi) saṃghaṭṭe- tavyo saṃgha-navaka~# “der jüngste Mönch in der Gemeinde” ☞ § 62.6, Anm. 4 ⇒ navakānta~ § 62.6.50A3. nâyaṃ kṣamati saṃghanavakena yena saṃghasthaviro tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipituṃ saṃgha-madhye (SWTF) “in der Mitte der Mönchsgemeinde, in der Mönchsgemeinde” § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: ... kathaṃ saṃghamadhye pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 9.1.9B5) § 20.14.20A2. nâpi kṣamati upasthānaśālāyām vā agniśālāyām vā bhaktaśālāyām vā kalpiyaśālāyām vā kalpikakuṭikāyām vā saṃghamadhye ... dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 27.7.23B7. nâpi kṣamati “saṃghamadhye mā tiṣṭha” ti ukto tiṣṭhituṃ § 28.6.24A4. saṃghamadhye vā caṃkramati, “mā caṃkramāhî”ti uktena na caṃkrami- tavyaṃ § 29.8.24B5. nâpi kṣamati “saṃghamadhye mā niṣīda” tti uktena samānena niṣīdituṃ § 38.8.30B3. tena kāryaṃ saṃghamadhye ārocayitavyaṃ § 57.9.47B6. nâpi kṣamati saṃghamadhye bhaktāgre tarpaṇāgre vā samīcīyaṃ vā sa- upānahena niṣīdituṃ saṃgha-vigraha~# “das Gebiet der Ordensgemeinde” ☞ § 19.20, Anm. 1 ⇒ stūpa-vigraha~, stūpābhigṛha, saṃghābhigṛha~ § 19.20.18B1. tato pi na kṣamati so tahiṃ cchorayituṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣintasya (für varṣante?) stūpavigrahaṃ vā saṃghavigrahaṃ vā gacchati § 20.12.19B7. na kṣamati stūpavigrahe vā saṃghavigrahe vā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ § 20.12.20A1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ glāno bhavati ..., kiñ câpi saṃghavigrahe dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, anāpattiḥ saṃgha-saṃvyavahāraka~# “der Oberaufseher der Gemeinde”? ☞ § 42.28, Anm. 2 § 42.28.37B5. saṃghasaṃvyavahārako vā dānapati vā jalpati “viśvastā bhadantā 515  snāyantu” tti saṃgha-sthavira~ (SWTF) “der Gemeindeälteste”; vgl. Pā. saṅgha-thera § 1.1.1B1. āyuṣmāṃ Nandano saṃghasthaviro. Upanandano dvitīyasthaviro (= § 2.1.2B1, § 5.1.6A4, § 6.1.7A4) § 1.1.1B1. bhikṣū āhaṃsu “saṃghasthaviro nâgacchati” (≒ § 4.1.4A6) § 1.2.1B2. navakā bhikṣū pṛcchanti: “āyuṣmānn, āgato saṃghasthaviro?” (≒ § 4.2.4A7) § 1.2.1B3. te pi navakā bhikṣū āhaṃsu “naỿva saṃghasthavirasya āgatiḥ prajñāyate na gatiḥ” § 1.4.1B4. tena hi evaṃ saṃghasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 1.6.1B5. saṃghasthavireṇa pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa svādhyāyitavyāni § 1.7.1B6. yadi dāni na gato saṃgho bhavati saṃghasthavireṇa yahiṃ bhaviṣyati tahiṃ ārocayitavyaṃ § 1.9.1B7. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ, ko śalākāṃ vārayiṣyati ... § 1.14.2A7. evaṃ saṃghasthavireṇa poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 2.1.2B1. saṃghasthaviro āgato (= § 5.1.6A4, § 5.3.6A6, § 6.1.7A4) § 2.11.3A4. saṃghasthaviro na pratibalo bhavati dvitīyasthavireṇa adhyeṣitavyaṃ § 12.12.11B7. taṃ likhitaṃ saṃghasthavirasya allīpitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman ...” § 38.5.30A7. ye (?; Hs. yā) vṛddhatarakā yāvad vṛddhāntaṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ, saṃghasthaviro pṛcchitavyo “asukaṃ me kāryaṃ jalpāmi?” tti § 38.6.30B1. saṃghasthavireṇa jānitavyaṃ. yadi tāva tasya dugraho bhavati, ... § 38.7.30B2. saṃghasthavireṇa vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, jalpatha ...” ti § 62.6.50A3. nâyaṃ kṣamati saṃghanavakena yena saṃghasthaviro tena phiccakaṃ utkṣipituṃ Antaroddāna 50B2. saṃghasthaviro ca śayyāsana kaṭhina āgantukā ca usw. saṃghāṭī~ (BHS, SWTF) “Obergewand” § 41.6.34A3. saṃghāṭīṃ prasphoṭiya sāhariya abhyantareṇa dviguṇikāṃ kariya ... saṃghāṭīkariya für saṃpuṭīkariya : § 41.29.35B5 saṃghāṭī-pātra-cīvara-dhāraṇa~ (BHS[Mvu, LV, Śikṣ]; s. BHSD, s.v. saṃghāṭī) “das Tragen des Obergewandes, der Almosenschale und des Gewandes”; vgl. SWTF IV 266b, saṃghāṭī- cīvara-pātra-dhāraṇa § 7.1.8A6. na jānanti: ... kathaṃ saṃghāṭīpātracīvaradhāraṇe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 9.1. 9B5; ≒ § 7.2.8A7, § 9.2.9B6) § 41.4.34A1. prāsādikena ... ālokitavilokitena sammiñjitaprasāritena saṃghāṭīpātra- cīvaradhāraṇena saṃghābhigṛha~# (saṃgha-abhi°) “das Gebiet der Ordensgemeinde” ☞ § 18.52, Anm. 1 ⇒ saṃgha-vigraha~, cetiyābhigṛha~, stūpābhigṛha~, stūpa-vigraha~ § 18.52.17B1. stūpābhigṛhe vā saṃghābhigṛhe vā paśyati, ujjhitavyaṃ saṃghārāma~ (saṃgha-ār°) (SWTF) “Klosterhain; Kloster” § 18.29.16B5. atha khalu saṃghārāmasya ekahiṃ ante upaviśitavyaṃ § 31.14.26A1. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśantehi puṣkiriṇīyaṃ vā taḍāge vā oghe vā pādāṃ dhovitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 31.20.26A4. saṃghārāmaṃ pradakṣiṇīkarentehi āgantavyaṃ § 31.24.26A7. (nevāsikā ...) saṃpraharṣayitavyā vaktavyā “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyanti” § 39.16.31B4. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 39.17.31B5. grāmāntikā ... saṃrādhayitavyā, vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, ... dharmmadeśanāṃ karetha. saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyantî”ti § 40.16.33B2. atha dāni āsaṃnodako saṃghārāmo bhavati, ... § 49.7.42B5. atha dāni dūragocaro saṃghārāmo bhavati, ... § 50.10.43B5. atha dāni dūragocaro saṃghārāmo bhavati, ... nīhārakapiṇḍapātena ... panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B7. atha dāni dūre saṃghārāmo bhavati, piṇḍapātanīhārakena yatraỿva pānīyaṃ 516  paśyati, tatraỿva bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 53.4.45A3. eṣo dāni saṃghārāmo purimaṃ paścimaṃ prahāṇaṃ pratijāgrīyati, ... § 53.6.45A5. yadi tāva so dvibhūmiko saṃghārāmo bhavati, prathamaṃ tāva sopāna- maggulīye dīpako jālayitavyo sace (BHS, Pā), sacet (BHS), saced (SWTF) “wenn; wenn auch” § 4.17.5B4. istrī pi vidhavā nagnā sace ’syā daśa bhrātaro (vs) § 30.4.25A2. siṃho ... sacet paśyati gātrāṇām anyathātvaṃ, tena bhavati anāttamano sajja~ § 4.8.4B7. yadā sajjaṃ bhaveya, tato mā paṭisaresi § 39.9.31A6. yadi na sajjaṃ bhavati, na dāni bhaktāgraṃ avaṣṭabhayitavyo āsayitavyaṃ sajjanako für khajj° : § 60.5.48B7 sajjaya- (Skt), sajje- (BHS, Pā) “zubereiten” ⇒ sejje- § 4.6.4B4. prakṛty’ eva māsavāriko pakṣavāriko vā preṣayitavyo “gaccha jānāhi kiṃ sajjiyatî”ti § 39.11.31A7. atha dāni āraṇyakānāṃ pi nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, pānīyaṃ pariśrāvayitavyaṃ, āsanaprajñapti karttavyā § 39.23.32A2. atha dāni grāmāntikānām api nimantreti, bhaktaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, ... puṣpaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ, gandho sajjayitavyo § 39.18.31B6. atha dāni āraṇyake śeyyāsane grāmāntikānāṃ ca āraṇyakānāñ ca bhaktaṃ sajjīyati, nâpi dāni kṣamati āraṇyakehi pi pratikṛty’ eva ... bhuñjituṃ § 42.11.36B5. kāṣṭhaṃ sejjetavyaṃ, bhaṇḍā sajjayitavyā, ghaṭā vā sajjetavyā kuṇḍā <vā> § 53.4.45A4. dīpavārikā uddiśitavyā ... tehi prakṛty’ eva tāva dīpavarttikāyo varttitavyāyo, dīpakoṭikāni sajjayitavyāni, tailaṃ sajjayitavyaṃ saṃca wohl für sarvaṃ bzw. sarvvaṃ : § 44.1.38B7 saṃ-caya- “sammeln” ⇒ √ci § 42.28.37B5. yadi tāva alpaṃ tailaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ bhavati, mitakaṃ dātavyaṃ, tailaṃ saṃcayitavyaṃ (Hs. maṃcayi°) saṃjña~# “Verabredung”; vgl. pw, s.v. saṃjñā “Einverständnis” § 4.8.4B7. yadi tāva saṃjñam bhavati, mahanto ca kālo bhavati, ... saṃjñā~ ⇒ utthāna-saṃjñā~, hasta-saṃjñā~ sat~ ⇒ samāna~ § 41.19.35A3. corehi gṛhīto saṃto (zur Verwendung des p.präs mit p.pt., vgl. Jacobi 1886: LXV, § 112; Bollée 2002: 35) mukto ācārakāraṇāt (vs) § 41.19.35A4. raudrā lohitapāṇī caurā tuṣyanti tādṛśā santā (vs) satatam “immer” § 41.19.35A3. tasmān nareṇa satataṃ ācāraguṇena bhavitavyaṃ (vs) sa-tila-pallava~# “zusammen mit Sesamsprossen”? § 62.2.49B5. tato śvetamayena yeva khādanti, bilvāni khādanti, vātakopanāni phalāni khādanti, kalāyā satilapallavaṃ khādanti § 62.4.50A1. nâpi kṣamati bilvāni vā madanaphalāni vātakopakāni phalāni khādituṃ kalāyaṃ {vā} satilapallavaṃ vā sat-kṛta~ “geehrt” § 4.18.6A1. bhoja<ne>nā vastupālā satkṛtā pratimānitā (vs) § 62.1.49B1. bhagavān samyaksambuddho ... satkṛto gurukṛto mānitaḥ pūjitaḥ apacāyito sattva~ ⇒ satva~ satya~ ⇒ ārya-satya~, evaṃ nāma § 1.3.1B3. bhagavān āha: “satyaṃ Nandana, evaṃ nāma saṃghasya poṣadho?” ti § 5.3.6A6. satyaṃ Upanandana, evaṃ nāma ...? (= § 49.2.42A4) § 6.3.7A6. satyaṃ bhikṣavo evaṃ nāma ...? § 9.2.9B6. satyaṃ bhikṣavo NandanOpanandanā ...? (= § 20.7.19B3, § 34.2.28B1, § 35.2. 29A1, § 36.2.29B1, § 40.2.32B3, § 47.2.40B4, § 48.2.41A4 et passim) § 20.2.19A6. satyaṃ bhikṣu evaṃ nāma ...? (= § 27.2.23B4, § 28.2.24A2) § 33.2.27B7. satyaṃ bhikṣava ṣaḍvarggikāḥ, evaṃ nāma § 41.2.33B4. satyaṃ bhikṣavo NandanOpanandanā ṣaḍvarggikā ca, evaṃ nāma ... ? 517  § 42.4.36A6. satyaṃ bhikṣavo ṣaḍvarggikāḥ evan nāma ... ? (= § 45.2.39B4, § 46.2.40A5 usw.) usw. satva~ ⇒ sarvva-satva~ § 62.1.49B2. bhagavān ... puṇyabhāgiyāṃ satvāṃ puṇyehi niveśayamāno, phalabhāgiyān satvāṃ phalehi pratiṣṭhāpayamāno, vāsanābhāgīyān satvān vāsanāyām avasthāpaya- māṇo √sad ⇒ ā-sādaya-, ni-ṣīda-, pra-sādaya- sadā § 4.18.6A1. devānukampito poṣo sadā bhadrāṇi paśyati (vs) sad-dharmma~ § 36.6.29B5. ārāgayanti saddharmmaṃ samyaksambuddha{ṃ}deśitaṃ (vs) § 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “ ... na ca vo Māraḥ pāpīyāṃ avatāram adhigamiṣyati saddharmmasya antarddhānāya sa<ṃ>mohāya.” sadhotā für sudhotā : § 16.7.14B2 saṃ-tarpita~ “satt” § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ yadā navakāḥ santarpitā bhavanti ... saṃtānikā~ “Spinnengewebe” (PW); vgl. Pā. santānaka § 13.15.12B6. santānikā śāṭitavyā (Hs. °vyo) § 23.8.21B6. kālena kālaṃ śodhayitavyo, saṃtānikā śāṭayitavyā ... § 23.9.21B7. upāṃsulako vihārako bhavati, ... saṃtānikā (Hs. śatān°) śāṭayitavyā § 42.11.36B5. tehi jentāke santānikā śāṭayitavyā ... santāpa~ ⇒ uṣṇa-santāpa~ saṃ-tāpita~ “geplagt” § 42.3.36A4. te ... uṣṇena ca dhūmena ca saṃtāpitāḥ udakaṃ na labhanti § 42.3.36A5. dhūmena ca uṣṇena ca suṣṭhu saṃtāpitāḥ § 42.3.36A5. te dāni uṣṇena ca santāpitāḥ bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārgganti, na labhanti § 42.4.36A7. ete dāni bhikṣū uṣṇena ca dhūmena ca santāpitā nirddhāvitā bāhyato pi udakaṃ mārggayanti, na labhanti saṃ-darśaya- § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati ... dhārmmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyāḥ samādāpayitavyāḥ samuttejayitavyāḥ ... § 1.13.2A6. dāyakadānapati dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyā samādāpayitavyā ... (≒ § 3.12.4A4) § 2.9.3A2. dhārmyā kathayā saṃdarśiya samādāpiya samuttejiya sampraharṣayitvā udyojayitavyā (= § 3.10.4A2; ≒ § 2.11.3A5) § 4.2.4A7. nâpi dāyakadānapatiṃ dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayati samādāpayati samuttejayati saṃpraharṣayati saṃdūṣitavyaṃ für kaṃḍūyitavyaṃ : § 60.2.48B5 saṃdyiptā für saṃkṣiptā : § 42.7.36B2 sandhi~ § 4.6.4B4. anekāya tahi ... mṛtakam vā bhaveya, sandhi vā cchinno (“eingebrochen”), agnidāho vā rājakulāto vā upadravo § 29.4.24B2. parvvāṇi āmilāyanti, nâpi kṣamati ubhayāni sandhī (“[Knie-]Gelenke”; Acc. pl.) maṭamaṭāye prasārituṃ sandhi-poṣadha~# “Wiedervereinigungs-Poṣadha-Feier” ☞ § 1.5, Anm. 1 § 1.5.1B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko pāñcadaśiko sandhipoṣadho bhaviṣyati? § 1.7.1B6. āyuṣman adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhipoṣadho vā § 2.5.2B4. kim adya saṃghasya poṣadho cāturddaśiko vā pāñcadaśiko vā sandhipoṣadho vā (= § 3.6. 3B4) saṃ-ni-√pat § 17.5.14B7. tato raṇaraṇāye gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiya sarvvasaṃghena sannipatitavyaṃ 518  § 17.5.15A1. atha khalu sarvvehi sannipatitavyaṃ § 34.1.28A7. kṣatriyaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 34.2.28B2) § 35.1.28B7. brāhmaṇaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāmo” ti (≒ § 35.2.29A1) § 36.1.29A7. gṛhapatiparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 36.2.29B1) § 37.1.29B7. tīrthikaparṣā dāni sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti (≒ § 37.2.30A1) § 34.1.28B1. vayaṃ yeva sannipatitā “karmmāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 36.1.29A7. vayaṃ ye<va> tāva sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāma” tti § 37.1.29B7. vayaṃ yeva{ṃ} tāva sannipatitā “kāryāṇi kariṣyāmo” ti § 42.2.36A3. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣu sannipatitāḥ usw. saṃ-ni-viṣṭa~ “gelagert” ⇒ ni-viṣṭa~ § 19.39.19A2. atha dāni sārthe sanniviṣṭe samudācāro bhavati, ekānte uvvattiya karttavyaṃ sanm / samm § 1.8.1B7. sanmārjayitavyaṃ für sammā° (= § 43.11.38B1) § 3.7.3B5. sanmārjitavya~ für sammā° (= § 8.9.9A6) § 29.4.24B2. sanmiñjiya für sammi° (= § 61.5.49A5) § 42.31.37B7. sanmārjiya für sammā° (= § 44.9.39A7) § 41.4.34A1. sanmiñjitaprasāritena für sammi° sa-parivāra~ ⇒ parivāra~ sapta~ Antaroddāna 50B2. saṃghasthaviro ca śayyāsana kaṭhina āgantukā ca āraṇyakā nevāsikā (lies: nivāsanaṃ?) ca pradīpo ca sapta varggāḥ prakāśitāḥ sapta-rātra~ § 4.15.5B1. aṃguṣṭhasnehena yāpaye saptarātraṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A3. aṅguṣṭhasnehena yāpayati saptarātraṃ (vs) sapta-varṣa~ § 41.12.34B2. yaṃ kālaṃ saptavarṣo ’ṣṭavarṣo vā ... sapratiśehi für sapratīśehi : § 42.29.37B6 sa-pratīśa~ (BHS, SWTF) “respektvoll” § 42.29.37B6. atha khalu anyonyasya sagauravehi snāyitavyaṃ, sapratīśehi (Hs. sapratiśehi) snāyitavyaṃ sapramāṇako für saprāṇako : § 24.4.22A2 sa-prasāda~ ⇒ prasāda~ sa-prāṇaka~ ⇒ prāṇaka~ sabrahmacārin~ “Ordensbruder” § 20.4.19B1. te dāni bhikṣū ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacāriṃ (Acc. pl. masc.; vgl. BHSG § 10.166) gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ” § 20.5.19B1. ete bhikṣavo ... paśyanti “mā sabrahmacārī gandhena vyābahiṣyāmaḥ” § 42.5.36B1. metraṃ kāyakarmma ... sabrahmacāriṣu dhruvaṃ pratyupasthāpayitavyaṃ āvi caỿva raho ca sama~ ⇒ grāmāraṇya-sama~ ☞ § 11.5, Anm. 2 zu samaṃ sthāpaya- usw. § 4.12.5A5. vaktavyaṃ “tathā dehi yathā sarvveṣāṃ samaṃ bhavati.” § 11.5.10B6. (śayyāsanaṃ ...) utpādakaṃ bhavati, sam<aṃ th>āpetavyaṃ § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... uppādakā bhavanti samaṃ (Hs. saye) tthapayitavyā § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhikā vā ... uppādakā bhavanti, samaṃ thāpeyitavyā § 12.12.11B7. vihāraṃ yūyaṃ uddiśatha, varṣāvāsikaṃ samaṃ kariṣyāma § 13.13.12B5. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā uppādakā bhavanti, samaṃ (Hs. samāṃ) thapitavyāḥ § 16.9.14B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā uppādakā bhavanti, samaṃ sthāpayitavyā § 17.12.15A6. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... upādakā bhavanti, yo ye paśyati tena yeva samaṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ § 23.8.21B6. mūṣika-ukkiro vâkoṭayitavyo. ukūlanikūlo bhavati, samo karttavyo § 28.5.24A4. nâpi kṣamati samaṃ caṃkramayituṃ § 28.8.24A4. tan na kṣamati purato samaṃ vā gantuṃ. ohayitvā gantavyaṃ 519  § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... satvān ... kṣeme same śive sthale abhaye nirvvāṇe pratiṣṭhāpaya- māno ... samagra~ § 1.1.1B1. dāyakadānapatī pṛcchanti: “ārya kiṃ samagro bhikṣusaṃgho?” (≒ § 4.1.4A6, § 5.1.6A5, § 6.1.7A5, § 6.3.7A7) § 1.1.1B2. samagrasya saṃghasya pādāni vandiṣyāma § 2.1.2B1. samagraṃ (Hs. samayaṃ) ca bhikṣusaṃgham vandiṣyāmaḥ § 2.1.2B1. te dāni pṛcchanti “ārya samagro bhikṣusaṃgho?” (≒ § 3.1.3A6) § 2.1.2B2. samagrasya saṃghasya pādāṃ vandiṣyāmaḥ § 3.1.3A7. {ā}gacchāma samagrasya <saṃghasya> pādāṃ vandiṣyāma § 4.1.4A6. gacchāma samagraṃ bhikṣusaṃghaṃ pariviṣiṣyāmaḥ (≒ § 5.1.6A5, § 5.3.6A7, § 6.3.7A7) § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ sahitānāṃ saṃmodamānānāṃ avivada- mānānāṃ ekoddeśakānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? § 38.8.30B3. sarvve tvaṃ etaṃ kāryaṃ samagreṇa saṃghena suvyupaśāntaṃ sam-anantaram “unmittelbar darauf, gleich danach” § 18.24.16B2. samanantaraṃ upaviśitavyaṃ ca nivasanaṃ oguhitavyaṃ (Hs. niguh°) ca -samantakena (veśikā-samantakena) für °sāmanta° : § 27.4.23B6 samanta-prāvṛta~# “völlig angezogen” § 26.5.23B1. nâpi kṣamati yavāgū ... oguṇṭhikākṛtena vā samaṃtaprāvṛtena vā praticchituṃ samantena “ringsum; vollständig” § 11.8.11A1. samantena sūtreṇa siviyāṇaṃ tato madhyeṇa dīrghasūtrāṇi dātavyāni § 12.10.11B5. te<na> dāni samantena āṣāḍhamāsaṃ śayyāsanaṃ grāhetavyaṃ § 14.6.13A5. samantena vihārasya tāva pratikṛty’ eva agniharaṇī karttavyā ... § 19.4.17B6. udakabhramaṇasya upari thapetavyā sudhāya samaṃtena lipitavyā § 19.4.17B6. tathā samantena setuḥ karttavyo, yathā ... praśvāsako bāhyena nirggacchati § 23.4.4.21B2. nâpi dāni kṣamati ekenântena. atha khalu samantena caṃkramitavyaṃ samantena für sāmantena : § 42.9.36B3 sam-anv-ā-gata~ (BHS, SWTF) “versehen, ausgestattet”; vgl. Pā. samannāgata § 12.9.11B4. pañcehi aṅgehi samanvāgato bhikṣuḥ śayyāsanaprajñāpakasaṃmutīye saṃ- manyitavyo § 41.6.34A2. sthaviro dāni grāmāraṇyasamena īryāpathena samanvāgato sam-anv-ā-hara- (BHS, SWTF) “beachten; achtgeben”; vgl. Pā. samannāharati § 32.1.27A4. so dāni anyavijñānasamaṃmī(?) na samanvāharati, na taṃ pratisaṃmodati samam ⇒ sama~ samaṃmī ⇒ anya-vijñāna-samaṃmī samaya~ (Skt, BHS, SWTF) “Zeit” § 26.3.23A6. eṣo dāni yavāgūye samayo ārocito bhavati, tato jānitavyaṃ ... § 40.1.32B2. tena dāni kālena tena samayena āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā pānīyaṃ pratijāgaranti § 41.4.33B7. ekam idaṃ bhikṣavo samayaṃ Śāriputro sthaviro Vaiśālyām viharati Mahāvane Kūṭāgāraśālāyāṃ § 41.21.35A4. anyo ’sau tena kālena tena samaye[na] .. .. bhavati agrakulikasya putro samayaṃ für samagraṃ : § 2.1.2B1 samaya-jña~ “den Zeitpunkt kennend” § 33.4.28A1. āyuṣmān dāni Upālī kālajño velajño samayajño bhagavantam upasaṃkram- iya pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, ...?” samavadhāna~# ⇒ samādhāna~ (1) “das Achtgeben, Berücksichtigung”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. samodahana (“completely attentive consideration”); Skt. ava-√dhā (“aufmerken, Acht geben”) ☞ § 8.12, Anm. 2 § 8.12.9B2. yadi mahājaniko bhavati, antamasato hastena samavadhānaṃ dātavyaṃ (Hs. dhā°) (2) “Konzentration” 520  § 28.2.24A2. tasya dāni tena śabdena cittaṃ na samavadhānaṃ (für samādh°?) gacchati samavasthāya#, samavasthāye# “bewegungslos, ruhig”; Instr. sg. fem. von Skt. samavasthā (“fixed condition” [Apte, s.v.])? ☞ § 25.15, Anm. 2 § 25.15.23A2. prasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiyantena kalācīyaṃ vāmāyaṃ aṃsivaddhakaṃ prakṣipitvā samavasthāya upaviṣṭakena utsaṅgasya upari prakṣipitavyaṃ § 32.7.27B2. atha khalu yaṃ kālaṃ samavasthāye niṣaṇṇo bhavati, taṃ velaṃ allīyāṇaṃ śīrṣeṇa pādā{ṃ} vanditavyā, karkaṭagrāhikāye vanditavyā sama-śīla-vrata~# “dieselben sittlichen Regeln einhaltend” § 4.17.5B5. ubhau puṇyāni kṛtvāna samaśīlavratā ubhau (vs) samā-kula~ “verworren” § 4.19.6A1. sarvvā diśā subhayā samākulā sa uttarā sa purastimā (vs) samākulī-√kṛ “in Unordnung bringen” § 42.23.37B1. na kṣamati ātmano cīvarāṇi gṛhṇitvā parasya cīvarehi samākulīkṛtvā sthapetuṃ sam-ā-gata~ § 32.2.27A5. te dāni aparakālena ubhaye samāgatā § 50.2.43A3. te dāni katpāhaṃ kālasya ubhaye samāgatā sam-ā-dāpaya- (BHS, SWTF) “anregen” § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati ... dhārmmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyāḥ samādāpayitavyāḥ samuttejayitavyāḥ ... § 1.13.2A6. dāyakadānapati dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyā samādāpayitavyā samuttejayitavyā ... § 2.9.3A2. dhārmyā kathayā saṃdarśiya samādāpiya samuttejiya sampraharṣayitvā udyojayitavyā (= § 3.10.4A2; ≒ § 2.11.3A5) § 4.2.4A7. nâpi dāyakadānapatiṃ dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayati samādāpayati samuttejayati saṃpraharṣayati sam-ā-dhaya-# “(den Gedanken) konzentrieren”; Hypersanskritismus für Pā. sam-ā-dhe-; vgl. Skt. sam-ā-√dhā; BHSG § 28.48, S. 217a (7) -dhaya-ti § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo “cittaṃ samādhayiṣyāmî”ti (= § 28.1.24A1; ≒ § 28.2.24A2) § 27.2.23B5. aparo yogācāro Vaidehake parvvate niṣaṇṇo “cittaṃ samādhayiṣyan” ti samādhāna~ (Skt, BHS, Pā) “Konzentration” ⇒ samavadhāna~ § 22.1.20B7. tasya dāni tena nivaraṇena sarvvarātriṃ cittaṃ na samādhānaṃ gacchati § 27.1.23B4. tasya dāni tena nīvaraṇena cittaṃ samādhānaṃ na gacchati (= § 27.2.23B5) § 28.1.24A1. tasya dāni tena śabdena cittaṃ na samādhānaṃ gacchati § 28.2.24A2. tasya dāni tena śabdena cittaṃ na samādhānaṃ (Hs. samavadh°) gacchati samāna~ (BHS, Pā, Pkt) Zur Verwendung des p.präs mit p.pt., vgl. Jacobi 1886: LXV, § 112; PW, s.v. samāna (f); BHSD, s.v. samāna; Bollée 2002: 35 ⇒ sat~ § 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto ... āgatasya samānasya hastanirmādanaṃ dātavyaṃ § 18.39.17A2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ praviṣṭo samāno samudācāra{ṃ}kṛto bhavati, ... § 19.37.19A1. eṣo bhikṣuḥ sārthena samānam adhvānaṃ gacchati § 27.7.23B7. upādhyāyācāryehi vā uktena samānena “mā tiṣṭhê”ti tiṣṭhati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 29.8.24B5. nâpi kṣamati “saṃghamadhye mā niṣīda” tti uktena samānena niṣīdituṃ § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati snātena samānena ... snānaśāṭikāṃ utkṣipituṃ § 48.1.41A3. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā antaragharaṃ praviṣṭā samānā ... § 48.2.41A5. yūyaṃ antaragharaṃ praviṣṭā samānā ... § 50.4.43A7. tena adhyiṣṭena samānena duve pātrāṇy ādāya praviśitavyaṃ § 56.1.47A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa āgatā samānā skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti § 57.1.47B1. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa okastāḥ samānā āsanehi upaviś- iyānaṃ upānahā nikkhāsiya ... prasphoṭanti § 60.1.48B5. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇam upaviṣṭāḥ samānā ... samānam “zusammen mit” 521  § 19.37.19A1. eṣo bhikṣuḥ sārthena samānam adhvānaṃ gacchati, praśvāsakṛto bhavati, ...; vgl. § 18.45.17A5. ete bhikṣu sārthena sārddham adhvānaṃ gacchaṃti, ... samāpatti~ ⇒ aśubha-samāpatti~ sam-ā-panna~ (BHS, SWTF, Pā) “erreicht habend” § 19.11.18A3. nâpi dāni tahiṃ dhyānāntaragateṇa vā svādhyāyam vā karentena aśubhasamāpattim vā samāpannena āsitavyaṃ sam-āpta~ “beendet” Kolophon 50B2. Ābhisamācārikāḥ samāptāḥ āryaMahāsāṃghikānāṃ Lokottaravādināṃ madhyuddeśapāṭhakānāṃ pāṭhena samāmapayi# Bedeutung?; wohl eine Verschreibung ☞ § 31.10, Anm. 1 § 31.10.25B7. atha dāni guḍapānīyaṃ bhavati, tahiṃ yeva vekālikaṃ kariya pra- veṣṭavyaṃ, mā paśyeṃsu “samāmapayi ime pravrajitā karonti.” samāvāpikānāṃ für samāvāyi° : § 60.5.48B6 samāvāyika~# “Versammlungsteilnehmer”; vgl. Skt. samavāya (“Zusammenkunft, Versammlung”), Skt. sāmavāyika (“Versammlungsteilnehmer”) ☞ § 60.5, Anm. 1 § 60.5.48B6. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā samāvāyikānāṃ vā ... kaṇḍūyituṃ sam-ā-śvāsaya- “trösten”; Kaus. von Skt. sam-ā-√śvas § 31.35.27A2. atha khalu samāśvāsitavyaṃ “vasantu āyuṣmanto, ramaṃtu ayuṣmanto.” samīcī~# “die Versammlungshalle” ☞ § 11.10, Anm. 3 ⇒ sāmāyikā~ § 57.9.47B6. nâpi kṣamati saṃghamadhye bhaktāgre tarpaṇāgre vā samīcīyaṃ vā sa- upānahena niṣīdituṃ samīpa~ § 18.50.17B1. na kṣamati ... aṅgajātaṃ gṛhṇiya draviḍena yathā udakasamīpa<ṃ> gantuṃ § 49.1.42A2. Jetavanasyârāmadvārakoṣṭhakasamīpe samucāra für samudācāra : § 19.30.18B5 sam-ut-tejaya- (BHS, SWTF) “begeistern”; vgl. Pā. samuttejeti § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati ... dhārmmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyāḥ samādāpayitavyāḥ samuttejayitavyāḥ saṃpraharṣayitavyāḥ udyojayitavyāḥ § 1.13.2A7. dāyakadānapati dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyā samādāpayitavyā samuttejayitavyā saṃpraharṣayitavyā udyojayitavyā § 2.9.3A2. dhārmyā kathayā saṃdarśiya samādāpiya samuttejiya sampraharṣayitvā udyojayitavyā (= § 3.10.4A2; ≒ § 2.11.3A5) § 4.2.4A7. nâpi dāyakadānapatiṃ dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayati samādāpayati samuttejayati saṃpraharṣayati samudaya~ ⇒ duḥkha-samudaya~ sam-ud-ā-gata~ § 39.1.30B5. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tam artham abhisam- bhāvayitvā Śrāvastyām viharati ... (≒ § 62.1.49B1) samudācāra~ “Bedürfnis; Notdurft”# ☞ § 18.21, Anm.1 ⇒ caukṣa-samudācāra~ § 18.21.16B1. atha khalu samudācāramātrakeṇaỿva varccakuṭiṃ gantavyaṃ § 18.25.16B3. atha khalu samudācāraṃ kariya utthiya cchatti gantavyaṃ § 18.32.16B6. eṣo bhikṣuḥ cetiyaṃ vandaṃto uśvāsakṛto bhavati, samudācāra- mātrakenaỿva nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 18.47.17A6. sārthe niviṣṭasmiṃ samudācāro bhavati, ekānte upaviśiya karttavyaṃ § 18.51.17B1. nāvāye gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, yadi varcakuṭī bhavati, ... § 19.7.18A1. atha khalu samudācāramātrakenaỿva praśvāsakuṭīṃ gantavyaṃ § 19.27.18B4. agniśālāyāṃ vā upasthānaśālāyām vā upaviṣṭasya samudācāro bhavati, cchatti niṣkramitavyaṃ § 19.30.18B5. eṣo bhikṣu cetiyaṃ vandanto praśvāsakṛto bhavati, samu<dā>cāra- mātrakeṇa eva gantavyaṃ § 19.39.19A2. sārthe sanniviṣṭe samudā<cā>ro bhavati, ekānte uvvattiya karttavyaṃ § 19.41.19A3. nāvāye gacchantasya samudā<cā>ro bhavati, yadi varccakuṭī bhavati, ... § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya sārthena sārddhaṃ gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, 522  na dāni sārthasya agrato sthitvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ samudācāra-kṛta~# “das Bedürfnis verspürend” ☞ § 18.28, Anm. 2 ⇒ uśvāsa-kṛta~, praśvāsa- kṛta~ § 18.28.16B4. eṣo bhikṣuḥ purime vā paścime vā prahāṇe upaviṣṭo samudācārakṛto bhavati, prahāṇasya āmantriyāṇa cchatti varccakuṭīyaṃ gantavyaṃ § 18.39.17A2. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ praviṣṭo samāno samudācāra{ṃ}kṛto bhavati, ... sam-ud-ā-naya- (BHS, SWTF), sam-ud-ā-ne- (Pā) “zusammenbringen” § 12.8.11B4. yaṃ tahiṃ pariveṇe bhavati bhaṇḍaṃ niyatakaṃ sarvvaṃ samudānitavyaṃ § 14.14.13B3. bhaṇḍaṃ niyatakaṃ bhavati, samudānetavyaṃ samudāro für samudācāro : § 19.39.19A2, § 19.41.19A3 saṃpatako wohl für saṃpatitako : § 30.5.25A3 *saṃpatitaka~ “sich (auf die Lagerstatt) niedergelegt habend”?; < Skt. saṃpatita (“herabgefallen”) + Suffix ka § 30.5.25A3. (śeyyā ...) tathā karttavyā yathā saṃpa<ti>tako yeva dakṣiṇena pārśvena śayyāṃ kalpeti sampatti~ ⇒ odana-sampatti~, tyāga-sampanna~, vyañjana-sampatti~ sam-panna~ ⇒ an-ākalpa-sampanna~, ācāra-guṇa-sam°, an-īryāpatha-sam°, yoga-sam° § 4.17.5B5. ubhau śraddhāya sampannā ubhau śīlehi saṃvṛtā (vs) saṃ-√paś § 11.1.10B1. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānās tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃkramanti anuvicaranti (= § 12.1.11A4, § 21.1.20A7; ≒ § 11.1. 10B3, § 12.1.11A6) § 23.1.21A4. pañcārthavaśāṃ saṃpaśyamānā yāva vistareṇa kṛtvā yāvad ... saṃ-pādaya- (Skt), saṃ-pāde (Pā) “sich anstrengen, streben” § 2.11.3A5. apramādena saṃpādayitavyaṃ (= § 3.12.4A4) § 7.7.8B5. antamasato vaktavyo “apramādena saṃpādehî”ti saṃpuṭa~ ☞ § 41.8, Anm. 3 ⇒ saṃpuṭ-kṛtikā~, saṃpuṭ-√kṛ § 41.8.34A4. upānahāpocchananattakaṃ gṛhṇiya upānahā saṃpuṭaṃ kariya ... saṃpuṭ-√kṛ# “(Sandalen mit den Sohlen) nach Art eines añjali aneinanderlegen” ☞ § 41.8, Anm. 3 ⇒ saṃpuṭa~, saṃpuṭ-kṛtikā~ § 41.24.35A7. upānahāyo prasphoṭitvā saṃpuṭīkṛtvā ... § 41.29.35B5. upānahāyo saṃpuṭī-(Hs. saṃghāṭī-)kariya ... § 57.5.47B3. upānahikāyo ... saṃpuṭikariyāṇaṃ vāmakena hastena gṛhṇiya nikuṭitakena <vāmā bāhāṃ> osārayitvā saṃprajānaṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ saṃpuṭ-kṛtikā~# (fem. von *saṃpuṭ-kṛtaka~) “halbkugelförmig gemacht, nach Art eines añjali aneinandergelegt” ⇒ saṃpuṭa~, saṃpuṭ-√kṛ, kṛtaka~ § 57.6.47B4. (upānahikāyo ...) pratisandhismi tathā yeva saṃpuṭikṛtikāyo āsanasya heṣṭhe sthapitavyāyo § 57.6.47B4. bhikṣuṇā upasthapitvā upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā nikuṭitakena vāmā bāhāṃ osāriya saṃprajānaṃ nirddhāvitavyaṃ saṃ-pra-jāna~ (BHS) “vollbewußt; sorgfältig”; vgl. Pā. sampajāna ⇒ saṃprajānakaṃ, saṃ-pra- jānat~ § 41.4.34A1. smṛto saṃprajāno nāgo viya kāritakāraṇo Veśālīṃ nagarīṃ piṇḍāya carati § 42.15.37A1. saṃprajānanena gantavyaṃ § 61.7.49A7. cīvarakoṇena mukhaṃ pidhiya saṃprajānena vijṛmbhayitavyaṃ § 62.6.50A2. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati saṃprajāna ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipiyāṇaṃ hastena vivaritvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.7.50A3. atha dāni bhikṣu na pāreti saṃprajāna vātakarmma karttuṃ, nirddhāviyāṇaṃ vātakarmma karttavyaṃ saṃprajānakaṃ# “sorgfältig, zurückhaltend” ⇒ saṃ-pra-jāna~, saṃ-pra-jānat~ § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānakaṃ kāsayitavyaṃ saṃ-pra-jānat~ “vollbewußt; sorgfältig; zurückhaltend” ⇒ saṃ-pra-jāna~, saṃprajānakaṃ § 56.6.47A7. niṣīdanaṃ ... saṃprajānaṃ sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gantavyaṃ § 57.5.47B4. upānahikāyo ... saṃpuṭikariyāṇaṃ vāmakena hastena gṛhṇiya nikuṭitakena 523  <vāmā bāhāṃ> osārayitvā saṃprajānaṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ § 57.6.47B4. upānahāyo tathā yeva saṃpuṭīkṛtikāyo gṛhītvā nikuṭitakena vāmā bāhāṃ osāriya saṃprajānaṃ nirddhāvitavyaṃ § 57.8.47B6. atha dāni vṛddhatarakā āsanti, bhikṣū ca {ā}gantukāmo bhavati, upānahāyo ābandhiya navakānte saṃprajānaṃ gantavyaṃ § 58.4.48A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāsikā āgacchati, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ § 58.6.48A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya ukkāsikā āgacchati, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ § 58.5.48A5. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kāsitavyaṃ § 59.4.48B1. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvayitavyaṃ ... § 59.5.48B2. atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvitavyaṃ ... (= § 59.6. 48B3) § 61.4.49A4. vijṛmbhikā āgacchati, ... atha dāni na pāreti vinodayituṃ, saṃprajānaṃ <cīvarakoṇena> mukhaṃ pithitvā jambhayitavyaṃ § 62.10.50A6. atha khalu ekaṃ phiccakaṃ ukṣipitvā saṃprajānan vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati, hastena vivaritvā mārggato udvarttitvā saṃprajānaṃ karttavyaṃ saṃ-pra-yaccha- “geben, darbringen” § 36.6.29B5. sāgārās tu (Hs. sāgārāṣṭraṃ) ’nagārāṇāṃ saṃprayacchanti dakṣiṇāṃ (vs) saṃ-pra-harṣaya- “entzücken” ⇒ saṃ-rādhaya- § 1.11.2A3. dāyakadānapati ... dhārmmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyāḥ samādāpayitavyāḥ samuttejayitavyāḥ saṃpraharṣayitavyāḥ udyojayitavyāḥ § 1.13.2A7. dāyakadānapati dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayitavyā samādāpayitavyā samuttejayitavyā saṃpraharṣayitavyā udyojayitavyā § 2.9.3A2. dhārmyā kathayā saṃdarśiya samādāpiya samuttejiya sampraharṣayitvā udyojayitavyā (= § 3.10.4A2; ≒ § 2.11.3A5) § 4.2.4A7. nâpi dāyakadānapatiṃ dharmyā kathayā saṃdarśayati samādāpayati samuttejayati saṃpraharṣayati § 31.24.26A7. (nevāsikā ...) saṃpraharṣayitavyā vaktavyā “āyuṣman, śobhanaṃ kriyati saṃghārāmo kelāpīyati, dhūmo kriyati, kulāni prasādīyanti” saṃbahula~ “zahlreich” § 44.1.38B6. aparehiṃ vihārake saṃbahulā bhikṣū pratisaṃkrama<ṃ>ti § 44.4.39A1. ete dāni saṃbahulā {saṃbahulā} bhikṣūḥ ekahi vihārake pratikramanti, ... saṃbādha-rathyā~# “Straßenengpaß, schmaler Weg” (vgl. CPS III, S. 374, Anm. 4. saṃbādhikā “Straßenengpaß”) § 47.1.40B3. saṃbādharathyāhi sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittiyo ghasantā gacchanti § 47.9.41A2. sambādharathyā (Hs. śambāvar°) bhavati susaṃvṛtena paśyillakena atikrāmitavyaṃ sambhava~ § 4.18.5B7. yaṃ vibhavadhanadhānyena sambhavo bhūrimedhaso (vs) saṃ-bhāvaya- “gelangen zu, erreichen”; vgl. Pā. saṃbhāveti § 49.1.42A1. na ca pratibalo Jetavanaṃ saṃbhāvayituṃ § 50.7.43B3. yadi jāna{n}ti śakyaṃ sakālena saṃbhāvayituṃ, gantavyaṃ § 50.7.43B3. upakaṭṭho kālo antāntiko. na śakyaṃ sakāle saṃbhāvayituṃ saṃ-√man “zustimmen, billigen” ☞ § 12.9, Anm. 2 § 12.9.11B4. pañcehi aṅgehi samanvāgato bhikṣuḥ śayyāsanaprajñāpakasaṃmutīye saṃmanyitavyo saṃmārjana~ “das Fegen, Saubermachen” § 45.6.39B7. upalepanaṃ vā saṃmārjanaṃ vā <karttukāmā> bhava<n>ti sammārjanaka~# “das Fegen, Saubermachen, Reinigen” § 46.6.40B1. etan (lies: etāni) dāni saṃghasya uṭṭhānakāni bhavanti cchādanikā vā lepanikā vā sammārjanako vā sam-mārjaya- “fegen, saubermachen” ⇒ √mṛj § 1.8.1B7. pratikṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ siñcāpayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyo) sammārjayitavyaṃ (Hs. sanmārjayitavyo) (≒ § 2.6.2B6, § 3.7.3B5) 524  § 8.9.9A6. vihārako siñcitavyo sammārjitavyo (Hs. sanmā°) § 13.14.12B6. vihārakā kālena kālaṃ siñcitavyāḥ saṃmārjitavyāḥ gomayakārṣī dātavyā{ḥ} § 14.7.13A5. vihārako siñcitavyo sammārjitavyo gomayakārṣī dātavyā (≒ § 14.16.13B4, § 23.9.21B7) § 15.9.14A4. vihārako śodhayitavyo sammārjayitavyo § 17.8.15A3. anyehi lepo dātavyaḥ, anyaiḥ sa<ṃ>mārjitavyaṃ § 23.9.21B7. upāṃsulako vihārako bhavati, kālena kālaṃ siñcitavyo saṃmārjitavyo § 42.11.36B5. tehi jentāke santānikā śāṭayitavyā, siñcitvā sammārjayitavyo § 42.31.37B7. jentākaṃ siñciya sammārjiya (Hs. sanmā°) ... § 43.11.38B1. abhīkṣṇaṃ sammārjayitavyaṃ (Hs. sanmā°) § 44.9.39A7. kālena kālaṃ siñcitvā sanmārjitavyaṃ (Hs. sanmā°) saṃ-miñjaya- (BHS) “beugen” § 29.4.24B2. atha khalu eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ āmuhūrtte viśrāmiya sammiñjiya (Hs. sanm°), dvitīyo pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo § 61.5.49A5. ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyā ... tāṃ sammiñjiya (Hs. sanm°) dvitīyā sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyā. eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ sammiñjiya (Hs. sanm°) dvitīyo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo saṃmiñjita-prasārita~ (BHS, SWTF[s.v. prasārita]) “das Krümmen und das Wieder-Ausstrecken (eines Armes)” § 41.4.34A1. prāsādikena ... ālokitavilokitena sammiñjitaprasāritena (Hs. sanmiñ°) saṃghāṭīpātracīvaradhāraṇena saṃmuti~ (Pā), saṃmutī~# “Übereinkunft”; vgl. BHS. saṃvṛti, saṃmati ☞ § 12.9, Anm. 2 § 12.9.11B4. pañcehi aṅgehi samanvāgato bhikṣuḥ śayyāsanaprajñāpaka-saṃmutīye saṃmanyitavyo § 31.32.26B6. amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. pātranikubjanaṃ sa<ṃ>mutī-kṛtaṃ; vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L) § 295.10B3.6f. pātranikubjanā-sammuti-pratisaṃyuktaṃ saṃ-moda- (BHS) “in Harmonie sein”#; vgl. Pā. saṃmodati § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ sahitānāṃ saṃmodamānānāṃ avivadamānānāṃ ekoddeśakānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? sammoditavyaṃ für <prati>sammoditavyaṃ : Uddāna (IV).30B5 saṃmoha~ “Verlust der Besinnung, Verwirrung” ☞ § 39.29, Anm. 12 § 39.29.32B1. grāmāntikehi āraṇyakā ... vaktavyā ... “ ... na ca vo Māraḥ pāpīyāṃ avatāram adhigamiṣyati saddharmmasya antarddhānāya sa<ṃ>mohāya.” samyak § 35.3.29A2. samyag bhikṣavo jano odhyāyanti § 51.1.44A1. samyag bhikṣavo jano odhyāyati samyak-sambuddha~ (BHS) § 11.1.10B1. tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ pañcāhikāṃ vihāracārikām anucaṃ- kramanti anuvicaranti (≒ § 21.1.20A7) § 34.6.28B6. dvihi kulehi (Loc. pl.) tathāgatā arhantaḥ samyaksambuddhāḥ utpadyanti kṣatriyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā (≒ § 35.6.29A6) § 39.1.30B5. bhagavān samyaksambuddho yadarthaṃ samudāgato tam artham abhisam- bhāvayitvā Śrāvastyām viharati ... (≒ § 62.1.49B1) samyaksambuddha-deśita~# “vom vollkommen Erleuchteten verkündet” § 36.6.29B5. ārāgayanti saddharmmaṃ samyaksambuddha{ṃ}deśitaṃ (vs) samyag-dṛṣṭi~ (BHS) “richtige Ansicht” ⇒ mithyā-dṛṣṭika~ § 4.17.5B4. śīlavatī yogasampannā samyagdṛṣṭi ca yā iha (vs) § 4.17.5B5. śīlavāṃ tyāgasampanno samyagdṛṣṭi ca yo iha (vs) saye für samaṃ : § 12.6.11B3 Sarayū~ Name eines Flusses § 26.1. he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu Gaṅgā ayaṃ Sarayū Ajiravatī Mahī Mahāmahī tti sa-rudhira~ ⇒ rudhira~ sare- ⇒ paṭi-sare- sarppi-khajjaka~# “mit zerlassener Butter gekochte feste Speise” ⇒ taila-khajjaka~ 525  § 48.8.41B3. na kṣamati ... cīvarakena pratīcchituṃ sarppikhajjakaṃ vā tailakhajjakaṃ vā sarvva~ ⇒ sarvveṇa sarvvaṃ § 1.3.1B3. tad eva sarvvaṃ bhagavān vistareṇa pratyārocayati (= § 7.2.8A7, § 9.2.9B6, § 42.4.36A6, § 47.2.40B5, § 49.2.42A5 et passim) § 3.4.3B1. tena hi sarvvehi evaṃ poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ § 3.5.3B2. sarvvehi jānitavyaṃ (= § 3.5.3B3) § 3.13.4A4. evaṃ sarvvehi poṣadhe pratipadyitavyaṃ (= Uddāna [I].10A7) § 4.7.4B6. sarvvehi paṭipāṭikāya piṇḍāya praviśitavyaṃ § 4.12.5A4. sarvveṣāṃ ettaka ettakaṃ bhaviṣyati? § 4.19.6A1. dakṣiṇā paścimā ca sa sarvvo ca loko saṃkulajāto (vs) § 14.13.13B2. yathā sarvva pratisaṃskāraṃ (Hs. °kāro) gacche (☞ § 14.13, Anm. 1) tathā dātavyaṃ § 20.9.19B5. tena dāni bhagavān dṛṣṭo bhagavato gauraveṇa sarvvam abhyavahṛtaṃ § 20.10.19B6. evaṃ ca yūyaṃ sarvvaṃ niravaśeṣaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādatha Uddāna (II).20A6. evaṃ hi sarvvehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 26.3.23A7. yadi tāva ubhayato sāṃghikā bhavati, sarvvehi gantavyaṃ § 26.8.23B1. “he he he Gaṅgā ayaṃ sarvvaṃ (‘ganz’)” yāva “Mahī Candrabhāgā ayaṃ.” § 31.32.26B6. nevāsikehi sarvvam ārocayitavyaṃ vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmanto, amukaṃ kulaṃ mā praviśatha. ...” § 31.34.26B7. sarvve yeva gocaraṃ praviśanti, kiñ câpi ghaṭṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 36.6.29B6. sarvve itipravṛttakā karttavyā (☞ § 36.6, Anm. 9) § 37.5.30A4. (tīrthikāḥ ...) sarvvāśrāmiṇânopavāde kadāci traividyaprāptāḥ bahuśrutā § 38.5.30A7. allīya vṛddhāntāto prabhṛti sarvveṣāṃ praṇāmo karttavyo § 38.8.30B3. āyuṣman, sarvve (Nom. sg. neut.; vgl. BHSG § 8.37; oder für sarvvaṃ) tvaṃ etaṃ kāryaṃ samagreṇa saṃghena suvyupaśāntaṃ § 39.2.30B7. te<hi> dāni āraṇyakehi ... bhaktakāni sarvvāṇi ukṣiptāni § 39.2.31A1. kin dāni yuṣmābhiḥ sarvvāṇi bhaktakāni utkṣiptāni? § 39.3.31A2. kalyato yeva sarvvāṇi bhaktāni utkṣipituṃ § 40.6.32B6. sarvvaṅ karttavyaṃ, yathā sugandhā bhaveṃsu § 41.1.33B3. sarvvaṃ udakaṃ cchoriya § 41.1.33B4. udake pi khalu mātrā uktā bhagavatā tathaỿva sarvvehi (Loc. pl. masc.) bāhirakehi jīvitapariṣkārehi § 41.2.33B6. udake pi khalu bhagavatā mātrā uktā tathaỿva sarvvehi (Loc. pl. masc.) jīvitapariṣkārehi § 41.16.34B6. tena ... tasya dārakasya pānīyaṃ dentasya sarvvam upalakṣitaṃ § 41.18.35A1. tāṃ sarvvāṃ corāṃ śabdāpiya pṛcchati § 41.18.35A2. sarvvaṃ hiraṇyaṃ suvarṇṇaṃ (wohl für hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ) demi § 41.18.35A2. tena dārakena dvārāṇi sarvvāṇi ghaṭitāni § 42.2.36A3. sarvvaṃ tailaṃ upayojiya, sarvvaṃ cūrṇṇaṃ upayojiya, sarvvaṃ udakaṃ cchoriya, sarvvaṃ kāṣṭhaṃ agnau prakṣipiya ... § 44.1.38B7. sarvvaṃ karddamehi anupraviṣṭaṃ § 44.1.38B7. “caṭa” tti sarvvaṃ (Hs. saṃca) phāṭitaṃ (= § 44.2.39A1) § 44.5.39A3. evaṃ sarvvehi vandiya thapetavyāni § 44.6.39A4. tatraỿva sarvvaṃ bhūmīye anupraviṣṭo bhavati § 54.11.46A6. atha dāni bahu pracālayanti, na dāni te sarvve balīvandā viya utthapetavyā § 59.1.48A6. te dāni sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena hacchīyanti § 59.3.48A7. nâpi kṣamati sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena “hā” tti kṣipituṃ § 59.5.48B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... sarvveṇa kaṇṭhe<na> kṣīvituṃ (≒ § 59.6.48B2, § 59.7.48B3) usw. sarvva-jña~ (Skt, BHS) “Allwissender” § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... buddho buddhavihārehi jino jinavihārehi jānako jānakavihārehi sarvvajño sarvvajñavihārehi ... sarvvajña-vihāra~# “Verweilungszuständen von Allwissenden” ☞ § 62.1, Anm. 1 ⇒ jānaka- 526  vihāra~, jina-vihāra~, buddha-vihāra~ § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... buddho buddhavihārehi jino jinavihārehi jānako jānakavihārehi sarvvajño sarvvajñavihārehi ... sarvvatra § 19.33.18B6. sarvvatra cetiya{ṃ}gṛhe gandhakārṣī vā tailakārṣī vā dātavyā sarvva-rātra~ “die ganze Nacht” § 15.10.14A4. yadi sarvvarātro gacchati pratisaṃskārayantasya, sarvvarātrī pratisaṃs- karayitavyaṃ sarvva-rātr#, sarvva-rātriṃ# “die ganze Nacht über” (vgl. Skt. sarva-rātram) ⇒ sarvva-rātra~, sarvva-rātrika~ § 1.13.2A6. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇaṃ sarvvarātriṃ dharmmavṛṣṭiye vītināmiyānaṃ ... (≒ § 2.11.3A5) § 3.12.4A4. yathâdhyeṣṭehi bhāṣiyāṇaṃ sarvvarātri dharmmavṛṣṭiyer vvītināmiyāna ... § 15.10.14A4. yadi sarvvarātro gacchati pratisaṃskārayantasya, sarvvarātrī pratisaṃs- karayitavyaṃ § 22.1.20B6. tasya dāni tena nivaraṇena sarvvarātriṃ cittaṃ na samādhānaṃ gacchati § 53.13.45B3. vibhavo bhavati, sarvvarātriṃ varccakuṭīyañ ca prasrāvakuṭīyaṃ dīpako prajvālayitavyo sarvva-rātrika~# “die ganze Nacht andauernd” (vgl. pw, s.v. sārva-rātrika) ⇒ sarvva-rātra~, sarvva-rātr, sarvva-rātrim § 1.13.2A6. atha dāni sarvvarātrikā bhavati, tato adhyeṣitavyaṃ “tvaṃ bhāṣayesî”ti § 2.11.3A4. atha dāni sarvvarātrikā bhavati, ... dvitīyasthavireṇa adhyeṣitavyaṃ § 3.12.4A3. atha dāni sarvvarātrikā bhavati, bhāṣaṇakā adhyeṣitavyāḥ sarvva-saṃgha~# “die gesamte (Mönchs)gemeinde” ⇒ sarvva-sāṃghika~ § 14.13.13B2. atha dāni naỿva sasvāmiko bhavati, nâpi uddiṣṭako, sarvvasaṃghena prati- saṃskarttavyo § 17.5.14B7. tato raṇaraṇāye gaṇḍiṃ āhaṇiya sarvvasaṃghena sannipatitavyaṃ § 17.8.15A2. sarvvasaṃghasya gaṇḍim ākoṭayitvā ... § 19.16.18A5. atha dāni praśvāsakuṭī na bhavati, ekasmi koṇe sarvvasaṃghasya praśvāsa- ghaṭo sthāpayitavyo § 19.17.18A6. nâpi dāni kṣamati abhyāgame pradeśe ujjhituṃ, sarvvasaṃghasya mā gandhena vyābaheyyā § 41.25.35B2. sarvvasaṃghasya pādadhovanikā bhavati, ... § 42.24.37B2. yadi tāva ekato sāṃghiko bhavati, sarvva{ṃ}saṃghena gantavyaṃ § 50.4.43A6. etaṃ dāni sarvvasaṃghasya antaraghare nimantraṇam bhavati, ... sarvva-satva~ ⇒ satva~ § 4.16.5B3. sarvvasatvā mariṣyanti maraṇāntaṃ hi jīvitaṃ (vs) sarvva-sāṃghika~# “die gesamte (Mönchs)gemeinde betreffend” ⇒ sarvva-saṃgha~, ekato sāṃghika~, ubhayato sāṃghika~ § 4.5.4B2. kasyâdya bhaktaṃ ubhayato sāṃghikaṃ sarvva{ṃ}sāṃghikaṃ pariveṇikaṃ § 42.13.36B6. jānitavyaṃ: kiṃ eṣo jentāko sarvvasāṃghiko pāriveṇiko parṣāye § 42.13.36B7. atha dāni sarvvasāṃghiko bhavati, tathā eva <gantavya>ṃ sarvveṇa sarvvaṃ (BHS) “ganz und gar”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. sarva; Pā. sabbena sabbaṃ § 20.18.20A4. sa eṣo bhikṣuḥ sarvveṇa sarvvaṃ dantakāṣṭhaṃ na khādati, vinayāti- kramam āsādayati sarvvevihārika~ für sārddhevihārika~ : § 42.18.37A3, § 42.25.37B3, § 47.1.40B3, § 47.2.40B5, § 48.1.41A3 sa-vallarika~# “mit Reisern versehen”? ☞ § 20.6, Anm. 2 § 20.6.19B2. te dāni āyuṣmanto NandanOpanandanā savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti § 20.6.19B3. evam ime śramaṇakāḥ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādanti (≒ § 20.7.19B4) § 20.7.19B3. evaṃ nāma yūyaṃ savallarikāni dantakāṣṭhāni khādatha savvaṭiyāṇaṃ für samvaṭṭi° bzw. saṃvaṭṭi° : § 21.6.20B3 sa-svāmika~ “einen Eigentümer habend” § 14.12.13B2. etāni mahāntāni vastūni bhavanti, yathā agniśālā vā upasthānaśālā vā. yadi 527  tāva sasvāmikā (Hs. °kaṃ) bhavati, tena pratisaṃskārāpetavyā § 14.13.13B2. atha dāni naỿva sasvāmiko bhavati, nâpi uddiṣṭako, sarvvasaṃghena prati- saṃskarttavyo √sah ⇒ uc-chaha-, uc-chāhe-, ut-saha- saha ⇒ sārddhaṃ § 8.11.9A7. vaktavyaṃ “karomi amukena saha svādhyāyan” ti sahasā “hastig, plötzlich” § 18.22.16B1. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ uśvāsena sahasā uppīḍito (Hs. °uppaḍi) bhavati, ... § 18.33.16B6. atha dāni sahasā utpīḍito bhavati, ... § 22.4.21A1. cakkalī utkṣipitavyā. nâpi dāni sahasā § 32.10.27B4. yadi kasyaci vraṇo bhavati gaṇḍo vā piṭako vā, na dāni sahasā uppīḍitavyaṃ § 53.17.45B6. § 53.17.45B6. nâpi kṣamati prahāṇaśālāyāṃ sahasā dīpakaṃ praveśayituṃ “mā navakā bhikṣu sahasā viprakaṭa utthiheṃsu” tti sahasākārasya#, sahasākāreṇa# “plötzlich, auf einmal”; vgl. Pā. sahasākāra (“Gewalttat”) ☞ § 40.10, Anm. 5 § 40.10.33A3. atha dāni sahasākāreṇa sāmiṣīkṛto bhavati, prakṣālayitvā patraśākhāya vā <nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ> § 53.14.45B4. na dāni sahasākārasya apratisaṃviditvā nirvvāpetavyo sahasra~ ⇒ prāṇi-koṭī-niyuta-śata-sahasra~ sahāya~ “Gefährte” § 18.44.17A5. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena purato parāṅmukhena sthātavyaṃ sahita~ “einig” ⇒ sahitaka § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ sahitānāṃ saṃmodamānānāṃ avivada- mānānāṃ ekoddeśakānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? sahitaka~ (BHS[Mvu]) “zusammen” ⇒ sahita~ § 31.27.26B2. nevāsikehi vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, āgametha sahitakā piṇḍāye praviś- iṣyāmaḥ”, tato sahitakehi praviśitavyaṃ § 49.7.42B4. āsa tvaṃ, sahitakā{ṃ} bhuñjiya nirddhāviṣyāmaḥ § 49.7.42B5. glānasya anukālyaṃ āhāraṃ datvā sahitakehi nirddhāvitavyaṃ (Hs. °itavyā) § 50.9.43B5. yaṃ kālaṃ āgato bhavati, upaviśiyāṇaṃ sahitakehi bhuṃjitavyaṃ § 50.10.43B6. tatra yeva panthāto uvvattiyāṇaṃ sahitakehi bhuñjitavyaṃ § 52.5.44B4. atha dāni upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā piṇḍapātako bhavati, ayaṃ ca piṇḍāya caritvā āgato bhavati, sahitakehi paribhuñjitavyaṃ sā / saṃ ⇒ saṃ / sā sāka-vyañjana~ (Pā [Vv-a 99.21]) “Gemüsebeilagen”; < Skt. śāka / sāka (“Gemüse”) + vy° § 50.6.43B2. na dāni apratyagraṃ gṛhṇitavyaṃ. ekānte yūṣaṃ sākavyañjanaṃ vā gṛhṇitavyaṃ sākāram (sa-ākā°) (Pā) “mit Aussehen; mit Kennzeichen”; < sa + ākāra ☞ § 4.5, Anm. 9 § 4.5.4B3. sākāraṃ soddeśaṃ pṛcchiyāṇaṃ tato ’dhivāsayitavyaṃ (= § 6.5.7B2; ≒ § 5.5. 6B2) sākṣāt √kṛ § 41.10.34A7. tena dāni brāhmaṇena tatraỿva sthāne sthitena srotāpattiphalaṃ sākṣāt kṛtaṃ sāgarā für sāgārā : § 36.6.29B5 (vs) sāgāra~ (sa-gāra) (Pā) “Hausbewohner” ⇒ an-agāra~, an-agārikā~, āgāra~ § 36.6.29B5. sāgārā (Hs. sāgarā) cânagārā (Hs. ca an°) ca ubhe anyonyaniśritā (vs) § 36.6.29B5. sāgārās tu (Hs. sāgārāṣṭraṃ) ’nagārāṇāṃ saṃprayacchanti dakṣiṇāṃ (vs) sāṃghika~ (BHS) “die Gemeinde betreffend; der Gemeinde gehörend” ⇒ ubhayato sāṃghika~, ekato sāṃghika~, sarvva-sāṃghika~, stūpika~ § 11.3.10B5. “kasyêmaṃ bhikṣavo śayyāsanaṃ ...?” āhaṃsu “etaṃ bhagavaṃ sāṃghikaṃ.” § 11.5.10B5. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ adhyupekṣituṃ utpādakam vā ... § 11.7.10B7. na dāni kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ evam eva paribhuṃjituṃ ... § 11.10.11A2. na kṣamati sāṃghikena śayyāsanena prāvṛtena bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā 528  sāmāyik<āy>am vā upaviśituṃ § 11.11.11A2. na kṣamati śayyāsanaṃ sāṃghikaṃ prāvariyaṃ dīrghacaṃkramaṃ caṃkramituṃ § 11.12.11A3. nâpi kṣamati sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ paudgalikaparibhogena pari- bhuñjituṃ. atha khalu sāṃghikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ prajñapayitavyaṃ ... § 18.19.16A6. nâpi ... kṣamati akṛtvā udakakṛtyaṃ sāṃghikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ paribhuñjituṃ § 18.26.16B3. nâpi kṣamati sāṃghikena śeyyāsanena prāvṛtena varccakuṭī praviśituṃ § 20.1.19A5. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyaṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropitako § 20.2.19A6. apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sāṃghikāyāṃ bhūmau āmrapotako ropito § 31.36.27A2. sāṃghikena kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, sāṃghikaṃ kāryaṃ pariprāpayitavyaṃ § 39.26.32A4. atha dāni teṣāṃ na koci lābhagrāhako bhavati, pariveṣakena sarvveṣāṃ ekasthāne piṇḍapātaṃ ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghikāyaṃ kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ thapitavyo § 42.26.37B3. atha dāni jentāko sāṃghiko bhavati, dāyakadānapatī vā denti, gaṇḍī āhanitavyā ... § 43.16.38B5. tac c’ eva{ṃ} cāturddiśaṃ sāṃghikaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ riktaparibhogaṃ na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ § 48.6.41B1. stūpikaṃ vā sāṃghikaṃ vā kāryaṃ adhīnaṃ bhavati usw. *sāṃghika-kalpiyakuṭī~ “Klosterküche der (Mönchs)gemeinde” § 39.14.31B2. tehi āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapāto ukkaḍḍhayitavyo. ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghika{ṃ}kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ sthāpayitavyo sātatya~ (BHS) “beständig”; vgl. Pā. sātacca, BHSD, s.v. sāṃtatya, BhiVin(Ma-L) § 1, Anm. 22 § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... svayaṃbhū divyehi vihārehi <viharanto> brāhmehi vihārehi āryehi vihārehi āniṃjyehi vihārehi sātatyehi vihārehi ... sātayitavyā für śāṭa° : § 23.8.21B6 sādvala~ (vgl. Skt. śādvala) ⇒ dūrvvā-sādvala~ √sādh ☞ § 4.7, Anm. 2 zu anugraha~ sādhayitavya~ § 4.7.4B5. yadi tāva anugraho bhavati, anugraho sādhayitavyo (= § 6.7.7B5) § 5.7.6B4. yadi tāva anugraho bhavati, anugraho sādhitavyo § 39.1.30B6. āraṇyakānāñ ca grāmāntikānāñ ca anugraho sādhīyati § 43.3.38A3. tena saṃghasya anugraho sādhayitavyo sādhu § 50.2.43A3. so dāni tasya jalpati “āyuṣman, sādhu taṃ pātrakaṃ pi labhema.” § 62.2.49B6. aparo āha “sādhv āyuṣmaṃ. kiṃ etaṃ samvatsarikaṃ pūti<vāta>karmmaṃ aṣṭaśatenâpi? ko vātaṃ na iccheyyā? aho manojño śabdo anukūlaṃ karoti.” sādhvo für sārtho : § 31.35.27A2 sānaṃ : ayaṃ sānaṃ für tvaṃ? : § 1.9.2A1 sāpāśraya~# (sa-apa°) “eine mit Rückenlehne versehene Sitzgelegenheit” ☞ § 48.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ upāśraya~, trepaśyaka~ oder °akā~ § 48.1.41A3. mañcā ca pīṭhāṃ ca sāpāśrayā (Hs. māyāśrayā) ca dārakadārikāhi pādehi mardditaparimardditā ... § 48.7.41B2. na kṣamati sāpāśrayaṃ vā upāśrayam (Hs. opā°) vā omayilomayilaṃ vā paṇḍara{ṃ}vipāṇḍaraṃ apāśrayituṃ sāmagrī~ “Vollständigkeit” § 1.11.2A3. yaṃ kālaṃ śalākā vāritā bhavanti, bhikṣū gaṇitā bhavanti, sāmagrī ārocitā bhavati, ... (≒ § 2.9.3A1, § 3.10.4A1) § 14.13.13B2. sāmagrīye saṃviditvā tahiṃ ekameko vâ<ṃ>śaśo dātavyo dve vā dve vā trayo vā trayo vā sāmantakena (BHS), sāmantena# “in der Nähe” § 27.4.23B6. nâpi kṣamati veśikā-sāmantakena (Hs. °samanta°) vā tiṣṭhituṃ, vadha- bandhanāgāraśālā-sāmantena vā tiṣṭhituṃ § 28.9.24A5. nâpi kṣamati veśikā-sāmantakena caṃkramituṃ. nâpi kṣamati dyutikaraśālā- sāmantakena caṃkramituṃ, vadhabandhanāgāra-sāmantena caṃkramituṃ § 29.9.24B5. nâpi kṣamati veśikā-sāmantena dyutikaraśālā-sāmantakena niṣīdituṃ, 529  vadhabandhanāgāraśālā-sāmantakena niṣīdituṃ § 42.9.36B3. yena bhraṣṭikā sāmantena (Hs. sam°) {karttavyaṃ} kapāṭaṃ karttavyaṃ sāmāyikaṃ für °yikāyaṃ : § 11.10.11A2, § 61.6.49A6 sāmāyikā~# “die Versammlungshalle” ☞ § 11.10, Anm. 3 ⇒ samīcī~ § 11.10.11A2. na kṣamati sāṃghikena śayyāsanena prāvṛtena bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>am vā upaviśituṃ § 58.4.48A3. nâpi kṣamati bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyikāye vā auddhatyābhi- prāyeṇa muktehi pārśvehi “kha kha kha” tti kāsituṃ § 59.7.48B3. nâpi kṣamati sāmāyikāyām vā ... auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena kṣīvituṃ § 61.6.49A6. na kṣamati bhikṣuṇā bhaktāgre vā tarpaṇāgre vā sāmāyik<āy>aṃ vā dharmmaśravaṇe vā aṅgāni bha<ṃ>jantena vijṛmbhayituṃ § 62.9.50A5. nâpi kṣamati dharmmaśravaṇe vā sāmāyikāyām vā auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa {vā} pharapharasya vātakarmma karttuṃ sāmiṣī-kṛta~# “durch Speise verschmutzt” ☞ § 40.10, Anm. 6 ⇒ nir-āmiṣa~ § 40.10.33A3. atha dāni sahasākāreṇa sāmiṣīkṛto bhavati prakṣālayitvā patraśākhāya vā <nirmmādayitvā pātavyaṃ> sāmīcī~ (BHS) “Verehrung” § 32.9.27B3. sāmīcī karentena na kṣamati jānukena (☞ § 32.9[Text], Anm. 1) vā jaṃghāhi vā vandituṃ. atha khalu pādā vanditavyā sāyaṃ, sāye “abends” § 7.5.8B3. śekhayitavyo anuśāsayitavyo kālyaṃ madhyantikaṃ sāyaṃ abhidharmmeṇa vā abhivinayena vā § 19.25.18B3. sāyaṃ praveśentena kunta vā tumbakā vā śikke uvvinitvā mañcakasthāne ullapitavyaṃ § 31.7.25B5. sāye (Hs. nyāye) vāsôpagatā bhavanti, taruṇā bhikṣu duve vā trayo vā praveśayitavyā ... sāra~ § 16.7.14B2. ye mañcā vā pīṭhā vā navā ca sārā ca sudhotā ca te āgantukānāṃ sthāpayi- tavyā § 18.4.15B3. yāni sārāṇi ca dṛḍhāni ca sthūlā<ni> ca kāṣṭhāni tāny adhastā dātavyāni sāraṇīyaṃ für sārāṇīyaṃ : § 31.31.26B6 sārāṇīya~ (Pā) “freundliche Aufnahme”#; vgl. BHSD, s.v. sārāyaṇīya (“hospitable entertainment [esp. with food]”) ☞ § 31.31, Anm. 3 § 31.31.26B6. atha dāni evaṃ pi na bhavati, antamasato yadi tahiṃ kiñci piṇḍacārikaṃ praṇītatarakaṃ bhavati, āgantukānāṃ sārāṇīyaṃ (Hs. sāraṇ°) karttavyaṃ sārāsāra~ (sāra-as°) “wertvoll und wertlos” § 14.7.13A6. yaṃ sārāsāraṃ śayyāsanaṃ amilā vā astaraṇikā vā kocakā vā guḍuguḍukā vā makucakā vā te grāmāntikaṃ śayyāsanaṃ nāpayitavyāḥ § 14.15.13B4. sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā upaskaro vā ... sāropya~ ⇒ pratisaṃlayana-sāropya~ sārtha~ § 18.45.17A5. ete bhikṣu sārthena sārddham adhvānaṃ gacchaṃti, ... § 19.37.19A1. eṣo bhikṣuḥ sārthena samānam adhvānaṃ gacchati, praśvāsakṛto bhavati, ... § 18.46.17A6. nâpi dāni anuvātaṃ karttavyaṃ, mā sarvvasārthaṃ gandhena vyābaheyyā (≒ § 18.48.17A7) § 19.38.19A2. nâpi dāni kṣamati anuvātaṃ karttuṃ, mā <sarvva>sārthaṃ (Hs. °rtho) gandhena vyābaheyyā § 18.47.17A6. sārthe niviṣṭasmiṃ (Hs. nisṛṣṭasmiṃ) samudācāro bhavati, ... § 19.39.19A2. sārthe sanniviṣṭe samudā<cā>ro bhavati, ekānte uvvattiya karttavyaṃ § 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. pañcavarṣikaṃ pravṛttaṃ. sārtho prayāto (Hs. yathā pāṭito)” § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he ... śramaṇa sārtho (Hs. mātā) 530  prayāto (Hs. prajātā) (☞ § 31.28, Anm. 1)” tti § 31.35.27A2. nâpi kṣamati tehi nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “āyuṣmaṃ, eṣā nāvā mucyati, eṣo sārtho (←Hs. sādhvo) prayāto. gacchantu āyuṣmanto. gataṃ mārggasya śreyo.” § 31.37.27A3. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāptaṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, yadi koci sārtho (Hs. °rthā) prayāto bhavati, te bhikṣu vāṇijakasya sārthavāhasya parinditavyā § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya sārthena (Hs. sārddhena) sārddhaṃ gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, na dāni sārthasya (Hs. sārthena) agrato sthitvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.12.50B1. yathā sārthaṃ gandhena na vyābaheyyā, vātapathaṃ mocayitvā karttavyaṃ sārtha-vāha~ “Karawanenführer” § 5.5.6B2. upāsako ’pāsikā āgantuko gamiko vāṇijako sārthavāho § 6.5.7B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti: ... gṛhastho pravrajito vāṇijako sārthavāho āgantuko gamiko? § 31.37.27A3. yaṃ kālaṃ pariprāptaṃ kāryaṃ bhavati, yadi koci sārtho prayāto bhavati, te bhikṣu vāṇijakasya sārthavāhasya parinditavyā § 52.6.44B6. asukasya me vāṇijasya sārthavāhasya parikathā kṛtā, buddhavacanaṃ jalpitaṃ. tena me eṣo prasannena āhārako dinno sārddhaṃ ⇒ saha § 8.13.9B3. āpṛcchitavyaṃ “karomi amukena sārddhaṃ svādhyāyaṃ.” § 18.45.17A5. ete bhikṣu sārthena sārddham adhvānaṃ gacchaṃti, ... § 28.5.24A3. eṣo dāni bhikṣuḥ upādhyāyena vā ācāryeṇa vā sārddhaṃ caṃkramati, ... § 31.37.27A3. upāsaka! dānapati! ime bhikṣavo tvayā sārddhaṃ gamiṣyanti § 32.1.27A4. so ca apareṇa bhikṣuṇā sārddhaṃ vācovācikāṃ karoti § 32.2.27A6. amukaṃ divasaṃ tvaṃ amukena bhikṣuṇā sārddhaṃ vācaṃvāciṃ karosi § 49.1.42A1. na me tvayā sārddhaṃ (Hs. sārvvaṃ) phāsu bhavati ... § 49.1.42A3. nagarakulopakena pityakena sārddhaṃ praviṣṭasya § 49.7.42B4. āgamiṣyaṃ ahaṃ yena vā tena <vā?> sārddhaṃ § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni bhikṣusya sārthena sārddhaṃ gacchantasya samudācāro bhavati, ... usw. sārddhena für sārthena : § 62.12.50A7 sārddhe-vihārika~# “ein gemeinsam (mit einem Upādhyāya) wohnender Schüler”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma- L) § 100, 2B6.4. sārdhevihārika~; BHS. sārdhaṃ-vihārika; Pā. saddhi(ṃ)-vihārika ⇒ śraddhe- vihārin~, śrāddha-vihārin~, śrāddhe-vihārin~, sār(d)dhe-vihārin~ § 42.18.37A3. antevāsikehi vā sārddhevihārikehi (Hs. sarvvevih°) vā parikarmma karentena na dāni apūrvvacarimaṃ ubhaya bāhā prasāretavyā § 42.21.37A6. antevāsiko sārddhevihāriko (Hs. sārvvevih°) vā āhaṃsu § 42.25.37B3. tasya sārddhevihārikā (Hs. sarvvevih°) bhavanti antevāsikā vā, tehi vaktavyaṃ § 47.1.40B3. teṣān dāni sārddhevihārikā (Hs. sarvvevih°) ca antevāsikā ca odhyāyanti § 47.2.40B5. yuṣmākaṃ sārddhevihārikā (Hs. sarvvevih°) antevāsikā odhyāyanti § 48.1.41A3. teṣāṃ sārddhevihārikā (Hs. sarvvevih°) antevāsikā odhyāyanti § 48.2.41A5. yuṣmākaṃ sārddhevihārikā (Hs. sārvvevih°) antevāsikā odhyāyanti § 49.1.41B6. so dāni tasya sārddhevihārikasy’ (Hs. sārvvev°) āha sār(d)dhe-vihārin~# “ein gemeinsam (mit einem Upādhyāya) wohnender Schüler”; vgl. BhiVin(Ma- L) § 294.10B3.4. sārdhevihāri-(pratisaṃyuktaṃ); BHS. sārdhaṃ-vihārin; Pā. saddhi(ṃ)- vihārin; vgl. auch Brough 1962: 177; EHS S. 70; Nolot 30, Anm. 80 ⇒ śraddhe-vihārin~, śrāddha-vihārin~, śrāddhe-vihārin~, sārddhe-vihārika~ § 8.3.8B7. evaṃ sārddhevihāriṇā upādhyāye pratipadyitavyaṃ § 8.4.8B7. sārdhevihāriṇā (Hs. sāvevi°) tāva kalyata eva utthaṃtena upādhyāyasya vihārasya dvāraṃ ākoṭayitavyaṃ § 49.2.42A4. tvaṃ Nandanasya sārddhevihāriṃ (Hs. sārvve°) jalpasi § 49.6.42B2. eṣo ca dāni bhikṣu <ta>sya (?) sārddhevihārī (Acc. ?) vā antevāsī vā paścāc- chramaṇaṃ praveśe{n}ti 531 sārvvaṃ für sārddhaṃ : § 49.1.42A1 sārvvevihāriṃ für sārddhevihāriṃ : § 49.2.42A4 sārvvevihārika~ für sārddhevihārika~ : § 42.21.37A6, § 48.2.41A5, § 49.1.41B6 sālohita~ (BHS, Pā) “Blutsverwandter” § 33.9.28A4. eṣo bhikṣu mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā bhaginīm vā śabdāpayitukāmo bhavati, ... atha khalu “sālohite (Voc. pl. masc.)” ti vā śabdāpayitavyāḥ § 33.10.28A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya <mātā vā> pitā vā bhaginī vā śabdāpayati, ... atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “sālohite (Voc. pl. masc. oder sg. fem.?), kiṃ āṇapesi? kiṃ karemi?” § 33.13.28A5. atha khalu vaktavyaṃ “sālohita, kiṃ āṇapesi? kiṃ karomi?” tti sāvevihāriṇā für sārdhevi°: § 8.4.8B7 sā-haṭa~ “zusammengefaltet”; < Skt. saṃhṛta ☞ § 4.20, Anm. 2 ⇒ sā-hara-, pātra-saṃhṛta~ § 56.5.47A6. yathāsāhaṭasya niṣīdanasya dvitīyo anto uvveliya prajñapayitavyaṃ, tato niṣīditavyaṃ sā-hara-# “zusammenlegen; zusammenfalten”; < Skt. saṃharati; vgl. BHSD, s.v. sāhartavya; BHSG § 3.3; Pkt. sāharaï ☞ § 4.20, Anm. 2 ⇒ abhi-sā-hara-, sā-haṭa~ § 8.6.9A3. upādhyāyasya cīvarāṇi prasphoṭiya sāhariya pratisāmayitavyāni § 11.5.10B6. yadi tāva ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ bhavati, sāharitvā ekānte sthāpayitavyaṃ § 41.6.34A3. saṃghāṭīṃ prasphoṭiya sāhariya abhyantareṇa dviguṇikāṃ kariya ... § 41.22.35A6. grāmapraveśikaṃ cīvaraṃ prasphoṭitvā abhyantaraparikarmmaṃ sāharitvā sthapetavyaṃ § 42.14.36B7. snāyantena cīvarakaṃ sāharitvā ekasthāne sthavitavyaṃ loḍhikena vā paṭikāya vā § 43.9.38A7. ete bhavanti vastrābharaṇakā vā pariśrāvaṇā vā caturasrakā vā sāharitvā ... § 43.15.38B4. cīvararaj<j>ūṃ ... sāharitvā yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyaṃ § 44.4.39A2. cīvarakāni {sa}sāharitāni kāriya antaramukhaṃ duguṇântaraṃ kariya cīvara- vaṃśe sthapetavyāni § 44.5.39A2. cīvaraṃ sāharitvā abhyantaraparikarmma dviguṇ’ ante agrato karttavyo antarapīḍito § 46.5.40B1. prasphoṭayitvā sāharitvā ekānte sthapayitavyaṃ § 53.19.45B7. tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati, sāhariyāṇaṃ ghaṭikāyāṃ vā bhājane vā sthāpayi- tavyaṃ § 56.1.47A3. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭiya sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gacchanti § 56.6.47A7. niṣīdanaṃ ... saṃprajānaṃ sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gantavyaṃ siṃha~ “Löwe” ⇒ sīha~ § 30.4.25A1. evaṃ bhikṣavo śeyyāṃ kalpetha yathā siṃho mṛgarājā. siṃho bhikṣavo mṛgarājā dakṣiṇena pārśvena śeyyāṃ kalpayati siṃhanādika~ ⇒ āṭakkara-siṃhanādika~ siṃha-bhaya~# “Gefahr durch Löwen” ☞ § 1.12, Anm. 3 § 1.12.2A5. yadi tāva ... na vā siṃhabhayam vā vyāghrabhayam vā caurabhayam vā <bhavati> § 1.12.2A5. atha dāni ... siṃhabhayam vā vyāghrabhayam vā caurabhayam vā, ... (≒ § 2.10.3A3) § 3.11.4A3. corabhayam vā na bhavati siṃhabhayaṃ vā vyāghrabhayaṃ vā na bhavati § 31.33.26B7. atha dāni siṃhabhayaṃ vā bhava{ṃ}ti vyāghrabhayaṃ vā corabhayaṃ vā, ... kiṃ câpi dvāraṃ ghaṭenti, anāpattiḥ § 39.8.31A5. anekāye āraṇyakānāṃ co<ra>bhayaṃ vā bhaveya udakabhayaṃ vā siṃhabhayaṃ vā vyāghrabhayaṃ vā siṃha-śeyyā~# “das Liegen wie ein Löwe” ⇒ śayyā~, śeyyā~, śeyyāṃ kalpaya- § 30.7.25A4. rātrīye madhyame yāme dakṣiṇena pārśvena siṃhaśeyyā kalpayitavyā siṃhāṇaka~ “Nasenschleim” ⇒ siṃghāṇaka~ siktaka~ ⇒ ghaṭa-siktaka~ siṃghāṇaka~ (Skt), siṃhāṇaka~ (BHS) “Nasenschleim” ⇒ uccāra-prasrāva-kheṭa-siṃghāṇaka~, kheṭa-siṃghāṇaka~, pakka-siṃghāṇaka~ 532  § 18.18.16A6. kheṭaṃ vā siṃhāṇakam vā varcco vā tahi nikṣiptaṃ bhavati, ... § 24.3.22A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati bhikṣuṇā ... bhittīyaṃ kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakam vā cchorayituṃ § 24.9.22A5. kheṭam vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā utthitvā ekānte kṛtvā punaḥ upaveṣṭavyaṃ § 25.17.23A3. na dāni kṣamati pātreṇa aprayataṃ gṛhṇituṃ, uccāro vā prasrāvo vā kheṭaṃ vā siṃghāṇakaṃ vā ... grahetuṃ § 59.4.48B1. saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvayitavyaṃ, yathā anantarikasya na vyābaheyyā kheṭena vā siṃghāṇakena vā § 59.5.48B2. saṃprajānaṃ kṣīvitavyaṃ, yathā ānantarikasya na vyābaheyyā kheṭen<a v>ā siṃhāṇakena vā siṃghāṇaka-varttī~# “Nasenschleimtropfen” ⇒ varttī~ § 24.1.22A1. adrākṣīd ... vihārakā<nā>ṃ pakkakheṭena vā pakkasiṃghāṇakena bhittīyo vināśitāyo siṃghāṇakavarttīhi lambantīhi √sic ⇒ ā-siñca-, ghaṭa-siktaka~, siñca-, siñcāpaya-, siñce- siñca- ⇒ ā-siñca-, siñcāpaya-, siñce- § 3.7.3B5. poṣadhasthānaṃ siñcitavyaṃ sanmārjitavyaṃ § 8.9.9A6. vihārako siñcitavyo sammārjitavyo (= § 14.7.13A5) § 13.14.12B6. vihārakā kālena kālaṃ siñcitavyāḥ saṃmārjitavyāḥ gomayakārṣī dātavyā § 19.28.18B5. atha dāni uppīlito bhavati, akaṃthāyena viya mūtreṇa siñcantena na gantavyaṃ § 23.9.21B7. upāṃsulako vihārako bhavati, kālena kālaṃ siñcitavyo saṃmārjitavyo § 42.11.36B5. tehi jentāke santānikā śāṭayitavyā, siñcitvā sammārjayitavyo § 42.31.37B7. jentākaṃ siñciya sammārjiya ... § 44.9.39A7. kālena kālaṃ siñcitvā sammārjitavyaṃ siñcāpaya-# “(mit Wasser) besprengen lassen”; vgl. Pā. siñcāpeti § 1.8.1B7. atha khalu pratikṛty’ eva poṣadhasthānaṃ gantavyaṃ siñcāpayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyo) sanmārjayitavyaṃ (Hs. °vyo) gomayakārṣī dātavyā (≒ § 2.6.2B6) siñcitavya~ für sīvitavya~ : § 8.9.9A6, § 55.10.47A1, § 56.7.47A7 *siñce-# “ausgießen”; < Skt. siñcayati § 18.12.16A1. udakakṛtyaṃ karentena na dāni jjhallajjhalāye udakaṃ <siṃ>cetavyaṃ. atha khalu mātrāye ’va <siṃ>cetavyaṃ sitakaṃ für mitakaṃ : § 42.28.37B5 √sidh § 4.7.4B5. “bhikṣusaṃgho tena nimantrito. kiṃ sidhyati vā pacyati vā?” ... “kasya bhaktaṃ? kasya sidhyati? kasya pacyatî?”ti § 4.7.4B6. bhante etaṃ sidhyati ... § 5.6.6B3. jānāhi kiṃ sidhyati, kiṃ pacyati § 5.7.6B4. kiṃ sidhyati vā kiṃ pacyati vā? ... na sidhyati na pacyati § 5.7.6B5. bhante etaṃ sidhyati, etaṃ pacyati (≒ § 6.7.7B5) § 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ. “āyuṣman, kiṃ sidhyati? kiṃ pacyati? kiṃ bhaktakānāṃ sthitikā?” √siv ⇒ sivaya-, sive-, sīvaya-, sīve- si{|}vapasikā für śivapathikā? : § 6.13.8A3 sivaya-#, sive-# “nähen” ⇒ sīva-, sīvaya-, sīve- § 11.8.11A1. samantena sūtreṇa siviyāṇaṃ (Hs. śiv°) tato madhyeṇa dīrghasūtrāṇi dātavyāni § 11.9.11A2. kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ, kālena kālaṃ sivitavyaṃ (Hs. śici°) § 14.14.13B3. uṇṇiyo vā bisio vā caturasrakā vā omayilomayilā bhavanti pāṭitavipāṭitā, dhovitvā sivitavyā, pratyaggalāni dātavyāni § 16.8.14B3. śeyyāsanaṃ dhovitavyaṃ sivitavyaṃ rañjitavyaṃ § 17.10.15A5. anyehi dhovayitavyaṃ, anyehi pīḍitavyaṃ, anyehi sivayitavyaṃ (Hs. visa°) § 21.2.20B1. bhagavan, idaṃ cīvaraṃ sivayāmi § 21.3.20B1. evan taṃ tvaṃ bhūmīya astarīya cīvaraṃ sivayasi § 47.1.40B3. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarakāṇi dhoventā siventā raṃjentā talavilayaṃ 533  gacchāmaḥ; vgl. § 48.1.41A4. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarāṇi dhoventā sīventā rañjentā ... siṣṭakam für śiṣṭakam : § 1.6.1B5 sīva- (BHS; vgl. BHSG § 28.29) “nähen” ⇒ sīvaya-, sīve-, sivaya-, sive- § 8.9.9A6. cīvarāṇi dhovetavyāni sīvitavyāni (Hs. siñcit°) raṃjitavyāni § 12.7.11B4. śayyāsanaṃ bhavati omayilamayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ, dhoviya sīvitavyaṃ § 12.18.12A5. kālena kālaṃ śayyāsanaṃ sīvitavyaṃ dhovitavyaṃ § 16.6.14B1. (śeyyāsanaṃ ...) dhoviṣyanti rañjiṣyanti sīviṣyanti § 21.2.20B1. adrākṣīd ... anyataraṃ bhikṣuṃ bhūmau astariya cīvaraṃ sīvantaṃ § 21.4.20B2. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣuḥ cīvaraṃ sīvitukāmo bhavati, upasthānaśālāyāṃ vā agniśālāyāṃ vā prāsāde vā prahāṇake <vā> kaṭhinaṃ prajñāpayitvā cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 21.5.20B2. kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiyāṇaṃ taṃ cīvaraṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 21.6.20B3. yaṃ kālaṃ cīvaraṃ sīvitaṃ bhavati, kaṭhinaṃ samvaṭ<ṭ>iyāṇaṃ ... § 21.9.20B5. atha dāni kaṭhinaṃ na bhavati, mañcasya vā upari cīvaraṃ pīṭhasya vā upari cīvarakaṃ kariyāṇaṃ sīvitavyaṃ § 32.6.27B1. cīvaraṃ dhovantasya, rajanikā pacantasya, cīvarāṇi sīvantasya raṃjentasya ... § 44.11.39B1. kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ raṃjitavyaṃ sīvitavyaṃ yathā cchavi § 47.2.40B5. cīvarakāni dhovaṃtā sīvantā rañjentā ... (= § 48.2.41A6) § 48.9.41B5. cīvaraka ... pāṭitaṃ vā vipāṭitaṃ bhavati, sīvitavyaṃ § 56.7.47A7. niṣīdanaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ kālena kālaṃ sīvitavyaṃ (Hs. siṃci°) usw. sīvaya- (Skt), sīve- (BHS) “nähen” ⇒ sīva-, sivaya-, sive- § 13.12.12B5. śayyāsanaṃ ... kālena kālaṃ dhovitavyaṃ sīvayitavyaṃ rañjayitavyaṃ § 17.11.15A5. bisī sīvayitavyā, caturasrā vāpayitavyā § 21.5.20B2. atha dāni aparo pi koci sīvayi<tu>kāmo bhavati, tenâpi pādāṃ dhovayitvā ... § 21.5.20B3. atha khalu bāhyena kaṭhinasmi pādāni thapiyāṇaṃ cīvaraṃ sīvayitavyaṃ § 21.5.20B3. kaṭhinasmiṃ pallaṃkenôpaviśiya cīvaraṃ sīvayitavyaṃ § 21.6.20B4. yadi aparo pi koci sīvayitukāmo bhavati, tenâpi ... tathā sīvayitavyaṃ § 21.7.20B4. nâpi kṣamati kaṭhinasmi raṅgaṃ vā śoṣayituṃ gomayaṃ vā cīvarakāni vā śoṣayituṃ. atha khalu cīvarakaṃ sīvayitavyaṃ § 21.9.20B6. antamasato jānukānāṃ pi upari cīvarakaṃ thaviya sīvayitavyaṃ § 48.1.41A4. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarāṇi dhoventā sīventā rañjentā talavilayaṃ gacchāmaḥ; vgl. § 47.1.40B3. vayaṃ yeva tāva cīvarakāṇi dhoventā siventā raṃjentā ... § 55.10.47A1. geṇḍuko ... kālena kālaṃ sīvayitavyo (Hs. siñca°) kālena kālaṃ pratisaṃs- karttavyo sīha~ (BHS[Mvu], Pā, Pkt) “Löwe” ⇒ siṃha~ § 61.1.49A2. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyā jaṃbhayanti ... yathā sīhā vā vyāghrā vā evaṃ jaṃbhayanti § 61.3.49A3. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati ... yathā sīhena vā vyāghreṇa vā unnadantena evaṃ jaṃbhayituṃ su / sna : § 53.17.45B6. utthihaṃsna für °heṃsu su + Absolutiv (vgl. § 43.10, Anm. 2) ⇒ su-dhovitvā sukumāra~ “weich” § 18.14.16A2. leṅkaṭakhaṃḍehi vā bhastrāyanakehi vā sukumārehi dayitavyaṃ sukhaṃ ⇒ sukhākaṃ, sukhena, yathā-sukhaṃ, yathā-sukhe § 8.12.9B2. sukhaṃ pratikramāpayitavyaṃ, uddiśitvā vā paripṛcchitvā vā § 10.5.10A6. dīpaṃ ādīpiya śayyāṃ prajñapiya sukhaṃ pratikrāmayitavyo § 34.5.28B5. darśanapathe upasaṃkramitvā na dāni vaktavyaṃ “sukham bhavanto, sukhaṃ mārṣa.” (= § 35.5.29A4, § 36.5.29B4) § 34.6.28B6. tavâhaṃ hitopasaṃhāreṇa rakṣāvaraṇaguptiye sukhaṃ ca phāsukañ ca viharāmi § 38.6.30B1. kasya tvaṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ samagrāṇāṃ ... śāstuḥ śāsanaṃ dīpayamānānāṃ sukhañ ca phāsuñ ca viharantānāṃ ... saṃghe karkaśāni adhikaraṇāni utpādayasi? 534  § 43.16.38B5. purokṛtyaṃ sukhaṃ bhaviṣyati sukha-rātri~ (BHS[Mvu]) “angenehme Nachtruhe” ⇒ sukha-śayita~ § 10.4.10A5. antevāsinā ... ācāryasya sukharātri pṛcchitavyā sukha-varṇṇao für mukhavarṇṇo: § 49.1.42A3 sukha-śayita~ “angenehme Nachtruhe” ⇒ sukha-rātri~ § 8.4.8B7. vanditvā sukhaśayitaṃ pṛcchitavyaṃ (Hs. °tavyo) sukhākaṃ# “vorsichtig, sachte, still, ruhig, leise, langsam” ☞ § 8.4, Anm. 2 § 8.4.8B7. yaṃ kālaṃ abhyanujñā dinnā bhavati, tato dvāraṃ sukhākaṃ apaduriyāṇa ... (≒ § 10.4.10A5) § 29.4.24B2. atha khalu eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ āmuhūrtte viśrāmiya sammiñjiya, dvitīyo pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo § 61.5.49A5. atha dāni bhikṣusya aṅgāni duḥkhāyanti, ekā tāva bāhā sukhākaṃ prasārayi- tavyā ... tāṃ sammiñjiya dvitīyā sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyā. eko pādo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo. taṃ sammiñjiya dvitīyo sukhākaṃ prasārayitavyo § 44.6.39A5. tato koṇakāto prabhṛti sukhākaṃ mocayitavyaṃ § 56.4.47A4. ātmano pratisandhismi sukhākaṃ niṣīdanakaṃ pīṭhake prajñapayitavyaṃ § 56.4.47A5. atha khalu sukhākaṃ utthitvā dviguṇīkṛtvā skandhe kṛtvā ca gantavyaṃ § 60.4.48B6. atha ca dāni bhikṣu prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā sukhākaṃ uvvaṭṭayitavyaṃ § 61.6.49A6. cīvarakarṇṇakena mukhaṃ pidhiya sukhākaṃ vijṛmbhitavyaṃ sukhena “leicht” ⇒ sukhaṃ § 42.9.36B4. nâpi dāni {kṣamati} tathā karttavyaṃ yathā sukhena tapyati sukhodakam für mukho° : § 8.5.9A1 sukhopaviṣṭa~ (sukha-upa°) “bequem sitzend” ⇒ upaviṣṭa~, upa-√viś § 1.12.2A5. yadi tāva ... bhikṣū vā sukhopaviṣṭā bhavanti, ... (≒ § 3.11.4A3) § 2.10.3A4. bhikṣū ca (lies: vā?) sukhopaviṣṭā bhavanti vistareṇa śrotukāmā su-gandha~ § 40.6.32B7. sarvvaṅ karttavyaṃ, yathā sugandhā bhaveṃsu su-gṛhīta~ § 25.13.23A1. okaḍḍhantena sugṛhītaṃ karttavyaṃ sugotrīmātā für sagotrīmātā : § 42.25.37B3 su-graha~# “gute Entscheidung”#?; vgl. Pā. suggaha ☞ § 38.4, Anm. 5 ⇒ du-graha~ § 38.4.30A7. yadi tāva tasya dugraho bhavati vaktavyaṃ, “mā allīya.” atha dāni tasya sugraho (Hs. saṃgr°; ☞ § 38.4[Text], Anm. 2) bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “āllīya” tti § 38.7.30B2. atha dāni tasya sugraho bhavati, so ca bhikṣu bhavati bhadrako guṇavān śikṣākāmo anuddhato ..., saṃghasthavireṇa vaktavyaṃ “āyuṣman, jalpatha ...” ti su-tthapita~#, su-thapita~# “richtig hingestellt”; < su +sthpita ⇒ su-sthapita~, du-tthapita~, du- tthāpitaka~, thapaya-, su-sthapita~, sthapaya-, sthape-, √sthā usw. § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... dutthapitā bhavanti, sutthapitā karttavyā § 13.13.12B5. pādakā utthitakā (lies: dutthitakā?) bhavanti, suthapitā karttavyāḥ su-tthita~# “richtig hingestellt”; < su + sthita ⇒ su-tthapita~, su-thapita~, su-sthita~, du-tthita~, du-tthitaka~, du-tthapita~, du-tthāpitaka~, ut-thitaka~ § 13.11.12B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... dutthitakā (Hs. utthitakā) bhavanti, sutthitā thapetavyā su-thapita~# ⇒ su-tthapita~ su-divasa~ § 4.16.5B2. adya te sudivasaṃ sumahābalaṃ (lies: sumaṅgalaṃ; vgl. § 4.16, Anm. 2) (vs) su-duṣkara~ § 4.20.6A3. suduṣkaraṃ pravrajitasya dānaṃ (vs) sudhā~ § 18.6.15B5. ākāśatalaṃ vā liṃpitavyaṃ mṛttikāya vā sudhāya vā § 19.4.17B6. udakabhramaṇasya upari thapetavyā sudhāya samaṃtena lipitavyā sudhā-cchadana~# “Decke bzw. Dach aus Zement” ☞ § 11.6, Anm. 3 ⇒ apakka-cchadana~, apakva-cch°, kabhalla-cch°, tṛṇa-cch°, phalaka-cch°, mṛttikā-cch° § 11.6.10B7. sudhā<cchadano bhavati, sudhāpiṇḍo dātavyo> 535  § 12.5.11B2. yadi tāva sudhācchadano bhavati, sudhāpiṇḍo dātavyo § 13.6.12B2. yadi tāva vihārako sudhācchadano bhavati, <sudhāpiṇḍo dātavyo> § 23.7.21B5. sudhācchadano bhavati, sudhāpiṇḍo dātavyo sudhātāṃ für sudhotāṃ : § 41.15.34B5 sudhā-pāṇḍu-lepana~# “aus Zement und weiße Tünche” § 47.1.40B3. saṃbādharathyāhi sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittiyo ghasantā gacchanti § 47.7.41A1. kaṇṭakaśākhā parivarjantena sudhāpāṇḍulepanāyo (Hs. °lapanāyo) <bhittīḥ> parivarjantena praviśitavyaṃ § 47.9.41A2. sudhāpāṇḍulepanā (Hs. suvāp°) bhittī bhavati varjayitavyā § 48.1.41A3. NandanOpanandanā ... sudhāpāṇḍulepanāyo bhittīyo ghasaṃtā upaviśaṃti § 48.2.41A5. sudhāpāṇḍulepanāhi (Loc. pl.) bhittīhi ghasaṃtā praviśatha § 48.7.41B2. nâpi kṣamati antaraghare praviṣṭena sudhāpāṇḍulepanā bhittī ghasatena atikramituṃ sudhā-piṇḍa~ (Pā[Ap I 133.9, 198.18, 21, Mhv 282.20]) “Zementklumpen” ⇒ mṛt-piṇḍa~, mṛttikā- piṇḍa~ § 12.5.11B2. yadi tāva sudhācchadano bhavati, sudhāpiṇḍo dātavyo (≒ § 23.7.21B6) sudhā-mṛttikā-lepa~# “das Bestreichen mit Zement und Ton”; vgl. Mvu I 302.13. sudhā-mṛttikā- lepana~; Vin II 154. 19. sudhā-mattikā-lepana~ ☞ § 42.7, Anm. 10 § 42.7.36B2. jentākaṃ karentena ... sudhāmṛttikālepo vā karttavyo su-dhota~ (Pā) “vollkommen gewaschen” ⇒ dhota~, a-dhotaka~, dhova- § 16.6.14B2. yaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ navakaṃ sudhotaṃ ca suraktaṃ ca, taṃ ... § 16.7.14B2. ye mañcā vā pīṭhā vā navā ca sārā ca sudhotā (Hs. sadh°) ca te ... § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... hastāṃ sudhotāṃ (Hs. sudhātāṃ) kṛtvā bhājanaṃ sudhotaṃ kṛtvā udakasya pūriya ... § 43.5.38A4. te sudhotāṃ suprakṣālitāṃ kārāpayiya ātape sthāpayitavyāḥ § 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā ... prasphoṭiya sudhotāṃ suprakṣālitāṃ kariya ātape śoṣayitavyā § 43.15.38B3. sudhotaṃ suprakṣālitaṃ suliptaṃ suśuṣkaṃ kariyāṇaṃ <yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyaṃ> su-dhovitvā “nachdem man vollkommen gewaschen hat” (Zu su als Präfix zum Absolutiv, s. § 43.10, Anm. 2) ⇒ dhova- § 43.10.38A7. atha khalu sudhovitvā yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyā § 43.16.38B5. atha khalu sudhovitvā (Hs. bodhisatvā bzw. vo°) yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyo su-nirmmādita~# “vollkommen gereinigt” ⇒ nirmmādaya- § 40.10.33A3. hastāṃ sunirmmāditāṃ kṛtvā bhājanaṃ sunirmmāditaṃ kṛtvā caukṣaṃ pānīyaṃ vāretavyaṃ su-prakṣālita~ “vollkommen gespült” § 43.5.38A5. te sudhotāṃ suprakṣālitāṃ kārāpayiya ātape sthāpayitavyāḥ § 43.7.38A6. etā bhavanti māṇikā vā khāṇukā vā ... prasphoṭiya sudhotāṃ suprakṣālitāṃ kariya ātape śoṣayitavyā § 43.8.38A6. ete khajjakacaṃgerīyo vanaphalacaṅgerīyo haritakīcaṅgerīyo vā prasphoḍiya suprakṣālitāṃ kariya ekamante sthapetavyāḥ § 43.15.38B3. sudhotaṃ suprakṣālitaṃ suliptaṃ suśuṣkaṃ kariyāṇaṃ <yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyaṃ> su-pratisaṃskṛta~ “gut repariert, gut instand gehalten” ⇒ prati-saṃ-s-√kṛ § 16.5.14B1. ye vihārakā navakā ca supratisaṃskṛtā ca, te āgantukānāṃ sthāpayitavyā su-pratyavekṣita~# “wohl betrachtet” ⇒ praty-avekṣa- § 41.15.34B5. bhājanaṃ sudhotaṃ kṛtvā udakasya pūriya ... so dāni supratyavekṣitaṃ kariya corasenāpatisya all[ī]no su-bhaya~ § 4.19.6A1. sarvvā diśā subhayā samākulā sa uttarā sa purastimā (vs) su-bhāvita~ “ganz gefüllt” § 40.5.32B6. pānīyaṃ pariśrāviya, golakā vā maṇikā vā ... subhāvitā kariya thapetavyā, yathā pānīyaṃ caukṣaṃ bhaveya 536 su-maṅgala~ § 4.16.5B2. adya te sudivasaṃ sumahābalaṃ (lies: sumaṅgalaṃ; vgl. § 4.16, Anm. 2) (vs) sumanā-phulla~# “aufgeblühte Blume”; sumanā (“the great-flowered jasmine” [PTSD]) + phulla (“aufgeblüht”) § 18.53.17B3. tasya bhikṣusya sumanāphullāni nāsikye dadiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ, ... § 19.42.19A4. tasya glānasya sumanāphullaṃ nakke dadiyāṇaṃ vaktavyaṃ “imaṃ ...” sumahābalaṃ für sumaṅgalaṃ : § 4.16.5B2 (vgl. § 4.16, Anm. 2) su-rakṣita~ § 41.13.34B2. tasya gṛha<ṃ> guptañ ca surakṣitañ ca na pārenti otāraṃ vindanāya su-rakta~ ⇒ rañja- § 16.6.14B2. yaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ navakaṃ sudhotaṃ ca suraktaṃ ca, taṃ ... su-lipta~ “(mit Tünche?) vollkommen bestrichen”# (?) ☞ § 43.1, Anm. 2 ⇒ an-upalipta~, an- upaliptaka~, upa-limpa- usw. § 43.15.38B3. sudhotaṃ suprakṣālitaṃ suliptaṃ suśuṣkaṃ kariyāṇaṃ <yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyaṃ> suvarṇṇa~ § 41.14.34B4. dāraka kahiṃ tumhāṇaṃ hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇaṃ vā? § 41.18.35A1. etaṃ hiraṇyaṃ suvarṇṇaṃ (wohl für hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ) harema § 41.18.35A2. imaṃ vayaṃ tava sarvvaṃ hiraṇyaṃ suvarṇṇaṃ (wohl für hiraṇya- suvarṇṇaṃ) demi § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti śāṭakā vā paṭakā vā hārā vā arddhahārā vā hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇam vā, ... suvā~ für sudhā~ : § 19.4.17B6, § 47.9.41A2 suvidita für suvihita : § 53.9.45A7 su-vihita~ “Gutherziger; Gutartiger”; als Vokativ “oh mein Lieber”# ☞ § 4.16, Anm. 4 § 4.16.5B2. adya te suvihitehi dakṣiṇā agrabhājanagatā virocati (vs) § 8.7.9A4. nānāvarṇṇitaṃ bhavati, pṛcchitavyo “suvihita, kuto idaṃ labdhaṃ?” § 4.20.6A3. prītiṃ janehi suvihitā (lies: °hita [m.c.]) tathā hi dinnaṃ imaṃ dānan (vs) § 49.7.42B4. suvihita, gantavyaṃ § 52.6.44B4. āha “upādhyāyācārya, paribhuṃjāhi” tti, “suvihita, kuto imaṃ?” ti pṛcchitavyo § 52.6.44B5. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, apratigrāhyo eṣo jano. mā bhūyo eteṣāṃ tena pratigṛhṇīhasi” § 52.6.44B6. vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, karohi dhūmaṃ. mā ca punaḥ āmiṣacakṣuḥ <deśesi>.” § 52.7.44B6. atha dāni na kāṃkṣati, vaktavyaṃ “suvihita, paribhu<ṃ>jāhi tvaṃ. nâhaṃ paribhuñjiṣyan.” ti § 53.9.45A7. atha dāni bhikṣu śrāddhako bhavati, āha “suvihita (Hs. suvidita), āsa tvaṃ, ahaṃ vārayiṣyan” ti, dātavyo su-vyupaśānta~# “völlig erledigt” ☞ § 38.8(Text), Anm. 5 ⇒ vyupaśānta~, vy-upa-śamaya- § 38.8.30B3. sarvve tvaṃ etaṃ kāryaṃ samagreṇa saṃghena suvyupaśāntaṃ (Hs. saṃvy°) su-śuṣka~ ⇒ śuṣka~ § 43.15.38B3. sudhotaṃ suprakṣālitaṃ suliptaṃ suśuṣkaṃ kariyāṇaṃ <yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyaṃ> suṣṭhu § 19.31.18B5. atha dāni bhikṣu suṣṭhu uppīlito bhavati, nâpi kṣamati yathā uṣṭreṇa ... § 42.3.36A5. dhūmena ca uṣṇena ca suṣṭhu saṃtāpitāḥ § 49.1.42A3. āyuṣman, snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo, pilipilāpanti oṣṭhā, suṣṭhu khalu nirddhāpīyati su-saṃvṛta~ “gut verhüllt, gut angezogen” ☞ § 29.6, Anm. 4 § 29.6.24B4. atha dāni arddhaparyaṅkenâpi na pāreti niṣīdituṃ, ubhau pādau osāriya susaṃvṛtena niṣīditavyaṃ § 47.9.41A2. sambādharathyā bhavati susaṃvṛtena paśyillakena atikrāmitavyaṃ su-sthapita~# “richtig hingestellt” ⇒ su-tthapita~, su-thapita~, su-sthita~, su-sthitaka~, sthapaya-, sthape- 537  § 19.25.18B4. oruhantena mallakaṃ ghaṭikā vā mañcakasya ca oruhantena (lies: adhastāt?) susthapitā karttavyā su-sthita~ “richtig hingestellt” ⇒ su-sthitaka~, su-tthita~, su-tthapita~, su-thapita~, su-sthapita~ usw. § 13.13.12B5. mañcā vā pīṭhā ... dutthitā bhavanti, susthitā thapitavyāḥ § 16.9.14B4. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... dutthāpitakā bhavanti, susthitā karttavyā su-sthitaka~# “richtig hingestellt” ⇒ su-sthita~, su-tthita~, su-tthapita~, su-thapita~, su-sthapita~ usw. § 17.12.15A6. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... dutthitakā bhavanti, susthitakā karttavyā sūkara~ § 35.6.29A5. nâpi kṣamati te nindituṃ “māṇavakasya mānahatasya ihaloke bhūtasya kukkuṭo sūkaro (Hs. śū°) śvāno śṛgālo pañcamo mūṣako nirayo ṣaṣṭho” tti sūcika-bandhimaṃ für sūcikā-bandhimaṃ : § 42.9.36B4 sūcikā-bandhima~# “geschlossen mit Hilfe eines Riegels in einem Schloß” i.e. “geschlossen mit Hilfe eines Schlosses” ☞ § 42.9, Anm. 2; zum -ima Suffix, vgl. § 18.7, Anm. 4 ⇒ ghaṭikā- bandhima~ § 42.9.36B4. kapāṭaṃ ... na dāni kṣamati sūcikābandhimaṃ (Hs. sūcikab°) karttuṃ sūtra~ (1) “Sūtra” § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ geyaṃ vyākaraṇaṃ gāthā ... (2) “Sūtra” ☞ § 1.6, Anm. 1 § 1.6.1B5. saṃghasthavireṇa pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa svādhyāyitavyāni yāva ’ntamasato catvāri pārājikā gāthāś ca śiṣṭakam abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā § 7.4.8B1~2. ekato vinayaṃ na pārayati, pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa grāhayitavyo. pañca sūtrāṇi na pārayati, catvāri vā trīṇi duve ekaṃ sūtraṃ vistareṇa grāhayitavyo. ekaṃ sūtraṃ na pāreti <dvānavatīto grāhayitavyo> (≒ § 9.4.10A1) (3) “Faden, Schnur” ⇒ dīrgha-sūtra~, sūtraka~ § 3.5.3B2. avaśyaṃ vaṃśavidalikāhi vā nalavidalikāhi vā likhitvā sūtreṇa āvuṇitvā ... dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ § 11.8.11A1. samantena sūtreṇa siviyāṇaṃ tato madhyeṇa dīrghasūtrāṇi dātavyāni § 21.5.20B3. atha dāni niṣaṇṇo bāhirakāṃ pādāṃ kṛtvā sūtraṃ valento āsati, anāpattiḥ § 55.2.46B3. geṇḍukaṃ dāni bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena kārāpayitavyo tṛṇānām vā palālānām vā leṅka<ṭa>kakhaṇḍakānām vā sūtrasya vā uṇṇāya vā § 59.3.48A7. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭena auddhatyābhiprāyeṇa tulikāya vā nakkaṃ vijjhituṃ sūtraṃ vaṭṭiya nakkasmin prakṣipituṃ (4) “Richtschnur”? ☞ § 43.16, Anm. 5 § 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā sūtraka~ “Faden, Schnur” ⇒ sūtra~ § 55.2.46B3. (geṇḍuka~ ...) bāhyena paṭṭena nattakena veṣṭayitvā sūtrakena veṣṭayitavyo § 59.1.48A6. te ... auddhatyābhiprāyāḥ tulikāye nakkaṃ vijjhanti, sūtrakaṃ pi vaṭṭiyāṇaṃ nakke prakṣipanti sūtrakāye für sūtrikāye? : § 22.2.20B7 ⇒ sūtrikā~ sūtra-kauśalya~# “die Fähigkeit, mit Sūtras umzugehen” ☞ § 7.6, Anm. 1 § 7.6.8B4. āpattikauśalyaṃ śikṣitavyo sūtrakauśalyaṃ skandhakauśalyaṃ ... sūtrānta~ (BHS) “Lehrtext” § 7.5.8B3. abhidharmmo nāma navavidho sūtrānto sūtraṃ geyaṃ vyākaraṇaṃ gāthā udānaṃ itivṛttakaṃ jātakaṃ vaipulyâdbhutadharmmā sūtrikā~ “Schnur”# ☞ § 21.3, Anm. 7 § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ ... vaṃśānāṃ vā nalānām vā na<ṃ>galānāṃ vā kāṇḍānām vā carukānām vā rohiṣāṇāṃ vā sūtrikāya vā rejjukāya vā ghaṇa<ṃ> vuṇitavyaṃ § 22.2.20B7. cakkalī ... kārāpayitavyā vaṃśānām vā naḍānām vā naṅgalānām vā kaṇḍānām vā rejjukāye vā sūtrakāye (für sūtrikāye?) vā ghaṇā vuṇitavyā sūtroddeśaka~# (sūtra-udd°) “Rezitator des (Prātimokṣa-)Sūtras” ⇒ uddeśa, ekoddeśaka~, 538  madhyuddeśa-pāṭhaka~ § 1.11.2A4. yaṃ kālaṃ dāyakadānapati nirddhāvitā bhavanti, tato sūtroddeśakena jānitavyaṃ (= § 3.10.4A3; ≒ § 2.9.3A2) sūpa~ § 4.1.4A5. odano śītalo bhavati. sūpo śītalo bhavati § 4.12.5A5. evaṃ ‖ pe ‖ sūpasya ghṛtasya māṃsasya olaṃkānāṃ dadhisya sūryādimukham für sūryābhimukhaṃ? : § 43.4.38A4 sūryābhimukham# (sūrya-abhi°) “zur Sonne gerichtet” § 43.4.38A4. lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ... liptopaliptaṃ kariya omuddhikā sthapitavyā sūryābhimukhaṃ (Hs. °ādimukhaṃ) sūryodgamana~# (sūrya-ud°) “Sonnenaufgang” § 30.7.25A4. nâpi dāni parivarttakaṃ yāvat sūryodgamanāt tato śayitavyaṃ √sṛ ⇒ us-sara-, o-sara-, o-saraya-, o-sāraya-, niḥ-sāraye-, pra-sāraya-, pra-sāre-, prati-sara-, saṃ-sāraya- √sṛj ⇒ vi-sarjaya-, vi-sarje- se; Gen. sg. masc.; vgl. BHSG § 21.18; Scheller 1967; Emeneau 1988: 114; v. Hinüber 2001: § 385; Norman CP III 119 ⇒ idam~ § 5.5.6B2. kiṃkarmmikā se mātāpitarau?; vgl. § 4.5.4B3. kiṃkarmmikā te mātāpitarau? § 6.13.8A3. kāko ca se akṣimalaṃ harantaṃ (vs) § 6.13.8A4. yathā icchati se mātā yathā icchati se pitā (vs) § 18.44.17A5. yo se (Hs. sau) dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, ... § 19.36.19A1. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena pṛṣṭhato sthātavyaṃ parāṅmukhena § 41.5.34A2. yatra yeva ayaṃ śramaṇako iryāpathaṃ vikopayiṣyati, tatraỿva se (Hs. śe) khaṭakaṃ dāsyāmi § 60.5.48B7. koci se (Hs. śe) pradeśo khajjati, hastā ca se ’kalpiyā bhavanti, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ sejje-# “bereitstellen”; < Skt. sajjayati (zur Palatalisierung des Vokals; vgl. Norman 1975/76 = 1990: 220~237) ⇒ sajjaya-, sajje- § 42.11.36B5. kāṣṭhaṃ sejjetavyaṃ, bhaṇḍā sajjayitavyā, ghaṭā vā sajjetavyā kuṇḍā <vā> setu~ “Damm” § 19.4.17B6. tathā samantena setuḥ karttavyo, yathā ... praśvāsako bāhyena nirggacchati senāpati~ ⇒ cora-senāpati~ § 41.15.34B5. senāpati, pibāhi § 41.16.34B6. senāpati, pānīyaṃ pratyavekṣituṃ § 41.16.34B6. tena senāpatisya aphāsu bhaveya § 41.16.34B6. so dāni senāpati tasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 41.17.34B7. tasya bhavati senāpatisya § 41.18.35A1. te dāni āhaṃsu “senāpati” senāpatika~# “Bandenführer” § 41.18.35A2. te dāni āhaṃsuḥ “yathā senāpatikasya rucyati” soddeśam# (sa-ud°) “mit Namen” ☞ § 4.5, Anm. 9 § 4.5.4B3. sākāraṃ soddeśaṃ pṛcchiyāṇaṃ tato ’dhivāsayitavyaṃ (= § 6.5.7B2; ≒ § 5.5. 6B2) sopāna-maggulī~# “unteres Ende der Treppe”? ☞ § 53.6, Anm. 2 ⇒ sopāna-śīrṣa~ § 53.6.45A5. yadi tāva so dvibhūmiko saṃghārāmo bhavati, prathamaṃ tāva sopāna- maggulīye dīpako jālayitavyo § 53.12.45B2. atha khalu bahi prāsādakoṇehi dīpakā nirvvāpayitavyā, sopānamaggulīyaṃ prāsādakuṭīyaṃ dīpako nirvvāpayitavyo § 53.16.45B5. yaṃ kālaṃ paścime yāme prahāṇasya jharjjharo āhato bhavati, tato dīpavārikehi sopānamaggulīyaṃ tāva dīpo prajvālayitavyo sopāna-śīrṣa~# “oberes Ende der Treppe” ☞ § 53.6, Anm. 2 ⇒ sopāna-maggulī~ § 53.13.45B3. racchāyāṃ nirvvāpayitvā, sopānaśīrṣe <dīpo> nirvvāpayitavyaḥ. sopāna- śīrṣe nirvvāpayitvā prahāṇaśālāyāṃ dīpo nirvvāpayitavyo sopānaha~# (sa-upā°), sa-upānaha~# “mit Sandalen” 539  § 57.4.47B3. yadi tāva prahāṇaśālāyāṃ bhūmyastāro kṛtako bhavati, na kṣamati sopānahena pādena prahāṇaṃ upaviśituṃ § 57.7.47B5. atha dāni akṛto bhūmi-astāro bhavati, sa-upānahena prahāṇaśālāṃ praviśi- tavyaṃ § 57.9.47B6. nâpi kṣamati saṃghamadhye bhaktāgre tarpaṇāgre vā samīcīyaṃ vā sa- upānahena niṣīdituṃ § 57.10.47B6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā agrato sa-upānahena niṣīdituṃ § 57.10.47B7. atha dāni bhikṣu glāno bhavati, kiñ câpi sa-upānaho upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā mūle upaviśati, anāpattiḥ *sopāpaya-# “schlafen lassen; zum Schlafen hinlegen”; BHS. sopa- (< √svap; vgl. BHSG § 3.117, S. 238, s.v. svap-, [3] sopa-ti) + -āpayati (vgl. BHSG §§ 38.41f.; v. Hinüber 2001: § 489) ⇒ sopāpitaka~, sovāpaya- sopāpitaka~# “zum Schlafen hingelegt”; < *sopāpita + Suffix ka ⇒ sopāpaya-, sovāpaya- § 4.10.5A2. anekāyo tatra garbharūpāṇi sopāpitakāni (Hs. sopāyita°) bhaveṃsuḥ, kāṃsa- bhājanāni vā thapitakāni bhaveṃsuḥ sobhanaṃ für śobhanaṃ : § 39.17.31B5 sovāpaya-# “schlafen lassen; zum Schlafen hinlegen”; sova- (< √svap; vgl. Pkt. sovaï, BHS. sopati) + -āpayati (vgl. BHSG §§ 38.41f.; v. Hinüber 2001: § 489) ⇒ sopāpaya-, sopāpitaka~ § 5.9.6B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi dārakadārikā vā sovāpitā bhaveṃsu § 6.9.7B7. anekāye tahiṃ āsanehi garbharūpā sovāpitāni bhaveṃsu sau für se : § 18.44.17A5 sauvastika~ “segensbringend” § 4.19.6A2. “diśā sauvastikā” dakṣiṇā vistareṇa ādiśitavyā yathā pātrapratisaṃyukte √skand ⇒ o-kkhanda- skandha~ “Schulter” § 8.6.9A3. cīvarāṇi ... ātmano skandhe dapiya śīrṣaṃ onāmiya purato gantavyaṃ § 47.4.40B6. śīrṣe vā skandhe vā cīvaraṃ kṛtvā gantavyaṃ § 48.7.41B3. antamasato saṃkacchikâpi skandhe datvā apāśrayitavyaṃ § 56.1.47A2. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ prahāṇa āgatā samānā skandhāto niṣīdanaṃ otāriyāṇaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caṭacaṭa” tti prasphoṭayitvā prajñapayitvā niṣīdanti § 56.1.47A3. yaṃ kālaṃ prahāṇasya yathāsukhaṃ kṛtaṃ bhavati, tato niṣīdanaṃ koṇe koṇe gṛhītvā “caḍacaḍā” tti prasphoṭiya sāharitvā skandhe kṛtvā gacchanti § 56.4.47A5. atha khalu sukhākaṃ utthitvā dviguṇīkṛtvā skandhe kṛtvā ca gantavyaṃ § 56.6.47A7. niṣīdanaṃ ... sāharitvā skandhe (Hs. °ndhaṃ) kṛtvā gantavyaṃ skandha-kauśalya~# “die Fähigkeit, mit den Daseinsgruppen umzugehen” ☞ § 7.6, Anm. 1 § 7.6.8B4. āpattikauśalyaṃ śikṣitavyo sūtrakauśalyaṃ skandhakauśalyaṃ āyatanak° ... § 9.5.10A2. śekhayitavyo dhātukauśalyaṃ skandhak° āyatanak° pratītyasamutpādak° √skhal ⇒ uk-khala-, pra-khala- st / pt ⇒ pt / st √stabh ⇒ ava-ṣṭabhaya- stūpa~ § 24.12.22A7. eṣo bhikṣuḥ stūpaṃ vandati stūpābhigṛhe vā <paśyati?> kheṭaṃ cchoritakaṃ kenaci aprakṛtijñena, pādena marditavyo § 27.6.23B6. na kṣamati stūpaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ § 28.4.24A3. nâpi kṣamati stūpam vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā caṃkramituṃ § 29.7.24B4. na kṣamati stūpaṃ pṛṣṭhato karīya niṣīdituṃ § 30.11.25A5. na kṣamati stūpaṃ vā pādato kṛtvā śayyāṃ kalpayituṃ § 39.28.32A5. atha khalu kālena kālaṃ āraṇyakaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ukkasitavyaṃ, pādāṃ prakṣāliya hastāṃ nirmmādiya stūpaṃ vistareṇa vanditavyaṃ; vgl. § 39.16.31B3. grāmāntikaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ ... āgacchiya pādāṃ dhoviya hastāṃ nirmmādiya cetiyo vistareṇa vanditavyo § 39.28.32A6. vihāraṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ āraṇyakāṃ bhikṣūṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ ... gaṇḍīyaṃ āhatāyaṃ stūpaṃ vandiyāṇaṃ bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ; vgl. § 39.16. 31B4~5. saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ ... 540  gaṇḍī<yaṃ> āhatāyaṃ vandiya cetiyaṃ <bhuṃjiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ> stūpa-vigraha~# “das Gebiet des Heiligtums” ☞ § 19.20, Anm. 1; § 18.52, Anm. 1 ⇒ saṃgha- vigraha~, stūpābhigṛha~, saṃghābhigṛha~ § 19.20.18B1. tato pi na kṣamati so tahiṃ cchorayituṃ, yahiṃ deve varṣintasya (für varṣante?) stūpavigrahaṃ vā saṃghavigrahaṃ vā gacchati § 20.12.19B7. na kṣamati stūpavigrahe vā saṃghavigrahe vā dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādituṃ stūpābhigṛha~# (stūpa-abhi°) “das Gebiet eines Heiligtums” ☞ § 18.52, Anm. 1 ⇒ stūpa-vigraha~, cetiyābhigṛha~, saṃghābhigṛha~, saṃgha-vigraha~ § 18.52.17B1. stūpābhigṛhe vā saṃghābhigṛhe vā paśyati, ujjhitavyaṃ § 24.12.22A7. eṣo bhikṣuḥ stūpaṃ vandati stūpābhigṛhe vā <paśyati?> kheṭaṃ cchoritakaṃ kenaci aprakṛtijñena, pādena marditavyo stūpika~# “das Heiligtum betreffend” ⇒ sāṃghika~ § 31.36.27A2. yadi tāva stūpikena vā kāryeṇa āgatā bhavanti, stūpikaṃ kāryaṃ pari- prāpayitavyaṃ § 48.6.41B1. stūpikaṃ vā sāṃghikaṃ vā kāryaṃ adhīnaṃ bhavati √stṛ ⇒ a-stara-, praty-ā-stara- stoka~ “wenig” ⇒ thoka~, thoki~, stoka-stokam § 12.15.12A2. atha dāni stokā vihārakā bhavanti, dviṇṇāṃ trayāṇāṃ janānāṃ eko vihārako uddiśitavyo ... atha dāni evaṃ pi stokā bhavanti, ... § 12.16.12A3. atha dāni evaṃ pi stokaṃ bhavati, ... atha dāni evaṃ pi stokaṃ bhavati, ... § 40.11.33A4. tato yyeva stokaṃ varjayitavyaṃ § 42.4.36A7. stokaṃ stokaṃ āyuṣman mātrāye upanetha. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā § 52.4.44B3. śaktukā stokā bhavanti, śaktukā dātavyā, sneho dātavyo, khajjakhaṇḍakānaṃ saṃvibhāgo karttavyo stoka-stokam# “tropfenweise, wenig, langsam”; vgl. Pā. thoka-thokaṃ (Jā. III 462.7. v.l.; Dhp-a. III 18.13. v.l. usw.; DP II 360b) § 42.3.36A6. stokastokaṃ āyuṣman mātrāye upanetha. udake pi mātrajñatā uktā bhagavatā § 47.8.41A2. kaṇṭakaśākhāyāṃ vā lagnaṃ bhavati, ... stokastokaṃ mocayitavyaṃ stokāvaśeṣa~# (stoka-ava°) “wenig übrig; knapp” § 50.10.43B6. piṇḍapātanīhārako ca cireṇa āgacchati, kālo ca stokāvaśeṣo bhavati, nīhārakapiṇḍapātena ... panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ strī~ ⇒ istr~ § 4.5.4B2. ko ’yaṃ nimantreti. āgantuko gamiko gṛhastho pravrajito strī puruṣo dārako ... § 18.41.17A4. nâpi dāni kṣamati strīṇāṃ nīlamañcaṃ gantuṃ § 18.42.17A4. na dāni taruṇikā strī pṛcchitavyā, mā prahāsaṃ deyā § 33.15.28A6. strī vā puruṣo vā mahanto bhavati, na dāni mātāpitṛkaṃṭhena ālapitavyā. “mahallako”, “mahallake” ti vā vaktavyā § 51.7.44A3. eṣā strī dhānyaṃ ohana{n}ti, ... § 51.8.44A3. eṣā strī dhānāṃ vā pīṣayati, tilam vā mudgam vā kalāyām vā daleti, ... § 51.9.44A4. eṣā strī karpāsaṃ kartteti, ... § 51.10.44A4. eṣā strī upaviṣṭikā āsati, ... § 51.11.44A5. eṣā strī bhikṣuṃ paśyiyāṇaṃ ovvarakaṃ praviśati, ... § 51.12.44A5. eṣā strī kāṃsabhājanaṃ mārjati, ... sth / cch ⇒ cch / sth stha~ ⇒ gṛha-stha~, gotra-stha~ sthapaya- (BHS), sthape- (BHS) ⇒ su-sthapita~, sthave-, thapaya-, thape-, thave-, ā-sthapaya-, ut- tatthapaya-, ut-thapaya-, du-tthapita~, du-tthāpitaka~, su-tthapita~, su-thapita~, sthāpaya-, sthāpe-, √sthā usw. (1) “stellen. legen” § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... grāmapraveśanikāni cīvarāṇi ekānte sthapetavyāni § 12.6.11B3. mañcā vā pīṭhā vā ... kākaśakuntehi vā ohayiyanti, cchanne sthapitavyā § 25.10.22B6. (pātraṃ) ... kāṣṭham vā iṣṭakam vā upalam vā nirāmiṣaṃ nirmmādiya tasya upari sthapetavyaṃ 541  § 35.4.29A4. cchatropānahāṃ ekamante sthapiya brāhmaṇaparṣāyām upasaṃkramitavyaṃ § 39.8.31A5. āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī ... sthāne sthapayitavyā § 40.12.33A5. taṃ bhājanaṃ ekānte sthapitvā, tṛṇaṃ vā kulikaṃ vā upari dātavyā abhijñānaṃ, yathā jñāye “akalpiyan” ti § 40.15.33A6. bhājanāni patraśākhāhi sthapitavyāni § 41.6.34A3. saṃghāṭīṃ ... abhyantareṇa dviguṇikāṃ kariya cīvaravaṃśe sthapayitvā ... § 41.29.35B6. upānahāpocchano dhoviya pīḍiya tatraỿva sthapitavyaṃ § 43.4.38A4. lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ... omuddhikā sthapitavyā sūryābhimukhaṃ § 43.8.38A6. ekamante sthapetavyāḥ § 43.7.38A6. ukkasiya sthapetavyā (☞ § 43.7, Anm. 9) § 43.10.38A7. etā bhaiṣajyapiṣaṇikā śilā na dāni kārya kṛtvā yathā yeva pratiliptikā sthapetavyā § 43.11.38B1. ekānte sthapetavyaṃ (Hs. sthaṣe°) § 43.16.38B4. ekānte sthapetavyā § 43.16.38B5. etā bhavanti vāsīyo vā kuddālakā vā niśreṇiyo vā, na dāni tathā yeva mṛttikāpraliptikā sthapetavyā § 44.4.39A2. nâpi kṣamati bhikṣūhi muktakaṃ cīvaraṃ sthapayituṃ § 44.4.39A2. cīvarakāni ... cīvaravaṃśe sthapetavyāni § 44.7.39A6. ātmano cīvarakāni heṣṭe sthapayitu<ṃ> § 44.7.39A6. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā <cīvarāṇi> heṣṭe sthapayitavyāni § 46.5.40B1. prasphoṭayitvā sāharitvā ekānte sthapayitavyaṃ § 52.1.44A7. teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā snehaṃ sthapenti, khajjakhaṇḍakāni thapenti § 52.1.44B1. vayaṃ yyeva tāva imeṣāṃ kṛtena snehaṃ thapemaḥ, khajjakakhaṇḍakāni sthapemaḥ ... § 53.4.45A4. agni pratijāgṛtavyo tuṣeṇa vā karṣeṇa vā. gomayapiṇḍikā vā paṭipaṭikāye sthapetavyā yathânupūrvveṇa gaccheya. bhaktaśālāyāṃ {vā paṭipāṭikāye} sthapetavyo (Hs. °tavyā) § 57.6.47B4. (upānahikāyo ...) pratisandhismi tathā yeva saṃpuṭikṛtikāyo āsanasya heṣṭhe sthapitavyāyo. sthapitvā prahāṇam upaviśitavyaṃ § 53.5.45A5. yadā cetiyaṃ vanditaṃ bhavati, tato (die Lampe) niṣkāsiya sthapetavyo, mā ādīnavaṃ utpādayeyyā (2) verwendet als Hilfsverb ☞ § 25.8, Anm. 5 § 13.17.12B7. nâpi dāni kṣamati vihāro pi{t}thitvā sthapituṃ § 25.8.22B5. atha khalu pātraprasevikāyāṃ prakṣipiya sthapetavyaṃ § 41.22.35A6. grāmapraveśikaṃ cīvaraṃ ... sāharitvā sthapetavyaṃ § 42.23.37B1. na kṣamati ātmano cīvarāṇi gṛhṇitvā parasya cīvarehi samākulīkṛtvā sthapetuṃ § 43.7.38A6. tato kīlakehi ollapitvā sthapitavyā § 43.9.38A7. kīlakehi ollapitvā sthapayitavyā sthala~ “trockenes Land” § 4.18.6A1. grāme vā yadi vâraṇye nimne vā yadi vā sthale (vs) § 62.1.49B3. bhagavān ... satvān ... kṣeme same śive sthale abhaye nirvvāṇe prati- ṣṭhāpayamāno ... sthavira~ (BHS) “Ordensälterer” ⇒ dvitīya-sthavira, saṃgha-sthavira~ § 32.2.27A5. so dāni sthaviro pṛcchati “āyuṣmaṃ, kecciro te āgatasya?” § 33.4.28A1. kathaṃ bhagavaṃ, navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirā bhikṣū ālapitavyā? § 33.5.28A1. sthaviro dāni bhagavantaṃ pṛcchati “kathaṃ bhagavāṃ, sthavirehi bhikṣūhi navakā bhikṣū ālapitavyā?” § 41.3.33B7. Śāriputro sthaviro ( = § 41.4.33B7) § 41.4.33B7. sthaviro dāni ... (= § 41.5.34A1, § 41.6.34A2[zweimal], § 41.7.34A3) § 41.5.34A2. so ... sthavirasya pṛṣṭhimena pṛṣṭhimaṃ anubaddho § 41.7.34A4. sthavireṇa dāni vāmā jaṃghā dhovitā § 41.10.34A6. sthavireṇa dāni ... catvāry āryasatyāni pradarśitāni § 41.11.34A7. yasya bhagavān katham ayaṃ brāhmaṇa sthavirasyâcāragocareṇa tuṣṭo? 542  § 41.21.35A5. eṣo Śāriputro sthaviro § 41.21.35A5. etarhi pi eṣo sthavirasya ācāragocareṇa tuṣṭo § 42.29.37B5. navakehi bhikṣūhi sthavirāṇāṃ bhikṣūṇāṃ kāyaparicaryā karttavyā sthave-# “stellen, legen”; < Skt. sthāpayati > Pkt. ṭhvei, ṭhvai; NiDoc. 134. sthaveṃti; vgl. S. 559 in diesem Band ⇒ thave-, thapaya-, thape-, sthapaya-, sthape-, sthāpaya-, sthāpe-, √sthā usw. § 19.25.18B3. tumbakaṃ bhavati, kalyato yeva ujjhitvā cchanne (Hs. °nnā) sthavitavyaṃ § 25.1.22B1. apareṇa dāni bhikṣuṇā muṇḍavātapāṇe pātraṃ sthavitaṃ § 42.14.36B7. snāyantena cīvarakaṃ sāharitvā ekasthāne sthavitavyaṃ loḍhikena vā paṭikāya vā sthaṣetavyaṃ für sthapetavyaṃ : § 43.11.38B1 √sthā ⇒ ava-sthāpaya-, ā-sthapaya-, ut-tatthaya-, ut-tatthapaya-, ut-thantaka~, ut-thapaya-, ut- √thā, ut-thāpaya-, ut-thāpīya-, ut-thāyyaṃ, ut-thitaka~, ut-thiyyaṃ, ut-thiha-, ut-thihantaka~, ut-the-, upa-thapaya-, upa-sthapaya-, upa-sthāpaya-, upa-sthāpe-, u-ṣṭhapaya-, u-ṣṭhiha-, thapaya-, thape-, thapitaka~, thave-, thāpe-, du-tthapita~, du-tthāpitaka~, prati-ṣṭhāpaya-, prati-ṣṭhita~, praty-ut-thā-, praty-upa-√sthā, praty-upa-sthāpayitavya~, praty-upa-sthita~, prasthita~, sthapaya-, sthape-, sthave-, sthāpaya-, sthāpe-, sthita, sthitaka~, su-tthapita~, su- thapita~, su-sthapita~, su-sthita~ § 14.16.13B4. maṃcā pratipādakehi sthātavyā (lies: sthā<payi>tavyā) bhittito muktaṃ § 19.36.19A1. yo se dvitīyo sahāyo bhavati, tena pṛṣṭhato sthātavyaṃ parāṅmukhena § 27.2.23B5. duṣkṛtaṃ te bhikṣu, eva<ṃ> ca tvaṃ yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhasi § 27.3.23B5. evaṃ sthātavyaṃ (= Uddāna [III].25A7) § 27.3.23B6. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati bhikṣuṇā yogācārasya bhikṣusya purato tiṣṭhituṃ § 27.4.23B6. nâpi kṣamati veśikāsāmantakena vā tiṣṭhituṃ, vadhabandhanāgāraśālā- sāmantena vā tiṣṭhituṃ § 27.5.23B6. nâyaṃ kṣamati atigupte vā atiprākaṭe vā pradeśe tiṣṭhituṃ. atha khalu cchannaprākaṭe pradeśe sthātavyaṃ § 27.6.23B6~7. na kṣamati stūpaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ, saṃghaṃ vā upādhyāyācāryam vā vṛddhatarakaṃ vā pṛṣṭhato kṛtvā tiṣṭhituṃ, upānahārūḍhena vā tiṣṭhituṃ (Hs. tiṣṭhantu) § 27.7.23B7. nâpi kṣamati “saṃghamadhye mā tiṣṭha” ti ukto tiṣṭhituṃ. upādhyāyācāryehi vā uktena samānena “mā tiṣṭhê”ti tiṣṭhati, vinayātikramam āsādayati § 27.9.23B7. evaṃ sthātavyaṃ. na tiṣṭhati, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati § 42.17.37A2. yadi tāva agni bahalako bhavati, navakehi agrato sthātavyaṃ agni prati- bāhentehi. atha dāni agnir mmando bhavati, vṛddhehi agrato sthātavyaṃ § 43.1.38A2. vihārakehi bhaṇḍaṃ ujjhitāvakīrṇṇe tiṣṭhati § 43.1.38A2. kim iyaṃ bhikṣavo bhāṇḍaṃ ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ tiṣṭhati? § 51.4.44A2. nâpi <kṣamati> adarśanapathe sthātuṃ. atha khalu ud<d>eśe sthātavyaṃ darśanaśravaṇapathe § 51.5.44A2. atha khalu tūṣṇīkena uddeśe sthātavyaṃ § 51.6.44A2~3. atha khalu ṣaḍāyatanaṃ manasikarentena sthātavyaṃ. “cakṣur anityā yāva mano anityan.” ti sthātavyaṃ § 54.8.46A5. atha khalu pārśve sthitvā trikkhatto purato yaṣṭi kārayitavyā § 62.12.50A7. na dāni sārthasya (Hs. sārthena) agrato sthitvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ usw. sthāna~ ⇒ eka-sthāne, poṣadha-sthāna~, mañcaka-sthāna~, yathā-sthāna~ § 19.22.18B2. vikāle praveśiyāṇaṃ tahiṃ yyeva sthāne sthāpayitavyo § 30.6.25A3. rātrīye purimaṃ yāmaṃ uddeśaprayuktena svādhyāyaprayuktena sthānena caṃkrameṇa vītināmayitavyaṃ § 39.8.31A5. āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī ... sthāne sthapayitavyā § 41.10.34A7. tena dāni brāhmaṇena tatraỿva sthāne sthitena srotāpattiphalaṃ sākṣāt kṛtaṃ § 41.19.35A3. sthāneṣu ca aiśvaryaṃ labhanti ācāraguṇayuktāḥ (vs) sthāna-caṃkrama-niṣadyāyoga~# (°ṣadyā-āyo°), sthāna-caṃkrama-niṣadyānuyoga~ (°ṣadyā-anuyo°) 543  “Übung des Stehens, des Auf- und Abgehens und des Sitzens” ☞ § 39.16, Anm. 3 ⇒ sthāna- caṃkramānuyukta~ § 39.16.31B4. tatraỿva sthānacaṃkramaniṣadyāyogam anuyuktehi (Hs. °yuktena) vihari- tavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktehi vā manasikāraprayuktehi vā § 39.28.32A5. ārāmehi vṛkṣamūlehi caṃkramehi niṣadyāhi sthānacaṃkrama- niṣadyānuyogam anuyuktehi vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktehi vā manasikāra- prayuktehi vā § 49.1.42A2. ye dāni bhikṣū Jetavanasyârāmadvārakoṣṭhakasamīpe sthānacaṃkrama- {sthāna}niṣadyāyogam anuyuktā viharanti sthāna-caṃkramānuyukta~# (°krama-anu°) “auf (Übung) des Stehens und des Auf- und Abgehens konzentriert” ⇒ sthāna-caṃkrama-niṣadyāyoga~ § 30.8.25A5. rātrīye paścime yāme paryaṅkena vītināmayitavyaṃ uddeśaprayuktena sthānacaṃkramānuyuktena vā sthāna-caṃkrama-niṣadyānuyoga~ ⇒ sthāna-caṃkrama-niṣadyāyoga~ sthānāsthāna-kauśalya~# “die Fähigkeit, mit der zugrundeliegenden Bedingung und der nicht zugrundeliegenden Bedingung umzugehen” ☞ § 7.6, Anm. 1 § 7.6.8B4. āpattikauśalyaṃ śikṣitavyo sūtrakauśalyaṃ skandhakauśalyaṃ āyatana- kauśalyaṃ pratītyasamutpādakauśalyaṃ sthānāsthānakauśalyaṃ sthāpaya- (Skt, BHS), sthāpe-# ⇒ √sthā, thāpe-, du-tthāpitaka~, thapaya-, sthapaya-, sthape-, sthave- usw. (1) “stellen. legen” § 3.5.3B3. kīlakā nikhanetvā dvāre sthāpayitavyaṃ (Hs. sthā{{tavyaṃ}}vyaṃ) § 11.5.10B6. yadi tāva ujjhitaprakīrṇṇaṃ bhavati, sāharitvā ekānte sthāpayitavyaṃ § 14.7.13A6. mañcāḥ pratipādakehi sthāpayitavyā bhittito muktāḥ. maṃcasya upari pīṭhā sthāpayitavyā. yaṃ tatra śayyāsanaṃ ... pīṭhasya upari sthāpayitavyaṃ cīvaravaṃśe sthāpayitavyaṃ bhittito muktaṃ § 14.15.13B4. yaṃ tatra sārāsāraṃ bhāṇḍam astaraṇaṃ vā prāvaraṇaṃ vā upaskaro vā śraddhāprasannehi upāsakakulehi sthāpayitavyaṃ § 14.17.13B5. yadi tāva uppīḍanako vihāro bhavati, tato lenāni muktāni sthāpetavyāni § 15.7.14A3. taṃ apaniya anyo kīlako ākoṭayitavyo pātraprasevikā sthāpayitavyā § 18.7.15B5. tahiṃ sthāpetavyā<ni> kāṣṭhakuṇḍāni vā mṛttikākuṇḍāni vā ... § 18.11.16A1. varccakumbhikā saprāṇakā bhavati, ... tṛṇam vā tūlikā vā upari sthāpetavyā § 18.17.16A5. varttikāyo vā tulikāyo vā ... tāyo cchoriya anyāyo sthāpayitavyāyo § 18.26.16B3. atha khalu sthāpayitvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 19.18.18A7. atha dāni dvibhūmiko bhavati, dvitīyāyāṃ bhūmiyaṃ tathā yeva ghaṭako sthāpayitavyo, tṛbhūmiko bhavati, tṛtīyāyāṃ bhūmau tathā yyeva sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.21.18B1. nâpi kṣamati praśvāsaghaṭaṃ atinikuñje pradeśe sthāpayituṃ ... nâpi kṣamati atiprākaṭe pradeśe sthāpayituṃ ... atha khalu pracchannaprākaṭe sthāpayi- tavyaṃ § 19.22.18B2. vikāle praveśiyāṇaṃ (Hs. praviś°) tahiṃ yyeva sthāne sthāpayitavyo § 19.22.18B2. ghaṭasyôpari cchidramallakaṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.23.18B2. paudgalikapaudgalikāni praśvāsaghaṭikāni sthāpayitavyāni § 19.24.18B3. kalyato eva praśvāsaṃ ekamante visarjiya praśvāsabhaṇḍakaṃ dhoviya pratigupte pradeśe ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ § 19.25.18B3. tumbakaṃ ... śikkena uvvinitvā sthāpayitavyaṃ ... mallakaṃ bhavati, ekānte ujjhitvā dhovitvā ātape sthāpayitavyaṃ § 25.8.22B5. pratisāmayantena nâpi kṣamati jaṃghāpathe vā sthāpayituṃ kapāṭe vā muṇḍavātāyane vā § 39.14.31B2. tehi āraṇyakānāṃ piṇḍapāto ukkaḍḍhayitavyo. ukkaḍḍhiyāṇaṃ sāṃghika- kalpiyakuṭīyaṃ sthāpayitavyo § 42.16.37A1. cīvarakāni sthāpitvā praviśitvā tasya tāva parikarmma karttavyaṃ § 42.23.37B1. yathāsthāne sthāpayitvā gantavyaṃ § 42.30.37B6. atha dāni praśno sthāpīyati, kiñ câpi praghuṣṭena svareṇa praśnā visarjenti, anāpattiḥ 544  § 42.31.37B7. yaṃ kāṣṭhaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati yathāsthāne sthāpetavyaṃ § 43.5.38A5. te ... ātape sthāpayitavyāḥ § 43.10.38A7. atha khalu sudhovitvā yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyā § 43.15.38B4. sāharitvā yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyaṃ § 43.16.38B4. vaḍḍhakibhaṇḍaṃ bhavati nāsite vā dāniyā vā viśālikā vā sūtrâtha olambiko, dhovitvā ekānte sthāpetavyā § 43.16.38B5. atha khalu sudhovitvā yathāsthāne sthāpayitavyo § 44.6.39A5. cīvarakaṃ dhoviya vihārakoṇake <sthā>payitavyo (oder <tha>pa°) § 44.7.39A5. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarāṇi upari sthāpayitavyāni § 44.7.39A6. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā cīvarakāni upari sthāpayituṃ § 44.7.39A6. ātmano cīvarāṇi upari sthāpayitavyāni § 53.19.45B7. tailaṃ śeṣaṃ bhavati, sāhariyāṇaṃ ghaṭikāyāṃ vā bhājane vā sthāpayi- tavyaṃ. dīpakoṭikāyo ekasthāne sthāpayitavyā. dīpavarttīyo niṣpīḍiyāṇaṃ ekaṃhi koṇake sthāpetavyāyo usw. (2) verwendet als Hilfsverb ☞ § 25.8, Anm. 5 § 14.4.13A4. mañcā pīṭhā ullapitvā sthāpayitavyā § 40.5.32B6. (Ein Wassergefäß) na dāni kukkuṭapāśakena bandhitvā sthāpetavyaṃ § 43.4.38A4. (lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā ...) kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya sthāpayitavyāni yathāsthānaṃ § 43.5.38A5. kalpiyakuṭiṃ praveśiya sthāpayitavyāḥ § 43.16.38B5. bhaṇḍakaṃ ... na dāni kāryaṃ kṛtvā vihāre gopitvā sthāpetavyaṃ (3) “zuweisen”#; wörtl. “übergeben” § 16.5.14B1. nâyaṃ tāva kṣamati naivāsikehi ye vihārakā oddriṇṇakā ... te āgantukānāṃ sthāpayituṃ ... ye vihārakā navakā ca supratisaṃskṛtā ca te āgantukānāṃ sthāpayitavyā § 16.6.14B1~2. nâpi kṣamati śeyyāsanaṃ omayilomayilaṃ pāṭitavipāṭitaṃ āgantukānāṃ sthāpayituṃ. ... yaṃ śeyyāsanaṃ navakaṃ sudhotaṃ ca suraktaṃ ca, taṃ āgantukānāṃ sthāpayitavyaṃ § 16.7.14B2. nâpi kṣamati ye mañcā vā pīṭhā vā praluggakā vā oddriṇṇakā vā te āgantukānāṃ sthāpayituṃ. ... atha khalu ye mañcā vā pīṭhā vā navā ca ... sthāpayitavyā sthāriya für cchoriya : § 41.1.33B3 sthālī~ “Topf ” ⇒ thālī~ § 39.8.31A5. āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī otāriyāṇaṃ dhoviyāṇaṃ sthāne sthapayitavyā § 39.19.31B6. duve sthālīyo adrāhayitavyāyo. ekā āraṇyakānāṃ ekā grāmāntikānāṃ. yā āraṇyakānāṃ sthālī tahiṃ taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ. yā grāmāntikānāṃ sthālī, yadi tāva grāmāntikā āgatā bhavanti, tahiṃ pi taṇḍulā prakṣipitavyāḥ § 43.1.38A2. sthālīyo piṭharikā adhotakā anupaliptā nakulamūṣikehi ālupyamānā ... § 43.4.38A4. yaṃ tatra bhaṇḍaṃ bhavati lohikā vā kaṭāhakā vā sthālī vā piṭharikā vā ... sthita~ § 27.1.23B4. aparo dāni bhikṣuḥ āgacchiya tasya purato sthito § 27.2.23B5. tvaṃ dāni tasya purato āgacchiya sthito § 39.1.30B6. tehi ... gaṇḍiṃ āhaniyāṇaṃ sthitāḥ § 41.4.34A1. sthitena dharmmatāvasthāprāptena (Hs. °sthapra°) § 41.10.34A7. tena dāni brāhmaṇena tatraỿva sthāne sthitena srotāpattiphalaṃ sākṣāt kṛtaṃ sthitaka~ (BHS) “stehend”; < sthita + Suffix ka § 25.6.22B4. nâpi kṣamati sthitakena pātraṃ nirmmādayituṃ § 25.7.22B4. adhvāvayantena nâpi kṣamati sthitakena adhvāpayituṃ § 25.8.22B5. nâpi kṣamati sthitakena prakṣipituṃ. atha khalu upaviṣṭakena prakṣipi- tavyaṃ § 40.15.33A7. ekena madhyama<ṃ> vārake sthitakena vāretavyaṃ, apareṇa praṇetavyaṃ § 54.9.46A5. yadi vāmena sthitako bhavati, dakṣiṇena jānukena (Hs. °kehi) saṃghaṭṭe- tavyo sthitikā~ “eine (vorher bestimmte) Reihenfolge”# ☞ § 31.18, Anm. 2 ⇒ thitikā~ 545  § 31.26.26B1. nâpi dāni kṣamati ... bhaktaśālaṃ praviśituṃ. “āyuṣman, kiṃ sidhyati? kiṃ pacyati? kiṃ bhaktakānāṃ sthitikā?” sthūla~ “dick” § 18.4.15B3. yāni sārāṇi ca dṛḍhāni ca sthūlā<ni> ca kāṣṭhāni tāny adhastā dātavyāni sthūla-kumārī~# “alte Jungfer” ☞ § 8.7, Anm. 4 § 8.7.9A4. asukāto veśikākulāto caṃḍavidhavāye sthūlakumārīye paṇḍakasya asukāye bhikṣuṇīye § 52.6.44B5. (praṇītabhojana~ ...) asukena paṇḍakena dinnaṃ. asukāye sthūlakumārīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpabhikṣuṇīye dinnaṃ. asukāye pāpaśrāmaṇerīye dinnaṃ sthūlatva~ “Breite” § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena aṣṭahastâyāmena karttavyā muṣṭimātrī sthūlatvena sn / n ⇒ n / sn sna / su ⇒ su / sna √snā ⇒ snāta~, snāpaya-, snāpe- § 32.5.27B1. snāyati vā ekanivasano vā bhavati, bhaktakṛtyaṃ karoti, purebhaktikam vā karoti, ... na kṣamati taṃ velaṃ tasya pādāṃ vandituṃ § 42.14.36B7. snāyantena cīvarakaṃ sāharitvā ekasthāne sthavitavyaṃ loḍhikena vā paṭikāya vā § 42.16.37A1. snāyāmi ācārya, snāyāmi upādhyāya § 42.25.37B3. upādhyāyācāryā, āgacchāhi snāhi § 42.25.37B3. atha dāni na snāyitukāmo bhavati, ... § 42.26.37B4. tailaṃ bhaviṣyati. cūrṇṇaṃ bhaviṣyati. udakaṃ bhaviṣyati. <s>nāyaṃtu āyuṣmanto § 42.28.37B5. saṃghasaṃvyavahārako vā dānapati vā jalpati “viśvastā bhadantā snāyantu” tti § 42.29.37B5. nâpi dāni kṣamati navakehi bhikṣūhi uccahantehi snāyituṃ § 42.29.37B6. anyonyasya sagauravehi snāyitavyaṃ, sapratīśehi snāyitavyaṃ § 42.30.37B6. nâpi kṣamati uccaśabdamahāśabdehi snāyituṃ § 42.30.37B6. alpaśabdehi alpanirghoṣehi jentāke snāyitavyaṃ § 45.6.40A1. te bhikṣū uddhārakaṃ karttukāmā bhavanti ... snātukāmo bhavati ... snāta~ § 42.31.37B6. yaṃ kālaṃ bhikṣū snātā bhavanti ... § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati snātena (Hs. snānena) samānena ... snānaśāṭikāṃ utkṣipituṃ snāna~ § 42.6.36B1. evaṃ snāne pratipadyitavyaṃ (= § 42.32.38A1; Uddāna [V].39B2) § 42.18.37A3. na snāne navapratipannena vā parikarmma karttavyaṃ snāna-śāṭaka~# “Badegewand” ☞ § 45.6, Anm. 2 § 45.6.39B7. snānaśāṭakaṃ vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakam vā nivāsiya snātukāmo bhavati § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati ... snānaśāṭakaṃ vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakaṃ nivāsayituṃ snāna-śāṭikā~# “Badegewand” ☞ § 45.6, Anm. 2 § 45.6.40A1. snānaśāṭikā vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakaṃ āveḍhayitavyaṃ § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati ... uparimeṇa nivāsanasya snānaśāṭikāṃ utkṣipituṃ § 45.6.40A2. nâpi kṣamati heṣṭhena snānaśāṭikām vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakam vā osārayituṃ snāpaya- “sich baden”; vgl. BHSG § 36.2, § 38.58; ib. S. 237b; Sakamoto-Goto 1993: 279 ⇒ √snā, snāpe- § 40.16.33B1. na dāni kṣamati pāridhovaniyāto snāpituṃ (verschrieben für snāyituṃ ?) vā cīvaram vā dhovituṃ rañjanaṃ vā kaḍhituṃ § 42.25.37B3. yadi snāpitukāmo (verschrieben für snāyitu° ?) bhavati, gantavyaṃ § 42.25.37B3. nâhaṃ snāpayiṣyāmi snāpe-# “baden” ⇒ √snā, snāpaya- § 8.6.9A3. vihāraṃ āgacchiyāṇa ... uṣṇaṃ bhavati, snāpetavyo snigdha~ § 49.1.42A3. āyuṣman, snigdho khalu te mukhavarṇṇo, pilipilāpanti oṣṭhā, suṣṭhu khalu 546  nirddhāpīyati sneha~ “Schmelzbutter” ☞ § 31.31, Anm. 2 ⇒ aṅguṣṭha-sneha~ § 52.1.44A7. teṣāṃ upādhyāyācāryā snehaṃ sthapenti, khajjakhaṇḍakāni thapenti § 52.1.44B1. vayaṃ yyeva tāva imeṣāṃ kṛtena snehaṃ thapemaḥ, khajjakakhaṇḍakāni sthapemaḥ ... § 52.4.44B3. śaktukā stokā bhavanti, śaktukā dātavyā, sneho dātavyo, khajjakhaṇḍakānaṃ saṃvibhāgo karttavyo snehaka~ “Schmelzbutter” ☞ § 31.31, Anm. 2 § 31.31.26B5. tato yadi nevāsikānāṃ vyañjanāni bhavanti, khajjakāni bhavanti, tato yadi snehakā (Hs. °ko) vā bhavanti, tehi āgantukānāṃ samvibhāgo karttavyo √spṛś ⇒ śīta-praṣṭavya~ § 42.3.36A4. te dāni bhikṣu śītapraṣṭavyena spṛṣṭāḥ tvaritatvaritaṃ praviṣṭā *√spruṣ ⇒ u-sphoṣe- √sphuṭ ⇒ phoḍe-, phoṭa-, pra-sphoṭa-, pra-sphoṭaya-, pra-sphoṭe-, pra-sphoḍa- smṛta~ (BHS) “besonnen” § 41.4.34A1. smṛto saṃprajāno nāgo viya kāritakāraṇo Veśālīṃ nagarīṃ piṇḍāya carati sy / kṣ ⇒ kṣ / sy sy / yy ⇒ yy / sy sy / śy ⇒ śy / sy sr / śr ⇒ śr / sr srotāpatti-phala~ (srota-āp°) (BHS) “die Frucht des Stromeintrittes” § 41.10.34A7. tena dāni brāhmaṇena tatraỿva sthāne sthitena srotāpattiphalaṃ (Hs. śro°) sākṣāt kṛtaṃ sv / śv ⇒ śv / sv svaka~ § 4.18.5B6. taṃ khu tasya svakaṃ bhavati na khalu yo tatra dahyati (vs) § 18.51.17B1. evaṃ na bhavati, antamasato svakā aṅguli upathapitavyā svaka-svaka~ § 4.7.4B6. svakasvakāṃ vṛttiṃ paryeṣatha (= § 5.7.6B5) § 39.16.31B4. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, saṃghārāmaṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ grāmāntikaṃ bhikṣuṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi (Loc. pl.) āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 39.28.32A6. atha dāni deśakālo bhavati, vihāraṃ praviśiyāṇaṃ āraṇyakāṃ bhikṣūṃ pratisaṃmodiyāṇaṃ svakasvakehi (Loc. pl.) āsanehi upaviśitavyaṃ √svap ⇒ sopāpaya-, sopāpitaka~, sovāpaya- svayam § 18.13.16A2. riktakāṃ varccakumbhikāṃ paśyati, ... svayaṃ vā pūrayitavyaṃ § 18.52.17B2. atha dāni so bhavati śaithiliko vā ... aśikṣākāmo, tadā svayaṃ ujjhitavyaṃ svayaṃbhū~ “selbst unabhängig Seiender” § 62.1.49B4. bhagavān ... svayaṃbhū divyehi vihārehi <viharanto> brāhmehi vihārehi āryehi vihārehi āniṃjyehi vihārehi sātatyehi vihārehi ... √svar ⇒ us-sāraya- svara~ § 42.30.37B6. kiñ câpi praghuṣṭena svareṇa praśnā visarjenti, anāpattiḥ svar-ggati~ § 4.16.5B3. nirayaṃ pāpakarmmāṇo kṛtapuṇyā ca svarggatiṃ (vs) svastika-paryaṅka~# “Sitzhaltung mit gekreuzten Beinen” ☞ § 29.3, Anm. 2 ⇒ arddha-paryaṅka~, paryaṅka~ § 29.3.24B1. bhikṣuṇâpi tāva svasti<ka>paryaṅkena prahāṇe niṣīditavyaṃ § 29.6.24B3. āmuhūrttakaṃ viśramiya bhūyo svastikaparyaṅkena niṣīditavyaṃ § 29.6.24B3. atha dāni bhikṣu na pāreti svastikaparyaṅkena niṣīdituṃ, arddhaparyaṅkena niṣīditavyaṃ svastiparyaṅkena für svastikap° : § 29.3.24B1 svāgatam “Willkommen!” ⇒ ehi-svāgata~, anurāgatam § 31.28.26B3. atha khalu āgantukānāṃ ehisvāgataṃ kartta<vya>ṃ “entu āyuṣmanto, 547  svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. ...” § 32.11.27B4. pratisaṃmodayitavyaṃ “svāgatam āyuṣmanto, anurāgatam āyuṣmanto. ...” svādhyāya~ § 8.11.9A7. vaktavyaṃ “karomi amukena saha svādhyāyan” ti (≒ § 8.13.9B3) § 18.25.16B3. nâpi dāni kṣamati varcakuṭīyaṃ upaviṣṭena dhyānāntaragatena vā middhāntaragatena vā uddeśaṃ vā svādhyāyam vā manasikarentena āsituṃ § 19.11.18A3. nâpi dāni tahiṃ dhyānāntaragateṇa vā svādhyāyam vā karentena aśubha- samāpattim vā samāpannena āsitavyaṃ § 39.9.31A7. cetiyaṃ vanditvā ekānte svādhyāyo karttavyo, dharmmam vā cintayantehi āsitavyaṃ § 41.32.35B7. atha dāni bhikṣuḥ svādhyāyaṃ karoti ... svādhyāya- § 1.6.1B5. saṃghasthavireṇa pañca sūtrāṇi vistareṇa svādhyāyitavyāni yāva ’ntamasato catvāri pārājikā gāthāś ca śiṣṭakam abhīkṣṇaśrutikāyā § 7.7.8B4. evaṃ svādhyāyati, araṇye vasati, prahāṇe upaviśati, so evâsya ovādo § 7.7.8B5. upādhyāyo ... na svādhyāyati, na araṇye vasati, na prahāṇe upaviśati § 8.10.9A7. uddeśaṃ gṛhṇiya ekamante svādhyāyatena āsitavyaṃ § 8.11.9A7. yadi dāni tahiṃ kenaci saha svādhyāyatukāmo bhavati, āpṛcchitavyaṃ (= § 8.13.9B3) svādhyāya-prayukta~# “sich im Studium übend” § 30.6.25A3. rātrīye purimaṃ yāmaṃ uddeśaprayuktena svādhyāyaprayuktena sthānena caṃkrameṇa vītināmayitavyaṃ -svāmika~ ⇒ sa-svāmika~ √svid ⇒ *prasvedati sveda~ § 42.18.37A2. na dāni svedena vā malena vā usphoṣetavyo upāntake sveda-# “schwitzen”; vgl. Pā. sedeti (“schwitzen lassen”), Skt. svedayati (dass.) § 42.2.36A2. te ... jentākaṃ prajvālīya dvāraṃ ghaṭṭiya svedantā (Hs. svedattā) āsanti § 42.3.36A5. svedantu āyuṣmanto, utpātagaṇḍapiṭakānāṃ vātapittaśleṣmikānāṃ phāsu bhaviṣyati √sru ⇒ pari-srāvaya~ H h/d ⇒ d/h ha ⇒ haỿva ha he # Interj. ⇒ hā, hū ha he, he, ho § 31.28.26B3. nâyaṃ kṣamati nevāsikehi vaktuṃ “o ha he nāvā <mucyati> ...” tti haṃgho# “Hallo!”; vgl. Roth 1977 = 1986: 183f.; Skt. haṃho, aṃgho ☞ § 33.1, Anm. 1 § 33.1.27B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti § 33.2.27B7. yūyaṃ gṛhī-ālāpena ālāpayatha “amba, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, {a}haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti § 33.6.28A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena ālapituṃ “haṃgho he he” tti § 41.15.34B5. so dāni corasenāpatiḥ pipāsitaḥ tasya dārakasyâha “haṃgho dāraka, pipāsito ’smi. icchāmi pānīyaṃ pātuṃ.” § 41.16.34B6. so dāni pṛcchati “haṃgho dāraka, kasya kasya kṛtena tvaṃ atra dīpamūlaṃ allīno ’si?” § 41.18.35A2. so dāni dārakasyâha “haṃgho dārakā, imaṃ vayaṃ tava sarvvaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ demi.” hacchīya-# “niesen”; aus einem Onomatopoeticum gebildetes Verbum § 59.1.48A6. te dāni sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena hacchīyanti. te dāni yogācārāṃ bhikṣūṃ śabdena vyābahanti 548 haṇṭha-# “wandern”?; vgl. CDIAL 13943. *haṭṭ, *haṇṭh “move” ☞ § 4.8, Anm. 6 ⇒ aṇṭha- § 4.8.4B7. na dāni tena “āmantritaṃ mayā” ti Bhadrapālakṛtyehi haṇṭhitavyaṃ (oder h(’) aṇṭhi°) hata~ ⇒ √han √had ⇒ o-haya- √han ⇒ ā-haṇa-, ā-√han, ā-hane-, o-hana-, vi-hanya-, māna-hata~ § 18.47.17A7. nâpi dāni apratisaṃviditena uvvattitavyaṃ, mā “coro vā ocorako vā” tti hanyeyā (≒ § 19.39.19A2) § 49.5.42A7. nâpi kṣamati khureṇa khuraṃ hanantena (“zu dicht auf den Fersen”) § 54.3.46A2. te dāni bhikṣu viheṭhiyantā ārāvaṃ muñca<ṃ>ti “āyuṣmaṃ, hato ’smi. hato ’smî”ti (≒ § 55.3.46B5) hantahantāye# Onomatopoeticum ☞ § 5.11, Anm. 1 ⇒ layyalayāye § 5.11.7A1. na kṣamati dvitīyasthavireṇa hantahantāye bhuñjiyāṇaṃ “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ § 6.11.8A2. na kṣamati labdhālabdhaṃ hantahantāye bhuñjiya “labdho piṇḍo” dvāraṃ paśyiya utthiya gantuṃ hantṛ~ § 41.20.35A4. dhig brāhmaṇasya hantāraṃ (vs) *haṃbha- “lospoltern”?; vgl. Skt. hambhāyate (“brüllen [von der Kuh]”) ☞ § 31.24, Anm. 1 § 31.24.26A7. nâpi dāni kṣamati tehi āgantukehi nevāsikāṃ kutsiya haṃbhiya “āyuṣmann, adyâpi yūyaṃ iha vasatha. ...” hara- § 4.15.5B1. kākā ca <se> akṣimalaṃ harantā (Impv. 3. pl.; < Skt. -ntām) (vs) § 6.13.8A3. kāko ca se akṣimalaṃ harantaṃ (Impv. 3. pl.; < Skt. -ntām) (vs) § 41.17.34B7. yadi vayam imasya dārakasya evaṃ dharmmiṣṭhasya imaṃ hiraṇya- suvarṇṇaṃ harāma, ... § 41.18.35A1. yadi vayaṃ etasya dharmmiṣṭhasya etaṃ hiraṇya{ṃ}suvarṇṇaṃ harema, ... haraṇaka~ ⇒ rajo-haraṇaka~ haraṇī~ ⇒ agni-haraṇī~ haritakī-caṅgerī~# “Korb für Gemüse” ☞ § 43.8, Anm. 1 ⇒ caṃgerī~ § 43.8.38A6. ete khajjakacaṃgerīyo vanaphalacaṅgerīyo haritakīcaṅgerīyo (Hs. harītakī°) vā prasphoḍiya suprakṣālitāṃ kariya ekamante sthapetavyāḥ harītakī~ “Frucht gelben Myrobalanenbaumes” § 48.8.41B5. labhyā ... gṛhṇituṃ badarāṇi vā kolakāni vā āmalakāni vā harītakī (Hs. hārī°) vā taṇḍulāni vā ... harītakī- für haritakī- : § 43.8.38A6 harmmiya~ ⇒ muṇḍa-harmmiya~ hasa- § 42.3.36A5. te dāni hasanti ca vilakṣenti ca hasta~ (1) “die Hand” ⇒ arddha-hasta~, eka-hastena, ohita-hasta~, dakṣiṇa-hasta~ § 1.10.2A1. nâpi kṣamati śalākāṃ vārayantena anirmmādiya hastāṃ śalākāṃ vārayituṃ § 1.10.2A2. atha khalu hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... śalākā vārayitavyā ... hastān nirmmādiya ... śalākā{ṃ} gṛhṇitavyā § 2.8.2B7~3A1. hastehi vā anirmmāditehi śalākāṃ vārayituṃ. ... hastān nirmmādiyānaṃ ... hastehi vā anirmmāditehi śalākāṃ praticchituṃ. ... hastān nirmmādiyāṇa ... śalākā praticchitavyā § 3.9.3B7~4A1. na kṣamati anirmmāditakehi hastehi upānahārūḍhena oguṇṭhitena vā śalākāṃ vārayituṃ ... hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... śalākā vārayitavyā ... anirmmāditakehi hastehi ... praticchituṃ ... hastāṃ nirmmādiyāṇa ... śalākā praticchitavyā § 4.10.5A2. atha khalu hastena āsanaṃ pratyavekṣitavyaṃ § 4.10.5A2. atha khalu hastena parāmṛśiyāṇa jānitavyaṃ § 4.13.5A6. na bhuñjitvā hastaṃ nikṣipiya āsitavyaṃ § 4.13.5A6. atha khalu anujānetavyaṃ yadā navakāḥ ... pānīyaṃ vā pibanti, hastām vā 549  ukkaḍḍhiya āsanti § 5.9.6B7. hastehi pratyavekṣiyāṇaṃ anantarikāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi upaviśitavyaṃ § 6.9.7B7. hastena pratyavekṣiyāṇa ānantariyāṇāṃ āsanāni varjayantehi ... upaviśitavyaṃ § 5.11.7A2. pānīyam vā pibanti hastāni oka<ḍ>ḍhiya āsanti § 8.12.9B2. yadi mahājaniko bhavati, antamasato hastena samavadhānaṃ dātavyaṃ § 18.50.17A7. na kṣamati nivāsanaṃ oguhiya vāmena hastena aṅgajātaṃ gṛhṇiya ... § 20.13.20A1. vāmena ca hastena kuccako gṛhṇitavyaḥ paścāt ekamantena cchorayitavyaḥ § 23.4.3.21B1. nâpi kṣamati tahiṃ pādāṃ dhovituṃ, hastāṃ dhovituṃ, mukhaṃ dhovituṃ § 23.6.4.21B4. pādām vā dhovati, mukham vā dhovati, hastam (wohl für hastām [< hastāṃ < hastān]) vā nirmmādayati § 25.12.22B7. na kṣamati pātreṇa pātraṃ mārggituṃ. atha khalu hastena mārggitavyaṃ § 25.13.22B7~23A1. nâpi kṣamati upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā pātraṃ vāmena hastena allīpayituṃ. atha khalu ... dakṣiṇena hastena pātraṃ allīpayitavyaṃ § 25.15.23A2. ullapantena kīlakaṃ hastena pratyavekṣitvā <ullapitavyaṃ> § 26.9.23B2. naỿva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādati, na mukhaṃ dhovati, na hastā nirmmādayati § 31.21.26A5. akalpiyakarakīto hastā nirmmādiyāṇa kalpiyakarakīto prakṣāliya tato cetiyaṃ vanditavyaṃ § 32.6.27B2. pādāṃ dhovantasya, hastā nirmmādantasya, cetiyaṃ vandantasya, ... § 32.11.27B5. svāgatam āyuṣmanto, ... pādāṃ prakṣālehi, hastāṃ nirmmādehi, viśramāhi § 39.28.32A5. pādāṃ prakṣāliya hastāṃ nirmmādiya stūpaṃ vistareṇa vanditavyaṃ § 40.1.32B2. tato yyeva hastāṃ nirmmādiyanti § 40.1.32B2. hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... § 40.5.32B5. tehi kalyata eva utthiya hastāṃ nirmmādiya ... § 40.10.33A3. hastāṃ sunirmmāditāṃ kṛtvā ... § 40.10.33A3. pānīyaṃ gṛhṇantena gharttitavyaṃ, yathā eka hasto nirāmiṣo bhavati § 40.13.33A5. hastāṃ sunirmmāditā kariya ... § 40.13.33A5. ekinā hastena pānīyaṃ parigṛhṇitavyaṃ § 40.16.33A7. hastaṃ vā nirmmādayituṃ § 40.16.33B2. tato yeva hastāṃ dhovati § 41.6.34A3. pātraṃ nikṣipiya hastāṃ prakṣāliya ... § 41.7.34A3. dakṣiṇena hastena udakaṃ āsiñcati § 41.7.34A4. vāmena hastena pādāṃ dhovati § 41.9.34A5. dakṣiṇena hastena upānahāpocchanakaṃ dhoviya ... § 41.9.34A5. kalācīya udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhotā § 41.9.34A5. hastāṃ dhoviya ... § 41.15.34B5. so dāni dārako ... hastāṃ sudhotāṃ (Hs. sudhātāṃ) kṛtvā ... § 41.23.35A7. vāmena hastena pādā{ṃ} dhovitavyā § 41.24.35B1. kalācīye udakaṃ āvarjiya hastā dhovitavyā § 41.27.35B3. dakṣiṇena hastena (Hs. antena) udakaṃ āsiñcitavyaṃ § 41.27.35B3. vāmena hastena pādā dhovitavyā § 41.27.35B4. vāmena hastena udakaṃ āsiñcitavyaṃ § 41.27.35B4. dakṣiṇena hastena pādā dhovitavyā § 41.27.35B4. nâpi dāni kṣamati tenaỿva hastena udakaṃ āsiñcituṃ § 41.29.35B6. hastān nirmmādiyāṇaṃ ... § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... udvedho nirmmuṣṭikā trayo hastā (ein Längenmaß) karttavyā vistāreṇa nimuṣṭikā vā § 42.15.36B7. ekena hastena agrato praticchāditvā praveṣṭavyaṃ § 42.18.37A3. hastena agrato praticchādayitavyaṃ § 48.6.41B2. antamasato hastenâpi prasphoṭiya āmarjiya upaviśitavyaṃ § 48.8.41B4. na kṣamati antaragharaṃ praviṣṭena ... cikkaṇā vā hastān nirmādituṃ § 49.5.42B2. atha dāni na paśyati, hastena gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ ekato vā ekato vā uvvattayitavyo § 49.7.42B5. anyasya haste pātraṃ datvā, tahiṃ gantavyaṃ § 50.6.43B2. nâpi dāni adhotakehi hastehi aprayatehi gṛhṇitavyaṃ. atha khalu prakṣālitvā nirmmādayitvā gṛhṇitavyaṃ 550  § 50.8.43B4. prakṛty’ eva tāva dantakāṣṭhaṃ khādayitavyaṃ, hastā nirmmādayitavyā ... § 50.10.43B6. nīhārakapiṇḍapātena hastā nirmmādiyāṇaṃ pānīyasya kuṇḍikāṃ pūriyāṇaṃ panthe pratyudgacchitavyaṃ § 53.14.45B4. <vaktavyaṃ> “... dīpaṃ gopayiṣyan.” ti. tato hastena tāva ovārayitavyo § 57.1.47B1. te ... upānahā nikkhāsiya eka<ṃ> pi ekena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrakasmi gṛhītvā dvitīyaṃ dvitīyena hastena pārṣṇikāvaddhrake gṛhītvā ... prasphoṭanti (≒ § 57.3. 47B2) § 57.5.47B3. upānahikāyo ... saṃpuṭikariyāṇaṃ vāmakena hastena gṛhṇiya nikuṭitakena <vāmā bāhāṃ> osārayitvā saṃprajānaṃ gṛhṇiyāṇaṃ gantavyaṃ § 58.3.48A3. atha dāni bhikṣusya kāso āgacchati, hastena grīvā parimarditavyā § 60.5.48B7. koci se pradeśo khajjati, hastā ca se ’kalpiyā bhavanti, kiñ câpi bhikṣuḥ tulikāya vā kāṣṭhaga<ṃ>ḍena vā sa<ṃ>kalikāya vā kaṇḍūyati, anāpattiḥ § 62.6.50A2. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati saṃprajāna ekaṃ phiccakaṃ utkṣipiyāṇaṃ hastena vivaritvā vātakarmma karttavyaṃ § 62.12.50A7. atha dāni ārśavyādhiko bhavati, hastena vivaritvā mārggato udvarttitvā saṃprajānaṃ karttavyaṃ (2) “eine Art Behälter”# (?) ☞ § 43.1, Anm. 5 ⇒ hasta-saṃjñā~ § 43.1.38A2. odanamānikāyo hastā kākaśakuntehi nikkhoḍiyantā ... (3) die Hand als Längenmaß (44~46 cm) § 18.4.15B4. (varccakuṭī ...) tac ca mukhāni karttavyāni hastām vā āyāmena nimuṣṭikam vā hastam vistāreṇa § 21.3.20B1. kaṭhinaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena dvādaśahastāṃ āyāmato karttavyaṃ aṣṭahastāṃ vistāreṇa § 54.2.46A1. yaṣṭīyaṃ tāva bhikṣuṇā kārāpayamāṇena aṣṭahastâyāmena karttavyā muṣṭimātrī sthūlatvena § 54.5.46A3. yaṣṭī kārayantena karttavyā vaṃśasya vā nalasya vā naṃgalasya vā rohiṣasya vā daśa-aṣṭahastāṃ dīrghatvena hasta-tala~ “Handfläche” § 60.4.48B6. atha ca dāni bhikṣu prahāṇaṃ upaviṣṭako khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā sukhākaṃ uvvaṭṭayitavyaṃ § 60.7.49A1. atha dāni bhikṣusya koci pradeśo khajjati, aṅguṣṭhodareṇa vā hastatalena vā parimardditavyaṃ hasta-nirmādana~# “Wasser zum Händewaschen” ☞ § 8.5, Anm. 6 § 8.5.9A1. hastāṃ nirmmādiya hastanirmmādanaṃ dātavyaṃ (= § 8.8.9A5) § 8.12.9B1. divāvihārāto ... āgatasya samānasya hastanirmādanaṃ dātavyaṃ hasta-śauca~# “das Reinigen der Hände” ⇒ pāda-śauca~ § 13.17.12B7. na dāni tahiṃ kṣamati hastaśaucaṃ vā karttuṃ pādaśaucaṃ vā, ... hasta-saṃjñā~ “(Behälter), der Hasta heißt, d.h. die Hand”#; vgl. Skt. hasta-saṃjñā~ (“Zeichen mit der Hand”) ☞ § 42.20, Anm. 3 ⇒ hasta~ (2) § 42.20.37A4. caṣakena vā karaṇḍikāya vā hastasaṃjñāya vā bhājanakena vā dātavyaṃ § 42.20.37A4. mānabhaṇḍe<na> vā bhājanena vā hastasaṃjñāya vā bhājanakena vā dātavyaṃ -hastika~ ⇒ dakṣiṇa-hastikaṃ, vāma-hastikam hastin~ ⇒ prabhūta-hasty-aśva-aja-gav’-eḍaka~ § 47.7.41A1. parivarjitavyā bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā hasti § 49.5.42B1. anekāye bhrānto vā hasti āgaccheya bhrānto vā aśvo bhrānto vā ratho hastodaka~ (hasta-ud°) “Waschwasser für die Hände”# § 40.7.32B7. bhikṣūṇāṃ hastodakasya pātrodakasya pāribhogikasya kumbhikā ca karakā ca pūrayitavyā hastodaka-pādodaka~# (hasta-ud°-pāda-ud°) “Waschwasser für die Hände und Waschwasser für die Füße” § 40.8.33A1. na kṣamati tato pānīyāto ... hastodakapādodakaṃ vā pānīyaṃ dātuṃ hā (1) Interj. ⇒ ha he, he, hū ha he, ho § 33.7.28A2. tenâpi na kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena vyāharttuṃ “hā kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti 551  § 33.8.28A3. vṛddhatarako śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā <kiṃ bhaṇasi>” tti pravyā- harituṃ § 33.10.28A4. atha dāni bhikṣusya <mātā vā> pitā vā bhaginī vā śabdāpayati, nâyaṃ kṣamati “hā kiṃ bhaṇasi” tti pravyāharttuṃ § 33.13.28A5. bhikṣū vā tehi śabdāpayati (lies: °piyati?), nâyaṃ kṣamati, “hā kiṃ bhaṇasi” ti vyāharttuṃ hā# (2) “hatschi!” (Onomatopoeticum) § 59.3.48A7. nâpi kṣamati sarvveṇa kaṇṭhena “hā” tti kṣipituṃ √hā ⇒ ujjha-, o-hayitvā, nihīnaka~ hāra~ “Perlenschnur; Halsschmuck aus 108 Perlenschnüren” ☞ § 51.13, Anm. 1 § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti śāṭakā vā paṭakā vā hārā vā arddhahārā vā hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇam vā, ... hāraka~ ⇒ piṇḍapāta-hāraka~ hārītakī für harītakī : § 48.8.41B5 hi ⇒ tena hi, hy § 2.1.2B1. āhaṃsu “no h’ etaṃ dīrghāyu” (= § 5.1.6A5, § 6.1.7A5) § 3.1.3A7. āhaṃsu “no hîdaṃ dīrghāyu” (= § 6.3.7A7) § 3.1.3A7. ete hi bhikṣū osarantikāye na āgacchati § 4.1.4A6. āhaṃsu “no h’ edaṃ dīrghāyu” § 4.11.5A4. atha dāni grīṣmo vā varṣārātro vā kālo bhavati, cire hi kālo atikramati, ... § 4.12.5A5. āha “na hi. āryasya etaṃ evaṃ dīyati.” § 4.13.5A6. mā h’ eva otrapeṃsu § 5.3.6A7. bhikṣū āhaṃsu “na hi.” § 5.10.6B7. vaktavyaṃ “na hi ....” § 18.53.17B2. eṣo hi bhikṣuḥ dīrghakena khāyitako bhavati, ... Uddāna (II).20A6. evaṃ hi sarvvehi śeyyāsane pratipadyitavyaṃ § 36.6.29B6. te hi yūyaṃ niśrāya tathāgate brahmacaryaṃ caratha mahato oghasya niḥsaraṇārthaṃ § 39.20.31B7. ekena bhikṣuṇā vihāraṃ ukkasiyāṇaṃ nidhyāyantena āsitavyaṃ “kiṃ grāmāntikā āgacchanti na hi?” tti § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... heṣṭhato viśālā hi upari saṃkṣiptā et passim -hi, -hiṃ : Loc. sg. masc.; vgl. BHSG § 21.22 ⇒ amukahiṃ, ekahi, ekahiṃ, kahiṃ, tahi, tahiṃ, yahiṃ hita~ § 4.18.5B7. hitāye (Dat.; vgl. BHSG § 8.45) vastupālānāṃ cirarātrāya kalpate (vs) hita-kāma~ § 41.17.34B7. asmākaṃ tāva eṣo ... pratyamitrāṇāṃ arthakāmo hitakāmo hita-citta~ (Pā) “gute Gesinnung, gute Absicht” § 55.4.46B5. nâpi kṣamati āghātacittena vā duṣṭacittena vā geṇḍukaṃ vārayituṃ. atha khalu maitracittena hitacittena geṇḍuko vāritavyo hitopasaṃhāra~ (BHS) (hita-upa°) “Fürsorge für das Wohl”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. upasaṃhāra; Ud-a 82.24. hitūpasaṃhāra § 34.6.28B6. tavâhaṃ hitopasaṃhāreṇa rakṣāvaraṇaguptiye sukhaṃ ca phāsukañ ca viharāmi hima-doṣa~# “Kälte im Winter” ⇒ udaka-doṣa~ § 14.1.13A1. aparaṃ dāni āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ himadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na vasati § 14.3.13A2. etaṃ dāni āraṇyakaṃ śayyāsanaṃ himadoṣeṇa rittaṃ na vasati himavatāḥ für haima°? : § 29.3.24B1 hiyo “gestern”; < Skt. hyas; vgl. Pā. hiyyo, hīyo; Pkt. hijjo; CDIAL 14108 hiyás § 3.5.3B2. bhante katamâdya? ... katamā puna hiyo ’bhūṣi? hiraṇya~ § 41.14.34B4. dāraka kahiṃ tumhāṇaṃ hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇaṃ vā? § 41.18.35A1. etaṃ hiraṇyaṃ suvarṇṇaṃ (wohl für hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ) harema 552  § 41.18.35A2. imaṃ vayaṃ tava sarvvaṃ hiraṇyaṃ suvarṇṇaṃ (wohl für hiraṇya- suvarṇṇaṃ) demi § 51.13.44A6. mahātmanāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ gṛhā bhavanti, tahiṃ kuṇḍā ujjhitaprakīrṇṇā bhavanti śāṭakā vā paṭakā vā hārā vā arddhahārā vā hiraṇyaṃ vā suvarṇṇam vā, ... hiraṇya-suvarṇṇa~# “Goldmünzen und ungeprägtes Gold” oder “Silber und Gold”; vgl. Pā. hirañña- suvaṇṇaṃ ☞ § 41.14, Anm. 1 § 41.14.34B4. tehi dāni mārggiya mārggiya prabhūtaṃ hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ gṛhasya madhyamāgāre mahāntaṃ kūṭaṃ kṛtaṃ § 41.17.34B7. imaṃ hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ harāma § 41.18.35A1. etaṃ hiraṇyaṃ suvarṇṇaṃ (wohl für hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ) harema § 41.18.35A2. muñcema vayaṃ etaṃ etasya hiraṇyasuvarṇṇaṃ § 41.18.35A2. imaṃ vayaṃ tava sarvvaṃ hiraṇyaṃ suvarṇṇaṃ (wohl für hiraṇya- suvarṇṇaṃ) demi hīna-vīrya~ “ohne Willenskraft” § 37.5.30A4. kusīdā hīnavīryā (Hs. hīnāv°) tīrthikāḥ, duḥprajñā tīrthikāḥ hīnāvīryā für hīnav° : § 37.5.30A4 √hu ⇒ ā-juha-, pra-juha- hū / kṛ ⇒ hūṣiyāṇaṃ hū ha he # Interj. ⇒ ha he, hā, he, ho § 31.16.26A2. nâpi nevāsikāṃ ullapitavyaṃ āgantukehi “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ ettha vasatha, ghuṇaviddhā tave, ...” § 31.17.26A2. nâpi dāni nevāsikena ullapitavyaṃ “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ. ...” hūṣiyāṇaṃ für kṛṣiyāṇaṃ : § 44.1.38B6 √hṛ ⇒ abhi-sā-hara-, abhy-ud-dhara-, ā-hara-, ni-hara-, nī-hara-, nī-√hṛ, pari-hara-, pra-vy-ā- hara-, pra-hara-, vi-hara-, vy-ā-hara-, saṃ-hṛta~, sam-anv-ā-hara-, sā-haṭa~, sā-hara-, hara- § 31.4.25B4. atha dāni koci glāno bhavati, ... avidūreṇa gantavyaṃ, mā dāni adarśanena parijāne “hṛtaṃ, hṛtaṃ me pātracīvaram” iti gacchantasya karttavyaṃ √hṛṣ ⇒ saṃ-pra-harṣaya- he Interj. ⇒ ha he, hā, hū ha he, ho § 26.1.23A5. te dāni āyuṣmaṃto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ ... yo (lies: yā?) tāva pelavā bhavati, jalpanti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu ...” § 26.1.23A5. atha dāni khakkhaṭa bhavati, jalpa<ṃ>ti “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, lecchaṃ (wohl für lehyaṃ) ayaṃ, ’peyyā ayaṃ, kaṭṭārikācchejjā ayaṃ.” § 26.8.23B1. yadi tāva tanukā bhavati, na vaktavyaṃ “he he he Gaṅgā ayaṃ sarvvaṃ” § 31.24.26A7. he he śiṣṭā baṣṭā. yūyaṃ jātā, <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti § 33.1.27B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti (≒ § 33.2.27B7) § 33.6.28A2. nâyaṃ kṣamati gṛhi-ālāpena ālapituṃ “haṃgho he he” tti hetu~ ⇒ artha-hetoḥ hemanta~ § 4.8.4B6. yadi tāva hemanto bhavati, anukālaṃ praviśitavyaṃ § 47.6.40B7. atha dāni hemanto bhavati, prāvaritvā gantavyaṃ § 4.11.5A3. hemanto ca kālo bhavati, vaktavyaṃ “na hi” tti § 12.17.12A4. hemante śayyāsanaṃ uddiśitavyaṃ guptyarthaṃ paribhogārthaṃ ... hemanta-kāla~# “Winterzeit” § 5.8.6B5. yadi tāva hemantakālo bhavati, ... lahuṃ kālo atikramati (≒ § 6.8.7B5) § 5.10.6B7. yadi tāva hemantakālo bhavati, laghu kālo atikramati, ... (= § 6.10.7B7, § 50.5.43A7) § 11.14.11A3. atha dāni hemantakālo bhavati, ... (= § 41.32.36A1) § 8.5.9A1. hemantakālo bhavati, mandamukhi prajvālayitavyā (≒ § 8.12.9B1) heṣṭe (BHS), heṣṭhe (BHS) “unten, hinunten; unter” ⇒ heṣṭhato, heṣṭhā, heṣṭhena § 22.2.21A1. (cakkalī ...) osāriyāṇaṃ heṣṭhe dve kīlakān āpīḍiyāṇa tahiṃ bandhitavyaṃ § 25.4.22B3. nâpi kṣamati bilvasya vā pakvasya kapitthasya pakvasya nālikerasya heṣṭhe 553  nirmmādayituṃ § 44.7.39A6. ātmano cīvarakāni heṣṭe sthapayitu<ṃ> § 44.7.39A6. upādhyāyasya vā ācāryasya vā <cīvarāṇi> heṣṭe sthapayitavyāni § 57.6.47B4. (upānahikāyo ...) pratisandhismi tathā yeva saṃpuṭikṛtikāyo āsanasya heṣṭhe sthapitavyāyo heṣṭhato (BHS) “unten; unter” ⇒ heṣṭe, heṣṭhe, heṣṭhā, heṣṭhena § 30.5.25A3. dakṣiṇ<en>a śayyā prajñapetavyā, cīvaravaṃśasya heṣṭhato § 42.8.36B3. bh<r>aṣṭikā ... heṣṭhato viśālā hi upari saṃkṣiptā heṣṭhā (BHS) “unten; unter” ☞ § 4.12, Anm. 2 ⇒ heṣṭe, heṣṭhe, heṣṭhato, heṣṭhena § 4.12.5A5. vaktavyaṃ “mama thokaṃ dehi heṣṭhā bahuṃ” heṣṭhe ⇒ heṣṭe heṣṭhena# “unten; unter”; vgl. BHSD, s.v. heṣṭena ⇒ uparimeṇa, heṣṭhā, heṣṭhato, heṣṭe, heṣṭhe § 45.6.40A1. nâpi kṣamati heṣṭhena snānaśāṭikām vā leṅkaṭakhaṇḍakam vā osārayituṃ haimavata~ “vom Himalaya stammend” ☞ § 29.3, Anm. 1 § 29.3.24B1. evaṃ bhikṣavo niṣīdatha, yathā nāgā haimavatāḥ (Hs. hima°) ... haỿva < ha +eva; vgl. Speyer 1896: § 228, PW, s.v. ha § 23.3.21A6. bhūmi bhavati māṣakālavarṇṇā, nâpi bhavati ulloyo prapāṇḍaro, na haỿva bhitti kṛtaparikarmmā. evaṃ kanīyasako ho Interj. ⇒ ha he, hā, hū ha he, he § 33.1.27B6. te dāni āyuṣmanto ṣaḍvarggikāḥ gṛhi-ālāpena ālāpenti “ambe, atte, bhāva, bhaṭṭa, tāta, haṃgho he he, ho kiṃ bhaṇasî”ti (≒ § 33.2.27B7) hy; eingesetzt zwischen den Vokalen zur Verhinderung des Sandhi, vgl. dazu PW, MW, s.v. hi ⇒ hi § 14.11.13B1. evaṃ hy eva sarvvaṃ pratisaṃskāro karttavyaḥ yāva śvetavarṇṇā dātavyā hy / cch ⇒ cch / hy Daṇḍa | (Daṇḍa) ⇒ a + | (Daṇḍa) / ā; a + | (Daṇḍa) / e; ā / o + | (Daṇḍa); e + | (Daṇḍa) / o; o / | (Daṇḍa) + ā 554  Nachträge Anhang I Über sprachliche und strukturelle Probleme der Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ 1. Der Titel: Abhisamācārikā, Ābhisamācārikāḥ oder bhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ?1 Die Handschrift des vorliegenden Textes beginnt mit “abhisamācārikāṇām ādiḥ” und endet mit “ābhisamācārikāḥ samāptāḥ”. Die chinesische Übersetzung des Textes beginnt mit Mingweiyifa 明威儀法 (“Erklärung zu den Regeln des richtigen Verhaltens”), mit der Variante Weiyifa 威儀法 (“Die Regeln des richtigen Verhaltens” = bhisamācārikā dharmāḥ), und endet mit dem Namen Weiyi 威儀 (“Richtiges Verhalten” = bhisamācārikā). In der chinesischen Übersetzung des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas (T. 22, Nr. 1425, Mohesengqilü 摩訶僧祇律) wird der vorliegende Text, der einer von dreizehn Teilen dieses Vinaya ist, mit dem Namen Weiyi 威儀 (“Richtiges Verhalten” = bhisamācārikā) zitiert: 459a29. 如威儀中廣説 (“Wie im Weiyi ausführlich dargelegt.”); 334c16f. 諸比丘於修多羅中、毘尼中、威儀中言：“此是罪，非{是}罪。”；“是輕，是 重”；“是可治，是不可治”；“是殘罪，是無殘罪。”，鬪諍相言(“Die Mönche führen Streitgespräche, indem sie aufgrund des [Prātimokṣa]Sūtra, des Vinaya [oder] des Weiyi sagen: ‘Dies ist ein Vergehen.’; ‘Dies ist kein Vergehen.’; ‘Dies ist ein leichtes [Vergehen].’; ‘Dies ist ein schweres [Vergehen].’; ‘Es ist möglich, es auszusühnen.’; ‘Es ist nicht möglich, es auszusühnen.’; ‘Dies ist ein Saṃghātiśeṣa-Vergehen.’; ‘Dies ist kein Saṃghātiśeṣa- Vergehen.’ ”). Der vorliegende Text wird also, außer am Anfang der chinesischen Übersetzung des Textes, mit der kürzeren Form bhisamācārikā(ḥ) benannt. Dagegen wird “bhisamācārikā dharmāḥ” als Sammelbezeichnung in den einzelnen Regeln benutzt. Die Abschnitte von § 1 bis § 30, d. h. Kapitel I~III, enden mit der Wendung “na pratipadyati, abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikramati” (“Wenn man nicht [so] verfährt, übertritt man die Regeln für das richtige Verhalten.”), während die Abschnitte von § 31 bis Ende, d. h. Kapitel IV~VI, mit der Variante “na pratipadyati, ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati” enden. In ähnlicher Weise enden die Abschnitte im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya derselben Schule (im Folgenden BhiVin[Ma-L]) mit den Pluralformen “pārājikā”, “saṃghātiśeṣā” und “niḥsargikapācattikā”. In BhiVin(Ma-L) § 68 kommen folgende Wendungen in der Auflistung der Regeln vor: aṣṭau pārājikā dharmāḥ, ekūnaviṃśati saṃghātiśeṣā dharmāḥ, triṃśan niḥsargikapācattikā dharmāḥ (“Acht Pārājika-Dharmas, neunzehn Saṃghātiśeṣa- Dharmas, dreißig Niḥsargikapācattika-Dharmas”). Die Abschnitte selbst jedoch enden jeweils ohne die Bezeichnung “dharmāḥ”: § 137.3B6.7. pārājikāḥ samāptāḥ; § 172.5A7.7. saṃghātiśeṣāḥ samāptāḥ; § 182.6A4.3. samāptā triṃśan naissargikāḥ. Da die Wörter abhisamācārika / ābhi° (“das richtige Verhalten betreffend”) hier, wie 1 Vgl. Band I, S. IX. 555 auch im Pāli, sicher als Adjektive verwendet werden, ist anzunehmen, daß die Verbindungen “abhisamācārikāṇām ādiḥ” und “ābhisamācārikāḥ samāptāḥ” Kurzformen von “abhisamācārikāṇāṃ dharmāṇām ādiḥ” bzw. “ābhisamācārikā dharmāḥ samāptāḥ” sind. Vermutlich wurden die Abhis. ursprünglich kein selbstständiger Text, sondern bildete einen Teil des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins. Darauf deutet besonders die Verwendung des Wortes antaroddāna (“Zwischen-Zusammenfassung”) am Ende dieses Textes hin. Deshalb hatte der vorliegende Text möglicherweise keinen eigenen Titel und wurde nur als der Teil des Vinayas betrachtet, in dem die abhisamācārikā dharmāḥ dargelegt sind. Daher wurde für den vorliegenden Text der Titel Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ2 (im Folgenden “Abhis.”) vorgezogen. 2. Madhyuddeśapāṭhaka Im Kolophon der Handschrift kommt der folgende Ausdruck vor: ārya- Mahāsāṃghikānāṃ Lokottaravādināṃ madhyuddeśapāṭhakānāṃ pāṭhena. Ähnliche Wendungen kommen auch in den anderen Vinaya-Texten der Mahāsāmghika- Lokottaravādins3 vor, z. B. im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya § 1, BI 1. āryaMahāsāṃghikānāṃ Lokottaravādināṃ madhyuddeśikānāṃ pāṭhena Bhikṣuṇīvinayasyâdiḥ. Die Bedeutung des Ausdrucks madhyuddeśika ist wiederholt erörtert worden. Roth übersetzt den oben zitierten Satz im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya folgendermaßen: “The beginning of the Disciplinary Code for nuns according to the recital of the Noble Mahāsāṃghikas, who profess the Supramundane, and recite [the Prātimokṣa] through the medium of an intermediate type of language.” (Roth 1985: 133). Der Ausdruck madhyuddeśika in den anderen Texten ist im vorliegenden Text zu madhyuddeśa-pāṭhaka (wörtl. “Rezitierer der Rezitation [des Prātimokṣa]”) geändert und dadurch verdeutlicht worden. Die Prātimokṣasūtras der verschieden Schulen sind in folgenden Sprachen entweder überliefert oder waren zumindest vermutlich einmal in Gebrauch:4 1. Theravādins : Pāli [Paiśācī] 2. Mahāsāṃghikas, Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins : Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit [Prakrit] 3. Mūlasarvāstivādins : Sanskrit [Sanskrit] 4. Sarvāstivādins : (Gāndhārī) > Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit > Sanskrit [-] 5. Dharmaguptakas : (Gāndhārī) > Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit > Sanskrit [-] 6. Sāmmitīya (die Sprache des Patna-Dharmapada) [Apabhraṃśa] Es ist daher nicht unmöglich, daß, wie Roth vermutet, madhyuddeśika bzw. madhyuddeśapāṭhaka “(das Prātimokṣa) in der "Mittleren Sprache" rezitierend” bedeutet. 2 In dem vorliegenden Text kommt die Form stets im Akkusativ, also abhisamācārikān dharmmān (atikrmati), vor. Der Ausdruck abhisamācārikā dharmāḥ findet sich nur einmal am Ende des BhiVin(Ma-L): § 293.10A3. 7f. āraṇyakaṃ jentākaṃ varca kaṭhinaṃ uddharitvā avaśeṣā tathaiva kāryāḥ abhisamācārikā dharmāḥ (“Außer [den Regeln hinsichtlich] Āraṇyaka, Jentāka, des Stuhlgangs und der Kaṭhina-Matte sollen die restlichen Regeln für das richtige Verhalten genau in der gleichen Weise [wie von den Mönchen] eingehalten werden.”). Es ist klar, daß es sich bei diesem Ausdruck um eine Sammelbezeichnung handelt. Roth (BhiVin[Ma-L], S. 325, Anm. 11) und die Forschergruppe der Taishō Universität (Abhis[T], I, S. 30) betrachten diesen Ausdruck irrtümlich als Titel des Textes. 3 Vgl. S. 470 (Übers), Anm. 1. 4 Vgl. von Hinüber 1989a: 354 (= 2009: 567), zu den Angaben in eckigen Klammen id. 361 (= 2009: 574). 556 Dabei bezeichnet diese “Mittlere Sprache” zwischen Mittelindisch und Sanskrit das, was heute als “Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit” gilt. In den chinesischen Übersetzungen der Vinaya-Texte der Mahāsāmghikas kommt keine Parallele zu diesen Selbstbezeichnungen der Schule vor. 3. Sprache Die Sprache der Abhis. ist als “Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit” zu klassifizieren, ebenso wie die des Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya und des Mahāvastu. Wie von Hinüber gezeigt hat, kann der Begriff “Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit” auf die Schulsprache der Mahāsāmghika-Lokottaravādin eingegrenzt werden.5 Wie oben erwähnt, beginnt die Handschrift der Abhis. mit “abhisamācārikāṇām ādiḥ” und endet mit “ābhisamācārikāḥ samāptāḥ”. Interessant ist die Tatsache, daß alle Abschnitte in der ersten Hälfte (§ 1~§ 30) der Handschrift mit der Wendung abhisamācārikān dharmmān atikramati (“Man übertritt die Regeln für das richtige Verhalten”) enden, während alle Abschnitte in der zweiten Hälfte (§ 31~§ 62) mit ābhisamācārikān dharmmān atikrāmati enden. Nicht nur die Schreibweise von abhisamācārikān bzw. ābhisamācārikān sondern auch die des Verbs atikramati bzw. atikrāmati wechselt. Auch das Wort für “Unterkunft, Lagerstätte; Bettzeug, Sitzkissen und -bezug, Mobiliar” kommt in zwei verschiedenen Varianten im Text vor: dabei steht 55-mal śayyāsana in diesem Text, davon 48-mal zwischen § 8.11 und § 14.7, während seine Variante śeyyāsana insgesamt 49-mal vorkommt, aber nur zwischen § 14.10 und § 39.29. Vielleicht gibt es noch weitere solche Wechsel von Varianten in dem Text, aber diese beiden Beispiele sollen an dieser Stelle genügen. Wahrscheinlich wurde die Handschrift im Ganzen, von einem Schreiber, geschrieben. Wenn diese Annahme stimmt, sind die beobachteten Wechsel von Wortvarianten vermutlich auf die der Handschrift zugrundeliegende Vorlage oder auf mündliche Überlieferung zurückzuführen. Ausdrucksweisen, die für die Schule der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins charakteristisch sind, wurden von Roth gesammelt und untersucht (Roth 1966; Roth 1993: 232). Zu Roths Liste kann man das Folgende nachtragen: ati-r-iva (= atīva), anyātaka~ (“eines anderen”), anyena (“anderswohin”), apara~ (“irgendeiner, ein gewisser”), allīya- (“nahekommen, sich nähern, zukommen”), ā-cikṣa- (“zeigen; sagen; mitteilen”), ā-ṇape- (“befehlen”), itthaṃ (“hier”), ekatam’ ante (“in einer Ecke”), ekamante (“beiseite”), etarhiṃ (“jetzt”), ettha (“hier”), kisya (“wessen”), taṃ velaṃ (“zu dieser Zeit”), tumaṃ (“Du”), dhova- (“waschen”), bhaṭṭā~ (“Frau”), viya (“wie, gleichsam”), vistareṇa nidānaṃ kṛtvā usw. Es gibt nur eine einzige erhaltene Handschrift der Abhis., und diese enthält viele Verschreibungen und viele unklare Wörter. Es ist oft schwer zu beurteilen, ob ein sonst unbelegtes, schwieriges Wort eine echte, ursprüngliche Lesart oder einfach eine Verschreibung des Schreibers zeigt. Jedoch ist deutlich zu erkennen, daß der Text viele echte mittelindische Formen enthält, die lexikalisch nicht belegt sind. Dieser Text enthält etwa 1100 (!) lexikalisch bislang unbelegte Wörter. Außerdem werden in diesem Text etwa 150 Wörter mit lexikalisch nicht belegter Bedeutung gebraucht. Weiterhin findet der Leser in diesem Text viele ungewöhnliche Wendungen. Zum Beispiel scheint etad~ oft am besten als Indefinitpronomen (“ein, irgendein”) zu übersetzen 5 Vgl. von Hinüber 1989a: 341, 354 (= 2009: 554, 567); ib. 2001: § 43. 557 zu sein, so daß die Satzkonstruktion etad~ + Substantiv + Verbum häufig mit “wenn ein ...” wiedergegeben werden kann; z. B.: § 4.5. eṣo dāni koci saṃghaṃ bhaktena ... nimantreti, ... (“Wenn nun irgendjemand die Gemeinde ... zum Essen einlädt, ...”) § 41.22. eṣo dāni bhikṣu yadā grāmāto nirggato bhavati, tato ... (“Wenn nun ein Mönch aus einem Dorf zurückgekommen ist, dann ...”) § 43.3. etaṃ dāni saṃghasya anugraho bhavati (“Wenn es nun einen Vorrat [an Lebensmitteln] in der Mönchsgemeinde gibt, ...”) § 50.4. etaṃ dāni sarvvasaṃghasya antaraghare nimantraṇam bhavati, ... (“Wenn die gesamte Mönchsgemeinde nun [zum Essen] in einem Haus eingeladen ist, ...”) usw.6 Etwa dreißig onomatopoetische Ausdrücke, die meisten sonst unbelegt sind, kommen in diesem Text vor, z. B. amaḍaṃ maḍamaḍaṃ (“knack! knack!”), cchitti (“sofort, rasch”), jhallajjhallāṃ, jhallajhallāye, jjhallajjhallāye (“platsch, platsch!”), ṭaṭṭa ṭaṭṭa (“knack! knack!”), ḍharaḍhara, ḍharaḍharāye (Laut der Blähung), pharapharāya (do.) usw. Beschimpfungen in Gesprächen sind sehr amüsant, allerdings oft schwierig genau zu verstehen; z. B.: § 26.1. “he he he nâyaṃ kiñcid yāgu. Gaṅgā ayaṃ Sarayū Ajiravatī Mahī Mahāmahī tti. nicuḍavuntikāye imaṃhi taṇḍulā mārggitavyā.” ... “he he he nâyaṃ kiñci yavāgū, lehyaṃ ayaṃ, ’peyyā ayaṃ, kaṭṭārikācchejjā ayaṃ.” (“ ‘He, he, he, das ist kein Reisbrei! Das ist [so wässerig wie] der Ganges, die Sarayū, Ajiravatī, Mahī, Mahāmahī. Die Reiskörner darin muß man mit einem Nicuḍa-Fächer [?] suchen.’ ... ‘He, he, he, das ist kein Reisbrei! Das ist ein Essen, an dem man lecken muß. Das kann man nicht trinken. Das muß man mit einem Messer schneiden.’ ”) § 31.16. “hū ha he adyâpi taṃ tad ev’ ettha vasatha, ghuṇaviddhā tave, NandOpanandanā yūyaṃ nāgarājāno, ihaỿva yūyaṃ jātā ihaỿva mariṣyatha. jātā te śṛgālā ye tumbhāṇaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti.” (“ ‘Hu, ha, he, ihr wohnt heute noch nach wie vor hier!’; ‘Ihr [?] seid [schon] von Würmern zerfressen!’ ‘Ihr seid die Schlangenkönige, Nanda und Upanandana!’; ‘Ihr seid eben hier geboren [und] ihr werdet eben hier sterben!’; ‘Die Schakale sind [schon] geboren, die euer Fleisch fressen werden.’ ”) § 31.17. “hū ha he caṇḍa<ṃ> muktaṃ pañcavarṣikaṃ pravṛttaṃ sārtho prayāto (Hs. yathā pāṭito)” (“ ‘Hu, ha, he! Hier ist der Teufel los! Das ist wie, wenn ein Pañcavarṣika-Fest losgegangen ist! Die Karawane ist aufgebrochen (, mit der ihr eigentlich hättet abreisen sollen)!’ ”) § 31.24. “āyuṣmann, adyâpi yūyaṃ iha vasatha. he he śiṣṭā baṣṭā. yūyaṃ jātā, <jātā> te ye śṛgālā ye yuṣmākaṃ māṃsāni khādiṣyanti.” (“ ‘Heute noch, oh Ehrwürdige, wohnt ihr hier! He, he, [Ihr] seid zurückgelassen, oh ihr Dummköpfe! Ihr seid [hier] geboren. Sogar die Schakale sind [schon] geboren, die euer Fleisch fressen werden.’ ”) Wahrscheinlich hat die Sprache des vorliegenden Textes mehr altertümliche Züge bewahrt als die Sprachen des Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya und des Mahāvastu. So findet man zum Beispiel in den Abhis. ziemlich häufig die Absolutive auf -iyāṇa (z. B. aṇṭhiyāṇa, kariyāṇa, gacchiyāṇa, thaviyāṇa usw.; insgesamt 36 Beispiele von 24 verschiedenen Verbalwurzeln) 6 Vgl. § 4.5, Anm. 5, § 12.5, Anm. 1; S. 163f. in diesem Band, s.vv. etad~ (2), etad~ ... ka~ + ci. 558 sowie auf -iyāṇaṃ (z. B. kariyāṇaṃ, utkṣipiyāṇaṃ, gacchiyāṇaṃ, dhoviyāṇaṃ usw.; insgesamt 125 Beispiele von 63 verschiedenen Verbalwurzeln), während die Absolutive auf - iyānaṃ (5 Beispiele von uddiśiyānaṃ, vītināmiyānaṃ und nirmmādiyānaṃ) und auf -iyāna (2 Beispiele von vītināmiyāna) deutlich seltener vorkommen. Die Absolutive auf -iyāṇa und -iyāṇaṃ finden sich auch in der älteren Schicht des Jaina-Kanons in Ardha-Māgadhī, während im Pāli -iyānaṃ und im buddhistischen Sanskrit -iyāna vorkommen.7 Im Gegensatz zu den Abhis., kommen diese Absolutive im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya nicht ein einziges Mal vor. Im Mahāvastu erscheint das Absolutiv auf -iyāna in 33 Beispielen von 20 verschiedenen Verbalwurzeln, das alte Absolutiv auf -iyāṇa dagegen nur einmal (Mvu I 227.16. upagrahiyāṇa) und das andere alte Absolutiv auf -iyāṇaṃ überhaupt nicht.8 Auch Formen wie thave-, sthave- (“legen, stellen”; < Skt. sthāpayati; vgl. Pkt. ṭhavei, ṭhavai), die weder im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya oder im Mahāvastu noch in anderen buddhistischen Texten, aber im vorliegenden Text insgesamt fünfmal zu finden sind, weisen wahrscheinlich auf die Altertümlichkeit der Sprache der Abhis. hin. Dasselbe gilt wahrscheinlich auch für die folgenden Beispiele. Die mittelindischen Formen yeva (= Pā, Pkt) und yyeva (= Pkt)9 und die entsprechende Sanskrit-Form eva erscheinen in den Abhis., im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya und im Mahāvastu in der folgenden Verteilung. yeva (= Pā) yyeva (= Pkt) eva (= Skt) Gesamt Abhis. 74 23 54 151 Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya 17 0 182 199 Mahāvastu 42 0 946 988 Mit hoher Häufigkeit treten die beiden mittelindischen Formen in den Abhis. auf, während die Sanskrit-Form eva seltener als yeva vorkommt. In den Abhis. erscheint yeva häufiger als im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya und im Mahāvastu, während yyeva in diesen beiden Texten nicht nachgewiesen ist. Dagegen erscheint eva mit einer viel höheren Häufigkeit in Bhikṣuṇī- Vinaya und Mahāvastu als in den Abhis. Die mittelindische Form viya (= Pā, Pkt) und die entsprechende Sanskrit-Form iva erscheinen in den Abhis., im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya und im Mahāvastu in der folgenden Verteilung. viya (= Pā, Pkt) iva (= Skt) Gesamt Abhis. 14 1 15 Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya 6 27 33 Mahāvastu 30 123 153 Während die Form viya in den Abhis. sehr oft vorkommt, läßt sich die sonst übliche Sanskrit- Form iva nur einmal dort finden. Dafür wird im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya und im Mahāvastu vorwiegend iva verwendet und selten die mittelindische Form viya, genau gegensätzlich zu den Abhis. 7 Vgl. Pischel § 592; Geiger § 214, Oberlies 2001: 265, 267f.; BHSG §§ 35.45f.; Roth 1980: 87~88 = 1986: 298~299. 8 Vgl. Roth 1980: 87f. = 1986: 298f. 9 Nach Norman sind die beide Formen durch Zusammenfügung von ye (emphatische Partikel) und eva gebildet; vgl. Norman 1967: 162f. = CP I 48f.; vgl. auch Steiner 1997: 199ff. 559  Die mittelindische Form kissa (“wessen; warum”) kommt zweimal in den Abhis. vor, die entsprechende hybride Form kisya einmal (s. Glossar, s.vv.). Im Mahāvastu erscheint nur die Form kisya 27-mal, während im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya keine der beiden Formen vorkommt. Die mittelindische Form dinna~ (“gegeben”)10, p. pt. von √dā, kommt in den Abhis. 14- mal vor (s. Glossar, s.v. dinna~), die entsprechende Sanskrit-Form datta~ nicht ein einziges Mal. Im Gegensatz zu den Abhis., erscheinen die beide Formen im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya (dinna~ 21-mal; datta~ 12-mal) und im Mahāvastu (dinna~ 125-mal; datta~ 18-mal). Die mittelindische Form khāyitaka~ (“angefressen”; vgl. Pā. khāyita + Suffix ka) kommt in den Abhis. zweimal und ihre Variante khāditaka einmal vor (s. Glossar, s.vv.). Im Mahāvastu erscheint nur die Form khāditaka~ (Mvu II 78.11, 14). 4. Sprachliche Ähnlichkeit zwischen der Literatur der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins und der Aṣṭasāhasrikā-Prajñāpāramitā In der Literatur der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins, nämlich Abhis., Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya und Mahāvastu, kommt das Verb √jalp in der Bedeutung “(jemandem) sagen, sprechen” häufig vor. In den Abhis. kommt das Verb insgesamt 37-mal vor11; z. B.: § 19.42.19A3. vaidyo jalpati “bhadantā pūtimūtraṃ pibanāya dethê”tti (“Ein Arzt sagt: ‘Ihr Herren, gebt [ihm] den stinkenden Urin zu trinken!’ ”) § 50.9.43B5. atha dāni so jalpati “āyuṣman, bhuṃja tvaṃ. bhuktaṃ mayê”ti, ... (“Wenn er nun sagt: ‘Iß, oh Ehrwürdiger! Ich habe gegessen!’, ...”) Im Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya (BhiVin[Ma-L]) kommt dieses Verb in derselben Bedeutung 38-mal vor; z. B.: § 120.3B1.6. yo dāni ahaṃ jalpāmi “ācikṣatu āryā kim ājñāpayasi” (“Ich sage nun ‘Die Edle sollte sagen, was sie anordnet.’ ”) § 236.8A9.2. yā puna bhikṣuṇī puruṣeṇa sārdhaṃ anto hastapāśasya santiṣṭheya vā saṃlapeya vā upakarṇaṃ vā jalpeya pācattikaṃ (“Und wenn eine Nonne einem Mann sehr nahe steht, sich mit ihm unterhält, oder ihm ins Ohr spricht, begeht sie ein pācattika.”) Im Mahāvastu kommt es 56-mal vor; z. B.: Mvu I 311.6. te āhansu “jalpa yā te vijñapti” (“Sie [d.h. die Brahmanen] sagten [zu Mālinī]: ‘Sage deinen Wunsch!’ ”) Mvu I 348.18f. tehi dāni yasya yaṃ mataṃ so taṃ jalpati (“Sie [beide] sagten nun einander, was sie gedacht hatten.”) Im Pāli kommt die diesem Verb entsprechende Form jappati in derselben Bedeutung gelegentlich vor12; z. B.: Vin IV 271.1f. yā pana bhikkhunī ... purisena saddhiṃ eken’ ekā santiṭṭheyya vā sallapeyya vā nikaṇṇikaṁ vā jappeyya, ... pācittiyaṃ (“Und wenn eine Nonne mit einem Mann ganz allein zusammensteht, sich mit ihm unterhält, ihm ins Ohr 10 Außer in Abhis., BhiVin und Mvu, erscheint diese mittelindische Form nur sehr selten in buddhistischen Sanskrit-Texten, wie Edgerton bemerkt (BHSG § 34.16). Dazu kann man das Folgende nachtragen: PrMoSū(Ma-L). 33.4 (śaikṣā dharmāḥ 46.) na dinnadinnāni; PDhp 356~358. dinnaṃ hoti mahapphalaṃ (vgl. Uv 16.16~18. dattaṃ bhavati mahāphalam); Merv-Avadāna, Folio 5 verso. gṛhasya dinnaṃ, 15 recto 2. acchādo dinnaḥ, 63 recto 4. yaṃ dinnaṃ taṃ pi chardditam siyā. Vgl. auch Karashima 2001: 209f.; von Simson, “Eine Prātimokṣasūtra-Handschrift in hybrider Sprache”, in: Fs. Bechert (1997), S. 584, 592~3, 595. 11 Vgl. S. 254 in diesem Band, s.v. √jalp. 12 Vgl. DP II 205f., s.v. jappati1. 560  spricht, ... begeht sie ein pācittiya.”)13 Mil 31.8. sādhu bhante, atthaṃ jappehi (“Bitte sage [mir] den Sinn, oh Ehrwürdiger!”) Auch im epischen Sanskrit gibt es mehrere Beispiele für die Verwendung dieses Verbs in gleicher Bedeutung.14 Interessanterweise kommt √jalp in der Bedeutung “(jemandem) sagen, sprechen” in anderen buddhistischen Sanskrit-Texten sehr selten vor. Im gesamten Korpus der Literatur der Mūlasarvāstivādins ist dieser Gebrauch nicht ein einziges Mal belegt. Auch im Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden kommt das Wort in der Bedeutung “sprechen, reden” nur ein einziges Mal in einem Fragment eines nicht identifizierten, aber wahrscheinlich als Abhidharma-Text einzustufenden, Textes vor.15 Das häufige Vorkommen dieser Wendung in der Literatur der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins ist daher auffällig. An den folgenden beiden Stellen aus der Aṣṭasāhasrikā-Prajñāpāramitā scheint die Bedeutung von jalpati dem Sprachgebrauch der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins nahe zu kommen: AS 15.14f. = AAA.122.5f. āha: “utpādo dharmo ’nutpādo dharma ity, āyuṣman Śāriputra, na pratibhāti jalpitum.” āha: “anutpādo ’pi te, āyuṣman Subhūte, na 16 pratibhāti jalpitum?” āha: “anutpāda evâyuṣman Śāriputra, jalpaḥ. ...” (“[Subhūti] sagte: ‘Meiner Meinung nach kann man nicht sagen, daß der Dharma des Entstehens der Dharma des Nicht-entstehens ist.’ [Śāriputra] sagte: ‘Denkst du, daß man von dem Dharma des Nicht-entstehens sprechen kann, oh ehrwürdiger Subhūti?’ [Subhūti] sagte: ‘Das Nicht-entstehen ist nur, oh Śāriputra, eine Rede. ...’ ”) AS 42.2f. = AAA.252.5f. yadâpi sa dharmabhāṇako na jalpitukāmo bhaviṣyati, tadâpi tasya te devaputrās tenaỿva dharmagauraveṇa pratibhānam upasaṃhartavyaṃ maṃsyante, yathā tasya kulaputrasya vā kuladuhitur vā bhāṣitum eva chando bhaviṣyati (“Wenn auch der Dharma-Prediger nicht reden will, so denken dennoch die Gottheiten wegen des Respekts vor dem Dharma, daß sie ihm Wortgewandtheit [Selbstvertrauen, Inspiration] geben müssen, damit der Mann oder die Frau aus guter Familie den Willen zum Predigen bekommen möge.”) Ob auch dieser besondere Sprachgebrauch in der Aṣṭasāhasrikā-Prajñāpāramitā andeutet, daß dieser Mahāyāna-Text im Umfeld der Mahāsāṃghika(-Lokottaravādin)s verfaßt wurde, wofür auch weitere Gründe sprechen, soll hier nicht näher betrachtet werden. Man müßte jedoch den Wortschatz eines jeden Mahāyāna-Sutras mit dem der Literatur der Mahāsāṃghika(-Lokottaravādin)s gründlich vergleichen, um die Beziehung zwischen bestimmten Mahāyāna-Sutras und diesen Schulen zu beweisen. Ich hoffe, die vorliegende Bearbeitung der Abhis. wird als Basis für weitere philologisch-historische Forschungen dienen. 5. Die Stellung der Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ in der chinesischen Übersetzung des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas Wie oben erwähnt, entspricht der vorliegende Text, Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ, dem Teil 13 Vgl. BhīPr, S. 179f. 14 Vgl. dazu PW, III 66~67, s.v. jalp. 15 SWTF II 290; SHT III, S. 208, Nr. 946 = S 434R3. [priyava]canāni jalpati. 16 na : In AS fehlt das Wort (ein Druckfehler). 561 Weiyifa 威儀法 (“Die Regeln des Richtigen Verhaltens”) der chinesischen Übersetzung des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas (T. 22, Nr. 1425, Mohesengqilü 摩訶僧祇律, S. 227~548), die 416~418 n. Chr. von Faxian und Buddhabhadra in Yangzhou (楊州) angefertigt wurde. Die Struktur des gesamten Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas ist wie folgt: I Prātimokṣasūtra-vibhaṅga : boluotimucha fenbie 波羅提木叉分別17 (S. 227~412) 1. catvāri pārājikā dharmāḥ18 : si boluoyifa 四波羅夷法 (S. 227~262) 2. trayodaśa saṃghāvaśeṣā dharmāḥ : sengcanjie 僧殘戒19 (S. 262~289) 3. dvāv aniyatau dharmau : er budingfa 二不定法 (S. 289~291) 4. triṃśan naiḥsargikāḥ pāyattikā dharmāḥ : sanshi nisaqiboyetifa 三十尼薩耆波夜 提法 (S. 291~324) 5. dvānavati śuddhapāyattikā dharmāḥ : danti jiushi-er shifa : 單提九十二事法 (S. 324~396) 6. catvāri prātideśanikā dharmāḥ : si tisheni 四提舍尼(法) (S. 396~399) 7. śaikṣā dharmāḥ : zhongxuefa 衆學法 (S. 399~412) II Bhikṣu-prakīrṇaka20 : zasong baqufa 雜誦跋渠法21 (S. 412~ 499) III Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ : weiyifa 威儀法 (S. 499~ 514) IV Bhikṣuṇīvinaya : biqiuni bini 比丘尼比尼22 (S. 514~548) 1. aṣṭa pārājikā dharmāḥ : ba boluoyifa 八波羅夷法 (S. 514~517) 2. *ekonaviṃśati saṃghāvaśeṣā23 dharmāḥ : shijiu sengcanjie 十九僧殘戒 (S. 517~524) 3. triṃśan naiḥsargikāḥ : sanshi shi 三十事 (S. 524~527) 4. 141 pāyattikā24 dharmāḥ : yibaisishiyi boyeti 一百四十一波夜提法 (S. 527~544) 5. aṣṭa prātideśanikā dharmāḥ : ba tishenifa 八提舍尼法 (S. 544) 6. Prakīrṇaka : za baqu 雜誦跋渠25 (S. 544~548) Die Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ und der Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya entsprechen den Teilen III 17 Dieser Titel befindet sich am Ende des Abschnittes; T. 22, Nr. 1425, 412b15. 18 Diese Sanskrit-Titel wurden aus dem Prātimokṣasūtra der Mahāsāṃghikas oder der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins aus Bamiyan (Karashima 2008a: 80, Folio 106 recto und verso) übernommen, weil die chinesischen Transkriptionen dieser Terminologie in diesem Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas fast völlig den Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit-Formen in der Prātimokṣasūtra Handschrift aus Bamiyan entsprechen, allerdings weichen diejenigen im PrMoSū(Mā-L) (35.25f.) von den chinesischen Transkriptionen ab. 19 V.ll. sengqieposhisha 僧伽婆尸沙, sengqieposhishafa 僧伽婆尸沙法. 20 Zu diesem Titel, vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L), S. 328~334; Śikṣ154.17. Bhikṣuprakīrṇake; Yuyama 2003. In Prakīrṇakacaityalakṣaṇa und Stūpalakṣaṇakārikāvivecana, die beide zur Schule der Mahāsāṃghika- Lokottaravādins gehören, kommen die Formen Prakīrṇaka-vinaya, Prakīrṇa-vinaya, Prakīrṇaka und Prakīrṇa wiederholt vor (s. Roth 1997: 208~217). Zur Struktur dieses Teiles, vgl. Frauwallner 1956: 198~207; Sasaki 1994 (mit weiteren Literaturhinweisen). Der Prakīrṇaka und die Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ entsprechen inhaltlich dem Skandhaka der anderen Vinaya-Texte. Es ist jedoch irreführend, daß Frauwallner, Sasaki und andere diese beiden Teile als Skandhaka bezeichnen. 21 *Prakīrṇaka-adhyāya-varga-dharmāḥ? 22 Dieser Titel befindet sich am Ende des Abschnittes; T. 22, Nr. 1425, 548a28. 23 In BhiVin(Ma-L) wird durchaus die Form saṃghātiśeṣa verwendet, während in der Prātimokṣa- sūtra Handschrift aus Bamiyan die Form saṃghāvaśeṣa benutzt wird. 24 In BhiVin(Ma-L) wird durchaus die Form pācattika verwendet, während in der Prātimokṣasūtra Handschrift aus Bamiyan die Form pāyattika, die gut der chinesischen Transkription 波夜提 (*payati) entspricht, vorkommt. 25 *Prakīrṇaka-adhyāya-varga? 562 Weiyifa 威儀法 (S. 499~514) bzw. IV Biqiuni bini 比丘尼比尼 (S. 514~548). Diese Teile machen zusammen 49 von insgesamt 322 Seiten, d. h. etwa 15 % der chinesischen Übersetzung aus. Wahrscheinlich wurden diese beiden Sanskrit-Handschriften von ein und demselben Schreiber geschrieben, und bildeten, wie schon vermutet, ursprünglich keine selbstständigen Texte, sondern waren feste Bestandteile des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghika- Lokottaravādins. Es ist zu hoffen, daß Handschriften auch der restlichen Teile dieses Vinaya noch irgendwo in Tibet aufbewahrt liegen. 6. Abweichungen des Textes der Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ von der chinesischen Übersetzung des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas Obwohl die beiden Texte zu verschiedenen Schulen gehören, nämlich der Schule der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins bzw. der Schule der Mahāsāṃghika, stimmen die Abhis. und der Teil Weiyifa 威儀法 der chinesischen Übersetzung des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas insgesamt inhaltlich miteinander überein. Es ist demnach sehr wahrscheinlich, daß beide Texte auf ein gemeinsames Original zurückgehen. Doch gibt es auch Unterschiede. Im Allgemeinen ist der Text der Abhis. ausführlicher als das Weiyifa. Es gibt nicht wenige Fälle, in denen die Übersetzer des Weiyifa Listen von typisch indischen, der chinesischen Kultur fremden Gegenständen abkürzten oder schwierige (möglicherweise auch verderbte) Wörter, die den Übersetzern unverständlich waren, wegließen. In einem Fall (§ 6, S. 56~60) wurde sogar ein ganzer Textabschnitt verkürzt, in dem er mit dem vorangehenden Abschnitt verschmolzen wurde. Allerdings kann man sich kaum vorstellen, daß Faxian, der schon im Alter von zwanzig Jahren als Mönch ordiniert war und den die Lückenhaftigkeit des Vinaya-piṭaka in China bedrückte, im Alter von 64 bis 76 Jahren auf der Suche nach vollständigen Vinaya-Texten durch Indien und Sri Lanka reiste, um anschließend willkürlich die mühsam beschafften Texte selbst zu verkürzen oder Teile des Wortlautes seines Originals einfach wegzulassen. Deswegen ist anzunehmen, daß der Originaltext, der als Vorlage der chinesischen Übersetzung diente, tatsächlich einfacher und kürzer gewesen sein muß als die Abhis. Die auffallendsten Unterschiede zwischen den Abhis. und dem Weiyifa sind die folgenden: (1) Kapitelreihenfolge Wie schon die Forschergruppe an der Taishō Universität gezeigt hat (Abhi[T], I, 9, 12~15, 33), gibt es einige Abweichungen des Weiyifa von den Abhis. in der Reihenfolge der Kapitel und Abschnitte. Die Reihenfolge der Kapitel IV und V ist in beiden Fassungen weitgehend vertauscht. Abhis. IV 1 (§ 31) Weiyifa IV 1 : Der Umgang von Gastmönchen und ansässigen Mönchen miteinander Abhis. IV 2 (§ 32) Weiyifa V 2 : Die Verehrung der Füße und die Erwiderung des Grußes Abhis. IV 3 (§ 33) Weiyifa V 3 : Die Anrede und die angemessene Ausdrucksweise Abhis. IV 4 (§ 34) Weiyifa V 4 : Das Verhalten in einer Versammlung von Kṣatriyas Abhis. IV 5 (§ 35) Weiyifa V 5 : Das Verhalten in einer Versammlung von Brahmanen Abhis. IV 6 (§ 36) Weiyifa V 6 : Das Verhalten in einer Versammlung von Hausherren Abhis. IV 7 (§ 37) Weiyifa V 7 : Das Verhalten in einer Versammlung von 563  Angehörigen anderer Sekten Abhis. IV 8 (§ 38) Weiyifa V 8 : Das Verhalten in einer Versammlung der Edlen Abhis. V 1 (§ 39) Weiyifa V 1 : Über Wohnstätten in der Wildnis und im Dorf Abhis. V 2 (§ 40) Weiyifa IV 4 : Über Trinkwasser und Waschwasser für die Füße Abhis. V 3 (§ 41) Weiyifa IV 2 : Über das Waschen der Füße - Weiyifa IV 3 : Über das Abtrocknen der Füße (s. S. 344) Abhis. V 4 (§ 42) Weiyifa IV 5 : Über das Baden und den Jentāka Abhis. V 5 (§ 43) Weiyifa IV 6 : Über Geschirr und Geräte Abhis. V 6 (§ 44) Weiyifa IV 7 : Über das Mönchsgewand Allerdings stimmt in beiden Texten die Stellung der jeweils ersten Kapitelabschnitte, nämlich IV 1 und V 1, überein. Wahrscheinlich ist das übergeordnete Thema von Kapitel Abhis. IV = Weiyifa V “Das Verhalten der Mönche”, während sich Kapitel Abhis. V = Weiyifa IV dem “täglichen Leben” gewidmet ist. Wenn dies stimmt, ist die Stellung von IV 1 (Der Umgang von Gastmönchen und ansässigen Mönchen miteinander) und V 1 (Über Wohnstätten in der Wildnis und im Dorf) in den Abhis. richtig, aber im Weiyifa vertauscht. Vermutlich wurde die Stellung dieser beiden Abschnitte im Weiyifa im Laufe der Überlieferung umgestellt. Es ist jedoch schwer zu beurteilen, wie die ursprüngliche Reihenfolge der Kapitel IV und V war, und ob die Abhis. oder das Weiyifa den älteren Text bewahrt hat. Weitere Abweichungen betreffen die Reihenfolge der Abschnitte in Kapitel VII Abhis. VII 1 (§ 53) Weiyifa VII 1 : Über die Lampe Abhis. VII 2 (§ 54) Weiyifa VII 2 : Über den Stock Abhis. VII 3 (§ 55) Weiyifa VII 3 : Über den Ball Abhis. VII 4 (§ 56) Weiyifa VII 5 : Über die Matte Abhis. VII 5 (§ 57) Weiyifa VII 4 : Über die Sandalen Abhis. VII 6 (§ 58) Weiyifa VII 6 : Über das Husten Abhis. VII 7 (§ 59) Weiyifa VII 7 : Über das Niesen Abhis. VII 8 (§ 60) Weiyifa VII 9 : Über das Kratzen Abhis. VII 9 (§ 61) Weiyifa VII 8 : Über das Gähnen Abhis. VII 10 (§ 62) Weiyifa VII 10 : Über Blähungen Auch hier ist es nicht möglich, die ursprüngliche Reihenfolge festzulegen. (2) Das Jātaka von Śāriputra In §§ 41.4~10 (S. 325~330) erklärt der Buddha, wie Śāriputra durch sein würdevolles Auftreten bei der Waschung seiner Füße einen Brahmanen beeindruckte. In § 41.11 sagt der Buddha weiter: “Nicht nur heute, sondern auch zu einer anderen Zeit wurde er durch dieses Auftreten und diese Umgangsformen von Śāriputra beeindruckt.” (S. 331). Anschließend, in §§ 41.12~20 (S. 332~337), erzählt er eine lange Geschichte über den Sohn aus einer vornehmen Familie, der ebenfalls durch sein tadelloses Verhalten den Anführer einer Diebesbande beeindruckt. Am Ende der Geschichte spricht eine Gottheit zwei Verse, die die Vorgeburtsgeschichte kurz zusammenfaßt (§ 41.19, S. 336). Nach der Erzählung der Geschichten aus der Vergangenheit und aus der Gegenwart verknüpft der Buddha diese beiden, indem er sagt, daß Śāriputra damals der Sohn aus einer vornehmen Familie, und daß der Brahmane, der Śāriputra beim Füßewaschen beobachtete, in einer früheren Existenz der Anführer eben jener Diebesbande war, die das Haus der vornehmen Familie überfiel 564 (§ 41.21, S. 338). Im Weiyifa fehlt jedoch der ganze Prosateil in der Geschichte von dem Dieben. Im Weiyifa liest man stattdessen: “Es ist ausführlich im Jātaka (shengjing 生經) dargestellt. Der damals der Sohn des vornehmen Mannes war, ist Śāriputra. Der damals der Dieb war, ist heute der Brahmane. Darauf sprachen Gottheiten, die (alles) gesehen hatten, (diese) Verse: ‘Durch Reinheit und gutes Benehmen ...’ ” (§§ 4.12, 19, 21, S. 332, 336, 338). Der Stil dieser stark verkürzten Zusammenfassung der Erzählung im Weiyifa, die nur aus einem ganz kurzen Hinweis auf den Inhalt der Geschichte und aus den Versen besteht, ähnelt dem des sogenannten Merv-Avadānas der Sarvāstivādins26. Den Kern der Pāli-Jātakas bildeten ursprünglich nur die Verse, denen erst später Prosatexte hinzugefügt wurden. Auch waren viele Jātakas27 wie dieses wahrscheinlich in früherer Zeit so bekannt28, daß sich die Mönche als Zuhörer allein durch den Vortrag der Verse an den Inhalt des Jātakas erinnern konnten, ohne daß es ausführlich rezitiert wurde. Vinaya-Texte und Jātakas wurden von spezialisierten Mönchen getrennt mündlich überliefert29. Daher kann man annehmen, daß das Weiyifa eine altertümlichere Form der Geburtsgeschichte von Śāriputra bewahrt hat, während der Zusatz des Prosatextes in den Abhis. eine Weiterentwicklung ist. (3) Abkürzung von § 6 im Weiyifa In den Abhis. beschreiben § 5 und § 6 ausführlich die Regeln hinsichtlich des Verhaltens des Zweitältesten der Gemeinde bzw. der übrigen Mönche im Speisesaal. Diese Beschreibungen sind im Weiyifa stark abgekürzt. So steht etwa in Weiyifa § 5.4 Folgendes: “Von heute an sollen sich alle Mönche versammeln und gemeinsam essen. Der Gemeindeälteste soll (sich verhalten) wie oben dargestellt. Nur ist hier (‘der Gemeindeälteste’) durch ‘den Zweitältesten’ und durch ‘alle (Mönche)’ (S. 52) zu ersetzen.” Und am Ende von § 5 des Weiyifa liest man: “Alle Mönche und der (Zweit)älteste sollen auf diese Weise (das richtige Verhalten) kennen. Wenn (sie es) nicht so (kennen), übertreten sie die Regeln für das richtige Verhalten.” Auf diese Weise ist im Weiyifa § 6 (S. 56~60) mit § 5 verschmolzen und der Text dadurch sehr stark abgekürzt. (4) dakṣiṇā für einen Abreisenden In § 4.19 (S. 40) der Abhis. sagt der Buddha: “Beim Essen eines Abreisenden ... ist das religiöse Verdienst (dakṣiṇā) beginnend mit: ‘(Alle) Himmelsrichtungen sind segensbringend’ ausführlich wie in dem Abschnitt über die Almosenschale (yathā Pātrapratisaṃyukte) zuzuweisen.” Dieser Hinweis auf eine Textstelle im Vinaya deutet 26 Vgl. Gregory M. Bongard-Levin, M. I. Vorob’ëva-Desjatovskaja and E.N.Tyomkin, Pamjatniki Indijskoj Pis’mennosti iz Tsentral’noj Azii, Vypusk 3, Moskva (Pamjatniki Pis’mennosti Vostoka LXXIII, 3; Bibliotheca Buddhica 40), S. 308ff. 27 Wie Sugimoto (1993: 23f.) und von Hinüber (IIJ 51 [2008], S. 88) klar gesehen haben, ist die übliche Definition, daß Jātakas Geburtsgeschichten des Buddha, aber Avadānas von anderen sind, nicht richtig. Denn es gibt Ausnahmen, die dieser Einteilung widersprechen. Auch diese Geburtsgeschichte von Śāriputra kann im Weiyifa richtig als Jātaka bezeichnet worden sein, wie das Wort shengjing 生經 (wörtl. “Sutra von der Geburt”) nahelegt, obwohl es sich bei der Erzählung eindeutig nicht um eine Geschichte aus einem früheren Leben des Buddha selbst handelt. 28 Eine ähnliche Geschichte kommt in MūKṣud(Ch) 277c4~26 vor. 29 Vgl. z. B. Mil. 341.27f. venayikā ... jātakabhāṇakā (“Kenner des Vinaya ... Rezitatoren des Jātaka”). 565 darauf hin, daß die Abhis. ursprünglich kein selbstständiger Text sondern ein fester Teil des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins waren. Im Weiyifa wird die ziemlich lange dakṣiṇā für einen abreisenden Spender30 ausführlich zitiert (S. 40~43). In dem Abschnitt über die Almosenschale (Pātra-pratisaṃyukta) in der chinesischen Übersetzung des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas hingegen findet man den entsprechenden abgekürzten Satz guangshuo zhuyuan 廣説呪願 (“Die Segenssprüche [sollen] ausführlich gesprochen werden.”) (MaVin 461b29). Folglich muß diese lange Zuweisung der dakṣiṇā im Pātra-pratisaṃyukta des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins, der verloren ist, ausführlich zitiert worden sein, während sie in den Abhis. nur abgekürzt erscheint. Umgekehrt steht dieselbe lange Zuweisung der dakṣiṇā im Pātra-pratisaṃyukta des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas nur in verkürzter Form, während sie im Weiyifa ausführlich zitiert ist. (5) Die Rechtshandlung zur Ernennung des śayyāsanaprajñāpaka Wie die Rechtshandlung zur Ernennung des śayyāsanaprajñāpaka (d. h. des Mönches, der das Śayyāsana zuweist) durchgeführt wird, ist das Thema von § 12.9 (S. 98). Während im Weiyifa der Ablauf der Rechtshandlung in allen Einzelheiten beschrieben wird, verweisen die Abhis. ohne ausführliche Beschreibung mit peyālaṃ auf eine andere Stelle. In dem entsprechenden Abschnitt über das Bettzeug (*Śayyāsana-pratisaṃyukta) in der chinesischen Übersetzung des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas findet sich eine ausführliche Beschreibung dieser Rechtshandlung (MaVin 445b12~21). Vermutlich gab es auch im *Śayyāsana- pratisaṃyukta des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins eine entsprechende längere Beschreibung. Der Ausdruck peyālaṃ in den Abhis. weist also ebenfalls darauf hin, daß die Abhis. ursprünglich kein völlig eigenständiger Text war, sondern in einer sehr engen Beziehung zum Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādins stand. (6) Ein Sondertext im Weiyifa “Auf diese Weise soll man sich die Füße waschen. Auf diese Weise soll man hinsichtlich gewaschener Füße verfahren.”, so spricht der Buddha in § 41.3 (S. 324) und § 41.33 (S. 344) der Abhis. Jedoch beschreibt der Abschnitt § 41 beinahe ausschließlich, wie man sich die Füße waschen soll, und verrät nichts über den Umgang mit gewaschenen Füßen. Im Weiyifa hingegen folgt nach § 41 ein zusätzlicher Abschnitt, nämlich “Über das Abtrocknen der Füße”, der im Text der Abhis. fehlt. Hier wird beschrieben, wie man, nachdem man sich mit Wasser die Füße gewaschen hat, sie abtrocknet, danach die Sandalen anzieht usw. (s. S. 344). Diese Beschreibung paßt gut zu der Aussage in den Abhis.: “Auf diese Weise soll man hinsichtlich gewaschener Füße verfahren.” Vermutlich ist dieser nur im Weiyifa enthaltene Abschnitt im Laufe der Überlieferung der Abhis. verloren gegangen. (7) Die Reihenfolge der Paragraphen innerhalb eines Abschnitts Die Reihenfolge der Paragraphen innerhalb eines Abschnitts in den Abhis. weicht oft von der im Weiyifa ab. Deshalb ist in diesem Buch die Reihenfolge der Paragraphen im Weiyifa so umgestellt, daß sie derjenigen der Abhis. entspricht. 30 Diese dakṣiṇā kommt auch in Mvu III 305.10~310.6 und in LV 387.12~391.18 vor. 566  Anhang II Die chinesische Übersetzung des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas 1. Die Herkunft der chinesischen Übersetzung des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas31 In seinem Bericht über seine Reise nach Indien schildert Faxian (法顯 337~422), wie er die Handschrift des Vinaya in Pāṭaliputra sah und kopierte: Von jenem Reich Vārāṇasī ging er nach Osten zurück bis Pāṭaliputra. Faxian wollte eigentlich die Vinaya(-Schriften) suchen, aber in den Ländern Nordindiens geschieht die Tradierung mündlich von Meister zu Meister, und man findet [daher] keine Vorlagen, um sie abzuschreiben. Deshalb ging er so weit, bis er nach Mittelindien (Madhyadeśa) kam; dort bekam er in einem Mahāyāna-saṅghārāma einen Vinaya. Das war der Vinaya der Mahāsāṅghika. Denn als der Buddha noch in der Welt weilte, befolgte der ganze Saṅgha zu Anfang [diesen Vinaya]. Die Vorlage wurde vom Jetavana-Kloster aus weitertradiert. Die insgesamt achtzehn Schulen haben ihre eigene Überlieferung. Im allgemeinen sind die Überlieferungen nicht verschieden sondern weichen nur in Kleinigkeiten von einander ab, oder unterscheiden sich in ihrem Umfang. Aber dieser (d. h. der Vinaya der Mahāsāṅghika) ist am ausführlichsten und vollständig. Weiterhin erwarb er eine Kopie eines Vinaya, der etwa siebentausend Verse (jie 偈: gāthā) umfasste: das ist der Vinaya der Sarvāsti[vādin], der in China vom Saṅgha befolgt wird. [Dieser wurde] auch von Meister zu Meister mündlich tradiert [und] nicht mit (Schrift-)Zeichen niedergeschrieben. Weiterhin gibt es in dieser Gemeinde (in dem Mahāyāna- saṅghārāma?) ein Saṃyukta-abhidharma-hṛdaya(śāstra), das etwa sechstausend Verse umfaßt. Er erwarb ein Sūtra, das zweitausendfünfhundert Verse umfaßt, das Vaitulya-Parinirvāṇa-sūtra (d. h. Mahāparinirvāṇa-sūtra der Mahāyāna-Anhänger), das etwa fünftausend Verse umfaßt, und er erwarb das Abhidharma[piṭaka] der Mahāsāṅghika. Deshalb blieb Faxian dort drei Jahre [und] lernte die Brahma-Schrift und Brahma-Sprache und schrieb den Vinaya [ab].32 (auf der Grundlage von Deeg 2005: 561~562). Faxian erreichte Pāṭaliputra im Jahre 405 n. Chr. und blieb dort drei Jahre. Nach China zurückgekehrt, übersetzte er zusammen mit dem aus Nordindien stammenden Buddhabhadra (359~429) den Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas ins Chinesische. Im Nachwort zu dieser Übersetzung (T. 22, Nr. 1425, 548a29~b25) gibt er den folgenden Bericht an33: 31 Vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L), S. If. 32 T. 51, Nr. 2085, 864b16~23. 從彼波羅㮏國東行還到巴連弗邑。法顯本求戒律。而北天竺諸國 皆師師口傳無本可寫。是以遠渉乃至中天竺。於此摩訶衍僧伽藍得一部律。是摩訶僧祇衆律。 佛在世時最初大衆所行也。於祇洹精舍傳其本。自餘十八部各有師資。大歸不異。然小小不 同。或用開塞。但此最是廣説備悉者。復得一部抄律可七千偈。是薩婆多衆律。即此秦地衆僧 所行者也。亦皆師師口相傳授，不書之於文字。復於此衆中得《雜阿毘曇心》可六千偈。又得 一部經二千五百偈。又得一卷《方等般泥洹經》可五千偈。又得摩訶僧祇阿毘曇。故法顯住此 三年，學梵書、梵語，寫律。 33 Vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L), S. II. 567  Einst herrschte in Mittelindien für kurze Zeit ein schlechter König. Die Śramaṇas flohen in alle vier Himmelsrichtungen, um sich ihm zu entziehen, und die Mönche, die den “Dreikorb” (beherrschten), wurden überallhin zerstreut. Als der schlechte König starb, kam erneut ein guter König an die Regierung. Er bat die Śramaṇas, ins Land zurückzukehren, und verehrte sie. Nun wohnten in der Stadt Pāṭaliputra fünfhundert Mönche und wollten eine Entscheidung treffen (duanshi 斷事; viniścaya), aber es gab keinen Vinaya-Kenner (d. h. Vinayadhara), keine Vinaya-Schriften und auch keine überlieferten Präzedenz- fälle. Daraufhin schickten sie jemanden zum Jetavana-Kloster. Man kopierte (dort) einen Vinaya-Text, der bis heute überliefert ist. Faxian (d. h. ich) kopierte diesen Sanskrit-Text im Devarāja-Kloster (tianwang jingshe 天王精舍), südlich vom Stūpa des Königs Aśoka in der Stadt Pāṭaliputra im Lande Magadha. Nach Yangzhou (楊 州) (in China) zurückgekehrt, begann ich im 11. Monat im 12. Jahres der (Ära) Yixi (義熙) der Jin (-Dynastie) in dem Jahr Bingchen (des sechzigjährigen Zyklus; d. h. 416 n. Chr.) im Douchang Kloster (鬪場寺)34, ihn (ins Chinesische) zu übersetzen, und wurde (damit) Ende des 2. Monats im 14. Jahr (d. h. 418 n. Chr.) fertig. Ich übersetzte den Sanskrit-Text zusammen mit dem Chan-Meister (chanshi 禪師) (d. h. Buddhabhadra) ins Chinesische. Ich schreibe dies ausdrücklich (gu 故) nieder.35 ... Dieser Kolophon, der weiter über die Tradition der Lehre Buddhas und die Entstehung der verschiedenen Schulen berichtet36, ist m. E. wirklich von Faxian geschrieben worden –– insbesondere der Ausdruck gu jizhi 故記之 (“Ich schreibe dies ausdrücklich nieder”) bestätigt die Authentizität. Dieses Nachwort, das auch in Sengyous 僧祐 Chusanzangji Ji 出 三藏記集 (Sammlung von Schriftstücken mit Bezug auf die Übersetzung des Tripiṭaka; Anfang 6. Jh.) in einer modifizierten Form aufgenommen wurde (T. 55, Nr. 2145, 20c25~21a10), ist sehr wichtig für die Erforschung der Geschichte des Buddhismus, vor allem der Beziehung zwischen der Schule der Mahāsāṃghikas und dem Mahāyāna. Die Mitteilung, daß die Originalhandschrift des Vinaya tatsächlich im Jetavana-Kloster überliefert wurde, wird auch durch die folgende Notiz Faxians am Ende des vierten Kapitels der Erläuterungen zu den Pācattikā-Regeln in seiner Übersetzung dieses Vinaya bestätigt. 34 Douchang-si 鬪場寺 ist identisch mit dem berühmten Kloster Daochang-si 道場寺; vgl. Deeg 2005: 26. Douchang-si 鬪場寺 in diesem Kolophon ist in der modifizierten Kopie im Chusanzangji Ji (出三藏記集; Sammlung von Schriftstücken mit Bezug auf die Übersetzung des Tripiṭaka) zu Daochang-si 道場寺 geändert (T. 55, Nr. 2145, 21a9). 35 摩訶僧祇律私記: 中天竺昔時，暫有惡王御世。諸沙門避之四奔。三藏比丘星離。惡王既 死，更有善王。還請諸沙門還國，供養。時巴連弗邑有五百僧，欲斷事，而無律師，又無律 文，無所承案。即遣人到祇洹精舍。寫得律本于今傳賞。法顯於摩竭提國巴連弗邑阿育王塔南 天王精舍寫得梵(v.l. 胡)本。還楊州，以晉(v.l. -)義熙十二年歳在丙辰十一(v.l. 十)月，於鬪場寺 出之。至十四年二月末都訖。共禪師譯梵(v.l. 胡)本(v.l. -)爲秦焉。故記之。Einige Editionen lesen hu 胡 anstelle von fan 梵. Dieser Wechsel findet sich überall in buddhistischen Texten, und die Interpretation, daß fan 梵 Brāhmī bedeutet, während hu 胡 Kharoṣṭhī bedeutet, ist nicht zutreffend. Hu 胡 bedeutet “Menschen oder Dinge aus den Nord- und Westländern (vom klassischen China aus gesehen), einschließlich Indien”. In der Tang-Zeit bezeichnete hu 胡 fast ausschließlich Sogdien und Sogdisch. In chinesischen buddhistischen Texten bedeutet fan 梵 wahrscheinlich “Sanskrit” oder “klassisch indisch”, während hu 胡 allgemeiner “indisch” (auch “zentralasiatisch”) bedeutet. Folglich bezeichnen fanyu 梵語 und huyu 胡語 “Sanskrit” bzw. “indische Sprache”, und fanben 梵本 und huben 胡本 bedeuten “Text in Sanskrit” bzw. “indischer Text”. Es gibt also einen kleinen, aber keinen wesentlichen Unterschied zwischen den zwei Ausdrucksweisen. 36 Vgl. BhiVin(Ma-L), S. II. 568 Dort endet die Zusammenfassung (uddāna) mit dem Satz “Das letzte ist (die Erläuterung zum 40. pācattika, nämlich) Gruppenmahlzeit (gaṇabhojana)”37. Trotzdem gibt es keine Erläuterung zu dieser Pācattika-Regel in der chinesischen Übersetzung. Stattdessen ist eine in kleinen Zeichen geschriebene Notiz eingefügt: “Der Sanskrit-Text im Jetavana-Kloster war von Insekten (oder kleinen Tieren) angefressen. (Deswegen) fehlt die Regel über die Gruppenmahlzeit.”38 Dieser Vermerk stammt möglicherweise von Faxian selbst. Über dieses Mahāyāna-Kloster und Anhänger des Mahāyāna in Pāṭaliputra berichtet Faxian weiterhin Folgendes: Ein Brahmanen, der ein Mahāyāna-Anhänger ist und Lâ tâ si buâ mi (羅汰私 婆迷; ...svāmī?) heißt, wohnt in diesem Stadt. Er ist scharfsinnig, sehr gelehrt, und es gibt nichts, was er nicht erfaßt, und er lebt in Reinheit. Der König verehrt ihn als Lehrer. Wenn er zu (ihm) geht, um ihn begrüßen, wagt (der König) nicht neben ihm sitzen. Wenn ihm der König aus Zuneigung und Verehrung die Hand berührt, wäscht der Brahmane sofort die (vom König) berührte Hand. Er ist etwa fünfzig Jahre alt. Im Lande respektieren ihn alle. Dank der Verbreitung der Lehre Buddhas durch diesen einen einzigen Mann, können Häretiker den Saṅgha nicht angreifen. Neben dem Aśoka-stūpa hat man den Mahāyāna-saṅghārāma errichtet, der sehr prachtvoll ist. Es gibt (dort) auch ein Hīnayāna-Kloster. Insgesamt sind (dort) sechs- bis siebenhundert Mönche von untadeligem Lebenswandel. Äußerst tugendhafte Śramaṇas und Gelehrte kommen von überall in dieses Kloster auf der Suche nach dem Sinn (der Lehre). Der Meister des (oben erwähnten) Brahmanen trägt den Namen des Mañjuśrī. Die äußerst tugendhafte Śramaṇas und alle Mönche im Reich, die dem Mahāyāna anhängen, verehren (ihn). Auch wohnt er in diesem Saṅghārāma. In den Ländern in Mittelindien (Madhyadeśa) ist diese (Haupt-)Stadt des Landes ist am größten. Die Leute sind sehr reich und wetteifern miteinander in Wohltätigkeit und Gerechtigkeit. Jedes Jahr am 8. des 2. Monats findet eine Prozession mit (Buddha-)Bildern statt. Man stellt Wagen mit vier Rädern her, setzt fünf Stockwerke aus Bambusgeflecht darauf. ... Das sieht aus wie ein stūpa. ... An allen vier Seiten werden Nischen gebildet, in denen von stehenden Bodhisattvas begleitete Buddhas sitzen. Es gibt etwa zwanzig Wagen. ... Der (oben erwähnte) Brahmane kommt und lädt die Buddhas (d.h. Buddha-Bilder) ein. (Die Wagen) mit den Buddhas kommen einer nach dem anderen in die Stadt hinein. Nachdem sie hineingekommen sind, übernachten sie zwei Nächte in der Stadt. Die ganze Nacht über verehrt man sie mit brennenden Lampen, Tanz und Musik. (auf der Grundlage von Deeg 2005: 548f.)39 37 T. 22, Nr. 1425, 362b23. 別衆食在後. In den anderen Vinayas gibt es natürlich eine Erläuterung zu dieser Regel, z. B. Vin IV 71~75. 38 T. 22, Nr. 1425, 362b24. 祇洹精舍中梵(v.l. 胡)本蟲噉，脱無此別衆食戒. 39 T. 51, Nr. 2085, 862b2~12: 有一大乘婆羅門子名羅汰私<婆>迷，住此城裏。爽悟多智，事無 不達。以清浄自居。國王宗敬師事，若往問訊，不敢並坐。王設以愛敬心執手，執手已，婆羅 門輒自灌洗。年可五十餘，擧國瞻仰。頼此一人弘宣佛法，外道不能得加陵衆僧。於阿育王塔 邊造摩訶衍僧伽藍，甚嚴麗。亦有小乘寺，都合六七百僧衆，威儀庠序可觀，四方高徳沙門及 學問人，欲求義理皆詣此寺。婆羅門子師亦名文殊師利，國内大徳沙門、諸大乘比丘皆宗仰 焉，亦住此僧伽藍。凡諸中國唯此國城邑為大。民人富盛競行仁義。年年常以建卯月八日行 像。作四輪車縛竹作五層。…其狀如塔。…皆有坐佛菩薩立侍。可有二十車。…婆羅門子 ↘  569 Es ist sehr bezeichnend, daß Faxian die Handschrift des Mahāsāṃghika-Vinaya in einem Mahāyāna-Kloster namens Devarāja-Kloster, in dem Mahāyāna-Mönche wohnten, kopierte. Wie oben gesagt, wurde diese Vinaya-Handschrift aus Jetavana nur deshalb nach Pāṭaliputra mitgebracht, um damit Entscheidungen (viniścaya) der Gemeinde zu begründen, jedoch nicht, um sie nur in der Klosterbibliothek aufzubewahren. Aus all dem kann man schließen, daß die Mahāyāna-Mönche in diesem Kloster zugleich zur Mahāsāṃghika-Schule gehörten, und daß das erwähnte Devarāja-Kloster also ein Mahāsāṃghika- und gleichzeitig ein Mahāyāna-Kloster war. Vermutlich waren auch andere Mahāyāna-Mönche in diesem Reich, die den Meister Mañjuśrī verehrten, Mahāsāṃghikas. Da Faxian an der oben zitierten Stelle im Gegensatz zu diesem Mahāyāna-saṅghārāma ein Hīnayāna-Kloster erwähnt, muß dieses einer anderen Schule als der der Mahāsāṃghikas angehört haben. In seinem Reisebericht schreibt Faxian, daß er in Pāṭaliputra auch einen mündlich überlieferten Text des Vinaya der Sarvāstivādins, der siebentausend Verse umfaßte (d.h. vermutlich in der Länge entsprechend etwa sieben Achteln der Aṣṭasāhasrikā-Prajñāpāramitā), vorfand, von dem er eine schriftliche Fassung erwerben konnte. Man könnte aber auch vermuten, daß Faxian in eben diesem Hīnayāna-Kloster den mündlich überlieferten Vinaya-Text der Sarvāstivādins selbst aufgeschrieben hat. Weiterhin kann man vermuten, daß das Kloster den Sarvāstivādins gehörte. 2. Mahāsāṃghikas und Anhänger des Mahāyāna Das Devarāja-Kloster in Pāṭaliputra wird auch im Nachwort zu Faxians Übersetzung des Mahāparinirvāṇa-sūtra des Mahāyāna erwähnt. Wie Faxian in seinem Reisebericht schreibt, hatte er in Pāṭaliputra ebenfalls eine Handschrift dieses Sutras erworben. Leider ist das ursprüngliche Nachwort dazu nicht überliefert. Allerdings ist es in dem oben angeführten Chusanzangji Ji (Sammlung von Schriftstücken mit Bezug auf die Übersetzung des Tripiṭaka) von Sengyou erhalten, jedoch ist zu vermuten, daß das Zitat von Sengyou selbst stark überarbeitet wurde, wie im Falle des oben zitierten Nachwortes zum Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas. Das erhaltene Nachwort lautet wie folgt: Nr. 18: Bericht über das (Mahā-)Parinirvāṇa-(sūtra), zitiert aus dem Nachwort zum Sūtra Als ein upāsaka (Laienanhänger) (namens) Gja-lâ-sien (伽羅先) aus dem Umkreis des Devarāja-Klosters (tianwang jingshe 天王精舍) am Stūpa des Königs Aśoka in der Stadt Pāṭaliputra im Land Magadha den Mönch Faxian (d. h. mich) aus China, der auf der Suche nach dem Dharma von weither in dieses Land gereist war, traf, war er tief gerührt, und kopierte daraufhin dieses “Große Parinirvāṇa-sūtra, den geheimen Schatz des Tathāgata” für (mich). Er wünschte, daß sich dieses Sūtra in China verbreiten möge, und daß alle Lebewesen ein und denselben Dharma-Körper des Tathāgata erlangen mögen. Am 1. (Tag) des 10. Monats des 13. Jahres der (Ära) Yixi (義熙) (d. h. 417 n. Chr.), begannen (wir) im Daochang Kloster (道場寺), das vom Minister für das Bauwesen (sikong 司空) Xie Shi (謝石; 327~388) gegründet worden war, dieses Vaitulya-Mahāparinirvāṇa-sūtra zu übersetzen und schlossen die Revision (des Textes) am 2. Tag des 1. Monats des 14. Jahres der (Ära) Yixi ab. (An diesem Tag) nahm Chan-Meister Buddhabhadra den indischen Text in die Hand, und ↖ 来請佛。佛次第入城。入城内再宿。通夜然燈伎樂供養。 570  Baoyun 寶雲 übersetzte (den von Buddhabhadra rezitierten Tetxt). Zu dieser Zeit saßen zweihundertfünfzig Leute (dort).40 Dieser Kolophon ist sehr wichtig für die Erforschung des Ursprungs und der Überlieferung des genannten Mahāyāna-Textes. Es ist besonders interessant und bedeutsam zugleich, daß gerade ein Laienanhänger des Mahāsāṃghika- und gleichzeitig des Mahāyāna- Klosters die Handschrift des Textes für Faxian kopierte. Obwohl der Kolophon nichts darüber sagt, wo die Handschrift aufbewahrt war, weist m. E. allein die Tatsache, daß nicht ein Mönch sondern ein Laienanhänger diesen inhaltlich radikalen und gegen die Autoritäten gerichteten41 Text kopierte, daraufhin, daß die Handschrift nicht in einem Kloster aufbewahrt wurde. Diese Annahme wird durch einen anderen Reisebericht von Zhimeng 智猛 (~454) unterstützt. Seiner Biographie zufolge reiste dieser chinesische Mönch im Jahre 404 n. Chr. von Chang-an 長安 ab, besuchte Kaschmir, Magadha, Kapilavastu und sogar Südindien, und trat 424 den Heimweg an. Um 433 erreichte er Dunhuang und noch im selben Jahr übersetzte er in Liangzhou 涼州 dasselbe Mahāparinirvāṇa-sūtra ins Chinesische.42 Er verfaßte einen Reisebericht, namens Youxing Waiguo zhuan 遊行外國傳, der verloren ist, aber sehr bekannt gewesen sein muß, weil der Titel sogar im Literaturkatalog der offiziellen Geschichte der Sui-Dynastie, Suishu Jingjizhi (隋書經籍志, 636 n.Chr.), erwähnt wird. Leider ist auch Zhimengs Übersetzung des Textes, die 20 juan 巻 umfaßte, verloren, aber glücklicherweise wird der Teil seines Reiseberichtes, in dem von der Handschrift des Textes die Rede ist, in dem Sengyous Chusanzangji Ji (Sammlung von Schriftstücken mit Bezug auf die Übersetzung des Tripiṭaka) zitiert: Nr. 19: Bericht über das (Mahā-)Parinirvāṇa-(sūtra) in 20 juan, zitiert aus Zhimengs Bericht über (seine) Reise in fremden Ländern (You waiguo zhuan) In Zhimengs Biographie heißt es: Im Lande Vaiśālī werden Mahāyāna und Hīnayāna auf unterschiedliche Weise studiert. Von der Stadt Dili (帝利?) kam (ich) in der Stadt Pāṭaliputra an. (Dort) lebte ein Brahmane, dessen Verwandtschaft sehr zahlreich war. Er war von Natur aus sehr scharfsinnig, hing dem Mahāyāna an, war sehr belesen in (Mahāyāna-?)Texten und war in allem bewandert. In seinem Haus gab es einen Stūpa aus Silber, der 8 chi lang, 8 chi breit und 3 zhang hoch war (d. h. ca. 2,6 × 2,6 × 10 m). In den Nischen der vier Seiten standen Silberstatuen, die über 3 chi (d. h. ca. 1 m) hoch waren. Er besaß viele (Handschriften von) Mahāyāna-sūtras und brachte ihnen auf mannigfaltige Weise Verehrung dar. Der Brahmane fragte Zhimeng, woher er komme. Dieser antwortete, daß er aus China komme. (Der Brahmane) fragte weiter, ob in China das Mahāyāna studiert würde. Darauf antwortete (Zhimeng): “(Dort) wird nur das Mahāyāna studiert.” Darüber war (der Brahmane) erstaunt und sagte in der tiefsten Bewunderung: “Wunderbar! Bedeutet das nicht, daß Bodhisattvas dorthin gegangen sind und (die Menschen) bekehrt haben?” Zhimeng bekam dann eine indische Handschrift des (Mahā-)Parinirvāṇa- 40 T. 55, Nr. 2145, 60b2~11.「六卷泥洹記」第十八 出經後記：摩竭提國，巴連弗邑，阿育王 塔，天王精舍，優婆塞伽羅先見晉土道人釋法顯遠遊此土，爲求法故，深感其人。即爲寫此 《大般泥洹經如來祕藏》，願令此經流布晉土，一切衆生悉成平等如來法身。義熙十三年十月 一日，於謝司空石所立道場寺，出此《方等大般泥洹經》。至十四年正月7二日挍定盡訖。禪 師佛大跋陀手執胡(v.l. 梵)本，寶雲傳譯。于時坐有二百五十人。 41 Vgl. Karashima 2007a, bes. S. 76f. 42 Vgl. T. 55, Nr. 2145, 113b3~c14. 571  (sūtra) in diesem Haus. (Nach China) zurückgekehrt, übersetzte er (das Sutra) in 20 juan 巻 in Liangzhou 涼州.43 Der oben zitierte Bericht von Faxian und der Reisebericht von Zhimeng selbst wurden in Zhimengs Biographie zusammengefügt. Dieser Biographie zufolge hätte auch Faxian seine Handschrift des Mahāparinirvāṇa-sūtra im Haus desselben Brahmanen bekommen, und Zhimeng zusätzlich eben dort auch eine Handschrift des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas erworben.44 Diese Mitteilungen erscheinen nicht ganz glaubwürdig. Wenn man allerdings bedenkt, daß Zhimeng Pāṭaliputra nur etwa zehn Jahre später als Faxian besuchte, ist es durchaus nicht unmöglich, daß der Laienanhänger, der Faxian die Handschrift gab, dieser Brahmane selbst oder einer seiner Verwandten war. Das Devarāja-Kloster in Pāṭaliputra ist auch in einem Vinaya-Text der Mahāsāṃghikas, dem Shelifu wen jing 舍利弗問經 (*Śāriputra-paripṛcchā; T. 24, Nr. 1465), erwähnt. In diesem Text erzählt der Buddha Śāriputra Folgendes: “Ein gewisser Sohn eines vornehmen Mannes namens *Puṇyatara, der in seinen früheren Leben gute Taten angesammelt hatte und in einer Brahmanen-Familie wiedergeboren worden war, wollte sein Haus verlassen und sich auf den höchsten (Buddha-)Pfad begeben. Er folgte Mahāmaudgalyāyaṇa und bat ihn um Ordination als Mönch im Devarāja-Kloster (tianwang jingshe 天王精舍) in Pāṭaliputra.” Funayama45 hat diesen Text gründlich untersucht und vermutet, daß dieser Vinaya-Text keine reine Übersetzung aus einem indischen Original, sondern ein in China und zwar erst in der Zeit nach Faxian bearbeiteter Text sei, weil der Ausdruck “Devarāja-Kloster” aus dem oben zitierten Kolophon Faxians übernommen worden sei. Funayama stellt auch die Authentizität des Textes als Vinaya-Text der Mahāsāṃghikas in Frage, weil der Bodhisattva Mañjuśrī am Ende des Textes erwähnt wird und der Ausdruck zhufo 諸佛 (viele [gleichzeitig lebende] Buddhas) vorkommt, was beides auf das Mahāyāna deutet. Das in der Buddhismusforschung übliche stereotype Denkmuster einer strengen Trennung von Hīnayāna-Schule(n) und Mahāyāna entspricht jedoch nicht der Wirklichkeit. Was uns die oben zitierten Berichte und Kolophone zeigen, ist vielmehr eine Symbiose von Mahāsāṃghikas und Anhängern des Mahāyāna (zumindest) in Pāṭaliputra. Dies illustriert deutlich der Fall des Meisters Mañjuśrī, der im Devarāja-Kloster, dessen Mönche Mahāsāṃghikas waren, wohnte, aber trotzdem auch von allen Mahāyāna-Mönchen im Land verehrt wurde. Zugleich kopierte ein Laienanhänger desselben Klosters eine Handschrift des Mahāparinirvāṇa-sūtra des Mahāyāna für Faxian. Eine solche Symbiose kann leicht zu einer engen Verbindung geführt haben, wie sie sich in der oben erwähnten *Śāriputra-paripṛcchā zeigt46. 43 T. 55, Nr. 2145, 60b12~22. 「二十卷泥洹記」 第十九 出智猛《遊外國傳》 《智猛傳》 云: 毘耶離國有大小乘學不同。帝利城次華氏邑。有婆羅門，氏族甚多。其禀性敏悟，歸心大 乘，博攬衆典，無不通達。家有銀塔，縱廣八尺，高三丈，四龕銀像高三尺餘。多有大乘經， 種種供養。婆羅門問猛言： 從何來？ 答言： 秦地來。 又問： 秦地有大乘學不？ 即答： 皆大乘學。 其乃驚愕，雅歎云： 希有。將非菩薩往化耶？ 智猛即就其家得泥 洹胡(v.l. 梵)本，還於涼州出得二十卷。Vgl. Deeg 2006: 119. 44 T. 55, Nr. 2145, 113c6, 9; T. 50, Nr. 2059, 343c2. Diese Biographie wurde in die späteren Kataloge des buddhistischen Kanons aufgenommen: T. 55, Nr. 2154. 521c27f., 522a2f.; T. 55, Nr. 2157, 818c7f., 10f. 45 Funayama 2007: 97f. 46 Auch eine Biographie des Verfassers der *Satyasiddhiśāstra (成實論; T. 1646), Harivarman (ca. 250~350? n. Chr.), die von Xuanchang (玄暢; 416~484) aus Jiangling (江陵) verfaßt wurde und in ↘ 572  Eine derartige Symbiose gab es vermutlich nicht nur in Pāṭaliputra sondern auch an anderen Orten, wie die Schøyen-Sammlung veranschaulicht. Diese Sammlung enthält viele Fragmente buddhistischer Manuskripte in Sanskrit und in Gāndhārī, darunter neben verschiedenen Mahāyāna-Texten, wie z. B. Saddharmapuṇḍarīka-sūtra, Aṣṭasāhasrikā- prajñāpāramitā, Samādhirāja-sūtra, auch viele Fragmente des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghika- (Lokottaravādin)s47. Diese Fragmente stammen aus Bamiyan, wo es Xuanzangs Reisebericht zufolge Dutzende Klöster gab, in denen mehrere Tausend Mönche der (Mahāsāṃghika-) Lokottaravādins lebten48. Ein Mönch mußte und muß sich nach der Ordination den Regeln der jeweiligen Vinaya- Tradition wie Theravādin, Sarvāstivādin, Mūlasarvāstivādin, Mahīśasaka, Mahāsāṃghika, Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādin oder Dharmaguptaka unterordnen und an der Prātimokṣa- Rezitation an jedem Voll- und Neumondfeiertag (uposatha, poṣadha, posaṭha) teilnehmen. Deshalb gab es prinzipiell im ordensrechtlichen Sinne keinen Mahāyāna-“Mönch”. Denn jeder Mönch folgt einer Vinaya-Tradition, konnte also nach dem Vinaya Mahāsāṃghika ordiniert sein, aber trotzdem dem Mahāyāna anhängen. Mahāyāna-Texte, wie das Saddharmapuṇḍarīka-sūtra, die Aṣṭasāhasrikā-prajñāpāramitā, das Samādhirāja-sūtra usw., kritisieren offensichtlich die Theorien der Pudgalavādins und Sarvāstivādins49. Die Autoren oder Verfasser dieser Sutras müssen deshalb, sofern sie Mönche waren, auch nach Vinaya- Traditionen ordiniert worden sein und an der Prātimokṣa-Rezitation teilgenommen haben. Faxian berichtet, daß der hoch verehrte Mahāyāna-Meister Mañjuśrī im Mahāsāṃghika- Kloster wohnte, d. h. der Meister unterwarf sich der Tradition der Mahāsāṃghikas und nahm an der Rezitation des Prātimokṣa dieser Schule teil. Vermutlich gab es Klöster der Mahāsāṃghika-Schule, die Mahāyāna-Mönche aufnahmen, die nicht nach dem Ideal eines Arhat sondern nach der Weisheit eines Buddha (buddhajñāna) strebten. Vermutlich gab es auch Klöster dieser Schule, in denen Mahāyāna-Anhänger, als Mönche oder Laien, anwesend waren. Dies könnte der Grund sein, warum das Devarāja-Kloster dieser Schule wohl auch Mahāyāna-saṅghārāma genannt wurde. 3. Devarāja = Chandragupta II? Xuanzang besuchte Pāṭaliputra im Jahre 630, also etwa zweihundert Jahre später als Faxian und Zhimeng, und er beschreibt in seinem Reisebericht sehr ausführlich den Aśoka- stūpa und die Klöster in seiner Umgebung. Ein Devarāja-Kloster oder etwas Entsprechendes kommt nicht vor.50 Möglichlicherweise war das Kloster inzwischen bereits verlassen. Als ↖ in Sengyous Chusanzangji Ji zitiert ist, weist auf eine mögliche Verbindung der Mahāsāṃghikas mit Mahāyāna in Pāṭaliputra hin: “Zu der Zeit (von Harivarman) gab es eine Gemeinde von (Mahā-) Sāṃghikas, die in Pāṭaliputra wohnte und auch (der Lehre des) Mahāyāna folgte, indem sie meinte, daß diese (d.h. die Lehre des Mahāyāna) die Grundlage für die fünf Nikāyas (Schulen) sei.” (T. 55, Nr. 2145, 79a12f. 時有僧祇部僧，住巴連弗邑，並遵奉大乘，云是五部之本). 47 Diese Fragmente sind zum Teil ediert und veröffentlicht in BMSC I~III. Auch eine nicht vollständige Handschrift vom Prātimokṣasūtra der Mahāsāṃghika-(Lokottaravādin)s ist in Bamiyan gefunden. Bislang habe ich selbst etwa eine Hälfte der Handschrift untersucht und veröffentlicht (Karashima 2008a), aber die Veröffentlichung des restlichen Teils ist nun auch in Vorbereitung. 48 T. 51, Nr. 2087, 873b4f. 梵衍那國 伽藍數十所，僧徒數千人，宗學小乘説出世部. 49 Ich habe z. Zt einen Aufsatz darüber in Vorbereitung. 50 T. 51, Nr. 2087, 911b14f. 573 Faxian in Pāṭaliputra weilte (406~409), beherrschte Chandragupta II (reg. 376~41551) Mittelindien. Damals war Pāṭaliputra –– Faxian beschreibt die Stadt als “am größten in den Ländern in Mittelindien”, wenn auch nicht die Hauptstadt des gesamten Gupta-Reiches52, so doch wahrscheinlich die Hauptstadt von Magadha, einem von mehreren untergeordneten Herrschaftsgebieten des Gupta-Reiches. Der Name oder Titel Devarāja erscheint auch auf einer 412/413 n. Chr. geschriebenen Inschrift auf einem Steinzaun in Sanchi: ... mahārājādhirāja-śrī-Candraguptasya Devarāja iti priyanām[ .... Aufgrund der Lücke hinter priyanām[ bleibt es unklar, ob wirklich ein Titel Candraguptas (oder der Name eines seiner Minister) gemeint ist53. Daher könnte das Devarāja-Kloster, das nach Faxians Beschreibung “sehr prachtvoll” war, vielleicht von Chandragupta II (oder seinem Minister Devarāja) gestiftet und nach dem Zusammenbruch des Gupta-Reiches (550?) im Niedergang begriffen gewesen sein. 51 Vgl. Michael Willis “Later Gupta History: Inscriptions, Coins and Historical Ideology”, in: JRAS 15 (2005), S. 131~150. 52 Die alte Vermutung, daß Pāṭaliputra die Hauptstadt des gesamten Gupta-Reiches gewesen sei, wird jetzt bezweifelt; vgl. S. G. Goyal, The Imperial Guptas: A Multidisciplinary Political Study, Jodhpur (India) 2005: Kusumanjali Book World, S. 246f. Die Zitate aus Reiseberichten von Faxian und Xuanzang, die Goyal als Beweise für die Bedeutungslosigkeit von Pāṭaliputra anführt, sind jedoch problematisch. Wie oben zitiert, schildert Faxian die Stadt folgendermaßen: “In den Ländern in Mittelindien (Madhyadeśa) ist diese (Haupt-)Stadt des Landes ist am größten. Die Menschen sind sehr reich und wetteifern miteinander in Wohltätigkeit und Gerechtigkeit.” Auch die Prozession der (Buddha-)Bilder in der Stadt, die Faxian beschreibt, und der 10 m hohe stūpa aus Silber im Haus eines Brahmanen, worüber Zhimeng berichtet, deuten auf einen beträchtlichen Wohlstand der Einwohner. Goyal zitiert aus Watters Übersetzung von Xuanzangs Bericht wie folgt: “This city had long been a wilderness save for a walled town near the Gaṅgā with about 1,000 inhabitants.” In Xuanzangs Bericht steht nicht “1,000 Bewohner” sondern “über 1,000 Familien” (千餘家; d.h. vielleicht bis zu 10,000 Bewohner!). 53 IBInsc I 729.8f.; John Faithful Fleet, Inscriptions of the Early Gupta Kings, Corpus Inscriptionum Indicarum, vol. III, Calcutta 1888, The Gupta Inscriptions, S. 33, Anm. 6; vgl. aber auch Devadatta Ramakrishna Bhandarkar, Inscriptions of the Early Gupta Kings, Corpus Inscriptionum Indicarum, vol. III, Revised Edition, Delhi 1981, S. 252, Anm. 1 mit der Kritik von V. V. Mirashi, D.R. Bhandarkar on the relations between the Guptas and Vākāṭakas, Fs. C. Sivaramamurti, Kusumañjalī 1987, S. 85~88. P. L. Gupta interpretiert Devarāja vielleicht richtig als Beiname von Chandragupta II, der auch Deva oder Deva Gupta genannt wurde (Parmeshwari Lal Gupta, The Imperial Guptas, vol. 1, Varanasi 1992: Vishwavidyalaya Prakashan, S. 17, 189, 297). Der Name Devarāja kommt auch in Mañjuśrī-Mūlakalpa vs. 647 vor. P. L. Gupta identifiziert ihn hier als Beiname von Budha Gupta (reg. 476?~487; vgl. Willis op. cit, S. 141f.), ibid. S. 122, 124, 353. 574  Nachwort Die vorliegende Arbeit, die im Herbst 1991 begonnen wurde, konnte ich schließlich nach zwanzig Jahren fertig stellen. Bis dahin haben mich viele Personen auf unterschiedlichste Weise unterstützt, denen ich allen meinen herzlichen Dank ausdrücken möchte. Zunächst möchte ich jedoch die "Vorgeschichte" dieser Studie beschreiben, die mit der Begegnung mit Prof. Ji und dem Erhalten der Handschriftenkopie beginnt. Nachdem ich neben Altchinesisch Sanskrit und Mittelindisch in Tokio und Cambridge (1976-1987) studiert hatte, wollte ich im Anschluß Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit in Zusammenhang mit Chinesisch studieren. So entschloß ich mich im Jahre 1987, mein Studium bei Prof. Ji Xianlin (季羨林 1911-2009) an der Universität Peking fortzusetzen. Er empfing er mich, den japanischen Studenten, mit offenen Armen, obwohl er selbst, seine Familie in Shandong (山東) und seine Landsleute durch den Angriff der Japanischen Armee mancherlei Leid durchlebt hatten. Kurz nach meiner Ankunft in Beijing bot sich mir die unerwartete Gelegenheit, als Dolmetscher für japanische Buddhologen die Bibliothek des Kulturpalastes der Nationalitäten zu besuchen. Dort sah ich zum ersten Mal Sanskrit- Handschriften, darunter eine alt-singhalesische Handschrift aus Tibet –– offen gestanden wußte ich vorher nichts vom Vorhandensein dieser Sammlung. Anfang 1989 zeigte mir Prof. Ji den Katalog der Sammlung und fragte mich, was für eine Handschrift aus dieser Sammlung ich für meine Doktorarbeit auswählen wolle. Da ich Mittelindisch studiert und eine mit Anmerkungen versehene japanische Übersetzung des Vessantarajātaka publiziert hatte, antwortete ich, daß ich entweder an die Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ oder an die alt- singhalesische Handschrift des “Vessantarajātaka” dachte (erst viel später fand ich heraus, daß diese letztgenannte Handschrift nicht das Jātaka, sondern das Karmavibhāgaya enthält). Prof. Ji empfahl mir, die Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ zu erforschen und gab mir ein langfristiges Forschungsthema an die Hand, nämlich die Beziehung zwischen der Schule der Mahāsāṃghika(-Lokottaravādin)s und bestimmten Mahāyāna-Sutras durch vergleichende Untersuchungen zur Grammatik und Sprache zu erforschen. Er äußerte dabei auch den Wunsch, eine Serie von buddhistischen Texten als Bibliotheca Buddhica Sinica zu veröffentlichen. In derselben Woche gab er mir eine Tüte mit Mikrofilmen der gesamten Handschriftensammlung. Leider konnte ich aber keinen einzigen richtig funktionierenden Mikrofilm-Reader an der Pekinger Universität finden. Daher bat Prof. Ji seinen ehemaligen Studenten, Prof. Jiang Zhongxin (蒋忠新 1942-2002) von der Chinesischen Akademie der Sozialwissenschaften, Ausdrucke eines anderen Mikrofilms der Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ für mich vorzubereiten und mir diese zu geben. Obwohl Prof. Jiang körperlich sehr schwach war, brachte er mir persönlich, unter Inkaufnahme einer zweistündigen Busfahrt, die Ausdrucke der Handschriften der Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ und auch des Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya. Ich war durch diese Großzügigkeit von beiden Professoren gegenüber einem Studenten aus dem Land des ehemaligen Kriegsgegners sehr berührt. Sofort fing ich an, die Handschrift der Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ zu transkribieren. Ich fand jedoch bald heraus, daß Sprache und Inhalt dieses Textes als Dissertationsthema zu schwer für mich waren, und änderte schließlich das Thema meiner Dissertation mit der Zustimmung von Prof. Ji in eine 575 vergleichende Untersuchung zu verschiedenen Versionen des Lotus Sutra. Nach der Promotion an der Pekinger Universität im Jahre 1991, wollte ich, anstatt sofort nach Japan zurückzukehren, in Europa meine Kenntnisse des Mittelindischen und des Sanskrit vertiefen und gleichzeitig das von Prof. Ji mir aufgegebene langfristige Forschungsthema verfolgen. In meinen Augen gab es niemanden außer Prof. von Hinüber, der mich zu diesem Ziel führen könnte. Also besuchte ich von China aus Prof. von Hinüber in Freiburg und bat ihn, mich als seinen Doktoranden anzunehmen, und gleichzeitig versuchte ich, ein Stipendium für den Studienaufenthalt in Deutschland zu bekommen. Glücklicherweise bot mir damals Herr Tatsushi Tamai, ein japanischer Tocharologe und z.Zt. Gastforscher an unserem Institut in Tokio, mit dem ich seit der gemeinsamen Zeit in Cambridge befreundet war, finanzielle Unterstützung für mein Studium in Freiburg an. Meine alten Eltern, die immer dadurch zu mir standen, daß sie mir völlig vertrauten und schweigend ihre Zustimmung gaben, wenn ich eine wichtige Entscheidung selber traf, unterstützten meine Vorhaben –– im Ausland weiter zu studieren und eine chinesische Studentin der Pekinger Universität zu heiraten. Diese Zustimmung meines sonst so strengen Vaters, des Hauptpriesters eines altehrwürdigen Tempels der Jōdo-Shinshū-Tradition, erstaunte meine älteren Geschwister. Als ich Beijing verließ, brachte ich die Kopien der Handschriften der Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ und des Bhikṣuṇī-Vinaya zu Prof. Ji und entschuldigte mich dafür, daß ich während meines Aufenthaltes nicht daran hatte arbeiten können. Zu meinem Erstauen gab er mir die Kopien, die damals wie ein Staatsgeheimnis gehütet wurden, zurück und erlaubte mir, sie zu behalten und unter Prof. von Hinüber daran zu arbeiten. Ich weiß nicht, wie ich Prof. Ji, Prof. Jiang und meinen Eltern, die nun alle nicht mehr unter uns sind, meine Dankbarkeit für ihre Unterweisungen und Unterstützung zum Ausdruck bringen kann. Zusammen mit den Kopien der oben genannten Handschriften und meiner Frau, Qiu Yunqing erreichte ich im Herbst 1991 Deutschland. Ich hatte das große Glück, sofort nach der Ankunft in Freiburg bei Prof. von Hinüber erneut Indologie studieren zu können. Er erlaubte mir nicht nur, an seinen Vorlesungen und Seminaren teilzunehmen, sondern las auch regelmäßig in seinem Haus mit mir zusammen anfangs die Textausgabe und später die Übersetzung der Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ. Jedes Mal mußte ich die ungewöhnliche Breite seines wissenschaftlichen Interesses, seine soliden Kenntnisse in allen Bereichen der Indologie, seine unerschütterliche Arbeitsdisziplin und seine unglaubliche Geduld bewundern, die er in seinen Klassen, in den privaten Seminaren und in sonstigen Gesprächen zutage legte. Ich war sehr froh, unter ihm die deutsche Indologie gründlich studieren zu können. Für mich war nun die Fertigstellung der Arbeit an den Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ nicht mehr das hauptsächliche Ziel meiner Bemühungen, sondern ich wollte versuchen, durch die als Mittel (upāya) eingesetzte Arbeit diesem würdigen Vorbild eines Wissenschaftler gerecht zu werden, mich der Stufe seiner moralischen Disziplin, Konzentration und Weisheit anzunähern. Meine Frau, Qiu Yunqing, die eigentlich Japanologie studiert hatte, fing in Freiburg an, Deutsch zu lernen, und immatrikulierte sich nach einem Jahr für das Magisterstudium der Indologie. Sie half mir sehr viel, indem sie den mit den Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ parallelen Teil namens Weiyifa 威儀法 der chinesischen Übersetzung des Vinaya der Mahāsāṃghikas ins Deutsche übersetzte –– für die vorliegende Arbeit übersetzte ich später den chinesischen Text erneut auf der Grundlage ihrer Übersetzung. Während unseres Aufenthaltes in Freiburg 576 war Frau von Hinüber, Dr. Haiyan Hu-von Hinüber, stets hilfsbereit und voller Unterstützung. Weil sie ebenso wie wir an der von Prof. Ji aufgebauten Fakultät für Asiatische Philologien an der Universität Peking studiert hatte, konnten wir an sie mit weniger Zurückhaltung verschiedene Anliegen und Wünsche herantragen, wie wir es bei ihrem Mann nicht direkt so nicht direkt gewagt hätten. Bis zum Sommer 1994 vermochte ich die Transliteration des ganzen Textes und die deutsche Übersetzung mit Anmerkungen zu der ersten Hälfte des Textes fertig zu stellen. Ich ging davon aus, daß ich in weiteren zwei Jahren den gesamten Text würde bearbeiten können. Als jedoch meine Frau schwanger wurde, entschlossen wir uns nach wiederholten Überlegungen, vor der Fertigstellung der Arbeit nach Japan zurückzukehren. Diese Entscheidung fiel uns nicht leicht, doch waren wir der Überzeugung, daß es unter den gegebenen Umständen die beste Lösung wäre. 1994, zurück in Japan, bot sich mir eine hervorragende Stelle als Gastforscher am Institut der buddhistischen Gemeinschaft Jōdo-Shinshū Ōtani-ha, die meine Studien an den Universitäten Cambridge und Beijing finanziell unterstützt hatte, so wie auch einst Bunyū Nanjō (1849-1927) und Kenju Kasahara (1852-1883). Meine Aufgabe am Institut in Kyoto war die Fortsetzung meiner bisherigen Forschungen, und dafür bezog ich ein gutes Gehalt. Ich möchte mich herzlich bei den Generalsekretären der Gemeinschaft, Seiji Koga (1923-2002), Nobumoto Hosokawa und Eiji Nomura (1932-2008), sowie vielen anderen für ihre Unterstützung, Ermunterung und ihr Vertrauen bedanken. Eines Tages im Jahre 1996 rief mich der berühmte japanische Buddhologe Prof. Yūichi Kajiyama (1925-2004), den ich zuvor nie getroffen hatte, an und fragte, ob ich zusammen mit ihm an einem neu zu gründenden Institut forschen wolle. Ich nahm sein Angebot sofort und ohne Zögern an. So zog ich 1997 nach Hachioji in Tokio und begann, zusammen mit Prof. Kajiyama und dem weltberühmten Sanskrit-Philologen Prof. Akira Yuyama am International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology an der Soka Universität zu arbeiten. Ich bedanke mich bei diesen meinen ehemaligen Seniorkollegen für ihre wertvolle Unterstützung, Ermunterung und die vielfältigen Hinweise. 1996 besuchte ich den damaligen Direktor der Bibliothek des Kultupalastes der Nationalitäten, Li Jiuqi (李久琦), mit dem ich mich befreundet war, in Beijing und bat ihn darum, mir für einige Jahre eine Kopie der gerade zuvor von der Bibliothek veröffentlichten Faksimile-Ausgabe der Handschrift von den Abhisamācārikā Dharmāḥ (The Facsimile Edition of the Abhisamācārika-Dharma of the Mahāsāṃghika-Lokottaravādin, Beijing 1996: Minzu Chubanshe) auszuleihen, deren Preis ziemlich hoch war. Er nahm mich zu einem Restaurant mit, das sich auf Gerichte aus Nordostchina (seiner Heimat) spezialisiert hatte. Wir aßen sehr viel und tranken noch mehr und plauderten über allerlei Dinge. Am Ende des Essens machte er ein ernstes Gesicht und überreichte mir eine Kopie der Ausgabe, indem er sagte, daß dies eine Dauerleihgabe sei. Seine freundlichen Worte und diese großzügige Geste rührten mich sehr. In diesem Moment ließ mir nicht nur die Schärfe der nordostchinesischen Speisen die Tränen in die Augen steigen. Seit meiner Rückkehr nach Japan 1994 bis heute hat mir Prof. Max Deeg, damals an der Universität Nagoya und jetzt an der Universität Cardiff, vielfach geholfen. Er hat mein Manuskript mehrmals gründlich gelesen, mein Deutsch korrigiert, und mir zahlreiche Vorschläge und Hinweise gegeben. Dr. Martin Repp, der ehemalige stellvertretende Direktor 577 des NCC Center for the Study of Japanese Religions, Kyoto, half mir ebenfalls beim Korrekturlesen, während ich in Kyoto wohnte. Ihnen sei für ihre Hilfe vielmals gedankt. Ich schickte das von ihnen korrigierte Manuskript Stück für Stück an Prof. von Hinüber, und jedesmal bekam ich mein Manuskript nach wenigen Wochen, vollständig korrigiert und mit neuen Referenzen und oft mit Bildern versehen, zurück. Zu meinem Glück hielt sich Prof. von Hinüber auf unsere Einladung hin in den Jahren 2004, 2007, 2009, 2010 und 2011 (vgl. S. VIII im Band I) bei uns in Japan auf. Während seines Aufenthaltes lasen wir jeden Tag, außer am Wochenende, zusammen die vorliegende Arbeit, und dadurch konnte ich weiter viel und konzentriert von ihm lernen. Anfang April diesen Jahres dann wohnte ich eine Woche lang bei meinem "Guru" in Freiburg und konnte ihm mehrere Fragen hinsichtlich der Grammatik des Textes und der Anhänge im Band III stellen. Ich muß zugeben, daß etwa vierzig Prozent der vorliegenden Arbeit und insbesondere der Informationen in den Anmerkungen von ihm stammen. Ohne seine 20-jährige Unterweisung, Förderung, Hilfe und Geduld wäre diese Arbeit nie vollendet worden. Mein Dank gilt auch Frau Ann-Elisabeth Philipp, die seit dem vergangenen Jahr die Bände I und II und sogar die Anhänge im Band III zweimal gründlich gelesen und mir zahlreiche Korrekturvorschläge gemacht hat. Frau Zhang Xueshan, Herrn Dr. Oliver von Criegern, Dr. Klaus Wille und Dr. Jundō Nagashima bin ich zu tiefem Dank verpflichtet für ihr gründliches Korrekturlesen des gesamten dritten Bandes. Dr. Jin-il Chung und Frau Evelyn Zgraggen danke ich ebenfalls für hervorragende Korrekturhinweise hinsichtlich des Glossars und der Anhänge. Bei Frau Li Cheng-Jung, Frau Zhang Xueshan und meiner Frau, Qiu Yunqing, die alle Zitate in den drei Bänden überprüften, auch bei Herrn Jirō Hirabayashi, Herrn Takao Hirahara, Herrn Kei Kawakami und Herrn Pi Jianjun, die auch teilweise die Zitate in den Anmerkungen nachprüften, bedanke ich mich herzlich. Meinen Kollegen und Mitarbeiterinnen, Assoz. Prof. Noriyuki Kudo, Dr. Tatsushi Tamai, Frau Hisako Hayashi, Frau Hiromi Oikawa, Frau Maika Igarashi und Frau Chiu Wanhu danke ich für ihre Unterstützung bei der Anfertigung dieser drei Bände. Bei meiner Frau, Qiu Yunqing, die mir nicht nur all die lange Zeit bei dieser Arbeit in vielerlei Weise half, sondern mich auch immer mit viel Geduld und Verständnis unterstützt, möchte ich mich besonders bedanken. Schließlich gilt mein Dank nicht zuletzt der Soka Universität, dem Präsidenten, Prof. Hideo Yamamoto, dem Vorstandsvorsitzenden, Herrn Yasunori Tashiro, und dem ehemaligen Direktor unseres Institutes, Prof. Hirotomo Teranishi, für ihr stets vorhandenes Verständnis, ihre Ermutigung und großzügige Unterstützung bei meinen verschiedenen Forschungs- Projekten. Ohne die selbstlosen Bemühungen und die Großzügigkeit all der genannten Personen wäre die Veröffentlichung dieser Arbeit nicht möglich gewesen. Ich hoffe, daß die drei Bände eine gute Grundlage für weitere Forschungen bieten. Ich selbst werde weiterhin die Beziehung zwischen der Schule der Mahāsāṃghika(- Lokottaravādin)s und bestimmten Mahāyāna-Sutras durch vergleichende Untersuchungen zur Grammatik und Sprache erforschen. Ich freue mich darauf, hierbei auch in Zukunft von Prof. von Hinüber und anderen lernen zu dürfen. Hachioji, am 15. Juni 2012 Seishi Karashima 578